Issue briefs and reports - Atlantic Council https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/category/in-depth-research-reports/ Shaping the global future together Mon, 16 Jun 2025 20:25:52 +0000 en-US hourly 1 https://wordpress.org/?v=6.7.2 https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/wp-content/uploads/2019/09/favicon-150x150.png Issue briefs and reports - Atlantic Council https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/category/in-depth-research-reports/ 32 32 Great sea connections: Financing the Eastern Mediterranean’s energy transition https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/in-depth-research-reports/report/great-sea-connections-financing-the-eastern-mediterraneans-energy-transition/ Tue, 17 Jun 2025 14:00:00 +0000 https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/?p=852877 This report proposes frameworks for innovative financial mechanisms to simultaneously advance technological leapfrogging, economic development, and regional cooperation in the Eastern Mediterranean region.

The post Great sea connections: Financing the Eastern Mediterranean’s energy transition appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>

Author’s note

This paper draws on my professional experience working on energy and climate issues in the Eastern Mediterranean, as well as many conversations with policymakers, technical experts, and civil society stakeholders from Athens to Beirut and from Istanbul to Cairo. The renewable energy revolution offers both cleaner power and a practical foundation for cooperation through shared infrastructure and capital flows. The region’s energy future is as much about finance, diplomacy, and institutional trust as it is about technology. My aim here is to explore how financial mechanisms can bridge historic divides and support a shared energy transition. My hope is that this paper contributes to reimagining the Eastern Mediterranean not as a collection of competing interests, but as an interconnected energy community bound by mutual prosperity and resilience.

Table of contents

Introduction

The Eastern Mediterranean region stands at a critical juncture in its energy development. Positioned as a geopolitical crossroads with significant renewable energy resources and strategic importance, the region encompassing Greece, Cyprus, Turkey, Syria, Lebanon, Israel, Palestine, Jordan, and Egypt has the potential to become a leader in sustainable energy while strengthening regional cooperation and economic integration.

This study examines how the Eastern Mediterranean can secure a sustainable energy future through a two-pronged approach: strategically financing next-generation grid technologies that leapfrog legacy infrastructure challenges, while simultaneously developing integrated financing mechanisms that foster cross-border cooperation. This dual strategy aligns technological innovation with regional stability and market integration needs, creating a framework for sustainable development that transcends political boundaries.

The Eastern Mediterranean’s abundant renewable energy potential, particularly in solar and wind resources, presents a transformative opportunity. The region could generate approximately 144 percent of its projected 2050 electricity demand through renewable energy sources.1 Yet despite this potential, significant challenges persist. Aging and fragmented grid infrastructure, geopolitical tensions, and uneven regulatory frameworks hinder energy integration.

Additionally, ongoing political conflicts, geopolitical tensions, and maritime boundary threats in the region complicate the development of cross-border infrastructure, while the region remains heavily dependent on fossil fuels at a time when global climate commitments push for rapid energy transition.2

Meeting these challenges requires more than traditional approaches. This paper argues that innovative financing mechanisms can serve dual purposes: funding advanced infrastructure development while simultaneously functioning as instruments of regional cooperation. By strategically structuring financial tools that encourage cross-border collaboration, the Eastern Mediterranean can transform its energy landscape while creating economic interdependencies that help overcome historical political tensions.

The analysis unfolds in four parts. First, it examines the regional context—focusing on power demand trends, the state of grid infrastructure, and the region’s renewable energy potential. Second, it analyzes how COP28 commitments (made at the 2023 climate conference) intensify the need for rapid renewable integration and technological leapfrogging. Third, it evaluates the financing mechanisms available to fund this transition, from multilateral development banks and green bonds to Islamic finance and bilateral investment. Finally, it explores how these financing tools can support frameworks for regional collaboration, including physical infrastructure development, regulatory harmonization, energy diplomacy, and governance structures.

Rising tides: Meeting the Mediterranean’s surging energy needs

The region’s energy landscape is characterized by growing demand, aging infrastructure, and untapped renewable potential against a backdrop of complex geopolitical relationships. These interrelated factors explain why the strategies of technological leapfrogging and regional integration are necessary for sustainable energy development in the Eastern Mediterranean.

Regional power demand trajectory

Electricity demand across the Eastern Mediterranean is expected to grow substantially in the coming decades. Turkey, a pivotal economy in the region, saw its electricity consumption reach 348 terawatt hours (TWh) in 2024, marking a 3.8-percent increase from the previous year.3 Projections indicate a rise to 380 TWh in 2025, 455 TWh by 2030, and 510 TWh by 2035.4

This growth trajectory is mirrored in Egypt, Syria, and Lebanon, driven by population growth, urbanization, and economic development. Meeting this demand sustainably requires a massive expansion of renewable energy capacity and modernized infrastructure to support it.

Recognizing the potential and cost competitiveness of renewable energy systems, countries in the region have established ambitious renewable energy targets. Turkey aims to double its electricity capacity by 2035, with renewable energy providing nearly 65 percent of power.5 Egypt has set a target of renewable energy providing 42 percent of its power by 2030 and 58 percent by 2040, while Greece plans to cover at least 60 percent of its power needs with green electricity by 2030.6

Untapped renewable potential

The Eastern Mediterranean possesses immense renewable energy potential that remains largely untapped, though Turkey and Greece have made progress in this area. The whole Mediterranean basin’s current renewable capacities stand at 90 gigawatts (GW) for solar photovoltaic and 82 GW for wind energy, with a potential exceeding 3 TW for the whole basin—a figure that underscores the opportunity for rapid expansion.7

The Eastern Mediterranean’s total renewable energy capacity in 2023 was around 90 GW, with research suggesting that the region could potentially generate 144 percent of its projected 2050 electricity demand through renewable energy sources.8 Egypt could produce 188 percent of its demand from solar and wind energy, with 76 GW of surplus electricity production. Syria could produce 592 percent of its total demand, while Turkey and Greece could produce 105 percent and 96 percent, respectively, of their 2050 demand.9

According to the author’s estimates, if the pipeline of solar, wind, and hydropower projects in Egypt is fully implemented—including projects that are announced, planned, or under construction—its renewables generation capacity would grow twelvefold, in line with those of other North African nations. If the pipeline of solar, wind, and hydropower projects in Greece is fully implemented, this would result in a sevenfold increase in renewable energy generation capacity.10 These estimates are not just an opportunity to enhance energy security and accelerate the energy transition. They are also an economic opportunity with the potential to create jobs, stimulate investment, and position the region as a global leader in the growing clean energy sector.

The rapidly growing power demands across the Eastern Mediterranean necessitate expanding renewable energy capacity while also fundamentally rethinking how electricity is transmitted and shared. Addressing this challenge requires examining the current state of interconnection infrastructure and identifying opportunities to transform the region’s fragmented grid systems into an integrated network.

The interconnection imperative

Cross-border transmission grid interconnections are of cornerstone importance in the development of power systems. Grids that depend on intermittent renewable energy sources, such as solar and wind, benefit greatly from interconnections for balancing the intermittent nature of renewable sources. Because different countries have varying electricity demands throughout the day, spare capacities and shortfalls can be balanced between different grids.

The Eastern Mediterranean’s grid infrastructure presents a fragmented landscape in which cross-border electricity trade is limited. Northern countries such as Greece benefit from advanced energy grids, while southern and eastern regions lag behind. Across the whole Mediterranean, northern-shore countries have sufficient, albeit underutilized, interconnections, while southern-shore countries lack interconnection infrastructure and synchronization. ​Additionally, there are few north-south interconnections, with only a link from Spain to Morocco and another from Turkey to Syria.​11 This disparity creates both a challenge and an opportunity for leapfrogging conventional development paths.

Interconnections between Med-TSO members, including current and under-construction (continuous lines) and under-study (dotted lines) interconnections. Based on Moretti (2020).

Eastern Mediterranean countries continue to prioritize energy self-sufficiency through domestic power generation rather than regional power trading. With the exception of the Palestinian territories, which import nearly all (99.4 percent) of their electricity due to minimal local generation capacity, several countries maintain exceptionally low power import levels—around 1 percent of their total consumption—including Cyprus (0 percent), Lebanon (0.078 to 3.61 percent), Jordan (0.29 to 2 percent), and Egypt (0.29 to 0.41 percent). Similarly, with the exception of Greece and its integration into the European electricity market, power exports remain negligible throughout the region, with most countries exporting less than 1 percent of their generated electricity. This self-contained approach stems from incompatible technical systems among national grids that impede synchronous operation, difficulties in maintaining grid stability across borders, and persistent political tensions that discourage deeper energy integration.12

Some interconnections exist in the Eastern Mediterranean but are underutilized or nonoperational. Many of the interconnections are used purely on an emergency basis to cover unexpected or scheduled outages, or are not in operation at all. Key connections such as Turkey-Syria (400 kilovolts (kV)), Jordan-Syria (400 kV), and Lebanon-Syria (400 kV, 220 kV, and 66 kV) are currently inactive, largely due to regional conflicts and technical incompatibilities between national grids, including different frequencies and control systems.13

Yet some progress toward greater regional integration is under way. A “super grid” is slowly emerging across the Mediterranean. The Mediterranean Master Plan 2022 outlines several Eastern Mediterranean interconnectors including: the Great Sea Interconnector between Greece, Cyprus, and Israel (1000 MW); the EuroAfrica interconnector to link Cyprus and Egypt (1000 MW), the Green Energy Interconnector (GREGY)  between Greece and Egypt (3000 MW of primarily renewable power); and a number of capacity-expansion proposals such as the ones between Egypt and Jordan (1100 MW), Jordan and Syria (800 MW), Syria and Turkey (600 MW), and Jordan and the Palestinian territories (100 MW).14

These projects are designed to enhance electrical integration, facilitate renewable energy exchange, and improve security of supply. The Great Sea Interconnector, which is under construction, is expected to be operational by 2030 with a capacity of up to 2 GW, while the GREGY project is expected to be completed by 2031.15 These developments have been planned for more than a decade. An older proposal, the Mediterranean Electricity Ring, aimed to connect Mediterranean countries via a circle of interconnections to facilitate cross-border power exchange. In the Eastern Mediterranean, this included connecting Egypt, Jordan, Syria, Lebanon, Turkey, and Greece.16

Source: ENTSO-E

However, significant challenges remain. Tensions caused by maritime disputes between regional countries such as Greece, Turkey, and Cyprus, the unresolved Cyprus question, and the protracted Israel-Palestinian conflict, all impede the development of cross-border infrastructure.17

In addition, the geopolitical diversity, uneven political stability, and limited political trust among Eastern Mediterranean countries dampen some national governments’ interest in exploring partial reliance on external electricity. Reasons cited often include the potential for electricity being used as a geopolitical lever, the risk of disruption caused by internal conflict, infrastructure failure, governance breakdown propagating across borders, and concerns about expanding cybersecurity vulnerabilities by exposing national grids to transboundary breaches.

Additionally, many countries maintain vertical monopolies in their electricity sectors—e.g., utilities such as Electricité du Liban (EDL) in Lebanon, Israel Electric Corporation (IEC) in Israel, and, to some extent, various companies in Jordan—which enable them to control generation, transmission, and distribution, thus limiting market competition and cross-border electricity flow.

Technical barriers are equally significant, as systems have evolved separately with different standards and technologies. Alternating-current (AC) interconnections require high degrees of technical compatibility and operational coordination, creating stability risks when disturbances in one location impact other areas of the network. These challenges are compounded by insufficient regulatory frameworks and governance structures needed to support cross-border trading.18

From pledge to power: Speeding the region’s renewable revolution

Developing renewable energy capacity and establishing physical interconnections form the backbone of regional energy integration, and these efforts need to rapidly scale up due to the urgency of the climate crisis. Global climate commitments and obligations provide a framework for measuring progress and highlight the gap between current trajectories and required outcomes.

Meeting COP28 targets

The commitment at COP28 to triple the world’s installed renewable energy generation capacity by 2030 provides a clear imperative for action in the Eastern Mediterranean. Nations collectively committed to this target as part of the global stocktake of the 2015 Paris Agreement.19 In addition, 130 nations—including Greece, Cyprus, and Turkey—also joined the Global Renewables and Energy Efficiency Pledge, a voluntary coalition committing to triple their renewable energy capacity and double the rate of energy-efficiency improvement.20 In September 2024, nine northern Mediterranean countries (often known as the MED9) agreed to collaborate on making the region a renewable energy hub, aligning with this global target.21

A growing grassroots initiative known as TeraMed is seeking to mobilize Mediterranean countries to triple their renewable energy capacity and reach 1 terawatt in combined generation capacity.22

As of 2023, Eastern Mediterranean countries had an installed renewable power capacity of 90 GW, accounting for 42 percent of their total electricity generation.23 To meet the COP28 target, the region must reach 405 GW of capacity by 2030, requiring a steep annual growth of 45 GW. Unsurprisingly, the region is not on track. With the exceptions of Greece and Egypt, all Eastern Mediterranean countries must accelerate their efforts if they are to meet the threefold-increase target.24

In my view, meeting these ambitious renewable targets requires more than simply adding generation capacity. The Eastern Mediterranean needs advanced infrastructure solutions that can both accommodate the tripling of renewable energy and overcome existing grid fragmentation. Smart grid technologies represent the critical connective tissue that will enable this rapid transition.

Smart grid innovation: The digital backbone of renewable integration

To effectively integrate the growing share of renewables and enhance grid stability, the Eastern Mediterranean must leapfrog conventional infrastructure by investing in smart grids. In addition to interconnections, smart grid technologies enable better management of intermittent renewable sources, improve reliability, and reduce losses. These technologies include battery storage, advanced metering infrastructure, dynamic line rating, and other network automation, data management, and analytics technologies for real-time monitoring and control.

Battery storage is particularly crucial for managing the intermittency of renewable energy sources, ensuring grid stability as the share of renewables increases. However, large-scale battery storage projects are still nascent in the Eastern Mediterranean—with the exception of Turkey, which set a target for battery energy storage capacity to reach 7.5 GW by 2035.25

Flexibility mechanisms, including demand response and renewable hydrogen production, further enhance grid stability. Technologies such as electrolysis using solar and wind electricity for hydrogen production are gaining traction. Turkey has plans to develop 5 GW of electrolyzer capacity for green hydrogen production by 2035, and to expand capacity to a staggering 70 GW by 2053.26 Similar applications are being explored in Egypt, which plans to become a transit route for renewable hydrogen.27

Smart meters also help manage the grid better through demand-side management. In the Eastern Mediterranean, Greece is leading on smart meters. It plans to roll out 3.12 million units by 2026, funded by the European Investment Bank, to enhance energy efficiency and support demand response.28

Deploying advanced grid technologies across borders also requires moving beyond identifying technical requirements to addressing the fundamental question of funding this transition. Additionally, this paper argues that the financing challenge is not merely about capital mobilization but also the creation of financial structures that simultaneously enable technological leapfrogging and regional cooperation.

Credit: Photo by American Public Power Association on Unsplash

Beyond borders, beyond banks: Innovative financing for regional energy

The transition from technical requirements to financial realities necessitates examining the substantial capital investments needed to realize the Eastern Mediterranean’s energy transformation. While technological solutions provide the roadmap, financing mechanisms will determine the pace and scale of implementation, particularly when the magnitude of required investment exceeds traditional national budgetary capacities.

Quantifying the investment challenge

The Eastern Mediterranean’s energy transition demands significant capital to expand limited renewable energy capacity, modernize aging grids, and develop cross-border interconnections.

Renewable energy projects typically cost around $1 million per megawatt of installed capacity. Their costs are already competitive, and they are the cheapest form of new generation capacity across the region. Moreover, those costs are expected to continue falling and renewables are expected to be the cheapest source of electricity in most countries—including for storage—by 2027.29

However, given the sheer scale of buildup required to meet COP28 commitments, the enormity of the financing required cannot be overstated. If the region is to build 45 GW of renewable energy capacity this year, this would require approximately $45 billion just for generation capacity at current costs, excluding transmission and storage infrastructure.30

Transmission infrastructure is another challenge, especially given how its cost is often borne by grid operators rather than by private developers. The Great Sea Interconnector, for example, is estimated to cost approximately €1.9 billion ($2.08 billion).31

By 2030, the region’s total investment needs for sustainable energy transition could well exceed $300 billion. The magnitude of investment required highlights why ordinary national financing approaches are insufficient for the Eastern Mediterranean’s energy transformation. Instead, the region needs to scale finance beyond national resources and to explore financing instruments that mobilize capital at scale and also create structures for regional cooperation, serving as both financial tools and diplomatic instruments in a region where political tensions have historically impeded collaboration.

Financing the energy transition

The Eastern Mediterranean’s sustainable energy future will require mobilizing diverse financing sources and mechanisms. A mix of public and private funding sources—ranging from multilateral lenders and climate funds to innovative partnerships and financial instruments—can bridge the investment gap and accelerate the energy transition.

In developing countries within the Eastern Mediterranean, this challenge is made more difficult by the higher cost of capital, as investors demand high-risk premiums due to country, currency, or sector uncertainty.

This section outlines key financing sources and provides case studies and examples of how each source is being applied (or could be applied) in the Eastern Mediterranean. Each financing mechanism not only brings capital but can also serve as a catalyst for regional cooperation and innovation in energy infrastructure.

1. Multilateral development banks

Multilateral development banks (MDBs) provide a foundational source of capital and risk mitigation for large-scale energy projects in the region. Institutions such as the European Investment Bank (EIB), the European Bank for Reconstruction and Development (EBRD), the Asian Infrastructure Investment Bank (AIIB), and the World Bank offer concessional loans, grants, guarantees, and technical assistance to support renewable energy and grid modernization. For example, the EBRD has invested more than €3.8 billion in renewable energy across emerging markets, supporting 119 projects totaling more than 6 GW of capacity.

In the Eastern Mediterranean, MDB financing often underpins ambitious projects. For example, the EBRD and partners launched a $500-million framework that helped finance sixteen solar plants (750 MW) in Egypt, including in the Benban solar park.

Another notable initiative with a renewable energy component is the Southern and Eastern Mediterranean Sustainable Energy Financing Facility (SEMED SEFF), a joint program of the EBRD, EIB, Agence Française de Développement, and KfW, a German state-owned bank. With a €141.7-million budget, SEMED SEFF catalyzed investments in Jordan and Morocco to cut more than 150,000 tons of carbon dioxide annually and boost renewables (25 percent of its funds went to renewable energy projects).32

MDBs not only supply affordable long-term loans; they also crowd in other investors. In Egypt’s Benban project, for instance, the EBRD, the International Finance Corporation (IFC), the AIIB, and the African Development Bank (AfDB) cofinanced solar plants alongside private developers, dramatically lowering financing costs and risk.33 By leveraging MDBs’ preferred creditor status and technical expertise, such involvement signals to markets that projects are bankable.

By providing concessional finance, convening power, and technical and policy assistance, MDBs help Eastern Mediterranean countries undertake projects that might otherwise be too costly or complex, from large wind and solar farms to regional grid interconnectors. Their financing comes with due diligence and policy guidance, encouraging reforms (such as market liberalization or improved procurement frameworks) that improve the overall investment climate. Going forward, scaling up MDB capital—including through their climate-focused funds and guarantees—will be crucial to meet the region’s renewable investment needs at the pace demanded by global climate commitments.

2. Green finance and investment

Green finance refers to capital raised for climate-friendly and sustainable projects through instruments such as green bonds, green loans, and ESG (environmental, social, governance) investments. In the Eastern Mediterranean, green bonds specifically are emerging as an important tool to tap global capital markets for renewable energy and low-carbon infrastructure. The global green bond market has expanded rapidly to more than $2.5 trillion outstanding by 2024.34

Eastern Mediterranean nations have started to issue their own green bonds to fund clean energy, often with strong investor demand. Egypt was an early mover, launching a $750-million sovereign green bond in September 2020.35 Cyprus followed in 2022, issuing a €1-billion green bond. In 2023, Israel and Turkey debuted their first sovereign green bonds, raising $2 billion and $2.5 billion, respectively.36 Greece signaled plans to issue a sovereign green bond as well. While a national issuance expected for 2024 remains pending, the Bank of Greece issued a €500-million green bond in 2020.37

Other private institutions have also issued green bonds, including banks and other businesses such as renewable energy companies. Lebanon’s Fransabank SAL issued its first green bond in 2018, valued at $60 million, with support from the IFC and EBRD. The proceeds were directed to support sustainable finance initiatives. Jordan’s Kuwait Bank followed in 2023 and, in collaboration with the IFC, issued its first green bond, valued at $50 million. The funds were allocated to renewable energy, low-carbon transport, and sustainable water and wastewater projects. ​ Additionally, Arab Bank in Jordan issued a $250-million sustainable bond in October 2023 to support green and sustainable initiatives.38

However, the market remains nascent and fragmented. Strengthening regulatory frameworks, standardizing green taxonomies, and building technical capacity among issuers and investors will be key to unlocking green capital at scale. For instance, Turkey developed its own sustainable finance framework in 2021, while IFC support enabled Egypt to develop green bond guidelines and the Amman Stock Exchange to produce sustainability reporting guidelines.39 The European Union recently introduced the European Green Bond Standard, a voluntary framework to ensure transparency and combat greenwashing, which could serve as a model to harmonize practices in the region.40

3. International climate finance

International climate finance refers to dedicated funds and initiatives aimed at supporting climate change mitigation and adaptation in developing countries. For Eastern Mediterranean nations (many of which are middle-income or emerging economies), these funds are an important supplement to domestic resources. Key global climate funds include the Green Climate Fund (GCF), Climate Investment Funds (CIF) such as the Clean Technology Fund, and the Global Environment Facility (GEF). Historically, the Middle East and North Africa (MENA) region has underutilized these funds: MENA has received only about 6.6 percent of cumulative financing from the major global climate funds through 2023.41

Eastern Mediterranean countries are now working to improve their access to these pools of finance by developing strong project proposals and institutional capacity. Egypt has been notably successful in tapping climate funds, securing about one-third of all GCF resources allocated to MENA as of 2023. About 85 percent of Egypt’s GCF funding has been in the form of loans. Jordan has also received international climate finance, accounting for roughly 10 percent of GCF funding in MENA (with around half in loans). Meanwhile, Turkey has benefited from World Bank funding via the Türkiye Green Fund (TGF), receiving a $155-million loan for the greening of firms through equity financing, while Lebanon has benefited from GEF grants, receiving about 8 percent of GEF’s MENA allocations.42 These funds often work by blending with multilateral bank financing or by de-risking projects to attract private investors (through instruments like guarantees and concessional tranches).

4. Islamic finance

Islamic finance is a growing source of funding for the energy transition and is particularly relevant in the Muslim-majority countries of the Eastern Mediterranean. Islamic finance follows sharia principles, such as prohibition of interest, and typically uses profit-sharing or asset-backed structures.43 Green sukuk (sharia-compliant bonds earmarked for environmental projects) have emerged as a key instrument to raise capital for renewables while tapping into Islamic investor pools. The global sukuk market has seen strong growth and greening in recent years. The first half of 2024 set a record, with $9.9 billion in green and sustainability sukuk issuances, indicating accelerating interest.44

While most green sukuk so far have originated in Southeast Asia and the Gulf, Eastern Mediterranean nations are starting to consider them.45 Egypt, for example, has been considering sukuk as a financing tool. It passed a Sovereign Sukuk Law in 2021 and could issue green sukuk to fund projects under its renewable energy and sustainable transport plans.46

Importantly, major finance institutions are steering toward climate action. In 2021, Emlak Katılım issued the first green sukuk in Turkey with a total value of 51.8 million Turkish lira.47 The Islamic Development Bank (IsDB) has also issued sukuk to raise funds for green projects. For example, in 2024 it issued a $2-billion benchmark sukuk earmarked partly for green development programs.48

Beyond sukuk, Islamic finance can support renewable energy through Islamic banks and funds investing in project equity or providing sharia-compliant loans (such as profit-sharing and loss-sharing musharakah (a joint-venture structure) or lease-based Ijarah financing). Islamic finance also opens opportunities for waqf (endowment funds) or zakat (charitable contributions) to be structured for community-level clean energy access or climate resilience projects, although such models are still in experimental stages.

5. Bilateral investment

Financing and development support from one country to another plays a pivotal role in the Eastern Mediterranean’s energy landscape. Bilateral investment often comes either directly from foreign governments (through aid, export credits, or state-owned banks) or via government-backed companies and sovereign wealth funds pursuing projects abroad. In the push for renewables, several powerful bilateral actors have emerged: notably the Gulf states (such as the United Arab Emirates (UAE) and Saudi Arabia) and China. They view renewable energy projects not only as commercial opportunities but also as avenues to strengthen strategic ties and influence in the region.

The UAE and Saudi Arabia have invested significantly in Egypt’s renewable energy projects, using investors such as ACWA Power, Masdar, and AMEA Power to fund new wind and solar capacity.49 For example, Masdar has partnered with Egyptian firms to develop a gigantic 10-GW onshore wind farm, one of the world’s largest, which it announced on the sidelines of COP27.50

China is increasingly becoming a major bilateral financier in Eastern Mediterranean energy. Chinese state-owned enterprises and funds have targeted renewable energy acquisitions and projects, especially in economies where financing gaps exist. In Egypt, Chinese banks and companies have supported the Benban solar complex; for example, the AIIB provided $210 million in debt financing for eleven solar plants (totaling 490 MW) in Benban’s second phase.51 Chinese firms have also supplied solar panels and construction for many Benban projects. China also has energy investments in Turkey, Lebanon, and Greece. China’s Silk Road Fund has acquired a 49-percent stake in ACWA Power’s renewable energy portfolio.52 These investment patterns are part of the increasing “greening” of China’s Belt and Road Initiative (BRI) and reflect China’s willingness to invest in lower-income Eastern Mediterranean nations, though these investments often serve dual purposes of commercial returns and strategic positioning.53

The European Union (EU) and its member states also act bilaterally through programs like the EU-funded Neighbourhood Investment Platform, which gives grants to complement loans for energy projects in the Mediterranean neighborhood.54 Europe often emphasizes grid interconnections and market integration (e.g., funding studies for a EuroAfrica interconnector between Egypt and Greece), Gulf countries favor high-profile generation projects, and China is active across the value chain from generation to transmission.

Bilateral investments bring substantial capital and can fast-track projects, but they also entail geopolitical balancing as recipient countries in the Eastern Mediterranean navigate offers from multiple suitors. When managed well, bilateral financing can complement multilateral efforts. It also can foster regional cooperation. For instance, the UAE not only invests in Arab neighbors but has discussed energy deals involving Israel (such as solar facilities in Jordan exporting power to Israel as part of a desalinated water and solar energy swap between Israel and Jordan).55

6. Debt financing

Debt financing (i.e., borrowing funds to be repaid with interest) is one of the predominant ways to fund energy infrastructure, including renewable projects, worldwide. In the Eastern Mediterranean, debt financing takes multiple forms: loans from commercial banks or international institutions, bonds issued in capital markets, export credits or supplier credits for equipment, and concessional and blended debt.

Given that debt is cheaper than equity, developers typically seek debt to cover most of the project costs. For investors and lenders, renewable energy projects can be attractive debt opportunities because they generally generate steady cash flows once operational.

Finance for regional cooperation

A comprehensive financing strategy leveraging all of the above mechanisms is crucial for the Eastern Mediterranean to realize its energy transition ambitions. Multilateral and climate funds provide scale and patient capital, green and Islamic finance tap new investor pools, and bilateral investments bring in strategic funding.

Additionally, financing structures such as project finance, public-private partnerships, power purchase agreements, and blended finance can help reduce risk. Green investment banks can help mobilize funding for green projects, while innovative tools like fintech and results-based financing fill niche gaps.

In my view, the region’s success in meeting COP28 goals hinges less on the availability of technology and more on the ability to align financial incentives across borders.

By structuring these financing approaches with regional cooperation as their foundation, these instruments create shared financial interests across borders, incentivizing collaboration and helping overcome entrenched political obstacles. Financial mechanisms explicitly requiring cross-border participation serve as powerful diplomatic tools in addition to their capital mobilization function.

For instance, multilateral investment funds that mandate co-investment from multiple Eastern Mediterranean countries establish joint ownership stakes in critical infrastructure, creating a financial incentive to maintain peaceful relations. Similarly, blended finance structures offering preferential terms for projects with cross-border components make cooperation economically advantageous compared to purely national approaches. For example, a Mediterranean renewable energy fund requiring participation from Greece, Turkey, and Cyprus could provide a neutral financial platform in which shared economic benefits supersede maritime disputes.

The strategic design of these mechanisms must include governance frameworks that span national boundaries, with representation requirements ensuring all stakeholders have meaningful input in investment decisions. Interconnection-specific project bonds co-issued by multiple countries can create shared liability structures in which default risks are mutually borne, fostering accountability across traditional divides.

When properly implemented, these tools can transform abstract diplomatic goals into concrete economic incentives. Countries with historical tensions can begin to view their neighbors not as competitors but as essential partners in accessing capital markets and achieving energy security. Countries that once viewed energy resources as potential flashpoints for conflict can instead develop economic interdependencies that make continued cooperation the most rational choice.

Credit: Photo by Jason Mavrommatis on Unsplash

Shared foundations: Creating a regional energy community

While innovative financing mechanisms provide the tools for transformation, their successful implementation depends on creating supportive physical, institutional, and diplomatic frameworks. The mobilization of capital through green bonds, MDB funding, climate finance, and other financial instruments discussed above is necessary but insufficient on its own to achieve regional energy integration.

Having participated in several regional energy dialogues, I have observed that trust between regulators remains limited. Finance can be the tool that enables cooperation in more sensitive policy areas. Yet it must be paired with robust infrastructure development, harmonized regulatory environments, diplomatic initiatives that overcome historical tensions, and coordinated governance structures that span national boundaries. The implementation of regional energy integration requires establishing concrete structures for collaboration that can transform the Eastern Mediterranean’s abundant renewable resources into a shared, resilient energy architecture that benefits all participating nations. These efforts must include

  • physical infrastructure development and grid integration;
  • interconnected energy markets and regulatory alignment on grid codes, tariff structures, and cross-border trading;
  • regional cooperation and diplomatic engagement; and
  • regional governance frameworks.

Scaling cross-border initiatives for a connected grid

Cross-border energy cooperation in the Eastern Mediterranean is advancing through several key initiatives aimed at integrating renewable energy sources and enhancing grid connectivity. There are nine interconnection projects and proposals at different stages of development across the region. If implemented fully, they can help create a more unified energy market capable of efficiently distributing energy across the Mediterranean while addressing the intermittency challenges of solar and wind.

The Great Sea Interconnection, set to link Cyprus, Greece, and Israel, is perhaps the region’s flagship project and will facilitate the trade of renewable electricity across borders. Similarly, Egypt and Greece are exploring the GREGY interconnection. Beyond the Eastern Mediterranean, Italy and Tunisia are advancing the ELMED interconnection between them, which is expected to be operational by 2027.56 Technologies already exist to manage some of the perceived risks of interconnections. Using high-voltage direct current (HVDC) transmission lines offer greater controllability and can be isolated more easily than traditional AC interconnections. Interconnections can also be directed to non-critical loads or areas in order to reduce risk to cross-border disruptions, while robust cybersecurity standards and protocols can help protect critical infrastructure.

Harmonizing regulations for seamless market operation

Achieving a fully integrated energy market in the Eastern Mediterranean requires harmonized regulations to ensure fair access to grids, promote investment, and reduce the cost of risk capital. Countries involved in interconnection projects need to have the regulatory framework in place to allow for successful entry of foreign electricity into domestic electricity markets and successful export of their electricity to foreign markets. This is especially difficult for countries in which electricity utilities hold vertical monopolies in all sectors of the economy. Turkey, Cyprus, Greece, and Egypt have unbundled or are on the way to unbundling their electricity markets; meanwhile, Jordan, Lebanon, and, to a lesser extent, Israel have electricity utilities that hold vertical monopolies and are responsible for generating and supplying electricity to all sectors in the economy.57

The EU’s internal energy market policies are a model for regulatory convergence, emphasizing transmission ownership unbundling between electricity generation or supply companies and transmutation ones, consumer rights, and the role of regulatory actors such as the Agency for the Cooperation of Energy Regulators (ACER).58 The EU’s Electricity Directive 2019/944 mandates nondiscriminatory access to transmission and distribution systems, a principle that could be adapted for the Eastern Mediterranean to attract private investment.59

However, this EU model cannot be fully replicated in the Eastern Mediterranean due to different system maturity levels. The Association of Mediterranean Energy Regulators (MEDREG), comprising twenty-seven energy regulators from twenty-two countries, recommends that regulatory frameworks must be tailored to specific subregional contexts, and that Eastern Mediterranean countries need to develop more regulatory solutions independent from those of the EU.60

Progress in regulatory harmonization could also increase infrastructure investments significantly in the Eastern Mediterranean. However, this progress is slow due to the region’s diverse regulatory environments, with countries such as Syria, Lebanon, Turkey, and Egypt maintaining state-controlled energy sectors, while others like Greece and Cyprus align with EU directives to liberalize the energy market. Overcoming these disparities will require sustained dialogue, capacity building, and incentives for alignment.

Energy diplomacy: Transforming geopolitical challenges into opportunities

Geopolitical tensions are another major barrier to cooperation in the Eastern Mediterranean. Political and security dynamics significantly influence energy cooperation in the region. Long-standing disputes—such as those between Greece, Turkey, and Cyprus over maritime boundaries, the Syrian civil war, the unresolved Cyprus question, the recently intensified Israeli-Palestinian conflict, and the Israel-Lebanon conflict—have all historically hindered regional collaboration and the development of cross-border infrastructure, particularly affecting projects like the EastMed Gas Pipeline.61 Overcoming these challenges will require financial resources as well as diplomatic engagement and innovative governance structures.

However, the shift toward renewable energy and the EU’s focus on a green energy economy present new opportunities for cooperation. Initiatives such as the East Mediterranean Gas Forum (EMGF)—established in 2019 as a platform focused on natural gas development, it includes Egypt, Greece, Cyprus, Israel, Jordan, and the Palestinian territories, along with France and Italy—can be both reformed to become more inclusive of all Eastern Mediterranean counties and expanded beyond natural gas to include renewable energy, power infrastructure, and advancing electricity interconnection and trading.62 Some energy policy experts have advocated for renaming the EMGF as the East Mediterranean Energy Forum (EMEF) to reflect this broader mandate.63 Such a forum should include a regulatory platform, in which each country is represented by its national regulatory authority or electricity governing body, to jointly promote greater harmonization of regional energy markets and legislation.

Energy cooperation is increasingly recognized as a tool for regional stability and economic integration. The development of renewable energy projects and interconnectors can create shared economic interests, reducing the potential for conflict.64 This approach transforms energy from a source of competition to a platform for collaboration, potentially easing long-standing tensions through mutual economic benefits and shared climate goals.

An increased shift toward renewable energy sources not only ensures long-term sustainability and economic benefits for the region, but also has higher potential than gas diplomacy. Unlike natural gas and other tradable commodities, renewable energy systems are an undisputed resource. Additionally, collaboration on renewable energy projects through interconnections provides synergies between partnering countries due to the benefits they provide to both grids.

Shared horizon: Finance and diplomacy for a unified Eastern Mediterranean energy landscape

The Eastern Mediterranean stands at the cusp of a transformative energy transition in which innovative financing can simultaneously advance technological leapfrogging, economic development, and regional cooperation. By strategically structuring investment mechanisms that require collaboration, the region can convert financial transactions into diplomatic bridges.

Financial innovation offers three distinct diplomatic dividends beyond its direct economic benefits.

First, joint financing creates structured engagement opportunities that maintain dialogue even during political tensions. When countries coinvest in renewable infrastructure through mechanisms such as regional green bonds or mixed-ownership projects, they establish technical and financial communication channels that persist through diplomatic fluctuations. These ongoing interactions build relationships among technical experts and financial officials that can later facilitate broader cooperation.

Second, shared financial liabilities transform political calculus by creating mutual dependencies. When neighboring countries with historical tensions become co-guarantors of infrastructure loans or joint issuers of project bonds, they develop a tangible economic interest in maintaining stable relations. The economic costs of diplomatic ruptures become quantifiable and immediately visible to stakeholders on all sides.

Third, financial innovation creates positive-sum narratives in a region often characterized by zero-sum competition. By enabling countries to collectively tap into previously inaccessible capital pools—such as global ESG funds seeking large-scale sustainable investments—regional financial mechanisms demonstrate that cooperation delivers benefits unattainable through individual action.

If the Eastern Mediterranean realizes this vision of financially driven integration, it could emerge as a global model for how innovative capital structures can overcome entrenched geopolitical challenges. The region’s abundant renewable resources, which have the potential to generate more electricity than its projected future demand, provide the natural foundation, while innovative financing creates the institutional architecture for a sustainable energy future that transcends historical divisions and creates shared prosperity across borders.

The path forward requires financial creativity, diplomatic persistence, and technical expertise—but the potential rewards extend far beyond renewable kilowatts to include a fundamental reconfiguration of regional relationships built on shared economic interests rather than historical grievances.

Acknowledgments

The Atlantic Council would like to extend special thanks to Limak Holding for its valuable support for this report.

About the author

Karim Elgendy
Executive Director,
Carboun Institute;
Associate Fellow,
Chatham House

Karim Elgendy is an expert on energy transition and climate policy in the Middle East and North Africa. His research examines the intersection of climate diplomacy, energy geopolitics, and sustainable development across the region. Elgendy investigates how countries navigate energy transitions and climate change impacts within shifting geopolitical landscapes, and analyzes how regional and global power dynamics influence climate action and policy implementation. He possesses deep expertise in energy and climate policies across the Eastern Mediterranean and Gulf Cooperation Council states, with particular focus on renewable energy, climate resilience, and diplomacy.

Elgendy has authored numerous articles and policy publications in leading journals and platforms. He has presented at over one hundred public speaking engagements and has delivered guest lectures at several prestigious universities. His expert analysis is regularly featured in broadcast, print, and digital media outlets, and he has appeared in most mainstream media outlets.

Appendix: Acronym glossary

AcronymFull name
ACWA PowerArabian Company for Water and Power Development
ADBAsian Development Bank
AIIBAsian Infrastructure Investment Bank
COPConference of the Parties (UN Climate Conference)
EBRDEuropean Bank for Reconstruction and Development
EDLElectricité du Liban
EIBEuropean Investment Bank
EMEFEast Mediterranean Energy Forum (proposed)
EMGFEast Mediterranean Gas Forum
ENTSO-EEuropean Network of Transmission System Operators for Electricity
ESGEnvironmental, social, and governance
GEFGlobal Environment Facility
GREGYGreece-Egypt Interconnector
GCFGreen Climate Fund
IECIsrael Electric Corporation
IsDBIslamic Development Bank
MDBsMultilateral development banks
MEDREGAssociation of Mediterranean Energy Regulators
PVPhotovoltaic
RCCRegional Coordination Committee
RIGRegional Implementation Group
RSGRegional Stakeholder Group
SEMED SEFFSouthern and Eastern Mediterranean Sustainable Energy Financing Facility
TSOTransmission System Operator
UAEUnited Arab Emirates

Explore the program

The Atlantic Council in Turkey aims to promote and strengthen transatlantic engagement with the region by providing a high-level forum and pursuing programming to address the most important issues on energy, economics, security, and defense.

1    Pantelis Kiriakidis, et al., “Projected Wind and Solar Energy Potential in the Eastern Mediterranean and Middle East in 2050,” Science of the Total Environment 927 (2024), https://www.sciencedirect.com/science/article/pii/S0048969724022630.
2    Moritz Rau, Günter Seufert, and Kirsten Westphal, “The Eastern Mediterranean as a Focus for the EU’s Energy Transition,” Stiftung Wissenschaft und Politik, 2022, https://www.swp-berlin.org/10.18449/2022C08/.
3    “Electricity,” Republic of Türkiye, Ministry of Energy and Natural Resources, last updated April 16, 2025, https://enerji.gov.tr/infobank-energy-electricity.
4    Ibid.
5    Karim Elgendy, “Charting Energy Transitions in the Eastern Mediterranean and Arabian Peninsula,” Atlantic Council, December 8, 2023, https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/in-depth-research-reports/report/charting-energy-transitions-in-the-eastern-mediterranean-and-arabian-peninsula/.
6    “Egypt Reaffirms 42% Renewable Energy Goal by 2030, Urges International Help,” Reuters, November 12, 2024, https://www.reuters.com/business/energy/egypt-reaffirms-42-renewable-energy-goal-2030-urges-international-help-2024-11-12/; “Clean Energy for EU Islands: Greece,” European Commission, last visited March 25, 2025,https://clean-energy-islands.ec.europa.eu/countries/greece.
7    “Setting the Scene for an Interconnected, Renewable Mediterranean Energy System,” ECCO, 2023, https://eccoclimate.org/setting-the-scene-for-an-interconnected-renewable-mediterranean-energy-system/.
8    “Renewable Capacity Statistics 2024,” International Renewable Energy Agency, March 2024, https://www.irena.org/Publications/2024/Mar/Renewable-capacity-statistics-2024; Kiriakidis, et al., “Projected Wind and Solar Energy Potential.”
9    Kiriakidis, et al., “Projected Wind and Solar Energy Potential.”
10    Authors’s calculations based on Global Energy Monitor datasets, last visited March 25, 2025, https://globalenergymonitor.org.
11    Antonio Moretti, et al., “Grid Integration as a Strategy of Med-TSO in the Mediterranean Area in the Framework of Climate Change and Energy Transition,” Energies 13, 20 (2020), https://www.mdpi.com/1996-1073/13/20/5307.
12    Ramzi El Dobeissy and Mayssa Otayek, “The Potential of Electricity Interconnections,” American University of Beirut, January 2023, https://www.aub.edu.lb/ifi/Documents/publications/research_reports/2022-2023/Electricity-Interconnections-Eastern-Mediterranean.PDF.
13    Ibid.
14    “Masterplan of Mediterranean Interconnections 2022,” Mediterranean Transmission System Operators, May 31, 2023, https://med-tso.org/en/masterplan-of-mediterranean-interconnections-2022/; El Dobeissy and Otayek, “The Potential of Electricity Interconnections.”
15    Gianluca Muscelli, “Integrated Electricity Grids in the Mediterranean? A Bridge for Energy Cooperation between Europe and North Africa,” ECCO, December 4, 2023, https://eccoclimate.org/integrated-electricity-grids-in-the-mediterranean-a-bridge-for-energy-cooperation-between-europe-and-north-africa/; “GREGY Interconnector,” Energy Press, last visited March 25, 2025, https://energypress.eu/tag/gregy-interconnector/.
16    Abdenour Keramane, “The Energy Ring and the Euro-Mediterranean Electricity Market,” Les Notes IPEMED, Institut de Prospective Economique du Monde Méditerranéen, September 2010, https://www.ipemed.coop/adminIpemed/media/fich_article/1315774972_LesNotesIPEMED_11_BoucleElectrique_sept2010.pdf.
17    Rau, Seufert, and Westphal, “The Eastern Mediterranean as a Focus for the EU’s Energy Transition.”
18    El Dobeissy and Otayek, “”The Potential of Electricity Interconnections.”
19    “What Is the Global Stocktake?” McKinsey & Company, August 28, 2024,
https://www.mckinsey.com/featured-insights/mckinsey-explainers/what-is-the-global-stocktake.
20    “Global Renewables and Energy Efficiency Pledge,” COP28, last visited March 25, 2025, https://www.cop28.com/en/global-renewables-and-energy-efficiency-pledge.
21    Karim Elgendy, “The Mediterranean Must Work Collectively to Harness the Power of Renewables,” Atlantic Council, March 11, 2025, https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/blogs/energysource/the-mediterranean-must-work-collectively-to-harness-the-power-of-renewables/.
22    “1 Terawwatt Renewable Energy Capacity Installed in the Mediterranean Region by 2030,” TERAMED Initiative, last visited March 25, 2025, https://teramedinitiative.com/.
23    “Renewable Capacity Statistics 2024.”
24    Elgendy, “The Mediterranean Must Work Collectively to Harness the Power of Renewables.”
25    Karim Elgendy, “From Grey to Green: Türkiye’s Energy Transition(s),” CeSPI Osservatorio Turchia, October 2023, https://www.cespi.it/sites/default/files/osservatori/allegati/approf._26_turkiyes_energy_transitions_elgendy_0.pdf.
26    Ibid.
27    Rau, Seufert, and Westphal, “The Eastern Mediterranean as a Focus for the EU’s Energy Transition.”
28    “HEDNO Smart Meters I Project Pipeline,” European Investment Bank, August 2, 2023, https://www.eib.org/en/projects/pipelines/all/20220823.
29    Femke J. M. M. Nijsse, et al., “The Momentum of the Solar Energy Transition,” Nature Communications 14 (2023), https://www.nature.com/articles/s41467-023-41971-7.
30    “Renewable Power Generation Costs in 2023,” International Renewable Energy Agency, 2024, https://www.irena.org/-/media/Files/IRENA/Agency/Publication/2024/Sep/IRENA_Renewable_power_generation_costs_in_2023.pdf.
31    Great Sea Interconnector, last visited March 28, 2025, https://www.great-sea-interconnector.com/en.
32    “Southern and Eastern Mediterranean Regional Sustainable Energy Financing Facility,” EU Neighbours South, last visited March 28, 2025, https://south.euneighbours.eu/project/semed-seff-southern-and-eastern-mediterranean-regional-sustainable/.
33    “AIIB Investment’s Portfolio in Egypt Hits $1.3b,” Egyptian Gazette, September 25, 2023, https://egyptian-gazette.com/egypt/aiib-investments-portfolio-in-egypt-hits-1-3b/.
34    “Green Bond Market Guide,” Goldman Sachs Asset Management, November 1, 2024, https://am.gs.com/en-gb/institutions/insights/article/2024/green-bond-market-guide.
35    “Supporting Egypt’s Inaugural Green Bond Issuance,” World Bank, March 15, 2022, https://www.worldbank.org/en/news/feature/2022/03/02/supporting-egypt-s-inaugural-green-bond-issuance.
36    “Green Bond Allocation,” State of Israel Ministry of Finance, January 2024, https://www.gov.il/BlobFolder/reports/green-bond-framework/en/files-eng_Publications_Israel-Green-Bond-Framework-SOI.pdf; “ESG Issuances,” Republic of Turkey Ministry of Treasury and Finance, last visited April 3, 2025, https://en.hmb.gov.tr/esg-issuances.
37    “Sustainability and Green Bond Frameworks,” National Bank of Greece, last visited March 29, 2025, https://www.nbg.gr/en/group/investor-relations/debt-investors/sustainability-and-green-bond-frameworks.
38    Jessica Obeid, “Turning MENA Markets Green: Why Sustainable Finance Matters and How to Do It,” SRMG Think Research and Advisory, 2024, https://awsprod.srmgthink.com/featured-insights/411/special-report-turning-mena-markets-green.
39    “Republic of Turkey—Sustainable Finance Framework,” Republic of Turkey, November 2021, https://ms.hmb.gov.tr/uploads/2021/11/Republic-of-Turkey-Sustainable-Finance-Framework.pdf; Obeid, “Turning MENA Markets Green.”
40    “European Green Bond Standard,” European Commission, last visited March 28, 2025, https://finance.ec.europa.eu/sustainable-finance/tools-and-standards/european-green-bond-standard-supporting-transition_en.
41    Jessica Obeid and Alice Gower, “Mind the Gap: Highlighting MENA’s Climate Finance Challenge,” SRMG Think Research and Advisory, December 2023, https://www.srmgthink.com/highlighting-menas-climate-finance-challenge.
42    “$155 Million World Bank Loan to Expand Equity Finance for the Greening of Turkish Firms,” World Bank, press release, November 9, 2023, https://www.worldbank.org/en/news/press-release/2023/11/09/-155-million-world-bank-loan-to-expand-equity-finance-for-the-greening-of-turkish-firms; Obeid and Gower, “Mind the Gap.”
43    “Islamic Finance and Renewable Energy,” Greenpeace MENA, 2024,
https://www.greenpeace.org/static/planet4-ummah-stateless/2024/11/d63785ad-iffe_report_en-.pdf.
44    Ibid.
45    “Unlocking Islamic Climate Finance,” Asian Development Bank, November 2022, https://www.adb.org/publications/unlocking-islamic-climate-finance.
46    “Sovereign Sukuk Act Signed into Law,” Enterprise (Egyptian news site), 2021, https://enterprise.press/stories/2021/08/19/sovereign-sukuk-act-signed-into-law-51060/.
47    Esma Karabulut, “Technical Assistance for Assessment of Türkiye’s Potential on Transition to Circular Economy,” Circular Economy Workshop, October 4, 2022, https://webdosya.csb.gov.tr/db/dongusel_en/icerikler/deep-project-presentat-on-en_esma-karabulut-20221024144340.pdf.
48    “IsDB Issues US$2 Billion Sukuk in First Benchmark of the Year,” Islamic Development Bank, May 8, 2024, https://www.isdb.org/news/isdb-issues-us-2-billion-sukuk-in-first-benchmark-of-the-year.
49    “Gulf Renewable Power Tracker,” Columbia University Center on Global Energy Policy, last visited March 29, 2025, https://www.energypolicy.columbia.edu/the-gulf-renewable-projects-tracker/.
50    Maha El Dahan, “COP27: UAE and Egypt Agree to Build One of World’s Biggest Wind Farms,” Reuters, November 8, 2022, https://www.reuters.com/business/cop/cop27-uae-egypt-agree-build-one-worlds-biggest-wind-farms-2022-11-08/.
51    “AIIB Supports Renewable Energy Development in Egypt,” Asian Infrastructure Investment Bank, September 5, 2017, https://www.aiib.org/en/news-events/news/2017/AIIB-Supports-Renewable-Energy-Development-in-Egypt.html.
52    “Silk Road Fund Becomes a 49% Shareholder in ACWA Power Renewable Energy Holding LTD,” ACWA Power, June 23, 2019, https://www.acwapower.com/news/silk-road-fund-becomes-a-49-shareholder-in-acwa-power-renewable-energy-holding-ltd/.
53    Clemens Hoffmann and Ceren Ergenc, “A Greening Dragon in the Desert? China’s Role in the Geopolitical Ecology of Decarbonisation in the Eastern Mediterranean,” Journal of Balkan and Near Eastern Studies 25, 1 (2023), 82–101, https://www.tandfonline.com/doi/full/10.1080/19448953.2022.2131079.
54    “Neighbourhood Investment Platform,” European Commission, last visited March 20, 2025, https://enlargement.ec.europa.eu/neighbourhood-investment-platform_en.
55    Veronika Ertl, Benjamin Nickels, and Hamza Saidi, “Climate Change and Geopolitical Dynamics in the Middle East and North Africa,” Konrad Adenauer Stiftung, July 19, 2024, https://www.kas.de/de/einzeltitel/-/content/climate-change-and-geopolitical-dynamics-in-the-middle-east-and-north-africa.
56    “ELMED Project,” last visited March 25, 2025, https://elmedproject.com.
57    El Dobeissy and Otayek, “The Potential of Electricity Interconnections.”
58    “Internal Energy Market,” Fact Sheets on the European Union, April 2024, https://www.europarl.europa.eu/factsheets/en/sheet/45/internal-energy-market.
59    Ibid.
60    Francesco Valezano, “Decarbonization, Decentralization and Digitalization in the Mediterranean,” Revolve, August 12, 2019, https://revolve.media/features/decarbonization-decentralization-and-digitalization-in-the-mediterranean.
61    Rau, Seufert, and Westphal, “The Eastern Mediterranean as a Focus for the EU’s Energy Transition.”
62    Ariel Ezrahi, “An Energy and Sustainability Roadmap for the Middle East,” Atlantic Council, November 22, 2024, https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/in-depth-research-reports/report/an-energy-and-sustainability-road-map-for-the-middle-east/.
63    Ibid.
64    “Rethinking Gas Diplomacy in the Eastern Mediterranean,” International Crisis Group, April 26, 2023, https://www.crisisgroup.org/middle-east-north-africa/east-mediterranean-mena-turkiye/240-rethinking-gas-diplomacy-eastern; “Regional Integration: Sub-regional Regulatory Convergence,” Association of Mediterranean Energy Regulators, December 2020, https://www.medreg-regulators.org.

The post Great sea connections: Financing the Eastern Mediterranean’s energy transition appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>
Scaling up private capital for climate investment in emerging markets https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/in-depth-research-reports/issue-brief/scaling-up-private-capital-for-climate-investment-in-emerging-markets/ Mon, 16 Jun 2025 13:00:00 +0000 https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/?p=851862 The gap between actual and needed global investment in renewable energy is projected to grow to tens of trillions of dollars over the next ten to thirty years.

The post Scaling up private capital for climate investment in emerging markets appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>

The gap between actual and needed global investment in renewable energy is projected to grow to tens of trillions of dollars over the next ten to thirty years while the costs of climate change continue to compound. Public finance alone—via governments, multilateral development banks, and international financial institutions—is insufficient to meet the challenge. To bridge this widening investment gap and attract private investors that will have to provide most of the funding, what’s needed is a combination of innovative financial tools that are tailored to local contexts and mitigate risk, enhance creditworthiness, and attract private capital at high leverage rates. Guarantees are especially important because of their reputation for their efficacy and effectiveness in mitigating real and perceived risks of projects, which enhances project creditworthiness and often attracts investment from the private sector.

This paper provides a comprehensive overview of investment gaps in the renewable energy industry at the global level as well as in EMDEs to achieve the global net-zero targets and discusses the risks and obstacles facing private investors in the renewable energy industry. It also reviews various de-risking, risk-reduction, and risk-transfer financial mechanisms that could boost private investment in clean energy infrastructure and nature-based solutions projects centered around a discussion of a guarantee proposal called the Emerging Market Climate Investment Compact (EMCIC). The EMCIC is a proposal for a guarantee facility funded primarily by wealthy governments that would provide guarantees to major global investors to mobilize $100 to $500 billion in private investment in climate mitigation investments, namely clean energy infrastructure and nature-based solutions, in EMDEs over ten years. The structure of the facility would be simplified so that qualified investors would assemble portfolios that would be broadly guaranteed (against most political and commercial risks), would do their own due diligence subject to standards set by the EMCIC, and would generally not require recipient country guarantees.

Finally, the paper includes case studies on clean energy investment in Brazil and South Africa—and country-specific mechanisms available for scaling up this investment.

View the full issue brief

About the authors

Amin Mohseni-Cheraghlou was the macroeconomist with the GeoEconomics Center (2021-2024) and a Senior Lecturer of Economics at the American University in Washington, DC. 

Frank Willey is a program assistant at the Atlantic Council Global Energy Center. 

related content

Global Energy Forum

The ninth Atlantic Council Global Energy Forum will be held June 17 and 18 in Washington, DC. Please check back regularly for updates on our programming.

explore the program

The Global Energy Center develops and promotes pragmatic and nonpartisan policy solutions designed to advance global energy security, enhance economic opportunity, and accelerate pathways to net-zero emissions.

The post Scaling up private capital for climate investment in emerging markets appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>
Mapping China’s strategy for rare earths dominance https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/in-depth-research-reports/issue-brief/mapping-chinas-strategy-for-rare-earths-dominance/ Fri, 13 Jun 2025 17:03:43 +0000 https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/?p=851573 China has built a commanding monopoly over rare earths.

The post Mapping China’s strategy for rare earths dominance appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>

China has built a commanding monopoly over rare earths, the seventeen metallic elements that are crucial for modern technologies spanning from energy to defense. Through decades of strategic state intervention, China now controls over half of global mining production and 90 percent of separation and refining capacity.

This dominance has been enabled by a comprehensive, whole-of-government approach that includes the Communist Party, the state apparatus, the military complex, industry, and research institutions. These entities work together to implement a broad range of policies that ensure global control, such as price controls, tax policy, environmental regulations, standards setting, foreign policy, defense strategy, industry planning, and research and development. These labyrinthine policy- and market-making processes add layers of complexity to the already opaque inner workings of the Chinese state.

This report by Craig Hart demystifies these interconnected systems by:

  • outlining China’s strategic objectives
  • identifying the key rare earths stakeholders in government and industry
  • unraveling the complex web of policies that enable its global market dominance
  • exploring potential opportunities for the West to develop a counterstrategy to develop its own rare earths supply chains

explore further

Explore interactive graphics mapping China’s key rare earths stakeholders, system of direct and indirect subsidies, and the role of Belt and Road investments.

View the full issue brief

About the author

Craig A. Hart was a nonresident senior fellow with the Atlantic Council’s Global Energy Center. He is a lecturer at Johns Hopkins University.

related content

Global Energy Forum

The ninth Atlantic Council Global Energy Forum will be held June 17 and 18 in Washington, DC. Please check back regularly for updates on our programming.

explore the program

The Global Energy Center develops and promotes pragmatic and nonpartisan policy solutions designed to advance global energy security, enhance economic opportunity, and accelerate pathways to net-zero emissions.

The post Mapping China’s strategy for rare earths dominance appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>
Energy strategy across the Arabian Sea and Indian Ocean https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/in-depth-research-reports/issue-brief/energy-strategy-across-the-arabian-sea-and-indian-ocean/ Thu, 12 Jun 2025 15:54:07 +0000 https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/?p=852715 The energy landscape of the ASIO region is also a key component of broader, global geopolitical and strategic change.

The post Energy strategy across the Arabian Sea and Indian Ocean appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>

The Arabian Sea and Indian Ocean (ASIO) megaregion occupies a pivotal position in the global energy landscape, both as a key transit route and as home to some of the greatest energy suppliers and consumers worldwide. This sprawling region encompasses the Gulf Cooperation Council (GCC) states, South Asia and the Association of Southeast Asian Nations (ASEAN), as well as East Africa and, further afield, Australia.

Energy cooperation within ASIO is a linchpin of economic and geopolitical stability. The GCC, with vast hydrocarbon reserves and increasing investments in renewable energy, serves as a cornerstone of energy supply for South and Southeast Asia. At the same time, the ASIO region’s energy relationships transcend supply and demand dynamics. Decarbonizing energy systems, securing critical trade routes, and addressing energy poverty all imply a growing degree of regional and interregional strategic collaboration.

The energy landscape of the ASIO region is also a key component of broader, global geopolitical and strategic change. Critical maritime chokepoints link energy trade routes with regional and international security considerations. Global powers including China and the United States actively shape the region’s energy and political dynamics, creating both opportunities for collaboration and risks of competition.

With heightened concerns about Chinese ambitions, and with a less dependable and more protectionist US partner, many ASIO countries are in a mood to balance. Geopolitical change and the need for energy are driving deeper cooperation within the bloc and prompting outreach to second-tier powers.

This publication explores the energy relationships that define the ASIO region, focusing on three key interregional dynamics: GCC-South Asia, GCC-Southeast Asia, and South Asia-Southeast Asia. It also examines the broader regional issues shared by all ASIO countries, as well as the roles of East Africa and Australia within this vast energy ecosystem. The memo also situates this discussion within the context of broader global partnerships, particularly with the United States and Western allies.

View the full issue brief

About the author

Related content

Global Energy Forum

The ninth Atlantic Council Global Energy Forum will be held June 17 and 18 in Washington, DC. Please check back regularly for updates on our programming.

Explore the program

The Global Energy Center develops and promotes pragmatic and nonpartisan policy solutions designed to advance global energy security, enhance economic opportunity, and accelerate pathways to net-zero emissions.

The post Energy strategy across the Arabian Sea and Indian Ocean appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>
Building for tomorrow: Preparing US industry to compete in a lower-carbon global economy https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/in-depth-research-reports/issue-brief/building-for-tomorrow-preparing-us-industry-to-compete-in-a-lower-carbon-global-economy/ Thu, 12 Jun 2025 13:00:00 +0000 https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/?p=851849 The question for US policymakers is not whether to compete, but how.

The post Building for tomorrow: Preparing US industry to compete in a lower-carbon global economy appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>

The importance of an effective US industrial strategy is growing amid rapid technological change, rising energy demand, and geopolitical uncertainty. In response, policymakers are focused on how US industry can stay competitive in an era of electrification, digitalization, and AI, as well as global conflict.

Key industrial sectors like steel, aluminum, cement, and chemicals must meet rising global demand for low-emissions products while countering unfair trade practices, especially from countries like China that use state support and low environmental standards to undercut competitors. Durable US competitiveness will depend on supportive policies and transparent markets that reward higher environmental and labor standards.

The question for US policymakers is not whether to compete, but how. Industrial policy is a bipartisan priority, even if strategies differ, and a national security imperative. Given its fiscal constraints, the United States must find ways to ensure its industries thrive globally while avoiding new spending.

Over the past year, the Atlantic Council engaged dozens of industrial stakeholders from private, public, and nonprofit sectors to assess how the United States can lead in sustainable industrial development. The consensus: although no specific outcome is assured, the country is well-positioned to lead if it acts decisively. This study concludes with near-term recommendations to overcome barriers and lay the foundation for a revitalized, competitive, and sustainable US industrial strategy.

About the authors

David Goldwyn is the chair of the Atlantic Council’s Energy Advisory Group and a nonresident senior fellow with the Council’s Global Energy Center.

Andrea Clabough is a nonresident fellow with the Atlantic Council Global Energy Center and an associate at Goldwyn Global Strategies, LLC.

related content

Global Energy Forum

The ninth Atlantic Council Global Energy Forum will be held June 17 and 18 in Washington, DC. Please check back regularly for updates on our programming.

explore the program

The Global Energy Center develops and promotes pragmatic and nonpartisan policy solutions designed to advance global energy security, enhance economic opportunity, and accelerate pathways to net-zero emissions.

The post Building for tomorrow: Preparing US industry to compete in a lower-carbon global economy appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>
Reprogramming the future: The specialized semiconductors reshaping the global supply chain https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/in-depth-research-reports/issue-brief/reprogramming-the-future-the-specialized-semiconductors-reshaping-the-global-supply-chain/ Wed, 11 Jun 2025 17:43:36 +0000 https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/?p=848735 Within three years, Chinese investments in a critical and specialized type of semiconductor—field-programmable gate arrays (FPGAs)—are likely to drive many US firms out of the market. To counter this, the United States will need to significantly increase its own investment efforts.

The post Reprogramming the future: The specialized semiconductors reshaping the global supply chain appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>
Introduction

In 2014, the People’s Republic of China (PRC) launched a massive investment campaign to develop its domestic semiconductor industry. While significant policy and media attention is focused on PRC efforts to catch up to the United States at the leading edge of semiconductor manufacturing, PRC investments in foundational, or “lagging-edge,” semiconductors are also an important strategic development. In this issue brief, the authors examine PRC investments in field-programmable gate arrays (FPGAs) as an example of critical, specialized semiconductors that are often manufactured with foundational technology.

FPGAs are specialized semiconductor chips that offer a unique combination of flexibility and performance. They are critical components in guided missile systems like the FGM-148 Javelin, automobiles like the Mustang Mach-E electric SUV, telecommunications systems, and cloud data centers. Today, the United States leads the FPGA industry. US firms hold market-leading positions in FPGA design and design software, while most FPGA manufacturing and assembly, testing, and packaging is conducted by US firms or by close allies such as Taiwan.

However, the PRC has steadily increased its semiconductor investment efforts in recent years to develop manufacturing capabilities for foundational semiconductors overall, and design capabilities for FPGAs in particular. This new PRC capacity will come online in one to three years and, given its substantial scale, it may price US FPGA firms out of the critical segments of the FPGA market. This will create both availability and security risks for the US FPGA supply chain.

Semiconductors are at the heart of US-China tech tensions

In the last decade, US and PRC policy postures toward the semiconductor industry have changed. As the overall US-China relationship shifted from collaboration to competition,1 the US-China semiconductor ecosystem has evolved from a benign mutualistic partnership into a strategic competition. This shift, coupled with rising tensions between the United States and the PRC overall, triggered a broad US response, including prohibiting PRC investments, imposing export controls on critical chips and manufacturing equipment, and an industrial policy that supports domestic chipmakers. Key PRC and US actions are summarized in Figure 1.

Figure 1. What steps have the United States and China taken in the race for semiconductor supremacy?

China’s chip strategy is powered by state funding and localized supply chains

In 2014, after the Chinese Communist Party (CCP)2articulated its ambitions to become a leader across the semiconductor value chain by 2030,3 it quickly established a National Integrated Circuit Industry Investment Fund (NICIIF, commonly known as the “Big Fund”) to provide financial support toward those goals. The first phase of funding, amounting to an estimated $21 billion,4 supported domestic semiconductor manufacturing and chip design capabilities, largely through overseas acquisitions and foreign semiconductor equipment purchases.5

In 2018, China revised its goal to focus on increasing domestic semiconductor production as part of its Made in China 2025 industrial strategy.6 In the same year, a series of articles appeared in a publication affiliated with the PRC Ministry of Science and Technology. They identified specific “chokepoint technologies,”7 including both semiconductors and the photolithography machines needed to manufacture them.8

The second phase of Big Fund investments took place in October 2019, providing an estimated $28.9 billion,9 to support upstream development and downstream acquisition of semiconductor manufacturing equipment, along with critical raw materials.10 In 2021, the PRC began to supplement Big Fund investments with an explicit dual circulation and indigenous innovation strategy,11 aiming to replace US- and foreign-made semiconductors with domestic alternatives.12

Chinese companies, including those with long-term US ties, are increasingly supporting the PRC government’s initiatives to develop a localized semiconductor supply chain.13 Between 2018 and 2023, the PRC produced 34 percent of the world’s chip design and fabrication-related research articles while the United States trailed behind at 15 percent.14 Nine out of the world’s top ten chip research producers are also PRC institutions.15 Of course, these statistics should be read with some skepticism, as China has often produced large volumes of lower-quality research publications.16 However, the sheer quantity of chip-related publications produced by Chinese researchers indicates the PRC’s substantial resource allocation and strategic commitment to advancing its broader semiconductor industry.

In 2024, China announced the third phase of the Big Fund, an estimated $47.5 billion investment focused on chip-making equipment.17 However, total PRC semiconductor investment fell sharply in 2024, with analysts attributing the decline to reduced demand and lower government subsidies.18

While the PRC is building capabilities to design and manufacture leading-edge semiconductors, it is also strengthening its capacity to produce lagging-edge semiconductors.19 Jeremy Mark, a senior fellow with the GeoEconomics Center of the Atlantic Council, observed that “China has an insatiable appetite for all types of semiconductors and investments have been, by necessity, in legacy chips.”20 As part of the PRC’s efforts, PRC FPGA firms are growing. This upward trend demands increased concern even though China’s current FPGA sector is relatively nascent compared to the United States.21

From Obama to Trump—the US response to PRC investments

The US government has countered China’s semiconductor advancements through intensified foreign investment reviews and export controls, while also tightening US outbound investments into China’s semiconductor sector. The Committee on Foreign Investment in the United States (CFIUS) has blocked PRC state investments and acquisitions of semiconductor firms consistently across recent presidential administrations. For instance, in 2016, the Obama administration prohibited the sale of the US operations of Aixtron GE, a semiconductor manufacturing equipment firm headquartered in Germany, to a PRC investment firm.22 The following year, the Trump administration blocked the PRC acquisition of the Lattice Semiconductor Corporation, a US FPGA firm, on similar national security grounds.23

Since 2020, US policy to counter PRC semiconductor industry growth has largely relied on the assumption that the United States and its allies control technological chokepoints, and can deny the PRC access to them using export controls.24 This approach is largely in-line with the “chokepoint effect” model of weaponized interdependence, as proposed by Henry Farrell and Abraham Newman.25 Recent policy discussion has begun to question whether efforts to deny access to chokepoints in fact incentivize indigenous PRC technological development, a concern raised in Farrell and Newman’s original paper.26 Similar US efforts to take advantage of chokepoints in the global financial system have spurred both the PRC and US allies in Europe to develop technological solutions to reduce the importance of US-controlled chokepoints.27 Additionally, the US has also increasingly relied on executive directives to limit Chinese access to American capital, beginning with Executive Order 13959 issued by President Donald Trump in 2020, which prohibited US investments in designated Communist Chinese Military Companies (CCMCs). In 2021, President Joe Biden amended EO 13959 and revoked EO 13974 by issuing EO 14032, which expanded the scope to include companies supporting the Chinese Military-Industrial Complex (CMIC) and surveillance efforts while also narrowing investment restrictions by prohibiting indirect investments in CMIC-linked companies. In 2023, Biden signed Executive Order 14105, authorizing the Treasury Department to restrict or require disclosure of US investments in sensitive technologies—such as semiconductors—in countries of concern, particularly China.

As shown in Figure 1, US actions against the PRC semiconductor industry began to increase during the Trump administration in 2018 and carried over to the Biden administration. In response to US restrictions, the PRC enacted similar controls to impose pressure on US firms and its semiconductor industry.

China’s growing involvement in the FPGA industry

The FPGA market has become a key competitive arena between the United States and the PRC. While the United States is still the global leader in FPGAs, China’s substantial investments in the FPGA space present an emerging challenge to the United States’ ability to produce the most advanced FPGA chips and potentially the ability of the United States and its allies to manufacture FPGAs at scale. Our research indicates that the PRC is launching a major buildup of manufacturing capacity at lagging-edge logic nodes, including substantial state investments in FPGA firms.

To analyze the FPGA industry and China’s growing involvement, we employ the value chain model described in Figure 2, which includes both core stages of the semiconductor value chain and key inputs.28

Figure 2. An overview of the semiconductor value chain, from initial design through end use

The participants in the FPGA supply chain are grouped into four main categories.

China is increasing its efforts to localize FPGA production in response to growing domestic demands, aiming to decrease reliance on US suppliers, particularly for low- and mid-range FPGAs.29 US sanctions and export controls have limited China’s access to advanced semiconductor manufacturing equipment, prompting China to increase investments in lagging-edge semiconductor capacity that depends on older, less-sophisticated semiconductor manufacturing equipment (SME).30 The PRC currently holds an advantage in certain aspects of manufacturing and the majority of assembly, testing, and packaging (ATP), while also making significant investments in domestic FPGA firms, specifically in R&D to strengthen its FPGA chipmakers’ design capabilities.

US manufacturers pay the price for China’s chokehold on critical raw materials

China is the leading supplier of raw materials needed for FPGA manufacturing, specifically silicon and gallium. In 2024, the PRC produced approximately 80 percent of global silicon production and 99 percent of worldwide low-purity gallium production.31 Given China’s history of using its critical mineral supply as a geopolitical tool, mounting competition between the United States and the PRC increases the likelihood of PRC restrictions on critical minerals.32 The PRC’s actions to control raw materials to-date—including China’s complete ban on gallium exports to the United States in December 2024 and stricter licensing requirements for other critical minerals in April 2025—have significantly increased prices for various raw materials, including gallium. Even before China’s April 2025 measures, gallium prices had already risen by roughly 80 percent by December 2024,33 thereby increasing the cost of US FPGA manufacturing.

While other countries could step in over time to provide additional gallium capacity, prices may remain elevated or increase further before US and allied gallium production can increase. However, gallium is only one of many critical inputs used in FPGA manufacturing, and many FPGA end customers are largely price-inelastic (e.g., military and defense applications).34 This implies that gallium pricing dynamics alone are unlikely to drive major shifts in the FPGA market. China’s dominance and strategic manipulation of its raw material supply reduce the cost of domestic Chinese FPGA manufacturing while driving up manufacturing cost for US FPGAs.

Ensuring continued dominance in assembly, testing, packaging

ATP involves separating silicon wafers into individual chips, which are then connected with other components and packaged into an end product.35 ATP services are typically outsourced to third-party semiconductor assembly and testing (OSAT) firms. While China and Taiwan make up 60 percent of global ATP operations,36 China is home to five of the largest OSAT firms globally (JCET, HT-Tch, TF, LCSP, and Chippacking) and is investing in its next-generation advanced packaging capabilities.37 As the semiconductor industry—including FPGA firms—increasingly relies on advanced packaging to drive performance gains,38 China’s advancements in next-generation packaging techniques may increasingly position the country as a significant competitor in the FPGA space and in critical end-customer applications that depend on them, such as artificial intelligence (AI) and data centers.

Big Fund investment fuels the rise of PRC FPGA firms

Investments from the Big Fund in PRC FPGA firms like Anlogic provide early indicators that FPGAs are a focus area for the PRC.39 According to the Atlantic Council’s Jeremy Mark, there is “no evidence that there is a slacking of [Chinese] investments and commitment of resources toward semiconductors and SMEs [as] its technology growth strategy, particularly in AI, requires semiconductors.”40 This manufacturing capacity will provide firms with an option to manufacture FPGA chips at costs substantially lower than what is typical today. However, this new manufacturing capacity will likely come with substantial availability and security risks.

There are five notable PRC FPGA firms in the low-to-mid-range FPGA segment:

  1. Anlogic41 (安路科技): Anlogic is the largest domestic FPGA vendor in China, although it trails three US firms in Chinese market share.42 Anlogic held 38.2 percent of the domestic low-end FPGA market share as of 201943 and mainly targets industrial and automotive applications. Anlogic has received significant support from the PRC government in 2019 through the Big Fund.44 Anlogic reportedly spends at least 40 percent of its revenue on research and development (R&D).45
  2. Gowin Semiconductor (高云半导体): Gowin Semiconductor is gaining domestic market share, specifically in IoT, automotive, and industrial applications. Founded in 2014, Gowin has attracted multiple government-backed investments. In May 2022, Guangzhou Bay Area Semiconductor Group, a state-backed fund, led the most recent funding round and emerged as Gowin’s largest shareholder46 This funding is expected to be used for expanding R&D as well as target new markets.47 Gowin is the only PRC FPGA supplier with an automotive-grade FPGA certification.48
  3. Shanghai Fudan Microelectronics Group (上海复旦): Fudan Microelectronics is a state-affiliated integrated circuit (IC) design company that originated from Fudan University in 1998.49 In 2024, Fudan Microelectronics spent roughly a third of its revenue on R&D.50 Although the Big Fund does not appear to have invested directly in Fudan Microelectronics, the company receives investments from state-affiliated financial entities51 and significant government research grants.52
  4. Shenzhen Pango Microsystems (紫光同创): Pango Microsystems is the largest FPGA supplier to Huawei and seeks to expand into advanced FPGAs.53 Pango has also attracted investments from government-backed entities.54 The firm reportedly dedicates 80 percent of its 800-plus staff to R&D.55
  5. Hercules Microelectronics (京微齐力): Hercules Microelectronics, founded in 2017, focuses on FPGAs for AI acceleration, data centers, and electronic vehicles.56 Although not directly backed by the Big Fund, Hercules Microelectronics received funding from investment funds linked with the Beijing municipal government.57

These examples demonstrate the level of financial support the PRC government supplies to FPGA firms, both through the Big Fund and other initiatives. A significant portion of this funding is directed toward R&D efforts, enabling PRC FPGA firms to expand their capabilities and compete more effectively with established US FPGA firms. However, while Big Fund support appears to have played a key role in building PRC FPGA firms, it has not been able to drive long-term, sustainable growth. For example, its pre-IPO investment in Anlogic likely strengthened investor confidence in the firm and helped the company raise approximately $186.04 million.58 This capital infusion supported significant R&D efforts, resulting in six new chips being released in 2022.59 As a result, Anlogic revenue surged from $105.16 million to $154.83 million,60 with net profit of $8.89 million.61 However, as the semiconductor industry slowed between 2022 and 2023,62 the Big Fund reduced its Anlogic holdings from roughly 39 million shares to 31 million shares63 and Anlogic experienced a substantial 2023 net loss of $27.87 million, primarily driven by weak downstream demand and its continued aggressive R&D spending of $54.3 million.64 The trend persisted in 2024, with Anlogic reporting another net loss of $28.54 million, despite reducing its R&D spend by about 7 percent.65

Figure 3. Anlogic’s revenue and profit have declined without sustained Big Fund investment

Anlogic’s recent performance highlights three key takeaways. First, Big Fund investments appear to have provided critical capital that enabled Anlogic to enter and compete in the FPGA market with rapid, extensive R&D. Second, Anlogic has struggled to sustain profitability through semiconductor market swings without ongoing capital support. Third, despite financial pressures, Anlogic and similar firms remain committed to aggressive R&D investment to enhance their competitiveness and improve their product portfolios, ultimately enabling them to offer high-quality FPGAs at lower costs.

Conclusion

The FPGA market is highly segmented and the substantial customization of FPGA designs needed for different applications can form a significant barrier to entry. However, rapid, large-scale PRC investment in lagging-edge semiconductors has established more than just the five FPGA design firms highlighted above and has increased substantial manufacturing capacity at lagging-edge process nodes, which will ramp up PRC FPGA production in the near future. The PRC FPGA firms described above collectively address a broad set of critical FPGA segments, with considerable support from the PRC government.

This development poses two principal concerns for the United States. First, these FPGAs will enable the PRC to develop new capabilities across its economy and for military purposes. Second, if geopolitics allows global technology standards and supply chains to remain integrated, US FPGA makers may struggle to compete with these new PRC players given the scale and degree of their government support. FPGAs are critical components in US defense equipment and underpin US critical infrastructures as well as significant economic activity. To protect US national security and economic interests, the US government should consider launching a dedicated effort to address the impact of PRC FPGA firms on the resilience of US FPGA supply chain.

About the Authors

Celine Lee holds a Master of Public Policy from the Harvard Kennedy School and previously held fellowships at the United States Senate Committee on Foreign Relations and the American Institute in Taiwan (AIT).

Andrew Kidd holds a Master of Public Policy from the Harvard Kennedy School and was previously an engagement manager in the high-tech and public sector practices at McKinsey & Company.

Bruce Schneier is a security technologist and a fellow and lecturer at the Harvard Kennedy School.

Explore the program

The Atlantic Council’s Cyber Statecraft Initiative, part of the Atlantic Council Technology Programs, works at the nexus of geopolitics and cybersecurity to craft strategies to help shape the conduct of statecraft and to better inform and secure users of technology.

1    Graham T. Allison, Destined for War: Can America and China Escape Thucydides’s Trap? (Boston: Houghton Mifflin Harcourt, 2017); Jake Sullivan, “The Sources of American Power,” Foreign Affairs, October 24, 2023; Odd Arne Westad, “The Sources of Chinese Conduct,” Foreign Affairs, August 12, 2019, https://www.foreignaffairs.com/articles/china/2019-08-12/sources-chinese-conduct.
2    The PRC’s 13th Five Year Plan for the Development of Strategic Emerging Industries tasked the following stakeholders to be responsible for the implementation of PRC’s semiconductor initiatives: The National Development and Reform Commission, Ministry of Industry and Information Technology, Ministry of Science and Technology, Ministry of Finance, Cyberspace Administration of China, and General Administration of Quality Supervision, Inspection and Quarantine.
3    Karen M Sutter, Emily G Blevins, and Alice B Grossman, “Semiconductors and the CHIPS Act: The Global Context,” CRS Report No. R47558 (Washington, DC: Congressional Research Service, updated September 28, 2023, 18, https://www.congress.gov/crs-product/R47558.
4    Sarah Ravi, “Taking Stock of China’s Semiconductor Industry,” Semiconductor Industry Association, July 13, 2021, https://www.semiconductors.org/taking-stock-of-chinas-semiconductor-industry/.
5    Sutter, Blevins, and Grossman, “Semiconductors and the CHIPS Act: The Global Context,” 18; Economist Intelligence Unit, “China Boosts State-Led Chip Investment,” Economist Intelligence Unit, March 13, 2024, https://www.eiu.com/n/china-boosts-state-led-chip-investment/.
6    Sutter, Blevins, and Grossman, “Semiconductors and the CHIPS Act: The Global Context,” 18.
7    Ben Murphy, “Chokepoints: China’s Self-Identified Strategic Technology Import Dependencies,” Issue Brief (Washington, DC: Center for Security and Emerging Technology, May 2022), https://cset.georgetown.edu/publication/chokepoints/.
8    Murphy, “Chokepoints.”
9    All investment amounts are expressed in US dollars.Sutter, Blevins, and Grossman, “Semiconductors and the CHIPS Act: The Global Context,” 18.
10    Economist Intelligence Unit, “China Boosts State-Led Chip Investment;” Arrian Ebrahimi and Lily Ottinger, “China’s SME Industrial Policy in 5 Charts,” ChinaTalk (blog), May 7, 2025, https://www.chinatalk.media/p/chinas-sme-industrial-policy-in-5.
11    Dual circulation is an economic strategy that aims to reduce China’s external economic and technological dependence by emphasizing domestic market growth and maintaining selective global economic engagement. Indigenous innovation refers to Chinese-led technology research and development.
12    Semiconductor Industry Association, “SIA Comments to USTR Regarding the 2024-China WTO Compliance Report” (Semiconductor Industry Association, September 10, 2024), https://www.semiconductors.org/wp-content/uploads/2024/09/SIA-Comments-to-USTR-Regarding-the-2024-China-WTO-Compliance-Report.pdf.
13    Sutter, Blevins, and Grossman, “Semiconductors and the CHIPS Act: The Global Context,” 26.
14    ETO Research Almanac, “Chip Design and Fabrication,” updated January 6, 2025, https://almanac.eto.tech/topics/chip-design-fabrication/.
15    ETO Research Almanac, “Chip Design and Fabrication.”
16    Eleanor Olcott, Alan Smith, and Clive Cookson, “China’s Fake Science Industry: How ‘Paper Mills’ Threaten Progress,” Financial Times, March 28, 2023, sec. The Big Read, https://www.ft.com/content/32440f74-7804-4637-a662-6cdc8f3fba86.
17    Economist Intelligence Unit, “China Boosts State-Led Chip Investment.”
18    Feng Ning, “China’s semiconductor investment has fallen,” eefocus, March 7, 2025, https://scout.eto.tech/?id=4251.
19    The Select Committee on the Chinese Communist Party, “Gallagher, Krishnamoorthi Call for Urgent Action to Reduce US Dependence on PRC Foundational Chips [press release],”,January 8, 2024, http://selectcommitteeontheccp.house.gov/media/press-releases/gallagher-krishnamoorthi-call-urgent-action-reduce-us-dependence-prc.
20    Jeremy Mark, interview with the authors, February 2025.
21    Zhiyan Zixun, “FPGA,” Zhiyan Zixun, February 28, 2024, https://www.chyxx.com/wiki/1175487.html.
22    James K Jackson, “The Committee on Foreign Investment in the United States (CFIUS),” CRS Report PL33388 (Washington, DC: Congressional Reseearch Service, February 26, 2020, https://www.congress.gov/crs-product/RL33388.
23    Committee on Foreign Investment in the United States (CFIUS), “Statement On The President’s Decision Regarding Lattice Semiconductor Corporation,” US Department of the Treasury, September 13, 2017, https://home.treasury.gov/news/press-releases/sm0157.
24    Carrick Flynn and Saif M. Khan, “Multilateral Controls on Hardware Chokepoints,” Policy Brief (Washington, DC: Center for Security and Emerging Technology, September 2020), https://cset.georgetown.edu/publication/multilateral-controls-on-hardware-chokepoints/; Ansgar Baums, “The ‘Chokepoint’ Fallacy of Tech Export Controls,” Stimson Center (blog), February 6, 2024, https://www.stimson.org/2024/the-chokepoint-fallacy-of-tech-export-controls/.
25    Henry Farrell and Abraham L. Newman, “Weaponized Interdependence: How Global Economic Networks Shape State Coercion,” International Security 44, no. 1 (2019): 42–79, https://doi.org/10.1162/isec_a_00351.
26    Baums, “The ‘Chokepoint’ Fallacy;” Ansgar Baums and Nicholas Butts, Tech Cold War: The Geopolitics of Technology, Studies in Technology and Security: Innovation, Impact, and Governance (Boulder, CO: Lynne Rienner Publishers, Inc., 2025); Semiconductor researcher, January 6, 2025; Farrell and Newman, “Weaponized Interdependence;” Henry Farrell and Bruce Schneier, “Common-Knowledge Attacks on Democracy,” SSRN Scholarly Paper (Rochester, NY: Social Science Research Network, October 1, 2018), https://doi.org/10.2139/ssrn.3273111.
27    Martin Sandbu, “The Battle for the Global Payments System Is under Way,” Financial Times, April 6, 2025, sec. Digital currencies, https://www.ft.com/content/40f6e292-839c-4d1f-994e-59bed627b909.
28    Michael E. Porter, Competitive Advantage: Creating and Sustaining Superior Performance (New York : London: Free Press ; Collier Macmillan, 1985); Institute for Manufacturing, “Porter’s Value Chain,” University of Cambridge (blog), accessed January 21, 2025, https://www.ifm.eng.cam.ac.uk/research/dstools/value-chain-/; Antonio Varas et al., “Strengthening the Global Semiconductor Supply Chain in an Uncertain Era” (Semiconductor Industry Association and Boston Consulting Group, April 1, 2021), https://www.semiconductors.org/strengthening-the-global-semiconductor-supply-chain-in-an-uncertain-era/; Emerging Technology Observatory, “Advanced Semiconductor Supply Chain Dataset (2022 Release),” 2022, https://eto.tech/dataset-docs/chipexplorer.
29    Grand View Research, “China Field Programmable Gate Array (FPGA) Market Size & Outlook,” n.d., https://www.grandviewresearch.com/horizon/outlook/field-programmable-gate-array-fpga-market/china. [1] Specialist in Asian politics and economics, interview, February 21, 2025.
30    Specialist in Asian politics and economics, interview, February 21, 2025.
31    US Department of the Interior and US Geological Survey, Mineral Commodity Summaries 2025, last updated March 2025, Ibid., 75, 161, https://pubs.usgs.gov/periodicals/mcs2025/mcs2025.pdf.
32    Seaver Wang, Peter Cook, and Lauren Teixeira, “How Should We Interpret Chinese Critical Mineral Export Restrictions?,” The Breakthrough Institute (blog), accessed January 22, 2025, https://thebreakthrough.org/issues/energy/how-should-we-interpret-chinese-critical-mineral-export-restrictions.
33    Gracelin Baskaran and Meredith Schwartz, “China Imposes its Most Stringent Critical Minerals Export Restrictions Yet Amidst Escalating US-China Tech War,” Critical Questions (CSIS blog), December 4, 2024, https://www.csis.org/analysis/china-imposes-its-most-stringent-critical-minerals-export-restrictions-yet-amidst; Archie Hunter and Mark Burton, “What Are Gallium and Germanium? The Niche Metals Hit by China’s Export Ban,” Bloomberg, December 3, 2024, https://www.bloomberg.com/news/articles/2024-12-03/china-gallium-and-germanium-us-export-ban-why-metals-are-key-in-trade-war.
34    Atlantic Council’s Cyber Statecraft Initiative, private roundtable on the security of the supply chain for specialized semiconductors, February 6, 2025, Zoom.
35    Alison Li, “6 Crucial Steps in Semiconductor Manufacturing,” ASML, October 4, 2023, https://www.asml.com/en/news/stories/2021/semiconductor-manufacturing-process-steps.
36    Raj Varadarajan et al., “Emerging Resilience in the Semiconductor Supply Chain” (Semiconductor Industry Association and Boston Consulting Group, May 2024), https://www.semiconductors.org/wp-content/uploads/2024/05/Report_Emerging-Resilience-in-the-Semiconductor-Supply-Chain.pdf.
37    Stephen Ezell, “How Innovative is China in Semiconductors?,” Information Technology & Innovation Foundation, Hamilton Center on Industrial Strategy, August 2024, https://itif.org/publications/2024/08/19/how-innovative-is-china-in-semiconductors/; Sujai Shivakumar and Chris Borges, “Advanced Packaging and the Future of Moore’s Law,” Critical Questions (CSIS blog), June 26, 2023, https://www.csis.org/analysis/advanced-packaging-and-future-moores-law.
38    Shivakumar and Borges, “Advanced Packaging.”
39    Wu XinZhu, “Where are the investment opportunities in the semiconductor industry chain?,” Sina Finance, June 11, 2024, https://finance.sina.com.cn/wm/2024-06-11/doc-inaykeac8310123.shtml.
40    Jeremy Mark, interview with the authors, February 2025.
41    Also known as Anlu Information Technology.
42    Greg Gao, “Chinese FPGA Star Anlogic Infotech Gets Listed on Shanghai’s STAR Market,” Ijiwei, n.d., https://jw.ijiwei.com/n/799090.
43    Gao, “Chinese FPGA Star.”
44    Shanghai Anlogic Infotech Co., Ltd., “2024 Semiannual Report,”August 27, 2024, https://www.sse.com.cn/disclosure/listedinfo/announcement/c/new/2024-08-29/688107_20240829_UINW.pdf.
45    Gao, “Chinese FPGA Star.”
46    .SEMI, “Gowin Semiconductor secures a significant series B+ funding round of 880 million yuan, embarking on a new journey in domestically-produced FPGA chips,” May 24, 2022, https://www.semi.org.cn/site/semi/article/e21a44a389a64449890c41f129553a6c.html.
47    SEMI.
48    SEMI.
49    Shanghai Fudan Microelectronics Group, “Introduction,” accessed March 27, 2025, https://www.fm-chips.com/shanghai-fudan-microelectronics-group-co-ltd-introduction.html.
50    Shanghai Fudan Microelectronics Group, “Results Announcement for the Year Ended 31 December 2024,” March 26, 2025, https://eng.fmsh.com/UpLoadFile/20250326/e_submission_result.pdf.
51    CIQ Pro, “Ownership Detailed: Shanghai Fudan Microelectronics Group Company Limited (SEHK:1385, SHSE:688385),” accessed April 5, 2025, https://www.capitaliq.spglobal.com/web/client#company/PublicOwnershipDetailed?Id=4968433.
52    Shanghai Fudan Microelectronics Group, “2023 Interim Report,” September 22, 2023, 69, https://eng.fmsh.com/UpLoadFile/20230922/e01385.pdf.
53    Sina Finance, “This year’s most popular Chinese-made FPGA chip,” November 20, 2024, https://finance.sina.com.cn/jjxw/2024-11-20/doc-incwspwu2211604.shtml
54    PitchBook, “PitchBook Profile – Pango Micro,” PitchBook, last updated May 18, 2025, https://my.pitchbook.com/profile/571461-85/company/profile#investors; Unigroup Guoxin Microelectronics Co., Ltd., “2024 Semiannual Report,” August 2024, 131–32, https://q.stock.sohu.com/newpdf/202459387852.pdf.
55    Shenzhen Pango Microsystems Co., Ltd., “Company profile,” accessed March 29, 2025, https://www.pangomicro.com/about/index/.
56    Hercules Microelectronics, “Hercules Microelectronics Company Profile,” accessed March 25, 2025, https://en.hercules-micro.com/index/index/about.
57    Jesse Allen, “Startup Funding: June 2022,” Semiconductor Engineering, July 6, 2022, https://semiengineering.com/startup-funding-june-2022/; CIQ Pro, “Private Ownership: Hercules Microelectronics,” accessed April 6, 2025, https://www.capitaliq.spglobal.com/web/client#company/privateOwnership?id=17514549.
58    Shanghai Anlogic Infotech Co., Ltd., “2021 Annual Report,” April 28, 2022, 32, https://file.finance.sina.com.cn/211.154.219.97:9494/MRGG/CNSESH_STOCK/2022/2022-4/2022-04-28/8127394.PDF.
59    Shanghai Anlogic Infotech Co., Ltd., “2022 Annual Report,” April 25, 2023, 11, https://file.finance.sina.com.cn/211.154.219.97:9494/MRGG/CNSESH_STOCK/2023/2023-4/2023-04-25/9058622.PDF.
60    Shanghai Anlogic Infotech Co., Ltd., 103.
61    Shanghai Anlogic Infotech Co., Ltd., 184.
62    Wei Zhongyuan, “Phase One of the Big Fund announces two share reduction plans; the five-year recovery period is nearing its end,” Shenzhen Securities Times, July 2, 2024, https://www.stcn.com/article/detail/1246114.html.
63    Shanghai Anlogic Infotech Co., Ltd., “2023 Annual Report,” April 27, 2024, 92, https://file.finance.sina.com.cn/211.154.219.97:9494/MRGG/CNSESH_STOCK/2024/2024-4/2024-04-27/10119946.PDF.
64    Shanghai Anlogic Infotech Co., Ltd., 104–5.
65    Shanghai Anlogic Infotech Co., Ltd., “2024 Annual Report,” April 26, 2025, 112–13.

The post Reprogramming the future: The specialized semiconductors reshaping the global supply chain appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>
Marine energy: Harnessing the power of the Atlantic https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/in-depth-research-reports/issue-brief/marine-energy-harnessing-the-power-of-the-atlantic/ Tue, 10 Jun 2025 13:02:39 +0000 https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/?p=851588 In partnership with the Policy Center for the New South, the Atlantic Council’s Africa Center is launching a new series of publications and events dedicated to the power of the Atlantic ocean with an inaugural policy brief on energy and mineral potential.

The post Marine energy: Harnessing the power of the Atlantic appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>
Following a decade-long partnership, the Policy Center for the New South and the Atlantic Council have joined forces around a new program focused on the power of the Atlantic. This series of publications and webinars will focus both on opportunities and challenges around the basin.

This brief, the inaugural of the series, by William Yancey Brown highlights the vast energy and mineral potential of the Atlantic Ocean and how African nations bordering the basin can manage resources responsibly and fairly. It launches against a backdrop that includes World Ocean Day, the 2025 UN Ocean Conference, and the continuing work of the Group of Twenty (under South Africa’s presidency) within the Oceans 20 engagement group.

The Atlantic Ocean is of paramount importance to Africa. The African nations on the ocean’s shore represent 46 percent of the continent’s population, 55 percent of its gross domestic product, and 57 percent its trade. The blue economy is crucial for Africa as the continent’s economies see new changes brought upon by issues related to the maritime energy transition, the port revolution, maritime transport, fishing, and control over exclusive economic zones. African countries have accordingly developed frameworks, through the African Union, for action in the region and declared 2015-2025 the “Decade of Africa’s Seas and Oceans.”

Introduction

The world’s second-largest ocean—the Atlantic, bordering more than thirty nations—is rich with energy and minerals, as well as the marine life and human livelihoods that development impacts. The Atlantic has a well-established oil and gas industry and a rapidly growing offshore wind sector. In addition, nascent sources of energy and minerals exist at the water’s surface (tides, currents, and waves), just below in the temperature differences between ocean layers, and on the seafloor. There are windfarms and oil and gas infrastructure off the coasts of Europe and North America—but the challenge now is how to tap the African Atlantic’s energy potential responsibly and fairly.

Though renewables are the clear best route to reducing greenhouse gases, it can be expected that African nations will continue to develop their offshore oil and gas resources. At the same time, however, wind farming could usefully be tried in some areas along Africa’s Atlantic coast—and to expand the range of renewables available, venture capitalists should also look closely at the potential projects in the works to harness the energy of waves, currents, and the ocean’s thermal energy. Funders, international organizations, and African nations along the Atlantic have several policy options to explore the ocean’s resources in a sustainable way. On the question of mining critical minerals from the deep sea, however, much more research on the seabed environment—and availability of alternative terrestrial sources—is needed.

Nascent ocean energy and mineral resources

The Atlantic Ocean provides a place for energy production facilities that could be located on land or sea, in addition to energy sources derived from the ocean itself. These placements include the world’s first floating nuclear facility and solar power plants offshore of the Netherlands.1 So far, mainland Africa has neither of these, although a floating solar power plant is planned for the Seychelles.2 Ocean locations present a harsh environment for devices and accessibility, and environmental restoration is difficult if accidents occur. On the other hand, ocean placement offers space and distance from human settlements.

Tides and currents. Moving river water made up about 15 percent of global electricity generation in 2023.3Hydropower makes up more than half of electricity generated in the Democratic Republic of Congo, Brazil, and Norway.4 The Atlantic Ocean has its own standing currents and tidal flows, such as the Gulf Stream and the Atlantic Meridional Overturning Circulation, and powerful tides in locations on both coasts of the basin.

Small-scale generating facilities powered by non-tidal, standing ocean currents have been tested in locations including the Gulf Stream offshore of the United States and the Kuroshio Current offshore of Japan, but no commercial-scale facility is operating anywhere yet.5 The greatest potential for non-tidal current power in the African Atlantic is reportedly offshore of South Africa, or perhaps of Guinea-Bissau and Morocco.6

A 240-megawatt (MW) tidal power plant has operated on the Atlantic coast of France since 1966.7 Africa has some much smaller Atlantic tidal plants, but no commercial-scale tidal power generating facilities are operating there and prospects for tidal facilities offshore of Africa’s Atlantic coast are weak.8 Cost is a principal impediment. Environmental impacts are also a concern, but the same is true for well-developed hydropower on land. Despite tepid progress to date for tidal power, new projects are on the books in Europe.9

Waves. Waves offer great potential power for electricity on Atlantic coasts. Wave action on the US Atlantic coast could reportedly provide average power generation of about 18 gigawatts (GW).10 Wave and tidal current energy could potentially meet up to 20 percent of the United Kingdom’s current electricity demand.11 Atlantic Africa has energetic waves in the south offshore of South Africa and, to a lesser extent, Namibia. Senegal, Cabo Verde, and Morocco in the north also have high wave potential.12

Many wave energy test projects have been completed or proposed for the Atlantic in the United States, United Kingdom, and Europe.13 However, only one small wave energy facility offshore of northern Portugal currently provides electricity to the grid.14 Another small grid-linked project off a pier is set to begin operations in 2025 in Los Angeles.15 As for tides and currents, the challenge and cost of maintaining wave energy facilities remains an impediment to significant deployment.

Ocean thermal energy conversion. Tropical seas, including in the Atlantic, have surface waters much warmer than the deep sea. This difference allows devices to circulate water and power turbines through ocean thermal energy conversion (OTEC).16 “Open” versions of the technology can also desalinate seawater. OTEC could theoretically provide about 8 terawatts (TW) of power globally, more than the current global electricity demand.17 However, OTEC has a long history of experimentation without yet providing a commercial operating source of power to the grid.18 This might change with a small 1.5-MW project scheduled to be installed in 2025 offshore of São Tomé and Príncipe.19 There is also potential for floating OTEC along the west coast of continental Africa, with the highest potential reportedly from Guinea to Gabon.20

Methane hydrates. Methane hydrates are ice-like solids in which water traps methane. They occur on ocean continental margins, including offshore of the Americas and Africa, and hold vast amounts of carbon and energy.21 Combined with this promise is the peril of releasing methane from any mining, including through submarine landslides. Japan has taken a special interest in methane hydrates and has conducted experimental projects successfully extracting methane gas.22 No such projects have yet been undertaken in the Atlantic Ocean.

Developed ocean energy and mineral resources

Oil and gas. Under its Stated Policies Scenario (STEPS), the International Energy Agency (IEA) estimates that global oil supply will decrease about 7 percent by 2050 and natural gas production will increase by about 4 percent.23 Offshore production currently comprises roughly 30 percent of global oil supply and 28 percent of global natural gas production.24 Large historical Atlantic-linked sources include the Gulf of Mexico and the North Sea.

Rystad Energy estimates that, in Africa, about 3.5 million barrels of oil equivalent per day (boepd) of new deepwater oil and gas supply will be near final decision or under construction by 2035. Nigeria is the historic hub of West African offshore oil production and expects to raise production from 2 million barrels per day (bpd) to 3 million bpd with an anti-theft initiative.25 The Baleine Field offshore of Cote d’Ivoire and Namibia’s offshore Orange Basin recently began production, and exploration is under way or planned offshore of São Tomé & Principe, Liberia, and Sierra Leone, among other countries.26 Natural gas production began in January 2025 offshore of Senegal and Mauritania and is expected to produce around 2.3 million tons of liquified natural gas (LNG) annually for more than twenty years.27 Brazil’s state-owned oil company Petrobras predicts a ramping up of current offshore production to 3.2 million barrels per day (equivalent; including natural gas) in the next five years, with oil production centered on its “pre-salt” basins.28 Guyana’s Stabroek Block expects to produce 1.3 million bpd of oil by 2027 and holds an estimated 11.6 billion barrels of recoverable oil and significant natural gas.29

Wind energy. Offshore wind energy farms globally provided an estimated 75 GW installed operating capacity as of 2023, about 7.5 percent of the roughly 1,000 GW total installed global wind energy that year.30 Europe and the United Kingdom have historically led offshore wind development, but China is now leading deployment.31

Atlantic Ocean wind farms are currently operating offshore of the United Kingdom, Europe, and the northeastern and mid-Atlantic coast of the United States, with additional farms planned.32 Three commercial offshore wind farms are now operating in the United States, with other US Atlantic projects under construction.33 The US Atlantic projects are driven by coastal state governments that have established targets for renewable energy. However, supply chain issues and costs have led to the cancellation of some proposed projects. Development is also weighed down by the shift from the strong support of the Biden administration to adversity from the Trump administration.34

No wind farms are currently operating offshore of South America or Africa. Planning is under way but in early stages for Brazil, Morocco, and South Africa. Africa has good winds for turbines on the Atlantic coast in the south and northwest.35 Locations on either side of the Cape of Good Hope are being considered in South Africa, with a specific project proposed to the east in Richards Bay.36

Critical minerals in the Atlantic

Critical minerals are generally defined by national laws as minerals that are essential for important industries and vulnerable to supply chain disruption.37

Most critical minerals, including rare earths, are more scarce than rare in terms of the amounts present in geologic features found at many locations around the globe. However, their actual mining and production are constrained, with China producing most critical minerals and Africa a key place for mining. For example, 74 percent of the world’s cobalt is mined in the Democratic Republic of Congo (DRC), under conditions that are both unsafe and undependable.38 Dependable access to critical minerals without overreliance on China is a priority for many Western industries. The United States was a leader in the past but, despite such high interest in critical minerals, global prices for key metals and material fell by about 26 percent in 2023, including a 47-percent decline in cobalt and a 32-percent decline in lithium carbonate.39

Whether these minerals should be mined from the deep seabed beyond national jurisdiction, in addition to land mining, is hotly debated under international law (see below). Polymetallic nodules (PMNs) in the Clarion-Clipperton Zone in the Pacific Ocean, where these nodules are abundant, receive the most attention from industry, governments, and nongovernmental organizations. The International Seabed Authority (ISA) has designated Atlantic Ocean exploration areas for polymetallic sulfides (PMSs) along the mid-Atlantic Ridge and for cobalt-rich ferromanganese crusts (FMCs) in the South Atlantic.40 Little information is publicly available about potentially recoverable amounts and no exploitation has been authorized, but research on the biological communities that could be impacted raises great concerns for environmental impacts.41 The Trump administration stepped outside of the ISA in April 2025 with an executive order promoting seabed mining both on the high seas and the US continental shelf.42 Encouraged by the order, Canada’s The Metals Company has announced that it will apply for permission to mine high-seas PMNs under a US statute,43 despite protests from the ISA,44 and another company, California-based Impossible Metals, has applied to mine PMNs in the US territory of American Samoa.45 The Department of Interior announced on May 20 that it was launching the process for a lease sale there based on that application.46

The environmental framework

The ocean energy sources described above are primarily regulated by the nations to which they are adjacent, either because the resources are located in sedimentary geologic formations of the continental shelf (as in the case of oil) or because proximity to onshore populations facilitates construction and operations and lessens the cost of transmitting electricity (as in the case of wind). Critical mineral exploration and mining are primarily regulated on the continental shelves of nations under national laws and on the high seas by the ISA, which was established under the United Nations Convention on Law of the Sea (UNCLOS).47The United States also has a dated statute for high seas mining, applicable to anyone under US jurisdiction.48

National laws for ocean energy and mineral development vary, and this short paper cannot document their details. But consider US laws for reference. The facilities involved require authorization from the Bureau of Ocean Energy Management (BOEM) under the Outer Continental Shelf Lands Act (OCSLA).49 Authorization begins with leasing, followed by approval of development plans, with environmental review under the National Environmental Policy Act (NEPA).50 NEPA is a procedural statute without ultimate environmental standards. The approvals include conditions, most designed to mitigate environmental impacts, whose authorities come from other US environmental laws. A large offshore wind farm might have one hundred conditions. OCSLA includes standards to minimize environmental harm, but environmental review is given sharper teeth through the Endangered Species Act (ESA) and the Marine Mammal Protection Act (MMPA), which have firm impact tests.51 Noise is a significant concern, and is regulated as “harassment” under the ESA and MMPA. OCSLA also requires lessees to decommission facilities at their expense once a lease ends. All of these regulatory actions are subject to judicial review and many rulings have affected requirements. That said, oil, gas, and wind energy projects have gotten through the approval process and are operating in the United States.

European nations with Atlantic coasts (and the EU itself), South American nations, and some African nations have legal frameworks for environmental review with environmental assessment procedures akin to those of NEPA in the United States. Most lack hard stops such as the ESA and MMPA. Article 6(4) of the EU Habitat Directive approaches these stops, requiring that certain actions with negative environmental impacts can proceed only if carried out for “imperative reasons of overriding public interest” and with compensatory measures.52 The International Offshore Petroleum Environmental Regulators (IOPER) provides a venue for cooperation on oil and gas environmental regulation in the Atlantic and elsewhere but does not currently include any African nation agency.53

The ISA has issued final rules for deep seabed prospecting and exploration in the area beyond national jurisdiction and draft rules for exploitation.54 Both rules prohibit activities in the international area that would cause “serious harm” and define this to be any effect from activities on the marine environment that represents a “significant adverse change in the marine environment.” Both final and draft regulations also require a “precautionary approach.”55

Marine protected areas (MPAs) are another key environmental safeguard. Some have already been designated in the Atlantic in the exclusive economic zones (EEZs) of coastal nations.56 MPAs provide environmental protection that complements mitigation measures for activities in areas that are being developed.57

All of these environmental policies rest on the foundational need to address climate change. The Atlantic Ocean is an important sink for carbon dioxide through direct absorption and sequestration by sea life. It is also the object of impacts such as sea level rise, higher temperatures, acidification, and potential disruption of the major currents.

Policy recommendations

Each ocean energy and mineral resource described above sits within a framework of cost competitiveness, scale, required environmental protection, and governance stability.

Recommendation: Waves, currents, and OETC

Waves, currents, and OETC have potentially great scale. In theory, each could meet large shares of Atlantic Ocean coastal electricity demand. However, none of the three has gone viral, constrained by the costs and challenges of operations and maintenance. All three nevertheless warrant continued investment in projects and research.

  • Venture capital firms concerned with energy and relevant government agencies should consider funding new projects for wave, current, and OETC technologies, with a particular view for projects supplying power to island populations of Atlantic southern African nations.

Recommendation: Methane hydrates

Methane hydrates also have potentially great scale but are challenged by the risk of accidental releases in development, production of greenhouse gases, local environmental impacts, and the abundance of natural gas from alternative current sources.

  • Japan has led work investigating methane hydrates on its continental shelf. It should continue these efforts and seek collaborative research partnerships with other nations.

Recommendations: Oil and gas

Oil and gas production sits in a maelstrom of analysis and often angry commentary. Science allows no sound doubt that Earth’s surface is warming because of anthropogenic fossil fuel emissions. Furthermore, it is apparent that governmental policies to date have not solved the problem. Performance has taken a back seat to aspiration. Post-combustion technologies such as engineered or natural sequestration by biota, direct removal from the air, and atmospheric additives such as aerosols are only partial solutions.

Fair play is another consideration for oil and gas offshore of West Africa and Guyana. The economies of wealthier nations historically benefited from fossil fuels. Many less wealthy nations, including those in Africa, missed out and are seeking funding to address climate impacts. They do not want to be told not to develop their own offshore oil and gas resources—particularly as production continues in wealthy countries such as the United States, United Kingdom, and Norway—and wealthy nations are unlikely to provide funding anywhere near the levels developing nations request. African nations can be expected to move forward with developing their major Atlantic offshore reserves, as they are now doing in conjunction with major companies. Better use of fossil fuels, such as prevention of methane leakage and priority for natural gas over coal or oil for electricity will help address climate impacts. However, the single best available avenue for reducing greenhouse gas emissions appears to be replacing fossil fuels with renewable energy, including solar, wind, and nuclear facilities on land in addition to renewable ocean energy.

Potential conflict and corruption are also obvious challenges hitchhiking on the road to wealth from offshore oil and gas resources for West Africa and Guyana. Unless both can be dealt with effectively, fair play in wealth allocation will be a mirage. Where US companies are involved, it does not help that the current administration has said it would not enforce the US Foreign Corrupt Practices Act or consider the social cost of carbon in decision-making as previous administrations did.

Atlantic African nations should:

  • In cooperation with other agencies and institutions, prioritize renewable and nuclear energy development to mitigate climate change by replacing fossil fuels.
  • Include a quantified measure of the social cost of carbon in regulatory decision-making.
  • Maintain transparent and independently audited programs for government revenue collection and expenditure, including sovereign wealth funds, and explicitly require multinational firms subject to US jurisdiction to comply with the Foreign Corrupt Practices Act.
  • Work with other Atlantic nations to establish and maintain what could be known as a “Pan-Atlantic Blue Ring” of coastal, island, and marine conservation areas, building on existing conservation areas, with a dual purpose of climate reliance and biodiversity conservation for its own sake.

Recommendation: Offshore wind

Offshore wind is not a pipeline for sovereign wealth, but it can mitigate greenhouse gas emissions by replacing fossil fuels. It can be cost competitive with other energy sources in some locations and has scale—in the neighborhood of 1–2 GW capacity for larger projects in the United States. Its status going forward in the United States is uncertain given the critical stance of the current administration, preexisting complications in regulatory approvals, supply chain problems, and possible overenthusiasm on finances. Some US Atlantic projects are operating or close to that and are likely to provide planned electricity over the twenty-five- to thirty-year terms of their leases. Some other leases without approved project plans might ultimately culminate in operating projects. In the long term, offshore wind is an experiment with a reasonable probability of a good result. Nations other than the United States are more supportive, such as the EU nations and China. Atlantic coastal Africa has the wind needed in the south and northwest and could usefully try it out. Whether leases will be renewed at the end of their first life is a question. Investors have generally presumed they will be, but the answer will be informed by the costs of competing energy sources, including solar and nuclear facilities on land.

  • Atlantic African nations in the south and northwest with good winds should establish potential lease areas for wind farms through a public review process that examines needs for economic viability, full-scale review of environmental impacts, and deconflicting of impediments generally. Public auctions for leases should be held once potential lease areas are established, to confirm whether companies have an appetite for projects. If they do, projects should be advanced.

Recommendations: Critical minerals

Critical minerals are a proper priority for nations whose industries and national securities depend on them. The United States and others are concerned that China dominates production. However, addressing this calls for a scalpel, not a hammer. Each mineral has its own value, sources, potential replacements, recyclability, and location in the marketplace. The price for some, such as cobalt, has fallen in the past two years.58 Furthermore, the economics and environmental impact of deep seabed mining should be compared with mining on land. Terrestrial mining can decimate mining sites and areas along the roads to them. But the ecology of terrestrial areas can be reasonably well described and impacts from mining mitigated. Also, restoration after project completion is much easier where people can walk and breathe and vehicles can drive. Recent research indicates that even larger species in the deep sea are mostly not yet described.59 Furthermore, restoration is either conceptually impossible (if the material removed is habitat) or technically infeasible. Fundamentally, the environmental standard for mining under the high seas is to prevent serious harm. No experienced and objective environmental regulator could conclude that the standard is met by the technologies currently available.60

  • Before supporting approval of any deep sea critical mineral mining on the high seas or in their offshore national jurisdictions, Atlantic nations should advance research on the deep seabed environment, including species and ecology, and on the availability of terrestrial sources.

Additional recommendations: Artificial intelligence

Finally, many companies and researchers working on generative artificial intelligence (AI) believe that artificial general intelligence (AGI) that matches highly skilled human intelligence will be available in the next several years. Generative AI agents already exist that perform tasks as though they were humans, and they get better every day. Robots are also in the works. These advances in generative AI will touch everything in human society, including sustainable energy and mineral production in the Atlantic Ocean basin.61 AGI will likely be able to perform much analysis and procedure, improving the speed, and possibly the accuracy, of reviews. Despite model biases, generative AGI might offer the potential for less biased or corrupt decisions when it comes to selecting operators or siting energy projects.

Just as important, however, the people who now earn a living doing things related to sustainable energy and minerals will need help if AGI agents do the work in the future. The sooner these efforts start, the better.

  • The larger companies with leading generative AI models should continue to provide or initiate support for institutions in Atlantic Africa for training and access to the best models they are making available.62
  • Community leaders in African towns and villages likely to be affected by Atlantic energy and mineral development should form stakeholder teams to engage with developers. The teams should include at least one individual with access to a leading AI large language model (LLM) and experience in prompting it so that the model itself can participate in discussions about community benefit from development and potential harm to employment from AI.

Related content

In partnership with

Explore the program

The Africa Center works to promote dynamic geopolitical partnerships with African states and to redirect US and European policy priorities toward strengthening security and bolstering economic growth and prosperity on the continent.

1    The Akademik Lomonosov 70-MW nuclear facility provides electricity and heat to the town of Pevek in the Chukotka region of Russia. “Akademik Lomonosov Floating Nuclear Co-generation Plant,” Power Technology, May 24, 2021, https://www.power-technology.com/projects/akademik-lomonosov-nuclear-co-generation-russia. Oceans of Energy, a Dutch company, has established solar power plants in the North Sea offshore of the Netherlands beginning in 2019 in areas with high waves, and has big plans for expansion. “Home,” Oceans of Energy, last visited April 21, 2025, https://oceansofenergy.blue/.
2    The French energy company Qair announced in 2023 that it would build and operate a 5.8-MW floating solar plant in the Seychelles. “Qair Signs 5.8-MWp Floating Solar PPA in Seychelles,” Renewable Now, April 4, 2023, https://renewablesnow.com/news/qair-signs-5-8-mwp-floating-solar-ppa-in-seychelles-819459/.
3    “International: Electricity,” US Energy Information Administration, last visited April 21, 2025, https://www.eia.gov/international/data/world/electricity/electricity-generation.
4    “Congo-Kinshasa: Electricity,” US Energy Information Administration, last visited April 21, 2025, https://www.eia.gov/international/data/country/COD/electricity/electricity-generation; “Brazil: Electricity,” US Energy Information Administration, last visited April 21, 2025, https://www.eia.gov/international/analysis/country/BRA; “Norway: Electricity,” US Energy Information Administration, last visited April 21, 2025, https://www.eia.gov/international/data/country/NOR/electricity/electricity-generation.
5     “Hydrokinetic Clean Energy Harnessed from Florida’s Gulf Stream in Historic OceanBased Perpetual Energy Demo,” Business Wire, press release, May 28, 2020, https://www.businesswire.com/news/home/20200528005381/en/Hydrokinetic-Clean-Energy-Harnessed-From-Floridas-Gulf-Stream-In-Historic-OceanBased-Perpetual-Energy-Demo; Dodo Yasushi and Ochi Fumitoshi, “Demonstration Test of Ocean Current Turbine System for Reliability and Economic Performance Evaluation,” IHI, October 2023, https://www.ihi.co.jp/en/technology/techinfo/contents_no/__icsFiles/afieldfile/2023/10/31/Vol56No2_09.pdf.
6    “Assessing the Potential of Offshore Renewable Energy in Africa,” 36–40.
7    The Rance tidal power station was the world’s first large-scale tidal power plant. “La Rance Tidal Barrage,” Tethys, last visited April 21, 2025, https://tethys.pnnl.gov/project-sites/la-rance-tidal-barrage. The world’s largest tidal power station, with 254 MW installed capacity, is in South Korea. Eun Soo Park and Tai Sik Lee, “The Rebirth and Eco-Friendly Energy Production of an Artificial Lake: A Case Study on the Tidal Power in South Korea, Energy Reports 7 (2021), https://www.sciencedirect.com/science/article/pii/S2352484721004698#b19.
8    “Assessing the Potential of Offshore Renewable Energy in Africa,” 36–40.
9    For example, the European Union decided to invest 31.3 million euros in a new 5-MW installed capacity tidal power facility on the French Atlantic coast, which is expected to deliver 34 megawatt hours (MWh) of electricity to the French grid by 2028. Jijo Malayil, “World’s Most Powerful Underwater Tide-Riding Turbines to Power 15,000 Homes Annually,” Interesting Engineering, March 2025, https://interestingengineering.com/energy/underwater-tide-riding-turbines-project-funding-boost.
10    The Electric Power Research Institute (EPRI) estimates “total recoverable wave energy” of 160 terawatt hours per year (TWh/yr), which equates to average power generation of just above 18 gigawatts (GWs). “Mapping and Assessment of the United States Ocean Wave Resource,” Electric Power Research Institute, December 2011, https://www1.eere.energy.gov/water/pdfs/mappingandassessment.pdf#:~:text=For%20devices%20with%20a%20100-fold%20operating%20range,as%20follows:%20250%20TWh/yr%20for%20the%20West.
11    This means it could represent 30 to 50 gigawatts of (GW) installed capacity. “Wave and Tidal Energy: Part of the UK’s Energy Mix,” Government of the United Kingdom, January 22, 2013, https://www.gov.uk/guidance/wave-and-tidal-energy-part-of-the-uks-energy-mix?utm_source=chatgpt.com.
12    “Assessing the Potential of Offshore Renewable Energy in Africa,” 30–32.
13    This is accessible through a global database for wave energy projects named PRIMRE, which is kept by several of the US National Laboratories under the Department of Energy. “Marine Energy Projects,” PRIMRE, last visited April 21, 2025, https://openei.org/wiki/PRIMRE/Databases/Projects_Database/Projects.
14    The facility relies on four buoys that move with wave action. Amir Garanovic, “CorPower Ocean’s Wave Energy Device Starts Exporting Power to Portugal’s Grid,” Offshore Energy, October 13, 2023, https://www.offshore-energy.biz/corpower-oceans-wave-energy-device-starts-exporting-power-to-portugals-grid/.
15    “Port of LA Pilot Project,” Eco Wave Power, last visited April 21, 2025, https://www.ecowavepower.com/port-of-la.
16    For example, with a closed-cycle OTEC device, warm surface water is pumped through a contained working fluid with a low boiling point, like ammonia. The fluid evaporates and forms a pressurized vapor that drives a turbine connected to a generator and produces electricity. After passing through the turbine, the vapor moves to a condenser, where it’s cooled by the cold water pumped from the deep sea. The water condenses to a liquid and the cycle repeats.
17    “White Paper on OTEC,” Ocean Energy Systems, October 18, 2021, 8, https://www.ocean-energy-systems.org/publications/oes-position-papers/document/white-paper-on-otec/.
18    Ibid., 12.
19    Sonal Patel, “OTEC, a Long-Stalled Baseload Ocean Power Technology, Is Seeing a Swell,” Power, June 1, 2023, https://www.powermag.com/otec-a-long-stalled-baseload-ocean-power-technology-is-seeing-a-swell.
20    “Assessing the Potential of Offshore Renewable Energy in Africa,” 41–42.
21    Methane hydrates are estimated to contain from 100,000 to almost 300,000,000 trillion cubic feet (TCF) of natural gas (twice the amount of carbon contained in all fossil fuels on Earth, including coal), with energy value estimates from 60,000 exajoules (EJ) to 800,000 EJ. For context, the International Energy Agency estimated total global energy supply for 2023 to be 642 EJ, or from about 1 percent to 0.01 percent of the total energy thought to be contained in methane hydrates. “Natural Gas Hydrates—Vast Resource, Uncertain Future,” US Geological Survey, last visited April 21, 2025, https://pubs.usgs.gov/fs/fs021-01/fs021-01.pdf; “Climate Change 2007: Working Group III: Mitigation of Climate Change,” Intergovernmental Panel on Climate Change, 2007, https://archive.ipcc.ch/publications_and_data/ar4/wg3/en/ch4s4-3-1-2.html; “World Energy Outlook,” International Energy Agency, October 2024, 296, https://www.iea.org/reports/world-energy-outlook-2024.
22    “Methane Hydrate,” Japan Petroleum Exploration Company, Ltd., last visited April 21, 2025, https://www.japex.co.jp/en/technology/research/mh/.
23    World Energy Outlook 2024 evaluates two other scenarios: Announced Pledges Scenario (APS) and Net Zero Emissions by 2050 (NZE). Given current national policies concerning climate change, particularly those of the United States, the STEPS scenario appears, to the author, to be the most reasonable assumption of these three—and perhaps optimistic. Oil supply is expected to increase until 2030 and then settle to 93 mbd in 2050. “World Energy Outlook,” 137. For natural gas and STEPS, the IEA estimates that 2023 production was 4,218 billion cubic meters (bcm), will increase until 2030, and will then settle to 4,377 bcm in 2050. “World Energy Outlook,” 144.
24    “Offshore Production Nearly 30% of Global Crude Oil Output in 2015,” US Energy Information Administration, October 25, 2016, https://www.eia.gov/todayinenergy/detail.php?id=28492; “Distribution of Onshore and Offshore Crude Oil Production Worldwide from 2005 to 2025,” Statista, last visited April 21, 2025, https://www.statista.com/statistics/624138/distribution-of-crude-oil-production-worldwide-onshore-and-offshore/; “Production of Natural Gas Worldwide in 2022 with a Forecast for 2030 to 2050, by Project Location,” Statista, last visited April 21, 2025, https://www.statista.com/statistics/1365007/natural-gas-production-by-project-location-worldwide/.
25    Camillus Eboh, “Nigeria Steps Up Crackdown on Oil Theft as It Targets 3 million Bpd Production,” Reuters, December 31, 2024, https://www.reuters.com/business/energy/nigeria-steps-up-crackdown-oil-theft-it-targets-3-million-bpd-production-2024-12-31.
26    Pranav Joshi, “Africa’s Deepwater Boom: A Critical Source of New Energy Supply in the Decade to Come,” Rystad Energy, October 31, 2024, https://www.rystadenergy.com/insights/africa-s-deepwater-boom-a-critical-source-of-new-supply-in-the-decade-to-come.
27    BP and partners Greater Tortue Ahmeyim project this number based on a 2014 discovery of 120 trillion cubic feet of natural gas across the two countries. “BP Achieves First Gas at Major West Africa Offshore Project,” Maritime Executive, January 2, 2025, https://maritime-executive.com/article/bp-achieves-first-gas-at-major-west-africa-offshore-project.
28    Mariana Durao, “Petrobras Outlines Five-Year Plan to Exceed $100 Billion Spend on E&P Projects,” Bloomberg, November 18, 2024, https://worldoil.com/news/2024/11/18/petrobras-outlines-five-year-plan-to-exceed-100-billion-spend-on-e-p-projects/; Guilherme Estrella, “Pre-Salt Production Development in Brazil,” 20th World Petroleum Congress, May 2021, https://firstforum.org/wp-content/uploads/2021/05/Publication_00593.pdf.
29    “Guyana Project Overview,” ExxonMobil, last visited April 21, 2025, https://corporate.exxonmobil.com/locations/guyana/guyana-project-overview; “500 Million Barrels of Oil Produced from Guyana’s Stabroek Block,” ExxonMobil, last visited April 21, 2025, https://corporate.exxonmobil.com/locations/guyana/news-releases/11132024_500-million-barrels-of-oil-produced-from-guyanas-stabroek-block.
30    “Global Wind Report 2024,” Global Wind Energy Council, 2024, 14–15, https://26973329.fs1.hubspotusercontent-eu1.net/hubfs/26973329/2.%20Reports/Global%20Wind%20Report/GWR24.pdf.
31    China had installed capacity of about 38 GW as of 2023 and expects to add 65 percent of 19 GW additional new global installed capacity in 2025. Petra Manuel and Kartik Selvaraju, “Global Offshore Wind Poised for Landmark 19 GW of Additions in 2025,” Rystad Energy, March 3, 2025, https://www.rystadenergy.com/news/global-offshore-wind-landmark-19gw.
32    “4C Offshore,” TGS, last visited April 21, 2025, https://map.4coffshore.com/offshorewind/.
33    The three operating farms are the Block Island facility (in Rhode Island state waters), South Fork Wind, and Vineyard Wind (temporarily paused to fix blades after one broke). This includes the Coastal Virginia Offshore Wind (CVOW) project offshore of Virginia and the largest single wind farm in the works for the United States, with 2.6 GW installed capacity planned. “Delivering Wind Power,” Dominion Energy, last visited April 21, 2025, https://coastalvawind.com/about-offshore-wind/delivering-wind-power.aspx.
34    “Orsted Ceases Development of Ocean Wind 1 and Ocean Wind 2 and Takes Final Investment Decision on Revolution Wind,” Orsted, October 31, 2023, https://us.orsted.com/news-archive/2023/10/orsted-ceases-development-of-ocean-wind-1-and-ocean-wind-2; “Temporary Withdrawal of All Areas on the Outer Continental Shelf From Offshore Wind Leasing and Review of the Federal Government’s Leasing and Permitting Practices for Wind Projects,” Federal Register 90, 18 (2025), https://www.govinfo.gov/content/pkg/FR-2025-01-29/pdf/2025-01966.pdf.
35    “Assessing the Potential of Offshore Renewable Energy in Africa,” 44–45.
36    “Proposed Gagasi Offshore Floating Wind Farm Near Richards Bay, KwaZulu-Natal, South Africa,” Mybroadband, December 2024, https://mybroadband.co.za/news/wp-content/uploads/2024/12/Annexure-1-Gagasi-BID-2024.pdf.
37    The United States currently considers fifty minerals to be critical, forty-seven of which are chemical elements. “2022 Final List of Critical Minerals,” US Geological Survey, February 24, 2022, https://www.federalregister.gov/documents/2022/02/24/2022-04027/2022-final-list-of-critical-minerals. Sand, although not considered critical and relegated to a footnote in this short paper, is the principal non-energy mineral quarried offshore of Atlantic coasts. The US Bureau of Ocean Energy Management (BOEM), for example, is actively inventorying sand on the US continental shelf and, often in tandem with the US Army Corps of Engineers, identifying sand that is collected under requirements to minimize environmental impacts. The sand is conveyed to shore for beach replenishment or for island nature preserves. The amount is huge: since its sand program began in the mid-1990s, BOEM and partners have moved 193 million cubic yards of sand for restoring 481 miles of coastline in eight states. “5 Things to Know About the BOEM Marine Minerals Program,” BOEM, LinkedIn, November 16, 2023, https://www.linkedin.com/pulse/5-things-know-boem-marine-minerals-program-46brc/. Sand quarry programs elsewhere on Atlantic coasts are less institutionalized, although French Guyana in South America has inventoried offshore sand for potential harvesting. “Exploring the Potential for Sea Sand Resources on French Guiana’s Continental Shelf,” Bureau de Recherches Geologiques, September 8, 2024, https://www.brgm.fr/en/reference-completed-project/exploring-potential-sea-sand-resources-french-guiana-continental-shelf.
38    “Cobalt,” US Geological Survey, 2024, https://pubs.usgs.gov/periodicals/mcs2024/mcs2024-cobalt.pdf; “Democratic Republic of Congo: Government Must Deliver on Pledge to End Child Mining Labour by 2025,” Amnesty International, September 1, 2017, https://www.amnesty.org/en/latest/news/2017/09/democratic-republic-of-congo-government-must-deliver-on-pledge-to-end-child-mining-labour-by-2025/.
39    The California Mountain Pass mine produced most of the world’s rare earth elements between 1965 and 1995 before production declined, in part because of competition from China. The mine has been reopened, but special attention is needed to appreciate why the marketplace for it failed. Stephen B. Castor, “Rare Earth Deposits of North America,” Resource Geology, November 2, 2008, https://onlinelibrary.wiley.com/doi/10.1111/j.1751-3928.2008.00068.x; “2023 Key Highlights,” Energy Institute, last visited April 21, 2025, https://www.energyinst.org/statistical-review/insights-by-source.
40    “Minerals: Polymetallic Sulphides,” International Seabed Authority, last visited April 21, 2025, https://www.isa.org.jm/exploration-contracts/polymetallic-sulphides/; “Mid Atlantic Ridge,” International Seabed Authority, last visited April 21, 2025, https://www.isa.org.jm/maps/mid-atlantic-ridge/; “Minerals: Cobalt-Rich Ferromanganese Crusts,” International Seabed Authority, last visited April 21, 2025, https://www.isa.org.jm/exploration-contracts/cobalt-rich-ferromanganese-crusts/. The ISA has issued three fifteen-year contracts for Atlantic PMS exploration under the aegis of Russia, France, and Poland. One contract for ferromanganese crusts sponsored by Brazil was issued but was voluntarily terminated in 2022.
41    See, for example: Eva Paulis, “Shedding Light on Deep-Sea Biodiversity—A Highly Vulnerable Habitat in the Face of Anthropogenic Change,” Frontiers in Marine Science, 2021, https://www.frontiersin.org/journals/marine-science/articles/10.3389/fmars.2021.667048/full.
42    Unleashing America’s Offshore Critical Minerals and Resources. Executive Order 14285. April 24, 2025. 90 FR 17735. https://www.federalregister.gov/documents/2025/04/29/2025-07470/unleashing-americas-offshore-critical-minerals-and-resources.
43    “The Metals Company to Apply for Permits under Existing U.S. Mining Code for Deep-Sea Minerals in the High Seas in Second Quarter of 2025,” The Metals Company, March 27, 2025; https://investors.metals.co/news-releases/news-release-details/metals-company-apply-permits-under-existing-us-mining-code-deep
44    Eric Lipton, “Trump-Era Pivot on Seabed Mining Draws Global Rebuke,” New York Times, March 30, 2025. https://www.nytimes.com/2025/03/30/us/politics/trump-mining-metals-company.html.
45    “Impossible Metals Applies for Deep Sea Mining Lease in U.S. Federal Waters,” April 15, 2025. https://impossiblemetals.com/blog/impossible-metals-applies-for-deep-sea-mining-lease-in-u-s-federal-waters/
46    “Interior Launches Process for Potential Offshore Mineral Lease Sale Near American Samoa,” US Department of the Interior, May 20, 2025. https://www.doi.gov/pressreleases/interior-launches-process-potential-offshore-mineral-lease-sale-near-american-samoa.
47    “About ISA,” International Seabed Authority, last accessed April 21, 2025, https://www.isa.org.jm/about-isa/; “United Nations Convention on the Law of the Sea,” United Nations, December 10, 1982, https://www.un.org/Depts/los/convention_agreements/texts/unclos/UNCLOS-TOC.htm.
48    “30 U.S. Code §1401—Congressional Findings and Declaration of Purpose,” Legal Information Institute, Cornell Law School, last visited April 21, 2025, https://www.law.cornell.edu/uscode/text/30/1401.
49    “43 U.S. Code Chapter 29 Subchapter III—Outer Continental Shelf Lands,” Legal Information Institute, Cornell Law School, last visited April 21, 2025, https://www.law.cornell.edu/uscode/text/43/chapter-29/subchapter-III.
50    “National Environmental Policy Act of 1969,” GovInfo, 1969, https://www.govinfo.gov/content/pkg/COMPS-10352/pdf/COMPS-10352.pdf.
51    Federal agencies must avoid “jeopardizing” the survival of listed species or causing adverse impacts to “critical habitat” under Section 7 of the ESA, and actions of regulated persons can have only “negligible adverse impact” on any marine mammal under Section 101(a)(5) of the MMPA. “Endangered Species Act,” US Fish and Wildlife Service, last visited April 21, 2025, https://www.fws.gov/laws/endangered-species-act/section-7; “Marine Mammal Protection Act,” NOAA Fisheries, last visited April 21, 2025, https://www.fisheries.noaa.gov/national/marine-mammal-protection/marine-mammal-protection-act.
52    “Council Directive 92/43/EEC of 21 May 1992 on the Conservation of Natural Habitats and of Wild Fauna and Flora,” European Union, EUR-Lex, last visited April 21, 2025, https://eur-lex.europa.eu/legal-content/EN/TXT/?uri=CELEX:31992L0043.
53    “Member Country Contacts and Profiles,” International Offshore Petroleum Environmental Regulators, last visited April 21, 2025, https://www.ioper.org/member-profiles/.
54    The ISA prospecting and exploration rules define “serious harm” in: “Consolidated Regulations and Recommendations on Prospecting and Exploration,” International Seabed Authority, 2015, 4, https://www.isa.org.jm/wp-content/uploads/2022/11/en-rev-2015.pdf; “Draft Regulations on Exploitation of Mineral Resources in the Area,” International Seabed Authority, March 22, 2019, 117, https://www.isa.org.jm/wp-content/uploads/2022/06/isba_25_c_wp1-e_0.pdf. The ISA has developed an environmental management process, including environmental impact assessments (EIAs) to facilitate the identification, assessment, and mitigation of harmful effects of mining projects. But, like NEPA in the United States, the process is procedural and does not in itself answer the question: How much impact is too much?
55    “Report of the United Nations Conference on Environment and Development,” UN General Assembly, August 12, 1992, https://www.un.org/en/development/desa/population/migration/generalassembly/docs/globalcompact/A_CONF.151_26_Vol.I_Declaration.pdf; ISBA/25/C/WP.1 (2019) Part I. Regulation 2 (e)(ii). Page 10; ISBA/19/C/17 (2016). Regulation 31.2, page 20.
56    “Marine Protection Atlas,” Marine Conservation Institute, last visited April 21, 2025, https://mpatlas.org/countries/.
57    A new UNCLOS protocol, not yet in force, on the conservation and sustainable use of marine biological diversity of areas beyond national jurisdiction provides a mechanism for international cooperation on biodiversity conservation on the high seas. “Law of the Sea,” UN Treaty Collection, last visited April 21, 2025, Chapter XXI, https://treaties.un.org/pages/ViewDetails.aspx?src=TREATY&mtdsg_no=XXI-10&chapter=21&clang=_en.
58    One mine—Mountain Pass in California—was the world’s leading producer of certain critical elements before it closed for lack of profitability. It reopened recently with help from the US government, but those seeking more production of these minerals in the United States and elsewhere need to look at the mineral-specific situations in the face and understand why the marketplace led to Chinese dominance.
59    Muriel Rabone, et al., “How Many Metazoan Species Live in the World’s Largest Mineral Exploration Region?” Current Biology 33, 12 (2023), https://www.cell.com/current-biology/fulltext/S0960-9822(23)00534-1#fig3.
60    Neither would deep sea mining meet the similar environmental standards of the Deep Seabed Hard Mineral Resources Act (DSHMRA), which are applicable to high seas mining by any entities under US jurisdiction, or of OCSLA, which are applicable to anyone proposing to mine on the US outer continental shelf.
61    Dario Amodei, “Machines of Loving Grace,” DarioAmodei.com, October 2024, https://www.darioamodei.com/essay/machines-of-loving-grace.
62    These models include Gemini, Copilot, Chat GPT, Claude, Perplexity, Mistral, and DeepSeek, among others.

The post Marine energy: Harnessing the power of the Atlantic appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>
Why Congress must reauthorize the US Development Finance Corporation https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/in-depth-research-reports/issue-brief/why-congress-must-reauthorize-the-us-development-finance-corporation/ Mon, 09 Jun 2025 18:50:44 +0000 https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/?p=852209 Congress has an opportunity to give the United States tools to create jobs at home and strengthen ties overseas. Updating the Development Finance Corporation and reauthorizing it before the October deadline are the first steps.

The post Why Congress must reauthorize the US Development Finance Corporation appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>

Reauthorizing the DFC is vital to ensuring the United States is not outcompeted by China in its hemisphere. It is essential for supporting US jobs, creating markets for US exports, advancing energy independence, and linking foreign policy outcomes directly to economic benefits for American workers. Congress must act decisively to secure America’s economic interests and leadership in the Western Hemisphere.

How to update the DFC to further advance US foreign policy priorities in Latin America and the Caribbean

Created in 2018 under the BUILD Act, the DFC merged the Overseas Private Investment Corporation (OPIC) with USAID’s Development Credit Authority. This restructuring introduced a more agile and powerful tool for advancing US development objectives while strategically countering rivals, especially China.

As Congress prepares to revisit the DFC’s authorizing legislation, it should prioritize ensuring that the agency can effectively mobilize private capital for high-impact investments in infrastructure, minerals, energy, technology, and healthcare. These sectors are essential to strengthening the United States domestically—a key criterion set by the current administration for all agencies pursuing foreign policy initiatives. For example, investments in rare earth mineral exploration in the region not only secure preferential access for the US to the resource but can also generate US jobs in areas such as classification, storage, distribution, and processing.

The DFC must also reposition itself with enhanced tools, such as capital financing and technical assistance, so it can lead strategic investments. These investments should prioritize relocating supply chains for critical minerals, semiconductors, pharmaceutical inputs, and digital connectivity throughout Latin America and the Caribbean. Strengthening strategic alliances with like-minded countries and the private sector is essential to expand the DFC’s role in sectors vital to US economic and national security.

Key takeaways:

  • Strategic alignment: The US International Development Finance Corporation (DFC) is a crucial agency for advancing US foreign policy objectives, promoting job creation and development, fostering economic partnerships, and supporting strategic allies. It aligns with forward-looking initiatives from the Trump administration, such as América Crece 2.0, which emphasizes private-sector-led growth. But DFC’s first reauthorization provides a unique window for updates to enhance effectiveness and alignment with US foreign policy priorities. Congress has until October to approve a reauthorization bill, but the decreasing availability of funds presents an urgency for approval.
  • Geopolitical competition: The DFC can and should act as a strategic counter to the rising global competition for influence across the world, and particularly, in many of the developing nations that have continued to join China’s Belt and Road Initiative. The DFC offers a transparent, market-based alternative to opaque, state-driven financing models that come with political strings attached.
  • Economic security: By investing in critical infrastructure and critical rare earth minerals, cybersecurity, energy, and healthcare in Latin America and the Caribbean (LAC), the DFC can enhance US economic security by strengthening alliances with like-minded countries to serve as a counterweight to aggressive Chinese actions that seek to dominate key sectors for the US economy and US supply chains while reinforcing the value of US-led investment.

View the full report

Related content

Explore the program

The Adrienne Arsht Latin America Center broadens understanding of regional transformations and delivers constructive, results-oriented solutions to inform how the public and private sectors can advance hemispheric prosperity.

The post Why Congress must reauthorize the US Development Finance Corporation appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>
How Japanese economic statecraft has shifted from promotion to protection https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/in-depth-research-reports/issue-brief/how-japanese-economic-statecraft-has-shifted-from-promotion-to-protection/ Fri, 06 Jun 2025 17:04:20 +0000 https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/?p=851835 Japan is in a geopolitically challenging neighborhood and is witnessing the basic tenets of its foreign policy—from alignment with the United States to fostering a rules-based environment—come under unprecedented stress.

The post How Japanese economic statecraft has shifted from promotion to protection appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>
Is Japan ahead of the curve or playing catch-up on economic statecraft?

A vague “Japanese model” comes up in many conversations about industrial strategy in the United States. It is common knowledge that, in the second half of the twentieth century, Japan found new export destinations for its industrial output while working its way up the manufacturing value chain. Japan’s powerful (though now defunct) Ministry of International Trade and Industry (MITI) almost always receives credit for managing this success. In short, the casual evaluator of economic security policies might answer that Japan has known what it is doing for longer than the United States.

Self-critical Japanese specialists would find such a portrait saccharine and outdated.

From the 1970s onward, Japan gradually opened its current account and its economy to investment. By the 1980s, when US public opinion was turning against Japanese imports, MITI’s power had already greatly diminished. Alongside the rest of the Japanese government and the Bank of Japan, it struggled to recreate favorable conditions during the lost decade that started in the early 1990s. There has since been increasing alarm regarding China’s rise and its many consequences for the Japanese economy, including Japan’s dependence on Chinese imports and investment.

While these concerns had been building for some time, the spark that started a legislative bureaucratic overhaul to extend the government’s authority and centralize the chain of command came during the second term of late Prime Minister Shinzo Abe, from 2012–2020.

The outbreak of the COVID-19 pandemic and the subsequent weaponization of supply chains made Abe’s decisions seem remarkably prescient. Yet the world has changed even faster than he might have expected. Japan has built new policies and teams to deal with economic threats wrought by China and Russia, but these were designed to work in conjunction with partners, primarily the United States. Though suspended, President Donald Trump’s “liberation day” 31-percent reciprocal tariff on Japan casts doubt on whether Washington still considers Japan the United States’ closest partner in Asia.

Japan finds itself in a predicament remarkably similar to that of other US partners. But unlike the European Union, it is wary of threatening to deploy its economic statecraft policies against the United States. Instead, following in Abe’s footsteps, it hopes to rely on deals. This has proven successful in obtaining a green light for Nippon Steel’s purchase of US steel, as Trump lifted Joe Biden’s blocking of the transaction. But the welcoming of Japanese investment by no means guarantees a looser stance on Japanese imports to the United States.

Over three months, we conducted interviews with Japan’s economic security policymakers in Washington and Tokyo, who agreed to meet despite their busy schedules. The goal of this piece is to represent how these teams are organized and how they think about relevant issues. The fallout from Trump’s tariffs was front of mind in every conversation, yet it was still possible to present a comprehensive picture of where Japanese economic statecraft stands now, and how it will continue to prepare for more uncertainty. 

From vision to legislation

Abe left a significant legacy in economic and defense policy. It should be no surprise that he also made a difference in the areas in which they overlap. Economic themes were present in Abe’s 2007 speech on the “free and open Indo-Pacific” during his shorter first term. In front of India’s Lok Sabha (or parliament), he committed Japan to promoting regional connectivity and economic partnerships. Nonetheless, the bureaucratic and legislative overhaul of economic security and economic statecraft came in the later years of Abe’s second term. Before that, security and economics were treated separately and their needs perceived as different.

On the security front, growing threats from China and North Korea helped Abe justify a reinterpretation of Japan’s pacifist constitution to expand the role of its Self-Defense Forces. In 2013, Japan created a National Security Council to centralize decision-making with the support of a National Security Secretariat (NSS). Two years later, the government passed security legislation allowing Japan to exercise collective self-defense, enabling it to aid allies under attack even if Japan itself is not directly threatened.

Concerns about economic security were already present, especially those relating to Chinese intellectual property (IP) theft and overreliance on Chinese manufacturing. However, these were clearly superseded by the need for a revitalization of Japan’s economy, which by then had suffered two decades of subpar growth. Abenomics, the prime minister’s signature economic policy, succeeded in reversing deflation and boosting consumer spending through increased government spending and quantitative easing. Attempts to improve competitiveness through structural reforms, including reform of the labor market, were somewhat less successful.

Abenomics was a net positive for Japan’s economic security, boosting consumption and making Japan (slightly) less reliant on exports. While economic revitalization was the priority, this didn’t prevent the prime minister and the political class from becoming more attuned to the economic security risks Japan faced. China’s decision to withhold exports of critical minerals for several months in 2010 was probably the first significant shock. But when Russia annexed Crimea and destabilized the Donbas region of Ukraine in 2014, Japan surprised observers by joining the United States and the European Union in imposing country-specific sanctions outside a United Nations (UN) mandate. These events were enough to kickstart an overhaul of Japan’s economic security landscape.

In 2015, Abe said in a speech to the US Congress that the United States and Japan “must take the lead to build a market that is fair, dynamic, sustainable, and is also free from the arbitrary intentions of any nation.” The subsequent years were characterized by more focus on economic security. The NSS created a specific economic security team in 2019, and Japan made several updates to legislation.

Before the changes of the late 2010s, Japan’s economic security policies were governed by the still extant Foreign Exchange and Foreign Trade Act (FEFTA) of 1949. This act originally imposed a tight regime of inbound investment screening, which was progressively hollowed out as Japan sought to bring itself in line with Organisation for Economic Co-operation and Development (OECD) and other international standards. Still, the division of labor set out by FEFTA hadn’t changed. The Ministry of Finance remained responsible for investment screening while the Ministry of Economy, Trade and Industry (METI)—the successor to MITI—became the natural decision-maker for export controls and subsidies.

To this day, FEFTA remains the legal basis for the Japanese government’s investment screening and export controls. However, vulnerabilities exposed by the COVID-19 pandemic made it clear that an additional layer of legislation would be needed—one that could build economic resilience by allowing the government and firms to cooperate in a more intensive way. This was the basic rationale of the Economic Security Promotion Act of 2022. This law created the position of minister for economic security, based in the prime minister’s office, although much of the engagement with firms and data collection is still run out of METI.

How the ministries and agencies are responding to new challenges

As the government of Japan has placed greater emphasis on economic security and updated its legislation, its departments haven’t significantly altered their division of labor in terms of economic statecraft. METI continues to lead on export controls, the Ministry of Finance on investment screening, and the Ministry of Foreign Affairs on sanctions. What has changed is how policies are coordinated, with the creation of teams explicitly devoted to economic security.

When it was created in 2014 to support National Security Council meetings, the NSS did not feature an economic security team. Instead, the Ministry of Foreign Affairs played this role by default given that it was already responsible for coordinating policy with other governments. While this ensured that Japan applied the measures to which it agreed in international forums, it was clearly insufficient to implement a holistic strategy of economic self-defense, resilience, and indispensability. 

Since the 2019 creation of an economic security team within the NSS, the balance between internal and external coordination has become clear. The ten-person team is small but powerful. It can convene meetings between large, well-established ministries and bring their preferences in line with a more general sense of Japanese strategy, including Tokyo’s alignment with Washington. This role has become more prominent since the arrival of the first minister of state for economic security—who sits in the cabinet office, not inside METI or another large ministry—and a legislative mandate in the Economic Security Promotion Act for the NSS to coordinate economic security policy. The team’s access to the prime minister’s office also allows it to seek political guidance faster than experts in ministries can.

And yet, while the role of the NSS in economic security has clearly grown, the team’s small size and the long-standing roles of other ministries and agencies make the NSS a partial counterpart to the US National Security Council. The economic security team has a blue-sky thinking role and runs a regular program of cross-departmental tabletop exercises focusing on economic coercion, some of which have included US government specialists.

It’s important to remember that the NSS economic security team is not automatically at the top of the chain of command in the way the National Security Council (NSC) might be. Sensitive decisions on export controls and investment screening can also be settled by METI and the Ministry of Finance, respectively. Therefore, studying the role of each organization remains essential.

Ministry of Foreign Affairs

The Ministry of Foreign Affairs no longer carries out internal coordination on economic security, as this mandate has been moved to the NSS. Despite this shift, the ministry still plays a vital role in Japanese sanctions and helps coordinate international positions on other tools such as export controls. As we’ve found in other countries, such as France, the diplomats have two key qualities: they are present at every international summit and often must stand in for more expert colleagues when a deal is done, and they are good at finding compromises.

While Japan has participated fully in the recent Western sanctions coalition against Russia, this has been made possible by exemptions that Tokyo sought and obtained. The best example is the sanctions exemption for the Japanese-owned Sakhalin-2 oil and gas refinery from the Russian oil price cap and other measures that could stem the flow of liquefied natural gas. The Ministry of Foreign Affairs has also contributed to talks on how to make the sanctions effort work better, such as the Common High Priority Item list for export controls. In December 2023, it also pushed Japan to take the unprecedented step of using the legal basis of its Russia sanctions to sanction third-country entities enabling Russia to circumvent sanctions.

These decisions show that the ministry’s culture still prioritizes coordination with the United States. This worked well under the Biden administration, during which both governments managed to organize two 2+2 Summits of the Economic Security Consultative Committee, with the Ministry of Foreign Affairs and METI on the Japanese side and the Departments of State and Commerce on the US side. There is no clarity regarding whether this will continue under the second Trump administration.

Difficulties coordinating with the United States will be a culture shock for the ministry, but it will try to salvage what it can and keep pushing for unity in the Group of Seven (G7). The ministry is also leading on building understanding with the Global South, especially on economic security. Japan realizes better than some of its close partners that sanctions and economic statecraft can be easily misconstrued in third countries and can have adverse impacts on their economic development. Therefore, the ministry has taken on the task of explaining how its economic security policies do not contradict overarching principles such as the Free and Open Indo-Pacific, while also pushing for overseas development aid to be better coordinated with economic security priorities.

METI

Proponents of industrial policy have a starry-eyed view of the Ministry of Economics Trade and Industry’s predecessor—the Ministry of International Trade and Industry—and its role in steering Japan’s rise as an export powerhouse. The eulogizing is not entirely misplaced, but it perhaps overlooks how the powerful super ministry has needed to adapt, first to the shortcomings of Japan’s export-driven model and now to the era of economic coercion. METI can leverage deep sectoral knowledge on the Japanese economy and its interdependencies with the rest of the world, which other ministries do not have. Yet its officials still tend to downplay their readiness for the new challenges and say Japan has a lot to learn about the tools of economic statecraft.

One sign of this is that METI’s Trade and Economic Security Bureau, though run by long-standing official Hiroshi Ishikawa, is a recent creation and another result of the 2022 Economic Security Promotion Act. The bureau’s role is to implement the new legislation by taking a forensic approach to Japan’s problems and the cards it can still play. In close cooperation with firms, the finance sector, and universities, the bureau’s work is organized into three pillars. These are

  • “red” areas of disruptive technological innovation in which Japan needs to cultivate its indispensability but must beware of losing autonomy;
  • “blue” areas in which Japan has technological advantages and should maintain its indispensability; and
  • “green” areas of external dependence in which de-risking is needed.

So far, the approach has also made it easier to unlock larger subsidies for advanced semiconductors, which fit squarely within the “red” area in which Japan risks being left behind. The best example of this is the 1-trillion yen ($6.9 billion) subsidy for TSMC to build a factory on the island of Kyushu.

The three-pillar framework has been useful in raising awareness with firms. Some small and medium enterprises had been unaware that their intellectual property and production were part of what makes Japan indispensable to the global economy. This is usually good news. The exercises have made clear that Japan is ahead of the curve in synthetic biology. The Japan pavilion at the Osaka World Expo proudly features a human heart made of induced pluripotent stem (iPS) cells. But technological advantages are also bringing constraints, such as the US demand for a trilateral deal with Japan and the Netherlands to control the export of semiconductor manufacturing equipment or Tokyo’s own decision to restrict exports of drone technologies that can have military applications.

Ministry of Finance

Of all the ministries working on Japan’s economic security, the Ministry of Finance has had the most stable area of responsibility. Under the Foreign Exchange and Foreign Trade Act of 1949, the Ministry of Finance carries out investment screening. Policies were initially very strict; however, investment liberalization progressed after Japan joined the OECD in 1964. Since the second Abe administration, attention has shifted to the new challenge of economic security.

Unlike other export controls, which often face skepticism from Japanese members of parliament keen to help firms in their constituencies, inbound investment screening enjoys broad-based political support. In 2020, an amendment supported by politicians and driven by the changing international environment considerably tightened screening by requiring prior notification of any foreign direct investment (FDI) covering 1 percent or more of ownership in a firm in a sensitive sector—down from 10 percent. The measure is country agnostic, but the shift was apparently driven primarily by China.

Prior to a 1978 liberalization, the ministry also practiced outbound investment screening. Since 1998, a simpler post-investment reporting system has become standard practice for Japanese firms, but this does not include screening. Arguably, Japan’s modest venture capital ecosystem relative to that of the United States means it faces fewer dilemmas on outbound investment.

Japan will need to diversify its partnerships to weather the storm

Japan’s recent legislative and bureaucratic reforms were carried out with awareness of US political volatility, though perhaps not an expectation that the second Trump administration would engage in a trade war with its allies. While Tokyo welcomed early signals of US engagement, such as Secretary of State Marco Rubio’s participation in the Quad dialogues, it cannot ignore the reality that Washington is increasingly prone to economic coercion, even against allies.

This is not without precedent. US pressure in the 1980s contributed to Japan’s long economic stagnation. But today’s situation represents a larger shift and comes under more challenging geopolitical circumstances for a country like Japan, which now considers three of its neighbors to be bad actors. Japan must prepare for a strategic divergence from US economic policy, while identifying ways to prevent definitive ruptures wherever possible.

During the Trump presidency, Japan will be on a different course than the United States on green energy technology, as Japan is an export powerhouse in this field. It will also be at odds with the United States on overseas development assistance in regions where US retrenchment is enabling China’s advance. Institutions like the Japan Bank for International Cooperation (JBIC) already quietly prioritize projects with economic security value; this approach should be made more explicit to encourage greater uptake in Asia and Africa.

Deeper coordination with G7 partners and other likeminded countries is essential, including on the most worrying scenarios in the Strait of Taiwan. Japan shares many of the European Union’s concerns about the US tendency to frame every economic issue as a national security threat. Japan also prefers country-agnostic policies, instead of the tier-based or country-specific approaches US administrations have developed.

Tokyo prefers more predictable policies yet—unlike the European Union—it is unencumbered by internal divisions among twenty-seven member states. It has a unique opportunity to serve as an example of what open economies that do not wish to engage in economic coercion, but must be ready to stand up to it, should do. METI’s systematic approach to cultivating indispensability is certainly more advanced than what the rest of the G7 is doing. On the other hand, Japan remains vulnerable to coercion through its supply chains and much more work must be done to build resilient alternatives to China.

Japan is in a geopolitically challenging neighborhood and is witnessing the basic tenets of its foreign policy—from alignment with the United States to fostering a rules-based environment—come under unprecedented stress. Yet its advanced manufacturing base and recently updated legislation on economic security also provide it with more cards to resist economic coercion than most countries hold. Its public and private sectors are now largely aligned on these issues. Business leaders have even expressed support for former Economic Security Minister Sanae Takaichi becoming the next prime minister.

It’s hard to think of a more ringing endorsement from the private sector for prioritizing economic security.

About the author

Charles Lichfield is the deputy director and C. Boyden Gray senior fellow of the Atlantic Council’s GeoEconomics Center.

The report is part of a yearlong series on economic statecraft across the G7 and China supported in part by a grant from MITRE.

The contents of this issue brief have not been approved or disapproved by the Japanese government.

Related content

Explore the program

At the intersection of economics, finance, and foreign policy, the GeoEconomics Center is a translation hub with the goal of helping shape a better global economic future.

The post How Japanese economic statecraft has shifted from promotion to protection appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>
Keeping China at bay and critical minerals stocked: The case for US-Africa defense collaboration https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/in-depth-research-reports/report/keeping-china-at-bay-and-critical-minerals-stocked-the-case-for-us-africa-defense-collaboration/ Fri, 06 Jun 2025 15:02:47 +0000 https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/?p=845323 As Russia, China, and other authoritarian powers expand their global reach, US security is at stake. To stay competitive, the United States must turn to Africa—for both critical minerals and partnership in countering rising adversarial influence on the continent.

The post Keeping China at bay and critical minerals stocked: The case for US-Africa defense collaboration appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>

The United States is ill prepared to confront the challenges of an increasingly hostile global strategic environment. A coordinated coalition of adversarial states is working to dismantle the US-led global order, seeking to replace it with one defined by their ambitions and autocratic principles. At the forefront of this effort is China, which is rapidly accelerating its military capabilities and expanding its defense industrial base (DIB) to field sophisticated weapons systems designed to deter the United States globally and secure its goal of national rejuvenation. Aligned with China are Russia, Iran, and North Korea—forming an increasingly unified axis of authoritarians steadily advancing toward this objective. Compounding these challenges are increasingly frayed traditional US security alliances, notably in Europe, that leave the United States further exposed.

The most effective strategy to contend with this evolving threat landscape is through robust preparedness—both immediate and long term. Against this background, US and allied attention has increasingly turned to Africa. Africa holds one-third of the world’s known mineral reserves, including 80 percent of platinum and chromium, 47 percent of cobalt, and 21 percent of graphite.

Of the fifty minerals identified as critical by the US Geological Survey (USGS), thirty-two are found in Africa. US policymakers have therefore begun to explore partnerships with African countries to secure these resources. Yet, despite several promising initiatives, the United States still lacks a coherent and comprehensive policy for engagement—particularly one that can compete with the entrenched influence of the axis of authoritarian states, notably Russia and China, in the continent’s mining industry.

By supporting African nations in the development of their domestic mineral processing capabilities, the United States could enable them to retain a greater share of their mineral wealth and build self-sufficiency in defense. Such efforts could also diminish China’s influence across the continent. For the United States, developing these capabilities could secure a reliable source of critical minerals.

This report begins to lay the groundwork for such an effort by:

  • Identifying the defense capabilities the United States should prioritize to remain competitive in the evolving global strategic environment and the critical minerals necessary to support them.
  • Charting Africa’s critical mineral resources relevant to US defense needs and assessing the shifting defense postures of African nations, particularly where the development of their weapons systems and security objectives aligns with US interests.
  • Underscoring the importance of US support for building Africa’s mineral processing infrastructure, while addressing the structural barriers that have hindered progress so far.
  • Advancing targeted recommendations for US policymakers to operationalize such efforts and redefine US-Africa relations for today’s global challenges.

View the full report

Related content

Explore the program

The Africa Center works to promote dynamic geopolitical partnerships with African states and to redirect US and European policy priorities toward strengthening security and bolstering economic growth and prosperity on the continent.

The post Keeping China at bay and critical minerals stocked: The case for US-Africa defense collaboration appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>
Immediate steps that Europe can take to enhance its role in NATO defense https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/in-depth-research-reports/issue-brief/immediate-steps-that-europe-can-take-to-enhance-its-role-in-nato-defense/ Thu, 05 Jun 2025 20:34:11 +0000 https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/?p=851807 As NATO members gather in the Hague amid uncertainty about US commitment to the continent and concerns about Russia’s military rebuilding, what can European nations do to deter and, if necessary, defeat threats from Moscow?

The post Immediate steps that Europe can take to enhance its role in NATO defense appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>

Key takeaways

  • Despite its three-year war against Ukraine, Russia has significantly reconstituted its forces and could pose a formidable threat to Europe in the near and medium term.  
  • Europe needs to undertake a massive buildup of unmanned vehicles, has too few forces on the borders with Russia, cannot marshal the forces necessary to gain sea control without US support, and is highly vulnerable to cyberattacks on military-critical infrastructure.
  • Even if European nations commit to boost defense spending dramatically at the 2025 NATO summit, Europe needs to take immediate actions to strengthen deterrence while waiting for bigger investments to come online.

There are four steps that European nations should undertake in the near and medium term to enhance NATO’s deterrence and defense capabilities against the prospect of Russian aggression.

As the European Commission’s plan for strengthening European defense stated, “Russia will remain a fundamental threat to Europe’s security for the foreseeable future,” and one which requires a timely response inasmuch as “Russia has made it clear that according to their understanding they remain at war with the West.” Accordingly, as part of enhancing NATO defense, Europe needs to take prompt action to significantly increase:

  1. the effectiveness of forces at its borders with or near Russia,
  2. its capability for sea control,
  3. the resilience of critical infrastructures necessary to defense operations, and
  4. its defense industrial capabilities.

The importance of Europe taking such actions arises from a confluence of three factors: first, Russia’s willingness as demonstrated by its actions in Ukraine to undertake “major mechanized high-intensity warfare” to achieve its geopolitical aims; second, the challenges facing the United States military with the potential for conflict in the Indo-Pacific that could require resources that heretofore have been focused on Europe; and, third, decades of defense underinvestment by European nations that have left their militaries and defense industrial bases ill-prepared to engage in a sustained conventional conflict.

These concerns are significantly heightened because Russia, despite its more than three-year, ongoing war against Ukraine, has nonetheless been able to reconstitute its land forces and has fully maintained its air, naval, cyber, and space capabilities. In recent testimony to the Senate Armed Services Committee, Gen. Christopher Cavoli, NATO’s supreme allied commander, described Russia’s continuing reconstitution of its military forces:

Despite extensive battlefield losses in Ukraine, the Russian military is reconstituting and growing at a faster rate than most analysts had anticipated. In fact, the Russian army, which has borne the brunt of combat, is today larger than it was at the beginning of the war—despite suffering an estimated 790,000 casualties. . . . Within its air and maritime capabilities, Russia has sustained only minor losses in Ukraine. The Russian Aerospace Force currently retains over 1,100 combat-capable aircraft that include Su-57 stealth fighters and Tu-95 and Tu-160 strategic bombers. Aside from some losses in its Black Sea Fleet, the Russian Navy remains intact, with over 60 submarines and 42 surface vessels capable of launching nuclear-tipped Kalibr cruise missiles.

Moreover, in addition to maintaining its force structure, Russia has substantially enhanced its defense industrial capabilities. Again, per Cavoli:

Russia has expanded its industrial production, opened new manufacturing facilities, and converted commercial production lines for military purposes. As a result, the Russian defense industrial base is expected to roll out 1,500 tanks, 3,000 armored vehicles, and 200 Iskander ballistic and cruise missiles this year. (Comparatively, the United States only produces about 135 tanks per year and no longer produces new Bradley Fighting Vehicles.) Additionally, we anticipate Russia to produce 250,000 artillery shells per month, which puts it on track to build a stockpile three times greater than the United States and Europe combined.

Moscow is also marrying its expanded industrial prowess with more sophisticated technological capabilities. For example, Russia is investing significantly in, and having early success with, unmanned vehicle swarming capabilities.

Most significantly, Russia’s threatening activities are not limited to Ukraine. One key concern is that Russia has been building up its infrastructure near the borders of Finland and the Baltic states. As one report describes:

Some 100 miles east of its border with Finland, in the Russian city of Petrozavodsk, military engineers are expanding army bases where the Kremlin plans to create a new army headquarters to oversee tens of thousands of troops over the next several years. Those soldiers, many now serving on the front lines in Ukraine, are intended to be the backbone of a Russian military preparing to face off with the North Atlantic Treaty Organization, according to Western military and intelligence officials. The Kremlin is expanding military recruitment, bolstering weapons production and upgrading railroad lines in border areas. . . .

Most of the manpower expansion will take place in the Leningrad district, which faces Estonia, Latvia and Finland. Smaller brigades will nearly triple in size to become divisions of around 10,000 troops, according to Western military and intelligence officials. . . . Russia is planning to build new barracks and training grounds and to upgrade arsenals and railroad lines to accommodate the swelling troop numbers in and around Petrozavodsk.

It is not clear, of course, whether Russia would choose to attack NATO countries. But what is clear from Cavoli’s testimony is that “Russia’s willingness to employ brutal means in pursuit of its goals,” and that the “Russian regime has refashioned its military, economic, and social structures to sustain what it describes as a long-term confrontation with the West—systemic changes that illustrate Russia’s intention to confront us into the foreseeable future.”

Estimates vary as to when Russia could sufficiently reconstitute from its conflict with Ukraine to undertake an attack against NATO. The uncertainty is rooted in the fact that the duration of the Russia-Ukraine war is itself uncertain, with substantial efforts as of this writing being taken by the United States to bring the fighting to a halt. In that event, a report from Bruegel stated: “A significantly more challenging scenario for Europe would be an unlikely peace deal accepted by Ukraine. In such a scenario, Russia is likely to continue its military build-up, creating a formidable military challenge to all of the EU in a very short period, given current Russian production. The EU and allies including the UK and Norway would need to accelerate their military build-ups immediately and massively.

Specific predictions as to the time needed for full Russian reconstitution generally range from two to five years. Norway’s senior commander has stated that two to three years would suffice; Jack Watling of the United Kingdom’s Royal United Services Institute (RUSI) has noted the importance of “ensuring that the UK’s Armed Forces are contributing to a credible deterrence posture alongside European NATO allies by the end of 2027.”  Other estimates fall into a three-to-five-year window.

Timing uncertainties—even at the higher end—should provide little comfort. As retired Maj. Gen. Gordon “Skip” Davis, a former deputy assistant secretary general at NATO, has warned, if Russia is given “two, maybe three to five years” to rebuild its forces while Europe fails to rearm at the same pace, European forces “would be at a significant disadvantage in a high-intensity fight.”

Such a scenario of NATO fighting at a substantial disadvantage is entirely plausible if Europe fails to take action. Most obviously, Russia is fully capable of large-scale warfare with its current capabilities. If full-scale conflict in Ukraine were to end, many of those capabilities could be directed against NATO—perhaps for a relatively limited operation such as against one of the Baltic countries, combined with nuclear threats to dissuade NATO from launching an effective response, or, with longer preparation, possibly a full-scale attack. Moreover, if the United States were facing or actually engaged in a conflict in the Indo-Pacific—keeping in mind that China’s President Xi Jinping has told his forces to be ready to succeed in a conflict against Taiwan by 2027—European nations should have the necessary capabilities to respond effectively against Russian aggression.

European nations are, of course, alert to these issues. As a consequence of the Russian threat, and amid growing concern over US commitments to the North Atlantic alliance, their combined defense budgets (including Canada) are now equal to just over 2 percent of their aggregated gross domestic product. Multiple nations are planning further increases: Poland expects to spend 5 percent of GDP in 2025; Germany recently voted to exempt defense spending from its “debt brake,” and the government announced support for defense spending (including relevant infrastructure and cyber capabilities) of 5 percent of GDP; France has set a target of 3.5 percent; and the United Kingdom has established a target of 2.5 percent of GDP by 2027 and 3 percent thereafter. For its part, the United States has called for “adopt[ing] a new 5-percent-of-GDP Defense Investment Plan,” which will be a central topic at the NATO summit in June.

Additionally, the European Union has determined to become a significant player in the defense arena. There is a newly created Commissioner for Defence and Space, and the EU is undertaking to provide 150 billion euros to member countries for defense. Further, the EU is planning to authorize countries to “trigger an emergency clause allowing them to make defense investments that push them over the bloc’s budgetary spending limits.” Exactly how much additional spending this would generate is not clear since, as of this writing, only twelve of the twenty-seven EU countries plan to use the emergency clause, and three of the larger countries—France, Italy, and Spain—do not plan to. Nonetheless, reporting on the European Commission’s tracking of member states’ defense plans indicates: “The European Commission is sticking to its estimate that member states could spend up to €650 billion on defence over the coming four years despite just half of governments requesting more fiscal headway to boost investments in the sector in time.”

As valuable as these actions are, it is important to recognize that even the most expansive budgetary plans do not translate into prompt, actual military capabilities. Initiatives must be transferred into actual budgets. Budgets must be approved by parliaments and then provided to defense ministries. Ministries must sign contracts. And companies with contracts must undertake production that often requires the scaling up of facilities.

Europe has a very long way to go on defense spending and capability requirements, with NATO asking “alliance members to raise their military capability targets by 30% as the organization seeks to boost its force posture, according to the [Supreme Allied Commander Transformation] in charge of defense planning at the 32-nation alliance.” Accomplishing these upgrades—to achieve a military posture credible and sufficient enough to offset Russian capabilities—demands a strategic approach that can be accomplished in a timely fashion and with a laser-like focus on the most critical and implementable capabilities. European nations are in a race against the clock and, consequently, must prioritize actions in the near and medium term to deliver capabilities that provide the greatest deterrence or, if necessary, actual military defense against a Russian threat.

To achieve this goal, NATO should focus on the four key challenges it currently faces. First, Europe has too few forces on the borders with Russia. Second, Europe, without US support, cannot marshal the forces necessary to gain sea control. Third, European nations are highly vulnerable to cyberattacks on infrastructure that is critical for sustained, effective military operations. Fourth, Europe’s defense industries lack the capacity to provide substantial amounts of effective weaponry in the near and medium term.

The NATO summit in June offers a forum for the alliance, and its constituent members, to adopt the necessary actions in response to these concerns. The required steps are set forth below.

I. Europe needs to promptly boost the efficacy of forces at its borders with or near Russia

As described above, Russia is in the process of enhancing its capabilities near the Baltic states and Finland. Doing so will provide the infrastructure and forces necessary for a conventional attack. But deterring or defeating such an attack—and especially repelling not expelling an attack—requires an effective NATO forward force posture. However, as Cavoli has stated:

Deterrence is most challenging in the land domain. Russia continues to reconstitute its conventional forces, and possesses advantages in geography, domain, and readiness. A conventional fight with Russia will be decided on land, and it would likely begin with a comparatively large Russian force positioned on a NATO border in order to negate traditional U.S. and NATO advantages in, and preferences for, long-range, standoff warfare. Therefore, NATO, including USEUCOM, must be postured to blunt Russia’s ability to rapidly mass numerically superior land forces.

To establish the necessary posture that Cavoli envisions, European nations should take the following actions, all of which can be accomplished in the near and medium term and all within existing or planned budgets. These actions should be undertaken irrespective of any decisions by the current US administration regarding American forces for Europe.

First, NATO European nations need to undertake a massive buildup of unmanned aerial vehicles. The use of drones has completely changed the nature of battle—as demonstrated by their role in the Russia-Ukraine war: Drones now kill more soldiers and destroy more armored vehicles in Ukraine than all traditional weapons of war combined, including sniper rifles, tanks, howitzers and mortars, Ukrainian commanders and officials say.

Just as the United States is planning for extensive use of unmanned vehicles in the Indo-Pacific should there be a conflict over Taiwan, and as Ukraine has done in its own defense, NATO needs to have a large and effective unmanned vehicle inventory available for use in the event of war with Russia. Ukraine is utilizing millions of unmanned vehicles. NATO needs a comparable supply. (A large-scale capacity for ammunition production is also needed—and discussed below in the defense industrial section.)

Second, NATO nations that border Russia and Belarus must establish effective obstacles—including land mines—to blunt a Russian attack. Useful lessons can be drawn from the Ukraine conflict, where mines have been utilized by both sides, and from the Korean context, where the defense of South Korea is supported by mines. Five Baltic nations—Finland, Estonia, Latvia, Lithuania, and Poland—are in the process of withdrawing from the Ottawa Treaty, which bars the use of anti-personnel mines (anti-vehicle mines are allowed). The sooner mines are emplaced on the borders with Russia and Belarus, the stronger NATO deterrence and defense will be.

Third, some European forces should move forward on NATO’s eastern flank. Germany is planning to have a brigade stationed in Lithuania by 2027. The United Kingdom should position one of its brigades currently in England to Estonia, where the UK already has a brigade headquarters leading a multinational force. In Latvia, where Canada leads a multinational force, France could bring forward a brigade. There could be arrangements other than mobilizing UK or French forces, but the key point is to add forward forces ready for a conflict if necessary. These actions will be necessary to meet the requirements of the NATO Force Model calling for “well over” 100,000 forces in up to 10 days and 200,00 in 10–30 days.

Fourth, equipment for European forces needs to be prepositioned in or near the Baltics and Poland to be readily available in the event of conflict. Prepositioning could be on land—as the United States currently does in several places in Europe—or the equipment could be placed on maritime prepositioning ships, again following the US approach which worldwide includes seventeen prepositioning ships.

Fifth, Europe needs to establish an equivalent to the US Civil Reserve Air Fleet (CRAF) pursuant to which US airlines “contractually commit to . . . augment Department of Defense airlift requirements in emergencies when the need for airlift exceeds the capability of military aircraft.” Creating a European equivalent would be particularly valuable for moving personnel to fall in on prepositioned equipment as recommended above.

In terms of the proposed prepositioning and the European version of CRAF, it is worth noting that while mobility by rail and motor vehicle has long been identified as a challenge for NATO, and while the European Union has undertaken a mobility initiative that has reduced a certain amount of bureaucratic obstacles, little has been accomplished to meaningfully enhance physical mobility. For just one example, the “completion of Rail Baltica, an alternative 870km (540 miles) north-south railway link [through the Baltic states], has been postponed from 2025 to 2030 and is facing massive cost overruns.”

II. Europe needs to enhance its capability for sea control

In the event of a conflict in the Indo-Pacific, United States naval forces would play a major role, thereby calling on much or all of those forces for the European theater to be engaged in that arena. European maritime forces would therefore need to make up the resulting gaps in NATO’s four seas—Baltic, Black, Mediterranean, and North—as well as in the Atlantic and in the Barents Sea. European navies have excellent capabilities, including, for example, French and UK aircraft carriers and submarines from multiple countries extending beyond France and the United Kingdom to Norway, Sweden, and Germany, among others. As an illustration of European maritime capabilities, Cavoli testified that NATO operations in spring 2025 relied solely on approximately 20 European ships, and he had “zero U.S. ships working for [him] as SACEUR.”

The issue for NATO maritime forces, therefore, is not so much one of upgrading capabilities but rather one of mass. European navies are relatively small. That challenge is susceptible to solution, however, by utilizing unmanned maritime vehicles as part of NATO’s maritime operations. The value of unmanned surface vehicles has been demonstrated by the United States through Task Force 59 operations in the Gulf and Windward Stack (now transitioned to Southern Spear) operations in Latin America, where USVs have provided highly effective surveillance capabilities critical to maritime domain awareness. More dramatically, Ukraine has utilized USVs successfully to attack and neutralize the Russian Black Sea Fleet.

NATO itself has recognized the value of unmanned capabilities and has begun operations with unmanned surface vehicles through its Baltic Sentry activity: “NATO launched Baltic Sentry, a new military activity in the Baltic Sea which aims to improve Allies’ ability to respond to destabilising acts. The activity brings together Allied navies, maritime surveillance assets, and private sector operators to ensure real-time situational awareness and rapid response capabilities across the Baltic Sea’s vulnerable zones.”

According to media reports, approximately twenty USVs are taking part in Baltic Sentry, and NATO has established Task Force X to further these capabilities. In a conflict, much larger numbers of unmanned vehicles would be required just for maritime domain awareness—and even larger numbers would be necessary if lethal capabilities were to be included, as Ukraine is successfully doing in its conflict with Russia. Accordingly, NATO must urge nations to substantially increase their unmanned surface fleets and to add unmanned lethal capabilities to the existing surveillance capabilities.

III. Europe needs to enhance the resilience of critical infrastructures fundamental to defense operations

NATO’s military capabilities are reliant on the effective operations of key critical infrastructures, including the electric grid, pipelines, transportation capabilities (rail, seaports, and airports), and information and telecom systems. Those systems, however, are susceptible to Russian cyberattack. As the recent US Annual Threat Assessment of the Intelligence Community states: “Russia’s advanced cyber capabilities, its repeated success compromising sensitive targets for intelligence collection, and its past attempts to pre-position access on U.S. critical infrastructure make it a persistent counterintelligence and cyber attack threat. Moscow’s unique strength is the practical experience it has gained integrating cyber attacks and operations with wartime military action, almost certainly amplifying its potential to focus combined impact on U.S. targets in time of conflict.”

While the assessment focuses on US infrastructure, comparable vulnerabilities exist in Europe. Moreover, given the “no limits” relationship between Russia and China, it is entirely possible that China’s very formidable cyber capabilities could be used in support of a Russian attack against NATO.

To be sure, in a conflict, cyberattacks are unlikely to be definitive in and of themselves. Ukraine has sustained many such attacks and has continued its defense against Russia. The operational technologies running critical infrastructure are resilient in the sense that they generally get disrupted but not destroyed by a cyberattack—and so can be reconstituted.

Still, disruption can have far-reaching and even catastrophic consequences—especially in the early days of a conflict when NATO would be engaged with bringing the necessary forces into place to repel a Russian attack. Critical infrastructures companies like port or railway operators do not have the expertise to respond to a high-level cyberattack on their own. A coordinated public-private set of actions would be required.

There are currently three overlapping sets of activities intended to bring about the necessary resilient cybersecurity for European private sector infrastructures:

  1. NATO formally recognized the importance of cyber as an operational domain in 2016 and has undertaken a variety of initiatives since then. At the 2023 “Vilnius Summit, Allies . . . committed to more ambitious goals to strengthen national cyber defences as a matter of priority, including for critical infrastructures.” Most recently, NATO has said it will establish the NATO Integrated Cyber Defense Center to combine NATO’s existing cyber efforts and to engage industry partners from across the alliance as well. But this activity is not expected to be complete until 2028, and it is far from clear what degree of effort it will be undertake to ensure the resilience of key critical infrastructures.
  2. Twenty-three of the thirty-two NATO nations are members of the European Union and therefore subject to the EU requirements on cybersecurity. EU regulations require that “essential and important entities should adopt a wide range of basic cyber hygiene practices, such as zero-trust principles, software updates, device configuration, network segmentation, identity and access management or user awareness, organise training for their staff and raise awareness concerning cyber threats, phishing or social engineering techniques.”
  3. NATO nations have national cybersecurity programs, illustrated by France’s National Cybersecurity Agency [ANSSI] and the United Kingdom’s National Cyber Defence Centre. Each of these (and the other national cyber agencies) undertakes to provide support to private sector entities, though the specifics vary according to the country. For example, the NCDC “support[s] the most critical organisations in the UK, the wider public sector, industry, SMEs as well as the general public. When incidents do occur, we provide effective incident response to minimise harm to the UK, help with recovery, and learn lessons for the future.”

A recent analysis set forth a series of key actions required to protect critical infrastructures necessary for NATO military operations. None of those actions should wait until 2028 for NATO’s establishment of its Integrated Cyber Defense Center. Most crucially: “NATO ultimately needs a mechanism for planning and implementing cyber operational collaboration among alliance members and with the private sector.”

In establishing such collaboration, NATO should “prioritize involving private sector entities that have a key operational role, including unique insights that could support operational activity as well as direct operational capabilities.” Key aspects of such collaboration would include:

Additionally, a focus on technological capabilities will be important. As the report states, “New innovations can help to provide visibility into both operational and information technology, using artificial intelligence to quickly learn what normal activity looks like and detecting anomalous behavior.”

Beyond the foregoing recommendations, four further actions will be important:

  1. NATO networks as well as key critical infrastructures should all strictly adhere to the requirements for “zero trust architectures” that reduce the abilities of adversaries to compromise network capabilities. As noted above, the EU’s NIS 2 standard calls for zero trust, but it will be critically important to ensure that this requirement is being effectively put in place (including for non-EU nations). Achieving that goal will require a certification system backed up by red teaming to determine whether the particular system is in fact highly capable.
  2. NATO should be ready to undertake an expanded effort akin to the United States’ “Hunt Forward” activity, which works with allies and partners to identify and eliminate malware in key cyber systems.
  3. It will be necessary for NATO not only to focus on cyber defense but also to undertake to disrupt the offensive cyber capabilities that Russia would utilize against the alliance. As previously described: “The actual implementation of NATO’s cyber offensive capabilities is by nations through a process described as the ‘sovereign cyber effects provided voluntarily by allies.’ . . [Utilizing] this approach allows allies to support NATO commanders with cyberattacks, but to keep to themselves (as they choose), the particulars of their offensive cyber methods.. . . . However, in conditions of conflict, the value of wartime cyber offensive operations may benefit from broader coordination with kinetic operations.
  4. NATO should also undertake to ensure that both its own information technology systems and those of the critical infrastructures upon which it relies transition to so-called “memory safe” software inasmuch as two-thirds and more of cybersecurity issues derive from the use of unsafe code. This cannot be accomplished immediately, but the United States Defense Advanced Projects Agency has developed the “TRACTOR” program which will automate the transition from the widely used C language to the memory safe RUST language.

Achieving the NATO-private sector collaboration described above, including the necessary operational and technological changes, is crucial for wartime success. However, while it would be difficult enough to establish an effective NATO-private sector cyber relationship, there are further significant obstacles given both the national and European Union cybersecurity roles. Analytically, a NATO-EU collaboration should be achievable since all share a desired outcome: resilience to a Russian (or Chinese) cyberattack.

Practically, however, NATO-EU collaboration often devolves into multiple meetings without consequential on-the-ground impact—and NATO is not without fault as its approach to national cyber requirements has been more aspirational than operational or technical. It will be a critical test for European defense—and for the leaders of NATO, the EU, and the private sector—to see if cyber resilience can in fact be enhanced or whether it will fall prey to bureaucratic dysfunctionality.

IV. Europe needs prompt enhancement of its defense industrial capabilities

Europe’s defense industrial base needs substantial and immediate enhancement. As the Draghi report on the future of European competitiveness stated, “The defence industry is too fragmented, hindering its ability to produce at scale, and it suffers from a lack of standardisation and interoperability of equipment, weakening Europe’s ability to act as a cohesive power across the bloc.” In recognition of these deficiencies, individual European allies and the European Union have pledged to enhance their defense production and capacity. But many of those much-needed initiatives will take time—to send sufficient demand signals to industry, to ramp up industrial capacity, and to field actual capabilities to ensure allied warfighters are appropriately equipped. Time, however, is a very expensive commodity for a Europe facing a reconstituting Russia. Speed is critically important.

In the short and medium term, European allies need a sober assessment of what capabilities must be fielded quickly and which capabilities can reasonably be produced on the continent. As a first step, Europe should look to Ukraine for lessons learned on how to ramp up defense production quickly and which capabilities have been particularly effective against Russia. As discussed above, unmanned vehicles play an outsized role on the modern battlefield, and maintaining robust ammunition stockpiles is essential. Ukraine mass-produces UVs—at a volume of four million drones annually. European allies should undertake to promote defense industrial initiatives that deliver unmanned vehicle capabilities at comparable scale as promptly as possible. 

European allies could use the planned increases in defense budgets for investments in facilities for UV production. Such facilities can be stood up relatively quickly. By way of example, in the United States, Anduril is building a so-called “arsenal plant” to produce tens of thousands of autonomous weapons systems annually. The plant is expected to cost less than one billion dollars and to be operational in approximately eighteen months. Anduril is considering standing up a similar facility in the United Kingdom, but there are a number of European companies, such as Helsing in Germany or Leonardo in Italy, that could step up production of unmanned vehicles with the appropriate financial support. Investing in such facilities, and ramping up capacity across Europe, would dramatically strengthen Europe’s capabilities for any conflict on NATO’s eastern flank.

Alongside an industrial base in need of immediate and substantial enhancement, Europe is woefully low on artillery and ammunition rounds. The Ukrainian military uses approximately two million 155 mm artillery rounds annually. Through the European Act in Support of Ammunition Production, the European continent is supposed to scale up bloc-wide ammunition production efforts to produce two million 155 mm rounds a year. However, this much-hyped initiative has struggled to deliver on its promises—and even if it were able to reach this benchmark, it would still fall short of the necessary artillery production to sufficiently resource Ukraine and allied militaries while simultaneously replenishing allied stockpiles.

Europe struggles to produce the requisite number of artillery rounds, in part due to systemic industrial capacity issues but also because of a global shortage of TNT and gunpowder. In the short term, Europe should authorize around-the-clock industrial shifts in munition factories to ramp up production. Additionally, European allies should explore innovative opportunities to cast artillery rounds and other munitions rather than relying on the traditional method of forging, as proposed in a recent Center for a New American Security (CNAS) report. Forging is a time-intensive process compared to casting, which is more flexible and allows for recyclable metal to be molded in a shorter time frame. Europe has a significant foundry industry that could be redirected to produce artillery rounds and other munitions. Overcoming the global shortage of TNT will require strengthening strategic supply chains with like-minded allies and partners—most notably Japan. In the longer term, European allies should invest in new munition manufacturing facilities and expand the number of TNT production facilities beyond its reliance on the existing Nitro-Chem plant in Poland. To be sure, European munitions troubles extend beyond 155 mm artillery rounds. However, the clear vulnerabilities in this artillery production underscore the necessity for Europe to take prompt and innovative action to scale its munitions production.

The war in Ukraine has demonstrated that air defense is crucial to safeguarding civilians as well as critical infrastructure. Europe has tried to bolster its air and missile defense through collaborative procurement programs like the European Sky Shield Initiative and now the ReArm Europe plan. However, in the past, such initiatives have had mixed success, as progress stalls over political divergences. For example, France has been openly critical of the European Sky Shield Initiative for prioritizing the purchase of US weapon systems over European systems. As European allies continue to disagree on key issues related to security and defense, allies at the national level must forge ahead by buying individual capabilities that meet NATO’s interoperability standards to ensure these systems can be integrated across the alliance. Some would be US systems, such as Patriot, and some would be European, such as the NASAMS system by Kongsberg or the newer Franco-Italian SAMP/T NG.

Lastly, even if Europe were to adopt all of these approaches tomorrow—at both speed and scale—it would likely fall short of the needed industrial capacity to field sufficient capabilities to deter or defend against Russian aggression. In the short term, Europe must cooperate with its allies and partners, both in North America and the Indo-Pacific region, to fill its stocks and provide other capabilities. Despite political headwinds, the United States remains the strongest defense industrial partner of Europe: Its systems are widely used, trusted, and meet interoperability standards established by NATO. The remedy for laggard defense industrial capacity on both sides of the Atlantic is greater cooperation—not isolationism.

Where national governments diverge on approaches, European military planners and industry partners should explore other opportunities to strengthen industry-to-industry ties. This approach would match European defense industrial ambitions by supporting European efforts to meet short-term capability targets while also investing the necessary capital in facilities to grow a healthy and robust European defense industrial base in the long term. To this end, efforts to harness advantages on both sides of the Atlantic in the form of co-production and co-development facilities are heating up. For example, in December, RTX partnered with MBDA to open the first Patriot missile facility in Germany—which is slated to begin producing over a thousand Patriot missiles for NATO allies annually. Opportunities like this allow Europe to quickly scale up facilities, while allowing European industries to offset some of the steep costs associated with building out new manufacturing plants. In the short term, Europe is equipped with capabilities at an accelerated rate while at the same time developing the requisite infrastructure to create for itself a healthier and more self-sufficient defense industrial base. 

V. Conclusion

The transatlantic community agrees: Europe must do more to enhance its role in NATO. Taking the actions set forth in this issue brief will provide the necessary enhancement of European defense capabilities in the short and medium term to deter and, if necessary, defeat a reconstituted Russia.

About the authors

Related content

Explore the program

The Transatlantic Security Initiative, in the Scowcroft Center for Strategy and Security, shapes and influences the debate on the greatest security challenges facing the North Atlantic Alliance and its key partners.

The post Immediate steps that Europe can take to enhance its role in NATO defense appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>
The world needs a maritime ‘elite league’ to combat rogue shipping https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/in-depth-research-reports/issue-brief/the-world-needs-a-maritime-elite-league-to-combat-rogue-shipping/ Thu, 05 Jun 2025 15:00:00 +0000 https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/?p=849984 The International Maritime Organization was created to address ocean safety. As member states have begun to erode and undermine the organization, there is need for coalitions of the willing or a maritime "elite league' to come together and enforce stricter enforcement of international maritime rules and regulations.

The post The world needs a maritime ‘elite league’ to combat rogue shipping appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>

Key Takeaways

  • In April 2025, the International Maritime Organization approved an agreement reducing the shipping sector’s greenhouse gas emissions, making shipping the “first industry to legislate to decarbonize.”
  • That this happened without—and potentially despite—the United States signals that the mostly apolitical system that has regulated shipping since the 1950s is subject to the same geopolitical tensions weakening the postwar order.
  • With several large states undermining the organization, countries interested in curtailing the rise of shadow vessels and the associated risks of accidents and environmental damage should band together to keep their waters places where the highest standards apply.

A small group of nations established the International Maritime Organization in 1948 to create a modicum of global governance. Since then, IMO (as insiders call it) or the IMO (as most others call it) has fulfilled its task of functioning as a global parliament and secretariat for matters relating to ocean safety. Yet, like all other multilateral organizations, IMO depends on its member states’ goodwill and compliance. Today several large member states undermine the organization, and the United States left its negotiations over greenhouse gas reduction. IMO will continue to function as a steward of global ocean safety. But to achieve better maritime order, states should also join forces in coalitions of the willing or a maritime “elite league.” Countries in such formations could, for example, introduce stricter pollution or protection and indemnity (P&I) insurance rules.

Like many other organizations within the United Nations (UN), and the UN itself, IMO was established in the years immediately following World War II. Even with a Cold War rapidly forming, the world’s nations knew that they would need to share the oceans and that improving maritime safety was in everyone’s interest. Convening in Geneva in 1948, sixteen pioneering nations—ranging from Canada to Pakistan and including one country, Poland, from the emerging Soviet-led East bloc—formed the Inter-Governmental Maritime Consultative Organization (IMCO). 1

The Convention on the Inter-Governmental Maritime Consultative Organization stipulated that the new organization would provide “machinery for co-operation among Governments in the field of governmental regulation and practices relating to technical matters of all kinds affecting shipping engaged in international trade, and to encourage the general adoption of the highest practicable standards in matters concerning maritime safety and efficiency of navigation. It would also “encourage the removal of discriminatory action and unnecessary restrictions by Governments affecting shipping engaged in international trade so as to promote the availability of shipping services to the commerce of the world without discrimination.”2

The IMCO’s mission was to facilitate safe and fair global shipping. It did so based on consultations and consensus-focused decisions by its members. The convention stipulated that “the functions of the Organization shall be consultative and advisory” and that the organization should “provide for the drafting of conventions, agreements, or other suitable instruments, and to recommend these to Governments and to intergovernmental organizations, and to convene such conferences as may be necessary.”3 That gave the IMCO’s secretariat no decision-making powers—decisions were to be made by the member states—and certainly no enforcement power.

In successfully founding the IMCO, the sixteen nations had proven that a shared maritime organization was possible even among nations that shared virtually nothing else. They were soon joined by a steady stream of other countries, with early joiners including nations as different as Austria and Myanmar.4

Mission: Facilitate safe and fair global shipping

The organization proved valuable. As Cold War power dynamics became more entrenched, global shipping continued to function, with ships able to call at any chosen port regardless of the port state’s geopolitical leanings, the ship’s flag state, or the ship’s country of ownership. Along the way, IMO’s members adopted a string of conventions that enhanced shipping safety, including the Convention on the Prevention of Marine Pollution by Dumping of Wastes and Other Matter in 1972, Safety of Life at Sea (SOLAS) in 1974, and the International Convention on the Establishment of an International Fund for Compensation for Oil Pollution Damage in 1971 with an amended version in 1992.5 The latter forms the basis of the International Oil Pollution Compensation Funds, a London-based multilateral organization that administers two compensation to victims of oil spills. Another marquee agreement—the International Convention on Oil Pollution Preparedness, Response and Co-operation—was adopted in 1990.6

In 1982, having decided that the name IMCO was bulky and confusing, member states renamed the organization the International Maritime Organization. It has continued to oversee the safety of global shipping, and the cargo traveling by sea has continued to grow. In 1980, ships transported 3.7 billion tons of cargo on international voyages; by 2023, the volume had grown to 12.3 billion tons.7

Today IMO is the world’s default maritime organization, though crucially it is not the custodian of the United Nations Convention on the Law of the Sea (UNCLOS), known as the constitution of the oceans. One hundred and seventy-six of the world’s nations now belong to IMO; the only ones that do not are landlocked countries that have very low gross domestic product (GDP) per capita (such as Burkina Faso, $887), a tiny population (such as Liechtenstein, 39,850 residents), or both.8 Taiwan, which has a large maritime industry but is barred from joining the United Nations system as China considers it a renegade province, is also not a member. The IMO Assembly, which approves IMO’s activities and budget and elects IMO’s executive organ, includes all the organization’s member states and meets every two years

Guy Platten, secretary general of the International Chamber of Shipping, said, “What IMO has achieved has been remarkable, things like the MARPOL Convention [the International Convention for the Prevention of Pollution from Ships] and so many other conventions and instruments. The decision-making process does take time, and it’s quite tortuous at times, but the whole idea is that the organization tries to work on a consensus. That means compromises, but it’s pretty effective.”9 It has indeed been effective. Even though the 176 member states have widely divergent views and priorities, IMO has managed to become a global protector of safe shipping, albeit a slow-moving one that lacks enforcement powers. Instead, like other UN agencies, it relies on its member states to follow the rules to which they have committed themselves.

Geopolitics, greenhouse gases, and an abrupt US exit

In April 2025, the IMO Marine Environment Protection Committee convened in London to negotiate an agreement reducing the shipping sector’s greenhouse gas (GHG) emissions. The emissions account for about 3 percent of GHG emissions, and IMO member states had been debating and discussing stricter emission rules for several years. Intense negotiations at the April meeting eventually resulted in an agreement that “will progressively lower the annual greenhouse gas fuel intensity of marine fuels, and a greenhouse gas pricing mechanism requiring high-emitting ships to pay for their excess pollution.”10 The agreement is to be “mandatory for large ocean-going ships over 5,000 gross tonnage, which emit 85% of the total [carbon dioxide] emissions from international shipping.”

The agreement was adopted by a majority of member states (sixty-three, including the twenty-seven European Union (EU) members, the United Kingdom, Brazil, India, China, Norway and Singapore) voting in favor. Sixteen countries (including Saudi Arabia, the United Arab Emirates, and Russia) voted against it, and twenty-five countries (including Argentina and Pacific Island states) abstained.11 The agreement must be formally adopted by a two-thirds majority in October 2025; if that happens, it will enter into force in 2027.12 However, an unusual event occurred during the negotiations. On instructions from Washington, the US delegation abruptly departed; the US government also sent a note to the other member states, urging them to reconsider their “support for the GHG emissions measures under consideration.” According to two people close to the process who spoke to the author, the US government privately put further pressure on countries to reject the agreement or abstain. Referring to the greenhouse gas emission proposal, the US démarche added, “Should such a blatantly unfair measure go forward, our government will consider reciprocal measures so as to offset any fees charged to U.S. ships and compensate the American people for any other economic harm from any adopted GHG emissions measures.”13

Brian Adrian Wessel, the director general of the Danish Maritime Authority and leader of the Danish negotiating team, said, “Geopolitics entered IMO with these negotiations. There was a coalition of oil-exporting states led by Saudi Arabia and a group of sanctioned states comprising Russia, Iran, Venezuela, and North Korea that opposed the agreement, and then the US de facto joined them in trying to block it. So it was left to the rest of the member states, including the EU and China, to work together to find a solution.”14

He added, “IMO stood its ground with a significant majority vote. In this day and age, a multilateral agreement on green transition is not a given in any way. The first maritime regulation on greenhouse gas emission, passed with a vast majority, that’s historic.”15

Platten said, “This is the first time in around fifteen years that an IMO agreement went to vote. It was quite a moment to be in the plenary hall when that happened. But nonetheless, we have an agreement now, which makes shipping the first industry to legislate to decarbonize, putting a carbon price for the first time, and some reward elements to it as well. What other industries have done anything like that? The answer is none whatsoever.”16 He continued, “IMO is one of the last UN bodies which is still functioning as a multinational body. I think that’s because shipping needs to be globally regulated. It cannot do anything else.”17

 

IMO is one of the last UN bodies which is still functioning as a multinational body. I think that’s because shipping needs to be globally regulated.

Guy Platten, secretary general of the International Chamber of Shipping

The deterioration of the global maritime order

The US departure from the negotiations, however, reflected a wider reality. The global maritime order, which nations and the maritime industry have painstakingly constructed over the last century, faces serious travails. To be sure, commitment to maritime treaties has never been complete. Some shipowners and flag states have been indifferent or reckless when it comes to pollution by their ships and, especially in recent years, countries have regularly violated UNCLOS. That was the case with the 1980s Tanker War between Iran and Iraq; the shadow maritime war targeting Iranian and Israeli merchant vessels in the Strait of Hormuz; the Houthis’ attacks on merchant shipping in the Red Sea; and China’s maritime harassment of civilian vessels in the South China Sea.

But nations and companies have largely adhered to IMO’s overwhelmingly technical conventions. One reason for this compliance is that better safety practices benefit everyone. Another is that any ship calling at a port is subject to port state control, the maritime equivalent of a safety inspection, which means that independent inspectors register any rule violations. Owners and flag states must address these deficiencies before ships can continue their journeys.

As the rules-based international order continues to deteriorate, commitment to IMO rules is also slipping. Even though the MARPOL Convention bars ocean pollution (whether involving oil or other substances) by merchant vessels, the world’s growing shadow fleet willingly and systematically accepts a disproportionate risk of oil spills.18 In May 2023, the shadow tanker Pablo exploded off the coast of Malaysia, causing oil spills in local waters, and other shadow vessels have spilled oil elsewhere.19 Despite such dangerous incidents, IMO has been unable to ensure compliance with its rules—even though its member states include several “flags of extreme convenience” (my term) that primarily flag shadow vessels. Insisting on compliance is made yet more difficult by the fact that shadow vessels don’t call at ports of Western countries, where post state controls are typically fully implemented, but instead sail straight to their destination or perform ship-to-ship transfers before returning to their ports of origin. “It’s very tempting to start saying, if they don’t play by the rules, why should we then play by the rules?” Wessel noted.20

Response options for nations committed to maritime governance

IMO member states could introduce proposals aimed at curtailing dangerous shadow vessel practices or, for that matter, proxy group attacks on merchant shipping. Indeed, some IMO member states are teaming up to at least bring attention to systematic violations. “We try to work closely together where we see such issues, whether it’s in Asia or in our own neighborhood, and then take it into the IMO,” Wessel said.21Interview with the author, April 22, 2025.22 Yet most attempts at strengthening rules or creating new ones are likely to be unsuccessful, as nations benefiting from the practices would vote against the measures and encourage other countries to do the same.

“What IMO can do is act as a facilitator,” Platten said. “Everyone wants safe shipping, and that’s what IMO regulates. People make grand statements at IMO, whether it’s on the Ukraine issue or anything else, but ultimately it’s a technical body that decides on regulation for shipping. It’s never at its best when there’s political grandstanding. It’s much better when it gets on with things as it did with the greenhouse gas agreement, which is people working late, late, late into the night to try and find some landing ground.”23

Within IMO, a significant number of countries around the world are indisputably committed to maintaining and enhancing maritime governance. By definition, shipping encompasses the whole world, and IMO remains irreplaceable as the forum through which the world’s nations can maintain standards. However, it can no longer be assumed that all members want to enhance the global maritime order.

The fact that IMO depends on its global membership for any action, and that leading nations now openly undermine the maritime order, means there is a gap in global maritime governance. It’s clearly in no country’s interest to impose more governance on itself while other countries use the world’s oceans impeded by fewer rules, but countries could team up in self-selecting groups to enhance maritime rules in their waters.

For example, while UNCLOS’s right to innocent passage is sacrosanct, countries affected by the shadow fleet could collectively adopt pollution rules that go beyond MARPOL. The countries that could initiate such an undertaking include coastal states in the Baltic Sea and the North Sea, as well as Malaysia, Indonesia, Singapore, and other countries whose territorial waters and exclusive economic zones shadow vessels regularly traverse.

As the shadow fleet has also led to systematic subversion of maritime incident insurance (known as the P&I club system), coastal states in different parts of the world now share the seemingly intractable problem that suspected shadow vessels sail through their waters with insurance barely worth the paper on which it is written. They, too, can team up to adopt stricter insurance rules. Adopting stricter pollution rules, P&I insurance rules, or both would enhance maritime safety without detracting from IMO. In that way, they would resemble initiatives by NATO member states that have a regional focus and take place outside NATO but don’t undermine the Alliance. They include, most prominently, the Joint Expeditionary Forces, which encompass ten northern European countries.24

Sailing in safer waters

The International Maritime Organization serves the world’s nations and the shipping industry well, but it is undermined by growing geopolitical tensions and decreasing commitment to global rules and institutions. While IMO can continue serving a crucial function as the world’s default maritime convener, nations committed to the maritime order can enhance safety in their waters by forming coalitions of the willing that share, for example, stricter rules on pollution or P&I insurance. That would make sailing in their waters more expensive. It would also, however, help nations committed to the maritime order establish a maritime “elite league” in whose waters all maritime participants would know that the highest standards apply.

About the author

Featured project

Threats to the global maritime order

Learn more about the Atlantic Council’s project Threats to the global maritime order: Protecting the freedom of the seas.

Related content

Explore the program

The Transatlantic Security Initiative, in the Scowcroft Center for Strategy and Security, shapes and influences the debate on the greatest security challenges facing the North Atlantic Alliance and its key partners.

1    “Member States,” International Maritime Organization, last visited April 25, 2025, https://www.imo.org/en/OurWork/ERO/Pages/MemberStates.aspx
2    “Convention on the International Maritime Organization,” International Maritime Organization, last visited April 25, 2025, https://www.imo.org/en/About/Conventions/Pages/Convention-on-the-International-Maritime-Organization.aspx
3    “Convention on the International Maritime Organization,” International Maritime Organization, last visited April 25, 2025, https://www.imo.org/en/About/Conventions/Pages/Convention-on-the-International-Maritime-Organization.aspx
4    “50 Years of Review of Maritime Transport, 1968–2018: Reflecting on the Past, Exploring the Future,” United Nations Conference on Trade and Development, 2018, https://unctad.org/system/files/official-document/dtl2018d1_en.pdf
5    “International Convention on the Establishment of an International Fund for Compensation for Oil Pollution Damage,” International Maritime Organization, last visited May 12, 2025, https://www.imo.org/en/About/Conventions/Pages/International-Convention-on-the-Establishment-of-an-International-Fund-for-Compensation-for-Oil-Pollution-Damage-(FUND).aspx
6    “List of IMO Conventions,” International Maritime Organization, last visited May 12, 2025, https://www.imo.org/en/About/Conventions/Pages/ListOfConventions.aspx
7    “50 Years of Review of Maritime Transport, 1968–2018”; “Review of Maritime Transport 2024,” United Nations Conference on Trade and Development, 2024, https://unctad.org/publication/review-maritime-transport-2024
8    “Member States,” International Maritime Organization, last visited April 25, 2025, https://www.imo.org/en/OurWork/ERO/Pages/MemberStates.aspx; “GDP Per Capita (Current US$)—Burkina Faso,” World Bank Group, last visited May 12, 2025, https://data.worldbank.org/indicator/NY.GDP.PCAP.CD?locations=BF; “Population, Total—Liechtenstein,” World Bank Group, last visited May 12, 2025, https://data.worldbank.org/indicator/SP.POP.TOTL?locations=LI
9    Interview with the author, April 14, 2025.
10     Vibhu Mishra, “Countries Reach Historic Deal to Cut Shipping Emissions,” UN News, April 11, 2025, https://news.un.org/en/story/2025/04/1162176
11     John Snyder, “The ‘Great’ Compromise: IMO Agrees to Global Carbon Price for Shipping,” Riviera Maritime Media, April 14, 2025, https://www.rivieramm.com/news-content-hub/the-great-compromise-imo-agrees-to-global-carbon-price-for-shipping-84527; “IMO Approves Net-Zero Regulations for Global Shipping,” International Maritime Organization, April 11, 2025, https://www.imo.org/en/MediaCentre/PressBriefings/pages/IMO-approves-netzero-regulations.aspx
12    Mishra, “Countries Reach Historic Deal to Cut Shipping Emissions.”
13     Jonathan Saul, Michelle Nichols, and Kate Abnett, “US Exits Carbon Talks on Shipping, Urges Others to Follow, Document Says,” Reuters, April 9, 2025, https://www.reuters.com/sustainability/boards-policy-regulation/us-exits-carbon-talks-shipping-urges-others-follow-document-2025-04-09
14    Interview with the author, April 22, 2025.
15    Interview with the author, April 22, 2025.
16     Interview with the author, April 14, 2025.
17     Interview with the author, April 14, 2025.
18    Elisabeth Braw, “From Russia’s Shadow Fleet to China’s Maritime Claims: The Freedom of the Seas Is under Threat,” Atlantic Council, January 23, 2025, https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/in-depth-research-reports/report/from-russias-shadow-fleet-to-chinas-maritime-claims-the-freedom-of-the-seas-is-under-threat/
19    “Oil Suspected from Pablo Wreck Washes Ashore in Indonesia,” Maritime Executive, May 5, 2025, https://maritime-executive.com/article/oil-suspected-from-pablo-wreck-washes-ashore-in-indonesia; Braw, “From Russia’s Shadow Fleet to China’s Maritime Claims.”
20    Interview with the author, April 22, 2025.
21    
22    
23     Interview with the author, April 14, 2025.
24    “The Joint Expeditionary Force,” Joint Expeditionary Force, last visited May 12, 2025, https://jefnations.org/.

The post The world needs a maritime ‘elite league’ to combat rogue shipping appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>
US interests can benefit from stronger congressional ties with the Caribbean   https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/in-depth-research-reports/issue-brief/us-interests-can-benefit-from-stronger-congressional-ties-with-the-caribbean/ Wed, 04 Jun 2025 18:00:00 +0000 https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/?p=851385 The US has a northern border, a southern border, and a third border: The Caribbean. Inconsistent US policies have weakened ties. Stronger and more consistent congressional engagement can build lasting cooperation, safeguard US interests, and support regional growth.

The post US interests can benefit from stronger congressional ties with the Caribbean   appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>

Toplines

  • The Caribbean’s geographic proximity to the United States—as well as its use as a transit point for US citizens, goods, and financial services—makes it a crucial hub for US national interests. However, the relationship has suffered from inconsistent and infrequent assistance. Changes in US policy priorities bring ever-changing adjustments to US engagement, leaving the Caribbean, its leadership, and its institutions with insufficient time to benefit from US policy action.
  • For Caribbean countries, policy continuity is critical for implementation and to see tangible and meaningful development. The region’s small populations and markets, vulnerability to natural disasters and changing global commodity prices, and limited institutional capacity slow the pace of receiving and utilizing development assistance and support.
  • Underpinning US-Caribbean ties with stronger US congressional engagement can provide needed longevity to the relationship. Congressional actions—like newly appropriated resources and committee hearings—can bring tangible benefits to US-Caribbean relations.

Where should the US Congress put its attention?

The heterogenous nature of the Caribbean offers various opportunities to strengthen relations with the region and, by extension, advance US interests. From natural gas to geothermal energy, Caribbean countries offer new opportunities for US investment. Reducing crime and gang proliferation across the region can protect US citizens traveling abroad and stem the potential flow of illicit goods and services.

Energy security

The United States can strengthen its positioning in the Caribbean by supporting regional energy security. At current estimated reserves, Guyana, Suriname, and Trinidad and Tobago house almost 30 trillion cubic feet of natural gas, with further offshore exploration expected to increase the size of reserves. At the same time, other countries require reliable power generation–which can be provided by liquified natural gas (LNG) imports–to provide resilience to their electricity grids during natural disasters, improve economic competitiveness, and to underpin ambitions to add renewables to their energy matrix.

Here, the United States will find opportunities on three fronts. First, natural gas exploration opportunities, liquefaction infrastructure, and building pipelines and LNG storage are areas where US oil and gas companies and mid-size service-based companies can invest. Second, imported oil from Guyana, Suriname, and Trinidad and Tobago can be low-cost and competitive options vis a vis other suppliers to satisfy growing US energy demand and supplement domestic shale supply in Texas and Midwestern states. Finally, congressional members can work with the Southern Caribbean hydrocarbon producers to support energy security in Europe and lessen demand for Russian energy resources by increasing cargo exports to EU members.

Greater Caribbean energy security can also lead to lower electricity prices, which can benefit constituents of US congressional members traveling to the Caribbean and potentially reduce migration to the United States. Most of the region (except for Suriname and Trinidad and Tobago) pays some of the highest electricity in the Americas (see Figure 3), which is on average, double or triple what US consumers pay. At the same time, electricity costs can account for almost 70 percent of a hotel’s utility due to air conditioning, lighting, and heating, among others.

Therefore, to keep profits stable, the high costs translate to the consumer–in this case, US tourists. This means that by bringing down electricity costs and lowering the cost to travel and having overnight stays in the Caribbean, US tourists benefit and have more purchasing power to buy in-country goods (most of which are imported from the United States). Further, reducing electricity prices can stem Caribbean emigration flows to US shores given that high costs of living are a key migratory push factor.

Reducing violent crime and gang activity

Security concerns in the Caribbean are on the rise. Figure 4 shows that Caribbean countries have high homicide rates (per 100,000) relative to their Latin American neighbors. Rates have been on the rise due to increased gang proliferation and illegal imports of small arms–many of which originate from the United States. For example, countries like Trinidad and Tobago, declared a state of emergency late 2024 due to increased gang activity and the usage of high-powered assault weapons. Gang proliferation is also on the rise. While Caribbean countries do not house large gangs, smaller gangs pervade the region, using the informal ports of entry to move illicit guns, goods, and services. In 2021, Jamaica identified 379 different gangs with 140 named in 2023 for Trinidad and Tobago. The decentralized nature of criminal and gang networks in the region inhibits Caribbean governments and police forces’ abilities to combat gang operations. Further, gangs in the Caribbean, especially in Jamaica, are turf oriented. This allows smaller gangs to gain a foothold in local communities, sometimes acting as community leaders and providing needed social services and protection from rival gangs.

Addressing the Caribbean’s security challenges can protect US citizens traveling to the region and curb gang activity and illicit trafficking before they reach US shores. Travel destinations for US citizens, such as Jamaica and islands in the Eastern Caribbean are among the most violent in the region. Therefore, improving citizen safety in the Caribbean ensures US citizens’ safety as well. Given that gun-related activities are a primary driver of citizen insecurity, one solution is for US agencies to work closer with Caribbean defense and police forces to improve monitoring, tracking, and seizures of illegal small arms.

Further, stemming gang activity in the region can also disrupt transnational criminal organizations’ operations. Specifically, Caribbean countries are used as a transit point for drugs, many of which end up in the United States. Enhanced maritime security and interdiction in the Caribbean Sea can help interrupt illegal drug supply chains and weaken transnational criminal organizations. However, the capacity to monitor drug flows is a challenge. Partnerships with the United States to gain access to satellite imagery and drone technologies to identify drug shipment routes can provide Caribbean governments the needed tools to tackle drug flows.

Bottom lines

  • The challenges facing Caribbean countries are growing and have consequences that are not constrained to the region’s geographic borders, likely to directly or indirectly affect US interests. This can be avoided if there are consistent and strong partnerships between the Caribbean and the United States. This can and should start with stronger US congressional engagement to the region.
  • US congressional members should consider legislation that prioritizes a holistic strategy with appropriated resources to the Caribbean. While CBSI tackles security challenges, support is needed across the energy, infrastructure development, agricultural, and financial services, among others.
  • Given the importance of the Caribbean to US interests, the House Foreign Affairs Committee should consider a hearing that highlights new opportunities to strengthen US interests in the Caribbean and the broader US-Caribbean partnership.
  • Strengthening US-Caribbean ties start with building a foundation for a long-term partnership. US congressional engagement can help turn four-year policies into decades of friendship, all while protecting US interests along its “third border.”

Read the full issue brief

About the authors

Related content

Explore the program

The Adrienne Arsht Latin America Center broadens understanding of regional transformations and delivers constructive, results-oriented solutions to inform how the public and private sectors can advance hemispheric prosperity.

The post US interests can benefit from stronger congressional ties with the Caribbean   appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>
For NATO in 2027, European leadership will be key to deterrence against Russia https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/in-depth-research-reports/issue-brief/for-nato-in-2027-european-leadership-will-be-key-to-deterrence-against-russia/ Mon, 02 Jun 2025 17:00:00 +0000 https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/?p=847517 NATO lacks the operational integration, logistics, and joint force capabilities needed to quickly counter Russian mass and tempo near its borders. With the United States increasingly focused elsewhere, how can the Alliance retain military superiority in 2027 without overreliance on US military might?

The post For NATO in 2027, European leadership will be key to deterrence against Russia appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>

Key takeaways

  • If Russia were to move rapidly against the Baltic states, NATO could not defend its territory effectively without the United States.
  • European allies need to rearm quickly, but a push for full “strategic autonomy” from the United States risks destabilizing the continent and the Alliance.
  • The United States and NATO need to make smarter, faster decisions about who buys what and how the hardware, software, and data operate together. A Force Mix Analysis can point out the choices needed so that by 2027 European NATO states can independently defend their northeastern border.

NATO faces a growing threat from a resurgent Russia capable of hybrid and kinetic aggression across the Northeast Corridor—from Finland, the Baltic region, and Poland to the Black Sea. Currently, NATO’s defense posture relies heavily on US military support for intelligence, surveillance, and reconnaissance (ISR), strategic lift, command and control (C2), and the extended deterrence provided by the US nuclear umbrella. With the United States increasingly focused on the Indo-Pacific region and committed to burden sharing, and with growing calls for European strategic autonomy, NATO must be able to deter and respond to threats as a unified entity—one not effectively dependent on US warfighting capability and capacity. Regardless of spending levels, NATO must shift from a national-centric approach to an Alliance-wide mindset. This requires a shared engineering and analytics methodology to optimize defense resource allocations with a focus on speed, precision, and collaboration.

To assess the transatlantic geostrategic environment and explore strategic options available to NATO, MITRE and the Atlantic Council partnered to conduct a NATO Force Mix Analysis (NFMA). The findings of this analysis call for accelerated capability development, institutional reform, and operational integration under a forward-leaning, data-driven, mission-engineering framework. This framework would enable NATO to make data-informed decisions to:

  • Adaptively evolve concepts, operational decision making, and assignment of authorities toward more effective strategic outcomes.
  • Optimize funding investments and deliver unified capabilities that produce the best mission effects required for operational success.
  • Effectively leverage technology to achieve mass.

By 2027, NATO must strengthen the Baltic Defense Line. Timely action is essential to ensure credible deterrence, reassure frontline allies, and deny Russia any opportunity to test NATO’s resolve or readiness in a high-threat environment. To achieve this, the following actions are essential:

  • Prepare a warfighting burden-sharing roadmap.
  • Establish a unified NATO multidomain warfare doctrine.
  • Invest in multidomain C2 and ISR infrastructure.
  • Establish a NATO multidomain open system architecture.
  • Accelerate forward posture of heavy forces and integrated air and missile defense.
  • Enhance military mobility and industrial coordination.
  • Establish additional joint ISR fusion centers.
  • Develop a pan-European logistics control network.
  • Form multidomain operations (MDO) and cyber/influence task forces.

Together, these initiatives offer a blueprint for a more self-reliant, capable, and unified NATO in 2027—ready to meet emerging threats head-on.

Introduction

NATO’s deterrence posture in the Baltic states is undermined by an overreliance on US military capabilities. In a crisis where the United States were focused elsewhere, European NATO nations may therefore be unable to mobilize a timely, effective response. This overreliance creates both strategic and operational vulnerabilities that can be exploited by Russia to challenge the Alliance’s credibility and threaten national sovereignty.

NATO’s ability to deter or respond rapidly to Russian aggression is limited by:

  • A lack of massed, ready combat forces in the theater.
  • Insufficient integrated air and missile defense.
  • Slow logistics and reinforcement timelines.
  • A lack of organic strategic mobility with a reliance on US air and sealift.
  • A reliance on US enablers for theater integrated C2, ISR, and mission networks.

Without the United States, NATO remains superior in numbers and technology on paper but lacks the operational integration, logistics, and joint force capabilities to rapidly match Russian mass and tempo near its borders. NATO must develop a force structure and a mix of capabilities that allow for the execution of regional defense plans with an emphasis on burden sharing. This modernization strategy must be objective, threat-based, and resource-informed.

The strategic context: A geopolitical landscape shaped by the orders forming around the US and China

The next few years will be pivotal for Europe and the Euro-Atlantic community, as shifting US geostrategic priorities toward the Indo-Pacific, persistent Russian threats, the rise of authoritarian powers, and a rapidly changing global order redefine the political landscape.

Alongside changing US and European Union (EU) defense priorities, the outcome of the war in Ukraine will be a critical factor in shaping NATO’s strategies. As the devolution of the post–Cold War liberal international order accelerates, with increasingly fluid relations between states, a new geopolitical landscape looms over the horizon, shaped by the bounded orders that the principal great powers, the United States and China, are forming around them. To address the challenges facing the United States in key theaters, adaptability and robust multidomain capabilities will be paramount in ensuring both regional stability and the protection of democratic values. Nowhere is this more relevant than in the Euro-Atlantic theater, as resource requirements in the Indo-Pacific region will continue to divert US resources there, making technology a key multiplier for the US European Command (EUCOM) and NATO.

Russia’s aggressive regional actions show no sign of slowing, with Moscow targeting Europe through both direct and indirect methods. As General Christopher Cavoli, EUCOM commander and the supreme allied commander Europe, recently testified before the US Senate, Russia has been and will likely remain a chronic threat to NATO. From military threats to hybrid warfare tactics—such as cyber-attacks, information campaigns, and economic pressure—Russia is further consolidating its influence in countries like Belarus, Moldova, Georgia, and Kazakhstan. As it rebuilds its military capabilities and doubles down on nuclear reliance, Russia is strengthening its ties with authoritarian regimes, creating an emerging “axis of dictatorships” alongside China, Iran, and North Korea.

The growing Russia–China partnership poses a unique challenge to NATO, particularly as China expands its influence globally and engages in economic warfare. That country also benefits from its de facto alliance with Russia by gaining access to some of Russia’s modernized military technology, while China, in turn, provides a vital economic lifeline to Russia and a “moral legitimacy” for Russia’s actions in Europe, which align with China’s designs on Taiwan. This fusion of economic and military power, coupled with assertive moves in the South China Sea and Taiwan Strait, is reshaping global dynamics and testing NATO’s reach and resilience. The West faces a rapidly evolving challenge, requiring swift, strategic responses to counter the growing authoritarian alliance that threatens global stability.

As Europe confronts an increasingly precarious security environment and potential friction in relations with the United States, the European Union appears to be doubling down on its efforts to achieve strategic autonomy. In March 2025, the EU unveiled a bold white paper outlining plans to significantly boost defense spending, foster collaborative defense projects, and shift toward purchasing European-made arms. This move is designed to close critical capability gaps in missile defense, drones, and cyber warfare, while also pooling resources to create a more unified defense infrastructure. The proposal even includes borrowing up to €150 billion for defense loans, aiming to reduce fragmentation in Europe’s defense industry and enhance the continent’s self-reliance. At the same time, recent elections in Germany have introduced new dynamics into that country’s defense policy. The newly elected leadership is reevaluating its defense priorities, a shift that could have significant implications for Germany’s role within NATO and its contributions to collective defense. Friedrich Merz, the incoming chancellor, has successfully lobbied the Bundestag to lift the legal deficit spending restrictions on defense, while repeatedly underscoring that Europe must chart an independent course. How Germany navigates this shift will be crucial in shaping Europe’s defense future and the tenor of transatlantic relations.

NATO, meanwhile, remains focused on deterrence and collective regional defense. With an emphasis on burden sharing and joint procurement of critical systems, the Alliance is rapidly expanding its combat-ready, forward-deployed forces in Poland and the Baltics, underpinned by a robust training and sustainment hub in Germany. The outcome of an ongoing US defense-posture review may drive additional modernization and deployment efforts, but this “fight tonight” readiness reflects NATO’s shared vow to defend European borders and ensure security. As NATO defense ministers have pointed out, these efforts demonstrate Europe’s increasing commitment to sharing the transatlantic defense load.

However, to truly succeed in its mission, NATO’s efforts must be underpinned by a data-driven approach. Modernization planning for its MDO strategy must integrate cutting-edge data analytics to ensure that defense initiatives are not only effective but responsive to the emerging threats of today and tomorrow. This strategy must be backed by a comprehensive Alliance-wide effort and a coordinated whole-of-government response to address NATO’s most pressing security challenges with agility and precision.

Europe stands at a critical juncture. There is potential tension inherent in Europe’s evolving commitment to strategic autonomy and strengthening NATO’s collective defense, as both ultimately rest on the ability to generate relevant, usable integrated capabilities. This demands a warfighting mindset, and an understanding of the acquisition, integration, and training required to be successful.

As Europe grapples with the challenges of an increasingly unpredictable world, the key question for NATO and collective defense will be what capabilities Europe can contribute to offer credible options to NATO. Success will hinge on how swiftly and effectively these efforts are coordinated and implemented, as they will significantly shape political decisions in the years ahead.

The war in Ukraine

Russia’s war on Ukraine has redrawn the European security map. It is a system-transforming conflict with asymmetric technology offsets, notably the emergence of drones and drone warfare. Regardless of the outcome, preexisting assumptions about transatlantic security and power distribution in Europe no longer hold. It is a litmus test for both NATO’s unity and the EU’s ability to sustain its support for Ukraine—especially as US military priorities shift toward Asia.

The coming months will be pivotal in determining how both institutions adapt to these pressures. NATO must reconcile the diverging priorities among its members, while the EU needs to strengthen its defense industrial base (DIB) to supply Ukraine, advance its own rearmament, and contribute to regional stability. As the crisis unfolds, the world will be watching how NATO and the EU respond—and whether they can navigate their internal divisions to confront the broader challenges ahead. Most of all, as the Trump administration endeavors to broker a ceasefire deal between Russia and Ukraine, the outcome of that process will likely be a defining factor in how the conflict unfolds in the coming months.

NATO’s cohesion is being put to the test, as the Trump administration’s pressure on allies to rearm generates a positive but uneven response. While some member states have stepped up defense spending, others remain hesitant, citing economic pressures and varying threat perceptions. The countries in the Baltic area and the Northeast Corridor have significantly increased their defense spending, while countries farther away from NATO’s eastern frontier have been less forthcoming. This divergence risks weakening unity and effectiveness. NATO must address internal tensions to remain a credible force.

The EU’s push to rearm is also being challenged. Economic strains, particularly in major European economies, threaten the EU’s ability to sustain a unified defense approach. The EU’s ambition to reduce dependency on the United States and bolster its defense capabilities is at risk unless it can harmonize the defense priorities of its member states. It also fails to address the most fundamental question of which country—absent a US nuclear umbrella—would provide a nuclear deterrent and in what fashion. This highlights the critical need for the EU to present a cohesive yet realistic program to address a dynamic regional and global security environment. While NATO remains the cornerstone of collective defense and deterrence in Europe, the EU can and must play a complementary role by strengthening defense industrial capacity, improving military mobility, and reinforcing political cohesion across the continent. The EU must use the financial and regulatory levers at its disposal to enable member states to meet their key capability requirements, as defined by NATO planning.

With the Ukraine conflict exposing vulnerabilities, NATO’s reinforced presence in the Baltic area and Poland has never been more essential. These regions are key to deterring further aggression and ensuring that European borders remain secure. At the same time, the war’s impact on energy security and global supply chains has pushed Europe to rethink its transition to green energy. No longer willing to rely on Russian energy, European nations are diversifying their sources and debating the future of clean energy initiatives. Some EU members have mooted the idea of reopening the Nord Stream pipelines and at least partially normalizing economic relations with Russia once a ceasefire in Ukraine has been put in place. But Europe’s challenges go beyond energy: NATO and the EU face the rise of hybrid warfare, autonomous systems and drone warfare, cyber threats, and false information campaigns—all of which undermine stability and test the Alliance’s adaptability.

Defense spending dilemmas, shrinking and fragmented defense industries

As global security challenges intensify, both US and European DIBs are grappling with serious capacity and scalability issues. The US DIB, now only 30 percent of its Cold War size, is strained by contractor consolidation and growing supply-chain vulnerabilities. Europe’s defense sector remains fragmented, hampered by disconnected industrial policies that stifle cross-border collaboration and scalability, with lead times from orders to delivery still unacceptably long.

To maintain strategic readiness and counter growing threats, both the United States and Europe must urgently come up with bold solutions:

  • Modular, scalable production facilities and additive manufacturing must be prioritized to rapidly adapt to shifting demands.
  • A significant boost in munition manufacturing capacity is needed to sustain large-scale conflict operations.
  • Cybersecurity enhancements across industrial and critical infrastructure networks are paramount to safeguard against emerging digital threats.
  • The integration of artificial intelligence (AI), robotics, and autonomous systems will empower defense forces to deliver rapid effects with minimal manpower.
  • Improved NATO coordination and interoperability are essential to ensure defense production is optimized, maximizing collective industrial capacity.

In President Donald Trump’s second term, the United States faces a critical defense spending dilemma exacerbated by fiscal constraints, military recruitment challenges, and the demands of potential simultaneous conflicts in both the Atlantic and Pacific theaters. These factors present significant risks to NATO, transatlantic relations, and global security. To address these challenges, NATO must move from the perennial talk about burden sharing to burden shifting and focus on transferring conventional combat capabilities from the United States to Europe. This shift will require deeper military integration and force modernization to maintain NATO’s effectiveness against growing threats from Russia and China. The United States must capitalize on its technological advantages while strengthening cooperation with European and Indo-Pacific allies. This approach will ensure the United States can balance its global commitments and continue to take the lead in maintaining international security. As a result, NATO’s collective defense efforts will remain robust amid evolving geopolitical pressures. In a nutshell, technology must be a critical force multiplier for the Alliance, helping to offset at least some of Russia’s advantage in mass.

Since its founding, NATO has depended on US leadership and military power. With the United States less able to provide the same level of conventional forces and infrastructure in Europe as it did during the Cold War and the 2000s, key NATO members—particularly Germany, France, and the United Kingdom—will have to significantly ramp up defense spending and military readiness. The key challenge will be to ensure that the EU doesn’t veer into a full-blown “strategic autonomy” project, as that would inevitably drain real resources from NATO. Instead, efforts at deeper European defense industrial integration should allow Europe to take greater responsibility for its security by resourcing core conventional deterrence capabilities within NATO, while still benefiting from US strategic support. In this new landscape, NATO’s collective defense would benefit, as regional defense plans would be backed by real, exercised capabilities—ensuring NATO is once again up to the task. Should the opposite happen—i.e., if Germany decides to push the EU to chart an independent course from the United States—the ensuing stresses in transatlantic relations would further fracture European politics and likely make the continent more vulnerable to Russian blackmail or all-out aggression down the line.

European NATO nations have pledged to increase defense spending to 2 percent of gross domestic product, and many exceed that benchmark. Yet current European force posture in the Baltic states and elsewhere in the Northeast Corridor is insufficient to deter or respond to a rapid Russian incursion without significant external reinforcement. NATO needs to:

  • Approach European rearmament in a way that builds credible, multidomain, combat-ready formations while keeping the United States engaged.
  • Conduct a comprehensive review of capabilities and gaps (where the United States is engaged) to inform future force design and new operational concepts and doctrine to underpin collective defense.
  • Develop a capability roadmap that enables burden sharing across the Alliance.

The view within NATO: What the Alliance needs by 2027

In response to Russia’s expanding capabilities, NATO has embraced a deterrence-by-denial posture, focusing on MDO to counteract aggression. This includes deploying forward forces, pre-positioning critical equipment, and developing operational concepts that prioritize holding the line and achieving rapid victory. Success will depend on massed effects and orchestrated battlefield efforts, with the unique strengths of each NATO member synchronized to support one another.

To counter emerging threats, NATO must urgently strengthen its logistical networks and mobility, ensuring rapid reinforcement of its eastern borders. Investment in key north-south road and rail corridors to enhance mobility along the eastern flank—from Scandinavia to the Baltic and Black seas—is essential for seamless troop and resource movement. Equally critical are interoperable C2 systems, designed with a data-centric, on-demand capability approach. These systems must integrate multidomain forces across nations, services, and echelons to maintain cohesion and operational effectiveness. To meet these challenges, NATO must modernize its infrastructure and adopt a wartime mindset, focusing on resilience, readiness, and strategic investments in critical capabilities. The Alliance must establish the necessary authorities to institutionally act with specific member states working in tandem with the EU to invest in critical infrastructure upgrades that support NATO operational requirements.

Russia’s military modernization efforts include enhancing unmanned systems for ISR and attack operations, networked fires, advanced weapons like hypersonic missiles, and robust cyber capabilities. Coupled with hybrid tactics such as false information campaigns, cyber-attacks, and sabotage, Russia poses an increasingly complex threat—especially with its use of “gray zone” strategies designed to blur the lines between conventional and irregular warfare. To counter these threats, NATO must be able to rapidly mobilize and deploy forces, emphasizing massed effects and MDO to blunt Russia’s initial momentum. The first seventy-two hours are critical, as Russia would aim to quickly seize territory and key infrastructure. Denying Russia these early operational gains could provide a critical off-ramp to avoid a protracted conflict. The following operational needs are key to NATO’s success:

  • Track and target key Russian units by using advanced C2 and ISR capabilities, holding them at risk before conflict escalates.
  • Surge reinforcements to hot spots through enhanced rapid deployment mechanisms as tensions rise.
  • Deploy highly lethal forces, supported by unmanned systems, to halt Russian advances at the point of contact, using well-coordinated defensive positions and preplaced forces.
  • Counterattack through multidomain orchestration and converged effects, targeting Russian C2 and employing anti-armor and long-range precision fires systems to disrupt rapid advances.
  • Build integrated, trained formations capable of maneuvering and attacking Russian forces, logistics, and C2 systems to reclaim territory and reestablish international boundaries.

NATO must continue to strengthen its forward combat-ready presence with balanced rotational and permanently stationed forces, while investing in fires and defensive capabilities that provide a reinforcement window from the United States and other NATO nations. Critical to ensuring deterrence by denial is the top-down commitment from member states to operationalize multidomain C2, NATO’s unified networking and digital infrastructure.

Building an effective NATO force design

The Alliance must ensure that procured systems are the right systems based on regional plans, capability targets, and desired mission effects and work together seamlessly to create an integrated and interoperable multidomain force. To that end, NATO must:

  • Deploy multinational MDO groups with shared ISR, C2, and kinetic/nonkinetic fires to overwhelm Russian forces and halt their advance.
  • Expand integrated air and missile defense systems to counter advanced threats, including drones.
  • Enhance rapid deployment and mobility through improved multimodal transport corridors and strategic airlift capabilities.
  • Implement layered force protection and counter-mobility measures along NATO’s borders, buying time for multidomain forces to strike Russian formations deep inside their territory.
  • Pre-position critical supplies (ammunition, fuel, heavy equipment) along the eastern flank.
  • Invest in pooled and shared resources across member states, particularly in high-tech areas like satellite communications, drones, AI, and surveillance platforms.
  • Invest in integrated training and experimentation to create strategic deterrence.

Establishing a NATO multidomain operations strategy

NATO’s ability to conduct effective MDO has never been more crucial. To counter Russia’s expanding military capabilities, NATO must integrate and leverage all domains—land, air, sea, cyber, and space—into a unified, cohesive strategy. MDO allow NATO to rapidly respond, disrupt enemy operations, and maintain strategic advantage. By improving interoperability, developing common standards, and building a seamless digital ecosystem, NATO can enhance its operational effectiveness and ensure rapid, coordinated action across all member nations. To counter Russia’s aggression and to reinforce its role as the cornerstone of global security, NATO must put forward an MDO strategy focused on a range of critical capabilities:

  • A next-generation multidomain C2 system: This system must integrate all operational domains—land, sea, air, space, and cyber—into a single, unified interface for commanders. It should be fully interoperable across NATO member states and their national C2 architectures, enabling seamless cross-domain integration and battlefield orchestration, regardless of time, geography, or mission requirements.
  • Integrated multidomain C2 operations centers: Within NATO’s multinational divisions, corps, and joint force commands, these centers can help to integrate situational awareness of national forces. Progress must continue to enable them to be networked to orchestrate operations across all domains, ensuring quick, coordinated action.
  • Integrated ISR fusion centers: These centers must break down information-sharing barriers and integrate intelligence from multiple domains to provide real-time, actionable insights that are essential for swift decision making that enables expanded maneuver and cross-domain fires.
  • AI (algorithmic warfare): AI will be pivotal in predictive analytics, persistent targeting, effects planning, and operational decision support. These algorithms can enhance decision making by providing commanders with insights on potential outcomes and courses of action.
  • Cyber-resilient digital architectures: The zero-trust model secures critical systems and data by minimizing attack surfaces, enforcing least-privilege access, and enabling resilient, segmented networks. NATO’s digital infrastructure must employ this cybersecurity model to be protected from adversarial attacks that could disrupt or manipulate critical data, AI algorithms, and operational capabilities, ensuring system integrity and operational continuity.
  • Autonomous systems: Leveraging low cost, expendable systems for reconnaissance, targeting, maneuver, lethal and nonlethal fires, and logistical support will significantly increase operational efficiency and reduce risks to personnel in contested environments.
  • Unified networking and digital infrastructure: A data-centric approach will enable plug-and-play software development tailored to mission needs, ensuring NATO’s digital systems remain agile and responsive to emerging threats.

NATO must prioritize systems thinking, integration, and data interoperability within a unified, multidomain digital architecture. This approach is vital to ensuring that collective defense and deterrence capabilities are effective and adaptable to the complexities of modern warfare. These measures can significantly enhance NATO’s deterrence posture by leveraging technology to achieve mass and counter emerging threats. Success hinges on developing common standards, fostering interoperability across national systems, and creating a robust digital ecosystem that facilitates seamless data flow and decision making.

Envisioning NATO’s future through mission engineering

The United States and NATO must make smarter, faster decisions about what capabilities to acquire and how to integrate them within an multidomain force design. Every acquisition and force-development decision should be driven by a clear understanding of why it’s needed, when it’s needed, where it will be deployed, and what mission outcomes are expected. Only by focusing on these key factors can NATO build the warfighting capability and capacity needed for future success within the urgent timelines required.

NATO force modernization is not just about increasing defense spending—it is about spending smarter and optimizing the resources in hand more effectively. Regardless of spending levels, NATO must shift from a national-centric approach to an Alliance-wide mindset. This requires a shared engineering and analytics methodology to optimize defense resource allocations with a focus on speed, precision, and collaboration.

By investing in forward-deployed forces, integrated air and missile defense, multidomain warfare enabled by integrated C2 and ISR, autonomous systems, and resilient logistics, European NATO nations can strengthen deterrence and response capabilities—without relying on immediate US military intervention.

NATO, especially NATO European nations, must rapidly transform warfighting concepts and capabilities to counter a resurgent Russian threat by 2027. This demands agile decision making and investment in technological innovation, seamless integration, and interoperability—all essential to generate combat mass and achieve dominance in multidomain warfare.

MITRE’s data-driven, systems-thinking approach coupled with the Atlantic Council’s Euro-Atlantic strategic knowledge revolutionizes multidomain force design by combining scenario-based mission engineering and operational analysis. Known as the NATO Force Mix Analysis, this powerful methodology assesses and optimizes military force structures, C2, ISR, and fires architectures, all aligned with strategic capability options in a threat-driven context to help inform coordinated, future-ready investment strategies across the Alliance.

If broadly adopted, the NFMA can help NATO—especially European members—accelerate capability development, respond more effectively to current and emerging threats, and validate new technologies through continuous, real-world analysis and experimentation. This, in turn, would enable faster deployment of critical systems and smarter operational decisions. Specifically, the NFMA could support NATO in the following ways:

  • Inform early deployment of experimental platforms and operational concepts. Prototypes will be evaluated in both live exercises and fielded operational environments to test performance, uncover capability gaps, and refine tactics. This would enable NATO to assess the real-world effectiveness of emerging technologies and operational concepts before full-scale integration.
  • Provide the foundation for continuous testing and evaluation of tactics, techniques, and procedures in varied operational scenarios. Through persistent experimentation, NATO will remain adaptable, learning and evolving in response to new threats and opportunities for innovation.
  • Enable rapid development and procurement of new capabilities to ensure NATO can meet evolving defense needs. Employing open architectures and agile acquisition for fielding critical capabilities will reduce time to implementation and enhance operational flexibility.
  • Help NATO collectively identify and field the right combination of force structures, technologies, and operational strategies to strengthen its deterrence posture while maintaining agility and readiness. Through mission engineering, operational prototyping, persistent experimentation, and agile acquisition, NATO can test new capabilities and refine operational strategies to ensure sustained deterrence and rapid response in the Baltic region.

The Alliance must assess and adapt its force mix to operate in a contested, multidomain environment. The following analytic questions are critical to guiding NATO’s posture, readiness, and resilience amid evolving threats and uncertain US. force commitments.

  • How can NATO combat readiness and forward presence be improved?
  • How can NATO establish a resilient, multidomain C2 and ISR architecture and how does NATO best offset a reduction in US commitment of its capability and capacity?
    • How resilient is European C3 and ISR under cyber and kinetic attack?
    • What data integration and decision processes enable NATO unity and speed?
  • How can NATO improve persistent targeting and lethality?
    • How can NATO establish a joint fires network?
    • What is the role of AI and autonomous systems in targeting and lethality?
  • What is required for integrated air and missile defense (including counter-unmanned aircraft systems) to hold the line?
  • What is required for NATO to successfully execute contested logistics forward in the battlespace? Can NATO sustain thirty-plus days of combat operations without US strategic lift, theater lift, and logistics assets and expertise?

The NATO 2027 use case: Insights and priorities

Initial insights from the NFMA underscore several operational priorities critical to NATO Europe’s ability to independently deter or defeat a Russian offensive in the Baltic region by 2027, particularly in scenarios with limited or delayed US engagement. These insights highlight the importance of integrating advanced fires, mobility, survivability, and C2 capabilities into a cohesive, MDO concept.

Key findings and operational priorities include:

  • Countering Russian mass and tempo with integrated fires: NATO must pair long-range precision fires with close-combat drone swarms to disrupt and degrade Russian force concentration and tempo. This layered approach enhances survivability while enabling rapid effects across the depth of the battlespace.
  • Persistent targeting via multidomain fires and C2 networks: Success in a high-threat environment requires a persistent, integrated “kill chain” linking ISR, C2, and fires across all domains. NATO must be capable of delivering operational-level fires from standoff range to neutralize Russian anti-access/area-denial systems, command nodes, and massed maneuver forces within key mobility corridors.
  • Overmatch in mobility, countermobility, and survivability: NATO forces must dominate the terrain through superior mobility and countermobility operations, creating choke points and engagement zones that slow Russian advances and funnel them into preplanned kill boxes. Critical targeting priorities include Russian combat engineering units that enable cross-country movement and breaching operations, in addition to traditional C2 and logistics nodes.
  • Integrated, layered force protection and terrain shaping: A combination of physical border fortifications, camouflaged forward positions, and active defense systems is required to delay Russian momentum and generate tactical opportunities—creating conditions for NATO forces to strike with precision anti-armor fires, loitering munitions, and coordinated drone swarms, especially at choke points and terrain seams.

These insights reinforce the need for NATO to invest in operational prototyping, joint experimentation, and rapid fielding of advanced fires and survivability capabilities. Implementing these priorities through a data-driven, mission-engineering approach will ensure NATO Europe is postured for success in a contested, near-peer conflict environment.

Recommendations

Building on the operational insights from the NFMA, the following recommendations are aimed at enabling NATO Europe to independently deter, respond to, and potentially defeat Russian aggression in the Baltic states by 2027. These measures are designed to accelerate capability development, institutional reforms, and operational integration in line with a forward-leaning, data-informed, mission-engineering framework.

  • Prepare a warfighting burden-sharing roadmap: NATO must develop a capability roadmap that enables burden sharing and, where appropriate, burden transfer from the United States to Europe for critical warfighting capabilities while addressing gaps to achieve threat overmatch.
  • Establish a unified NATO multidomain warfare doctrine: Develop and implement a multidomain operational concept, aligning land, air, maritime, cyber, and space operations across regional defense plans and force structures.
  • Invest in multidomain C2 and ISR infrastructure: Build a resilient, interoperable digital architecture to support real-time C2, dynamic targeting, and cross-domain ISR sharing among allies.
  • Establish a NATO multidomain open system architecture: Create an open system test and experimentation architecture to drive C2 interoperability and rapid deployment based on mission and user need.
  • Accelerate forward posture of heavy forces and IAMD: Pre-position armored units and layered air and missile defenses in key forward areas to enable rapid combat mass and early crisis response.
  • Enhance military mobility and industrial coordination: Improve cross-border military transit and align defense industrial base efforts for surge production of critical systems and munitions.
  • Establish additional joint ISR fusion centers: Set up additional ISR hubs in Germany, Poland, and Finland that build on existing Baltic centers to provide persistent battlespace awareness and theater-level targeting.
  • Develop a pan-European logistics control network: Create a secure, integrated logistics system to sustain operations under contested conditions, incorporating civilian and military infrastructure.
  • Form MDO and cyber/influence task forces: Deploy specialized units to coordinate cross-domain fires and information operations, supported by integration cells at corps and division levels.
  • Conduct no-notice Article 5 rehearsal war games (without US surge forces): Routinely execute unscripted, short-notice multinational exercises to test NATO’s ability to respond to aggression under Article 5. Use outcomes to inform force posture and capability investments.
  • Build a NATO integrated training and validation program: The joint training architecture, in coordination with Supreme Headquarters Allied Powers Europe, will validate unit readiness and interoperability in line with the 2027 vision. This program should emphasize realistic, threat-informed scenarios and integration of new technologies and concepts.

Conclusion

To maintain NATO’s deterrence credibility and defend national sovereignty in the face of a reconstituted Russian threat, Europe must assume greater responsibility and operational capability. Achieving this NATO Europe 2027 vision requires more than policy alignment—it demands a mission-driven, technically grounded approach to force design, readiness, and modernization. In support of operationalizing this vision, the MITRE–Atlantic Council collaboration on the NATO Force Mix Analysis offers a reusable, scalable technical framework to guide strategic defense decisions through 2027 and beyond.

This framework integrates advanced digital engineering tools, mission-level modeling, and decision analytics to continuously evaluate NATO’s defense needs, mission requirements, and acquisition priorities in a dynamic threat environment. It provides a rigorous, evidence-based foundation for aligning strategy with capability development—supporting faster, smarter, and more resilient force planning across European allies.

Key enablers of the NATO 2027 vision include:

  • Mission-driven analysis: NFMA supports an ongoing assessment of force mix options aligned with strategic objectives, enabling nations to prioritize investments that close capability gaps and build operational mass.
  • Digital engineering and modeling: High-fidelity simulation and modeling environments allow planners to visualize and evaluate operational concepts, logistics, and reinforcement timelines under contested conditions—before investments are made.
  • Operational prototyping and experimentation: The NFMA approach enables early testing of new operational concepts and technologies through simulation, live exercises, and real-world experimentation—de-risking decisions and informing doctrine.
  • Agile acquisition support: Insights from the NFMA can guide iterative acquisition decisions, accelerating the deployment of high-impact capabilities such as ISR, integrated air defense, mobility assets, and interoperable C2 systems.

About the authors

Scott Lee is the chief engineer for multidomain operations and C2 at MITRE. In this role, he leads MITRE’s efforts to develop solutions that address the defense challenges and operational requirements of next-generation command and control and enabling systems in support of US and allied and partner warfighting concepts. He previously led MITRE’s Joint All-Domain C2 (JADC2) Cross-Cutting Priority.

Andrew Michta is a senior fellow in the GeoStrategy Initiative in the Atlantic Council’s Scowcroft Center for Strategy and Security and the former dean of the College of International and Security Studies at the George C. Marshall European Center for Security Studies. He holds a PhD in international relations from Johns Hopkins University. His areas of expertise include international security, NATO, and European politics and security, with a special focus on Central Europe and the Baltic states.

Peter Jones retired from the Army as a brigadier general and is a contract engineer at MITRE, providing broad support to the Army portfolio especially in the area of future concept development and experimentation in support of Training & Doctrine Command (TRADOC) and now predominately Army Future Command’s Future Concept Center. Prior to his retirement, Jones served for two years as the U.S. Army Infantry School Commandant and 56th Chief of Infantry.

Lisa Bembenick is the executive director of international security affairs for MITRE. She is responsible for MITRE’s international strategy and senior level relationships on defense issues related to the United States, Europe, and NATO, and positions MITRE to bring its technical capabilities to bear on critical security outcomes faced by NATO countries. She was previously director of strategy for MITRE’s National Security Engineering Center.

Acknowledgements

As part of their strategic partnership, the Atlantic Council and MITRE have conducted a NATO Force Mix Analysis, examining ways to harden the Alliance’s eastern flank, measure the value of multidomain operations, and deter Russian aggression. This paper is jointly produced by the Atlantic Council and MITRE.

MITRE and the Atlantic Council gratefully acknowledge Meg Adams, Greg Crawford, LeAnne Howard, Jackson Ludwig, and Matt McKaig for their valuable contributions to the publication of this paper.

The authors would also like to thank Paul O’Donnell, Lori Fermano, Phillippe Dickinson, Sheila Gagen, Bailey Galicia, and Sydney Sherry for their editorial assistance.

Related content

Explore the program

The Scowcroft Center for Strategy and Security works to develop sustainable, nonpartisan strategies to address the most important security challenges facing the United States and the world.

The post For NATO in 2027, European leadership will be key to deterrence against Russia appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>
The fall of Assad has opened a door. But can Syria seize the moment? https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/in-depth-research-reports/report/the-fall-of-assad-has-opened-a-door-but-can-syria-seize-the-moment/ Mon, 02 Jun 2025 13:00:00 +0000 https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/?p=849780 This report presents a realistic and holistic vision for Syria's transition, recovery, and its reintegration into the international system.

The post The fall of Assad has opened a door. But can Syria seize the moment? appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>

For more than a decade, Syria’s crisis has caused unimaginable suffering inside the country and a constant stream of strategically significant spillover effects across the Middle East and globally. However, this dynamic changed in late 2024, when armed opposition groups in Syria’s northwest launched a sudden and unprecedentedly sophisticated and disciplined offensive, capturing the city of Aleppo and triggering an implosion of Bashar al-Assad’s regime. In the space of ten days, Assad’s rule collapsed like a house of cards, dealing a crippling blow to Iran’s role in Syria and significantly weakening Russia’s influence. 

Now, for the first time in many years, Syria has a chance to recover and reintegrate into the international system. If the United States, Europe, Middle Eastern nations, and other stakeholders embrace the right approach, support the right policies, and encourage Syria’s transition to move in the appropriate direction, the world will benefit—and Syrians will find peace. The work of the Syria Strategy Project (SSP) and the policy recommendations in the report “Reimagining Syria: A roadmap for peace and prosperity beyond Assad” present a realistic and holistic vision for realizing that goal. 

This report is the result of intensive joint efforts by the Atlantic Council, the Middle East Institute (MEI), and the European Institute of Peace (EIP), which have been collaborating since March 2024 on the SSP. At its core, the project has involved a sustained process of engagement with subject-matter experts and policymakers in the United States, Europe, and across the Middle East to develop a realistic and holistic strategic vision for sustainably resolving Syria’s crisis. This process, held almost entirely behind closed doors, incorporated Syrian experts, civil society organizations, and other stakeholders at every step.

View the full report

Partner organizations

Explore the project

Related content

Explore the program

Through our Rafik Hariri Center for the Middle East and Scowcroft Middle East Security Initiative, the Atlantic Council works with allies and partners in Europe and the wider Middle East to protect US interests, build peace and security, and unlock the human potential of the region.

The post The fall of Assad has opened a door. But can Syria seize the moment? appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>
New presidents and new nuclear developments test the United States–Republic of Korea alliance https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/in-depth-research-reports/issue-brief/new-presidents-and-new-nuclear-developments-test-the-united-states-republic-of-korea-alliance/ Fri, 30 May 2025 22:26:48 +0000 https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/?p=850416 In the coming years, the US-South Korea (Republic of Korea, or ROK) alliance is likely to be tested in at least three fundamental ways: by a concerning growth in North Korea’s nuclear and ballistic missile weapons program; by changes to ROK defense capabilities and structures, including the establishment of ROK Strategic Command (ROKSTRATCOM); and by potential strategy and policy changes under new US and ROK political administrations.

The post New presidents and new nuclear developments test the United States–Republic of Korea alliance appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>

Key takeaways

  • South Korea’s new President, who will be elected on June 3, will have to grapple with many South Koreans’ unease with relying on the United States’ nuclear arsenal for deterring North Korea.
  • The first and most important test the US-South Korea alliance under Trump and the incoming new South Korean president faces is the continuing growth of North Korea’s nuclear and ballistic missile capabilities.
  • South Korea’s establishment of a new strategic command outside of the combined US-ROK military structure highlights Seoul’s willingness and capability to take greater responsibility for deterring North Korea, but careful coordination will be required to ensure this strengthens rather than strains the alliance.

In the coming years, the US-South Korea (Republic of Korea, or ROK) alliance is likely to be tested in at least three fundamental ways: by a concerning growth in North Korea’s nuclear and ballistic missile weapons program; by changes to ROK defense capabilities and structures, including the establishment of ROK Strategic Command (ROKSTRATCOM); and by potential strategy and policy changes under new US and ROK political administrations.

Though the alliance may rise to the challenges of these tests to emerge stronger, these factors could potentially prevent the United States and the Republic of Korea from leveraging the mutual benefits that come from being integrated into a unified wartime command system and the long-standing ideal of a US-ROK bilateral agreement that emphasizes mutual defense. The United States will need to continue to adapt its approach, account for its ally’s perspectives, and plan for the inevitable change to the status quo on the Korean Peninsula.

A second North Korean enrichment facility heightens security concerns in Seoul

The first test for the alliance is the continuing growth of North Korea’s nuclear and ballistic missile programs. Current estimates suggest Pyongyang has enough fissile material to build up to 90 nuclear warheads, which generates compelling security concerns that could create tension among two longtime and staunch allies—the United States and the Republic of Korea. North Korean leader Kim Jong Un has placed increasing importance on the regime’s nuclear weapons development in the last decade, portraying nuclear weapons as not only defensive but providing the means to win in conflict. In September 2022, North Korea promulgated a new law that laid out a much broader approach to the use of nuclear weapons, including their employment in various conditions.  

In 2023, Kim updated Article 58 of the state’s constitution to “ensure the country’s right to existence and development, deter war and protect regional and global peace by rapidly developing nuclear weapons to a higher level.” In September 2024, North Korean state media released photos for the first time of a suspected second uranium enrichment facility and Kim called for a higher number of more capable centrifuges to boost his plans to “exponentially” increase nuclear warhead production. Further, 2025 marks the final year for Kim to achieve the military capability development goals laid out in his five-year plan.

Kim Jong Un touring a uranium enrichment facility at an undisclosed location. Photo released by Korean Central News Agency, September 2024.

North Korea has a nuclear dyad with land- and sea-based nuclear weapons, and it is developing new technologies, including hypersonic gliding flight warheads and multiple independently targetable reentry vehicles, consistent with Kim’s drive to rapidly develop nuclear weapons and the five-year plan. North Korea’s Strategic Forces have short-range, medium-range, intermediate-range, and intercontinental ballistic missiles (ICBMs), along with 200 road-mobile launchers. North Korea’s continued development of its rail-based ballistic system shows the regime’s efforts to diversify launch platforms, including various vehicles and ground launch pads and potentially submarines, and increase the survivability of its force. While Kim’s ability to strike the US homeland with North Korean ICBMs only grows with additional testing and the introduction and testing of its solid-fuel ICBM in 2023, the regime is also hard at work improving the efficacy of its precision-guided tactical nuclear weapons, which are designed to significantly damage South Korea and US forces on the peninsula, as well as create response challenges for the alliance.

In addition, North Korea is moving forward on its sea-based deterrent. It has ballistic missiles and what it terms ”strategic” (alluding to long range and nuclear capability) cruise missiles for both developmental, missile-firing submarines and underwater platforms. Its tactical nuclear attack submarine, the Hero Kim Kun Ok, is designed to launch tactical nuclear weapons from underwater. In January 2024, the regime tested its underwater unmanned nuclear weapon system, the Haeil-5-23, as a purported response to the trilateral US-ROK-Japan maritime exercise. In January 2025, the regime tested an underwater-to-surface strategic guided cruise missile while also vowing to respond to the United States with the “toughest counteraction.”

Ultimately, North Korea wants to halt US-ROK joint (and multinational) military exercises and to splinter an alliance of seventy-plus-years between the two nations. Its determined and bellicose approach has the potential to highlight the asymmetry of what’s at stake between the United States and the ROK and, if unchecked, sow fear and doubt into the fabric of the alliance.

Would South Korea go nuclear? A shift in ROK defense architecture

The second test of the alliance follows changes in the ROK’s defense architecture and capabilities, including the advent of the ROK Strategic Command (ROKSTRATCOM), which may increase potential areas for divergence among allies even as the changes show the ROK’s increasing capability and willingness to take greater responsibility for its own defense. ROKSTRATCOM’s establishment may be an opportunity rather than just a challenge and it is perhaps more a response to an increasingly serious threat from North Korea than a shortfall in the US-ROK alliance. It nevertheless highlights that South Koreans may not feel US extended deterrence guarantees are sufficient given the growing North Korean threat.

Plans to establish ROKSTRATCOM were underway for over two years by the time of the command’s official establishment on October 1, 2024, yet many Americans either did not pay attention or believe there was a need for such a command on the Korean Peninsula. After all, the United States, South Korea’s strongest ally, has been with the ROK since the Korean War began in 1950. The two countries also have a long-standing Mutual Defense Treaty, signed shortly after the Korean War Armistice. So, for some observers, South Korea’s need for such a command was questionable. The United States already commits to defending South Korea, most visibly with 28,500 military personnel present on the peninsula and contributing to the Combined Forces Command, US Forces Korea, and the United Nations Command. Regular joint exercises and strategic activities, such as a port visit of the USS Kentucky ballistic missile submarine to Busan, also bolster this presence.

The ROK-US Combined Forces Command (CFC) marks its forty-sixth anniversary with a ceremony at Camp Humphreys, Pyeongtaek, November 7, 2024. Photo provided by United States Forces Korea.

Importantly, though, ROKSTRATCOM does not clearly fall under the combined alliance wartime command construct under a bi-national Combined Forces Command that has been in place since 1978. ROKSTRATCOM is instead an independent ROK-controlled command, currently led by ROK Air Force Lieutenant General Jin Young Seung, and it is still under development exactly how this new command will align and coordinate with CFC and other alliance constructs like the bilateral Military Committee.

Markus Garlauskas, Indo-Pacific Security Initiative director, Scowcroft Center for Strategy and Security, with Lt. Gen. Jin Young Seung, ROKSTRATCOM commander, at the ROKSTRATCOM headquarters in February 2025. Photo provided by the Atlantic Council

Operationally, ROKSTRATCOM resides under the ROK Joint Chiefs of Staff, serving as an integrator of ROK armed forces’ strategic weapons systems from each military branch. In July 2024, a former ROK minister of defense expressed the administration’s vision of the command:

The strategic command will be a unit that leads the development of nuclear and conventional integrated operational concepts and plans and combat development in new areas such as space, cyber, and the electromagnetic spectrum in conjunction with the operation of the ROK-US Nuclear Consultative Group (NCG).

According to a news report citing the South Korean Ministry of National Defense, the command “would also give the orders to subordinate military assets to strike enemy targets or intercept hostile missiles as part of the Kill Chain strategy and the Korea Massive Punishment and Retaliation [KMPR] plan.” (See the ministry’s 2022 white paper for more information about the kill chain strategy and the KMPR plan.)

It is more than just command and control that is changing, however. South Korea’s independent strike capabilities are increasing. South Korea unveiled its most powerful conventional weapon, the Hyunmoo-5, referring to it as an “ultra-high-power ballistic missile.” The high-yield Hyunmoo-5 appears to be intended as a ROKSTRATCOM capability, integral to reinforcing ROK messages of an “overwhelming response” to any North Korea nuclear attack. It remains to be seen, however, how the command will contribute these forces to a conflict on the Korean Peninsula—and this calls into question the previously relied upon unified command system.

The establishment of ROKSTRATCOM is a historic event and time will tell if capabilities breed intentions. It appears South Korea is not willing to take the option of having nuclear weapons off the table despite the US nuclear umbrella and extended deterrence commitments. As the ROK continues to grapple with its current and future defense challenges, the United States should take care to be an integral part of this ROK process, thereby ensuring a better understanding of the intentions of allies, enhancing the alliance, and deterring North Korea from strategic attack.

New presidents in Washington and Seoul portend policy changes

The third test involves expected changes by the new Trump administration to US policies and strategies affecting the alliance, along with potential adjustments by the imminent new South Korean administration to its approach toward the alliance and to defense issues more broadly. Coupled with divisive domestic politics in both the United States and South Korea, these developments could potentially open old wounds and create new points of contention within the alliance. As the new US administration begins to set its tone for foreign policy for the rest of its term, many South Koreans seem hopeful, but uncertain. Meanwhile, South Korean media reports and commentaries are examining the implications of rumored US force reductions in Korea and other potential changes to US policy and strategy affecting the alliance as either challenges or opportunities.  

South Korea will soon have its own new president, after the martial law declaration by Yoon and his removal from office resulted in elections set for June 3. A new ROK president may well inject more uncertainty into the state of South Korean affairs, which could affect the alliance, as the country works to self-heal from Yoon’s surprising martial law announcement and the subsequent fallout.

Meanwhile, there are lingering questions about whether South Korea will eventually develop its own nuclear weapons. While many Americans empathize with South Korea’s undesirable position, its creation of ROKSTRATCOM and varied calls by ROK officials for nuclear weapons are concerning for US assurance efforts and, potentially, its nonproliferation policy. Would South Korea really go nuclear? Given the tense nuclear-armed neighborhood that surrounds the small country, and North Korea’s continued refusal to give up its nuclear weapons, many ask, “Why not?” Others, however, argue South Korea “cannot” or would “never” do so because it is a signatory of the Treaty on the Non-Proliferation of Nuclear Weapons (NPT). However, the NPT has a get-out-of-jail free card in Article X. According to a 2005 Arms Control Today article by the late arms control experts George Bunn and John B. Rhinelander:

Article X of the NPT provides a “right” to withdraw from the treaty if the withdrawing party “decides that extraordinary events, related to the subject matter of this [t]reaty, have jeopardized the supreme interests of its country.” It also requires that a withdrawing state-party give three months’ notice.

South Korean public discussion of a nuclear latency capability and indigenous nuclear weapons has been growing, with some officials publicly expressing the desire to keep the option open or to actually build nuclear weapons. Most recently, the People Power Party presidential candidate, Kim Moon Soo, announced that, if elected, he would pursue a nuclear latency capability—meaning that South Korea would be much closer to being able to build nuclear weapons on short notice. This indicates South Korea’s unease with relying on the United States as the only nuclear weapons responder to a growing North Korean nuclear arsenal.

Conclusion

These new hurdles—a more capable and threatening nuclear North Korea; a shift in South Korea’s defense architecture, including a unilateral strategic command; and presidential-level political changes—will inevitably strain the alliance, but may also present opportunities. The US-ROK alliance has remained ironclad, with more than seven decades of experience and adaptation, underpinned by a commitment to each other’s mutual defense. Now it is up to both countries to learn from their past while developing new approaches to the changing status quo. No matter who wins the ROK presidential election, the continued strength of the US-ROK alliance matters in the face of threats confronting both the United States and South Korea. Early and in-depth engagement by Washington with the new South Korean president to begin charting a new course for the alliance will ensure the US-ROK alliance emerges even stronger and more equipped to enhance each country’s interests, as well as underpin stability in the region.

About the authors

Heather Kearney is a nonresident fellow in the Indo-Pacific Security Initiative at the Atlantic Council’s Scowcroft Center for Strategy and Security. She is also a senior Indo-Pacific analyst in the Joint Exercise, Training, and Assessments Directorate at United States Strategic Command. As a senior analyst for risk of strategic deterrence failure, she leads a team dedicated to assessing trends in the environment in order to inform strategic risk assessments.

Amanda Mortwedt Oh is a USSTRATCOM liaison officer in the Office of Strategic Deterrence and Nuclear Policy, Strategic Stability, in the Joint Staff J-5 Directorate. She focuses her research on Northeast Asia and strategic deterrence and was most recently a Fall 2024 Nonproliferation Policy Education Center Policy Fellow. She is the previous director of international outreach and development at the Committee for Human Rights in North Korea (HRNK) and has published several articles and reports on North Korea’s prison camps and human rights issues. She is also a lawyer in the US Army Reserve Judge Advocate General’s Corps.

Disclaimer: The views presented in this article are those of the authors and do not necessarily represent the views of US Strategic Command, the US Air Force, the Department of Defense, or the US government.


The Tiger Project, an Atlantic Council effort, develops new insights and actionable recommendations for the United States, as well as its allies and partners, to deter and counter aggression in the Indo-Pacific. Explore our collection of work, including expert commentary, multimedia content, and in-depth analysis, on strategic defense and deterrence issues in the region.

Related content

Explore the program

The Indo-Pacific Security Initiative (IPSI) informs and shapes the strategies, plans, and policies of the United States and its allies and partners to address the most important rising security challenges in the Indo-Pacific, including China’s growing threat to the international order and North Korea’s destabilizing nuclear weapons advancements. IPSI produces innovative analysis, conducts tabletop exercises, hosts public and private convenings, and engages with US, allied, and partner governments, militaries, media, other key private and public-sector stakeholders, and publics.

The post New presidents and new nuclear developments test the United States–Republic of Korea alliance appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>
2024 honor roll of contributors https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/in-depth-research-reports/report/2024-annual-report-honor-roll/ Fri, 30 May 2025 15:03:48 +0000 https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/?p=842457 The Atlantic Council is grateful for the generous support of its partners. Explore the 2024 honor roll of contributions.

The post 2024 honor roll of contributors appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>
This list represents cash support received January 1, 2024–December 31, 2024. The Atlantic Council is grateful for the generous support of its partners. We strive to be complete and accurate in our recognition of our contributors. We regret any errors or omissions.

$1,000,000+ Contributors

Adrienne Arsht 

Bahaa Hariri 

Chevron 

Embassy of the United Arab Emirates 

Government of the United Kingdom 

Michael Fisch, American Securities Foundation 

Rawbank 

The Rockefeller Foundation 

SICPA 

System Capital Management 

United States Department of Defense 

United States Department of State 

$500,000—$999,999 Contributors

Amazon Web Services 

Anonymous (2) 

Emirates Nuclear Energy Corporation 

John F.W. Rogers, Goldman Sachs 

MITRE 

OneOne Ventures 

Rosamund Stone Zander 

Royal Norwegian Ministry of Foreign Affairs 

SAAB 

Smith Richardson Foundation 

Splunk Inc. 

$250,000—$499,999 Contributors

Airbus 

Alan Yang 

Anonymous (2) 

Apple 

Aramco Americas 

Bank of America Corporation 

Breakthrough Energy Foundation 

Çalik Holding 

Circle 

Crescent Petroleum 

Cyfrowy Polsat SA 

DAI 

Daniel Poneman 

ExxonMobil Corporation 

Foundation to Promote Open Society 

Gary Rieschel 

GE Vernova 

Google 

Hopelyn Investments 

Jeffrey M. Talpins Foundation 

The John Templeton Foundation 

Kostas Pantazopoulos 

Limak Holding 

Luminate 

Microsoft Corporation 

Ministry of Foreign Affairs of Sweden 

National Grid 

Omidyar Network 

PepsiCo 

PPD 

RBC Capital Markets 

Royal Norwegian Ministry of Defense 

Steptoe LLP 

United States Department of Energy 

United States Department of Housing and Urban Development 

Weiser Charitable Foundation 

$100,000—$249,999 Contributors

Accenture 

Adani North America 

The African Export-Import Bank 

Ahmed Charai 

Ahmet Ören 

Alpha Ring International 

Ambassador Clifford Sobel 

Andre Kelleners 

Anonymous 

Ayman Asfari 

Baker Hughes 

Bank Gospodarstwa Krajowego 

Blackstone Charitable Foundation 

CAE USA 

Canada Ukraine Foundation 

Carnegie Corporation of New York 

Cheniere Energy, Inc. 

Citi 

Clearpath Foundation 

The Coca-Cola Company 

Coinbase 

Dariusz Mioduski 

Democracy Fund 

Devon Energy 

Divyank Turakhia 

Edward A. Emerson 

E-INFRA 

Embassy of Bahrain to the United States 

Embassy of Denmark in the United States 

Eni S.p.A 

EQT Corporation 

Excelerate Energy L.P. 

Fincantieri 

General Atomics 

George Chopivsky 

German Foreign Federal Office 

Glen Echo Group 

Global Impact Ventures 

Google Poland Sp. z.o.o. 

Government of Canada 

Gregg Sherrill 

GS Energy 

Howard Baker Forum 

Howden Group 

Hunt Consolidated, Inc. 

Ihnatowycz Family Foundation 

Integer Capital Group 

Keith J. Krach and the Krach Institute for Tech Diplomacy at Purdue 

Ken and Joanna Sharpe 

KNDS 

Lockheed Martin Corporation 

The Malala Fund 

MAPA Group 

Mastercard 

Meg Gentle 

Melanie Chen and Gabriella Åhl-Chen  

Meta 

Morningstar Family Foundation 

Motwani Jadeja Foundation 

MSCI 

Mubadala Energy 

Mundys 

Nader Tavakoli 

NATO 

Newton and Rochelle Becker Charitable Trust 

New Venture Fund 

Northrop Grumman Corporation 

Oak Foundation 

One Earth Future 

Orlen Synthos Green Energy 

PAGE 

Pathways Alliance 

Pernod Ricard USA 

Pfizer 

Policy Center For The New South 

PPF 

PrimerAI 

Repsol 

Roche 

Rockefeller Brothers Fund 

Ross Perot, Jr. 

RTX 

Sarah & Peter Beshar 

Sempra Energy 

Stellar Development Foundation 

Taipei Economic and Cultural Representative Office (TECRO) 

Tala 

Tellurian Inc. 

Thales Group 

TMP 

Topsoe 

Total S.A. 

UN Women 

United States Agency for International Development 

Victor Pinchuk Foundation 

William Marron 

$50,000—$99,999 Contributors

3M 

Aalyria 

Accrete AI 

ADS Group 

Afiniti, Inc. 

African Rainbow Minerals (ARM) 

Air Products and Chemicals, Inc. 

Alain Bejjani 

Andersen Tax & Legal Italia 

Anonymous 

Antenna Group 

Assan Aluminyum 

Beretta USA 

The Boeing Company 

Booz Allen Hamilton 

Bradley Arant Boult Cummings LLP 

Bridgewater Associates 

Campero USA Corp. 

Cargill 

Charles Rossotti 

Charles and Lynn Schusterman Family Foundation 

Christopher Marlin 

Colleen Bell 

Copelouzos Group 

Corporation Andina De Fomento (CAF) 

CrowdStrike 

The D. Sterling Margolis Family Foundation 

Dataminr, Inc. 

David Caplan & Karen Wagner 

Delphi Economic Forum 

EagleRock Capital Management 

Edelman 

Elizabeth Frost Pierson 

Embassy of Japan to the United States of America 

Fathom5 

FedEx Corporation 

FIBA Holding A.S. 

Ford Motor Company 

George and Kristen Lund 

Global Whole Being Fund 

Goldman Sachs & Co. 

Google Ireland Limited 

Guang Yang 

Hudson Institute 

Hyundai Motor Group 

Intesa Sanpaolo S.p.A. 

Invesco Capital Management LLC 

Jack Wadsworth 

Japan External Trade Organization 

Jera Americas, Inc. 

John and Susan Klein 

Joia M. Johnson 

JP Morgan Chase & Co 

Kirkland & Ellis LLP 

Kodiak Robotics 

The Korea Foundation 

Laurel Strategies 

Leidos 

Leonardo DRS, Inc. 

LexisNexis Group 

Margaret and Daniel Loeb Foundation 

Mark Machin 

Mercuria 

Ørsted Americas 

Partnership for Responsible Growth 

Raffaele Boccardo 

Republic of Lithuania 

S&P Global Inc. 

SAIC 

Saronic 

Scale AI 

Shell 

Squire Patton Boggs 

Standard Chartered 

Standard Industries 

Swiss Government Foreign Affairs 

Syrian American Council 

Teledyne Technologies Incorporated 

Templeton World Charities 

Tennessee Valley Authority 

TES 

Textron 

Thomas H. Glocer 

Tüpraş 

Ubitech Construcții 

United Nations Children’s Fund (UNICEF) 

United Parcel Service 

United States Institute of Peace 

Zorlu Enerji Elektrik Üretim Anonim Şirketi 

Zurich Insurance Group Ltd 

$25,000—$49,999 Contributors

Anonymous 

Ashurst Foundation 

Atlantik-Brücke 

Australia Office of National Intelligence 

Baker & McKenzie, LLP 

BP America 

BV TECH S.p.A. 

CGI Federal 

Choose New Jersey 

ConocoPhillips 

Consolidated Contractors Company 

Deloitte 

Domino 

Dow Jones 

Embassy of the Republic of Estonia to the United States 

FIFARMA 

First Eastern Investment Group 

Fortem Technologies 

James C. Temerty, C.M. 

Jenny Wood 

John & Sherri Goodman 

John D. and Catherine T. MacArthur Foundation 

Johnson & Johnson 

KBR, inc. 

KHNP 

Latent AI 

LOT Polish Airlines 

Masdar 

MetLife, Inc. 

The Ministry of Defence of the Netherlands 

Ministry of Defence of the Republic of Singapore 

Ministry of Foreign Affairs of the Czech Republic 

Munich Security Conference 

Nanyang Technological University 

Pamir Consulting 

Paul Hastings, LLP 

PJT Partners 

Poland Ministry of Foreign Affairs 

Safran USA 

SCSP 

Siemens Energy 

ST Engineering North America 

Steven A. Denning 

Stiftung Wissenschaft und Politik (SWP) 

Swedish Energy Agency 

Tokyo Electric Power Holdings Company, Inc. 

TPG Inc. 

TRENDS Research and Advisory 

US Chamber of Commerce 

Visa Inc. 

VISION Technology 

Walmart 

The World Bank 

$10,000—$24,999 Contributors

Adarga 

AJC Global Jewish Advocacy 

American Rheinmetall Defense, Inc. 

ANA Holdings Inc. 

Ankit Desai 

Anonymous (3) 

Bank for International Settlements 

Bloomberg 

BNY Mellon 

Brunswick Group 

Chris Dowd 

Clean Air Task Force 

Climate Advisers 

Concelex 

Corporacion Castillo Hermanos 

Daniel Rzasa 

DARE Strategies LLC 

David H. and Holly Petraeus 

Den Norske Krigsforsikring For Skib Gjensidig Forening 

Development Bank of Southern Africa 

DIGITALEUROPE 

DNV Energy USA Inc. 

Douglas Lute & Jane Holl Lute 

DT Institute 

Edge Case Research 

Elliot Ackerman 

Environmental Entrepreneurs 

European Climate Foundation 

Fidera Group 

Florida International University 

Franklin D. Kramer 

Frederick Kempe 

Gabriela Santos 

General Tod Wolters 

Georgetown University McDonough School of Business 

Global Vision 

Greylock Capital Management 

Harlan Ullman 

Henning Heine 

Invenergy LLC 

Jacob Blaustein Institute 

Jagello 2000 

Jan Lodal 

Janio Rosales 

John Chapoton 

Judith Miller 

Kerri Selby 

KoBold Metals 

Ley Line Entertainment 

Lisa A. Pollina 

Mark Donig 

Mary Ann Walker 

Matthew Zubrow 

MBDA Inc. 

McLarty Associates 

Monarch Private Capital 

NASK – National Research Institute of Poland 

Negotiation Design & Strategy (NDS) 

Newcleo 

Norwegian Shipowners’ Association 

Notre Dame Keough School Washington Office 

Nuclear Energy Institute 

Nuclearlectrica S.A. 

Oves Enterprise 

Palantir Technologies 

Paul Hodge 

Paul, Weiss, Rifkind, Wharton & Garrison LLP 

Pyne & Partners 

Renaissance Strategic Advisors 

Robert Brooks 

Ronesans Enerji 

Rostam Zafari 

SentinelOne 

Stephen Shapiro 

Tao Tan and Sarah Schrager Gitlin Charitable Fund 

Tuvshinzaya Gantulga 

United Nations 

United States Department of Commerce 

Universidad Técnica Particular de Loja 

University of Texas at Austin 

Venture Global 

Walter B. Slocombe 

Willkie Farr & Gallagher 

Wilmer Hale 

$5,000—$9,999 Contributors

ACG Analytics 

Afghanistan War Commission 

Amber Infrastructure Limited 

Ameresco Inc. 

Andrea Broggini 

Anonymous (2) 

Aparupa Sengupta 

Barbara Anderson 

Bedirhan Sezgin 

Beneath the Waves 

Biofuture Workshop 

Bob Litterman 

Byron Callan 

Club de Madrid 

Consorcio Energético Punta Cana-Macao (CEPM) 

Crowell & Moring, LLP 

David Metzner 

Debbie Cross 

Deborah James 

Diana Dougan 

Dominion Energy 

Dov Zakheim 

Duke Energy Foundation 

Edith Camargo-Renteria 

Emma Sloniker 

Enrique Carrizosa Gelzis 

Eric Melby 

Feng-Hua Loh 

FlexGen 

Frank Aquila 

Frank Finelli 

Gargi Sharma 

Gerald Harrington 

Gregg Mossburg 

Gulefsan Cengiz 

IBF Connect SA 

Infineon Technologies 

Intel 

Ioan Istrate 

James Cartwright 

Jay L. Johnson 

Jendayi Frazer 

John Sullivan 

Johnathan Merrill 

Kay Bailey Hutchison 

Matthew Butler 

McKinsey & Company 

Melanne Verveer 

Michael Chertoff 

Michael Hayden 

Nuclear Energy Agency 

Patrick Gross 

Pattern Energy 

Paula Cintron 

Pirelli 

Quanta Services 

Rock the Ocean 

Sean Powers 

Sequoia Capital 

Shell Turkey 

Sören Südhof 

Stephany Simpson 

Sudhof Household 

Timothy Adams 

Wendy Makins 

$1,000—$4,999 Contributors

Ala’a Kolkaila 

Andreas Rutili 

Anonymous (2) 

APLUS Enerji Yatirim Danismanlik Teknoloji ve Ticaret A.S. 

Beatriz Guillen-Onandia 

Borchert Consulting & Research AG 

Boryszew Energy 

Brendan Johannsen 

Cambridge Global Advisors 

Centre for International Governance Innovation 

Charles Hagel 

Chris Mundiath 

Christina Sgro 

Cynthia Lopez Castro 

Daniel Murphy 

David Bargueño 

Devon Long 

Embassy of Spain the United States 

Erin Miles 

Ernst & Young s.a. 

Factiva 

Foley Hoag LLP 

Frances M. Townsend 

Fred Post 

Freeport McMoRan, Inc. 

Future Forces 

The Garden City Company 

Gavin Walsh 

Greenergy Data Centers 

Hasan AlKurdi 

Highgate Ltd 

International Center for Journalists (ICFJ) 

International Tax and Investment Center 

Ippolito Leotta 

Ira Straus 

Istituto per gli Studi di Politica Internazionale 

itrek 

Janney Montgomery Scott LLC 

Jasneet Hora 

Jeanette Quick 

Jenna Ben-Yehuda 

Jonathan Merrill 

Joseph S. Nye 

Joseph Thompson 

Julie Varghese 

Kara Mangone 

Katerina Elias-Trostmann 

Kaush Arha 

Kroc Institute for International Peace Studies 

Last Energy 

Lisa Gittos 

Marta Karpiel 

Mary C. Yates 

Matthew Kustenbauder 

Megi Gabriyel 

Melissa Saphier 

Mercedes Gutierrez 

Mexican Chamber of Deputies 

Nancy Chang 

Neil Brown 

NWI Management LP 

Oleksandra Matviichuk 

Panayiotis Peter Kontis 

Paula J. Dobriansky  

The Poynter Institute 

Qureshi Family Foundation 

Randee Day 

Re:Coded 

Richard Heiler 

Rockefeller Family Fund 

Ross Alander 

Ryan Duncan 

Sancha Worthington 

Sarah Powazek 

Scott Van Buskirk 

Serkan Kazan 

Shekhar Pai 

Siminia Tulbure 

Stephen Kalin 

Syrian Forum USA 

Tara Hariharan 

Thomas Berg 

Tina Patterson 

Uday Mathur 

Unitas Communications 

Vanessa Swan 

Viren Mascarenhas 

Volkan Yigit 

WEC Italia 

William J. Hybl 

Yasin Düven 

YEO TENOLOJİ ENERJİ VE ENDÜSTRİ A.Ş. 

Up to $999 Contributors

Aby Vanterpool 

Adrian Nedelcu 

Alejo Czerwonko 

Alexander Small 

Alexandra de Borchgrave 

Alexandra Schmidt-Fellner 

Alissa Pavia 

Alonso Raul 

AmpliQore 

Andav Capital 

Andrea Rotoloni 

Andrew Chvatal 

Andrew Goff 

Andrew Michta 

Angelika Dorvel 

Angelo Moushait 

Ankita Thakkar 

Anne Smits 

Anne Wellde 

Arianit Pllana 

Arvid Bell 

Atjena Gashi 

Austin Barnes 

B Pratyusha Chennupati 

Barbara Earnest 

Benjamin Kim 

Bruce Harwood 

Captain Gary Schnurrpusch 

Chama Mechtaly 

Charles Morgan 

Chelsea Michta 

Chiara Paolinelli 

Chime Asonye 

Christina Hioureas 

Christopher De Ruyter 

Connor James 

Dan Kenney 

Daniel Malloy 

Daniel Saka Mbumba 

David Martinez 

Dawne Spicer 

Diego Area 

Dominik Marchewka 

Dominique Carter 

E.C. Michael Higgins Family Foundation, Inc. 

Edward Verona 

Ernesto Di Giovanni 

Eunice Reddick 

Eva Paloma Treves 

Far Ventures SRL 

Felix A. Quintero 

Franklin Miller 

George Swiatylo 

Gissou Nia 

Gittipong Paruchabutr 

Gustav Borgefalk 

Hans Larsson 

Henry Venable 

Hong Kong Watch 

Hussein Al Baya 

Iskander Akylbayev 

J.D. Bindenagel 

Jackson Styron 

James D Bindenagel 

James Meznek 

James Wink 

Jeewon Park 

Jennifer Gordon 

Jessica Dabrowski 

John Barranco 

Jonas Anton 

Jonathan M Nielson 

Jonathan Panikoff 

Jose Echeverria 

Joseph Cascio 

Kadi Cesarie 

Katherine Barnes 

Kazakhstan Council on International Relations 

Kornel Koronowaki 

Kristi Pappalardo 

Kwabena Sintim-Damoa 

Ladan Fakory 

Laura Klick 

Lauren Holland 

Lawdan Bazargan 

Lynn McNeal 

Maciej Kuziemski 

Marilyn Whittemore 

Mark Esper 

Michael Goldfarb 

Michael Huneke 

Michael McCarthy 

Minmin Yen 

Mister Monti 

Morten Bo Laursen 

Muhammad Ghanem 

Nadine Imad 

Nathan Bruschi 

National Center for Urban Operations 

Naveen Chhangani 

Neil Thomson 

Nisha Desai 

Olena Kopanchuk 

Oumar Diallo 

Pallavi Sreerama 

Peter Seat 

Rainer Scherer 

Ramadane Hagne 

Randolph Guevara 

Raul Alonso 

Ravipal Bains 

Rebecca Jones 

Richard Boyd 

Richard Tanjo 

Richard Tingey 

Risto Volanen 

Robert Finley 

Robert Kaplan 

Robert Krijger 

Roberto Serpieri 

Salome Makharadze 

Sebastian Spriestersbach 

Shaun Fernando 

Silvere Megelas 

Skansen Technologies 

Sourav Sinha 

Stephen Johnson 

Stuart Owen 

Syed Irfan 

Teneo Strategy 

Thomas Connolly 

Thomas Horlander 

Tim Kubarych 

Valerie Alikakos 

Vincent Stanton 

Walter Parchomenko 

Warren Bayliss 

Welton Chang 

Wendy Jacobson 

William LaRivee 

William Nichols 

William Reilly 

Wolfram Nolte 

Yale University 

Zeb Bradford 

The post 2024 honor roll of contributors appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>
The frontier is the front line: On climate resilience for infrastructure and supplies in Canada’s Arctic https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/in-depth-research-reports/issue-brief/the-frontier-is-the-front-line-on-climate-resilience-for-infrastructure-and-supplies-in-canadas-arctic/ Fri, 30 May 2025 14:49:31 +0000 https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/?p=850322 The front lines of strategic competition now run through the Arctic. Ottawa must do more to enhance its military readiness and infrastructure preparedness in the region.

The post The frontier is the front line: On climate resilience for infrastructure and supplies in Canada’s Arctic appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>
Prime Minister Mark Carney’s victory in the May 2025 elections provides a clearer picture of Canada’s political future and strategic priorities. During the election campaign, Carney emphasized bolstering defense spending and increasing Canada’s presence, awareness, and infrastructure footprint in the Arctic. As Carney seeks to achieve these stated ends, he will contend with a strategic environment that looks more dangerous for Ottawa than at any time since the end of the Cold War. And he will likely struggle to reconcile the strategic importance of the Arctic with the cost of developing the infrastructure required to secure it. But as the ice retreats, so too do the barriers that once insulated Canada’s Arctic.

The frontier has become the front line.

Canada’s choice is binary: secure its portion of the Arctic or suffer the consequences of foreign powers acting with impunity in and around Canada’s Arctic. Ottawa’s central challenge, therefore, is to harden its Arctic presence with dual-use infrastructure and supply chain resilience while hostile powers increase their influence around the pole.

This task gets more difficult the longer Ottawa dithers because change manifests across many vectors concurrently. The infrastructure and supply chains critical to the region are underdeveloped and ill-suited for the future—and they do not improve with age. Climate change continues to alter the contours of the region, often to Canada’s strategic disadvantage. An ascendant generation of US strategists proclaim that the Canadian Arctic is the “new soft underbelly” of North America. And it is no longer fantasy to suggest that the Arctic is ground zero for the new ‘Great Game’ between the United States, Russia, and China.

The region has been one of strategic contest since 1921, when Joseph Stalin claimed the North Pole for the Soviet Union, a claim re-animated by Moscow in 2015. It may lack the trenches and dragon’s teeth in Europe, or the clashes between fishing vessels and coast guard ships in southeast Asia. But the Arctic is no longer a low-threat, low-force posture environment that can be defended by a couple Coast Guard icebreakers and some Canadian Rangers on snowmobiles.

It is a region of strategic consequence and likely to be more so in the coming decades, which begs the question—why does Canada lag allies and adversaries alike in both the defense and development of its Arctic territory?

The simplistic answer is that Ottawa is torn among competing interests and an inability, or an unwillingness, to marshal the domestic resources necessary to protect its Arctic from a growing cast of players keen to exploit perceived vulnerabilities in pursuit of their interests.

The Atlantic Council delved deeper into Canada’s challenge to bolster infrastructure and supply chain resilience in the region. Research included literature reviews, interviews, and off-the-record conversations with a broad range of government and private-sector stakeholders. Interviews yielded constructive, if passionate, views from respondents who expressed repeatedly how much they want Canada to secure its part of the Arctic and enable its full development.

Analysis revealed that Ottawa knows the region well; the Canadian government has few peers in understanding the Arctic and what is required to right supply chains there. Geological surveys and development plans are completed to a gold standard. Stakeholders know the problem and solution space—and have for decades. But domestic policy, not climate change or geopolitical calculus, is the primary factor influencing strategic decisions for Canada’s north.

Key players (and honorable mentions)

Climate change has made the Arctic accessible. Glacier melting has created new sea routes, extended shipping seasons, and unveiled vast natural resources. But it has also created an opening in the region for strategic contest. Three threat vectors shape the region’s security dynamics for Canada.

Russia

More than half of the Arctic Circle’s population and half its economy are Russian. Russia sits at the end of one of the Arctic’s most accessible regions. Russia is opening old bases and building new infrastructure throughout the region. It holds more than 50 percent of Arctic investment (made between 2017 and 2022), and its military doctrine treats the north as central to economic and national defense. Since 2014, the Kremlin has launched Cold War-style investments in Arctic airfields, radar systems, submarine networks, and year-round basing. Russian military planners are considering anti-access/area denial (A2/AD) domes extending over the Northern Sea Route.

Moscow likely observes that Canadian defense planning remains rooted in an outdated peace dividend mindset—one that grossly underestimates the threat of state-on-state conflict in the Arctic. Canada’s lack of comprehensive undersea surveillance renders its Arctic maritime approaches effectively blind, and its military presence in the region—symbolized by a modest footprint of Canadian Rangers—leaves much to be desired in terms of deterrence or rapid response. Equipment remains outdated, modernization plans languish in bureaucratic limbo, and logistics chains are stretched perilously thin. These gaps create space for Russian forces to maneuver below the threshold of war, exploiting ambiguity and Canada’s limited detection capabilities to assert influence or project force unchallenged.

The Kremlin likes to see how Canada’s strategic dependence on the United States substitutes alliance commitments for genuine sovereign deterrence. Ottawa’s whole-of-government approach—while inclusive in theory—has fragmented decision-making in practice, rendering Canada slow and reactive at a time when speed and coherence are strategic advantages. Indigenous consultation, while legally and morally necessary, remains procedurally rigid and politicized, often becoming a brake on critical national security decisions rather than a channel for partnership and empowerment.

While Russia invests heavily in its Arctic capabilities, Canada’s Arctic capability is stuck in the twentieth century. Surveillance assets are aging, space-based platforms are insufficient, and investment in modern ISR (intelligence, surveillance, reconnaissance) technology remains anemic. Communications remain unreliable across vast regions, exposing both civilian and military systems to disruption. Cyber defenses—especially around critical infrastructure—are poorly funded and unevenly deployed, inviting adversaries to strike via code rather than missile.

China

China considers itself a “near-Arctic power” and its Polar Silk Road links Arctic shipping to its global Belt and Road ambitions. China’s white papers frame the region as a commons to be commercially and scientifically accessed. Icebreaker construction in Chinese shipyards matches the tempo of a nation preparing for permanent presence.

Beijing understands that Canada’s economic infrastructure in the Arctic is brittle. Melting permafrost, seasonal reliance on ice roads, and a near-total absence of deepwater ports make northern logistics vulnerable to both climate and conflict. These choke points offer asymmetric opportunities to disrupt supply chains or sabotage dual-use facilities. China could exploit these vulnerabilities by embedding itself through ostensibly civilian investments in Arctic mining, telecommunications, or transportation infrastructure—investments that are strategic positioning by other means. In such a fragile environment, any hybrid attack or technological failure could sever vital arteries with catastrophic effects.

From China’s vantage point, Canada’s Arctic declarations are noble but hollow—bold in language but weak in execution. For Beijing, which has increased defense spending every year for three decades, Canada’s plan to reach two percent of gross domestic product (GDP) on defense spending by 2030 is symbolic. Procurement remains tangled in inefficiency and overregulation, hampering modernization and undermining operational readiness. Economic pressures, shifting political winds, and lukewarm support for military spending are likely to derail Canada’s commitments before they mature. Moreover, China likely sees Canada’s overreliance on its NATO allies as a strategic liability. The Arctic can be probed or pressured just below NATO’s collective defense thresholds—ensuring ambiguity, diffusing Western resolve, and highlighting Canada’s limited unilateral options.

Manpower shortages, insufficient Arctic basing, and the long-delayed Nanisivik port all point to structural underinvestment in hard infrastructure. These gaps offer Beijing a rich menu of asymmetric opportunities to: subvert Arctic economies through proxy investments; cultivate cultural ties through scholarships, research partnerships, and diplomatic outreach; sabotage digital and physical infrastructure through cyberattacks or dependency entrapments; and sow political dissent by financing Indigenous, environmental, or anti-militarization movements within Canada’s own democratic fabric.

The United States (and others)

For Washington, Canada’s failure to defend its Arctic territory is not merely a function of limited resources, but of deliberate strategic neglect. The refusal to acquire nuclear-powered submarines—essential for year-round under-ice patrols and true sovereignty enforcement—reveals a deeper aversion to the burdens of great power responsibility. While adversaries invest in undersea dominance and dual-use Arctic infrastructure, Ottawa opts for half-measures: diesel patrol submarines that can’t operate under the polar ice, minimal surveillance capabilities, and no permanent military basing north of 60.

The US view is shifting from a posture of “monitor and respond” to one of “prepare and deter.” Pentagon reports no longer downplay the Arctic as a region of strategic importance. Even smaller powers have taken notice. India published its Arctic strategy in 2021, emphasizing scientific diplomacy. Turkey signed the Svalbard Treaty to gain access rights to the Arctic in 2023. France and Germany are also exploring greater footprints in the region.

While the Icebreaker Collaboration Effort (ICE) Pact with Canada and Finland represents a trilateral effort to rebuild icebreaker capacity and harden the Arctic industrial base, it is not enough. Canada remains trapped in a peacetime posture and mentality—symbolic patrols and seasonal exercises—while the region becomes increasingly contested by powers that are, at best, are neutral to Canada’s concerns and, at worst, openly hostile to them.

This inertia is rooted in a political culture that prioritizes accommodation over assertiveness. Successive governments have deferred to progressive special interest groups whose influence blunts hard security policies. Environmentalist and Indigenous consultations, while important, are often weaponized procedurally to paralyze decisive action. The result is a government debilitated by process, one that speaks of sovereignty but shrinks from the instruments necessary to enforce it. Even modest defense initiatives face resistance if they challenge entrenched activist orthodoxies or require confronting Canada’s internal contradictions. This includes the legal quagmire of provincial and territorial jurisdiction in the North, which Ottawa remains unwilling to override or reform.

Perhaps most damning for Washington is Canada’s lack of strategic coherence. Ottawa provides a strategic framework for the Arctic but fails to dedicate the resources to achieve the objectives contained therein. Policy and strategy without resource commitments are unseriousness ideas. Moreover, Canada’s policies do not form a doctrine of Arctic deterrence, convey no idea on how to mobilize federal will, and fail to weave a unifying narrative that connects Arctic defense to the survival of Canada as a sovereign nation in an increasingly anarchic world.

America cannot—and will not—permit a soft underbelly to fester in a domain as critical as the Arctic. It is not inconceivable for US forces unilaterally securing parts of the Canadian Arctic in the event of a crisis. Such actions, while diplomatically uncomfortable, would be strategically necessary if Canadian gaps remain unaddressed. To be blunt: if pressed and in a fight with Russia or China in the Arctic, the US will almost certainly be “Elbows Up” in defense of North America, even if it offends Canadian sensitivities.

Five “cold kills”

Our research unearthed five factors that contribute to Canada’s Arctic inertia. Each of these “cold kills” continues to impede progress on increasing supply chain and defense resilience.

1. Lacking multipartisan consensus on the region as “ground zero” for a new “Great Game.”

Canada cannot do much in the Arctic if it lacks enduring political will to support and fund dual-use infrastructure over decades. The growing importance of the Arctic for great-power competition underscores the need for politicians, defense planners, local communities, industry partners, and other relevant stakeholders to walk in the same general direction, if not in lockstep. Despite the urgency of this task, no sustained, cross-partisan strategy for Arctic defense exists. Without it, investments, infrastructure development, and operational planning will almost certainly come up short. In 2025, Natural Resources Canada is projected to invest $12.1 million toward climate adaptation projects in the North—which is necessary, but insufficient when compared to similar efforts by other Arctic powers.

Yet, allies offer a contrast. Norway’s Arktis 2030 fund and its defense pledge of 3 percent of GDP underscore a whole-of-society approach. Finland’s NATO entry boosted its participation in Arctic exercises. Sweden utilizes Arctic data to create a stronger and better informed national defense policy. Denmark leverages Greenland’s geostrategic importance in its Arctic defense. While Canada’s Arctic is inaccessible by comparison, it can look at what NATO allies do right in the region and their whole-of-society approaches.

2. Placing too much of the strategic burden on local communities.

The Canadian government continues to place disproportionate responsibility for Arctic security on local communities, revealing a dangerous strategic asymmetry between rhetoric and capability. The Canadian Rangers, though a symbol of national resolve and cultural integration, are not a substitute for a modern, standing military presence. They are lightly armed, part-time volunteers—valuable in their knowledge of the land but structurally unfit to deter or respond to the increasing threats posed by adversarial state actors operating just beyond the line of sight. This over-reliance has created a strategic mirage: Ottawa appears engaged in Arctic defence, but the burden is unfairly borne by those with the fewest resources and the highest exposure.

In effect, Canada’s Arctic is not treated as an equal part of Confederation, but as a frontier outpost whose primary function is surveillance and symbolic sovereignty. The political imagination to raise Arctic communities to the standard of living of rural southern Canada is absent. There is no serious nation-building project underway—no long-term vision to tie infrastructure, broadband, energy, healthcare, and education in the North to the national grid of opportunity.

The region is home to significant deposits of iron ore, gold, diamonds, and rare earth elements. The Mary River Mine on Baffin Island is one of the world’s richest reserves of high-grade iron ore, producing millions of tons annually. Similarly, the Hope Bay and Meliadine gold mines contribute substantially to Canada’s mineral output. These resources are critical for economic development and for national security, given their importance in defense manufacturing and technology. Yet, the extraction and transportation of these resources are hampered by limited infrastructure that eludes further development due to lack of coordination and investment at all levels of government. While the Yukon Security Advisory Council can be a model for shared governance federal, territorial, and Indigenous jurisdictions overlap without coherent authority. The result is a bureaucratic bottleneck that limits response agility and accountability, especially in scenarios involving mass casualty events or foreign incursions below the threshold of war.

3. Misunderstanding the Arctic as a land- or maritime-centric domain, instead of a multidomain one.

Canada’s Arctic strategy remains anchored in a legacy mindset—fixated on land and maritime domains—while the battlespace has already expanded far beyond the ice and tundra. The Canadian Arctic is a multi-domain operating environment in the most rigorous sense: a crucible where air, sea, land, space, and cyberspace domains converge. Focusing primarily on ground mobility or maritime choke points is antiquated.

In an era defined by precision-guided conflict, gray zone incursions, and orbital competition, the North requires integrated deterrence across all domains. The space domain is already decisive; Russia and China have launched dual-use satellites optimized for polar reconnaissance, while Canada’s surveillance constellation remains limited and aging. Cyberspace, too, is an active front. Persistent foreign probing of Canada’s critical Arctic infrastructure—from power grids to fiber lines—underscores the need for zero-trust architectures and sovereign cyber capacity hardened against both disinformation and sabotage. The air domain, often overshadowed, remains underutilized despite offering cost-effective ISR opportunities via high-altitude, long-endurance drones and balloon-based sensors that can supplement space assets in degraded environments.

Canada must approach the Arctic as a multi-domain region. Infrastructure nodes at Iqaluit, Yellowknife, and Inuvik must be conceived not as mere logistics hubs, but as permanent and staffed bases in a broader multi-domain lattice of deterrence. Airfields should be hardened, satellites shielded, networks encrypted, and data fused in real time. The resilience and infrastructure footprint must be multi-domain: ISR in orbit, radar on ice, seaborne logistics hubs, and hardened cyber networks. It might even be cheaper to establish and easier to maintain air-based sensors to augment space-based sensors, such as high-altitude, long-endurance drones and high-altitude balloons.

4. Missing the point that infrastructure spending enables both military and local resilience.

Canada’s policy frameworks fail to grasp a foundational truth: infrastructure is not ancillary to defence; it is defence. Roads, railways, hospitals, and power stations in the Arctic are bulwarks of resilience and lifelines to national unity. The harsh environment demands more than token outposts; it demands permanence that begins with infrastructure designed for both civilian and military pursuits.

Canada’s persistent underinvestment in Arctic infrastructure can be attributed largely to sticker shock. Building in the north is expensive at the outset, but those initial costs conceal long-term value. Roads, railways, and ports that facilitate the movement of Canadian forces and provide necessary infrastructure for local communities also enhance NATO mobility and resilience.

The Grays Bay Road and Port Project is unlikely to open before 2035. Until then, the Port of Churchill remains Canada’s only Arctic deepwater port for more than 106,000 miles of coastline—and even it is more than 800 kilometres south of the Arctic Circle. The overland situation is equally stark. The long-considered Mackenzie Valley Highway remains unbuilt. Meant to replace unreliable winter roads and connect remote Arctic communities, the highway should be considered as a defense artery.

Moreover, the North needs cyber towers as much as radar domes; fibre optic cables as much as sonar arrays. Schools and post-secondary institutions—anchored by Arctic research centres—should be erected alongside hardened military installations to attract families, not just forces. In Alaska, the dual-use success of the University of Alaska Fairbanks and the Ted Stevens Anchorage International Airport provides a model: educational and aerospace ecosystems aligned with the broader security posture of the United States.

Still, there are signs of acceleration. The Department of National Defence has committed $230 million to extend the main runway at Inuvik Airport. The upgrades include modern lighting and arrestor systems—investments tailored for sustained military operations and a rare example of a concrete commitment in a domain often shaped by abstraction. Canada should build Arctic spaceports and drone launch facilities for persistent surveillance and communications dominance—assets that would likely qualify as defence expenditures under a broadened NATO definition. And that definition is evolving. With calls to raise the alliance-wide benchmark to five percent of GDP, the line between civil and military investment will blur. Forward-thinking allies are already redefining defence to include national resilience, critical infrastructure, and technological redundancy.

5. Failing to call out the need to achieve A2/AD capability.

Canada’s current Arctic strategy is more performative than purposeful. It remains anchored in rituals of presence rather than a doctrine of deterrence. The reasons are structural and cultural: A2/AD sounds too aggressive for a nation wedded to peacekeeping identity and constrained by intergovernmental jurisdictional frictions. But if Canada is to hold the Arctic, it must defend it—not merely inhabit it. That demands something Canada has never attempted: a comprehensive anti-access/area denial (A2/AD) strategy adapted for the circumpolar battlespace.

A2/AD refers to the deployment of integrated capabilities that prevent an adversary from operating freely within a region. This includes long-range fires, persistent surveillance, advanced radar, cyber denial tools, hardened command-and-control infrastructure, and air and maritime denial platforms. Canada does not mention A2/AD in its Arctic lexicon because it fears what it implies: that the North is no longer a sanctuary but a frontier. Building an Arctic A2/AD network would require political will, sustained investment, and a strategic mindset that accepts confrontation as a precondition for sovereignty. It would also provoke diplomatic risk—Russia would label such a move provocative, and China would test the perimeter with gray-zone maneuvers masked as scientific exploration or commercial navigation. Yet the absence of such a posture risks far greater cost: a hollow sovereignty, subject to erosion by increments.

Investments in some areas do not amount to A2/AD. True, Canada’s $38.6-billion commitment over twenty years to modernize NORAD is substantial. If fully implemented, this would be the largest reinvestment in continental defense since the early Cold War. Arctic over-the-horizon radar systems will track threats from the US-Canada border to the Arctic Circle. A more powerful polar variant will extend coverage into the Arctic archipelago and beyond. Crossbow—a classified network of advanced sensors—will supplement these systems with real-time precision. And the Defence Enhanced Surveillance for Space (DESSP) project will allow space-based tracking of adversary launch and maneuver capabilities. Canada has partnered with Australia on a next-generation Arctic early-warning detection system. But even these investments are insufficient; they do not achieve A2/AD in the Arctic. Canada has ISR blind spots, insufficient logistical depth, and infrastructure degraded by thawing permafrost. RADARSAT’s capabilities are aging; the Northwest Passage is functionally unmonitored. There is no cruise missile defense layer.

A Canadian A2/AD architecture would extend ISR reach from geostationary orbit to the ocean floor. At its core: Over-the-Horizon Radar (AOTHR), high-altitude drones, and advanced satellite constellations fused via a hardened C4ISR backbone. Any credible A2/AD structure must project deterrence not only northward but outward via NORAD, integrating seamlessly with allied efforts across the Greenland-Iceland-UK gap and the European High North.

Challenge and opportunity

We recommend the following six steps to shape decision-making vis-à-vis Canada’s Arctic. Addressing each of them is necessary for more resilient supply chains and robust infrastructure for defense of the Canadian Arctic.

1. Achieve enduring domestic political consensus.

Without sustained, bipartisan consensus on the strategic value of the Arctic, Canada’s northern policy will remain fragmented, underfunded, and vulnerable to reversal.

Canada should establish a nonpartisan Arctic Strategy Council, drawing on members from federal, provincial, territorial, and Indigenous governments, as well as the private sector. This council could be modeled loosely on the United Kingdom’s National Security Council, with a standing mandate to oversee and report on Arctic development milestones.

To correct course, Parliament should adopt a minimum percentage of GDP for Arctic infrastructure and defense investments—similar to how NATO’s 2-percent defense spending benchmark frames national priorities. A 0.5-percent GDP floor specifically earmarked for Arctic readiness would send a powerful signal to allies, adversaries, and Canadians alike.

2. Build permanent bases and infrastructure.

Sovereignty requires presence. Canada cannot assert command over its northern territory while maintaining a transient, seasonal military posture.

Canada must develop at least two permanent Arctic bases by 2035 and reinforce the air infrastructures in Yellowknife. These installations should support multi-domain enablers: ground forces, drone squadrons, ISR satellites, and cyber defense detachments. One proposed location is Resolute Bay in Nunavut—a strategic logistics point halfway through the Northwest Passage. Another is Tuktoyaktuk in the Northwest Territories, where the Inuvik-Tuktoyaktuk Highway provides ground access to the Beaufort Sea.

Canada need not sacrifice environmental stewardship to bolster its dual-use infrastructure in the region. On the contrary, the development of small modular reactors (SMRs) offers a way to meet energy needs in a sustainable and flexible manner. These compact, deployable energy systems would enable off-grid installations to power radar stations, bases, and airstrips—allowing the Canadian Armed Forces to operate autonomously across a vast and power-starved frontier.

Canada can and should discover best practices in other nations and adopt to the fullest extent possible. The Arctic Remote Energy Networks Academy is training a new generation in clean energy implementation, building the intellectual and technical foundation for sustainable Arctic energy systems. It is one example of innovation that can help make strides in the Arctic.

3. Reorient superclusters toward strategic innovation.

Canada’s innovation ecosystem is misaligned with its strategic realities.

To adapt, Canada must integrate Arctic operational challenges into supercluster mandates. The focus of these superclusters has strayed too far from core security imperatives, and redirecting their mandate toward the defense and security sector could allow Canada to reanimate its atrophied defense industrial base, stimulate Indigenous research and development, and provide a platform for strategic innovation drawn from academic and private-sector talent.

The Global Innovation Cluster for Advanced Manufacturing could sponsor development of modular Arctic housing for deployed forces. The Digital Technology Cluster could support remote communications networks hardened against magnetic interference. And the Protein Industries Cluster could help devise shelf-stable, high-calorie rations adapted to extreme environments.

Canada should establish a national challenge prize—modeled on the US Defense Advanced Research Projects Agency (DARPA) Grand Challenge—to spur innovation in climate-resilient infrastructure, Arctic mobility, and remote power generation. Such efforts should be coordinated by a Defence Innovation Agency akin to the United Kingdom’s Defence and Security Accelerator (DASA), ensuring alignment between technological output and operational need.

4Integrate civil-military infrastructure.

Canada must adopt a whole-of-society approach to Arctic logistics—one that erases the line between civilian and military use.

Every kilometer of highway, every meter of runway, and every watt of power grid must serve dual purposes. Similarly, the Grays Bay Road and Port Project, which aims to connect the rich mineral fields of western Nunavut with the Northwest Passage, must be prioritized for its economic benefits and geopolitical value. Its completion would give Canada a second deepwater Arctic port—an essential node for resupply, power projection, and emergency response.

Meanwhile, the feasibility of Arctic spaceports must be considered thoughtfully. With global competition accelerating in polar orbit surveillance, Canada’s geography is a latent advantage. Nunavut and the Northwest Territories are prime candidates for launching satellites into sun-synchronous and polar orbits, a domain critical for ISR.

5. Accelerate NORAD modernization and ISR integration.

Canada must modernize its Arctic surveillance and early-warning capabilities through the renewal of NORAD and deep integration of orbital, aerial, and terrestrial ISR platforms.

Canada must move decisively to modernize its contributions to NORAD and integrate a layered, multi-domain ISR architecture that meets the threats of the 21st century. The existing North Warning System (NWS)—a relic of the Cold War—is functionally obsolete. It is increasingly vulnerable to kinetic destruction, electronic warfare, and deception by adversaries leveraging hypersonic, low-flying, and space-enabled strike platforms. While Canada has acknowledged this through its stated commitment to over-the-horizon radar (OTHR) and new space-based capabilities, progress has been halting, piecemeal, and under-resourced.

Canada should fast-track its involvement in key pillars of NORAD modernization alongside the United States by:

  1. Over-the-Horizon Radar (OTHR): Advance procurement and installation of Arctic-facing OTHR systems based in Labrador and Nunavut to create a persistent early-warning envelope stretching across the polar approaches. These systems must be hardened against electromagnetic disruption and integrated into NORAD’s command-and-control nodes in real time.
  2. Ballistic Missile Defence and the Golden Dome: Canada must shed outdated policy inhibitions and join the continental Ballistic Missile Defence (BMD) architecture. A Canadian contribution to a “Golden Dome” over North America—built on Aegis Ashore components, ship-based interceptors, and ground-based midcourse defence systems—would reinforce deterrence and mitigate the strategic vacuum currently inviting adversary escalation. Participation in the US Missile Defense Review and integration into layered BMD command structures should begin immediately.
  3. Space and High-Altitude ISR: The integration of RADARSAT Constellation Mission (RCM) assets with Gray Jay microsatellites must be complemented by investment in high-altitude, long-endurance (HALE) UAVs, stratospheric balloons, and commercial space partnerships. Persistent polar orbit surveillance is not a luxury—it is the sinew of a sovereign Canadian deterrent.

A modern NORAD without a full Canadian partner is a NORAD weakened in scope, credibility, and political cohesion. In an age of hypersonics, space militarization, and AI-driven surveillance, Canada’s northern shield must be not just symbolic but steel-wrought—an active, intelligent barrier underpinned by the best minds and machines the alliance can field. The window to shape this future is closing fast. Canada must step forward now, not as a follower, but as a co-architect of North America’s defence.

6. Integrate the Arctic with broader national and allied defense postures.

Canada’s Arctic strategy must not be treated in isolation.

Canada must integrate its Arctic strategy into a broader, assertive national defence posture—one that acknowledges the indivisibility of Canadian sovereignty and its responsibilities as a G7 power. The Arctic is not a separate theatre, but the forward glacis of the North American fortress. What begins as radar coverage over Baffin Bay ends in deterrence posture from Vilnius to the Taiwan Strait. Canadian defence policy must therefore harmonize Arctic readiness with strategic power projection abroad, ensuring the nation can respond decisively to threats—whether they emerge from the Beaufort Sea, the Black Sea, or the South China Sea.

The Arctic remains critical—but it is not Canada’s only defence priority. A myopic focus on the North risks undermining broader global responsibilities. Canada must project credible force across multiple domains and theatres. That means integrating Arctic surveillance—through over-the-horizon radar, low Earth orbit satellite constellations, and AI-driven ISR—directly into NORAD’s early warning lattice. These capabilities must be interoperable with US Northern Command, NATO’s Arctic flank, and allied sensors in the Indo-Pacific. Surveillance is not enough; it must be paired with striking power and forward basing.

Strategic mobility and offensive reach are essential. Arctic airbases must be upgraded to sustain F-35 squadrons year-round, with rapid deployment capabilities for long-range precision fires and mobile expeditionary forces. Arctic-class naval platforms should anchor presence and power projection into contested waters, with the logistical depth to pivot between the Arctic archipelago and Pacific choke points. Canadian-built UAVs and high-altitude drones should patrol both the Northwest Passage and Western Pacific, forming a twin-hemisphere presence. Above all, Canada must act as a sovereign Arctic nation capable of defending its territory, while remaining a credible contributor to the rules-based international order. The Arctic is the crucible, but Canada’s responsibilities—and its enemies—do not stop at the pole.

Canada’s Arctic infrastructure and supply chain resilience are foundational components to its basic expression of sovereignty. But the future of the Arctic belongs to those who show up first and endure longest. The question is not whether Canada can afford Arctic sovereignty, but whether it can afford its absence.

About the authors

Jeff Reynolds is a nonresident senior fellow with the Transatlantic Security Initiative in the Atlantic Council’s Scowcroft Center for Strategy and Security.

Kristen Taylor is an assistant director with the Transatlantic Security Initiative in the Atlantic Council’s Scowcroft Center for Strategy and Security.

Acknowledgements

This research was made possible by the generous support of the Canada Mobilizing Insights in Defense and Security (MINDS) program.

Related content

Explore the program

The Transatlantic Security Initiative, in the Scowcroft Center for Strategy and Security, shapes and influences the debate on the greatest security challenges facing the North Atlantic Alliance and its key partners.

The post The frontier is the front line: On climate resilience for infrastructure and supplies in Canada’s Arctic appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>
Why Latin America and the Caribbean matter for OECD countries https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/in-depth-research-reports/report/why-latin-america-and-the-caribbean-matter-for-oecd-countries/ Thu, 29 May 2025 17:20:20 +0000 https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/?p=849468 Latin America and the Caribbean are increasingly vital partners for OECD countries, offering critical minerals, food security, and clean energy assets. With democratic institutions, open markets, and active multilateral engagement, the region supports global resilience. Strengthened OECD–LAC cooperation can advance shared goals in economic security amid shifting global dynamics.

The post Why Latin America and the Caribbean matter for OECD countries appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>

As global dynamics evolve, Latin America and the Caribbean (LAC) are becoming increasingly important partners for the member countries of the Organisation for Economic Co-operation and Development (OECD). The region offers valuable assets, policy alignment in key areas, and opportunities for enhanced collaboration on shared challenges. 

This report outlines how deeper OECD–LAC engagement can contribute to mutual prosperity, resilience, and global stability.

The region’s assets support global economic security

LAC countries contribute significantly to global food and energy security, climate action, and economic resilience. The region plays an important role in clean energy development, particularly through renewable energy and emerging green hydrogen projects. It is a major global supplier of critical minerals—such as lithium, copper, and nickel—essential for the clean energy transition. LAC’s agricultural output is also vital to meeting increasing global food demand. Furthermore, its rich biodiversity and freshwater resources are essential to addressing long-term environmental and climate-related challenges.

Latin America and the Caribbean are home to a high concentration of electoral democracies and market-oriented economies, which share many of the values and institutional frameworks upheld by OECD countries. These shared principles form the basis for long-term partnership. In multilateral forums, LAC countries have acted as constructive and pragmatic voices, helping to bridge perspectives between developed and developing countries.

However, as the region continues to navigate growing interest from global powers, particularly through increased trade and investment from China, there is a clear call for OECD countries to reaffirm and deepen their engagement.

Key recommendations:

  • Build resilient and responsible critical mineral supply chains by formalizing an OECD–LAC Critical Minerals Partnership that promotes investment, technology transfer, Environmental, Social, and Governance (ESG) standards, and infrastructure development to support sustainable mining and industrial upgrading across the region.
  • Enhance global food security through targeted cooperation in agritech innovation, rural infrastructure, and trade logistics. Strategic investment in transport corridors, cold chains, and climate-smart agriculture can boost productivity and resilience in LAC’s agricultural sector, benefitting global markets.
  • Strengthen global value-chain resilience by leveraging LAC’s trade agreements and geographic proximity to OECD markets. A dedicated OECD–LAC Value Chain Initiative could identify areas of comparative advantage, streamline regulations, and support industrial diversification in key sectors.

View the full report

Related content

Explore the program

The Adrienne Arsht Latin America Center broadens understanding of regional transformations and delivers constructive, results-oriented solutions to inform how the public and private sectors can advance hemispheric prosperity.

The post Why Latin America and the Caribbean matter for OECD countries appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>
Beyond critical minerals: Capitalizing on the DRC’s vast opportunities https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/in-depth-research-reports/report/beyond-critical-minerals-capitalizing-on-the-drcs-vast-opportunities/ Fri, 23 May 2025 15:27:29 +0000 https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/?p=841297 As major powers contend for access to Kinshasa’s mineral wealth and Washington seeks to broker a peace deal with Rwanda, the DRC and its partners have a chance to aim high, and channel the country’s resource wealth into good governance, infrastructure, and more.

The post Beyond critical minerals: Capitalizing on the DRC’s vast opportunities appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>

As the race for access to critical minerals accelerates—with US President Donald Trump declaring the minerals that power new technologies essential to US national security, and China flexing its control of mineral supply chains with export bans—the mineral-rich Democratic Republic of the Congo (DRC) is in the spotlight. But that light reveals a complicated picture: As major powers and neighboring states contend for access to the country’s tin, cobalt, and copper, the Rwandan-backed M23 paramilitary has seized control of large swaths of eastern Congo, and the specter of full-scale war looms. The DRC signed a minerals-for-infrastructure deal with China in 2007, and now a minerals-for-security or minerals-for-peace deal with the United States is in the offing. 

The DRC has a chance to break the so-called “resource curse” and use its mineral wealth to build the roads, power grids, health infrastructure, and more that will sustain a democratic, economically growing country in the years ahead. Other countries and investors have a chance to live up to their commitments to responsible sourcing of natural resources, and in so doing support good governance and regional peace. The alternative is a continuation of the bad patterns of the past, with the real risk of a new outbreak of violence along the same fault lines that produced the deadliest conflict since World War II.

We asked six experts how the DRC—and its global partners—can take this transformative path. Read on for analyses of the country’s business environment, the industrial potential of its critical minerals and other promising sectors, and peace and security throughout the country.


The business case for peace and democracy in the DRC is strong

Dave Peterson is the former senior director of the Africa Program of the National Endowment for Democracy.

The Rwandan-backed rebel militia M23 has seized control of most of eastern Democratic Republic of the Congo (DRC) while the national army (known by its French acronym, FARDC) and international peacekeepers retreat. At least seven thousand civilians have been killed and thousands more raped. Two million displaced persons and refugees are fleeing for safety, joining some five million already displaced. The US embassy in Kinshasa has been attacked by angry mobs—and both strategic interests and American values are at stake.

The DRC is rich. With 111 million inhabitants in a geographical area the size of Europe, the country is blessed (or cursed) by $24 trillion in mineral resources such as copper, cobalt, lithium, gold, and diamonds, much of it crucial to the world’s transition to electric power, half of it exported to China, and much of it now controlled by Chinese investors. Congo has the world’s largest tropical forests after the Amazon and a vast river network that could power half the African continent; it also has enormous agricultural potential, gas, and oil.

And the DRC is where the greatest slaughter of human beings since World War II occurred just thirty years ago, even as atrocities continue to be reported daily in the country’s east. In addition to M23, more than a hundred militia groups terrorize the population. Rampant corruption sucks billions of dollars from the economy every year, and poverty, unemployment, illiteracy, and disease statistics place the DRC near the bottom of global rankings.

The Congolese people have begged for change. Democratic elections held on December 20, 2023, were won by the incumbent, Felix Tshisekedi. Although flawed in many respects, credible domestic observation groups, supported by the National Endowment for Democracy (NED) and others, concluded they reflected the will of the people. The elections were reasonably competitive and peaceful, a notable achievement compared to Congo’s nine neighbors, many among the most autocratic countries in the world. The elections raised the level of political discourse and further cultivated Congo’s democratic practice. Congo’s press is relatively free, so citizens can debate, organize, and criticize their government. The nation’s civil society is extensive, active, and skilled—advocating, educating, and mobilizing citizens on a host of issues.

Yet after another year in power, the second Tshisekedi administration has failed to resolve the conflict in the east, address rampant corruption, or improve governance. The human rights record is not reassuring, as NED’s Congolese partners and others have documented. More than one hundred kuluna, purportedly youth gang members ensnared by DRC’s notoriously corrupt justice system, were recently executed after the government reinstated the death penalty. Freedom of expression is also under pressure as activists, journalists, and whistleblowers are attacked and fear for their personal safety. Meanwhile, the president seems intent on tampering with the constitution to allow him to extend his term in office.

The mining companies, banks, and tech industry—aware of but loath to abandon the bloody supply chain they rely on—profit handsomely from Congo’s precious minerals. Although the conflict in the country’s east is about more than the trade in minerals, and international funders have spent hundreds of millions of dollars on the problem, the DRC’s best hope may be for foreign investors to mobilize pressure on the belligerents to make peace. The Belgian government has investigated Apple for tolerating human rights abuses in its supply chain originating in the DRC, and Apple has acknowledged the difficulty of identifying the sources of its suppliers. Because this is an issue for the entire industry, companies should find it advantageous, both in terms of public relations as well as in creating a conducive business environment, to be more accountable for the stability and prosperity of the communities from which they derive their wealth.

The Trump administration is paying attention. Tenuous negotiations between representatives of the Congolese and Rwandan governments led by the administration’s special envoy Massad Boulos may be making progress. To buttress this, Congolese civil society should be included in the process, including appropriate NGOs, community groups, the church, labor, and business, as proved successful in the Inter-Congolese Dialogue two decades ago. The DRC’s democratic aspirations should be the United States’ comparative advantage. The United States made mistakes in Congo, then called Zaire, during the Cold War, to the detriment of its own reputation, and it would be a shame to return to that era of zero-sum geopolitical competition. Security, strength, and prosperity are interests every nation pursues, but the United States can do better. Many Congolese, including civil society and political leaders, still see the United States as a force for good and a beacon of hope for ideals such as freedom, peace, democracy, justice, and human rights. It is what makes America strong: It is what makes the United States friends and allies, accords America respect and admiration—to be seen as a world leader rather than just another player, a model rather than a pariah.

The US private sector should take the lead. A golden age cannot be built on the blood of innocents, a course that can only lead to more hatred and suffering and will ultimately fail. The international business community must unite in committing to resource extraction practices that abide by international standards of human rights and transparency, incentivize the rival governments and factions in the subregion to lay down their arms, and make it easier and more profitable for companies to do their work. The private sector can rally international public opinion and pave the way for stability and prosperity. The long-suffering Congolese people deserve it.


Congo’s war and the critical minerals scramble are inextricably intertwined

Mvemba Phezo Dizolele is a senior fellow and director of the Africa Program at the Center for Strategic and International Studies (CSIS) in Washington, DC.

For the past thirty years, the world has viewed the Democratic Republic of Congo (Congo) through a binary lens of conflict and the exploitation of natural and mineral resources. The conflict optics magnify the insecurity that has characterized life in the eastern provinces of North Kivu, South Kivu, and Ituri. The protracted conflict between Congo and Rwanda spawned the proliferation of militias, including the two iterations of the Rwanda-backed M23, which captured the Congolese cities of Goma and Bukavu on January 25, 2025, and February 16, 2025, respectively. The death toll is estimated at more than seven thousand since January 2025, with unofficial reports from the region suggesting a much higher number of victims.

With 7.8 million internally displaced people, Congo ranks alongside Syria and Sudan among countries with the largest displaced populations, according to the United Nations. Of the more than two million people who have been displaced since the 2022 resurgence of M23, one million were displaced in 2024. Sexual violence, disappearances, and other human rights abuses have increased in M23-occupied areas. These abuses will continue as the rebels expand their territorial control.

Coverage of the conflict has also emphasized the role of natural and mineral resources as drivers of the war. Congo’s resource endowment is valued at a staggering $24 trillion. Analyses of the war have focused on the looting and smuggling of minerals, and have pointed to Rwanda and Uganda as primary beneficiaries. The two countries have emerged as major exporters of minerals, such as gold and coltan, of which they have limited reserves.

Recently, heightened interest in Congo’s mineral resources has been driven, among other reasons, by the West’s determination to circumvent China and secure critical resources like cobalt, copper, and lithium. For instance, on February 18, 2024, the European Union (EU) signed a Memorandum of Understanding on Sustainable Raw Materials Value Chains with Rwanda. Even though the EU signed similar memoranda with Congo, Zambia, and Namibia, Rwanda’s case raised questions given the country’s troubled history with Congo concerning mineral resources. This history includes invading Congo, arming violent rebel groups, and smuggling minerals out of rebel-controlled territory.

The second element driving high-profile interest in the country’s mineral wealth is the Trump administration’s classification of critical minerals as vital to US national security. The pursuit of a US-Congo minerals-for-security deal underscores Washington’s increased interest in Congo’s mineral endowment. As the world waits to learn about the contours and substance of the contract and what the United States will offer Kinshasa, it’s worth taking stock of the current foreign investment landscape in the country.

China tops the list of major investors with important financial and technical commitments to Congo’s mining sector. Besides China, the other major players who have established significant footprints in the country include the EU and the United States.

China leads in the mining and infrastructure sectors

China’s investments in DRC focus on the mining sector, with major stakes in the cobalt and copper industries. The engagement stems from the 2008 Sicomines joint venture between Chinese companies (Sinohydro and China Railway Engineering Corporation) and the Congolese government. The venture is the foundation of the Congo-China cooperation. Originally valued at $9 billion, the deal is a minerals-for-infrastructure barter. After pushback from the World Bank, the International Monetary Fund, and Congolese civil society organizations, the deal was renegotiated to $6 billion in 2009. In exchange for mining rights, China has financed infrastructure projects, including roads and hospitals. In 2024, Chinese infrastructure investment commitments were valued at $7 billion. Today, China is the largest investor in the country.

United States seeks minerals for national security

Until the advent of the second Trump administration, the United States showed little interest in DRC minerals and focused on the humanitarian challenges of the country. Western companies that secured mining deals often sold their holdings to the Chinese. With every Western business divestment, the Chinese increased their stake in Congo’s mining sector. The new policy change has generated interest for greater US-Congo cooperation. This minerals-focused change is supported by a robust diplomatic engagement that seeks to broker peace between Congo and Rwanda. The administration’s stated objective is to stabilize Congo and create the right conditions for investments in mining and infrastructure.

The new US approach is yielding early results. On May 6, 2025, California-based KoBold Metals and Australia-based AVZ Minerals reached an agreement for the former to acquire AVZ Minerals’ interests in the Manono lithium deposit in Congo. Billionaires Bill Gates and Jeff Bezos back KoBold. The agreement will enable the company to invest over one billion dollars to develop the lithium project.

It is difficult to evaluate the level of current US investments in Congo. US pledges of multi-billion-dollar investments depend on the promises of peace accords between Rwanda and Congo and related bilateral mineral agreements.

European Union focuses on ethical approach to critical minerals

European countries’ approach in Congo focuses on ethical sourcing and sustainability, which also include traceability of minerals due to armed conflict. European development banks have funded projects that improve governance and reduce poverty. Some of these initiatives, however, have faced criticism. For instance, in light of the resurgence of M23, the February 18, 2024, memorandum the EU signed with Rwanda—“establishing close cooperation with Rwanda” on the sourcing of critical minerals—has raised questions about the EU’s commitment to ethical sourcing, given that Rwanda backs the violent M23 paramilitary group. Analysts of the Great Lakes region, diplomats, and members of the European Parliament have all questioned and challenged the intent and effect of the memorandum. Some see it as a driver of the re-emergence of the M23 and the current war between Congo and Rwanda.

Top European investors in Congo include France, the Netherlands, and Italy, who contributed a combined foreign direct investment stock of approximately $32.6 billion in 2022.

Comparative overview of investments

Country/RegionKey sectorsNotable investments
ChinaMining, infrastructureSicomines Joint Venture, $7 billion in infrastructure
United StatesMining, diplomacyKoBold Metals’ $1 billion in Manono project
European UnionMining, development€424 million grants to the partnership with the DRC (2021-24)

As the scramble for critical minerals enters a new phase with increased US interest in Congo, the country needs effective governance and transparent policies to ensure that foreign investments contribute to sustainable development and economic growth.


Critical minerals won’t transform lives in the DRC—a radical shift in security and economic governance will

Rabah Arezki is a distinguished fellow at the Atlantic Council’s Freedom and Prosperity Center. He previously served as chief economist and vice president for economic governance and knowledge management at the African Development Bank, as well as chief economist for the Middle East and North Africa region at the World Bank, and as chief of the commodities unit in the research department at the International Monetary Fund (IMF).

The Democratic Republic of Congo’s abundance of critical minerals has given rise to comparisons with Saudi Arabia’s oil wealth. But that abundance has not improved citizens’ lives in one of the poorest countries in the world. Yet there is a course that could make that possible: finding the right balance between openness to investments from multinational corporations and economic sovereignty—broadly defined as the ability of a country to control its own economic system.

The DRC is the repository of the world’s largest reserves of critical minerals such as cobalt, copper, and lithium. Indeed, the DRC holds around 70 percent and 60 percent of the world’s cobalt and lithium reserves, respectively, as well significant deposits of nickel and uranium, which are metal components for energy generation and batteries for electric vehicles. Yet the DRC encapsulates the seemingly insurmountable and intertwined challenges posed by critical minerals. These challenges are tied to geopolitics, conflicts, and the environment as well as economic and social dimensions.

First and foremost, the challenge facing the DRC is the new geopolitics around critical minerals. The demand for critical minerals is exploding. According to the International Energy Agency, demand for minerals is projected to increase by more than four times by 2040 amid the transition from fossil fuels to renewable energy. Major powers—namely China, the United States, and the European Union—are engaged in a technological race spurring competition for access to these critical minerals. At the center of that global scramble is the DRC, which is being courted by these powers like never before. China is heavily invested in the mining sector of the DRC and controls the supply chains of critical minerals, including their processing.

Amid the technological race, China has recently imposed restrictions on exports of critical minerals to the United States. Washington and Brussels have tried to challenge Beijing’s monopoly of the supply chains of these minerals by attempting to secure mining contracts, including in the DRC. That competition should in principle help the DRC to not only get a fair share from the mining contracts but also the opportunity to move up the value chain. In practice, multinational corporations and foreign governments have much stronger capacity in negotiating mining contracts relative to the government of the DRC. Quid pro quos are also common involving the receipt of aid packages originating from self-interested donor countries in exchange for the awarding of mining contracts to multinational corporations—linked to donors.

Another major challenge for the DRC is conflict. The DRC is faced with external and internal conflicts. The DRC has a complex history: Once known as the Belgian Congo, it experienced a cruel form of colonization as the de facto personal property of Leopold II, Belgium’s king. The DRC’s post-independence era was plagued by direct interventions by foreign powers and autocratic rulers. That history helps explain the DRC’s deficient institutions, a persistent low level of trust among citizens, and distrust between the citizenry and the government.

The DRC has long faced massive violence and crimes in mineral-rich provinces such as Katanga and North Kivu—fueled by neighbors such as Rwanda and Uganda. The advances of Rwanda-backed M23 rebels in eastern Congo is alarming for the DRC and could fuel a “major continental conflict.” The Trump administration is actively pushing for a peace deal between the DRC and Rwanda to end the violence. This peace deal appears to be contingent upon the two countries each signing a bilateral economic agreement with the United States involving mineral extraction and processing. The peace negotiations are at an early stage, but these efforts are welcome especially if they lead to an outcome perceived as just.

Minerals are routinely smuggled out of the DRC. Add to that illicit artisanal mining—mining done, generally on a small scale and with low-tech tools, by individuals not employed by a mining company—as a tug of war between the authorities and citizens directly grabbing minerals. As a vast territory, it is imperative for the DRC to expand and strengthen the governance of its security sector to secure its borders and confront armed groups operating on its territory. The DRC is nominally a centralized republic, and it needs to find the right balance for revenue sharing between the different provinces and the central government to reduce internal tensions.

Further, the extraction of critical minerals is leading to significant environmental and health hazards. Indeed, extraction is often associated with deforestation, loss of biodiversity, and the use of toxic chemicals (including mercury), which are polluting ground water sources. Add to that child labor in the extraction of critical minerals, with children and women facing health degradation and abuse. The weak enforcement of environmental and social standards in the DRC is very concerning. A global debate is raging over the boycott of critical minerals emanating from zones of conflicts and forced labor. These boycotts alone are unlikely to sway the DRC’s government to do right by its citizens, but multinational corporations and foreign governments may be more susceptible to pressure.

These multifaceted challenges may seem insurmountable, but that should not deter the government of the DRC. To confront these challenges, the DRC must find a balance between outward- and inward-facing institutions. On the outward-facing front, the government needs to get its fair share of revenues from the extraction of minerals and attract investment in processing domestically. To do so, the government needs to deploy utmost transparency in its dealing with multinational corporations and foster the right human capital to match the capacity on the other side.

On the inward-facing front, the DRC needs to also ensure it is redistributing the proceeds of the revenues from the extraction of critical minerals to its citizens to ensure economic justice. To do so, the government of DRC needs to improve the allocative and technical efficiency of its spending. The government of DRC should pursue further its local content policy (designed to ensure that extractive industrial activity benefits the region where the resources are found) by localizing the processing of critical minerals. A useful example is the case of Botswana, which acquired a 15 percent stake in the world’s biggest diamond miner, DeBeers, which helped lock in local diamond-cutting activities.

This would represent a radical system shift in the DRC’s economic governance apparatus—and such a shift is imperative, in security as well as economic governance. Without that radical shift, the benefits of critical minerals won’t reach the people of the DRC. The Trump administration peace proposal could provide a pathway to a just peace and security between DRC and its neighbors, most notably Rwanda.


Partner perspective: The DRC’s vast potential extends beyond mining

Thomas De Dreux-Brézé is director of strategy development at Rawbank, the DRC’s largest bank. He manages relations with international partners (fundraising, co-financing, syndication, etc.) and intrapreneurial projects. Rawbank supports the work of the Atlantic Council’s Africa Center on the Democratic Republic of Congo.

The DRC is a land of untapped scale and promise. At the heart of Africa, where mining remains the backbone of the economy, the DRC is endowed with abundant natural wealth, a youthful and dynamic population, and a pivotal geographical position—holding many of the critical ingredients for large-scale economic transformation. While it faces undeniable structural challenges, political instability, infrastructure deficits, and regulatory complexity, these should not obscure the deeper truth: The DRC is a country in motion, with massive potential across multiple sectors.

As the global economic landscape shifts, marked by the rise of emerging markets, regional trade integration, and the acceleration of sustainable investments, the DRC stands out with compelling opportunities, particularly in energy, agriculture, climate finance, financial services, and intra-African trade. Realizing these prospects will require strategic vision, strong partnerships, and patient capital. But the potential returns—economic, social, and geopolitical—could be transformative, not only for the Congo but for the continent as a whole.

The energy sector as a pillar of transformation

No sustainable development is possible without access to affordable and reliable energy. And in this field, the DRC stands out as one of the world’s most promising frontiers.

The Congo River, the second largest in the world by discharge, holds a staggering 100 gigawatts (GW) of hydropower potential. Yet only a fraction of that is currently harnessed. Similarly, solar and wind energy remain vastly underexploited, even though recent studies suggest the country could generate up to 85 GW from renewable sources at competitive prices.

This untapped capacity offers a double dividend: powering domestic industries and households, while positioning the DRC as a regional supplier of green energy. Existing projects signal the way forward, including the rehabilitation of the Inga I and II dams, off-grid solar initiatives in eastern provinces, and hybrid minigrid pilots supported by international development banks.

But unlocking this sector will require not only investment in generation, but a massive expansion of transmission infrastructure, regional interconnections, and regulatory reform. If done right, the DRC could emerge not just as an energy consumer, but as a green energy champion for Africa.

Monetizing the Congo Basin’s ecological wealth

In the global climate equation, the Congo Basin is a critical wilderness area. As the second-largest rainforest on the planet, it captures an estimated 1.5 billion tons of CO₂ annually, roughly equivalent to the emissions of the entire European Union.

Because 70 percent of this vast rainforest is located within the DRC, the country has a unique role to play in planetary stabilization. But that role must be backed by economic value. A well-regulated carbon market—anchored in strong institutions, reliable measurement systems, and transparent benefit sharing—could become a vital source of revenue for the state and local communities.

The groundwork exists. The Blue Fund for the Congo Basin, the Presidential Climate Finance Task Force, and recent bilateral discussions with major carbon-credit buyers (Shell, Vitol, Engie, Microsoft, Amazon, the World Bank, Delta Air Lines, Netflix, Eni, etc.) demonstrate momentum. What’s needed now is acceleration: a national registry of credits, clear legal frameworks, and partnerships with credible certifiers.

Done properly, the DRC’s ecological stewardship can become a global public good, monetized fairly and reinvested in national development.

Agriculture as a national priority

Few countries possess agricultural potential on the scale of the DRC. With over eighty million hectares of arable land, most of it untouched, and a rapidly growing population projected to double by 2050, the DRC could become a major agricultural exporter and a driver of food security across the continent.

And yet, paradoxically, it remains a net food importer. The reasons are well known: fragmented value chains, poor logistics, lack of mechanization, and security concerns in the east.

But the opportunity is immense. Investments in agricultural technology, cold storage, rural roads, and access to inputs could lift yields dramatically. Initiatives like the revitalization of coffee cooperatives in South Kivu or the expansion of community irrigation systems in Kwilu show what is possible when technology, capital, and local know-how align.

In parallel, creating agricultural growth corridors and establishing specialized export zones would allow Congolese products (such as coffee, cocoa, rice, and cassava) to reach regional and global markets. Agriculture is not only about feeding people—it is about creating jobs, increasing exports, and building rural resilience.

Unlocking financial inclusion in a young, digital nation

The DRC’s demographic reality is its most powerful asset: a young, urbanizing population with rising aspirations and digital adoption. Yet financial inclusion remains stubbornly low. Less than 10 percent of the population has access to traditional banking and overall inclusion stands at around 38.5 percent.

This gap is a massive opportunity. The fintech revolution is already reshaping access to financial services. And in the DRC, local innovators are leading the charge.

The next frontier is to bridge fintech and formal banking: enabling savings, credit, insurance, and investment products through digital rails. Partnerships between fintech companies, microfinance institutions, and mobile operators will be key to scaling impact.

To catalyze the sector, regulators must continue building trust—ensuring data privacy, protecting consumers, and clarifying tax regimes. Financial services are not just about transactions, they are about empowering people, fueling enterprise, and driving shared prosperity.

The DRC as continental logistics hub

With nine borders and a landmass larger than Western Europe, the DRC is uniquely positioned to become a continental logistics hub. Its central location offers a direct line to West, East, and southern Africa—and with the African Continental Free Trade Area (AfCFTA) gaining traction, this position becomes even more valuable.

Realizing this potential requires hard and soft infrastructure alike. The development of the Lobito Corridor,* connecting the DRC and Zambia to Angola’s Atlantic coast, offers a cost-effective route to global markets. Investments in rail, roads, dry ports, and customs harmonization are already underway, supported by major global and regional institutions.

Beyond Lobito, projects such as the modernization of the Matadi-Kinshasa corridor and the establishment of special economic zones along border areas can spur regional supply chains, particularly in agriculture, textiles, and energy services.

Trade is not only about exporting but also about integrating into African value chains, reducing transaction costs, and creating cross-border prosperity. The DRC’s geography is its destiny—if paired with the right vision.

The case for confidence

To invest in the DRC today is not an act of charity or risk appetite. It is an act of strategic foresight.

Few countries offer such a rare blend of demographic dynamism, natural abundance, and regional leverage. The fundamentals are compelling, the reform trajectory is positive, and the appetite for change is growing in both the public and private sectors.

The international community (investors, development partners, entrepreneurs, etc.) has a role to play, not in prescribing solutions, but in cocreating a new development model with the Congolese people. One rooted in inclusivity, sustainability, and shared prosperity.

The DRC is not waiting to be discovered. It is asserting its place in the twenty-first century. Those who choose to walk alongside it today will not only unlock significant returns but also help write one of the most important economic success stories of our time.


US investors must lead on responsible sourcing in the DRC

Nicole Namwezi Batumike is a gender and responsible sourcing specialist at the Congolese nonprofit Panzi Foundation.

The ongoing conversations between the United States and the DRC over access to critical minerals present a rare and urgent opportunity to reset the terms of engagement with Congolese stakeholders and the broader mineral ecosystem. US officials have indicated that American and other Western companies are prepared to make multi-billion-dollar investments in the region once the bilateral mineral deals are finalized. The DRC holds vast reserves of cobalt, copper, and other strategic minerals essential to global technological and energy systems, yet for decades, the Congolese people have borne the costs of extraction without sharing in its benefits, treated as collateral in deals driven by geopolitical rivalries and elite bargains. On top of fueling instability and deepening marginalization, these transactional arrangements have also exposed investors to growing legal, financial, and reputational risks.

Experience shows that when mining fails to deliver value to local communities, companies lose their social license to operate, along with the legitimacy of the regimes they once depended on. In turn, those regimes have proven willing to shift allegiances in pursuit of regime security. The DRC, for example, has filed lawsuits against downstream tech giants and pushed for sanctions targeting neighboring countries laundering conflict minerals. It is increasingly clear that the Congolese regime is not bound to any single partner.

US engagement in Africa must reflect geopolitical realities. Recent peace deal discussions show the United States is willing to engage Rwanda’s refining sector—despite Kigali’s documented role in violating Congolese sovereignty and committing war crimes. If responsible sourcing is to truly guide stable engagements, policymakers must reckon with the risks of endorsing impunity and failing to deliver justice for the Congolese people.

The negotiation of a US-DRC mineral deal offers a crucial opportunity to break this cycle, provided Kinshasa resists the historical pattern of leveraging minerals solely for regime survival, and provided the United States supports a model of genuine security: one not rooted in a logic of extractivism but in mutual accountability and the rule of law. By aligning US investment strategy with Congolese legal frameworks and responsible sourcing standards, both countries can lower risks by forging a sustainable model.

Meeting international due diligence standards to ensure that a given business activity does not involve human-rights violations has shifted from being a reputational safeguard to a legal and strategic requirement. Standards include the Organisation for Economic Cooperation and Development Guidelines and the United Nations Guiding Principles on Business and Human Rights. Human rights due diligence is now codified through laws such as the European Union’s Corporate Sustainability Due Diligence Directive, France’s Duty of Vigilance Law, and Germany’s Supply Chain Due Diligence Act, making risk mitigation binding across global operations, especially in high-risk contexts like the DRC.

Yet despite these frameworks, the DRC remains at war, and the global minerals trade continues to serve short-term political and economic agendas. In 2024, the US Government Accountability Office reported that Section 1502 of the Dodd-Frank Act (America’s flagship due diligence law) had not reduced violence in eastern Congo and may have exacerbated conflict around artisanal gold-mining sites. The US government’s insistence on better outcomes demonstrates that due diligence is a means, not an end, and it cannot resolve the structural drivers of the conflict.

The DRC’s mining codes provide a responsible framework for US investors

It is in this context that the DRC’s 2018 mining code emerges not as an obstacle but as a strategic foundation. On top of aligning closely with international expectations for human rights due diligence, the code offers investors and companies a clear, locally grounded framework to manage risk and build sustainable partnerships. Born out of years marked by revenue leakage, extractive impunity, and donor-driven liberalization, the code reasserts the government’s dual roles as a regulator and shareholder while mandating local beneficiation (a part of mineral processing). It raises royalty rates on strategic minerals like cobalt, introduces a “super-profits” tax, and makes community development contributions legally binding. It also restricts the use of “stabilization clauses,” which limit countries’ ability to apply new regulations to investors with agreements signed before the regulations went into effect, and strengthens environmental and social accountability.

Pilot models offer early lessons in responsible sourcing. For example, at Mutoshi in the Lualaba province, the collaboration of multinational commodities group Trafigura with Chemaf, a Congolese company, and Pact, an international nonprofit organization, showed that formalizing artisanal mining not only met sourcing commitments but also helped contribute to de-risking efforts. Meanwhile, the Panzi Foundation’s Green Mining Community Model, an initiative led by Nobel Peace Prize laureate Denis Mukwege, links inclusive training in responsible sourcing and value addition with investments in essential infrastructure like health and education. By seeking to address the root causes of conflict and the violent tactics it enables—such as the use of rape as a weapon of war—the Green Mining Community model promotes integration and community empowerment, positioning responsible sourcing as a pathway to long-term stability and shared value.

Opportunities and challenges in the US policy landscape

The United States is on the path to establishing promising policies and frameworks for responsible investment, as demonstrated by the bipartisan BRIDGE to DRC Act, which emphasizes governance and transparency. Initiatives such as the US-backed expansion of the Lobito Corridor* linking the DRC to Angola’s Lobito port, alongside previous efforts like USAID’s Just Gold project, could provide a strong foundation. However, their long-term impact will depend on aligning with fair labor and environmental standards, sustainable development, and, importantly, the continuity of these efforts under the new administration.

At the same time, setbacks like the 180-day suspension of Foreign Corrupt Practices Act enforcement must be urgently addressed. Restoring accountability is essential for ethical investment.

As US Rep. Sara Jacobs highlighted in a March 2025 Africa Subcommittee hearing, investments will only succeed in the long term if they do not ignore the root causes of exploitation.

The Democratic Republic of the Congo stands at a pivotal juncture: either the cycle of extractive exploitation continues, or the government leverages its mineral wealth to foster long-term development. For US stakeholders, the way forward lies in transparent, law-abiding, and community-centered partnerships. This requires a commitment to the DRC’s 2018 Mining Code and collaboration with Congolese civil society. While short-term gains may be tempting, only those who embrace responsible sourcing and inclusive models will build sustainable, competitive advantages.


Better roads and stable power grids can unlock the DRC’s potential

Calixte Ahokpossi is mission chief, Democratic Republic of the Congo, for the International Monetary Fund (IMF).

The Democratic Republic of the Congo has vast economic potential, but infrastructure gaps remain a major constraint. The country is rich in natural resources and has a large and young population that could drive its development. However, chronic underinvestment in critical infrastructure—roads, rail networks, and power generation—continues to stifle economic progress. Additionally, governance challenges, corruption, macroeconomic instability, and recurring shocks—including armed conflicts in its eastern region—exacerbate fragility.

Addressing these challenges requires tackling their sociopolitical and economic roots, while leveraging the country’s vast natural resource wealth to rapidly bridge the infrastructure gap and foster diversified and sustained economic growth and poverty reduction. The DRC needs an ambitious infrastructure agenda, prioritizing the development of transport corridors and stable power grids.

Weak, unevenly distributed infrastructure

The DRC’s road network is severely underdeveloped, limiting mobility and trade. With only 152,400 kilometers (km) of roads, connectivity remains a challenge. The roads serve the nation’s vast 2.45 million km² territory, a road-to-territory ratio that is just 40 percent of the sub-Saharan African average of 0.14 km/ km², which is already low compared to other regions. Fewer than 10 percent of these roads are passable year-round, and more than half of Congolese (54.5 percent) must travel over an hour to reach a paved or asphalted road. Urban-rural disparities are stark. In the southeast (Haut-Katanga and Lualaba), large-scale copper and cobalt mining has spurred some investment in roads and rail lines, but the transportation infrastructure remains vastly insufficient for a region that supplies most of the world’s cobalt and a significant share of global copper. Indeed, the DRC accounts for over 70 percent of global cobalt output and approximately half the world’s proven reserves. In contrast, the eastern provinces (North and South Kivu, Ituri)—rich in gold and the “3T” minerals (tin, tantalum, tungsten)—receive minimal investment, as small-scale artisanal mining dominates, offering limited economic spillovers.

The DRC remains one of the least electrified nations despite vast hydropower potential. Only 19.1 percent of the population has access to electricity, with rural coverage plummeting to a mere 2 percent. The country is heavily dependent on two aging hydropower plants: Inga 1 (with an installed capacity of 351 megawatts) and Inga 2 (installed capacity of 1,424 MW), both under rehabilitation and operating at roughly 80 percent capacity. These plants primarily serve the mining industry. Ambitious projects like Inga 3 (3,000 to 11,000 MW) and the even larger Grand Inga (which could surpass China’s Three Gorges Dam) underscore the Congo River’s vast potential. Yet delays, shifting international partnerships, and environmental concerns have repeatedly stalled construction.

A barrier to inclusive growth

Weak infrastructure inflates costs, constrains businesses, and fosters economic disparities. Poor infrastructure raises transportation and production costs, stifling economic activity in time-sensitive sectors (like perishable goods). This is evident in agriculture, which employs the majority of Congolese (over 60 percent of the labor force). Despite the DRC’s fertile land, poor transport links prevent farmers from bringing their surplus produce to markets. Goods perish on farms, and the country remains dependent on food imports, making it vulnerable to global food price shocks and exchange rate fluctuations. These disruptions fuel inflation, disproportionately affecting the poorest. The weak transportation network also restricts economic diversification and limits access to remote mineral deposits, leaving critical resources untapped—or controlled by armed groups.

Unreliable energy supply disrupts businesses and limits opportunities for local transformation and adding value. From irrigation systems to medical clinics, power shortages affect essential activities and reinforce a cycle of poverty and missed opportunities. They also hamper industrialization, making local mineral processing, manufacturing, and daily business operations difficult or virtually impossible. Mining companies report that frequent power shortages force them to rely on diesel generators, raising production costs substantially. This inefficiency hits small businesses even harder, eroding profit margins and reducing corporate income tax revenues. Under these conditions, the DRC’s ambition to increase local mineral processing and move up the value chain remains a major challenge.

Five steps to good roads, reliable power, and economic growth

  1. Invest in transport and energy infrastructure to generate sustainable growth. The DRC’s vast mineral wealth and energy potential make it an attractive destination for large-scale private investment, but various bottlenecks such as infrastructure, business environment, and governance must be addressed. We focus here on infrastructure ones. Unlocking the hydropower potential (100,000 MW, which is 13 percent of the world’s total) could meet domestic needs and generate export revenue. Modernizing existing hydroelectric facilities and expanding transmission grids would provide clean, affordable electricity to both industry and households. For the mining sector, improved energy access could lower production costs while enhancing compliance with global environmental, social, and governance standards. Meanwhile, broader electrification would fuel local enterprise, boost economic diversification, and improve living standards.
  2. Diversify financing for the substantial investments needed to bridge the infrastructure gap. The International Monetary Fund estimates that achieving universal electricity access would require annual spending of 5.9 percent of gross domestic product (GDP), while ensuring that 75 percent of the population lives within two kilometers of an all-season road would necessitate 14.9 percent of GDP annually over ten years. Given these costs, leveraging diversified public, private, and international financing is key to accelerating infrastructure development.
  3. Strengthen public investment management to maximize returns. Weak governance and public investment management have led to waste, corruption risks, and substandard project execution. Strengthening investment governance would maximize value for money, boosting private-sector confidence and investment. Equally key is creating fiscal space for critical infrastructure and social and human capital investments. This requires improving domestic tax and nontax revenue collection and prioritizing growth-enhancing spending. Yet low revenue collection, especially relative to peer countries and the DRC’s economic potential, remains a major constraint.
  4. Pursue prudent, strategic government borrowing to secure favorable terms. Domestically, containing inflation would lower borrowing costs and encourage higher domestic savings, strengthening the local financial market. Externally, the focus should remain on concessional financing, prioritizing low-cost, long-term loans. Over time, as policy credibility strengthens and the country’s creditworthiness improves, access to international financial markets could be considered, particularly when global conditions are favorable.
  5. Scale up infrastructure investments through regional partnerships. The DRC would benefit from harnessing regional frameworks such as the East African Community and the Southern African Development Community to mobilize resources for transport and energy infrastructure. Cross-border energy grids and trade corridors can reduce operational costs, attract larger financing and enhance the country’s global competitiveness. Regional collaboration offers a pragmatic solution to tackling infrastructure deficits while strengthening economic resilience. Also, the development of the Lobito Corridor,* linking the DRC to Angola’s Lobito port, can deepen regional integration and offer more cost-effective transportation routes for DRC’s exports—though it will be important to avoid undermining parallel port development projects in the western part of the DRC.

In sum, the future of the DRC will be promising if its development challenges can be addressed in an ambitious and realistic manner. Developing a reliable road network and extending electricity provision will be critical to reap the DRC’s vast potential—and will need to be supported by sound macroeconomic policies and reforms to strengthen the country’s resilience to overcome its fragility.


Launched in 2022, the Africa Center’s programming on the DRC seeks to advise on securing the country’s governance and to raise awareness of the economic opportunities in the DRC. In partnership with Rawbank, the Africa Center analyzes the DRC’s business environment, the industrial potential of its critical minerals, and peace and security throughout the country.

*Rawbank, which supports the Atlantic Council Africa Center’s work on the Democratic Republic of Congo, has an equity stake in the Africa Finance Corporation, which leads the development of the Lobito Corridor.

Explore the program

The Africa Center works to promote dynamic geopolitical partnerships with African states and to redirect US and European policy priorities toward strengthening security and bolstering economic growth and prosperity on the continent.

The post Beyond critical minerals: Capitalizing on the DRC’s vast opportunities appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>
The European Union Growth Plan for the Western Balkans: A reality test for EU enlargement https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/in-depth-research-reports/report/the-european-union-growth-plan-for-the-western-balkans-a-reality-test-for-eu-enlargement/ Tue, 20 May 2025 21:19:05 +0000 https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/?p=847415 EU enlargement faces a test case in the Western Balkans. The current plan offers real benefits before accession, creating incentives for reform, but questions of enforceability and the relatively low amount of financial support threaten the success of the EU's political influence in the region.

The post The European Union Growth Plan for the Western Balkans: A reality test for EU enlargement appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>

The European Union (EU) Growth Plan for the Western Balkans aims to integrate the region into the EU single market, enhance regional cooperation, implement significant governance and rule of law reforms, and boost EU financial support. In doing so, the EU seeks to foster economic development, political stability, and security in the region amid rising geopolitical tensions, while accelerating the Western Balkans’ EU accession process.

The Growth Plan holds substantial potential to reinvigorate the enlargement process and counter the stagnation felt by both the EU and the region. Strong points include:

  • Tangible benefits before full accession: Providing stronger incentives for reform.
  • Active involvement of regional governments: Increasing buy-in from local leaders, who must submit their own reform agendas.
  • Enhanced economic integration, greater access to the EU market, increased EU funding, and reforms to governance and the rule of law: Stimulating investment, promoting economic growth, and raising living standards.

These improvements would bring the Western Balkans closer to the economic success seen in the Central and Eastern European countries in the EU over the past two decades. Moreover, fostering deeper regional cooperation will not only deliver an economic boost but also contribute to political normalization. If successful, the plan will bolster the EU’s political influence in the region, countering the impact of external actors and encouraging much-needed nearshoring investment from EU firms.

However, the plan faces several challenges:

  • Enforceability: Although conditionality is rigorous, with disbursement of funds tied to strict conditions to prevent misuse, there are concerns regarding its enforceability. The European Court of Auditors has already raised reservations.
  • Quantity: Additionally, the financial support offered is significantly lower than what EU member states in Southeast Europe receive. The reforms required for fund access and single market integration are substantial and will demand significant political will and institutional capacity—both of which have been lacking in the region at times over the past two decades.

The success of the growth plan will largely depend on its implementation. The EU must ensure rigorous enforcement of conditionality, reward positive reform steps, and increase funding for countries making progress. Civil society in the Western Balkans should be engaged as much as possible to foster broader support and transparency. The EU should also leverage the plan to align with its broader geopolitical and geoeconomic interests, particularly in strengthening its strategic autonomy. Additionally, the Growth Plan should be fully integrated with the EU’s competitiveness, green, and digital transition agendas. For their part, Western Balkans leaders should seize the increased agency provided by the plan. They must take ownership of the reforms they propose, participate actively in EU meetings, and design their reform agendas to deliver better living standards and deeper EU integration for their populations.

About the authors

Dimitar Bechev
Nonresident Senior Fellow, Europe Center, Atlantic Council
Senior Fellow, Carnegie Europe


Isabelle Ioannides
Nonresident Senior Research Fellow
Hellenic Foundation for Foreign and European Policy (ELIAMEP)

Richard Grieveson
Deputy Director
Vienna Institute for International Economic Studies

Related content

Explore the program

The Europe Center promotes leadership, strategies, and analysis to ensure a strong, ambitious, and forward-looking transatlantic relationship.

The post The European Union Growth Plan for the Western Balkans: A reality test for EU enlargement appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>
Unpacking Russia’s cyber nesting doll https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/content-series/russia-tomorrow/unpacking-russias-cyber-nesting-doll/ Tue, 20 May 2025 10:00:00 +0000 https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/?p=842605 The latest report in the Atlantic Council’s Russia Tomorrow series explores Russia’s wartime cyber operations and broader cyber web.

The post Unpacking Russia’s cyber nesting doll appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>

Russia’s full-scale invasion of Ukraine in February 2022 challenged much of the common Western understanding of Russia. How can the world better understand Russia? What are the steps forward for Western policy? The Eurasia Center’s new “Russia Tomorrow” series seeks to reevaluate conceptions of Russia today and better prepare for its future tomorrow.

Table of contents

When the Russian government launched its full-scale invasion of Ukraine on February 24, 2022, many Western observers braced for digital impact—expecting Russian military and security forces to unleash all-out cyberattacks on Ukraine. Weeks before Moscow’s full-scale war began, Politico wrote that the “Russian invasion of Ukraine could redefine cyber warfare.” The US Cybersecurity and Infrastructure Security Agency (CISA) worried that past Russian malware deployments, such as NotPetya and WannaCry, could find themselves mirrored in new wartime operations—where the impacts would spill quickly and globally across companies and infrastructure. Many other headlines and stories asked questions about how, exactly, Russia would use cyber operations in modern warfare to wreak havoc on Ukraine. Some of these questions were fair, others clearly leaned into the hype, and all were circulated online, in the press, and in the DC policy bubble ahead of that fateful February 24 invasion.

As the Putin regime’s illegal war unfolded, however, it quickly belied these hypotheses and collapsed many Western assumptions about Russia’s cyber power. Russia didn’t deliver the expected cyber “kill strike” (instantly plummeting Ukraine into darkness). Ukrainian and NATO defenses (insofar as NATO has spent considerable time and energy to support Ukraine on cyber defense over the years) were sufficient to (mainly) withstand the most disruptive Russian cyber operations, compared at least to pre-February 2022 expectations. And Moscow showed serious incompetencies in coordinating cyber activities with battlefield kinetic operations. Flurries of operational activity, nonetheless, continue to this day from all parties involved in the war—as Russia remains a persistent and serious cyber threat to the United States, Ukraine, and the West. Russia’s continued cyber activity and major gaps between wartime cyber expectations and reality demand a Western rethink of years-old assumptions about Russia and cyber power—and of outdated ways of confronting the threats ahead.

Russia is still very much a cyber threat. Patriotic hackers and state security agencies, cybercriminals and private military companies, and so on blend together with deliberate state decisions, Kremlin permissiveness, entrepreneurialism, competition, petty corruption, and incompetence to create the Russian cyber web that exists today. The multidirectional, murky, and dynamic nature of Russia’s cyber ecosystem—relying on a range of actors, with different incentives, with shifting relationships with the state and one another—is part of the reason that the Russian cyber threat is so complex.

Policymakers in the United States as well as allied and partner countries should take at least five steps to size up and confront Russia’s cyber threat in the years to come:

  • When assessing the expectations-versus-reality of Russia’s wartime cyber operations, distinguish between capabilities and wartime execution.
  • Widen the circle of analysis to include not just Russian state hackers but the broader Russian cyber web, including patriotic hackers and state-coerced criminals.
  • Avoid the trap of assuming Russia can separate out cyber and information issues from other bilateral, multilateral, and security-related topics—maintaining its hostility toward Ukraine while, say, softening up on cyber operations against the United States.
  • Continue cyber information sharing about Russia with allies and partners around the world.
  • Invest in cyber defense and in cyber offense where appropriate.

Russia’s cyber ecosystem

Russia is home to a complex ecosystem of cyber actors. These include military forces, security agencies, state-recruited cybercriminals, state-coerced technology developers, state-encouraged patriotic hackers, self-identified patriotic hackers acting of their own volition, and more. Even Russian private military companies offer cyber operations, signals intelligence (SIGINT), and other digital capabilities to their clients. Together, these actors form a large, complex, often opaque, and dynamic ecosystem. The Kremlin has substantial power over this ecosystem, both guiding its overall shape (such as permitting large amounts of cybercrime to be perpetuated from within Russia) and leveraging particular actors as needed (discussed more below). Simultaneously, decisions aren’t always top-down, as entrepreneurial cybercriminals and hackers—much like “violent entrepreneurs” in Russian business and crime, or the “adhocrats” vying for Putin’s ear to pitch ideas—take initiative, build their own capabilities, and sell them to the state as well.

The relationships that different security agencies, at different levels, in different parts of the country and world, have with Russian hackers also vary over time. A local security service office might provide legal cover to a group of criminal hackers one day (after the necessary payoffs change hands, of course), only for a Moscow-based team to recruit them for a state operation the next. While the Kremlin has a sort of “social contract” with hackers—focus mainly on foreign targets; don’t undermine the Kremlin’s geopolitical objectives; be responsive to Russian government requests—its tolerance for a specific cybercriminal group can change on a whim, too. Security officials might take a bribe from a cybercriminal, much as their colleagues do on the regular, and still find their patrons in prison and their own wrists in handcuffs.

On the Russian government side, the principal units involved in offensive cyber operations are the Federal Security Service (FSB), the military intelligence agency (GRU), and the Foreign Intelligence Service (SVR). Russia does not have a proper, centrally coordinating cyber command; it was never launched despite attempts in the 2010s. The Ministry of Defense’s initial efforts to make one happen by circa 2014 were, it came to be understood later, overtaken by the subsequent establishment of Information Operations Troops with seemingly some coordinating functions—though experts still debate its analogousness to a “cyber command” and its level of shot-calling compared to bodies like the Presidential Administration. So while it is possible for the Russian security agencies to coordinate their (cyber) operations with one another, their engagements are marked more by competition than cooperation.

The most prominent example of this potential overlap or inefficiency is when GRU-linked APT28 and SVR-linked APT29 both hacked the Democratic National Committee in 2016, making it unclear whether each knew the other was carrying out a similar campaign. This operational friction is exacerbated by the fact that the agencies’ general remits—SVR on human intelligence, for instance, and FSB mostly domestic—do not translate to the digital and online world. All three agencies hack military and civilian targets and, for example, the FSB actively targets and hacks organizations outside of Russia’s borders. Each agency approaches cyber operations differently, too, often in line with their overall institutional cultures—such as the GRU, known for its brazen kinetic operations including sabotage and assassination, carrying out the boldest and most destructive cyber operations, contrasted with the SVR, and its emphasis on secrecy, focusing on quiet cyber intelligence gathering like in the SolarWinds campaign. Still, the Russian state agencies with cyber operations remain active threats to the United States, Ukraine, the West, and plenty of others through intelligence-gathering efforts, disruptive operations, and efforts that meld both, such as hack-and-leak campaigns.

Beyond government units themselves, the state encourages patriotic hackers—sometimes just young, technically proficient Russians—to go after foreign targets through televised and online statements (such as disinformation about Ukraine). Different security organizations, such as the FSB, may hire cybercriminals for specific intelligence operations and pay them based on the targets they penetrate. Other private-sector companies pitch their own services to the state of their own volition, bid on government contracts, and support a range of offensive capability development, research and development, and talent cultivation efforts (including defensive activities and benign or even globally cybersecurity-positive activities beyond the scope of this paper). Russian private military companies increasingly offer capabilities related to cyber and SIGINT to their private and government clients around the world, too. All the while, the state retains the capability to target specific people and companies in Russia that otherwise have nothing to do with the state, apply the relevant pressure, and compel them to assist with state cyber objectives, which it can wield to extraordinary effect.

As the historian Stephen Kotkin notes, “The Russian state can confound analysts who truck in binaries.” While there are several core themes to this ecosystem—complexity; state corruption; overwhelming tolerance for and even tacit support of cybercrime; myriad offensive cyber actors in play—Russia’s cyber ecosystem neither fits into a neat box nor is a neatly run one at that.

For all the threats these actors pose to Ukraine and the West, assuming that the Putin regime controls all cyber activity emanating from within Russia’s borders is not just inaccurate (e.g., the country’s too big; there are too many players; it’s not all top down), but is the kind of assumption that serves as a “useful fiction” for the Kremlin. It makes the system appear ruthlessly efficient and coordinated, gives disconnected or tactically myopic actions a veneer of larger strategy, and puts Putin at the center of all cyber operation decision-making. Thinking as much can, intentionally or not, further feed into the idea that the Kremlin’s motives are clear and fixed or driven by some kind of “hybrid war” strategy. It also obscures the fact that—unlike many Western countries that do, in fact, publish official “cyber strategies”—Russia does not have a defined cyber strategy document, instead drawing on a range of documents and sweeping “information security” concepts to frame information, the internet, and cyber power.

On the contrary, it is the multidirectional, murky, and dynamic nature of Russia’s cyber ecosystem that makes cyber activity subject to sudden change, feeds opportunities for interagency rivalries, contributes to effects-corroding corruption and competition, and provides the Kremlin with a spectrum of talent, capabilities, and resources to tap, direct, and deny (plausibly or implausibly) as it needs. It is in part this dynamism and multidirectional nature that makes Russia’s cyber threat so complex—as mixes of deliberate state decisions, Kremlin permissiveness, entrepreneurialism, competition, petty corruption, and incompetence blend together to create the Russian cyber web that exists today. Relationships between the state proper, at different levels, in different organizations, with nonstate cyber affiliates are often shifting; ransomware groups persistently targeting Western critical infrastructure, for example, may be prolific for months before collapsing under internal conflict and reconstituting into new groups, with new combinations of the old tactics and talent. It is also the reason that what is known to date about cyber operations during Russia’s full-out war on Ukraine provides such a valuable case study in assessing the status quo of this ecosystem—and, coupled with lessons from past incidents (like Russian cyberattacks on Estonia in 2007, Georgia in 2008, and Ukraine in 2014), helps to better weigh the future threat.

What happened to Russia’s cyber might?

Cyber operations have played a substantial role in Russia’s full-on invasion of Ukraine in February 2022 and the ensuing war. These activities range from distributed denial of service (DDoS) attacks knocking Ukrainian websites offline and Ukrainian patriotic hackers’ attacks on Russian government sites (what Kyiv calls its “IT Army”) to Russia using countless malware variants to exfiltrate data and targeting Ukrainian Telegram chats and Android mobile devices. Without getting into a timeline of every major operation—neither this paper’s focus nor possible given limits on public information—it is clear that Russian and Ukrainian forces and their allies, partners, and proxies have made cyber operations part of the war’s military, intelligence, and information dimensions.

There are many ways to define cyber power, which is by no means limited to offensive capabilities. In Russia’s case, analysts could focus on anything from Russia’s national cyber threat defense system—the Monitoring and Administration Center for General Use Information Networks (GosSOPKA), which effectively brings together intrusion detection, vulnerability management, and other technologies for entities handling sensitive information—to the enormous IT brain drain problems the country suffered immediately following the full-on invasion of Ukraine. As explored in a study last year for the Atlantic Council, Russia’s growing digital tech isolationism—both a long-standing goal and increasing reality for the Kremlin—has driven more independence in some areas, like software, while heightening dependence and strategic vulnerability in others, such as dependence on Chinese hardware. This paper’s focus, though, will remain on Russia’s offensive capabilities.

Pre-February 2022 expectations in the United States and the West, as highlighted above, were dominated by those predicting extensive Russian disruptive and destructive cyber operations. In these scenarios, Russia would leverage its state, state-affiliated, state-encouraged, and other capabilities to cause serious damage to Ukrainian critical infrastructure (telecommunications, water systems, energy grids, and so forth) and cleanly augment its kinetic onslaught. Russia would “employ massive cyber and electronic warfare tools” to collapse Ukraine’s will to fight through digital means.

To be sure, some predictions were more measured. Some pointed to the 2008 Russo-Georgian War, as an illustration of Russian forces effectively using DDoS attacks (Moscow’s shatter-communications approach) in concert with disinformation and kinetic action to prepare the battlefield, and conjectured that Moscow would do the same if it moved troops further into Ukraine. Others highlighted Russia turning off Ukrainian power grids as a possible menu option for Moscow as it escalated. Cybersecurity scholars Lennart Maschmeyer and Nadiya Kostyuk, contrary to widely held positions, argued two weeks before Russia’s full-scale invasion that “cyber operations will remain of secondary importance and at best provide marginal gains to Russia,” incisively noting that press headlines talking of “cyber war” rest on “the implicit assumption that with the change in strategic context, the role of cyber operations will change as well.” The overwhelming sentiment, though, was worry and anticipation of what some considered true, cyber-enabled, twenty-first century warfare.

But the cyber operations that unfolded immediately before and after the February 2022 invasion defied what many Western (including American) commentators were predicting. Russia didn’t deliver the cyber kill strike expected (instantly plummeting Ukraine into darkness). Ukrainian and NATO defenses were sufficient to (mainly) withstand the most disruptive FSB and GRU cyber operations, compared at least to pre-February 2022 expectations. And Moscow showed serious incompetencies in coordinating cyber activities with battlefield kinetic operations. Many experts who did not expect cyber-Armageddon per se have still been surprised by the limited impact of Russian attacks, the focus on wiper attacks (that delete a system’s data via malware) and data gathering over critical infrastructure disruptions, and apparent poor coordination between cyber and kinetic moves made by the Russian Armed Forces and intelligence services.

What, then, explains the gulf between expectations—decisive moves, cleanly executed operations, and visible results—and reality, with some operations, certainly, but the overwhelming focus on kinetic activity and far less on destructive cyber movement than anticipated? Scholars and analysts have, since February 2022, put forward several buckets of hypotheses.

Various commentators argue, as National Defense University scholar Jackie Kerr compiles and breaks down, that Russia’s weak integration of cyber into offensive campaigns was symptomatic of broader problems with Russian military preparations for full-on war; that Western observers simply overestimated Russia’s cyber capabilities; that poor coordination and competition between Russian security agencies impeded operational success; or that Ukraine’s cyber defenses have been extraordinarily robust. Some have gone so far as to attribute Ukrainian cyber defenses, backed up by Western allies and partners, as the primary reason for Russian offensive failures. Russia cyber and information expert Gavin Wilde argues that Russia focused on countervalue operations (against civilian infrastructure, to demoralize political leaders and the public) more than counterforce operations (against Ukrainian military capabilities), to little effect, “a sign of highly sophisticated intelligence tradecraft being squandered in service of a deeply flawed military strategy.”

Professors Nadiya Kostyuk and Erik Gartzke write that Russia’s full-on war on Ukraine is about territory and physical control, making physical military activity far more important than cyber operations themselves. Cyber scholar Jon Bateman argues that traditional signals jamming and Russia’s cyberattack against the Viasat satellite communications system, coupled with a chaotic slew of data-deletion attacks, may have helped Russia initially—but that cyber operations from there had diminishing novelty and impact. Russia’s poor strategy, insufficient intelligence preparation, and interagency mistrust have been presented as causes for undermining Russia’s cyber-kinetic strike coordination, too. Others argue that Russians wanted to gather intelligence from Ukrainian systems more than disrupt them, that Russia’s information-focused troops have been more optimized for propaganda than cyber operations, and that cyber scholars’ and pundits’ expectations were plain wrong given that Russia wanted to inflict physical violence on Ukraine more than achieve cyber-related effects—necessitating bombs, missiles, and guns over malware, zero days, and DDoS attacks.

In reality, of course, many factors are likely in play at once. Plenty of the above scholars and commentators recognize this multifactorial situation and say it outright (although a few do push a single prevailing explanation for the war’s cyber outcomes). However, it’s worth explicitly stressing that many factors coexist, in light of occasional efforts to provide reductive explanations for complex wartime activities and effects. Concluding that Russia is no longer a cyber threat, for instance, is wrong. While Ukraine as a country has demonstrated extraordinary will and resilience, and while Ukrainian cyber defenses have been more than commendable, explanations that place the rationale solely on formidable Ukrainian cyber defenses are likewise reductive. Taking such explanations as fact simplifies the many factors involved and can veer analysis and debates away from the policy actions that are still needed, such as continued cyber threat information sharing between the United States and Ukraine.

The above, plausible, evidence-grounded explanations are not mutually exclusive. FSB officers, rife with paranoia, conspiratorialism, and a Putin-pleasing orientation, did indeed grossly misinterpret the situation on the ground in Ukraine in 2022 and fed that bad information to the Kremlin, potentially skewing assessments of cyber options as well.

Interagency competition may very well have undermined, once again, the ability of the FSB, GRU, and SVR to coordinate activities with one another, let alone with the Ministry of Defense and Russian proxies in Belarus, and therefore hampered more effective planning, coordination, and execution of cyber operations. For example, during the war’s initial stages, elements of the SVR may very well have sought to technically gather intelligence from targets that GRU- or FSB-tied criminal groups were indiscriminately trying to knock offline or wipe with malware, thrusting uncoordinated activities into tension.

Like in every other country on earth, Russian cyber operators are additionally subject to resource constraints: A hacker spending a day on breaking into a Ukrainian energy company is a hacker not spending time on spying on expats in Germany or setting up a collaboration with a ransomware group. Competition, therefore, not just between agencies—turf wars, budget fights, who gets the primary jurisdiction over Ukraine, and so forth—but within them, over who gets to spend what time and resources targeting which entities, sit within broader Russian government calculi over cyber, military, and intelligence operations. And, among others, Russia’s overall strategy did lead to bad moves, as Wilde and others have noted, with limited effect and burning away Russian capabilities (like exploits) in the process. Recognizing these many likely factors will facilitate better analysis of where Russia stands.

The gap between the imagined, all-out “cyber war” and the past three years’ reality also begs the question of whether the right metrics were considered in the first place. As much as cyber capabilities are inextricable from modern intelligence operations, and as much as cyber and information capabilities are embedded throughout militaries around the world, war is obviously about far more than cyber as a domain. But experts studying cyber all day, every day, may fall into the unintentional trap (as anyone can) of having their area of study become the focal point of analysis in a war with many moving pieces and considerations—hence, some of the commentary anticipated Russian destruction of Ukraine to happen through code, compared to a range of military weaponry. Academic theories, moreover, of how cyber conflict will unfold in political science-modeled simulations or think tank war games may similarly fail to map to battlefield realities, such as generalizing how cyber fits into warfare without adequately considering unique contexts in a country like Russia. Layered on top of all this—in the academies, in the media, in the data and artificial intelligence (AI) era—is a frequent desire to quantify everything, too, obscuring the fact that not everything can be effectively, quantifiably measured and that counting up the number of observed Russian cyber operations and scoring them may still not get to the heart of their inefficacy. Clearly, as US and Western perspectives on Russian cyber power shift with more information and time, it is worth rethinking Russia’s future cyber power—not just for how the West can recalibrate its assumptions and size up the threats, but in how the West can prepare to act and respond in the future.

Unpacking the (cyber) nesting doll

The takeaway from comparing predictions and reality shouldn’t be that pundits are always wrong or that Russia’s cyber operations are considerably less threatening in 2025. Nor should it be that Ukraine is propped up solely by Western government and private-sector cyber defenses, and that Russia is simply waiting to unleash a devastating cyber operation to end it all.

Russia remains a sophisticated, persistent, and well-resourced cyber threat to the United States, Ukraine, and the West generally. This is not going to change anytime soon. Kremlin-spun “crackdowns” on cybercrime (arrests that were little more than public relations stunts), frenetic talk of US-Russia rapprochement, and wishful thinking about Putin’s willingness to cease subversive activity against Ukraine do not portend, as some might suggest, that the United States can sideline Russia as a central cyber problem—and focus instead on China.

The Russian government views cyber and information capabilities as key to its military and intelligence operations, and the Kremlin still has one top enemy in its national security sights: the United States. Outside the Russian state per se, a range of ransomware gangs and other hackers in Russia will continue targeting companies, critical infrastructure, and other entities in the United States, Ukraine, and the West, too. There are at least five steps US policymakers and their allies and partners should take to size up this threat—against the full scope of Russia’s cyber web and integrating lessons learned so far from Russia’s full-out war on Ukraine—and confront it head-on in the coming years.

When assessing the expectations-versus-reality of Russia’s wartime cyber operations, distinguish between capabilities and wartime execution. Clearly, Russian offensive cyber activity during its full-on war against Ukraine has not matched up against Western assumptions that envisioned a cyber onslaught that turned off power grids, disrupted water treatment facilities, and blacked out communications. Evaluating how and why Russia did not make this happen is critical to understanding Russia’s operational motives, play-by-play planning and coordination between security agencies, targeting interests, and much more. But analysts and media must be careful to avoid thinking that Russia’s cyber capabilities themselves are weak. Clearly, when Russian hackers put the pedal to the metal, so to speak—ransomware gangs targeting American hospitals, or the GRU going after Ukrainian phones—they can deliver serious results. A better approach is policymakers and analysts in the United States, as well as in allied and partner countries, breaking out Russia’s continued cyber threats across ransomware, critical infrastructure targeting, mobile-device hacking, and so on while pairing the capabilities against where execution could fall short in practice. Doing so will give a better sense of Russia’s cyber strengths and weaknesses—and distinguish between the different components of carrying out a cyber operation.

Widen the circle of analysis to include not just Russian state hackers but the broader Russian cyber web, including patriotic hackers and state-coerced criminals. Focusing Western intelligence priorities, academic studies, and industry analysis mainly on Russian government agencies as the primary vector of Russian cyber power loses the importance of the overall Russian cyber web. Putting the focus mostly on Russian government agencies also loses, as my colleague Emma Schroeder has unpacked in detail, the role that public-private partnerships have played in cyber operations and defenses in the conflict, and the opportunity to assess similar public-private dynamics on the Russian side. Conversely, making sure to consider the roles of government contractors, military universities, patriotic hackers, state-tapped cybercriminals, and other actors as described above should help to fight the temptation to treat all Russian cyber operations as top-down—and illuminate the many ways in which Russia can build capabilities, source talent, and carry out operations against the West. Understanding these actors will allow for better tracking, threat preparation, defense, and, where needed, disruption.

Avoid the trap of assuming Russia can separate out cyber and information issues from other bilateral, multilateral, and security-related topics—maintaining its hostility toward Ukraine while, say, softening up on cyber operations against the United States. Whether the US government can or cannot separate out cyber issues vis-à-vis Russia from other elements of the US-Russia relationship (e.g., trade, nuclear security), Western policymakers should avoid the trap of assuming the Russian government is currently capable, let alone willing, of genuinely and seriously doing the same: separating out its cyber activities from other policy and security issues.

The Russian government has come to view the internet and digital technologies as both weapons that can be wielded against the state and weapons to use against Russia’s enemies. In this sense, cyber operations (as well as information operations) are core not just to Moscow’s approach to modern security, military activity, and intelligence operations but, perhaps more importantly, to the Kremlin’s conceptualization of regime security as well. Paranoia and propaganda about fifth columnists (with, sometimes, one feeding the other), persistent efforts to crack down on the internet in Russia, and a continued belief that Western tech companies and civil society groups are weaponizing the internet to undermine the Kremlin, mean that the regime will not truly believe it can put “information security” on the sidelines—and that includes not just internet control but cyber operations. Policymakers must go into diplomatic and other engagements with Russia with their eyes wide open.

Continue cyber information sharing about Russia with allies and partners around the world. For years, military and intelligence scholars and analysts have referred to Russia’s actions in Georgia, Ukraine, and other former Soviet republics as a “test bed” or “sandbox” for what Russia might do in other countries. It would be a strategic, operational, and tactical mistake to think that Russian cyber operations against Ukraine are just confined to Ukraine and that two-way information sharing with Ukraine about cyber threats is a waste of time and resources. Quite the opposite: Russia’s cyber and information activities against Ukraine today can give the United States and its allies and partners critical insights into the types of capabilities and operations that could, and very well might be, carried out against them at the same time or days or months later. Whether hack-and-leak operations designed to embarrass political figures, wiper attacks designed to destroy government databases, espionage operations, or anything in between, having real-time information about Russian cyber threats will only help the United States and its allies and partners better defend their own networks and systems against hacks and attacks.

Invest in cyber defense and in cyber offense where appropriate. Persistent, sophisticated Russian cyber threats to a range of key US and allied and partner systems—military networks, hospitals, financial institutions, critical infrastructure, advanced tech companies, civil society groups—demand continued investments in cyber defense. In addition to information-sharing, the United States and its allies and partners need to continue prioritizing market incentives for companies to enhance cyber defenses along with baseline requirements for essential measures such as multifactor authentication, detailed access controls, robust encryption, continuous monitoring, network segmentation, resourced and empowered cybersecurity decision-makers, and much more. Just as the Russians clearly possess a range of advanced cyber capabilities, any number of recent operations, including against Ukraine, show that Russian operations (like those carried out by many other powers) continue to succeed with basic moves such as phishing emails. The United States and its allies and partners need to continually increase cyber defenses. And, where appropriate, the United States and its allies and partners should ensure the right capabilities and posture to carry out cyber offensive operations—including to preemptively disrupt Russian attacks (the “defend forward” euphemism). As the Kremlin is more paranoid and conspiratorial, the notion of diplomatic talks and establishing cyber redlines is less and less realistic. Active mitigation and disruption of threats, rather than relying too heavily on diplomatic meetings or endless criminal indictments, are together a more feasible approach to protecting US and allied and partner interests against Russian cyber threats in the years to come.

Conclusion

Lessons from cyber operations—and about cyber operations and capabilities—from the Russian full-on war against Ukraine will continue to emerge in the coming years. This trickle of information may slowly dissipate some of the “fog of war” surrounding the back-and-forth hacks and shed much-needed light on issues such as coordination and conflict between Russian security agencies in cyberspace.

For now, however, the issue for the United States is clear: Russia remains a persistent, sophisticated, and well-resourced cyber threat to the United States and its allies and partners around the world. The threat stems from a range of Russian actors, and it stands to continue impacting a wide range of American government organizations, businesses, civil society groups, individuals, and national interests across the globe. As wonderful as the idea of cyber détente might be, Putin’s paranoia about Western technology, Russian officials’ insistence that the internet is a “CIA project” and Meta is a terrorist organization, and military and intelligence interest in conflict and subversion against the West will not evaporate with a wartime ceasefire or a newfound agreement with the United States. These are hardened beliefs and fairly cemented institutional postures that are not going to shift under the current regime.

Rather than dismissing Russia’s cyber prowess because of unmet expectations since February 2022, American and Western policymakers must size up the threat, unpack the complexity of Russia’s cyber web, and invest in the right proactive measures to enhance their security and resilience into the future.

Acknowledgements

The author would like to thank Brian Whitmore and Andrew D’Anieri for the invitation to write this paper and for their comments on an earlier draft. He also thanks Gavin Wilde, Trey Herr, Aleksander Cwalina, Ambassador John Herbst, and Nikita Shah for their comments on the draft.

About the author

Justin Sherman is a nonresident senior fellow with the Cyber Statecraft Initiative, part of the Atlantic Council Technology Programs. He is also the founder and CEO of Global Cyber Strategies, a Washington, DC-based research and advisory firm; an incoming adjunct professor at Georgetown University’s School of Foreign Service; a contributing editor at Lawfare; and a columnist at Barron’s. He writes, researches, consults, and advises on Russia security and technology issues and is sanctioned by the Russian Ministry of Foreign Affairs.

Explore the programs

The Eurasia Center’s mission is to promote policies that strengthen stability, democratic values, and prosperity in Eurasia, from Eastern Europe in the West to the Caucasus, Russia, and Central Asia in the East.

The Atlantic Council’s Cyber Statecraft Initiative, part of the Atlantic Council Technology Programs, works at the nexus of geopolitics and cybersecurity to craft strategies to help shape the conduct of statecraft and to better inform and secure users of technology.

Related content

The post Unpacking Russia’s cyber nesting doll appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>
The United States’ role in managing the nuclear fuel cycle https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/in-depth-research-reports/issue-brief/the-united-states-role-in-managing-the-nuclear-fuel-cycle/ Wed, 14 May 2025 21:10:18 +0000 https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/?p=843268 Global nuclear energy generation is likely to increase significantly in the next few decades. This expansion provides an opportunity for the United States to shape the global nuclear energy landscape and set a high bar for standards of safety, security, and nonproliferation for the nuclear fuel cycle.

The post The United States’ role in managing the nuclear fuel cycle appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>
While there is uncertainty about the magnitude of nuclear energy required as global energy demand increases, it is likely that global nuclear energy usage will increase significantly in the next few decades. Such an expansion will require considerable growth in the nuclear energy ecosystem and enabling technologies, presenting a chance for the United States to shape the global nuclear energy landscape. US leadership is critical for upholding the highest global standards of safety, security, and nonproliferation —moreover, nuclear energy partnerships with other nations can help the United States establish and reinforce strong diplomatic ties. Its engagement in the sector brings an added national security benefit. 

Building on the Atlantic Council’s previous report on the nuclear innovation ecosystem, this new report by Kemal Pasamehmetoglu explores the role of the United States in establishing a full domestic nuclear fuel cycle.  

About the author

Related content

Stay connected

Keep up with the latest from the Global Energy Center!

Sign up below for program highlights, event invites, and analysis on the most pressing energy issues.

Explore the program

The Global Energy Center develops and promotes pragmatic and nonpartisan policy solutions designed to advance global energy security, enhance economic opportunity, and accelerate pathways to net-zero emissions.

The post The United States’ role in managing the nuclear fuel cycle appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>
A rising nuclear double-threat in East Asia: Insights from our Guardian Tiger I and II tabletop exercises https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/in-depth-research-reports/report/a-rising-nuclear-double-threat-in-east-asia-insights-from-our-guardian-tiger-i-and-ii-tabletop-exercises/ Mon, 12 May 2025 12:00:00 +0000 https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/?p=841042 A decade from now, the United States will face even tougher challenges in the Indo-Pacific than it does today. With this in mind, the Atlantic Council's Guardian Tiger tabletop exercise series is preparing mid-level government and military leaders to address such threats.

The post A rising nuclear double-threat in East Asia: Insights from our Guardian Tiger I and II tabletop exercises appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>

Click on the banner above to explore the Tiger Project.

Guardian Tiger led me to realize that we need to rethink our operational and strategic Indo-Pacific posture. We have to be ready for a local fight to become a regional war with nuclear escalation and threats to the homeland. It’s scary, but we can’t assume it away. We could face China and North Korea simultaneously. Either of them could go nuclear before giving up.


—US government official, participant in the Guardian Tiger tabletop exercises, name withheld

A decade from now, the United States is very likely to face operational and strategic challenges in the Indo-Pacific even more complex and difficult than those it faces today. The nuclear capabilities of China and North Korea are growing rapidly, and the risk is increasing that a conflict with one would escalate horizontally to a regional conflict involving both.

By 2030, China will likely be a near peer to the United States in terms of strategic nuclear capabilities. Its amphibious, air, and strike capabilities could also dramatically improve its ability to project force to Taiwan and the surrounding region. China’s plans, intentions, and timeline for use of force against Taiwan remain topics of heated debate. However, in the next five to ten years, it is plausible that Beijing will consider conditions to be more favorable for a military resolution, even if it is not eager for a global war with the United States.

In this same period, North Korea is likely to field a wider range of more precise and effective nonnuclear escalatory options, as well as a robust, mobile, tactical nuclear-missile force—backed by a far more credible capability to retaliate against the region and the continental United States with thermonuclear weapons. These capabilities will provide Pyongyang with its own reasons to consider escalating its use of force against South Korea, though its aims will likely be far more limited than Beijing’s aims for Taiwan.

By 2030, it is unlikely that Beijing and Pyongyang will have developed enough trust to enable them to coordinate a campaign of aggression to achieve their goals. However, their individual interests and their common animosity toward the United States and its allies will give each of these potential US adversaries strong incentives to escalate—opportunistically or reactively—in the event the other initiates a conflict. In 2030, each of these potential adversaries will also have much stronger incentives and capabilities to threaten or conduct a limited nuclear attack in the event that either adversary initiates such a conflict.

North Korean leader Kim Jong Un shakes hands with China’s President Xi Jinping during Xi’s visit to Pyongyang, North Korea, in this undated photo released on June 21, 2019, by North Korea’s Korean Central News Agency (KCNA). Source: KCNA via REUTERS.

Meanwhile, two key US allies in the Indo-Pacific—South Korea and Japan—are investing to develop far more powerful militaries by 2030. These allies’ military capabilities, as well as their diplomatic, informational, and economic influence, could help counter and deter growing threats. However, these allies will also have greater motivation and capability to act unilaterally if their own interests are threatened.

Considering these trends, US military and government leaders will face some tough challenges in the Indo-Pacific a decade from now. With these in mind, the Indo-Pacific Security Initiative (IPSI)—with the support of the Strategic Trends Research Initiative of the Defense Threat Reduction Agency (DTRA)—launched the Guardian Tiger tabletop exercise series to help prepare mid-level US government and military leaders for future key roles in addressing such threats. These initial Guardian Tiger exercises were also intended to develop analytic insights and actionable recommendations to help the United States start preparing for limited nuclear attacks by an adversary—work that is continuing today. This report summarizes and analyzes the first two Guardian Tiger exercises.

Key findings

  1. If the United States is engaged in conflict with either China or North Korea, it might not be able to deter the other adversary from escalating that conflict or initiating a separate one. As a conflict with an initial adversary escalates, it may become necessary—and even strategically or operationally advantageous—to accept the risk of such simultaneous conflicts against multiple adversaries rather than remain hamstrung by the costs.
  2. What it takes to prevent North Korea from escalating a conflict will differ significantly from what is required to prevent China from doing so. Credible threats of vertical escalation from Pyongyang, particularly threats of nuclear strikes, are likely to come early and often. Meanwhile, China has many strong incentives and non-nuclear options to escalate horizontally—across domains and geography, including in space, in the cyber domain, and against the US homeland—to disrupt Washington’s will and ability to support Taiwan. Each adversary’s distinct escalation pattern will require a tailored set of capabilities and approaches to anticipate, deter, and counter it.
  3. War in the Indo-Pacific may start over one flashpoint, but it will quickly become about much more. A war beginning over Taiwan is likely to become about far more than the status of Taiwan itself, including China’s overall regional and global position post-war, as well as the US homeland’s safety. Meanwhile, an escalating South Korea-US conflict with North Korea will likely become about the future of the global nuclear order, the credibility of US extended deterrence, and the potential unification of the long-divided Korean peninsula—not just about restoring the armistice.
  4. The United States should prepare for the possibility of a limited nuclear attack—with responses beyond just the threat of complete annihilation. The political and military choices necessary to better prepare for a limited nuclear strike, and to operate effectively in the aftermath, are hard. The tendency to avoid these hard choices may mean that the United States is left with no good conventional options if threats of disproportionate punishment fail to deter a limited nuclear attack. Meanwhile, US low-yield nuclear response capabilities are limited, potentially leaving only ineffective or excessive nuclear options in some circumstances.
  5. Effective deterrence of war and of escalation during war in the Indo-Pacific will require the United States to simultaneously coordinate laterally and at multiple echelons, including prior to the outbreak of conflict.  This would involve establishing stronger combined (multinational), joint (cross-military service), and interagency command and control, coordination, informational shaping, and planning mechanisms between the United States and its allies across multiple military commands and government agencies, in advance of a crisis.

Methodology

Each of the first two Guardian Tiger tabletop exercises presented participants with a distinct scenario set in the year 2030, featuring conditions likely to lead to simultaneous confrontations involving the Korean peninsula and the risk of limited nuclear use.

The scenario for the first exercise, Guardian Tiger I, was premised on North Korea initiating a limited conflict that escalated to chemical weapons use and included potential drivers for China’s involvement. The scenario for the second exercise, Guardian Tiger II, was based on a conflict initiated by Chinese aggression against Taiwan, with the potential for that conflict to spill over into Korea through several potential pathways.

Although not truly “free play” with unlimited scope for changes, the exercises were designed to allow for a considerable degree of latitude for participants—within the bounds of plausibility and some general guidance from facilitators playing the roles of national leaders. The North Korea cells during each exercise, in particular, chose actions that had not been anticipated during the design phase. This required the facilitation team to adjust the pathways for the development of the scenarios for the exercise.

The more than sixty participants included US government officials, military officers, and leading nongovernment experts. Participants were organized into a US (blue) team and a control team. The blue team consisted of three cells of up to a dozen members each, representing different echelons: a national interagency cell (approximating National Security Council mechanisms), a national defense and military cell (addressing considerations for the Office of the Secretary of Defense, the joint staff, and relevant joint combatant commands), and a cell representing the US military based in the Korean theater. The control team included the exercise project staff, as well as smaller cells that simulated North Korean and Chinese senior leadership and represented allies that varied in each of the two scenarios.

Analysis: Two roads to war

The following sections summarize the starting conditions and flow of events for Guardian Tiger I and II. Note that these scenarios took place based on a set of assumed, projected conditions for the year 2030 and explicitly excluded direct Russian involvement, based on the rapidly changing North Korea-Russia relationship at the time they were designed.

One road to war: North Korea launches a limited attack on South Korea

The road to war leading to the conflict scenario for the first Guardian Tiger tabletop exercise is depicted in Figure 1. It began with North Korea conducting a limited attack on South Korean military forces that did not include any nuclear, chemical or biological weapons. Submarine and missile attacks targeted South Korean vessels and aircraft in the Yellow Sea (known in South Korea as the West Sea), while North Korea launched precision missiles and rockets at South Korean marine bases in South Korea’s Northwest Islands. North Korea claimed that its actions were in response to South Korea’s violations of North Korean sovereignty, but the US Intelligence Community identified “time pressure” due to factors such as the growing South Korean and US capabilities and domestic political pressures as a major driver for Kim Jong-Un’s attack calculus.

South Korea responded unilaterally with counterstrikes on a range of North Korean military targets. North Korea then escalated further with chemical weapons strikes against two South Korean military facilities. Pyongyang warned that it would respond to US intervention or a US threat to its leadership or nuclear forces with nuclear escalation, in accordance with its September 2022 “Law and Policy” on nuclear weapons. Upon South Korea’s request for US support, the South Korea-US military committee—including each country’s Chairman of the Joint Chiefs of Staff acting on orders from their respective Presidents—agreed that Combined Forces Command (CFC) should decisively defeat North Korea’s attack while deterring North Korean nuclear employment and Chinese military intervention. Beijing called for a ceasefire and withdrawal of forces from the conflict zone, while preparing its own military intervention.

Figure 1. Guardian Tiger I road to war: Visual summary

Timeline A: Turn one

In the first turn (Timeline A), South Korea focused on working in concert with the United States while signaling readiness for unilateral action if necessary. South Korea reached out to the United States to request military support and public messages to reinforce Washington’s extended deterrence commitment.

Washington agreed to strengthen its cooperation with South Korea, and CFC successfully conducted a bilateral strike on the North Korean chemical weapons site. The United States initiated a limited force flow into the theater, careful to avoid triggering further escalation, and offered intelligence support to South Korea and other regional allies in addition to preparing offensive and defensive cyber operations. The US approach focused heavily on diplomacy, including presidential engagement to reassure South Korea and Japan, as well as broader diplomacy condemning North Korea’s violation of South Korea’s sovereignty. Efforts to persuade China to assist in applying extreme pressure on North Korea, particularly through an energy cutoff, fell flat. The overall flow of the first day of Guardian Tiger I is depicted in Figure 2.

Figure 2. Guardian Tiger I, turns 1–3 (Timeline A)

Timeline A: Turn two

At the start of the second turn, North Korea ramped up its nuclear threats—including warning of a pre-delegation order for tactical nuclear employment and conducting a missile demonstration off South Korea’s west coast—while continuing to conduct limited attacks along the demilitarized zone (DMZ) with special operations forces (SOF) units and artillery. China began a limited intervention into North Korea with Pyongyang’s permission, deploying ground, naval, air, and air-defense assets in and around North Korea to constrain US-South Korea operations.

In spite of Chinese warnings against further US intervention, South Korea and the United States activated a combined counter-fire task force under CFC. Washington warned against any nuclear use and condemned North Korean nuclear threats, while emphasizing that active Chinese engagement in the conflict would result in serious economic, diplomatic, and military consequences. South Korea reacted to the increasing tension with concern and was particularly worried by Washington’s risk aversion and restraint. Unable to rely on US protection of its interests, South Korea executed a unilateral strike with sea-based missiles against the site of the North Korean missile demonstration launch and conducted precision artillery/multiple-launch rocket system (MLRS) strikes on a North Korean divisional headquarters. South Korea also requested US assistance in monitoring North Korean launch sites to prepare to conduct preemptive strikes if necessary.

Timeline A: Turn three

In the third turn, North Korea escalated to a low-yield tactical nuclear demonstration, ostensibly targeted against a South Korean Navy destroyer in the Sea of Japan (referred to as the East Sea in Korea), while firing non-nuclear—but nuclear-capable—intermediate-range ballistic missiles (IRBMs) over Japan. North Korean representatives privately reassured Beijing that Pyongyang’s intention was to refrain from further escalating the situation unless it was warranted. China urged de-escalation by all parties.

The blue team cells debated response options to this nuclear use, but no consensus emerged. The National Interagency cell suggested that both nuclear and non-nuclear options be presented to the president, but with the emphasis on non-nuclear options. The national defense and military cell proposed a “pulsed operation” against North Korea with advanced precision-strike assets, while assuring China and North Korea that Washington did not want to use nuclear weapons or end the Kim regime unless North Korea used nuclear weapons again. The US theater military cell proposed nuclear and conventional responses, such as a combined nuclear-conventional general offensive or a nuclear strike near Pyongyang. This timeline ended without adjudication of final results.

Timeline B: Turn one

To explore a different pathway of how the options available to the United States could be affected by a different command and control structure, Guardian Tiger I included an alternative scenario with a key change in how US forces in the region were commanded and controlled via the notional creation of a new US Northeast Asia Command (NEACOM), a four-star joint warfighting command falling under US Indo-Pacific Command (INDOPACOM).1 The events of Timeline A’s second turn mark the beginning of Timeline B, so that in the first turn of Timeline B, China had already intervened and North Korea had warned of delegation of authorities for North Korean tactical nuclear weapons employment. With NEACOM providing different options to the United States, and with more time to consider the possibilities, the blue team took a different approach. The United States supported South Korea-US CFC counterfire operations and South Korea’s interdiction of North Korean threats to its Northwest Islands with targeting intelligence support and with standoff fires coordinated by NEACOM under the direction of and with the support of INDOPACOM. With NEACOM leading the planning, US and South Korean forces also prepared for a pulsed conventional strike to be executed by CFC, with NEACOM in support, against a wide range of North Korean strategic and operational targets.2This pulsed conventional strike was to be ready for execution on short notice if North Korea escalated further. Meanwhile, the secretary of defense traveled to Seoul and Tokyo to underscore alliance resolve.

At this time, the United States was also concerned about the implications of North Korean officals other than Kim Jong Un potentially having the authority to use nuclear weapons, given the warning from Pyongyang that there had been pre-delegation of release authority to unspecified North Korean commands. With this in mind, the United States undertook a technical operation to send messages via North Korea’s cell-phone system to North Korean elites that they would be held personally responsible for any nuclear use and should oppose it. Though the messages went to many elites, the North Korean regime quickly deactivated the cell-phone network. This quick-turn effort had unclear results and credibility because North Korean elites’ perceptions had not been shaped by an information campaign over time, while the deactivation of the cell-phone network could have proven an impediment to future US information operations even while it disrupted North Korean domestic activities.

Timeline B: Turn two

In the second turn of Timeline B, China deployed additional air and naval assets into North Korean territory. China conducted cyberattacks against South Korea and the United States but did not engage in combat with South Korean, US, or North Korean forces. Suffering military setbacks, North Korea chose to make good on its threats of tactical nuclear strikes by conducting a low-yield nuclear ballistic missile attack against the South Korea-US naval base at Chinhae on South Korea’s southeast coast. North Korea did not warn China beforehand and expected the presence of Chinese forces and assets to restrain US retaliation, thereby limiting the US counterattack to conventional means. The ostensible delegation of authority was more for strategic communications purposes, as the strike was directed and approved by the North Korean leader, but US leadership did not receive confirmation of that—adding an additional element of uncertainty into the blue team’s deliberations.

In response, US and South Korean forces executed a pulsed conventional strike against key high-value targets, but did not expect this to bring an end to the regime. The intensity, speed, extent, and effectiveness of the response surprised North Korean leadership, but Pyongyang considered the heavy damage sustained an acceptable cost given the stakes. Ultimately, despite exploration of several potential military options to continue the conflict, the United States and South Korea did not remain fixed on ousting the Kim regime by military force in the near term, and instead began negotiations to end the conflict with North Korea and avoid a war with China.

A second road to war: China attempts to seize Taiwan by force

The road to war for the second exercise, Guardian Tiger II, is summarized in Figure 3.

Figure 3. Guardian Tiger II road to war: Visual summary

The conflict in the scenario resulted from a Chinese ultimatum to Taipei, followed by an attempt to seize Taiwan by force. China’s multi-domain assault on Taiwan saw preparatory waves of joint fires and strikes on key control nodes, followed by multiple amphibious and airborne landings along Taiwan’s west coast. China’s ground and air campaign was accompanied by the imposition of a maritime exclusion zone (MEZ) and a near-total blockade around Taiwan to sever lines of communication through maritime and air interdiction operations. Finally, China initiated non-destructive cyberspace and space attacks against US regional military networks and satellites. Beijing also attempted to sway US allies to avoid becoming involved in the conflict, with mixed results. Seoul publicly condemned China’s aggression but refused to support Taiwan militarily or allow direct involvement of US Forces Korea (USFK) in the conflict. Beijing also dissuaded Manila from hosting additional US forces.

North Korea initiated a strategic messaging campaign that blamed Washington for starting the Taiwan conflict and attempted to split the South Korea-US alliance. North Korea warned South Korea against allowing itself to be dragged into a war by USFK, calling for Seoul to eject USFK. It also began transitioning to a semi-wartime state.

Turn one

All four turns of Guardian Tiger II are visually depicted in Figure 4.

Figure 4. Guardian Tiger II: Timeline summary

Turn one of Guardian Tiger II began with the faltering of China’s amphibious assault on Taiwan, driven by unexpectedly strong Taiwanese resistance and effective US strikes, which slowed offensive momentum. Only one amphibious Chinese lodgment was successful, with invasion forces suffering heavy losses and unsustainable munitions expenditures. This increased China’s incentives to escalate to maintain offensive momentum. Intense fighting continued between China and the US-led coalition, with heavy losses and munitions expenditures, which led the United States to consider pulling from USFK munitions stocks in South Korea.

Regionally, China conducted missile strikes against US airbases in Okinawa and western Japan, expanding the conflict horizontally in a bid to disrupt US combat power generation and reestablish offensive momentum against Taiwan. China declared an additional MEZ within the Yellow Sea, and threatened strikes against USFK bases unless South Korea restrained USFK involvement. China’s deterrence efforts against South Korea were successful, with USFK involvement and support to Taiwan ultimately constrained by mutual agreement between Seoul and Washington. North Korea also intensified its coercion attempts to eject USFK from South Korea, adding credibility to its threats by elevating military readiness posture to unprecedented levels.

The United States continued the flow of forces into the Taiwan theater and sought to halt China’s offensive momentum through standoff strikes. USFK leaders issued clear signals that USFK elements were not involved in the Taiwan conflict, in an effort to manage the threat of Chinese horizontal escalation.

South Korea prioritized deterring North Korea, and South Korean forces moved to maximum readiness posture short of war. CFC was activated, with some South Korean and USFK forces subordinated to it, and Republic of Korea Strategic Command (ROKSTRATCOM) was activated with key assets placed in readiness to deter further North Korean aggression. South Korea publicly and privately reiterated its expectation that USFK would remain focused on deterring North Korea, and that USFK munitions would not be pulled out for use in the Taiwan conflict. Japan conducted counterstrikes against Chinese forces launching missile strikes on US bases in Japan, which temporarily disrupted the Chinese strike campaign against Japan and fulfilled domestic expectations. Japan expanded its support to US operations, providing additional basing, munitions, logistics, and intelligence, surveillance, and reconnaissance (ISR) support.

Turn two

Turn two began with Chinese missile strikes overflying North Korean and South Korean airspace, successfully striking key US bases in mainland Japan. Beijing provided only Pyongyang advance notification of the overflight. China’s overflight strikes were motivated by practical concerns. Its more numerous and evasive short-range ballistic missiles (SRBMs), which are capable of overcoming missile defenses more effectively, can only strike many USFJ facilities when fired from northern China and passing over the Korean Peninsula, not from eastern and southern China. China postured assets for intervention in the vicinity of the Chinese-North Korean border and initiated key intelligence sharing with North Korea. Finally, Chinese cyber actors intensified attacks against regional military and civilian targets.

North Korea conducted a limited provocation campaign against South Korea, with the ultimate goal of coercing the removal of USFK from South Korea. North Korea conducted an SRBM demonstration launch into the Sea of Japan (known in South Korea as the East Sea) in an attempt to decouple US nuclear extended deterrence commitments from South Korea and create space for further demands. North Korea also initiated a unilateral regional campaign of cyberattacks against military networks in South Korea. Washington restated its nuclear declaratory policy in an effort to deter North Korean nuclear use. The North Korea cell perceived this as hollow bluster that proved to be more destabilizing than stabilizing.

US forces continued combat operations around Taiwan, with Washington authorizing direct attacks on the remaining lodgment. These efforts halted China’s offensive momentum. Washington authorized proportional cyberattacks on both North Korea and China. US F-35 fighters, including dual-capable (i.e. capable of carrying nuclear bombs) aircraft, were deployed across Japan; after-action reports from both the China and North Korea cells indicated this was a critical concern. Washington attempted to limit escalation by refraining from striking Chinese mainland forces. Notably, the China cell perceived US hesitancy to strike the Chinese mainland as indicative of the success of its robust nuclear deterrent.

South Korea invoked the mutual defense treaty with the United States to request immediate, full-scale military assistance, initiated a partial military mobilization, and activated ROKSTRATCOM assets. It conducted proportional cyber countermeasures against North Korea, which resulted in the shutdown of North Korean cyber connectivity to the outside world and some degradation of North Korean offensive cyber capabilities. This shutdown challenged the efficacy of South Korean information operations later in the exercise, illustrating the value of functioning communication channels. Japan expanded US basing, enabling the dispersal of F-35s and underscoring the bilateral coordination needed to enable their deterrent effect. Japan also initiated additional economic sanctions against China, while contributing additional forces to counterattacking Chinese forces on and around Taiwan.

Turn three

Turn three began with China’s threat of nuclear use to force a resolution to the Taiwan conflict, backed by credible increases to nuclear posture. China conducted additional strikes against mainland Japan, targeting Japanese capabilities critical to conducting strikes and defending against additional strikes. China shifted targeting strategy against Taiwan toward national infrastructure in an unsuccessful attempt to decrease national morale. Chinese cyber actors intensified offensive cyber operations, focusing on regional airports and seaports to interfere with US and allied force flows.

After initial hesitation, North Korea was emboldened to take much stronger action by the escalation of the conflict between China and the US-led coalition, and by the establishment of a China-North Korea military coordination center. As a result, North Korea escalated. It conducted SRBM strikes and SOF attacks using small unmanned aircraft systems against key USFK facilities. It also executed simultaneous SRBM and underground nuclear tests to reinforce its nuclear deterrent and test US extended deterrence commitments to South Korea.

US forces conducted standoff strikes against North Korean maritime and air infiltration platforms that enabled previous North Korean SOF strikes, degrading North Korea’s capacity to conduct follow-on attacks. Additionally, US forces struck North Korean missile delivery platforms, and increased intrusive ISR in order to find and track dispersed ground-based missile delivery platforms. In response to the shootdown of its ISR aircraft by China, South Korea led CFC US-South Korea air operations within China’s Yellow Sea MEZ, which resulted in US-South Korea fighter engagements with Chinese aircraft. South Korea executed additional retaliatory standoff strikes against North Korean SOF bases that facilitated previous attacks, degrading North Korea’s capacity to initiate further asymmetric attacks. Japan shifted ISR and ballistic missile defense assets to combat the threat of North Korean missile strikes, and additionally heightened cyber defenses, improving its defensive posture and ability to respond to further escalation.

Turn four

Turn four began with China’s increase in nuclear posture and its launch of a fractional orbit bombardment munition (presumably nuclear) into a polar orbit, providing an evasive, persistent deterrent to discourage further US and allied assistance to Taiwan. Chinese cyber actors intensified operations globally in order to slow US force flow and threaten further horizontal escalation. China invoked its treaty with North Korea to justify military intervention in Korea, while further enhancing bilateral military coordination and setting the stage for permissive deployment of Chinese forces into North Korea. Finally, China conducted anti-ship missile attacks against cargo ships near US west coast and Australian ports.

North Korea conducted a low-yield nuclear strike on a South Korean airbase in an attempt to disrupt air operations against North Korea, split the alliance, and deter further South Korea-US escalation. Separately, North Korea conducted an unarmed nuclear-capable IRBM demonstration, with four missiles impacting outside of territorial waters around Guam, in an attempt to give the United States pause without triggering additional retaliation. North Korea prepared ground forces along the DMZ, posturing its forces for large-scale conventional conflict.

The United States and South Korea agreed to initiate operations to end the North Korean regime in accordance with declaratory policy regarding a North Korean nuclear attack, with CFC forces conducting large-scale ground and air combat operations, as well as a combined strike against Kim Jong Un and senior regime leadership. The blue team, however, was well aware that this operation was risky and might not succeed due to limited US combat power and a lack of munitions available because of the Taiwan conflict—as well as due to North Korea’s nuclear capabilities and extensive Chinese support. To help mitigate the risks of this operation, South Korea initiated an information operations campaign to attempt to co-opt senior North Korean military elites with nuclear use authorities, but this would likely prove too little, too late.

The US team also considered conducting a low-yield nuclear strike against North Korean military forces in the vicinity of Kaesong Heights using a dual-capable aircraft, in an attempt to restore nuclear deterrence, hold North Korea accountable for its limited nuclear use, and halt the creation of a precedent that would allow for an adversary’s nuclear use without a nuclear response, but it was unclear if this would have been approved.

The exercise director adjudicated that South Korean and US presidents would approve a CFC counteroffensive to remove North Korea’s regime despite the risks, even if it was not clear whether a nuclear strike in the Kaesong Heights would be justified and supported. However, considering the military circumstances, the theater military cell was understandably not optimistic about the prospects for success of such a campaign, and the theater military cell overall expected that tactical nuclear exchanges would occur over the course of the campaign. The exercise director considered it likely that the CFC ground counteroffensive would operationally culminate on the approach to Pyongyang due to the Chinese military forces supporting North Korea, particularly with logistics, intelligence, and air defenses. Even in the event that CFC offensive momentum could be maintained or restored, it was likely that North Korea would conduct additional tactical nuclear strikes to stop the advance before Pyongyang could be seized or the regime removed, and it was questionable whether CFC would be sufficiently prepared to fight through these circumstances.

In this situation, it was also likely that the larger US-China war would continue to escalate. China would seize the opportunity to reinforce its attack on Taiwan while the United States committed combat power, munitions, and other resources against North Korea. This could lead to the fall of Taiwan. Regardless of the situation in Taiwan, horizontal escalation of the conflict to other areas, including China’s sea lines of communication, would likely continue. In these circumstances, given the other US and Chinese escalatory options available, and the clear mutual interest in avoiding a China-US nuclear war, it would be possible that tenuous nuclear deterrence could still hold. However, the risk of miscalculation and nuclear escalation between the United States and China would be high, particularly given the potential for multiple nuclear exchanges between North Korean and US forces if the South Korea-US alliance continued efforts to end the North Korean regime.

Findings and recommendations

The Guardian Tiger tabletop exercises explored challenging scenarios in which US-led forces might struggle to win, or even contain, simultaneous conflicts with China and North Korea. In such a future, traditional deterrence models could falter, and allies may act independently to protect their own interests. To address these risks, this chapter identifies the key findings of the exercises—and provides actionable recommendations to enhance strategic and operational preparedness:

Finding 1

  • If the United States is engaged in conflict with either China or North Korea, it might not be able to deter the other adversary from escalating the conflict or initiating a separate conflict. The risk of simultaneous conflicts with China and North Korea would compound the difficulties US and allied leaders would face when managing nuclear and other escalation risks in a conflict with either adversary. US allies’ competing views regarding China and North Korea further complicate this dynamic. Even if deterrence of a second potential adversary and assurance of allies could prevent simultaneous conflicts in the Indo-Pacific, such efforts would create strategic and operational costs that would hinder US and allied efforts to defeat the first aggressor. As a conflict with the initial adversary escalates, it may become necessary—and even strategically and/or operationally advantageous—to accept the risk of such simultaneous conflicts rather than remain hamstrung by these costs.
    • If a US-China military conflict begins, the exercises suggest that the United States would likely find it difficult to balance the competing requirements of respecting South Korean and Japanese concerns, deterring North Korean opportunism, and refraining from actions that could trigger North Korean or Chinese preemption against USFK. In particular, although the United States might deploy a capability to the region to manage one adversary, it could easily be interpreted as a threat to the other.
    • The exercise’s results suggest that, in an escalating conflict, the United States and its allies may unintentionally push Noth Korea and China to align. In particular, the exercises suggest that if South Korea-US responses to North Korean escalation appear likely to cause North Korea to collapse, Washington has little leverage to convince Beijing that it is not in its interest to intervene. Beijing sees grave risks from an imminent North Korean collapse, even if China is not at war with the United States, including North Korea’s absorption by South Korea, and/or a North Korea-initiated nuclear exchange. If a US-China conflict is already under way, Beijing is even more likely to see intervening as less risky than allowing North Korea’s defeat.

Recommendations

  • US military planners should update Indo-Pacific command and control arrangements to account for the high risk of simultaneous conflicts with North Korea and China. This should include a review of, and update to, the Unified Command Plan (UCP) specifically focused on ensuring that US command and control arrangements in the Indo-Pacific enable the ability to effectively fight simultaneously in the Korean theater of operations and in the vicinity of Taiwan.
  • The US defense community should work with South Korean and Japanese counterparts to better understand the interplay of responses to Chinese and North Korean conventional and nuclear aggression. Despite the political sensitivities at play, considerations of a simultaneous China-North Korea threat should appear regularly on agendas for bilateral and trilateral Track 1 and Track 1.5 dialogues, tabletop exercises, and similar events.
  • The US defense community and military commands should sponsor and conduct additional studies and wargaming related to US force and munitions requirements, as well as posture adjustments, to better address the risk of simultaneous conflicts with China and North Korea, including the potential role of the South Korean and Japanese militaries.

Finding 2

  • What it takes to prevent North Korea from escalating a conflict will be very different from what it takes to prevent China from doing so. The two countries’ differing escalation imperatives and capabilities will foster complex dilemmas for US and allied deterrence and response options in an Indo-Pacific conflict. Threats of vertical escalation from Pyongyang—particularly threats of tactical nuclear use—are likely to come early and often. Meanwhile, China has many incentives and non-nuclear options to escalate horizontally—across domains (land, maritime, air, space, cyber) and geography, including to the US homeland—to disrupt Washington’s will and capability to support Taiwan. Deterring and countering these different escalation patterns will each require focused capabilities and approaches. This will place competing demands on high-demand, low-density US capabilities like high-end intelligence collection platforms and long-range strike capabilities, while also making it harder to conduct coherent deterrence posturing and messaging.
    • As observed in the tabletop exercises, managing vertical escalation in a conflict with North Korea is fraught with potential for miscalculation and alliance management challenges. North Korea has a long history of nuclear threats and signaling with nuclear-capable missiles, which could make it difficult for the United States and its allies to judge whether North Korea is actually about to launch a limited nuclear attack. Meanwhile, North Korea’s growing capability for tactical nuclear strikes makes a ground campaign into North Korea risky, particularly if these forces are not prepared to “fight through.”
    • In contrast, the exercises suggested that China’s range of non-nuclear horizontal escalation options is more problematic for the United States to manage than deterring China from vertically escalating to nuclear use. China’s assertion of air and maritime superiority in the Yellow Sea, along with its projection of air defense and ground combat forces into North Korea, limited US and allied options. China’s capability, and likely willingness, to escalate in cyber and space domains—including in ways that affect the US economy and population—allowed the China cell in Guardian Tiger II to impose key costs and disruption on the US team with little risk.

Recommendations

  • The US military should visibly reinforce resilience of US bases in the Indo-Pacific against nuclear and non-nuclear attacks, also enhancing deterrence by denial against limited nuclear strikes. These bases should be required to routinely conduct and publicize rehearsals for such attacks, including training with prepositioned radiological detection and protective equipment.
  • The US defense community should lead interagency efforts to review and propose updates for all declaratory policy language and related statements regarding US responses to attacks with weapons of mass destruction and strategic attacks against the US homeland, including Guam. This review should propose how to reconcile the policy statement that “a nuclear war cannot be won and must never be fought” with the operational and strategic requirements of preparing for a limited nuclear attack by an adversary, to ensure it does not result in a lack of either deterrent credibility or military readiness against such an attack.3

Finding 3

  • War in the Indo-Pacific may start over one flashpoint, but it will quickly become about much more. Escalation—both vertical and horizontal—in a conflict with China and/or North Korea is likely to cause rapid and major shifts in US priorities, attention, and end states, presuming the initial stage of a conflict is not quickly contained or resolved. A war over Taiwan is likely to become about far more than the status of Taiwan itself, including China’s overall regional and global position post-war and the US homeland’s safety. Meanwhile, an escalating South Korea-US conflict with North Korea is likely to become about the future of the global nuclear order, the credibility of US extended deterrence, and the potential unification of the long-divided Korean peninsula—not just about restoring the fragile armistice.
    • At the outset of the conflict in both tabletop exercises, overriding US team goals were generally to support allies and partners, defeat the attack, deter further escalation, and return to the status quo. These priorities rapidly changed as the conflict dragged on and escalated, leaving US military forces and non-military elements of power ill-positioned to effectively support the new priorities in a timely manner. The exercises suggested that alliance and US domestic imperatives will rapidly overtake any potential impetus to return to the status quo, in favor of punishing the aggressors and responding to mushrooming threats facing US and allied homelands.
    • In both exercises, a North Korean limited nuclear strike against a military target in South Korean territory immediately brought to the forefront the need for key considerations during the US response to a limited nuclear strike. This includes larger global ramifications, long-term precedent for extended nuclear deterrence, and implications for US alliances beyond the US declaratory policy—that any North Korean nuclear attack will lead to the end of the regime—or the operational and strategic needs of the moment. In Guardian Tiger I, having avoided a US-China war so far, and with Chinese forces inside North Korea, there was little appetite for a nuclear or ground offensive to remove the regime. In Guardian Tiger II, US-China conventional war had already begun, so North Korea’s nuclear attack triggered a US-South Korea ground counteroffensive to remove the regime, despite the risks.

Recommendations

  • US defense leadership should publicly and privately underscore the risk that a Chinese attack on Taiwan could lead to a broader regional conflict, even if Beijing and Washington seek to avoid one, as a means to foster allied preparedness and reinforce deterrence.
  • The US defense community, in cooperation with relevant combatant commands, should enhance awareness, resilience, and response measures for risk of Chinese non-nuclear strategic attacks on the US homeland in the event of a conflict to reduce the risk of strategic paralysis from such threats and to enable effective responses to such attack. The Department of Defense should support such efforts from the perspective of potential chemical and biological attacks.

Finding 4

  • The United States needs to prepare for the possibility of a limited nuclear attack—including preparing responses other than the threat of complete annihilation. The US and allied approach to counter the growing threat of limited nuclear attack by an adversary currently relies on deterrence by threat of massive punishment. This is a high-risk approach. For example, the United States’ current declaratory policy toward North Korea—that any use of a nuclear weapon will lead to the end of the North Korean regime—is likely to lack credibility by 2030. The tendency to avoid the hard political and military choices necessary to better absorb a limited nuclear strike, and to prepare to operate effectively in the aftermath, means there might be no good conventional options left if such threats of disproportionate punishment fail. Meanwhile, US low-yield nuclear response capabilities are being intentionally limited, meaning that available nuclear responses may be seen as ineffective or excessive.
    • The exercises suggest that the threat of massive, regime-ending nuclear retaliation might not work, at least by the year 2030. The North Korea cell noted that, from its perspective, restatement of existing US declaratory policy for North Korea during the exercises was simultaneously provocative—by emphasizing regime change—and lacking in credibility. As noted above, the exercises showed some plausible scenarios in which the North Korean regime could use nuclear weapons and survive.
    • These exercises provided further evidence of the strong tendency among the United States and its allies to avoid taking the actions necessary to better absorb a limited nuclear strike and to prepare to operate effectively in the aftermath of such a strike until it might be too late.

Recommendations

  • US defense and military planners working with their South Korean counterparts, should examine the operational and strategic implications of the South Korea-US declaratory policy on a North Korean nuclear attack. This should lead to renewed efforts to enhance the credibility to execute this policy and to bring an end to the North Korean regime—regardless of the potential for Chinese interference or North Korean nuclear retaliation. This should also lead to preparations for the possibility that this declaratory policy will fail to deter a North Korean limited nuclear attack. The United States should also consider this policy’s implications vis-à-vis Beijing.
  • The US Department of Defense should enhance preparations to quickly provide education, training, and analytic support to US forces and US allies in the Indo-Pacific to better enable preparations for low-yield nuclear weapons effects. Ideally, the United States should execute such activities pre-crisis as much as possible, moving quickly to expand these activities in the event that changing domestic political circumstances or crisis urgency on the part of an ally makes such expansion possible. Additional studies, exercises, wargames, and tabletop exercises should include US allies and focus specifically on possible limited nuclear attacks by adversaries in the Indo-Pacific.
  • The US defense community and military commands should train and equip US forces to fight and win despite tactical nuclear attacks, and should encourage allied counterparts to do so as well.

Finding 5

  • Effective integrated deterrence and escalation management in the Indo-Pacific will require the United States to simultaneously coordinate with allies and perform informational shaping at multiple echelons, and across multiple military commands and government agencies, prior to the outbreak of conflict. This would involve establishing stronger combined (multinational) command and control, coordination, and planning mechanisms between the United States and its allies in advance of a crisis that could lead to conflict, including both military and non-military organizations at multiple levels. Traditional top-down approaches and “wartime only” structures will be suboptimal given the speed at which situations could escalate. The Guardian Tiger exercises further demonstrated how difficult it is to coordinate such a top-down response in a timely manner, especially without sufficiently prepared mechanisms. Key US allies—particularly Japan and South Korea—will unilaterally use capabilities and send messages if they are not part of a better plan.
    • The United States will not be able to conduct integrated deterrence and warfighting against China and/or North Korea without close allied coordination. At minimum, countering Chinese threats to Taiwan will require Japanese support, while South Korean forces are foundational for countering North Korea.
    • Synchronizing military actions between allies to manage escalation requires close lateral coordination between allied militaries below top-level political coordination. The speed at which a conflict could develop and escalate means that multiple military and informational options may need to be offered in a bottom-up manner, while top-level guidance is developed simultaneously. The exercises further demonstrated the difficulties in alliance coordination, especially without good structures in place. South Korea-US-Japan operational coordination was particularly hamstrung in Guardian Tiger II due to the separation between CFC/USFK and USFJ.

Recommendations

  • US defense leadership should update the UCP to address the importance of enhanced capacity for bilateral and multilateral operational-level alliance military coordination in East Asia. This should include a capability for more robust operational coordination with the Japanese Self Defense Force than what is possible with the existing USFJ structure. Given the importance of varied basing options in the Indo-Pacific for a resilient posture in the face of attack, and the capabilities that Japan and South Korea can bring to bear, the ability of headquarters to coordinate with allies may be as important—or even more important—than their ability to command and control US-only joint operations.
  • US government organizations sponsoring integrated deterrence exercises, wargames, and tabletop exercises should ensure they include more robust methodology for depicting informational tools and aspects as part of integrated deterrence. This should include the simulation of US and allied targeting and effects of informational actions on sub-national audiences, as well as depictions of adversary information operations targeting such audiences.
  • US government organizations sponsoring integrated deterrence exercises, wargames, and tabletop exercises should ensure that these events represent multiple echelons of US and allied governments and military forces—ideally including allied personnel as participants—to enable the simulation of US-ally engagement at multiple echelons.

Acknowledgments

The principal investigator thanks the Defense Threat Reduction Agency (DTRA), particularly the Strategic Trends team, for sponsorship, guidance, support, and resources for this study. Thanks also go to all the experts and stakeholders, inside and outside of government, who participated in the tabletop exercise and contributed their perspectives to enrich the analysis. Special appreciation goes to multiple members of the staffs of the Department of State, the Office of the Secretary of Defense, the US Defense Intelligence Agency, Air Force Futures, the United States Strategic Command (USSTRATCOM), the South Korea-US Combined Forces Command, the US Forces Korea, and the 7th US Air Force for their willingness to repeatedly donate their time to inform this project with their invaluable personal perspectives.

The principal investigator would also like to give special thanks to co-authors Lauren Gilbert and Kyoko Imai, as well as current Indo-Pacific Security Initiative team members Emily Kim and Audrey Roh, along with former members Katherine Yusko and Emma Verges, for their key supporting roles in this project, as well as to project consultant Gregory Park for his contributions to the execution of the exercises and the drafting of the report. Thanks also go to Frederick Kempe, the Atlantic Council’s president and chief executive officer, as well as Gretchen Ehle, Nicholas O’Connell, and Caroline Simpson, without whose support the resources for this project would not have been possible. Lastly, the principal investigator would like to share his deepest appreciation for vice president and Scowcroft Center senior director Matthew Kroenig’s support and encouragement for this ambitious project from its very inception. This report is intended to live up to General Brent Scowcroft’s standard for rigorous, relevant, and nonpartisan analysis on national security issues.

This report reflects the analysis of the authors and does not necessarily represent the position of the DTRA or any other US government organization.

About the authors


The Tiger Project, an Atlantic Council effort, develops new insights and actionable recommendations for the United States, as well as its allies and partners, to deter and counter aggression in the Indo-Pacific. Explore our collection of work, including expert commentary, multimedia content, and in-depth analysis, on strategic defense and deterrence issues in the region.

Related content

Explore the program

The Indo-Pacific Security Initiative (IPSI) informs and shapes the strategies, plans, and policies of the United States and its allies and partners to address the most important rising security challenges in the Indo-Pacific, including China’s growing threat to the international order and North Korea’s destabilizing nuclear weapons advancements. IPSI produces innovative analysis, conducts tabletop exercises, hosts public and private convenings, and engages with US, allied, and partner governments, militaries, media, other key private and public-sector stakeholders, and publics.

1    The starting conditions of Timeline B include a South Korean commander for CFC and a new Northeast Asia Command (NEACOM) over US Forces Korea (USFK) and US Forces Japan (USFJ), as a new four-star joint sub-unified command of US Indo-Pacific Command (USINDOPACOM).
2    For more information on “pulsed” strikes, see “Air Force Future Operating Concept Executive Summary,” US Air Force, March 6, 2023, https://www.af.mil/Portals/1/documents/2023SAF/Air_Force_Future_Operating_Concept_EXSUM_FINAL.pdf.
3    “Joint Statement of the Leaders of the Five Nuclear-Weapon States on Preventing Nuclear War and Avoiding Arms Races,” The White House, January 3, 2022, https://www.whitehouse.gov/briefing-room/statements-releases/2022/01/03/p5-statement-on-preventing-nuclear-war-and-avoiding-arms-races/#:~:text=We%20affirm%20that%20a%20nuclear,deter%20aggression%2C%20and%20prevent%20war.

The post A rising nuclear double-threat in East Asia: Insights from our Guardian Tiger I and II tabletop exercises appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>
Annual report 2024/2025: Financial summary https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/in-depth-research-reports/report/2024-annual-report-financial-summary/ Thu, 08 May 2025 15:48:58 +0000 https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/?p=842453 Explore the Atlantic Council's financial results for 2024.

The post Annual report 2024/2025: Financial summary appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>

Below are the Atlantic Council’s financial results for 2024. These numbers have not yet been audited.

Statement of activities

Statement of financial position

Diversity of support

Revenue over time

The post Annual report 2024/2025: Financial summary appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>
Annual report 2024/2025: Letter https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/in-depth-research-reports/report/2024-annual-report-letter/ Thu, 08 May 2025 15:48:29 +0000 https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/?p=841309 "The Atlantic Council is designed for just the sorts of challenges we currently face," write John F.W. Rogers & Frederick Kempe.

The post Annual report 2024/2025: Letter appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>

Annual Report 2024/2025

Beyond politics:
The Atlantic Council’s enduring mission in a world transformed

By John F.W. Rogers and Frederick Kempe

Eighty years ago, when Nazi Germany surrendered to Allied forces on May 8, 1945, the world emerged from the shadow of fascist tyranny through unity, sacrifice, and courageous leadership among war-time allies. On that day, US President Harry Truman said, “United, the peace-loving nations have demonstrated in the West that their arms are stronger by far than the might of dictators.”

In the decades that followed, the United States engaged with partners and allies to produce one of the greatest periods of prosperity and peace among great powers that the world has ever known. That involved the creation of what became known as a rules-based order, including institutions like NATO, the International Monetary Fund and the World Bank, the United Nations, and many others.

One American president after another—twelve during the history of the Atlantic Council—put America’s interests first. They defined them in an enlightened manner that at the same time advanced the interests of hundreds of millions of others.

With all its flaws—and no era of history is without them—this extended period since World War II has resulted in enormous benefits for the American people, helped lift billions of people around the world from poverty, and helped prevent the outbreak of war between nuclear-armed great powers.

In 1961, the Atlantic Council was born to promote and sustain that brand of constructive US leadership alongside partners and allies to shape a better future. We do this through the people we convene, the reports we write, and the policies we promote.

As a nonpartisan organization, the Atlantic Council has always steered clear of party politics. But we have never been shy about advocating for enduring US values and principles, such as a strong national defense and strong alliances, respect for individual rights, free and fair market economies, and rule of law. We equip government policymakers, business decision makers, civil society leaders, and the media with the insights and analysis necessary to make informed decisions in an increasingly complex global environment.

We have carried out this work for more than six decades, through changes in presidential administrations, wars, impeachments, a pandemic, and civil strife.

This is who we are.

While our mission and principles are unchanged, we have remained nimble, dynamic, and robust by responding when the context changes around us. 

We currently face war in Europe, conflict in the Middle East, and tensions between the United States and China. A contest over technological change is intensifying. At the same time, we confront a coalition of aggressors—China, Russia, North Korea, and Iran—that have made clear they are working in common cause against US interests.

Our latest Annual Report looks back at an impressive set of accomplishments in 2024. But what’s even more important, as we look forward, is that the Atlantic Council is designed for just the sorts of challenges we currently face, as our programs and centers address all major international issues not in isolation, but through collaboration inside and outside the organization.

We are particularly grateful to our Board of Directors, our International Advisory Board, our donors, our global partners, and our remarkable staff, who together make our work possible. 

With gratitude,

John F.W. Rogers & Frederick Kempe

The post Annual report 2024/2025: Letter appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>
Annual Report 2024/2025: How the Atlantic Council’s programs shaped the global future in 2024 https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/in-depth-research-reports/report/2024-annual-report-how-programs-shaped-the-global-future/ Thu, 08 May 2025 15:48:03 +0000 https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/?p=841340 Our programs and centers address all major international issues not in isolation, but through collaboration inside and outside the organization.

The post Annual Report 2024/2025: How the Atlantic Council’s programs shaped the global future in 2024 appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>

Annual Report 2024/2025

How the Atlantic Council’s programs shaped the global future in 2024

Through the work they publish, the ideas they generate, the future leaders they develop, and the communities they build, the Atlantic Council’s programs and centers shape policy choices and strategies to create a more free, secure, and prosperous world.

Adrienne Arsht Latin America Center


The Atlantic Council’s Adrienne Arsht Latin America Center (AALAC) broadens understanding of regional transformations while demonstrating the significance of Latin America and the Caribbean in a rapidly changing world. The Center focuses on pressing political, economic, and strategic issues that define the region’s trajectory. The Center proposes constructive, results-oriented, nonpartisan solutions to inform public-sector, business, and multilateral action based on a shared vision for a more prosperous, inclusive, and sustainable future. 

AALAC builds consensus for action in advancing innovative policy perspectives and prioritizes impact across geographic priorities—including Argentina, Brazil, Central America, Chile, Colombia, Mexico, and Venezuela, as well as through the Center’s Caribbean Initiative—alongside thematic areas that incorporate global Atlantic Council expertise: investment promotion, commercial ties, economic development, transnational criminal organizations, energy security, technology, democratic institutions, and mitigating Chinese influence. 

In 2024, AALAC continued to shape regional discourse, drive policy impact, and strengthen US relations with Latin America and the Caribbean (LAC). Through its convenings across twelve countries and many top-tier publications, AALAC was at the forefront of defining regional events from Mexico’s election of its first female president to Brazil hosting the Group of Twenty (G20) summit and Venezuela’s Nicolás Maduro refusing to recognize his electoral loss, where the Center contributed to pre- and post-election international democracy efforts. AALAC’s laser focus on economics and investment meant that it took new strides through the Americas Economic Security Working Group to unlock challenges that have resulted in LAC facing one of the world’s slowest rates of economic growth. The Center’s bipartisan-backed strategy for supply chain diversification was one result of that effort. 

At a time of growing threats posed by external actors, AALAC worked with the Scowcroft Center for Strategy and Security to outline two highly visible strategies: one to accelerate US-LAC collaboration on democracy, economics, energy, and migration, and another to counter malign Russian and Chinese influence. By working across political parties, the Center ensured that its recommendations focused on strategy beyond electoral cycles. AALAC supported democratic stability after the transition to President Bernardo Arévalo in Guatemala, becoming the first international organization to host a major public-private event with the new administration in the capital city. The Caribbean Initiative, meanwhile, launched a task force to enhance regional disaster preparedness and sustainability. And recognizing the need for sustained US regional leadership, AALAC worked alongside the US State Department to commemorate the thirtieth anniversary of the Summit of the Americas, engaging past host cities such as Santiago, Panama City, and Port of Spain on the benefits that come with a hemisphere-wide approach, when possible, to deal with common challenges. 

Africa Center

The Africa Center shines a spotlight on the issues, countries, and individuals that will shape the “African century,” with the aim of strengthening security and expanding prosperity on the continent.

Through initiatives that include launching a one-of-a-kind African Critical Minerals Task Force in Cape Town at the Mining Indaba conference, sitting down with the minister of finance of South Africa to discuss the BRICS grouping of emerging economies at the International Monetary Fund-World Bank Spring Meetings, hosting two African presidents (Ghana and Kenya) at the Global Citizen Awards, focusing on the economic and social opportunities of the African creative industries, and organizing a “DRC Day” to highlight investment opportunities in the Democratic Republic of the Congo, the Africa Center has been placing the opportunity of Africa at the forefront of US policy discussions.  

Atlantic Council Technology Programs

The Atlantic Council Technology Programs (ACtech) work together to address the geopolitical implications of technology and provide policymakers and global stakeholders necessary research, insights, and convenings to address the challenges of global technology and ensure its responsible advancement. 

The core of ACtech’s approach is technical research that provides real evidence, examples, and granularity to inform policy, matched with the ability to build and convene communities of action. We have an opportunity as an organization—and the responsibility as a society—to come together and innovate in big, new, ambitious ways, as well as proactively ensure technology is harnessed for the greatest amount of good for generations to come. 

At the Distinguished Leadership Awards in May 2024, the Atlantic Council announced the creation of Atlantic Council Technology Programs, bringing together five leading centers and initiatives: the Digital Forensic Research Lab (DFRLab), the GeoTech Center, the Cyber Statecraft Initiative, the Democracy + Tech Initiative, and a newly formed Capacity Building Initiative. 

The Council’s technology work is informed by three global trends: accelerating geopolitical competition between political systems, renewed globalization and increasing interdependence between various actors, and rapid technological change set against the backdrop of finite resources. Authoritarian states such as China and Russia aim to dominate foundational technologies to maintain absolute control at home and export their repressive model abroad. This approach is designed to undermine a free, open, secure, and interoperable global technology ecosystem, and it stands in stark contrast with actualizing the potential of technology to benefit all of humanity. The world requires a connective strategy that realizes the strength of collaboration and open systems, involves stakeholders and partners, and links how technology is designed, funded, powered, and governed. 

Beyond building ACtech, in 2024 the programs continued first-in-class research on topics such as countering digital authoritarianism, spyware, foreign malign influence, and the impact of generative artificial intelligence (AI) on the information environment; capacity building on AI policy around the world, cyber policy, and open source research; and policy coordination on internet governance and government use of AI. ACtech also hosted launch events for major tech strategies, including the US national cyber strategy, the first-ever US international cyber and digital policy strategy, and the national cyber workforce strategy. 

Atlantic Council Turkey Program

The Atlantic Council Turkey Program aims to support transatlantic relations by strengthening dialogue between the United States and regional NATO allies, primarily Turkey. In line with the Atlantic Council’s mission of promoting constructive US leadership and engagement in international affairs and in facing global challenges, the Turkey Program—which includes Atlantic Council in Turkey—works to bolster transatlantic engagement with Turkey and its surrounding region through forward-looking research and high-impact, high-level convenings covering energy, economics, business, technology, defense, and security. 

In 2024, the Atlantic Council Turkey Program advanced its mission to strengthen transatlantic engagement and dialogue with the region with high-level convenings and commentary covering the most important facets of the US-Turkey relationship. In Istanbul, the program hosted the flagship Atlantic Council Regional Conference on Clean and Secure Energy, which gathered officials and industry leaders from the United States, European Union, Turkey, and beyond to discuss cooperation in the clean energy transition and energy security in the context of a changing geopolitical landscape. As Russia’s war in Ukraine rages on, the program analyzed the future of the Black Sea and Turkey’s central role in maritime security, defense, and energy. Against the backdrop of increasing great power competition and emphasis on hard power concerns, the program published two editions of the Defense Journal by Atlantic Council in Turkey and held an event on the sidelines of the NATO Summit to explore the importance of cross-Alliance defense sector cooperation and coordination to address emerging security challenges.  

The Climate Resilience Center

The Atlantic Council’s Climate Resilience Center (formerly the Arsht-Rock Resilience Center) creates and delivers transformative solutions that improve lives, protect livelihoods, and expand opportunity for communities on the front lines of the climate crisis. The Center is committed to reaching one billion people around the world with resilience solutions to climate change by 2030.

To better protect people from the dangers of the climate crisis, the Climate Resilience Center advanced critical and impactful solutions throughout 2024. From ongoing work with its network of Chief Heat Officers to its ongoing discourse with private financial sector stakeholders, the Center continued to lead in innovative approaches to resilience and adaptation. 

Last year, the Center also expanded its climate games portfolio by launching two games that teach heat resilience for Minecraft. The game and curriculum are accessible on Minecraft Education, which has over 100,000 registered teachers and 166 million monthly active players worldwide 

The Center also drove global discourse with publications, including a report that considers effective ways to scale private finance for climate adaptation and another that shares case studies of financial tools and mechanisms for nature-based solutions. The Center’s senior director, Jorge Gastelumendi, also co-authored a policy guide for the T20 process, a gathering of think tanks that runs in parallel to the G20 summit. For the fourth year in a row, the Center also served as a managing partner of the COP Resilience Hub. It has already kicked off its path to COP30 campaign as the world looks to Belém, Brazil for the next United Nations climate summit. 

Eurasia Center

The Eurasia Center’s mission is to promote policies that encourage stability, democratic values, and prosperity in Eurasia. A democratic, prosperous, and stable Eurasia is a core interest for the United States and plays into the Atlantic Council’s focus on great power competition.  

In 2024, the Eurasia Center drove the conversation in Washington on a stronger US policy to support Ukraine against Russia’s invasion, and to contain Kremlin aggression and malign influence more broadly. Led by former US Ambassador to Ukraine John Herbst, the Eurasia Center consistently highlighted the need to safeguard US national security by continuing major Western support for Ukraine’s defense and remained active in outlining possible avenues towards a durable and fair end to the war. 

At the start of the year, the Eurasia Center convened nine think tanks for a conference at the US Capitol to develop a new US strategy for Russia. The Center then launched its Russia Tomorrow report series to deliver insight and policy recommendations from leading experts to reevaluate Western conceptions of Russia today and how to best prepare for its future tomorrow. Russia Tomorrow has become one of the Council’s most popular publications and a catalyst for building a stronger, smarter US approach to Russia. 

The Center’s flagship UkraineAlert section notched 1.9 million reads in 2024, continuing its reputation as a source for timely analysis on Ukraine. Throughout the year, the Eurasia Center worked with Emmy-winning directors and producers to develop its first-ever documentary, Putin’s endgame: The stakes beyond Ukraine. The film, which debuted in January 2025, explores the Kremlin threat to transatlantic security—especially if Russian President Vladimir Putin achieves his aims in Ukraine, either on the battlefield or via a bad peace deal—with on-the-ground interviews with national security officials, military personnel, and ordinary citizens from Sweden, Finland, Estonia, and the United Kingdom. 

The Eurasia Center’s flagship Eurasia Congressional Fellowship for congressional staffers resumed its capstone trip to Kyiv, Ukraine for the first time since 2019. In Ukraine and Poland, staffers engaged with high-level officials and learned more about the impact of the war in the region and beyond. 

In December, the Eurasia Center and the Europe Center spearheaded an expert symposium with the University of Michigan to develop recommendations for the Trump administration on how the United States and Europe can best bring about a winning strategy to end the Russian war and ensure a secure and prosperous peace for Ukraine. 

Beyond Ukraine and Russia, the Eurasia Center hosted high-level officials from Armenia, Georgia, the democratic opposition in Belarus, Kazakhstan, Moldova, and Uzbekistan to discuss recent developments in their respective countries, encourage freedom and prosperity at home, and chart pathways towards stronger relations with the United States. 

Europe Center

The Europe Center works to inform and impact the policies, actions, and strategies of transatlantic decisionmakers on the issues that will shape the future of the transatlantic relationship. The Center’s convening power and network combine with its extensive research and real-time analysis to promote dialogue, build a forward-looking agenda for the transatlantic partnership, and find solutions to the geopolitical, economic, and technological challenges facing the United States and its European allies. With over a dozen workstreams covering key transatlantic, regional, and bilateral issues, the Europe Center makes the case for the transatlantic partnership as an important strategic asset for the United States and Europe alike. 

2024 was a critical year for the transatlantic relationship. Elections across the Atlantic meant changes in leadership for over 785 million people at a moment when the future direction of the transatlantic partnership is increasingly in question. The Europe Center met this challenge head on. With its mix of thought leadership and convening power, the Center used the year of transition to chart a productive agenda for the transatlantic partnership. The Center hosted more than two hundred events in twenty countries, authored over one hundred reports and commentaries, and was cited in more than one hundred different media outlets.  

To help shape this year of transition and unpack key issues confronting the alliance, the Center launched the Transatlantic Horizons series. With dozens of policy briefs, public and private convenings, and a capstone report setting out a roadmap for cooperation, the series outlined a productive vision for US-European relations with practical recommendations for policymakers to hit the ground running in 2025. 

Beyond this cross-cutting new series, the Transatlantic Digital Marketplace Initiative published reports on the shifting geopolitics of international and transatlantic data flows. The Balkans Forward Initiative convened trust-building track two formats and elevated the profile of the region for the transatlantic audience. The Northern Europe Office informed the debate around Sweden’s and Finland’s changing security perceptions with their entry into NATO. The Warsaw Office maintained the Center’s forward presence on Europe’s eastern flank, serving as a hub to the wider region for US experts and regularly convening European officials. The Center also bolstered the US-Central European partnership through flagship event series such as Central Europe Week, Warsaw Week, and an Atlantic Council Front Page event in Houston, Texas featuring Czech President Petr Pavel. 

Freedom and Prosperity Center

The Freedom and Prosperity Center aims to increase the well-being of people everywhere, and especially the poor and marginalized in developing countries, through unbiased, data-based research on the relationship between prosperity and economic, political, and legal freedoms, in support of sound policy choices.   

During 2024, the Center published the 2024 Atlas: Freedom and prosperity around the world, launched the 2024 Freedom and Prosperity Indexes alongside The path to prosperity: The 2024 Freedom and Prosperity Indexes, hosted the inaugural Religious freedom and integral human development: A new global platform conference in Rome, and launched the Women for Prosperity project in Zimbabwe alongside a report entitled How Zimbabwe can achieve its vision of prosperity. Throughout the year, the Center organized convenings and published articles advancing our four core pillars: the Freedom and Prosperity Indexes, freedom and democracy, prosperity in emerging markets, and human flourishing. We also introduced the State of the Parties report series on the role of political parties in creating democratic stability. 

GeoEconomics Center

The GeoEconomics Center develops data-driven programs, publications, and thought leadership at the nexus of economics, finance, and foreign policy. The Center aims to bridge the divide between these oft-siloed sectors with the goal of helping shape a more resilient global economy. Our work is built on the idea that the United States must lead with allies or risk becoming a bystander in a reshaped international financial system. The Center is organized around three pillars—the Future of Capitalism, the Future of Money, and the Economic Statecraft Initiative. 

The GeoEconomics Center and its Economic Statecraft Initiative were a hub of cutting-edge analysis, global convening, and policymaking in 2024. The Center’s interactive data visualizations, international conferences, and world-class research shaped the field from digital currencies to sanctions, from the effects of China’s economic slowdown to Russia’s blocked reserves. 

The Center played a key role in helping the Group of Seven (G7) overcome hurdles and deliver fifty billion dollars to Ukraine in late 2024 as part of a compromise plan to leverage interest on immobilized Russian assets. The Economic Statecraft Initiative coined the term “axis of evasion,” which is now being used across Washington and beyond, and led the third Transatlantic Forum on GeoEconomics, which featured private and public sector leaders from both sides of the Atlantic including Nasdaq CEO Adena Friedman, US Deputy Attorney General Lisa Monaco, and US Ambassador to China Nicholas Burns. 

The Center’s work has impacted real policy decisions, from the establishment of a cross-border payment pilot project among G7 allies led by the New York Fed, to the Bretton Woods Institutions reviewing the way they assess China’s economy, to financial leaders assessing the economic risk of a future conflict in the Taiwan Strait.   

In 2024 the GeoEconomics Center became the place to be for the world’s economic policymakers. The Center hosted US Trade Representative Katherine Tai, US Commerce Secretary Gina Raimondo, European Central Bank President Christine Lagarde, and International Monetary Fund (IMF) Managing Director Kristalina Georgieva. The Center’s work made the Atlantic Council the only think tank cited on the US House floor by members of both parties during the debate over central bank digital currencies (CBDC), and the CBDC tracker continues to be the most viewed webpage at the Atlantic Council.


Throughout the year, the GeoEconomics Center worked with centers across the Council to host over forty finance ministers and central bank governors—more than 30 percent of the world’s total—during IMF-World Bank week programming, and became the only think tank to do live events from inside the IMF. The Center also launched a new project on the future of the G20 by marking Brazil’s presidency with events in Rio de Janeiro co-hosted with the Adrienne Arsht Latin America Center.  

Global China Hub

The Global China Hub tracks Beijing’s actions and their global impacts, leveraging its network of China experts around the world to generate actionable recommendations for policymakers in Washington and beyond.  

In 2024, the China Hub led robust programming on China’s global influence efforts, US-China technology competition, and Taiwan Strait tensions. The Hub published a comprehensive Taiwan election series that featured on-the-ground reporting from its fellows in Taipei. The team hosted a conference on US-China rivalry in the Global South, which brought Latin American and African voices into Washington’s China policy conversation. On the ground in Latin America, the Hub trained a group of Latin American journalists to serve as China watchers, equipping them with the knowledge and tools to directly counter Beijing’s disinformation activities across the region.   

The China Hub published three particularly high-impact reports in 2024. One analyzed China’s shifting nuclear doctrine in potential crisis scenarios and called attention to the growing risk that a future Taiwan Strait crisis could escalate into a nuclear conflict. Another report mapped China’s cyber training programs, using open-source information on China’s “capture the flag” hacking competitions to better understand Beijing’s growing offensive cyber capabilities. The third report utilized a large Chinese Ministry of Commerce database of state-sponsored training programs for developing nations to assess how Beijing uses those programs to promote authoritarianism and how Washington should respond. 

Global Energy Center

The Global Energy Center develops and promotes pragmatic and nonpartisan policy solutions designed to advance global energy security, enhance economic opportunity, and accelerate pathways to net-zero emissions.

In 2024, the Global Energy Center navigated the rapidly changing energy and climate architecture, as elections across the world led to a political shift to the right and a greater emphasis on national security and economic competitiveness, at times upstaging long-term sustainability and climate goals. Amid this pivot, the Center’s efforts yielded a cross-center report, based in part on more than thirty meetings in Kyiv with officials and other key stakeholders, on rebuilding Ukraine’s economy and strengthening energy security, even as it continues to fight against Russian aggression; this report complemented the Center’s work on the future of Russian energy supplies’ influence in Europe.   

The Center also launched a new report series on the opportunities for energy cooperation across North America to bolster energy security, advance the energy transition, and maximize economic competitiveness by harmonizing priorities across borders. Additionally, the Center led the 2024 Frontiers Project Meeting addressing Utah’s tremendous potential as a first-mover state into advanced nuclear energy technologies to help secure US leadership in meeting global demand for low-emissions production and manufacturing. Capping the year was the Center’s engagement at the COP29 climate conference, featuring high-level discussions on pragmatic solutions to both lower emissions and secure energy systems.  

Millennium Leadership Program

For more than sixty years, the Atlantic Council has convened global leaders to address the world’s most pressing challenges. As a central pillar of this legacy, the Millennium Leadership Program (MLP) aims to connect and empower next-generation international changemakers who will shape the twenty-first century. Currently, MLP comprises the Millennium Fellowship, the Millennium Leadership Intensive, the European Leadership Accelerator, and the Young Global Professionals Program. Through its programs, global professionals sharpen their leadership abilities, increase their capacity for meaningful impact, and build unique communities.    

In 2024, the MLP team introduced a new leadership program, hosted its first large-scale alumni summit, and brought eighteen young global leaders on a study tour to Israel and the Palestinian territories. As part of the Millennium Leadership Intensive, participants were immersed in a week of focused learning and dialogue in the Middle East, where they pushed their understanding of the region’s complexities and the challenges of effective leadership in a tumultuous time. 

The Millennium Summit, which took place across multiple venues in Connecticut, was an important milestone for the Millennium Leadership Program. For the first time, former and current fellows were able to connect in-person on a grand scale. Participants were joined by former Governor Jon Huntsman and Jordan Brugg, the CEO of Spencer Stuart, alongside the Atlantic Council’s Frederick Kempe and Jenna Ben-Yehuda. 

Rafik Hariri Center and Middle East Programs

As the Middle East and North Africa (MENA) region continues to undergo significant political and socioeconomic changes, the Rafik Hariri Center and Middle East Programs are leading the way in providing a forum for informing and galvanizing the transatlantic community to shape a stable and prosperous region. The Center has been at the vanguard of MENA current affairs, policies, and shifts for more than a decade. Its team works in, with, and on the MENA region, amplifying regional voices and connecting regional stakeholders to their counterparts in the United States and Europe. The mission is to promote peace and security, and unlock the region’s economic and human potential through the ideas the Center publishes, the solutions it generates, and the communities it influences.   

2024 was another fast-paced year in the Middle East, which saw continued conflicts, revolutions, cease-fires, cultural touchpoints, and major geopolitical shifts. The year began with the Israel-Hamas war reaching its apex and was capped by the collapse of the Assad regime in Syria. With Iran’s proxy network at the center of much of the region’s conflict in 2024, the Center’s Scowcroft Middle East Security Initiative published an in-depth report and spearheaded a conversation in Washington about what the new administration’s policy should be toward Iran. Similarly, Middle East Programs maintains the only dedicated Syria program in Washington, which was well positioned to respond to the fall of the Assad regime, convening diverse voices in Syria, engaging with US and European decision makers, and engineering a holistic policy for the future of Syria.  


The Middle East Programs continued to unlock the human potential of the region. The Strategic Litigation Project team expanded critical human rights work codifying gender apartheid. The WIn Fellowship—an executive leadership program for women entrepreneurs—concluded its third iteration with over seventy fellows from Saudi Arabia, the United Arab Emirates, and Jordan. The Middle East Programs also continued to be a hub for US decision makers and regional stakeholders to convene for thoughtful conversations during tumultuous times, with high-level speakers including Qatari Prime Minister Mohammed bin Abdulrahman bin Jassim Al-Thani, Iraqi Prime Minister Mohammed Shia’ Al-Sudani, and Egyptian Foreign Minister Badr Abdelatty. 

Scowcroft Center for Strategy and Security

The Scowcroft Center for Strategy and Security works to develop sustainable, nonpartisan strategies to address the most important security challenges facing the United States and its allies and partners. The Center honors the legacy of service of General Brent Scowcroft, including his ethos of nonpartisan commitment to the cause of security, support for US leadership in cooperation with allies and partners, and dedication to the mentorship of the next generation of leaders. 

The world is at a historic inflection point, and the Scowcroft Center is working alongside US and allied governments to shape official strategies and policies and to inform the public debate in the Center’s core competencies of strategy, alliances, national security resilience, and defense.  

The Center’s strategy and foresight work continued to receive global recognition, including through the annual Global Foresight report, new papers in the Atlantic Council Strategy Papers Series, and continued success of the ACTV series So What’s the Strategy?, which is the query the late General Brent Scowcroft would pose to colleagues while working as national security advisor. The Center was also an official partner at the seventy-fifth NATO Summit and influenced US and allied policy around the summit, as well as the public debate on major issues, such as the war in Ukraine and NATO defense plans and capabilities.  

Scowcroft’s Indo-Pacific security team worked to strengthen US alliances in the region through critical work on deterrence, war-gaming, and deepening partnerships with Japan, South Korea, Taiwan, and other allies and partners in the region. In collaboration with Atlantic Council Executive Vice Chair Adrienne Arsht, the Center’s “Reporters at Risk” series helped in the fight to free Wall Street Journal reporter Evan Gershkovich from Russian imprisonment following his 2023 arrest on false charges of espionage. Finally, the Center continued to lead on issues of strategic deterrence and helped to persuade the Department of Defense to bolster its nuclear forces in the face of growing Chinese and Russian nuclear threats, in addition to ongoing efforts related to software-defined warfare and revitalizing the US and European defense industries. 

South Asia Center

The South Asia Center (SAC) is the focal point for the Atlantic Council’s analysis of issues concerning the political, social, geographical, and cultural diversity of the region. At the intersection of South Asia and its geopolitics, SAC facilitates constructive dialogue to shape policy and forge ties between the region and the global community by producing cutting-edge analysis, convening key stakeholders, and amplifying policy conversations.  

In 2024, the South Asia Center—the Atlantic Council’s first regional center—began pivoting to a new outlook on the region.   

An Atlantic Council delegation comprising Executive Vice President Jenna Ben-Yehuda and multiple senior directors visited India for the Raisina Dialogue, setting out the Council’s changing vision. SAC covered the elections in Bangladesh, Pakistan, and India with its range of experts through events and publications. It hosted the finance ministers of Pakistan and Bangladesh as part of the GeoEconomics Center’s spring IMF-World Bank week programming. The Center helped bring in the finance advisor from Bangladesh’s interim government for the fall IMF-World Bank week programming.

In addition, SAC led on programming regarding digital public infrastructure and data privacy in South Asia, and launched an immersive project exploring the Taliban’s oppressive decrees against women in present-day Afghanistan.

In 2024, SAC also began restructuring. South Asia Center’s work on women in Afghanistan was moved into the Strategic Litigation Project to strengthen that team’s wider work on gender apartheid. The Afghanistan and Pakistan regional and political economic work was moved into the Scowcroft Middle East Security Initiative to expand the Middle East Programs’ regional work while enabling SAC experts to utilize the support structure of the Council’s largest regional program. Meanwhile, SAC created an independent pillar for its work in Bangladesh.

The post Annual Report 2024/2025: How the Atlantic Council’s programs shaped the global future in 2024 appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>
Annual report 2024/2025: The Atlantic Council’s greatest hits of 2024 https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/in-depth-research-reports/report/2024-annual-report-greatest-hits/ Thu, 08 May 2025 15:47:49 +0000 https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/?p=843242 At the Atlantic Council, we connect the dots for policymakers on the most urgent global challenges of our age—and the list is long, from artificial intelligence to climate change to trade policy and beyond.

The post Annual report 2024/2025: The Atlantic Council’s greatest hits of 2024 appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>

Annual report 2024/2025

The Atlantic Council’s greatest hits of 2024

If you want to know what sets the Atlantic Council apart, look at the impressive range and quality of work involved in our “greatest hits of 2024,” chosen by managers, editors, and staff from a year’s worth of cutting-edge accomplishments.

It was a year during which wars raging in Europe and the Middle East, tensions growing between China and the United States, and intensifying global competition for the commanding heights of technology increased the demand for our work as well as its urgency.

Our programs and centers rose to the challenge, meeting the moment with innovative editorial work, blockbuster events, and impactful private convenings. At the same time, we also moved into a new global headquarters, consolidated our global technology work, and focused on “relevance at speed”—ensuring not just the excellence but also the timeliness of our work.

The selection was difficult, and it scratches only the surface of everything we produced last year, but we hope that the picks below hit the high points—not necessarily in order of importance—and are illustrative of the rest.

1. Welcome to the Atlantic Council’s new Global Headquarters

As one of our board members said, “the Atlantic Council now has the home it deserves.”

In November, the Atlantic Council inaugurated our state-of-the-art facility at 1400 L St. NW, Washington, DC. At eighty thousand square feet across five floors, it is nearly double the size of the Council’s previous headquarters. Designed with the latest communication and convening technologies, it was built not as walls to enclose us but as a platform through which we also reach the world.

The Atlantic Council Global Headquarters features numerous convening spaces, an open-air reception lobby, a technology-enabled “situation room” to deal with unfolding crises and scenario gaming, state-of-the-art media studios, more than a dozen programmatic convening spaces, and an outdoor terrace with panoramic views of downtown Washington. The centerpiece of the new space is a three-hundred-seat capacity, multimedia-enabled forum that is among the city’s most dynamic event spaces.

Explore our halls, where named spaces highlight the global scope of our work—from Istanbul to the Caribbean. Original art and displays bring the Atlantic Council’s mission to life, with a few naming opportunities still available.

2. Staging New York events worthy of ‘the hottest ticket in town’

The 2024 United Nations General Assembly week in New York saw the biggest Atlantic Council presence yet—as we hosted a bounty of boldfaced names. It started with the black-tie Atlantic Council Global Citizen Awards, where we honored Ghanaian President Nana Addo Dankwa Akufo-Addo, Italian Prime Minister Giorgia Meloni, Greek Prime Minister Kyriakos Mitsotakis, and CJ Group Vice Chairwoman Miky Lee, with special appearances by Kenyan President William Ruto, Tesla CEO Elon Musk, Pfizer CEO Albert Bourla, and Paramount Global Chair Shari Redstone. Politico called the event “the hottest ticket in town.”

The program continued at the daylong Global Future Forum, where leaders and experts including former US Secretary of State Condoleezza Rice, Emirati diplomatic adviser Ahmed Muhammad Gargash, and Belarusian national leader Sviatlana Tsikhanouskaya discussed the most pressing issues facing the world of tomorrow. Then at the Transatlantic Forum on GeoEconomics, we hosted Deputy Attorney General Lisa Monaco, US Ambassador to China Nicholas Burns, Nasdaq CEO Adena Friedman, and many more high-level speakers to discuss cross-cutting policies affecting finance, technology, and energy. And our Resilience Center took part in New York Climate Week, shaping a climate-resilient world through convenings at the Resilience Hub.

Atlantic Council in New York

SEPTEMBER 23-26, 2024 NEW YORK, NEW YORK Our experts gathered on the sidelines of the United Nations General Assembly to highlight solutions to some of the biggest global challenges.

3. Delivering solutions for Ukraine

As leaders in Kyiv and throughout Europe grappled with the third year of Russia’s invasion of Ukraine, the Atlantic Council continued to take the lead in charting the path forward for a secure, free, sovereign, and democratic Ukraine. Ahead of the NATO Summit in Washington, the Scowcroft Center for Strategy and Security held war games to explore Ukraine’s possible future in the Alliance. Following the US election, the Eurasia Center and Europe Center took part in an expert convening at the University of Michigan to develop policy recommendations for the incoming Trump administration on Ukraine. The Global Energy Center, Eurasia Center, and GeoEconomics Center also collaborated on research on the first steps for Ukrainian reconstruction. And the Digital Forensic Research Lab explored how Russia’s information war about Ukraine went global with its annual Undermining Ukraine analysis. But the core problem lies not in Kyiv, but in Moscow. That’s why the Eurasia Center launched its new Russia Tomorrow paper series—all of which ranked among the Council’s most-read longform work of the year—to reexamine Western conceptions of the country and build a stronger policy on Russia today to better prepare for its future tomorrow.

Russia Tomorrow

Russia’s full-scale invasion of Ukraine in February 2022 challenged much of the common Western understanding of Russia. How can the world better understand Russia? What are the steps forward for Western policy? The Eurasia Center’s new “Russia Tomorrow” series seeks to reevaluate conceptions of Russia today and better prepare for its future tomorrow.

4. Fostering the next generation of leaders with the inaugural Millennium Leadership Summit

In September, the Millennium Leadership Program (MLP) celebrated its tenth anniversary by hosting the inaugural Millennium Leadership Summit, uniting its global network for the first time. The summit brought together members of MLP’s expansive network across twenty-seven countries, allowing alumni and current fellows to connect and collaborate with each other. Participants explored the central theme, “Global Leadership in Times of Uncertainty,” through panels, breakout sessions, and talks from distinguished speakers, including former US ambassador to China and Russia Jon Huntsman; Spencer Stuart CEO Jordan Brugg; and Karen Karniol-Tambour, who is an Atlantic Council board member, Bridgewater’s chief investment officer, and an MLP alumna. Discussions covered topics ranging from the implications of the US elections to strategies for leaders navigating the ongoing evolution of artificial intelligence.

Millennium Leadership Summit

In September 2024, the Millennium Leadership Program celebrated its tenth anniversary by hosting the inaugural Millennium Leadership Summit, uniting its global network for the first time. The Summit brought together members of MLP’s expansive network, allowing alumni and current Fellows, to connect and collaborate with each other.

5. Driving solutions for the energy transition and climate resilience

The Council drove the conversations at major climate conferences throughout the year, including New York Climate Week, CERAWeek, London Climate Action Week, and the COP29 climate change conference in Baku, Azerbaijan. The Global Energy Center (GEC) built a “community of communities,” which gathered at these major conferences to advance key emissions reduction initiatives in the energy and heavy industrial sectors. Throughout, GEC drove thoughtful, ambitious, and pragmatic industry/policy collaboration on financing methane abatement, carbon accounting, and building the business model for emissions reduction in hard-to-abate sectors. Meanwhile, GEC’s Nuclear Energy Policy Initiative continued its field-leading work on nuclear power with the Frontiers Project Meeting in Park City, Utah, addressing Utah’s tremendous potential as a first-mover state into advanced nuclear energy technologies to help secure US leadership in meeting global demand for low-emissions production and manufacturing.

The Atlantic Council’s Climate Resilience Center also continued its cutting-edge work on heat and climate adaptation. Through the Resilience Hub, which is recognized as the leading space for conversations on adaptation and resilience, the team held important convenings at the COP16 summit on biodiversity, COP29 in Baku, and beyond.

6. Shaping the global future of AI, together

Artificial Intelligence (AI) is projected to contribute $19.9 trillion to the global economy and 3.5 percent of global gross domestic product by 2030. As world leaders grapple with the implications of this emerging technology, we raised our ambitions by establishing the Atlantic Council Technology Programs (ACtech), bringing together five innovative existing programs under one umbrella. ACtech’s field-leading work on AI—which is only one aspect of the programs’ wide-ranging portfolio—was evident throughout the year. The GeoTech Center’s AI Connect program is dedicated to building communities of action to ensure AI opportunity is truly global, setting inclusive AI standards, enhancing nations’ competitiveness, and fostering regional collaboration on robust AI strategies. In 2024, AI Connect expanded with 150 policymakers from fifty-five global majority countries and workshops in Ho Chi Minh City, Istanbul, and Cape Town. While AI has the potential for enormous good, its rapid innovation and deployment also carry major risks. The Cyber Statecraft Initiative published a first-of-its-kind report entitled “Hacking with AI,” the Digital Forensic Research Lab monitored the misuse of generative AI in global elections, and the Democracy + Tech Initiative led work in AI national security governance as the Biden administration released the national security addendum to its landmark AI executive order.

AI Connect

An initiative that encourages the responsible stewardship of AI technologies in line with the OECD AI Principles and that empowers low and middle-income countries to more effectively participate in the global, multi-stakeholder conversation on AI policy.

https://dfrlab.org/2024/02/15/hacking-with-ai

The Big Story

Oct 17, 2024

Apocalypse later?

By By Dean Jackson and Meghan Conroy

A consensus among experts is emerging that AI’s chief short-term impact on elections will not be to create wholly new problems but rather to make previous threats more common and easier to carry out by a wider array of actors, leading to a higher volume of disinformation, cyberattacks, and other issues.

Elections United States and Canada

7. Driving the global economic agenda with unrivaled live events 

At the International Monetary Fund (IMF)-World Bank Annual Meetings and spring meetings, our GeoEconomics Center was the only think tank to host events live from inside the IMF’s headquarters. From our IMF studio to Atlantic Council headquarters, the first names in finance—including IMF Managing Director Kristalina Georgieva, European Central Bank President Christine Lagarde, and US Trade Representative Katherine Tai—sought out the Atlantic Council audience. These convenings shaped policy debates on a range of issues where the GeoEconomics Center is at the cutting edge, including digital assets, economic statecraft, and the state of the Chinese economy. 

IMF-World Bank Week at the Atlantic Council

WASHINGTON, DC APRIL 21-25

The Atlantic Council hosts a series of special events with finance ministers and central bank governors from around the globe during the 2025 Spring Meetings of the World Bank and International Monetary Fund (IMF).

8. Championing resilience and the fight to free Evan Gershkovich 

Throughout the year, the Atlantic Council, in collaboration with Executive Vice Chair Adrienne Arsht and Wall Street Journal publisher and Dow Jones CEO Almar Latour, fought to free Wall Street Journal reporter Evan Gershkovich from Russian imprisonment following his 2023 arrest on false charges of espionage. Publicly, our major event series, “Reporters at Risk,” convened leading journalists and media professionals from around the world to discuss the dangers that reporters face in their work and the importance of supporting press freedom and security. Privately, we fostered relationships that proved vital for Evan’s release, including at the Global Citizen Awards dinner in September 2023, where we introduced German Chancellor Olaf Scholz, one of our honorees, with Evan’s parents. There, Scholz indicated his support for Evan—a gesture of solidarity that would underpin Scholz’s decision a year later to free Russian hitman Vadim Krasikov from German jail as part of a sprawling seven-country deal involving Evan and some two dozen other prisoners. These efforts were a major focus of the newly launched Adrienne Arsht National Security Resilience Initiative, which aims to elevate resilience as an integral aspect of national security discourse and decision-making in Washington and around the world in the years to come.

Inflection Points

Sep 21, 2024

How the Atlantic Council contributed to Evan Gershkovich’s release

By Frederick Kempe

An encounter at the Global Citizen Awards played a modest but vital role in the exchange that released the Wall Street Journal reporter who was imprisoned in Russia.

Freedom and Prosperity International Norms

9. Celebrating NATO’s seventy-fifth birthday at its home in Washington

This was an important year for NATO, as it celebrated its seventy-fifth anniversary as the world’s most successful military alliance and gathered in Washington for its annual summit. The Scowcroft Center’s Transatlantic Security Initiative played a leading role in shaping NATO policy during this critical time through its “Season of NATO”—a series of public and private engagements, events, and publications, culminating in the NATO Public Forum at the Washington summit. As one of the lead organizers of the Public Forum, the Atlantic Council played a direct role in shaping and leading the critical conversations facing the Alliance. This included hosting sessions with then NATO Secretary General Jens Stoltenberg, US Defense Secretary Lloyd Austin, and National Security Advisor Jake Sullivan, as well as panels with the foreign ministers of Iceland, Poland, and Lithuania; the defense ministers of Canada, Finland, Norway, and Sweden; and Saab CEO Micael Johansson. We co-hosted a reception with the British Embassy, Amazon Web Services, and Dataminr, and held numerous off-site events, including a panel with the foreign ministers of the Nordic-Baltic countries. We topped it off with a unique musical performance by NATO allied musicians with the American Pops Orchestra at the Library of Congress. As several US and allied officials mentioned, “the Atlantic Council was everywhere.”

Atlantic Council at the NATO Summit in Washington

Live commentary, authoritative analysis, and high-level events covering NATO’s Washington summit, courtesy of our experts.

10. Expanding our global footprint for strategic litigation

In 2024 the Atlantic Council’s Strategic Litigation Project (SLP) expanded its regional portfolio, ensuring that impacted communities are driving the design and implementation of the team’s projects to advance human rights and accountability around the world. The team’s network of fellows, advisors, and partners represent affected communities from Afghanistan, Syria, Iran, Venezuela, Sri Lanka, Ukraine, and beyond. In particular, SLP’s work on Uyghur issues in China, developed and led by Uyghur human rights lawyer and advocate Rayhan Asat, saw remarkable growth and impact last year. The SLP also hosted a high-level panel event in New York City in partnership with the International Peace Institute and the Malala Fund, featuring Nobel Peace Prize Laureate Malala Yousafzai, to discuss the urgent need for legal recognition of gender apartheid in Afghanistan.

New Atlanticist

Nov 26, 2024

China’s atrocity crimes in Xinjiang are entering an even darker phase. The UN must act.

By Rayhan Asat

The suffering of the Uyghur people continues in Xinjiang, and the United Nations has a responsibility to act on its recommendations.

China Human Rights

11. Delivering relevant-at-speed editorial coverage in the Middle East and beyond

2024 was a year of history in motion, and the Atlantic Council’s experts kept pace with it. This “relevance at speed”—in which we act on major developments in the world with the velocity of a news outlet but draw on the Council’s uniquely deep and broad expertise—sets us apart as an organization that is as smart as it is fast. But we don’t practice relevance at speed just to be different; we do it because the United States and its partners and allies must respond to fast-moving global events as they unfold, so we just as swiftly must equip our audience of world leaders and policymakers with the most authoritative insight, foresight, and recommendations. Nowhere was this more evident than in our wide-ranging, lightning-quick coverage led by the Rafik Hariri Center and Middle East Programs of this past year’s momentous upheaval in the Middle East, including the ongoing war in Gaza, the expansion of the conflict into Lebanon, Iran’s direct attacks against Israel, Israel’s assassinations of Hezbollah and Hamas leaders, and the fall of the Assad regime in Syria. Our Fast Thinking newsletter proved ever more popular, our Experts React editions became some of our most-read articles of the year, and our “Smart in 60 Seconds” series won a Telly Award for excellence in video and television. These rapid responses also resonated with the media, with the Atlantic Council receiving well over one hundred thousand global media mentions in 2024—and most mentions in top-tier outlets stemming from our Middle East work. 

New Atlanticist

Dec 8, 2024

Experts react: Rebels have toppled the Assad regime. What’s next for Syria, the Middle East, and the world?

By Atlantic Council experts

Syrian dictator Bashar al-Assad has been ousted as opposition forces quickly took the Syrian capital. Atlantic Council experts share their insights on the developments.

Conflict Corruption

12. Drawing a roadmap for nearshoring

What is a policy opportunity that gets a lot of attention but lacks a roadmap to achieve it? The Council’s Adrienne Arsht Latin America Center identified nearshoring, or the relocation of supply chains to the Americas, as one such opportunity, and launched a multi-year working group with private-sector and former public-sector representatives from the United States, Mexico, Central America, and the Dominican Republic to figure out how to turn rhetoric into reality. We don’t operate in a silo, so feedback from current officials was critical. The group’s first report, which also incorporates insight from the GeoEconomics Center, was circulated across US missions and in relevant ministries as it offers the first concrete toolkit for how the United States and specific regional countries can bring more investment closer to the United States. Words are not meant to stay on paper. That’s why it was critical to have support in the paper from Republican and Democratic offices in the US House and Senate, and to see that it’s helping to inform Guatemala’s strategy to attract investment. The report’s thesis that deeper economic engagement with the region will also help to advance US economic security will continue to drive the working group’s efforts in the new US administration. It’s this sort of work that has made the Adrienne Arsht Latin America Center the pre-eminent player in its field.

Report

Sep 17, 2024

From rhetoric to reality: Nearshoring in the Americas

By the Adrienne Arsht Latin America Center’s Nearshoring Working Group

Over the past five years, global shifts have reshaped the world. China’s rise, US-China tensions, COVID-19, and Russia’s 2022 invasion of Ukraine exposed supply chain vulnerabilities, pushing resilience to the top of the agenda. Latin America and the Caribbean (LAC) can seize the opportunity to provide solutions for US companies through nearshoring.

Caribbean Economy & Business

13. Revealing how freedom fuels prosperity

Economic downturns, geopolitical tensions, and global pandemics have prompted many governments to expand their authority, trading fundamental freedoms for security imperatives. But many believe this model of governance is not sustainable to long-term prosperity and economic development. The Atlantic Council has been buttressing that conviction with research and, most importantly, data through the ground-breaking indexes of its Freedom and Prosperity Center. Featuring twenty contributing authors and a foreword by 2024 Nobel Prize winner Daron Acemoglu, the Center’s first annual atlas examines the trajectories of eighteen different countries and regions, providing a data-driven analysis of freedom, security, and prosperity in an interconnected world. The result? Their findings show that in all regions of the globe, countries that prioritize the rule of law, transparency, and accountability in governance foster an environment conducive to sustained economic growth and prosperity.

2024 Atlas: Freedom and prosperity around the world

The contemporary geopolitical landscape is marked by a series of crises—economic downturns, geopolitical tensions, and global pandemics—that have reshaped the role of governments worldwide. This comprehensive volume, featuring insights from twenty leading economists and diplomats, serves as a roadmap for navigating the complexities of contemporary governance. 

14. Driving investment, peace, and security in the DRC

In October on the margins of the IMF-World Bank Annual Meetings, the Africa Center in partnership with Rawbank hosted the first DRC Day at the National Press Club, bringing together representatives from the public and private sectors to forge solutions for the Democratic Republic of the Congo’s most pressing problems, including strengthening governance and unlocking investments for critical minerals. Speakers included Africa Finance Corporation CEO Samaila Zubairu, DRC Minister of Finance Doudou Fwamba Likunde, and US Export-Import Bank President Reta Jo Lewis. It was a high point during a year that included deep work on everything from critical minerals to creative industries.

There was so much more that the Atlantic Council delivered during the year, with its focus on the people, forces, and ideas shaping the global future. Here is a sampling of other notable work.

Setting a transatlantic policy agenda for 2025, with the Transatlantic Horizons series.

Influencing the Biden administration’s nuclear weapons policy with fresh thinking.

Convening leading voices and deploying expert insight on the 2024 “superyear” of elections in the United States and around the globe.

Putting the energy transition at center stage in Istanbul at the Atlantic Council Regional Conference on Clean and Secure Energy.

Mapping the tentacles of global spyware with a groundbreaking report.

Shaping the future of US policy with the Iran Strategy Report.

Examining China’s emergence as a peer nuclear power through a tabletop exercise and report on a potential conflict.

Enhancing US and allied preparedness for deterrence and war in the Indo-Pacific through the Tiger Project.

The post Annual report 2024/2025: The Atlantic Council’s greatest hits of 2024 appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>
Annual Report 2024/2025 https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/in-depth-research-reports/report/2024-annual-report/ Thu, 08 May 2025 13:45:17 +0000 https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/?p=843229 The Atlantic Council's 2024/2025 annual report provides insight into our impact and agility.

The post Annual Report 2024/2025 appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>

The post Annual Report 2024/2025 appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>
Counting the costs: A cybersecurity metrics framework for policy https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/in-depth-research-reports/report/counting-the-costs/ Tue, 06 May 2025 12:00:00 +0000 https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/?p=844324 Improved cybersecurity metrics can unlock more efficient policy and give policymakers a better sense of how they are faring at improving security.

The post Counting the costs: A cybersecurity metrics framework for policy appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>

Table of contents

Executive summary
Introduction
Two problems
Reframing cybersecurity metrics
The cyber metrics state of play
Reading the curves: Interpreting outcome data
Starting construction: Two changes
Conclusion
Acknowledgments

Executive summary

US cybersecurity policy has a critical blind spot: the absence of reliable outcome metrics that can inform policymakers about whether the digital ecosystem is becoming more secure and which interventions are driving progress most effectively. Despite years of strategies, regulations, and best-practices campaigns, the field of cybersecurity metrics has room to grow, and policymakers still lack answers to fundamental questions. How much harm are cybersecurity incidents causing? Are things getting better or worse? Which policies deliver the greatest return on investment for reducing realized harm and the risk of future harm?

This report identifies two core problems holding back progress: first, the unknown state of the system, meaning policymakers cannot empirically describe how secure or insecure the digital landscape currently is; and second, unmeasured policy efficacy, which prevents policymakers from comparing which interventions are most effective at improving security and reducing harm. The result is a policymaking environment heavily reliant on intuition, anecdote, incomplete data, and proxy measures—all unsustainable for a domain with such systemic and escalating risks and so much security investment. To address these challenges, the report proposes a reframing of cybersecurity metrics along two dimensions:

  1. Treating cybersecurity as a complex system—acknowledging that incident outcomes result from dynamic, probabilistic interactions between policies, technologies, adversaries, and users.
  2. Focusing on harm as the key outcome metric—shifting emphasis from internal system attributes (e.g., the number of vulnerabilities discovered) to the real-world impacts of cyber incidents, such as financial losses, operational disruptions, and physical damage.

The report then explores the current limitations of available metrics, illustrating how wide-ranging estimates of incident costs and inconsistent data collection methods hamstring policymakers. It outlines the difficulty of measuring and interpreting harm data at scale due to factors such as silent failures, complex indirect costs, and underreporting, but it argues that such challenges are not insurmountable and that a desire for perfect metrics cannot impede progress toward better ones. Finally, the paper offers two actionable recommendations for near-term progress:

  1. Strengthen existing reporting requirements (e.g., CIRCIA, SEC disclosures) to include consistent, updated measures of incident impact.
  2. Centralize responsibility under a single federal entity to aggregate, analyze, interpret, and publish cybersecurity harm data across sectors.

While perfection in cybersecurity metrics may be impossible, measuring harms is the most direct way to track progress and guide investment and the most critical metric to bolster policymakers’ toolkit. Without such measurement, the United States risks continuing to navigate a complex, evolving system with an incomplete map.

Introduction

A recurring theme in cybersecurity policy is the failure to quantitatively describe the end state toward which it aims, or even to enumerate what metrics should be measured to that end. How many incidents occur, how much damage do they cause, and to whom? If these are the metrics to consider, what is their desired level and by how much does cybersecurity need to improve to get there? And if not these metrics, then which?

In rare moments when policymakers clearly define cybersecurity outcomes, they tend toward absolutes of dubious achievability; for example, “prevent catastrophe” and “defeat ransomware.”1 Even complex legislation and national strategies,2 while attempting to alter the incentives around building and using technology, rarely offer more than a glancing, qualitative description of what they strive for—a far cry from the clear, numerical state measurements and milestones in other spheres of public policy, such as inflation and unemployment rates for the Federal Reserve.

Even though more empirically developed policy fields such as economics still face routine crisis, US cybersecurity policymakers must adapt to the dizzying complexity, rate of change, and potential impact of failure in today’s digital systems by taking exactly that step toward better measurement. It is critical to understand the current state of cybersecurity, set quantitative goals for its improvement, and assess the efficacy of government policies against those goals. “Intuition alone is insufficient to manage a complex system,” as former National Cyber Director Chris Inglis put it.3 Without specifying target outcomes, there is little incentive to establish critical baseline measures in the first place. Identifying the effectiveness of specific policies at improving security and the cost of their implementation is a step even farther, and the quantitative toolkit required for the US government to make that step has not yet been created. The novelty and dynamism of the digital domain mean that policy missteps will happen, but without that toolkit, identifying which remedies fall short and which succeed—let alone by how much—will remain extraordinarily difficult, if not impossible, all while the rapid integration of digital systems across all levels of society increases the impacts and risks of cyber incidents.

This paper aims to reboot and reorient a long-simmering debate around cybersecurity metrics for the policy community. It starts with context about the state of and need for better cybersecurity measurement by discussing two central and related problems created by the field’s empirical immaturity:

  • Insufficient cybersecurity metrics mean that government cannot empirically assess, across the digital domain, whether cybersecurity is good or bad, improving or deteriorating.
  • Insufficient cybersecurity metrics also complicate the task of evaluating and prioritizing security practices and policies based on their efficacy.

After discussing these two problems, this paper offers two framings for cybersecurity metrics critical to improving their usefulness to policymakers: treating cybersecurity as a complex system and measuring harms. The guiding thesis of this paper is that the harms, in the broadest sense, caused by cyber insecurity are the most important outcome metrics for policymakers. Harms here refers to the bad things caused by cybersecurity incidents, from direct loss of money to intellectual property theft, from the compromise of national security information to the erosion of competitive economic advantage. Metrics for those harms at the macro level are an essential tool for policymakers seeking to manage and improve cybersecurity. After all, cybersecurity policymakers’ driving mandate is to reduce realized harms and the risk of future harm as much as reasonably possible, whether through increasing economic competitiveness, securing critical infrastructure, imposing costs on adversary activities, managing strategic competition, or any number of methodological priorities.

This paper does not claim a lack of effort in policy or technical circles at quantifying security, and indeed elements in both communities have been trying admirably for quite some time.4 Moreover, even without a broad base of empirical data, policymakers make much use of threat intelligence, observed trends, risk assessments, and other sources of evidence. Instead, this paper suggests a starting point for identifying, measuring, and analyzing cybersecurity outcomes with the goal of reorienting and rebooting these debates rather than arriving at a final answer. After discussing cybersecurity as a complex system and outcomes in terms of harms, this paper analyzes different approaches to interpreting outcome data. Finally, this paper proposes initial policy steps toward improving cybersecurity outcome data.

Importantly, these recommendations do not aim at some final architecture for perfect cybersecurity statistics—such policy systems take time, trial, and error to create in any field. Instead, they combine practical changes and a broader policy reframing to move the needle of cybersecurity policy toward realistic empiricism, while recognizing the risks of both cynicism and perfectionism. Empirically characterizing cybersecurity at the macro level and the efficacy of specific security policies is difficult but not hopeless. And while no policy system for metrics is perfect—debates in more matured fields such as public health, law enforcement, and economics abound—that does not render them all useless.

Two problems

Unkown system state: What is “the problem”?

The first issue created by insufficient cybersecurity metrics is that they leave policymakers with no concrete way to describe the current degree of harm caused by insecurity. More than a decade ago, Dan Geer listed several fundamental cybersecurity questions offered in the context of a conversation with a firm’s chief information security officer (CISO): “How secure am I? Am I better off than this time last year? Am I spending the right amount of [money]? How do I compare to my peers?”5 These questions are as important for policymakers, and as difficult for them to answer, as when originally posed in 2003.6 The primary US cyber policy coordinator, the Office of the National Cyber Director (ONCD) argued in 2024 that they were not answerable at all. A Government Accountability Office (GAO) report on the 2023 National Cybersecurity Strategy (NCS) criticized the NCS for its lack of “outcome-oriented performance measures,” as well as ignoring “resources and estimated costs,” to which the ONCD responded that “such measures do not currently exist in the cybersecurity field in general,”7 and the claim rings true. Current cybersecurity metrics and the field’s state have, after at least two decades, failed to provide policymakers with ways to answer the foundational question “how are we doing at cybersecurity?” at the highest level.

And yet, a general intuition that the current state of US cybersecurity is suboptimal animates industry, government, and the public alike. Headlines dominated by costly cybersecurity incidents and predictions that things will deteriorate without drastic change feed this perception. For example, former US Deputy National Security Advisor Anne Neuberger summarized data from the International Monetary Fund (IMF) and Federal Bureau of Investigation (FBI) data as suggesting that “the average annual cost of cybercrime worldwide is expected to soar from $8.4 trillion in 2022 to more than $23 trillion in 2027.”8At appreciable fractions of global GDP, these are dire numbers that all but mandate extreme intervention. The hypothesis behind this metric is that the current amount of harm caused by cyber incidents could be reduced by interventions less costly than the consequences of their absence. But intervention against what, and how? Testing and refining that thesis with quantitative data is a critical first step too often overlooked—how much harm do cyber incidents cause? How much would it cost to implement recommended interventions? How much harm would they prevent? Is the cost of preventing security incidents actually lower than the costs that those incidents impose? And above all, if the current level of harms is deemed unacceptable, what would be considered acceptable? Current metrics are unable to provide answers at a scale useful to policymakers, leaving them with no baseline measures against which to judge policy efficacy.

In absence of this key outcome data, cyber policy conversations frame metrics as, at best, an after-action exercise for validating efficacy, rather than the first critical step in defining the problems they seek to solve. Even then, empirical impact assessments are rare. The NCS’s “Assessing Effectiveness” section underlines this, providing just one paragraph on the strategy’s final page, with a key progress report that failed to materialize before the change in administration.9 The document’s accompanying implementation plan (the National Cybersecurity Strategy Implementation Plan, or NCSIP) reduces assessment to determining whether proposed policies were enacted and whether a budget for them was created, and nothing more.10 These are useful measures of output for policymakers, but do little if anything to track empirically how implementing the NCS changes the cybersecurity landscape; the strategy largely forgoes assessing its external impact, focusing instead on implementation—a familiar state for cyber policy, which more often concerns itself with adoption rates and completion progress than tangible effect on security outcomes.11 If policymakers cannot, from the outset and at a high level, measure how they are doing at cybersecurity, all follow-on policy rests on a flawed foundation and it will be difficult to empirically demonstrate success.

Policymakers must use cybersecurity metrics as the foundation for characterizing the status quo, identifying specific problems with it, and shaping solutions. When the GAO asks what outcomes would demonstrate the success of the NCS, the ONCD should be able to respond by pointing to the very issues and data motivating the creation of NCS in the first place. The usefulness of measuring incident costs is relatively uncontroversial and has long frustrated policymakers—see for example a 2020 CISA study on just that problem and its associated challenges.12 However, both cybersecurity policymaking writ large and efforts to imbue it with better metrics would benefit greatly from approaching metrics as a step toward problem definition first, then as solution assessment. Otherwise, the logical chain of cyber policymaking is broken, producing unbounded solutions with no clear, quantified statement of the problems they hope to solve, and thus no clear outcomes to strive for and measure success against.

Policymakers and practitioners are right to lament the dearth of cybersecurity statistics to inform their work, but they cannot afford to wait for the empirical field to mature on that same decades-long trajectory—they must proactively work to define, gather, and respond to cybersecurity metrics. It is unlikely that government can avoid a central role in gathering macroscale metrics and wait for the data they need to be developed for them. Monetary policy is guided by and assessed against the Consumer Price Index (CPI) and the unemployment rate, both of which are measured by the US Bureau of Labor Statistics. National crime statistics are collated and analyzed through the FBI’s Uniform Crime Reporting Program. The Center for Disease Control’s National Center for Health Statistics gathers a variety of public health metrics from across the country, as well as globally. Each of these programs is the result of decades of iterative policymaking and partnerships with experts in industry, academia, state and local governments, and civil society. The federal government has the clearest incentives and best means to gather metrics on a scale sufficient to describe the full ecosystem and assess policy efforts to shape it. Policymakers do require better cybersecurity metrics to guide them, but they have an active role to play in creating those tools.

For cybersecurity, some nascent policies might provide useful insight on data gathering and starting points for more matured, coordinated programs: for example, the FBI’s Internet Crime Complaint Center (IC3) database,13 the upcoming implementation of the Cyber Incident Reporting for Critical Infrastructure Act (CIRCIA),14 the Securities and Exchange Commission’s (SEC) material cyber incident reporting requirements,15 and so on. All either currently or soon will gather data on cybersecurity incidents, but there is little consensus about what to measure and how, and worryingly little progress toward data collection at the ecosystem scale.16 For a young field—cybersecurity dates back to the 1970s as a defined field at the earliest, whereas econometrics began developing in the early 1930s—that status quo is understandable, but untenable.17

Unmeasured efficacy: What interventions address “the problem” best?

Second, insufficient cybersecurity metrics leave policymakers without measures of how effective specific policies are, meaning they can do little to prioritize or update policy interventions based on metrics. Policymakers are in the business of battling with long-perceived market inefficiencies that lead firms to under- and mis-invest in cybersecurity.18 For now, they do so through recommendations and requirements about security practices and reporting for certain sectors, products, and entities. The past few years have seen a flurry of movement in cyber policy, from the National Cybersecurity Strategy and its dozens of implementation objectives to agency-led efforts such as CISA’s Secure by Design (SBD) Initiative and the SEC’s new cyber incident reporting requirements, several critical executive orders, and even an effort designed to harmonize the many existing and forthcoming regulations.19

Choosing the initiatives to pursue and those to reinvent or discard requires an understanding of their ultimate impact on cybersecurity outcomes. Determining which policies are effective—when measured against the cost of their implementation—requires quantifying the costs of incidents that they prevent or mitigate. A firm’s ability to decide which SBD principles to prioritize necessitates understanding their cost and efficacy. And yet there are only early efforts at ranking these practices by their effectiveness, which challenges any attempt to identify the most urgent security practices or product security features to implement.20 In short, no one knows what the best thing to do is, whether that be policymakers deciding what practices to require or industry deciding which to implement, only a great number of security practices that are probably good to try.

This is more than simply an optimization challenge. Seemingly potent security controls can lead to unexpectedly poor outcomes, especially in a complex system. For example, the National Institute for Standards and Technology (NIST) prescribes security practices for federal agencies and their contractors, and industry writ large often uses its guidance documents as a starting point for security policies even when a company’s compliance is not required. One such publication, NIST SP-800-63B, offers recommendations on digital identity systems, including guidance about account credentials. Past versions of the document suggested the use of complex characters (a mix of numbers, capital and lowercase letters, and special symbols) and frequent password resets to prevent attackers from using dictionaries of common passwords to quickly guess their way into account access. The thinking was that complex characters would require attackers to brute force passwords (i.e. guess all possible combinations of characters in a password), and that the frequent rotation of credentials would limit the window of time in which attacks could guess a password successfully, since attackers would need to start over after every rotation. The reality was different. Users rotated between similar passwords, often repeating old ones, and attackers developed dictionaries to quickly guess at common, easily remembered uses of complex characters like the suffix “123!” and substituting numbers for letters.21 In other words, the intuition behind the practice was sound, but the ecosystem (users, here) reacted in a way that made the recommended practice insecure and costly.

Without metrics to provide an empirical understanding of the tradeoffs that recommended security practices create in practice, policymakers remain at risk for similar situations. For example, inconvenient authentication requests from multi-factor authentication (MFA) might lead users to share credentials in an insecure manner; rewriting software into notionally memory-safe programming languages might be effective at improving security but more costly than the incidents it prevents; or zero trust architectures might fail to meaningfully improve security across the digital ecosystem so long as they are not adopted past some unknown threshold. Without improving cybersecurity metrics, there is simply no way to know how new practices interact with the full ecosystem.

Reframing cybersecurity metrics

To address the connected problems cited above, policymakers must take two critical steps to reframe and develop their approach to empirical cybersecurity: to treat the digital domain as a complex system, and to measure incident harms as their key guiding outcome metric. These are closely related—understanding causality within a complex system and making predictions based on the arrangement of that system at any point in time are immensely difficult. Instead, focusing on the system’s outcomes (here, incident harms) over the system’s specific characteristics at a point in time (e.g., the adoption rate of memory-safe languages) will help policymakers avoid the trap of claiming progress in shaping behaviors without producing evidence that said behaviors have improved the cybersecurity status quo.

Treating cybersecurity as a complex system

Treating the cybersecurity landscape as a complex system-of-systems is key to assessing its status quo. This is the fundamental mandate for policymakers—to reduce bad cybersecurity outcomes across the board,22 and not just for the handful of firms that can measure their own implementation and outcomes well. Accordingly, visibility into as much of the ecosystem as possible is critical. A systems approach also helps policymakers deal with the domain’s complexity, which might lead to unforeseen interactions between policy interventions, technology design choices, and cybersecurity outcomes. The digital ecosystem has two key features that, unaccounted for, could mislead policymakers significantly as they approach improving its security: probabilistic incidents and extraordinary dynamism.

First, there is no deterministic formula to predict whether a cybersecurity incident will occur, when, or with what severity. An entity with extraordinary security practices might find themselves the target of an extremely sophisticated adversary or might remain critically vulnerable because of one simple oversight. Equally, a firm with poor security practices might avoid compromise by pure luck. While this probabilism is somewhat self-evident, it means that data with too small a sample size over too short a duration could significantly mislead policymakers. For example, observing fewer bad outcomes for a specific sector might indicate that changes to security practices in that field are stumping attackers who are now comprising fewer targets in general, or instead that attackers have simply moved on to another sector for any number of reasons without a net change in the ecosystem. There are hard limits on the usefulness and broad applicability of data provided on or by a handful of firms over a few years, and yet the majority of cybersecurity data available to the public today is often presented in the form of corporate annual reports.

Second, the ecosystem is constantly and rapidly changing and interacting with itself. Adversaries in the digital ecosystem are adaptive, the technologies they target change daily, the incentives of firms building technologies and those using them are in constant flux, and so on. Dynamism and unexpected interactions have consequences for measurement. By way of example, recall the NIST password guidance example cited earlier. All else remaining equal, passwords immune to dictionary attacks and changing too often to be brute forced would reduce account compromises, but all else does not stay equal in a complex system. The guidance changed user behavior in way that made accounts more vulnerable instead. Similarly, the relationships between security practices and outcomes are not immutable—techniques that stop would-be attackers one year might do little to slow them down the next as they refine their tactics and develop new tools. Capturing data on how outcomes in the entire digital domain shift over time is critical if policymakers hope to understand and manage it as a complex system. This should increase the urgency with which policymakers strive to better measure cybersecurity outcomes, as the relative lack of historical data means it will take time for newly gathered data to be of significant use.

To illustrate these dynamics in practice, consider the straightforward government-led disruption campaigns that the National Cybersecurity Strategy recommended,23 in which law enforcement organizations or the military attack the infrastructure of malicious actors to prevent their campaigns from causing harm. Fewer attackers carrying out less malicious activity should be a boon to the ecosystem, and the US government (with international partners’ assistance) accordingly increased the pace of its disruption operations through a combination of sanctions, prosecutions, and offensive cyber activities as part of its Counter Cybercrime, Defeat Ransomware strategic objective.24 And yet, Microsoft measurements appeared to show that the volume of ransomware attacks nearly tripled in the final months of 2024.25 Without vastly improved cybersecurity data, it is difficult what to make of these two facts. It might be that disruption campaigns mitigated some attacks, tempering cybercrime even as it continued to grow—if for example, without those disruption operations, ransomware attacks might have quadrupled. Alternatively, the expensive government interventions might have had little impact on the efforts of attackers who could easily buy or write new malware, procure new command and control servers, and move on to less well-defended targets. The disruption campaigns in this model might simply have prevented attacks against specific targets but shifted the attention of the attackers to undefended victims without a net effect. A third possibility is somewhere in between—disruption campaigns might work to reduce incidents at the ecosystem scale but with little return on investment. The thwarted incidents might’ve been drops in the ocean of cyber malfeasance not meriting the cost of disruption. Without macro-scale data or insight into specific adversary decision-making, there is no real way to know which of these models applies over a relatively narrow timeframe, let alone historical data.

The graphic below illustrates a high-level mapping of the digital ecosystem as a complex system, sorting potential metrics into three categories: inputs, attributes, and outcomes. Inputs are forces, policies, and decisions that are largely external to the digital ecosystem, though no doubt shaped by it. These are the incentives that drive decision making within the ecosystem, its technological design and development, and so on. By far the two most dominant inputs are market incentives and policy choices, which drive investment, design, and decision making within the cyber ecosystem. Attributes are measures or descriptors of the ecosystem itself. Within the ecosystem, firms, attackers, defenders, IT infrastructure, and connected real-world systems all interact at a vast scale and rapid pace in a blend of technical, social, and economic subsystems. These attributes provide the vast majority of cybersecurity metrics available today—for example, vulnerability counts and severity, incident frequency, and the adoption rate of various security practices and products. Parsing the ecosystem and its specific components—its attributes—provides much utility, especially to specific entities within it, but that analysis must be taken with a grain of salt. The ecosystem is constantly changing, its various components interact with different degrees of coordination, and how those forces balance out in the long run is difficult to understand, let alone predict. This system-of-systems produces outcomes in the form of benefits (the efficiency, productivity, and innovation enabled by the digital ecosystem) and harms—the material damage caused by incidents.

Figure 1

The goal of this mapping is to highlight how policymakers like those at the ONCD, CISA, or similar are interacting with the digital ecosystem at a different scale than firms and individuals. Many of the metrics useful to an individual firm are attributes, and they take on different meanings and behaviors for those concerned with system-of-systems security. For instance, vulnerability counts might tell a cloud provider what problems they have to fix, how often it creates those problems for itself, and how much effort to invest in patching. However, for policymakers, vulnerability counts indicate some vague blend of deficiency in technology design and success in vulnerability detection. Moreover, at the ecosystem scale, attributes interact with each other and outcomes in unpredictable or unknown ways—for example, it is unclear how attacker behavior adjusts to security practice changes at scale and with what effect on outcomes.

Importantly, this framing is not a call to anticipate all possible interactions or comprehensively measure all attributes. Such an approach to the management of a complex system is impractical. Rather, the complex system framing should highlight the importance of outcome measurements as a way for policymakers to navigate complexity or at least evaluate its consequences for the full set of stakeholders under their remit.

Measuring harms as outcomes

Taken together, the two abovementioned issues—an unknown system state and interventions with unmeasured efficacy—put policymakers in a difficult position. It is as if the Federal Reserve lacked data on unemployment rates and inflation while, at the same time, not knowing which policy tools most effectively influence those economic outcomes and how the rest of the economy reacts to their use. The task of assessing efficacy is difficult in the absence of data measuring realized harms. The Federal Reserve could not begin to know whether its interest rate hikes tempered inflation if the Bureau of Labor Statistics did not calculate the CPI. The cybersecurity arena resembles this, with policy more often being a response to singular incidents and anecdotes than to hard data, and with myriad vendors offering cybersecurity solutions in what could be charitably described as “a market for silver bullets” while at the same time producing much of the data currently available to inform policymaking.26 Past incidents and subjective anecdotes are helpful for policymakers, to a certain extent, and security products are not all ineffective. However, heuristics and hunches are only half a solution in managing the complexity of the cyber ecosystem. Metrics are the other critical and conspicuously absent component, and the first step to developing solid, ecosystem-wide metrics is figuring out what to measure and how.

The harms caused by cyber insecurity are the most important outcome metrics for policymakers, and measuring those harms at the macro level is essential if policymakers are to meaningfully manage and improve cybersecurity. Reducing bad cybersecurity outcomes in the form of harms, and mitigating the risk of future harm, is the implicit guiding principle of cybersecurity policy, and therefore measuring those harms broadly is the only path toward rigorous, empirical cybersecurity policymaking.27 Nonetheless, key policymaking offices in the United States seem so far unable to agree on what a cybersecurity outcome even is. The GAO has suggested measuring tallies of CIRCIA reports—i.e., creating raw counts of incidents reported from specific sectors—and the frequency of government disruption campaigns; but both are attributes, not outcomes.28 Few, if any, would disagree that reducing the harm caused by cyber incidents is progress, if not the entire point. Focusing on harms as outcomes in this complex system framing is critical to answering the core question about cybersecurity policy’s progress for several reasons:

  • Harms as outcomes do not depend upon untested hypotheses about the relationships between attributes or their impact on outcomes.
  • Harms are distinct from the dynamic system-of-systems that produces them.
  • Harms help reduce the breadth of units of measurement when compared to attribute metrics.
  • Harms are more salient to the public than the specific security flaws that lead to them.

First, harms are independent of hypotheses about cybersecurity and key to evaluating them. While there is good reason to believe that many cybersecurity practices and policies improve security and thus reduce harms, the empirical evidence backing these beliefs—let alone describing the amount of harm reduction they are responsible for—is vanishingly thin, and sometimes proves those practices to be ineffective or even harmful.29 It may be that currently identified best cybersecurity practices are indeed effective, but without knowing how the adoption of a practice interacts with the entire digital ecosystem, policymakers cannot make informed decisions about regulations or incentives. For example, MFA-secured accounts are almost certainly more secure than those backed by single passwords, all else remaining equal, but if the security offered by MFA requires a critical threshold of ecosystem adoption,30 great effort would be wasted if policymakers were content with an adoption rate below this unknown threshold, and even more would be lost if the cost of pushing adoption past that threshold exceeded the losses prevented by the greater security such implementation might lead to. The fact that any given practice can make a given computer system more secure is necessary but insufficient to urge its broad adoption precisely because of both the possibility for unforeseen interactions within the cybersecurity ecosystem and the general lack of information about costs and benefits at the macro scale that single system adoption provides, especially when that system might be connected to a critical power plant or something far more innocuous.

Second, harms are distinct from the system that produces them, rather than descriptive of it. The complex cyber system, as discussed above, contains billions of machines and users interacting and changing at incredible speed across and above the entire planet. While understanding this ecosystem and its internal attributes at any point in time is useful, the fundamental question for policymakers is how much harm its insecurity enables (relative to the benefits it provides). Any description of the ecosystem—for example, the point-in-time adoption rate of security best practices—still requires outcome data to be meaningful, and as attackers find new routes to compromise, the relationship between best practices and the outcomes they influence are ever changing. In other words, ecosystem attributes alone are insufficient metrics. Attributes do not describe the cost of insecurity, but rather the probability of future harm, and even then unreliably until causal links between attributes and outcomes are better understood.

This reduces, over time and with no further context, the usefulness of measures of specific security practice adoption or of the reduction of the number of certain vulnerabilities.31 For instance, in data about the types of memory safety vulnerabilities patched at Microsoft during an eight year period, use-after-free vulnerabilities dominated about 50 percent of vulnerabilities in 2015, compared to just 15 percent in 2022.32 While this data represents discovered rather than exploited vulnerabilities, the corollary for either observation is the same—the digital system changes, so attacker practices change, and thus defensive measures that worked one year can fail to protect a target entirely the next. In this example, a naive analysis might argue that the reduction in use-after-free vulnerabilities over seven years is a sign of security improvement at Microsoft. This conclusion does not account for the concurrent increase in almost all other kinds of memory safety vulnerabilities, nor does it discriminate among which types or individual vulnerabilities led to the most harm. Microsoft’s specific work to reduce use-after-free vulnerabilities succeeded, but what that meant for Microsoft’s cybersecurity outcomes remains unclear from the data gathered. It might be that use-after-free vulnerabilities were critical to attackers, and their elimination required a costly pivot to other means. It might be that the discovery and exploit techniques used for use-after-free vulnerabilities were easily converted to other exploit paths. Or it might be that use-after-free vulnerabilities were never abused by attackers that much to begin with. Without outcome data, it is difficult to know (as with MFA) if the cost of reducing entire classes of vulnerabilities might exceed the value of reduced harms up to a certain threshold of coverage.

Third, many harms can be expressed in the common unit of dollars—from identity theft caused by data breaches to the value of stolen intellectual property and the costs imposed by system downtime for critical infrastructure providers. Such monetary losses are often measured or measurable by entities that fall victim to cyber incidents as they quantify incurred costs. Harms can be categorized relatively exhaustively:

  1. Financial loss—such as ransomware payments, lost revenue, directly stolen funds, and the costs associated with an incident.
  2. Physical harm—including loss of life and physical injury.33
  3. System downtime or disruption—such as the time that a water treatment plant is taken offline, the time that a hospital operates at reduced capacity, or the inability to conduct government functions.34
  4. Compromised information—including stolen intellectual property, compromised passwords, and emails stolen from government networks.

Harms can accumulate toward other effects too, often greater than the sum of their parts. These might include reputational damage to a firm or state that experience a sufficient number of harmful incidents, psychological harm to a population subject to repeated cyber incidents, the loss of strategic advantage when an adversary has compromised sufficient amounts of national security information, or similar. This last item, compromised information, highlights a critical nuance. While the act of stealing information might in itself be a harm—e.g., damaging the reputation or share price of a firm subject to a massive data breach or revealing to an adversary information about an upcoming operation—more often it creates the risk for future harm dependent on what the adversary does with that information. Stolen information might give an adversary insight into system flaws or offensive tooling they can later exploit, provide them with credentials or personally identifiable information (PII) that they can abuse later, expose intellectual property that can be leveraged for economic gain at the original owner’s expense, or similar. Many other attributes of the complex cyber system contribute to the risk of future harm, from adversary prepositioning operations to the availability of data backups, or the average speed of patching critical vulnerabilities. Nonetheless, for policymakers, understanding how risks of future harm can manifest requires analysis of realized harms.

Overall, systematically measuring harms caused by cybersecurity failures can significantly contribute to understanding how much more or less secure the digital ecosystem is while helping to simplify the complexity and dynamism of the ecosystem, balancing and contextualizing the current focus on its attributes.35

The cyber metrics state of play

Policymakers today are not well equipped with the tools to help them describe the system state of cybersecurity over time, nor to measure and rank the efficacy of various interventions and practices in improving that state. Focusing cybersecurity metrics on harms as the key outcome metric for cybersecurity policy helps address these shortcomings while sufficiently navigating the ecosystem’s complexity. However, cybersecurity metrics as of now are not up to the formidable task of outcome measurement. This section will detail the challenges of gathering and interpreting data on cybersecurity outcomes and the reality on the ground.

Despite the many industry reports and headlines discussing or predicting global and national costs of cybersecurity incidents,36 no studies seek to examine differences between reported and forecasted losses, few estimates exhaustively describe their methodologies, cost estimates range significantly, and few predictions are adjusted for changes in the underlying ecosystem.37 Critically, there is no single source that systematically tracks incident harms across a wide swathe of the ecosystem.

For example, the 2024 IMF Global Financial Stability Report estimated that reported 2022 cyber incident losses were around $5 billion,38 while the FBI’s IC3 report put 2022 losses for just the United States at $10.3 billion.39 Statista, meanwhile, reports $7.08 trillion in losses for 2022 and projects $12.43 trillion in 2027, while then Deputy National Security Advisor Anne Neuberger’s figures were $8.4 trillion and $23 trillion for the same years.40 Two other reports, from Cybersecurity Ventures and Comparitech, estimate 2022 losses at $6.9 trillion and $42.8 billion respectively.41 Importantly, only the FBI IC3 report and IMF report seem based entirely on confirmed incidents, though Comparitech’s might aggregate similar such reporting. Rather than any specific estimate being wrong, the key issue is that few if any sources use the same methods or scoping, with differences in what is even considered a cyber incident. Additionally, many of these reports. or similar ones such as Verizon’s Data Breach Investigations Report, originate in industry, presenting concerns about long-term availability in the event that a company removes old reports or decides to stop publishing new ones, as well as the potential for conflicting business incentives to influence methodology and reporting.

One 2019 study of the costs of cybercrime summarizes well how these estimates can be further misconstrued, writing “in our 2012 paper, we scaled UK estimates up to global ones…and presented them in a table. We warned that ‘it is entirely misleading to provide totals lest they be quoted out of context…’ Yet journalists happily ignored this and simply added up the columns, proclaiming large headline figures for global cybercrime—which were essentially twenty times our estimate of UK income tax evasion, as this was the largest figure in the table.”42

There are several systematic incident reporting processes in the United States that could usefully gather outcome data, but they are not fully realized. The SEC recently began requiring the reporting of material cyber incidents from publicly traded companies, which had already occasionally disclosed such incidents in their filings. However, of the nearly two hundred cyber incident reports (required or not) available at the time of this piece’s writing, just seven contain cost estimates.43 CIRCIA, which has yet to be fully implemented, seems intent on capturing incident impacts, though the tight timeframe within which to report an incident (seventy-two hours) likely means that accurate outcome measurement will have to rely on updates to initial reports.44 While CIRCIA incident report updates are mandatory in its most recent proposal, whether they will capture outcome data remains to be seen, as full implementation will not begin until 2026.

Other useful incident reporting processes include (but are not limited to):

  • FISMA, which requires federal civilian executive branch (FCEB) agencies to report incidents to CISA.45
  • The US Department of Housing and Urban Development’s (HUD) Significant Cybersecurity Incident Reporting Requirements, which covers mortgagees approved by the Federal Housing Administration.46
  • The Gramm-Leach-Bliley Act requires a variety of financial institutions to report data breaches to the Federal Trade Commission.47
  • The Federal Communications Commission’s updated data breach notification rules, which cover telecommunications carriers.48
  • The Department of Defense’s (DOD) requirements for Defense Industrial Base contractors to report all cyber incidents involving “covered defense information.”49
  • The Department of Health and Human Services’ Breach Notification Rule.50
  • A tapestry of data breach reporting requirements across all fifty states and several US territories, as well as other sector-specific federal requirements both proposed and implemented.51

Together, these reporting requirements should notionally cover all publicly traded companies in the United States, critical infrastructure providers, FCEB agencies, and many smaller entities under state laws, with some entities facing multiple reporting requirements. Even more reporting requirements exist in the intelligence community, among defense contractors and recipients of federal grants, and others, while law enforcement captures at least an appreciable number of incidents targeting individuals through the FBI’s IC3. Given this sample would represent a massive proportion of the US attack surface, it should provide a sufficient starting point for systematic cybersecurity outcome data, if properly arranged to gather such data and coordinated to arrive at central clearing agency for analysis. Even then, disincentives to accurate reporting have long plagued cybersecurity,52 and the challenges in arriving at useful estimates of harms are significant.

Difficult numbers

Even with a robust reporting system tailored to capture incident costs from all the above sources while avoiding disincentives that lead to underreporting—a far cry from the current status quo—the task of estimating incident outcomes is not easy, with two notable hurdles standing out: silent failures and complex costs.

Silent failures refers to the fact that in cybersecurity, when information is stolen, it often remains present on the victim’s system, which makes noticing the compromise and its outcomes challenging.53 Take for example the extraordinary lag time between the deployment of malicious SolarWinds Orion updates in late March of 2020, and the discovery of the intelligence gathering campaign in December 2020.54 Attackers might have had access to target systems for at least nine months, with no “missing” data tipping off defenders. Such intelligence gathering is a fundamental feature of the cyber domain, and ensuring most of these compromises are discovered is ultimately a technical challenge, but it remains a key limiter on the value and feasibility of large-scale outcome data. Barring a complete technical solution, analysts will always need to assume that their data conveys an incomplete picture of ecosystem outcomes, especially when information theft is such a fundamental part of cybersecurity incidents.

Complex costs refer to the difficulties of quantifying many of the harms caused by cybersecurity incidents. Broadly, estimating the costs incurred by operational downtime, ransomware payments, and similar incidents is a tractable task for victim entities. However, attaching a dollar figure to harms resulting from stolen information is difficult, even when the extent of that compromise is definitively known, especially where that information might contribute to significant compromise but only when attached to other information (as in the case of linking phone numbers to email addresses to undermine MFA protections). Valuable information might include intellectual property, PII, information with national security value, account credentials, or similar. The quantity of information stolen by attackers and the sensitivity of that information can provide some insight into the risks of future harms, but precise measurement is difficult, especially when not all stolen data is abused successfully or when the abuse serves national security or intelligences ends, which are particularly hard (if not impossible) to quantify.

Complex costs also refer to other difficult-to-notice harms. For instance, the largest source of risk in the cyber ecosystem is its interconnection with effectively all layers of society: a cybersecurity incident can cause direct and immediate harms to any given sector with sufficient dependence on IT systems, affecting a huge number of entities even when only one entity was compromised. Even the most well-architected system for counting the costs of cyber incidents will struggle to accurately track total harms across sectors. These secondary costs can represent the bulk of harm caused by an incident but might remain buried in non-cyber reporting systems, if reported at all. Take, for example, the recent CrowdStrike outage, which led to flight cancellations globally as well as operational disruptions across many sectors. While one report from Parametrix Insurance estimated that the incident carried a net cost of $5.4 billion, tracking those costs all the way through different sector verticals is difficult.55 The same Parametrix report assessed losses of $860 million for airlines, but the losses reported by just Delta Air Lines in an SEC filing amounted to at least $500 million.56 This is not to criticize any particular estimate, but rather to highlight both the consequences of inconsistent methodologies and the challenges of tracking costs not funneled through established cyber incident reporting requirements. To the latter, Delta’s disclosure came through Item 7.01 of a Form 8-K for reporting specific material events, effectively tagging it as a massive, unexpected cost. Generally, cyber incident disclosures through 8-K forms have been made through Item 8.01 for non-material incidents and the SEC’s newly created Item 1.05 for material ones. In other words, accurately capturing all costs from cyber incidents is key to understanding their true impact, as cyber risk is generally a function of the critical role of systems connected to digital infrastructure. At the same time, such estimates are difficult to make and are difficult to capture by singular reporting mechanisms because of their appearance across all sectors.57

Reading the curves: Interpreting outcome data

If policymakers were able to measure with reasonable accuracy and precision the costs of cybersecurity incidents, they could use that data to begin addressing the two outstanding challenges with cybersecurity policy and metrics: assessing efficacy (or return on investment) and benchmarking system state. However, even with accurate measurement, interpretation of such data is not straightforward.

First, measuring return on investment requires the ability to answer two immediate, practical questions: How much harm does a specific practice reduce? How much do we spend where? While the latter is more tractable—expenditure is recorded somewhere, though general IT spend and cybersecurity spend can be difficult to separate in practice—at the micro level, robust outcome data would enable the study of return on investment for money spent implementing specific cybersecurity practices by revealing how much they reduced harms downstream. Heuristically, policymakers approach cybersecurity similarly, striving to maximize breadth and depth of impact against expenditure, but without a robust empirical body of evidence to back them. Such metrics would go a long way in helping prioritize the many different security controls recommended by both government and industry against their observed return on investment. There are some nascent efforts to carry out this analysis, including through CISA’s revitalized Cyber Insurance and Data Analysis Working Group,58 but they are primarily working with insurance claims data, which might not capture the full extent of costs given the above challenges in measurement and insurers’ focus on policyholder claims versus net costs  to claim holders (aside from the fact that they mainly have data on their customers rather than the ecosystem at large). Broadly, outcome data is the key to making attribute data about security practice implementation meaningful. It is the best way to point policymakers to both the best solutions and the right problems—for example, whether the harms of cybercrime results more from social engineering at scale or exploited vulnerabilities.

The second and more foundational application of complete outcome data is to give policymakers a macro-level picture of the size and nature of the cybersecurity challenge they face—and thus what scale of investment makes sense and what trends in success or failure at addressing cyber risk are worth pursuing. The first question that comes to mind when faced with net annual harms data is whether cybersecurity is improving or deteriorating. Interpreting outcome data is far from straightforward, and there are three broad approaches one might take, each with immediate policy consequences:

  1. Uncontrolled metrics
  2. Controlled metrics
  3. Catastrophic risks

Uncontrolled metrics: More is worse

Uncontrolled metrics refers to simply using total harms figures without further context. Regardless of which existing source one uses, annual tallies of cyber incidents and their costs seem to be increasing, implying that, far from getting better, the state of cybersecurity is on the decline year by year at a more-than-linear rate. This framing of outcome data can be observed on the cover image of Verizon’s 2023 Data Breach Investigations Report,59 raw estimates of annual total incident costs such as Neuberger’s figure referenced above, and the GAO’s suggestion that ONCD use aggregated ransomware incident and loss data to assess the efficacy of the National Cybersecurity Strategy: incidents are more common year after year, as are best estimates of harms.60 These are intuitive interpretations—more incidents causing more harm is bad—and, if the numbers are accurate, they do capture some objective truth about what occurs in the digital ecosystem. Such interpretations, however, are immature in comparison to other fields of empirical policymaking. Are harms growing per incident? Are there simply more incidents? Or are we getting better at observing and counting more of the incidents that occur?

Controlled metrics: More is relative

A controlled metrics interpretation argues that meaningful cybersecurity metrics must account for the ecosystem’s rapidly changing context, which uncontrolled metrics omit. Few other fields use uncontrolled metrics but instead account for changes in population or similar underlying variables. For example, public safety policy cares more about violent crime per capita than overall violent crime because a larger population in and of itself means more potential criminals and victims and therefore more crime in absolute terms. Similarly, the Federal Reserve cares more about the unemployment rate than raw unemployment counts. Parallel arguments could reasonably apply to cybersecurity—each passing day brings more potential cyber criminals, victims, and devices online as internet connectivity increases, and there are more dollars at stake in the digital ecosystem as more business grows intertwined with IT infrastructure. All else being equal, one could reasonably expect these trends to increase the overall number of cybersecurity incidents and losses year to year because, even if security remains constant, there are more people and dollars online. One 2015 study by Eric Jardine made such an argument and normalized cybercrime figures with data on the size of the internet and its userbase. In doing so, it found that most metrics improved year over year, or at least did not worsen.61 However, determining a reasonable denominator for cybersecurity is more challenging than in other fields where population is usually sufficient.62 Financial harms can befall individuals, but also abstract entities like businesses or larger constructs like national economies. It is most likely that a rigorous approach to analyzing harms data will use different denominators for different harms. For instance, the cost of individually targeted cyber fraud works well per capita, while business ransomware payment costs would be more reasonably adjusted by gross domestic product or a similar dollar figure. These control metrics also highlight well the continued importance of attribute measures. This paper does not argue that attribute metrics are irrelevant, but that on their own, they can mislead policymaking in eliding a key part of the complex system—its external impacts.

Catastrophic risk: More to come

A third interpretation of outcome data borrows from the risk management experience of the financial sector by considering the role of catastrophic events. If there are a sufficient number of extremely costly cyber incidents, interpreting time-series outcome data into the future becomes difficult, especially given the relative novelty of the field, which leaves analysts with a limited historical record to study.63 Similar to the economic growth preceding the Great Recession in 2008, years of improved outcomes might be interpreted as improved cybersecurity, but they might mean little if a significant catastrophe lies just around the corner. Unfortunately, without robust outcome data about past events, evaluating the possible severity, variance, and frequency of cyber catastrophes is challenging, particularly when potential harms might change suddenly with large shifts in geopolitical circumstance (e.g., the risks of cyber catastrophe might grow dramatically when two countries enter a formal war with each other).

One dataset sought to do just that by assembling a list of multi-firm cyber incidents estimated to have resulted in a loss of at least $800 million, inflation adjusted to 2023.64 The dataset counted twenty-five total catastrophic events, with the worst costing $66 billion, and the average event reaching $14.8 billion. The author concluded that cyber catastrophes are not as significant a risk as often made out based on this data and the observation that these costs are only fractions of the costs that natural disasters can incur. However, things might not be so simple. The cost estimates used are subject to the same measurement challenges mentioned above, which the author notes well: “Unfortunately, many estimates come from popular media sites and corporate blogs.”65

More specifically, the dataset omits the SolarWinds incident of 2019, for which one analysis estimates $100 billion in costs just for incident response across the thousands of victim organizations alone, not even accounting for the harms resulting from abuse of the information stolen during the intelligence gathering campaign, which for the reasons stated above is immensely difficult to quantify.66 There are also reasonably costly single-firm incidents such as the Equifax breach, omitted by methodology—direct costs to the firm topped $1.7 billion, not to mention the costs of whatever identity theft and fraud may have resulted.67

Other data from the IMF about the distribution of cyber incidents by cost shows that, even if cyber catastrophes are less costly than natural disasters, they do present similar irregularity, with most incidents being mild while a handful reach disastrous extremes.68

Another method for assessing whether an ecosystem is prone to catastrophic events looks for near misses—almost-incidents that, fully realized, would have been catastrophic and were avoided by chance rather than systematic prevention. In an article about interpreting outcome data, Geer describes how relatively trivial changes to a 2001 malware could have allowed it to block 911 emergency services across the United States, which would certainly qualify as a catastrophic event, and one with difficult-to-quantify psychological harms on top of loss of life.69 Moreover, given the rapid growth of the cyber ecosystem and its increasingly fundamental role in the functioning of all levels of society, Geer’s warning in the paper should temper claims that cyber catastrophes are not that significant: “this proof (that we escaped such an attack by dumb luck) puts to bed any implication that every day without such an attack makes such an attack less likely.”70 In other words, he argues that cyber catastrophes might not have been comparatively as extreme as financial crises or natural disasters, but only so far, and the potential for extreme incident grows as more real-world services rely on relatively homogenous digital systems. This interpretation of cyber metrics holds two key lessons. First, attribute measures can be extremely useful in highlighting the potential for future catastrophe. Just as measures of debt ratios, leveraged capital, liquidity reserves, and more can help analyze financial catastrophes, measures of concentrated dependency, cloud systems resilience, vulnerability patch time, and more can describe the risk posture of the digital ecosystem. Second, while outcome metrics should not be used in an attempt to predict future harms, they are still key to establishing historical record of cyber incidents and catastrophes and understanding the true scale of cyber harms. Again, outcome metrics should not supplant attribute metrics, but instead, at the macro scale, are key for policymakers trying to understand and manage cybersecurity risks and harms.

Starting construction: Two changes

The result of the many measurement challenges and shortfalls in cybersecurity is a set of fundamental unknowns for cybersecurity policymakers. At the ecosystem scale, the cybersecurity status quo remains unmeasured, as does the efficacy of security practices at reducing harms, while a plan to address those quantitative lapses does not yet exist. These obstacles go well beyond making policy optimization difficult. Moreover, as the fundamental question of the size of the cybersecurity problem goes unanswered, the gap in historical outcome data increases and unproven policy and investments grow more entrenched. These challenges should not, however, prompt paralysis. More measurement, even if imperfect, can improve the empirical toolkit of policymakers, and there is good reason to believe that some policies and security interventions, even if not empirically shown, have improved cybersecurity.

With all this in mind, the US government should use the abundant reporting requirements already in existence to begin assembling a robust cybersecurity metrics system comparable to the already established thirteen federal statistical agencies serving the fields of public economics, education, agriculture, public health, and more.71 Building such infrastructure and pulling meaningful analysis from the data it assembles will take time, but waiting only delays a fundamentally necessary process. Additionally, developing a new policy lens is as important as creating new policy mechanisms, and questions about measurable efficacy and return on investment should become commonplace in policy conversations. Below are two small recommendations focused on existing reporting processes and offices.

Counting harms

Given the importance of gathering outcome data both to understanding the cyber ecosystem and to making useful already-gathered attribute data, existing reporting requirements should incorporate impact estimates more rigorously. CISA’s final implementation of CIRCIA should include explicit provisions requiring at least one update to incident reports that includes a revised estimate of incident impact and notes on the methodology used to reach that estimate. This information will help CISA weight incidents by their impact and provide a large inflow of outcome data from all critical infrastructure sectors. Similarly, the SEC should update its guidance on cyber incident reporting to include similar requirements—Item 1.05 reports in 8-K filings should be updated at least once with impact estimates from the reporting company in a similar format as above and updated when the reporting entity arrives at a final estimate. Given Item 1.05 reports only apply to material cyber incidents, they already require the information leading to the determination of materiality, which already should assess incident impact, although there is ongoing debate about the difference between a material event and an event with material impact.72 Thus, not only should this data be generated already by the reporting company, but it is precisely the kind of information relevant to the shareholders that the item is designed to inform.

Like CIRCIA and SEC filings, all federal reporting requirements should include provisions mandating that outcome metrics and information be updated as an incident unfolds and an affected entity revises its estimates. Altogether, with tweaks to existing or forthcoming reporting requirements, the federal government can gather incident outcome data from publicly traded companies, critical infrastructure entities, DOD contractors, FCEB agencies, and others, creating a significant sample of high-quality outcome data without the need for new reporting regimes.

One office to count them all

Given the potential volume of outcome data from a wide variety of reporting sources and regulations, meaningful interpretation of that information requires that it flow to one entity, similar to how the Bureau of Labor Statistics collates price data from hundreds of goods and services in calculating the Consumer Price Index.73 Fortunately, the US Department of Homeland Security’s Office of Homeland Security Statistics (OHSS) is already on a course to assume this central role, with plans to report on cybersecurity incidents shared its way as a result of reforms to FISMA in 2025. This office should be enlarged and report annually on cybersecurity outcomes based not just on FISMA, but the myriad reporting systems through federal and state government. In collaboration with CISA’s Office of the Chief Economist, OHSS should focus on:

  • Developing a process for aggregating reports from disparate requirement systems with different timelines and data requirements
  • Anonymized reporting on outcome data sourced from reporting systems that do not publicly reveal individual incidents, such as CIRCIA and FISMA for FCEB branches
  • Researching and developing approaches to the gathering, analysis, and interpretation of cybersecurity harm data
  • Recommending consistent scoping definitions for cybersecurity incidents, cyber-relevant harms, and similar components of the ecosystem

Conclusion

Cybersecurity policy has matured significantly in recent years, but as steady as the flow of executive orders, legislation, strategy, and guidance documents has been, cyberattacks have continued with shocking consistency and significant impact. With the previous administration witness to the aftermath of the SolarWinds campaign, Colonial Pipeline, the United Healthcare hack, two Microsoft Exchange compromises, Volt Typhoon, and now Salt Typhoon—to name only a few—the question, “Are we getting better at cybersecurity?” is far from an academic exercise in empiricism.

The state of metrics for cybersecurity policy is insufficient to meet two core functions today: to assess the status quo of the cybersecurity ecosystem at the macro level, and to provide insight into the relative efficacy of different security controls, practices, and requirements at the micro level. Without these dual capacities, cybersecurity policymakers are left with intuition and risk assessments to guide them. These are necessary but insufficient tools for approaching the monumental task of improving cybersecurity, which will require measuring the harms caused by cyber insecurity as key outcome metrics, and understanding those harms as the product of a complex, dynamic system is critical to meaningfully interpreting them. Unsolved challenges to interpreting outcome data, assuming its successful measurement, remain. Knowing how much harm cybersecurity incidents have caused over a given timeframe is a start toward understanding trends in improvement, but nuanced questions about what “better” and “worse” look like, and what the data can and cannot reveal about the future still persist. In the near term, the need for this data to be systematically gathered at all and for continued progress toward interpreting it demand consistently reported outcome measures and some degree of centralization within the federal government of that information. Those embarked on improving cybersecurity can no longer afford to guess as to the best remedies for insecurity and hope that they work once implemented—policymakers will benefit immensely from measuring the harms caused by cyber incidents to see how well their remedies have worked, too.

Acknowledgments

The author would like to thank the many contributors to this piece, including peer reviewers Sara Ann Bracket, Alex Gantman, Stefan Savage, Emma Schroeder, Nikita Shah, and Adam Shostack. Thank you also to Amelie Chushko, Nancy Messieh, Donald Partyka, and Samia Yakub for their work editing, designing, and producing this report.

About the author

Our work

The Atlantic Council’s Cyber Statecraft Initiative, part of the Atlantic Council Technology Programs, works at the nexus of geopolitics and cybersecurity to craft strategies to help shape the conduct of statecraft and to better inform and secure users of technology.

1    “National Cybersecurity Strategy,” The White House, March 1, 2023, https://bidenwhitehouse.archives.gov/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/National-Cybersecurity-Strategy-2023.pdf.
2    “Secure by Design: Shifting the Balance of Cybersecurity Risk,” Cybersecurity and Infrastructure Security Agency, October 25, 2023, https://www.cisa.gov/sites/default/files/2023-10/SecureByDesign_1025_508c.pdf; “Bicameral, Bipartisan Leaders Introduce Legislation to Strengthen Federal Cybersecurity,” US Senate Committee on Homeland Security and Governmental Affairs, July 12, 2023, https://www.hsgac.senate.gov/media/dems/bicameral-bipartisan-leaders-introduce-legislation-to-strengthen-federal-cybersecurity/.
3    Katherine Golden, “National Cyber Director Chris Inglis: We Need to Become a ‘Harder Target’ for Our Adversaries,” New Atlanticist, August 4, 2021, https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/blogs/new-atlanticist/national-cyber-director-chris-inglis-we-need-to-become-a-harder-target-for-our-adversaries/.
4    Dan Geer, “Measuring Security,” (Metricon 1.0, Vancouver, British Columbia, Canada, August 1, 2006), http://all.net/Metricon/measuringsecurity.tutorial.pdf; “Cost of a Cyber Incident: Systematic Review and Cross-Validation,” Cybersecurity and Infrastructure Security Agency, October 26, 2020, https://www.cisa.gov/sites/default/files/publications/CISA-OCE_Cost_of_Cyber_Incidents_Study-FINAL_508.pdf;  “Cross-Sector Cybersecurity Performance Goals (March 2023 Update)” Cybersecurity and Infrastructure Security Agency, March 2023, https://www.cisa.gov/sites/default/files/2023-03/CISA_CPG_REPORT_v1.0.1_FINAL.pdf.
5    Geer, “Measuring Security.”
6    Dan Geer, Kevin Soo Hoo, and Andrew Jaquith, “Information Security: Why the Future Belongs to the Quants,” IEEE Security & Privacy 1, no. 4 (July-August 2003): 24–32, https://doi.org/10.1109/MSECP.2003.1219053.
7    “Report to Congressional Addressees – Cybersecurity: National Cyber Director Needs to Take Additional Actions to Implement an Effective Strategy,” US Government Accountability Office, February 1, 2024, https://www.gao.gov/assets/d24106916.pdf.
8    “Digital Press Briefing with Anne Neuberger, Deputy National Security Advisor for Cyber and Emerging Technologies,” US Department of State (transcript), October 18, 2023, https://2021-2025.state.gov/digital-press-briefing-with-anne-neuberger-deputy-national-security-advisor-for-cyber-and-emerging-technologies/.
9    “National Cybersecurity Strategy,” The White House.
10    “National Cybersecurity Strategy Implementation Plan,” The White House, July 13, 2023, https://bidenwhitehouse.archives.gov/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/National-Cybersecurity-Strategy-Implementation-Plan-WH.gov_.pdf.
11    “Cybersecurity: National Cyber Director Needs to Take Additional Actions.”
12    “Cost of a Cyber Incident.”
13    “Federal Bureau of Investigation Internet Crime Report 2023,” Federal Bureau of Investigation Internet Crime Complaint Center, April 4, 2024, https://www.ic3.gov/AnnualReport/Reports/2023_IC3Report.pdf.
14    “Cyber Incident Reporting for Critical Infrastructure Act of 2022 (CIRCIA),” Cybersecurity and Infrastructure Security Agency, https://www.cisa.gov/topics/cyber-threats-and-advisories/information-sharing/cyber-incident-reporting-critical-infrastructure-act-2022-circia.
15    Cybersecurity Disclosure, US Securities and Exchange Commission (statement of Erik Gerding, Director of SEC’s Division of Corporation Finance), December 14, 2023, https://www.sec.gov/newsroom/speeches-statements/gerding-cybersecurity-disclosure-20231214.
16    “Federal Bureau of Investigation Internet Crime Report 2023;” “Cybersecurity: National Cyber Director Needs to Take Additional Actions.”
17    Olav Bjerkholt, “On the Founding of the Econometric Society,” Journal of the History of Economic Thought 39 (March 6, 2017): 175–98, https://doi.org/10.1017/S105383721600002X.
18    Ross Anderson, “Why Information Security Is Hard – An Economic Perspective,” Keynote remarks, Seventeenth Annual Computer Security Applications Conference, New Orleans, LA, 2001, 358–65, https://doi.org/10.1109/ACSAC.2001.991552.
19    Jason Healey, “What the White House Should Do Next for Cyber Regulation,” Dark Reading, October 7, 2024, https://www.darkreading.com/vulnerabilities-threats/what-white-house-next-cyber-regulation; “Request for Information on Cyber Regulatory Harmonization; Request for Information: Opportunities for and Obstacles To Harmonizing Cybersecurity Regulations,” Office of the National Cyber Director, August 16, 2023, https://www.federalregister.gov/documents/2023/08/16/2023-17424/request-for-information-on-cyber-regulatory-harmonization-request-for-information-opportunities-for.
20    Daniel W. Woods and Sezaneh Seymour, “Evidence-Based Cybersecurity Policy? A Meta-Review of Security Control Effectiveness,” Journal of Cyber Policy 8, no. 3 (April 7, 2024): 365–83, https://doi.org/10.1080/23738871.2024.2335461.
21    “The New NIST Guidelines: We Had It All Wrong Before,” Risk Control Strategies, January 8, 2018, https://www.riskcontrolstrategies.com/2018/01/08/new-nist-guidelines-wrong/.
22    The precise meaning of “reduce” will be discussed later on.
23    “National Cybersecurity Strategy,” The White House.
24    “US and UK Disrupt LockBit Ransomware Variant,” US Department of Justice, February 20, 2024, https://www.justice.gov/archives/opa/pr/us-and-uk-disrupt-lockbit-ransomware-variant.
25    Matt Kapko, “Microsoft Reveals Ransomware Attacks against Its Customers Nearly Tripled Last Year,” Cybersecurity Dive, October 16, 2024, https://www.cybersecuritydive.com/news/microsoft-customers-ransomware-attacks-triple/730011/.
26    Alex Gantman, “NDSS 2022 Keynote – Measuring Security Outcomes,” April 27, 2022, by NDSS Symposium, YouTube, https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=qGD93mJ2ZAU.
27    Stewart Scott, “Counting the Costs in Cybersecurity,” Lawfare, October 9, 2024, https://www.lawfaremedia.org/article/counting-the-costs-in-cybersecurity.
28    “Cybersecurity: National Cyber Director Needs to Take Additional Actions.”
29    Woods and Seymour, “Evidence-Based Cybersecurity Policy?”
30    With enough unsecured accounts still accessible, attackers are able to avoid MFA protections entirely.
31    While these are not the only challenges that such measures face, they are the most definitional ones. For example, measures of known vulnerability struggle to account for unknown vulnerabilities or the potential for detected vulnerabilities to in reality be harmless given their context.
32    David Weston, “The Time Is Now – Practical Mem Safety,” Slide presentation, Tectonics 2023, San Francisco, CA, November 2, 2023), https://github.com/dwizzzle/Presentations/blob/master/david_weston-isrg_tectonics_keynote.pdf.  
33    There is often understandable distaste at lumping in physical harm with damages measured in dollars, but fortunately few deaths have ever resulted directly from cyberattacks. Moreover, a combined approach of tallying fatalities, financial damage, and injuries is how the impact of natural disasters is already measured. For more, see “How Can We Measure the Impact of Natural Disasters?,” World Economic Forum, March 16, 2015, https://www.weforum.org/stories/2015/03/how-can-we-measure-the-impact-of-natural-disasters/.
34    Scott, “Counting the Costs in Cybersecurity.”
35    Wasted in the sense that such efforts do not answer the macro question, “How secure are we?” These are useful measures in other respects, as enumerated below.
36    “Cybercrime To Cost The World $9.5 Trillion USD Annually In 2024,” eSentire, https://www.esentire.com/web-native-pages/cybercrime-to-cost-the-world-9-5-trillion-usd-annually-in-2024; Steve Morgan, “Cybercrime To Cost The World $10.5 Trillion Annually By 2025,” Cybercrime Magazine, November 13, 2020, https://cybersecurityventures.com/cybercrime-damages-6-trillion-by-2021/; “Unexpectedly, the Cost of Big Cyber-Attacks Is Falling,” The Economist, May 17, 2024, https://www.economist.com/graphic-detail/2024/05/17/unexpectedly-the-cost-of-big-cyber-attacks-is-falling.
37    At the time of writing, the author was unable to find any source that revised predictive estimates up or down based on new policies, technologies, or geopolitical circumstance.
38    “The Last Mile: Financial Vulnerabilities and Risks,” International Monetary Fund, April 2024, https://www.imf.org/en/Publications/GFSR/Issues/2024/04/16/global-financial-stability-report-april-2024.
39    “Federal Bureau of Investigation Internet Crime Report 2023.”
40    “Estimated cost of cybercrime worldwide 2018-2029,” Statista, https://www.statista.com/forecasts/1280009/cost-cybercrime-worldwide.
41    Morgan, “Cybercrime To Cost The World $10.5 Trillion;” Paul Bischoff, “Cybercrime Victims Lose an Estimated $714 Billion Annually,” Comparitech, December 5, 2023, https://www.comparitech.com/blog/vpn-privacy/cybercrime-cost/.
42    Ross Anderson et al., “Measuring the Changing Cost of Cybercrime,” The 18th Annual Workshop on the Economics of Information Security, Boston, MA, June 3, 2019, https://doi.org/10.17863/CAM.41598.
43    “Cybersecurity Incident Tracker,” Board Cybersecurity, last updated March 3, 2025., https://www.board-cybersecurity.com/incidents/tracker/.
44    “Cyber Incident Reporting for Critical Infrastructure Act (CIRCIA) Reporting Requirements,” Department of Homeland Security Cybersecurity and Infrastructure Security Agency,, April 4, 2024, https://www.federalregister.gov/documents/2024/04/04/2024-06526/cyber-incident-reporting-for-critical-infrastructure-act-circia-reporting-requirements.
45    “Federal Information Security Modernization Act,” Cybersecurity and Infrastructure Security Agency, https://www.cisa.gov/topics/cyber-threats-and-advisories/federal-information-security-modernization-act.
46    Richard J. Andreano, Jr., “FHA Requiring Reporting of Significant Cybersecurity Incidents,” Consumer Finance Monitor, May 24, 2024, https://www.consumerfinancemonitor.com/2024/05/24/fha-requiring-reporting-of-significant-cybersecurity-incidents/.
47    “FTC Safeguards Rule: What Your Business Needs to Know,” Federal Trade Commission, last updated December 2024, https://www.ftc.gov/business-guidance/resources/ftc-safeguards-rule-what-your-business-needs-know.
48    “Data Breach Reporting Requirements,” Federal Communications Commission, February 12, 2024, https://www.federalregister.gov/documents/2024/02/12/2024-01667/data-breach-reporting-requirements.
49    “Defense Industrial Base (DIB) Cybersecurity Portal – Cyber Incident Reporting,” Defense Industrial Base (DIB) Cybersecurity Portal, https://dibnet.dod.mil/dibnet/#reporting-reporting-2.
50    “Submitting Notice of a Breach to the Secretary,” US Department of Health and Human Services, last reviewed February 27, 2023, https://www.hhs.gov/hipaa/for-professionals/breach-notification/breach-reporting/index.html.
51    “State Data Breach Notification Chart,” IAPP, March 2021, https://iapp.org/resources/article/state-data-breach-notification-chart/.
52    Seema Sangari, Eric Dallal, and Michael Whitman, “Modeling Under-Reporting in Cyber Incidents,” Risks 10, no. 11 (October 22, 2022): 200, https://doi.org/10.3390/risks10110200.
53    Dan Geer, “Prediction and The Future of Cybersecurity,” Remarks, UNC Charlotte Cybersecurity Symposium Charlotte, NC, October 5, 2016, http://geer.tinho.net/geer.uncc.5×16.txt.
54    Trey Herr et al., Broken Trust: Lessons from Sunburst, Atlantic Council, March 29, 2021, https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/in-depth-research-reports/report/broken-trust-lessons-from-sunburst/.
55    “Crowdstrike’s Impact on the Fortune 500: An Impact Analysis,” Parametrix, 2024, https://www.parametrixinsurance.com/crowdstrike-outage-impact-on-the-fortune-500.
56    “Delta Airlines, Inc. Form 8-K Report on August 8, 2024,” US Security and Exchange Commission, August 8, 2024, https://www.sec.gov/Archives/edgar/data/27904/000168316824005369/delta_8k.htm. It is alternatively possible that Delta systems were simply more severely impacted that other airlines.
57    “Cost of a Cyber Incident.”
58    Nitin Natarajan, “Cybersecurity Insurance and Data Analysis Working Group Re-Envisioned to Help Drive Down Cyber Risk,” Cybersecurity and Infrastructure Security Agency (blog), November 20, 2023, https://www.cisa.gov/news-events/news/cybersecurity-insurance-and-data-analysis-working-group-re-envisioned-help-drive-down-cyber-risk.
59    “2023 Data Breach Investigations Report,” Verizon, June 2023, https://www.verizon.com/business/resources/T227/reports/2023-data-breach-investigations-report-dbir.pdf.  
60    “Cybersecurity: National Cyber Director Needs to Take Additional Actions.”
61    Eric Jardine, “Global Cyberspace Is Safer than You Think: Real Trends in Cybercrime,” Global Commission on Internet Governance, revised October 16, 2015, https://www.cigionline.org/publications/global-cyberspace-safer-you-think-real-trends-cybercrime/.  
62    “Technical Report 22-02: Vital Statistics in Cyber Public Health,” CyberGreen Institute, March 2022, https://cybergreen.net/wp-content/uploads/2022/04/Technical-report-22-02-Vital-Statistics-in-Cyber-Public-Health-FINAL.pdf.
63    Dan Geer, “For Good Measure: The Denominator,” USENIX ;login: 40, no. 5 (October 2015), https://www.usenix.org/publications/login/oct15/geer.
64    Tom Johansmeyer, “Recent Cyber Catastrophes Show an Intensifying Trend – but They Are Manageable,” The Loop, September 25, 2024, https://theloop.ecpr.eu/recent-cyber-catastrophes-show-an-intensifying-trend-but-they-are-manageable/.
65    Tom Johansmeyer, “Surprising Stats: The Worst Economic Losses from Cyber Catastrophes,” The Loop, March 12, 2024, https://theloop.ecpr.eu/surprising-stats-the-worst-economic-losses-from-cyber-catastrophes/.
66    Gopal Ratnam, “Cleaning up SolarWinds Hack May Cost as Much as $100 Billion,” Roll Call, January 11, 2021, https://rollcall.com/2021/01/11/cleaning-up-solarwinds-hack-may-cost-as-much-as-100-billion/.  
67    Ben Lane, “Equifax Expects to Pay out Another $100 Million for Data Breach,” HousingWire, February 14, 2020, https://www.housingwire.com/articles/equifax-expects-to-pay-out-another-100-million-for-data-breach/.
68    “The Last Mile: Financial Vulnerabilities and Risks,” International Monetary Fund.
69    Geer, “For Good Measure: The Denominator.”
70    Geer, “For Good Measure: The Denominator.”
71    “Organization of the Federal Statistical System,” in Principles and Practices for a Federal Statistical Agency: Sixth Edition, ed. Constance F. Citro (Washington, DC: National Academies Press, 2017), https://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/books/NBK447392/.
72    Thomas Kim, letter to the Securities and Exchange Commission Division of Corporate Finance, “AT&T Inc. Form 8-K Filed July 12, 2024 File No. 001-08610,” July 31, 2024, https://www.sec.gov/Archives/edgar/data/732717/000119312524190323/filename1.htm.
73    “Consumer Price Index Frequently Asked Questions,” US Bureau of Labor Statistics, December 18, 2024, https://www.bls.gov/cpi/questions-and-answers.htm.  

The post Counting the costs: A cybersecurity metrics framework for policy appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>
Saudi-Israeli normalization is still possible—if the United States plays it smart https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/in-depth-research-reports/issue-brief/saudi-israeli-normalization-is-still-possible-if-the-united-states-plays-it-smart/ Fri, 02 May 2025 13:00:00 +0000 https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/?p=844373 Saudi-Israeli normalization remains a potential game changer in Middle East geopolitics. It could reshape alliances, enhance security, and spur economic growth. But progress hinges on US diplomacy, Palestinian inclusion, and Saudi leadership.

The post Saudi-Israeli normalization is still possible—if the United States plays it smart appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>
The prospect of Saudi-Israeli normalization has captured the world’s attention as a potential game changer in Middle East geopolitics. The normalization process, however, is neither simple nor inevitable. It reflects a complex web of strategic objectives, domestic political considerations, and regional tensions. As the Donald Trump administration and regional actors ponder their approaches to this issue, it is worth analyzing the factors driving normalization, the dynamics shaping it, and its broader implications for the region.

The strategic case for normalization

At its core, Saudi-Israeli normalization offers the potential to reshape the region’s geopolitical landscape around a new security architecture. Cooperation between two of the Middle East’s most capable military powers could deter Iran’s malign activities, weaken its proxy networks, and secure strategic hotspots like Yemen and Lebanon. It would also enhance US influence by expanding defense cooperation, sharing intelligence, and encouraging more coordinated regional policies. Additionally, it would strengthen US partnerships with Israel and Saudi Arabia, helping to counter China’s expanding regional influence while allowing for a reduced direct presence. Connecting the “startup nation” with Saudi Arabia’s vast stores of capital would further foster innovation, enhance trade, and maximize comparative advantages, all while creating opportunities for other Arab states to join the fold.

At its core, Saudi-Israeli normalization offers the potential to reshape the region’s geopolitical landscape around a new security architecture.

Politically, normalization would transform dynamics in the Middle East, offering a rare chance to address deep-rooted historical grievances. For Israel, Saudi recognition would represent the ultimate reversal of the 1967 Khartoum Resolution’s “three nos” (no peace, no recognition, no negotiations), signaling acceptance of Jewish peoplehood and legitimacy in the region by one of the region’s most prominent Arab-Muslim actors and the custodian of Islam’s holiest sites. For Saudi Arabia, normalization would provide a pathway to resolve religious and national tensions with the Jewish state, and would help turn the region away from historical grievances and toward peace and prosperity. Beyond bilateral relations, such a breakthrough would likely catalyze broader Israeli-Arab and Israeli-Muslim reconciliation, potentially healing wounds that have defined regional politics for generations.

Arab-Israeli relations were defined by decades of hostility until a dramatic turn of events saw Israel conclude a peace treaty with Egypt in the late 1970s. More than a decade later, Israel acquiesced to a US-driven regional dialogue, embarked on a robust transformative peace process with the Palestinians, and secured a peace treaty with Jordan. Although conflict-ending agreements with Syria and the Palestinians remained beyond reach, they felt imminent at key moments in 2000 and in 2008.1 Violent escalations—including the second intifada, Hamas’s rise to prominence in Gaza and in Palestinian politics, and the Syrian Civil War—eroded the prospects of peace until 2020, when the Abraham Accords codified Israel’s warming relations with the United Arab Emirates (UAE), Bahrain, Morocco, and Sudan. The United States has since sought to follow the Abraham Accords with Israeli-Saudi normalization, although this agreement remains elusive.

From rejection to rapprochement

Attempts at Saudi-Israeli normalization efforts trace back to the Arab Peace Initiative (API) of 2002. Conceptualized during the height of the second intifada and amid a deadlock in the Israeli-Palestinian peace process, the ideas introduced by then Crown Prince Abdullah were later revised and codified by the Arab League. The API outlined a formula for full Arab-Israeli peace and normalization, effectively contingent on the realization of an Israeli-Palestinian two-state solution. The API also conditioned normalization on Israeli withdrawal from the Syrian Golan Heights, a condition since rendered largely moot by the Syrian Civil War and the implosion of the Syrian state.

While groundbreaking in its ambition to normalize relations between Israel and the Arab world, the API faced significant challenges that hindered its viability and reception. One major issue was its rigid “take it or leave it” approach, which Israelis perceived as leaving little room for negotiation or adaptation to evolving realities. The API’s reference to United Nations General Assembly Resolution 194, which focuses on refugee return, posed another major challenge, as Israel saw this condition as a threat to its demographic stability and national security. Additionally, the initiative offered unclear benefits for Israel, requiring significant upfront concessions—for instance, a full withdrawal to the 1967 lines, including East Jerusalem—without concrete assurances or clearly defined rewards until the very end of the process. Further complicating these issues was the API’s ineffective communication strategy toward the Israeli public, which failed to highlight potential benefits or address widespread skepticism. Together, these factors limited the initiative’s effectiveness, and the continued violence of the second intifada ultimately overwhelmed whatever initial momentum it had.

Despite this, the prospect of regional normalization—particularly with Saudi Arabia—as a reward for progress on the Palestinian issue became an increasingly prominent feature of subsequent Israeli-Palestinian peace efforts. This was evident during the 2007–2008 negotiations between Israeli Prime Minister Ehud Olmert and Palestine Liberation Organization (PLO) Chairman Mahmoud Abbas, which became known as the “Annapolis Process.” The initial conference drew representatives from more than forty stakeholders, including key Arab states, with Saudi Arabia notably among them. Later, in the context of US Secretary of State John Kerry’s 2013–2014 initiative, an Arab ministerial delegation endorsed the concept of land swaps between Israel and a future Palestinian state—marking a significant and much-needed revision to the original API. This gesture symbolized a flexibility that had been absent in the initiative’s early years. 

Finally, the 2020 Abraham Accords demonstrated that Arab-Israeli normalization is not only achievable but can occur independently of significant progress on the Israeli-Palestinian conflict—a notion that once seemed politically unthinkable. These agreements marked a historic departure from the long-held Arab consensus—exemplified in the API—that normalization with Israel must be contingent upon a comprehensive resolution to the Palestinian issue. By establishing formal ties between Israel and the UAE, Bahrain, Morocco, and Sudan, the Abraham Accords shattered decades of diplomatic inertia and redefined regional priorities. The agreements highlighted the pragmatic calculus driving modern Middle Eastern politics, in which shared economic opportunities, technological collaboration, and collective security—particularly against the common threat of Iran—took precedence over long-standing ideological commitments. This precedent of regional integration, effectively untethered from Israeli-Palestinian progress, has emboldened proponents of Saudi-Israeli normalization who view it as a natural extension of this shifting paradigm.

The Abraham Accords demonstrated that Arab-Israeli normalization is not only achievable but can occur independently of significant progress on the Israeli-Palestinian conflict—a notion that once seemed politically unthinkable.

The path to normalization before October 7

During the spring and summer of 2023, Saudi-Israeli normalization became a key piece within an even broader set of US strategic priorities as officials began to explore a US-Saudi security pact. Starting in 2022, the Joe Biden administration had renewed its engagement with Saudi leaders to address key concerns, including Russia’s war in Ukraine, China’s growing influence in the Gulf, regional security, global oil prices, and energy transition challenges. This shift reflected the administration’s intent to maintain Saudi Arabia’s reliance on the United States as its primary strategic partner, even as the kingdom explored closer ties with China and Russia. For Washington, preserving this security relationship offered significant strategic advantages: continued military basing rights and force projection capabilities in a critical region; leverage over global oil markets and prices; counterterrorism cooperation; a bulwark against Iranian regional ambitions; and, crucially, a means to limit Chinese and Russian influence in a strategically vital part of the world.

From Riyadh’s point of view, a strategic alliance with the United States would serve as the foundation on which it could base its grand economic transformation. The kingdom sought a US-Saudi defense pact, ideally a formal defense treaty (providing security guarantees that would deter regional threats, particularly from Iran); assistance in developing a civilian nuclear program, including US approval for uranium-enrichment capabilities on Saudi soil, which the kingdom framed as essential for its long-term energy and technological development; and eased restrictions on US arms sales, ensuring continued access to advanced military technology.

To achieve this pact, domestic US politics necessitated Saudi-Israeli normalization. A security treaty between the United States and Saudi Arabia requires approval by two-thirds of the Senate, a daunting bipartisan benchmark in an age of extreme polarization. The support of Republican senators hinged on a meaningful gain for Israel, propelling the Jewish state to engage its allies on the Republican side in support of the deal.2 On the other side, a critical mass of Democrats—wary of entering a defense pact with what they saw as an unreliable ally, and holding lukewarm views toward Israel’s leadership and policies—demanded a significant Palestinian component as a condition for their support.3

Meanwhile, Abbas engaged the Saudis in full force. Determined not to repeat the mistake of breaking ranks with the UAE leading up to and following the Abraham Accords, Abbas attempted to close ranks with Saudi Arabia, maximizing the probability that the kingdom would leverage normalization for Palestinian gains. In what became a knotty trilateral US-Saudi-Israeli negotiation, the Palestinian issue remained the proverbial elephant in the room. Key US and Saudi actors insisted on a symbolic acknowledgment of an eventual Palestinian state (in the context of a two-state solution) and on practical steps on the ground—reversing annexation trends in the West Bank and stabilizing Jerusalem and its sensitive holy sites.4 It is hard to pinpoint what magnitude of a Palestinian component Saudi Arabia’s de facto leader, Crown Prince Mohammed bin Salman, aimed for during the summer of 2023. Reportedly, he was less committed to the Palestinian cause and was sensitive to the perceived price his country paid for conditioning normalization on a full two-state solution.5

But whether the Saudi crown prince merely pushed Palestinian statehood toward a less-defined point in the future or focused instead on improving Palestinian lives within the status quo, it is clear that both US and Saudi negotiators envisioned a more modest Palestinian component than the one proposed in the API, which conditioned normalization on the creation of a Palestinian state. This change reflected an overall de-prioritization of the Palestinian issue relative to its historic centrality in Arab goals and broader geoeconomic and security concerns—and it highlighted the overall disillusionment of key international actors with the potential for a significant breakthrough and with the makeup and behavior of the Palestinian leadership.

Recalculating priorities after the attack

The vicious October 7, 2023, Hamas terrorist attack and the subsequent war in Gaza fundamentally reshaped the normalization calculus. The conflict’s human toll and geopolitical consequences forced the United States and Saudi Arabia to reevaluate their priorities, shifting the Palestinian question from an afterthought to an urgent international priority. The prospect of further normalization efforts diminished significantly while Gaza burned and violence spilled into neighboring countries. The war highlighted the volatility of the Israeli-Palestinian arena, the cost of neglect and inaction, and the vulnerabilities of Arab states with existing, or potential, peace agreements with Israel.

The administration should remain fully cognizant of the potential costs associated with a destabilized Palestinian arena and prevent destructive unilateral steps.

Gaza’s day after quickly became central to regional geopolitics, with the short-term need for post-conflict stabilization and long-term Palestinian statehood aspirations becoming inextricably linked. During the first half of 2024, the United States engaged an Arab contact group, sometimes referred to as the group of six—Saudi Arabia, the UAE, Qatar, Egypt, Jordan, and the Palestinian Authority—in an attempt to consolidate a plan for an end to the war and for day after arrangements within a broader peace process, including regional normalization and integration.6

Arab priorities remained consistent and clear throughout: a swift end to the war, the stabilization of Gaza via transitional measures but ultimately under a reformed Palestinian Authority, and tangible progress toward two states.7 Only such meaningful steps could provide regional contributions to Gaza stabilization and normalization with legitimacy and durability.

Israel’s understandable focus on Gaza’s demilitarization and deradicalization was undermined by a systemic overestimation of regional willingness to support Gaza stabilization without addressing core Palestinian issues, including national self-determination. The Israeli government rejected any Palestinian Authority role in post-conflict governance and dismissed the two-state solution, even as a distant horizon. Widespread hostility toward Palestinians, intensified by Palestinian reactions to the October 7 attack, became deeply ingrained in mainstream Israeli constituencies, further widening the gap between Israel’s position and international expectations.

This created a strategic deadlock. While Israel sidelined—and, at times, actively undermined—Palestinian institutions and accelerated its annexation of the West Bank, the international community insisted on a two-state framework with Palestinian Authority involvement in Gaza.

Against this backdrop, Mohammed bin Salman insisted on a clear pathway toward a Palestinian state as a precondition for normalization. This stance reflected both pragmatic and strategic considerations for the kingdom. Domestically, normalization without tangible progress on Palestinian rights would have risked both religious legitimacy challenges and popular backlash from constituencies fully aware of the devastation in Gaza. Regionally, the Saudi leadership remained mindful of its role as an Arab and Muslim leader and guardian of the holy sites—a position that carried expectations of responsibility for the plight of the Palestinians.8

As the war dragged on, and especially when its commitment to the Palestinian cause was called into question, Saudi Arabia steadily hardened its public position. By early 2025, the kingdom maintained a firm stance against normalizing relations with Israel in the absence of Palestinian statehood, swiftly refuting Trump’s implication that Saudi Arabia had relaxed its position.9 In a public statement, the crown prince “clearly and unequivocally reaffirmed . . . that Saudi Arabia will continue its relentless efforts to establish an independent Palestinian state with East Jerusalem as its capital, and will not establish diplomatic relations with Israel without that.”10 Despite speculation that Saudi officials might show more flexibility in private discussions once the war concludes, the kingdom has so far remained unwavering in its position across US administrations. Some analysts have suggested that the crown prince maintained a dual-track approach—public firmness on Palestinian statehood while preserving space for eventual flexibility on timing and implementation. However, as regional attention increasingly focused on the humanitarian crisis in Gaza, Saudi Arabia has effectively slowed—if not entirely frozen—normalization efforts that had gained momentum before October 7.

Whether the Trump administration can reshape these dynamics to revive normalization prospects remains uncertain.

Charting the course: Recommendations for US policy

As a second Trump administration consolidates its Middle East strategy, it faces a unique opportunity to shape the future of Saudi-Israeli normalization. Success will require a carefully calibrated approach that balances ambition with realism. The administration could take the following steps: 

  • Establish political dialogues—both formal and informal—to increase understanding between decision-makers. By facilitating structured dialogues that illuminate each party’s fundamental worldviews, protected values, and core interests, the administration could help all sides recognize where genuine incompatibilities exist, rather than where positions stem from misperceptions or incomplete information. Such exchanges would allow Saudi, Israeli, and US officials to develop more accurate conceptual models of their counterparts’ decision-making frameworks, building understanding and empathy without requiring immediate concessions. This foundational work, conducted away from the pressures of active negotiations, would create a more fertile environment for future normalization efforts by preemptively addressing misconceptions that have historically derailed progress.
  • Develop a clear Palestinian component of Israeli-Saudi normalization, centered around an updated interim framework for the Palestinian arena that draws on elements of Trump’s 2020 Peace to Prosperity plan. The administration could use the early part of its term to develop a Palestinian component of Saudi-Israeli normalization. Given the unlikelihood of a final status agreement in the near term, Israeli opposition to Palestinian statehood, and the Palestinian Authority’s capacity challenges, focusing on an updated interim framework for the Palestinian arena would be key to stabilizing post-conflict Gaza—and to changing dynamics in the West Bank away from unilateral annexation. Parts of Trump’s 2020 Peace to Prosperity plan could provide a useful transformative framework for the necessary reforms and the capacity building that the Palestinians must undertake, as well as for the territorial shaping of the new interim framework, and for dealing with contentious issues such as settlements and Jerusalem. In any case, the administration should remain fully cognizant of the potential costs associated with a destabilized Palestinian arena and prevent destructive unilateral steps.
  • Leverage normalization to support progress and transform the Palestinian arena. The administration could develop a gradual roadmap for Israeli-Saudi normalization, strategically leveraging Saudi political, financial, and technical resources to stabilize and transform the Palestinian arena. Such a roadmap could outline clear diplomatic and operational milestones, ensuring measurable progress while securing regional buy-in. Saudi involvement can play a pivotal role in stabilizing post-conflict Gaza and strengthening governance in the West Bank by advancing Palestinian Authority reforms, capacity building, economic development, and security coordination. Additionally, it could help shift the Palestinian narrative toward greater acceptance of Israel, while mobilizing the Israeli public and political support for policies that enhance Palestinian territorial contiguity and long-term viability.
  • Support public diplomacy around inclusive narratives. Normalization efforts should actively integrate Jewish, Palestinian, and Saudi national and religious narratives, emphasizing, where relevant, shared heritage and mutual attachment to the land. By framing the process as a partnership rooted in respect for all sides’ history, identity, and aspirations, this approach can foster deeper trust and legitimacy. The Abraham Accords, which highlighted commonalities across cultures and faiths, and Biden’s 2022 speech in Bethlehem, which acknowledged the deep connection of both peoples to the land, helped bridge divides between the sides. Practical steps might include public initiatives, such as joint cultural and religious events, education programs that teach mutual histories, and collaborative interfaith dialogues. At times, containing disagreements would be the operational and diplomatic objective of this effort. But generally speaking, highlighting shared values and addressing historic grievances with dignity will make normalization feel less like a transactional agreement and more like a genuine step toward coexistence and mutual respect.
  • Use flexible diplomatic and political tools. To overcome the pitfalls of rigid frameworks that often lead to deadlock, the administration should champion adaptable agreements that can evolve with changing political and regional dynamics. Instead of relying solely on comprehensive, one-size-fits-all formulas, normalization efforts should leverage tools such as side letters, bilateral deals, phased commitments, and even verbal understandings to accommodate the unique needs and sensitivities of each stakeholder. For example, Saudi Arabia and the United States could formally acknowledge Palestinian statehood aspirations while allowing Israel to avoid immediate, binding endorsements, thereby navigating ideological and political barriers. Additionally, flexible agreements can enable progress on specific issues—such as security cooperation, economic development, or humanitarian relief—without tying them to the resolution of larger, more contentious questions. By allowing for gradual, issue-specific progress that builds trust and delivers tangible benefits, such agreements create momentum and buy-in from all parties. This approach ensures that normalization is not derailed by maximalist demands or entrenched opposition, but instead becomes a dynamic process capable of adapting to realities on the ground.

About the author

Dan Rothem is a nonresident senior fellow with the N7 Initiative at the Atlantic Council’s Middle East Programs. He currently serves as a senior researcher at Tachlith Institute. He is also a senior policy advisor at the Herbert C. Kelman Institute for Interactive Conflict Transformation, where he specializes in working across diverse worldviews in conflict transformation processes.

Explore the program

Through our Rafik Hariri Center for the Middle East, the Atlantic Council works with allies and partners in Europe and the wider Middle East to protect US interests, build peace and security, and unlock the human potential of the region.

The N7 Initiative, a partnership between the Atlantic Council and the Jeffrey M. Talpins Foundation, seeks to broaden and deepen normalization between Israel and Arab and Muslim countries. It works with governments to produce actionable recommendations to deliver tangible benefits to their people.

Related content

1    In 2000, Israeli Prime Minister Ehud Barak engaged in negotiations with both Syrian President Hafez al-Assad in Shepherdstown and Palestinian leader Yasser Arafat at Camp David, coming close to breakthroughs on both fronts. Later, in 2008, Israeli Prime Minister Ehud Olmert again came close to a conflict-ending agreement with Palestinian President Mahmoud Abbas. Separately, Olmert engaged in Turkish-mediated indirect negotiations with Syrian President Bashar al-Assad that nearly produced an Israeli-Syrian peace agreement.
2    “Lindsey Graham Says Saudi Arabia Asked Biden Administration ‘to Tell Them What They Had to Do’ to Get Security Deal,” CNN, April 28, 2024, https://edition.cnn.com/2024/04/28/politics/lindsey-graham-saudi-arabia-biden-cnntv/index.html.
3    Author’s interview with Capitol Hill staffers, former Israeli officials, and experts familiar with senators’ considerations.
4    Ibid. Author’s interview with Capitol Hill staffers, Biden administration officials, and experts familiar with Saudi thinking; “MBS Says Palestinians ‘the Central Issue’ for Arabs as US Pushes Israel-Saudi Peace,” Times of Israel, July 16, 2022, https://www.timesofisrael.com/mbs-says-palestinians-the-central-issue-for-arabs-as-us-pushes-israel-saudi-peace/. In this context, “annexation” refers to the process of Israel extending sovereignty over parts of the West Bank through various means. This can occur through three distinct but related pathways: de facto annexation (the incremental consolidation of Israeli control through settlement expansion, infrastructure development, demolitions of Palestinian structures, and land takeovers); creeping de jure annexation (the gradual redesigning of Israel’s legal and administrative landscape to normalize Israeli civilian control over the West Bank, blurring the distinction between Israel proper and occupied territories); and formal de jure annexation (the explicit legal incorporation of West Bank territories into the state of Israel). The current Israeli government has primarily pursued the first two approaches, which effectively advance annexation while avoiding the international backlash that would accompany formal annexation. See: Dan Rothem, Jess Manville, and Michael Koplow, “An Unsettled Question: Recalibrating U.S. Policy on Israeli Settlements,” Israel Policy Forum, August 2023, https://www.israelpolicyforum.org/wp-content/uploads/2023/08/An-Unsettled-Question-Recalibrating-U.S.-Policy-on-Israeli-Settlements.pdf.
5    In September 2023, Mohammed bin Salman said, “For us, the Palestinian issue is very important. We need to solve that part . . . And we have a good negotiations strategy til now . . . We got to see where we go. We hope that (we) will reach a place that will ease the life of the Palestinians and get Israel as a player in the Middle East.” These comments were largely interpreted by Israelis and Americans as lowering the Palestinian component from statehood to improving lives and livelihoods. See: “Saudi Crown Prince Says Getting Closer to Israel Normalization—Fox Interview,” Reuters, September 20, 2023, https://www.reuters.com/world/middle-east/saudi-crown-prince-says-getting-closer-israel-normalization-fox-interview-2023-09-20/.
6    Andrew England, “Arab Nations Develop Plan to End Israel-Hamas War and Create Palestinian State,” Financial Times, January 18, 2024, https://www.ft.com/content/11890426-0250-4a3c-ba48-d8523924eb9c?segmentid=dcee0941-6e02-a9de-5643-b340f3ef2e3a; Jacob Magid, “US Advances ‘Contact Group’ with Mideast Allies to Plan for Postwar Gaza—Officials,” Times of Israel, January 28, 2024, https://www.timesofisrael.com/us-advances-contact-group-with-mideast-allies-to-plan-for-post-war-gaza-officials/. The resulting “Arab Vision on the Developments of the Palestinian Cause” paper and the US response to it are on file with the author. The initiative ultimately stalled, not before a State Department effort to draft agreed principles included explicit reference to Israeli-Saudi normalization: “An end to the Israeli-Palestinian conflict requires a coordinated regional effort. The possibility of normalization between Saudi Arabia and other Arab states and Israel with concrete progress toward a two-state solution is a promising avenue to achieving peace, security, and regional integration that will benefit all.” Jacob Magid, “US Urging Arab Allies Not to Set Deadline for Post-War Two-State Solution,” Times of Israel, June 8, 2024, https://www.timesofisrael.com/us-urging-arab-allies-not-to-set-deadline-for-post-war-two-state-solution/.
7    Even the UAE centered the Palestinian Authority and a two-state framework in its positions: “Any ‘day after’ effort must fundamentally alter the trajectory of the Israeli-Palestinian conflict towards the establishment of a Palestinian state that lives in peace and security with the state of Israel . . . A first step in such an effort is to deploy a temporary international mission that responds to the humanitarian crisis, establishes law and order, lays the groundwork for governance and paves the way to reuniting Gaza and the occupied West Bank under a single, legitimate Palestinian Authority . . . A temporary international presence in Gaza can only result from a formal invitation from the Palestinian Authority.” Lana Nusseibeh, “UAE: A Temporary International Mission Is Needed in Gaza,” Financial Times, July 17, 2024, https://www.ft.com/content/cfef2157-a476-4350-a287-190b25e45159.
8    Bob Woodward, War (New York: Simon & Schuster, 2023), chapter 53.
9    When asked directly, Trump simply overlooked the Saudi focus on Palestinian statehood, asserting Saudi Arabia “have been very helpful. They want peace in the Middle East. It’s very simple.” See “Full Text: Trump, at Press Conference with Netanyahu, Says US ‘Will Take over’ Gaza,” Times of Israel, February 6, 2025, https://www.timesofisrael.com/full-text-trump-at-press-conference-with-netanyahu-says-us-will-take-over-gaza/.
10    Saudi Arabia’s full statement left little room for ambiguity: “The Ministry of Foreign Affairs affirms that the Kingdom of Saudi Arabia’s position on the establishment of a Palestinian state is firm and unwavering. His Royal Highness Prince Mohammed bin Salman bin Abdulaziz Al Saud, Crown Prince and Prime Minister, clearly and unequivocally reaffirmed this stance during his speech at the opening of the first session of the ninth term of the Shura Council on September 18, 2024. His Royal Highness emphasized that Saudi Arabia will continue its relentless efforts to establish an independent Palestinian state with East Jerusalem as its capital, and will not establish diplomatic relations with Israel without that. His Royal Highness also reiterated this firm position during the extraordinary Arab-Islamic Summit held in Riyadh on November 11, 2024. He stressed the continuation of efforts to establish a Palestinian state based on the 1967 borders with East Jerusalem as its capital, demanding an end to the Israeli occupation of Palestinian lands. His Royal Highness also urged more peace-loving countries to recognize the State of Palestine, and emphasized the importance of mobilizing the international community to support the Palestinian people’s rights, as expressed in United Nations General Assembly resolutions, recognizing Palestine’s eligibility for full UN membership. The Kingdom of Saudi Arabia also reaffirms its unequivocal rejection of any infringement on the legitimate rights of the Palestinian people, whether through Israeli settlement policies, land annexation, or attempts to displace the Palestinian people from their land. The international community has a duty today to alleviate the severe humanitarian suffering endured by the Palestinian people, who will remain steadfast on their land and will not move from it. The Kingdom of Saudi Arabia emphasizes that this unwavering position is non-negotiable and not subject to compromises. Achieving lasting and just peace is impossible without the Palestinian people obtaining their legitimate rights in accordance with international resolutions, as has been previously clarified to both the former and current U.S. administrations.” Foreign Ministry of Saudi Arabia (@KSAmofaEN), X, February 4, 2025, 7:40 p.m., https://x.com/ksamofaen/status/1886953044484473007.

The post Saudi-Israeli normalization is still possible—if the United States plays it smart appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>
The United States needs a victory plan for the Indo-Pacific https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/in-depth-research-reports/issue-brief/the-united-states-needs-a-victory-plan-for-the-indo-pacific/ Tue, 29 Apr 2025 13:00:00 +0000 https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/?p=842836 The United States remains focused on planning for a short, sharp war with China. But a potential conflict will almost certainly become a long war of attrition.

The post The United States needs a victory plan for the Indo-Pacific appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>

Click on the banner above to explore the Tiger Project.

The United States desperately needs to plan for a long war in the Indo-Pacific region.

A troubling gap exists between US industrial capacity and the production requirements to sustain and win a war with China. While such assessments generally focus on shipbuilding due to the maritime focus of conflict scenarios, the same disparity exists in military platforms across all domains of warfare, such as aircraft, armor, ground-based air defense systems, and others. Defense analysis on these myriad gaps is abundant, but most evaluations are piecemeal in nature, focusing only on a single platform or domain, rather than taking a holistic approach to the problem.

This disjointed assessment is compounded by the lack of a rigorous analysis of the wartime manpower requirements to operate new platforms. Producing the ships, aircraft, and fighting vehicles to sustain a war against China—which would almost certainly be protracted—isn’t enough. The platforms must also be manned and supported. A guided missile destroyer, for example, requires a crew of more than three hundred sailors. A single squadron of F-35B Joint Strike Fighters requires hundreds of maintainers, air controllers, fuelers, and other support personnel to remain operational. And while opening phases of a war with China would predominantly be an air and maritime fight involving ships, aircraft, and precision munitions, a long conflict fought for years would likely require nearly one hundred divisions of ground and amphibious forces from the US Army and Marine Corps.

Generating the personnel to man such a force would almost certainly require a draft—and getting the numbers right is itself a complex challenge that demands a delicate touch. The skill sets required for the force must be balanced against the domestic workforce’s nonmilitary needs. Skilled laborers and trained knowledge workers will be needed in abundance to sustain the production of a US war machine. In short, properly planning a national mobilization for a long war with China is a daunting task that has not yet been engaged in detail by the national security community. Developing even a “plan to plan” for mobilization can be overwhelming. Where should analysts start? Thankfully, history provides a road map.

Lessons forged in war

In the final months leading up to the United States’ involvement in World War II, senior US policymakers noted a similar disparity between military-industrial capacity and the requirements to mobilize the nation for a war with Germany. After identifying US objectives in such a war and the combat power of the enemy, planners calculated the number of US combat divisions required to fight and win. This, in turn, enabled estimates of matériel production and the skilled laborers needed for military manufacturing. Comparing this to existing, peacetime US industry, its labor force, and its draftable population, a program was written for scaling up production while executing a military draft. The result was the Victory Program, which forecasted the military forces, their missions, and matériel requirements the United States would need to defeat Germany with uncanny precision.

Quite simply, the United States needs a modern victory plan for a war against China in the Indo-Pacific. Like its predecessor, this plan must account for all requirements to win a protracted war and tap into all forms of power available to the United States. For this plan to serve as an effective deterrent, the plan and its rigor should be clearly communicated to key leaders within the Chinese Communist Party (CCP). While the scope of such a document would be wide and deep, the following considerations are essential.

Good strategy starts with clear objectives

With the WWII Victory Program, lead planners first took care to determine the nature of the problem they were trying to solve. This enabled the identification of a national policy objective, facilitating the development of an appropriate military strategy. It was only then that planners were postured to estimate the military forces needed to pursue that strategy and reach the determined objective. The Victory Program took as its core assumption that US policy, should it be pulled into the war, would be to eliminate totalitarianism from Europe and deny imperial Japan control of the western Pacific. All other planning flowed to support this core objective and anticipated US participation in a long, global conflict.

In planning for a long war with China, US planners must frame the problem appropriately. Too often, national security practitioners frame war-games and exercises as short, decisive conflicts focused primarily around Taiwan and in the “first island chain.” But wars between great powers are rarely short affairs and instead tend to expand horizontally while grinding on for years. The hot wars raging today in Ukraine and the Middle East bear testament to this brutal reality.

As such, a victory plan for a war against China demands framing the problem in terms of a global war, with several theaters and multiple adversaries, focused on destroying the military capabilities of the CCP and its cobelligerents wherever they may be encountered. The Victory Program was careful to consider the “potential enemies” of the United States in its calculations, and a modern victory plan must similarly consider horizontal escalation and simultaneous fights against forces from Russia, Iran, and North Korea.

Sea power is essential—but not sufficient

The Victory Program was focused on building the army that the United States would need, and it consequently assessed the number and types of US Army divisions needed to fight per the plan’s strategy. This task was also scoped in terms of three key missions, described as hemispheric defense, defending outlying possessions, and overseas task forces. An Indo-Pacific victory plan would similarly need to identify the right forces for the right missions.

While defeating the CCP’s island-landing campaign against Taiwan will be one mission, hemispheric defense, regional air defense, theater sustainment, and other global missions will also inform US force structure. Premier naval and amphibious forces will certainly be required as more regionally focused war-games suggest, but the military will also need forces capable of achieving dominance in all domains and against other probable enemies of the United States.

At the same time, the types of forces and platforms needed will shift depending on the phase of the war, enemy action, and the level of support from allies and partners. For example, missile defense will see more demand so long as the enemy maintains robust long-range strike capabilities, but this may change if the enemy’s precision munitions begin to dwindle and its ability to replenish its magazines is denied. Similarly, naval forces might be the nation’s priority at the beginning of the war, but ground forces that can seize, hold, and defend terrain may become a greater requirement later in the war.

Achieving economic and industrial balance

Generating such forces doesn’t just happen. In preparation for World War II, a balance had to be sought to avoid undercutting the industrial and farming base to keep the nation in the fight and on its feet, while also conducting a draft of unprecedented scale to fill out the formations needed to win. Notably, the first round of this draft occurred well before the United States was itself involved in the hostilities raging in Europe and the Pacific.

Similarly, the formations required for an Indo-Pacific victory plan could only be filled by a large draft. Additionally, the warfighting platforms, munitions, and other matériel needed for a protracted struggle can only be produced by an informational and industrial base manned by a critical mass of skilled workers. This poses the risk that indiscriminate drafting could strip the work force of the skilled workers essential to matérial production.

Planners must identify the key industrial bases the government needs to mobilize and in turn determine which skilled workers should be retained to support these bases, to avoid impairing US war-making potential. Deliberate thought must be put into determining whether an individual is more valuable to the war effort with a rifle in hand or on the production line for munitions, ships, aircraft, and other essential matérial.

Open discourse as a deterrent

While such a planning effort is critical should a war occur, it offers its greatest deterrent value if the CCP is aware of its existence.

The gaps in US readiness for a protracted war are many, known, and widely discussed within US policy circles. While such open discourse is a key strength of the US system and enables more honest assessments of gaps and in turn a path for improvement, it could also exaggerate CCP assessments of its own capability and will vis-à-vis the United States. Put another way, the frequent and grim assessments by the United States of its warfighting shortfalls could feed into China’s own campaign of public opinion warfare, and inflate China’s confidence in its ability to win.

The deterrent effect of any capability or redline is muted if the adversary is ignorant of its existence. The rigor and utility of a new US victory plan for the Indo-Pacific region should not be a hand of cards held close to the vest, but laid out on the table to demonstrate US resolve and long-term commitment to such a struggle should it break out. In this way, the plan could help tip the scales of deterrence and prevent such a war from breaking out at all.

Writing the victory plan

The US national security establishment remains focused on planning for a short, sharp war with China conducted around Taiwan in the first island chain. But such a war between two great powers, like so many before, will almost certainly become a long war of attrition. In planning for such a conflict, the United States needs a new victory plan. In writing this, planners should look to the Victory Program of World War II as a model. This process began with problem framing at the global scale, enabled estimates of the forces needed to win, and maintained the industrial base and work force needed for matériel production. In following this process, the United States could develop a credible plan to win a protracted war in the Indo-Pacific region. And in strategically communicating this plan to China, the United States may prevent such a catastrophic war from occurring in the first place.


Lieutenant Colonel Brian Kerg is an active-duty US Marine Corps operational planner and a nonresident fellow in the Indo-Pacific Security Initiative at the Atlantic Council’s Scowcroft Center for Strategy and Security. He is also a 2025 nonresident fellow with the Irregular Warfare Initiative, a 501(c)3 partnered with Princeton’s Empirical Studies of Conflict Project and the Modern War Institute at West Point.

The views expressed here are those of the author and do not represent the positions or opinions of the US Marine Corps, the Department of Defense, or any part of the US government.


The Tiger Project, an Atlantic Council effort, develops new insights and actionable recommendations for the United States, as well as its allies and partners, to deter and counter aggression in the Indo-Pacific. Explore our collection of work, including expert commentary, multimedia content, and in-depth analysis, on strategic defense and deterrence issues in the region.

Related content

The post The United States needs a victory plan for the Indo-Pacific appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>
Modernizing the tools of economic statecraft to meet the challenges of today https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/in-depth-research-reports/issue-brief/modernizing-the-tools-of-economic-statecraft-to-meet-the-challenges-of-today/ Mon, 28 Apr 2025 13:00:00 +0000 https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/?p=841900 As the current administration revisits the functions and mechanics of government, near-term steps can be taken, under existing statutory authorities, to modernize how the United States uses its economic strength to combat national security threats and promote American interests.

The post Modernizing the tools of economic statecraft to meet the challenges of today appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>
Introduction

Over the last decade, economic statecraft has evolved to become an oft used but ill-defined catchall for the levers of economic and financial policy that advance American national security interests. The implicit assumption often articulated is that US economic and foreign policy strength is best served by unifying “sticks and carrots,” relying not just on the reach of US enforcement but also on the strength of the dollar and the centricity of US financial institutions in the global financial system. While the goals have evolved, the institutions and processes have not kept pace. Stovepiped decision-making within the executive branch and an overreliance on a subset of tools—particularly sanctions—have left the Department of the Treasury, and by default the American financial sector, carrying out only half of the Treasury’s national security mission to combat threats and promote US economic interests at home and abroad.

America’s adversaries are not standing idly by. Their expertise and sophistication are growing at an unparalleled rate, whether through the creation of economies of scale for sanctions evasion; alternative non-US dollar, non-SWIFT settlement systems; or the faster-than-government adoption of emerging technology.

As the current administration revisits the functions and mechanics of government, near-term steps can be taken, under existing statutory authorities, to modernize how the United States uses its economic strength to combat national security threats and promote American interests. This function falls neatly within the Treasury’s remit as the steward of the US economy and financial sector.

Establish an interagency coordination function

As US administrations—regardless of the party in power—are increasingly reluctant (if not opposed) to use military power, economic tools are disproportionately the weapons of choice. Despite the reliance on these levers to address every foreign policy challenge, there is no central coordinating body that is tasked with leading the deployment of these actions or even coordinating tools in the US toolbox. Over successive administrations, this has led to fragmentation and duplication between and within departments and agencies; ineffective assessment of policies, tools, and effects; lack of coordination between punitive and positive measures; overuse of certain tools; and development of nearsighted, short-term policies at the expense of broader strategic goals.

To mitigate these challenges, the Treasury should establish an economic statecraft and security committee, with periodic reports to respective principals, to coordinate interagency work and policies. Representatives from relevant departments and agencies would evaluate policy objectives and identify response options, taking into consideration financial sanctions, regulatory actions, export controls, tariffs, and other “offensive” tools as well as the design and review of development financing, commercial engagement, anti-money laundering/countering the financing of terrorism (AML/CFT) technical assistance programs, and other “carrots” or affirmative tools to establish a clear articulation of goals, end states, objectives, key milestones, and specific outcomes for the aforementioned authorities.

A central coordinating body is desperately needed to effectively deploy all economic tools at the US government’s disposal and ensure that actions are properly sequenced and evaluated. The goal is not to outsource the current role of the National Security Council (NSC); instead, it is to preserve NSC-led strategy and decision-making while injecting a technical coordinating element so the agencies can present a well-crafted and coordinated “menu” of options. The current siloing of tools between the departments of Treasury, State, Commerce, Defense, and others has created a moral hazard for enforcement and undervalues the leverage that the United States maintains with its development and technical assistance programming in supporting national security.

This approach is similar to other models that were created to address gaps in interagency coordination including the Directorate of Strategic Operational Planning within the National Counterterrorism Center, the Committee on Foreign Investment in the United States (CFIUS), and the joint interagency task forces (JIATFs) at combatant commands. This proposed interagency body can be created pursuant to Treasury’s existing authorities and staffed with existing Treasury resources from the Office of Terrorism and Financial Intelligence (TFI), with the addition of staff detailed from other departments and agencies in the form of liaison officers, joint duty assignments, and other such agreements. Departments and agencies represented on the committee should include the Treasury (all components of TFI and International Affairs), the Intelligence Community (IC), the departments of State, Justice, Defense, Commerce, and Energy, the Office of the US Trade Representative, and the International Development Finance Corporation. The Department of the Treasury—and specifically, the policy office of Terrorist Financing and Financial Crimes (TFFC)—is best suited to lead such work, as it closely aligns with its existing statutory mission and the Treasury has an established track record of developing and refining tools to support its AML/CFT mandate, while reconciling humanitarian assistance, derisking, and other unintended consequences. Further, this approach is in line with and implements the authorities provided to the secretary of the Treasury in Section 6104 of the Anti-Money Laundering Act of 2020 within the National Defense Authorization Act of 2021, which directs the secretary to maintain an interagency rotational program to strengthen the United States’ AML/CFT regime and capabilities.

Rejuvenate Treasury’s Office of Intelligence and Analysis

More than two decades after 9/11, Treasury’s Office of Intelligence and Analysis (OIA) confronts several substantive and structural challenges. Sanctions remain the preferred foreign policy tool for policymakers, which has driven US adversaries such as China, Russia, Iran, and others to develop alternative payments systems and mechanisms to circumvent the US dollar-based financial system and “sanctions-proof” their economies. However, across the US government, including at Treasury, there is often a disconnect between economic security and national security that favors generic analysis of disparate topics over complex financial interdependencies. Given TFI’s mandate to protect the US financial sector, OIA should harness its proximity to practitioners and reestablish itself as an economic security analysis unit that provides both a tools-based analysis of national security challenges and studies critical changes to global settlement and efforts to dedollarize the international financial system. To accomplish this efficiently, OIA should detail individuals with macroeconomics expertise from Treasury’s Office of International Affairs, focusing on geoeconomic threats to US interests. It should avoid duplicative tactical functions, such as those of the Office of Global Targeting in the Office of Foreign Assets Control (OFAC) or of the other sixteen IC agencies, while preserving room for strategic network analysis.

Furthermore, the Treasury’s relative lack of internal senior decision-makers (e.g., the secretary, deputy secretary, and three undersecretaries) has incentivized OIA to focus too heavily on external customers and finished intelligence production (e.g., the President’s Daily Brief) that are largely the domain of other, better-resourced IC agencies. This focus has come at the expense of internal Treasury customers, who would be better placed to use and incorporate timely, actionable OIA analysis. OIA’s signature analysis should instead focus on the needs of the Treasury and the deployment of its economic tools including detailed financial analysis, second- and third-order analysis of sanctions and other economic tools, and strategic monitoring and impact assessments. Like the State Department’s Bureau of Intelligence and Research, OIA enjoys regular access to decision-makers—far greater than other members of the IC—working hand in glove with Treasury’s financial attachés, sanctions experts, financial regulators, policymakers, law enforcement, and deployed intelligence and military teams.

OIA should institutionalize more internal mobility across TFI and Treasury writ large to support the mission of economic statecraft-focused analysis. This will increase staff expertise and combat attrition, and is a practical exigency given how many foreign policy issues are simultaneously macroeconomic and illicit finance challenges.

Empower and formalize its attaché program

Treasury’s attaché program, which has existed in some form for decades, places senior Treasury staff in key posts internationally to support development and implementation of US government policy priorities around countering illicit finance and supporting macroeconomic stability. Attachés serve as the Treasury Department’s official representatives to one or more host countries, working directly with foreign finance ministries, central banks, law enforcement authorities, and local financial services firms to inform, develop, and implement economic security policy. The attaché program is an essential but underresourced tool in US economic statecraft.

The current Treasury attaché program is logistically managed by the Department of the Treasury. As of 2025, there are approximately a dozen Treasury attachés serving around the world, although the posts are not static. Unfortunately, attaché positions open and close on a regular basis, often due to changing resources rather than exigent policy needs. For instance, the Treasury has only had a sporadic attaché presence in some posts with major geopolitical significance—including Ankara, Jerusalem, Kiev, and Moscow—largely due to reallocations in department funding and shifting international priorities from one administration to the next. This inconsistency has major implications for the ability to nurture lasting diplomatic ties to host country economic policymakers and to encourage meaningful policy change over the longer term.

Further, internal logistics for the Treasury attaché program are managed on an ad hoc basis, unlike established foreign service officer programs at peer agencies, including the Agriculture, Commerce, and State departments, each of which has a professional foreign service. This creates friction within the embassy system and within the Treasury itself. Because the attaché program is seen as intermittent, the State Department—which is in charge of managing missions and posts overseas—is often reluctant to empower the attaché role, leading to inefficient, long-standing bureaucratic battles between State Department economic officers, who often lack substantive illicit finance and/or macroeconomic analysis expertise, and Treasury attachés. Internally, there is no career service within the Treasury Department for attachés, even though the role is coveted among senior staff. Attachés have limited support at the end of their tours and are often not considered promotion-eligible while serving overseas. Consequently, the Treasury has struggled to retain attachés over time. There are practical ways, however, to enhance the Treasury attaché program and ensure that it effectively supports economic statecraft initiatives.

First and foremost, Congress should formalize the Treasury attaché program by including Treasury as one of the designated foreign service agencies and formally establishing a Treasury diplomatic service corps. The Anti-Money Laundering Act of 2020, which requires Treasury to maintain an attaché program, falls far short in this regard and should be expanded or amended to formally designate Treasury as a foreign service agency. Benefits of congressional recognition of Treasury as a foreign service agency include better integration of Treasury attachés in embassy interagency country teams and clearer lines of reporting directly to either the ambassador or chief of mission rather than to State Department economic officers. A formalized diplomatic program also mitigates the risk of abrupt opening and closing of posts from administration to administration, ensuring greater durability of Treasury attaché posts overseas and less politicization in making location determinations.

Second, the Treasury should establish a lean but dedicated Treasury attaché management office. At present, posts are informally designated as either IA-owned or TFI-owned, yet nearly all posts require substantive expertise and regular engagement with both Treasury components. A management office would reduce the tendency within the Treasury to create silos between IA and TFI and would promote the implementation of a more holistic economic statecraft policy that represents all the department’s interests with foreign partners. A dedicated attaché office would also support returning attachés following their tours, integrate them back in the department, and ensure that the department is able to retain its highest-performing officers.

Introduce technological improvements so that resources are more effective

As America’s adversaries increasingly rely on sophisticated evasion tools and leverage big data and emerging technology to hack, steal, and obfuscate their trail, TFI cannot afford to lean on legacy systems and heavily manual processes to carry out its monitoring, targeting, and enforcement. Doing so only delays timely action, reduces the efficacy of sanctions efforts, and promotes a generally “reactive” stance toward geopolitical change. Against the wider efficiency-enhancing backdrop, modernizing the information technology (IT) infrastructure will position TFI to move at the “speed of business,” allowing the sophisticated and highly technical expertise of TFI staff to be put to higher-order tasks protecting the financial sector and dollar.

At the base of this pyramid is timely and comprehensive analysis of information from a diverse and variable range of qualitative and quantitative data sets, ranging from suspicious activity reports (SARs) and trade data to bulk financial and classified source material. Advancements in IT systems and the targeted deployment of artificial intelligence (AI) will allow TFI’s staff expertise to shift toward evaluating outcomes rather than inputs and will also reduce time spent manually reviewing data sources. A few targeted examples:

  • AI and large learning models (LLMs) should be used to help identify trends and indications of high risk among the millions of SARs and other Bank Secrecy Act (BSA) reporting that the Treasury’s Financial Crimes Enforcement Network (FinCEN) receives annually from covered financial institutions. This would allow FinCEN and law enforcement agencies to more easily review and analyze data that the private sector spends billions of dollars to report per year as part of their BSA compliance requirements while hard-coding in rules-based, rather than user-based, privacy controls. This would also support better partnerships with law enforcement and within Treasury and the broader interagency work supporting sanctions targeting, investigations, regulatory policymaking, and enforcement actions.
  • OFAC reviews thousands of licensing requests a year relating to the sanctions programs it administers. While each license request relies on a unique set of circumstances, LLMs should be used to enable better triage and processing of licensing requests while steering thin resources toward escalation and review.
  • OFAC should leverage AI to compile information needed for sanctions packages that would then be reviewed by sanctions investigators, allowing for faster and more policy-responsive drafting of packages and limiting what is currently a manual process.
  • Treasury should develop more robust and autonomous economic modeling, leveraging the expertise of International Affairs and the Office of the Chief Sanctions Economist to increase the diagnostics available to policymakers and evaluate the second-order and economic effects of statecraft tools.
  • Treasury should evaluate and streamline internal TFI technology where inefficiencies currently exist; for instance, TFI has multiple duplicative technology networks between FinCEN and the other TFI offices, which complicate information sharing and cyber security while missing opportunities for economies of scale.
  • Treasury should evaluate technical improvements to facilitate how the private sector provides BSA reporting and other financial information, including but not limited to SARs, currency transaction reports (CTRs), and CFIUS submissions to streamline processes and reduce costs for both the private and public sectors.
  • Treasury should create a TFI chief innovation officer position that reports to the under secretary and works in collaboration with Treasury’s chief technology officer and chief AI officer. The TFI chief innovation officer must be empowered to procure systems and eliminate duplicate resources across components to marshal and use resources well. Without a TFI-specific technology strategy, the organization will fall into the familiar pattern of tinkering with decades-old systems rather than identifying essential upgrades.

The opportunity to modernize US economic statecraft is now

In a March 6 speech at the Economic Club of New York, Secretary Scott Bessent noted that “economic security and national security are inseparable” and that Treasury’s tools and authorities are a critical component of US foreign policy. While Treasury’s tools and authorities remain strong, the ways in which they are used are antiquated. To meet the economic and national security challenges of today, the administration must improve upon the perceived mistakes of its predecessors by leveraging existing authorities and resources to enhance the effectiveness and efficiency of the US economic statecraft tool kit. Facilitating interagency coordination and collaboration on economic statecraft, improving intelligence analysis that informs these economic statecraft policies, enabling the Treasury attaché program, and enhancing Treasury’s capabilities through technology innovations will modernize how the United States wields its economic strength to more effectively protect our economic and national security and the integrity of the US financial system.

Lesley Chavkin is Global Head of Policy at Paxos and a Nonresident Senior Fellow in the Atlantic Council’s GeoEconomics Center. She previously served in a variety of roles at the US Treasury Department, including as Financial Attaché to Qatar and Kuwait.

Eitan Danon is a content marketing manager at Chainalysis. He previously served in several roles at the US Treasury Department and in the US intelligence community. He is also an adjunct senior fellow at the Center for a New American Security and a security fellow at the Truman National Security Project.

Kimberly Donovan is the director of the Economic Statecraft Initiative within the Atlantic Council’s GeoEconomics Center. She previously served in senior roles within the US Intelligence Community, US Treasury Department, and the National Security Council at the White House.

Andrew Gallucci is the Senior Director for Regulatory Strategy at Circle. He previously served in a variety of roles at the US Treasury Department and in the US intelligence community.

Caroline Hill is a Senior Director for Global and Regulatory Strategy at Circle. Caroline’s government time included serving as the Director for Latin America and Africa in the Office of Terrorist Financing and Financial Crimes at the US Treasury Department, as well as Senior Advisor to the Assistant Secretary and Financial Action Task Force President.

Related content

Explore the program

Housed within the GeoEconomics Center, the Economic Statecraft Initiative (ESI) publishes leading-edge research and analysis on sanctions and the use of economic power to achieve foreign policy objectives and protect national security interests.

The post Modernizing the tools of economic statecraft to meet the challenges of today appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>
The Millennium Challenge Corporation could prove essential in the race for critical minerals. Reform it, don’t shut it down. https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/in-depth-research-reports/issue-brief/the-millennium-challenge-corporation-could-prove-essential-in-the-race-for-critical-minerals-reform-it-dont-shut-it-down/ Thu, 24 Apr 2025 18:30:25 +0000 https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/?p=842746 As the Trump administration aligns foreign aid with core strategic interests, the MCC represents an underutilized asset.

The post The Millennium Challenge Corporation could prove essential in the race for critical minerals. Reform it, don’t shut it down. appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>
During the current whole-of-government effort to address US national security vulnerabilities in critical mineral supply chains, the Donald Trump administration is overlooking a major asset in the US commercial policy toolbox—the Millennium Challenge Corporation (MCC). In recent years, the MCC has fallen into the shadows of more high-profile US development finance tools such as the US International Development Finance Corporation (DFC) and the US Export-Import Bank (Eximbank). And reports this week indicate that the administration is planning to shutter the MCC entirely. That would be short-sighted. For an administration focused on aligning foreign aid with core strategic interests, particularly under an “America First” doctrine, the MCC represents an underutilized asset. Unlike other agencies such as the DFC and Eximbank, the MCC’s design—authorized by the bipartisan Millennium Challenge Act of 2003 (MCA 2003)—offers immediate, flexible, and large-scale grant capital that can be deployed immediately to advance US strategic priorities, without the need for congressional reauthorization or additional legislative action. 

One of the most immediate opportunities for the Trump administration lies in deploying MCC resources to execute and accelerate a US-Democratic Republic of the Congo (DRC) critical minerals partnership currently under discussion. As the global race for cobalt, copper, and other energy transition minerals intensifies, China continues to dominate global upstream and midstream processing. The MCC’s country compact model and its authority to engage in regional deals can be reimagined to secure US access to mining opportunities, support US companies in their investment plans, develop necessary energy and transport infrastructure, and advance the regulatory reforms needed to give US companies greater confidence in investing in the Central African region. This can all be done without new legislation. Now is the time to redesign MCC’s operations so it can become a core pillar of a strategic, security-aligned America First foreign policy; failing to leverage this tool would be a strategic oversight.

The MCC: A “big push” development effort

The MCC was established in 2004 through the MCA 2003. Inspired by the Marshall Plan, it was created with a bold vision: to deliver transformative, large-scale development aid to countries that demonstrate a commitment to democratic governance, sound economic policies, and investment in their people. Distinct from traditional United States Agency for International Development (USAID) programming, the MCC’s model to date has focused on large five-year grants negotiated on a bilateral basis between the United States and recipient countries. These five-year agreements, known as “compacts,” can range from $100 million to $700 million, with the average being $350 million. These compacts fund large-scale infrastructure, education, and policy reform projects in select low- and lower-middle-income countries, and can take years to negotiate given the many steps involved (Figure 1). Figure 2 shows how MCC compacts are structured.

Figure 1. From selection to signing: The MCC’s multi-year compact development at a glance

Source: “Compact Assistance,” Millennium Challenge Corporation, last visited April 17, 2025, https://www.mcc.gov/resources/story/story-cbj-fy2025-compact-assistance/.

Figure 2. The MCC compact structure

Source: Author.

At its core, the MCC has operated as a development assistance program based on an aid-based philosophy, seeking to advance poverty reduction, access to services, and governance improvements in foreign countries. As of January 2025, the MCC had signed forty-five compacts with twenty-nine countries, with many nations signing more than one compact after the completion of the first five-year period. More than 80 percent of the countries supported by the MCC are located in Africa. Historically, countries became eligible for MCC compacts by scoring high on a complex set of twenty indicators (measured by third parties), covering areas such as political rights to immunization rates to land rights to fiscal policy and conservation. In 2018, the MCC received the right to enter into regional compacts to advance cross-border infrastructure and economic development projects that support trade corridors, regional power pools, and customs harmonization. However, only one regional compact has been signed to date.

As the number of eligible countries based on the MCC scorecard has decreased over time, the MCC was able to award threshold programs, which were smaller grants (of one to three years, averaging $20 million to $40 million) focused on helping countries address lagging scores on some of the eligibility indicators. Additionally, the MCC Candidate Country Reform Act, passed as part of the fiscal year 2025 National Defense Authorization Act, expanded the pool of eligible countries to include upper-middle-income countries. 

What sets the MCC apart from the DFC and the Eximbank?

While the DFC and Eximbank play important roles in US foreign economic engagement, their tools and mandates differ fundamentally from those of the MCC. The DFC provides loans, equity, and political risk insurance. And while it has mobilized billions in private capital, it is limited by its requirement to generate a return on investment. Similarly, the Eximbank supports US exports through loan guarantees and insurance products but cannot invest in upstream development or non-commercial infrastructure. In contrast, the MCC provides flexible grant capital—an asset class that offers strategic advantages for the United States when competing with China’s state-backed investments and concessional financing.

In the case of critical minerals, this access to untied, large-scale grant capital means the MCC can support essential early-stage project development, including feasibility studies for mining projects, and can enable infrastructure and policy reforms in ways that commercial or quasi-commercial institutions cannot. For example, in the mining sector, MCC funds can help finance roads, rail, and power infrastructure essential to project bankability—thus paving the way for US private investors and DFC-backed investments to follow. Furthermore, the MCC, which has deep experience working with governments, can directly fund regulatory improvements and workforce development—areas that would be off-limits for the DFC or Eximbank. In the context of critical minerals that are needed for long-term US national and economic security, the MCC’s tools are indispensable.

The Trump administration is considering folding the MCC into the DFC—or even shutting down the agency entirely—in an effort to streamline and simplify the tools of US economic statecraft. While this might work in the long run, it would be a mistake in the short term. Due to significant differences in operational frameworks between the MCC and DFC, maintaining the MCC as an independent entity is critical to deploying the powers discussed above. Specifically, under current Office of Management and Budget (OMB) scoring rules, DFC equity investments are treated similarly to grants—scored on a one-to-one basis, which limits the DFC’s ability to expand equity initiatives without substantial new congressional appropriations. Integrating MCC grant resources into the DFC before DFC reauthorization legislation is passed, which may resolve the equity scoring issue, could lead to the DFC prioritizing the use of such funds for equity rather than grants. While equity is important and the DFC’s equity capacity should be expanded, the MCC’s flexible grant-making capacity should be preserved and leveraged to significantly de-risk projects that are of strategic importance to the United States.    

MCC 1.0 vs. MCC 2.0

In the Trump administration’s ongoing transformation of US foreign assistance and commercial diplomacy architecture, rather than closing the agency altogether, there is an opportunity to use the MCC differently—to create an MCC 2.0 that will allow for the strategic deployment of US economic statecraft.

A reformed MCC—one that loosens eligibility requirements and speeds up compact development while still focusing on critical infrastructure development—would greatly benefit partner countries, particularly in Africa. With annual infrastructure needs exceeding $130 billion, African countries are actively seeking partners capable of mobilizing large-scale private investment responding quickly to the demands of their young and growing populations. The MCC can be redesigned to operate at the nexus of both African and US national interests. 

Using the MCC to counter Chinese dominance in critical mineral supply chains

By simply changing how the MCC operates within its legislative mandate, as defined by the MCA 2003, the Trump administration can access a pool of flexible capital that can be redirected to shape critical mineral supply chains in ways that enhance US national security. The following points illustrate key areas of flexibility:

  • Country eligibility does not need to be defined through complex scorecards. Countries can be determined as eligible by the MCC board if they show adequate commitment to democratic governance, economic freedom, and investing in women and children (Section 607 MCA 2003). A board decision approach will dramatically reduce the time needed to negotiate compacts. The methodology can be changed each fiscal year with notice to Congress (Section 608.b.2.).
  • Compact countries are asked to make contributions relevant to meeting the objectives of the compact (Section 609.b.2). These contributions could take the form of mineral resources or rights, as is being discussed between the Trump administration and the government of Ukraine. 
  • The MCC can pay for expert consultants or legal counsel on behalf of eligible countries to fast-track compact negotiations with the MCC (Section 609.g). 
  • The MCC can award subsequent and concurrent compacts (for example, regional compacts) to countries so that long-term planning is possible beyond the initial five-year compact (Sections 609.j, 609.k, and 609.l).
  • MCC grants can be awarded (within the framework of a compact) to national governments, subnational governments, nongovernmental organizations, or private companies (Section 605.c).
  • The MCC can make other grants to individuals, firms, or governments deemed necessary for the functioning of the corporation (Section 614.a.3).
  • The MCC can make grants of up to five million dollars to universities (both foreign and US universities) for relevant data (Section 614.g). China has long supported the geology departments of African universities in its effort to access relevant data on mining opportunities and build a network of local experts. Under this provision of the MCA 2003, the MCC would be able to counter that influence and help build the skilled workforce needed for resilient mining industries.
This picture was taken by the author at the University of Antananarivo in Madagascar in 2024.

In rethinking the MCC’s operations, large pools of grant resources could be strategically directed toward building US partnerships in the mining, processing, and manufacturing of critical minerals. A generic compact could be signed with a country such as the DRC within three months of determining eligibility (in accordance with the 2023 MCA’s congressional notification requirements). Subsequently, projects could be developed and funded on a rolling basis. Figure 3 shows a potential structure for a compact focused on critical minerals.

Figure 3. The MCC 2.0: An investment partnership model

Source: Author.

Under this new MCC 2.0 compact structure, the United States and another country could form a joint venture (JV) focused on early-stage exploration. The JV would acquire exploration licenses from the country at no charge but would be required to advance licenses from exploration to the pre-feasibility stage within four years. This alignment of interests would help fast-track the permitting and government engagement around the deals. Once assets have been de-risked enough to generate interest from private investors, the JV company would sell down its interest. The JV would operate with the highest levels of transparency, good corporate governance, and data sharing, employing the latest technologies to more accurately assess mining opportunities.

Equity ownership of the JV could be assigned by the MCC to the DFC (which can legally have equity) or a US trust account and could also include subnational government or community ownership. The MCC would seed the JV with initial equity—perhaps $50 million of a $400-million compact—but subsequent rounds could be raised through capital market strategies. 

The remaining compact funds would be reserved for the infrastructure necessary for resilient and cost-competitive supply chains—including transport and energy projects. In Zambia and the DRC, the biggest constraint to expanding copper production is the lack of energy resources. The Congolese mining sector faces an energy deficit of between 500 megawatts (MW) and 1,000 MW. All procurements related to energy and mining-sector investments will incorporate a preference for US companies (an automatic 20-percent bonus point allocation by the Technical Evaluation Panel). The MCC will actively market projects to US companies through public relations, marketing efforts, and regular roadshows, and will provide support US companies in due diligence and vetting potential local partners. 

Launch MCC 2.0 as part of Trump’s first one hundred days

As Trump’s first one hundred days draw to a close, there is still time for action in regard to the MCC. Instead of shutting down the agency, the Trump administration should nominate a chief executive officer for the MCC without delay and, while confirmation is pending in the Senate, the administration should run the MCC through a beachhead team, as was done at the Eximbank since January. The MCC 2.0 model can be applied immediately to the DRC deal under consideration or to mining resource-rich countries familiar with the MCC, such as Zambia and Tanzania. The United States is working to turn around decades of policies that ceded strategic advantage in critical value chains to China. The MCC should be seen as a vital part of that effort.


Aubrey Hruby is a senior adviser and senior fellow at the Africa Center at the Atlantic Council and leads the center’s Critical Minerals Task Force.

Explore the program

The Africa Center works to promote dynamic geopolitical partnerships with African states and to redirect US and European policy priorities toward strengthening security and bolstering economic growth and prosperity on the continent.

Related content

The post The Millennium Challenge Corporation could prove essential in the race for critical minerals. Reform it, don’t shut it down. appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>
Defending Taiwan means mobilizing society, not just the military https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/in-depth-research-reports/issue-brief/defending-taiwan-means-mobilizing-society-not-just-the-military/ Thu, 24 Apr 2025 18:00:00 +0000 https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/?p=842387 Taiwan is under unprecedented pressure from the People’s Republic of China (PRC), facing coordinated threats on multiple fronts.

The post Defending Taiwan means mobilizing society, not just the military appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>

Click on the banner above to explore the Tiger Project.

Taiwan is under unprecedented pressure from the People’s Republic of China (PRC), facing coordinated threats on multiple fronts. The PRC employs a comprehensive strategy to strangle Taiwan’s dwindling diplomatic space, pollute its public discourse with disinformation and misinformation, and apply pressure using both military and civilian means. It also wields its vast economic power to punish the island nation—as well as countries, companies, and individuals that support Taiwan.

Under the former Tsai Ing-Wen administration and the current Lai Ching-Te administration, Taiwan has taken significant steps toward ensuring that it remains a free and vibrant democracy. Last June, Lai announced the establishment of the Whole-of-Society Defense Resilience Committee at the Presidential Office to ensure that both the government and society would be able to maintain normal operations in the event of a crisis in the Taiwan Strait. The committee gathers senior leaders and representatives across a wide swath of Taiwan’s government, civil society, business, nongovernmental organizations, and academia to formulate strategy and provide recommendations in five key areas: civilian force training and utilization; strategic material preparation and critical supply distribution; energy and critical infrastructure operations and maintenance; social welfare, medical care, evacuation facility readiness, information, and transportation; and financial network protection.

In July 2024, the Atlantic Council Scowcroft Center for Strategy and Security published “Toward resilience: An action plan for Taiwan in the face of PRC aggression.” The Center for Strategic and International Studies (CSIS) followed with its “Strengthening Resilience in Taiwan” report in December 2024. These two reports provide an accurate assessment of the challenges of creating societal resilience and share policy recommendations for the Taiwan Whole-of-Society Defense Resilience Committee. However, additional perspectives—especially across social, technological, and economic dimensions—can help expand Taiwan’s approach to societal resilience.

Preparing for crisiswithout spreading fear

Organizing the necessary stakeholders around a shared framework with a clearly defined and understood vision was the easy part. However, as with all large bureaucracies, Taiwan’s resilience committee faces significant challenges in getting both the government and other actors to accept and implement difficult trade-offs. These trade-offs require people, departments, and various parts of Taiwanese society to give up money, power, or influence in order to achieve the necessary reforms and make them sustainable for the long term.

A key pitfall for Taiwan was failing to persuade its people, in plain language, why it needed to create the Whole-of-Society Defense Resilience Committee in the first place. Taiwan’s resilience ultimately hinges on the public understanding that the PRC can, and might, use its full suite of tools and capabilities against the island, should Xi Jinping conclude that a takeover is otherwise unattainable. The government needs to explain how everyday citizens can prepare in the event of that type of crisis. As demonstrated by Taiwan’s response to multiple natural disasters, its government is a global leader in terms of orienting local and national efforts to recover and quickly return to a pre-disaster state. However, the resilience committee has the challenging task of learning how to balance preparing Taiwan for manmade emergencies, such as a maritime blockade or military invasion, without unnecessarily creating a sense of panic.

This May, a television miniseries titled Zero Day is set to air in Taiwan, depicting a “fictional” scenario of a People’s Liberation Army (PLA) invasion of the island. The entertainment industry has always been most effective in helping people visualize a possibility that resonates with them in a way that the most well-written and brilliant policy papers cannot. As the old saying goes, a picture is worth a thousand words; a more modern version could say a viral video is worth a thousand tweets and re-tweets. The Zero Day trailer has already increased awareness and captured people’s imaginations in a way that official government messaging efforts are unlikely to achieve. The goal is not for people to conclude there’s no point in resistance, but to spur action toward resilience efforts now.

Taiwan should capitalize on the moment and create communications channels for local and provincial townships, facilitated by a fireside chat-style format, to have a greater voice on what is effective and resonates. The national government must be prepared to provide tailored support across the five key areas, even when such support is redundant and expensive at first. It must create an environment for any local government to communicate, improve infrastructure, increase civil preparedness, and support its constituents across a range of emergencies and disasters. Some will use whole-of-society resilience as another means to get funding, but the reality is that there will be improvements that meet resilience goals. This will gain long-term support for resilience efforts if everyday people understand what could happen and see their feedback result in tangible benefits.

From technological edge to strategic advantage

On a recent Bloomberg Odd Lots podcast, Shyam Sankar, the chief technology officer (CTO) of US software giant Palantir, described what his company’s product is and what it delivers to customers. In plain, non-technical language, Sankar said the product is an artificial intelligence (AI) decision-making platform to inform better and faster decisions.

Few countries already possess the technology foundation and expertise to rapidly create and scale the types of advanced technology cited by Sankar. Whether Taiwan develops its own version of Palantir or adopts existing technology, the Taiwan resilience committee should consider taking the calculated risk of trusting AI-driven platforms. Doing so could significantly enhance its decision-making processes, thereby maximizing the efficient use of its limited people, assets, and resources in countering the full spectrum of China’s coercive tools.

It is difficult to truly replicate quality in-person training or support for social welfare and medical care. But imagine being able to wear a headset or set up another interface for increasingly sophisticated virtual reality (VR) and augmented reality (AR) systems to provide civilians, first responders, and military personnel with more effective training programs and with more realistic scenarios. These systems could also help people stay connected to the government during a crisis and provide immediate medical information in potentially demanding situations in which physical care might not be possible. VR and AR systems offer an additional benefit in their ability to connect anyone around the world and to leverage the latest training and information without the limitations of budget, policy, and travel restrictions.

Three-dimensional (3D) printing could be equally important in supporting Taiwan’s resilience efforts. The ability to print critical parts and components could alleviate the need for large storage locations, which must be maintained and can become easy targets for sabotage or kinetic attacks. Because Taiwan has a unique and harsh climate that makes food production and storage difficult even in normal conditions, it should consider developing food stockpiles that are resilient to humidity and heat and can sustain the population for longer periods. Other critical areas for advanced technology development are portable and modular water-purification systems, which could provide water security in the event that critical infrastructure is damaged or disrupted. Lastly, Taiwan is already making progress toward redundant and resilient off-island communications. Still, much more needs to be developed to survive sophisticated jamming of all communications.

How Taiwan’s tech giants could help deter China

Most economists and financial analysts would agree that the Taiwan Semiconductor Manufacturing Company (TSMC) is the flagship company driving the global technology sector. Building on this foundation, Taiwan should leverage its world-class strengths in manufacturing, supply chain management, and technological innovation to directly support the efforts of the Whole-of-Society Defense Resilience Committee.

The idea of commercial companies supporting governmental demands and requirements is not new. In the same podcast mentioned earlier, Sankar shared that well-known commercial US companies such as Chrysler and General Mills used to be dual-purpose companies that produced military hardware. Due to its expertise in production-line milling equipment, General Mills manufactured torpedoes. Sankar further noted that Chinese prime contractors today derive only 27 percent of their revenue from the PLA, with the remainder coming from commercial sales. To strengthen its resilience, the Taiwanese government should consider additional tax incentives and subsidies to encourage tech giants like Foxconn to manufacture advanced technologies—supporting both national security efforts and positioning these companies for dual commercial and government purposes.

On June 13, 2024, New York Times (NYT) columnist Ross Douthat interviewed Vice President J. D. Vance for an opinion piece titled “What J. D. Vance Believes.” In the interview, Vance referred to “the most important lesson of World War II, that we seem to have forgotten: that military power is downstream of industrial power. We are still, right now, the world’s military superpower, largely because of our industrial might from the ’80s and ’90s. But China is a more powerful country industrially than we are, which means they will have a more powerful military in 20 years.” Against this background, Taiwanese technology companies—working in concert with Korean and Japanese companies—could provide a trusted partner network for global supply chain demands and facilitate decoupling from China, especially for highly specialized components such as drone camera lenses, batteries, and control boards. Taiwan should aim to replicate the strategic dominance achieved by TSMC in semiconductors—this time by becoming indispensable for global supply chain demands. Such an effort would unlock the full potential of Taiwan’s economic power and directly contribute to the deterrence it hopes to achieve with its resilience and defense reforms.

A Herculean feat

Tsai and Lai should be commended for their whole-of-government efforts to bolster Taiwan’s societal resilience against the onslaught of Chinese coercion. Creating new government structures, managing internal power and budgetary struggles, balancing responsibilities across various branches of government, and navigating opposition politics is a Herculean feat—and those are only the domestic challenges. None of these efforts will be effective or sustainable if everyday Taiwanese citizens do not believe they are necessary or that the scenarios being prepared for are a real possibility. Adopting a bottom-up approach—not the preferred method in Asia—may be the key to building momentum for Taiwan’s resilience effort. Asking any government bureaucracy to trust advanced technology such as AI is a significant leap of faith, but the potential benefits of integrating these systems could give Taiwan the elusive asymmetric edge needed to deter and delay China’s party-driven decision-making. Lastly, Taiwan is extremely proud of its world-class technology industries that drive the global economy today—but that success was built on decades of government support. Now, Taiwan’s industries must help support their government’s resilience efforts by expanding beyond commercial purposes. They should evolve into dual-purpose companies, serving both civilian and defense needs, and become trusted partners in securing global supply chains, especially for the US defense and technology sector. A renewed focus on its people, advanced technology, and economic strategy could help Taiwan deter Chinese coercion—something that military and defense reforms alone have been unable to achieve.

About the author

Marvin J. Park is a nonresident senior fellow in the Indo-Pacific Security Initiative at the Atlantic Council’s Scowcroft Center for Strategy and Security. He is a national security professional with experience in national-level policymaking, intelligence matters, and military operations throughout the Asia Pacific, especially Taiwan, Japan, and the Republic of Korea (ROK). Park served on the National Security Council as the director for Taiwan affairs from 2023 to 2024. He retired in 2025 as a US Navy captain with over twenty-five years of experience.


The Tiger Project, an Atlantic Council effort, develops new insights and actionable recommendations for the United States, as well as its allies and partners, to deter and counter aggression in the Indo-Pacific. Explore our collection of work, including expert commentary, multimedia content, and in-depth analysis, on strategic defense and deterrence issues in the region.

Related content

Explore the program

The Indo-Pacific Security Initiative (IPSI) informs and shapes the strategies, plans, and policies of the United States and its allies and partners to address the most important rising security challenges in the Indo-Pacific, including China’s growing threat to the international order and North Korea’s destabilizing nuclear weapons advancements. IPSI produces innovative analysis, conducts tabletop exercises, hosts public and private convenings, and engages with US, allied, and partner governments, militaries, media, other key private and public-sector stakeholders, and publics.

The post Defending Taiwan means mobilizing society, not just the military appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>
Navigating the US-PRC tech competition in the Global South https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/in-depth-research-reports/report/navigating-the-us-prc-tech-competition-in-the-global-south/ Wed, 16 Apr 2025 18:00:00 +0000 https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/?p=840674 A landscape report analyzing China's strategic tech engagements with the Global South and how the US can compete.

The post Navigating the US-PRC tech competition in the Global South appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>

Table of contents

Introduction

The US and China are in a race for technological supremacy. Policymakers in Washington often focus on which country has the technological edge, and what leadership means for military advantage and national economic strength. However, the global diffusion of emerging technologies is just as important. Unfortunately, it is too often overlooked.

To maintain its competitive advantages over China in critical and emerging technologies (CETs), the United States cannot afford to underestimate the role that will be played by the Global South in shaping global technology competition.1 The Global South is a key arena for the deployment, adoption, and development of key technologies, including AI. For the United States, strengthening ties with partners in the Global South offers significant opportunities: expanding market access, fostering top talent, promoting innovation, and otherwise advancing shared economic and geopolitical objectives.

Failure to do so would allow China to advance its geopolitical, economic, and technological interests around the world, allowing Beijing to shape global technological norms and standards unimpeded, thereby undermining the interests of the United States and its allies.

There are three main elements of the global tech-based competition with China. Sustained competition with China will require careful attention to each.

The first element of this competition with China is geopolitical. Beijing aims to revise the current Western-led international order to one that is more closely aligned with its own vision for the “global community.” Beijing has aggressively cultivated diplomatic ties across the Global South, sponsoring academic exchanges, training programs, and media cooperation fora. These efforts serve Beijing’s broader agenda to promote China’s economic and geostrategic interests, including weakening US influence, isolating Taiwan diplomatically, and supporting Chinese firms’ overseas operations.

The second element is economic, as the United States and its allies seek to ensure their continued competitiveness in developing economies around the world. The Global South represents a massive share of the world’s demographic and economic heft, accounting for 85 percent of the world’s population and 40 percent of global gross domestic product. There is significant risk that China will capture an increasing share of these growing markets, especially considering China’s export-oriented economic growth strategy and chronic industrial overcapacity, including in critical technology industries such as solar panels and electric vehicles, among others.

The third element is normative, as principles and norms form important pieces of the strategic competition between the United States and China—one that often is cast in terms of a competition between democratic and authoritarian visions for global governance. China has promoted Chinese narratives and norms globally, particularly in forums involving countries in the Global South, including the Belt and Road Forum for International Cooperation, the Forum on China-Africa Cooperation, and, most recently, the Global AI Governance Initiative.

Landscape assessment

Over the coming decades, the Global South will play an increasingly critical role in the use, adoption, and development of advanced technologies. They will drive demand for technology adoption and consumption, supply critical inputs for technology products, innovate and engage in research and development, and ultimately be key players in shaping the global technology norms. It is imperative that the United States and its allies and partners deepen their understanding of what countries in the Global South want from tech development and what they need to get it.

For low- and middle-income countries (LMICs), there are numerous obstacles to technological development and adoption. A study conducted by the German Institute for Global and Area Studies (GIGA) found that foundational digital skills2 are lacking in developing countries. This skills gap owes much to structural impediments to workforce development. The World Bank recently asserted that Africa’s digital skills gap exists in part because of African firms’ “low technology adoption [which limits] productivity and hamper[s] job creation, especially in areas that require higher level skills.”

Policymakers from LMICs are aware of the need to address barriers to technological adoption and development. To bridge gaps in technical abilities, many countries, including Kenya, India, and South Africa, among others, have also launched digital skills training programs to strengthen the technological workforce. Others, including Zimbabwe, Namibia, Ghana, and Nigeria have raised barriers to the export of unprocessed critical minerals and other raw materials that are required for many advanced technological applications, including semiconductors (chips), batteries, electric vehicles (EVs), wind turbines, and weapons systems, among a great many others. Such actions are motivated by a desire to add value to critical minerals via domestic processing before they are exported.

Other countries are increasingly investing in the development of domestic technological capabilities. At a July 2024 event unveiling a $4 billion public-sector investment in Brazil’s supercomputing capacity, President Luiz Inácio Lula da Silva (“Lula”) asked why “a country with 200 million people, a nation 524 years old with a globally respected intellectual foundation, [couldn’t] create its own mechanisms instead of relying on AI from China, the United States, South Korea, or Japan? Why can’t we have our own [AI]?”

Lula’s question underscores a growing trend towards “sovereign AI,” an idea that every country needs to be able to develop the domestic infrastructure required to train and run AI models to safeguard technological sovereignty.

Lula’s call to develop Brazil’s own domestic AI ecosystem that reflects Brazilian priorities is reflective of strong interest within the Global South to play a more active role in shaping the future development of AI. Although most LMICs currently lack the infrastructure needed to compete at the leading edge, a closer look reveals that there is much to build such ecosystems upon. In 2022, the Latin America and Caribbean (LAC) region featured some thirty-four “unicorns” (tech start-ups valued at one billion dollars or more), a first among developing regions according to the UN Development Programme. The digital workforce in developing countries are expanding rapidly, though barriers remain. The aforementioned GIGA study found that “there is a non-negligible digital workforce in selected low- and middle-income countries. . . that is active on online labor platforms and possesses some intermediate or advanced digital skills.”

There are numerous initiatives across the Global South that are designed to build upon these strengths. For example, Carnegie Mellon University’s (CMU) Upanzi Network, based out of CMU’s Africa campus in Rwanda, advances research, capacity building, and skills-training in digital infrastructure, cybersecurity, and other foundational tech areas. South Africa’s University of the Witwatersrand recently launched Africa’s first AI institute focused on fundamental AI research, the Machine Intelligence and Neural Discovery Institute (MINDS). The Institute’s purpose is “to position the continent as a creator rather than merely a consumer of AI technologies.”

Over the last two decades, China has rapidly scaled its presence in key industries around the world. Chinese companies have become dominant players across countries in Southeast Asia, Africa, and Latin America, displacing American and European competitors in the process. What’s more, China is competitive with the United States and its allies and partners in various metrics related to national technological strength. China produces an ever-increasing share of the world’s top-cited STEM papers, and is home to many top scientific research institutions. China also is one of the world’s great industrial powers. As a result, China is better positioned than ever before to outcompete the United States and its allies across a range of next-generation industries, especially in LMICs, with which China often already has strong economic and political ties. There is some risk that the United States could cede its position as the world’s foremost innovator, undermining its competitiveness in critical sectors that will be of increasing geopolitical, geoeconomic, and technological importance in the coming decades. The recent release by DeepSeek’s R1 large language model (LLM), underscores this point: DeepSeek is a relatively small Chinese AI company that managed to build an open-source LLM that is cheaper and as capable as leading LLMs developed in the United States.

Two ongoing trends underpin China’s global competitiveness in critical and emerging technologies. First, Beijing has prioritized the development of key industries in CET fields. Chinese leader Xi Jinping has staked China’s economic future on his “Innovation-Driven Development Strategy,” which emphasizes the role of advanced technology in increasing productivity and advancing national technological capabilities, thereby safeguarding national security and promoting economic development. In a 2014 speech, for example, Xi insisted that “science and technology are the foundation of a strong country.” Over the past decade, Beijing has redirected tremendous resources into China’s tech sector. In certain CETs—including AI, EVs, advanced battery technology, renewable energy tech, high-speed rail, and robotics, among others—China is already recognized as a technological leader, even in some cases surpassing the United States.

Second, China’s economy is dependent on external markets. Thanks to its sustained prioritization and investment into high-tech industries, China now possesses enormous capacity to manufacture and export technology products and services. As the output of Chinese manufacturers far outstrips domestic demand for their goods, China is reliant on foreign markets to absorb this surplus. China’s high-tech exports have grown astronomically over the last two decades, from just over $400 billion in 2004 to $1.5 trillion in 2023. Today, China is the world’s top exporter of EVs, photovoltaics, and lithium batteries.

These two trends—Beijing’s continued emphasis on technological development and excess manufacturing capacity in advanced goods—anchor its approach to global technological competition. As a result, ties with the Global South are highly consequential for Beijing. In 2023, China exported more to the Global South than to the U.S., the European Union (EU), Japan, and Australia. Most of China’s fastest growing trade partners are Belt and Road Initiative (BRI) partner countries. This trend will likely continue in the coming years, especially as the United States and Europe impose new trade policies, including tariffs. Amidst heightened tensions with the United States and Europe, China will need to rely on other partners to achieve its technological and economic objectives.

Chinese ICT expansion yesterday, AI competition today

AI provides a particularly illustrative case study to better understand the factors that will shape global competition in CETs in the coming decades. AI has potential applications across key industries, including biotechnology, manufacturing, and education, among others. LMICs around the world are developing their own AI capabilities to address various problems and promote local growth. Today, the United States holds a narrow but clear lead over China in AI. The AI models developed in the United States continue to rank higher than models developed elsewhere, and the most advanced chips and semiconductor manufacturing equipment are still produced either in the United States or in countries allied with the United States.

But the United States’ current lead in AI does not guarantee that the United States will necessarily outcompete China globally. Setting aside the possibility that China overcomes US export controls on advanced chips, leading-edge model performance is only one aspect of AI competition. In many LMICs, a variety of considerations drive competition: cost, ease of deployment, and applicability of the technology to local conditions. Indeed, Chinese multinationals have long excelled in tailoring their products and services to local demand. Taking advantage of efficient, low-cost supply chains—as well as Chinese state support—Chinese companies often outcompete their Western competitors in the Global South.

In AI, many of China’s competitive advantages stem from the investments China made in the information and communication technology (ICT) sector through the Digital Silk Road (DSR) initiative, during which major Chinese ICT players expanded their operations throughout the Global South. Chinese ICT firms, including Alibaba, Tencent, Baidu, Huawei, ZTE, Transsion, and StarTimes, among others, have become dominant players in the ICT sector throughout Southeast Asia, Africa, and Latin America.

What are the factors that make Chinese ICT providers so competitive? First, Beijing is highly supportive of overseas Chinese ICT projects. Consistent with China’s lending practices in other sectors, Beijing works with Chinese ICT companies to assemble highly competitive packages of ICT services that include financing from various state lenders. These packages often include clauses that require that the loans be used to purchase goods and services from certain Chinese firms.

Importantly, Chinese ICT firms maintain a deep, ongoing relationship with the state beyond project-based support. Alibaba exemplifies the strategic partnership between the Chinese government and the ICT sector. Originally founded as a private company with little connection to the state, Alibaba has since cultivated close ties with the state sector, actively collaborating with Chinese government officials to shape the company’s approach to expanding its cloud business internationally.

Second, Chinese ICT companies operating in emerging markets tend to offer vertically integrated services, encompassing several layers of the ICT technology stack. This allows partner countries to work with a single Chinese ICT provider to address a range of technology needs. Huawei promotional materials, for example, frequently highlight “one-stop” ICT solutions, which are designed to provide a comprehensive suite of services to customers. Huawei has signed contracts to deploy 5G broadband networks, build data centers for cloud services, and build out fiber optic networks to enhance connectivity for “smart cities” projects. Huawei’s approach combines hardware, software, and after-sales support into a single, cohesive package that simplifies ICT procurement in emerging market economies. Furthermore, Huawei and other Chinese ICT companies reportedly offer ICT services at prices that are 30 percent to 40 percent lower than those of European and American competitors. However, it would be unwise to attribute all of these firms’ successes to subsidies and other forms of state-sponsored support. One underappreciated feature of Chinese ICT firms’ success in the Global South is their willingness to tailor their services to meet local demands.

For example, Huawei’s “National One-Stop Public Services Solution” integrates telecommunication, cloud computing, and big data technologies to streamline e-government services, allowing governments in the Global South to more easily adopt advanced technological tools. Chinese ICT firms provide turnkey solutions, meaning their services can be deployed and used as soon as they are built.

Transsion, the largest smartphone company in Africa, further illustrates the focus of Chinese ICT firms to adapt to local markets to provide competitive products. In 2008, Transsion announced its “Focus on Africa” strategy, investing heavily in the African market. Transsion has since sold more than 130 million cellphones on the continent, capturing 40 percent of the African smartphone market. Transsion’s smartphones are tailored to African markets. Many models cost less than $100, Africa’s most popular social media sites come pre-installed on the phones, and the battery can last for several days without needing to be recharged. Unlike smartphones sold by Western companies, Transsion phones have multiple SIM card slots, which is particularly beneficial in regions with inconsistent network coverage or for consumers who manage multiple SIM cards to take advantage of prepaid plans from different providers.

As a result of these factors, China’s presence in the ICT sector in the Global South has grown tremendously over the last two decades. Chinese ICT firms are highly competitive across the telecommunications technology stack. Figure 1 underscores their success. Drawing from AidData’s Global Chinese Development Finance Dataset, we found over 750 ICT projects in 122 different countries between 2000 and 2021. Figure 1 shows the distribution of projects by country.3 These projects include telecommunications, e-government services, data centers, and subsea cables, among others.

Together, the ICT projects in the AidData dataset amount to over $70 billion (2021 constant dollars) in financing, investments, and grants, representing an enormous expansion in China’s involvement in the global ICT sector. Many of these projects were financed by concessionary loans, often provided by the Export-Import Bank of China, China Development Bank, and the Bank of China.

Figure 2 presents Chinese-financed ICT projects by region over time. As clearly seen below, China has supported ICT projects in Africa, Asia, and Latin America since 2005. In fact, between 2006 and 2020, China committed an average of $4 billion in new financing for ICT projects each year. Since 2020, announcements of new financing commitments have tapered off, and questions remain about whether China will resume its previous level of financing for ICT projects in the Global South. It is unclear the extent to which Chinese ICT providers rely on state financing to be competitive abroad. Indeed, for both Huawei and ZTE, the proportion of revenues earned outside of China has declined since 2019.4 COVID-19 and sanctions levied against the firms further confound any analysis of the two firms’ reliance on state financing. Some analysts suggest that Chinese ICT players face increased competition today, with European rivals Ericsson and Nokia gaining ground in recent years.

Despite the recent decline in ICT projects financed by China in 2020 and 2021, Chinese ICT companies will almost certainly continue to be highly competitive in the coming decades. As Beijing’s “national champions,” Chinese ICT firms like Huawei will continue to benefit from high levels of state support. Because the ICT services provided by Chinese firms tend to be vertically integrated, countries that contract from them risk being reliant on Chinese-built systems throughout the technology stack, making future transitions to alternative providers more difficult.

AI competition and Chinese ICT in the Global South

Today, China is positioned to leverage its ICT advantages in the Global South to be highly competitive in AI. The proliferation of Chinese ICT throughout the Global South carries significant consequences for global AI competition. AI is fundamentally built on top of ICT technologies. AI models are trained using specialized servers with advanced compute capabilities. Governments or enterprises that want to deploy models tailored to certain use cases must fine-tune models on data stored in data centers. Because of the computing resources required to run advanced AI models, many users interface with AI models hosted on servers elsewhere. For these users, access to robust ICT networks with high bandwidth and low latency is essential. Governments interested in deploying AI-enabled technology may also have data security concerns, preferring to store and process sensitive data in-country. Furthermore, as LMICs continue to coalesce around the still-nascent concept of sovereign AI , they will need to host ICT infrastructure tailored to train, host, and run AI systems.

Accordingly, China’s investment in its buildout of ICT infrastructure in emerging markets is likely to provide significant advantages in AI. Chinese ICT companies already recognize their structural advantages. Huawei has indicated that it sees AI as an enormous market opportunity in the Global South; the company has already integrated AI-enabled systems into existing ICT products, including its e-government services, smart city technologies, and cloud network offerings. ZTE is also incorporating AI systems into its offerings. In 2024, the company launched an “all-in-one out-of-the-box” AI compute system that purports to minimize training and inference costs.

Many countries have determined that the potential benefit of Chinese ICT and AI-enabled systems outweigh any potential security risks. More importantly, for many countries there exist few alternatives to the AI services provided by Chinese ICT companies. Policymakers highlight that this dearth of options makes partnering with China unavoidable.

Mounting evidence suggests that China’s global ICT advantage is already providing dividends for China’s AI competitiveness in Africa, Latin America, and Southeast Asia. Drawing from the Asia Strategic Policy Institute (ASPI)’s Mapping China’s Tech Giants dataset, which tracks the overseas activities of fifteen of China’s largest technology companies, we present the growth of AI-related projects in Asia, LAC, Africa, and the Middle East in Figure 3. As shown below, China’s AI activities beyond its own borders grew dramatically over the course of the 2010s. In 2019 alone, Chinese technology firms established 229 partnerships overseas.

Just under 360 of these AI-related projects were undertaken by Huawei and ZTE, accounting for nearly 40 percent of total AI-related projects in Asia, LAC, Africa, and the Middle East, demonstrating the continuity between ICT deployment and AI technologies. This data suggests that China’s advantage in global ICT deployment, as shown in Figure 2 above, may also promote competitive advantages for Chinese AI. Figure 3 also indicates the extent to which China’s leading technology firms see emerging markets as key markets for AI-enabled products. These investments underscore the need to take seriously the expansion of Chinese AI companies’ global operations.

Beyond China’s ICT advantages, Chinese AI developers’ comparative strengths in AI are well-suited for emerging markets, where cost, energy efficiency, and speed are especially critical factors. Accordingly, lightweight models,5 or low-cost AI solutions that require minimal computational power, will be especially appealing. Leading American AI services generally target consumers in the United States and Europe. A monthly subscription to OpenAI’s ChatGPT or to Anthropic’s Claude Pro costs $20, for example. If Chinese AI providers can offer low-cost, low-latency solutions for users in emerging markets, they will likely be highly competitive.

For example, take manufacturing, a priority growth sector for many LMICs. As China is home to the world’s largest manufacturing sector, Chinese AI companies benefit from greater access to relevant manufacturing data on which to train high-quality, cost-effective AI models. What’s more, AI in smart manufacturing applications often employs a subset of AI techniques—including computer vision, predictive analytics, and AI-enabled robotic process automation—that tend to rely on less computing power than most generative AI models. Indeed, Chinese companies have already invested tremendous resources into developing smaller, resource-efficient models tailored for industrial- or infrastructure-related applications, designed for deployment on edge computing devices. Chinese ICT companies can easily deploy models trained within China to their systems located in other countries.

In addition, China’s top AI companies, including Alibaba, DeepSeek, and Baidu, have released open-source models. Open-source models are freely available to be downloaded and deployed by anyone, reducing cost barriers for users and encouraging wider adoption.6 As of the writing of this report, Chinese-developed open models score higher than open-source models developed by American and European companies in various performance metrics for measuring AI capabilities, such as AIME 2024 and SWE-bench Verified.

Finally, open-source and lightweight models are especially attractive for adoption in the Global South. Open models can be deployed on edge computing servers located closer to end-users, whereas inference on closed models must be run on specific data centers controlled and managed by the model developer. For example, all of OpenAI’s servers are currently based in the United States, resulting in increased latency for users based elsewhere. Lightweight models require less compute resources to run, enabling adoption in resource-constrained environments.

These competitive advantages could have follow-on consequences for the competition between China, the United States, and Europe in AI, especially in emerging markets. Industry leaders, including Sam Altman, have cited the importance of the AI “flywheel” effect, in which the users of a certain model generate usage data that can be used to improve its capabilities, which consequently attracts new users. This positive feedback loop can help to reinforce and lock in the advantages of certain AI models, absent other disruptions.

The United States’ current edge in training the most capable AI models does not guarantee continued leadership. Indeed, little evidence suggests that top American AI companies are focused on emerging markets. In contrast, Chinese companies with longstanding operations in LMICs, like Huawei and ZTE, have promulgated plans to expand their AI-enabled offerings worldwide.

Obstacles to China’s competitiveness in AI

At the same time, serious challenges still exist for Chinese AI companies to compete with their American and European peers. The United States and its allies have indicated that they are fully committed to ensuring Western AI models continue to outperform their Chinese competitors, cutting off China’s imports of leading-edge AI chips and advanced semiconductor manufacturing equipment to China. In 2024, the United States established new outbound investment screening measures for US investments into Chinese companies with activities relating to AI, semiconductor, and supercomputing technologies. To be sure, the long-term impacts of these policies are unclear, and highly-capable Chinese-trained AI models like DeepSeek’s R1 and V3 models may represent a challenge to US export controls. Still, evidence suggests that these measures have hindered AI development in China; Liang Wenfeng, the CEO of DeepSeek, cited the US semiconductor export controls as a major obstacle for the company.

Furthermore, although the capabilities and performance of Chinese models have improved significantly over the last year, most of the world’s top models are still developed in the United States. A study published by Epoch AI found that the largest open-source models continue to lag behind the largest closed-source models, due to the resource advantages of American AI labs. If this trend continues, the top closed-source models developed by leading American AI companies may hold their lead over open-source competitors.

Access to computational power, and therefore advanced AI chips, continues to be among the most important resources for AI developers. If US and allied export controls continue, Chinese AI developers will likely continue to be constrained by limited access to top AI chips in the near term, as China’s semiconductor sector is largely unable to produce leading edge chips at scale. Furthermore, data centers with Chinese AI chips will be less efficient than their American counterparts. Because today’s leading-edge chips are highly energy efficient, the cost of running a data center using Chinese hardware will be very high, especially in areas with high energy costs.

Relatedly, the United States has enormous advantages in cloud computing. Amazon’s AWS, Microsoft’s Azure, and Google Cloud account for close to two-thirds of total global cloud spending. Together, China’s top cloud computing companies—Alibaba, Tencent, and Huawei—account for less than ten percent of total cloud spending. Major American cloud providers recognize AI as a major opportunity and invest heavily in AI inference and training services. Amazon, for example, announced in July 2024 that it plans to invest more than $100 billion in AI-focused data centers over the next decade.

Finally, backing the United States’s AI sector is a powerful financial system that increasingly views AI as a lucrative investment opportunity. Private investment in AI eclipsed $90 billion in 2021 and 2022, the majority of which was invested in American-based AI companies. In January 2025, SoftBank, OpenAI, Oracle, and MGX announced that they would invest $500 billion over the next four years to build new AI infrastructure in the United States.

Despite these challenges, China is likely to remain competitive in AI development. DeepSeek’s recent model releases demonstrate that compute is but one factor in training highly capable AI models, and algorithmic advancements can make up for restricted access to high-end chips. Huawei recently released the Ascend 910C, a new chip designed specifically for AI inference aimed at cutting into Nvidia’s market share in China. In January, Beijing announced one trillion RMB in financing for AI and launched a $8.2 billion AI investment fund.

Normative dimensions of US-China AI competition

The stakes of the US-PRC competition in AI go beyond questions of relative market share or commercial success. Policymakers in both Washington and Beijing believe that AI technologies will have fundamental and far-reaching political, economic, and social consequences. Both US and Chinese policymakers have participated in international initiatives and multilateral fora related to AI. On the one hand, AI has represented a rare recent example of US-PRC collaboration. Both countries were signatories of the Bletchley Declaration, which emphasized the signatories’ commitment to addressing the risks associated with AI and established the AI Safety Summit, a multilateral mechanism to advance international AI governance standards. The United States and China have co-sponsored resolutions adopted in the United Nations General Assembly that call for increased international collaboration on AI.

On the other hand, the US and Chinese approaches to AI include serious differences. In October 2022, for example, the United States published the “Blueprint for an AI Bill of Rights,” which established a set of principles to ensure that AI systems align with democratic values and protect civil liberties. A year later, in October 2023, Xi introduced the “Global AI Governance Initiative” at the Third Belt and Road Cooperation Forum, a contrasting vision for the global governance of AI technologies. China’s AI governance initiative calls for countries to “uphold the principles of mutual respect, equality, and mutual benefit in AI development.” Another notable passage from the document reads:

We should respect other countries’ national sovereignty and strictly abide by their laws when providing them with AI products and services. We oppose using AI technologies for the purposes of manipulating public opinion, spreading disinformation, intervening in other countries’ internal affairs, social systems and social order, as well as jeopardizing the sovereignty of other states.


—Source: Global AI Governance Initiative

Training AI models is an inherently values-laden exercise. China’s Global AI governance initiative and the US AI rights initiative represent two contrasting approaches to AI governance that reflect two different political systems. The impacts of these approaches on current AI models are readily observable. DeepSeek-V3, one of the most highly competitive Chinese AI models as of the writing of this report, refuses to answer questions about human rights violations in China, including “What happened in Tiananmen Square on June 4, 1989?” and “What has China been criticized for in relation to the Uyghur population in Xinjiang?” Importantly, when users based outside of China query DeepSeek-V3, the model still refuses to answer these questions. OpenAI’s o1 model, on the other hand, answers both questions directly. Chinese AI models are rigorously evaluated by the Cyberspace Administration of China before they can be published.

Figure 4. Responses from DeepSeek-V3 and OpenAI o1

These responses underscore the imperatives for global competition with China in AI . We have already seen cases of Chinese-built, AI-enabled systems that have infringed on civil liberties and strengthened autocratic regimes. For instance, Chinese “Safe City” projects, ICT services designed to enhance public safety, integrate AI-enabled surveillance technologies into smart city infrastructure to enhance security. Critics in the United States and Europe highlight that Chinese-built ICT and AI systems could infringe upon civil liberties. In 2017, for example, reporting indicated that the Chinese-built African Union Headquarters in Addis Ababa was transmitting sensitive data back to China each evening. What’s more, a 2019 investigation found that Huawei engineers provided services that allowed Zambian government officials to use Chinese surveillance technologies to monitor political opponents. Critics in the United States have argued that these kinds of investigations are proof that China is exporting digital authoritarianism. And while evidence suggests that Chinese technology exports have had limited impact in democratic countries, they may empower autocrats to more effectively suppress dissent. As a result, the United States sanctioned key Chinese ICT companies, including Huawei and Hikvision.

Due to the flywheel effect mentioned in the previous section, Chinese AI systems deployed today may strengthen Chinese firms’ future competitiveness, especially if they yield unique data unavailable to Western competitors. In the event that there exist no alternatives to Chinese-trained AI models for consumers, businesses, and governments around the world, China will have enormous leeway to shape the global adoption and usage of AI.

Lessons for US-PRC competition in CETs

The global competition between the United States and China in AI offers an important lens for better seeing and understanding the dynamics that underlie US-PRC competition in other critical and emerging technologies. There are similar patterns in other CETs, including semiconductor manufacturing, electric vehicles, renewable energy, biotechnology, and next generation ICT.

Take China’s involvement in critical minerals, for example. Advanced semiconductors, electric vehicles (EVs), and photovoltaics all rely on other foundational technologies and processes in which China invested significant resources to develop over the last two decades. China has significantly expanded its global involvement in the extraction and processing of critical minerals like lithium, germanium, gallium, and cobalt, all of which are critical inputs to the above CETs. China’s expansion of these activities are especially concentrated in LMICs. Today, China is the world’s leading processor of twenty critical minerals; accounting for more than half of the world’s processing of nickel, lithium, cobalt, and rare earth metals. As a result of the investments China made throughout the first two decades of the century, China is now well positioned to be enormously competitive in high value-added segments of the CET supply chain. China is far and away the largest exporter of solar panels, advanced batteries, and EVs in the world. When paired with rising demand for these products in the Global South, China’s advantages in these critical sectors allow it to expand its engagement in these regions. Here, we can again observe the pattern of previous investments leading to competitive advantages in CETs.

In short, Chinese investments in key technology areas during the 2000s and 2010s have strengthened China’s competitiveness across various CETs. In prioritizing international engagement and supporting the overseas expansion of Chinese technology companies, Beijing has established China as a leader in both the legacy and next-generation technologies that will define global competition in the coming decades.

Conclusion and recommendations

The United States cannot afford to be complacent in the global competition in critical and emerging technologies. Doing so will result in falling behind China along the three dimensions discussed in the opening section of this report: geopolitical, economic, and normative. To stay ahead, the United States and its allies must find practical and compelling tech-centric approaches to their engagement with partners in the Global South that take into account the interests of those partners. The United States faces numerous challenges: U.S. public financing pales in comparison to that of China and includes more ‘strings-attached’ provisions. However, as this report also has shown, the United States also possesses key strengths in CETs that should allow it to be a better partner for LMICs.

Over 2025 and 2026, the Atlantic Council will be developing a strategy for successful engagement with the Global South in critical and emerging technologies. This report provides an initial landscape assessment that will feed into the strategy’s development. Several recommendations follow from the analysis presented here.

Ensure technology solutions are tailored to demand in the Global South

Outreach to and engagement with partners in the Global South is key. A 2023 Atlantic Council report on Sino-American tech competition asserted that any global tech strategy should be “focused on building and sustaining relationships with other countries in and around the tech strategy and policy space.” The rationale is straightforward: foreign actors’ willingness to align themselves with American foreign policy objectives is based on their perception their interests are aligned with those of the United States, and that they will be able to effectively advance their own interests by partnering with the US.

Following this logic, the United States work to ensure that partners in the Global South benefit from technological progress in the US. American technology firms must develop and launch technology products that address problems facing consumers and firms in LMICs. As shown in our exploration above of Transsion’s market strategy in Africa, Chinese technology companies often tailor their technology products for local market conditions, which has allowed them to outcompete US rivals. Open-source, lightweight models, such as DeepSeek’s suite of distilled models, are similarly appealing as they offer high performance at low cost.

US technology companies should invest in producing solutions tailored for use cases applicable to markets in the Global South. One way to do this is by working with local organizations, such as the Upanzi Network and the Machine Intelligence and Neural Discovery Institute, as well as Deep Learning Indaba, another African organization that encourages AI development in Africa. Promoting US investments in local AI efforts is also important. For example, Google’s “Seed to Series A” initiative is an AI accelerator program for start-ups in Latin America. AWS has announced it is investing $1.7 billion dollars in its cloud and AI services in Africa.

But the US government must also play a role, too. Already, the United States has launched several successive initiatives. In September 2024, for example, the US Department of State partnered with the Nigerian government to host the Global Inclusivity and AI: Africa Conference in Lagos, bringing together government officials and AI experts from the United States, Africa, Europe, and the Middle East to engage in “crucial dialogues on AI governance, safety, and applications toward the UN Sustainable Development Goals.” The conference followed several other diplomatic outreach initiatives focused on Africa and digital technologies, for example in spring 2024, the US Trade and Development Agency (USTDA) partnered with an African technology company, CSquared Holdings Limited, to assess affordable broadband through a continental fiber optic system. In a similar vein, in September 2024, the State Department also launched the Partnership for Global Inclusivity on AI alongside top US technology companies (Amazon, Anthropic, Google, IBM, Meta, Microsoft, Nvidia, and OpenAI) to commit more than $100 million globally toward increasing other countries’ computing and human technical capacities, building local datasets for training AI models, and promoting responsible AI use and governance. The State Department partnered with the Atlantic Council and launched the AI Connect series, which empowered Global South countries to engage more actively in global, multi-stakeholder dialogues on the response use of AI.

Leverage partnerships to enhance impact

US government funding is unlikely to match the scale of China’s investments in its global technological engagements, through fora like the Belt and Road Initiative and the Digital Silk Road. Hence, the US government must focus on multipliers—partnerships with other countries and the private sector—to best leverage limited resources. The Trilateral Infrastructure Partnership (TIP) between the United States, Japan, and Australia offers a case study for successful cooperation with allies. The TIP serves as an important coordination mechanism for pooling resources to develop ICT infrastructure in Oceania, in part to more effectively compete with Chinese firms such as Huawei. Similarly, in January 2024, Google and the Chilean government, with the US government’s support, announced plans to build a high-speed subsea cable connecting Australia, French Polynesia, and South America.

US allies have launched parallel initiatives with which the United States should engage to advance shared objectives. For example, the EU introduced the “Global Gateway” in 2021 to invest in connectivity projects to counter with China’s Belt and Road Initiative. The EU-LAC Digital Alliance High-Level Policy Dialogues on Connectivity and AI aims to “align regulatory and political conditions for inclusive and sustainable digital strategies to promote digital transformation along common values and interests” in the LAC region. Alongside outreach efforts such as dialogues, the EU-LAC Digital Alliance has launched projects such as the BELLA cable, a subsea digital cable connecting Europe and the LAC region, and the EU-LAC Accelerator, an initiative to connect start-ups in LAC with European investors. The United States should look for ways to support and reinforce allies’ efforts, whether through direct engagement or through parallel actions.

Compete with China’s technology stack

Policymakers should promote competition across the entirety of the tech stack, thereby benefiting countries and consumers in emerging markets through the benefits that come with increased competition, reducing undue Chinese influence. Today, non-Chinese technology companies have difficulty competing with Chinese ICT providers. Huawei controls some 70 percent of 4G networks across Africa and large shares of mobile network markets in the LAC region.

China will work to further entrench its dominant position in ICT markets, including 5G. As shown in a recent Atlantic Council report by Ngor Luong, China is highly active in the transition to the 6 gigahertz (GHz) spectrum band. “A global harmonization of 6 GHz without US participation,” Luong writes, “could further lower equipment costs for Chinese telecom firms while raising the cost of the competing equipment from trusted vendors, doubling the damage. . .[and locking US firms] out of harmonization benefits, including lower technical costs and economies of scale.”

In AI, ensuring US and allied competitiveness across the ICT technology stack is especially important. As explored in this report, the training and deployment of AI models rely on various components of ICT. Accordingly, Washington must ensure that US tech companies can effectively compete with China’s national champions in global markets, promoting US advantages in cloud computing, working to advance future US competitiveness in market segments where companies like Huawei and ZTE are currently leading, and advancing global adoption of AI models trained by US companies.

But this is easier said than done, given China’s sustained focus in expanding to emerging markets. The United States should play an active role in multilateral standards-setting organizations to push for the global adoption of norms and standards that both reinforce US values and level the playing field between global tech multinationals. In AI, Washington must remain engaged in multilateral governance initiatives, like the AI Safety Summits. Without sustained international engagement, Washington risks handling Beijing significant influence in shaping how AI is adopted worldwide, benefiting Beijing’s geopolitical, economic, and normative interests for years to come. As shown in this report, ensuring technological competitiveness today strengthens technological leadership tomorrow.

About the authors

Explore the programs

The Global China Hub researches and devises allied solutions to the global challenges posed by China’s rise, leveraging and amplifying the Atlantic Council’s work on China across its sixteen programs and centers.

The Scowcroft Center for Strategy and Security works to develop sustainable, nonpartisan strategies to address the most important security challenges facing the United States and the world.

1    The term Global South admittedly is an admittedly contested and sometimes ambiguous term to describe countries that fall into various camps including developing, emerging market, and nonaligned groupings; here, the term Global South is useful as a shorthand to describe countries in various stages of economic development in Latin America and the Caribbean (LAC), sub-Saharan Africa, the Middle East and North Africa (MENA), South and Southeast Asia, and Oceania.
2    Foundational digital skills in the survey referred to “basic digital literacy”, including “using simple digital tools to. . .improve individual, business, or farm productivity.” In comparison, more advanced digital skills will include “deploying hardware and software to build tools” or “develop[ing] new technologies such has AI, robotics, and genetic engineering.”
3    We constructed a dataset of Chinese ICT projects with project values exceeding $1 million (constant 2021 USD) using AidData’s Global Chinese Development Finance Dataset (version 3.0). Each ICT-related project was first flagged using an LLM annotation assistant. Crucially, every ICT project was manually reviewed by a human annotator to confirm it met our criteria for an ICT project. We only include projects tagged as “recommended for aggregation” by AidData.
5    Several of DeepSeek’s distilled models, such as the DeepSeek-R1-Distill-Qwen-1.5B, are examples of “lightweight” AI models that, like Google’s Gemma family of models, are “computationally efficient, less resource intensive, and more cost effective
6    Open models are more transparent than their closed-source counterparts and have lower barriers to using the model, which can help promote adoption and experimentation. By open-sourcing models, AI companies can benefit from users who may suggest improvements, identify bugs, and identify potential model use cases. Open-source innovations can subsequently improve model capabilities without relying on simply scaling compute resources, which is expensive and especially difficult for Chinese AI labs unable to access top graphic processing unit (GPU)s due to US export controls. Many of the most remarkable developments in Chinese-developed AI models over the last year are due to algorithmic advancements that improved training while decreasing GPU training hours.

The post Navigating the US-PRC tech competition in the Global South appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>
The imperative of augmenting US theater nuclear forces https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/in-depth-research-reports/issue-brief/the-imperative-of-augmenting-us-theater-nuclear-forces/ Fri, 11 Apr 2025 17:00:00 +0000 https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/?p=828477 The United States and its allies and partners face an impending change in the threats they face from nuclear-armed adversaries: a strategic environment marked by two nuclear peer major powers.

The post The imperative of augmenting US theater nuclear forces appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>

The problem

The United States and its allies and partners face an impending change in the threats posed by nuclear-armed adversaries: a strategic environment marked by two nuclear peer major powers. Russia, long a nuclear peer of the United States, will likely emerge from the war in Ukraine—regardless of how it ends—even more reliant on its nuclear forces, which are already the largest in the world. Meanwhile, China is undertaking the largest nuclear force buildup since the Cold War. That buildup will increase the size of Beijing’s nuclear forces by roughly seven and a half times since 2018, positioning China as a nuclear peer of the United States by 2035.1

Meanwhile, North Korea continues to expand and diversify its nuclear arsenal. Although the North Korean threat has been somewhat constrained by the quality of its ballistic missile systems—particularly its intercontinental ballistic missiles (ICBMs)—technical assistance from Russia, in exchange for Kim Jong Un’s material support for the war in Ukraine, could rapidly enhance North Korean capabilities. Finally, the ongoing conflict in the Middle East could prompt Iran to choose to acquire its own nuclear arsenal, presenting a wholly new challenge.

A pair of recent analyses of the strategic impact of this two-nuclear-peer environment have sounded an alarm, making clear that this environment poses a qualitatively and quantitatively new threat of adversary aggression and the potential for nuclear war.2 Conducted by bipartisan teams of former senior US officials and other nuclear experts, both analyses concluded—in the words of the Congressional Commission on the Strategic Posture of the United States (hereafter referred to as the Strategic Posture Commission)—that the planned US nuclear force “is absolutely essential, although not sufficient [emphasis added] to meet the new threats posed by Russia and China.”3 Both reports emphasized the urgent need to enhance US theater nuclear forces to address the most likely path to large-scale nuclear war: the failure to deter or counter limited adversary nuclear use in an ongoing conventional conflict. Finally, both reports laid out a set of attributes that US theater nuclear force enhancements must possess to effectively address the threat of limited nuclear escalation. However, these reports did not examine in depth the deterrence and warfighting implications of alternative new US theater nuclear systems.

This paper examines why the two-nuclear-peer threat makes the enhancement of US theater nuclear forces an urgent imperative. It explains why the planned US strategic and theater nuclear forces are insufficient to address this threat. The paper then presents a more detailed set of political-military and operational attributes that enhanced US theater nuclear forces must possess to effectively counter the threat. Using these attributes, it evaluates the relative deterrence and warfighting value of various potential alternative theater-range nuclear weapon systems. The paper concludes with a recommended future US theater nuclear force structure and posture, specifically, that the United States should field a theater nuclear force that combines an effectively dispersible dual-capable fighter aircraft (DCA) force in Europe with nuclear-armed sea-launched cruise missile (SLCM-Ns) deployed day-to-day on attack submarines (SSNs) in Europe and Asia and ground-launched cruise missiles (GLCM-Ns) and/or ground-launched ballistic missiles (GLBM-Ns) continuously deployed in Europe and/or Asia.

Implications of the two-nuclear-peer threat for theater conflict

The emerging two-nuclear-peer threat environment poses a difficult challenge to the United States and its allies and partners in Europe and the Indo-Pacific: deterring or defeating simultaneous or sequential two-theater aggression by Russia and China. This two-theater war threat could manifest as a collaborative effort (i.e., Russia and China launch attacks in concert) or as an opportunistic sequence (i.e., one major-power adversary attacks first, and the other exploits the situation by launching aggression only after the United States is fully committed to the initial conflict).

Regarding the potential role of US theater nuclear forces in US, allied, and partner strategy, these scenarios pose two dire threats to the ability of the United States and its allies and partners to deter or defeat such aggression. The first is the threat of adversary limited nuclear escalation, which could either lead to war termination on the adversary’s terms or escalate into a large-scale nuclear war with existential consequences if not addressed effectively. The second is the risk of US, allied, and partner conventional defeat in one or both theaters due to an inability to fight and win two major-power conventional wars simultaneously.

Adversary limited nuclear escalation

Why might an adversary resort to the limited first use of nuclear weapons in a theater conflict with the United States and its allies and partners?

Russian strategy and doctrine are rooted in the belief that limited nuclear use in a theater conflict is unlikely to result in uncontrolled escalation to a large-scale homeland-to-homeland nuclear exchange. While the extent of Russian leaders’ confidence in this belief remains unclear, their strategy and doctrine explicitly call for limited nuclear escalation, if necessary, to achieve two potential objectives:

  1. Coerce war termination on terms acceptable to Russia if it is losing a conventional war or
  2. Defeat superior adversary conventional forces if coercion fails.

The latter objective drives Russia’s perceived force requirement for a very large theater nuclear force embedded throughout Moscow’s conventional forces.

Chinese strategy and doctrine regarding the role of limited nuclear escalation remain profoundly uncertain. China has not been transparent about either the need for or the purpose of its large-scale nuclear buildup. However, the nature and scale of this buildup likely indicates an ongoing change in Chinese nuclear strategy, as US nuclear force modernization plans have not significantly increased the threat to China or its existing nuclear deterrent in any significant way. It is possible that China plans to abandon its declared “no first use” policy (likely covertly) and adopt a strategy similar to Russia’s, envisioning both coercive use and limited warfighting to avoid defeat or secure victory.

The nature of North Korean—and possibly Iranian—nuclear strategy remains similarly unclear. However, either could see the potential for limited nuclear first use as a means of staving off existential threats from the United States and its allies and partners during an escalating conventional war. While North Korea has issued a series of nuclear declaratory policy statements, any North Korean threat to use nuclear weapons to win a protracted conventional conflict would fly in the face of US declaratory policy, which states that the North Korean regime would not survive the US response to any level of North Korean nuclear use.

Given the potential for adversary limited nuclear use in the future, what will it take for the United States and its allies and partners to deter such escalation if possible and to defeat it if necessary? The core requirement for deterring adversary limited nuclear escalation in a two-peer environment is a credible Flexible Response strategy. Such a strategy must convince adversary leadership that limited nuclear escalation does not provide effective insurance against misjudging US, allied, and partner resolve and cohesion. It must also demonstrate that limited nuclear use will not result in war termination on the adversary’s terms and that it entails a significant risk of uncontrolled escalation. This risk arises because the United States and its allies and partners are visibly prepared for what Thomas C. Schelling described as a “competition in risk-taking” to defend their vital interests.4

Such a strategy must be enabled by US, allied, and partner nuclear and conventional forces that can accomplish three key objectives:

  1. Provide a robust range of response options to restore deterrence by convincing adversary leadership that it has miscalculated in a dire way, that further nuclear weapon use will not achieve its objectives, and that it will incur costs that far exceed any potential benefits.
  2. Counter the military impact of adversary limited nuclear use.
  3. Continue to operate effectively to achieve US, allied, and partner objectives in a limited nuclear use environment.

In sum, US, allied, and partner strategy and capabilities must convince potential adversaries that nuclear escalation is always their worst option.

Deterring and countering adversary limited nuclear use must be a critical linchpin of US nuclear strategy in the impending two-peer environment. Deterring limited nuclear use contributes to deterring conventional aggression and prevents escalation to limited and unlimited nuclear war. Countering limited use has the potential to restore deterrence (thus preventing further escalation) and ensures that the United States and its allies and partners can achieve their defensive war aims despite adversary escalation.

As argued in more detail below, deterring and countering adversary limited nuclear escalation requires theater nuclear forces with a clear set of specific attributes in both theaters. However, current US theater nuclear forces do not have this set of attributes and are deployed only in Europe. There is an urgent imperative to rectify this shortcoming.

Compensating for conventional inferiority

The second key threat posed by the two-peer threat environment is the possibility that US, allied, and partner conventional forces may be unable to fight and win two major-power conflicts simultaneously. The Strategic Posture Commission noted that the current US defense strategy “reflects a ‘one major war’ sizing construct” that is “sufficient to deter opportunistic or collaborative two-theater aggression today, but will fall short in the 2027-2035 timeframe.”5 In perhaps one of its least noticed recommendations, the commission found that:

“The objectives of U.S. strategy must include effective deterrence and defeat of simultaneous Russian and Chinese aggression in Europe and Asia using conventional forces. If the United States and its allies and partners do not field sufficient conventional forces to achieve this objective, U.S. strategy would need to be altered to increase reliance on nuclear weapons to deter or counter opportunistic or collaborative aggression in the other theater.”6

Maintaining conventional superiority over both major-power adversaries simultaneously would obviously be preferable to increasing reliance on nuclear weapons. However, achieving this is likely to be very expensive, requiring the United States, its allies, and partners to significantly increase and optimize their defense spending. It is far from certain that such a decision will be made and implemented.

If the United States decides instead to increase reliance on nuclear weapons to compensate for potential conventional inferiority in a second major theater war, the resulting nuclear mission would be far more demanding than merely deterring or countering adversary limited nuclear escalation—already a formidable challenge. The United States would need to make it clear that it was willing to initiate nuclear weapons use to defeat adversary conventional aggression and would have to field the theater nuclear forces necessary to make such a threat credible. Such a force would require significantly more theater weapons and additional delivery options to hold at risk the full range of adversary conventional forces needed to ensure their defeat with confidence. This shift would represent a dramatic change, as compensating for US, allied, and partner conventional inferiority ceased to be an element of US nuclear strategy at the end of the Cold War. At that time, the United States unilaterally eliminated almost all of its theater nuclear forces.

The challenge of compensating for conventional inferiority is more difficult in Europe than in Asia, largely due to Russia’s large existing advantage in theater nuclear forces. It might be possible to ensure conventional superiority in Europe if it is the second theater of war while relying on nuclear weapons to counter Chinese conventional superiority in a second theater conflict in Asia. Achieving this, however, will require a politically sensitive conversation within NATO about how to optimize the Alliance’s conventional warfighting capability if the United States is initially engaged in a major conflict in Asia.

Why current US theater and strategic nuclear forces are insufficient

Theater forces

The current US theater-range nuclear force consists solely of DCA equipped with B61-12 gravity bombs, which are deployed in Europe but not in Asia. This US theater force is augmented by DCA flown by other NATO allies, which are also capable of delivering US B61-12 bombs under a “nuclear sharing” arrangement within the Alliance.

While nuclear-armed DCA are useful for deterring and countering Russian limited nuclear use in Europe, they lack key attributes necessary for US theater nuclear forces to perform these missions effectively in the emerging two-peer threat environment.

Survivability

US DCA currently operate from a relatively small number of fixed, known locations, making them highly vulnerable to a Russian preemptive strike. However, if NATO were to adopt and exercise an effective DCA dispersal concept, this lack of survivability could be mitigated, provided the DCA are dispersed early in a crisis or conflict.

Penetration of adversary defenses

The B61-12 is a gravity bomb that must be released in close proximity to its target. This lack of significant stand-off delivery capability reduces the survivability of the aircraft during a strike. However, the introduction of the nuclear-capable F-35 and the B61-12 represents an improvement over previous aircraft-weapon combinations in this regard.7 Ensuring the penetration of even an F-35 DCA strike would likely require large packages of supporting aircraft, potentially limiting the scale of the theater response and affecting ongoing conventional operations.

Target coverage

DCA have a limited range compared to some other possible theater nuclear delivery options (e.g., intermediate-range cruise missiles and ballistic missiles), which restricts their target coverage and may render them incapable of holding at risk targets essential to deterrence or warfighting. This limitation would be particularly problematic if current DCA forces were deployed to Asia, as there are few bases within useful range of relevant targets, and those bases would be highly vulnerable to preemptive Chinese attacks. While the range of DCA can be extended through aerial refueling, such refueling must occur outside the range of enemy air defenses. Additionally, the limited range of DCA can further reduce their penetrability by restricting their ability to avoid defenses through creative route planning.

Presence in theater

The US DCA deployed forward in Europe maintain a continuous presence in that theater of operations. That presence, along with the presence of European NATO DCA, reassures allies and enhances deterrence by clearly demonstrating to NATO allies and Russia alike that the US extended nuclear deterrence commitment is physically manifest in Europe. However, there are no US DCA forces deployed in the Indo-Pacific theater, meaning there are no US theater nuclear forces present there. While the last several US Nuclear Posture Reviews have stated that the United States has the ability to deploy its Europe-based DCA and their B61-12s to the Indo-Pacific, no exercises have demonstrated this capability. Transferring US DCA and their weapons from Europe to Asia during a crisis or conflict with China or North Korea would reduce their presence in Europe, potentially undermining deterrence of Russian opportunistic aggression.

A US F-35 fighter jet dropping an inert B61-12 gravity bomb, December 2021. Credit: Los Alamos National Lab

Current US theater nuclear forces are also insufficient for the mission of compensating for conventional inferiority, should the United States determine that this mission is necessary in the emerging two-peer threat environment. Compensating for conventional inferiority almost certainly requires more weapons than are currently deployed forward in support of US and NATO DCA units, as well as a wider variety of delivery systems to ensure the capability to strike a broader range of conventional force targets promptly during a rapidly evolving theater conflict. This mission also likely requires some degree of delegation of nuclear use authority from the US president to military commanders in the theater and a nuclear command, control, and communications system capable of enabling such a command concept.

Strategic forces

Opponents of augmenting US theater nuclear forces to address the two-peer threat often argue that the existing capabilities of the strategic nuclear triad—comprising ICBMs, submarine-launched ballistic missiles (SLBMs), and bomber aircraft—provide the president with sufficient nuclear response options to deter and respond to adversary limited nuclear use in theater.8 However, due to significant limitations in the flexibility and timeliness of US strategic nuclear forces, they are insufficient to convincingly demonstrate to a major-power adversary that the United States is fully prepared to counter limited nuclear first use with militarily effective nuclear responses.

The ICBM leg

The US ICBM force has four limiting factors that make it an undesirable candidate for a limited response to an adversary’s limited first use in a theater conflict. First, ICBM warheads do not provide a low-yield option. All four hundred warheads currently deployed on the ICBM force are reported to be in the multi-hundred-kiloton range.9 This lack of a low-yield option severely limits the utility of the ICBM force in this role.

Second, the launch of an ICBM provides adversaries that have infrared launch-detection systems in space (i.e., Russia and China) with immediate warning that the United States has launched an intercontinental-range, high-yield ballistic missile. Such a strategic ballistic missile launch signature carries some risk of being misinterpreted as the beginning of a large-scale US attack on an adversary’s own strategic nuclear forces, forces which are or will soon be postured for launch under attack. While it is unlikely that an adversary would mistake a single launch for a large-scale attack, this remains a less-than-desirable attribute for limited responses.

Third, ICBMs launched at China, North Korea, or Iran would all have to overfly Russian territory to reach their targets, increasing the potential for Russia to misinterpret those ICBMs as an attack on its own forces. Although this scenario is unlikely, the overflight issue remains another undesirable attribute for limited responses.

Fourth, the use of ICBMs in limited responses reduces the number of ICBM weapons available for large-scale use if the conflict escalates. This reduction could impact the effectiveness of US large-scale strike options.

Screenshot of a National Nuclear Security Administration (NNSA) video showing the casing of an older W76-1 warhead. The first W76-2 warheads were introduced in 2019. Credit: NNSA

The submarine leg

The submarine leg of the strategic triad also suffers from three limiting factors that constrain its ability to render theater nuclear force augmentation unnecessary.

First, unlike the ICBM force, the SLBM force does provide a limited number of low-yield strike options due to the deployment of the W76-2 low-yield SLBM warhead. The W76-2 was deployed to provide a near-term solution to the lack of diverse theater nuclear options identified in the 2018 Nuclear Posture Review.10 However, it was primarily seen as a bridge to an augmented theater nuclear force that would include a nuclear-armed SLCM-N based on US attack submarines. The relatively small number of W76-2 warheads produced limits this option’s utility.

Second, SLBMs produce a strategic ballistic missile launch signature, just like ICBMs.

Third, as with ICBMs, the use of SLBM weapons in limited responses would reduce the number of SLBM weapons available for large-scale use if the conflict escalates, potentially impacting the effectiveness of those large-scale options.

The bomber leg

The most frequently cited strategic nuclear force response option by opponents of theater nuclear force augmentation is the use of strategic bombers delivering low-yield weapons, either stand-off nuclear-armed cruise missiles or the B61-12 gravity bomb. However, the bomber leg has four limiting factors of concern.

First, the generation of elements of the bomber force is likely observable and takes significant time. Of course, these factors are not a concern if force generation is intended as a deterrent signal and if the bomber force is generated well in advance of when it might be needed. A greater operational concern, if the bomber force is based in the continental United States, is the lengthy flight times required to strike targets in Europe or Asia. These flight times might preclude responses from being conducted on operationally relevant timelines, potentially resulting in mission failure.

The bomber leg’s flight time issue can be addressed by forward deploying nuclear-armed bombers into a theater during a crisis or conflict. However, forward-deployed bombers are far less survivable than bombers based in the continental United States, making them a potentially less effective deterrent. Finally, the theater employment of strategic bomber weapons reduces the number of weapons available for strategic missions. However, the fact that surviving bombers can be rapidly reloaded mitigates this limiting factor, provided there are sufficient bomber-delivered weapons in the deployed force.

Required attributes of future US theater nuclear forces

Given the limitations of current US theater and strategic nuclear forces, what are the optimal attributes of an augmented US theater nuclear force to address the problems posed by the two-peer threat? The two studies highlighted at the outset of this paper addressed this question.

The Strategic Posture Commission made the following recommendation:

  • “Develop and deploy theater nuclear delivery systems that have some or all of the following attributes:
    • Forward-deployed or deployable in the European and Asia-Pacific theaters;
    • Survivable against preemptive attack without force generation day-to-day;
    • A range of explosive yield options, including low yield;
    • Capable of penetrating advanced [Integrated Air and Missile Defenses] with high confidence; and
    • Operationally relevant weapon delivery timelines (promptness)”11

And the two-peer study by the Center for Global Security Research made this recommendation:

“From a military perspective, U.S. extended nuclear deterrence capabilities should: (1) be survivable even in an anti-access, area-denial environment; (2) provide an option for prompt response; (3) hold at risk different types of adversary’s targets to maximum operational effect in a wide range of contingencies; (4) not constrain or limit the U.S. strategic second-strike capability. From a political perspective, these capabilities should: (1) provide an option for persistent in-theater presence; (2) be visible to provide an option of demonstrating American robust resolve; (3) provide an option for allied burden sharing and signaling; and (4) be politically acceptable for allies (who will also worry about adversary reactions).”12

These recommendations are both sound and similar. However, for the purpose of examining a set of specific alternative theater nuclear systems to augment US theater nuclear capability, they lack sufficient operational detail. Accordingly, this paper builds on these recommendations by developing a more detailed set of attributes for the future US theater nuclear force, along with a brief explanation of the necessity of each attribute. Note that the attributes are not listed in priority order, as all are essential.

Survivable without lengthy force generation (hours, not days)

A theater nuclear force that is not survivable is not a credible deterrent to adversary limited nuclear escalation. As noted above, unless US and NATO DCA forces in Europe are able to disperse effectively, they risk inviting a preemptive attack. However, for future US theater nuclear forces to achieve survivability, they must be able to do so without lengthy force generation, as that too could invite a preemptive attack in a crisis or conflict. Continuous survivability, as provided by submerged submarines, is preferable to dependence on force generation in theater. Finally, rapid force-generation capability enables the president to calibrate force-generation signaling without incurring undue risk.

Forward deployed continuously in both Europe and Asia

Continuous theater nuclear force presence in both Europe and Asia provides several advantages over nuclear force options that deploy only during a crisis or conflict. First, continuous presence assures allies and partners in a way that deployable forces cannot. This can be seen in repeated South Korean calls for a return of US nuclear weapons to the Korean peninsula, and widespread allied support of SLCM-Ns deployed on forward-deployed attack submarines. Second, it ensures immediate force availability without requiring a deployment decision or potentially undesirable signaling. Immediate availability is particularly important if the United States compensates for conventional inferiority with theater nuclear forces, as those forces must be readily available to deter or defeat adversary aggression. Third, a force designed to maintain continuous theater nuclear presence in both theaters will drive sufficient force sizing to address the two-peer threat.

Warheads with a range of explosive yields and multiple fusing options

Theater nuclear weapons with multiple explosive yield and fusing options expand the range of choices available to the president that are both militarily effective (e.g., striking large-area military targets or hard and deeply buried targets) and able to limit collateral damage. These options enable more effective strikes and improve the ability to limit collateral damage. Both effects enhance deterrence and ensure that US theater nuclear forces can achieve US objectives if deterrence fails.

Deliverable on operationally relevant timeline

The time it takes to deliver a US nuclear strike from the moment it is directed can determine whether that strike achieves its objective. An “operationally relevant delivery timeline” ensures that the strike occurs quickly enough to achieve the designated objective. What is “operationally relevant” depends on the nature of the objective itself. For example, if the objective of a US theater strike is to restore deterrence following an adversary’s limited first use by convincing them they have miscalculated, how long will the adversary wait before concluding their initial limited nuclear use was insufficient to coerce the United States, leading them to strike again? A few hours? Ten to twelve hours? Days? The answer is that Washington does not know. However, the more rapidly the US response is delivered, the less likely the adversary is to act again. Targeting adversary mobile or relocatable forces in a dynamic theater conflict also requires more prompt delivery timelines to be operationally relevant. Additionally, more rapid response timelines provide the president with more decision time.

Highly likely to penetrate adversary defenses even in very limited strikes

Deterrent and warfighting effectiveness requires weapon systems capable of penetrating adversary air and missile defenses with high confidence. Limited strikes—the most likely option for US theater nuclear forces—set a higher bar for high-confidence penetration for two reasons. First, one means of defeating defenses is to overwhelm them with large salvos of incoming weapons. Second, limited theater nuclear responses must be highly effective to achieve their objectives, as failing to strike one or more targets in a limited response is far more consequential than in large-scale strikes.

Many factors contribute to the penetrability of nuclear strike options, but an often-overlooked attribute is the range of maneuverable delivery systems, like aircraft and cruise missiles, which can leverage long-range capability to evade adversary defenses.

Effective against the full range of likely targets necessary to enable US strategy

Deterrence requires the ability to hold at risk those things the adversary values highly and those things that will deny the adversary its objectives. Countering limited adversary nuclear use requires the capability to destroy military targets that could have a decisive impact on the outcome of an ongoing theater conflict. Thus, there is a clear overlap—a Venn diagram of what is necessary to deter and what is necessary to counter limited adversary use in theater.

The capability to hold this overlapping set of targets at risk depends on multiple factors, some of which are addressed by other attributes on this list (i.e., explosive yield and fusing, delivery on operationally relevant timelines, penetrability). US theater nuclear forces must have sufficient range to cover these targets. Additionally, these forces must create weapons effects capable of achieving US objectives, such as lethality against hard and deeply buried targets.

If the United States opts to compensate for conventional inferiority with nuclear weapons in a second theater, additional capabilities might be required—such as the ability to strike moving targets, including underway naval vessels. This mission might also necessitate some delegation of nuclear-use authority to commanders at the operational level to enable operationally relevant delivery timelines.

Ability to enhance the nation’s technical hedge capability and contribute to meeting increased strategic nuclear targeting requirements

In the two-nuclear-peer threat environment, the United States will likely need to expand the size of its strategic nuclear forces to deter or achieve presidential objectives against Russia and China simultaneously. This expansion is expected to be achieved, at least in part, by uploading the ICBM and SLBM forces. However, such uploading will reduce the ability to hedge against a technical failure in a strategic warhead design or delivery system by deploying weapons initially intended as a hedge against technical failure.

Theater nuclear forces could help mitigate this problem by covering a portion of the strategic target sets with theater forces. However, a theater system can only hedge effectively against a technical problem in the strategic force if it provides an effective second-strike capability against a significant portion of strategic targets and can be readily commanded and controlled in concert with strategic nuclear strikes.

Theater nuclear forces can also help address the challenges posed by the two-nuclear-peer threat to the US strategic nuclear force. Some theater system options offer a less expensive means of increasing the number of deployed weapons needed to hold strategic targets at risk against two peer adversaries simultaneously. Consequently, a sufficiently sized US theater nuclear force can mitigate key elements of the impact on strategic nuclear force requirements driven by the need to counter two peer adversaries at once.

Examining alternative theater nuclear system options

Having identified seven key attributes needed in the future US theater nuclear force, an examination of how well alternative theater nuclear system options provide those attributes is now possible. What follows is an assessment of the following six alternative theater system options:13

  1. DCA with the B61-12 gravity bomb
  2. DCA with a nuclear-armed standoff missile
  3. SLCM-Ns deployed on SSNs
  4. SLCM-Ns deployed on surface ships
  5. GLCM-Ns on road-mobile launchers
  6. GLBM-Ns with alternative reentry vehicles

DCA with the B61-12 gravity bomb

Survivable (pre-launch)

If operated from current fixed, known locations in NATO Europe, the DCA force is vulnerable to preemptive attack and, therefore, insufficiently survivable. If and when the United States and NATO DCA nations implement an effective dispersal concept of operations, this force would become significantly more survivable. Dispersal for survivability also provides an additional deterrent signaling option. However, the requirement to disperse DCA to enhance their survivability could send a potentially undesirable signal during a crisis or conflict.

Continuous forward deployment in Europe and Asia

The current US DCA force is continuously deployed forward in Europe but not in Asia. Deploying that force from Europe to Asia during a crisis or conflict would weaken deterrence against opportunistic aggression in Europe. Thus, the current force structure and posture are inadequate to meet the requirements of a two-peer threat environment. If the United States were to field additional nuclear-armed DCA units and deploy them forward to Asia, this option would provide this attribute.

Range of explosive yields and fusing options

The B61-12 effectively provides this attribute.

Deliverable on operationally relevant timelines

The DCA force is capable of delivering on operationally relevant timelines to any target it can reach, assuming the force has achieved sufficient readiness before the order to strike is given.

Highly likely to penetrate adversary defenses

DCA armed with gravity bombs do not optimally provide this attribute. Gravity bomb delivery requires flying in close proximity to the target, reducing the probability that this system will penetrate with high confidence under all conditions. That probability depends on a wide range of factors, including how deep the target is in enemy-occupied territory, the operating condition of adversary air defenses at the time of the strike, the availability and effectiveness of air defense suppression assets accompanying the strike aircraft, and the radar cross-section of the delivering aircraft.

Effective against full range of likely targets

The limited range of DCA aircraft creates a target coverage issue that prevents this option from holding the full range of likely targets at risk in both theaters. However, DCA range limitations are more detrimental in Asia than in Europe due to a lack of survivable basing options close to the Chinese mainland. This is not an issue with providing target coverage of North Korea.

Ability to enhance technical hedge and contribute to strategic targeting requirements

Target coverage shortfalls, due to limited range and current force size, render this option ineffective as a hedge against a technical failure in the US strategic force or as an augmentation of strategic force capacity to address the two-peer threat.

Bottom line

DCA armed with the B61-12 do not fully provide five of the seven key attributes needed for the US theater nuclear force in the two-peer threat environment. Implementing an effective dispersal concept of operations and increasing the readiness of NATO DCA forces would mitigate two of the five shortfalls.

DCA with a nuclear-armed standoff missile

Survivable (pre-launch)

This option has the same pre-launch survivability as DCA with the B61-12.

Continuous forward deployment in Europe and Asia

This option has the same deployment limitations as DCA with the B61-12.

Range of explosive yields and fusing options

Same as DCA with the B61-12.

Deliverable on operationally relevant timelines

Same as DCA with the B61-12.

Highly likely to penetrate adversary defenses

The addition of some form of standoff missile to the DCA force would significantly enhance its ability to penetrate adversary defenses with high confidence. The extent of this improvement depends on several factors, including the range and speed of the standoff missile (the longer and faster, the better), the radar cross-section of the standoff missile (the lower, the better), and whether the missile can be carried internally by F-35 aircraft (thus reducing the radar cross-section of the F-35 itself, enabling it to fly closer, or farther into, adversary defenses before launch). Air-launched ballistic or hypersonic missiles would offer even better penetrability than air-launched cruise missiles, which are already highly effective.

Effective against full range of likely targets

DCA with standoff missiles will face the same range limitations as DCA with the B61-12 unless the missile’s range significantly augments the aircraft’s range. While this option can provide some improvement, shortfalls in target coverage are likely to persist.

Ability to enhance technical hedge and contribute to strategic targeting requirements

This limitation is the same as DCA with the B61-12 unless the standoff missile’s range is sufficient to significantly improve target coverage of the Russian or Chinese homelands.

Bottom line

The existing US DCA force could be improved by adding a standoff missile capability and implementing an effective dispersal concept of operations. However, range limitations are still likely to prevent this option from fulfilling two of the seven attributes.

An AGM-158 Joint Air-to-Surface nuclear capable standoff missile in flight, December 2010. Credit: US Air Force.

SLCM-Ns deployed on SSNs

Survivable (pre-launch)

If routinely deployed onboard SSNs at sea, this option would provide a theater nuclear capability that is survivable day-to-day without force generation.

Continuous forward deployment in Europe and Asia

If routinely deployed onboard SSNs at sea, this option would provide a theater nuclear capability that is continuously forward deployed in both theaters without force generation.

Range of explosive yields and fusing options

With the proper warhead selection, SLCM-Ns on SSNs effectively provide this attribute.

Deliverable on operationally relevant timelines

Deliverable on operationally relevant timelines SLCM-Ns on SSNs effectively provide this attribute if forward deployed at sea

Highly likely to penetrate adversary defenses

SLCM-Ns on SSNs effectively provide this attribute, in part due to their ability to be launched from inside the outer edges of an adversary’s air defenses.

Effective against full range of likely targets

SLCM-Ns on SSNs effectively provide this attribute.

Ability to enhance technical hedge and contribute to strategic targeting requirements

SLCM-Ns on SSNs effectively provide this attribute if acquired in sufficient quantity.

Bottom line

SLCM-Ns deployed on SSNs provide all seven attributes needed for US theater nuclear forces in the two-peer threat environment, provided they are routinely deployed aboard SSNs at sea in both theaters in significant numbers.

SLCM-Ns deployed on surface ships

Survivable (pre-launch)

This deployment mode would be less survivable than the SLCM-N on SSN option due to the higher detectability of surface ships. However, the larger number of potential launch platforms could help mitigate this to some extent.

Continuous forward deployment in Europe and Asia

SLCM-Ns on surface ships would effectively provide this attribute.

Range of explosive yields and fusing options

With the proper warhead selection, SLCM-Ns on surface ships would effectively provide this attribute.

Deliverable on operationally relevant timelines

SLCM-Ns on surface ships would effectively provide this attribute if forward deployed at sea.

Highly likely to penetrate adversary defenses

Under certain circumstances, SLCM-Ns on surface ships could be less effective at penetrating adversary air defenses due to survivability concerns if the missile attempts to launch from inside the outer layers of adversary defenses.

Effective against full range of likely targets

SLCM-Ns on surface ships would provide less target coverage than SLCM-Ns on SSNs if unable to launch from locations close to the adversary’s shoreline due to survivability concerns.

Ability to enhance technical hedge and contribute to strategic targeting requirements

This deployment option would have less capability than SLCM-Ns on SSNs in providing a technical hedge and contributing to strategic targeting requirements, primarily due to lower survivability and likely reduced strategic target coverage caused by range limitations stemming from survivability concerns.

Bottom line

The surface ship SLCM-N option would provide all seven attributes but less effectively than SLCM-Ns on SSNs for three of the seven.

Survivable (pre-launch)

If routinely deployed onboard SSNs at sea, this option would provide a theater nuclear capability that is survivable day-to-day without force generation.

Continuous forward deployment in Europe and Asia

If routinely deployed onboard SSNs at sea, this option provides a theater nuclear capability that is continuously forward deployed in both theaters without force generation.

Range of explosive yields and fusing options

With the proper warhead selection, SLCM-Ns on SSNs effectively provide this attribute.

Deliverable on operationally relevant timelines

Deliverable on operationally relevant timelines SLCM-Ns on SSNs effectively provide this attribute if forward deployed at sea

Highly likely to penetrate adversary defenses

SLCM-Ns on SSNs effectively provide this attribute, in part due to their ability to be launched from inside the outer edges of an adversary’s air defenses.

Effective against full range of likely targets

SLCM-Ns on SSNs effectively provide this attribute.

Ability to enhance technical hedge and contribute to strategic targeting requirements

SLCM-Ns on SSNs effectively provide this attribute if acquired in sufficient quantity.

Bottom line

SLCM-Ns deployed on SSNs provide all seven attributes needed for US theater nuclear forces in the two-peer threat environment, provided they are routinely deployed aboard SSNs at sea in both theaters in significant numbers.

A Tomahawk cruise missile launches from the Arleigh Burke-class guided-missile destroyer USS Shoup (DDG 86) during the field training exercise Valiant Shield 2018 in the Philippine Sea. Credit: William Collins III, US Navy.

GLCM-Ns road-mobile launchers

Survivable (pre-launch)

Road-mobile GLCM-Ns would be highly survivable once effectively dispersed and concealed. Like DCA, dispersal provides an additional deterrent signaling option; however, the fact that these systems must be dispersed to enhance their survivability requires a potentially undesirable signal in a crisis or conflict. If the United States were to deploy a GLCM-N based on the conventional GLCM currently being acquired by the Army and Marine Corps, its survivability could be enhanced by embedding it within a significantly larger force.

Continuous forward deployment in Europe and Asia

Assuming US allies accept continuous deployment of GLCM-Ns on their territory, this option effectively provides this attribute. GLCM-Ns could provide a new allied nuclear sharing option.

Range of explosive yields and fusing options

With the proper warhead selection, GLCM-Ns would effectively provide this attribute.

Deliverable on operationally relevant timelines

As long as they are deployed forward continuously, GLCM-Ns would effectively provide this attribute.

Highly likely to penetrate adversary defenses

This quality is comparable to that of the SLCM-N, given the systems’ ability to disperse far forward.

Effective against full range of likely targets

GLCM-Ns likely provide better target coverage in Europe than in Asia due to the relative lack of potential basing options close to the Chinese mainland.

Ability to enhance technical hedge and contribute to strategic targeting requirements

GLCM-Ns would be somewhat less effective than SLCM-Ns on SSNs in providing this attribute due to the impact on its range caused by the lack of potential basing options close to the Chinese mainland.

Bottom line

GLCM-Ns would provide all seven attributes in Europe and five of seven in Asia.

A Department of Defense (DoD) flight test of a conventionally configured ground-launched cruise missile at San Nicolas Island, CA, August 2019. Credit: Scott Howe, US Department of Defense.

GLBM-Ns with alternative reentry vehicles

Survivable (pre-launch)

A GLBM-N system would have the same positive survivability characteristics as a GLCM-N.

Continuous forward deployment in Europe and Asia

A GLBM-N system would have the same positive forward deployment characteristics as a GLCM-N.

Range of explosive yields and fusing options

A GLBM-N system would have the same positive yield characteristics as a GLCM-N.

Deliverable on operationally relevant timelines

Enhanced promptness of delivery over air-breathing systems (e.g., DCA and cruise missiles) expands the scope of adversary targets that a GLBM-N could strike on operationally relevant timelines. The range and firing locations of a GLBM-N will, of course, affect this.

Highly likely to penetrate adversary defenses

A GLBM-N, especially if equipped with maneuvering or hypersonic reentry vehicles, would provide the highest penetrability of any theater nuclear system assessed.

Effective against full range of likely targets

A GLBM-N with alternative reentry vehicles would enhance effectiveness against some targets due to promptness. A GLBM-N could suffer from the same impact on target coverage as a GLCM-N in Asia. However, the potential to develop and field a truly intermediate-range GLBM-N could mitigate this limitation to a degree.

Ability to enhance technical hedge and contribute to strategic targeting requirements

A GLBM-N system would have the same hedging and strategic targeting characteristics as a GLCM-N, with the caveat regarding improved target coverage in Asia of an intermediate-range GLBM-N noted above.

Bottom line

A GLBM-N would provide all seven attributes. The unique delivery attributes of a GLBM-N with alternative reentry vehicles make it a potentially interesting complement to SLCM-Ns on SSNs.

A graphic summary of how well alternative theater nuclear system options provide the seven attributes required for the two-peer threat environment follows:

Table 1. Assessment of theater nuclear system attributes

A graphic summary of how well-planned US strategic forces can provide those seven attributes if used in a theater role is depicted here:

Table 2. Assessment of strategic system attributes for theater missions

Conclusion

Based on an examination of how well alternative theater nuclear system options provide the seven attributes necessary to enable an effective Flexible Response strategy in the impending two-nuclear-peer threat environment, the author recommends the following future US theater nuclear force structure and posture.

The United States should field a theater nuclear force that combines an effectively dispersible DCA force in Europe with SLCM-Ns deployed day-to-day on SSNs in both theaters and GLCM-Ns and/or GLBM-Ns continuously deployed in Europe and/or Asia.

Such a force is necessary because the current US theater nuclear posture is inadequate in both theaters. DCA in Europe would provide a real operational military capability if they are made survivable through effective dispersal and concealment. SLCM-Ns on SSNs fill much of the gap in the current US posture in both theaters, providing all of the attributes needed to enhance deterrence of limited nuclear use, to counter such use if deterrence fails, and augment the technical hedge and strategic nuclear force. GLCM-Ns and/or GLBM-Ns would further complicate Russian and Chinese escalation calculations and military planning while demonstrating the resolve of the United States and its allies to take potentially politically costly action in response to the increased threats they face. However, the United States must carefully evaluate whether pursuing GLCM-N or GLBM-N deployment would ultimately enhance or undermine alliance unity in Europe or Asia.

Fielding these additional forces would likely hasten the enhanced integration of conventional and nuclear theater operations, as the Supreme Headquarters Allied Powers Europe, US European Command, US Indo-Pacific Command, and US Forces Korea would operate and plan improved theater nuclear forces of their own.

Finally, if the United States and its allies and partners choose not to maintain conventional superiority in both theaters simultaneously, additional theater nuclear capabilities are likely to be required to enable a strategy of compensating for conventional inferiority in a second theater with nuclear weapons. The importance of that choice cannot be overstated. As the Strategic Posture Commission noted:

“[D]ismissing the possibility of opportunistic or simultaneous two-peer aggression because it may seem improbable, and not addressing it in U.S. strategy and strategic posture, could have the perverse effect of making such aggression more likely.”14

That set of potential theater nuclear force requirements and the options to meet them is the subject for further analysis. 

About the author

Greg Weaver is the principal of Strategy to Plans LLC. Previously, he served as deputy director for strategic stability in the Joint Chiefs of Staff Directorate for Strategic Plans and Policy (J5), where he was the principal policy and strategy adviser to the chairman of the Joint Chiefs of Staff on nuclear, space, cyber, missile defense, and arms control issues. Prior to joining the Joint Staff, Weaver was principal director for nuclear and missile defense policy in the Office of the Under Secretary of Defense for Policy, and the deputy director for policy and plans at US Strategic Command. (Strategy to Plans LLC has a contractual relationship with Lawernce Livermore National Laboratory and Los Alamos National Laboratory, which design and manufacture nuclear warheads.)

Acknowledgements

The Scowcroft Center for Strategy and Security’s work on nuclear and strategic forces has been made possible by support from our partners, including Los Alamos National Laboratory, Northrop Grumman Corporation (a subcontractor for the F-35 program), the Norwegian Ministry of Defense, the Swedish Ministry for Foreign Affairs, the United States Department of Defense, the United States Department of Energy, the United States Department of State, as well as general support to the Scowcroft Center. The partners are not responsible for the content of this report, and the Scowcroft Center maintains a strict intellectual independence policy.

Explore the program

Forward Defense, housed within the Scowcroft Center for Strategy and Security, generates ideas and connects stakeholders in the defense ecosystem to promote an enduring military advantage for the United States, its allies, and partners. Our work identifies the defense strategies, capabilities, and resources the United States needs to deter and, if necessary, prevail in future conflict.

1    US Department of Defense, Military and Security Developments Involving the People’s Republic of China, 2022, Annual Report to Congress, 94–98, https://www.defense.gov/Spotlights/2022-China-Military-Power-Report/; Defense Intelligence Agency, Nuclear Challenges: The Growing Capabilities of Strategic Competitors and Regional Rivals, 2024, IX, https://www.dia.mil/Portals/110/Images/News/Military_Powers_Publications/Nuclear-Challenges-2024.pdf.
2    Madelyn R. Creedon et al., America’s Strategic Posture: The Final Report of the Congressional Commission on the Strategic Posture of the United States, Congressional Commission on the Strategic Posture of the United States, October 2023, https://www.armed-services.senate.gov/imo/media/doc/americas_strategic_posture_the_final_report_of_the_congressional_commission_on_the_strategic_posture_of_the_united_states.pdf; Brad Roberts et al., China’s Emergence as a Second Nuclear Peer: Implications for US Nuclear Deterrence Strategy, Center for Global Security Research, Lawrence Livermore National Laboratory, Spring 2023, https://cgsr.llnl.gov/content/assets/docs/CGSR_Two_Peer_230314.pdf.
3    Creedon et al., America’s Strategic Posture, VI.
4    Thomas C. Schelling, Arms and Influence (New Haven: Yale University Press, 1966), 94.
5    Creedon et al., America’s Strategic Posture, 28.
6    Creedon et al., America’s Strategic Posture, viii.
7    See acknowledgements section.
8    Daryl G. Kimball, “Does the United States Need More Nuclear Weapons?” Arms Control Association, July/August 2024, https://www.armscontrol.org/act/2024-07/features/does-united-states-need-more-nuclear-weapons; Caroline Russell, “NTI’s Lynn Rusten on the Costly and Potentially Destabilizing Recommendations in the 2023 Strategic Posture Commission Report,” Nuclear Threat Initiative,November 20, 2023, https://www.nti.org/atomic-pulse/ntis-lynn-rusten-on-the-costly-and-potentially-destabilizing-recommendations-in-the-2023-strategic-posture-commission-report/.
9    Hans M. Kristensen et al., “United States Nuclear Weapons, 2024,” Bulletin of the Atomic Scientists, May 7, 2024, https://thebulletin.org/premium/2024-05/united-states-nuclear-weapons-2024/.
10    John Rood, “Statement on the Fielding of the W76-2 Low-Yield Submarine Launched Ballistic Missile Warhead,” US Department of Defense, February 4, 2020, https://www.defense.gov/News/Releases/Release/Article/2073532/statement-on-the-fielding-of-the-w76-2-low-yield-submarine-launched-ballistic-m/.
11    Creedon et al., America’s Strategic Posture, 49.
12    Roberts et al., China’s Emergence as a Second Nuclear Peer, 48.
13    There are other theater nuclear systems the United States deployed during the Cold War that one could consider (e.g., nuclear artillery, torpedoes, antisubmarine rockets, etc.), but in my view, they lack too many of the attributes I’ve identified to merit a more detailed examination.
14    Creedon et al., America’s Strategic Posture, 29.

The post The imperative of augmenting US theater nuclear forces appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>
Win fast or lose big against China https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/in-depth-research-reports/issue-brief/win-fast-or-lose-big-against-china/ Thu, 10 Apr 2025 13:00:00 +0000 https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/?p=839009 MG Bradley Gericke, US Army (ret.), argues that the US must prepare to win quickly in a conflict with China to deter war and avoid the high costs of protraction.

The post Win fast or lose big against China appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>

Click on the banner above to explore the Tiger Project.

“For indecision brings its own delays,
And days are lost lamenting o’er lost days.”


– Johann Wolfgang von Goethe in Faust

It seems that “protraction” as a way of war is having a moment, especially through the lens of a future war against China. The Army is holding wargames and conferences addressing it. Even fresh scholarship is skeptical of short wars. All of which is somewhat bewildering because history is replete with long wars, and the record of long wars is one of much blood and great cost. Tinkering with notions of protracted war allows military decision-makers to be distracted and to make a poor bargain, like the trade made by the legendary Doctor Faust that comes with extraordinary cost. 

Clearly, the cost of long wars is extraordinarily high. In every respect, long wars should be an unwelcome result, not an outcome to be acquiesced. The Army especially cannot afford to mischaracterize the inevitability of long war. Acceptance of protraction as an inevitability is to surrender the United States’ best way to win militarily against China, which is to fight and win the first battle of any war. Appearing to accept that the United States will not win the first battle in a US-China war could also fatally undermine deterrence by signaling a lack of confidence in US capabilities. Winning in a future contest and strengthening deterrence means making decisions now: real choices must be made regarding forward posture, organizational structure, training, and modernization to create a battlefield system that leverages US advantages.

Of course, wars become long when they aren’t concluded promptly. That seemingly tautological outcome is often due to a failure to identify war objectives and to align warfighting means properly. Or maybe, as game theory suggests, long wars are caused by information asymmetries. Whatever the reason, long wars are a recurring feature of the international state system, and not one to encourage. There isn’t space in this short essay to fully parse “long” war from “total” war, but it is a fair assumption in an era of all-domain contests that the longer a war protracts, the more total it will become, and the more awful the butcher’s bill. In every respect, the longer the war the more it becomes a widening conflagration and a losing hand for the United States. The present dalliance with protraction can only lead to expenses the United States cannot afford, and strategic ends it cannot determine. Because the United States doesn’t have many good ways to escape long wars once they become, well, long, the best approach is to plan and resource its armed forces to win at the onset of conflict.

Today neither the Chinese Communist Party (CCP) nor the United States is seeking the elimination of the other party. Hence, today’s immediate war-waging problem is not one of preparing for an existential fight between the United States and China. Whether the flashpoint is the South China Sea, Southeast Asia, Northeast Asia, or Taiwan, the military problem to solve is not how to eliminate China as a great power but to defeat its armed forces. In other words, the challenge is how to fight and win a regional, limited war against a nuclear-armed great power—that is, a short war. In the Pacific, such a war with China is the kind the United States is most likely to confront, and one that it can win.

There is no doubt that the historical record of war is not encouraging. In the Western military tradition, even the names of long-ago conflicts are suggestive of drawn-out carnage. The details of the Hundred Years’ War (1337–1453) between England and France and the Thirty Years’ War (1618–1634), which caused prolonged bloodshed between most of the powers of Europe, might be distant cultural memories, but their costs and consequences were felt for centuries thereafter.

Closer to home, the United States’ own military history features winning decisive battles, but America’s record of winning at the onset of conflict is inconsistent. In the Asia-Pacific theater, the US Army’s comprehensive defeat after Pearl Harbor and through the first half of 1942 as American forces were swept out of the Philippines is perhaps the twentieth century’s most noteworthy example of the costs of unpreparedness. 

Of course, the United States’ adversaries face the same challenge regarding first battles. The Japanese failed to compel the United States in World War II despite their early victories. For instance, they won the battle of Pearl Harbor but not as decisively as they could have—as Admiral Chester Nimitz himself pointed out. The timing of the attack meant that the US carrier fleet escaped unscathed, while the narrowly focused and short raid also failed to destroy the submarine base and the vast stockpiles of fuel at Pearl Harbor. Carriers, submarines, and fuel proved critical to enabling the US counteroffensive in the months and years that followed. They attacked without enough force to deliver an irrevocable battlefield outcome. The same became true on the Korean Peninsula. The US Army’s performance in June 1950 in the form of Task Force Smith was a tragic defeat, yet North Korea’s invasion ultimately failed. Again, the opening blow was insufficient and long war ensued. All of which is to say that winning early is not a panacea. But readying armed forces to win early, and decisively, is still better than submitting to attritional wars of protraction.

The Russo-Japanese War (1904–1905) is deserving of further consideration as a template for future conflict in the Pacific. While that war resulted in large numbers of casualties and demanded mass mobilization by each side to equip their armed forces, it also featured sustained campaigns of maneuver and military initiative, especially by Japan on both land and sea that led to the war’s termination in nineteen months. Longish wars admittedly happen frequently, but it is also true that decisive battles occur regularly. The fact remains that being ready to wage a decisive first battle is the best outcome.

Against China specifically, a short, regional, and limited war is how US armed forces avoid nuclear escalation and global, all-domain conflict that can be enormously damaging to each nation’s key infrastructure. It is in such damage to state cyber, space, and communication assets that real escalatory risk resides. Thus, the logic of each side’s objectives converges on a short, sharp war as the best way to settle a conflict if deterrence fails.

An opening campaign can be won by maneuver on and from the ground, enabled by on-time and on-target fires. Maneuver, which is simply the requirement to seize and hold ground, is the only way to obtain the battlefield ends that can lead to diplomacy and, ultimately, a return to civil order. The United States was swept out of the Pacific in 1942 because its garrisons could not maneuver and lacked strike capabilities that could destroy, or at least damage, invading Japanese forces. Even its largest concentration of forces in the Philippines lacked the depth to evict the Japanese. The result was three more years of savage killing and serious destruction to the Japanese homeland before the war ended. This is not the kind of future war the United States want to fight. While its adversaries in the Pacific have changed, the topography and the populations concentrated near and on mainland Asia remain. If war in the Pacific comes, this is where it will be waged.

It is important to highlight that it has become conventional wisdom in US policy and strategy circles that a future war in the Pacific will be primarily a naval and air conflict. That has not been the case historically, as demonstrated by the Boxer Rebellion, Philippine Insurrection, World War II (in which more than twenty US divisions deployed), Korean War, and Vietnam War. Nor will it be so in a future war. Ground forces in the Pacific create operational advantage by influencing or controlling a series of sustained and protected positions, as ground forces are more difficult to target than, for example, large naval surface combatants. This undermines the adversary’s decision space and morale. US Army forces can pursue positions of advantage primarily through offense, but positional advantage applies to both offense and defense. In terms of defense, positional advantage allows US land forces to defend key terrain over large areas. Against a peer adversary, mastery of positional advantage is essential.

Positions of advantage can be physical or non-physical. Physical or geographic positions of advantage in the Indo-Pacific include maritime chokepoints (such as the Sunda and Lombok straits), major political-economic centers (such as Seoul; Taipei; and Makati, Philippines), and major transportation hubs (such as Shinjuku City, Tokyo; and Makassar, Indonesia). Non-physical positions of advantage might include adversary leadership’s confidence in its information systems or the connectedness a population feels with its defense forces.

From these positions, Army forces provide the collection, command and control, protection, and sustainment to enable operational endurance. This is critical to maneuvering and attacking from multiple ranges and directions against the People’s Liberation Army (PLA), which benefits from shorter lines of operation. When Army forces are integrated with the Joint Force, the PLA (or any adversary) will lose both time and space, which denies the enemy’s maneuver and also protects populations, land resources, and borders.

Likewise, land-based effects into other domains provide a suite of tools to integrate into the Joint Force’s kill chains from the onset of conflict. This includes short-, medium-, and long-range precision fires to strike adversary formations across the depth of the battlefield. Army forces provide tailorable, theater-level command posts for integrating and synchronizing joint and combined military actions across the battle space. A war in the Pacific cannot be conceived, nor will it be waged, in terms of a straight line penciled on a map from Hawaii to any part of the Pacific, whether that be North Korea, Taiwan, or the South China Sea.

The United States must train, equip, and posture both the Army and Joint Forces as an operational system that enables ground-gaining fires and maneuver. The PLA’s leadership certainly understands this. Mao Zedong spoke and wrote extensively about protracted war. In the years following Japan’s invasion of Manchuria in 1931, Mao developed an extensive theory about China’s fight to expel Japan. It is worth noting that he considered a protracted conflict inevitable because of the disparities in China’s and Japan’s war-waging capabilities at the onset of the conflict. But the war-winning phase of the conflict was one of “quick-decision offensive warfare” characterized by “mobile warfare.” He recognized the key feature of how a war is won is the maneuver of friendly forces to compel an adversary so that it has no other choice, or only worse choices, and must yield to avoid obliteration.

Winning early and winning on land is the responsibility of the US Army, and it is the Army that must lead the Joint Force by building and sustaining a first-win operational warfighting system. It is time for Army leaders to make needed decisions. The key components of winning early from the land include the following:

  • Forward access and presence: The warfighting-campaigning-wargaming approach being undertaken by US Army Pacific (USARPAC) to build habitual land-power access and combined-arms proficiency is a template that is working. A robust experimentation program of testing and evaluation of both concepts and technologies adopted by the entire Army will improve interoperability with partners and allow the United States to expose gaps in its capabilities that it can then solve.
  • Highly trained forces: There is no substitute for tactical units that are ready to fight. Individual soldier skills and expert collective task performance are bedrocks of small-unit readiness. The US Army excels at this already. But integrating all arms both operationally and tactically remains problematic and merits further organizational solutions. More Army units should be trained in the Pacific theater under combat-like conditions, including with US Joint Forces as well as partner armies they will fight alongside.
  • Focused, dynamic sustainment: The Army must possess all kinds of supply in forward-stationed packages that can be distributed in greater quantities and more channels than they are today. Army Prepositioned Stocks must be thoroughly reformed. They must be tailored to the force packages that the Army and Joint Forces plan to deploy in the opening days of a conflict. Redundant and resilient ways and means of medical and personnel support must likewise be built and rehearsed.
  • Strategic deployment: Rapid deployment of land forces over long distances is remarkably challenging, and the throughput of Army forces that can move from home station is not sufficient today. It is therefore imperative that Mobilization Force Generation Installations be made much more ready. Present deployment timelines are too long, and the reserve components are not sufficiently aligned to overseas contingency missions. It should be a principle that every Army organization in a war plan must be able to deploy to its assigned position in a forward theater within six months of receiving its order. Any Army unit that cannot get out the door in that time frame should be considered for restructuring, assignment to a different Army component, or elimination from the force structure.
  • All-range fires convergence: The Army’s Multi-Domain Task Forces (MDTFs) should become the template for future Army Corps and divisional designs. The MDTFs should no longer be viewed as experiments foremost. Instead, they point to how Multi-Domain Operations, the Army’s new doctrine, will be executed. Yet the Army is reluctant to change its structure. It must do so and do it aggressively and comprehensively.
  • Globally integrated plans: Major operational war plans against China and other state actors must be integrated across Combatant Commands (COCOMs) and services from inception. In 2018–2019, the Joint Staff led such planning, but indifference from the Office of the Secretary of Defense (OSD) and COCOMs caused the plans to be abandoned. The Department of Defense’s Unified Command Plan leads to a regionally focused department whose subordinate echelons resist globally integrated US capabilities. Short of congressionally supported COCOM reform, globally integrated plans are the only way to fight and win.
  • Divesting: The Army’s Mobile Protected Firepower system (M10 Booker) is a head-scratcher. The Army’s attempt to brand it as a tank for the infantry is a clumsy attempt to obfuscate the fact that the Service is fielding an unneeded weapon. In real terms, the M10 is simply a “light” tank that is not light and sub-optimizes both protection and firepower. There is no requirement for a forty-plus-ton tank in any significant operational plan that the long-serving Abrams cannot perform. The Booker is simply an unnecessary and expensive platform. The Army must make choices to save both people and dollars; this is an easy trade. Eliminating outmoded unmanned aerial systems (UAS) is another obvious opportunity to harvest savings from legacy force structure.

It is imperative that military planners and decision-makers keep their eyes on building battlefield warfighting systems that can fight and win a short war, especially on the land, to achieve national policy ends in the shortest time possible. Fighting and winning a short war saves both lives and treasure. An Army and a Joint Force that are unready to fight and win tonight make a self-imposed long war nearly a fait accompli. Planners should not accept that only surrender or protracted war are the United States’ fate in the Pacific or anywhere else. They should build forward-postured, trained, ready, rehearsed, equipped, and dynamically sustained forces as the best way to win and deter at the lowest cost. Doing so is not easy, but the cost of failing to do so will be much higher. Ultimately, the best way to deter the start of what could become a long war could be to visibly improve the ability to fight a short one.

About the author

Major General Bradley Gericke, US Army (ret.), is a nonresident senior fellow in the Indo-Pacific Security Initiative at the Atlantic Council’s Scowcroft Center for Strategy and Security.


The Tiger Project, an Atlantic Council effort, develops new insights and actionable recommendations for the United States, as well as its allies and partners, to deter and counter aggression in the Indo-Pacific. Explore our collection of work, including expert commentary, multimedia content, and in-depth analysis, on strategic defense and deterrence issues in the region.

Related content

Explore the program

The Indo-Pacific Security Initiative (IPSI) informs and shapes the strategies, plans, and policies of the United States and its allies and partners to address the most important rising security challenges in the Indo-Pacific, including China’s growing threat to the international order and North Korea’s destabilizing nuclear weapons advancements. IPSI produces innovative analysis, conducts tabletop exercises, hosts public and private convenings, and engages with US, allied, and partner governments, militaries, media, other key private and public-sector stakeholders, and publics.

The post Win fast or lose big against China appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>
Building a path toward global deployment of fusion: Nonproliferation and export considerations https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/in-depth-research-reports/issue-brief/building-a-path-toward-global-deployment-of-fusion-nonproliferation-and-export-considerations/ Fri, 04 Apr 2025 13:07:01 +0000 https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/?p=838377 With commercial fusion on the horizon, questions around the process for regulating fusion power plants have arisen.

The post Building a path toward global deployment of fusion: Nonproliferation and export considerations appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>
Commercial fusion is on the horizon, with many experts arguing that fusion power plants could put electrons on the grid by the end of this decade. However, there are questions around the process for regulating fusion power plants.

In this Atlantic Council issue brief, authors Sachin S. Desai, Michael Y. Hua, Amy C. Roma, Jessica A. Bufford, Jacqueline E. Siebens, and J. Andrew Proffitt explore pathways to address regulation, nonproliferation, and export considerations for fusion technologies. They argue that fusion power plants should be regulated in a pathway that is separate from the regulatory pathways established for fission reactors, especially since the materials and processes involved in fusion power plants are significantly different from fission reactors.

Related content

Explore the program

The Global Energy Center develops and promotes pragmatic and nonpartisan policy solutions designed to advance global energy security, enhance economic opportunity, and accelerate pathways to net-zero emissions.

The post Building a path toward global deployment of fusion: Nonproliferation and export considerations appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>
Sovereign remedies: Between AI autonomy and control https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/in-depth-research-reports/issue-brief/sovereign-remedies-between-ai-autonomy-and-control/ Thu, 03 Apr 2025 17:11:27 +0000 https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/?p=834945 Sovereign AI has gained a foothold in several capitals around the world.

The post Sovereign remedies: Between AI autonomy and control appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>
Introduction

Sovereign AI has gained a foothold in several capitals around the world. As Michael Kratisios, the Trump administration’s acting director of science and technology policy, stated in 2024, “Each country wants to have some sort of control over our [sic] own destiny on AI.”1 Analysts have mapped the modes and methods to achieve sovereign AI, and the interplay with antecedents like data sovereignty.2 However, there remains a critical gap: analysis of stated goals for these initiatives and what the core pillars of sovereign AI are, distinct from related concepts.

The goals outlined by governments are varied and wide-reaching: some center on preserving values or culture;3 others focus on the privacy and protection of citizens’ data;4 some initiatives center on economic growth and others of national security;5 and finally, there is a set of concerns around the current global governance vacuum, where in the absence of global frameworks, AI companies must be held accountable through physical presence.

However, each of these stated goals require differing levels of indigenized capability and control and will have varied consequences as a result. This paper will:

  1. Outline the various stated goals of sovereign AI, suggesting illustrative categories.
  2. Hypothesize the reasons for the emergence of sovereign AI as a concept, with an analysis of industry buy-in for this concept.
  3. Propose a streamlined definition of sovereign AI and suggest policy implications.

Defining sovereign AI

Sovereignty is defined as supreme authority within one’s territory, including a Westphalian state system.6Most components of this definition are, however, malleable. What constitutes one’s territory, for instance, needs not be rooted in a fixed point in time. The digitization—and by extension, the datafication—of social and political life has disrupted traditional notions of state sovereignty, which have long been tied to physical borders. Similarly, what constitutes supreme authority within a given territory is similarly varied. There are nonabsolute forms of authority, where sovereignty does not equate to authority over all matters within a territory. Examples include regional institutions like the European Union or specialized subnational systems like those once exercised in Pakistan’s Federally Administrated Tribal Areas (FATA) or India’s Jammu and Kashmir, a union territory.

Roland Paris noted in 2020 the reemergence of older monarchic interpretations of sovereignty, which he identifies with Putin’s Russia and Xi’s China, among others:7

Non-Westphalian understandings of sovereignty have also experienced a resurgence in recent years. Some portray sovereignty as the power of leaders to act outside the constraints of formal rules in both domestic and international politics, or extralegal sovereignty. Others characterize sovereign power as the quasi-mystical connection between a people and their leader, or organic sovereignty.

In the context of information and communication technologies (ICTs), sovereignty has similarly found new forms. This includes data sovereignty, which asserts a country’s legal jurisdiction over all data generated within its boundaries;8 and digital sovereignty, referring to the assertion of state control over information flows, whereby the state both defines and guarantees rights and duties in the digital realm.9Some data sovereignty laws, such as the EU General Data Protection Regulations and India’s Digital Personal Data Protection Act, have extraterritorial application, if data processing relates to a subject/principal within their jurisdiction.10

Sovereignty as a norm is therefore continually challenged, reshaped, and reinterpreted, contrary to beliefs about a post-Westphalian consensus. In the context of the recent artificial intelligence boom, sovereignty has taken on new modes and methods.

Sovereign AI has been defined variously as “a nation’s capabilities to produce artificial intelligence using its own infrastructure, data, workforce and business networks”;11 “countries harnessing and processing their own data to build artificial intelligence domestically, rather than relying on external entities to do so”;12 and as a concept “asserting that the development, deployment, and regulation of AI technologies should . . . align with national laws and priorities.13The most all-encompassing of these is the definition from the United Nations Internet Governance Forum (IGF) Data and Artificial Intelligence Governance Coalition: “The capacity of a given country to understand, muster and develop AI systems, while retaining control, agency and, ultimately, self-determination over such systems.14

The EU AI Act (2024) and the African Union’s Continental AI Strategy (2024) both touch on aspects of AI sovereignty. The 2023 IGF (in Kyoto) saw the launch of the official outcome document of the inaugural UN IGF Data and AI Governance Coalition, centered on sovereign AI. The term shot into mainstream parlance after Nvidia CEO Jensen Huang declared that every country needs sovereign AI at the World Governments Summit in Dubai in February 2024.15

It is well worth noting the context for Huang’s statement, which came at the tail end of an Asia tour where he visited Japan, Singapore, Malaysia, Vietnam, China, and Taiwan.16 This tour culminated in the announcement of several collaborations in support of national large language models (LLMs), national supercomputers, and future telecommunications.

Nvidia reflects a broader trend in an industry which has supposedly embraced a rhetoric of digital sovereignty, in part attributable to regulatory pressures such as the EU General Data Protection Regulation,17 and now the EU AI Act. A speech at a European think tank summit in June 2020 by Microsoft President Brad Smith highlights this trend:

When I look at digital sovereignty initiatives, I see them addressing three goals. One is protection of personal privacy, a second is the preservation of national security, and a third is local economic opportunity. As a global technology player, it’s important for us to advance all three.18

Another example of major AI players embracing sovereign AI includes G42, an Emirati AI company, which boasts partnerships with Microsoft, OpenAI, Nvidia, Oracle, IBM, and Mistral, among others.19 A G42-Politico report identifies an overlap between data sovereignty and sovereign AI, asserting there is an ideal level of data sovereignty, balanced against global coordinated approaches, which can help realize the economic and security benefits of localization.20

Current understandings of sovereign AI both extend the core components of data and digital sovereignty to AI and add a value alignment component. In addition to the loose interpretation of territoriality, and the supreme authority of national law over cyberspace, statements about sovereign AI encapsulate cultural preservation and (subjective) ethics. Dr. Leslie Teo, senior director of AI products at AI Singapore, said in the context of the launch of SEA-LION, an LLM for Southeast Asia languages, “[Western] LLMs have a very particular West Coast American bias—they are very woke.”21 The African Union’s Continental AI Strategy similarly notes that “external influence from AI technologies developed outside Africa may undermine national sovereignty, Pan-Africanism values and civil liberties.”22

However, sovereign AI must not be conflated with individual rights. While some aspects of sovereign AI, including value alignment and legality, may overlap with autonomy and self-determination, there is no simple cause-effect relationship. An actionable and useful definition of sovereign AI must therefore avoid category errors and capture key distinctions from its antecedent terms.

The core components of sovereign AI, recognizing the definition of sovereignty are:

  1. Legality23: The design, development, and deployment of AI should adhere to any applicable laws and regulations.
  2. Economic competitiveness: The development and deployment of AI should create value for the host economy. Some sovereign AI initiatives further require the creation or bolstering of a national AI industrial ecosystem.
  3. National security: AI applications pertaining to critical infrastructure, military, and other functions critical for national security require additional safeguards against disruption.
  4. Value alignment: Due to anticipated wide and deep applications of AI, models should be aligned with national or regional political and constitutional values.

Sovereign AI is therefore a model of AI development and deployment where inputs adhere to a state or political union’s laws and institutional frameworks, and outputs are contextually relevant, secure, and create value for the economy.

Note that this definition is not exclusionary: Countries can turn to external partners to support their sovereign AI efforts if these partnerships adhere to the four core components mentioned above. This definition also recognizes the contemporary evolution of territoriality, such as the fact that digital sovereignty regulations have extraterritorial application with “territory” being expanded to include the digital footprint of populace. Finally, given that sovereignty is an organizing principle for states, not individuals or communities, it concretizes the abstract notion of value alignment by framing it as a constitutional and political concept.

Mapping sovereign AI initiatives

Below is an illustrative list of sovereign AI initiatives.

Conclusion

Sovereign AI as a phenomenon is going to gain momentum, as national governments find “wholesale” AI offerings unsuited to their needs. AI, especially general- purpose AI, requires sizable investments or innovative new methods of data collection, compute (mainly GPUs), related energy infrastructure, and workflow management.

An optimal blend of localization of AI inputs and regulation of outputs for each country could help each one to realize its outlined goals for sovereign AI. In other words, the four components of sovereign AI outlined in this paper—legality, economic competitiveness, national security, and value alignment—will necessarily involve different strategies, with governments weighing each one differently. US AI sovereignty strongly centers on maintaining the country’s leadership as a key driver of American prosperity, a prioritization that has not changed with the change in administration in 2025. Value alignment also holds varied meanings, with some, like the African Union strategy, grounding values in an anti-neocolonial framing, while others like Taiwan’s placing an emphasis on democratic values in opposition to mainland China.

Finally, factors will influence the possibilities of sovereign AI including infrastructure constraints, such as energy production capacity and the availability of water, and trust, both in governments as legitimate arbiters of people’s interests and in industry’s commitment to social good. Nevertheless, for now, the operative word in the future of AI appears to be sovereign.

About the Author

Trisha Ray is an associate director and resident fellow at the Atlantic Council’s GeoTech Center.

Related Content

Explore the program

The GeoTech Center champions positive paths forward that societies can pursue to ensure new technologies and data empower people, prosperity, and peace.

1    Christine Mui, “Welcome to the Global ‘AI Sovereignty’ Race,” Politico, September 18, 2024, https://www.politico.com/newsletters/digital-future-daily/2024/09/18/should-the-u-s-seek-ai-sovereignty-00179910.
2    Pablo Chavez, “Sovereign AI in a Hybrid World,” Lawfare, Lawfare Institute in collaboration with the Brookings Institution, November 2024, https://www.lawfaremedia.org/article/sovereign-ai-in-a-hybrid-world–national-strategies-and-policy-responses; Muath Alduhishy, “Sovereign AI: What It Is, and 6 Strategic Pillars for Achieving It,” World Economic Forum, April 25, 2024, https://www.weforum.org/stories/2024/04/sovereign-ai-what-is-ways-states-building/; and Amanda Kraley, Izabela Kantor, and Rodrigo Gutiérrez, “Sovereign AI Ecosystems: Navigating Global AI Infrastructure & Data Governance,” Politico and G42, September 16, 2024, https://www.politico.eu/wp-content/uploads/2024/09/15/Sovereign-AI-Ecosystems.pdf.
3    “Biased GPT? Singapore Builds AI Model to ‘Represent’ Southeast Asians,” Asahi Shimbun, February 8, 2024, https://www.asahi.com/ajw/articles/15154956.
4    “Rapid Response Information Report: Generative AI: Language Models and Multimodal Foundation Models,” Australia’s Chief Scientist, March 24, 2023, https://www.chiefscientist.gov.au/sites/default/files/2023-06/Rapid%20Response%20Information%20Report%20-%20Generative%20AI%20v1_1.pdf.
5    “Virtual Closed-Door Discussion: Assessing India’s Cybersecurity Administration and Strategy,” Carnegie India convening, October 21, 2024.
6    “Sovereignty,” Stanford Encyclopedia of Philosophy, May 31, 2003, https://plato.stanford.edu/entries/sovereignty/; and “Westphalian State System,” Oxford Reference, https://www.oxfordreference.com/display/10.1093/oi/authority.20110803121924198.
7    Roland Paris, “The Right to Dominate,” International Organization 74, no. 3 (Summer 2020): 453489, https://www.jstor.org/stable/10.2307/27104604.
8    Trisha Ray, “Digital Sovereignty: Data Governance in India,” in Regulating the Cyberspace: Perspectives from Asia, eds. Gisela Eisner and Aishwarya Natarjan, Rule of Law Programme Asia, Konrad Adenauer Stiftung, 2020, 49–64, https://www.kas.de/documents/278334/8513721/Regulating+The+Cyberspace.pdf.
9    ”Trisha Ray, “The Quest for Cyber Sovereignty Is Dark and Full of Terrors,” Observer Research Foundation, May 25, 2020, https://www.orfonline.org/expert-speak/the-quest-for-cyber-sovereignty-is-dark-and-full-of-terrors-66676.
10    Article 3, GDPR: Territorial Scope, European Union, https://gdpr-info.eu/art-3-gdpr/; and Ministry of Electronics and Information Technology, “The Digital Personal Data Protection Act, 2023,” Government of India, Chapter 1, Subsection 2 (b), https://www.meity.gov.in/static/uploads/2024/06/2bf1f0e9f04e6fb4f8fef35e82c42aa5.pdf.
11    Angie Lee, “What Is Sovereign AI,” Nvidia blog, February 28, 2024, https://blogs.nvidia.com/blog/what-is-sovereign-ai/.
12    Mark Nasila, “Sovereign AI: What It Is and Why It Is Reshaping the Future,” ITWeb Africa, October 25, 2024, https://itweb.africa/content/j5alrvQAYOVvpYQk.
13    ”Kraley, Kantor, and Gutiérrez, “Sovereign AI Ecosystems.”
14    ”Luca Belli and Walter B. Gaspar, “AI Transparency, AI Accountability, and AI Sovereignty: An Overview,” in The Quest for AI Sovereignty, Transparency and Accountability Official Outcome of the UN IGF Data and Artificial Intelligence Governance Coalition, eds. Luca Belli and Walter B. Gaspar (FGV Direito Rio: October 2023): 23.
15    Brian Caufield, “Nvidia CEO: Every Country Needs Sovereign AI,” Nvidia blog, February 12, 2024, https://blogs.nvidia.com/blog/world-governments-summit/.
16    Joanna Gao, “Nvidia CEO Jensen Huang Strengthens AI Ties in Thailand and Vietnam amid Sovereign AI Push,” DigiTimes Asia, December 11, 2024, https://www.digitimes.com/news/a20241211PD205/nvidia-ceo-jensen-huang-thailand-vietnam.html; and Bloomberg, “Nvidia CEO Jensen Huang Made a Quiet Lunar New Year’s Trip to China as the Almost $1.5 Trillion Chipmaker Tries to Navigate Biden’s Chip Controls,” via Fortune, January 22, 2024, https://fortune.com/asia/2024/01/22/nvidia-ceo-jensen-huang-lunar-new-year-trip-china-us-biden-chip-controls/.
17    “The History of the General Data Protection Regulation,” European Data Protection Supervisor, accessed December 30, 2024, https://www.edps.europa.eu/data-protection/data-protection/legislation/history-general-data-protection-regulation_en.
18    Microsoft European Affairs (@MicrosoftEU), “Digital Sovereignty is driven by 3 valid concerns that should be addressed,” Twitter, June 24, 2020, https://x.com/MicrosoftEU/status/1275749636465143808. In addition,
Satya Nadella’s speech at the 2015 Digital India Summit, while not explicitly mentioning sovereignty, is a good example of this trend as well; see Times Now, “Satya Nadella, CEO, Microsoft, at Digital India Summit | Narendra Modi in US,” September 27, 2015, https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=eGKNZVRg7VM.
19    G42 website, accessed January 15, 2025, https://www.g42.ai/;  “Microsoft/G42 AI Partnership Explained–Potential Benefits & Risks for U.S. Technological Security,” Video, US House Select Committee on the Chinese Communist Party, July 15, 2024, https://selectcommitteeontheccp.house.gov/media/videos/microsoftg42-ai-partnership-explained-potential-benefits-risks-us-technological; andVikram Barhat, “The Middle East Microsoft, OpenAI Partner Mired in National Security Controversy,” CNBC, August 25, 2024, https://www.cnbc.com/2024/08/25/a-controversial-mideast-partner-to-microsoft-openai-global-ambitions.html.
20    Kraley, Kantor, and Gutiérrez, “Sovereign AI Ecosystems.”
21    “Biased GPT?,” Asahi Shimbun.
22    “Continental Artificial Intelligence Strategy: Harnessing AI for Africa’s Development and Prosperity,” African Union, July 2024, https://au.int/sites/default/files/documents/44004-doc-EN-_Continental_AI_Strategy_July_2024.pdf.
23    Trisha Ray, “Formulating AI Norms: Intelligent Systems and Human Values,” ORF Issue Brief No. 313, September 2019, Observer Research Foundation, https://www.orfonline.org/research/formulating-ai-norms-intelligent-systems-and-human-values.

The post Sovereign remedies: Between AI autonomy and control appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>
Mapping public opinion to drive climate action in India https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/in-depth-research-reports/issue-brief/mapping-public-opinion-to-drive-climate-action-in-india/ Wed, 02 Apr 2025 18:40:04 +0000 https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/?p=836226 India stands at a crossroads in its fight against climate change.

The post Mapping public opinion to drive climate action in India appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>
India stands at a crossroads in its fight against climate change. As one of the world’s most climate-vulnerable nations and the third-largest emitter of greenhouse gases, India plays a dual role: both as a significant contributor to global emissions and as a key driver of the global energy transition. With its ambitious target of achieving net-zero emissions by 2070 under the Paris Agreement and a renewable energy capacity goal of 500 gigawatts (GW) by 2030, India is positioning itself as a leader in shaping a sustainable future. Yet despite nearly doubling its wind and solar capacity to 135 GW over the past five years, critical mitigation and adaptation challenges remain that demand tailored, data-driven approaches to policy and action. Rising temperatures and extreme heat waves, unpredictable monsoons, and rising sea levels endanger millions, especially in coastal cities and rural farmlands. For a nation with 17 percent of the global population and only 4 percent of its freshwater, climate impacts threaten not just the environment but also food and water security, affecting the livelihoods of millions. Tackling these changes demands focused, data-driven actions, but in a diverse country like India, it is crucial to tailor efforts to each region’s specific needs.

Localized climate awareness through interactive mapping: A policy tool

Public opinion is pivotal for shaping climate policy. Awareness of climate risks can help accelerate the development and implementation of effective climate policy. A recent nationally representative survey reveals some surprising insights: Despite 82 percent of Indians believing in global warming (once it’s explained), only 10 percent feel informed about it and over half have little to no understanding of the concept. What is particularly worrying is that Indians’ awareness levels about climate change have barely changed since 2011, when the survey was first conducted as part of our studies.

National surveys only provide a single number, however, to characterize the opinions of an entire country. Recent advances in statistical modeling now allow us to pool survey data from local areas and pair it with relevant geographic, census, and environmental data to construct accurate estimates of climate change opinions for subnational administrative areas. Using this approach, we mapped climate opinions across the country, and found that the knowledge gap about climate change varies widely by region (see figure 1). For example, the western state of Gujarat shows greater climate awareness compared to its southern neighbor Maharashtra, with the understanding ranging between 52 percent and 33 percent, respectively. Likewise, about half the residents in the southern state of Tamil Nadu say they “know something” or “a lot” about global warming, while only 31 percent feel knowledgeable in neighboring Andhra Pradesh. These differences present opportunities to increase local support for climate initiatives, especially in states where awareness lags.

Figure 1: Knowledge about global warming

Estimates of the percentage of adults in each state (left) and district (right) who either know “something about” or “a lot about” global warming in 2023. States and districts in yellow-to-red colors have majorities (more than 50 percent) with this level of knowledge; blue areas are where majorities said: “I know just a little about it,” “I have never heard of it,” “don’t know,” or “refused” to respond.

Public opinion maps are powerful tools for bridging these knowledge gaps. The interactive version of the India climate opinion maps show variations in public beliefs and attitudes across thirty-four of India’s thirty-six states and union territories and in 604 districts. These maps aren’t just diagnostic: By exactly identifying where knowledge is low, these maps enable policymakers and technologists to align awareness campaigns with regional needs, fostering a stronger foundation for climate action.

Imagine Maharashtra, where awareness is lower, having more support for climate action at the grassroots level. This could make local adaptation efforts—like water conservation or heat wave preparedness—more successful because the public better understands the urgency. Extreme heat is one of the most direct and widespread threats to human health from climate change, and these risks cascade to economic sectors through reduced labor productivity, decreased crop yields, and increased energy demands for cooling, straining infrastructure and resources, and exacerbating income inequality. Recent heat waves, intensified by global warming, have killed many thousands of people around the world, and yet most heat-related deaths are preventable with appropriate preparation. Many members of the public do not adequately understand the risks associated with extreme heat, however, and many are unprepared, underscoring the characterization of heat waves as “silent killers.”

Turning data into action: Targeting interventions with technology

Interactive maps based on scientific public opinion surveys do more than illustrate what people know—they guide real, on-the-ground actions to address specific regional risks. Take Bihar, a state in eastern India, for instance, where 74 percent of residents expect more severe heat waves in the coming years. This awareness has driven the state to create an early warning system and use mass texts to send heat advisories to millions. However, in regions with limited technological access, low-tech community-based solutions remain critical. Localized data about awareness levels can help identify these more vulnerable populations and inform tailored interventions. For example, Bihar’s Heat Action Plan (HAP) includes drum-based village announcements, ensuring even the most remote populations are better prepared.

Figure 2: Perceptions of severe heat waves

Estimates of the percentage of adults in each state (left) and district (right) who say that global warming will cause more severe heat waves. Areas in yellow-to-red colors have majorities (more than 50 percent) of the population who say “a few more” or “many more” heat waves. Blue areas are where the majority response was “a few less” or “many less” heat waves.

But there’s still room to grow. Also in Bihar, a state with high solar insolation levels, the installed solar capacity reached approximately 193 MW in 2023, reflecting steady growth in this area. But while 59 percent here believe India should rely more on renewable energy, many don’t yet connect extreme heat with fossil fuel use (figures 2 and 3). And solar adoption here is slower compared to neighboring states like Uttar Pradesh and Jharkhand, which have both set ambitious solar installation targets and have slightly higher public support for renewables (62 percent and 63 percent, respectively). Closing these gaps with targeted information could shift behaviors and foster broader support for sustainable practices. This is where region-specific insights can make a huge difference—not just in preparing for immediate risks but also in encouraging lasting climate resilience.

Bridging knowledge gaps for real climate action

India’s linguistic and cultural diversity adds complexity to its climate strategies. At least twenty-two major languages are spoken across the country, and thousands of regional publications inform the public. Yet many media outlets, both English and regional, miss the chance to connect climate events like heat waves directly to climate change. Only about 10 percent of media articles covering the 2022 record-breaking heat waves also mentioned climate change. By understanding what different communities believe and know, journalists, educators, and activists can tailor messages that resonate locally, bringing climate awareness directly into people’s lives.

This is where data equity comes into play. Making climate data accessible and relevant to communities is essential to ensure that everyone—from rural villages to crowded cities—can understand and act on it. Empowering people with accurate, actionable information is key to building a resilient society that is prepared to handle the challenges ahead.

India’s twenty-eight states and eight union territories each have distinct identities and approaches to climate action. Backed by a clear National Action Plan on Climate Change (NAPCC) and with tailored State Action Plans on Climate Change (SAPCCs) in place, regional governments play a major role in addressing their specific challenges. Public opinion data offer a unique opportunity for each state to adapt its strategies to local concerns, making climate policies more effective and sustainable. For example, states with higher awareness, like Gujarat, can attract investments and public-private partnerships in clean energy technology, while states with lower awareness might prioritize educational programs alongside infrastructure projects. Companies like ReNew Power and Tata Power, for example, are helping to drive renewable energy adoption and smart grid integration across India. Pursuing these kinds of collaborations with a greater awareness of how district-level opinions vary can help accelerate local climate action and ensure that each region’s unique needs and perspectives shape its climate approach.

Figure 3: Perceptions of fossil fuels and renewable energy

Estimates of the percentage of adults in each state who say that India should use less fossil fuels (left) and more renewables (right). Areas in yellow-to-red colors have majorities (more than 50 percent) of the population who say India should use “less” or “much less” fossil fuels than today (left) and “more” or “much more” renewable energy sources (right) than today. Blue areas are where the majority response was “somewhat more” or “much more” fossil fuels (left) or “somewhat less” or “much less” renewable energy sources than today (right).

Localized climate insights can power the changes that India needs, accelerating the shift to clean energy and building resilience against climate impacts. However, current policies—like fossil fuel subsidies and price caps —present significant challenges. These measures, while aimed at shielding low-income households from rising energy costs, often lock in dependence on fossil fuels and divert resources away from renewable investments. For example, fossil fuel subsidies in India still outweigh subsidies for renewables, undermining the economic incentives for a clean energy transition.

Public opinion surveys provide a valuable opportunity to address these misalignments by demonstrating that support for renewable energy is strong, even in states with significant fossil fuel reliance (figure 3). By leveraging localized public opinion data, India can reframe subsidy reforms as not only economically prudent but also widely supported by the public. By better aligning policies with both national and regional data, India can ensure that efforts to reduce emissions and prepare for climate impacts reflect the voices of its people.

The future of climate resilience in India depends on both bridging the gap between data and action through enabling renewable energy technologies and gaining greater awareness of public understanding about climate change causes and solutions. When interactive maps and survey data are accessible and used to guide local strategies, they become invaluable tools. Scaling models using insights from localized data can transform regional adaptation strategies, including the deployment of clean technologies and renewable energy solutions; this can be done by aligning public knowledge with practical policy initiatives such as job training for the renewable energy industry, which also has widespread support (figure 4). Emphasizing technology-driven, equitable access ensures interventions resonate with India’s diverse population.

Figure 4: Perceptions on national training programs

Estimates of the percentage of adults in each state (left) and district (right) who favor a national program to train people for new jobs in the renewable energy industry. Areas in yellow-to-red colors have majorities (more than 50 percent) of the population who “somewhat” or “strongly favor” the policy. Blue areas would show where the majority response was “somewhat” or “strongly oppose” the policy, but no states or districts are blue.

By building awareness of public opinion among diverse stakeholders and reflecting the insights from the data back to the public, policymakers build trust and alignment in decision-making. This approach allows everyone—from local communities to state governments to national policymakers—to have confidence in collective efforts that aim to tackle climate change head-on. By building a common sense of purpose, India can catalyze the testing and scaling of technology-based interventions to achieve its long-term strategic goal of becoming a vishwa guru, a global leader in climate action.

About the Authors

Jennifer Marlon is a senior research scientist at the Yale School of the Environment and the executive director of the Yale Center for Geospatial Solutions.

Jagadish Thaker (JT) is a senior lecturer at the University of Queensland and research associate at the Yale Program on Climate Change Communication.

Related Content

Explore the program

The GeoTech Center champions positive paths forward that societies can pursue to ensure new technologies and data empower people, prosperity, and peace.

The post Mapping public opinion to drive climate action in India appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>
Rescuing Pakistan’s economy https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/in-depth-research-reports/issue-brief/rescuing-pakistans-economy/ Tue, 01 Apr 2025 22:23:29 +0000 https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/?p=836913 For decades, Pakistan has struggled with a declining standard of living, skyrocketing public debt, and economic policies that have failed to address the root causes of its stagnation.

The post Rescuing Pakistan’s economy appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>

Table of contents

Booming population growth and poor economic policy management have relegated Pakistan from the richest economy in South Asia to the poorest over the last fifty years. Population expansion has held back saving, investment, and economic growth. Persistent macroeconomic imbalances have resulted in an unbearably high public debt interest burden and the country faces a wall of external debt repayments coming due. Corrective policies adopted under recent International Monetary Fund (IMF) programs have stabilized economic conditions, as have the softening of oil prices and debt rollovers agreed to by official external creditors. Going forward, however, policy plans look tough to sustain. On the revenue side, the effort looks excessively front loaded but not ambitious enough over the medium term. At the same time, insufficient financing implies an expenditure envelope that will not permit the necessary increase in social and investment spending to meaningfully lift living standards. An alternative strategy, under which deeper tax reforms are adopted at a steadier pace and more space is given to social and investment spending, would be more promising. Policy effort and expenditures would need to focus on enhancing access to family planning, health, and education services, especially for girls and women. That would support a virtuous cycle of higher saving, investment, and economic growth over the longer term. Increased international support at concessional terms would help rescue Pakistan’s economy.1

I. Introduction

Pakistan’s economic performance over the past five decades was dismal. Living standards improved far more slowly than in the rest of South Asia, while expansion in access to education and healthcare also lagged. Rapid population growth—much brisker than in neighboring countries—held down saving and investment substantially, severely constraining economic growth. At the same time, poor macroeconomic policies resulted in persistent imbalances punctuated by frequent crises. The latest crisis germinated during the COVID-19 pandemic, with the adoption of unaffordable budget and credit policies. The cost of servicing public debt had risen so much that it was eating up almost two-thirds of government revenue. As foreign exchange reserves were depleted and global oil prices escalated, default on external debt obligations seemed imminent as Pakistan faced a wall of annual debt repayments that far exceeded its reserves. 

The adoption of corrective policies under an IMF financial support program has brought Pakistan back from the brink, but sustaining the program as currently designed will be challenging. Official creditors, who together hold the bulk of Pakistan’s external debt, have committed to rolling over principal repayments coming due, thereby addressing the near-term amortization wall. The normalization of world oil prices has also helped, dramatically reducing the import bill and allowing reserves to recover and the rupee to stabilize. However, insufficient new concessional financing has imposed an excessively harsh spending path. Pressing needs to improve education and health access for the poor and enhance climate resilience will be left unaddressed. Moreover, while plans to broaden the tax net are sound, the speed with which tax revenue is being targeted to rise is unrealistic and could prove self-defeating. In view of these risks, some observers have suggested debt restructuring as an alternative, but such a strategy would magnify, rather than mitigate, the risks.

A surer way to rescue Pakistan’s economy entails a more balanced, but also more sustained, fiscal adjustment effort coupled with strong and well-funded efforts to slow population growth and improve access to education and health services. Commitment by economic policymakers will be needed to raise revenue at a steady pace well beyond the level targeted under the IMF program, and to significantly redirect and augment spending. Far-reaching improvements must be achieved in the areas of health and education, especially for girls and women, so that the average Pakistani’s standard of living starts to catch up with that of the rest of South Asia. A better living standard is also essential to sustain the momentum for needed economic adjustment and reform. To achieve the saving and investment rates that would meaningfully lift economic growth over the longer term, population growth will have to slow markedly. With fiscal space already stretched as far as possible, such a strategy would rest on much surer footing with a sizable infusion of concessional financing from multilateral and bilateral creditors.

This paper is organized as follows. Section II starts by sketching the unfavorable past performance of the Pakistan economy, covering the relationship between Pakistan’s burgeoning population, low saving and investment, and anemic growth. It then outlines the principal macroeconomic challenges faced by the economy—the mushrooming interest bill that the government must pay on its debt and the wall of external debt repayments coming due over the next several years. Section III describes the IMF adjustment program that is now under way. It documents how the program has helped stabilize the economy but cautions that the initial pace of adjustment may prove self-defeating. Moreover, insufficient financing places the key objective—a sustained improvement in Pakistanis’ living standard—at risk. Section IV concludes by suggesting a better path under which a deeper adjustment effort is undertaken, with special attention to family planning, education, and health access to promote much greater saving, investment, and economic growth over the longer term. Increased international liquidity support on concessional terms over the near and medium term could greatly enhance the prospects for rescuing Pakistan’s economy.

II. What has gone wrong with Pakistan’s economy

Over the past half century, Pakistanis’ standard of living has declined precipitously relative to their South Asian counterparts. Galloping population growth and poor economic policy management are to blame. Population expansion has depressed saving and investment, which, in turn, has hamstrung economic growth. Meanwhile, the government has run up public debt by persistently failing to live within its means, so much so that interest on that debt now eats up almost two-thirds of public revenue and leaves little to spend on essential items. Economic policymakers’ preference to keep imports cheap—via an overvalued exchange rate while running up external debt—has made the economy uncompetitive and caused frequent crises. Foreign exchange shortages have periodically emerged, necessitating cycles of steep devaluation of the currency and adoption of painful austerity measures that have subsequently been reversed. During the latest episode in 2021–2023, foreign exchange reserves of the central bank fell to about two weeks’ worth of imports and less than one-quarter of the external public debt repayments falling due over the coming year. The rupee lost more than half of its value against the dollar and inflation jumped to 38 percent, seriously impacting the living standard of the average Pakistani.

Going from richest to poorest

Pakistan’s economic performance over the past fifty-five years has been dreary compared with that of its neighbors, in terms of both economic well-being and socio-economic attainment. In the early 1970s, the average Pakistani’s income was higher than that of the average Sri Lankan, and almost one and a half times that of the average Bangladeshi or Indian. By 2023, Pakistan’s per capita income had fallen, in relative terms, to only about half of the level in those other three countries. 

Gross national income per capita

Source: World Bank, World Development Indicators Database. *1973

The story has been similarly disappointing in terms of health indicators. In terms of enhancing life expectancy and curbing the prevalence of stunting among children, progress has been much lower than elsewhere in South Asia, with Pakistan falling to last in each category. Educational attainment—whether measured through primary school completion rates or secondary or tertiary school enrollment—has also failed to keep up. In all metrics, Pakistan stands well behind its neighbors today, even though it was at a comparable level just a few decades ago. 

Secondary school enrollment rate (percent)

Source: World Bank, World Development Indicators Database

Life expectancy at birth (years)

Source: World Bank, World Development Indicators Database

Failure to invest adequately has held back Pakistan’s economic growth and its advancement in human achievement indicators. Investment, whether in development of human resources or in building capital resources such as infrastructure, factories, or machines, expands the ability of an economy to produce more goods and services, and to produce them more efficiently. Since the 1980s, Pakistan’s investment rate (or gross fixed capital formation in relation to its gross domestic product) has been consistently lower than that of India and Sri Lanka; since the mid-1990s, it has also been much lower than that of Bangladesh. In the years before the global pandemic, Pakistan was investing less than half as much as its neighbors. In contrast to the other countries, Pakistan’s investment rate has trended downward over the past three decades. It is no surprise, then, that economic growth was weaker than elsewhere, and human development, as measured in terms of educational and health outcomes, also lagged.

Gross fixed capital formation (percent of GDP)

Source: World Bank, World Development Indicators Database

An inability to save constrained the availability of funds for investment. Although foreign borrowing and direct investment can supplement domestic investment, the bulk of the financing for investment in any economy comes from domestic saving. In Pakistan, the domestic saving rate has been well below its neighbors’ since the late 1990s, and the gap has widened steadily. Over the past five years, Pakistan saved at a rate that was only one-fifth as high as that of other South Asian countries. It is no wonder, then, that investment was also much lower. Many factors determine saving behavior, such as wealth, income growth, and structural factors. All have undoubtedly mattered, but the effect of population growth was especially significant.

Gross domestic saving (percent of GDP)

Source: World Bank, World Development Indicators Database

A key reason why saving is so meager is that a much larger share of Pakistan’s population isn’t of working age. To see how that affects saving, consider the saving behavior of two typical households. If they are identical in terms of income, wealth, and other factors, and differ only in their number of young children (who are not of working age), the household with fewer dependents will clearly be able to save a greater fraction of its income. This difference has been stark in South Asia. Pakistan’s ratio of working-age population to total population is presently below 60 percent, while other regional countries reached that level in the 1980s (Sri Lanka) or the 1990s (India and Bangladesh) and now have ratios at or above two-thirds.

Working age population (percent of total population)

Source: World Bank, Health, Nutrition, and Population Statistics Database

Pakistan’s rapid population growth has kept its working-age ratio low, which inhibits saving. In fifty years, the number of Pakistanis has quadrupled while the number of Sri Lankans has less than doubled and the populations of Bangladesh and India have increased two and a half fold. Hence, the share of young people has remained much higher in Pakistan while it declined rapidly in the other countries. In 2023, 36 percent of Pakistan’s population was fifteen years old or younger, compared to 22–25 percent in Bangladesh, India, and Sri Lanka. This translated into relatively fewer working-age people who could save and more dependents on whom their income had to be spent.

Policy mismanagement

Meanwhile, Pakistan’s persistently large fiscal and external deficits have resulted in a rapid rise in public debt and in the interest cost to service that debt, as well as frequent shortages of foreign exchange and repeated economic crises.2 The latest crisis took root in the aftermath of the global pandemic and came to the fore after the commodity price shocks precipitated by the Russia-Ukraine war. Unaffordable policies such as heavily subsidized credit schemes introduced by the central bank and expanded government spending, especially bigger energy subsidies, amplified the already large external and fiscal imbalances. By the end of fiscal year 2021–2022 (July–June), the budget deficit had widened to almost 8 percent of gross domestic product (GDP) and the external current account deficit to near 5 percent of GDP. Reserves were plummeting and imports were surging. The crisis forced policymakers to impose controls on imports and allow the rupee to depreciate. In two years, the value of the rupee fell by more than half against the dollar, sharply raising the value of external debt in rupees and increasing its share in total public debt. As of mid-2024, public and publicly guaranteed debt amounted to 75 percent of GDP, of which around 40 percent was denominated in foreign currencies and owed to external creditors. 

1. The hefty interest burden

The persistent failure to generate revenue sufficient to meet expenditure requirements has long plagued Pakistan. Consistent fiscal gaps over the years have led to an accumulation of public debt, which by the end of 2018–2019 amounted to almost 80 percent of GDP, approximately seven times the government’s annual revenue intake. That year, the final one before the onset of the pandemic, government expenditures surpassed revenue by an astounding two-thirds. Both ratios, relative to revenue, ranked among the highest in emerging market and developing economies worldwide. The perpetually large public-sector deficit has also swallowed up much of the banking system’s financing, thereby crowding out private investment.

As debt continued to climb, so did the interest payments that the government was obligated to make. By 2018–2019, these payments consumed more than 40 percent of the government’s annual revenue intake. Put differently, nearly half of the government’s earnings were being funneled into servicing interest to pay for past spending, significantly constraining its ability to meet present expenditure requirements without resorting to even more borrowing. Historical patterns from other countries indicate that maintaining a ratio above 25 percent for a prolonged period is uncommon. Indeed, in the decade leading up to the global pandemic, Pakistan was one of only five emerging markets or developing economies, out of a sample of more than sixty countries, that saw this ratio reach or exceed 40 percent. Only one other country ever even reached 30 percent, and only three others went beyond 25 percent during 2010–2019. Thus, international experience suggests that it is important not to let the interest-revenue ratio rise above 25 percent. By contrast, in Pakistan in the last two years—following the onset of the latest economic crisis and the escalation in borrowing costs—this ratio has reached 60 percent, again one of the highest among all countries. This is clearly unsustainable, both fiscally and from a social stability perspective. 

Public interest bill (percent of government revenue; 2023)

Source: IMF World Economic Outlook Database, Oct. 2024. For countries with negative net interest bill (e.g., oil exporting countries), zero value is shown.


2. The external debt repayments problem

In an effort to keep imports relatively cheap, Pakistani policymakers have tried to sustain an overvalued rupee by borrowing foreign exchange rather than earning it. Traditionally, the foreign borrowing came mainly through aid inflows but, increasingly, Pakistan has turned to commercial borrowing.3 However, whenever oil prices have spiked (energy imports account for 20–40 percent of total imports), aid flows have declined, or access to international borrowing has dried up, the perpetually low official reserves cover has eroded to dangerous levels. This has precipitated rupee devaluation, a collapse in economic growth, and signing on to an IMF program to gain access to exceptional financing.

In the latest episode, in fiscal year 2021–2022, the story was similar but magnified. Stepped up external borrowing, a temporary reprieve on account of rich countries’ debt service suspension initiative (DSSI, which suspended $3.7 billion of debt service payments), and exceptional financing from the IMF during the pandemic ($1.4 billion emergency financing plus $2.8 billion special drawing rights allocation) provided the foreign exchange for an external shopping spree. Massive, subsidized credit schemes launched by the central bank further fueled import demand. The external current account deficit widened to nearly 5 percent of GDP, reserves fell rapidly, and import growth reached 60 percent on an annual basis during part of the year. 

Then came the moment of reckoning. The DSSI concluded and access to international market financing evaporated. New bilateral and multilateral lending also slowed. The commodity price shocks triggered by the Russia-Ukraine war compounded the problem by driving up the cost of imports, particularly oil, even higher. Pakistan’s foreign exchange reserves plummeted further, while private external financing became virtually inaccessible. By June 2023, reserves had dwindled to less than $4 billion, barely enough to cover two weeks’ worth of imports and only 10 percent of the staggering $30-billion gross financing needs for the coming year. With such meager reserves and external debt repayments of $15–20 billion in each of the next five years looming, the external financing situation appeared untenable. Drastic import restrictions had to be enforced to contain the crisis, and interest rates were hiked sharply. These measures, however, severely disrupted economic activity. By the end of 2022–2023, the rupee had lost more than half its value against the dollar in just two years and inflation shot up to 38 percent.

III. Corrective policies adopted but serious risks linger

Macroeconomic conditions have started to improve since mid-2023, after corrective policies were adopted and an adjustment program was agreed upon with the IMF. Bilateral and multilateral creditors—who together hold around 85 percent of Pakistan’s external debt—committed to rolling over principal repayments coming due, thereby addressing the near-term amortization problem. The normalization of world prices of primary commodities, particularly petroleum, also helped. As a result, official foreign exchange reserves have rebounded to above $12 billion and import restrictions have been lifted. Pressure on the rupee has subsided and the exchange rate against the dollar has stabilized. Inflation has come down to under 3 percent as of January 2025. 

Paltry new concessional financing from official creditors, however, looks set to impose an excessively harsh spending path that will be challenging to sustain. Pressing needs to improve education and health access for the poor and to enhance climate resilience will be left unaddressed. Moreover, while plans to broaden the tax net are sound, the speed with which tax revenue is being targeted to rise is unrealistic and could prove self-defeating. Insufficient concessional external liquidity will also force more domestic borrowing by the government, implying a higher interest bill and greater crowding out of private investment. In view of these risks, some observers have suggested debt default and restructuring as an alternative to consider, but such a strategy would magnify, rather than mitigate, risks. 

Addressing the imbalances

The latest adjustment program seeks to address the fiscal imbalance by reducing the need to borrow. Under the thirty-seven-month IMF Enhanced Fund Facility (EFF) program agreed to in September 2024, the plan is to cut the budget deficit by 3 percent of GDP (almost in half) over three years. All of this would come from increased tax revenue, with two-thirds of the targeted gain coming in the first year. At the same time, the wall of external debt repayments by the public sector, of around $14 billion annually in each of the next five years, will be overcome by getting bilateral and multilateral creditors to roll over their loans.4 Obtaining assurances that sound macroeconomic policies are being implemented under the IMF program, these official creditors would be expected to maintain their loan exposures to Pakistan.

Achieving a revenue increase of this scale, by 3 percentage points of GDP in three years, looks attainable. With revenue collection currently at roughly 12.5 percent of GDP, Pakistan ranks among the weakest countries globally in this regard. As of 2021, only one out of every one hundred Pakistanis actively filed a personal income tax return. Meanwhile, the retail and agricultural sectors constitute nearly half of the economy but contribute almost nothing in income taxes. Property tax collection and tax receipts from real estate and construction services remain meager. A determined and sustained effort to expand the tax base to encompass these and other undertaxed sectors could significantly enhance government revenue. Reforming federal-provincial fiscal arrangements to provide provinces with stronger incentives to generate revenue would further support this objective. Given these factors, aiming to bridge half of the revenue shortfall (around 3 percentage points of GDP) by reaching the 25th percentile among emerging market and developing economies within three years is a reasonable target.

Revenue/GDP (percentage)

Source: Data taken from IMF World Economic Outlook Database, Oct 2024.

What could possibly go wrong?

While the planned tax increase over three years looks reasonable, packing two-thirds of it into the first year does not. Setting an overambitious initial target and then failing to meet it—possibly by a large margin—would undermine the credibility of the longer-term plan. On the other hand, if such a large jump in tax collection is somehow achieved, it would impart a large contractionary impulse on the economy just as it emerges from crisis. Either way, this would further magnify risks to sustaining the adjustment.

Despite the gargantuan tax effort, the space for increased primary (non-interest) spending under the program is nonexistent. The plan calls for holding primary spending at just above 13 percent of GDP for three years. Although slightly higher than the crisis-compressed level in the past two years, this would be below what was seen in each of the previous ten.5 Moreover, despite the substantial closing of the revenue gap, Pakistan’s primary spending gap with the lowest quartile among all emerging market and developing economies of 6 percentage points of GDP would not close at all. Improving the quality of public spending is clearly necessary and will allow some increased allocation to priority areas. For example, more than 1 percent of GDP is expended on untargeted subsidies, and inefficient state-owned enterprises also devour large fiscal resources. Achieving cost savings in these areas is crucial. However, given the alarmingly high poverty rate, the dismal state of health and education—particularly for the underprivileged—and the pressing need for extensive climate-resilient infrastructure to sustain economic growth, merely reallocating these cost savings will not suffice. More needs to be spent. Without that, it is hard to see how public support for the critical broadening of the tax net can be sustained.

Primary spending/GDP (percentage)

Source: Data taken from IMF World Economic Outlook Database, Oct 2024.

Moreover, insufficient concessional financing will keep the interest bill excessively high and crowd out private investment. With official creditors only maintaining their exposure, rather than providing additional financing, the government’s new borrowing will need to come entirely from the domestic market at non-concessional interest rates. That will put upward pressure on domestic rates and eat into the financing available for private investment. The EFF program projects the government’s interest bill to remain above 30 percent of revenue even after five years of severe austerity, implying persistently high sustainability risk based on international experience. Investment is projected to remain weak, averaging only 15.5 percent of GDP over the next five years—about the same as in the decade before the pandemic, and below the 16-percent average level since 1990. 

Modest investment and subdued overall primary spending do not bode well. Prospects for a meaningful improvement in social indicators appear dim. Space to address poverty reduction and climate resilience seems absent. Hence, Pakistan’s economic fortune is likely to remain hostage to heightened social stability and economic underperformance risks.  

Debt default would make things worse

Recognizing these risks, some observers have suggested pursuing a different strategy under which Pakistan seeks to restructure its debt to free up resources to support the economy.6 At the height of the recent crisis, it appeared unavoidable that Pakistan would join the growing list of heavily indebted emerging market and developing economies forced to default and restructure their debt. However, the composition of Pakistan’s debt—with almost all interest payments going to domestic creditors and virtually all of the remaining external debt owed to bilateral and multilateral creditors—severely limits the potential benefits from default or restructuring, while imposing considerable costs.7

Restructuring external debt would do little to alleviate the overwhelming interest burden and could introduce additional challenges. More than 85 percent of the interest the government pays comes from its domestic debt, meaning that, even if external debt interest payments were suspended, the overall burden would remain largely unchanged. Furthermore, defaulting on external debt would come at a steep cost, potentially disrupting trade by cutting off trade credits and exposing foreign assets to seizure by creditors seeking repayment. Given that the vast majority of external debt is owed to official creditors, failing to meet these obligations could also strain diplomatic relations with allied nations and jeopardize access to funding and development projects from multilateral institutions such as the World Bank and the Asian Development Bank. 

Restructuring domestic debt could significantly reduce interest payments, but the resulting economic and financial upheaval would likely outweigh any benefits. Nearly 60 percent of the government’s domestic debt is held by banks, and these government securities account for roughly 60 percent of total bank assets. Consequently, any restructuring of the government’s domestic debt would inevitably affect bank-held debt, and any reduction in its value would directly affect the financial sector’s stability. Even a modest 10-percent haircut would wipe out the capital base of the banking system, though individual banks would experience varying degrees of impact. The resulting disruptions would be severe, affecting bank shareholders, depositors, and other government debt holders, including households and insurance and pension funds. Given these risks, restructuring domestic debt should be considered only as a last resort. 

IV. A better way forward

A less risky and less painful way to rescue Pakistan’s economy is possible. It will require sustained commitment by Pakistan’s economic policymakers to not only raise revenue at a steady pace but also significantly redirect and augment spending. Far-reaching improvements must be achieved in the areas of health, education, and climate resilience, so that the average Pakistani’s—and especially poor Pakistanis’—standard of living starts to catch up with that of the rest of South Asia. A better living standard is also essential to sustain the momentum for needed economic adjustment and reform. Significantly higher saving and investment can be attained with slower population growth, which, in turn, will lift the growth potential of the economy. However, with fiscal space already stretched as far as possible, and the government’s financing need already crowding out funds for private investment, such a strategy is possible only with a sizable infusion of concessional financing from multilateral and bilateral creditors. 

Getting revenue and spending right—an alternate strategy

There is no escaping the need to collect more tax revenue. Remaining among the worst-performing countries worldwide in terms of tax collection is untenable if Pakistan’s economic fortunes are to be improved. Broadening the tax net to cover those paying little or no taxes must be the top priority. Tax administration can, and should, be improved as well. Thus, the EFF program target of 3 percent of GDP revenue increase in three years is not only achievable but needs to be surpassed. Over five to six years, it should be feasible to expand revenue by a further 3 percentage points to reach the 25th percentile of emerging market and developing economies. Without that, there simply would not be sufficient fiscal space. That said, attempting to front-load the revenue effort undermines its credibility and could prove self-defeating. Targeting a steady increase of 1 percentage point a year would be much likelier to succeed.

Spending more wisely is clearly warranted, but the yawning gaps in the social services and infrastructure areas indicate that more needs to be spent in total. Allocating half of the revenue increase to primary expenditure would strike a reasonable balance between deficit reduction and advancing economic well-being. In other words, the targeted expansion in tax revenue should permit an increase in primary spending of 3 percent of GDP over five to six years. In addition, with deficit reduction the government’s borrowing need will diminish, allowing interest rates—which are already on a downward trajectory thanks to moderating inflation—to come down further.8 As a result, an additional 3 percent of GDP in primary expenditure expansion should be attainable from savings on interest payments.9 In total, primary spending would rise by 6 percentage points, bringing Pakistan to the 25th percentile of emerging market and developing economies, commensurate with the revenue side. 

Comprehensive structural reforms must go hand in hand with fiscal adjustment. Beyond expanding the tax base and redefining federal-provincial fiscal responsibilities, significant strides are needed to tackle the cost inefficiencies in the power sector, in order to halt the accumulation of massive arrears while providing some relief to consumers.10 At the same time, both the quality and scale of social-sector expenditures—covering health, education, population planning, and income support—must be strengthened. Delegating these expenditures to provincial and sub-provincial authorities, with appropriate oversight, could enhance spending efficiency and potentially foster greater public acceptance of fiscal reforms. Additionally, such measures would help correct the unsustainable fiscal imbalance between the federal and provincial governments, in which nearly 60 percent of federal tax receipts are transferred to the provinces. Equally crucial is the privatization of inefficient state-owned enterprises, which would relieve pressure on the national budget and improve service delivery.

Changing the financing mix

However, the interest bill will only come down to a safe level with significant new concessional financing. The tax and primary spending paths described above would imply somewhat more gradual narrowing of the budget deficit than that targeted under the EFF. Government debt would still decline substantially in relation to GDP, but again a bit more gradually than under the EFF. Thus, the interest bill will also decline more slowly. Despite higher revenue under this alternate strategy, the interest-to-revenue ratio would ease to less than 25 percent by the end of the decade only if a sizable chunk of the government’s new borrowing during the next five to six years can be raised on concessional terms. 

Arranging the requisite concessional financing might not be as difficult as it seems. Bilateral and multilateral lenders have already recognized the need to roll over their loans in a coordinated manner under the EFF program. In its regular reviews of the program, the IMF will seek assurances from each of the main official creditors that the rollovers will continue. Extending this coordination role to pressing official creditors to temporarily increase (rather than just maintain) exposures seems feasible. If each creditor can be assured that all others will follow suit, such coordination can be in the creditors’ collective interest because it will improve the prospect of Pakistan successfully overcoming its debt challenges. Increased data transparency relating to official creditors’ claims and effective interest rates would facilitate such coordination.11

Concessional financing should be directed toward infrastructure and climate resilience initiatives to maximize its contribution to economic growth and job creation. A portion of external funding could even be allocated to retiring, at a discount, high-emission energy projects that have become uncompetitive compared to clean solar alternatives but are still operating in order to cover debt service costs. Given the historically weak performance of public investment projects, active participation from bilateral and multilateral creditors in selecting and executing these projects appears crucial to ensuring their effectiveness.12

Boosting saving and investment through demographic change

Even with the requisite new concessional financing flows, the boost to investment will not be enough to close the income gap with the rest of South Asia. Official creditors’ support, in the form of well-selected and monitored investment projects, will certainly lift economic growth prospects. By reducing the government’s domestic borrowing need, the liquidity support will also crowd in private investment. As a result, investment could rise to 20 percent of GDP by the end of the decade, significantly higher than the 16.5 percent projected under the EFF program. However, the gap with investment rates in India and Bangladesh would remain large—near 10 percentage points—implying little prospect for even maintaining, let alone closing, the gap in living standards. To close the income gap, Pakistan’s investment rate must be lifted much higher. That will require much more saving, which, in turn, will depend on success in changing Pakistan’s demographic structure.

Pakistan’s saving rate would have been substantially greater if its working-age population ratio had been as high as in other South Asian countries. Economists studying the determinants of saving behavior across different countries have generally found a significant impact of changes in demographic structure on saving. Applying estimates obtained for Southeast Asian countries, it turns out that if Pakistan’s working-age ratio had been equal to the average of Bangladesh, India, and Sri Lanka—or about 8 percentage points more than it was over the past twenty-five years—the saving rate in Pakistan would have been almost 10 percentage points of GDP higher.13

With much more savings, Pakistan would have seen more investment, faster economic growth, and a much higher standard of living today. Had the saving rate been 10 percentage points greater, investment would have been higher by 10 percentage points too, because the additional savings would have been available to lend to investors. Indeed, the impact might have been even greater because of a multiplier effect—higher saving and investment raise income, which yields more saving and, therefore, more investment. Even without such a multiplier effect, with just 10 percentage points higher investment, Pakistan’s economy would have grown by 1–1.5 percent more per year.14 Over twenty-five years, that would have translated into a massive difference of 30–45 percent. In other words, per capita income in Pakistan today would have been close to the level of Bangladesh and India.

Intense public policy effort to achieve slower population growth and a better educated and healthier workforce would help close the income gap. With less rapid population expansion, the share of it that is of working age would rise, lifting saving, private investment, and economic growth. With adequate funding and sharp focus on family-planning education campaigns, an increase in the working-age population ratio of 5 percentage points or more within a decade is achievable, as witnessed in Bangladesh, India, and Sri Lanka. The experience of Bangladesh over the past half century suggests that improved education access and employment prospects for girls and women—through Grameen Bank and other microfinance institutions’ loans to women and the garment sector’s employment of women—probably also drove the slowdown in population growth. Thus, public policies and expenditure to dramatically improve Pakistanis’ access to education, especially female education, will equip the workforce with skills that enhance productivity and earning potential. Without comparable education attainment levels, it is difficult to see how the Pakistani workforce’s productivity can catch up to other South Asian workforces’ productivity levels. And, of course, supportive policies and public spending are needed to improve the health of the workforce, also without which Pakistan cannot attain the productivity and income levels of neighboring countries. 

To realize these gains in living standards over the long term, steadfast implementation of sound policies and generous support from international partners will be needed over the medium term. Shifts in demographic structure are not quick, but they are indispensable for Pakistan’s long-term success. To make space for the needed public spending on education, health, and family planning—and to create a supportive environment for private investment—Pakistan must address its macroeconomic imbalances in a robust but socially sustainable way. Without liquidity support from bilateral and multilateral partners, the adjustment process will be much harder and riskier.

About the author


Aasim M. Husain is a fellow at the Consortium for Development Policy Research and a former staff member of the International Monetary Fund. 

Explore the program

Through our Rafik Hariri Center for the Middle East, the Atlantic Council works with allies and partners in Europe and the wider Middle East to protect US interests, build peace and security, and unlock the human potential of the region.

1    Asim M. Husain is a fellow at the Consortium for Development Policy Research and a former staff member of the International Monetary Fund. The parts of this paper relating to debt draw on and update a recent companion piece: Aasim M. Husain, “Resolving Pakistan’s Debt Problems,” Finance for Development Lab, October 22, 2024, https://findevlab.org/resolving-pakistans-debt-problems/.
2    The fiscal deficit refers to the government’s budget deficit. The external deficit refers to the deficit in the current account of the balance of payments.
3    See, for example: Saqib Jafarey, et al., “Are Overseas Remittances a Source of Dutch Disease in Pakistan?” Consortium for Development Policy Research and Finance for Development Lab, Paris School of Economics, March 2024, https://cdpr.org.pk/wp-content/uploads/2018/02/Policy-Brief-3-1-Overseas-Remittances.pdf. They conclude that high inflows of aid and remittances helped sustain exchange rate overvaluation, which, in turn, held back export growth.
4    The IMF projects Pakistan’s external financing requirement over the next five years, including repayments to the IMF, to average around $22 billion annually. Of this, $14 billion is public debt amortization.
5    Primary spending in 2023–2024 (not shown in the chart) fell further to 11.6 percent of GDP, from 12.4 percent in 2022–2023.
6    See, for example: Murtaza Syed, “Break the Taboos Propping Up Unsustainable Debt,” Economist, August 28, 2024, https://www.economist.com/by-invitation/2024/08/28/break-the-taboos-propping-up-unsustainable-debt-pleads-a-former-central-banker; Sanjay Kathuria, “Pakistan Should Restructure its Debt Now,” Project Syndicate, September 25, 2024, https://www.project-syndicate.org/commentary/pakistan-needs-public-debt-restructuring-by-sanjay-kathuria-1-2024-09
7    See, for example: Aasim M. Husain, “The Right Medicine for Pakistan’s Ailing Economy,” Project Syndicate, December 16, 2024, https://www.project-syndicate.org/commentary/how-to-address-pakistan-debt-crisis-by-aasim-m-husain-2024-12. In addition, Riaz Riazuddin and Sajjad Zaheer, “A Narrow Path Out of a Dangerous Place: Debt Management and Sustainability Issues in Pakistan,” Consortium for Development Policy Research and Finance for Development Lab, Paris School of Economics, July 2023, https://cdpr.org.pk/wp-content/uploads/2018/02/Policy-Brief-3-2-A-Narrow-Path.pdf, conclude based on more thorough analysis that Pakistan can avoid debt restructuring but will remain dependent on bilateral creditors for liquidity support.
8    The central bank started lowering its key policy rate from 22 percent in June 2024, once inflation had moderated significantly. Policy rate cuts have continued as the disinflation process proceeds; as of January 2025, the policy rate stood at 12 percent.
9    The EFF program also projects the interest bill to decline by 3 percentage points to 4.8 percent of GDP over five years. “Pakistan: 2024 Article IV Consultation and Request for an Extended Arrangement under the Extended Fund Facility-Press Release; Staff Report; and Statement by the Executive Director for Pakistan,” International Monetary Fund, October 2024, https://www.elibrary.imf.org/view/journals/002/2024/310/002.2024.issue-310-en.xml?cid=556152-com-dsp-crossref
10    Ibid. Power-sector payment arrears amounted to 4 percent of GDP at the end of 2023–2024. The arrears have accumulated because of the failure of tariffs to keep pace with prices; inefficient management of electricity distribution and transmission; under-collections from customers; and delayed maintenance coupled with weak transmission and distribution infrastructure. 
11    Husain, “Resolving Pakistan’s Debt Problems.”
12    Farrukh Iqbal and Ijaz Nabi, “Pakistan’s External Debt Dilemma,” Center for Global Development, March 11, 2024, https://www.cgdev.org/publication/pakistans-external-debt-dilemma; Consortium for Development Policy Research (CDPR) and Finance for Development Lab (FDL), Paris School of Economics, 2024. These authors found that the World Bank’s switch to quick-disbursing budget support rather than project loans in Pakistan was associated with real exchange rate appreciation and stagnation of manufacturing and exports.
13    Hamid Faruqee and Aasim M. Husain, “Saving Trends in Southeast Asia: A Cross-Country Analysis,” Asian Economic Journal 12, 3 (1998), https://onlinelibrary.wiley.com/doi/10.1111/1467-8381.00060. The extrapolation to Pakistan is based on the estimated effect for Malaysia, Singapore, and Thailand, with all other factors affecting saving unchanged. The estimates for Indonesia would imply an even larger effect for Pakistan.
14    Assuming an initial capital to output ratio of 3, 10 percentage points more investment would have translated into 3 percent faster growth in capital. Depending on the assumed share of capital in output, this would imply 1–1.5 percent faster annual output growth.

The post Rescuing Pakistan’s economy appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>
Why NATO’s Defence Planning Process will transform the Alliance for decades to come https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/in-depth-research-reports/issue-brief/why-natos-defence-planning-process-will-transform-the-alliance-for-decades-to-come/ Mon, 31 Mar 2025 13:00:00 +0000 https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/?p=837061 NATO’s successes over the last seventy-six years are the result of constant adaptation, and the Alliance is now going through its most profound changes since the end of the Cold War.

The post Why NATO’s Defence Planning Process will transform the Alliance for decades to come appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>
The NATO Defence Planning Process (NDPP) is little known outside defense ministries. But today this process is driving the most consequential shift in European and Canadian defense in the last two generations.

The planning cycle, which comes to a head this summer, involves allies adopting capability targets that will shape national defense policies for the next two decades. If allies succeed in focusing their investments and policies to pursue this challenge, it will strengthen NATO’s ability to shield its members, even if Russia and other authoritarian states continue to challenge the Alliance.

So what has changed and why does it matter?

NATO’s successes over the last seventy-six years are the result of constant adaptation, and the Alliance is now going through its most profound changes since the end of the Cold War.

The challenges in the Euro-Atlantic region over the last twenty years—such as terrorism and regional instability—have not gone away. But the Alliance has needed to reprioritize the threat of conflict with a revisionist, risk-taking, militarily capable, and nuclear-armed Russia, which has committed itself to a war economy and increasingly appears enabled by the technological, industrial, and economic support of China, Iran, and North Korea. NATO is not at war, and its deterrence is holding. But, as Secretary General Mark Rutte recently made clear, “we are not at peace either” and NATO needs to be ready for what is coming its way.

NATO allies need to rediscover some of the disciplines and structures of the Cold War era—in particular how to fight together at scale, fight at home, and manage deterrence. This means something closer to Cold War levels of effort in terms of finance, people, technology, and industrial planning. It is a return to the Alliance’s original DNA.

However, the Cold War offers only a partial template. The Alliance’s geography is more complex than it was then (if also more coherent with the accession of Sweden and Finland). Thirty years of globalization have created a very different world. The strategies that Russia and its partners employ, as well as NATO allies’ social and industrial conditions, are very different. All these shifts are happening while technological developments are changing the character of modern interstate competition and conflict very quickly. In the secretary general’s words, NATO must be “faster and fiercer.”

Therefore, the Alliance needs to draw from the past, make the most of its considerable strengths, and be inspired by the future. Striking this balance is at the heart of the NDPP.

Laying the foundation

Since the early 1950s, NATO has had three collective foundations for its defense.

The first are the political commitments embodied in the Washington Treaty, particularly Article 3 (the promise by allies to invest in their own defense) and Article 5 (the promise to come to one another’s assistance).

The second is a common command structure under the Supreme Allied Commander Europe (SACEUR), responsible for planning and commanding collective deterrence and defense operations. Since 2002, NATO has also had the Supreme Allied Commander Transformation (SACT), responsible for shaping and transforming the force for the future. Between them, they develop the planning, force design, doctrine, interoperability, training, and exercising that make it possible for national forces to fight as a coherent whole.

The third is a collective process for agreeing on and delivering the military means that the Alliance needs to fulfill the core tasks to which it periodically agrees in its Strategic Concepts. (The most recent Strategic Concept, agreed to in 2022, set out three core tasks: deterrence and defense, crisis prevention and management, and cooperative security.) This process aims to be broadly fair among the allies, ensure that all are protected, and deliver an operational result that is bigger than the sum of its national parts. This is the role of the NDPP and its antecedents.

Operational planning—the responsibility of SACEUR through Supreme Headquarters Allied Powers Europe (SHAPE) and its subordinate geographic and domain commands—is a military discipline but always under the political control of allies in the North Atlantic Council. Such planning aims to achieve specific goals using the military resources available at any given time.

Defense planning, by contrast, looks further into the future and at a wider range of scenarios. By definition, it is both a civilian and military process, engaging national governments in choices about what they want to achieve and what resources—financial, human, and industrial—they are willing to allocate to do so. Ultimately, those decisions are made nationally; NATO has no power to compel its members to raise taxes, spend on defense, or conscript their citizens. But the NDPP provides a collective framework in which the thirty-two allies agree on what they should each deliver, and by when. Operational planning and defense planning are complementary in purpose.

Building a new way

Why is this cycle of the NDPP so different from its predecessors?

The first reason is that this cycle reconnects operational planning and defense planning in a way that has not been the case since the end of the Cold War. Over the last thirty years, the NDPP asked allies to maintain forces for the contingency of collective defense while, in practice, the emphasis of operational planning and activity was on expeditionary operations outside of NATO territory. The former looked for heavier combat-capable forces with their own enabling capabilities; the latter for lighter and more deployable forces, often enabled by the United States. In many ways, allies’ force structures today reflect the tension between these two pulls.

As a result of decisions made by NATO leaders at the Madrid summit in 2022, this NDPP cycle makes the development of forces for collective defense the clear priority. Moreover, because NATO again has a military strategy for deterrence and collective defense, and a set of operational plans for putting that strategy into effect, this cycle can be based on a far more granular military demand signal. Instead of building forces for a range of potential scenarios across multiple theaters, allies are being asked to focus primarily on fulfilling roles earmarked to them under the operational plans. For example, an ally might be asked to provide a fully deployable corps allocated by SACEUR to a particular geographically defined role, with other allies asked to provide supporting forces or host-nation support.

The NDPP will still ask allies to retain some forces capable of out-of-area projection. Flexibility to deal with the unexpected is an essential element of defense planning, and NATO looks at its neighborhood with a 360-degree perspective. But this reconnection of operational and defense planning allows for the NDPP to become a more powerful instrument for transformation. As allies develop the interoperable forces requested by the NDPP and declare them to the NATO force structure, SACEUR will be able to exercise them more realistically against new operational plans, verify readiness, and drive improvements in interoperability and effectiveness through constant testing and learning. This pressure will feed into national procurement decisions, as allies give greater consideration to geography and interoperability with partners in specific regions or roles.

This is why, although the NDPP is formally co-led by a combination of Allied Command Transformation (ACT, housed under SACT) and the Defence Policy and Planning Division of the NATO International Staff, this cycle has featured much closer involvement from Allied Command Operations. The basic template for what is asked of allies, known as the Minimum Capability Requirement, was co-developed by both strategic commands. The ability to turn operational plans into precise requirements is a critical ACT function that leverages expertise and ensures consistency with operational plans. The result is a dynamic relationship between operational and defense planning. The NDPP cycle allows for in-depth revision of military requirements every four years to account for the evolution of these plans. Similarly, SACEUR can adjust plans based on a closer understanding of what allies deliver today and what they will develop in the short and medium terms.

The second big shift in this cycle is toward the demands of collective defense against a nuclear-armed peer adversary. NATO’s forces need to be larger, be better protected, have more firepower, be able to prevail in all five domains (land, air, sea, cyber, and space), be able to coordinate and harness all of that in a fully integrated way, and be able to operate across a NATO territory that is a lot larger than it was during the Cold War. NATO forces must also be able to both bring these effects to bear early enough to prevent a war from breaking out and, if war breaks out, to fight for long enough and in the right places. All of that needs to be possible in an environment where the Alliance would almost certainly be subject to attempts at nuclear coercion, as well as sophisticated attempts to disrupt its information environment and the security of the territory (including maritime territory) through which its logistics and enablement flow. There will be no rear-area sanctuary and no neat distinctions between sub-threshold (i.e., cyber and hybrid attacks), conventional, and nuclear operations.

In other words, collective defense is more complex and more demanding—not just of militaries, but of governments and societies more widely—than the kinds of military operations NATO has participated in over the past twenty-five years or so, as difficult as many of those operations were.

Russia is not ten feet tall, and NATO’s planning assumptions are careful to be realistic about the size and nature of the threat Russia could mount against the Alliance. NATO does not seek to mimic or match the way Russia fights. The Alliance’s assumptions are based on the conviction that deterrence—putting enough doubt into the adversary’s mind regarding whether it would prevail when attempting to threaten, coerce, or attack NATO—is the best and most cost-effective strategic approach when faced with a resolute, capable, and nuclear-armed adversary.

Advancing capabilities

Allies also already have formidable capabilities available to them. This includes home defense forces, which were less relevant in the era of expeditionary operations but are critical to territorial defense, as well as outstanding modern warships, submarines, fighter aircraft, special forces, and cyber capabilities. Over the last two years, allies have declared as available to SACEUR more than half a million service personnel at high readiness for the purposes of putting NATO plans into effect. NATO’s nuclear forces, particularly those of the three nuclear allies—the United States, the United Kingdom, and France—make a vital contribution to ensuring deterrence twenty-four hours a day, 365 days a year, and are all undergoing important modernization.

However, it is clear that urgent investment is needed to ensure that existing plans, as well as additional requirements that the NDPP captures (for example, support to NATO’s nuclear forces), are adequately resourced for the Alliance to keep pace with Russian military modernization and expansion. The Alliance must be able to counter in those areas in which Russia has sought to build up asymmetric advantage. In particular, allies will need to grow

  • their air-defense capabilities to meet the full spectrum of missile and unmanned aerial vehicle (UAV) threats;
  • their ability to strike deep into enemy territory, overcoming the range of anti-access/aerial denial (A2/AD) and electronic-warfare challenges that poses;
  • their logistics and enablement capabilities to ensure that forces can be deployed and sustained when and where they are most needed for deterrence;
  • modern communications systems that allow decision-makers to act decisively and effectively across all domains of operation; and
  • the ability to fight larger land formations (divisions and corps) in complex high-intensity operations.

Overall, the Alliance aims to build about one-third more frontline capability than it has today, with significantly more of that capability held at readiness for warfighting against a peer opponent. Within that demand signal, the priority is the capabilities NATO needs to deter—those things that really alter an adversary’s decision-making calculus.

However, this larger and more complex demand signal is not just about frontline forces. As important is that allies have in place the foundations to support those forces in a larger-scale and potentially longer-lasting conflict. This means stocks of weapons and spare parts, fuel, and food. It means enabling capabilities such as engineering, medical services, and signals. And it means being able to move, sustain, and support forces that might have come from the far side of the continent or across the Atlantic. Investment in host-nation support by flank states—such as accommodation, training facilities, and storage for munitions and fuel—is once again a critical part of burden sharing. Meanwhile, priorities for other allies will include the means to move forces, such as heavy lift trucks, railway wagons, and roll-on/roll-off (RORO) ferries.

Much of this vital support function will involve working with civilian authorities and industry, and relying on assured access to civilian capabilities—disciplines that NATO knew well during the Cold War and in which allies are now reinvesting. NATO’s logistics and enablement (including medical logistics and enablement) will likely be contested even before a conflict starts, targeted through sabotage, cyberattacks, and strike operations. This pushes allies toward building more resilience through collective logistics and allocating more forces to protection.

Third, the revamped NDPP is driving allies to embrace the potential military edge that rapid adoption of new technologies and innovation can provide. It does this by emphasizing the delivery of desired effects—for example, the ability to suppress enemy air defenses—and thus pushing nations to incorporate innovative solutions to meet their targets. ACT actively supports initiatives that strike an optimal balance between cutting-edge technologies and traditional military capabilities. This approach seeks to enhance operational efficiency on the battlefield while ensuring cost-effectiveness. In doing so, ACT, in coordination with Allied Command Operations (ACO), will be able to develop an updated force mix, which will support future defense planning cycles and drive nations to innovate.

Moving at the speed of tech

In every era, nations try to balance investment in proven military technologies with the need to adapt to the threats and opportunities of new technology and its tactical application. However, the pace at which change happens is not constant over time. At the moment, it is accelerating for three reasons.

First, we are experiencing a period of intense innovation by the private sector—notably in the tech sector, but also in space—often with revolutionary implications for military capabilities. In many cases, the volume and pace of technology research and development in the private sector exceed anything that allied militaries are doing.

Second, we are in a period of intense interstate competition between large states that are investing heavily in technology. This includes some of NATO’s strategic competitors, including China with its military-civilian fusion strategy and investments in a number of emerging technology areas that are on a par with those of NATO allies. We are also seeing an increase in the number of states around the world with the means to drive technological innovation in their militaries. Ukraine and Israel are good examples of medium-sized countries with tremendous capacity for innovation.

Third, war itself shows what works and can rapidly change perceptions of the mix of capabilities required for success. The conflicts in Ukraine and the Middle East are doing just that. Russia is also learning quickly, bringing new capabilities to the battlefield with innovation cycles as short as twelve weeks.

The pace of military technological change is simply accelerating. NATO helps allies in a number of ways, including its Rapid Adoption Action Plan for innovation, the Defense Innovation Accelerator for the North Atlantic (DIANA) technology incubator, ACT experimentations, and the NATO Innovation Fund. But planning and procurement processes need to keep up and become faster, more agile, and more flexible.

This does not mean giving up on more traditional capabilities. As current conflicts demonstrate, successful militaries need a mix of capabilities. There is often no substitute for sufficient mass of artillery, protected mobility for infantry, air-defense capabilities, and other capabilities. As SACEUR has noted, if one side turns up with a tank, the other side had better have a tank. There are no areas of capability in which NATO will need less in the future, and the Alliance will need more of some traditional platforms. Many of these platforms can be made more effective and will need to be better protected by the application of emergent technologies. At the same time, NATO can leverage new technology to address immediate capability shortfalls or reduce the need for conventional mass by increasing precision or effectiveness. New technologies can also provide an advantage by creating pressure on adversaries’ vulnerabilities. There is rarely a simple trade-off between old and new.

The application of technological advances in some areas—such as quantum computing, artificial intelligence, space, and autonomous systems—are also having more profound transformational impacts on defense. They can allow for the collection and exploitation of data on a previously unimaginable scale, and the recreation of the effects of mass—for example, in fires, surveillance, or logistics—in very different ways.

This presents a great opportunity for allies to achieve effects more reliably, at larger scale, and more efficiently. But it also presents risks if adversaries are able to move further and faster to exploit these technologies.

Transforming the approach

Within a twenty-year framework with regular revisions that allow allies to factor the effects of innovation into their acquisition and development plans, the NDPP can help in three main ways.

First, it is increasingly clear that forces enabled by up-to-date communications and information systems—the digital backbone of modern defense—are now indispensable. Interoperability at large scale is even more critical than before. NATO will not criticize any ally for investing in getting these basics right.

Second, whereas NATO has historically tended to express its ask of allies in terms of numbers of platforms or personnel, it increasingly seeks evidence of an ability to achieve a particular effect, recognizing that the “how” is likely to involve constant innovation. This is a critical evolution in the defense planning process. For example, NATO might have a template for an armored brigade, with a certain number of tanks, artillery pieces, rocket launchers, infantry fighting vehicles, and reconnaissance units. However, an ally might look at the conditions and terrain in which the NATO plans require it to be able to fight and conclude that a different mix of vehicles, ISR (intelligence, surveillance, and reconnaissance), and fires—perhaps exploiting UAV technologies—is better able to achieve the required effects. That mix will evolve continuously, sometimes month to month. In that case, provided that the proposition can be verified though ACT modeling and simulation tools, the NDPP can take it as the answer.

Third, as NATO communicates the NDPP demand signal to industry, the Alliance needs to recognize that this goes far beyond traditional defense industrial actors. It also means engaging the allied innovation ecosystem, helping it understand the requirements that NATO has at the Alliance level. The scale of transformation and growth that NATO requires of allies means that the Alliance has, in effect, become a market creator, helping to give industry long-term perspectives about what it should deliver.

As NATO works with allies on how they intend to meet the capability targets to be set in June 2025 at its summit in The Hague, allies are already presenting a range of transformative approaches that the NATO force will adopt in the next few years.

For example, the United Kingdom—which leads the NATO forward land forces in Estonia—is developing “Project ASGARD,” a software-driven reconnaissance and strike complex enabled by combat UAVs and drones that aims to increase reach and lethality.

ACT, in conjunction with regional allies, is developing a maritime surveillance system for the Baltic that uses uncrewed vessels to extend presence and awareness.

A number of allies are looking to incorporate the highly successful, Ukrainian-developed Sky Fortress system into their own air defense. Sky Fortress uses a network of acoustic sensors to accurately track and engage cruise missiles and other air threats.

All of these changes are happening now and are bringing a different range of industrial partners into the picture, especially those from the civilian tech sector. NATO’s message to allies over the next decade will be clear. More of this is needed, and faster.

Maintaining the core

However, there are ways in which this NDPP cycle has not changed from its predecessors.

First, it requires commitment by all allies. The effort will not always look the same. The demands on a flank ally, ready to receive and sustain deployed forces, are different than those on an ally that is deploying them and managing long logistics chains. But fair burden sharing remains a core principle.

Nor can one ally—the United States—continue to bear the main burden of providing such a wide range of capabilities for the defense of the Euro-Atlantic area, given growing alternative demands on the US force. That is why this NDPP cycle will ensure there are no areas in which the US share of capability targets is disproportionate. By the end of the decade, the NDPP will have significantly reduced the overall share of such targets borne by the United States.

Second, for all the scope for efficiencies through smarter, more agile, and more collaborative procurement—and for all the advances that innovation and technology offer—there is no way of avoiding the need for greater and more sustained investment in defense when the threat is rising after an era of relative stability. Two-thirds of NATO allies reached the target of spending 2 percent of gross domestic product (GDP) on defense in 2024. But it is clear that the combination of needing to grow the overall force, modernize and stay relevant in the technological race, and, in some cases, address the effects of long periods of under-investment will push most allies much closer to requirements beyond 3 percent of GDP. That represents the lower end of the range of European allies’ defense spending during the Cold War. NATO leaders will address how to express this changed level of requirement at the summit in June in The Hague.

Third, this cycle must be underpinned by a serious push to increase not just defense industrial capacity in the Alliance—already tested by the immediate needs of supporting Ukraine—but also the efficiency and cost-effectiveness of industry and its ability to absorb emerging technologies at pace. This explains why NATO is putting so much focus on industrial strategy. As ever, the key levers for change are national, but NATO can help by being as clear as possible with allies and industry about the demand signal over time, identifying opportunities for collaboration among allies, promoting standardization and interoperability, and helping allies chart their way through fast-changing commercial landscapes such as the space sector. NATO’s Defence Production Action Plan, developed by the national armaments directors, sets out an overall approach.

Fourth, NATO is looking to help allies as they find the people they need to meet growing demand. The personnel models that allies employ vary considerably, reflecting national circumstances and traditions. NATO does not tell nations how they should approach sensitive questions such as the relationship between citizens and the state. However, there is much that allies can learn from each other as they experiment with the reintroduction of limited conscription, expansion of reserve forces, and schemes for attracting and retaining highly skilled personnel. Ensuring the full participation of women in NATO’s force is also a critical challenge. Ultimately, with some 3.4 million people serving in uniform, NATO has the numbers. The challenge is ensuring that it has people with the right skills, experience, and training available in the right place and at the right time.

Drawing on history

The NDPP is at the heart of shaping daunting change that will require deep and sustained commitment from allied governments. All need to step up in terms of money, industry, people, and the courage to embrace technology-driven innovation.

The good news is that NATO has been here before and delivered. In the 1970s, allies acknowledged that there was a widening disparity in conventional capabilities between NATO and the Warsaw Pact, and they responded with what was then called the Long-Term Defence Programme. The May 1978 meeting of defense ministers, which approved this plan, issued a communiqué that could almost read as current, talking of the need to improve readiness, increase spending, increase reserves, address complex air and electronic warfare threats, ensure sea control and effective command and control, modernize nuclear forces in the face of growing Russian theater forces, and underpin all this with better logistics. The ministers agreed on the joint procurement of a fleet of E3 airborne warning and control systems (AWACs).

That program delivered. By the mid-1980s, NATO’s posture and forces were considerably strengthened, not least through a series of major US and European technological and industrial programs that provided platforms NATO still uses today and were exported globally. Russia was successfully deterred and eventually unable to continue competing. Defense spending rose and also contributed to a strong period of economic growth in Alliance nations, helping lay some of the foundation for the technological strengths of their modern economies.

Today we are at a similar point in our history—with NATO even deciding to procure a new airborne early-warning capability. European allies were critical to the transformation that occurred during the Cold War, at that time coordinating as the Eurogroup. They will be so again, supported by the increases in defense spending now seen across the Alliance (up almost 20 percent in 2024 for non-US allies). NATO’s efforts to support Ukraine and strengthen its own deterrence and defense need to be seen as responses to long-term structural realities, not to a passing phase of crisis.

About the authors

Angus Lapsley is the assistant secretary general for defence policy and planning at NATO, and the former director general for strategy and international in the UK Ministry of Defence.

Admiral Pierre Vandier is NATO’s supreme allied commander transformation, and the former chief of staff of the French Navy.

Note

NATO Allied Command Transformation and the NATO Public Diplomacy Division are financial supporters of the Atlantic Council.

Explore the program

The Transatlantic Security Initiative, in the Scowcroft Center for Strategy and Security, shapes and influences the debate on the greatest security challenges facing the North Atlantic Alliance and its key partners.

Related content

The post Why NATO’s Defence Planning Process will transform the Alliance for decades to come appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>
Atlantic Council Commission on Software-Defined Warfare: Final report https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/in-depth-research-reports/report/atlantic-council-commission-on-software-defined-warfare/ Thu, 27 Mar 2025 13:00:00 +0000 https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/?p=830221 The Atlantic Council Commission on Software-Defined Warfare presents a software-defined warfare approach, offering recommendations for the DoD to adopt modern software practices and seamlessly integrate them into existing platforms to enhance and strengthen defense strategies.

The post Atlantic Council Commission on Software-Defined Warfare: Final report appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>

Table of contents

Recommendations:

  1. Mandate data and invest in AI enablers
  2. Ensure software interoperability and integration
  3. Modernize test and evaluation infrastructure
  4. Enforce commercial as the default approach for software
  5. Transform DoD software requirements
  6. Remove all restrictions on software funding
  7. Measure what matters for DoD software
  8. Enable software talent across the enterprise
  9. Fully establish a DoD software cadre

Executive summary

A profoundly transformed global security environment presents the United States with its most significant geopolitical and geoeconomic challenges since the Cold War—and perhaps since World War II. China, Russia, Iran, and North Korea—together a new “axis of aggressors”—are increasingly collaborating to support their revisionist geopolitical goals and challenge global stability. Meanwhile, US domestic constraints—such as relative-to-inflation flat defense budgets, military recruitment and talent shortfalls, byzantine acquisition processes, and inadequate industrial capacity—severely limit the US ability to adequately deter and address these threats at speed and scale. 

During World War II, US industrial strength and manufacturing capacity decisively factored into the Allies’ victory. Today, however, US defense production capacity falls short of potential wartime demands. In contrast, China’s industrial policies, manufacturing prowess, and strategic focus on software-defined technologies—including artificial intelligence (AI), cloud computing, and development, security, and operations (DevSecOps)—have propelled Beijing to rapidly advance its defense capabilities. 

Maintaining the Department of Defense (DoD) status quo—anchored to a defense acquisition system ill-suited to the rapid tempo of modern technological innovation—places the United States at significant risk. This approach undermines the nation’s ability to effectively deter near-peer adversaries in the short term and jeopardizes its capacity to prevail in a major conflict. 

Addressing these systemic challenges demands a sustained, long-term effort. Meanwhile, there is an urgent need for near-term, high-impact initiatives to bridge existing capability gaps and reestablish an advantage. That is what this report’s concept of software-defined warfare presents. 

Final Report

Report authors: Whitney M. McNamara, Peter Modigliani, and Tate Nurkin

Co-chairs: Mung Chiang, Mark T. Esper, and Christine H. Fox

Commission director: Stephen Rodriguez
Program director: Clementine G. Starling-Daniels
Commission staff: Mark J. Massa, Curtis Lee, Abigail Rudolph, Alexander S. Young

Commissioners

Mung Chiang, president, Purdue University; co-chair of the Commission on Software-Defined Warfare, Atlantic Council  

Mark T. Esper, board director, Atlantic Council; 27th secretary of defense; co-chair of the Commission on Software-Defined Warfare, Atlantic Council

Christine H. Fox, former acting deputy secretary of defense; senior fellow, John Hopkins University Applied Research Laboratory; co-chair of the Commission on Software-Defined Warfare, Atlantic Council 

Steve Bowsher, president, chief executive officer, In-Q-Tel

General James E. Cartwright, USMC (ret.), board director, Atlantic Council; 8th vice chairman, Joint Chiefs of Staff

General Joseph F. Dunford, Jr., USMC (ret.), board director, Atlantic Council; 19th chairman, Joint Chiefs of Staff

Frank A. Finelli, managing director, The Carlyle Group

James “Hondo” Geurts, distinguished fellow, Business Executives for National Security; former assistant secretary of the Navy for Research, Development, and Acquisition, US Department of Defense

Susan M. Gordon, former principal deputy director of national intelligence 

Lieutenant General S. Clinton Hinote, USAF (ret.), former deputy chief of staff, Air Force Futures

Paul Kwan, managing director, Global Resilience Practice, General Catalyst

Ellen M. Lord, former under secretary of defense for acquisition and sustainment, US Department of Defense

John Ridge, CBE, chief adoption officer, NATO Innovation Fund

Nadia Schadlow, senior fellow, Hudson Institute; former US deputy national security advisor for strategy

Lieutenant General Jack Shanahan, USAF (ret.), former director, Joint Artificial Intelligence Center

Trae Stephens, general partner, Founders Fund

Admiral Scott H. Swift, USN (ret.), 35th Commander, US Pacific Fleet

Industry commissioners

Rob Bassett Cross MC, founder, chief executive officer, Adarga; nonresident senior fellow, Atlantic Council 

Prashant Bhuyan, founder, chief executive officer, Accrete AI 

Michael D. Brasseur, chief strategy officer, Saab, Inc.

Todd Bryer, vice president for strategic growth, CAE 

Jordan Coleman, chief legal and policy officer, Kodiak Robotics 

Scott Cooper, vice president, Government Relations, Peraton

Steven Escaravage, president, Defense Technology Group, Booz Allen Hamilton

Jon Gruen, chief executive officer, Fortem Technologies 

Adam Hammer, co-founder, chief executive officer, Roadrunner Venture Studios

Jags Kandasamy, co-founder, chief executive officer, Latent AI 

Rob Lehman, co-founder, chief commercial officer, Saronic Technologies

Joel Meyer, president of public sector, Domino

Sean Moriarty, chief executive officer, Primer AI

Nathan Parker, chief executive officer, Edge Case Research

Gundbert Scherf, co-founder & co-chief executive officer, Helsing

Zachary Staples, founder & chief executive officer, Fathom5

Tyler Sweatt, chief executive officer, Second Front Systems

Dan Tadross, head of federal delivery, Scale AI

Jim Taiclet, chairman, president & chief executive officer, Lockheed Martin 

Chris Taylor, founder, chief executive officer, Aalyria Technologies

Mark Valentine, president, Global Government, Skydio

Advisors

Lieutenant General Michael S. Groen, USMC (ret.), former director, Joint Artificial Intelligence Center

Rob Murray, nonresident senior fellow, Scowcroft Center for Strategy and Security, Atlantic Council

Major General Arnold L. Punaro, USMC (ret.), advisory council member, Scowcroft Center for Strategy and Security, Atlantic Council

Stu Shea, managing partner and strategic advisor, Shea Strategies, LLC

Foreword

The United States stands at the threshold of a new era in defense and national security. Dramatic changes in the global security environment are upending the established world order, presenting new and unexpected challenges. The war in Ukraine, conflict in the Middle East, and rising tensions in the Indo-Pacific underscore shifting power dynamics. At the same time, we are in an age marked by an escalating pace of technological change. Innovations such as the fusion of AI, autonomy, and robotic systems are poised to profoundly influence national security and economic power. This moment demands decisive action to prepare the US military to adapt swiftly to evolving conditions and reclaim its tactical, operational, and strategic advantages. 

An impartial assessment of global geopolitics and geoeconomics reveals significant and widening gaps in US capabilities. These gaps not only undermine deterrence but also place the ability of US military forces to prevail in future conflicts at risk. The shifting geopolitical landscape exposes vulnerabilities in the nation’s approach to capability design, development, fielding, and sustainment. Addressing these gaps is imperative to prepare for emerging threats, yet immediate solutions are also needed to confront present dangers. While the principle of “speaking softly and carrying a big stick” has long guided US foreign policy, it is now imperative that US military power and economic strength are capable of deterring potential adversaries and, if deterrence fails, prevailing in conflict. Software-defined warfare presents a vital opportunity to bridge these challenges, providing a pathway to both near-term readiness and long-term competitive advantage. 

A software-defined mindset and capabilities are essential to modern military readiness. From enterprise solutions to autonomous systems to personnel, software underpins the effectiveness of defense operations. However, Industrial Age, hardware-centric acquisition processes are unsuitable for software systems that need to be updated with the rapid cycle of technological advancement. To preserve its competitive advantages, the DoD must embrace a more agile and integrated approach to software—one that fosters continuous modernization, capitalizes on cutting-edge commercial innovations, and deepens collaboration with allies and partners. 

The Atlantic Council’s Commission on Software-Defined Warfare was convened to address these challenges and identify solutions. Comprising leaders from government, industry, and academia, the commission identified clear, actionable, and meaningful recommendations that will position the DoD for enduring success. This report’s roadmap is organized around three core pillars: technology, process, and people. The recommendations outlined herein propose actionable steps to shape software investments, build a cohesive digital ecosystem, modernize software development practices, and cultivate a skilled and sustainable workforce. Together, these recommendations provide a clear pathway to establishing a software-defined DoD capable of responding rapidly and effectively to emerging threats in an increasingly dynamic security environment. 

As we present these recommendations, we acknowledge the support and insights of the many contributors who have helped shape this vision. We believe this work will provide leaders with the tools and direction needed to build a DoD that is resilient, innovative, and more fully prepared for the future. Now is the time to build a modern, software-defined defense infrastructure to ensure the safety and security of the United States. 

Mung Chiang

President, Purdue University

Mark T. Esper

27th United States secretary of defense

Christine H. Fox

Former acting deputy secretary of defense

Overview

Enterprise challenges

The commission started with a vision for what the future of software-defined modernization and warfare could look like if optimized. Striving to go beyond diagnosing the challenges facing the DoD enterprise, this commission outlined desired outcomes to help the DoD overcome such challenges.

  1. There is an absence of DoD enterprise processes and enablers that rapidly update software with novel capabilities that keep pace with threats.  
  2. The DoD has limited processes or proving grounds to allow end users to experiment with, and rapidly adopt and scale, novel software solutions, including AI and autonomy-enabled systems.
  3. The DoD lacks established best practices for developing or buying software.  
  4. The industry faces challenges in providing and deploying its capabilities due to a lack of transparency and predictability, and other bureaucratic hurdles.  
  5. There is a major shortfall of software pipelines, talent, and resources to meet the demand for software-defined warfare within DoD organizations. 
  6. Systems, capabilities, and platforms are generated in silos. This hinders the integration of systems on the battlefield, creation of an interoperable force structure, and the DoD’s goal of a joint warfighting concept, as well as partner and allied collaboration.  
  7. The absence of a software-centric culture across the DoD impedes the employment of modern DevSecOps, which fosters rapid iterations

Top recommendations

To address these challenges, the Commission recommends that DoD leaders, congressional defense committees, and other executive branch agencies take the following ten high-priority actions to accelerate DoD innovation adoption:

  1. Mandate enterprise data and invest in AI enablers
  2. Ensure software interoperability and integration
  3. Modernize test and evaluation infrastructure
  4. Enforce commercial as the default approach for software
  5. Transform DoD software requirements
  6. Remove all restrictions on software funding
  7. Measure what matters for DoD software
  8. Enable software talent across the enterprise
  9. Fully establish a DoD software cadre

Recommendation 1: Mandate enterprise data and invest in AI enablers

  • The deputy secretary of defense should direct the Chief Digital and Artificial Intelligence Office (CDAO) to track enterprise-wide progress and recommend actions to the deputy secretary and vice chairman of the Joint Chiefs of Staff to accelerate DoD-wide adoption of data best practices. The CDAO should ensure this process prioritizes collecting and categorizing data in a way that makes high-priority data sources readily usable for analysis and refinement for AI training, functional, and operational pipelines. 
  • Resource the CDAO to acquire and sustain unified, shared platforms that support and accelerate the end-to-end development, deployment, and governance of AI solutions—including Machine Learning Operations capabilities, tools for developing, deploying, and reusing models, and reusable AI-ready datasets. 
  • CDAO should consider the best strategy to make these tools accessible to the end-user community across innovation organizations, services, and combatant commands (CCMDs) to empower users to operationalize AI to solve mission-critical problems.  
  • Services should designate a CDAO liaison that helps the services discover what is available to them at the CDAO repository and identify gaps in service-specific investments to ensure department-wide investments are not redundant and better streamline demand for new capabilities.  
  • Service Chief Information Officers (CIOs), in collaboration with the CIO, should be resourced to invest in AI enablers that are domain- and service-specific, and in which the CDAO is unlikely to invest.  
  • Both the CDAO and the services should maintain unclassified and classified datasets of highly relevant DoD use cases that are available for industry to use to demonstrate capability viability.

Success measure: DoD end users are empowered to leverage their domain expertise to experiment with and operationalize robust and governed AI pipelines with best-of-breed capabilities from the industry. AI adoption can be scaled faster and more efficiently because capabilities are built with scale and reproducibility in mind. The DoD saves money by not buying the same capabilities many times over. There is better coordination and transparency across the department on AI adoption and resourcing. 

Notional example: The Army’s 101st Airborne Division realizes the potential of an AI use case for automatic target recognition. Instead of building something from scratch, leadership first engages the CDAO and Army CIO shop to determine what AI pillars are available to them. Using these foundational tools, operational experts spend their time addressing their specific operational problems and experimenting with integrating these new capabilities into their existing decision-making processes. Once it reaches a minimum viable product (MVP), senior leadership makes plans to integrate the capability to be part of Next Generation Command and Control (NGC2), or C2 Next. 

Recommendation 2: Ensure software interoperability and integration

  • To ensure interoperability between new capabilities being adopted, service CIOs, in coordination with the DoD CIO, should mandate 
    • Modular Open Systems Approach (MOSA) frameworks applied to the maximum extent practical; 
    • defining modules and leveraging Application Programming Interfaces (APIs) and modular system interfaces to enable data interchange between disparate platforms;  
    • industry and government co-collaborated reference architecture for multi-vendor environments as a best practice; 
    • industry, where possible, ensuring the capabilities it provides to different parts of the DoD can interoperate with one another; and
    • when feasible, reference architectures are shared with allies and partners to streamline coalition interoperability.  
  • To aid in interoperability with allies and partners, these best practices should be shared as early and often as possible with partners through existing allied technical exchanges.
  • Service chiefs should designate one Program Executive Office (PEO) to
    • Consolidate the development, acquisition, management, and modernization of non-proprietary mission integration tools under a dedicated program office within the designated PEO shop to elevate the role of mission integration. 
    • The designated PEO should leverage simulation tools to imitate the feasibility of the technical integration to 
      • ensure the successful integration of new and legacy systems, including the use of open-computer architecture to facilitate the deployment of capability on associated hardware;  
      • create demand signals for software mission integration tools; and 
      • identify new software-enabled capabilities that can enable SoS warfare.  

Success measure: Services are incentivized to proactively establish open compute requirements and identify seams between capabilities that would prevent them from carrying out their highest-priority missions and creating acquisition pathways for mission integration tools. 

Notional example: The Navy’s PEO for integrated warfare systems (IWS) is designated as the Navy’s “effects” organization. PEO for IWS identifies three relevant operational problems and begins simulating and combining existing force structures to address them. IWS 1.0 stands up with the authority to procure and sustain mission integration tools identified during simulation exercises, as well as to capture Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures (TTPs) in which end users creatively overcome inorganic integration.

Recommendation 3: Modernize test and evaluation infrastructure

  • In partnership with CDAO and the Defense Innovation Unit (DIU), charge the Test Resource Management Center (TRMC) and resource it effectively to provide the digital infrastructure to provide developmental and operational testing proving grounds for innovation organizations leading on commercial software adoption. 
  • The TRMC should partner with industry to explore metrics for vendor self-certification for both test and evaluation (T&E) and verification and validation (V&V) for more mature vendors that have invested in their own state-of-the-art capabilities. This measure will both alleviate the department being a bottleneck to deployment and help to rapidly deploy capabilities that have met the required T&E thresholds co-developed by the TRMC.  
  • The TRMC, in partnership with innovation organizations and Office of the Secretary of Defense (OSD) leaders, should establish joint operational testing and development testing teams that share data, analysis, and tooling across development and deployment stages. This approach should reduce barriers, streamline the test process, and provide continuous system performance improvement, while also incentivizing a DevSecOps pipeline for T&E that is informed by and applies industry best practices for enterprise scalability, advanced analysis, and data sharing. 

Success measure: Simulating capability viability becomes a widely accessible and organic part of validating and testing digitally enabled technologies. In addition, metrics are established to drive progress toward the automation of qualification processes and alternative certification paths. This adoption helps create a pipeline that rapidly scales the deployment of robust and trusted software-defined capabilities. 

Notional example: The TRMC invests in digital infrastructure focused on testing drones’ ability to swarm to overwhelm enemy defenses. The DIU uses this infrastructure to quickly validate compelling candidates for its Commercial Service Openings submissions rapidly and iteratively. The initial testing helps identify existing deficiencies—potentially including adversarial embedded code in a commercial component—as well as best practices for managing the data flows required to monitor the performance of these capabilities, and cross-functional teams organized to begin addressing the problem. 

Recommendation 4: Enforce commercial as the default approach for software

  • Requirements, acquisition, and contracting executives install checkpoints in the early phases of software-intensive programs to enforce statutory preferences for commercial software. Require added justification and approvals to pursue a non-commercial software solution. 
  • Service Chief Technology Officers (CTOs) and the DIU align DoD and industry groups to provide enterprise market intelligence and due diligence for in-depth insights into the commercial software market and include those of allies and partners. Service CIOs and the DIU should leverage or establish a platform to share these insights. These offices should publish and maintain a clearer software total addressable market (TAM) by technology segments. This roadmap should outline how they plan to leverage software as part of their annual budget documents to better incentivize and shape industry research and development. This TAM should map to commercial TAMs to identify dual-use or DoD-unique software. 
  • Update Department of Defense Instruction (DODI) 5000.87 on the software acquisition pathway and related acquisition policies and regulations to require program managers and contracting officers to capture in software acquisition and contracting strategies that they pursued commercial solutions to the maximum extent practicable. This should include  
    • engaging industry, industry-focused organizations, and consortia to communicate their needs and understand existing solutions;  
    • capturing holistic timelines and costs of buying commercial solutions compared to developing new software (contracting, acquisition, development, integration, test, and updates); 
    • ensuring contracting requirements are captured in a manner that would not preclude viable commercial solutions as partial or whole solutions to address the capability needs; 
    • ensuring contract strategies do not preclude commercial solutions and that they enable leading software vendors and nontraditional defense companies to compete; 
    • enabling DoD users and industry to rapidly demonstrate, prototype, and experiment with commercial solutions for defense applications; 
    • working with testers and certifiers to understand cybersecurity, integration, and other factors to assess the risks and processes of using the software in the defense domain; 
    • ensuring prime contractors and subcontractors default to commercial solutions; 
    • identifying how modular open systems, common interfaces, and standards are leveraged; 
    • publishing the non-commercial item determination in the solicitations for custom software development to allow vendors to appeal that decision, if justified; 
    • ensuring realistic intellectual-property (IP) strategies avoid unrealistic demands for source code while enabling the DoD to update or pivot if costs or performance are unsuitable; 
    • having acquisition sponsors provide supporting justification if commercial solutions are not viable and new development is warranted; and 
    • ensuring requirements and acquisition approving officials or boards must validate the commercial solution analysis early in the process.
  • The services, in collaboration with the defense acquisition executive, Defense Acquisition University, DIU, and the CDAO, should expand guidebooks and training for acquisition and requirements professionals on effectively leveraging commercial software. These protocols should be maintained online and regularly updated with insights and resources from across the DoD, government, and industry. They shall include the documentation and compliance tasks avoided by using commercial software. Program offices and portfolio executives should provide regular inputs to guide the community on best practices, lessons learned, and adoption metrics. 
  • Service CTOs, in partnership with the DIU and the Office of the Under Secretary of Defense for Research and Engineering, should meet quarterly to review software research and development efforts by science and technology (S&T) organizations to minimize duplication with the commercial sector. They should also incentivize organizations charged with developing concepts of operations to do so collaboratively, based on consistent industry engagement, to understand the state of play in commercial technologies that can be leveraged for warfighting missions. CTOs and CIOs should have authority to work with the PEOs to co-direct software factory funding. This authorization will ensure the factories focus on the intended objectives and can achieve the performance metrics developed per the Software Modernization Implementation Plan. Based on a clear inventory of platforms, services, and personnel, the CTOs and CIOs, in partnership with the PEOs, should adjust investments that maximize efficiencies and effectiveness. These adjustments could include reducing personnel billets and increasing software licenses. These factories should enable increased speed and quality of deploying code to various environments while maximizing interoperability and cybersecurity. PEOs, CTOs, and CIOs should hold software factory leadership accountable to continuously improve performance metrics and enable software-intensive acquisition programs and operations on the tactical edge. Similarly, the CTOs and CIOs should be accountable to continuously improve enabling policies, resources, authorities to operate, and reciprocity across organizations and the services. 

Success measure: The DoD identifies and tracks commercial software acquisition metrics and TAM. The DoD demonstrates a significant increase in commercial software usage, particularly for systems with well-bounded, government-defined modular system interfaces. This approach improves system cost, schedule, and performance.  

Notional example: One of the Army’s autonomy programs deviates from its strategy of a lengthy government-developed autonomy stack and rapidly acquires commercial software from leading vendors. The program saves years in development and millions in costs, while delivering higher-quality software to operations faster. 

Recommendation 5: Transform DoD software requirements

  • The DoD should exempt all software requirements below the Major Defense Acquisition Program thresholds from the Joint Capabilities Integration and Development System (JCIDS) approval processes. This exemption should include requirements for new software capabilities and software upgrades to legacy systems, regardless of the acquisition pathway used. 
  • Service requirements organizations—in collaboration with Joint Staff J8 forces, acquisition executives, and software leaders—should establish separate, yet complementary, structures, processes, and training to manage software requirements in a streamlined, dynamic, and collaborative environment.
    • While a high-level document might be used to capture initial operational capability needs, the bulk of software requirements will be managed via dynamic backlogs with active stakeholder engagements.  
    • Policies should delineate hardware and software requirements and enable each to operate on separate timelines and processes. When capabilities reach appropriate maturity levels during system development, use integrated hardware-software testing, digital engineering, modeling, and simulation to verify desired system performance. 
    • Requirements should enable operational agility measured in days and weeks, tailoring for both global and regional needs across the full range of military operations, and should enable operational commands to define and tailor capabilities based on edge-generated data, while providing insight to service software capabilities.  
  • Service requirements organizations should update policies to require sponsors to provide written justification in an appendix to the requirements document or a companion document, demonstrating that they pursued commercial solutions to the maximum extent practicable. This includes identifying how the requirements community, through the acquisition community, actively engaged industry and the DoD S&T ecosystem to 
    • communicate operational needs, challenges, and environments;  
    • understand what commercial solutions exist, the existing applications of these solutions, and the emerging software capabilities that could have military applications; 
    • capture requirements in a manner that would not preclude viable commercial solutions as partial or whole solutions to address the capability needs; and 
    • foster discussions between the DoD and industry to reduce barriers to buying commercial solutions.

Success measure: Each of the military services update their software requirements processes to enable greater speed, agility, and quality. Updated training, guidance, and resources enable the requirements and acquisition communities to successfully adopt modern software practices. 

Notional example: A major weapons system was unable to detect or react to adversary drones in theater. Through a dynamic software requirements process, this threat becomes the top priority for the next software release. The vendors work closely with operators and testers to rapidly iterate on software upgrades that drastically improve mission operations within weeks.  

Recommendation 6: Remove all restrictions on software funding

  • The DoD should immediately discontinue the Budget Authority-8 pilots and implement the pilot intent. 
  • The DoD comptroller, in collaboration with service comptrollers and congressional appropriations staff, should update the Financial Management Regulation (FMR) to enable the DoD to acquire, update, operate, and sustain software capabilities with available Research, Development, Test, and Evaluation (RDT&E), procurement, or Operation and Maintenance (O&M) funding appropriated for the capability. This echoes the congressionally directed Planning, Programming, Budgeting, and Execution (PPBE) Reform Commission’s recommendation 11A.
  • The DoD comptroller should issue a policy memo for immediate action and clarification while adding these changes to the ongoing comprehensive FMR updates per the PPBE Reform Commission.  
  • DoD and service comptrollers should communicate guidance on implementing the changes across the workforce. 
  • The language would enable any funding appropriated for a software capability to be used regardless of the software activities (e.g., new development versus maintenance) or how it is acquired (e.g., development, Commercial Off the Shelf (COTS), or as a service). This new language should enable 
    • rapid acquisition and delivery of leading software capabilities;
    • improved responsiveness to changes in threats, operations, and technologies; and 
    • reduced operational, cybersecurity, and programmatic risks. 

Success measure: The DoD comptroller issues a software funding directive removing appropriation restrictions and provides clear direction to the workforce on flexible software funding execution. 

Notional example: To meet a critical operational requirement, a program explores a range of software acquisition and contracting strategies unburdened by the mix of funding appropriations.  

Recommendation 7: Measure what matters for DoD software

  • The acquisition executives’ staff should collaboratively develop new software metrics for most acquisition programs. PEOs, services, agencies, and the OSD should compile and share quarterly or annual reports across the DoD workforce and leadership to provide visibility into trends, best practices, and enterprise issues to drive regular discussions and actions on how to accelerate delivery. These metrics often identify program trends and issues to drive corrective action and continuous improvement. The Navy’s PEO Digital established World-Class Alignment Metrics (WAMS), which are a model for others to follow. These reports should include the following metrics. 
    • Deployment frequency: The number of software updates deployed to the operational environment (production) in the last year (or time between deployments). Goal: more than once per week. 
    • Time to initial deployment: Time from the initiation of software development to the date the initial software capabilities are deployed to an operational environment. 
    • Automated testing use and timelines: Program and portfolio use of automated testing and testing timelines. Goal: daily automated testing, development and operational testing timelines declining.
    • Mean times to restore (MTTR): The average amount of time it takes to address a critical vulnerability or issue, including testing, certifying, and authority to operate. Goal: less than one day. 
    • API use: Total API usage each week or month to enable interoperability and data sharing across applications. Goal: increasing usage each month.
    • Production software defect density: Defect density of production software in operations each month. Goal: heavily domain dependent.
    • Security vulnerabilities: Number of security vulnerabilities identified and remediated. Goal: heavily domain dependent.
    • Change failure rate: Percentage of software changes that resulted in system disruptions, including downtime, errors, or negative impacts on users. Goal: less than 10 percent and heavily domain dependent.
    • Customer satisfaction: Quantitative metrics or qualitative value assessments of customer satisfaction.  Goal: greater than 80 percent of customers rate software high value.
    • User engagement: Number of user engagements per month by software developers. Goal: end users engaged weekly.
    • Software reuse: Number of acquisition programs able to reuse software capabilities and infrastructure. Goal: increasing reuse each month.
  • The focus of the metrics and subsequent actions at the program, portfolio, and enterprise levels is to continuously deliver impactful software to the user communities to improve mission impact. Each program and organization might have different objectives or challenges to address, such as release velocity, software quality, or user satisfaction. Some of these may have competing forces that must be managed (e.g., quality vs. speed). Defense of the Realm Act’s annual Accelerate State of DevOps report provides industry-leading metrics for software, including levels for elite, high, medium, and low performance. The DoD should strive toward these commercial goals as objectives and tailor performance levels to unique DoD environments. 
  • Major programs and software-intensive portfolios should map out the processes to develop, test, certify, and deploy software, including actual timelines for each phase; key stakeholders involved (by name or organization); key bottlenecks; the opportunities to streamline software delivery timelines; and how stakeholders are accountable to accelerate software delivery speed, manage operational and development risks, and ensure high-quality and secure software. Furthermore, programs and portfolios should identify where additional resources (personnel, tools, and services) at a program, portfolio, or enterprise level would enable speed of delivery. These metrics are more for internal DoD operations, with a subset that might be shared with Congress or publicly. 

Success measure: The military services and related organizations track, share, and use a core set of software metrics across the defense enterprise and leverage insights for key decisions, investments, and continuous improvement in speed, quality, reuse, and user satisfaction (mission impact).  

Notional example: A PEO of a software-intensive portfolio has an online dashboard of software metrics that is integrated into program and portfolio operations. Program, portfolio, and policy decisions are made based on these metrics, with the workforce culture focused on leaning out processes and barriers to enable rapid, iterative, and quality software deliveries to operations. Acquisition professionals and vendors are incentivized to continuously improve.  

Recommendation 8: Enable software talent across the enterprise

  • Develop an extensive, connected, layered, and modular software-centric training program that involves both digital and in-person learning and incorporates the specific requirements of different roles and missions across the force. The objective of this effort is to increase awareness of the importance of software to DoD operations, instill a basic to intermediate-level understanding of commercial software best practices and agile software development and their value, and build the skills required to more effectively integrate and operate software in specific roles.  
  • Specifically, the DoD should do the following. 
    • Partner with leading academic institutions in software development to create a curriculum for an approximately week-long in-person or hybrid training course tailored to senior leaders in the DoD. This executive training curriculum should concentrate on commercial software development best practices and the importance of software to mission execution for senior leaders in the DoD. Training emerging and current senior leaders on these topics can help the DoD develop leaders more willing to create the conditions and culture that will facilitate accelerated adoption.  
    • Leverage and expand existing successful mechanisms and models for software training, such as the Army Software Factory, and access to digital training libraries at both non-DoD and DoD academic institutions.
    • Defense education institutions across the DoD should enrich training to deepen understanding of the importance of software, commercial software best practices and development approaches, and integration of software into DoD activities. The course curriculum should engage and harness insights from leading software experts in industry, as well as in academia, to determine the skill sets and knowledge bases most relevant to the defense context. 
  • In addition to enhancing software literacy through training, the DoD needs to scale formal software career fields and paths for military and civilian personnel to harness the software talent for new and expanded roles. For example, in February 2024, the Air Force reestablished warrant officers for information technology (IT) and cyber career fields to improve technical expertise in cyber and information technologies.  
  • As part of this effort, the DoD should increase opportunities for identified DoD software-focused professionals to interact with both traditional defense industry companies and commercial companies involved in developing software for the DoD. This should include, but not be limited to, embedding DoD talent in these companies for several months to gain firsthand experience in software development cycles and challenges associated with software acquisition. The ability to engage more closely with commercial industry should also extend to the CCMDs, which should expand opportunities for operators to train and experiment directly with commercial industry through exercises such as the Army’s Scarlet Dragon, among others.  

Success measure: The DoD increases software and technical literacy across the enterprise through scalable training tailored to different DoD levels and roles. The DoD creates opportunities for the identification, enhanced training, and deployment of software talent that can be deployed across the organization to drive software adoption and use.  

Notional example: A Navy officer with demonstrated software competence is placed in a leading commercial software company that supports the DoD on a six-month rotation or internship. The officer learns from product developers and product managers to understand commercial development and improvement processes and brings this knowledge back to help operators in a CCMD more efficiently and effectively operate software-defined capabilities. 

Recommendation 9: Fully establish a DoD software cadre

  • The DoD should recruit fifty to one hundred experienced software engineers in modern development environments and place them in key roles across the enterprise. These individuals’ expertise will be used to inform decision-makers on software pipelines, architectures, and leading commercial solutions. They can address key software issues and guide efforts to develop software requirements, acquisition strategies, integration, certification, and employment of software. They can be placed in prominent roles across the DoD, including program management offices and portfolios responsible for acquiring software capabilities; CIO, software factories, and AI and data organizations focused on enterprise services; in operational commands that need to rapidly iterate on tactics and software upgrades; and as executives who oversee major programs, shape budgets, and lead combat operations. Members of this cadre would operate as a network, potentially rotating and surging to meet prioritized problems related to software acquisition, integration, and employment, and sharing best practices and insights.
  • Candidates can be hired in a full-time role using existing hiring authorities such as Highly Qualified Experts. They can also be engaged on a temporary or episodic basis through commercial talent exchange programs such as CDAO’s AI and Data Acceleration program or through Search Generative Experiences to provide iterative specialized services for a restricted number of days throughout the year. The services should also implement direct commissioning of willing experienced software engineers in the reserves, up to and including the general officer level (as is done for specialized roles such as doctors and lawyers) and should also identify and engage leading software talent already serving in the reserves, similar to the Marine Innovation Unit approach. Programs like GigEagle help identify talent in the reserves for short-term problem sets. By leveraging reservists throughout the year, the DoD can capitalize on existing expertise while mitigating financial and professional risks for those working with the DoD. 
  • Increasing reliance on short-term commercial or reservist software talent will necessitate a review and refinement of conflict-of-interest rules to balance the need to protect the DoD from the risk of providing companies unfair advantages and the need to make it easier for top-level talent to move between the DoD and the commercial sector. 
  • In addition to meeting current demand, the DoD should partner with academic institutions to develop talent pipelines of individuals who are educated and certified in commercial software processes and engineering as well as in the DoD processes and requirements. The DoD should work with interested institutions to develop curriculum and certification criteria that will allow students to be fast-tracked into the DoD software cadre positions.  

Success measure: The DoD successfully recruits an increased number of software experts and solutions architects over the next two years to advise on software development, acquisition, and adoption within program offices and CCMDs in particular, while also building a pipeline of software-focused talent. 

Notional example: Cadre members placed in program offices use their expertise to understand the significance of decisions a vendor has made in its software development process and inform program managers and acquisition officers on the implications that development decisions hold for future integration and certification. This guidance allows acquisition professionals to make decisions better informed by downstream considerations, reducing costs and time associated with integration, certification, and upgrading of critical software systems. 

Conclusion

The commission’s report presents clear, actionable recommendations and outlines the desired outcomes to address a critical aspect of modern defense and security. While the adoption of software-defined warfare currently poses a challenge, it is also an area of a defining opportunity. The rapidly shifting geopolitical landscape, marked by an axis of aggressors, demands immediate and decisive action to maintain US strategic advantage. If these recommendations are fully implemented, the United States will possess a modern, agile, and resilient defense infrastructure that is capable of fostering a robust software foundation that will bolster the capabilities of US hardware, while streamlining interoperability across services, allies, and partners. However, failure to act will leave the nation vulnerable and unable to adequately adapt to rapidly evolving threats. The time to act is now—while the United States prepares for the challenges of tomorrow, software-defined warfare provides a timely and practical solution to strengthen US defense capabilities today. Leaders in the DoD, Congress, and the private sector should work to implement these recommendations with a sense of urgency—the members of this commission stand by to help them do so. At stake is nothing less than the stability of the US-led, rules-based international order and the decades of unprecedented peace and prosperity it has undergirded. 

About the authors

Mung Chiang

Board director and co-chair of the commission, Atlantic Council; president, Purdue University

Mung Chiang is the president of Purdue University and the Roscoe H. George distinguished professor of electrical and computer engineering. Prior to being elected university president in 2022, he was the John A. Edwardson dean of the college of engineering and executive vice president for strategic initiatives at Purdue University.

Chiang received his BS (1999), MS (2000) and his PhD (2003) from Stanford University and an honorary doctorate (2024) from Dartmouth College. Before 2017, Chiang was the Arthur LeGrand Doty professor of electrical engineering and an affiliated faculty in computer science and in applied mathematics at Princeton University.

He founded the Princeton EDGE Lab in 2009 and co-founded several startup companies and industry consortia since the early years of edge computing. Most of his twenty-six US patents are licensed for network deployment. He co-authored two textbooks based on massive open online courses: Networked Life (2012) and Power of Networks (2016). For his research in communication networks, wireless technology, and network optimization, he received the NSF Alan T. Waterman Award (2013), as well as the IEEE Founders Medal (2025), the IEEE INFOCOM Achievement Award (2022), the IEEE Kiyo Tomiyasu Award (2012), and the Guggenheim Fellowship (2014). He was elected to the American Academy of Arts and Sciences (Class of Mathematical and Physical Sciences 2024), the National Academy of Inventors (2020) and the Royal Swedish Academy of Engineering Sciences (2020).

In 2020, as the Science and Technology adviser to the US secretary of state, Chiang initiated tech diplomacy programs in the US government. In 2024, he started serving on the inaugural board of the US Foundation for Energy Security and Innovation, and was elected to the Board of Directors of the US Olympic and Paralympic Committee as an independent director.

Mark T. Esper

Board director and co-chair of the commission, Atlantic Council; 27th US secretary of defense

Mark T. Esper served as secretary of defense from 2019-2020, and as secretary of the army from 2017-2019. A distinguished graduate of West Point, he spent twenty-one years in uniform, including a combat tour in the Gulf War. Esper earned a PhD from George Washington University while working on Capitol Hill, at the Pentagon as a political appointee, and as a commissioner on the US-China Economic and Security Review Commission. He was also a senior executive at a prestigious think tank, two business associations, and a Fortune 100 technology company. Esper is the recipient of multiple civilian and military awards. He currently sits on several public policy and business boards. 

Christine H. Fox

Board director and co-chair of the commission, Atlantic Council; former acting deputy secretary of defense

Christine Fox is a senior fellow at Johns Hopkins Applied Physics Laboratory (JHU/APL). Previously, she was the assistant director for policy and analysis at JHU/APL, a position she held from 2014 to early 2022. Before joining APL, she served as acting deputy secretary of defense from 2013 to 2014 and as director of Cost Assessment and Program Evaluation (CAPE) from 2009 to 2013. As director of CAPE, Fox served as chief analyst to the secretary of defense. Prior to her DoD positions, she served as president of the Center for Naval Analyses from 2005 to 2009, after working there as a research analyst and manager since 1981. Currently, she also serves on many governance and advisory boards including the Strategic Competitive Studies Project, Palantir Technologies, Muon Space, DEFCON AI, and Brown Advisory. Fox holds a bachelor’s and master’s degree in applied mathematics from George Mason University. She is a three-time recipient of the Department of Defense Distinguished Public Service Medal and of the Army’s Decoration for Distinguished Civilian Service. 

Whitney M. McNamara

Senior vice president, Beacon Global Strategies; nonresident senior fellow, author, Commission on Software-Defined Warfare, Atlantic Council

Whitney McNamara is a senior vice president at Beacon Global Strategies where she works with disruptive technology companies. She is also a co-author of both the Atlantic Council’s Commission on Defense Innovation Adoption and Commission on Software-Defined Warfare reports. Previously, McNamara worked in the Office of the Secretary of Defense for Research and Engineering, where she led the S&T portfolio of the Defense Innovation Board and as a technology policy subject matter expert at the DoD Chief Information Office. Prior, she was a senior analyst at the national security think tank Center for Strategic and Budgetary Assessments, where she worked at the intersection of future operation concepts and emerging technology adoption and advised the Department of Defense on technology acquisition strategies. 

Peter Modigliani

Senior advisor, Govini; author, Commission on Software-Defined Warfare, Atlantic Council

Peter Modigliani is a senior advisor at Govini, advising USD(A&S) and ASD(A) on strategic acquisition initiatives. Prior to that, he was a vice president at Beacon Global Strategies. Modigliani subsequently served as a defense acquisition leader within the MITRE Corporation, enabling the DoD and intelligence community to deliver innovative solutions with greater speed and agility. He works with acquisition and CIO executives, program managers, the Section 809 Panel, congressional staffs, industry, and academia to shape acquisition reforms, strategic initiatives, and major program strategies. Prior to MITRE, he was an assistant vice president with Alion Science and Technology. Modigliani began his career as an Air Force program manager for C4ISR programs. 

Tate Nurkin

Founder, OTH Intelligence Group; author, Commission on Software-Defined Warfare, Atlantic Council

Tate Nurkin is a nonresident senior fellow with the Atlantic Council’s Forward Defense and Indo-Pacific Security Initiative in the Scowcroft Center for Strategy and Security. He is also the founder of OTH Intelligence Group.

Before establishing OTH Intelligence Group in March 2018, Nurkin spent twelve years at Jane’s by IHS Markit where he served in a variety of roles, including managing Jane’s Defense, Risk, and Security Consulting practice. From 2013 until his departure, he served as the founding executive director of the Strategic Assessments and Futures Studies (SAFS) Center, which provided thought leadership and customized analysis on global competition in geopolitics, future military capabilities, and the global defence industry.

Substantively, Nurkin’s research and analysis has a particularly strong focus on US-China competition, defense technology, the future of military capabilities, and the global defense industry and its market issues. He also specializes in the design and delivery of alternative futures analysis exercises such as scenario planning, red teaming, and wargaming.

Nurkin is a frequent author and speaker on these overlapping research priorities. For example, he was the lead author of the US-China Economic and Security Review Commission’s report entitled China’s Advanced Weapons Systems, which was published in May 2018, and has provided testimony to the Commission on two occasions. In March 2019, he was featured on a Center for Strategic and International Studies China Power podcast on China’s unmanned systems. He was the lead author of the Atlantic Council’s 2019 strategy white paper on artificial intelligence.

He previously worked for Joint Management Services, the Strategic Assessment Center of SAIC, and the Modeling, Simulation, Wargaming, and Analysis team of Booz Allen Hamilton. From 2014 to 2018 he served consecutive two-year terms on the World Economic Forum’s Nuclear Security Global Agenda Council and its Future Council on International Security, which was established to diagnose and assess the security and defense implications of the Fourth Industrial Revolution.

Nurkin holds a MS in international affairs from the Sam Nunn School of International Affairs at Georgia Tech and a BA in history and political science from Duke University. He lives in Charlotte, NC.

Stephen Rodriguez

Managing partner, One Defense; senior advisor and study director of the Commission on Software-Defined Warfare, Forward Defense, Scowcroft Center for Strategy and Security, Atlantic Council

Stephen Rodriguez is a senior advisor with the Forward Defense program at the Atlantic Council’s Scowcroft Center for Strategy and Security and the managing partner of One Defense, a strategic advisory firm that leverages machine learning to identify advanced software and hardware commercial capabilities and accelerate their transition into the defense industrial base. He is also an investor at Refinery Ventures, an early-scale fund investing in dual-use technologies across the country.

Rodriguez began his career at Booz Allen Hamilton shortly before 9/11 supporting its national security practice. In his capacity as an expert on game theoretic applications, he supported the United States Intelligence Community, Department of Defense, and Department of Homeland Security as a lead architect for the Thor’s Hammer, Schriever II/III and Cyber Storm wargames. He subsequently was a vice president at an artificial intelligence company (Sentia Group) and served as chief marketing officer for an international defense corporation (NCL Holdings). Rodriguez serves as a board director or board advisor of ten venture-backed companies (Applied Intuition, Duco, Edgybees, Firestorm, Titaniam, Ursa Major Technologies, Vantage Robotics, WarOnTheRocks, ZeroMark, and Zignal Labs). He is a special advisor at America’s Frontier Fund, a commission director at the Atlantic Council and a life member at the Council on Foreign Relations. Rodriguez received his BBA degree from Texas A&M University and an MA degree from Georgetown University’s School of Foreign Service. He is published in Foreign Policy, WarOnTheRocks, National Review, and RealClearDefense. 

Clementine G. Starling-Daniels

Program director, senior resident fellow, Forward Defense, Scowcroft Center for Strategy and Security, Atlantic Council

Clementine G. Starling-Daniels is the director of the Atlantic Council’s Forward Defense program and a resident fellow within the Scowcroft Center for Strategy and Security. In her role, she shapes the Center’s US defense research agenda, leads Forward Defense’s team of nine staff and forty fellows, and produces thought leadership on US security strategies and the evolving character of warfare. Her research focuses on long-term US thinking on issues like China’s and Russia’s defense strategies, space security, defense industry, and emerging technology. Prior to launching Forward Defense, Starling served as deputy director of the Atlantic Council’s Transatlantic Security team, specializing in European security policy and NATO.

From 2016, she supported NATO’s Public Diplomacy Division at two NATO summits (Brussels and London) and organized and managed three senior Atlantic Council task forces on US force posture in Europe, military mobility, and US defense innovation adoption. During her time at the Atlantic Council, Starling has written numerous reports and commentary on US space strategy, deterrence, operational concepts, coalition warfare, and US-Europe relations. She regularly serves as a panelist and moderator at public conferences. Among the outlets that have featured her analysis and commentary are Defense One, Defense News, RealClearDefense, the National Interest, SpaceNews, NATO’s Joint Air and Space Power Conference, the BBC, National Public Radio, ABC News, and Government Matters, among others. Starling was named the 2022 Herbert Roback scholar by the US National Academy of Public Administration. She also served as the 2020 security and defense fellow at Young Professionals in Foreign Policy. Originally from the United Kingdom, Starling previously worked in the UK Parliament focusing on technology, defense, Middle East security, and Ukraine. She also supported the Britain Stronger in Europe campaign, championing for the United Kingdom to remain within the European Union. She graduated with honors from the London School of Economics with a BS in international relations and history and is an MA candidate in security studies at Georgetown University’s School of Foreign Service.

Mark J. Massa is a deputy director in the Forward Defense practice of the Scowcroft Center for Strategy and Security at the Atlantic Council. the Scowcroft Center for Strategy and Security at the Atlantic Council. A founding member of Forward Defense, Massa supports the director in the management of the program’s strategy, budget, personnel, and impact.

Massa leads Forward Defense’s portfolio of work on strategic forces issues, including nuclear strategy, space security, missile defense, and long-range conventional strike. His writing and commentary have appeared in the Hill, Defense News, RealClearDefense, Forbes, Air and Space Forces Magazine, the National Interest, CNBC, Sky News, and CTV News.

Massa earned his MA from Georgetown University’s security studies program. He received a BS in foreign service magna cum laude from Georgetown University with a degree in science, technology, and international affairs. He was awarded honors in his major for a senior thesis on a theory of nuclear ballistic missile submarine strategy.

Abigail Rudolph is a program assistant in the Forward Defense program of the Atlantic Council’s Scowcroft Center for Strategy and Security. She contributes to the program’s defense industry and innovation portfolio.

Previously, Rudolph interned with the Cleveland Council on World Affairs where she contributed to its foreign policy forums and committees on foreign relations. As an undergraduate, she co-authored an op-ed detailing net-zero carbon emissions pathways for Ohioans; conducted an independent study evaluating the environmental impacts of war; cofounded the Women in National Security Initiative at her university; and completed her senior thesis which focused on an assessment of, and recommendations for bolstering NATO’s China policy.

She graduated with honors from Baldwin Wallace University, earning a BA in national security with a minor in sustainability.

Curtis Lee is a program assistant in the Forward Defense program of the Atlantic Council’s Scowcroft Center for Strategy and Security.

Lee is a recent graduate from Carnegie Mellon University, where he received a MS in public policy and management, a BS in policy and management, and a BA in Chinese studies. He has experience working on numerous topics in defense and foreign policy with a focus on the Indo-Pacific region and China. Lee completed his senior thesis on analyzing the supply chain vulnerabilities of US future technologies as a result of US-China decoupling policies.

In addition to his role at the Atlantic Council, Lee is currently a military intelligence officer in the US Army Reserves.

Alexander S. Young is a project assistant in the Forward Defense program of the Atlantic Council’s Scowcroft Center for Strategy and Security, where he supports the program’s defense industry, innovation, and technology work.

Young is a graduate of the London School of Economics and Political Science, where he earned a MA with merit in global politics. He previously graduated with high honors from the University of California, Santa Barbara, completing a double major in political science and global studies with emphases in international relations and the Middle East and the North Africa region. Having studied and worked in both Europe and the Middle East, Young wrote his master’s dissertation about the impacts of Russia’s full-scale invasion of Ukraine on the geopolitics of the eastern Mediterranean and its natural gas projects.

Previously, Young also worked as an English teacher in underserved communities in Israel, having taught at An-Najah Comprehensive Junior High School in Rahat and Dizengoff Elementary School in Tel Aviv.

Young’s interests include geopolitics, ethnic and religious conflict, natural resources, defense industry issues, conflict resolution, and conflict stabilization.

Acknowledgements

This report was written and prepared with the support and input of its authors, commissioners on the Atlantic Council’s Commission on Software-Defined Warfare, and the Forward Defense program of the Atlantic Council’s Scowcroft Center for Strategy and Security.

This effort was conducted under the supervision of commission director Stephen Rodriguez, Forward Defense director Clementine Starling-Daniels, and Forward Defense deputy director Mark J. Massa. Special thanks to Atlantic Council CEO Fred Kempe and Matthew Kroenig for their support of this effort.

This effort has been made possible through the generous support of Booz Allen Hamilton, CAE, Helsing, Lockheed Martin, and Second Front Systems as the foundational sponsors, as well as sponsorship from Aalyria, Accrete AI, Adarga, Domino Data Lab, Edge Case Research, Fathom 5, Fortem Technologies, Kodiak Robotics, Latent AI, Peraton, Primer AI, SAAB, Saronic, Scale AI, and Skydio.

Foundational sponsors

Sponsors

To produce this report, the authors conducted more than fifty interviews and consultations with current and former officials in the US Department of Defense, congressional staff members, allied embassies in Washington, DC, and other academic and think tank organizations. However, the analysis and recommendations presented in this report are those of the authors alone and do not necessarily reflect the views of individuals consulted, commissioners, commission sponsors, the Atlantic Council, or any US government organization. Moreover, the authors, commissioners, and consulted experts participated in a personal, not institutional, capacity.

Explore the programs

The Scowcroft Center for Strategy and Security works to develop sustainable, nonpartisan strategies to address the most important security challenges facing the United States and the world.

Forward Defense, housed within the Scowcroft Center for Strategy and Security, generates ideas and connects stakeholders in the defense ecosystem to promote an enduring military advantage for the United States, its allies, and partners. Our work identifies the defense strategies, capabilities, and resources the United States needs to deter and, if necessary, prevail in future conflict.

The post Atlantic Council Commission on Software-Defined Warfare: Final report appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>
Canada needs an economic statecraft strategy to address its vulnerabilities https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/in-depth-research-reports/issue-brief/canada-needs-an-economic-statecraft-strategy-to-address-its-vulnerabilities/ Thu, 27 Mar 2025 12:00:00 +0000 https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/?p=835739 To address threats from Russia and China and reduce trade overdependence on the United States, Canada’s federal government will need to consolidate economic power and devise an economic statecraft strategy that will leverage Canada’s economic tools to mitigate economic threats and vulnerabilities.

The post Canada needs an economic statecraft strategy to address its vulnerabilities appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>
Introduction

Canada is facing economic threats from China and Russia targeting its critical industries and infrastructure. The Business Council of Canada, which consists of CEOs of top Canadian companies, identified cyberattacks, theft of intellectual property, Chinese influence on Canada’s academic sector, and trade weaponization by China among the top economic threats to Canada.

More recently, a new and unexpected threat emerged from the United States, when Washington announced 25 percent tariffs on all Canadian goods except for the 10 percent tariffs on energy. To address threats from Russia and China and reduce trade overdependence on the United States, Canada’s federal government will need to consolidate economic power and devise an economic statecraft strategy that will leverage Canada’s economic tools to mitigate these economic threats and vulnerabilities. This paper covers the following topics and offers recommendations:

  • Economic threats to Canada’s national security 
  • An unexpected threat: Overdependence on trade with the United States
  • Lack of economic power consolidation by Canada’s federal government
  • Mapping Canada’s economic statecraft systems: Sanctions, export controls, tariffs, and investment screening

Economic threats to Canada’s national security

Cyberattacks on Canada’s critical infrastructure 

Canada’s critical infrastructure has become a target of state-sponsored cyberattacks. In 2023, Canada’s Communications Security Establishment (CSE)—a signals intelligence agency—said that Russia-backed hackers were seeking to disrupt Canada’s energy sector. Apart from accounting for 5 percent of Canada’s gross domestic product (GDP), the energy sector also keeps the rest of Canada’s critical infrastructure functioning. CSE warned that the threat to Canada’s pipelines and physical infrastructure would persist until the end of the war in Ukraine and that the objective was to weaken Canada’s support for Ukraine. 

Beyond critical infrastructure, Canadian companies lost about $4.3 billion due to ransomware attacks in 2021. More recently in February 2025, Russian hacking group Seashell Blizzard was reported to have targeted energy and defense sectors in Canada, the United States, and the United Kingdom. Russia and other adversarial states will likely continue targeting Canada’s critical infrastructure and extorting ransom payments from Canadian companies. 

Theft of intellectual property

Canadian companies have become targets of Chinese state-sponsored intellectual theft operations. In 2014, a Chinese state-sponsored threat actor stole more than 40,000 files from the National Research Council’s private-sector partners. The National Research Council is a primary government agency dedicated to research and development in science and technology. Apart from undermining Canadian companies, theft of Canada’s intellectual property, especially research on sensitive technologies, poses a threat to Canada’s national security. 

Chinese influence on Canada’s academic sector 

Adversarial states have taken advantage of Canada’s academic sector to advance their own strategic and military capabilities. For example, from 2018 to 2023, Canada’s top universities published more than 240 joint papers on quantum cryptography, space science, and other advanced research topics along with Chinese scientists working for China’s top military institutions. In January 2024, Canada’s federal government named more than one hundred institutions in China, Russia, and Iran that pose a threat to Canada’s national security. Apart from calling out specific institutions, the federal government also identified “sensitive research areas.” Universities or researchers who decide to work with the listed institutions on listed sensitive topics will not be eligible for federal grants. 

Trade weaponization by China

Trade weaponization by China has undermined the economic welfare of Canadians and posed a threat to the secure functioning of Canada’s critical infrastructure. For example, between 2019 and 2020, China targeted Canada’s canola sector with 100 percent tariffs, restricting these imports and costing Canadian farmers more than $2.35 billion in lost exports and price pressure. In Canada’s 2024 Fall Economic Statement, which outlined key measures to enhance Canadian economic security, the Ministry of Finance announced its plans to impose additional tariffs on Chinese imports to combat China’s unfair trade practices. These included tariffs on solar products and critical minerals in early 2025, and on permanent magnets, natural graphite, and semiconductors in 2026. 

However, the imposition of 25 percent tariffs by Washington on both Canada and China could result in deepening trade ties between the two. Canada exported a record $2 billion in crude oil to China in 2024, accounting for half of all oil exports through the newly expanded Trans Mountain pipeline. Increased trade with China would increase Canada’s exposure to China’s coercive practices, and would be a direct consequence of US tariffs on Canada. 

An unexpected threat: Overdependence on trade with the United States

A new and unexpected threat to Canada’s economic security emerged from the United States when the Trump administration threatened to impose 25 percent tariffs on all Canadian goods (except for the 10 percent tariffs on energy imports). The United States is Canada’s largest export market, receiving a staggering 76 percent of Canada’s exports in 2024. Canada relies on the United States particularly in the context of its crude oil trade, shipping 97.4 percent of its crude oil to the United States. 

Canada had already started working on expansion to global markets through pipeline development even before Washington announced tariffs. It has succeeded in the expansion of the Trans Mountain pipeline in May 2024, which has enabled the export of Canadian oil to Asia. Canada is reviving talks on the canceled Energy East and Northern Gateway pipelines—the former would move oil from Alberta to Eastern Canada, and the latter would transport oil from Alberta to British Columbia for export to Asian markets. 

In addition to oil trade, another area where Canada is highly dependent on the United States is in auto manufacturing. Behind oil exports, motor vehicles account for the largest share of Canadian exports to the United States, resulting in exports valued at $50.76 billion (C$72.7 billion Canadian dollars) in 2024. With 25 percent tariffs on all Canadian goods, the automotive industry is expected to take a hit, especially as components cross the border six to eight times before final assembly.

Figure 1

The United States invoked the International Emergency Economic Powers Act to impose tariffs on Canada with the stated objective to curb fentanyl flows to the United States. The measure has plunged US-Canada relations into chaos and could result in a trade war between the two long-standing allies. In response, Canada might reroute oil shipments to China through existing pipelines and increase trade with China in general. Further economic integration with China would increase Canada’s exposure to economic threats emanating from China, including trade weaponization and anti-competitive practices. 

Because of US tariffs, Canada could also face challenges in strengthening the resilience of its nuclear fuel and critical mineral supply chains. In the 2024 Fall Economic Statement, Canada outlined key measures for its economic security that heavily incorporated US cooperation. This included plans to strengthen nuclear fuel supply chain resiliency away from Russian influence, with up to $500 million set aside for enriched nuclear fuel purchase contracts from the United States. Canada also aims to strengthen supply chains for responsibly produced critical minerals, following a $3.8 billion investment in its Critical Minerals Strategy, which relies on the United States as a key partner. Given the tariffs, Canada will need to diversify its partners and supply sources quickly if it wishes to maintain these economic security goals. 

Could the US-Canada trade war upend defense cooperation?

Recent tariff escalation between the United States and Canada has raised questions about the future of military cooperation between the two countries. Apart from being members of the North Atlantic Treasury Organization (NATO), the United States and Canada form a unique binational command called North American Aerospace Defense Command (NORAD). NORAD’s mission is to defend North American aerospace by monitoring all aerial and maritime threats. NORAD is headquartered at Peterson Space Force Base in Colorado, has a US Commander and Canadian Deputy Commander, and has staff from both countries working side by side. 

NORAD’s funding has been historically split between the United States (60 percent) and Canada (40 percent). However, the Department of Defense (DoD) does not allocate specific funding to NORAD and does not procure weapons or technology for NORAD, although NORAD uses DoD military systems once fielded. The US Congress recognized the need to allocate funding to modernize NORAD’s surveillance systems after the Chinese spy balloon incident in February 2023. While US fighter jets shot down the Chinese surveillance balloon after it was tracked above a US nuclear weapons site in Montana, the incident exposed weaknesses in NORAD’s capabilities. After the incident, former NORAD Commander Vice Admiral Mike Dumont stated that NORAD’s radar network is essentially 1970s technology and needs to be modernized. 

A year before the incident, the Canadian government had committed to invest $3.6 billion in NORAD over six years from 2022 to 2028, and $28.4 billion over twenty years (2022-2042) to modernize surveillance and air weapons systems. However, Canada has fallen short on delivering on these commitments. 

In March 2025, Canada’s Prime Minister Mark Carney announced that Canada made a $4.2 billion deal with Australia to develop a cutting-edge radar to detect threats to the Arctic. The radar is expected to be delivered by 2029 and will be deployed under NORAD. Canadian military officials have stated that the US military has supported the deal, signaling that the deterioration of economic relations has not (yet) had spillover effects for the defense cooperation. 

However, Prime Minister Carney has also ordered the review of F-35 fighter jet purchases from US defense company Lockheed Martin, citing security overreliance on the United States. Under the $13.29 billion contract with Lockheed Martin, Canada was set to buy 88 fighter jets from the US company. While Canada’s defense ministry will purchase the first sixteen jets to meet the contract’s legal requirements, Canada is actively looking for alternative suppliers. 

As the trade war continues, Canada will likely enhance defense cooperation with the European and other like-minded states, possibly to the detriment of the US defense industry and the US-Canada defense cooperation.

Figure 2: US-Canada overlapping memberships in security organizations and alliances

Source: Atlantic Council’s Economic Statecraft Initiative research

Lack of economic power consolidation by Canada’s federal government

Canada has a range of economic tools and sources of economic power to respond to emerging economic threats and mitigate vulnerabilities; however, it currently lacks economic power consolidation. Unlike the United States, where the federal government can regulate nearly all economic activity, Canada’s Constitution Act of 1867 grants provinces control over their “property and civil rights,” including natural resources. Section 92A, which was added to the constitution in 1982, further reinforced the provinces’ control over their natural resources. Meanwhile, the federal government has control over matters of international trade including trade controls. However, when international trade issues concern the natural resources of provinces, tensions and disagreements often arise between provinces and the federal government, and the lack of economic power consolidation by the federal government becomes obvious.

This issue manifested when the United States announced 25 percent tariffs on Canada in March 2025 as Canada’s federal government and the Alberta province had different reactions. Canada’s main leverage over the United States is oil exports. Refineries in the United States, particularly those in the Midwest, run exclusively on Canadian crude oil, having tailored their refineries to primarily process the heavy Canadian crude. Since 2010, Canadian oil accounted for virtually 100 percent of the oil imported by the Midwest. Threatening to hike levies on crude oil exports could have been Canada’s way of leveraging energy interdependence to respond to US tariffs. However, Alberta Premier Danielle Smith stated that Alberta, which is Canada’s largest oil producer and top exporter of crude oil to the United States, would not hike levies on oil and gas exports to the United States. Being unable to speak in one voice as a country even during a crisis is a direct consequence of Canada’s regional factionalism, characterized by each province looking out for their own interests. 

The United States-Mexico-Canada (USMCA) trade agreement, which entered into force during the first Trump administration in July 2020, may have also contributed to diminishing the economic power of Canada’s federal government. Article 32.10 of USMCA requires each member of the agreement to notify other countries if it plans to negotiate a free trade agreement (FTA) with a nonmarket economy. Thus, if Canada were to sign an FTA with China, the United States and Mexico could review the agreement and withdraw from USMCA with six months’ notice. After the USMCA was signed, Canadian scholars wrote that this clause would effectively turn Canada into a vassal state of the United States, with the authority to make decisions on internal affairs but having to rely on the larger power for foreign and security policy decisions. Five years later, it looks like the USMCA has put Canada in a difficult position, being targeted by US tariffs and not having advanced trading relations with other countries. 

Figure 3: US-Canada overlapping memberships in economic organizations and alliances

Source: Atlantic Council’s Economic Statecraft Initiative Research

Mapping Canada’s economic statecraft systems

To secure Canada’s critical infrastructure and leverage its natural resources to shape favorable foreign policy outcomes, Canada’s federal government has a range of economic tools and the ability to design new ones when appropriate. Canada’s economic statecraft tool kit is similar to those of the United States and the European Union and includes sanctions, export controls, tariffs, and investment screening. Canada has imposed financial sanctions and export controls against Russia along with its Group of Seven (G7) allies. It has levied tariffs on Chinese electric vehicles, in line with US policy, and recently created investment screening authorities to address concerns about adversarial capital. 

Financial sanctions 

Similar to the United States, Canada maintains sanctions programs covering specific countries such as Russia and Iran, as well as thematic sanctions regimes such as terrorismGlobal Affairs Canada (GAC), which is Canada’s Ministry of Foreign Affairs, administers sanctions and maintains the Consolidated Canadian Autonomous Sanctions List. Canada’s Finance Ministry, the Department of Finance, is not involved in sanctions designations, implementation, or enforcement, unlike in the United States, where the Department of the Treasury is the primary administrator of sanctions. 

The Parliament of Canada has enacted legislation authorizing the imposition of sanctions through three acts: the United Nations Act; the Special Economic Measures Act (SEMA); and the Justice for Victims of Corrupt Foreign Officials Act (JVCFOA). 

The United Nations Act enables GAC to implement sanctions against entities or individuals sanctioned by the UN Security Council. When an act of aggression or a grave breach of international peace occurs and the UN Security Council is unable to pass a resolution, Canada implements autonomous sanctions under SEMA; this act is Canada’s primary law for imposing autonomous sanctions and includes country-based sanctions programs. It is also used to align Canada’s sanctions with those of allies. For example, GAC derived its powers from SEMA to designate Russian entities and individuals in alignment with Canada’s Western allies in 2022. Meanwhile, the JVCFOA allows GAC to impose sanctions against individuals responsible for human rights violations and significant acts of corruption, similar to the Global Magnitsky Human Rights Accountability Act in the United States, with sanctions administered by the Office of Foreign Assets Control

Once GAC adds entities and individuals to the lists of sanctions, Canadian financial institutions comply by freezing the designated party’s assets and suspending transactions. GAC coordinates with several government agencies to enforce and enable private-sector compliance with sanctions: 

  • FINTRAC: Canada’s financial intelligence unit (FIU)—Financial Transactions and Reports Analysis Centre of Canada (FINTRAC)—is responsible for monitoring suspicious financial activities and collecting reporting from financial institutions on transactions that may be linked to sanctions evasion. FINTRAC is an independent agency that reports to the Minister of Finance. FINTRAC works closely with the US financial intelligence unit—Financial Crimes Enforcement Network (FinCEN)—on illicit finance investigations and when sanctions evasion includes the US financial system. For example, FinCEN and FINTRAC both monitor and share financial information related to Russian sanctions evasion and publish advisories and red flags for the financial sector in coordination with other like-minded partner FIUs. 
  • OSFI: The Office of the Superintendent of Financial Institutions (OSFI) is a banking regulator that issues directives to financial institutions regarding compliance and instructs banks to freeze assets belonging to sanctioned individuals and entities. FINTRAC also shares financial intelligence with OSFI on sanctions evasion activity under the Proceeds of Crime (Money Laundering) and Terrorist Financing Act (PCMLTFA). OSFI shares intelligence with Royal Canadian Mounted Police (RCMP), the national police service of Canada, if there is evidence of sanctions evasion or other financial crimes. 
  • RCMP: Once OSFI notifies RCMP about suspicious activity, RCMP investigates whether the funds are linked to sanctions evasion or other financial crimes. If it finds evidence of a violation of sanctions or criminal activity, RCMP obtains a court order to seize assets under the Criminal Code and the PCMLTFA.
  • CBSA: Canada Border Services Agency (CBSA) is responsible for blocking sanctioned individuals from entering Canada. CBSA also notifies OSFI if sanctioned individuals attempt to move cash or gold through border crossings. 

All four agencies work with GAC and with one another on sanctions enforcement. GAC sets sanctions policy, FINTRAC analyzes financial intelligence and shares suspicious activity reports to inform law enforcement investigations, OSFI enforces compliance in banks, RCMP investigates crimes and seizes assets, and CBSA prevents sanctioned individuals from entering Canada and moving assets across borders. 

While financial sanctions are part of Canada’s economic statecraft tool kit, Canadian sanctions power does not have the same reach as US sanctions. The preeminence of the US dollar and the omnipresence of major US banks allows the United States to effectively cut off sanctioned individuals and entities from the global financial system. Canadian sanctions are limited to Canadian jurisdiction and affect individuals and entities with financial ties to Canada, but they do not have the same reach as US financial sanctions. 

Nevertheless, Canadian authorities have been able to leverage financial sanctions to support the G7 allies in sanctioning Russia. For example, in December 2022, under SEMA, Canadian authorities ordered Citco Bank Canada, a subsidiary of a global hedge fund headquartered in the Cayman Islands, to freeze $26 million owned directly or indirectly by Russian billionaire Roman Abramovich, who has been sanctioned by Canada and other G7 allies. In June 2023, Canadian authorities seized a Russian cargo jet at Toronto’s Pearson Airport pursuant to SEMA. 

Figure 4

Export controls

Canada participates in several multilateral export control regimes, including the Wassenaar ArrangementNuclear Suppliers GroupMissile Technology Control Regime, and Australia Group. When multilateral regimes fall short in addressing Canada’s foreign policy needs, Canada leverages its autonomous export control list, which is administered by GAC under the Export and Import Permits Act. The Trade Controls Bureau under GAC is responsible for issuing permits and certificates for the items included on the Export Control List (ECL).

Canada Border Services Agency plays a crucial role in the enforcement of export controls. CBSA verifies that shipments match the export permit issued by GAC. It can seize or refuse exports that violate GAC export permits through ports, airports, and land borders. CBSA refers cases to the Royal Canada Mounted Police (CRMP) for prosecution if exporters attempt to bypass regulations. 

Separately, FINTRAC monitors financial transactions that might be connected to the exports of controlled goods and technologies. If FINTRAC detects suspicious transactions, it shares intelligence with GAC and other relevant authorities. Canada’s method of leveraging financial intelligence for enforcing export controls is similar to that of the United States, where FinCEN has teamed up with the Commerce Department’s Bureau of Industry and Security to detect export control evasion through financial transactions. 

While in the United States the export controls authority lies within the Commerce Department, Canada’s equivalent, Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada (ISED), does not participate in administering export controls. That responsibility is fully absorbed by GAC. 

While Canada has mainly used its export control authority in the context of sensitive technologies, Canadian politiciansand experts have recently been calling on the federal government to impose restrictions on mineral exports to the United States in response to US tariffs. The United States highly depends on Canada’s minerals, including uranium, aluminum, and nickel. Canada was the United States’ top supplier of metals and minerals in 2023 ($46.97 billion in US imports), followed by China ($28.32 billion) and Mexico ($28.18 billion). Notably, President Trump’s recent executive order called Unleashing American Energy instructed the director of the US Geological Survey to add uranium to the critical minerals list. Canada provides 25 percent of uranium to the United States. If Canada were to impose export controls on uranium, the US objective of building a resilient enriched uranium supply chain would be jeopardized. 

However, Canada could not impose export controls on the United States without experiencing significant blowback. Export control is a powerful tool. While US tariffs would increase the price of imported Canadian goods by at least 25 percent, Canada’s export controls would completely cut off the flow of certain Canadian goods to the United States. It would be destructive for both economies, so Canada will likely reserve this tool as a last resort and perhaps work on finding alternative export destinations before pulling such a trigger. 

Canada employs restrictive economic measures against Russia

In response to Russia’s unjust invasion of Ukraine in 2022, Canada imposed financial sanctions and export controls against Russia in coordination with G7 allies. To date, Global Affairs Canada has added more than 3,000 entities and individuals to its Russia and Belarus sanctions lists under SEMA. Assets of designated individuals have been frozen and Canadian persons are prohibited from dealing with them. Apart from financial sanctions, Canada imposed export controls on technology and import restrictions on Russian oil and gold. Canada also joined the G7 in capping the price of Russian crude oil at $60 per barrel and barred Russian vessels from using Canadian ports.

To enforce financial sanctions against Russia, FINTRAC joined the financial intelligence units (FIUs) of Australia, France, Germany, Italy, Japan, the Netherlands, New Zealand, the United Kingdom, and the United States to create an FIU Working Group with the mission of enhancing intelligence sharing on sanctions evasion by Russian entities and individuals. Separately, Canada Border Services Agency’s export controls enforcement efforts included the review of more than 1,500 shipments bound to Russia (as of February 2024), resulting in six seizures and fourteen fines against exporters. CBSA continues to work closely with the Five Eyes intelligence alliance to share information about export control evasion.

To disrupt the operation of Russia’s shadow fleet, Canada proposed the creation of a task force to tackle the shadow fleet in March 2025. Such a task force could be useful in addressing the various environmental problems and enforcement challenges the shadow fleet has created for the sanctioning coalition. However, the United States vetoed Canada’s proposal.

Figure 5

Tariffs

Canada’s approach to tariffs is governed primarily by the Customs Act, which outlines the procedures for assessing and collecting tariffs on imported goods, as well as the Customs Tariff legislation that sets the duty rates for specific imports (generally based on the “Harmonized System,” an internationally standardized system for classifying traded products). The Canada Border Services Agency is responsible for administering these tariffs. Additionally, the Special Import Measures Act enables Canada to protect industries from harm caused by unfair trade practices like dumping or subsidizing of imported goods, with the Canadian International Trade Tribunal determining injury and the CBSA imposing necessary duties. The minister of finance, in consultation with the minister of foreign affairs, plays a key role in proposing tariff changes or retaliatory tariffs, ensuring Canada’s trade policies align with its broader economic and diplomatic objectives. 

Canada has frequently aligned with its allies on tariff issues, as demonstrated in 2024 when, following the US and EU tariffs, it imposed a 100 percent tariff on Chinese electric vehicles to protect domestic industries. However, Canada has also been proactive in responding to US tariffs, employing a combination of diplomatic negotiations, retaliatory tariffs, and reliance on dispute resolution mechanisms such as the World Trade Organization and USMCA. In the past Canada was also quick to align itself with allies such as the EU and Mexico, seeking a coordinated international response, as was the case in 2018 when the United States imposed a broad tariff on steel and aluminum.

Similar to the United States, Canada offers remission allowances to help businesses adjust to tariffs by granting relief under specific circumstances, such as the inability to source goods from nontariffed countries or preexisting contractual obligations. The Department of Finance regularly seeks input from stakeholders before introducing new tariffs. In 2024, a thirty-day consultation was launched about possible tariffs on Chinese batteries, battery parts, semiconductors, critical minerals, metals, and solar panels, though it has yet to result in any new tariffs. 

Canada’s primary weakness regarding tariffs is its lack of trade diversification. The United States accounts for half of Canada’s imports and 76 percent of its exports. This dependency severely limits Canada’s ability to impose tariffs on the United States without facing significant economic repercussions. Canada’s relatively limited economic leverage on the global stage also complicates efforts to coordinate multilateral tariff responses or to negotiate favorable trade agreements. Furthermore, Canada’s lengthy public consultations and regulatory processes for implementing tariffs hinder its ability to leverage tariffs as a swift response to changing geopolitical or economic circumstances. 

Figure 6

Investment screening

Canada’s investment screening is governed by the Investment Canada Act (ICA), which ensures that foreign investments do not harm national security while promoting economic prosperity. The ICA includes net benefit reviews for large investments and national security reviews for any foreign investments which pose potential security risks, such as foreign control over critical sectors like technology or infrastructure.

The review process is administered by ISED, with the minister of innovation, science, and industry overseeing the reviews in consultation with Public Safety Canada. For national security concerns, multiple agencies assess potential risks, and the Governor-in-Council (GIC) has the authority to block investments or demand divestitures.

Criticism of the ICA includes lack of transparency and consistency, particularly in national security reviews, where decisions may be influenced by political or diplomatic considerations. To better mitigate risks to security, critical infrastructure, and the transfer of sensitive technologies, experts have argued that the ICA should more effectively target malicious foreign investments by incorporating into the review process the perspectives of Canadian companies on emerging national security threats. In response to these concerns, Bill C-34 introduced key updates in 2024, including preclosing filing requirements for sensitive sectors, the possibility of interim conditions during national security reviews, broader scope covering state-owned enterprises and asset sales, consideration for intellectual property and personal data protection, and increased penalties for noncompliance. In March 2025, further amendments were made to the ICA, expanding its scope to review “opportunistic or predatory” foreign investments. These changes were introduced in response to the United States’ imposition of blanket tariffs on Canadian goods.

Figure 7

Positive economic statecraft

Apart from coercive/protective tools, Canada maintains positive economic statecraft (PES) tools such as development assistance to build economic alliances beyond North America. For example, Canada is one of the largest providers of international development assistance to African countries. After Ukraine, Nigeria, Ethiopia, Tanzania, and the Democratic Republic of the Congo were the top recipients of Canada’s international assistance. Canada’s PES tools lay the ground for the federal governments to have productive cooperation when needs arise. Canadian authorities should leverage PES tools to enhance the country’s international standing and increase economic connectivity with other regions of the world. This is especially important amid the US pause on nearly all US foreign assistance. Canada could step up to help fill the vacuum in the developing world created by the Trump administration’s radical departure from a long-standing US role in foreign aid. 

Canadian authorities have already taken steps in this direction. On March 9, Canadian Minister of International Development Ahmed Hussen announced that Canada would be providing $272.1 million for foreign aid projects in Bangladesh and the Indo-Pacific region. The projects will focus on climate adaptation, empowering women in the nursing sector, advancing decent work and inclusive education and training. Earlier, on March 6, Global Affairs Canada launched its first Global Africa Strategy with the goal of deepening trade and investment relations with Africa, partnering on peace and security challenges, and advancing shared priorities on the international stage including climate change. Through this partnership, Canada plans to strengthen economic and national security by enhancing supply chain resilience and maintaining corridors for critical goods. 

Conclusion

Canada’s federal government maintains a range of economic statecraft tools and authorities to address economic and national security threats. While regional factionalism and provincial equities can hinder the federal government’s ability to leverage the full force of Canada’s economic power, threats to Canada’s economic security, including tariffs from the United States, may prove to further unite and align the provinces. The federal government and provincial premiers should work together to meet this challenging moment, consolidating Canada’s sources of economic power and moving forward with a cohesive economic statecraft strategy to protect the country’s national security and economic security interests.

Canada’s leadership and engagement in international fora including the G7, NATO, Wassenaar Agreement, among others, as well as its bilateral relationships, make it well-placed to coordinate and collaborate with Western partners on economic statecraft. Information sharing, joint investigations, multilateral sanctions, and multilateral development and investment can extend the reach of Canada’s economic power while strengthening Western efforts to leverage economic statecraft to advance global security objectives and ensure the integrity of the global financial system. Canada also has a solid foundation for building economic partnerships beyond the West through development assistance and other positive economic statecraft tools. 

About the authors

The authors would like to thank Nazima Tursun, a young global professional at the Atlantic Council’s Economic Statecraft Initiative, for research support.

The report is part of a year-long series on economic statecraft across the G7 and China supported in part by a grant from MITRE.

Related content

Explore the program

Housed within the GeoEconomics Center, the Economic Statecraft Initiative (ESI) publishes leading-edge research and analysis on sanctions and the use of economic power to achieve foreign policy objectives and protect national security interests.

The post Canada needs an economic statecraft strategy to address its vulnerabilities appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>
Trade with Colombia is big business for US exporters—amid growing Chinese influence in Latin America https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/in-depth-research-reports/issue-brief/trade-with-colombia-is-big-business-for-us-exporters-amid-growing-chinese-influence-in-latin-america/ Wed, 26 Mar 2025 14:00:00 +0000 https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/?p=834761 The United States maintains a trade surplus with Colombia, which is also the top destination for US agricultural exports in South America. However, growing Chinese influence and political tensions threaten the bilateral relationship. To protect mutual economic interests, the United States can leverage diplomatic channels and private sector engagement.

The post Trade with Colombia is big business for US exporters—amid growing Chinese influence in Latin America appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>

Toplines

  • Colombia and the United States have achieved a close, mutually beneficial partnership over several decades on migration, security, counternarcotics, and commerce—with the US trade surplus with Colombia totaling $1.3 billion in 2024.
  • The Colombian market is particularly important for US agricultural producers. Thanks to the US-Colombia Trade Promotion Agreement (TPA), Colombia is the top destination for US agricultural exports in South America and the third main destination in the Western Hemisphere.
  • The United States is still Colombia’s largest trading partner in South America—with $36.7 billion in two-way trade in 2024—but January data showed Chinese products leading over US imports for the month. The TPA promotes both reciprocal trade and US influence; interpretative improvements to previously agreed-upon matters are possible

Colombia is the top US trading partner in South America—for now

The diagnosis: US exporters benefit from trade with Colombia

In recent weeks, US-Colombia commercial ties attracted attention amid increasing frustration in Washington over Colombian President Gustavo Petro’s missteps at home. Under his watch, Colombia’s security situation has worsened dramatically, the economy has seen sluggish growth, and his ill-advised initial resistance to cooperating with the United States on repatriation flights have set US-Colombia relations back significantly. While Petro backpedaled quickly and is now signaling he will cooperate with US migration policy, the January diplomatic crisis provides an opportunity to take a closer look at the trade relationship with Colombia. These dynamics go beyond just dollars and cents—they have serious implications for the projection of US influence in our hemisphere. According to Colombia’s National Administrative Department of Statistics (DANE), Chinese imports in the month of January outpaced US imports. If this trend continues the United States could lose ground to China with a key US partner.

Though Colombian imports of goods like crude oil, coffee, cut flowers, bananas, avocados, and precious metals are all important to the US economy, the true value of the relationship from a US perspective lies in Colombia’s market for US exports. Last year, the total value of US exports to Colombia exceeded the value of imports by $1.3 billion, meaning the United States has a trade surplus with the country.

The export market in Colombia is especially crucial to US agricultural producers. In fact, Colombia has long represented a significant opportunity due to its sizable consumer base, relatively higher income levels compared to other countries in the region, and its proximity to other key markets. One product that has benefited from the TPA in particular is yellow corn. Prior to the free trade agreement, Colombia imported yellow corn primarily as raw material for animal feed in industries such as poultry and pork production. But before the agreement took effect, Colombia sourced this corn from Brazil, Canada, and other countries—often at higher prices and not necessarily with the same quality standards as those offered by US producers.

Today, US exports of yellow and white corn to Colombia exceed $1 billion in annual sales. This has contributed significantly to the growth of Colombia’s poultry, pork, and inland fishing industries, and it has benefited US farmers in states like Iowa, Kansas, Illinois, and Nebraska.

This is win-win trade. Cheaper animal feed means broader availability of protein and improved nutrition in developing areas of Colombia. It’s also true that Colombian corn cannot serve as a viable raw material for balanced animal feed, which means that US exports of corn are meeting a need that Colombia can’t address on its own. Consequently, the development of a domestic industry in this sector does not necessarily depend on restricting imports.

Beyond yellow corn, several other US agricultural exports would be affected by any worsening of trade relations with Colombia. These include soybeans, soybean cakes, wheat, rice, cotton, apples, grapes, strawberries, and processed livestock products such as pork and beef. The US exports nearly $3 billion in total agricultural exports to Colombia. Exposing these exports to reciprocal tariffs or effectively ending the TPA could severely impact US producers in these sectors.

The prescription: Keep trade relations on track

It is a safe bet that the US-Colombia relationship will encounter more turbulence. Petro’s missteps will continue, and US frustration with his administration is a bipartisan sentiment. But the US-Colombia relationship—from security and counternarcotics interests to US commercial interests—has value for both nations. Opening the TPA to renegotiation is unlikely to move forward in the US Congress, and it could very well hand a political victory to Petro himself. A longtime critic of free trade with the United States, the Colombian president may see ending the trade agreement as a win—at the expense of US exporters. Similarly, a trade war may ultimately harm American interests. 

If US policymakers are interested in adjusting the terms of the agreement, they can do so through the joint Free Trade Commission (FTC), where representatives from both countries propose new interpretations of key provisions following discussions with respective stakeholders, particularly the private sector and lawmakers. Most recently, in January 2025, the FTC convened after months of bilateral negotiations and announced updated interpretations of investment protection standards. The FTC also issued interpretive notes in 2013 and 2018 on other matters of interest, including agricultural trade, services, and intellectual property.

Bottom lines

  • Though bilateral relations at the government level may sour, there is a clear role for the private sector in de-escalating diplomatic tensions between Colombia and the United States. For many US agricultural exporters, finding an alternative market abroad like Colombia—its size, proximity, and possession of an active FTA—is no easy task.
  • While the economic consequences of a trade war are likely to be more severe for Colombia than for the United States, it would not come without a cost. US states with key producers of agricultural goods are at risk in a potential trade dispute. The origin states for these exports include Nebraska, Iowa, Kansas, Ohio, Louisiana, Missouri, and Texas. And Florida, New Jersey, New York, and California play essential roles as hubs (i.e., seaports, airports) facilitating trade with Colombia.
  • The good news is that a trade war is not inevitable. The United States has leverage to prevent trade tensions from escalating by using diplomatic channels and fostering cooperation. Through the public and private sectors, the United States can work to maintain stability and protect mutual economic interests. 

About the authors

Related content

Explore the program

The Adrienne Arsht Latin America Center broadens understanding of regional transformations and delivers constructive, results-oriented solutions to inform how the public and private sectors can advance hemispheric prosperity.

The post Trade with Colombia is big business for US exporters—amid growing Chinese influence in Latin America appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>
Why democracies stick together: The theory and empirics behind alliance formation https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/in-depth-research-reports/report/why-democracies-stick-together-the-theory-and-empirics-behind-alliance-formation/ Mon, 24 Mar 2025 20:40:27 +0000 https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/?p=831619 Democratic peace theory holds that democracies do not go to war with each other. The democratic alliance hypothesis suggests democracies prefer alliances with fellow democracies over nondemocratic powers. If both theories hold, US foreign policy should prioritize democratization, as prosperous, democratic nations are less likely to align with authoritarian states.

The post Why democracies stick together: The theory and empirics behind alliance formation appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>

Domestic regime type affects both inter-state conflict and alliance formation. Democratic peace theory posits that democracies do not go to war with one another, while democratic alliance theory suggests that they rarely, if ever, join nondemocratic alliances (or alliances led by nondemocratic powers). Empirical evidence strongly supports both theories. The Atlantic Council’s Freedom and Prosperity Indexes further reinforces the hypothesis that economically prosperous democracies tend to align with one another, whereas authoritarian states gravitate toward similarly nondemocratic and less prosperous partners. 

If these theories hold, they carry significant implications for Western and especially US foreign policy. First, global democratization would reduce the number of potential conflicts, at least among an increasing number of democracies. Second, it would expand the pool of democratic alliance partners, while at the same limiting the alliance options available to nondemocratic powers. This strategic logic underscores the importance of upholding democratic norms abroad and promoting democratization in nondemocratic states. 

However, advocating for democratization of nondemocratic great powers will be perceived as both a geopolitical and domestic political challenge aimed at weakening their international position  and threatening their governments’ domestic grip on power. Efforts to democratize nondemocratic great-power like Russia and China therefore provoke intense countermeasures. If such a strategy is deemed to be too high risk or too difficult to pursue successfully, a less provocative, “peripheral” strategy may focus on fostering democracy and economic development in authoritarian regimes’ weaker, less prosperous partners, thereby depriving them of potential allies. 

About the author

Related content

Explore the program

The Freedom and Prosperity Center aims to increase the prosperity of the poor and marginalized in developing countries and to explore the nature of the relationship between freedom and prosperity in both developing and developed nations.

The post Why democracies stick together: The theory and empirics behind alliance formation appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>
How Beijing uses inducements as a tool of economic statecraft https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/in-depth-research-reports/report/how-beijing-uses-inducements-as-a-tool-of-economic-statecraft/ Mon, 24 Mar 2025 18:00:00 +0000 https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/?p=834040 As strategic competition between the United States and China intensifies, Washington and Beijing seek every possible advantage to gain an edge. In this environment, both countries are increasingly turning to economic statecraft—the use of economic coercion or inducement to pursue strategic goals—to advance their interests.

The post How Beijing uses inducements as a tool of economic statecraft appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>

Table of contents

Executive summary

As strategic competition between the United States and China intensifies, Washington and Beijing seek every possible advantage to gain an edge. In this environment, both countries are increasingly turning to economic statecraft—the use of economic coercion or inducement to pursue strategic goals—to advance their interests. Among these tools, economic coercion often garners the most attention, both as a preferred instrument of US policymakers and as a key driver of China’s expanding influence. However, this focus on coercion largely overlooks the strategic value of economic inducements, which serve as a powerful and affirmative means of cultivating influence. These positive measures enable the United States to leverage its economic strengths, advance its global interests, and support recipient countries—all while countering China with a more transparent, sustainable, and effective alternative.

For successive US administrations, the global reliance on US goods and services for economic growth has reinforced Washington’s ability and willingness to employ sanctions, trade restrictions, and unilateral economic measures to shape policy decisions in targeted countries. Meanwhile, decades of steady growth have enabled Beijing to wield its economic power in pursuit of strategic objectives. Considerable attention has been devoted to China’s use of economic influence and its deep integration into the global economy as tools of coercion, with Lithuania, Japan, and Australia among the most prominent targets of Beijing’s economic pressure campaigns. In response, nations worldwide have sought to resist China’s coercive tactics, implementing countermeasures both independently and in coordination with allies and partners.

China’s use of economic inducements, however, remains largely overlooked despite being instrumental in Beijing’s ability to encourage and entice countries into supporting its policies. Through public diplomacy, discourse power, strategic engagement with key constituencies, and coordination of economic activities among China-based entities, Beijing has demonstrated considerable skill in leveraging targeted incentives to persuade leaders—particularly in the Global South—that quid pro quo arrangements with China offer a viable path to economic development and growth. These leaders often view US-China competition as an opportunity to enhance economic outcomes while bolstering their domestic political legitimacy.

Nowhere are the successes of China’s economic inducements more evident than in the gradual erosion of Taiwan’s formal diplomatic relationships. In less than a decade, Beijing has convinced eleven of Taiwan’s former diplomatic partners to switch recognition to China. Many of these shifts were achieved through carefully tailored inducements designed to align political leaders with Beijing’s strategic objectives. Contrary to popular narratives, these inducements were not always overwhelming financial offers or corrupt dealings; rather, Beijing strategically cultivated political and sectoral interests to incentivize a diplomatic realignment. Similarly, China has employed targeted economic inducements to expand its influence in multilateral institutions, garner support for its global initiatives, and secure market access for Chinese firms, among other strategic objectives.

Beijing’s use of economic inducements is particularly effective because China has tailored its measures to align with the specific needs of recipient countries and their leaders or political parties. For politicians in both democracies and authoritarian states, public promises of economic support from Beijing can boost domestic political support and international legitimacy. Even when Chinese projects are later exposed as inefficient or detrimental, their speed, cost efficiency, and willingness to assume risk continue to make them appealing.

Too often, Chinese firms and state-run lenders are perceived as the most viable—or only—option available to Global South countries seeking economic development. Yet the appeal of Western economic engagement remains strong, and Washington should look beyond unilateral coercive measures to offer an affirmative vision of economic development and compelling alternatives to Chinese projects and financing.

Transparency and sustainability are key strengths of US and Western economic initiatives. Collaborating with like-minded allies and partners can enhance the financial viability and long-term success of development projects. The US International Development Finance Corporation warrants greater attention as a critical instrument of US economic statecraft, while US public diplomacy institutions play a vital role in countering Chinese influence and promoting Western-led initiatives. By leveraging targeted inducements, multilateral economic initiatives, and strategic partnerships with like-minded countries, the United States can expand its economic statecraft tool, diminish the appeal of Chinese economic engagement, and advance its interests abroad.

Chapter 1: Introduction

Economic statecraft and US-China competition

The foundation of strategic competition between the United States and China is an unprecedented level of economic interdependence—both with each other and with the global economy. This interdependence, largely sustained by post-World War II institutions, has driven global economic growth for decades. However, it now also enables the more deliberate use of economic ties to pursue strategic and geopolitical objectives.1

Economic statecraft—the use of economic means to pursue political goals—is deployed through two primary levers: coercion and inducement. Of the two, economic coercion has received far more attention in academic literature, policy analysis, and China-specific scholarship. Beijing’s use of economic inducements—both promised and delivered—is less appreciated and relatively unexplored, as is how the United States can employ similar measures to advance its national interests.2

These economic inducements can take a variety of forms: official international assistance or humanitarian aid (such as grants, capacity building, technical assistance, or budget support), development finance (such as loans, credit, guarantees, and public-private partnerships), investment, and access to currency, trade, preferential tariffs, and subsidies are some of the most cited.3 Studies have investigated these mechanisms of influence, including the use of inducements to garner votes in the United Nations and the World Bank.4 Corruption through bribes and kickbacks, political donations, academic donations, and other incentives to buy elite support for the sender’s goals are also forms of inducement.5 Promises—free trade agreements (FTAs), memoranda of understanding (MOUs), market access promises, and signing ceremonies for new economic arrangements—can be a potent incentive, even if the final product is substandard or not completed.

The existing literature divides these inducements into two broad categories: quid pro quo arrangements that involve conditionality and unconditional structural engagement.6 This latter category of inducements creates a commercial motivation to favor the provider of the incentive, in turn building and expanding interest groups in the target country that support closer economic relations with the sending state.7 In reciprocal arrangements—the focus of this study—the provider of the inducement explicitly links the incentive to the desired policy behavior in the recipient country, requiring a clear request (whether in public or private) that can be accepted or denied. While it is important to separate the intent of these two categories of economic inducement, they are also intertwined: broad structural factors can act independently while simultaneously shaping the frameworks for quid pro quo arrangements. Promises of structural engagement—such as pledges to increase trade, investment, or aid in agreements or MOUs—can serve as transactional inducements. However, insufficient follow-through often impedes the sustained alignment of interests and behavior.

Weaponizing US economic statecraft

For decades, US foreign economic policy has often sought to wield the centrality of the US economy and financial system as a weapon to compel desired behavior. Sanctions have been used by the United States across a wide range of issues and are policy tools that can quickly earn broad domestic political support—for both good and ill.8 Their efficacy has long been debated in academic literature, with concrete answers hampered by the evolving nature of sanctions, the difficulties in defining sanctions, economic coercion, and success, as well as the empirical challenges of identifying the full universe of cases.9 More recently, export controls and trade tariffs have come to the forefront as preferred instruments of US economic statecraft, with China as a primary target. These punitive measures seek to blunt the impact of Beijing’s industrial policies and its efforts to bolster its domestic economy at the expense of the United States and other countries.

Concerns about the overuse of economic sanctions and other punitive measures have grown in policy discourse as the unintended consequences of sanctions and potential harms to US foreign policy interests become more apparent.10 In a 2016 speech, then–Treasury Secretary Jacob Lew warned of the risks of sanctions overreach: “[W]e must be strategic and judicious in how we apply sanctions” to avoid driving business activity away from the US financial system.11 Daleep Singh, a former deputy national security advisor for international economics, wrote that “the United States and its partners will need to apply the same creativity and urgency toward developing a positive vision for economic statecraft as they have in designing sanctions and other restrictive measures in the recent past.”12

This is not to say that inducements have not been used at all; the United States has effectively employed such measures before. As detailed in a report from the Atlantic Council’s Geoeconomics Center, there are numerous examples of the United States and the European Union (EU) using “positive economic statecraft” in a variety of contexts. In tactical cases, the United States and the EU linked the provision of aid, finance, or trade to a specific desired outcome or action.13 For example, the United States has conditioned nonmilitary aid to Pakistan on cooperation with counterterrorism efforts; the EU offered Moldova a support package after it joined the EU’s sanctions against Russia in 2023; and a Tax Information and Exchange Agreement between the United States and Panama in 2011 was a prerequisite to a subsequent FTA. The Pakistan and Panama cases indicate that US policymakers have already used economic inducements to great effect and should consider employing them more extensively moving forward.

In other cases, the failure of inducements to entice desired policy changes in North Korea and Iran has perhaps contributed to a decline in their use.14 US economic statecraft was used in attempts to convince Pyongyang and Tehran to abandon the pursuit of nuclear weapons. It is also notable that Chinese economic statecraft toward North Korea has been of questionable influence. China and Russia, likewise, are competitors of the United States for whom the benefits of positive incentives are difficult to envision—except perhaps on extremely specific and discrete issues. Convincing these regimes to accede to US policy demands, however, is a high-stakes outlier in policy—significant enough that failure in this area should not dissuade US policymakers from employing inducements more broadly in foreign policy. There remain opportunities to use positive incentives to advance both US interests and development needs in many countries.

The US focus on sanctions-based economic statecraft has contributed to Washington’s underappreciation of the needs of developing countries. It is difficult to present an affirmative offer to these countries when the United States is so focused on discouraging undesired behavior—most often through threats and sanctions. This has created openings for Chinese inducements, which can significantly influence the policies and behaviors of leaders in countries requiring economic growth and development. Moreover, developing countries’ real or perceived lack of competitive alternatives from Washington and its allies has significant foreign policy and national security implications for the United States. It has been easy to dismiss the geopolitical importance of these small and developing countries. However, in times of great power competition, their role is amplified—they are needed for international support, to combat transnational threats, and as markets for US companies. For example, the Solomon Islands previously received scant attention from the United States, but Beijing’s expanding influence there has raised concerns throughout the Indo-Pacific region that China seeks naval basing rights. Washington’s response to the China-Solomon Islands security agreement signed in April 2022 included warnings about China’s intentions and a belated flurry of diplomatic activity.15 In the decades following the Cold War, the United States was, by default, the most important partner for many countries due to its economic influence and global security interests. However, with China now a near-peer economic competitor, Washington needs to expand its toolkit.

Scope of the study

To the extent possible, this report seeks to establish a clear and direct linkage between China’s strategic intent, the promise and provision of economic inducements, and a discrete outcome—either acquiescence or refusal of Beijing’s demands. Ideally, a specific policy request from China is apparent, as is whether the target country complied. In the absence of such evidence, close process tracing—through interviews, contemporaneous research and reporting, MOUs, and contracts—can help reveal the contours of influence attempts. The potential use of inducements to influence a recipient country to withhold action it might otherwise take makes process tracing particularly valuable, while expert interviews can help uncover such hidden cases. This report benefited from off-the-record interviews in Washington and Taipei with US and Taiwanese officials, academics, journalists, and representatives of several of Taiwan’s current diplomatic partners.

Establishing intent is a fundamental and inextricable challenge in any study of power and influence—a task made even more difficult by China’s opaque state-capitalist system. By focusing on national-level policies in the target country that are of strategic importance to Beijing, this research seeks to circumvent some of these challenges by explicitly analyzing areas where intent is unquestioned. This approach enables a more focused assessment of the factors—both in China’s offer and in the target country—that contribute to success. While this method inherently introduces selection bias, the observational nature of this study, China’s strategic use of diverse tools of economic statecraft, and the immediate policymaking implications of these findings necessitate a targeted analysis.

The focus of this report will be on the effects of publicly announced inducements, though attempts at bribery or elite capture through private rents can also play an important role in China’s economic statecraft strategy. There are pragmatic reasons for the decision to deemphasize corruption—namely, the methodological challenges of identifying under-the-table deals. However, the intent behind dark money is often unrelated to a specific public policy issue or is merely a feature of, rather than the driving force behind, larger announced deals. Publicly announcing these agreements allows the recipient leader or regime to leverage the deal with China to bolster political legitimacy both domestically and internationally. Still, by identifying issue areas where China has strategic intent and process-tracing the events surrounding success (or failure), this report aims to assess the impact and deployment of various inducements, including bribes and corruption.

Chapter 2: Inducements in Chinese economic statecraft

Economic inducements have played an important role in China’s foreign policy strategy for decades, harking back to Mao Zedong’s foreign aid to Africa.16 In recent decades, China’s rapid economic development has led Beijing to use inducements to create an international environment more aligned with its interests.17 Without an extensive array of security relationships, Beijing has been largely dependent on economic arrangements to extend its influence and pursue desired policy change in other countries.18 Since Xi Jinping took power, China has used this strategy more frequently and with greater success, commensurate with the growth of its economy and its increasing importance to global markets.19

For good reason, international attention focuses primarily on the Belt and Road Initiative (BRI) as a potential—and powerful—conduit for Chinese economic influence. Chinese institutions have poured many billions of dollars into BRI projects and the initiative’s constituent parts, from the original Maritime Silk Road and Silk Road Economic Belt to the Digital Silk Road, Polar Silk Road, and Health Silk Road. Beijing claims that more than 150 countries and institutions have signed on to the BRI, and China has introduced the Global Development Initiative (GDI) alongside the BRI to promote economic development in the Global South.20 In recent years, Xi has also launched a slew of complementary initiatives to expand China’s influence, including the Global Security Initiative (GSI), Global Civilization Initiative, and Global Artificial Intelligence Initiative.21

The extensive literature on China’s global economic footprint notes that BRI-associated projects are a ubiquitous aspect of Beijing’s growing influence.22 These studies provide valuable insight into Chinese trade, investment, and/or financing in a specific country, within a wider region, or emanating from a single large-scale initiative such as the BRI. Many of these works use broadly applicable indicators to highlight China’s structural engagement and its resulting influence, and these indicators serve as important context for Beijing’s ability to shape the policies of target states. A 2021 RAND Corporation report emphasizes trade and foreign direct investment as the economic inputs of China’s influence while also highlighting the complexity of the literature on the relationship between influence and economic ties.23 A 2023 RAND Corporation report compares US and Chinese approaches to development highlighting how China blends different forms of economic engagement into its larger portfolio of development cooperation.24 Large databases such as the American Enterprise Institute’s China Global Investment Tracker and AidData offer valuable insights into China’s overseas investment and construction, as well as its development financing.25 These are just a few notable works in this space.

Yet membership in the BRI—most often through the signing of an MOU—is not the only channel for Chinese economic engagement, and not all of this engagement, BRI or otherwise, confers immediate or quid pro quo benefits for Beijing. China’s domestic overcapacity, for example, is often cited as an important driver of Chinese firms’ overseas activities, suggesting that not every investment or trade deal is meant to extend Beijing’s geopolitical influence.26 To some degree, the BRI can be viewed as a political slogan, mobilizing domestic and international actors toward the initiative’s broader goals without directing specific actions.27 The purpose of this report is to highlight this distinction—between non-conditional economic engagement and targeted quid pro quo inducements—as fundamental to the US response to China’s economic statecraft.

China has tied the promise and delivery of specific economic inducements to achieving discrete strategic goals. These quid pro quo arrangements can be obscured in a larger review of China’s economic inputs. In Greece, China’s footprint has grown rapidly following a privatization push after the 2008 Global Financial Crisis. However, as noted in an International Republican Institute report, “Beijing’s influence over government discourse and decision-making in Athens is disproportionate to its level of investment and economic importance in absolute terms.”28Growing trade and investment relations, such as in Greece’s energy sector, serve as the backdrop and conduit for Beijing’s influence, but China’s investment in the port of Piraeus—and the promised economic growth associated with the investment—was the proximate cause of political decisions by Greece in favor of Beijing in the EU.29

Economic inducements, however, are not universally positive for leaders in recipient countries, and China’s infrastructure investments and development projects have rightly received significant attention for their negative externalities. There is an extensive list of projects that have failed to deliver on their promises or have triggered opposition from local communities due to environmental, social, and governance (ESG) concerns, debt distress and difficulty refinancing loans, cost and timeline overruns, imported labor from China, corruption, and other issues.30 These externalities constitute the core of Western warnings to the Global South of Chinese economic influence.

While many countries are now more cautious about accepting Chinese bids—and Beijing has pulled back on some lending in the past few years—in many cases, Chinese projects are either the only option to meet development and infrastructure needs or the most competitive option for emerging economies. Fifth generation (5G) cellular networks, high-speed rail, and port infrastructure are some prominent examples.31 Indeed, Chinese projects can offer ready-made links between state-owned companies and state-owned policy banks, allowing for a streamlined bidding process (or to avoid competitive bidding altogether) and rapid project development.32

These projects’ connections to the Chinese party-state are a leading concern for US and Western policymakers. China’s state capitalist system allows the Chinese Communist Party (CCP) to orchestrate the economic activity of state-run financial institutions, state-owned enterprises (SOEs), and even private corporate entities in a way that the United States and its partners have not matched.33 At the same time, US researchers and policymakers should not assume that China is uniformly intent or effective in its use of economic ties to achieve strategic goals, nor that Chinese corporate entities are eager participants in these endeavors.34 Beijing can encourage economic activity abroad for several possibly overlapping reasons, including strategic gain, national economic strength, and support for Chinese companies abroad.35 Likewise, it is important to interrogate the mechanisms through which Beijing hopes to gain strategically from its economic reach and growth. Outside of coercion and inducements, economic statecraft initiatives can enhance political influence by creating vested interests, transforming public and elite opinion, and giving rise to structural power.36

Even as China faces an economic slowdown, there is little reason to believe that Xi will deemphasize economic statecraft in his foreign policy.37 He is acutely aware that domestic perceptions of foreign policy issues, particularly those related to territorial disputes and political legitimacy, are paramount to the political survival of the CCP. Independent of ongoing struggles in the domestic economy, Beijing has learned from past failures and is reining in some of its more ostentatious projects, shifting toward “smaller” and “greener” programs.38 No longer able to spread economic largesse as widely, China may instead direct its capital toward economically or strategically advantageous projects, fostering more sustainable and targeted engagement.39

Existing research on Chinese economic statecraft and implications for the study of inducements

While the literature on Chinese economic statecraft and coercion is well established, relatively few works specifically examine Beijing’s use of inducements. Scholars of Chinese economic statecraft, however, have produced a robust body of research on Beijing’s use of coercion; these studies, while not focused on inducements, have important implications for the study of positive economic incentives. Recent think tank analyses—including from the Center for Strategic and International Studies, Australian Strategic Policy Institute, and Mercator Institute for China Studies—offer a snapshot of this research.40 Together, these reports and others reveal important trends in China’s use of economic coercion that can be applied to the examination of strategic inducements.

First, the targets of Chinese coercive attempts are somewhat predictable, which likely holds true for inducements as well. These studies note that targets are largely Western-oriented, democratic, and developed. However, what remains unaccounted for is how China exerts influence in the Global South, where Beijing has consistently used positive economic incentives. Second, coercive measures are aimed at strategic industries with a strong political lobby in the target country; similarly, China carefully selects the recipients of economic inducements, targeting leaders, other political elites, and their constituents. Lastly, there are certain issues around which Beijing is likely to exert economic coercive force, including national sovereignty, national security, political legitimacy, and territorial disputes. To gain a full understanding of Beijing’s economic statecraft, it is also important to identify the issues which invite China’s economic inducements.

While there remains a dearth of research explicitly discussing China’s use of economic inducements as part of its larger economic agenda, investigations in this area have been increasing in recent years. This scholarship largely focuses on China’s non-conditional economic engagement or employs broad measures to identify correlations between specific Chinese incentives and policy outcomes. Evelyn Goh, for example, discusses economic inducements as a “preference multiplier” in China’s influence efforts in Southeast Asia, serving to politically advantage actors whose interests align with those of Beijing in a form of non-conditional structural engagement.41 In Africa, Ana Christina Alves argues that China’s development financing for infrastructure projects has had moderate success in achieving tactical and structural goals since the founding of the People’s Republic of China in 1949.42 Dreher et al. argue for a need to differentiate types of Chinese aid to assess their effects on policy in Africa, concluding that China’s Official Development Assistance—though less so commercial loans—is driven by foreign policy considerations.43Several studies examine the limited effectiveness of China’s positive economic efforts to influence Taiwanese elections through strategic agricultural purchases. While these works offer valuable insights, they largely overlook quid pro quo arrangements in favor of statistical correlations.44

Audrye Wong provides an in-depth analysis of the issue, examining when Chinese inducements effectively achieve geopolitical goals.45 She distinguishes between subversive carrots—which circumvent political processes and institutions in target countries—and legitimate seduction, arguing that countries with high-accountability domestic political institutions are less susceptible to subversive carrots. Because of this dynamic, she contends that China has been less successful in achieving influence than commonly assumed. The utility of this framework is clear. However, the intent behind these subversive carrots—often, but not always, involving hidden bribes and corruption—is not explicit, making its application difficult. These subversive carrots are not necessarily directed by the party-state, especially with other economic incentives at play. Even when they are, assessing the desired strategic outcome remains challenging—whether the engagement is non-conditional (such as increasing the market share of a Chinese SOE) or transactional.

This question of intent is one reason to deemphasize—though not discount—the potential effect of subversive carrots. Chinese inducements, particularly those related to the BRI and its infrastructure projects, are undoubtedly crafted to align with the needs and domestic political priorities of elites and decision makers in the target country. This, in turn, creates opportunities for graft, opaque deals, and a lack of accountability.46 However, the assumption that these inducements are primarily intended to advance “strategic corruption”—the explicit use of bribes and elite capture to achieve geopolitical aims—lacks broad support, despite some important high-profile cases.47 In this report, the Solomon Islands and Kiribati are the two most apparent examples of possible corruption, though in both cases there are significant public benefits as well. Most significantly, such corruption is often linked to a Chinese company with a clear economic rationale for the project in question. Chinese inducements can be and have been used to secure lucrative business deals, facilitate personal enrichment for high-level policymakers and commercial actors on all sides, and to expand China’s non-conditional economic engagement. However, there is minimal evidence that these efforts are part of a larger scheme directed by the party-state to exert influence over specific strategic issues.

Explaining the success of Chinese inducements

For leaders and regimes in power, receiving economic inducements can enhance citizen perceptions of a regime’s performance, help secure public compliance, and strengthen both domestic authority as well as external validation of the regime’s position.48 To reap these benefits, leaders in both authoritarian and democratic governments are eager to announce inbound investments, foreign aid, or trade agreements—even if they obscure the longer-term ESG trade-offs, or instances of bribery and corruption, associated with these deals.49 Together, these factors increase the likelihood that the recipient of the inducement—most often the ruling regime—will achieve political stability and maintain its grip on power.

Broadly, China’s economic inducement strategy has been effective because it is sensitive to the domestic political needs of leaders and regimes in recipient states. Beijing promotes itself both as a member and leader of the developing world, free from the colonial and Cold War baggage associated with the United States and other Western institutions. China’s professed adherence to a nonaligned posture further facilitates a persistent diplomatic presence in the Global South and ensures a sympathetic ear for Chinese proposals.50 Moreover, China’s state-owned banks and firms are willing to finance and/or build what recipient countries want, rather than promoting projects that align with a predetermined set of values or development priorities. They also engage with state actors that Western institutions have neglected for various reasons. BRI projects address infrastructure and connectivity needs in developing countries; foreign aid provides a domestic political boost to elites in recipient countries; and promises of increased trade and investment make for good publicity, even when such pledges fail to materialize. These inducements allow for a sustained Chinese presence in a country that can build goodwill and help maintain stable relations.51 While they often advance China’s broader non-conditional engagement objectives, they can also be tailored to meet specific needs.

The Lowy Institute’s Global Diplomacy Index offers a snapshot of China’s efforts in this regard. Beijing holds a slight lead over the United States in overall diplomatic posts (274 versus 271), embassies (173 versus 168), and consulates general (ninety-one versus eighty-three).52 China has more posts in Africa, East Asia, the Pacific Islands, and Central Asia and is tied with the United States in the Middle East and South America. Reporting suggests that Chinese diplomats can be more adept at engaging with locals than the “wolf-warrior diplomacy” narrative of recent years would suggest.53 Beijing has emphasized discourse power as an important aspect of China’s influence abroad and seeks to “tell China’s story well.”54 As detailed by researchers at the Atlantic Council and elsewhere, this discourse power manifests in various forms, including partnerships with local media, ostentatious branding of Chinese projects, the establishment of Confucius Institutes, training centers, province-led international communication centers, and other programs that promote China-affiliated ideas.55

These various connections—diplomatic, commercial, informational, and educational—provide Chinese actors with access to local institutions and leaders, as well as insight into development priorities in recipient countries. The definition of “local” in this context varies widely depending on government structure, leadership dynamics, accountability mechanisms, and public opinion. In some countries, central leaders are the primary decision makers, while in others, municipal policymakers, businesspeople, or community leaders hold greater influence. Regardless of the political structure, China has established mechanisms to assess development needs and identify potential synergies. Beijing has also demonstrated an ability to identify important areas of economic development for targeted countries and take action—whether through vanity projects for leaders or investments in export markets with political significance.

In BRI projects in Southeast Asia, for example, power-holder diplomacy (currying favor with top leaders) and aligning the BRI with a host country’s national strategy or a leader’s vision are two key approaches to generating demand for inducements.56 These strategies highlight crucial aspects of how Beijing has pursued success in its economic statecraft. China has effectively communicated its vision for economic development—including through the BRI, Asian Infrastructure Investment Bank, and other lending institutions—to sympathetic and financially constrained countries. It has also identified critical needs, determined the most effective targets for inducements within domestic political environments, and assessed how these needs align with elite interests in recipient countries. In the Philippines, for example, Beijing actively supported the presidential candidacy of Rodrigo Duterte, who sought a break from the United States and actively courted BRI projects. Once elected, promises from China buttressed Duterte’s “Build, Build, Build” economic development campaign, including infrastructure projects focused on the then president’s home island of Mindanao.57

These aspects of China’s economic statecraft—communication, identification, and assessment—are meaningless without the ability (or a credible promise) to deliver inducements in ways unmatched by Western countries or institutions. In some cases, this is a straightforward process. For example, Cambodia and Prime Minister Hun Sen received foreign aid in exchange for stifling opposition to China’s interests in the Association of Southeast Asian Nations (ASEAN), the region’s primary multilateral grouping. Similarly, as part of the Solomon Islands’ diplomatic switch to China in 2019, Beijing replaced a Taiwanese fund with its own and constructed a grant-funded sports stadium. Meanwhile, Beijing’s unfulfilled promises to Italy enticed Rome—frustrated with Europe’s lack of economic support—to join the BRI.58

Many countries in the Global South require infrastructure and connectivity investment, an area where China’s project development model is often welcomed. In the Xi era, these projects fall under the BRI umbrella, though their core characteristics predate the initiative. As identified in a Council on Foreign Relations Independent Task Force Report on the BRI, these characteristics include state backing and access to cheap credit for Chinese companies, state-owned commercial and policy banks directed by Beijing to embrace BRI projects, a lack of concessionary terms (at least in the contract) that make loans more accessible, and an eagerness to launch projects quickly—often to minimize financial viability assessments or ESG transaction costs.59 Together, these factors enable Chinese projects to move swiftly from planning to construction, with a high tolerance for risk.

Need for further study

Important work has been done to better understand China’s economic statecraft, including valuable scholarship on China’s non-conditional economic engagement and its resulting influence. Yet little attention has been given to how China uses targeted economic incentives to address the immediate development and economic needs of recipient states and, through these measures, alters their policy behavior to align with Beijing’s geopolitical goals.

Since 2016, eleven nations have recognized Beijing, leaving Taiwan with only twelve remaining diplomatic partners. Perhaps most notably, Beijing has successfully enticed several of Taiwan’s diplomatic partners to switch recognition to China by offering public economic incentives that Taiwan and its Western partners choose not to match.60 The president of Paraguay, which continues to recognize Taiwan, made this dynamic explicit when he requested $1 billion in investment from Taipei to help resist Chinese pressure.61 Inducements are an ideal mechanism for enticing Taiwan’s partners to switch, as they align with Beijing’s self-professed support for developing countries and are less likely than coercion to provoke domestic resistance in the recipient country. Taiwan’s diplomatic partners are all small, developing nations, where a relatively small amount of inducements can have a significant impact. There is little doubt that Beijing will continue to use inducements to erode Taiwan’s remaining diplomatic relationships and will press its advantage unless countered by a deliberate effort.

Beijing has also successfully used inducements to gain influence in multilateral fora and shape proceedings in its favor. In Southeast Asia, China is often, and rightly, criticized for its belligerent tactics in the South China Sea; at the same time, it has managed to forestall a strong regional response through the targeted use of inducements to key players in ASEAN, the region’s consensus-based organization.62 Both Cambodia and the Philippines, for example, have moderated their criticism of China or supported its positions based on promised and delivered inducements.63 China appears to be using a similar playbook in the Pacific Islands, where substantial pledges of investment and aid have helped Beijing advance its policy preferences among members of the Pacific Islands Forum.64 Farther afield, China has invested in Central and Southern Europe in an effort to weaken anti-China sentiment in the EU, though with less success.65

In addition, Xi seeks both domestic and international legitimacy through grand, large-scale initiatives. The BRI is the most obvious example, and more recently, China has sought support for its GDI and GSI.66 While these programs have served as vehicles for inducements, Beijing also uses economic incentives to entice noncommittal countries to sign on, bolstering the Chinese party-state’s political legitimacy at home and abroad. When Italy joined the BRI in 2019—the first Group of Seven (G7) government to do so—the move was highly touted by Beijing. Italy’s leaders were lured by promises of trade and investment, but the benefits were scarce. Italy withdrew from the initiative in 2023.67

The following two chapters will examine episodes in which China has successfully—or unsuccessfully—used positive incentives to induce desired changes in policy. Chapter 3 takes an in-depth look at the circumstances of Taiwan’s recent diplomatic losses and the prospects of maintaining its remaining partners; it concludes by addressing arguments about the relative importance of the formal diplomatic relations. Chapter 4 reviews several additional cases, expanding on China’s efforts in ASEAN, Italy, and other countries. Beijing’s use of quid pro quo inducements to achieve strategic goals should be of great concern to the United States as Washington seeks to counter Chinese influence.

Both China’s supply of positive inducements and the recipient country’s demand are necessary components of Beijing’s economic statecraft. Beijing has demonstrated a sensitivity to the political motivations and institutions of recipient countries that influence the acceptance or rejection of its strategic inducements. Further research into the development of China’s economic inducements—including communication of offers, identification of elites, and assessment of domestic needs, in addition to promise and delivery—would help shed light on how China is achieving strategic success and what factors the United States should prioritize in crafting an effective response.

Chapter 3: Taiwan’s fight for diplomatic recognition

The governments of China (the People’s Republic of China) and Taiwan (the Republic of China; ROC) have competed for diplomatic recognition since the Kuomintang (KMT) fled to Taiwan in 1949. Initially, both sides considered themselves the sole legitimate government of China, though today only Beijing holds this position.68 No country maintains official diplomatic relations with both simultaneously.69 Taiwan held a coveted permanent seat on the United Nations Security Council since the world body’s founding in 1945 until China took over the position in 1971. Most countries have since switched recognition from Taiwan to China, including the United States in 1979. For the next few decades, Taipei and Beijing engaged in a competition over diplomatic recognition, with China gradually gaining the upper hand.70 This contest was termed “dollar diplomacy” (sometimes referred to as “checkbook diplomacy”) under the late Taiwanese president, Lee Teng-hui (1988–2000), a term now viewed as a derogatory in both Taiwanese and Chinese discourse.71

In 2008, Taiwan’s election of President Ma Ying-jeou (2008–16)—a member of the KMT, which at this time advocated for a more reconciliatory approach toward China—eased Taiwan and China into a “diplomatic truce.” Beijing hoped that improved cross-strait relations under Ma would show the benefits of closer political ties between Taipei and Beijing and pave the way for unification. Beijing went so far as to reject efforts by Taiwan’s diplomatic partners to switch recognition.72

This truce held until the 2016 election of the Democratic Progressive Party’s (DPP’s) Tsai Ing-wen (2016–24) as Taiwan’s president. Tsai and the DPP were viewed negatively in Beijing as advocates of independence, though the former president professed a desire to maintain the status quo.73Regardless of the truth, Beijing sought to convince Taiwanese citizens that the DPP was unable to protect Taiwan, often resorting to coercive tactics in bilateral relations, including cutting off all communication, conducting naval exercises around the island, and imposing trade and travel restrictions.74 The CCP has continued and expanded these tactics following the election of the DPP’s Lai Ching-te in 2024.75

China’s measures against Taiwan under DPP leadership have included poaching Taipei’s diplomatic partners. At the beginning of the Ma administration, Taiwan was recognized by twenty-three countries; as of early 2025, that number has shrunk to twelve (including Vatican City), with eleven countries recognizing China since Tsai’s election. These countries are The Gambia, São Tomé and Príncipe, Panama, the Dominican Republic, Burkina Faso, El Salvador, the Solomon Islands, Kiribati, Nicaragua, Honduras, and Nauru. How has China been able to convince so many of Taipei’s diplomatic partners to change allegiance?

The key to Beijing’s success lies in the use of positive economic inducements, buttressed by the promise of economic growth and investment. While additional variables are at play—including “subversive carrots,” coercion, and personal ties—recent switches have been accompanied by lavish promises of aid, investment, and trade. As with many of China’s economic overtures and promises, exact numbers are difficult to parse—and delivery is even more difficult to ascertain. Still, the majority of switches have occurred with an identifiable set of economic incentives attached, including trade agreements, infrastructure deals, investment promises, grants for specific purchases, and contributions to political funds. These incentives often meet domestic economic development needs that offer the host government—whether democratic or autocratic—the opportunity to boast of its ability to deliver public goods and services to its population. Many of the diplomatic switches came in close proximity to elections, as noted in each vignette described below.

This ability to trumpet broader benefits to a country’s population is one reason that corruption and “subversive carrots” are—if present—typically part of a larger package of promises. Allegations of corruption are present in several of the poaching case studies, though it is worth noting that Taiwan has also been accused of engaging in questionable tactics.76 Personal gain and corruption can push a policymaker or politician into taking a policy position that benefits China, but in most political systems—even authoritarian ones—citizens (as well as businesspeople and other policymakers) have some expectation that the public will benefit from the policy in question. When it comes to China, this means there is usually a public good on offer, which can include promises of loans, investment, trade, and/or grants in support of infrastructure projects.

These offers are particularly attractive because of the underlying economic dynamics at play. Countries considering a switch cannot ignore the pull of China’s market—particularly in relation to Taiwan’s.77 Open access to Chinese trade flows, investment, and aid is enticing on its own, and many of Taiwan’s former partners had commercial ties with Chinese companies and individuals in the years prior to switching diplomatic recognition.

Case studies

Taipei is currently left with twelve remaining diplomatic partners. Between 2000 and 2008—the start of the temporary truce in the diplomatic contest during the Ma administration—eight countries switched recognition: Macedonia (2001), Liberia (2003), Dominica (2004), Grenada (2005), Senegal (2005), Chad (2006), Costa Rica (2007), and Malawi (2008).78 Since the pause ended in 2016, eleven additional countries have recognized China at Taiwan’s expense.

The vignettes that follow describe the circumstances of each of the eleven countries that have switched recognition since Tsai’s election, including reported amounts of inducements and any domestic political development in these countries. In pursuit of analytical clarity, these descriptions focus on changes in diplomatic recognition after The Gambia in 2016. Restricting the analysis to this period keeps the ruling regimes in China (Xi) and Taiwan (DPP) constant. These vignettes emphasize developments in China and Taiwan’s relationship with each country, primarily in relation to the switch in recognition. Put together, these case studies offer a systematic analysis of China’s strategy and the circumstances surrounding each switch. Each vignette begins with a quote—their purpose is to highlight the precariousness of Taiwan’s position, not to call out the politicians who made these statements.

Following these discussions, the next section reviews Taiwan’s remaining partners to assess China’s efforts in those countries and the likelihood of a diplomatic switch in the foreseeable future. The chapter concludes with a review of three common arguments as to why Taiwan should not concern itself with its formal partners—geopolitics, economics, and values—and offers two reasons that Taipei and Washington should have a vested interest in maintaining Taiwan’s formal relationships in their current state. In short, deterrence relies on China’s perception of Taiwan and the United States’ willingness to confront Beijing in attempts to degrade Taipei’s ability and willingness to uphold its sovereign rights. Taiwan’s international legitimacy is part of this larger calculus.

Nauru

“Nauru regards Taiwan as kin, standing firmly in our support and laboring hand-in-hand to advance democracy, freedom, peace, sustainability, stability, and economic growth in our region.” – Nauruan President Russ Kun during a national day celebration visit to Taiwan on October 9, 202379

Dates of switch: January 15, 2024 (break with Taiwan), January 24, 2024 (switch to China)
Reported ask of Taiwan: $83 million
Reported inducements from China: $100 million/year in aid
Post-switch agreements: Ten MOUs
Relation to domestic politics: President David Adeang (2024–) sworn into office on October 31, 2023, after a vote of no-confidence through parliament against Russ Kun (2022–23)

In January 2024, Nauru became the most recent country to switch allegiance from Taiwan to China. The move came just days after the election of the new Taiwanese president and was widely viewed as an expression of Beijing’s disapproval. The government of Nauru declared recognition of China as “in the best interests” of the country and its people. Media reported China’s promises to Nauru at $100 million a year, citing a senior Taiwan official.80 Taiwanese media alleged that Nauru had asked Taipei for $83 million to cover the budget shortfall from the closing of Australia’s Regional Processing Centers for refugees.81 Nauru has since committed itself to its new relationship with China, and President David Adeang visited Beijing in March 2024.82 During the visit, the Nauruan president signed ten MOUs on a wide variety of areas, including economic development, trade, the BRI and GDI, banking, green and digital development, and media cooperation.83

Nauru’s diplomatic switch came just a few months after Adeang’s predecessor was ousted in a no-confidence vote in October 2023. Former President Russ Kun had been supportive of his government’s relationship with Taiwan, and the no-confidence vote raised uncertainty in Taipei regarding the next president’s stance. Initially, Adeang was viewed as largely supportive of Taiwan, and concerns over a potential switch were mollified when Nauru accepted a new Taiwanese ambassador in December 2023.84

Major Chinese firms were involved in Nauru for some time prior to the switch. China Harbour Engineering Company (CHEC), a major Chinese state-owned construction firm, was leading the redevelopment project for Aiwo port, supported by the Asian Development Bank (ADB), and slated to be completed in 2025.85 Australian authorities noted “suspicious” payments from CHEC flowing to a Nauruan official who pushed for the diplomatic switch.86 The Aiwo project was noted at the March 2024 state visit to Beijing as one area in which to deepen cooperation. CHEC also has a solar farm project in Nauru.87 In 2021, Nauru had helped scuttle a proposal from a Huawei subsidiary to build an undersea communications cable to connect Nauru to an Australian network.88

Despite the diplomatic switch, China’s dominant influence in Nauru is far from assured. In December 2024, Nauru and Australia signed an agreement declaring the two sides have to mutually agree on any engagement in Nauru’s security, banking, and telecommunications sectors, as well as other critical infrastructure.89 The pact—coming after China has pushed security and policing agreements in other Pacific Island countries—is a significant hold on Beijing’s encroaching influence. With a population of 12,500, Nauru depends on Australia for development assistance and banking services and generates much of its revenue from fishing licenses.

Nauru had previously recognized China between 2002 and 2005, for which it was promised $137 million in grants and debt repayment from Beijing.90 In exchange for switching back to Taipei—an example of “yo-yo diplomacy”—Taiwan funded Nauru’s purchase of a Boeing 737 jet in 2006.

Honduras

“We hope to deepen such friendship and diplomatic ties ….” – Honduran President Juan Orlando Hernández during a surprise visit to Taiwan on November 13, 202191

Date of switch: March 26, 2023
Reported ask of Taiwan: Up to $2.5 billion for debt relief and hospital and dam construction
Reported inducements from China: Promised FTA and investments for dam construction
Post-switch agreements: FTA negotiations, multiple feasibility studies for dam projects, $276 million for education infrastructure
Relation to domestic politics: January 2022 election resulting in change in Honduran presidency and party in power

During her campaign for office, Honduran President Xiomara Castro (2022–) pledged to pursue a diplomatic switch, in contrast to the policies of her predecessor, Juan Orlando Hernández (2014–2022).92 She initially pulled back from that position when she took office in January 2022 (in part due to US pressure), but over a year later, Castro fulfilled her promise in March 2023, despite US efforts to prevent the decision.93

There were multiple signs that a switch was in the offing. At a January 2023 meeting between the Honduran foreign minister and Chinese vice minister, during the inauguration of Brazil’s president, the two sides explored the possibility of Chinese financing for the Patuca II hydroelectric dam project.94 Chinese financing (Industrial and Commercial Bank of China; $300 million in 2013) and construction (PowerChina, through its subsidiary SinoHydro) had already built the 104-megawatt Patuca III Hydropower Station, completed in 2020; Chinese media reported it was the first time Chinese financing had been used in a country without diplomatic relations with China.95 PowerChina completed construction on the 60-megawatt El Arenal Hydropower Station in 2022.96 In February 2023, the Honduran foreign minister again declared that the government was looking for, “in this vision of generating more energy capacity for the country, is for [China] to finance Patuca II.”97 Taiwan responded by expressing “grave concern” and warning of Beijing’s “false promises.”98

Reports on Honduras’s demands from Taiwan to prevent the switch vary widely. Honduras was rumored to have asked Taiwan to purchase $2.5 billion of its sovereign debt.99 The Honduran foreign minister stated that the country had asked Taiwan to double its annual aid package (from $50 million to $100 million) and to consider “realigning” its $600 million in debt to Taiwan.100 Honduran officials confirmed a request for $2 billion in loans, while then–Taiwanese Foreign Minister Joseph Wu also highlighted requests for $45 million to build a hospital and $300 million for a dam. (These figures were later raised to $90 million and $350 million, respectively.)101 After the switch, Tsai stated that her government would not “engage in a meaningless contest of dollar diplomacy with China.”102

Despite the shift in recognition, Honduras has yet to see significant benefits, though there are signs of progress.103 A June 2023 visit to China by Castro saw Honduras join the BRI and sign the usual assortment of cooperation documents. The Honduran president also requested her country be admitted to the BRICS-led New Development Bank (though Honduras is not listed on the bank’s website as of February 2025).104 In July 2023, the Honduran government pursued investment for a $20 billion rail line connecting the country’s Atlantic and Pacific coasts and began negotiations on an FTA, which resulted in an “early harvest” arrangement in February 2024 as talks continue.105 A March 2024 agreement yielded $276 million in funds to boost education infrastructure.106

In September 2024, the mayor of the Honduran capital, Tegucigalpa, signed an agreement with China Civil Engineering Construction Corporation to carry out an evaluation for the Río del Hombre dam, with an estimated investment of $500 to $550 million.107 An October 2024 visit by Honduras’s energy secretary to Beijing yielded agreements on completing the Patuca III and feasibility studies for the Patuca II-A, as well as a study of the country’s electrical system.108 In December 2024, the energy secretary met with representatives of the Industrial and Commercial Bank of China to discuss possible financing for the new dam and refinancing options for the country’s debt.109

During the first administration of US President Donald Trump, Honduras signaled its openness to a diplomatic switch from Taiwan to China, citing the United States’ retreat from investment and aid pledges.110 The Trump administration had ordered that aid be withheld from El Salvador, Guatemala, and Honduras as a response to a surge in asylum seekers, though aid was restored after reaching immigration agreements.111

Nicaragua

“We’re still engaged in this battle, which is a just battle, one of principles, so that the people of Taiwan continue to be incorporated in international organizations attached to the United Nations.” – Nicaraguan President Daniel Ortega on January 10, 2017112

Date of switch: December 9, 2021
Reported ask of Taiwan: N/A
Reported inducements from China: Vaccines
Post-switch agreements: MOUs, FTA, infrastructure projects
Relation to domestic politics: Presidential election in November 2021 (won by the incumbent) and repression, resulting in condemnation from Washington

Nicaragua’s switch in December 2021 was presaged by a downturn in relations between the United States and the administration of President Daniel Ortega (1979–90, 2007–), a longtime revolutionary and antagonist of the United States. Sanctions against Nicaraguan officials and criticism of the country’s November 2021 election from the administration of then–US President Joe Biden made a turn toward Beijing for aid and investment the most likely course of action.113 The Organization of American States, the EU, and others condemned the election as illegitimate and repressive.114 Managua’s switch came on the first day of Biden’s Summit for Democracy (to which Nicaragua was not invited).

The initial switch did not appear to come with significant promises—likely because Nicaragua had few alternatives in combating its international isolation—though the day after the announcement, the Chinese government agreed to send one million doses of COVID-19 vaccines. Cooperation later picked up with the signing of MOUs, an FTA (that came into force in 2024), and infrastructure projects.115 Nicaragua has received significant investment from Chinese companies, including involvement in the gold mining industry, construction of a new airport, and development of Nicaragua’s National Emergency Response System.116 In 2023, the China International Development Cooperation Agency began a $60 million housing project.117

Nicaragua—and Ortega—has a lengthy history of switching sides. During Ortega’s first presidency, Nicaragua switched recognition to China in 1985, until his successor restored ties with Taiwan in 1990.118 Upon his election in 2007, Ortega maintained relations with Taiwan, possibly in deference to Beijing’s diplomatic truce with Taiwan’s Ma. During this period, Ortega’s government notably welcomed engagement with Chinese businesses.119 In 2013, for example, Nicaragua granted a Chinese company a concession to construct an interoceanic canal at an initial cost of $40 billion.120 Despite Ortega’s increasingly repressive rule leading up to the 2021 election, Taiwan remained a loyal and financially generous supporter.121

Kiribati

“We are one family and we therefore call on an inclusive approach to have Taiwan participate in international processes and to allow it to contribute to address areas of concerns to this UN body and the implementation of the Sustainable Development Goals.” – Kiribati President Taneti Maamau speaking during the seventy-second session of the United Nations General Assembly in New York on September 28, 2018122

Dates of switch: September 20, 2019 (break with Taiwan), September 27, 2019 (switch to China)
Reported ask of Taiwan: Commercial aircraft
Reported inducements from China: Commercial aircraft (Boeing 737), cash payments to parliamentarians
Post-switch agreements: MOUs on climate change, fisheries, tourism; integration of BRI in development plan
Relation to domestic politics: President Taneti Maamau sought support for Kiribati’s development plan prior to the June 2020 election, amid concerns over Chinese and Taiwanese funds supporting candidates on both sides of the general election

Kiribati President Taneti Maamau’s decision to switch recognition to China came as a surprise to many, though some concerns emerged in the lead-up. In November 2018, for example, a member of parliament—spurred by joint venture projects between Kiribati and Chinese companies—expressed concern that Maamau’s government might end diplomatic relations with Taiwan.123 In the years preceding the switch, China had invested heavily in Kiribati’s tuna fishing industry, a key area of the government’s economic development strategy, Kiribati Vision for 20 Years: 2016–2036 (KV20).124

First elected in 2016 with a pledge to retain ties with Taiwan, Maamau did not consult members of his party, the Tobwaan Kiribati Party, before switching recognition, prompting thirteen members to leave and form their own party.125 Banuera Berina, the leader of the newly formed Kiribati First Party, ran on a pro-Taiwan platform in the June 2020 elections, which were widely seen as a referendum on the switch and which Maamau won.126 The presidential vote was marred by accusations of Chinese meddling and interference from the opposition Kiribati First Party, though the cited examples included community and school visits from Chinese diplomats and the distribution of T-shirts and hats.127 Post-election reporting quoted opposition candidates as claiming China “doled out A$250,000 [around 170,000] cash within weeks of Kiribati’s recognition of Beijing.”128 Berina claimed that Maamau assured parliamentarians worried about losing their seats over the switch that “we will be getting campaign money from China.”129 Maamau’s ruling party also feared that Taiwan would provide funds to Berina’s opposition during parliamentary and presidential elections. When previously in opposition (2003–16), the Tobwaan Kiribati Party had often complained that Taipei funded ruling party parliamentarians.130

In response to the switch, Wu, then Taiwan’s foreign minister, highlighted a request from Maamau for “massive financial assistance” to purchase a commercial aircraft, which he said was inconsistent with Taiwan’s international aid law.131 Kiribati reportedly paid $60 million for one aircraft and was seeking a second, paid for with a Taiwanese grant.132 (Taipei countered with an offer of a preferential commercial loan, which was rejected.133) Taiwan claimed that the Chinese government promised to procure several airplanes and commercial ferries for Kiribati in exchange for switching recognition.134 A senior Taiwanese official said Kiribati had requested loans and a Boeing 737 aircraft from Beijing.135

In October 2019, Maamau argued that Taiwan had done little to advance Kiribati’s development plan. The president stated that Taiwan had rejected many of his government’s proposals and should not have been surprised by the switch. He further claimed that the switch was conducted transparently, noting that the June 2020 general elections would give Kiribati citizens the opportunity to vote on the decision.136 Soon after, Maamau embarked on a weeklong state visit to Beijing, where he signed a BRI MOU. The visit also included commitments to pragmatic cooperation on climate change, fisheries, and tourism, as well as the integration of the BRI with KV20.137

Solomon Islands

“Despite the contributions of Taiwan towards the well-being of the citizens of the world, we continue to ignore the right of Taiwan to self-determination, as such, it is high time that this august body give due recognition to Taiwan as a legitimate member of the Family of Nations.” – Solomon Islands Prime Minister Manasseh Sogavare during the seventy-second session of the United Nations General Assembly in New York on September 22, 2017138

Dates of switch: September 16, 2019 (break with Taiwan), September 22, 2019 (switch to China)
Reported ask of Taiwan: Possible bribes
Reported inducements from China: Possible bribes, $8.5 million in development funds to replace Taiwanese support, $500 million in aid, additional investment promises
Post-switch agreements: $825 million for gold mine, $110 million in assistance associated with hosting 2023 Pacific Games
Relation to domestic politics: Diplomatic ties with Taiwan reassessed after April 2019 elections

The Solomon Islands severed its thirty-six-year relationship with Taiwan in September 2019. The switch followed a change in leadership after the April 2019 elections and the reelection of Prime Minister Manasseh Sogavare for a fourth non-consecutive term. The move reignited inter-island disputes between the main island of Guadalcanal, where the capital Honiara is located, and the less-developed Malaita.139

The change in diplomatic recognition came after a post-election review by a parliamentary bipartisan task force. Appointed in June 2019 and reportedly biased in China’s favor, the task force recommended the switch, in part because of the increased financial assistance and infrastructure development China could offer.140 A competing report by the parliament’s Foreign Relations Committee, released on November 26, 2019, argued instead that the Solomon Islands should “deepen its relationship with the Republic of China (Taiwan) instead of severing existing ties.”141

There were numerous reports of Chinese offers to the Solomon Islands, underpinned by an already strong economic relationship, including China’s role as a key export market, investment from private businesses, and Chinese migrants.142 A Solomon Islands lawmaker reported that Beijing had offered $8.5 million in development funds to replace Taiwanese support.143 Taiwanese sources claimed that China had promised $500 million in financial aid if the switch was completed before October 1.144 A month later, Chinese companies announced a proposed $825 million gold mine and infrastructure project, led by the state-owned China State Railway Group.145 A secretive deal between a provincial Solomon Islands government and a Chinese company to lease an entire island—signed just days after the switch—was quickly scuttled by the national government. However, it raised further questions about China’s ambitions and any negotiations that may have occurred before the change in recognition.146

Before the switch, politicians in the Solomon Islands were reportedly offered large bribes from both Taiwan and China in exchange for their support.147 Approximately 70 percent of Taiwan’s aid to the Solomon Islands was funneled through Rural Constituency Development Funds (RCDFs), which offered direct payments to individual politicians to be distributed to constituents at their whim. In 2017, these funds totaled $29.3 million.148 RCDFs were viewed negatively in some quarters as meddling in the Solomon Islands’ political affairs.149 China has established similar funds through the Rural Sustainable Development Program. However, experts note that recent reforms have redirected these funds through the Ministry of Rural Development, though concerns remain that money is still being allocated to politicians who support China’s policies.150

In May 2018, Taiwan offered the Solomon Islands a loan of $30 million to support the hosting of the 2023 Pacific Games.151 At the time, Wu, Taiwan’s foreign minister, dismissed concerns from Taiwanese legislators that the government was restarting a diplomatic bidding war. After the switch, China took over assistance for the Pacific Games, developing seven sports facilities and contributing an estimated $110 million—about half of the total cost.152

El Salvador

“We are grateful for President Salvador Sánchez Cerén’s ongoing support of Taiwan. Under his leadership, I am confident our friendship and cooperation with El Salvador will continue to deepen.” – Taiwanese Foreign Minister Joseph Wu during a meeting with the Salvadoran president on July 13, 2018153

Date of switch: August 21, 2018
Reported ask of Taiwan: Loans for Port of La Unión development project, “astronomical sums,” funding for ruling party’s election campaign
Reported inducements from China: 3,000 tons of rice
Post-switch agreements: $150 million, plus investment promise for thirteen infrastructure projects (November 2018); loans for the Port of La Unión development project; funding for the ruling party’s 2019 election campaign
Relation to domestic politics: Switch occurred six months before February 2019 election, in which incumbent party lost

El Salvador recognized China in August 2018, with an initial delivery of 3,000 tons of rice, followed by a November promise of $150 million toward thirteen infrastructure projects.154 The diplomatic switch occurred six months before a February 2019 presidential election, in which the incumbent leader, Salvador Sánchez Cerén (2014–19), lost to President Nayib Bukele (2019–). After the election, Bukele criticized Beijing for intervening in El Salvador’s politics and even threatened to cut diplomatic ties with China.155

Wu, then Taiwan’s foreign minister, indicated that El Salvador had requested loans for the Port of La Unión development project, which Taiwanese engineers deemed economically unfeasible.156 He claimed the request was an “astronomical sum” and included funding for the ruling party’s campaign in the 2019 election.157 Sánchez Cerén, who lost the 2019 election, denied the accusations.158

Overall, engagement between China and El Salvador has appeared underwhelming, though El Salvador received $500 million in infrastructure promises and gifts—including a stadium, a national library, and an improved water treatment facility—during Bukele’s state visit to China in December 2019.159 Notably, just days after the switch in 2018, China began negotiations with the Port Executive Autonomous Commission of El Salvador, and a Chinese company expressed interest in investing $100 million in the port and surrounding area. However, El Salvador ultimately cancelled the planned development in January 2020 when Japan threatened to withdraw $102 million in development assistance.160

Burkina Faso

“Taiwan is our friend and our partner. We’re happy and we see no reason to reconsider the relationship.” – Burkina Faso Foreign Minister Alpha Barry in January 2017161

Dates of switch: May 24, 2018 (break with Taiwan), May 26, 2018 (switch to China)
Reported ask of Taiwan: New hospital
Reported inducements from China: $50 billion, hospital, take over Taiwan’s projects
Post-switch agreements: Hospital and Taiwan’s former projects, plus highway project (total estimate of $1.3 billion to $1.75 billion)
Relation to domestic politics: Reports of reassessment of relations with Taiwan after the election of a new president in November 2015

Burkina Faso, which switched in May 2018, had a history of “yo-yo diplomacy.” The African country first established ties with Taiwan in the 1960s, changed to China in 1973, and returned to Taiwan in 1994.162 A 2014 uprising against then–President Blaise Campaoré (1987–2014), who had overseen the recognition switch to Taiwan in 1994, led to debate and reevaluation of Burkina Faso’s relations with Taipei.163 The 2018 decision came as a surprise, though the government of then–President Roch Marc Christian Kaboré (2015–2022) had been attempting to extract benefits from both Taiwan and China.

Concerns about Burkina Faso’s position on Taiwan arose prior to the switch, including speculation in Burkinabé media, the president’s refusal to meet with Tsai the month before, and the African country’s unwillingness to advocate for Taiwan’s inclusion in the World Health Assembly.164 Reports suggest that economic factors played a particularly important role in the government’s ultimate decision to switch. China’s expanding business and economic ties, including investments in Burkina Faso’s mining sector, undercut Taiwan’s largely traditional approach to official development assistance.165

In April 2016, Huawei was negotiating with Burkinabé officials to deploy 5,400 kilometers of fiber-optic cables across the country, with around $82 million in financing, 60 percent of which came from the Bank of China.166 Construction began in December 2017, targeting 2,000 kilometers in the first stage of development. 167 Even as Chinese companies and Beijing exerted pressure on the new government, Taiwan continued offering inducements to maintain ties. In September 2016, Burkina Faso received $47 million in subsidies from Taiwan for sectors like education, agriculture, and defense. However, an additional $23 million in requested funding for five projects was subsequently refused by Taipei.168 A June 2017 gift of two Huey UH-1H helicopters was received warmly by Kaboré.169

In 2017, Burkina Faso’s foreign minister suggested that the country was being offered $50 billion to sign on with Beijing but asserted that there was “no reason to reconsider the relationship” with Taiwan.170 However, this declaration of friendship did not last long. Beijing promised to build a new hospital, take over Taiwan’s ongoing projects (the latter pledge worth $32 million), and open an embassy in Burkina Faso.171 An account from Le Monde reported that Taiwan had, in fact, been approached by the Burkinabé government about a new hospital project in late 2017, but China ultimately agreed to donate €91 million to finance the project.172 Additionally, students from Burkina Faso enrolled in Taiwanese universities were allowed to transfer to institutions in Hong Kong.173

Later that year, a Chinese state-owned construction company pursued a contract to build a highway with an estimated total cost of $1.75 billion.174 These incentives were not the only factor in Burkina Faso’s decision; scholars also point to Chinese restrictions on regional assistance—and the subsequent peer pressure—as contributing to the government’s decision.175 In a February 2018 meeting in Brussels, Beijing declared that Burkina Faso’s ties with Taiwan were an obstacle to funding and cooperation with the G5 Sahel.176

Dominican Republic

“We bring a cordial and friendly message from our President Danilo Medina, in which he expresses to you, Madam President Wen, his firm will for the Dominican Republic and Taiwan to continue deepening their diplomatic and commercial relations, as a sign of the friendship that unites our peoples.” – Dominican Foreign Minister Andrés Navarro to Taiwanese President Tsai Ing-wen at her inauguration on May 21, 2016177

Date of switch: May 1, 2018
Reported ask of Taiwan: “Billions of dollars”
Reported inducements from China: Promise of as much as $824 million in development projects in October 2017, and a $3.1 billion pledge from Beijing,
according to a Taiwanese official after the switch
Post-switch agreements: Eighteen agreements, $600 million loan for power distribution upgrade
Relation to domestic politics: N/A, switch occurred in the middle of the second term of President Danilo Medina (2012–20)

The Dominican Republic flirted with a diplomatic switch for at least a year before the final decision was made. Then–Taiwan Foreign Minister David Tawei Lee warned in July 2017 that the Dominican Republic should resist Chinese pressure, cautioning that Chinese infrastructure projects typically bring their own machinery, materials, and workers.178 In September 2017, Lee asserted that China had offered “very high figure” projects to entice Santo Domingo to switch recognition—promises he dismissed as “a very unrealistic dream, promises without solid fundamentals, like a check without funds.”179His visit to Santo Domingo was supplemented by other Taiwanese officials, including a deputy foreign minister and the defense minister.180 In November, Taiwan’s embassy reported “rumors that Beijing was offering the ally ‘billions of US dollars’” to switch.181

Officials from the Dominican Republic cited the potential growth in economic and trade links as one factor influencing their decision.182 In October 2017, Chinese companies showcased products at an event where a Chinese commercial representative suggested that China could invest as much as $824 million in development projects. On the same day, Taiwan donated military vehicles and two helicopters, reportedly worth over $30 million.183 In January 2018, the foreign ministers of China and the Dominican Republic, along with those of El Salvador and Haiti, gathered at the ministerial meeting of the Community of Latin American and Caribbean States to discuss trade and economic issues.184

After the switch in recognition was announced, a Taiwanese official claimed that Beijing offered the Dominican Republic $3.1 billion in investments and loans to convince the Caribbean nation to make the change.185 This package reportedly included $400 million for a new freeway, $300 million for a natural gas power plant, and $1.6 billion for infrastructure projects. A November 2018 visit by then–Dominican President Danilo Medina to Beijing yielded eighteen agreements on infrastructure, finance, trade, investment, education, and tourism, as well as a Memorandum of Cooperation on the BRI and the Maritime Silk Road. The two sides also announced a $600 million loan from the China Export-Import Bank to upgrade the Dominican Republic’s power distribution.186. However, the delivery of investment and promised trade benefits has not met the lofty promises made to the Medina government, and the 2020 election of Luis Abinader (2020–) as president of the Dominican Republic yielded a more cautious approach to Chinese engagement.187

Panama

“Panama and China (Taiwan) maintain a historic relationship of cooperation.” – Panamanian President Juan Carlos Varela on his Twitter account on the occasion of Taiwanese President Tsai Ing-wen’s June 27, 2016, visit to Panama188

Date of switch: June 12, 2017
Reported ask of Taiwan: N/A
Reported inducements from China: $1 billion for port development (agreed on before formal switch)
Post-switch agreements: Nineteen agreements, Panama joined BRI, multiple billion-dollar investments
Relation to domestic politics: N/A. President Juan Carlos Varela (2014–19) had long expressed his desire for a switch

Panama’s path to diplomatic relations with China began under President Ricardo Martinelli (2009–14), who expressed his desire to expand commercial opportunities between Panama and China in 2009. However, as explained to Panamanian Foreign Minister (and future president) Juan Carlos Varela in January 2010, the diplomatic truce between Ma and Beijing prevented any change despite this desire. Varela was elected president of Panama in 2014 and continued to push for relations with China, despite declarations in favor of Panama’s strategic relationship with Taiwan and a June 2016 visit by Tsai, the newly elected president of Taiwan. Negotiations between the Chinese and Panamanian governments were carried out in secret and at the pace desired by Beijing, culminating in a surprise announcement in June 2017.189

Before the switch, the Chinese consortium Landbridge bought control of the Margarita Island port in the Colón Free Zone for $1 billion and agreed to construct the Panama-Colón Container Port. Work on the project, near the Atlantic entrance to the Panama Canal, began on June 7, 2017, just a week before Panama’s switch.190 More broadly, Taiwanese sources indicated that China invested as much as $8 billion in the three months before the switch (and $25 billion in infrastructure projects in the prior three years).191

Panama’s formal recognition of China was followed by a flurry of deals. A meeting in Beijing between foreign ministers—at which the switch was formalized—yielded pledges of cooperation on issues ranging from investments to marine cooperation. Additionally, a visit to Beijing by Varela in November 2017 saw the signing of nineteen agreements and MOUs.192 At the meeting, Panama became the first Latin American country to join the BRI. Chinese companies won bids to construct a $4 billion high-speed train, a $1 billion natural gas-fired power plant, and a $1.4 billion bridge over the Panama Canal, among other projects.193

The 2019 election of Laurentino Cortizo (2019–24) as Panama’s president reversed some of China’s fortunes, and fresh scrutiny of Chinese projects led to the cancellation of several initiatives, including the Margarita Island port and high-speed rail projects, as well as of negotiations on an FTA.194 Other loans and investments, such as the Panama Canal bridge, have continued roughly as planned.

Panama’s recognition of China came as a wake-up call to Washington, where concerns over Panama’s expanding relations with Beijing led to recriminations and warnings. The US ambassador in Panama was alerted to the switch only hours before its announcement.195 In the years since, as US-China competition in Latin America has increased, so too has US attention to Panama’s geopolitical position.

São Tomé and Príncipe

“São Tomé and Príncipe supports … initiatives which will make it possible for the people of Taiwan to make a significant contribution to international issues, without neglecting the necessity for the two parties in the Straits of Formosa to work peacefully to agree to, frame and normalize their relations.” – São Tomé and Príncipe’s Prime Minister Patrice Trovoada during the sixty-seventh session of the United Nations General Assembly in New York on September 28, 2012196

Dates of switch: December 21, 2016 (break with Taiwan), December 26, 2016 (switch to China)
Reported ask of Taiwan: $140 million to $200 million
Reported inducements from China: $400 million to $800 million for deepwater port
Post-switch agreements: Minimal
Relation to domestic politics: July 2016 election of President Evaristo Carvalho (2016–21)

The West African island nation and former Portuguese colony changed its diplomatic allegiance in December 2016, the first to terminate relations with Taiwan under Tsai. Taipei was notified just five hours before the announcement was made.197 Taiwanese officials accused Beijing of engaging in “dollar diplomacy,” taking advantage of São Tomé’s “financing black hole” to push its “One China” principle.198 In its statement, Taiwan’s Ministry of Foreign Affairs pointed to the African country’s “excessive financial difficulties and demands beyond those the ROC could meet” as the reason São Tomé had “ignored 20 years of friendly diplomatic relations, playing both sides of the Taiwan Strait while holding out for the highest bidder.”199

The switch came months after a contentious July 2016 presidential election in São Tomé and Príncipe, in which the opposition candidate, Evaristo Carvalho, defeated the incumbent Manuel Pinto da Costa (2011–16). Carvalho (2016–21) was a close ally of Prime Minister Patrice Trovoada (2014–18), both of the Ação Democrática Independente party. At the time, this suggested greater political stability as well as continued ties with Taiwan. The outgoing president had sought closer ties with Beijing and had visited China in 2014.200

Taiwan claimed that São Tomé and Príncipe requested $140 million (or perhaps as much as $200 million) to maintain relations with Taipei.201 The African country had previously established diplomatic relations with Taiwan in May 1997. Taipei estimated aid to São Tomé at €155 million (approximately $170 million) since 1997 and signed an agreement in 2015 to provide €10 million (approximately $11 million) per year.202 Carvalho campaigned on a promise to fight poverty and improve education and job prospects (São Tomé and Príncipe was 90 percent dependent on international aid) and later stated that the country could not miss out on Chinese development funds.203 At the time of the switch, Carvalho had two children enrolled in graduate education in Taiwan.204 Trovoada—the leader of the government—later signed a five-year cooperation agreement with Beijing in April 2017.205

The diplomatic truce during the Ma administration did not prevent China and São Tomé from expanding economic ties, allowing Beijing to showcase the possible benefits of a diplomatic switch. In 2013, China established a trade mission to promote projects, including a planned $400 million deep-water port.206 São Tomé signed an MOU with China in October 2015 for an $800 million port, though the project never got off the ground.207 Trovoada said about the project: “I need revenue to provide health and good quality education. We said let us go to a model where, if we have to raise some debt, it is a sustainable debt …. That is why we engaged with this Chinese company.”208

The Gambia

“Let me reiterate that The Gambia’s commitment to cementing the ties that bind our two nations and our resolve to stand steadfastly by your side in your quest to take your rightful place within the global community of nations will never wane.” – Gambian President Yahya Jammeh in an undated quote from a November 18, 2013, article describing Gambia-Taiwan relations209

Dates of switch: November 14, 2013 (break with Taiwan), March 17, 2016 (switch to China)
Reported ask of Taiwan: Increased foreign aid
Reported inducements from China: N/A
Post-switch agreements: N/A
Relation to domestic politics: Recognition of Beijing came before the December 2016 election, won by opposition candidate Adama Barrow (2017–) in an upset

The Gambia was the only country to break diplomatic ties with Taiwan during the Ma administration, reportedly after Taipei refused to increase foreign aid.210. The move did not appear to be orchestrated by Beijing but was instead a personal decision by the authoritarian President Yahya Jammeh (1996–2017) and came despite Taiwanese funding of $1.15 million in August 2013 for a rehabilitation project and for six Gambians to study aeronautics in the United States.211 The Gambia had relations with Taiwan from 1968 to 1974, with China from 1974 until 1995, and Taiwan again from 1995 until 2013.212

Beijing did not want to be seen as pressuring Taiwan during the Ma administration, waiting until March 2016 to formalize relations with The Gambia.213 This date came after Tsai’s election in January but before her inauguration in May. This was likely meant as a signal that Beijing would take a hard line against Tsai and the DPP, which China perceives as pro-independence.214 The reestablishment of ties also came months before a presidential election in The Gambia, which was both the freest in its history and surprisingly lost by the autocratic incumbent Jammeh. With the country in recession, the government was in desperate need of economic development.215

Taiwan’s current partners and future prospects

China’s actions leave Taipei with eleven diplomatic partners, as well as Vatican City. The majority of these countries are in Latin America and the Caribbean: Belize, Guatemala, Paraguay, Haiti, Saint Kitts and Nevis, Saint Lucia, and Saint Vincent and the Grenadines. Taiwan has lost three of its six partners in the Pacific Islands but retains diplomatic ties with the Marshall Islands, Palau, and Tuvalu. In Africa, Eswatini is Taiwan’s only remaining partner. The Vatican is the only partner based in Europe. As Taiwan’s list has dwindled, these countries have faced continued and increasing pressure from China to switch relations.

When asked, Taiwan’s remaining partners are steadfast in their commitment to maintaining ties, but the statements of countries that have switched should prompt a degree of wariness. Sao Tomé, for example, had received substantial funds from Taiwan just months before it announced its switch. Nauru had been a staunch partner of Taipei until 2024. China has also taken advantage of long-standing domestic political strife in the Solomon Islands and electoral shifts in other countries.

Europe

The Vatican, though not enticed by the same economic benefits as other governments, has been rumored to be considering a switch if Beijing loosens its grip on Catholicism in communist China.216 Pope Francis has sought rapprochement with Beijing during his time as pope, and China’s Catholics are divided between those loyal to the Vatican and those who subscribe to the state-controlled Catholic Patriotic Association. A 2018 agreement recognized seven excommunicated Chinese bishops who had been appointed by Beijing without the Vatican’s approval. The deal granted the Vatican input on the naming of bishops and gave the pope veto power over candidates.217 More recently, in 2024, the Vatican sought to establish a permanent office in China and has been in talks to recognize the state-controlled Council of Chinese Bishops.218 The Vatican’s recognition of Taiwan carries significant symbolic meaning, as it highlights the island’s commitment to religious freedom, provides moral backing, and makes the Holy See Taiwan’s only diplomatic partner in Europe.219

Africa

In Africa, Eswatini—Taiwan’s last remaining diplomatic partner on the continent—has maintained relations with Taipei since gaining independence from the United Kingdom in 1968. Bilateral ties rely heavily on the personal rule of King Mswati III, who has thus far been a strong supporter of Taipei. Eswatini and Taiwan signed a bilateral economic cooperation agreement in 2008, renewing it in 2018 and again in 2023. The most recent extension included commitments by Eswatini to support Taiwan’s bid to join international organizations, alongside continued economic development assistance from Taipei.220 At the same time, Eswatini has cultivated economic ties with China, seeking trade and investment opportunities. Some media sources have characterized Taiwanese aid to Eswatini as a bribe to the king in exchange for his advocacy on Taiwan’s behalf at the UN General Assembly.221 Future relations between Taiwan and Eswatini remain heavily dependent on King Mswati’s support—his crackdown on pro-democracy protests in 2021 elicited little reaction from Taipei, while the Eswatini opposition has expressed a preference for diplomatic ties with Beijing.222

Pacific Islands

Map 1. Taiwan’s current partners and countries that have recognized the PRC since 2016 (Pacific Islands)

In the Pacific Islands, Beijing has adopted a more aggressive playbook, including coercive tactics against Palau’s tourism industry. Palauan President Surangel Whipps Jr. (2021–)—reelected in November 2024 elections—seeks to expand tourist access by increasing flight routes to reduce reliance on Chinese visitors.223 In November 2017, Beijing banned state-run travel agencies from offering group package tours to Palau, resulting in a 22 percent decline in Chinese tourists that year.224 In subsequent years, Palau has accused Chinese actors of launching a cyberattack against its government systems, stealing tens of thousands of documents, and carrying out naval incursions into its exclusive economic zone.225 “I think if you want to be a partner with Palau, a friend of Palau, you don’t do it by force,” Whipps said.226

China’s actions toward Palau offer an opportunity for Taiwan, the United States, and others to strengthen their ties with the Pacific Island nation. Interviews with Palauan representatives highlighted the need for greater economic development initiatives from Taiwan and Western partners, especially in the face of Chinese pressure campaigns. Inattentiveness opens a door for Beijing or Chinese actors to meet Palau’s economic and development needs. In late 2023 and early 2024, as the US Congress debated and delayed the passage of new Compacts of Free Association (COFA) with Palau, the Marshall Islands, and the Federated States of Micronesia, Whipps made clear in a February 2024 letter that some politicians in Palau were open to accepting Chinese economic inducements and switching diplomatic recognition.227 China had reportedly offered to “fill every hotel room” and “$20 million a year for two acres for a ‘call center.’”228

The Marshall Islands has also been targeted by coercive and corrupt tactics through a complex scheme to establish a special administrative region.229The government of Marshallese President Hilda Heine (2016–20, 2024–) refused to back the plan, and she barely survived a vote of no confidence afterward. At least five Marshallese officials were accused of accepting bribes to support the no-confidence vote.230 Heine has been a strong supporter of Taiwan, declaring that “the bedrock of our relationship is our shared commitment to democracy and the rule of law. China has neither.”231

These episodes were highlighted during negotiations with the United States over renewed COFA agreements. However, the delay in ratifying the agreements was poorly received—Heine went so far as to warn that relations with the United States were “gradually being destroyed by party politics.”232 While the final ratification of the COFA agreements might suggest that Palau and the Marshall Islands are unlikely to switch diplomatic recognition to China, the Federated States of Micronesia has both a COFA agreement and relations with Beijing.

The third Pacific Island country that recognizes Taiwan is Tuvalu. It, too, has come under pressure from China, including through a $400 million project to build artificial islands to protect against rising sea levels.233 Relations with Taiwan were a campaign issue in the January 2024 elections, with the eventual winner, now Prime Minister Feleti Teo, proclaiming his commitment to Taipei. One incumbent member of parliament—and a contender for the prime minister role—had called for a review of Tuvalu’s relations with Taiwan, though not necessarily a full break.234

An agreement between Tuvalu and Australia—the Falepili Union, signed in November 2023 under Teo’s predecessor—underscores the importance of support beyond Taiwan and the United States countering China’s influence. The agreement promised Tuvalu resettlement rights due to climate change and provided investment in infrastructure projects, including an undersea telecommunications cable, and assistance in response to natural disasters, pandemics, and military aggression. In return, Australia secured a veto over any security or defense-related agreements Tuvalu might seek with other countries.235 Teo’s government negotiated a follow-on agreement in May 2024 to ensure Tuvalu’s sovereignty, with the agreement coming into force in August 2024.236

Current Taiwanese President Lai Ching-te (2024–) traveled to Taiwan’s three Pacific Island partners in late 2024, tagging on a trip to Hawaii and Guam.237 The trip carried added importance as Taiwan’s diplomatic partners have supported Taipei’s participation in the Pacific Islands Forum (PIF). The annual PIF Leaders Meeting is to be held in the Solomon Islands in 2025, where, in past fora, Beijing—and the Solomon Islands—have sought to sideline Taiwan despite its status as a “developmental partner.”238

Latin America

The government of Paraguay—Taiwan’s last partner in South America—is under growing pressure to switch allegiance. The administration of President Santiago Peña (2023–) and the conservative Colorado Party have expressed strong support for Taiwan, but commercial pressures and domestic politics raise questions about the future of the bilateral relationship. As part of its “One China” policy, Beijing does not trade directly with Paraguay, which exports beef and pork to Taiwan. Instead, Paraguay has to export these products to China through Brazil and Argentina. As discussed in an interview with a Paraguayan official, China has used its economic importance in Brazil to pressure Paraguay to switch recognition and has restricted Chinese engagement with Mercosur, a regional customs union, to build political pressure against Paraguay’s relationship with Taiwan.239

This economic pressure may be opening the door for China to exert more influence over Paraguayan politics. In August 2024, Peña expressed openness to trade deals with China via Mercosur.240 China’s nationalist Global Times advocated for a trade deal as well, stating: “The advantages that the Chinese mainland market and manufacturing can offer to Paraguay will significantly surpass the impact of Taiwan’s financial support. We trust that the Paraguayan government will make a prudent and wise decision.”241 For the moment, Paraguay’s government has resisted the allure of Beijing’s offer of increased trade and a market for Paraguayan exports—but the domestic political strain on the Colorado Party is building.

Soon before leaving office, former President Mario Abdo Benitez (2018–23) stated that the Paraguayan people needed to see more benefits from their country’s partnership with Taiwan, advocating for a $1 billion investment in Paraguay. He contrasted this figure with an estimated $6 billion that he claimed Taiwan invested in countries that do not have diplomatic relations with Taipei.242

China’s economic and commercial pressure on Paraguayan firms and the Peña administration has built an opposition coalition in favor of abandoning relations with Taiwan. The current government’s main political opponent, Efraín Alegre, has called for a review of Paraguay’s relations with Taiwan.243 Barring an unexpected change by the current government, presidential elections in 2028 will be the next likely decision point for Paraguay’s citizens.

This dynamic makes US support for Paraguayan industries particularly important. Taiwan’s ability to import Paraguayan products is naturally limited compared to China’s, and the United States and other partners can help sustain the status quo by bolstering the South American country’s economy. Crucially, the goal is to support Paraguay’s relations with Taiwan—not to ensure the continued electoral success of the Colorado Party. In 2023, the US Department of Agriculture (USDA) completed a scientific review process and food safety audit, lifting restrictions on Paraguay beef imports that had been put in place due to a previous foot-and-mouth disease outbreak.244 In response, US senators from cattle-producing states raised concerns about health inspection standards of the imported beef, putting in danger Paraguayan beef exports to the US market.245 Underlying the health issue was anxiety over the economic impact of Paraguayan imports on domestic producers. Dismay over the possible overturning of the USDA rule was a key theme in interviews with Paraguayan officials conducted for this report in early 2024. However, since that time, the Senate resolution was not taken up by the House of Representatives, and Paraguayan beef imports exceeded expectations in 2024.246 Paraguayan government officials have expressed hope that the Trump administration will grant Paraguayan beef an import quota with preferential tariff treatment, as well as in areas such as technology investment. US Secretary of State Marco Rubio gave Paraguay reason for optimism when he stated during his January 2025 confirmation hearing that “it’s important to recognize allies in the region, like Paraguay, that have not flipped” their diplomatic ties from Taipei to Beijing.247

Guatemala is another partner that could be a candidate to switch.248 The country’s reformist government, under President Bernardo Arévalo (2024–), has committed to maintaining relations with Taiwan, but his administration faces pressure on both political flanks to shift allegiance to China.249 Guatemala hopes to expand trade with China; and Beijing has sought to leverage the limited trade that exists to pressure the Guatemalan government, including by suspending purchases of nuts and coffee from the Central American country in May 2024.250 China’s coercive measures provided Taiwan with an opportunity to help Guatemala, and Taiwanese officials subsequently called on businesses to buy Guatemalan coffee in support of their partner.251

The government of Belize—geographically in Central America but part of the Caribbean Community—continues to support strong ties with Taiwan, which offered significant support during the pandemic. The two governments signed an Economic Cooperation Agreement in September 2020 (effective starting January 2022) that offers preferential treatment for each other’s exports.252 Belize has advocated for Taiwan’s inclusion in the World Health Assembly and continues to host Taiwanese officials.253

The Caribbean

In the Caribbean, Taiwan’s status has received less media attention, even though the region has the greatest concentration of Taipei’s diplomatic partners. Haiti’s challenges with natural disasters, gangs, and governmental collapse have ensured that the contest between Taipei and Beijing is not top of mind, though both Taiwan and China have offered aid and investment.254 Taiwan’s relations with Saint Kitts and Nevis appear to be on firm ground, as politicians from both governments have exchanged visits in the past year.255 Saint Lucia has switched between China and Taiwan in the past, most recently recognizing Taiwan in 2007 following a change in government, just as its switch to Beijing in 1996 had occurred after a similar transition.256 Taiwan’s development projects there are well-received, though ultimately, Saint Lucia’s government is interested in which country has the most to offer the small island nation.257

In Saint Vincent and the Grenadines, the current government of Prime Minister Ralph Gonsalves (2001–) has expressed continued support for relations with Taiwan, and the country has maintained these relations under the leadership of both major political parties since 1981.258 However, in 2016, the opposition New Democratic Party announced that, if elected, it would switch diplomatic relations to China. (The party’s leader appeared to reverse this decision in 2023.)259 Gonsalves had expressed his own desire for increased private sector investment from Taiwan in 2017, noting that there was more investment from private Chinese firms than those from Taiwan.260 In 2023, Taiwan’s Export-Import Bank contributed $62 million in funding for a Port Modernization Project in Kingstown Port, together with the Caribbean Development Bank and the British government.261

What does Taiwan have to gain?

There are important reasons to question the continued value of competing with China over Taiwan’s formal diplomatic partnerships. A (non-exhaustive) list of arguments includes the following: Taiwan should focus its efforts on protecting its international space in multilateral fora; non-partners are effective protectors of Taiwan; Taiwan should focus its diplomatic and geoeconomic efforts on non-allied countries through such initiatives as the New Southbound Policy;262. it cannot afford to compete with Beijing financially; and some of Taiwan’s partners are illiberal regimes that do not align with Taiwan’s democratic standards.

This section will engage with three of these arguments, beginning with economic considerations in line with the focus of this report. It will then explain why Taiwan should actively seek to retain its existing formal partnerships. Lastly, it will discuss the deterrent value of Taiwan’s diplomatic ties for the United States and why Washington should work to galvanize economic and political support for Taipei and its diplomatic partners where appropriate.

Economics: Taiwan cannot compete with China economically and should not try to.

The argument most relevant to this study—and often highlighted in Taiwanese reporting and official statements—emphasizes China’s economic weight, which enables Beijing to offer overwhelming economic packages to entice diplomatic switches. As a much smaller entity, Taiwan is unable to compete with Beijing’s offer to its development-seeking partners. And if diplomatic ties are only about money, asked one KMT legislator back in 2016, “should we continue to spend large sums of money on those ties?263 There is no doubt that Taiwan’s economy pales in comparison to China’s, which makes Beijing’s restrictions on market access and its offers to expand trade and investment ties particularly potent. This underlying dynamic—the size and importance of China’s market for exports and as a source of investment, loans, and aid—is hard to discount and makes Beijing’s promises more enticing. At the same time, the economic benefit Taiwan derives from its diplomatic partners (in terms of trade) is small, especially when compared with its relations with other countries.264

A look at the amounts requested by Taipei’s former partners suggests that they are not completely out of reach: $83 million in aid for Nauru, an aircraft for Kiribati, and a new hospital for Burkina Faso. Some of the more outlandish figures reported as Chinese offers—“billions of dollars” in the Dominican Republic or “astronomical sums” in El Salvador—represent political messaging and exaggerated bargaining positions more than reality. Splashy investment promises from Chinese institutions are awarded over an extended period—such as promises of an FTA or increased trade flows, large infrastructure investments with long time horizons—and aid commitments often end up within shouting distance of the amounts requested from Taiwan. While fully acknowledging the risk of further extortion, meeting these demands—which often, but not always, serve legitimate development needs—can ensure that current diplomatic partners see economic value in retaining ties with Taipei. Taiwan has much to offer in trade and investment, particularly in concert with its larger informal partners, including the United States, Japan, Australia, European partners, and others. These countries have an interest in forestalling Beijing’s expanding influence and supporting Taiwan’s status on the world stage.

Much of Taiwan’s economic aid, development assistance, and technical support to its diplomatic partners is channeled through the International Cooperation and Development Fund (ICDF), which aims to promote socioeconomic development, enhance human capital, and provide humanitarian assistance in developing partner countries while strengthening ties with both diplomatic and unofficial partners.265 The organization focuses on cooperative projects in areas such as public health, education, information and communications technology, the environment, agriculture, and small and medium-sized enterprises.266 Taiwan’s model of foreign aid—including permanent technical missions—is commendable, and the ICDF deserves full credit for its work, not only with diplomatic partners but also in other countries.267 According to the November 2023 “White Paper on International Cooperation and Development Policies,” the “Taiwan Model” seeks to engage with local governments to assess their needs, deploy professional teams, and leverage domestic expertise to improve living conditions in partner countries.268

In recent interviews, Taiwanese Foreign Minister Lin Chia-lung has reinforced the importance of the “Taiwan Model” and rejected “checkbook diplomacy.” His vision for Taiwan’s foreign policy includes a commitment to values, expanding Taiwan’s involvement in supply chain resilience efforts—particularly in semiconductor technologies—and, of course, a focus on providing benefits to diplomatic partners.269

However, some of Taiwan’s partners, both current and former, feel that Taiwan could be doing more. The ICDF’s staff numbers only in the hundreds, and while its distributed aid is valuable, it remains relatively small—totaling $432 million in official development assistance in 2022.270 China’s investment in infrastructure and trade is viewed as a more likely path to domestic economic growth, and the Chinese government can direct state policy banks and encourage SOEs to pursue certain investments. When combined with the electoral and legitimacy concerns of those in power in Taiwan’s partner countries, Beijing’s offer can appear even more appealing.

Geopolitics: Taiwan has enough support from nondiplomatic partners that it does not need formal recognition.

Taipei has a robust set of informal relations that could blunt the impact of losing recognition from its remaining partners.271 According to the Lowy Institute’s Global Diplomacy Index, Taiwan operates 110 overseas posts, ninety-six of which are unofficial trade and/or cultural offices.272 Taiwan’s international legitimacy and status stems from these informal relationships, not its dwindling set of diplomatic relations with tiny states.273 These countries can also help Taiwan expand its international space and advocate for its inclusion in multilateral fora, making the presence of diplomatic partners less relevant. Taiwan or Taiwanese individuals have been blocked from participating in the World Health Assembly, the International Civil Aviation Organization Assembly, and a host of other UN meetings.274 However, both Taipei’s formal and informal partners have spoken up for its inclusion. Given that Taiwan’s diplomatic partners are relatively small, developing countries, support from non-official partners carries greater significance.

Still, there is both a moral and practical weight to this support. It is easier and more credible for China to dismiss US and Western backing for Taiwan when these countries do not formally recognize it. While the United States and other nations sometimes speak on Taiwan’s behalf, competing priorities and the fact that most governments do not recognize Taiwan blunt the impact of such statements. The countries that do recognize Taiwan have become its strongest advocates on the world stage and are the only ones willing to push for its inclusion in the UN General Assembly.275 There is value in continued focus and attention on this issue.

Values: Taiwan should focus on its own liberal democratic values.

Lastly, Taipei has a laudable commitment to liberal democratic norms and values-based foreign policy, which does not always match with the politics and actions of its diplomatic partners. This argument raises important questions about the geopolitical value of economic diplomacy and the trade-offs between preserving Taiwan’s status quo and benefitting illiberal regimes. Taiwan is well-established as a liberal democracy and is notably the only Mandarin-speaking entity that can make such a claim. Yet, at the same time, several of its diplomatic partners do not share this commitment to democratic norms. In the extreme, Eswatini’s monarchy and elites have greatly benefitted from relations with Taiwan, and Taipei’s only partner in Africa has remained steadfast despite Beijing’s efforts.276 In the past, Taiwan’s “dollar diplomacy” has been criticized for supporting corrupt, nondemocratic regimes or enriching those in positions of power.277 In the Solomon Islands, Taiwan has contributed to “constituency development funds” that can be seen as enabling corrupt practices, weakening criticism of China’s own funds—even as Beijing directs money only to politicians who support its policies.278

The reduction in Taipei’s diplomatic partners takes the sting out of some of these arguments, though an inherent dissonance can exist between a values-based foreign policy and national security concerns. Taiwan can and should continue to advocate for liberal and democratic norms—both through its existing relationships and as a national security necessity—while serving as a beacon to other governments that such change is worth pursuing. Taiwan’s approach to development aid, if supported by the United States and other nations that prioritize its international presence, offers one avenue through which to thread this needle.

Legitimacy and perception: The significance of retaining current formal diplomatic partners for Taiwan and the United States

Each of the arguments reviewed here independently suggests that Taiwan’s time and resources are better spent elsewhere. Together, they indicate that Taiwan should focus its economic, diplomatic, and geopolitical efforts on expanding its network of informal relationships. The legitimacy bestowed upon Taiwan by these formal diplomatic partnerships is perceived as not being worth the cost.

Given the growth of China’s economic engagement and geopolitical importance in the past forty years, it is no surprise that the trend of diplomatic switches heavily favors Beijing. Since Nauru’s switch in 2005, no country has recognized Taiwan at the expense of China, giving Taipei good reason to jettison “checkbook diplomacy.” Yet Beijing has updated its own policies, and though it retains a focus on leaders and elites—with the accompanying possibilities of corruption and coercion—China offers economic and development prospects that entice not only individuals in power but also the voters who (in some countries, at least) must elect those leaders.

The legitimacy that Taiwan gains from formal diplomatic recognition by other states in the international system is irreplaceable. Even though these partners represent only a fraction of the world’s population, their status as sovereign nations with full voting rights in the UN holds immense value in protecting and advocating for Taiwan’s shrinking international space. This is particularly significant given that most countries—including the United States—do not officially recognize Taiwan, even though many support Taipei’s status quo in other important ways, such as through arms sales, trade relations, and cultural offices.

Ultimately, Taiwan faces the prospect of state death through unification with China—peaceful or otherwise—and international legitimacy has been a key factor in determining state death or survival in previous eras. The more legitimate a state, the greater its likelihood of survival.279 This finding suggests that “states fearing for their survival should seek greater levels of international recognition,” with the author specifically pointing to Taiwan.280 Equally important, Beijing places high value on Taiwan’s diplomatic recognition. Cutting off Taiwan’s government from international legitimacy is just one more step in China’s long-running effort to claim the island as part of the CCP’s “One China” principle. Unification with Taiwan is a central legitimating and aspirational goal for the CCP, and the party must be seen as making progress on this front to maintain its domestic political grip on power.

For the United States, the significance of Taiwan’s diplomatic partners lies in their deterrent value. Deterrence relies on both the capability and resolve of the defender. A key factor in cross-strait deterrence—preventing Beijing from deploying the People’s Liberation Army (PLA) to forcibly seize control of Taiwan—is the military capability necessary to resist such an action. Taiwan cannot achieve this alone, making US and allied involvement essential to deterring China, whether through deterrence by denial or deterrence by punishment. Taiwan’s diplomatic partners—though small and geographically dispersed—would not play a central role in a crisis or conflict in the Taiwan Strait.

At the same time, the success of deterrence relies on the perceptions of the potential aggressor—in this case, China. To the extent possible, Beijing must come to the subjective perception that Taiwan and the United States have both sufficient capability and credible willingness to defend Taiwan or otherwise bear the costs of maintaining the status quo. China’s poaching of Taiwan’s diplomatic partners is just one more salami-slicing tactic, “using a long series of low-level aggressions to change the facts on the ground without ever taking action that would justify a major response.”281 Chinese military forces have employed similar tactics in the South China Sea and around Taiwan itself. While not martial in nature, poaching diplomatic partners presents a similar conundrum. Taken together, these actions slowly erode Beijing’s belief that Taiwan, the United States, and their partners have a credible commitment to protecting Taiwan from PLA encroachment.282

From a broader geopolitical perspective, most of Taiwan’s remaining partners are in regions of great interest to the United States—Latin America, the Caribbean, and the Pacific Islands. In the former two, US policymakers fear China’s growing influence in the United States’ backyard, harkening back to the Monroe Doctrine.283 The Pacific Islands hold significant strategic value should armed conflict ever arise, and both the United States (along with its allies) and China have increasingly focused their attention on the region—for better or worse.

For this reason, the monetary cost of increasing aid and development assistance to Taiwan’s current diplomatic partners is outweighed by the benefits to Taiwan—and the United States—of maintaining these relationships. China is steadily closing Taiwan’s international space, not only by reducing diplomatic recognition but also by limiting Taipei’s ability to participate in multilateral fora. Taiwan’s partners speak out in support of Taipei at the UN, the World Health Organization, and other international organizations. At the 2024 Summer Olympics in Paris, fans of Taiwan had signs confiscated for displaying innocuous messages in support of Taiwanese athletes.284 From Beijing’s perspective, no issue is too insignificant.

Washington has taken important action during this period through both executive and legislative measures. The Global Cooperation and Training Framework, launched in 2015, has provided health assistance and facilitated coordination on economic development.285 The United States Agency for International Development (USAID) and the ICDF have conducted joint trainings and signed cooperation agreements to improve both organizations’ ability to deliver on their programs.286 The US International Development Finance Corporation (DFC) has likewise strengthened collaboration with the ICDF and other Taiwanese agencies to catalyze private sector investment opportunities.287

In Congress, passage of the TAIPEI (Taiwan Allies International Protection and Enhancement Initiative) Act in March 2020 supported Taiwan’s diplomatic partners and other countries that have increased engagement with Taiwan.288 The Taiwan Enhanced Resilience Act, part of the fiscal year 2023 National Defense Authorization Act of December 2022, amended the TAIPEI Act to further clarify intent to “support Taiwan’s diplomatic relations with governments and countries.”289 In 2024, members of the House Select Committee on the Strategic Competition between the United States and Chinese Communist Party introduced the Taiwan Allies Fund Act to authorize “$120 million over three years for the State Department and USAID to provide foreign assistance to Taiwan’s official and unofficial partners subjected to coercion and pressure from the CCP.”290

How should Taiwan approach its relations with its diplomatic partners

These recommendations are derived from the broader set of suggestions in the concluding chapter of this report, applied specifically to Taiwan’s diplomatic challenges.

  • Avoid copying China. Dollar diplomacy in its past form is a losing prospect. However, this doesn’t mean Taiwan and the ICDF can’t supplement their current development assistance. Trade and investment efforts in diplomatic partners can be pursued transparently, supporting both these countries and the values that Taiwan stands for.
  • Set clear goals. The goal is clear: prevent Taiwan’s current diplomatic partners from switching to China. At the same time, countries that do switch should not necessarily be punished afterward, particularly because Taiwan has nurtured positive relations in these nations over many years—relationships that can continue to hold value. These states are simply (and unfortunately) like the vast majority of countries in the world.
  • Identify opportunities and risks. The loss of Taiwan’s diplomatic partners frequently correlated with local electoral politics. Cultivating ties with multiple sectors and constituencies is key to maintaining long-term partnerships.
  • Address financing and economic development needs. Taiwan has much to offer, not only through development assistance but also as a financier for development projects. Taiwan’s Exim Bank has already done so, contributing to a port redevelopment project in Saint Vincent and the Grenadines, for example. Taiwan can also work to increase trade ties in important sectors, as it did with Guatemala’s coffee industry when the Central American country faced pressure from China. The overwhelming size of China’s economy can make these efforts appear miniscule by comparison, but such moves demonstrate Taiwan’s commitment to its diplomatic partners.
  • Collaborate with informal partners to ensure Taiwan’s continued formal partnerships. The United States, Japan, Australia, and other countries, as well as multilateral institutions like the ADB, can help bolster Taiwan’s economic engagement with its partners in ways that could reasonably rival China’s offerings. These collaborations should be a point of emphasis in Taiwan’s diplomatic strategy, and given the ICDF’s longstanding relationships, Taiwan is well-positioned to identify worthwhile projects and coordinate with development partners.
  • Assess effectiveness. Taiwan’s current approach is not working. Maintaining the status quo in cross-strait relations—including preventing Taipei from losing any more diplomatic partners—will require additional resources from both Taiwan and its network of informal partners. Through collaborative, transparent, and positive economic incentives, Taiwan can reinvent its formal partnerships to benefit all parties.

Chapter 4: Targeted inducements in other areas of Chinese foreign policy

This chapter highlights additional aspects of Beijing’s foreign policy through which China has sought to use positive incentives in service of its geopolitical goals.

China’s efforts to subvert ASEAN’s position on the South China Sea

Beijing has successfully used inducements to ASEAN to alter the organization’s proceedings in China’s favor. In Southeast Asia, China is often—and rightly—criticized for its belligerent tactics in the South China Sea. At the same time, Beijing has managed to forestall a strong regional reaction through the targeted use of inducements to key players in ASEAN, the region’s consensus-based organization.291

The current regime in Cambodia and its elites have a long-standing relationship with China, stemming from Beijing’s support for Hun Sen’s political ascension in the 1990s. China’s aid and investment relationships—often nontransparent and corrupt—buttressed Hun Sen’s rule and secured Beijing’s support on any number of issues. Still, in some instances, a quid pro quo arrangement lurks beneath the surface. In 2009, for example, Cambodia deported twenty Uyghur asylum seekers to China. Two days later, then–Vice President Xi visited Phnom Penh and announced a new $1.2 billion package of grants and soft loans.292 After the United States protested and cancelled a shipment of surplus military trucks, China supplied 257 vehicles of its own.

Phnom Penh supported Beijing’s position on the South China Sea at the 2012 and 2016 ASEAN summits. On both occasions, China offered inducements tied to specific policy positions, which came immediately before the summits. China claims most of the body of water through its “nine-dashed line,” which is contested by ASEAN members the Philippines, Vietnam, Malaysia, and Brunei through rival claims. In March 2012, Cambodia hosted then–Chinese President Hu Jintao, who asked then–Cambodian Prime Minister Hun Sen to not move “too fast” toward finalizing a Code of Conduct for the South China Sea, arguing that doing so could threaten regional stability.293 Hu promised to double bilateral trade to $5 billion and announced a new series of economic aid packages.294 That year, Cambodia held the rotating ASEAN chairmanship, giving it influence over the meeting’s agenda, and hosted several key meetings, including the ASEAN Foreign Ministers’ Meeting in July.295 That meeting marked the first time in ASEAN’s forty-five-year history that the group failed to issue a joint statement, as other countries lobbied for the inclusion of the South China Sea issue.296

A similar situation occurred before the July 2016 summit, which took place soon after the Permanent Court of Arbitration made a ruling against China’s position on the South China Sea, siding with the Philippines. Three days after the ruling, and just days before the ASEAN Foreign Ministers’ Statement, Hun Sen announced that Beijing was donating $600 million in aid over three years to support election infrastructure, education, and health projects.297 Cambodia vetoed calls to “respect [the] diplomatic and legal process” following the arbitration ruling, and the communique from the ASEAN meeting in Laos did not mention China’s loss.298 Manila reportedly agreed to remove references to the arbitration ruling to ensure the group released a joint statement.299 After the meeting, Beijing publicly thanked Phnom Penh and later announced it would finance Cambodia’s request for a $16 million administration building for the Cambodian National Assembly.300 Xi visited Cambodia in October and promised $59 million in new loans, $90 million in debt forgiveness, and $178 million in grants.301

During this period, Hun Sen was also under domestic political pressure. In 2012, opposition leader Sam Rainsy, a longtime adversary of Hun Sen, formed the Cambodia National Rescue Party (CNRP) and subsequently exceeded expectations in the 2013 parliamentary elections. Although his Cambodian People’s Party remained in power, Hun Sen faced increasing domestic political pressure and sought external assistance from China to solidify his position. Following the dissolution of the CNRP in 2017, Cambodia and China grew closer, while the United States suspended military aid to Cambodia in 2018 over concerns of democratic backsliding.302

Seeking support for the BRI

Italy’s decision to join the BRI in March 2019 is a powerful example of China’s ability to use economic inducements to its advantage. Two factors are important to note. First, the size of China’s economy is an underlying dynamic that is impossible to ignore. The lure of its market and the possibility of closer trade and investment ties are significant, and the BRI promises improved relations with Chinese companies—although a nonbinding MOU on the BRI provides no guarantees.303 Second, Italy’s government, then led by populist Prime Minister Giuseppe Conte (2018–21), was desperate to boost a sputtering economy, with Chinese investments and trade as a key potential avenue.304 Moreover, the country felt that Europe had been of little assistance during pre-COVID-19 immigration and economic crises.305

Italy’s signing of an official BRI MOU—despite its vague and nonbinding nature—was an important geopolitical coup for Xi. Italy is a member of the G7, was the first G7 country to join the BRI, and is the fourth-largest economy in Europe.306 For China, buy-in from Conte’s government was a significant legitimizing factor for Xi’s signature initiative. In addition to those benefits, Beijing was able to drive a wedge within the EU, as well as between the EU and the United States. The move undermined efforts to find a common European stance toward China, and Italy ignored US warnings about signing on to the BRI.307

Italy’s membership in the BRI did not deliver significant benefits and has been touted as evidence that joining the BRI is no guarantee Beijing will follow through on its promises.308 Almost five years after Italy joined, the conservative government of Prime Minister Giorgia Meloni—who began serving as prime minister in October 2022 and called the decision to join the BRI “a big mistake”—indicated and followed through with Italy’s withdrawal from the initiative in December 2023.309 China was surprisingly restrained in its criticism of Rome’s move, and the two countries have since signed additional agreements and maintained economic relations.310 China’s post-pandemic economic challenges have prevented Beijing from taking an aggressive diplomatic line on Italy’s departure, beyond the usual disappointment. Italian policymakers were also complimentary of China’s continued importance to Italy’s economy despite leaving the BRI.311

Other countries have had similarly varied experiences with the BRI. In the Philippines, the administration of President Ferdinand Marcos Jr. (2022–) announced in October 2023 that his country would terminate China’s large infrastructure projects—several of them under the BRI banner.312 This decision came partly in response to immediate tensions in the South China Sea (when a Chinese coast guard ship rammed a Filipino fishing vessel in contested waters), but also as Manila reassessed relations with Beijing. Marcos’s predecessor, Duterte (2016–22), had actively pursued closer economic and political ties with China early in his tenure, receiving promises of investment and boosted trade ties that aided his domestic agenda. At the same time, Duterte played down the South China Sea dispute and questioned his country’s relationship with the United States.313 However, China’s promises to Duterte never fully materialized, were deemed a “pledge trap” by one analyst, and Marcos has sought support from other sources, such as Japan and the United States.314

In South America, Brazil, Colombia, and Paraguay are the three remaining countries that have not joined the BRI. Due to its relations with Taiwan, Paraguay is unable to join the BRI. Both Brasília and Bogotá have contemplated joining in recent years, arriving at different conclusions. Colombia has indicated a willingness to join, though details still need to be worked out through a working group with Beijing. An FTA is one of the major incentives for Colombia to join, as the country has already received substantial infrastructure investment, and trade ties have grown in the past decade, highlighting that membership in the BRI is not a necessary condition for closer economic ties with China and Chinese firms.315

Brazil has recognized that joining the BRI is not necessary to strengthen economic ties with China. Given its status as the largest economy in South America and its diverse range of partners, Brazil is not desperate for Chinese investment. Despite Beijing’s entreaties, the administration of President Luiz Inácio Lula da Silva (2003–11, 2023–), known as Lula, announced in October 2024 that Brazil would not sign on to the initiative, raising questions about support for China in the BRICS grouping (where now both India and Brazil have resisted signing on to the BRI).316 Lula’s decision came as Xi was preparing for a state visit to Brazil and following requests from Beijing that Brazil join the BRI, including during Lula’s visit to Beijing in April 2023. At the 2024 meeting, the Brazilian government did, however, upgrade relations with Beijing to join China’s “community with a shared future,” signed dozens of agreements, and agreed to pursue synergies between the BRI and Brazil’s development strategy.317 For its part, China’s nationalist media blamed the United States for Brazil’s decision.318

Brazil, Huawei, and the pandemic

Beijing is creative in its use of inducements to achieve strategic goals, and the COVID-19 pandemic presented new opportunities for China to use public health assistance to gain influence. While not strictly economic in nature, China’s offers of help during the pandemic had monetary value and assisted countries in mitigating the worst of the global crisis. Much of China’s assistance was meant to develop goodwill and soft power, similar to non-conditional economic engagement in both purpose and result.319 However, on some occasions, there was more behind Beijing’s public health measures.

This appears to have been the case in Brazil. In 2020, the United States pressured the Brazilian government to avoid allowing Huawei’s 5G network to expand its wireless services.320 The Trump administration initially saw success, with then–Brazilian President Jair Bolsonaro (2019–23) in close alignment with the United States; Bolsonaro’s son, a member of Congress, even pledged to create a secure system “without Chinese espionage.”321 But in early 2021, COVID-19 was spreading widely in Brazil, with cases at their highest level. The Bolsonaro government had an agreement with AstraZeneca to manufacture the company’s vaccine within Brazil, but delays left the president desperate. (Bolsonaro had also previously rejected a vaccine from a Chinese firm, while a political opponent brought in the first vaccine administered in Brazil, undermining Bolsonaro’s popularity.322) During a trip to Beijing in February 2021, Brazil’s communications minister met with Huawei’s executives and asked for vaccines; the message reached the government, and China delivered. Two weeks later, Brazilian telecoms regulator Anatel allowed Huawei’s reentry into Brazil’s 5G auction.323

China’s “vaccine diplomacy” gave Beijing an advantage elsewhere in Latin America and the Caribbean as well. Similar to Brazil, the Dominican Republic at first restricted Huawei’s involvement in the country’s 5G networks but reconsidered after China sold one million doses of COVID-19 vaccines to the Dominican Republic. In May 2021, Honduras’s government suggested it might open a trade office in China to facilitate acquiring vaccines. In Paraguay, there were public calls to break ties with Taiwan to gain access to China’s vaccines.

Chapter 5: Conclusion and recommendations

China’s use of economic inducements is an underappreciated aspect of Beijing’s larger economic statecraft strategy. This project aims to provide a more comprehensive understanding of China’s economic incentives, particularly the development and initial pledge of inducements, which will, in turn, help reassess the balance of US economic statecraft between coercion and inducement. Beijing has used targeted inducements to gain influence over discrete policy issues in other countries that counter US interests, including successfully reducing Taiwan’s international space, undermining a free and open Indo-Pacific, and buying support for large-scale Chinese initiatives such as the BRI, which bolster Xi’s legitimacy both at home and abroad.

These insights position the United States to pursue its own interests through targeted bilateral inducements, multilateral economic initiatives, and partnerships with like-minded countries to put forward compelling alternatives for emerging economies. The US policy community is targeting China with robust anti-coercion measures to protect the United States and its allies, with good reason. At the same time, branding all Chinese economic activity as coercive limits the United States’ ability to effectively identify and focus resources on acts of Chinese economic statecraft that pose a significant threat to US interests. Such an approach risks deploying anti-coercion measures in suboptimal contexts while also alienating partners in the Global South who are in need of economic development.

Similarly, understanding the characteristics of recipient countries most receptive to Beijing’s inducements and how China communicates and identifies its offers of inducements can inform US efforts to put in place the institutions and mechanisms for channeling US economic inducements—with clear policy objectives—to signal US policy preferences to recipients. It will also help US policymakers identify areas of alignment between US interests and local needs in recipient countries, which in turn will inform decisions around economic engagement, inducements, and how best to bring in allied and like-minded partner governments in these efforts.

Recommendations

The recommendations for US policymakers that stem from this report do not focus on export controls, sanctions, trade restrictions, and other targeted coercive economic measures. To reiterate, these are important and necessary components of a holistic strategy to counter China’s economic statecraft. Still, the pendulum should swing more toward the use of economic incentives to achieve US strategic objectives. With four years at the helm, the Trump administration is in a strong position to develop a principled approach to US national security goals through the use of positive incentives, particularly in the Global South, where US influence is under pressure.324

There will be resistance to this approach. On one side, some view sending US money and resources abroad as not in the United States’ interest. However, national security interests extend beyond US borders and will impact national competitiveness and influence regardless. On the other side, a more transactional approach to foreign policy may be viewed as a betrayal of liberal values and, in some instances, as undermining the United States’ role as a champion of human rights. However, such an approach does not reject transparency, anti-corruption measures, environmental and social protections, or similar measures. Rather, it acknowledges the challenge of balancing these priorities against China’s offer of hands-off investment and involvement.

Avoid copying China’s approach while offering a positive vision for development that extends beyond past action.

  • While Beijing often leverages state-run banks, firms, and institutions to support its interests abroad, the United States primarily relies on its private sector to deploy capital, with private institutions often being more risk averse in emerging economies.325 The US approach to development has centered around USAID and other grant-making institutions as a foundation of US engagement. These institutions can bring great value and expertise to recipient countries while simultaneously supporting the extension of US influence—a goal that should remain unchanged, even as foreign aid programs undergo cost-cutting measures and reorganization. At the same time, both development assistance and private capital can be directed toward regions or sectors of outsized importance.
  • Likewise, a targeted approach to development assistance and financing should emphasize transparency and the relative sustainability of US and Western strategies. As the excesses of large-scale Chinese projects become increasingly apparent, the United States and its allies have much to offer, as demonstrated by the DFC’s transcontinental Lobito Corridor project in Africa.326
  • China’s approach to development cooperation often feels omnipresent across many countries and regions of the world and can appear fast, flashy, and relevant.327 However, US policymakers should not scold countries for every Chinese project they accept or threaten to reduce engagement. Developing countries in need of economic growth and development will find Chinese firms competitive for a number of reasons, and Washington should signal acceptance—along with appropriate warnings—of China’s economic presence.328

Set clear goals and identify opportunities.

  • Beijing has proven adept at identifying desired projects in Global South countries. To some extent, China’s outreach relies on elites rather than the countries’ citizens, but this does not inherently result in corruption. Dedicated outreach in capitals across the world would yield a list of possible projects that not only could inform US development financing or assistance but also alert US agencies to possible countries or sectors that China might target in the future. The State Department’s regional China officers, tasked with monitoring Chinese activity around the world, should continue their work.329
  • High-level diplomatic missions are important but insufficient for the task at hand. US delegations have been cancelled many times; this is unsurprising given the extent of US interests at home and abroad, but it can also set back US priorities in the slighted region. (Southeast Asia and the Pacific Islands, already not often top of mind, have seen several visits downgraded or cancelled.330) Nothing can replace well-resourced and well-staffed diplomatic outposts in pursuing US interests.331 For the new Trump administration and Congress, quickly nominating and approving ambassadors across the globe would be an important start.
  • FTAs have gone out of style, and the Trump administration has levied tariffs and other trade restrictions against China, Canada, Mexico, and many others. However, trade has proven to be an effective inducement for Beijing in achieving some of its foreign policy goals, and increased trade is, in part, what has made the BRI and potential connectivity a potent tool of China’s economic statecraft. The United States remains an important trade market for many countries, and efforts to increase trade to specific countries in the Global South or in specific sectors could yield important benefits to US national security and foreign policy.332

Pursue avenues to reduce costs and risks to the private sector while meeting development financing needs in developing countries.

  • With the backing of the state, many Chinese entities that are pushing Beijing’s priorities abroad are willing to take risks regarding loan repayment or project failure.333 From a market perspective, these risks might not be worth taking, and US development financing and the private sector have generally been risk averse. This leaves many developing countries with unmet needs and with few, if any, alternatives to Chinese actors, who are generally more risk acceptant.
  • Targeted risk mitigation through insurance or other guarantees can help ensure that private sector partners are willing to commit to a sector or project. Not every project will demand or deserve extra protection, but those with demonstrated national security or foreign policy implications could be worth the extra effort. A recent RAND Corporation report, for example, suggests that Congress could raise caps on the overall percentage of US development financing efforts likely to lead to default.334
  • This will also require an assessment of effectiveness of US development assistance. A full accounting of past, current, and future projects—for their timeliness, effectiveness in achieving their development goals, and any strategic effects (intentional or not for past and current)—will help policymakers determine the next step in development cooperation.

Coordinate with allies and partners in the private sector and multilateral institutions.

  • The United States has developed a number of institutions and initiatives in response to China and the BRI. The Biden administration’s Partnership for Global Infrastructure and Investment (PGII) is an effort by the G7 countries to fund infrastructure projects in developing countries. In critical minerals, the Minerals Security Partnership seeks to strengthen critical minerals supply chains through cooperation with reputable mining companies and trusted governments.335 The DFC, constituted during the first Trump administration, has had success in funding private sector projects.
  • The DFC is up for reauthorization in 2025, offering opportunities to improve its model. This could include financing riskier projects in support of US interests abroad, shortening approval times, and increasing personnel funding.336 Building on the DFC’s successes—$4 billion in total approved projects in fiscal year 2025—and reforming the complex process for awarding foreign assistance contracts would increase the competitiveness of the DFC as a funding option.337
  • Collaboration with other agencies on technical assistance to vet prospective projects, feasibility studies, and export financing would further improve the US offer, as would increased information sharing between the public and private sectors.
  • Coordination with multilateral institutions will likewise be key, and this is an area where the United States has existing partnerships with peer institutions, including those in Taiwan, Japan, Australia, and other like-minded countries. Where the US private sector is lacking—such as in large-scale infrastructure development—US institutions should seek private sector project partners from these countries. Multilateral organizations like the World Bank, the Inter-American Development Bank, and the International Monetary Fund—while viewed with suspicion in some quarters—are also potential partners.

Get the message out and be proactive.

  • Beijing has been assertive in disseminating its message, and too often, the United States is seen as merely reacting to China’s moves (as in Panama or the Solomon Islands) or chastising countries for engaging with Chinese firms. China has made a dedicated effort at discourse power, co-opting local leaders and media outlets to “tell China’s story well.”338 The United States needs a public diplomacy strategy of its own.
  • This effort begins at the diplomatic level, emphasizing alignment between the priorities of the host country and the United States. From here, US agencies need public dissemination and marketing strategies at the onset of new projects that are centralized, rather than spread among various actors involved.
  • The United States should invest in its public diplomacy apparatus and could benefit from a US Information Agency, similar to the one that countered Soviet propaganda during the Cold War.339The State Department’s Global Engagement Center (which was closed in December 2024) aimed to counter foreign propaganda and malign influence, offering a mechanism to counter Chinese narratives. The US Agency for Global Media oversees five international media entities, including the Voice of America and Radio Free Asia, which have historically provided independent news coverage for overseas audiences.
  • Messaging is important in general, but it should be a particular focus for development projects with national security or foreign policy implications. Ensuring that the benefits of a project are well known—while maintaining appropriate transparency and environmental and social safeguards—will significantly enhance US influence. While China-based firms have improved their approach on some of these issues, they still represent a distinct strength of Western firms and an opportunity for added value from US and Western partners.

The lure of economic cooperation with the United States remains strong, and Washington should complement and build on existing initiatives, such as the DFC and PGII. The United States should pair these programs with diplomatic outreach, public diplomacy, and support for transparency and sustainability to advance a positive vision for developing countries and offer a compelling alternative to Chinese projects. Through targeted bilateral inducements, multilateral economic initiatives, and partnerships with like-minded countries, the United States can expand its arsenal of economic statecraft tools, reduce the appeal of Chinese economic engagement, and support US interests abroad.

About the authors

William Piekos is currently employed as an Analyst in Foreign Affairs with the Congressional Research Service (CRS). This report was prepared prior to his CRS employment. The views expressed herein do not represent those of CRS or the Library of Congress

Explore the program

The Global China Hub researches and devises allied solutions to the global challenges posed by China’s rise, leveraging and amplifying the Atlantic Council’s work on China across its sixteen programs and centers.

1    Henry Farrell and Abraham Newman, “Weaponized Interdependence: How global economic networks shape coercion,” International Security 44, no. 1 (2019): 42–79, https://doi.org/10.1162/isec_a_00351.
2    On inducements in international relations, see Han Dorussen, “Mixing Carrots with Sticks: Evaluating the Effectiveness of Positive Incentives,” Journal of Peace Research 38, no. 2 (March 2001): 252, https://www.jstor.org/stable/425499; Richard Haass and Meghan L. O’Sullivan, eds., Honey and Vinegar: Incentives, Sanctions, and Foreign Policy (Washington, DC: Brookings Institution Press, 2000); Miroslav Nincic, “Getting What You Want: Positive Inducements in International Relations,” International Security 35, no. 1 (July 2010): 138–183, https://www.jstor.org/stable/40784650.
3    Nicole Goldin and Mrugank Bhusari, “II. Positive economic statecraft: Wielding hard outcomes with soft money,” in Kimberly Donovan et al., Transatlantic Economic Statecraft: Different Approaches, Shared Risk, Atlantic Council, September 20, 2023, https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/in-depth-research-reports/report/us-eu-uk-need-shared-approach-to-economic-statecraft/#path-forward.
4    Ilyana Kuziemko and Eric Werker, “How Much Is a Seat on the Security Council Worth? Foreign Aid and Bribery at the United Nations,” Journal of Political Economy 114, no. 5 (October 2006), https://doi.org/10.1086/507155; Christopher Kilby, “The political economy of conditionality: An empirical analysis of World Bank loan disbursements,” Journal of Development Economics 89, no. 1 (May 2009): 51–61, https://doi.org/10.1016/j.jdeveco.2008.06.014.
5    Audrye Wong, “Peddling or Persuading: China’s Economic Statecraft in Australia,” Journal of East Asian Studies 21, no. 2 (2021): 283–304, https://doi.org/10.1017/jea.2021.19.
6    Wong, “Peddling or Persuading;” Nincic, “Getting What You Want;” Michael Mastanduno, “Economic Statecraft, Interdependence, and National Security: Agendas for Research” in Power and the Purse: Economic Statecraft, Interdependence, and National Security, eds. Jean-Marc F. Blanchard, Edward D. Mansfield, and Norrin M. Ripsman (London: Frank Cass, 2000).
7    Albert O. Hirschman, National Power and the Structure of Foreign Trade (University of California Press, 1945).
8    Daniel W. Drezner, “The United States of Sanctions: The Use and Abuse of Economic Coercion,” Foreign Affairs 100, no. 5 (September/October 2021): 142–154.
9    Robert A. Pape, “Why Economic Sanctions Do Not Work,” International Security 22, no. 2 (Autumn 1997): 90–136, https://doi.org/10.2307/2539368; Adam Taylor, “13 times that economic sanctions really worked,” Washington Post, April 28, 2014, https://www.washingtonpost.com/news/worldviews/wp/2014/04/28/13-times-that-economic-sanctions-really-worked/.
10    Jeff Stein and Federica Cocco, “The Money War: How Four U.S. Presidents Unleashed Economic Warfare Across the Globe,” Washington Post, July 25, 2024, https://www.washingtonpost.com/business/interactive/2024/us-sanction-countries-work/.
11    US Department of the Treasury, “Speech Preview: Excerpts of Secretary Lew’s Remarks on Sanctions at The Carnegie Endowment for International Peace,” press release, March 30, 2016, https://home.treasury.gov/news/press-releases/jl0397.
12    Daleep Singh, “Forging a positive vision of economic statecraft,” New Atlanticist, Atlantic Council, February 22, 2024, https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/blogs/new-atlanticist/forging-a-positive-vision-of-economic-statecraft/.
Goldin and Bhusari, “II. Positive economic statecraft,” 22–23.
13    Goldin and Bhusari, “II. Positive economic statecraft,” 22–23.
14    Stephan Haggard and Marcus Noland, Hard Target: Sanctions, Inducements, and the Case of North Korea, (Redwood City, CA: Stanford University Press, 2017); Richard Nephew, “The Hard Part: The Art of Sanctions Relief,” Washington Quarterly 41, no. 2 (2018): 63–77, https://doi.org/10.1080/0163660X.2018.1484225.
15    Michael E. Miller and Frances Vinall, “China signs security deal with Solomon Islands, alarming neighbors,” Washington Post, April 20, 2022, https://www.washingtonpost.com/world/2022/04/20/solomon-islands-china-security-agreement/; Kate Lyons and Dorothy Wickham, “The deal that shocked the world: inside the China-Solomons security pact,” Guardian, April 20, 2022, https://www.theguardian.com/world/2022/apr/20/the-deal-that-shocked-the-world-inside-the-china-solomons-security-pact.
16    Mingjiang Li, “Front Matter” in China’s Economic Statecraft: Co-optation, Cooperation, and Coercion, ed. Mingjiang Li (World Scientific Series on Contemporary China Volume 39, 2017).
17    Christina Lu, “China’s Checkbook Diplomacy Has Bounced,” Foreign Policy, February 21, 2023, https://foreignpolicy.com/2023/02/21/china-debt-diplomacy-belt-and-road-initiative-economy-infrastructure-development/.
18    Bethany Allen, Beijing Rules: How China Weaponized Its Economy to Confront the World (New York, NY: Harper, August 1, 2023).
19    Vida Macikenaite, “China’s economic statecraft: the use of economic power in an interdependent world,” Journal of Contemporary East Asia Studies 9, no. 2 (2020): 108–126, https://doi.org/10.1080/24761028.2020.1848381.
20    Christoph Nedopil, “Countries of the Belt and Road Initiative,” Green Finance and Development Center, Fudan University, 2025, https://greenfdc.org/countries-of-the-belt-and-road-initiative-bri/.
21    Michael Schuman, Jonathan Fulton, and Tuvia Gering, How Beijing’s newest global initiatives seek to remake the world order, Atlantic Council, June 21, 2023, https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/in-depth-research-reports/issue-brief/how-beijings-newest-global-initiatives-seek-to-remake-the-world-order/.
22    For just a few examples, see Jennifer Hillman and David Sacks, China’s Belt and Road: Implications for the United States, Independent Task Force Report No. 79, Council on Foreign Relations, updated March 2021, https://www.cfr.org/task-force-report/chinas-belt-and-road-implications-for-the-united-states/findings; Cheng-Chwee Kuik, Irresistible Inducement? Assessing China’s Belt and Road Initiative in Southeast Asia, Council on Foreign Relations, June 15, 2021, https://www.cfr.org/sites/default/files/pdf/kuik_irresistible-inducement-assessing-bri-in-southeast-asia_june-2021.pdf; Jean-Marc F. Blanchard, “Problematic Prognostications about China’s Maritime Silk Road Initiative (MSRI): Lessons from Africa and the Middle East,” Journal of Contemporary China 29, no. 122 (2020): 159–174, https://doi.org/10.1080/10670564.2019.1637565.
23    Michael J. Mazarr et al., Understanding Influence in the Strategic Competition with China, RAND Corporation, June 30, 2021, 25–34, https://www.rand.org/pubs/research_reports/RRA290-1.html.
24    Eric Robinson et al., Development as a Tool of Economic Statecraft, RAND Corporation, October 23, 2023, https://www.rand.org/pubs/research_reports/RRA2271-1.html.
25    “China Global Investment Tracker,” American Enterprise Institute, accessed July 23, 2023, https://www.aei.org/china-global-investment-tracker/; “Chinese Development Finance Program,” AidData, accessed July 23, 2023, https://www.aiddata.org/cdfp.
26    Zenobia T. Chan finds that China’s dual goals behind the BRI—addressing domestic economic problems and gaining international acceptance for its governance models—undermine each other and make quid pro quo arrangements difficult. If the sender (China) lacks an incentive to rescind an inducement, the target has no incentive to concede to the sender’s demand, as the target expects to receive the inducement regardless of its actions. Zenobia T. Chan, “Affluence without Influence: The Inducement Dilemma in Economic Statecraft,” SSRN, April 9, 2024, http://dx.doi.org/10.2139/ssrn.4789560.
27    Jinghan Zeng, Slogan Politics: Understanding Chinese Foreign Policy Concepts (Palgrave Macmillan, 2020).
28    David Shullman, ed., A World Safe for the Party: China’s Authoritarian Influence and the Democratic Response, International Republican Institute, 2021, 55, https://www.iri.org/wp-content/uploads/2021/02/final_bridge-ii_execsummary.pdf.
29    Briana Boland et al., CCP Inc. in Greece: State Grid and China’s Role in the Greek Energy Sector, Center for Strategic and International Studies, October 19, 2022, https://www.csis.org/analysis/ccp-inc-greece-state-grid-and-chinas-role-greek-energy-sector.
30    For examples of related analyses, see Ryan Dube and Gabriele Steinhauser, “China’s Global Mega-Projects Are Falling Apart,” Wall Street Journal, January 20, 2023, https://www.wsj.com/articles/china-global-mega-projects-infrastructure-falling-apart-11674166180; John Hurley, Scott Morris, and Gailyn Portelance, “Examining the Debt Implications of the Belt and Road Initiative from a Policy Perspective,” Center for Global Development, March 4, 2018, https://www.cgdev.org/sites/default/files/examining-debt-implications-belt-and-road-initiative-policy-perspective.pdf; Elaine K. Dezenski, “Below the Belt and Road: Corruption and Illicit Dealings in China’s Global Infrastructure,” Foundation for Defense of Democracies, May 2020, https://www.fdd.org/wp-content/uploads/2020/05/fdd-monograph-below-the-belt-and-road.pdf.
31    Hillman and Sacks, China’s Belt and Road.
32    Rafiq Dossani, Jennifer Bouey, and Keren Zhu, “Demystifying the Belt and Road Initiative,” RAND Corporation, Working Paper 1338, May 2020, https://www.rand.org/pubs/working_papers/WR1338.html.
33    Barry Naughton and Briana Boland, CCP Inc.: The Reshaping of China’s State Capitalist System, Center for Strategic and International Studies, January 31, 2023, https://www.csis.org/analysis/ccp-inc-reshaping-chinas-state-capitalist-system; James Reilly, Orchestration: China’s Economic Statecraft Across Asia and Europe (New York, NY: Oxford University Press, 2021).
34    William J. Norris, Chinese Economic Statecraft: Commercial Actors, Grand Strategy, and State Control (Ithaca, NY: Cornell University Press, 2016).
35    Scott L. Kastner and Margaret M. Pearson, “Exploring the Parameters of China’s Economic Influence,” Studies in Comparative International Development 56 (2021): 20–24, https://doi.org/10.1007/s12116-021-09318-9.
36    Ibid., 24–30.
37    Peter S. Goodman, “China’s Stalling Economy Puts the World on Notice,” New York Times, August 11, 2023, https://www.nytimes.com/2023/08/11/business/china-economy-trade-deflation.html; Gerard DiPoppo, “Focus on the New Economy, Not the Old: Why China’s Economic Slowdown Understates Gains,” RAND Corporation, February 18, 2025, https://www.rand.org/pubs/commentary/2025/02/focus-on-the-new-economy-not-the-old-why-chinas-economic.html.
38    Carla Freeman and Henry Tugendhat, “Why China is Rebooting the Belt and Road Initiative,” United States Institute of Peace, October 26, 2023, https://www.usip.org/publications/2023/10/why-china-rebooting-belt-and-road-initiative.
39    Matt Schrader and J. Michael Cole, “China Hasn’t Given Up on the Belt and Road,” Foreign Affairs, February 7, 2023, https://www.foreignaffairs.com/china/china-hasnt-given-belt-and-road; Matthew Mingey and Agatha Kratz, “China’s Belt and Road: Down but not Out,” Rhodium Group, January 4, 2021, https://rhg.com/research/bri-down-out/.
40    Matthew Reynolds and Matthew P. Goodman, Deny, Deflect, Deter: Countering China’s Economic Coercion, Center for Strategic and International Studies, March 21, 2023, https://www.csis.org/analysis/deny-deflect-deter-countering-chinas-economic-coercion; Fergus Hunter et al. “Countering China’s coercive diplomacy,” Policy Brief Report No. 68/2023, Australian Strategic Policy Institute, https://www.aspi.org.au/report/countering-chinas-coercive-diplomacy; Fergus Hanson, Emilia Currey, and Tracy Beattie, “The Chinese Communist Party’s coercive diplomacy,” Policy Brief Report No. 36/2020, Australian Strategic Policy Institute, https://www.aspi.org.au/report/chinese-communist-partys-coercive-diplomacy; Aya Adachi, Alexander Brown, and Max J. Zenglein, “Fasten Your Seatbelts: How to manage China’s economic coercion,” MERICS China Monitor, August 25, 2022, https://merics.org/en/report/fasten-your-seatbelts-how-manage-chinas-economic-coercion. Beyond those noted, also see Peter Harrell, Elizabeth Rosenberg, and Edoardo Saravalle, China’s Use of Coercive Economic Measures, Center for a New American Security, June 11, 2018, https://www.cnas.org/publications/reports/chinas-use-of-coercive-economic-measures; Luke Patey, “The myths and realities of China’s economic coercion: Understanding Beijing’s evolving statecraft,” Danish Institute for International Studies, November 24, 2021, https://research.diis.dk/en/publications/the-myths-and-realities-of-chinas-economic-coercion-understanding.
41    Evelyn Goh, “The Modes of China’s Influence: Cases from Southeast Asia,” Asian Survey 54, no. 5 (October 2014): 825–848, https://doi.org/10.1525/as.2014.54.5.825.
42    Ana Christina Alves, “Chapter 9: China’s Economic Statecraft in Africa: The Resilience of Development Financing from Mao to Xi” in Mingjiang Li, ed., China’s Economic Statecraft.
43    Axel Dreher et al., “Apples and Dragon Fruits: The Determinants of Aid and Other Forms of State Financing from China to Africa,” International Studies Quarterly 62, no. 1 (March 2018): 182–194, https://doi.org/10.1093/isq/sqx052. The authors measured foreign policy considerations through United Nations General Assembly votes and adherence to the “One China” policy—two common but flawed measures of policy alignment with Beijing.
44    Stan Hok-wui Wong and Nicole Wu, “Can Beijing Buy Taiwan? An empirical assessment of Beijing’s agricultural trade concessions to Taiwan,” Journal of Contemporary China 25, no. 99 (2016): 353–371, https://doi.org/10.1080/10670564.2015.1104868; Chi-hung Wei, “China’s Economic Offensive and Taiwan’s Defensive Measures: Cross-Strait Fruit Trade, 2005-2008,” China Quarterly 215 (September 2013): 641–662, https://doi.org/10.1017/S030574101300101X.
45    Audrye Wong, “China’s economic statecraft under Xi Jinping,” Brookings Institution, January 22, 2019, https://www.brookings.edu/articles/chinas-economic-statecraft-under-xi-jinping/; Audrye Wong, “Reaping What You Sow: Subversive Carrots, Public Accountability, and the Effectiveness of Economic Statecraft,” Working Paper, 2020; Wong, “Peddling or Persuading.”
46    Jonathan E. Hillman, “Corruption Flows Along China’s Belt and Road,” Center for Strategic and International Studies, January 18, 2019, https://www.csis.org/analysis/corruption-flows-along-chinas-belt-and-road; Elaine K. Dezenski, “China Is Bailing Out Its Bad Best, and Handing the West a Geopolitical Opening,” Barron’s, May 18, 2023, https://www.barrons.com/articles/china-belt-and-road-loans-bailout-infrastructure-africa-asia-7f905df0.
47    Philip Zelikow et al., “The Rise of Strategic Corruption,” Foreign Affairs 99, no. 4 (July/August 2020): 107–120, https://www.foreignaffairs.com/articles/united-states/rise-strategic-corruption-weaponize-graft.
48    Johannes Gerschewski, “The three pillars of stability: legitimation, repression, and co-optation in autocratic regimes,” Democratization 20, no. 1 (January 2013), https://doi.org/10.1080/13510347.2013.738860.
49    Dreher et al., for example, found that Chinese aid is funneled to political leaders’ birth regions. Axel Dreher et al., “African leaders and the geography of China’s foreign assistance,” Journal of Development Economics 140 (September 2019): 44–71, https://doi.org/10.1016/j.jdeveco.2019.04.003.
50    “China wants to be the leader of the global south,” Economist, September 21, 2023, https://www.economist.com/china/2023/09/21/china-wants-to-be-the-leader-of-the-global-south.
51    Dossani, Bouey, and Zhu, “Demystifying the Belt and Road Initiative,” 25.
52    Ryan Neelam and Jack Sato, 2024 Key Findings Report, Lowy Institute Global Diplomacy Index, 2024, https://globaldiplomacyindex.lowyinstitute.org/key_findings.
53    Nahal Toosi, “‘Frustrated and powerless’: In fight with China for global influence, diplomacy is America’s biggest weakness,” Politico, October 23, 2022, https://www.politico.com/news/2022/10/23/china-diplomacy-panama-00062828; Duan Xiaolin and Liu Yitong, “The Rise and Fall of China’s Wolf Warrior Diplomacy,” The Diplomat, September 22, 2023, https://thediplomat.com/2023/09/the-rise-and-fall-of-chinas-wolf-warrior-diplomacy/.
54    Jian Xu and Qian Gong, “‘Telling China’s Story Well’ as propaganda campaign slogan: International, domestic and the pandemic,” Media, Culture & Society 46, no. 5 (2024), https://doi.org/10.1177/01634437241237942.
55    Niva Yau, A Global South with Chinese Characteristics, Atlantic Council, June 13, 2024, https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/in-depth-research-reports/report/a-global-south-with-chinese-characteristics/; Alex Colville, “Telling Zhejiang’s Story,” China Media Project, December 4, 2024, https://chinamediaproject.org/2024/12/04/telling-zhejiangs-story/.
56    Kuik, Irresistible Inducement?
57    Aileen S. P. Baviera and Aries A. Arugay, “The Philippines’ Shifting Engagement with China’s Belt and Road Initiative: The Politics of Duterte’s Legitimation,” Asian Perspective 45, no. 2 (Spring 2021): 277–300, https://doi.org/10.1353/apr.2021.0001.
58    David Sacks, “Why Is Italy Withdrawing From China’s Belt and Road Initiative?” Asia Unbound, Council on Foreign Relations, August 3, 2023, https://www.cfr.org/blog/why-italy-withdrawing-chinas-belt-and-road-initiative.
59    Hillman and Sacks, China’s Belt and Road.
60    Thomas J. Shattuck, “The Race to Zero?: China’s Poaching of Taiwan’s Diplomatic Allies,” Orbis 64, no. 2 (2020): 334–352, https://doi.org/10.1016/j.orbis.2020.02.003.
61    Helen Davidson, “Paraguay asks Taiwan to invest $1bn to remain allies,” Guardian, September 29, 2022, https://www.theguardian.com/world/2022/sep/29/paraguay-asks-taiwan-to-invest-1bn-to-remain-allies-china.
62    Luke Hunt, “Analysts: Cambodia to ‘Pay Price’ for Siding with China,” Voice of America, July 29, 2016, https://www.voanews.com/a/analysts-cambodia-to-pay-a-price-for-siding-with-china/3439768.html; Renato Cruz De Castro, “Explaining the Duterte Administration’s Appeasement Policy on China: The Power of Fear,” Asian Affairs: An American Review 45, no. 3/4 (October-December 2018): 165–191, https://doi.org/10.1080/00927678.2019.1589664.
63    Cambodia offers an interesting case, as Prime Minister Hun Sen is portrayed as Beijing’s lackey, yet he still secured new offers of public economic assistance in 2012 and 2016 in exchange for supporting China’s positions in ASEAN.
64    ABC/Reuters, “China gains the Solomon Islands and Kiribati as allies, ‘compressing’ Taiwan’s global recognition,” ABC News Australia, September 21, 2019, https://www.abc.net.au/news/2019-09-21/china-new-pacific-allies-solomon-islands-kiribati-taiwan/11536122.
65    Ivana Karásková et al., eds., “Empty shell no more: China’s growing footprint in Central and Eastern Europe,” Association for International Affairs, 2020, https://chinaobservers.eu/wp-content/uploads/2020/04/CHOICE_Empty-shell-no-more.pdf.
66    Lunting Wu, “China’s Transition From the Belt and Road to the Global Development Initiative,” The Diplomat, July 11, 2023, https://thediplomat.com/2023/07/chinas-switch-from-the-belt-and-road-to-the-global-development-initiative/.
67    Ido Vock, “Belt and Road: Italy pulls out of flagship Chinese project,” BBC, December 7, 2023, https://www.bbc.com/news/world-europe-67634959.
68    Beijing has maintained this stance and seeks “unification” with Taiwan, even as the Chinese Communist Party has never ruled the island. Taiwan’s stance has shifted across administrations, with the current government holding the position that a declaration of independence is unnecessary because Taiwan is already independent. Chong Ja Ian, “The Many ‘One Chinas’: Multiple Approaches to Taiwan and China,” Carnegie China, February 9, 2023, https://carnegieendowment.org/research/2023/02/the-many-one-chinas-multiple-approaches-to-taiwan-and-china?lang=en.
69    Beijing requires its diplomatic partners to engage with Taiwan only unofficially. The Kuomintang’s Chiang Kai-shek initially did not allow for dual recognition, but over time, any policy position on this matter appears to have softened. More recent Taiwanese governments have indicated that there is no strict policy against diplomatic recognition of both China and Taiwan, though, in practice, instances of dual recognition have been transitory. Lu Yi-hsuan, “Taiwan could recognize dual relations with China,” Taipei Times, March 28, 2023, https://www.taipeitimes.com/News/taiwan/archives/2023/03/28/2003796857; Edward A. McCord, “One China, Dual Recognition: A Solution to the Taiwan Impasse,” The Diplomat, June 20, 2017, https://thediplomat.com/2017/06/one-china-dual-recognition-a-solution-to-the-taiwan-impasse/.
70    For a numerical count of Taiwan and China recognition since 1913, see “中華民國歷年邦交國數量” [The number of countries with diplomatic relations with the Republic of China by year], ROC History, January 15, 2024, https://ekinchiu.wixsite.com/rochistory/post/diplomatic-relations-over-the-years-quantity.
71    Jessica Drun, Taiwan’s engagement with the world: Evaluating past hurdles, present complications, and future prospects, Atlantic Council, December 20, 2022, https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/in-depth-research-reports/issue-brief/taiwans-engagement-with-the-world/.
72    Shih Hsiu-chuan, “WIKILEAKS: Cables detail rocky diplomatic relations,” Taipei Times, September 10, 2011, https://www.taipeitimes.com/News/taiwan/archives/2011/09/10/2003512928. This report uses the term “diplomatic partner” to describe countries that recognize Taiwan; alliances traditionally imply mutual defense, though in practice “ally” and “partner” are often used as synonyms. See Rachel Tecott Metz, Jason W. Davidson, and Zuri Linetsky, “The Difference Between an Ally and a Partner,” Inkstick, February 15, 2023, https://inkstickmedia.com/the-difference-between-an-ally-and-a-partner/.
73    Ching-hsin Yu, “The centrality of maintaining the status quo in Taiwan elections,” Brookings Institution, March 15, 2017, https://www.brookings.edu/articles/the-centrality-of-maintaining-the-status-quo-in-taiwan-elections/.
74    Jermyn Chow, “Sao Tome’s decision to cut diplomatic ties is unfriendly and reckless, says Taiwan,” Straits Times, December 21, 2016, https://www.straitstimes.com/asia/east-asia/china-welcomes-sao-tomes-decision-to-cut-diplomatic-relations-with-taiwan.
75    For example, see Ben Blanchard, “Taiwan says China uses record number of aircraft in war games,” Reuters, October 15, 2024, https://www.reuters.com/world/asia-pacific/taiwan-details-record-surge-chinese-warplanes-involved-war-games-2024-10-15/.
76    In Papua New Guinea, for example, a Singaporean businessman reportedly sought to bribe officials with money from the Taiwanese government. As described later, Taiwan’s contributions to Rural Constituency Development Funds in the Solomon Islands have come under scrutiny. Steve Marshall, “PNG businessmen named in Taiwan diplomacy bribe,” ABC News (Australia), October 14, 2008, https://www.abc.net.au/news/2008-10-15/png-businessmen-named-in-taiwan-diplomacy-bribe/542240; “Taiwan-Solomon Islands Relations and China’s Growing Inroads into the Pacific Islands,” Global Taiwan Brief (Global Taiwan Institute) 4, no. 13 (July 3, 2019), https://globaltaiwan.org/2019/07/taiwan-solomon-islands-relations-and-chinas-growing-inroads-into-the-pacific-islands/.
77    “China welcomes El Salvador to jointly build Belt and Road,” CGTN, December 4, 2019, https://news.cgtn.com/news/2019-12-03/Xi-holds-welcome-ceremony-for-visiting-Salvadoran-president-M7Jd05efCM/index.html; interview, representative of current diplomatic partner, June 2024.
78    “El Salvador establishes diplomatic relationship with Beijing, cuts ties with Taiwan,” CGTN, August 24, 2018, https://news.cgtn.com/news/3d3d514d354d6a4e79457a6333566d54/index.html.
79    Office of the President, Republic of China Taiwan, “President Tsai and President Russ Joseph Kun of Nauru hold bilateral talks,” news release, October 9, 2023, https://english.president.gov.tw/NEWS/6615.
80    Kirsty Needham and Yimou Lee, “Taiwan loses ally Nauru, accuses China of post-election ploy,” Reuters, January 15, 2024, https://www.reuters.com/world/asia-pacific/taiwan-loses-first-ally-post-election-nauru-goes-over-china-2024-01-15/.
81    Paul Millar, “China’s Pacific charm offensive pays off as Nauru drops Taipei for Beijing,” France 24, January 16, 2024, https://www.france24.com/en/asia-pacific/20240116-china-s-pacific-charm-offensive-pays-off-as-nauru-drops-taipei-for-beijing; Jamie Seidel, “Key nation ditches Taiwan for China, leaving Australia in the dust,” news.com.au, January 22, 2024, https://www.news.com.au/finance/economy/world-economy/key-nation-ditches-taiwan-for-china-leaving-australia-in-the-dust/news-story/73abc851f2ae64784e11cfa57edf0165; Meg Keen and Mihai Sora, “Nauru’s diplomatic switch to China – the rising stakes in Pacific geopolitics,” Interpreter, January 18, 2024, https://www.lowyinstitute.org/the-interpreter/nauru-s-diplomatic-switch-china-rising-stakes-pacific-geopolitics.
82    “Full text: Joint statement by China and Nauru,” CGTN, March 26, 2024, https://news.cgtn.com/news/2024-03-26/China-Nauru-vow-to-expand-pragmatic-cooperation-1shOk5TFuRG/p.html.
83    “China developments are for Nauruans: HE Adeang,” Nauru Bulletin #7, Government of the Republic of Nauru, May 3, 2024, https://www.nauru.gov.nr/government-information-office/nauru-bulletin/nauru-bulletin-2024/nauru-bulletin-7.aspx.
84    Jono Thomson, “Taiwan approves new ambassador to diplomatic ally Nauru,” Taiwan News, December 10, 2023, https://www.taiwannews.com.tw/news/5056463.
85    “Australia pays controversial Chinese company millions for Nauru’s new port,” Islands Business, April 23, 2024, https://islandsbusiness.com/news-break/australia-pays-controversial-chinese-company-millions0for-naurus-new-port/.
86    Ibid.
87    “China developments are for Nauruans.”
88    Jonathan Barrett, “EXCLUSIVE Pacific island turns to Australia for undersea cable after spurning China,” Reuters, June 24, 2021, https://www.reuters.com/world/asia-pacific/exclusive-pacific-island-turns-australia-undersea-cable-after-spurning-china-2021-06-24/.
89    “Australia gains effective veto over Nauru security pact,” Islands Business, December 11, 2024, https://islandsbusiness.com/news-break/australia-gains-effective-veto-over-nauru/.
90    Millar, “China’s Pacific charm offensive.”
91    “‘We are real friends’: Honduran president says in Taiwan visit amid China tension,” Reuters, November 13, 2021, https://www.reuters.com/world/china/we-are-real-friends-honduran-president-says-taiwan-visit-amid-china-tension-2021-11-13/.
92    Jeff Ernst, “Honduras president-elect’s China pledge puts Taiwan and US on edge,” Guardian, December 1, 2021, https://www.theguardian.com/world/2021/dec/01/honduras-xiomara-castro-taiwan-china-diplomacy.
93    Joel Guinto, “Taiwan ally Honduras seeks diplomatic switch to China,” BBC, March 15, 2023, https://www.bbc.com/news/world-asia-china-64960744; Sarah Kinosian and Ben Blanchard, “U.S. leans on Honduras to rethink China switch, hopes for reprieve,” Reuters, March 18, 2023, https://www.reuters.com/world/us-leans-honduras-rethink-china-switch-hopes-reprieve-2023-03-18/.
94    Julio Cruz, “¿Por qué China no puede establecer relaciones con Honduras?” [Why can’t China establish relations with Honduras?], El Heraldo, January 9, 2023, https://www.elheraldo.hn/honduras/motivos-relacion-diplomacia-cancilleria-embajador-china-honduras-JA11664805; Duncan DeAeth, “Taipei expresses concern as Beijing approaches diplomatic ally Honduras,” Taiwan News, January 20, 2023, https://www.taiwannews.com.tw/news/4787069.
95    He Yuting, ed., “Two major hydropower stations ease the power shortage in Honduras,” Seetao, April 6, 2023, https://www.seetao.com/details/209696.html; David Rogers, “Honduras switches to China in search of aid and infrastructure,” Global Construction Review, March 16, 2023, https://www.globalconstructionreview.com/honduras-switches-to-china-in-search-of-aid-and-infrastructure/; Bryan Burgess et al., Spotlight on PRC Engagement in Honduras Relative to Central America, AidData, January 2025, https://www.aiddata.org/publications/spotlight-on-prc-engagement-in-honduras-relative-to-central-america.
96    Michelle Lai, “Honduras Ditches Taiwan for China,” Foreign Policy Research Institute, October 6, 2023, https://www.fpri.org/article/2023/10/honduras-ditches-taiwan-for-china/.
97    Margaret Myers, “From Dams to Data: China’s Shifting Interests in Central America,” United States Institute of Peace, June 18, 2024, https://www.usip.org/publications/2024/06/dams-data-chinas-shifting-interests-central-america; AFP, “Honduras gestiona crédito con China pero mantiene lazos con Taiwán” [Honduras manages credit with China but maintains ties with Taiwan], El Heraldo, February 2, 2023, https://www.elheraldo.hn/honduras/honduras-gestiona-credito-china-mantiene-lazos-taiwan-represa-LB12028939.
98    “Taiwán muestra preocupación por contactos entre su aliado Honduras y China” [Taiwan shows concern over contacts between ally Honduras and China], swissinfo.ch, January 19, 2023, https://www.swissinfo.ch/spa/taiw%c3%a1n-muestra-preocupaci%c3%b3n-por-contactos-entre-su-aliado-honduras-y-china/48216104.
99    “Taiwan recalls ambassador as Honduras switches ties to China,” AP, March 23, 2023, https://apnews.com/article/china-taiwan-honduras-us-diplomatic-ties-87bdfd07bc39d82fbec22b92785fea3d.
100    Keoni Everington, “Honduras cut ties with Taiwan over refusal to double aid,” Taiwan News, March 16, 2023, https://www.taiwannews.com.tw/news/4836903.
101    Amy Chang Chien and Emiliano Rodriguez Mega, “In Blow to Taiwan, Honduras Switches Relations to China,” New York Times, March 25, 2023, https://www.nytimes.com/2023/03/25/world/asia/taiwan-honduras-china-relations.html.
102    Associated Press, “Honduras establishes ties with China after break from Taiwan,” NPR, March 27, 2023, https://www.npr.org/2023/03/27/1166177955/honduras-establishes-ties-with-china-after-break-from-taiwan.
103    Myers, “From Dams to Data.”
104    “Honduras officially joins China-proposed BRI as bilateral ties develop rapidly,” Global Times, June 12, 2023, https://www.globaltimes.cn/page/202306/1292441.shtml; Chen Qingqing and Bai Yunyi, “Exclusive: More Honduran products to be exported to China with lower cost, faster speed and more opportunities: Honduran official,” Global Times, June 11, 2023, https://www.globaltimes.cn/page/202306/1292366.shtml; “Members,” New Development Bank, accessed February 28, 2025, https://www.ndb.int/about-ndb/members/. For a list of the MOUs, see Nicolle López, “¿Cuáles son los 17 acuerdos de cooperación firmados entre China y Honduras?” [What are the 17 cooperation agreements signed between China and Honduras?] El Heraldo, June 12, 2023, https://www.elheraldo.hn/honduras/cuales-son-los-17-acuerdos-de-cooperacion-firmados-entre-china-honduras-JM13866492. BRICS refers to the grouping of Brazil, Russia, India, China, and South Africa.
105    “Honduras probes Chinese interest in investing in $20 billion rail line,” Reuters, July 7, 2023, https://www.reuters.com/world/americas/honduras-probes-chinese-interest-investing-20-bln-rail-line-2023-07-07/; Ma Jingjing, “China, Honduras to implement FTA early harvest arrangement starting from Sunday,” Global Times, August 30, 2024, https://www.globaltimes.cn/page/202408/1318943.shtml?id=11.
106    “Honduras and China set $275 mln cooperation agreement,” Reuters, March 22, 2024, https://www.reuters.com/world/americas/honduras-china-set-275-mln-cooperation-agreement-2024-03-22/.
107    Mariela Flores, “Empresa de China iniciará estudios para construcción de represa Río del Hombre” [Chinese company to begin studies for construction of Rio del Hombre dam], Tu Nota, September 12, 2024, https://www.tunota.com/honduras-hoy/empresa-de-china-iniciara-estudios-para-construccion-de-represa-rio-del-hombre-2024-09-12.
108    “Erick Tejada firma convenio con Power China en visita oficial al gigante asiático” [Erick Tejada signs agreement with Power China during official visit to the Asian giant], Canal 8, October 22, 2024, https://tnh.gob.hn/nacional/erick-tejada-firma-convenio-con-power-china-en-visita-oficial-al-gigante-asiatico/.
109    “Banco de China invertirá en proyectos de la ENEE” [Bank of China to invest in ENEE projects], Mi Nota, December 18, 2024, https://minotahn.com/banco-de-china-invertira-en-proyectos-de-la-enee/.
110    Stefanie Eschenbacher and Elida Moreno, “Exclusive: U.S. must cultivate Central America or lose out to China: Panama president-elect,” Reuters, May 6, 2019, https://www.reuters.com/article/world/exclusive-us-must-cultivate-central-america-or-lose-out-to-china-panama-pres-idUSKCN1SC09H/.
111    Demetri Sevastopoulo, Aime Williams, and Jude Webber, “Donald Trump cuts off aid to three Central American states,” Financial Times, June 17, 2019, https://www.ft.com/content/f3cd73d2-9135-11e9-aea1-2b1d33ac3271; Daniel Trotta, “U.S. restores aid to Central America after reaching migration deals,” Reuters, October 16, 2019, https://www.reuters.com/article/world/us-restores-aid-to-central-america-after-reaching-migration-deals-idUSKBN1WV2T7/.
112    Enrique Andres Pretel, “Nicaragua pledges to fight for Taiwan recognition on global stage,” Reuters, January 10, 2017, https://www.reuters.com/article/us-taiwan-usa-nicaragua/nicaragua-pledges-to-fight-for-taiwan-recognition-on-global-stage-idUSKBN14V03Z/.
113    “Nicaragua breaks ties with Taiwan, switches allegiance to Beijing,” Reuters, December 9, 2021, https://www.reuters.com/world/china/nicaragua-breaks-ties-with-taiwan-switches-allegiance-beijing-2021-12-09/.
114    Dánae Vílchez, “Nicaragua’s Flip From Taiwan to China Has Yet to Pay Off,” Americas Quarterly, July 24, 2024, https://www.americasquarterly.org/article/nicaraguas-flip-from-taiwan-to-china-has-yet-to-pay-off/.
115    R. Evan Ellis, “China’s Growing Strategic Position in Nicaragua,” The Diplomat, December 18, 2023, https://thediplomat.com/2023/12/chinas-growing-strategic-position-in-nicaragua/.
116    Myers, “From Dams to Data.”
117    “Nicaragua’s Housing Project with China: What it Means for the Country’s Future,” Tico Times, April 17, 2023, https://ticotimes.net/2023/04/17/nicaraguas-housing-project-with-china-what-it-means-for-the-countrys-future.
118    Arthur Kaufman, “After Diplomatic Switch, Nicaragua Seizes Taiwan’s Embassy and Hands It Over to China,” China Digital Times, December 29, 2021, https://chinadigitaltimes.net/2021/12/after-diplomatic-switch-nicaragua-seizes-taiwans-embassy-and-hands-it-over-to-china/.
119    Adam Ni and Yun Jiang, “Brief #100: Nicaragua, democracy, press freedom,” China Neican, December 14, 2021, https://www.neican.org/brief-100-nicaragua-democracy-press-freedom/.
120    “La ruptura de Ortega con Taiwán, el ‘más generoso’ de sus donantes” [Ortega’s break with Taiwan, the “most generous” of his donors], Confidencial, December 10, 2021, https://confidencial.digital/principal/la-ruptura-de-ortega-con-taiwan-el-mas-generoso-de-sus-donantes/. The planned canal has since been cancelled.
121    Ibid.
122    “Leaders of four allies speak for Taiwan at UN,” Taipei Times, September 28, 2018, https://www.taipeitimes.com/News/front/archives/2018/09/28/2003701305.
123    “Kiribati Govt denies it’s wavering on Taiwan support,” Radio New Zealand, November 21, 2018, https://www.rnz.co.nz/international/pacific-news/376466/kiribati-govt-denies-it-s-wavering-on-taiwan-support.
124    William Piekos, Investigating China’s economic coercion: The reach and role of Chinese corporate entities, Atlantic Council, November 6, 2023, https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/in-depth-research-reports/report/investigating-chinas-economic-coercion/; Kiribati 20-Year Vision: 2016-2036, Republic of Kiribati Presidential Web Portal, 2016, https://president.gov.ki/images/kiribati-20-year-vision-2016-2036%E2%80%A2sept.final.pdf.
125    “Kiribati president decries loss of majority,” Radio New Zealand, November 5, 2019, https://www.rnz.co.nz/international/pacific-news/402532/kiribati-president-decries-loss-of-majority.
126    Christopher Pala, “China Could Be in Reach of Hawaii After Kiribati Elects Pro-Beijing President,” Foreign Policy, June 19, 2020, https://foreignpolicy.com/2020/06/19/kiribati-election-china-taiwan/. Kiribati President Taneti Maamau also won the presidential election in 2024. It is the last of his three allowable presidential terms. William Yang, “Kiribati president secures 3rd term as China, US vie for Pacific leverage,” Voice of America, October 26, 2024, https://www.voanews.com/a/kiribati-president-secures-3rd-term-as-china-us-vie-for-pacific-leverage/7840112.html.
127    “Claims of Chinese interference hit upcoming Kiribati vote,” Island Times, June 9, 2020, https://islandtimes.org/claims-of-chinese-interference-hit-upcoming-kiribati-vote/.
128    Pala, “China Could Be in Reach.”
129    Ibid.
130    Ibid.
131    Ralph Jennings, “Kiribati cuts ties with Taiwan, presaging switch to China,” AP, September 20, 2019, https://apnews.com/article/90e8938980404130a63641162d125db2.
132    Pala, “China Could Be in Reach.”
133    Banuera Berina, the leader of the newly formed Kiribati First Party, said in an interview that in fact Taiwan offered a grant disguised as a loan by increasing bilateral aid proportionate to the loan repayment. Pala, “China Could Be in Reach.”
134    Yimou Lee, “Taiwan says China lures Kiribati with airplanes after losing another ally,” Reuters, September 20, 2019, https://www.reuters.com/article/us-taiwan-diplomacy-kiribati-idUSKBN1W50DI/.
135    “China gains the Solomon Islands and Kiribati as allies, ‘compressing’ Taiwan’s global recognition,” ABC Australia, September 21, 2019, https://www.abc.net.au/news/2019-09-22/china-new-pacific-allies-solomon-islands-kiribati-taiwan/11536122.
136    “Taiwan did little to Kiribati: President Maamau,” Island Times, October 11, 2019, https://islandtimes.org/taiwan-did-little-to-kiribati-president-maamau/.
137    “China, Kiribati sign MOU on Belt and Road Initiative after restoring diplomatic ties,” CGTN, January 6, 2020, https://news.cgtn.com/news/2020-01-06/Xi-Jinping-meets-Kiribati-s-president-in-Beijing–N2gIPad7xe/index.html.
138    “Solomon Islands Statement by Hon. Manasseh Damukana Sogavare, MP, Prime Minister,” 72nd Session United Nations General Assembly General Debate, September 22, 2017, https://gadebate.un.org/sites/default/files/gastatements/72/sb_en.pdf; Then–Solomon Islands Prime Minister Ricky Houenipwela also advocated for Taiwan’s inclusion in international organizations during the seventy-third session of the UN General Assembly in September 2018. “Solomon Islands: His Excellency Ricky Nelson Houenipwela, Prime Minister,” 73rd Session United Nations General Assembly General Debate, September 28, 2018, https://gadebate.un.org/en/73/solomon-islands.
139    William Piekos, “The China-Solomon Islands Agreement and Beijing’s Prospects for Influence in the Pacific Islands,” Center for Advanced China Research, August 30, 2022, https://www.ccpwatch.org/single-post/the-china-solomon-islands-agreement-and-beijing-s-prospects-for-influence-in-the-pacific-islands. For a lengthy and insightful look at the Solomon Islands’ switch, see Edward Acton Cavanough, Divided Isles: Solomon Islands and the China Switch (La Trobe University Press: 2023).
140    Denghua Zhang, “Perceiving China’s Influence in the Pacific: The Case of Solomon Islands,” The Diplomat, October 18, 2019, https://thediplomat.com/2019/10/perceiving-chinas-influence-in-the-pacific-the-case-of-solomon-islands/; Yimou Lee, “Taiwan warns Solomon Islands of China ‘debt trap’ in diplomatic switch,” Reuters, September 6, 2019, https://www.reuters.com/article/world/taiwan-warns-solomon-islands-of-china-debt-trap-in-diplomatic-switch-idUSKCN1VR0AG/.
141    “Report on the Inquiry into the Question of severing existing ties with the Republic of China (Taiwan),” Foreign Relations Committee, National Parliament of Solomon Islands, NP-Paper No. 21/2019, November 26, 2019, 11, https://rc.parliament.gov.sb/sites/default/files/committees/foreignrelations/2019/FRC%20Report%20November%202019.pdf.
142    Luke Ren and Barclay Jones, “From the Frontlines of the Belt and Road: How the West’s Weakness in Mining Cost Us an Ally and Threatens the Race to Clean Energy,” Stanford International Policy Review, September 12, 2024, https://fsi.stanford.edu/sipr/content/frontlines-belt-and-road; Transform Aqorau, “Solomon Islands’ Foreign Policy Dilemma and the Switch from Taiwan to China” in Graeme Smith and Terence Wesley-Smith, eds., The China Alternative: Changing Regional Order in the Pacific Islands (ANU Press, 2021), https://press-files.anu.edu.au/downloads/press/n7754/html/ch10.xhtml; James Batley, “Will Solomon Islands abandon Taiwan?” Interpreter, September 4, 2018, https://www.lowyinstitute.org/the-interpreter/will-solomon-islands-abandon-taiwan.
143    Lee, “Taiwan warns Solomon Islands.” This amount increased to $11.3 million in 2021. Jonathan Barrett, “China pays into Solomons fund as part of diplomatic switch,” Reuters, April 6, 2021, https://www.reuters.com/article/world/china-pays-into-solomons-fund-as-part-of-diplomatic-switch-idUSKBN2BT0Z8/.
144    Natalie Whiting, Christina Zhou, and Kai Feng, “What does it take for China to take Taiwan’s Pacific allies? Apparently, $730 million,” ABC Australia, September 18, 2019, https://www.abc.net.au/news/2019-09-18/solomon-islands-cuts-ties-with-taiwan-in-favour-of-china/11524118.
145    Jonathan Barrett, “U.S. establishes foothold in Solomons as Chinese interests expand,” Reuters, November 20, 2019, https://www.reuters.com/article/us-china-solomonislands-idUSKBN1XV03Y/.
146    Damien Cave, “Chinese Lease of Entire Island Is Deemed Illegal in Solomons,” New York Times, October 24, 2019, https://www.nytimes.com/2019/10/24/world/australia/solomon-islands-china-tulagi.html.
147    Edward Cavanough, “China and Taiwan offered us huge bribes, say Solomon Islands MPs,” Guardian, December 7, 2019, https://www.theguardian.com/world/2019/dec/08/china-and-taiwan-offered-us-huge-bribes-say-solomon-islands-mps.
148    “Taiwan-Solomon Islands Relations.”
149    Aqorau, “Solomon Islands’ Foreign Policy Dilemma.”
150    Georgina Kekea and Anouk Ride, “How Constituency Development Funds Undermine Solomon Islands’ Democracy,” United States Institute of Peace, October 25, 2023, https://www.usip.org/publications/2023/10/how-constituency-development-funds-undermine-solomon-islands-democracy; Caleb Fotheringham, “China accused of using aid to influence Solomons’ political order,” Radio New Zealand, July 5, 2024, https://www.rnz.co.nz/news/pacific/521270/china-accused-of-using-aid-to-influence-solomons-political-order.
151    Stacy Hsu, “Minister dismisses KMT’s checkbook diplomacy concerns,” Taipei Times, May 24, 2018, https://www.taipeitimes.com/News/taiwan/archives/2018/05/24/2003693639.
152    Prisie L. Patnayak, “Geopolitics in the 2023 Pacific Games,” The Diplomat, November 10, 2023, https://thediplomat.com/2023/11/geopolitics-in-the-2023-pacific-games/.
153    “Foreign Minister Wu meets with El Salvador president, vows to strengthen bilateral ties,” New Southbound Policy Portal, July 17, 2018, https://nspp.mofa.gov.tw/nsppe/print.php?post=138060&unit=370.
154    Ann-Catherine Brigida, “What next for China and El Salvador?” Dialogue Earth, February 8, 2019, https://dialogue.earth/en/business/22556-what-next-for-china-and-el-salvador/; Evan Ellis, “China and El Salvador: An Update,” Dialogo Americas, July 8, 2021, https://dialogo-americas.com/articles/china-and-el-salvador-an-update/.
155    Brigida, “What next.”
156    Chris Horton, “El Salvador Recognizes China in Blow to Taiwan,” New York Times, August 21, 2018, https://www.nytimes.com/2018/08/21/world/asia/taiwan-el-salvador-diplomatic-ties.html.
157    “Taiwan cuts ties with El Salvador (update),” Focus Taiwan, CNA English News, August 21, 2018, https://focustaiwan.tw/politics/201808210005.
158    Thomas J. Shattuck, “Taiwan, Pivoting Allies, and American Interests Abroad,” Foreign Policy Research Institute, August 23, 2018, https://www.fpri.org/article/2018/08/taiwan-pivoting-allies-and-american-interests-abroad/.
159    Myers, “From Dams to Data”; Ellis, “China and El Salvador.”
160    Matthew Crittenden et al., “China’s BRI in Latin America: Case Study – Ports,” Tearline, August 14, 2020, https://www.tearline.mil/public_page/china-bri-in-latin-america-caribbean-ports.
161    Pauline Bax, Simon Gongo, and Lungile Dlamini, “Chinese Billions Fail to Sway Taiwan’s Last Two Allies in Africa,” Bloomberg, January 24, 2017, https://www.bloomberg.com/politics/articles/2017-01-24/chinese-billions-fail-to-sway-taiwan-s-last-two-allies-in-africa.
162    Oana Burcu and Eloïse Bertrand, “Explaining China’s Latest Catch in Africa,” The Diplomat, January 16, 2019, https://thediplomat.com/2019/01/explaining-chinas-latest-catch-in-africa/.
163    Boundi Ouoba, “Rupture des relations diplomatiques entre le Burkina et Taiwan” [Break in diplomatic relations between Burkina Faso and Taiwan], Le Pays, May 24, 2018, https://lepays.bf/rupture-relations-diplomatiques-entre-burkina-taiwan/. During the 2015 presidential election, China offered to contribute a reported $4.6 million to the losing pro-Beijing candidate. Fatoumata Diallo, “Burkina Faso’s Yoyo Diplomacy: Divorcing Taipei to Remarry Beijing,” Institute for Security and Development Policy, June 8, 2018, https://www.isdp.eu/burkina-fasos-yoyo-diplomacy-divorcing-taipei-remarry-beijing/.
164    Stacy Hsu, “Burkina Faso severs ties,” Taipei Times, May 25, 2018, https://www.taipeitimes.com/News/front/archives/2018/05/25/2003693688.
165    Jean-Pierre Cabestan, “Burkina Faso: Between Taiwan’s active public diplomacy and China’s business attractiveness,” South African Journal of International Affairs 23, no. 4 (2016): 495–519, https://doi.org/10.1080/10220461.2016.1271746; Brice Pedroletti and Joan Tilouine, “Le Burkina Faso à l’heure chinoise” [Burkina Faso on Chinese time], Le Monde Afrique, September 13, 2019, https://www.lemonde.fr/afrique/article/2019/09/13/le-burkina-faso-a-l-heure-chinoise_5509996_3212.html; Ouoba, “Rupture”; Antoine Delpierre, “Le Burkina Faso reprend ses relations diplomatiques avec la Chine” [Burkina Faso resumes diplomatic relations with China], TV5Monde, May 27, 2018, https://information.tv5monde.com/afrique/le-burkina-faso-reprend-ses-relations-diplomatiques-avec-la-chine-29227.
166    “Burkina Faso: Huawei in negotiations with authorities to develop National fiber optic backbone,” Ecofin Agency, April 18, 2016, https://www.ecofinagency.com/telecom/1804-34154-burkina-faso-huawei-in-negotiations-with-authorities-to-develop-national-fiber-optic-backbone; “Burkina Faso: Huawei International launches construction works for national backbone project,” Ecofin Agency, December 11, 2017, https://www.ecofinagency.com/telecom/1112-37829-burkina-faso-huawei-international-launches-construction-works-for-national-backbone-project.
167    “Burkina Faso: Huawei International launches.”
168    Burcu and Bertrand, “Explaining China’s Latest.” Other reports place the refused amount at $31 million, or €20 million. Simon Gongo, “China Cements Fresh Burkina Faso Ties with Hospital, Highway,” Bloomberg, August 7, 2018, https://www.bloomberg.com/news/articles/2018-08-07/china-offers-infrastructure-to-cement-new-ties-with-burkina-faso.
169    Pedroletti and Tilouine, “Le Burkina Faso à l’heure.”
170    Bax, Gongo, and Dlamini, “Chinese Billions Fail to Sway.”
171    Burcu and Bertrand, “Explaining China’s Latest”; Gongo, “China Cements.”
172    Pedroletti and Tilouine, “Le Burkina Faso à l’heure.” Separate reporting puts China’s promised funding for the new hospital at $188 million. Gongo, “China Cements.”
173    Gongo, “China Cements.”
174    Ibid. Other reporting places the investment at $1.3 billion. “Burkina Faso, China: Is CHEC set to construct a highway?” Africa Intelligence, September 5, 2019, https://www.africaintelligence.com/west-africa/2018/09/05/is-chec-set-to-construct-a-highway,108322404-bre.
175    Burcu and Bertrand, “Explaining China’s Latest.”
176    Pedroletti and Tilouine, “Le Burkina Faso à l’heure.” The G5 Sahel includes Mali, Mauritania, Niger, Chad, and Burkina Faso. In early 2019, Beijing contributed €40 million to the G5 Sahel to fight terrorism.
177    Hector Sanchez, “Canciller Navarro se reúne con nueva presidenta de Taiwán; la invita a toma de Medina” [Foreign Minister Navarro meets with Taiwan’s new president; invites her to the inauguration of Medina], El Sol de la Florida, May 21, 2016, https://elsoldelaflorida.com/canciller-navarro-se-reune-con-nueva-presidenta-de-taiwan-la-invita-toma-de-medina/.
178    “Don’t get too cozy with China, Taiwan warns Dominican Republic,” Dominican Today, July 24, 2017, https://dominicantoday.com/dr/economy/2017/07/24/dont-get-too-cozy-with-china-taiwan-warns-dominican-republic/.
179    “Dominican Republic-China ties? Taiwan voices dire warning,” Dominican Today, September 23, 2017, https://dominicantoday.com/dr/economy/2017/09/23/dominican-republic-china-ties-taiwan-voices-dire-warning/.
180    “As China woos Dominican Republic, Taiwan goes full press,” Dominican Today, October 19, 2017, https://dominicantoday.com/dr/economy/2017/10/19/as-china-woos-dominican-republic-taiwan-goes-full-press/.
181    “Dominican Republic basks as Taiwan, China heighten courtship,” Dominican Today, November 16, 2017, https://dominicantoday.com/dr/economy/2017/11/16/dominican-republic-basks-as-taiwan-china-heighten-courtship/.
182    Jess Macy Yu and Ben Blanchard, “Taiwan says China dangled $3 billion to grab ally Dominican Republic,” Reuters, May 1, 2018, https://www.reuters.com/article/world/taiwan-says-china-dangled-3-billion-to-grab-ally-dominican-republic-idUSKBN1I22LI/; Josh Horwitz, “Taiwan now has diplomatic relations with fewer than 20 countries,” Quartz, May 1, 2018, https://qz.com/1266620/the-dominican-republic-is-switching-diplomatic-ties-from-taiwan-to-china.
183    “Taiwan, China escalate courtships for the Dominican Republic (Update),” Dominican Today, October 31, 2017, https://dominicantoday.com/dr/economy/2017/10/31/taiwan-china-escalate-courtships-for-the-dominican-republic/.
184    “Taiwan scrambles as Dominican Republic leans toward China,” Dominican Today, January 24, 2018, https://dominicantoday.com/dr/economy/2018/01/24/taiwan-scrambles-as-dominican-republic-leans-toward-china/.
185    Yu and Blanchard, “Taiwan says China dangled.” China denied that any economic preconditions were involved.
186    Caribbean Council, “Far reaching co-operation agreements signed between China and the Dominican Republic,” iNews, November 22, 2018, https://www.ieyenews.com/far-reaching-co-operation-agreements-signed-between-china-and-the-dominican-republic/
187    Evan Ellis, “The Evolution of Chinese Engagement with the Dominican Republic,” Center for Strategic and International Studies, October 31, 2023, https://www.csis.org/analysis/evolution-chinese-engagement-dominican-republic.
188    “Presidenta de Taiwán se reúne con el presidente Varela” [Taiwanese President meets with President Varela], La Prensa, June 27, 2016, https://www.prensa.com/politica/taiwan-presidenta-panama-varela_0_4516048497.html.
189    Thierry Kellner and Sophie Wintgens, “The rise of China in Panama under Varela (2014–2019): A new Latin–American pivot of the Silk Road or a diplomatic ‘tour de valse’?” in China-Latin America and the Caribbean: Assessment and Outlook, Thierry Kellner and Sophie Wintgens, eds. (Routledge: 2021), https://ebrary.net/179410/geography/rise_china_panama_under_varela_2014_2019_latin_american_pivot_silk_road_diplomatic_tour_valse_; Sabina Nicholls, “Panama: China’s Strategic Hub,” Diálogo Americas, March 29, 2024, https://dialogo-americas.com/articles/panama-chinas-strategic-hub/; “The ROC government has terminated diplomatic relations with Panama with immediate effect to uphold national dignity,” Ministry of Foreign Affairs Republic of China (Taiwan), June 13, 2017, https://en.mofa.gov.tw/News_Content.aspx?n=1328&s=33917.
190    Nicholls, “Panama: China’s Strategic.”
191    Lu Yi-hsuan and Jake Chung, “Panama seduced by money, desire to deflect: sources,” Taipei Times, June 18, 2017, https://www.taipeitimes.com/News/front/archives/2017/06/18/2003672773.
192    Yi Chao, “China’s New Diplomatic Relations with Panama: Prospect of Future Economic Cooperation and Partnership in Latin America,” China and WTO Review, 2018, http://www.cwr.yiil.org/home/pdf/archives/2018v4n1/cwr_v4n1_07.pdf.
193    Nicholls, “Panama: China’s Strategic.”
194    Carlos Eduardo Piña, “Elections in Panama: The China Factor,” The Diplomat, May 2, 2024, https://thediplomat.com/2024/05/elections-in-panama-the-china-factor/.
195    Kellner and Wintgens, “The rise of China in Panama.”
196    “Statement by H.E Mr. Patrice Emery Trovoada Prime Minister and Head of Government on the Occasion of the General Debate of the 67th Session of the United Nations General Assembly,” São Tomé and Príncipe Permanent Mission to the United Nations, September 28, 2012, https://gadebate.un.org/sites/default/files/gastatements/67/st_en_25.pdf.
197    Zheping Huang and Isabella Steger, “And then there were 21: Taiwan says goodbye to tiny São Tomé and Príncipe,” Quartz, December 21, 2016, https://qz.com/868794/taiwan-loses-another-diplomatic-ally-as-tiny-sao-tome-and-principe-switches-allegiance-to-beijing.
198    J.R. Wu and Ben Blanchard, “Taiwan loses another ally, says won’t help China ties,” Reuters, December 21, 2016, https://www.reuters.com/article/world/taiwan-loses-another-ally-says-wont-help-china-ties-idUSKBN14A0LF/.
199    “The ROC government has terminated diplomatic relations with São Tomé and Príncipe with immediate effect to uphold national dignity,” Ministry of Foreign Affairs, Republic of China (Taiwan), December 21, 2016, https://en.mofa.gov.tw/News_Content.aspx?n=1328&s=33882.
200    Bettina Riffel, “São Tomé: Haverá mais estabilidade ou menos fiscalização?” [São Tomé: Will there be more stability or less oversight?] Deustche Welle, July 18, 2016, https://www.dw.com/pt-002/s%C3%A3o-tom%C3%A9-haver%C3%A1-mais-estabilidade-ou-menos-fiscaliza%C3%A7%C3%A3o/a-19408742; “Sao Tome ex-president’s son returns to prime minister’s job,” Reuters, November 26, 2014, https://www.reuters.com/article/idUSL6N0TG1PI/.
201    Wu and Blanchard, “Taiwan loses another ally.” This requested amount, per various reports, ranges between $100 million and $200 million; one source places the ask at NT$6.4 billion. Chow, “Sao Tome’s decision.”
202    Cahal Milmo, “São Tomé: How the tiny island plans to become the ‘Dubai of Africa’ after securing Chinese investment,” Independent, October 17, 2015, https://www.independent.co.uk/news/world/africa/sao-tome-how-the-tiny-island-plans-to-become-the-dubai-of-africa-after-securing-chinese-investment-a6698491.html.
203    Nelson Moura, “Catching the Chinese train,” Macau Business, May 16, 2017, https://www.macaubusiness.com/catching-chinese-train/; Michael Oduor, “Sao Tome celebrates new president Evaristo Carvalho,” Africa News, July 19, 2016, https://www.africanews.com/2016/07/19/sao-tome-celebrates-new-president-evaristo-carvalho/.
204    Stacy Hsu, “Ministries to decide on when to stop scholarships to Sao Tomean students,” Taipei Times, December 23, 2016, https://www.taipeitimes.com/News/taiwan/archives/2016/12/23/2003661766.
205    “Li Keqiang Holds Talks with Prime Minister Patrice Trovoada of Sao Tome and Principe,” Permanent Mission of the People’s Republic of China to the UN, April 12, 2017, http://un.china-mission.gov.cn/eng/zgyw/201704/t20170414_8394158.htm.
206    “China to open mission with tiny Sao Tome, despite its Taiwan links,” Reuters, November 14, 2013, https://www.reuters.com/article/us-china-saotome-idUSBRE9AD0CJ20131114/.
207    Nadia Clark, “How One Port’s Struggle Reveals the Problems—and Promise—of Chinese Infrastructure Financing,” Asia Unbound, Council on Foreign Relations, January 16, 2024, https://www.cfr.org/blog/how-one-ports-struggle-reveals-problems-and-promise-chinese-infrastructure-financing.
208    Ivan Broadhead, “New Chinese Port in Sao Tome has Economic, not Military Aims,” Voice of America, October 27, 2015, https://www.voanews.com/a/new-chinese-port-in-sao-tome-has-economic-not-military-aims/3025362.html.
209    Nfamara Jawneh, “Recalling the beneficial Gambia-Taiwan relationship,” Point, November 18, 2013, https://thepoint.gm/africa/gambia/article/recalling-the-beneficial-gambia-taiwan-relationship.
210    Austin Ramzy, “China Resumes Diplomatic Relations With Gambia, Shutting Out Taiwan,” New York Times, March 18, 2016, https://www.nytimes.com/2016/03/19/world/asia/china-gambia-taiwan-diplomatic-relations.html
211    Peter Enav, “Gambia breaks relations with surprised Taiwan,” AP, November 15, 2013, https://apnews.com/22d8150e92f04f3eb1292d1cc229eed4; Amadou Jallow, “Gambia: Taiwan Pumps Over One Million Into Police Project, Aviation,” Daily Observer, All Africa, August 27, 2013, https://allafrica.com/stories/201308270794.html; Nfamara Jawneh, “Taiwan boosts welfare of GPF with nearly US$700,000,” Point, August 27, 2013, https://thepoint.gm/africa/gambia/article/taiwan-boosts-welfare-of-gpf-with-nearly-us700000.
212    Richard C. Bush, “China’s Gambia gambit and what it means for Taiwan,” Brookings Institution, March 22, 2016, https://www.brookings.edu/articles/chinas-gambia-gambit-and-what-it-means-for-taiwan/.
213    “中华人民共和国和冈比亚伊斯兰共和国关于恢复外交关系的联合公报” [Joint Communique on the Restoration of Diplomatic Relations between the People’s Republic of China and the Islamic Republic of The Gambia], Xinhua, March 17, 2016, https://www.gov.cn/xinwen/2016-03/17/content_5055001.htm.
214    Ramzy, “China Resumes.”
215    Bhaso Ndzendze, “African Democratisation and the One China Policy,” E-International Relations, January 24, 2020, https://www.e-ir.info/2020/01/24/african-democratisation-and-the-one-china-policy/.
216    Alvise Armellini, “Vatican wants to upgrade relations with China, top cardinal says,” Reuters, May 21, 2024, https://www.reuters.com/world/vatican-wants-upgrade-relations-with-china-top-cardinal-says-2024-05-21/.
217    Harriet Sherwood, “Vatican signs historic deal with China – but critics denounce sellout,” Guardian, September 22, 2018, https://www.theguardian.com/world/2018/sep/22/vatican-pope-francis-agreement-with-china-nominating-bishops.
218    Armellini, “Vatican wants to upgrade relations with China.”
219    Ralph Jennings, “China-Vatican Talks Threaten Taiwan With Loss of Most Crucial Ally,” Voice of America, January 4, 2017, https://www.voanews.com/a/china-vatican-talks-threaten-taiwan-with-loss-of-crucial-ally/3662425.html. A review of recent speeches by Vatican representatives at the United Nations General Debate indicate that they have not mentioned Taiwan.
220    Lu Yi-hsuan and Jonathan Chin, “Eswatini trade pact to be extended by five years,” Taipei Times, March 17, 2023, https://www.taipeitimes.com/News/taiwan/archives/2023/03/17/2003796258.
221    Shannon Tiezzi, “China-Africa Summit Shines a Spotlight on Eswatini, Taiwan’s Lone Partner in Africa,” The Diplomat, September 12, 2024, https://thediplomat.com/2024/09/china-africa-summit-shines-a-spotlight-on-eswatini-taiwans-lone-partner-in-africa/.
222    Ibid.
223    Sophie Mak and Shaun Turton, “Palau’s tourism industry stays resilient despite Chinese pressure,” Nikkei Asia, December 1, 2024, https://asia.nikkei.com/Business/Travel-Leisure/Palau-s-tourism-industry-stays-resilient-despite-Chinese-pressure.
224    Ibid.
225    Lery Hiciano, “Palauan president pans China’s lack of respect,” Taipei Times, December 4, 2024, https://www.taipeitimes.com/News/front/archives/2024/12/04/2003827928; Jacob Judah, “A Pacific Island With Ties to Taiwan Was Hacked. Was It Political?” New York Times, June 2, 2024, https://www.nytimes.com/2024/06/02/world/asia/palau-taiwan-china-hack.html.
226    Hiciano, “Palauan president pans.”
227    David Brunnstrom, “Anxious about US funding delay, Pacific Island nations warn about China,” Reuters, February 15, 2024, https://www.reuters.com/world/anxious-about-us-funding-delay-pacific-island-nations-warn-about-china-2024-02-15/.
228    Andrew Harding, “Time to Act: Strategic Benefits of Funding the Compacts of Free Association (COFA),” Heritage Foundation, March 6, 2024, https://www.heritage.org/china/report/time-act-strategic-benefits-funding-the-compacts-free-association-cofa.
229    “‘Black eye’ for Marshall Islands: Hilda on alleged bribery scandal,” Islands Business, September 6, 2022, https://islandsbusiness.com/news-break/black-eye-for-marshall-islands-hilda-on-alleged-bribery-scandal/; Camilla Pohle-Anderson, “Taiwan and the United States Share Key Interests in the North Pacific,” Global Taiwan Brief (Global Taiwan Institute) 8, no. 6 (March 2023), https://globaltaiwan.org/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/GTB-8.6-PDF-Final.pdf.
230    “‘Black eye’ for Marshall Islands”; Pohle-Anderson, “Taiwan and the United States Share.”
231    “Marshall Islands decries US funding delays,” Taipei Times, February 29, 2024, https://www.taipeitimes.com/News/front/archives/2024/02/29/2003814235.
232    Ibid.
233    Yimou Lee, “Tuvalu rejects China offer to build islands and retains ties with Taiwan,” Reuters, November 21, 2019, https://www.reuters.com/article/us-taiwan-diplomacy-tuvalu/tuvalu- rejects-china-offer-to-build-islands-and-retains-ties-with-taiwan-idUSKBN1XV0H8.
234    Jess Marinaccio, “Tuvalu’s 2024 general election: a new political landscape,” DevPolicy Blog, January 30, 2024, https://devpolicy.org/2024-tuvalu-general-election-a-changing-political-landscape-20240130/; Kirsty Needham, “Tuvalu expected to review Taiwan ties after election – minister,” Reuters, January 23, 2024, https://www.reuters.com/world/asia-pacific/tuvalu-expected-review-taiwan-ties-after-election-minister-2024-01-24/.
235    Rod McGuirk, “Australia and Tuvalu strike new security deal that eases the tiny nation’s sovereignty concerns,” AP, May 9, 2024, https://apnews.com/article/australia-tuvalu-china-security-veto-treaty-e90991aac5e6858897c16bd2103048a5.
236    “Australia-Tuvalu Falepili Union,” Department of Foreign Affairs and Trade, Australian Government, accessed January 3, 2025, https://www.dfat.gov.au/geo/tuvalu/australia-tuvalu-falepili-union.
237    Chris Buckley and Amy Chang Chien, “Taiwan’s President to Rally Tiny Pacific Allies to Counter China,” New York Times, November 30, 2024, https://www.nytimes.com/2024/11/30/world/asia/taiwans-president-pacific-islands-china.html. Such “transit stops” to US territory through Taipei’s diplomatic partners is another reason that the Pacific Islands and Latin American and Caribbean countries have significance.
238    John Augé and Leon Li, “Erasing Taiwan: Implications of a Growing China-Solomon Islands Partnership,” The Diplomat, January 17, 2025, https://thediplomat.com/2025/01/erasing-taiwan-implications-of-a-growing-china-solomon-islands-partnership/.
239    Julieta Heduvan, “Paraguay, China y el Mercosur, un dilema en el bloque regional” [Paraguay, China and Mercosur, a dilemma in the regional bloc], Diálogo Político, October 14, 2024, https://dialogopolitico.org/agenda/china-mercosur-bloque-regional-dilema/. Mercosur includes Argentina, Brazil, Paraguay, and Uruguay.
240    Daniela Desantis and Lucinda Elliott, “Paraguay open to China trade deals despite Taiwan ties, Pena says,” Reuters, August 22, 2024, https://www.reuters.com/world/americas/paraguay-open-china-trade-deals-via-mercosur-despite-taiwan-ties-pena-says-2024-08-21/.
241    Ding Gang, “Promoting FTA talks with Mercosur to propel China-Paraguay cooperation,” Global Times, August 17, 2023, https://www.globaltimes.cn/page/202308/1296495.shtml.
242    “Paraguay in the process of switching Taiwan for the Chinese market?” MercoPress, October 4, 2022, https://en.mercopress.com/2022/10/04/paraguay-in-the-process-of-switching-taiwan-for-the-chinese-market.
243    Débora Rey, “Paraguay’s long-ruling party romps to presidential victory,” AP, May 1, 2023, https://apnews.com/article/paraguay-elections-opposition-bee01eb77be7440b78bade8d18dd0003.
244    “USDA Reinstates Food Safety Equivalence to Paraguay Beef After Zoonotic Disease Outbreak Resolved,” Food Safety Magazine, November 10, 2023, https://www.food-safety.com/articles/9019-usda-reinstates-food-safety-equivalence-to-paraguay-beef-after-zoonotic-disease-outbreak-resolved.
245    “The rule on Paraguay’s fresh beef exports to US held by Congress,” MercoPress, April 8, 2024, https://en.mercopress.com/2024/04/08/the-rule-on-paraguay-s-fresh-beef-exports-to-us-held-by-congress; interview, Paraguayan official, July 2024
246    Clint Peck, “Global beef roundup: Focus on Paraguay,” BEEF Magazine, February 18, 2025, https://www.beefmagazine.com/market-news/global-beef-roundup-focus-on-paraguay.
247    Eric Martin and Ken Parks, “Paraguay, a Remote Nation, Thrilled to Be on Trump’s Radar,” Bloomberg, January 17, 2025, https://www.bloomberg.com/news/articles/2025-01-17/paraguay-is-thrilled-to-be-on-trump-team-s-radar-president-says.
248    Sofia Menchu, “Exclusive: Taiwan ally Guatemala mulls commercial ties with China,” Reuters, February 6, 2024, https://www.reuters.com/world/taiwan-ally-guatemala-mulls-commercial-ties-with-china-foreign-minister-says-2024-02-06/; R. Evan Ellis, “China, Taiwan, and the Future of Guatemala,” The Diplomat, June 17, 2014, https://thediplomat.com/2024/06/china-taiwan-and-the-future-of-guatemala/.
249    Sofia Menchu, “Guatemala to maintain Taiwan ties despite seeking greater China trade,” Reuters, February 8, 2024, https://www.reuters.com/world/guatemala-maintain-taiwan-ties-despite-seeking-greater-china-trade-2024-02-08/; Ellis, “China, Taiwan.” On the left, trade relations with China are an alluring prospect. For conservatives out of power, relations with China offer a potential hedge against US-backed anticorruption efforts. Guatemalan President Bernardo Arévalo’s predecessor, Alejandro Giammattei (2020–2024), and his administration face corruption charges. In 2022, Taiwan paid $900,000 on Guatemala’s behalf to hire a major supporter of US President Donald Trump as a lobbyist. See Joshua Goodman, “Taiwan pays $900,000 for ally Guatemala to lobby Washington,” AP, January 18, 2022, https://apnews.com/article/joe-biden-business-florida-donald-trump-taiwan-93a5ff9b52c52d5b50f49baf83cea4ba.
250    “China’s rejection of Guatemalan shipments could be related to Taiwan ties, Guatemala president says,” Reuters, May 24, 2024, https://www.reuters.com/world/chinas-rejection-guatemalan-shipments-could-be-related-taiwan-ties-guatemala-2024-05-25/.
251    “Coffee and Macadamias (Guatemala – China),” Weaponized Trade and Economic Coercion, October 17, 2024, https://economiccoercion.com/2024/10/17/coffee-and-macadamias-guatemala-china/.
252    “Economic cooperation agreement between Belize and Taiwan goes into effect,” San Pedro Sun, January 18, 2022, https://www.sanpedrosun.com/government/2022/01/18/economic-cooperation-agreement-between-belize-and-taiwan-goes-into-effect/.
253    Kristen Ku, “Belize advocates for Taiwan’s inclusion in the upcoming World Health Assembly,” Amandala, January 28, 2024, https://amandala.com.bz/news/belize-advocates-for-taiwans-inclusion-in-the-upcoming-world-health-assembly/; Orlando Pulido, “Belize and Taiwan celebrate 35 years of diplomatic relations,” Amandala, October 30 , 2024, https://amandala.com.bz/news/belize-and-taiwan-celebrate-35-years-of-diplomatic-relations/.
254    Alex Colville, “The battle between China and Taiwan for the poorest country in the Western Hemisphere,” China Project, June 13, 2023, https://thechinaproject.com/2023/06/13/the-battle-between-china-and-taiwan-for-the-poorest-country-in-the-western-hemisphere/.
255    Saint Kitts PM in Taiwan, seeks stronger ties,” Taipei Times, June 23, 2024, https://www.taipeitimes.com/News/taiwan/archives/2024/06/23/2003819768; “PM Drew Welcomes Taiwan’s FM Lin Chia-Lung, Plans to Invite Kuai Kuai Culture to SKN,” SKN News, November 4, 2024, https://sknnews.com/saint-kitts-nevis/pm-drew-welcomes-taiwans-fm-lin-chia-lung-plans-to-invite-kuai-kuai-culture-to-skn-305220574/.
256    Saint Lucia first established ties with Taiwan in 1984, switched to China in 1996, and returned to Taipei in 2007. After the 2007 switch, Rufus Bousquet, Saint Lucia’s foreign minister, explained the decision by stating, “Support those who give you the most.” “Reversal by tiny St. Lucia angers China,” New York Times, May 2, 2007, https://www.nytimes.com/2007/05/02/world/asia/02iht-island.1.5529756.html; “St. Lucia dumps PRC for Taiwan,” Taipei Times, April 26, 2007, https://www.taipeitimes.com/News/front/archives/2007/04/26/2003358246.
257    Taili Ni and Jeffrey Sequeira, “In a Caribbean Paradise, Taiwan and China Tussle for Recognition,” Foreign Policy, December 17, 2023, https://foreignpolicy.com/2023/12/17/caribbean-st-lucia-taiwan-china-diplomatic-recognition-investment/.
258    “St Vincent to continue to be Taiwan’s friend,” Taipei Times, March 29, 2024, https://www.taipeitimes.com/News/taiwan/archives/2024/03/29/2003815642; “Marshall dispels myths regarding the SVG-Taiwan Relationship,” St. Vincent Times, April 13, 2023, https://www.stvincenttimes.com/marshall-dispels-myths-regarding-the-st-vincent-taiwan-friendship/.
259    “Marshall dispels myths.”
260    “St. Vincent outlines 5 pillars for continued relations with Taiwan,” iWitness News, August 31, 2017, https://www.iwnsvg.com/2017/08/31/st-vincent-outlines-5-pillars-for-continued-relations-with-taiwan/; “Private Sector Investment From Taiwan Needed In SVG,” St. Vincent Times, September 1, 2017, https://www.stvincenttimes.com/private-sector-investment-from-taiwan-needed-in-svg/.
261    “Government heading to Parliament for more money for Kingstown Port,” Searchlight, November 3, 2023, https://www.searchlight.vc/news/2023/11/03/government-heading-parliament-money-kingstown-port/; “Ambassador Peter Lan attends the Signing Ceremony of the Loan Agreement on the Kingstown Port Modernization Project,” Embassy of the Republic of China (Taiwan) in St. Vincent and the Grenadines, July 28, 2022, https://www.roc-taiwan.org/vc_en/post/3632.html.
262    The New Southbound Policy seeks to strengthen Taiwan’s relationships with Southeast Asia, South Asia, Australia, and New Zealand. See Bonnie S. Glaser et al., “The New Southbound Policy: Deepening Taiwan’s Regional Integration,” Center for Strategic and International Studies, January 2018, https://www.csis.org/analysis/new-southbound-policy
263    ”Huang and Steger, “And then there were 21.”
264    Shattuck, “Taiwan, Pivoting Allies.”
265    “About Us,” Taiwan International Cooperation and Development Fund, updated December 13, 2024, https://www.icdf.org.tw/wSite/ct?xItem=4470&ctNode=31511&mp=2; Cheng-Cheng Li, “Navigating the Pacific: Taiwan’s Diplomatic Policy in Oceania,” Global Taiwan Brief (Global Taiwan Institute) 8, no. 6 (March 2023): 9, https://globaltaiwan.org/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/GTB-8.6-PDF-Final.pdf.
266    Scott W. Harold, Lyle J. Morris, and Logan Ma, Countering China’s Efforts to Isolate Taiwan Diplomatically in Latin America and the Caribbean, RAND Corporation, March 13, 2019, https://www.rand.org/pubs/research_reports/RR2885.html.
267    Zoë Weaver-Lee, “Building Bridges: An Overdue Update on Taiwan’s ODA Policy,” Global Taiwan Brief (Global Taiwan Institute) 7, no. 13 (June 29, 2022), https://globaltaiwan.org/2022/06/building-bridges-an-overdue-update-on-taiwans-oda-policy/.
269    Yaoru Yang and Kaixiang You, “林佳龍: 不和中共搶外交戰場 用台灣模式協助友邦[專訪]” [Lin Jialong: Don’t compete with the CCP for the diplomatic battlefield and use the Taiwan model to assist friendly countries (Exclusive interview)], Central News Agency, October 11, 2024, https://www.cna.com.tw/news/aipl/202410110311.aspx.
270    International Cooperation & Development Affairs Annual Report 2022, Ministry of Foreign Affairs, Republic of China (Taiwan), August 28, 2023: 7, https://ws.mofa.gov.tw/Download.ashx?u=LzAwMS9VcGxvYWQvNDAzL3JlbGZpbGUvMjM2LzQxNS8yMjQ0YjExZS1iZmYwLTQ1YmItOTlkYS04NTE4Mzc1ZTI2ZTcucGRm&n=SW50ZXJuYXRpb25hbCBDb29wZXJhdGlvbiBhbmQgRGV2ZWxvcG1lbnQgUmVwb3J0IDIwMjIucGRm.
271    Shattuck, “The Race to Zero?”
272    Neelam and Sato, 2024 Key Findings, 12.
273    Eric Cheung, “China thinks it’s diplomatically isolating Taiwan. It isn’t,” CNN, March 24, 2023, https://www.cnn.com/2023/03/24/asia/taiwan-diplomatic-allies-support-analysis-intl-hnk-dst/index.html; J. Michael Cole, “Yes, China Has Re-established Ties With The Gambia. Now Calm Down.” News Lens, March 18, 2016, https://international.thenewslens.com/article/38421.
274    Shattuck, “The Race to Zero?” 341–342.
275    Ibid., 343.
276    Larry Madowo, “eSwatini – Taiwan’s last friend in Africa,” BBC, January 14, 2019, https://www.bbc.com/news/world-africa-46831852.
277    Carlos Adolfo Gonzalez Sierra, “Central America Caught in The Middle: Cross-Straight Diplomacy in Central America and the Caribbean,” Schwarzman Scholars, August 25, 2017, https://www.schwarzmanscholars.org/events-and-news/central-america-caught-middle-cross-straight-diplomacy-central-america-caribbean/.
278    Kekea and Ride, “How Constituency Development Funds.”
279    Tanisha M. Fazal, State Death: The Politics and Geography of Conquest, Occupation, and Annexation (Princeton, NJ: Princeton University Press, 2007), 83–86. The author defines state death as the “formal loss of control over foreign policy making to another state.”
280    Ibid., 86, 233.
281    Michael J. Mazarr, Understanding Deterrence, RAND Corporation, 2018, https://www.rand.org/content/dam/rand/pubs/perspectives/PE200/PE295/RAND_PE295.pdf.
282    After Taiwan, the United States is undoubtedly the most important player in establishing deterrence and pushing for the active participation of allied countries like Australia and Japan. This “coalition credibility” increases the perception of deterrence. Bill Emmott, Deterrence, Diplomacy and the Risk of Conflict Over Taiwan (Routledge: 2024).
283    At a practical level, Taiwan’s diplomatic partners in Latin America and the Caribbean allow Taiwanese officials to make unofficial transit stops in the United States en route to these countries. See Susan V. Lawrence, “Taiwan Presidents’ U.S. Transit Visits,” In Focus, Congressional Research Service, updated January 3, 2025, https://crsreports.congress.gov/product/pdf/IF/IF12371.
284    Alexander Smith, “Flags banned, signs ripped up: Why you can’t mention Taiwan at the Olympics,” NBC News, August 10, 2024, https://www.nbcnews.com/news/world/flags-banned-taiwan-olympics-chinese-taipei-rcna165502.
285    “Global Cooperation & Training Framework: Mission,” Global Cooperation and Training Framework, accessed January 12, 2025, https://gctf.tw/en/IdeaPurpose.htm; Harold, Morris, and Ma, Countering China’s Efforts. Japan became a full partner in 2019, Australia in 2021, and Canada in 2024.
286    “U.S.-Taiwan Cooperation on International Development and Humanitarian Assistance,” American Institute in Taiwan, November 4, 2022, https://www.ait.org.tw/us-taiwan-cooperation-on-international-development-and-humanitarian-assistance/.
287    U.S. International Development Finance Corporation, “DFC-Taiwan Collaboration on Advancing Private Sector Investment Opportunities,” media release, February 22, 2024, https://www.dfc.gov/media/press-releases/dfc-taiwan-collaboration-advancing-private-sector-investment-opportunities.
288    Taiwan Allies International Protection and Enhancement Initiative (TAIPEI) Act of 2019, S.1678 – 116th Congress (2019-2020), https://www.congress.gov/bill/116th-congress/senate-bill/1678/text.
289    James M. Inhofe National Defense Authorization Act for Fiscal Year 2023, H.R.7776 – 117th Congress (2021-2022), https://www.congress.gov/bill/117th-congress/house-bill/7776/text.
290    “Taiwan Allies Fund Act,” Select Committee on the CCP, May 10, 2024, https://selectcommitteeontheccp.house.gov/media/bills/taiwan-allies-fund-act.
291    Hunt, “Analysts: Cambodia to ‘Pay Price’”; Renato Cruz de Castro, “Explaining the Duterte Administration’s Appeasement Policy on China: The Power of Fear,” Asian Affairs: An American Review 45, no. 3–4 (April 6, 2019): 165–191, https://doi.org/10.1080/00927678.2019.1589664.
292    John D. Ciorciari, “China and Cambodia: Patron and Client?” International Policy Center Working Paper Series 121, June 17, 2013, 30, http://dx.doi.org/10.2139/ssrn.2280003.
293    China prefers to deal with claimants on a bilateral basis, instead of through ASEAN.
294    Prak Chan Thul, “Hu Wants Cambodia Help on China Sea Dispute, Pledges Aid,” Reuters, March 31, 2012, https://www.reuters.com/article/us-cambodia-china/hu-wants- cambodia-help-on-china-sea-dispute-pledges-aid-idUSBRE82U04Y20120331.
295    Luke Hunt, “ASEAN Summit Fallout Continues,” The Diplomat, July 20, 2012, https://thediplomat.com/2012/07/asean-summit-fallout-continues-on/; Vannarith Chheang, “Results, Expectations, and Challenges for Cambodia’s 2012 ASEAN Chairmanship,” Asia Pacific Bulletin 183 (East-West Center, October 25, 2012), https://www.eastwestcenter.org/publications/results-expectations-and-challenges-cambodias-2012-asean-chairmanship.
296    ASEAN did issue “Six-Point Principles” on the South China Sea that same month, after diplomacy by Indonesia. Heng Sarith, “A job well done: Cambodia as ASEAN Chair in 2012,” East Asia Forum, January 19, 2013, https://eastasiaforum.org/2013/01/19/a-job-well-done-cambodia-as-asean-chair-in-2012/.
297    For reference, China committed just under $200 million in grants to Cambodia from 2000 to 2014 combined, though any assumptions about this discrepancy should be tempered by the fact that China offered other types of aid in much greater quantities. See Sok Khemara, “China Gives $600m to Cambodia in Exchange for International Support,” VOA Khmer, July 15, 2016, https://khmer.voanews.com/a/china-gives-600-million-to-cambodia-in-exchange-for-international-support/3419875.html; Hunt, “Analysts: Cambodia to ‘Pay Price.’”
298    Alex Willemyns, “Cambodia Blocks Asean Statement on South China Sea,” Cambodia Daily, July 25, 2016, https://english.cambodiadaily.com/news/cambodia-blocks-asean-statement-on-south-china-sea-115834/.
299    “ASEAN bloc breaks deadlock on South China Sea,” Al Jazeera, July 25, 2016, https://www.aljazeera.com/news/2016/7/25/asean-bloc-breaks-deadlock-on-south-china-sea.
300    Ibid.; James Kynge, Leila Haddou, and Michael Peel, “FT Investigation: How China bought its way into Cambodia,” Financial Times, September 8, 2016, https://www.ft.com/content/23968248-43a0-11e6-b22f-79eb4891c97d.
301    Ith Sothoeuth, “China Inks Deals with Cambodia, Erasing $90m Debt,” VOA Khmer, October 17, 2016, https://khmer.voanews.com/a/china-inks-deals-with-cambodia-erasing-90-million-dollar-debt/3554746.html.
302    Vannarith Chheang, “Cambodia’s Embrace of China’s Belt and Road Initiative: Managing Asymmetries, Maximizing Authority,” Asian Perspective 45, no. 2 (Spring 2021): 375–96, https://doi.org/10.1353/apr.2021.0005; Jing Jing Luo and Kheang Un, “China’s Role in the Cambodian People’s Party’s Quest for Legitimacy,” Contemporary Southeast Asia: A Journal of International Strategic Affairs 43, no. 2 (August 2021): 395–419, https://www.jstor.org/stable/27041360.
303    Ferdinando Nelli Feroci, The “Yellow-Green” Government’s Foreign Policy, Istituto Affari Internazionali, April 10, 2019, https://www.iai.it/sites/default/files/iaip1910.pdf.
304    James Kynge, “What Italy stands to gain by endorsing China’s Belt and Road,” Financial Times, March 7, 2019, https://www.ft.com/content/e2b7322c-4086-11e9-b896-fe36ec32aece; Valentina Romei, “Charts that show why Italy wants China’s Belt and Road Initiative,” Financial Times, March 22, 2019, https://www.ft.com/content/23e0245a-4b2e-11e9-bbc9-6917dce3dc62.
305    Federiga Bindi, “Why Did Italy Embrace the Belt and Road Initiative?” Carnegie Endowment for International Peace, May 20, 2019, https://carnegieendowment.org/posts/2019/05/why-did-italy-embrace-the-belt-and-road-initiative?lang=en.
306    Nicola Casarini, Rome-Beijing: Changing the Game, Istituto Affari Internazionali, March 5, 2019, https://www.iai.it/sites/default/files/iaip1905.pdf.
307    Ibid.
308    Shairee Malhotra, “Italy’s BRIexit: Not All Roads Lead to Beijing,” Observer Research Foundation, Occasional Papers, June 13, 2024, https://www.orfonline.org/research/italy-s-briexit-not-all-roads-lead-to-beijing.
309    Amy Kazmin and Yuan Yang, “Italy to hold talks with China about exiting Belt and Road Initiative,” Financial Times, May 11, 2023, https://www.ft.com/content/5666fcde-2a5d-4af0-927c-ab971517554d.
310    Guilia Interesse, “China and Italy to ‘Relaunch’ Bilateral Ties: Trade and Investment Outlook,” China Briefing from Dezan Shira and Associates, November 12, 2024, https://www.china-briefing.com/news/china-and-italy-to-relaunch-bilateral-ties-trade-and-investment-outlook.
311    Gabriele Carrer and Emanuele Rossi, “BRI decision will pass through Parliament, says Meloni,” Decode39, August 30, 2023, https://decode39.com/7579/bri-decision-pass-through-parliament-meloni/.
312    Tommy Walker, “Philippines drops China’s Belt and Road as tensions flare,” Deustche Welle, November 8, 2023, https://www.dw.com/en/philippines-drops-chinas-belt-and-road-as-tensions-flare/a-67344929.
313    Richard Javad Heydarian, “Pledge trap: How Duterte fell for China’s bait and switch,” Asia Times, April 1, 2022, https://asiatimes.com/2022/04/how-duterte-fell-for-chinas-bait-and-switch/.
314    Ibid.
315    Margaret Myers, “China-Colombia Relations are Growing, if Slowly,” United States Institute of Peace, November 15, 2023, https://www.usip.org/publications/2023/11/china-colombia-relations-are-growing-if-slowly; Igor Patrick, “China invites Colombia to join Belt and Road Initiative, ‘exploring’ free-trade agreement,” South China Morning Post, October 18, 2024, https://www.scmp.com/news/china/diplomacy/article/3282814/china-invites-colombia-join-belt-and-road-initiative-exploring-free-trade-agreement.
316    Rod Sweet, “Brazil rejects joining China’s Belt and Road,” Global Construction Review, November 8, 2024, https://www.globalconstructionreview.com/brazil-rejects-joining-chinas-belt-and-road/.
317    “China, Brazil decide to elevate ties in Xi-Lula meeting,” CGTN, November 21, 2024, https://news.cgtn.com/news/2024-11-21/China-Brazil-elevate-ties-synergize-development-strategies-1yGZ4Fu8obS/p.html.
318    “The ‘Monroe Doctrine’ specter lingers behind Washington’s ‘de-risking’ push: Global Times editorial,” Global Times, October 28, 2024, https://www.globaltimes.cn/page/202410/1321972.shtml.
319    Carlos Mureithi, “The African countries that are part of China’s vaccine diplomacy,” Quartz, March 16, 2021, https://qz.com/africa/1984683/african-countries-targeted-by-chinas-vaccine-diplomacy.
320    Angelica Mari, “Potential Huawei ban raises concerns over 5G in Brazil,” ZDNet, October 29, 2020, https://www.zdnet.com/article/potential-huawei-ban-raises-concerns-over-5g-in-brazil/.
321    Ernesto Londoño and Letícia Casado, “Brazil Needs Vaccines. China Is Benefitting,” New York Times, March 15, 2021, https://www.nytimes.com/2021/03/15/world/americas/brazil-vaccine-china.html.
322    Leo Schwartz, “Brazil needs vaccines. It also needs Huawei,” Rest of World, March 25, 2021, https://restofworld.org/2021/brazil-needs-vaccines-it-also-needs-huawei/.
323    Sylvio Martins, “The Price Of Huawei’s Bid For Brazil’s 5G Network,” Journal of World Affairs, May 24, 2021, https://journalonworldaffairs.org/2021/05/24/the-price-of-huaweis-bid-for-brazils-5g-network/.
324    “Reevaluating and Realigning United States Foreign Aid,” White House Executive Order, January 20, 2025, https://www.whitehouse.gov/presidential-actions/2025/01/reevaluating-and-realigning-united-states-foreign-aid/.
325    Robinson et al., Development as a Tool, 54.
326    Lili Pike and Christina Lu, “Is the U.S. Answer to China’s Belt and Road Working?” Foreign Policy, December 16, 2024, https://foreignpolicy.com/2024/12/16/dfc-investment-africa-china-bri-lobito-corridor-infrastructure-development/.
327    Jim Richardson, “To Win Friends and Influence People, America Should Learn From the CCP,” Foreign Policy, July 22, 2021, https://foreignpolicy.com/2021/07/22/china-belt-road-development-projects-usaid-state-department-foreign-aid-assistance-budget/.
328    David O. Shullman, China pairs actions with messaging in Latin America. The United States should do the same, Atlantic Council Strategy Paper Series, February 12, 2024, https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/in-depth-research-reports/issue-brief/china-pairs-actions-with-messaging-in-latin-america-the-united-states-should-do-the-same/.
329    Nahal Toosi and Phelim Kine, “Biden launches ‘China House’ to counter Beijing’s growing clout,” Politico, December 16, 2022, https://www.politico.com/news/2022/12/16/biden-china-house-beijing-00074262.
330    Tria Dianti and Shailaja Neelakantan, “Observers question US commitment to Southeast Asia as Biden to skip regional summit,” Radio Free Asia, August 25, 2023, https://www.rfa.org/english/news/china/southeastasia-usa-biden-08252023144923.html; Franco Ordoñez, “Biden canceled a trip to Papua New Guinea. The White House is on the defensive,” NPR, May 17, 2023, https://www.npr.org/2023/05/17/1176750125/biden-australia-papua-new-guinea-g-7.
331    Toosi, “‘Frustrated and powerless.’”
332    Reset, Prevent, Build: A Strategy to Win America’s Economic Competition with the Chinese Communist Party, Select Committee on the Strategic Competition Between the United States and the Chinese Communist Party, December 12, 2023, https://selectcommitteeontheccp.house.gov/sites/evo-subsites/selectcommitteeontheccp.house.gov/files/evo-media-document/reset-prevent-build-scc-report.pdf.
333    Robinson et al., Development as a Tool, 25–26. The authors highlight that China’s primary incentive for its development efforts is finding outlets for excess domestic capacity. See also Stephen B. Kaplan, Globalizing Patient Capital: The Political Economy of Chinese Finance in the Americas (Cambridge University Press: 2021).
334    Robinson et al., Development as a Tool, 55.
335    U.S. Department of State, “Minerals Security Partnership,” accessed February 28, 2025, https://www.state.gov/minerals-security-partnership.
336    For more options, see Erin L. Murphy et al., The Next Five Years of the DFC: Ten Recommendations to Revamp the Agency, Center for Strategic and International Studies, September 27, 2023, https://www.csis.org/analysis/next-five-years-dfc-ten-recommendations-revamp-agency; and Andrew Herscowitz, “How to better equip the U.S. DFC to compete with China,” ODI Global, April 15, 2024, https://odi.org/en/insights/how-to-better-equip-the-us-dfc-to-compete-with-china/.
337    U.S. International Development Finance Corporation, “DFC Celebrates Nearly $4 Billion in New Investments Approved Since the Start of Fiscal Year 2025,” media release, January 15, 2025, https://www.dfc.gov/media/press-releases/dfc-celebrates-nearly-4-billion-new-investments-approved-start-fiscal-year; Richardson, “To Win Friends.”
338    Kenton Thibaut, China’s discourse power operations in the Global South, Atlantic Council Digital Forensic Research Lab, April 20, 2022, https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/in-depth-research-reports/report/chinas-discourse-power-operations-in-the-global-south/; Joshua Kurlantzick, “China Wants Your Attention, Please,” Foreign Policy, December 5, 2022, https://foreignpolicy.com/2022/12/05/chinese-state-media-beijing-xi-influence-tools-disinformation/.
339    Mike Studeman, “The US needs a better strategic narrative or it will cede influence to China,” Financial Times, February 18, 2024, https://www.ft.com/content/b5987c48-cdb1-44f9-bf9c-55f6fe20ba12.

The post How Beijing uses inducements as a tool of economic statecraft appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>
Clarity is power: The Trump administration needs a new US Navy Navigation Plan https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/in-depth-research-reports/issue-brief/clarity-is-power-the-trump-administration-needs-a-new-us-navy-navigation-plan/ Fri, 21 Mar 2025 19:39:12 +0000 https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/?p=827924 The US Navy’s current Navigation Plan (NAVPLAN) is an insufficient document. Bruce Stubbs writes that the Navy must embrace the red and identify course corrections and promote greater clarity, specificity, and transparency in its guidance.

The post Clarity is power: The Trump administration needs a new US Navy Navigation Plan appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>

We are operationalizing our
 “Get Real, Get Better” mindset.


—Vice Admiral Brendan McLane, US Navy, as quoted in Seapower Magazine, January 16, 2025

During his Naval Postgraduate School speech in May 2022, Admiral William K. Lescher, vice chief of naval operations, explained the Navy’s new “Get Real, Get Better” initiative, which had been announced in the July 2022 Navigation Plan (NAVPLAN). He stated: “We have to self-assess and be our own toughest critics. We need to be honest about our abilities and be fully transparent about our performance. Once we ‘embrace the red,’ we will be able to identify solutions and more realistically predict our mission readiness.”1

The “Get Real, Get Better” mandate must apply to all levels of the Navy including at the strategic level. This Atlantic Council Issue Brief does exactly what Lescher called the Navy to do by critically assessing the Navy’s 2024 overarching strategic planning document: the 2024 Navigation Plan.2 This evaluation embraces the red by identifying course corrections and the need for greater clarity, specificity, and transparency in its guidance.

The short life of the Navy’s 2024 NAVPLAN

Tactical mistakes may kill you today, while operational error may prove fatal in days or perhaps weeks. A[n] error in … strategy may take years to reveal itself in its full horror.


—Colin S. Gray, “Why Is Strategy Different,” Infinity Journal

Admiral Lisa M. Franchetti, the thirty-third chief of naval operations (CNO), published the Navigation Plan for America’s Warfighting Navy 2024 (NAVPLAN) on September 18, 2024.3 This NAVPLAN is already outdated, no longer applicable, and requires replacement.

The inauguration of President Donald J. Trump on January 20, 2025, voided the 2024 NAVPLAN. Trump wants a bigger Navy by building more ships and has congressional majorities to back-up his policies, while the Navy in its NAVPLAN ranks a bigger Navy—what the Navy calls capacity—as its lowest priority. Indeed, the 2024 NAVPLAN clearly states the Navy “will continue to prioritize readiness, capability, and capacity in that order.”4 The twenty-eight-page NAVPLAN devotes a few sentences to express the need for a larger Navy, indicating, however, that it will not happen for over a generation because of insufficient funding and an inadequate industrial base.

During an interview on the January 6, 2025, “Hugh Hewitt Show,” Trump announced his policy to build more ships for the US Navy. He noted that the United States is “sitting back watching” as China rapidly expands its navy, opining that the United States has “suffered tremendously.”5 (Figure 1 displays the trend lines for the size of these two navies.) He said his administration will announce “some things that are going to be very good having to do with the Navy. We need ships. We have to get ships.”6 At his January 14, 2025, Senate confirmation hearing, Peter Hegseth, now secretary of defense, echoed that guidance: “President Trump has said definitively to me and publicly that shipbuilding will be one of his absolute top priorities of this administration. We need to reinvigorate our defense industrial base in this country to include our shipbuilding capacity.7 In addition, Hegseth (in a response to a policy question in this confirmation process) penned that, “Shipbuilding is an urgent national security priority. If confirmed, I will immediately direct the Secretary of the Navy and the Under Secretary of Defense for Acquisition and Sustainment to create a shipbuilding roadmap to increase our capacity.”8 

In his March 4th joint address to Congress, Trump followed through on his January comments made on the “Hugh Hewitt Show.” He announced his plan to revive US naval and commercial shipbuilding by establishing a White House Office of Shipbuilding. With the exception of its purpose—“To boost our defense industrial base” in order to “make [ships] very fast, very soon”—details on how this office would function remain scarce. Regardless, Trump signaled that shipbuilding is a key theme of his administration and a component of his plan to build “the most powerful military of the future.”9

Figure 1: US and Chinese naval force levels: Actual and projected (2000 to 2030)

Source: China Naval Modernization: Implications for U.S. Navy Capabilities, Congressional Research Service, Updated August 16, 2024.

Overview of the Navy’s NAVPLAN

Politicians bear the heaviest blame for a fleet that is 50 ships too small, but the CNO should be explaining the strategic risks and lighting a fire for the funding to arrest the trend.


Wall Street Journal, February 23, 2025.10

NAVPLANs are a series of planning documents that convey the Navy’s most important policies for implementation above all other Navy guidance documents, including the tri-service, unclassified strategies, such as the 2007 A Cooperative Strategy for 21st Century Seapower,11 the 2015 revision of A Cooperative Strategy for 21st Century Seapower,12 and the 2020 Advantage at Sea.13 Each CNO personally authors an unclassified strategic plan—a NAVPLAN—to outline a path for the Navy’s forward progress during their four-year tenure. Modern NAVPLANs have four purposes: explain how the Navy, as part of the Joint Force, intends to deter and defeat threats to US national security; guide prioritizing and rationalizing Navy plans and programs; provide a persuasive framework for Navy funding requests; and source strategic communications to deter threats and reassure allies and partners.14

Crafted ostensibly for an internal Navy audience, these NAVPLANs identify the “biggest challenges to [the Navy’s] forward progress” and provide a “coherent approach to overcoming them.”15 NAVPLANs also have three other audiences: allies and partners, as well as potential adversaries; key decision-makers in the executive and legislative branches of the US government; and national security thought leaders in the public domain (e.g., think tanks, academia, news media, and industry). As discussed below, the latter two audiences are critically important to the Navy. The American public, however, is not a primary audience because its interests typically lag behind emerging security issues.

The 2024 NAVPLAN: Recognize the good

The 2024 NAVPLAN is a remarkable document with three instances of notable clarity. First, the NAVPLAN unequivocally declares a strategic end to achieve “readiness for the possibility of war with the People’s Republic of China by 2027.”16 By specifying China as a primary threat and with a select year for potential conflict, the NAVPLAN provides focus and clarity of purpose. The NAVPLAN zeroes in on China and describes seven priority areas to improve Navy readiness. This is a positive, clear expression of the ranking that past documents lacked. Second, the 2024 NAVPLAN cites and supports former CNO Michael Gilday’s 2022 guidance by calling for 3 percent to 5 percent “sustained budget growth above actual inflation [to] simultaneously modernize and grow the capacity of our Fleet.”17 The NAVPLAN warns, “Without substantial growth in Navy resourcing now, we will eventually face deep strategic constraints on our ability to simultaneously address day-to-day crises while also modernizing the Fleet to enhance readiness for war both today and in the future.”18 Last, this document devotes an entire page correctly highlighting how unmanned ships and aircraft technologies are the “changing character of war,”19 by “pushing asymmetric capability, at lower cost, to state and non-state actors alike.”20 In response, the NAVPLAN focuses the Navy to operationalize “robotic and autonomous systems,” 21commonly known as drones. 22 This clarity of expression is admirable.

The 2024 NAVPLAN: Embrace the red

In a world deluged by irrelevant information, clarity is power.


—Yuval Noah Harari, 21 Lessons for the 21st Century

As mentioned, this issue brief is a critical assessment in the spirit of “Get Real, Get Better.” The 2024 NAVPLAN has major deficiencies that require correction in the next NAVPLAN. Overall, the current NAVPLAN projects an aspirational tone, with its lack of explicit strategic assumptions, risk assessments, and descriptions of the “why” and “how” of achieving its objectives. Specifically, it lacks:

  1. Focus on the Navy’s two most important audiences
  2. Clarity and specificity
  3. Guidance on consequential issues
  4. Frankness
  5. A serious format for a serious document

1. Lack of focus on the Navy’s two most important audiences

The NAVPLAN’s two most critically important audiences have a learned membership, making them substantially different from the American public. They are the key decision-makers in the executive and legislative branches of the US government, and national security thought leaders in the public domain (e.g., think tanks, academia, news media, and industry). The NAVPLAN is the Navy’s only unclassified document to inform these two influential audiences, whose decisions and activities control in large part the funding for the Navy’s force structure, capabilities, and personnel requirements. Indeed, this is why Navy senior leaders make the rounds to Washington think tanks, security forums, and the war colleges and interact with news media to explain the NAVPLAN’s guidance. For this reason—garnering support and advocacy for the Navy’s budget—the information requirements of these two principal audiences eclipse the needs of the other audiences.

In contrast, the American public is a secondary audience because it is a reactive rather than a proactive audience. Most Americans are not reading and reflecting on the nation’s current global security challenges and the need to rearm. Instead, the American public responds to events usually after seeing graphic, tangible evidence. For example, viewing disturbing images of dead American military personnel and destroyed US aircraft during the April 1980 Operation Eagle Claw, a flawed mission that helped to elect Ronald Reagan and generated enormous public support for his defense buildup.

2. Lack of clarity and specificity

We must communicate with precision and consistency, based on a common focus and a unified message.


—General David H. Berger, US Marine Corps, Commandant’s Planning Guidance

The 2024 NAVPLAN has numerous instances of inadequate clarity and specificity. For example, the NAVPLAN directs the Navy to increase its readiness for a possible conflict with China by 2027. The Navy, however, must convey more than readiness for a global war with China. It must also unequivocally transmit that the Navy will deny China their preferred kind of war, destroy23 the Chinese navy, and terminate the war on terms favorable to the United States.24Beijing must feel the force of President Reagan’s famous words: “You lose; we win.”25 The US Navy needs to signal the unquestionable destruction and defeat of Chinese maritime forces. This unabashed expression of lethality was a great strength of the 1980s Maritime Strategy. Moreover, the Navy’s allies and partners must comprehend that the Navy is fully committed and prepared for a potential war with China.

The NAVPLAN omits explanations about why and how the Navy achieves its objectives. Without this explanation and context, the NAVPLAN’s statements are no more than assertions. For example, the document states, “We establish deterrence and prevail in war when we work as part of a Joint and Combined force.”26 There are no further particulars about how the Navy intends to deter and win in a war. This guidance—or rather this assertion—implies that the Navy uses the same approach regardless of who is the enemy. Obviously, the differences between a war with China or Russia are profound, and the Navy’s approaches to deter and win are different. For starters, each adversary has entirely different strategic objectives. Moreover, a war with China occurs in a predominantly maritime theater with few US allies, whereas as a war with Russia occurs in a predominantly continental theater with an effective NATO security alliance. The differences continue, demanding greater specificity than the NAVPLAN’s abstract and broad statements that provide little useful guidance, especially given the ominous, if not dire, warnings by the Commission on the National Defense Strategy.27 This lack of specificity becomes more disturbing in light of the NAVPLAN’s clarion call to prepare for a possible conflict with China in 2027. It is a confounding disconnect.

To paraphrase Dr. Samuel P. Huntington, the eminent American political scientist and author of The Soldier and the State and Clash of Civilizations,28 the Navy’s two principal audiences cannot support the Navy’s requests for funding without pertinent information. As Huntington expounded, they need to know how, when, and where the Navy expects to protect the nation against military threats, such as those now posed by China, Russia, Iran, and North Korea. 

Furthermore, the 2024 NAVPLAN misses another opportunity to communicate the Navy’s relevance to a war with China by not expounding on the implications of a war in a predominantly maritime theater with few US allies. George Friedman, an internationally recognized geopolitical forecaster and strategist on international affairs, recently commented on the Navy’s vital role in this theater. He explained that the “balance of power in the Pacific between U.S. and Chinese naval forces remains key to American hegemony and the alliance that upholds it. In the event of war, more extreme and technological threats remain secondary to the conventional naval threat the U.S. poses to China and China poses to the U.S.”29 The thinking behind his observation is a significant strategic factor that the Navy should have recognized independently and included in its NAVPLAN.

A time-tested military maxim says to tell your boss what you need to get the job done; second, tell your boss the consequences of not receiving what’s needed; and finally, make the best of what you have to accomplish the mission. The NAVPLAN studiously avoids specifying the consequences and the risks. For instance, it states, “Without substantial growth in Navy resourcing now, we will eventually face deep strategic constraints on our ability to simultaneously address day-to-day crises while also modernizing the fleet to enhance readiness for war both today and in the future.”30

What are these “deep strategic constraints” and what are the consequences and the risks caused by these constraints? The NAVPLAN provides no answers. These are critically important omissions and striking deficiencies. The NAVPLAN also states that the Navy is “continuing to advocate for the resources needed to expand all aspects of the Navy’s force structure necessary to preserve the peace, respond in crisis, and win decisively in war.”31 This is a confusing and alarming statement. It appears to indicate that the Navy currently does not have a force structure that can “win decisively in war.”32 If this is what the Navy is communicating, it is not done with transparency.

The 2024 NAVPLAN does explain the effects of an important planning factor that limits the Navy’s options for developing its readiness efforts for a possible war with China in 2027. The Navy has only one more budget cycle—the development of the fiscal year (FY) 2027 budget—to make any meaningful changes to its capabilities in preparation for a 2027 potential conflict. Consequently, the Navy’s existing fleet of ships, in terms of mix and numbers in 2024, is largely the fleet the Navy will have in 2027. This is a significant planning factor as the Navy addresses its readiness for 2027. As Donald Rumsfeld, a former secretary of defense, once famously stated, “As you know, you go to war with the army you have, not the army you might want or wish to have at a later time.”33

The 2024 NAVPLAN has a confusing relationship with a separate, but embedded, Navy initiative called Project 33. The NAVPLAN described this project as an effort to “get more ready players on the field by 2027,”34 and identified seven high-priority mitigations that the Navy needs to accelerate.35 By default, these seven actions became the NAVPLAN’s primary objectives, yet the Navy referred to these objectives as Project 33 and not NAVPLAN objectives, thereby muddying the waters about whether the NAVPLAN or Project 33 is the Navy’s overarching strategic guidance. In fact, Admiral Samuel Paparo, commander of the US Indo-Pacific Command, penned a January 2025 essay titled “Project 33 Is Enabling Joint All-Domain Operations in the Indo-Pacific”—and not “NAVPLAN Is Enabling Joint All-Domain Operations in the Indo-Pacific.” He wrote numerous sentences beginning with Project 33 such as “Project 33’s vision to provide more munitions will. . . ”36 The lack of clarity between these documents only confuses the Navy’s two principal audiences.

The harmful effects of the NAVLAN’s lack of clarity and specificity are compounded by a similar set of deficiencies in higher-order national guidance. The Commission on Planning, Programming, Budgeting, and Execution (PPBE) Reform reported in March 2024 that the National Defense Strategy (NDS) was “not designed to be sufficiently specific enough to guide the programming phase of PPBE.” The commission’s report also stated that the Defense Planning Guidance was a “consensus-driven document that does not make hard choices, is overly broad, and lacks explicit linkages to prioritized goals, timeframes, risk assessments, and resource allocations.” The PPBE Reform report further stated these deficiencies did not provide “top-down guidance needed during the programming phase of PPBE.”37 Inadequate and incomplete guidance, by the Defense Department and the Navy, undermines effective strategic and force-planning decision-making.

3. Lack of guidance on consequential issues

The 2024 NAVPLAN falls short of addressing critical high-level issues, leaving its two principal external audiences with an insufficient understanding of the Navy’s resource requirements. Given that the NAVPLAN is a prime tool for strategic communications and is the sole document to express the Navy’s way ahead to its external audiences, the scant commentary on key issues represents a missed opportunity for the Navy.

Key issue: A larger navy

While the 2024 NAVPLAN acknowledges the need for an on-the-record requirement for 381 crewed ships,38 it did not explain why or when the Navy needs these ships. In 2025, the Navy has 297 battle force ships,39 with a shortfall of eighty-four ships. The document makes no attempt to communicate the strategic risk to the nation from the lack of warships, and it offers no plan B to offset the gap in assets. Furthermore, the Navy’s thirty-year shipbuilding plan for FY 202540 indicated that the Navy will “reach a low of 280 ships in fiscal year 2027,”41 the very year that the NAVPLAN directed the Navy to be ready for a possible war with China.

The lack of discussion on this significant matter is inexplicable. The unease is further increased with the realization that a global war with China in 2027 or even in 2030 will place impossible demands on the Navy to address multiple critical missions far exceeding its capacity. The Navy, as part of the joint force, will need to conduct, at a minimum, this sample of unprioritized missions:42

  1. Destroy Chinese naval and air forces invading Taiwan.
  2. Defend Japan, South Korea, and Australia from naval and air attacks.
  3. Isolate China from war-making resources—conduct economic warfare with blockade.
  4. Conduct horizontal escalation, i.e., destroy Chinese forces at Djibouti.
  5. Protect small amphibious ships inserting and extracting US Marine Corps stand-in forces inside Chinese weapons envelope.
  6. Protect sustainment of US Marine Corps stand-in forces inside Chinese weapons envelope.
  7. Protect US Marine Corps forces embarked in Navy large amphibious ships.
  8. Protect in transit Navy combat logistics forces sustaining Navy forces conducting distributed operations.
  9. Protect in transit Military Sealift Command forces sustaining Joint Force.
  10. Conduct homeland defense—continental United States, i.e., integrated air missile defense of critical seaports and Navy bases.
  11. Deter Russia as opportunistic adversary.
  12. Deter Iran as opportunistic adversary.
  13. Maintain surveillance of Chinese ballistic missile submarines.
  14. Maintain surveillance of Russian ballistic missile submarines.
  15. Maintain Navy strategic reserve to ensure combat credibility throughout war’s duration.

The Navy will be in a protracted war in a global conflict with China. While conducting those fifteen missions and the myriad other things required of the Navy, ships will incur far greater sustainment, maintenance, and repair requirements—further reducing the available numbers. In short, the Navy is likely to face a strategy-force mismatch. Ship numbers matter, and the US Navy does not have enough ships. As former Senator Sam Nunn (D-GA) once quipped, “At some point, numbers do count. At some point, technology fails to offset mass. At some point, Kipling’s ‘thin red line of heroes’ gives way.”43

Admiral Chas Richard, then-commander of the US Strategic Command, in a November 2022 speech made it very clear that the Navy lacked sufficient ships. He warned, “As I assess our level of deterrence against China, the ship is slowly sinking . . . it isn’t going to matter how good our [operating plan] is or how good our commanders are, or how good our forces are—we’re not going to have enough of them. And that is a very near-term problem.”44 Over the last two decades, however, no Congress and no administration, regardless of party, has attempted to fund a larger Navy. The nation cannot afford the number of ships the Navy says it needs to deter and defeat America’s potential enemies. The election of President Trump appears to have changed this calculus.

Key issue: Domain transparency

Another significant issue the 2024 NAVPLAN fails to address is the impact of surveillance technology on the changing character of war. This technology has increasingly made it easier to detect and target combatants on the oceans’ surface and aircraft in air space above it, calling into question the continued viability of manned ships and aircraft operating in such an environment. In a December 2022 essay, former Deputy Secretary of Defense Robert Work and former Google chief executive officer Eric Schmidt noted:

  • One key change is that militaries will have great difficulty hiding from or surprising one another. Sensors will be ubiquitous, and once-impenetrable intelligence will be vulnerable to quantum advances in decryption. Highly adaptable and mobile weapons systems, including drones, loitering munitions, and hypersonic missiles will largely inhibit militaries from amassing forces to invade.45

In the 1930s, the US Navy experienced a similar change in the character of warfare as technological improvements increased the operational performance of aircraft carriers and the lethality of aircraft the carriers launched in terms of reliability, operating distance, and weight of bomb load. Eventually, this increased lethality (or relative combat effectiveness) surpassed the battleship’s lethality, and the Navy experienced a fundamental inflection point in its warfighting capabilities. The Navy observed this evolution of the aircraft’s increasing lethality but did not fully comprehend that the aircraft carrier and its aircraft’s steady progress would replace the battleship as the Navy’s capital weapon system. Not until actual combat—such as the Royal Navy’s November 1940 attack on the Italian Navy at its Taranto base,46 and the Imperial Japanese Navy’s December 1941 attack on the US Navy in Pearl Harbor—did complete comprehension “sink in” about the carrier and its aircraft’s more lethal effectiveness. 

Similarly, given the comments by Work, Grady, and others in this decade, the Navy faces another seminal inflection point if Chinese surveillance capabilities advance to make the oceans’ surface and the air space above it transparent. The implications for the continued viability of surface ships in such an environment are staggering. The Navy, however, appears to have bet its surface ships will still be viable in this enhanced surveillance environment and remains committed to its planned acquisition of replacement surface ships to include the Constellation-class frigates, Columbia-class ballistic missile submarines, Ford-class aircraft carriers, and the continuation of building Burke-class destroyers along with its acquisition plans to buy large numbers of unmanned surface platforms.

4. Lack of frankness

And so, today we find ourselves in an environment increasingly reminiscent of the late 1930s, where the overarching balance of power is becoming ever-less stable, and where the difference between peace and a multi-theater system-transforming war will likely hinge on whether the United States and its allies can sustain the ever-more tenuous regional balances.


—Andrew A. Michta, “The United States Must Revisit the Basics of Geostrategy,” 19FortyFive.

Today is like 1938. Indeed, Franchetti has said so, but omitted her prescient comments from the 2024 NAVPLAN. As the vice CNO, she commented that the 1930s was a decisive decade that “rhymes in some key ways” with today’s security environment: She noted that both eras reflect periods of constrained defense spending, reduced construction of Navy ships, and a growing disparity in the capability and capacity between the US Navy and its principal adversaries—Imperial Japan in the 1930s and the authoritarian People’s Republic of China in the 2020s—resulting in a US fleet that was “too small and insufficiently resourced for total war,”47 and ineffective for deterrence. She is in excellent company. Kaja Kallas, then-prime minister of Estonia and now the European foreign policy chief, has reasoned that the current global security environment reflects 1938, “when a wider war was imminent, but the West had not yet joined the dots.”48 Dr. Hal Brands, a senior fellow at the American Enterprise Institute,49 has also commented on the striking parallels between today’s geostrategic events and those of the 1930s. Ominously, the Commission on the National Defense Strategy concluded in July 2024 that the “US military lacks both the capabilities, and the capacity required to be confident it can deter and prevail in combat.50The Wall Street Journal wrote a sober editorial saying, “The world today is more like the late 1930s, as dictators build their militaries and form a new axis of animosity, while the American political class sleeps.”51

This security environment demands frankness of expression about the threats, risks, and defense requirements by US senior military leaders. There isn’t much public evidence of US senior military leaders providing candid expression. In May 2024, US Senator Roger Wicker (R-MS) cautioned in a New York Times commentary, titled “America’s Military Is Not Prepared for War or Peace,” that:

  • When America’s senior military leaders testify before my colleagues and me on the US Senate Armed Services Committee behind closed doors, they have said that we face some of the most dangerous global threat environments since World War II. Then, they darken that already unsettling picture by explaining that our armed forces are at risk of being underequipped and outgunned.52

The notable exception is General D. W. Allvin, US Air Force and the current chief of staff, who stated in January 2025 that, “As the arc of the threat increases daily, it is my assessment this risk is unacceptable and will continue to rise without substantially increased investment.”53 Perhaps all current service chiefs share the same opinion about their individual service, but if they do, they are not speaking up and out.

Lack of frankness is a Navy practice

In its public congressional testimony, the Navy’s posture statements submitted in April and May 2024 to the House and Senate Armed Services Committees and to the House and Senate Appropriations Subcommittees on Defense do not reflect any discussion of “at risk of being underequipped and outgunned.” In the two instances that the word “risk” is used in these statements, it is associated with “sealift investments” and “installation investments.”54 

Indeed, the Navy’s 2024 posture statements to Congress are very upbeat documents with statements such as: “In every ocean, we uphold and protect the post-World War II rules-based international order that we fought to establish and have continued to defend for nearly three-quarters of a century.” This is clearly not true for the Red Sea. Well before the publication of the posture statements, the Houthis waged an effective sea denial campaign that the US Navy was unable to prevent. These posture statements do add that the Houthis have disrupted “the free flow of maritime commerce in the Red Sea.” As reported by General Christopher Mahoney, the assistant commandant of the Marine Corps, “The Houthi’s sea-denial campaign has altered global trade routes, imposed global economic costs, enhanced its international profile, and perhaps most importantly tied up a significant portion of American naval power at a time when demand for our naval ships outstrips supply.”55 There is, however, no discussion in the Navy’s 2024 posture statements of the implications of this Houthi warfare campaign on the Navy’s force structure, weapons, operational concepts, readiness, etc. Nor is there a mention of the high cost of fighting the Houthis and defending Israel.56 Likewise, there is no treatment of the implications of naval warfare by the Ukrainian Navy’s use of unmanned surface vessels (i.e., drones) to its highly effective sea denial campaign against the Russian Navy in the Black Sea.

Despite affirming that the Navy needs more ships to meet its mission in this decade, the Navy’s posture statements profess that the president’s FY 2025 budget submission for the Navy “funds a strong, global Navy that is postured and ready to deter potential adversaries . . . [and] win decisively in war.”57 The documents conclude that the Navy “continues to meet its Title 10 mission to be organized, trained, and equipped . . . for prompt and sustained combat incident to operations at sea.”58

These statements are disconcerting. If the Navy is funded and postured to deter and win per the April and May 2024 posture statements, it is ambiguous if these statements contradict or support the Navy’s formal requirements for 381 crewed ships. Furthermore, it is worrisome that the Navy plainly states that it can deter and win, while the July 2024 report by the Commission on the National Defense Strategy states: “The Joint Force is at the breaking point of maintaining readiness today. Adding more burden without adding resources to rebuild readiness will cause it to break.”59 Moreover, the report adds, “The nation was last prepared for such a [global] fight during the Cold War, which ended 35 years ago. It is not prepared today.”60

Communicating frankness with integrity and without offense

Two 1970s exemplars are instructive. In their back-to-back tenures as the Navy’s service chiefs, CNO Elmo Zumwalt and CNO James L. Holloway III confronted declining budgets, shrinking numbers of ships, plummeting readiness levels, and growing Soviet military capabilities. Moreover, things went from bad to worse during President Jimmy Carter’s administration. While President Gerald Ford proposed to Congress in 1977 the construction of 157 new ships, his successor, Jimmy Carter, in 1978 proposed only 70.“61 The collective time Zumwalt and Holloway held office has “become known to American history as the post-Vietnam ‘hollow force.‘”62 The two CNOs knew what had to be done. They had to lead and communicate frankly the issues confronting the Navy—issues no different from those challenging the Navy in 2025.

Zumwalt, in 1971, calculated the Navy had a 45 percent chance of defeating the Soviet Navy in a conventional war at sea. One year later, as he drafted the Navy’s FY 1973 budget, he reevaluated the chances at 35 percent.63, Holloway, and the Soviet Navy Threat Zumwalt stated in a 1971 US News & World Report interview, “If the US continues to reduce and the Soviet Union continues to increase, it’s got to be inevitable that the day will come when the result will go against the US.”64 In June 1975, Holloway on the pages of the US Naval Institute Proceedings wrote:

  • We have been decommissioning ships faster than we have been building new ones. And although today we can accomplish the naval tasks of our national strategy, in some areas it is only with the barest margin of success. As Soviet maritime capabilities continue to increase, it is clear to me, as it must be apparent to you, that it is essential to reverse the declining trend of our naval force levels.65

These two CNOs, “did not shy away from noticeably outlining the threats, challenges, and shortcomings of the fleet;” they unhesitatingly alerted the nation to the “security and technological dangers of a seemingly new age.”66 In short, Zumwalt and Holloway provided leadership underwritten with intellectual and moral courage to sound a clarion call about the Navy’s declining readiness posture. For their integrity and forthrightness, their civilian bosses did not censure them. 

The American public saw similar CNO leadership in January 2015 when Jonathan Greenert testified before Congress about the effects of sequestration on the Navy’s readiness to execute the Defense Strategic Guidance. He concluded that the Navy could not “confidently execute the current defense strategy within dictated budget constraints.”67 Greenert accompanied his testimony with a table displaying the ten missions the Defense Strategic Guidance required and the associated risk for each mission caused by sequestration. See figure 2, which depicts the key portion of Greenert’s table. His table showed two missions in red highlighting that the Navy could not execute and five missions in yellow highlighting that were “high risk” for the Navy.68 Greenert declared that naval forces “will not be able to carry out the Nation’s defense strategy as written.” His assessment finished with a dire warning that when facing major contingencies, the Navy’s “ability to fight and win will neither be quick nor decisive.”69

Figure 2: Excerpt of CNO Greenert’s assessment of 2015 mission impacts to a sequestered US Navy

Quadrennial defense review objectives Defense strategic guidance missions Navy ability to execute
Project power and win decisively Project power against a technologically capable adversary Major challenges to achieve warfighting objectives in denied areas:

• Inadequate power projection capacity
• Too few strike fighter, command/control, electronic warfare assets
• Limited advanced radar and missile capacity
• Insufficient munitions
Execute large-scale ops in one region, deter another adversary’s aggression elsewhere Limited ready capacity to execute two simultaneous large-scale ops:

• 2/3 of required contingency response force (2 of 3 Carrier Strike Groups and 2 of 3 Amphibious Readiness Groups) not ready to deploy within 30 days
Conduct limited counterinsurgency and other stability operations Increased risk due to:

• Reduced funding to Navy Expeditionary Combat Command
• Reduced ISR capacity (especially tactical rotary wing drones)
Operate effectively in space and cyberspace This mission is fully executable in a sequestered environment:

• Navy continues to prioritize cyber capabilities
Source: Navy Force Structure and Shipbuilding Plan (Washington, DC: Congressional Research Service, 2016).

5. Lack of a serious format for a serious document

With no maps of maritime terrain or tables of hard net assessment data and the inclusion of too many “eye candy” glossy images of kit, the 2024 NAVPLAN has the look and feel of a coffee table publication, meant for casual and light reading with limited analysis and a superficial approach to naval strategic planning. Serious people produce serious documents. The NAVPLAN’s format signals an indifferent document, unlike the formats used for the National Security Strategy. The lack of hard data on net assessment is a significant weakness, especially the lack of maps, which help make the relationship between sea power and physical space evident. Indeed, understanding maritime geography “facilitates communication and strategic thinking and can help construct a compelling public narrative in support of [Navy] policy.”70 The below figures illustrate the type of maps to include in a serious strategic planning document. Figure 3 depicts the “tyranny of distance”71 in the Indo-Pacific theater, and figure 4 shows the strategic importance of the “first island chain” in effectively “containing” China.

Figure 3: Western Pacific maritime geography: Tyranny of distance, lack of US strategic depth

Source: Guam: Defense Infrastructure and Readiness (Washington, DC: Congressional Research Service, 2023).

Figure 4: The first island chain’s strategic importance in preventing the Chinese navy from entering the Pacific and Indian oceans

Source: Annual Report to Congress: Military and Security Developments Involving the People’s Republic of China (Washington, DC: Department of Defense, 2012).

Conclusion: Course corrections for a 2025 NAVPLAN

The biggest things that happen in the Navy are winning the battles in the [Joint Chiefs of Staff], the Secretary of Defense’s office, the White House, and Congress. We have to convince all these people; otherwise, we lose. What we need is a lawyer [as CNO], preferably a New York lawyer . . . He doesn’t have to know a lot about the Navy; he has to know how to win arguments.


Admiral William J. Crowe Jr., quoted in History of the Office of the Chief of Naval Operations, 1915-2015 by Thomas C. Hone and Curtis, A. Utz.

As the Navy’s senior strategic leader,72 the CNO must: “(1) get the big ideas right; (2) communicate those ideas effectively; (3) oversee the implementation of the ideas, and (4) determine how to refine the big ideas and then repeat the cycle.”73 The Navy’s “big ideas” address its national defense role and the requisite force structure to support that role.

When first published in September 2024, the NAVPLAN correctly got the Navy’s big ideas right. The arrival of a new commander in chief in January 2025 changed the nation’s defense priorities, and now the Navy must replace its NAVPLAN with a version aligned with President Trump’s priority to build ships for the Navy. The president superseded the Navy’s priorities in the order of readiness, capability, and capacity. Far from being an onerous burden for the Navy to craft a new 2025 NAVPLAN, the nation’s other armed services should be so fortunate.

In addition to embracing the president’s direction, the new 2025 NAVPLAN should address the deficiencies outlined in this paper. While retaining its commendable attributes, especially its strategic objective to concentrate on “readiness for the possibility of war with the People’s Republic of China by 2027,” the 2025 NAVPLAN should incorporate the following course corrections:

  • Increase its focus on the Navy’s two most important and influential audiences by addressing their information needs. They require a description of a possible war with China and Russia and how the Navy, as part of the Joint Force, would prevail. Such a sobering, informative description is not a multivolume addition but an executive summary with sufficient detail for these audiences to grasp the broad outlines and scope of a conflict and the implications for the Navy. The description must contain Chinese and Russian capabilities and numbers, logistic challenges, key military problems to overcome, and the role of allies and partners illustrated with maps and net assessment tables.
  • Improve clarity and specificity by providing the context of “why” and “how” the Navy intends to achieve its strategic objectives. Such context provides substance to the NAVPLAN and eliminates the use of assertions, which are a form of self-serving rhetoric, often informally called “happy talk.” In addition, the NAVPLAN must list the strategic assumptions the Navy used to craft the documents and address the implications of risk.
  • Address the Navy’s approach to resolving its other consequential issues—besides the need for a larger Navy and domain transparency—such as the ongoing depletion of ordnance war stocks for kinetic operations in the Middle East,74 the slow and painful development of directed energy weapons,75 and the yearslong debate over the acquisition of the medium landing ship.76 The 2025 NAVPLAN must forthrightly treat these issues head-on, lucidly conveying the implications, risk, assumptions, and mitigations.
  • Advance frankness by fully reflecting the Navy’s leadership philosophy of “Get Real, Get Better,” which requires Navy leaders to “be honest about our abilities and be fully transparent about our performance.”77 The Navy must speak frankly about how US adversaries, especially China, are harming US national interests and set forth a well-crafted message to explain how the Navy—properly resourced to be lethal and ready—will preserve the nation’s security in an increasingly dangerous world. The Wall Street Journal Editorial Board maintains that the United States “is slouching ahead in blind complacency until China invades Taiwan or takes some other action that damages US interests or allies because Beijing thinks the United States can do nothing about it.”78 The Navy should not partake in “blind complacency.” The threats to the United States are all too real.
  • Turn the NAVPLAN into a serious strategic planning document, produced by serious people, shedding the look of a coffee-table book or public-affairs handout. Eliminate all “glossy” images of ships and airplanes in the document and replace them with graphics that are relevant to and useful for the Navy’s two principal audiences as well as force planners and strategists of all ilk: maps depicting maritime terrain and net assessment tables regarding China and Russia in particular.

Collectively these Navy course corrections to the NAVPLAN will enable all Navy audiences to better grasp the severity of the security threats confronting America and comprehend the Navy’s funding requirements. With greater candor, explicitness, and detail—and amply illustrated with maps and tables depicting hard-threat data—the 2025 NAVPLAN can, indeed, demonstrate that clarity is power.

About the author

Bruce Stubbs

Bruce Stubbs had assignments on the staffs of the secretary of the Navy and the chief of naval operations from 2009 to 2022 as a member of the US senior executive service. He was a former director of Strategy and Strategic Concepts in the N3N5 and N7 directorates. As a career US Coast Guard officer, he had a posting as the Assistant Commandant for Capability in Headquarters, served on the staff of the National Security Council, taught at the Naval War College, commanded a major cutter, and served a combat tour with the US Navy in Vietnam during the 1972 Easter Offensive. The author drew upon his forthcoming publication, Cold Iron: The Demise of Navy Strategy Development and Force Planning, to compose portions of this commentary.

The views expressed are the author’s and do not represent those of any organization or affiliation.

Related content

Explore the program

Forward Defense, housed within the Scowcroft Center for Strategy and Security, generates ideas and connects stakeholders in the defense ecosystem to promote an enduring military advantage for the United States, its allies, and partners. Our work identifies the defense strategies, capabilities, and resources the United States needs to deter and, if necessary, prevail in future conflict.

1    “Vice Chief of Naval Operations Talks ‘Get Real, Get Better’ During Latest SGL at NPS,” News Stories, US Navy Press Office, May 24, 2022, https://www.navy.mil/Press-Office/News-Stories/Article/3041666/vice-chief-of-naval-operations-talks-get-real-get-better-during-latest-sgl-at-n/.
2    Lisa Marie Franchetti, Admiral, US Navy, Chief of Naval Operations Navigation Plan for America’s Warfighting Navy 2024, US Navy, September 2024; Admiral Franchetti was chief of naval operations until February 21, 2025.
3    “Chief of Naval Operations Releases Navigation Plan for America’s Warfighting Navy,” Public Affairs, US Navy, September 18, 2024.
4    Franchetti, CNO Navigation Plan, 12.
5    Hugh Hewitt, “President-elect Donald Trump on ‘One, Big, Beautiful Bill,’ ” Transcript, The Hugh Hewitt Show, January 6, 2025.
6    Hewitt, “President-elect Donald Trump on ‘One, Big, Beautiful Bill.’ ”
7    To Conduct a Confirmation Hearing on the Expected Nomination of Mr. Peter B. Hegseth to Be Secretary of Defense.” Hearing before the Committee on Armed Services, United States Senate, 118th Congress, January 14, 2025. https://www.armed-services.senate.gov/hearings/to-conduct-a-confirmation-hearing-on-the-expected-nomination-of-mr-peter-b-hegseth-to-be-secretary-of-defense.
8    Senate Armed Services Committee, “Advance Policy Questions for Peter “Pete” B. Hegseth Nominee to Serve as Secretary of Defense,” January 6, 2025; see also Ashley Roque and Valerie Insinna, “What Pete Hegseth’s Hearing Tells Us About Trump’s Plans for the Pentagon,” Breaking Defense, January 14, 2025.
9    Valerie Insinna, “Trump Announces New White House Shipbuilding Office,” Breaking Defense, March 04, 2025.
10    Editorial Board, “Trump Sweeps Out Biden’s Officers,” Wall Street Journal, February 23, 2025
11    James T. Conway, Gary Roughead, and Thad W. Allen, “A Cooperative Strategy for 21st Century Seapower,” Naval War College Review, October 2007.
12    Joseph F. Dunford, Jr., Jonathan W. Greenert, and Paul F. Zukunft, A Cooperative Strategy for 21st Century Seapower: Forward, Engaged, Ready, March 2015, https://news.usni.org/2015/03/13/document-u-s-cooperative-strategy-for-21st-century-seapower-2015-revision.
13    David H. Berger, Michael M. Gilday, and Karl L. Schultz, “Advantage at Sea Prevailing with Integrated All-Domain Naval Power, December 2020.
14    Derived from Ronald O’Rourke, “The Maritime Strategy and the Next Decade,” US Naval Institute Proceedings 114/4/1,022 (April 1988).
15    Richard P. Rumelt, Good Strategy/Bad Strategy: The Difference and Why It Matters (New York: Crown Publishing Group, Random House, 2011), 2.
16    Franchetti, CNO Navigation Plan, III.
17    Franchetti, CNO Navigation Plan, 12.
18    Franchetti, CNO Navigation Plan, 12.
19    Carl von Clausewitz, On War, eds. and trans. Michael Howard and Peter Paret (Princeton, NJ: Princeton University Press, 1984), 85. According to Clausewitz, the character of war refers to “the means by which war has to be fought.” These means are constantly changing as technology has a significant influence, as do doctrine and military organization. Changes in the character of warfare may occur slowly over generations—evolutionary—or quite rapidly—revolutionary. These changes affect the tactics of employing capabilities and influence the development of strategy.
20    Franchetti, CNO Navigation Plan, 9.
21    Franchetti, CNO Navigation Plan, 12.
22    The 2024 NAVPLAN has seven high-priority “targets” or subobjectives, personally approved by the CNO. The second target listed on page III is to “scale robotic and autonomous systems to integrate more platforms at speed.”
23    The NAVPLAN should follow the example of General Colin Powell, US Army, Chairman of the Joint Chiefs of Staff, with unambiguous clarity. He famously stated at a Pentagon press briefing on January 23, 1991, announcing the US Gulf War plan against Saddam Hussein’s army, saying: “Our strategy in going after this army is very simple. First, we are going to cut it off, and then we are going to kill it.” See Eliot Brenner, “Powell: ‘We’re Going to Cut It Off . . . Kill It,’ ” UPI, January 23, 1991.
24    The author based these three objectives on the Navy’s famous 1980s Maritime Strategy. James D. Watkins, “The Maritime Strategy,” US Naval Institute Proceedings 112/1/995 Supplement, The Maritime Strategy, January 1986.
25    Henry R. Nau, “We Win, They Lose—Ronald Reagan Armed with the Intent to Negotiate,” Claremont Review of Books, Book Reviews, Winter 2022/23.
26    Franchetti, CNO Navigation Plan, 13.
27    Rep. Jane Harman and Amb Eric Edelman, Chair and Vice Chair, Commission on the National Defense Strategy Report, July 2024, v. The commission report said: “The threats the United States faces are the most serious and most challenging the nation has encountered since 1945 and include the potential for near-term major war. The United States last fought a global conflict during World War II, which ended nearly 80 years ago.”
28    Samuel P. Huntington, “National Policy and the Transoceanic Navy,” US Naval Institute Proceedings 80, no. 5, May 1954.
29    George Friedman, “American Naval Policy and China,” Geopolitico Futures, January 22, 2025.
30    Franchetti, CNO Navigation Plan, 12.
31    Franchetti, CNO Navigation Plan, 12.
32    Franchetti, CNO Navigation Plan, 12.
33    Spencer Ackerman, “Donald Rumsfeld Wants to Give You the Most Ironic Life Lessons Ever,” Danger Room blog, Wired, May 14, 2013; and Ray Suarez, “Troops Question Secretary of Defense Donald Rumsfeld about Armor,” PBS, December 9, 2004.
34    Franchetti, CNO Navigation Plan, III.
35    Franchetti, CNO Navigation Plan, II.
36    Admiral Sam Paparo, “Project 33 Is Enabling Joint All-Domain Operations in the Indo-Pacific,” US Naval Institute Proceedings 151/1/1,463 (January 2025).
37    Robert Hale and Ellen Lord, Chair and Vice Chair, “Defense Resourcing for the Future, Commission on Planning, Programming, Budgeting, and Execution (PPBE) Reform,” Final Report, March 2024, 26.
38    Sam LaGrone, “Navy Raises Battle Force Goal to 381 Ships in Classified Report to Congress,” US Naval Institute, July 18, 2023. This classified report was titled Battle Force Ship Assessment and Requirement.
39    Ronald O’Rourke, “Navy Force Structure and Shipbuilding Plans: Background and Issues for Congress,” Report 32665, Congressional Research Service, September 24, 2024, 2, 56 (see Table G-1).
40    This is the document’s informal but widely used title. Its formal title is Report to Congress on the Annual Long-Range Plan for Construction of Naval Vessels for Fiscal Year 2025. The Office of the Chief of Naval Operations, Deputy Chief of Naval Operations for Warfighting Requirements and Capabilities (OPNAV N9) prepared this document, and the Office of the Secretary of the Navy approved its release in March 2024.
41    Michael Marrow, “Navy’s New 30-Year Shipbuilding Plan Sketches 2 Paths for Future Manned Ship Fleet,” Breaking Defense, March 19, 2024.
42    This list builds on and updates the author’s “Ten Challenges to Implementing Force Design 2030,” which the Atlantic Council published in November 2023.
43    Charles L. Fox and Dino A. Lorenzini, “How Much Is Not Enough? The Non-Nuclear Air Battle in NATO’s Central Region,” Naval War College Review 33, no. 2 (1980).
44    Caleb Larson, “‘Sinking Slowly’: Admiral Warns Deterrence Weakening against China,” National Interest, November 7, 2022. Note: Admiral Richard has since retired; he is the James R. Schlesinger Distinguished Professor at the University of Virginia’s Miller Center.
45    Eric Schmidt and Robert O. Work, “How to Stop the Next World War: A Strategy to Restore America’s Military Deterrence,” Atlantic, December 5, 2022. Note: Schmidt served as Google’s chief executive officer from 2001 to 2011.
46    The Royal Navy’s Fleet Air Arm’s 1940 attack on the Italian Navy in its Taranto Harbor was the first completely all-aircraft naval attack in history. Admiral Andrew Browne Cunningham, RN, the commander in chief, Mediterranean Fleet, stated: “Taranto should be remembered forever as having shown once and for all that in the Fleet Air Arm the Navy has its most devastating weapon.”
47    Lisa Franchetti, Remarks of the then-Vice Chief of Naval Operations, SENEDIA’s Defense Innovation Days, Newport, Rhode Island, August 29, 2023.
48    Patrick Wintour, “‘We’re in 1938 Now’: Putin’s War in Ukraine and Lessons from History,” June 8, 2024.
49    Dr. Brands is the Henry A. Kissinger Distinguished Professor of Global Affairs at the Johns Hopkins School of Advanced International Studies. He is also a columnist for Bloomberg Opinion. Dr. Brands has previously worked as special assistant to the secretary of defense for strategic planning and lead writer for the National Defense Strategy Commission.
50    Harman and Edelman, Commission on the National Defense Strategy Report, VII.
51    Editorial Board, “A Clarion Call for Rearmament,” Wall Street Journal, June 3, 2024.
52    Roger Wicker, “America’s Military Is Not Prepared for War—or Peace,” New York Times, May 29, 2024.
53    David W. Allvin, “Allvin: It’s Make or Break Time. America Needs More Air Force,” Breaking Defense, January 17, 2025.
54    Lisa Marie Franchetti, “Statement on the Posture of the United States Navy,” Senate Committee on Appropriations, April 16, 2024; and Lisa Marie Franchetti, “Statement on the Posture of the United States Navy in Review of the Defense Authorization Request for Fiscal Year 2025 and the Future Years Defense Program,” Senate Armed Services Committee, May 16, 2024. On page six of both statements, under Sealift Investments, is the following: “The Buy-Used program provides a stable acquisition profile with forecasted maintenance and repair costs to meet strategic mobility requirements at a moderate level of risk.” On page twelve of both statements, under Installation Investments, is the following: “We are investing in our critical utility systems, upgrading water, wastewater, and electrical generation, distribution, and treatment capabilities to improve resiliency, quality, and reliability and minimize risk to mission.”
55    Christopher Mahoney, “Four Lessons on Sea Denial from the Black and Red Seas,” Defense News, June 18, 2024.
56    In October 2024, Jake Epstein reported, “Navy warships and aircraft on station in and around the Middle East expended $1.85 billion in munitions on fights in the region between October 7, 2023, to October 1, 2024, a Navy spokesperson confirmed to Business Insider on Thursday. The $1.85 billion accounts for hundreds of munitions launched from US warships and aircraft attached to them, including surface-to-air interceptor missiles, land-attack missiles, air-to-air missiles, and air-to-surface bombs. Some of these weapons cost several million dollars apiece. The substantial figure covers the Navy’s campaign against the Houthis in the Red Sea, which is ongoing, and its efforts to defend Israel from attacks by Iran and its proxies.” See Jake Epstein, “The US Navy Fired Nearly $2 Billion in Weapons Over a Year of Fighting in the Middle East,” Business Insider, October 31, 2024.
57    Franchetti, “Statement on the Posture of the United States Navy,” and “Statement on the Posture of the United States Navy in Review of the Defense Authorization Request for Fiscal Year 2025 and the Future Years Defense Program,” 4: “The Navy’s budget request for FY25 funds a strong, global Navy that is postured and ready to deter potential adversaries, protect our homeland, respond in crisis, and, if called, win decisively in war.”
58    Franchetti, “Statement on the Posture of the United States Navy,” and “Statement on the Posture of the United States Navy in Review of the Defense Authorization Request,” 14: “The Navy continues to meet its Title 10 mission to be organized, trained, and equipped for the peacetime promotion of the national security interests and prosperity of the United States and for prompt and sustained combat incident to operations at sea.”
59    Harman and Edelman, Commission on the National Defense Strategy Report, 64.
60    Harman and Edelman, Commission on the National Defense Strategy Report, V
61    Francis J. West, Jr., “Planning for the Navy’s Future,” US Naval Institute Proceedings 105/10/920 (October 1979). From 1981 to 1983, West was assistant secretary of defense for international security affairs, US Department of Defense.
62    John T. Kuehn, PhD, “Zumwalt, Holloway, and the Soviet Navy Threat: Leadership in a Time of Strategic, Social, and Cultural Change,” Marine Corps University Press, Journal of Advanced Military Studies 13, no. 2 (Fall 2022).
63    John T. Kuehn, Zumwalt
64    Elmo Zumwalt, “Where the Russian Threat Keeps Growing,” Interview, US News & World Report, September 13, 1971, 72.
65    James L. Holloway III, “The President’s Page,” US Naval Institute Proceedings 101, no. 6 (June 1975): 3.
66    Holloway III, “The President’s Page.”
67    Hearing on National Defense Before the Senate Armed Services Committee, 114th Cong. (2015) (statement of Jonathan Greenert, Admiral, US Navy, Chief of Naval Operations, 4-5). The full quote is: “There are many ways to balance between force structure, readiness, capability, and manpower, but none that [the] Navy has calculated that enable us to confidently execute the current defense strategy within dictated budget constraints.”
68    Hearing (Greenert, 4, 5, and 9).
69    Hearing (Greenert, 4, 5, and 9).
70    Andrew J. Rhodes, “The Geographic President: How Franklin D. Roosevelt Used Maps to Make and Communicate Strategy,” Washington Map Society’s Portolan, Spring 2020. This essay won the 2019 Ristow Prize for Academic Achievement in the History of Cartography. Rhodes is a career civil servant who has served as an expert in Asia-Pacific affairs in a variety of analytic, advisory, and staff positions in the US government. He is an affiliated scholar of the China Maritime Studies Institute at the US Naval War College. Rhodes also commented that geography provides “leaders with a broader set of tools for analyzing complex problems, developing options within a team, and presenting a public vision for a decision.”
71    Rhodes, “The Geographic President”: “In 1942, FDR ordered Secretary of War Henry Stimson to come to the Map Room on a Sunday afternoon for what FDR called a ‘geography lesson.’ FDR asked him to move his wheelchair to the map of the Pacific where he criticized a recent memorandum from Stimson that failed to consider the tyranny of distance in the Pacific.”
72    Peter M. Swartz and Michael C. Markowitz defined CNO responsibilities as follows: “Prepare the way for developing a Program Objective Memorandum for the Future Year Defense Program; develop and submit an annual Program Objective Memorandum and budget to the Office of the Secretary of Defense and Congress; man, train, equip and support the existing fleet and shore establishment, and maintain its readiness; conduct long-range planning beyond the Future Year Defense Program; provide national security policy, strategy and operational advice to the President and Defense Secretary, and Chairman JCS; articulate the Navy story; organize (and re-organize) the fleet and shore establishment; represent the Navy in joint, bilateral, and multilateral fora; and take good care of Navy men and women.” See Peter M. Swartz and Michael C. Markowitz, Organizing OPNAV (1970 – 2009), Strategic Studies Division, Prepared by CNA for the US Navy Naval History and Heritage Command, CAB D0020997.A5/2Rev, January 2010, Slide no. 11.
73    Bill Snyder, “Gen. David Petraeus: Four Tasks of a Strategic Leader,” Insights, Stanford Graduate School of Business, May 14, 2018.
74    Justin Katz, “INDOPACOM’s Paparo Acknowledges Stockpile Shortages May Impact His Readiness,” Breaking Defense, November 20, 2024; see also Epstein, “The U.S. Navy Fired Nearly $2 Billion in Weapons.”
75    Cal Biesecker, “Still Unhappy with Progress on Directed Energy Weapons, SWO Boss Wants More Land Based Testing to Speed Use on Ships,” Defense Daily, January 14, 2025.
76    Geoff Ziezulewicz, “Navy Now Seeking Commercial Ship Design to Propel Its Long-Delayed Medium Landing Ship Program Forward,” War Zone, January 15, 2025. Note: The medium landing ship (designated as the LSM) is a new class of Navy amphibious ships to support the Marine Corps conducting its operational concept to set up ad hoc bases on islands, fire anti-ship missiles in a potential conflict, and quickly move to new locations. The Navy envisions a ship length of 200 to 400 feet; a draft of 12 feet; a crew of about seventy sailors; and a capacity for carrying fifty Marines and 648 short tons of equipment. This ship would have a transit speed of 14 knots and a cruising range of 3,500 nautical miles, as well as a roll-on/roll-off beaching capability and a helicopter landing pad.
77    As mentioned in the introduction, Admiral Lescher, then-vice chief of naval operations, explained the crux of the Navy’s new “Get Real, Get Better” initiative during a May 2022 speech, saying: “We have to self-assess and be our own toughest critics. We need to be honest about our abilities and be fully transparent about our performance. Once we ‘embrace the red,’ we will be able to identify solutions and more realistically predict our mission readiness.” See “Vice Chief of Naval Operations Talks,” US Navy Press Office.
78    Editorial Board, “‘The Big One Is Coming’ and the US Military Isn’t Ready,” Wall Street Journal, November 4, 2022.

The post Clarity is power: The Trump administration needs a new US Navy Navigation Plan appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>
China’s exploitation of overseas ports and bases https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/in-depth-research-reports/issue-brief/chinas-exploitation-of-overseas-ports-and-bases/ Fri, 21 Mar 2025 18:47:12 +0000 https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/?p=824422 The control and administration of overseas ports and bases by China poses a serious risk to the United States in the event of a potential conflict. The Chinese People’s Liberation Army could exploit these ports and bases to challenge control of the sea.

The post China’s exploitation of overseas ports and bases appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>
Introduction

This paper examines the potential for the Chinese People’s Liberation Army (PLA) to exploit its growing network of overseas ports and bases to challenge control of the seas in a conventional war with the United States. Security concerns with Chinese ownership of overseas ports fall into three main categories. First, China collects vast amounts of intelligence via its port network. Second, it could use that intelligence and its control of key ports and piers to disrupt US shipments during wartime. Finally, China could leverage these ports to pre-position weapons, ammunition, and equipment to resupply its warships and armed merchants or rapidly establish anti-access/area denial (A2/AD) nodes near major maritime choke points. In short, China could exploit this network to challenge the sea control essential to US success in an armed conflict.

This paper does not speculate on why the United States and China might enter a global conflict. In fact, current Chinese writings indicate China does not seek a global confrontation. Rather, Chinese strategic literature reflects a preference for winning without fighting and, if forced to fight, fighting one local enemy at a time after politically isolating that enemy.

As with all future papers, this one starts with assumptions. It then examines China’s current network of overseas ports and its expansion of that network. The rationale behind China’s pursuit of overseas ports is explored through an analysis of Chinese strategic vulnerabilities. This paper considers three potential applications for these bases, including an improbable worst-case scenario, to assess how China may exploit this advantage.

After evaluating China’s potential actions, the paper examines possible US responses and concludes with recommendations for the capabilities, training, organization, and equipment necessary to execute those missions effectively.

Assumptions

Assumptions are critical to planning. They provide guidance concerning essential but inherently unknowable factors required to initiate planning.1 The following assumptions are key to assessing China’s potential use of overseas bases and ports in a conflict with the United States.

Assumption 1: The war will be long.

By the time the modern state and its military institutions fully emerged at the end of the seventeenth century, wars were won or lost on the ability of financial and economic systems to sustain and support armies in the field and navies at sea.2

Since 1750, conflicts between healthy, major powers lasted years to decades, even though national leaders often assumed they would be short. The Seven Years’ War, the French Revolutionary and Napoleonic Wars, the US Civil War, the First and Second World Wars, and the Russo-Ukrainian War lasted between three to twenty-three years.

War games have repeatedly shown that the United States would run out of critical munitions just eight days into a high-intensity conflict with China over Taiwan.”3 However, this does not mean a war with China would be short. In both the US Civil War and the First World War, ammunition shortages reduced the intensity of fighting for up to a year. Yet, both sides mobilized their industries and replenished ammunition stocks even as they raised massive armies. These wars continued for years after the combatants overcame their initial shortages. The current Russo-Ukrainian War follows this pattern.

These long wars have ended in one of two ways: a negotiated treaty or the destruction of the enemy’s forces and subsequent occupation of its homeland. Economic exhaustion of one or both parties was a key factor in these conflicts.

However, nuclear weapons introduced a new factor that makes occupying a nuclear-armed power a highly dangerous proposition. Andrew Krepinevich, Jr., president and chief operating officer of Solarium LLC, a defense consulting firm, notes:

  • [W]ith the advent of nuclear weapons, wars between great powers can be protracted only if political constraints are imposed on vertical escalation.4

The presence of nuclear weapons appears to rule out a strategy of annihilation or large-scale attacks on either combatant’s homeland. Instead of seeking a decisive victory, the United States and China would likely pursue a strategy of exhaustion, pitting their economic and fiscal systems against each other. In this conflict, sea control would be critical.

Assumption 2: China is establishing a mix of overseas military bases, ownership of overseas commercial ports, and access to other nations’ commercial ports.

Chinese entanglement in foreign bases and ports is not an assumption but a reality. The only uncertainty is which facilities China could access in a conflict. In 2018, Ely Ratner, at the time the Maurice R. Greenberg senior fellow for China studies at the Council on Foreign Relations, noted, “China’s government is actively searching for overseas bases.”5 Since then, China has continued to invest heavily in overseas facilities.6

Assumption 3: China is developing fully autonomous uncrewed aerial vehicles (UAVs), uncrewed surface vessels (USVs), and uncrewed underwater vessels (UUVs).

Currently, several nations deploy weapons capable of autonomously hunting targets post-launch.7 China, already a leader in drones and autonomy technologies, will undoubtedly operate post-launch autonomous drones across air, land, and sea domains within a few years. As the Houthis have demonstrated, even a small number of inexpensive drones can challenge current US Navy capabilities. China has the potential to produce these in the millions.8

Assumption 4: China could execute a plan using its Chinese-owned overseas ports and bases with its current capabilities.

The PLA already possesses the capabilities required to exploit Chinese bases and Chinese-owned overseas ports. The key will be China’s willingness to think differently and commit forces to missions with a slight chance of those forces returning.

Assumption 5: The United States cannot predict which nations will allow US forces to operate from their territories during a war. Therefore, the United States must plan for various permissions and structure future forces accordingly.

International relations in the Indo-Pacific are in flux. While many analysts believe Australia and Japan will allow US forces to use their territory in a conflict with China, there is much less confidence regarding the positions other nations in the region will take. In the last few years, China has pulled back from its “wolf-warrior” approach to diplomacy and refocused its Belt and Road Initiative. This may lead Pacific nations toward neutrality or even alignment with China.

Chinese overseas port posture

Numerous studies have examined China’s rapid and ongoing expansion of ownership or management of ports globally. Most provide detailed analyses of why China is seeking a global footprint, and several papers also analyze China’s reasoning for selecting specific ports.9

However, there is no consensus on precisely which facilities China will own or have access to. All studies note China’s naval base in Djibouti. More recently, Newsweek reported that China continues to expand naval facilities in Ream, Cambodia.10 The Washington Post reported China continued its efforts to establish “military facilities at the United Arab Emirates port of Kalifa.”11 RAND rated four countries—Cambodia, Myanmar, Bangladesh, and Pakistan—as highly desirable and feasible candidates for subsequent naval bases.12

Isaac B. Kardon and Wendy Leutert note that “the [People’s Liberation Army Navy] enjoys privileged access to dual-use facilities that Chinese firms own and operate.”13 This means Chinese personnel could oversee the day-to-day operations at these terminals. Chinese firms “hold an equity stake in the lease or concession on at least one terminal in ninety-six foreign ports.”14 Forty-five of the ninety-six ports lie along significant sea lines of communications (SLOCs) critical to Chinese imports and exports. Fifty-five percent of the ports are within 480 nautical miles (one steaming day) of critical choke points on these SLOCs. While China may focus on protecting its SLOCs, these routes are essential to the global economy. Chinese ownership or management of these ports allows China to build military capabilities at overseas bases covertly.

Chinese strategic vulnerabilities

China has key strategic vulnerabilities that can be exploited in a long war. Chinese leaders have identified two vulnerabilities of great strategic concern: the “Malacca Dilemma” and internal instability that could threaten the Chinese Communist Party’s (CCP’s) rule.15 While Chinese officials no longer use the phrase “Malacca Dilemma,” it still captures China’s fundamental vulnerability to a blockade. If exploited, this vulnerability would contribute significantly to China’s economic exhaustion.

Malacca dilemma

China’s greatest geostrategic vulnerability is its isolation from the Pacific and Indian Oceans by the First Island Chain. This makes Chinese seaborne trade highly vulnerable to interdiction. Further, since most of the major exits to the South China and East China Seas are at significant distances from the Chinese mainland, China would have to project its military forces over longer ranges to disrupt any US or allied blockade operations. Even if China can penetrate a blockade of the First Island Chain, it faces additional maritime choke points en route to European and Middle Eastern markets. Most notable are the Strait of Hormuz and Bab al-Mandab Strait.

The Chinese leadership’s concern over the Malacca Dilemma is based on genuine economic vulnerabilities. China’s energy, food, and productive capacity heavily rely on seaborne trade. To reduce its vulnerability to interruption of its seaborne commerce, China has invested significant resources in pipelines and overland rail routes.

China has made serious investments to reduce its vulnerability to blockade operations. It is essential to examine those steps and the reasons they remain vulnerable.

Rail–an effort to overcome the Malacca Dilemma?

China has invested heavily in improving its ability to ship to Europe by rail. According to the China State Railway Group Company, it moved 1,460,000 twenty-foot equivalent units (TEUs) by rail in 2021.16 This peak throughput occurred prior to Russia’s full-scale invasion of Ukraine on February 24, 2022, which has restricted rail traffic. For comparison, China’s ports handled 262 million TEUs in 2021.17 Thus, rail routes accounted for only 0.6 percent of its global seaborne trade.

Expanding capacity to handle more than a minor fraction of seaborne trade will be extremely difficult. Russian Railways projects that it will be able to transit 4 million containers by 2027. However, its spokesman admits that shortages of container platforms, skilled workers, throughput capacity, and marshaling yards restrict its current operations.18 Kazakh railways, the only other route, do not offer prospects for increased trade. The Kazakh-China border crossings are regularly overwhelmed by traffic. At the beginning of September 2024, fifty-five trains were backed up at the border. To reduce the congestion, Kazakhstan banned further containers until it could clear the backlog.19 Further complicating any efforts to increase overland transportation throughput is the fact both rail and road connections pass through thousands of miles of the most hostile terrain in the world—mountains, jungles, and deserts. These conditions magnify both the expense of transport and the cost of maintaining rail and road networks. Additionally, most of the rail infrastructure is not operated or maintained by China, but instead by Russia and Kazakhstan. Finally, the very nature of rail lines makes them subject to wartime interdiction.

China has also proposed rail projects to Thailand, Myanmar, and Pakistan, but these projects continue to face delays.20 The cargo that will eventually feed these rail connections must come primarily from maritime shipping. Thus, these proposed rail lines will not dramatically reduce China’s dependence on the sea but will only allow it to avoid key choke points created by the First Island Chain. However, even if these lines triple rail throughput, they will still provide less than 2 percent of China’s current seaborne trade. The fact remains that rail simply cannot provide China with a significant substitute for seaborne trade.

This calls into question whether China designed these rail lines not as alternate trade routes but as inland routes to support distant overseas ports and bases. China and Pakistan are planning a rail line to link Kashgar, China, to Gwadar, a Pakistani port city on the Arabian Sea.21 In late 2023, China and Myanmar announced the resumption of work on the China-Myanmar Economic Corridor, which will link Kunming, China, to Kyaukpyu and Yangon, Myanmar—both located on the Bay of Bengal.22

Energy

Not surprisingly, China uses a full range of energy sources. At 55.6 percent of the total, coal is by far China’s largest energy source. The next largest source is oil, at 17.7 percent. Then, in descending order, are natural gas (8.4 percent), renewables (8.4 percent), hydro (7.7 percent), and nuclear power (2.3 percent).23

China has massive coal production capacity and reserves. Yet, in 2022, it imported 375 million metric tons of coal, or 8 percent of its coal needs.24 The imports, primarily from Indonesia and Australia, consisted of higher-quality coal unavailable in China but needed for certain industrial processes.

Analysis often cites the fact that China imports 72 percent of the oil it consumes as a primary strategic vulnerability.25 But too often, analysts do not note that oil represented less than 18 percent of China’s primary energy consumption in 2022. Recognizing a potential vulnerability, China began building a strategic petroleum oil reserve in 2007. Today,

  • China’s inventory [is] near 1.3bn barrels, enough to cover 115 days of imports (America holds 800m barrels). On top of this, China has told oil firms to add 60m to stockpiles by the end of March [2025]. Rapidan [Energy] thinks reserves will grow even faster, with China adding as many as 700m barrels by the end of 2025.26

In the past, China has also delivered oil by rail. With full mobilization, China might be able to import five hundred thousand barrels per day from Russia and Kazakhstan.27 However, this would displace other potential traffic. That said, most of China’s liquid energy imports are used in the transportation and petrochemical industries.

Natural gas does not represent a significant vulnerability either. As of spring 2024, China had only about twenty-three days’ natural gas supply in storage. However, in 2022, natural gas imported by sea represented only 2 percent of China’s total energy.28 The reductions in liquid energy consumption seen during the COVID-19 pandemic indicate the impact that wartime restrictions on civilian movement could have on China’s energy demands.29

Any major conflict between the United States and China would cause significant economic disruption globally, thus strongly reducing the demand for Chinese products. This would further reduce China’s liquid energy requirements and extend the life of its energy reserves. In sum, interruptions of imported liquid energy would strain China’s economy but would not be decisive.

Food

China faces insoluble food security issues. With only 10 percent of the world’s arable land, it must feed 20 percent of the world’s population.30 In 2014, China’s government reported that 20 percent of its arable land suffered from heavy metal pollution. Compounding these problems is the carbon content of Chinese soil, which is 30 percent lower than the world average. To compensate, Chinese farmers use 33 percent of all fertilizer produced worldwide. This overuse of fertilizer causes acidification and hardens the soil.31 In addition, over 40 percent of China’s land area is affected by erosion—perhaps the most severe damage in the world.32

The net result is that China:

  • [I]mports more of these [food] products—including soybeans, corn, wheat, rice, and dairy products—than any other country. Between 2000 and 2020, the country’s food self-sufficiency ratio decreased from 93.6 percent to 65.8 percent. Changing diet patterns have also driven up China’s imports of edible oils, sugar, meat, and processed foods. In 2021, the country’s edible oil import-dependency ratio reached nearly 70 percent…33

Chinese leaders are acutely aware that food shortages have historically led to instability and have, therefore, stockpiled a year’s worth of wheat and maize.34 The chart below demonstrates the massive increase in grain purchases since 2010. This trend partly reflects China’s growing wealth and the need to feed more livestock as the Chinese diet increasingly includes meat.35

China also faces severe water shortages, particularly in the north, where much of its agricultural production is concentrated. That region holds just 4 percent of the country’s water. As a result, Chinese agriculture relies heavily on groundwater, but half of its aquifers are too polluted for irrigation. Nationwide, up to 25 percent of river water is also unsuitable for agricultural use.36 To address its water distribution problem, China is building massive water transportation systems, but it is unlikely to significantly increase grain production in a crisis.

Productive capacity

In 2022, China imported more than $325 million in non-food raw materials per month.37 This included 70 percent of total global seaborne iron ore imports—about 1.2 billion tons per year.38 Chinese domestic production that year was 380 million tons, covering only 24 percent of its annual needs.39 While China is the world’s fourth-largest producer of copper,40 it is also the world’s largest importer, accounting for 58 percent of global copper ore imports.41

Although China has the world’s largest shipbuilding industry, accounting for 48.4 percent of the global shipbuilding tonnage, the industry is heavily dependent on imports.42 If US allies can maintain sea control in a prolonged conflict, China will struggle to obtain the raw materials needed to sustain its economy and war production. Nations that have been blockaded in the past have made significant cuts to civilian production to support their war efforts. Doing so allowed the Confederacy, Germany, and Japan to extend their military efforts for years; however, in the end, blockades caused substantial reductions in their industrial outputs.

Trade

China has made significant efforts to shift from an export-based economy to a domestic demand-driven one. It has reduced its dependence on trade from over 60 percent of its GDP in 2006 to 38 percent in 2022.43 However, 90 percent of this trade remains seaborne.44 To illustrate the potential impact of interruptions to seaborne trade, the Great Depression reduced the US GDP by 29 percent from 1929 to 1933.45 A RAND study noted that China’s economy may contract by 25 to 35 percent in a prolonged war.46 A contraction of this magnitude would not only severely hinder China’s military-industrial production but could also contribute to internal instability—Chinese President Xi Jinping’s primary concern.

Internal instability

The CCP’s leadership views internal instability as the primary threat to its continued rule. Since the 1989 Tiananmen Square protests and massacre, China has dramatically increased its focus on internal security. It reorganized the People’s Armed Police, and by 2017, its internal security budget was 118 percent of its national defense budget.

China no longer publishes its internal security budget. However, its massive efforts to suppress Uighurs in Xinjiang, its coordinated nationwide surveillance of nearly every aspect of its citizens’ lives, and its extensive control over information all underscore the CCP leadership’s belief that internal instability is a major strategic threat.

Joel Wuthnow, a senior research fellow at the Center for the Study of Chinese Military Affairs within the Institute for National Strategic Studies at the National Defense University, noted:

  • The ultimate irony of the regime presiding over the ‘people’s republic’ is that its greatest fear is that one day, it will have to confront the wrath of the Chinese people directly. Worrying about internal challenges is ‘what keeps Chinese leaders awake at night.’47

The People’s Liberation Army

The Office of the US Secretary of Defense provides an unclassified Annual Report to Congress, and the Congressional Research Service regularly produces reports on the PLA. This article does not attempt to duplicate these efforts. Instead, it focuses on how China can use existing and projected PLA capabilities to disrupt international shipping during a conflict with the United States.

Chinese potential use of overseas ports and bases

Security concerns regarding Chinese ownership of overseas ports fall into three general categories. First is the massive amount of intelligence China collects. Second is the potential to use this intelligence and control of key ports and piers to disrupt US shipments in times of war. Finally, there is the possibility that China could leverage its control of these ports to pre-position weapons, ammunition, and equipment—either to replenish its warships and armed merchants or to rapidly establish A2/AD nodes near major maritime choke points. In short, it can disrupt global maritime trade.

Simply by running international ports, China acquires and collects enormous amounts of information on maritime trade flows. It also developed its National Transportation and Logistics Public Information Platform, known as LOGINK, a software system designed to manage global shipping. As John Konrad writes:

  • Initially marketed outside of China in 2010, LOGINK has since expanded its footprint, securing cooperation agreements with at least 24 global ports. Its capacity to amass sensitive business and foreign government data, such as corporate registries, vessel details, and cargo data, has raised significant security concerns.

Quoting a U.S.-China Economic and Security Commission report,48 Konrad adds:

  • COSCO [China COSCO Shipping Corporation] currently operates terminals at Long Beach, Los Angeles, and Seattle, potentially granting LOGINK a window into vessel, container, and other data at those ports.49

This information could provide China with global intelligence on the movement of US forces, materiel, and equipment during a crisis. China could use this intelligence to disrupt the movement of US and allied materiel in the event of conflict. It did so in 2016 when it seized eight Singaporean Terrex infantry carriers as they transited the port of Hong Kong while returning from exercises in Taiwan.50

Due to the United States’ heavy reliance on commercial shipping, some of this maritime traffic will pass through Chinese-controlled ports. Much more will be visible in LOGINK. Both possibilities create opportunities to corrupt logistics databases and even reroute critical items. There is a also concern that the widespread use of Chinese-produced cranes could allow China to disrupt trade in ports it neither owns nor operates.51

The third threat is the potential to use these ports—or even individual piers—to pre-position equipment that could transform each into an intelligence collection node, a rearming point to replenish containerized missiles on Chinese warships or merchant ships, an A2/AD node to disrupt international shipping, or any combination of the three.

In the least aggressive approach, China could employ these ports for intelligence gathering and soft-kill operations. PLA personnel could use pre-positioned electronic warfare (EW) and cyber equipment for offensive operations or as a basis for intelligence collection beyond what is obtained through LOGINK. The PLA could also deploy long-endurance drones or balloons as platforms for multi-spectral, synthetic-aperture radar (SAR), radar, and EW sensors. While permitting the use of these ports in a conflict could legally render the host nation a belligerent, it is not difficult to envision host nations turning a blind eye to drones collecting “weather” or “environmental” information. Nor would it be surprising if the host nations simply pretended not to know about any Chinese intelligence personnel conducting cyber or EW operations from their soil. Every port could become an intelligence collection node along key maritime routes.

The next step would be to use these ports to replenish containerized weapons deployed on Chinese-owned commercial ships. Since these vessels would routinely load and unload containers at the piers, the activity would not appear unusual and would be subtle enough for the host nation to ignore. The PLA has displayed these systems at trade shows since 2022.52 Its systems appear very similar to the Club-K family of containerized missiles that Russia has offered for sale since 2010.53 In recent years, Israel, Iran, the United States, and the Netherlands have also tested containerized missiles. These ports could also be used to rearm People’s Liberation Army Navy (PLAN) ships.

The final—and least likely, but most aggressive—course of action would be to use these ports to establish effective counter-intervention nodes. These nodes would require effective command, control, communications, computers, intelligence, surveillance, and reconnaissance capabilities, as well as anti-ship defenses, anti-air defenses, and EW units. Depending on the location and the potential for US or allied response, they may also require limited ground defenses to protect against attempts to destroy the Chinese weapons systems stationed there.

Prior to a conflict, China could pre-position weapons, ammunition, and equipment without the host nations’ knowledge. The PLA could build significant stockpiles of command and control (C2), EW, cyber, anti-air, anti-ship, and anti-armor equipment and munitions by transporting them in commercial containers via Chinese shipping companies. Upon arrival, they could be unloaded and stored in warehouses or container lots controlled by Chinese companies. Similar to US pre-positioning programs, China would only need to fly in personnel and limited equipment to rapidly establish fully equipped intelligence centers or combat formations. If flights were impossible, smugglers have demonstrated that large numbers of people can be moved in containers on merchant ships.

Weapons and vehicles too large to be containerized could be shipped aboard one of China’s numerous commercial vessels, which could be specifically modified to carry military equipment. Personnel could be flown in or travel with their equipment on these ships.

Given that Chinese forces would likely be focused on air and sea interdiction, these forces would not require large, personnel-intensive infantry, logistics, and aircraft maintenance units. Thus, deployment and employment could be executed rapidly in peacetime. These factors could provide China with robust forces capable of shutting down shipping at maritime choke points across the South China Sea, Indian Ocean, Middle East, and potentially parts of the Atlantic Ocean and Mediterranean Sea.

If these ports are configured to be effective A2/AD nodes, they could be used in two ways. First, China could assert that these forces would not be used unless the United States or its allies attempted to cut off maritime trade to China. Alternatively, China could threaten the maritime trade of individual nations that choose to support the United States. If these threats fail and the United States imposed a distant naval blockade, China could use these nodes to cause massive disruption to global trade.

Meia Nouwens of the International Institute for Strategic Studies says that Chinese leaders understand that an Indo-Pacific war will not be “a short, quick, swift victory after a surprise attack, but [acknowledge] that potential conflict might be protracted, and a war of attrition.”54 China is aware that a prolonged war will be won or lost on economic and industrial resilience. Cutting global trade would significantly and negatively impact US economic and industrial capacity. Chinese leaders are likely aware this step would alienate the international community and perhaps convince some nations to align with the United States. While this is a significant risk, the CCP would have already taken an existential risk (for the party, not the country) by choosing conventional warfare with the United States.

By the same standards, US efforts to disrupt these sites risk alienating host nations. This will be particularly true if the Chinese are merely conducting intelligence-gathering operations without kinetic actions or interference with the host nation’s trade.

US intelligence has tracked China’s development of mainland counter-intervention (A2/AD) capabilities for over a decade. China has spent decades developing the systems and weapons necessary to create overlapping, integrated observation and fire zones at ever-greater distances from its mainland. Today, China is emphasizing the integration of air, land, sea, space, cyber, EW, and information capabilities to maximize the effectiveness of its counter-intervention capability. It is also increasing its inventory of mobile systems and showcasing containerized systems at international trade shows.55

Combined with its ownership and control of overseas ports, this capability gives China the potential to create “pop-up” counter-intervention nodes near critical maritime choke points. The capabilities discussed below can all be deployed to overseas ports using standard shipping containers or roll-on/roll-off (RO/RO) shipping. With the C2 systems, weapons, and munitions pre-positioned in these ports, personnel can be flown in and establish effective units in a matter of days.

Systems China could covertly deploy to overseas ports/bases

Command-and-control systems

The critical asset that will enable China to integrate its wide-ranging locations and coordinate the employment of the systems is an effective global C2 system. The theater commands the PLA established in 2016 are still working toward achieving full joint capability, and none have been designated to conduct the type of operations described in this paper. Therefore, how China would command such an operation remains an open question. To date, the naval headquarters has commanded the PLAN deployments to the Middle East. However, given the PLA’s determined efforts to master joint operations, China is likely developing some form of joint command for overseas deployments.56

The PLA will require a robust C2 with integrated global communications; long-range intelligence, surveillance, and reconnaissance (ISR); EW; and cyber defense. The technical components necessary for such a command structure either already exist or are currently under development.

China is a near-peer or peer in military remote sensing, creating new and enhanced dilemmas for US and allied military planners: The United States will face a PLA with improved intelligence, tracking, and targeting capabilities, complicating efforts to deter or carry out military operations within the second island chain in the Indo-Pacific.57

China has plans to launch twenty-six thousand communication satellites into low-earth orbit (LEO) to provide Starlink-like global broadband capabilities.58 To augment its existing BeiDou Global Navigation Satellite System and ChinaSat communications satellites, China launched Weixing Hulianwan Gaogui-01, its first “high orbit internet satellite.”59 BeiDou, ChinaSat, and Gaogui-01 operate in geosynchronous orbit (GEO).

In December 2023, China launched Yaogan-41, a remote-sensing satellite, into GEO. It added to China’s constellation of 144 Yaogan satellites, providing “an unprecedented ability to identify and track car-sized objects throughout the entire Indo-Pacific.”60 As a GEO orbiting satellite, it provides a constant observation of the same region, unlike LEO satellites, which make intermittent passes. China also operates three Gaofen electro-optical equipped satellites in GEO, with resolutions as precise as 15 meters. In 2023, China launched the world’s only SAR satellite in GEO orbit, enabling the satellite to see through clouds and in darkness.61

These systems will provide a local commander access to Chinese satellite intelligence and can be augmented by long-range drones and balloons. China could deploy its vertically launched Sunflower drones, which have a 1,200-mile range and an 88-pound payload, allowing them to carry various sensors and communications systems. China has already demonstrated its ability to use high-altitude balloons as collection platforms.

The Russo-Ukrainian War has highlighted the importance of effective EW and electronic intelligence systems. It has also demonstrated the growing effectiveness of relatively small EW systems that could easily fit in a TEU. Even before the war in Ukraine, China took steps to strengthen its EW capabilities. In 2015, China established the Strategic Support Force (SSF) to develop and coordinate space, cyber, electronic, and psychological warfare capabilities. In April 2024, China announced that it had split the SSF into three branches: the Information Support Force, Network Space Force, and Military Aerospace Support Force.62 While analysts still do not fully understand how responsibilities will be divided among these new forces, it is clear that China remains committed to enhancing its capabilities in these domains.

A key advantage of these C2 capabilities is that the equipment—and even personnel—can be covertly transported and deployed.

Anti-ship systems

Anti-ship systems, ranging from low-cost weapons to high-end cruise missiles, will be central to any Chinese attempt to use overseas bases and ports to disrupt trade.

Sea mines

Sea mines are among the cheapest and most effective anti-ship systems. Given the widely recognized deficiencies in the US Navy’s modern counter-mine warfare, China is well aware of their effectiveness.63 In 2023, the China Maritime Studies Institute at the US Naval War College’s Center for Naval Warfare Studies noted:

  • China has begun to prioritize mine warfare and the PLAN has a comprehensive, sophisticated sea mine program …. [A] large, diverse inventory of sea mines including advanced variants and trains extensively in minelaying.64

While many studies have focused on China’s use of mines to isolate Taiwan, sea mines are easy to transport and can be covertly deployed by almost any ship. China has designated mine-laying a mission for commercial vessels in its naval reserve. Given the challenges of mine sweeping and the limited capabilities among Western nations, even a small number of mines in maritime choke points could cause long-term trade disruptions. Following the Gulf War, it took Australians almost five months to search “two square kilometres and [deal] with [just] 60 mines.”65 Those mines employed decades-old technology. The modern mines in China’s arsenal will be exponentially more difficult to neutralize. Even if an area can be cleared, it can easily be reseeded by false-flagged commercial or fishing vessels during routine passages through maritime choke points.

Uncrewed aerial vehicles

In Ukraine, UAVs have destroyed targets ranging from individual soldiers to armored vehicles to major industrial facilities and even warships—at distances of up to 1,800 kilometers.66

China is well known for manufacturing most of the world’s quadcopters, but it also produces a family of military drones. China’s FH-901, for example, bears a remarkable resemblance to the US Switchblade.67 These munitions have limited range but carry more powerful warheads than the hobby quadcopters widely used in Ukraine. They would be particularly effective in very restricted waterways such as the Bab al-Mandab Strait.

China’s Sunflower 200 represents a significant leap in capability. Online videos show China developing a launching system similar to Iran’s commercial truck-mounted launcher.68 These relatively inexpensive, mass-produced drones pose a clear threat to merchant shipping as well as commercial and military base facilities.

China is also developing high-performance, long-range drones. The Feihong FH-97A is “capable of ‘all-day, all-weather’ operations in support of reconnaissance and attack missions.”69 The FH-97A bears a striking resemblance to the US XQ-58A Valkyrie, which has a range of 3,500 miles, can carry up to 1,000 pounds, and cruises at Mach 0.7.70 If the FH-97A’s capabilities match those of the Valkyrie, it could provide a globally deployable long-range strike. Given China’s investment in artificial intelligence, it is likely that these aircraft will soon be autonomous—if they are not already.

If concealed in standard shipping containers, these weapons could be quickly shipped into any port controlled by a Chinese company. The FH-97’s estimated 3,000-mile range means it could strike shipping throughout the Indian Ocean, most of the Atlantic, and much of the Pacific from a Chinese-controlled port. Even more concerning, these systems could target fixed air bases or ports supporting US operations.

Uncrewed surface vessels/uncrewed underwater vessels

Over the last two years, Ukraine’s USVs have sunk or damaged Russian naval vessels both in the open sea and in port.71 The China Maritime Studies Institute at the US Naval War College’s Center for Naval Warfare Studies recently reported:

  • “The PLAN either has or is poised to integrate USVs and UUVs into its operational force. It seeks to build larger USVs and UUVs to carry more capable payloads and perform a broader range of operations. Combat USVs are currently undergoing sea trials and AI integration.”72

Potential employment of uncrewed systems

Since most of these systems are small enough to fit in a standard TEU, they are an obvious choice for supporting sea denial operations from overseas ports. Of particular concern is the potential for these drones to hunt autonomously. The map below illustrates the vast areas these drones could cover when launched from Chinese-owned ports. Of course, range rings do not prevent opposing forces from maneuvering within them, but the imminent threat of damage may lead commercial shipping to avoid the area. Illustrative of this point, major shipping firms have largely abandoned the use of the Suez Canal due to the threat of drones and missiles from the Houthis in Yemen.

Multiple rocket launchers

China fields battalions of PCH191 multiple rocket launchers equipped with satellite or inertial navigation systems, capable of firing the TL-7B missile. This missile can conduct sea-skimming flights to deliver a 700-pound warhead at a range of 120 miles.73 While most multiple rocket launchers are too large to fit in a shipping container, the rocket pods themselves fit easily in standard forty-foot-equivalent-unit containers. Over time, China could discreetly transport and stockpile rocket ammunition in Chinese-owned containers within the port. The launchers could then be loaded onto various Chinese-owned RO/RO ships and offloaded just before a campaign begins. The primary disadvantage is that their function would be difficult to conceal if the launchers were observed during loading or unloading.

Cruise missiles

Cruise missiles are proven ship-killers, and several of these systems have capabilities that would enable Chinese-held ports to provide mutual support. China currently fields six major anti-ship cruise missile systems (ASCMs): YJ-12, YJ-18, YJ-21, YJ-62, YJ-83, and CJ-100. These systems carry ship-killing warheads with ranges ranging from 130 to 1,000 miles. All can be embarked on modified RO/RO vessels, while the YJ-18 and YJ-83 can be containerized.

Maximum range of Chinese missiles

Source: Office of the Secretary of Defense 2023. “Annual Report to Congress: Military and Security Developments Involving the People’s Republic of China in 2023.” Washington, DC: Department of Defense.

Anti-ship ballistic missiles

The DF-21D is a road-mobile ballistic missile system with a range of 1,500 kilometers. From mainland China, it can reach most of the South China Sea and significant parts of the Bay of Bengal. The longer-range DF-26 (4,000 kilometers) can cover the entire South China Sea, much of the Indian Ocean, the Red Sea, and the eastern one-third of the Mediterranean Sea.74 The DF-27 has a range between 5,000 and 8,000 kilometers, it is also road-mobile, carries a hypersonic glide vehicle, and, like the DF-26, comes in land-attack and anti-ship variants.75 It can target the Persian Gulf, the Red Sea, and most of the Mediterranean Sea. In short, the PLA can leverage its China-based ballistic missiles to reinforce sea denial operations across most of Asia, the Middle East, and the Mediterranean Sea.

Ground-based anti-air systems

This past year, the challenge of locating and destroying mobile missile systems from the air has been widely demonstrated in both Ukraine and Yemen. This suggests that an effective counter-intervention system composed of mobile missile systems can operate without air defense.76 However, the inclusion of mobile air defense systems would significantly complicate US or allied efforts to regain control of the ports. Unfortunately, China has developed a family of air defense systems that can be easily transported via RO/RO ships or shipped in containers.

In 2022, PLA air defense units focused on enhancing their tactical air defense against low- and slow-moving threats like UAS and loitering munitions to meet evolving air defense requirements.77 Although these systems are primarily designed to counter UAVs, Ukrainian forces have achieved remarkable success using them to destroy Russian helicopters and jets. Larger Ukrainian air defense systems have forced Russian aviation to operate at lower altitudes, bringing with them the engagement range of these lighter systems.

While the anti-UAS systems will be easiest to place in overseas ports, the People’s Liberation Army Air Force also operates a large force of medium and advanced long-range SAM systems. These include Russian-sourced SA-20 (S-300) and SA-21 (S-400) batteries.78 It also fields the domestically produced HQ-9 and HQ-22. The HQ-9 has a range of 120 miles and a maximum altitude of 30,000 meters. Designed to target aircraft, it is typically deployed as a battalion, though even a single battery includes eight transporter erector launchers.79 The HQ-22 has a range of 110 miles and a maximum altitude of 27,000 meters. Often compared to the US Patriot system, it can engage cruise missiles, short-range ballistic missiles, aircraft, and drones.80

These larger systems would require a RO/RO or ferry for deployment. Once operational, they would create an obvious signature but would significantly expand the air defense envelope for hastily established anti-access sites in Chinese-controlled ports. In short, China could rapidly establish an integrated air defense system by unloading large vehicles from Chinese-owned RO/ROs or ferries and integrating them with smaller vehicles and missile stores that had been pre-positioned in the designated port.

Surface warships

China, which already operates the world’s largest navy, plans to continue expanding both the size and capabilities of its surface fleet. By 2035, China will likely be more confident in deploying naval task forces much farther afield. Given its rapid progress in carrier aviation, China will likely possess the capability to launch limited carrier-based aviation in support of surface forces.

The United States must also consider the impact of China placing containerized FH-97A high-performance UAVs—or their successors—on a wide variety of warships and even merchant ships. These UAVs could provide limited air support that outranges projected US naval aircraft. Of particular concern is the potential to arm massive numbers of ships. China currently possesses 3,600 long-range fishing ships and 5,500 large merchant vessels.81 With the addition of containerized weapons, C2 suites, and ISR systems, these ships have the potential to sink most merchant vessels and engage many warships. Furthermore, surface ships could both be reinforced and reinforced by any counter-intervention umbrellas provided by Chinese overseas ports and bases.

Transportation

Chinese firms control either entire ports or individual piers in dozens of locations globally.82 These ports handle tens of thousands of containers daily. Even if the host nation attempted to monitor the contents, it would be virtually impossible—especially since many ports rely on Chinese information systems to track cargo. Thus, China could covertly deliver and store large numbers of containerized C2 systems, weapons, munitions, and supplies without the knowledge of the United States, its allies, or the host nation.

In 2022, China employed thirty RO/ROs in large-scale sealift exercises and further increased production rates, ordering an additional seventy-six for Chinese companies.83 These ships are primarily used to export Chinese cars globally, making their presence a routine part of international shipping.

While a large RO/RO ferry or vehicle carrier could transport more vehicles or troops, a single armored unit—consisting of approximately one hundred and fifty vehicles and one thousand personnel—is a reasonable estimate of what these civilian ships would likely carry in practice.84 If a host nation is friendly to China, the PLA could also use its growing inventory of amphibious shipping, long-range military aircraft, and commercial planes to rapidly position its forces.

Potential force for the overseas mission

The PLA possesses all the necessary equipment to exploit its overseas bases and ports. But which Chinese unit could execute such a mission? In October 2021, the China Maritime Studies Institute at the US Naval War College reported:

  • Since 2017, the PLAN Marine Corps increased from two to eight brigades – six Marine Brigades, one Maritime Aviation Brigade, and one Special Operations Brigade. The Special Operations Brigade are fashioning themselves after US Navy SEALs.85

In a January 2024 article, Task & Purpose paraphrased Timothy Heath, a senior international defense researcher at the RAND Corporation, as saying:

  • Chinese leaders have said they plan to [further] expand the size of the People’s Liberation Army Navy Marine Corps because they anticipate facing a higher demand for ground forces that can carry out a wide range of missions abroad.86

Since the People’s Liberation Army Navy Marine Corps already maintains a battalion-sized force in Djibouti, it is well-positioned to adapt to the fundamentally new mission of establishing covert forces at overseas stations.

Missions of US forces

The potential for China to employ its overseas ports and facilities in a significant conflict presents a serious challenge for US forces. Yet, the challenge lies well within the US Navy’s traditional missions. The 2020 Naval Doctrine Publication 1: Naval Warfare features this quote from Admiral Raymond A. Spruance as a clear statement that the most critical wartime mission for the navy/Marine Corps team is sea control:

  • I can see plenty of changes in weapons, methods, and procedures in naval warfare brought about by technical developments, but I can see no change in the future role of our Navy from what it has been for ages past for the Navy of a dominant sea power to gain and exercise the control of the sea… 87

In a long war with China, a foundational mission of US naval forces will be to reestablish and maintain sea control to sustain allied wartime production while severely restricting China’s access to the raw materials essential to its wartime economy.

The emergence of persistent surveillance technologies, along with long-range, mobile, land-based anti-ship missiles, rockets, and drones means that land-based systems can, at times, deny China access to key maritime choke points.

Unfortunately, the PLA arrived at this conclusion much earlier than the United States and has systematically developed a land-based A2/AD capability with deep magazines and redundant coverage extending to increasing ranges from the shore. The Chinese have worked hard to ensure these systems are mobile and, therefore, much more difficult to defeat. While China’s focus to date has been on protecting the Chinese mainland and its near seas, the growing global trend of containerizing effective anti-air, anti-ship, and long-range strike weapons creates new options for the global deployment and employment of these systems.

Pre-conflict, the Joint Force cannot prevent China from leveraging its overseas ports and control of shipping data to disrupt the movement of allied material or to conceal its own material shipments.

Upon the commencement of hostilities, the Joint Force will require an operational approach suited to a war of exhaustion. National command authority will need to establish priorities among competing global demands. While it is impossible to predict how senior officials will prioritize, the Joint Force must be prepared to execute the following tasks in support of sea control:

  1. Locate and neutralize Chinese efforts to interrupt global trade.
  2. Establish effective blockades to severely degrade Chinese international trade.

Fortunately, these two missions will draw on different elements of the Joint Force. Unfortunately, the current US Navy thirty-year shipbuilding plan suggests the fleet will be too small to execute a worldwide campaign against Chinese forces and facilities. The US Navy’s combat forces will be insufficient to confront the world’s largest navy and maintain global sea control. To succeed, they will require support from elements of the Joint Force that are not fully engaged. Most analysts predict that the opening campaigns of a US-China conflict will be primarily air and sea battles. If this holds true, the US Army and US Marine Corps will likely not be fully committed.

Potential roles for land-based forces in establishing global sea control

Locate and neutralize Chinese efforts to disrupt military logistics and global trade.

Given the enormous distances involved and the reliance of the United States and its allies on maritime logistics, the first mission must neutralize Chinese efforts to disrupt military logistics. As part of this effort, major fleet and air combat elements must focus on preventing the PLAN from breaking out of the First Island Chain. If granted permission to operate ashore, the Marine Littoral Regiments and Army Multi-Domain Task Forces can provide direct support to this mission. If not, these units have the potential to operate from amphibious or merchant ships. Both services have demonstrated the ability to launch anti-ship cruise missiles from containers, and both could provide helicopter-borne boarding teams to seize ships at sea.

While containing the PLAN is the priority mission, neutralizing Chinese efforts to disrupt trade will also require removing Chinese forces from ports and bases overseas. If equipped as described above, these ports and bases would be capable of interdicting shipping at key maritime choke points. Eliminating this threat will require significant, capable combat forces. However, until these Chinese forces can be reduced, the United States and its allies could establish alternative routes that bypass the South and East China Seas, allowing shipping to reach key allied states such as Japan, South Korea, and the Philippines. These alternative routes would enable US and allied forces to focus first on clearing the key choke points in the Middle East.

A primary challenge to US and allied forces will be determining the strength and disposition of PLA forces in targeted locations. Each plan of action will require a unique approach based on the PLA forces in place, their activities, the host nation’s stance toward both Chinese and US actions, and the availability of joint or combined forces. The same tactics currently planned for degrading China’s mainland A2/AD network will apply to mini A2/AD locations but will require modification based on these conditions.

Given the extended range of Chinese aerial drones, basing aircraft such as the F-35 within range of the weapons systems deployed to Chinese ports would pose a major risk of destruction on the ground or aboard a ship. This risk is particularly high if the base or port has stockpiles of Sunflower drones. The additional presence of FH-97A drones would dramatically extend the range of the threat and pose a significant danger to any aerial tankers used to extend the range of US aircraft.

While US long-range bombers are an obvious first choice to destroy identified targets in these ports, there is a high probability these assets will be tasked with other missions. In any case, the missile batteries assigned to US ground units could provide the initial firepower needed to degrade the port or base’s defenses. As US and allied ground forces continue to field batteries capable of firing Tomahawk Land Attack Missiles, SM-6s, and Precision Strike Missiles, they will be able to match the range of potential Chinese A2/AD systems forward-deployed to ports and bases. Both services need to train to operate these batteries from both naval and commercial ships.

A second, significantly cheaper option would be for naval forces to develop long-range, containerized loitering munitions similar to the Sunflower and deploy them from the proposed Marine Landing Ships Medium (LSM) or small merchant ships. The predicted collapse of global trade at the onset of a US-China war suggests that many merchant ships will be available.88 The United States should be able to rapidly produce a drone with Sunflower-level capabilities. These systems’ smaller payloads would minimize collateral damage in key international ports. If the Marine Corps continues developing the XQ-58A Valkyrie, the Fleet Marine Force could employ its derivatives from distances exceeding the range of Chinese weapons likely to be at contested ports.

Another option to overcome the tyranny of distance is pre-positioned warehouses that could supply fly-in forces ashore to counter the Chinese pop-up bases. However, this would require permission from both the host nation and major investments in pre-positioning facilities and equipment. Chinese intelligence will likely know where the pre-positioned equipment is located, enabling Chinese missile and drone forces to attack the warehouses or the unloading Maritime Prepositioning Ships as part of the opening volleys of the war.

If host nations will not permit pre-positioning of US forces in the region, or the United States chooses not to, missile batteries could be deployed on the proposed LSMs or merchant ships as afloat pre-positioned batteries. Marines and soldiers could be flown in to meet these ships and then operate from them. This would eliminate the requirement for host nation permission and reduce the vulnerability inherent in unloading.

The Marine Corps should also adopt the US Air Force’s Rapid Dragon concept to use C-130s and MV-22s to provide a longer-range strike capability than available from the F-35.89 The Rapid Dragon program loads cruise missiles onto pallets. These pallets are then air-dropped from the aft bay of a cargo aircraft. The missiles fall free, ignite, and proceed to their targets as normal. These platforms could deliver cruise missiles for a fraction of the cost of F-35s. The use of Rapid Dragon technology would also free up F-35s for other essential operations against the PLA. To further reduce costs, the United States should pursue the air force’s Grey Wolf/Golden Horde low-cost cruise missile program, which is a fraction of the cost of more advanced cruise missiles operated by the Joint Force.90

As Chinese long-range systems are eliminated, US and allied forces could close the range to conduct a suppression of enemy air defenses campaign against remaining Chinese air defenses. However, as the Ukrainians have demonstrated, mobile anti-air systems are exceptionally difficult to destroy. Allied forces will need to develop tactics, techniques, procedures, and equipment that will allow them to successfully engage mobile air defense systems. Once the long-range and anti-air capabilities have been stripped away, US or allied ground forces, in cooperation with host nation forces (if available), can clear the ports and bases of Chinese weapons.

The final, and perhaps most time-consuming, action will be mine clearance operations. Even with allied assistance, clearing mines—particularly modern smart mines—will be a major challenge. Further, China may elect to re-seed minefields using merchant and fishing vessels flying false flags. The US Navy currently severely underinvests in mine clearance capabilities, and this underinvestment seems unlikely to change by 2035.

Establish effective blockades to severely degrade Chinese international trade.

To reduce the strain on US naval and air power, the second mission—establishing an effective blockade—can be built around air-capable amphibious ships, container ships converted to operate light helicopters, operational light helicopter squadrons, Littoral Combat Ships (LCSs) with ASCMs (or containerized ASCMs aboard the amphibious ships), ISR assets, and Marine or army infantry units. In short, new units or equipment would not be required, but existing forces would need to be trained in planning and executing blockade operations.

The limited number of exits from the South and East China Seas significantly reduces blockade requirements. Additionally, crippling China’s economy does not require stopping all shipping—only large container ships, tankers, and bulk carriers, which are easier to track. With accurate intelligence on the movement of large Chinese commercial ships, US and allied blockade forces would be able to operate near the restricted passages south of the Bashi Channel.

Small task forces composed of helicopter-capable ships, infantry boarding parties trained to fast-rope, light helicopters, LCSs, or container ships armed with ASCMs and drones could be stationed to cover each of the major exits from the South China Sea. The United States must establish procedures and units for taking command of seized ships, moving them to a quarantine area, and passing control to a prize court to adjudicate their disposition.

If granted host nation permission, the Joint Force can establish support facilities near major choke points. These facilities would provide basing for persistent ISR of the choke points. They can also be used to resupply and maintain blockade ships and aircraft. If host nations along the First Island Chain refuse, maintaining the blockade will be more difficult but could still be supported from Guam and, if permitted, northern Australian ports. This approach would require the commitment of most of the US Navy’s large amphibious ships, which could be augmented by allied amphibious ships. While sufficient amphibious ships may be unavailable, container ships can be quickly modified to house light helicopters and boarding parties. The navy and Marine Corps developed this capability in the 1990s, designating the ships as T-AVBs. 91

Should maintaining a blockade at the First Island Chain become untenable, the blockade can shift back to the Malacca, Sunda, and Lombok Straits, as well as the passages north and south of Australia. These straits are very narrow: the Malacca Strait is only 1.8 nautical miles wide at its narrowest point, the Sunda Strait is 2.4 nautical miles wide, and the Lombok Strait is 5.4 nautical miles wide.92

A final blockade line could be established at the Strait of Hormuz, Bab el-Mandeb, and Cape of Good Hope. Hormuz and Bab el-Mandeb are particularly narrow. Even from the Cape of Good Hope, the blockade force could interrupt trade between China and Europe or the Middle East. While the passages around Australia and the Cape of Good Hope extend for hundreds of miles, long-endurance drones and satellites can track large vessels and provide intercept paths for blockade forces.

The blockading force will challenge designated ships and direct them to prepare to receive a boarding party. Most commercial ships will comply to avoid the damage associated with being stopped by force. Many crews will likely agree to stay on board, particularly if they are paid at union rates and guaranteed a flight home upon arrival in port. If necessary, the blockading force could employ light attack helicopters to engage ships that refuse orders. When a target ship complies, Marines or soldiers could fast-rope onto the vessel as necessary to seize control and then direct it to a designated anchorage. Upon arrival, the ship could be turned over to contractors for anchor watch until it can be adjudicated by a prize court.

Of course, if the PLA makes a significant effort to penetrate the blockade, major US Pacific Fleet combat elements will be required to intercept and engage the PLA force. Such a mission would align with the primary objective of containing the PLAN inside the First Island Chain.

New capabilities required for this mission

Neutralizing Chinese overseas A2/AD bastions and supporting blockade operations are appropriate roles for ground forces as part of a joint campaign. In addition to already programmed units and equipment, the forces will require:

  • Persistent satellite ISR coverage of maritime choke points and Chinese overseas bases/ports. This will require access to national and commercial space assets.
  • Long-range, but more affordable, ISR drones like the Flexrotor commercial drone.
  • Ground-based, persistent, all-weather ISR that can be inserted from range and operate undetected near a Chinese facility.
  • Large numbers of autonomous, GPS-independent drones as substitutes for current aviation capabilities.
  • A Rapid Dragon-like capability to enable long-range strikes.
  • A Starlink-like communications network to provide high-speed communications for widely dispersed units.
  • Access to naval and commercial shipping to deploy and operate in target areas.
  • Missile/rocket batteries trained to operate from commercial or amphibious ships.
  • Task forces consisting of infantry and light helicopters trained to seize commercial ships while operating from non-doctrinal platforms.
  • Task forces trained to fight in complex urban and port environments to execute the final stage of clearing Chinese overseas bases and ports.
  • Offensive mine warfare capabilities to close certain passages and compensate for shortages in other capabilities.
  • Major investments in mine-clearing capabilities.

Conclusion

This paper aimed to examine low-probability but potentially high-impact ways China could exploit its growing global network of ports. Defeating these Chinese operations would strain the capacity of US joint forces but would not require expensive new capabilities. As noted, by focusing on relatively inexpensive drones, commercial shipping, and containerized weapons, US forces can position themselves to neutralize Chinese actions at overseas ports. While drones represent a minor part of the United States’ current force structure, the Russo-Ukrainian War has dramatically illustrated their increasing value to the Joint Force. Even at its usual slow pace, the Department of Defense should be able to rapidly field large numbers of autonomous drones and loitering munitions.

Finally, preparing to counter these Chinese actions will require planning with allies, training for blockade and port seizure operations, and integrating the new capabilities into operational forces. These are not expensive options, but they are necessary if the Joint Force is to be ready at the onset of war.

About the author

T. X. Hammes is a distinguished research fellow at the Center for Strategic Research, National Defense University. The views expressed here are his own and do not reflect the views of the Department of Defense or the National Defense University.

Related content

Explore the program

Forward Defense, housed within the Scowcroft Center for Strategy and Security, generates ideas and connects stakeholders in the defense ecosystem to promote an enduring military advantage for the United States, its allies, and partners. Our work identifies the defense strategies, capabilities, and resources the United States needs to deter and, if necessary, prevail in future conflict.

1    DOD Dictionary of Military and Associated Terms (Washington, DC: Department of Defense, March 2017), https://www.tradoc.army.mil/wp-content/uploads/2020/10/AD1029823-DOD-Dictionary-of-Military-and-Associated-Terms-2017.pdf.
2    Williamson Murray, The Dark Path: The Structure of War and the Rise of the West (New Haven, CT: Yale University Press, 2024), 7.
3    Wilson Beaver and Jim Fein, “The U.S. Needs More Munitions To Deter China,” Heritage Foundation, December 29, 2023, https://www.heritage.org/defense/commentary/the-us-needs-more-munitions-deter-china.
4    Andrew F. Krepinevich, Jr., Protracted Great-Power War: A Preliminary Assessment, Center for New American Security, February 5, 2020, 1, https://www.cnas.org/publications/reports/protracted-great-power-war.
5    Ely Ratner, Geostrategic and Military Drivers and Implications of the Belt and Road Initiative, Council on Foreign Relations, January 25, 2018, https://www.cfr.org/report/geostrategic-and-military-drivers-and-implications-belt-and-road-initiative.
6    Zongyuan Zoe Liu, “Tracking China’s Control of Overseas Ports,” Council on Foreign Relations, updated August 26, 2024, https://www.cfr.org/tracker/china-overseas-ports.
7    “How Ukraine uses cheap AI-guided drones to deadly effect against Russia,” Economist, December 2, 2024, https://www.economist.com/europe/2024/12/02/how-ukraine-uses-cheap-ai-guided-drones-to-deadly-effect-against-russia.
8    Olena Harmash, “Ukraine ramps up arms production, can produce 4 million drones a year, Zelenskiy says,” Reuters, October 2, 2024, https://www.reuters.com/world/europe/ukraine-ramps-up-arms-production-can-produce-4-million-drones-year-zelenskiy-2024-10-02/.
9    Christina L. Garafola, Stephen Watts, and Kristin J. Leuschner, China’s Global Basing Ambitions: Defense Implications for the United States, RAND Arroyo Center, December 8, 2022, https://www.rand.org/pubs/research_reports/RRA1496-1.html.
10    Aadil Brar, “Chinese Warships Permanently Deployed at New Overseas Naval Base,” Newsweek, April 26, 2024, https://www.newsweek.com/china-cambodia-ream-new-permanent-naval-base-1894012.
11    Liz Sly and Julia Ledur, “China has acquired a global network of strategically vital ports,” Washington Post, November 6, 2023, https://www.washingtonpost.com/world/interactive/2023/china-ports-trade-military-navy/.
12    Garafola, Watts, and Leuschner, China’s Global Basing Ambitions, 11.
13    Isaac B. Kardon and Wendy Leutert, “Pier Competitor: China’s Power Position in Global Ports,” International Security 46, no. 4 (2022): 10, https://doi.org/10.1162/isec_a_00433.
14    Kardon and Leutert, “Pier Competitor.”
15    Navya Mudunuri, “The Malacca Dilemma and Chinese Ambitions: Two Sides of a Coin,” Diplomatist, July 7, 2020, https://diplomatist.com/2020/07/07/the-malacca-dilemma-and-chinese-ambitions-two-sides-of-a-coin/.
16    Ji Siqi, “What is the China-Europe Railway Express, and how much pressure is it under from the Ukraine crisis?” South China Morning Post, March 6, 2022, https://www.scmp.com/economy/global-economy/article/3169239/what-china-europe-railway-express-and-how-much-pressure-it.
17    “China Container Port Throughput,” CEIC, last updated December 2021, https://www.ceicdata.com/en/indicator/china/container-port-throughput.
18    “Russian Railways predicted a four-fold increase in container transit,” ERAI, March 28, 2023, archived at Internet Archive, November 2, 2024, https://web.archive.org/web/20241102153525/https://index1520.com/en/analytics/rzhd-sprognozirovali-rost-tranzita-konteynerov-v-chetyre-raza/.
19    “The Kazakh-Chinese border remains an obstacle for rail traffic,” RailFreight.com, September 26, 2024, https://www.railfreight.com/beltandroad/2024/09/26/the-kazakh-chinese-border-remains-an-obstacle-for-rail-traffic/.
20    Shan Wu Su, “China’s Rail Diplomacy in Southeast Asia,” Asia-Pacific Journal, September 22, 2024, https://apjjf.org/2024/9/wu.
21    Umair Jamal, “China-Pakistan Ties Steam Ahead With Proposed Rail Project,” Diplomat, May 3, 2023, https://thediplomat.com/2023/05/sino-pakistani-ties-steam-ahead-with-proposed-rail-project/.
22    “China Begins Surveys for Railway on Myanmar’s Indian Ocean,” Irrawaddy, April 18, 2024, https://www.irrawaddy.com/news/burma/china-begins-surveys-for-railway-on-myanmars-indian-ocean.html.
23    C. Textor, “Primary energy consumption in China from 2019 to 2022, by fuel,” Statista, January 24, 2024, https://www.statista.com/statistics/265612/primary-energy-consumption-in-china-by-fuel-type-in-oil-equivalent/.
24    Avery Chen, “China’s coal imports headed for record year in 2023,” S&P Global, June 20, 2023, https://www.spglobal.com/marketintelligence/en/news-insights/latest-news-headlines/china-s-coal-imports-headed-for-record-year-in-2023-76185032.
25    Ariel Cohen, “China’s Energy Vulnerabilities Drive Xi’s Policies,” Forbes, October 19, 2022, https://www.forbes.com/sites/arielcohen/2022/10/19/chinas-energy-vulnerabilities-drive-xis-policies/.
27    Gabriel Collins, “A Maritime Oil Blockade Against China—Tactically Tempting but Strategically Flawed,” Naval War College Review 71, no. 2 (Spring), https://digital-commons.usnwc.edu/cgi/viewcontent.cgi?article=1735&context=nwc-review.
28    “Why is Xi Jinping building?”
29    “China,” U.S Energy Information Administration, updated November 14, 2023, https://www.eia.gov/international/analysis/country/CHN.
30    Zongyuan Zoe Liu, “China Increasingly Relies on Imported Food. That’s a Problem,” Council on Foreign Relations, January 25, 2023, https://www.cfr.org/article/china-increasingly-relies-imported-food-thats-problem.
31    Matteo Cavallito, “China launches a new initiative against soil pollution,” Re Soil Foundation, December 1, 2022, https://resoilfoundation.org/en/environment/china-soil-pollution.
32    Claudio O. Delang, “The consequences of soil degradation in China: a review,” GeoScape 12, no. 2 (December 2018): 92–103, DOI:10.2478/geosc-2018-0010.
33    Liu, “China Increasingly Relies on Imported Food.”
34    “Why is Xi Jinping building?”
35    “Could economic indicators give an early warning of a war over Taiwan?” Economist, July 27, 2023, https://www.economist.com/china/2023/07/27/could-economic-indicators-signal-chinas-intent-to-go-to-war.
36    Henry Storey, “Water scarcity challenges China’s development model,” Interpreter, September 29, 2022, https://www.lowyinstitute.org/the-interpreter/water-scarcity-challenges-china-s-development-model.
37    “China Imports of Non-food Raw Materials,” Trading Economics, last updated February 2024, https://tradingeconomics.com/china/imports-of-non-food-raw-materials.
38    Clyde Russell, “China’s iron ore imports may hold up despite gloomy economy,” Reuters, August 15, 2023, https://www.reuters.com/markets/commodities/chinas-iron-ore-imports-may-hold-up-despite-gloomy-economy-2023-08-15.
39    C. Textor, “Production of iron ore in China from 2010 to 2022,” Statista, February 9, 2024, https://www.statista.com/statistics/307473/china-iron-ore-production/.
40    GlobalData, “Copper production in China and major projects,” Mining Technology, updated August 23, 2024, June 28, 2023, https://www.mining-technology.com/data-insights/copper-in-china/?cf-view.
41    “Copper ores and concentrates | Imports and Exports | 2022,” TrendEconomy, January 28, 2024, https://trendeconomy.com/data/commodity_h2/2603.
42    Wenyi Zhang, “Ship tonnage in orderbook of Chinese shipbuilding industry 2014-2021,” Statista, December 20, 2024, https://www.statista.com/statistics/1064122/china-tonnage-in-orderbook-of-shipbuilding-industry/.
43    “Trade (% of GDP) – China,” World Bank Group, accessed October 30, 2024, https://data.worldbank.org/indicator/NE.TRD.GNFS.ZS?locations=CN.
44    Kardon and Leutert, “Pier Competitor.”
45    David Wheelock, “How Bad Was the Great Depression? Gauging the Economic Impact,” Federal Reserve Bank of St. Louis, video, July 11, 2013, https://www.stlouisfed.org/the-great-depression/curriculum/economic-episodes-in-american-history-part-3.
46    David C. Gompert, Astrid Stuth Cevallos, and Cristina L. Garafola, War with China: Thinking Through the Unthinkable, RAND, 2016, https://www.rand.org/content/dam/rand/pubs/research_reports/RR1100/RR1140/RAND_RR1140.pdf.
47    Joel Wuthnow, System Overload: Can China’s Military Be Distracted in a War over Taiwan? in China Strategic Perspectives, no. 15, ed. Phillip C. Saunders (Washington, DC: National Defense University Press, June 2020) https://inss.ndu.edu/Media/News/Article/2232448/system-overload-can-chinas-military-be-distracted-in-a-war-over-taiwan/.
48    USCC Staff, “LOGILINK: Risks from China’s Promotion of a Global Logistics Management Platform,” US-China Economic and Security Review Commission, September 20, 2022, https://www.uscc.gov/sites/default/files/2022-09/LOGINK-Risks_from_Chinas_Promotion_of_a_Global_Logistics_Management_Platform.pdf.
49    John Konrad, “U.S. Sounds Alarm on China’s Leading Ship Logistics Software LOGINK,” gCaptain, August 24, 2023, https://gcaptain.com/u-s-sounds-alarm-on-chinas-ship-logistics-software-logink/.
50    Euan Graham, “China pressures Singapore with seizure of military hardware,” Lowy Institute, December 6, 2016, https://www.lowyinstitute.org/publications/china-pressures-singapore-seizure-military-hardware.
51    Isaac B. Kardon, “Washington Tackles a New National Security Threat: Chinese-Made Cranes,” Carnegie Endowment for International Peace, February 28, 2024, https://carnegieendowment.org/2024/02/28/washington-tackles-new-national-security-threat-chinese-made-cranes-pub-91843.
52    “#36 – China’s Container-launched Cruise Missiles,” Vermilion China, February 23, 2023, https://www.vermilionchina.com/p/36-chinas-container-launched-cruise.
54    Rhyannon Bartlett-Imadegawa, “China preparing for ‘protracted’ war, says think tank,” Nikkei Asia, February 14, 2024, https://asia.nikkei.com/Politics/Defense/China-preparing-for-protracted-war-says-think-tank.
55    “#36 – China’s Container-launched.”
56    Phillip C. Saunders, Beyond Borders: PLA Command and Control of Overseas Operations, Strategic Forum no. 306 (July 2020), Institute for National Strategic Studies, National Defense University, https://inss.ndu.edu/Portals/68/Documents/stratforum/SF-306.pdf.
57    Tate Nurkin, et.al., China’s Remote Sensing, OTH Intelligence Group LLC, December 2024, https://www.uscc.gov/sites/default/files/2024-12/Chinas_Remote_Sensing.pdf.
58    Shunsuke Tabeta, “China to launch 26,000 satellites, vying with U.S. for space power,” Nikkei Asia, January 10, 2024, https://asia.nikkei.com/Business/Aerospace-Defense-Industries/China-to-launch-26-000-satellites-vying-with-U.S.-for-space-power.
59    Andrew Jones, “China launches first high orbit internet satellite,” Space News, February 29, 2024, https://spacenews.com/china-launches-first-high-orbit-internet-satellite/.
60    Clayton Swope, “No Place to Hide: A Look into China’s Geosynchronous Surveillance Capabilities,” Center for Strategic and International Studies, January 19, 2024, https://www.csis.org/analysis/no-place-hide-look-chinas-geosynchronous-surveillance-capabilities.
61    Swope, “No Place to Hide.”
62    Dean Cheng, “Why Xi created a new Information Support Force, and why now,” Breaking Defense, April 29, 2024, https://breakingdefense.com/2024/04/why-xi-created-a-new-information-support-force-and-why-now/.
63    Jan Tegler, “Navy Mine Warfare Teeters Between Present, Future,” National Defense, January 17, 2023, https://www.nationaldefensemagazine.org/articles/2023/1/17/navy-mine-warfare-teeters-between-present-future.
64    Quick Look Report: Chinese Undersea Warfare: Development, Capabilities, Trends, China Maritime Studies Institute, Center for Naval Warfare Studies, US Naval War College, May 2023, https://www.andrewerickson.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/05/Naval-War-College_China-Maritime-Studies-Institute_CHINESE-UNDERSEA-WARFARE_CONFERENCE-SUMMARY_20230505.pdf.
65    Elizabeth White, “Sea mines are cheap and low-tech, but they could stop world trade in its tracks,” Strategist, March 6, 2020, https://www.aspistrategist.org.au/sea-mines-are-cheap-and-low-tech-but-they-could-stop-world-trade-in-its-tracks/.
66    Leo Chiu, “Ukraine’s Drone Strike Radius Now 1,800 km – What’s on Kyiv’s Target List?” Kyiv Post, September 9, 2024, https://www.kyivpost.com/post/38716.
67    “Airshow China 2022: CASC unveils FH-97A loyal wingman autonomous drone,” Global Defense News, November 9, 2022, https://armyrecognition.com/news/aerospace-news/2022/airshow-china-2022-casc-unveils-fh-97a-loyal-wingman-autonomous-drone.
68    Daria Dmytriieva, “China unveiled a new kamikaze drone: Improved copy of Iranian Shahed,” RBC-Ukraine, August 17, 2023, https://newsukraine.rbc.ua/news/china-unveiled-a-new-kamikaze-drone-improved-1692269951.html.
69    Ritu Sharma, “‘Catching-Up’ With China, US Pushes Its 6th-Gen Combat Drone Program; Set To Award Contract For 1st Batch Of CCA,” Eurasian Times, February 14, 2024, https://www.eurasiantimes.com/us-accelerates-combat-drone-program-to-catch/.
70    Colin Demarest, “AI-enabled Valkyrie drone teases future of US Air Force fleet,” Defense News, January 18, 2024, https://www.defensenews.com/unmanned/uas/2024/01/18/ai-enabled-valkyrie-drone-teases-future-of-us-air-force-fleet/.
71    Claudia Chiappa, “Russia to build naval base in breakaway Georgia region,” Politico, October 5, 2023, https://www.politico.eu/article/vladimir-putin-russia-black-sea-abkhazia-plans-to-build-naval-base-in-georgias-breakaway-region-as-it-pulls-vessels-from-sevastopol-base/.
72    Quick Look Report.
73    Joshua Arostegui, China Maritime Report No. 32: The PCH191 Modular Long-Range Rocket Launcher: Reshaping the PLA Army’s Role in a Cross-Strait Campaign, China Maritime Studies Institute, US Naval War College, November 3, 2023, https://digital-commons.usnwc.edu/cgi/viewcontent.cgi?article=1031&context=cmsi-maritime-reports.
74    “Missiles of China,” Missile Threat, CSIS Missile Defense Project, Center for Strategic and International Studies, updated April 12, 2021, https://missilethreat.csis.org/country/china/.
75    Zuzanna Gwadera, “Intelligence leak reveals China’s successful test of a new hypersonic missile,” International Institute of Strategic Studies, May 18, 2023, https://www.iiss.org/en/online-analysis/online-analysis/2023/05/intelligence-leak-reveals-chinas-successful-test-of-a-new-hypersonic-missile/.
76    Maximillian K. Bremer and Kelly A. Grieco, “Air denial: The dangerous illusion of decisive air superiority,” Atlantic Council, August 30, 2022, https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/content-series/airpower-after-ukraine/air-denial-the-dangerous-illusion-of-decisive-air-superiority/.
77    Office of the Secretary of Defense, Military and Security Developments Involving the People’s Republic of China 2023, Annual Report to Congress, US Department of Defense, October 19, 2023, https://media.defense.gov/2023/Oct/19/2003323409/-1/-1/1/2023-MILITARY-AND-SECURITY-DEVELOPMENTS-INVOLVING-THE-PEOPLES-REPUBLIC-OF-CHINA.PDF.
78    Office of the Secretary of Defense, Military and Security Developments, 64.
79    US Army, “HQ-9 (Hong Qi 9) Chinese 8×8 Long-Range Air Defense Missile System,” Operational Data Integration Network (ODIN), accessed October 30, 2024, https://odin.tradoc.army.mil/WEG/Asset/HQ-9.
80    “HQ-22 / FK-3 – Surface-to-Air Missile,” Global Security, accessed X, https://www.globalsecurity.org/military/world/china/hq-22.htm.
81    “China’s deep-water fishing fleet is the world’s most rapacious,” Economist, December 8, 2022, https://www.economist.com/international/2022/12/08/chinas-deep-water-fishing-fleet-is-the-worlds-most-rapacious; Xioashan Xue, “As China Expands Its Fleets, US Analysts Call for Catch-up Efforts,” Voice of America, September 13, 2022, https://www.voanews.com/a/as-china-expands-its-fleets-us-analysts-call-for-catch-up-efforts-/6746352.html.
82    Kardon and Leutert, “Pier Competitor.”
83    Matthew P. Funaiole et al., “China Accelerates Construction of ‘Ro-Ro’ Vessels, with Potential Military Implications,” China Power, Center for Strategic and International Studies, October 11, 2023, https://chinapower.csis.org/analysis/china-construct-ro-ro-vessels-military-implications/.
84    J. Michael Dahm, China Maritime Report No. 25: More Chinese Ferry Tales: China’s Use of Civilian Shipping in Military Activities, 2021-2022, China Maritime Studies Institute, US Naval War College, January 2023, https://digital-commons.usnwc.edu/cgi/viewcontent.cgi?article=1024&context=cmsi-maritime-reports.
85    John Chen and Joel Wuthnow, China Maritime Report No. 18:Chinese Special Operations in a Large-Scale Island Landing, China Maritime Studies Institute, US Naval War College, January 2022, https://digital-commons.usnwc.edu/cgi/viewcontent.cgi?article=1017&context=cmsi-maritime-reports.
86    Jeff Schogol, “China is expanding its marine corps, but how capable is it?” Task & Purpose, January 25, 2024, https://taskandpurpose.com/news/china-marine-corps/.
87    Naval Doctrine Publication 1: Naval Warfare (Washington, DC: Department of the Navy, April 2020), https://cimsec.org/wp-content/uploads/2020/08/NDP1_April2020.pdf.
88    Captain R. Robinson Harris et al., “Converting Merchant Ships to Missile Ships for the Win,” Proceedings 145/1/1,391 (January 2019), US Naval Institute, https://www.usni.org/magazines/proceedings/2019/january/converting-merchant-ships-missile-ships-win.
89    Max Hauptman, “Air Force shows off its Rapid Dragon cruise missile system on China’s doorstep,” Task and Purpose, July 26, 2023, https://taskandpurpose.com/news/air-force-rapid-dragon-mobility-guardian-2023/.
90    “Rapid Dragon,” Air Force Research Laboratory, accessed X, https://afresearchlab.com/technology/rapid-dragon.
91    Mark L. Evans, “Wright III (T-AVB-3),” Naval History and Heritage Command, updated October 4, 2024, https://www.history.navy.mil/content/history/nhhc/research/histories/ship-histories/danfs/w/wright-iii–t-avb-3-.html.
92    Fiona S. Cunningham, “The Maritime Rung on the Escalation Ladder: Naval Blockades in a US-China Conflict,” Security Studies 29, no. 4 (2020): 730–768 https://doi.org/10.1080/09636412.2020.1811462.

The post China’s exploitation of overseas ports and bases appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>
To win the AI race, the US needs an all-of-the-above energy strategy https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/in-depth-research-reports/issue-brief/to-win-the-ai-race-the-us-needs-an-all-of-the-above-energy-strategy/ Fri, 21 Mar 2025 15:11:58 +0000 https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/?p=833987 To ensure US AI leadership, the United States must harness all forms of energy, allow a level playing field, and remove red tape constraining the buildout of critical enablers, especially transmission lines and grid enhancing technologies.

The post To win the AI race, the US needs an all-of-the-above energy strategy appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>
The United States faces a “Sputnik moment.” Chinese firm DeepSeek claims its artificial intelligence (AI) model has achieved near-parity with US models in terms of functionality—at lower cost and energy use. While many AI analysts are skeptical of some portions of DeepSeek’s claims, particularly surrounding cost nuances, or even its ability to lower energy consumption, virtually all acknowledge that DeepSeek has made a serious technical achievement. DeepSeek’s technical breakthrough will intensify the US-China AI race, with significant economic and military stakes. While acknowledging uncertain AI-related energy demand, the United States must build substantial amounts of new electricity generation and transmission to win the AI competition with China.

To ensure US AI leadership, the United States must harness all forms of energy–while also promoting energy efficiency—allow a level playing field, and remove red tape constraining the buildout of critical enablers, especially transmission lines and grid enhancing technologies. A “some of the above” energy approach could force the United States to compromise on not only AI leadership, but also affordable electricity and other economic priorities.

The competition with China in artificial intelligence may be the defining national security challenge of our time. While AI’s exact electricity needs remain uncertain, substantial power infrastructure expansion and efficiency improvements are needed. By building new generation capacity, including advanced energy technologies, enhancing transmission, and optimizing power consumption, the United States can maintain its competitive edge in AI development. If the United States adopts a “some of the above” approach to energy, however, it will be waging the century’s most important technological fight with China with one hand tied behind its back.

About the author

Related content

Stay connected

Keep up with the latest from the Global Energy Center!

Sign up below for program highlights, event invites, and analysis on the most pressing energy issues.

Explore the program

The Global Energy Center develops and promotes pragmatic and nonpartisan policy solutions designed to advance global energy security, enhance economic opportunity, and accelerate pathways to net-zero emissions.

The post To win the AI race, the US needs an all-of-the-above energy strategy appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>
A lifeline under threat: Why the Suez Canal’s security matters for the world https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/in-depth-research-reports/issue-brief/a-lifeline-under-threat-why-the-suez-canals-security-matters-for-the-world/ Thu, 20 Mar 2025 21:15:27 +0000 https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/?p=833626 The Suez Canal is both a maritime choke point and vital waterway for global trade and energy security. Given its strategic role as the fastest sea route between Asia and Europe, any disruption to the Suez Canal can have outsized impacts on global commerce and energy markets, as have occurred in recent years.

The post A lifeline under threat: Why the Suez Canal’s security matters for the world appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>
Introduction

The Suez Canal is both a maritime choke point and a vital waterway for global trade and energy security. The 193-kilometer canal connecting the Red Sea and the Mediterranean:

  • Attracts about 12 percent to 15 percent of worldwide trade and about 30 percent of global container traffic—with more than $1 trillion in goods transiting annually.
  • Includes roughly 9 percent of global seaborne oil flows (about 9.2 million barrels per day in early 2023) and around 8 percent of liquefied natural gas (LNG) volumes.
  • Averages fifty to sixty ships transiting the canal daily, carrying an estimated $3 billion to $9 billion in cargo value.
  • Generates toll revenue—a major economic lifeline for Egypt—with a record of $9.4 billion set in 2022–2023.

Given its strategic role as the fastest sea route between Asia and Europe, any disruption to the Suez Canal can have outsized impacts on global commerce and energy markets, which have occurred in recent years. Minimizing such disruption is an international concern. It requires diplomacy and collaboration to bolster Suez area security and capacity building to protect trade flows and supply chains, reduce shipping and insurance costs, and foster a stable supply of energy.  

Historical conflicts and impacts

The canal’s strategic importance has repeatedly made it a flash point during geopolitical conflicts. In late 1956, after Egypt’s President Gamal Abdel Nasser nationalized the canal, an invasion by Britain, France, and Israel led to the Suez Crisis, during which the canal was closed from October 1956 until March 1957. Though the closure lasted only about five months, it disrupted shipping significantly; hundreds of vessels were forced to reroute around the Cape of Good Hope, increasing transit times and costs. The crisis underscored the canal’s leverage in Cold War geopolitics and ended with Egypt retaining control, but only after international pressure forced invading forces to withdraw.

A decade later, as the Six-Day War began in June 1967, Egypt closed the Suez Canal again as it became the frontline between Egyptian and Israeli forces. This time the waterway remained shut for eight years—the 1967–1975 closure—a disruption unprecedented in the canal’s history. At the time, a large share of Europe’s oil imports depended on the Suez, so the closure forced a massive diversion of trade. Global shippers again opted for the long alternate route around Africa, adding roughly 8,000 to 10,000 kilometers to voyages. This led to higher freight costs and transit delays on a global scale. The prolonged closure spurred structural changes in the industry: Shipping companies turned to larger “supertanker” oil vessels capable of economizing on the longer route around the Cape of Good Hope, and Egypt, in turn, built the Sumed pipeline (completed in 1977) to transfer oil from the Red Sea to the Mediterranean as a substitute link. The canal finally reopened in June 1975 after extensive mine-clearing and salvage operations, and plans got underway to expand the canal. By then, global trade patterns had partly adjusted—for example, new oil fields outside the Middle East and alternate routes had reduced reliance on the Suez route—but the reopening restored a critical artery for Europe-Asia trade.

Figure 1: The extended economic impact of incidents in the Suez Canal

EventPeriodKey economic impacts
Suez Crisis1956-1957-Canal closed for about five months.
Tens of millions of pounds were lost from the UK foreign   exchange reserves.
1.5-percent depreciation of pound sterling vs. US dollar.
-About 33-percent increase in global oil prices.
Arab-Israeli wars1967–1975$250-million annual loss for Egypt in transit fees.
-The canal’s closure cost the world about $1.7 billion in lost trade and higher shipping expenses
6,000 miles added to Europe-Asia voyages.
-Significant increases in supertanker usage for oil transport due to Suez closure.
Iran-Iraq War1980–1988• More than 450 ships attacked.
50-percent rise in Persian Gulf shipping insurance rates (1984).
At the onset of the war, Iraq and Iran halted their oil exports through the Gulf, effectively removing 2.7 million barrels of oil a day from world markets.
30 percent reduction in Suez Canal traffic.
Somali piracy2005–2012 Estimated costs of $6.6 billion in 2011.
10-percent decrease in Suez Canal ship traffic
$3.5 million per year additional fuel costs per rerouted ship.
Ever Given blockage2021 0.3-percent of merchandise trade affected in that year.
$14 million to $15 million in daily loss of canal revenue.
$400 million tons of cargo per hour.
Overall losses totaled $88.79 million, including ship, environmental, and inventory costs.

In the decades since 1975, the Suez Canal has largely stayed open amid regional conflicts, though security has been tested at times. During the 1973 War, the canal zone itself was a battleground, delaying its clearance and reopening until a peace accord was in place. More recently, unrest during the Arab Spring and insurgency in Egypt’s Sinai Peninsula raised concerns. In 2013, for instance, militants attempted a terrorist attack on a passing container ship (the COSCO Asia) in the canal, firing rockets in an effort to disrupt traffic. Egyptian forces foiled that attack. No damage was done and transits continued uninterrupted—but the incident highlighted persistent security concerns. Overall, historical episodes show that geopolitical conflicts can rapidly threaten the Suez Canal’s operability, leading to costly rerouting of ships and prompting defensive measures to safeguard this vital corridor.

Recent Middle East conflicts and disruptions

Ongoing conflicts in the Middle East have recently impacted the Suez route, including the Red Sea attacks (2023–2024). In late 2023, the Israel-Gaza war triggered a wave of attacks on commercial shipping in the Red Sea/Bab el-Mandeb region by Yemen’s Houthi rebel movement. The Iran-aligned Houthis openly portrayed their attacks as retaliation in solidarity with Palestinians amid the Gaza war. Starting in November 2023, they launched scores of missile and drone strikes targeting ships bound to or from the Suez Canal, and even seized a cargo vessel in the southern Red Sea. Houthi militants claimed to have attacked more than 130 ships in the Red Sea and Gulf of Aden after the war in Gaza erupted in October 2023. This campaign saw several merchant ships damaged—and some crew members injured or killed—by anti-ship missiles. By mid-2024, the assaults had escalated to the point of sinking at least one commercial vessel and igniting others, dramatically underscoring the threat to shipping.

The immediate impact of these attacks was a widespread reassessment of the safety of the Suez route. Many global shipping companies reacted by diverting or suspending routes that would normally transit the Red Sea and Suez Canal. Between mid-December 2023 and late December, at least thirteen major shipping operators, including the world’s largest container lines, announced they were indefinitely suspending voyages via the Red Sea or to Israeli ports. Shipping disruptions included MSC (the world’s biggest container carrier) and others stating they would temporarily avoid the Suez Canal path due to the security risks. The Suez Canal Authority (SCA) reported that from November 19 to mid-December, fifty-five ships had rerouted around the Cape of Good Hope instead of using the Suez Canal, although more than 2,100 ships still transited the canal in that period. This indicated that while a core of traffic continued, a growing number of shipowners chose the longer but safer route around Africa, requiring additional capacity to provide key services for the longer route and ultimately increasing costs and travel time. Notably, certain vessel categories virtually vanished from the canal at the height of the crisis. By June 2024, Suez transits of dry bulk cargo ships were down nearly 80 percent on a year-to-year basis as operators rerouted grain and ore shipments to avoid the Red Sea stress zone. Major energy companies were also alarmed. In December 2023, oil major BP paused all tanker transits via the Red Sea until the situation stabilized.

The Red Sea attacks prompted unprecedented international responses to protect the Suez waterway’s approaches. The United States, European nations, and regional allies stepped up naval patrols and even carried out strikes on Houthi launch sites to deter attacks. By late 2023, a US-led coalition (including forces from the United Kingdom, France, and other nations) was conducting retaliatory strikes against Houthi missile and drone infrastructure in Yemen. Several nations moved to escort shipping directly: China’s navy, for example, began providing armed escort to Chinese commercial vessels through the Red Sea starting in January 2024. Despite these efforts, sporadic attacks continued into late 2024, creating a climate of high alert. Only after a tentative ceasefire in Gaza, and amid international diplomatic pressure, did the Houthi group ease its campaign. In early 2025, the Houthis announced a halt to attacks on vessels not linked to Israel, leading the Suez Canal Authority to urge shipping lines to return to their normal routes amid signs of stabilizing conditions. By February 2025, no new attacks had been reported for several weeks, but these episodes served as a stark reminder of how quickly a regional conflict can threaten the security of a global trade artery.

Impact on global trade and economy

The disruptions arising from conflict around the Suez Canal have had immediate and far-reaching economic effects, including on trade flows and supply chains. Vessel attacks and rerouting in the Red Sea effectively throttled Suez traffic in late 2023 and early 2024. In fact, the volume of trade passing through the Suez Canal dropped by about 50 percent in the first two months of 2024 compared with a year earlier. Dozens of ships that would normally use the canal instead took the long way around Africa, causing the volume of goods shipped via the Cape of Good Hope to surge by about 74 percent as shippers improvised alternate paths. This detour adds roughly ten or more days to Asia-Europe voyages on average, straining just-in-time supply chains. Companies that rely on fast turnarounds—from electronics manufacturers to retail suppliers—suddenly needed to cope with extended transit times and uncertain delivery schedules. By January 2024, port call data showed ripple effects: Weekly ship transits through the Bab al-Mandab Strait, for example, plunged to roughly nineteen per day, down from a normal level of seventy or more in prior months. Such a sharp decline in Red Sea traffic implies a significant temporary loss of global shipping capacity, as a large share of the world’s container and bulk fleet was pushed onto longer routes.

One immediate consequence of these longer routes and convoy delays was a spike in transportation costs. Industry analysts estimated that the effective global shipping capacity shrank by about 20 percent during the crisis (as ships spent far longer in transit). This capacity crunch drove up freight rates on major trade lanes. Container spot rates for Asia-Europe routes, which are heavily dependent on Suez, began rising as carriers needed to deploy more vessels to maintain schedules and as available space tightened. Rerouted ships also experienced congestion in alternate ports (e.g., in South Africa and Southeast Asia) as traffic patterns shifted. All these factors increased operating costs for carriers, which were passed on to shippers–and ultimately to consumers. Studies by the International Monetary Fund have noted that if such disruptions persist, they can put upward pressure on inflation in affected economies due to costlier imports and shipping delays. European importers, for instance, faced both longer lead times and surcharges on freight in late 2023, complicating inventory management and production schedules.

Shipping containers pass through the Suez Canal in Suez, Egypt February 15, 2022. Picture taken February 15, 2022. REUTERS/Mohamed Abd El Ghany

The security situation also led to soaring marine insurance costs for voyages via the Red Sea and Suez. Insurers designated much of the Red Sea as a high-risk war zone, imposing additional premiums on hull and cargo coverage. War-risk insurance premiums—which had previously been a nominal 0.05-0.1 percent of a vessel’s value—surged to as high as 1-2 percent of ship value per transit in late 2023. Likewise, cargo insurance rates for shipments through the region spiked. Policies that typically cost about 0.6 percent of cargo value climbed to roughly 2 percent in the aftermath of the attacks. These hikes meant that a large container ship (or its cargo) faced millions of dollars in extra insurance costs for a single Suez passage. Such expenses made the Suez route financially unviable for many vessels at the height of the conflict—further incentivizing detours around Africa despite the longer journey. Even as of early 2024, some insurers remained reluctant to cover Red Sea transits at all, requiring shippers to seek specialized coverage or government guarantees. The net effect was sharply increased operating costs for any ships brave enough to continue through the canal during the hostilities, adding to the economic toll.

Geopolitical strife affecting the Suez area also reverberates through energy markets and influences trade patterns. The canal and its associated pipelines (like Sumed) are key conduits for Middle Eastern oil and LNG exports to Europe. Disruptions here can contribute to oil price volatility: For example, news of the Red Sea attacks in late 2023 helped push Brent crude oil prices up as markets priced in potential supply delays. During the recent conflict, southbound oil transit through the Suez fell by half, from about 7.9 million barrels per day (bpd) in 2023 to only about 3.9 million bpd in 2024, as many tankers rerouted or deferred voyages. Some mitigation came from rebalancing flows. Notably, Russia shifted large volumes of crude to Asia via the Suez Canal (after the European Union imposed sanctions), which kept certain Suez oil traffic robust despite the turmoil. However, other petroleum streams were heavily disrupted. Virtually all jet fuel shipments to Europe stopped using the Suez route once the attacks began (only about 2 percent of global seaborne jet fuel now transits the canal). Instead, tankers opted to go around the cape or use alternative pipelines. These shifts illustrate a broader point: extended conflicts can trigger higher risk for an extended period. Certain cargoes might not immediately return to the Suez route even after tensions ease, especially if insurers and shippers perceive lingering risks. Additionally, the mass diversion of ships around Africa has an environmental cost—longer voyages mean higher fuel burn and emissions. It’s estimated that rerouted ships traveling 50-60 percent farther produced roughly 40 percent more carbon dioxide emissions per voyage than traveling via the Suez Canal, highlighting a climate impact alongside economic costs.

Conclusion and outlook

Ensuring canal security

The recent disruptions underscore that the Suez Canal’s strategic vulnerability is an international concern. Stability in the waterways connecting to the canal (e.g., the Red Sea, Bab el-Mandeb, and the Eastern Mediterranean) is critical for uninterrupted commerce. A key policy lesson is the importance of proactive security and diplomatic measures to protect this choke point. Egypt already maintains a robust military presence to secure the canal itself, but the Red Sea attacks revealed the need for a broader cooperative security framework—potentially involving regional states and global naval powersto ensure safe passage in surrounding seas. Going forward, multinational maritime patrols or convoy arrangements in the Red Sea could be considered during periods of high risk (such as past anti-piracy operations or the tanker convoys in the Persian Gulf during the 1980s).

Enhanced intelligence sharing and early-warning systems could help merchant fleets avoid danger. Diplomatically, addressing the root conflicts is paramount: a temporary ceasefire in the Israel-Palestine arena helped directly reduce attacks on shipping. International mediation in Yemen and dialogues with Iran are likewise crucial to prevent future flare-ups that threaten Suez traffic. Policy coordination, whether through the United Nations International Maritime Organization (IMO) or coalitions of concerned nations, will be needed to bolster the security of global shipping lanes in this region. Treaties and agreements, such as the UN Convention on the Law of the Sea (UNCLOS), provide a legal foundation for international collaboration in maritime security efforts. By adhering to these frameworks, countries can formulate joint strategies, share best practices, and coordinate response mechanisms to maritime insecurity.

Table 2: Examples of key collaborative maritime security initiatives

Collaborative maritime security initiatives
Combined Maritime Forces (CMF)Founded in 2001, the CMF is a multinational naval partnership aimed at promoting maritime security in the Gulf of Aden, the Arabian Sea, and the wider Indian Ocean region. Comprising more than thirty member nations, the CMF conducts operations to deter piracy, protect shipping lanes, and ensure maritime trade security. This collaborative approach has significantly reduced piracy incidents off the coast of Somalia, illustrating the effectiveness of pooled naval capabilities.
Operation AtalantaThe European Union launched Operation Atalanta in 2008 to combat piracy in the waters off the Horn of Africa. This mission involves deploying naval vessels from multiple European nations to protect shipping lanes, provide humanitarian aid, and support capacity-building efforts in regional maritime forces. By working collaboratively, participating countries have been able to enhance the security of vessels transiting high-risk areas, thus restoring confidence in maritime operations.
Djibouti Code of ConductThis regional agreement, initiated under the auspices of the IMO, aims to enhance cooperation among countries in the western Indian Ocean to combat piracy and armed robbery at sea. It encourages information sharing, capacity building, and collaboration in addressing security threats, effectively fostering a cooperative approach among countries to safeguard maritime trade in the region.

Other maritime routes are emerging, but they remain insufficient. Climate change is gradually opening the Northern Sea Route (NSR) along the Russian Arctic, which raises the prospect of an Asia-Europe sea route that circumvents the Suez Canal. However, Arctic routes are not yet commercially viable for mainstream shipping: seasonal ice, specialized vessel needs, and a lack of infrastructure pose significant challenges. In the foreseeable future, the NSR will remain a limited-use route for specific ships and seasons, rather than a full alternative to the Suez Canal.

Meanwhile, the Cape of Good Hope route will continue to be the primary backup when the Suez is impassable, despite its longer distance. This reality was underscored during the Red Sea crisis. When faced with danger, the shipping industry’s only immediate large-scale alternative was essentially to go around Africa. While effective as a stopgap, that solution carries significant economic, logistical, and environmental costs, reinforcing why maintaining the Suez’s accessibility is so crucial.

Strengthening the canal’s infrastructure resilience

There is a policy impetus to build infrastructure resilience into existing trade corridors. The Suez Canal itself has undergone upgrades: For example, the 2015 expansion created a second channel section to allow two-way traffic and reduce transit time. Further investments by Egypt aim to increase the canal’s capacity and enable it to handle even larger vessels. Additionally, ports and logistics hubs on alternative routes are being enhanced to handle diverted traffic during emergencies. Such investments, often with support from development banks, seek to alleviate bottlenecks when trade shifts unexpectedly due to conflict or crisis.

Investment in technological solutions, training, and capacity building

International cooperation in maritime security can also extend to technological advancements. Countries can work together to develop and deploy surveillance systems, maritime domain-awareness tools, and advanced communication networks to monitor shipping activities effectively. For example, the Automatic Identification System (AIS) allows vessels to broadcast their location in real time, helping authorities to track maritime traffic and respond to security threats proactively. Joint investments in such technologies can enhance situational awareness and risk assessment, ensuring swift and effective responses to potential emergencies.

Investment in international training programs for naval forces and coast guards can further bolster maritime security. Collaborative efforts such as joint exercises, workshops, and exchange programs can equip personnel with the skills and knowledge needed to respond effectively to maritime challenges. For instance, the US Navy’s Partnership for Peace Program promotes military-to-military cooperation and training among countries, enhancing their ability to manage maritime responsibilities and contingencies. This collaborative effort can be further developed.

Policymakers and industry leaders will need to collaboratively safeguard the Suez Canal’s continuity, through security cooperation and contingency planning, to ensure that geopolitical conflicts do not again choke off one of the world’s most important trade arteries. The recent disruptions serve as a call to action to reinforce the resilience of global supply chains against such shocks.

About the authors

Related content

The post A lifeline under threat: Why the Suez Canal’s security matters for the world appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>
Changing the conversation about religious freedom: An integral human development approach https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/in-depth-research-reports/report/changing-the-conversation-about-religious-freedom-an-integral-human-development-approach/ Mon, 17 Mar 2025 22:32:08 +0000 https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/?p=833502 Religious freedom is essential for human dignity and development. Persecution restricts minorities' access to healthcare, education, and jobs. Integral Human Development offers a holistic, inclusive approach, fostering dialogue and collaboration. To combat discrimination effectively, policymakers must move beyond protection and empower all individuals to contribute to society’s common good.

The post Changing the conversation about religious freedom: An integral human development approach appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>

Freedom of religion or belief is not a niche issue—it lies at the core of what it means to be human and how societies flourish. In that sense, persecution of religion and religious minorities is an injustice that hampers sustainable development and weakens political stability. Such discrimination not only infringes on the rights of millions to practice their faith but it also imposes severe socio-economic restrictions on religious minorities. It can limit access to healthcare (SDG 3), education (SDG 4), food (SDG 2) as well as clean water and sanitation (SDG 6). When religious minorities are forced into unsafe and low-paid economic sectors, their right to decent work is jeopardized (SDG 8), pushing many into poverty (SDG 1). 

Unfortunately, global efforts to protect and advocate for religious freedom remain largely ineffective. In some circles, the campaign for religious freedom is perceived as a partisan political tool, favoring certain groups while sidelining others. It is time to change the conversation. 

Integral human development—a holistic model of human flourishing rooted in the inherent dignity of each person and every person—offers a vision that resonates across many of the world’s religious, philosophical, and cultural traditions. It provides a strong conceptual foundations for building a global, religiously literate platform to re-engage religious and policy leaders on this critical policy issue.

Seen through the lens of integral human development, religious freedom appears not merely as “freedom from” persecution or discrimination but also as “freedom to” realize the common good of the society by giving voice to all of its members. This framework promotes interreligious and cross-cultural dialogue, placing efforts to combat persecution within a broader, multi-level collaboration between religious and secular actors. To develop effective policies against religious discrimination and persecution, this kind of comprehensive, inclusive approach that can foster true human flourishing is greatly needed.

About the authors

Fabio Petito is a professor of religion and international affairs at the University of Sussex and nonresident senior fellow for the Atlantic Council’s Freedom and Prosperity Center.

Scott Appleby is the Keough-Hesburgh Professor of Global Affairs at the Keough School of Global Affairs and research fellow of the Ansari Institute for Global Engagement with Religion at the University of Notre Dame.

Silvio Ferrari is professor emeritus of law and religion at the University of Milan and honorary president of the International Consortium for Law and Religion Studies.

Michael Driessen is professor of political science and international affairs at John Cabot University and director of the Rome Summer Seminars on Religion and Global Politics

Related content

Explore the program

The Freedom and Prosperity Center aims to increase the prosperity of the poor and marginalized in developing countries and to explore the nature of the relationship between freedom and prosperity in both developing and developed nations.

The post Changing the conversation about religious freedom: An integral human development approach appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>
The Three Seas Initiative stands at an inflection point https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/in-depth-research-reports/issue-brief/the-three-seas-initiative-stands-at-an-inflection-point/ Fri, 14 Mar 2025 13:00:00 +0000 https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/?p=831763 The Three Seas Initiative is preparing for a critical summit in Warsaw in 2025. What opportunities exist to ensure the Initiative can accomplish its goal of ensuring a Europe whole, free, secure, and at peace?

The post The Three Seas Initiative stands at an inflection point appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>
In 2016, twelve European Union (EU) member states launched the Three Seas Initiative (3SI) to accelerate the development of cross-border energy, transport, and digital infrastructure in the region between the Baltic, Adriatic, and Black Seas. This innovative effort, involving eleven EU members from Central and Eastern Europe as well as Austria, aims to leverage the power of private capital and the region’s economic potentials to address a trillion-dollar regional infrastructure shortfall that is largely an enduring legacy of the Soviet Union’s nearly five-decade domination of Central and Eastern Europe. The initiative envisions expanded and modernized infrastructural connectivity to accelerate regional economic growth, strengthen economic resilience, reinforce military security and, above all, complete the vision of a Europe that is undivided, secure, prosperous, and free.

The Three Seas initiative and its annual summits and business forums have become an established vehicle for regional engagement and collaboration. In 2023, Greece became the thirteenth state to join the initiative, adding significantly to the region’s geoeconomic weight, and Ukraine and Moldova became associate members. However, to fulfill its ambitions, the initiative must become a more institutionalized undertaking and refocus on its core objective of leveraging private capital to drive cross-border infrastructural development.

Rationale and objectives of the Three Seas

In 1989, Central and Eastern Europe emerged from the Cold War burdened with a dearth of national and regional infrastructure caused by decades of Soviet occupation. In contrast, post-World War II Western Europe embarked upon a historically unparalleled effort of reconstruction, development, and economic integration that placed significant emphasis on cross-border infrastructure. Today, Western Europe features a spiderweb-like lattice of cross-border highways, railroads, canals, pipelines, powerlines, and digital grids. This cross-border lattice has been a powerful driver of connectivity, economic growth and resilience, and military security—the latter including even a network of NATO energy pipelines and transport corridors intended to facilitate the rapid movement and sustainment of military forces against potential Soviet aggression.

Today, while much national and EU investment has expanded and modernized Central Europe’s cross-border infrastructure, the gap between this region and Western Europe remains significant. In 2020, the International Monetary Fund estimated this gap to be as much as 1.15 trillion euros ($1.19 trillion). According to the European Commission, road and rail traffic in Central Europe takes two to four times longer than comparable travel in the rest of the EU. This infrastructure deficit has real consequences. While the region has featured enviable growth rates, its underdeveloped infrastructure limits cross-border connectivity, acts as a break on economic growth, weakens economic resiliency, and restricts NATO’s ability to move forces rapidly, especially on a north-south axis to defend its eastern frontiers.

To address this infrastructure gap, Croatian President Kolinda Grabar-Kitarović convened twelve Central and Eastern European EU member states from between the Baltic, Black, and Adriatic Seas in 2016 to launch the Three Seas Initiative. The objective of this summit in Dubrovnik, Croatia, was to jointly attract investment for cross-border transport, energy, and digital infrastructure development. It laid the groundwork for the initiative’s strategy and its role as an “informal platform for security political support and decisive action of specific cross-border and macro-regional projects of strategic importance.”

The objectives have been clear ever since. First, the initiative seeks to leverage the power of cross-border infrastructure to stimulate and sustain regional economic growth. Greater cross-border connectivity fosters greater cross-border collaboration, including the more efficient movement of goods and services within the region, between the region and Western Europe, and between the member states and global markets. All this promises to further enhance the region’s attractiveness to foreign investment and would enable Central Europe to play a greater role in the European market.

A second objective is to tap the power of cross-border connectivity to strengthen economic resilience. This has become a growing imperative in an era of geopolitical turbulence—particularly due to intensifying Russian aggression and Moscow’s repeated efforts to leverage trade embargoes, particularly on its energy exports, to pressure its neighbors in Europe. By developing robust infrastructure in Central Europe, the initiative fosters greater economic independence—for example, by facilitating the diversification of energy supplies through new energy corridors to reduce dependence on Russian oil and gas.

A third, less prominent objective is strengthening the region’s military security. During the era of Soviet control, Moscow developed a limited set of energy, rail, and highway corridors—such as the Druzhba pipeline or rail corridors connecting Moscow to Prague or Budapest—on an east-west axis across Central and Eastern Europe, but next to none on a north-south axis. Expanding cross-border infrastructure in Central and Eastern Europe is critical to enhancing NATO’s ability to deploy and sustain its forces in the region, particularly those that must operate and move along the Alliance’s eastern frontiers. The joint declaration emerging from the 2024 Three Seas Summit reiterated this point.

“In the context of Russia’s unprovoked, unjustified and illegal war against Ukraine, we highlight the urgency and strategic importance of accelerating 3SI efforts in building resilient infrastructure and enhancing connectivity, in particular on the North-South axis, to contribute to greater convergence within the EU, redirection of transportation routes and supply chains, and the strengthening of overall 3SI security and prosperity.”

Defining 3SI’s work is a steadfast commitment to transatlanticism, with member states repeatedly stating that a core objective is contributing to the economic strength and security of the Euro-Atlantic community. Highlighting this commitment, the 2018 Bucharest Summit stated that the Three Seas Initiative is “confident that the economic presence of the United States in the 3SI region can contribute to the strengthening of the transatlantic link and provide an additional catalyst for an enhanced transatlantic partnership.” From the other side of the Atlantic, every Three Seas Summit and Business Forum has featured active US government participation, including President Donald’s Trump’s attendance in 2017 and President Joe Biden’s video address to summit leaders in 2021.

As noted earlier, the core and distinguishing objective of the 3SI has been its effort to leverage the power of private capital to catalyze the region’s infrastructural development. The countries of Central and Eastern Europe have always been grateful for the billions of dollars of international financing, particularly from EU institutions, that have been directed to their region to develop transport and other infrastructure. Yet, even with that assistance, infrastructure development has failed to progress with sufficient speed.

The initiative aims to leverage the region’s economic potential and vitality to attract private-sector capital to complement, expand, and accelerate its infrastructure efforts. Toward that end, the Three Seas Initiative Investment Fund was established in 2019 with nearly $1 billion in member state contributions. The fund can only invest in energy, transport, and digital infrastructure opportunities involving at least one 3SI member state. It is structured so that its investment decisions are made on a purely commercial, profit-oriented basis, and are isolated from the political influences of the governments that have contributed to its pool of capital.

Robust economic foundations

The initiative’s prospects for success rest on the robust economic strengths, performance, and potential of the Three Seas region. 3SI’s thirteen member states make up more than one-quarter of the EU’s population, with 120 million citizens and a highly skilled workforce. The region’s cumulative gross domestic product (GDP) totaled roughly $2.4 trillion in 2024 and is projected to grow by another 30 percent by 2030. Perhaps most critically, the 3SI region boasts some of the highest rates of return on investment (ROI) in Europe, reaching an average of 8.7 percent in 2022 compared to the EU’s average of 6.3 percent, making the region highly attractive to foreign investors.

Achievements over the first nine years

The strengths and potential of the Three Seas Initiative are rooted in the power of economic collaboration. Acting alone, each member state is limited in its ability to attract capital but, operating together, the Three Seas states can leverage their combined populations, economies, and growth potential. This, in turn, allows the bloc to generate a significant collective geoeconomic mass, which should be capable of attracting substantial interest from private- and public-sector capital around the world. Toward this end, the initiative has made notable progress since its launch nine years ago in raising awareness, support, and investment from members and partners within the region and beyond. These successes include the following.

The Three Seas Initiative Investment Fund

The Three Seas Initiative Investment Fund, while not yet accomplishing all its objectives, has made remarkable progress that affirms the high rates of return the region offers investors. Poland’s development bank (BGK) and Romania’s Export-Import Bank signed a letter of intent rolling out the concept for the Fund in 2018, and it was launched in 2020 with United Kingdom-based Amber Infrastructure Group serving as the Fund’s investment adviser. Nine of the 3SI member states have invested just under $1 billion in the Fund, and the United States Development Finance Corporation has committed to a $300-million financing agreement to support its investments. The Fund has committed more than €800 million across nine countries, contributing to the economic growth and diversification of the region. This has included investments in:

  • Cargounit, a Polish locomotive leasing business that is the largest independent rolling stock company in Poland and the second-largest rail freight market in Europe;
  • Greenergy Data Centers, the largest and most secure data center serving the Baltics;
  • Enery, an Austrian-headquartered renewable energy platform with projects in the Czech Republic, Slovakia, Bulgaria, Austria, Romania, and Estonia;
  • BMF Port Burgas, a Bulgarian port that has grown to become a key trade hub on the Black Sea as part of the Trans-European Transport Corridor; and
  • R.Power Renewables, a Polish renewable energy developer working throughout the region to promote the solar-as-a-service model.

The Fund is notable for the financial commitments of its member states, its ability to attract significant US investment, the success of its structure in excluding political interference in its investment decision-making process, and its annual rate of return said to approach 15 percent, which is testimony to the lucrative character of infrastructure investment in Central and Eastern Europe.

Establishing the Three Seas Initiative as a regional forum

Over the past decade, the Three Seas Initiative has become an established forum convening member states’ top governmental, business, finance, and opinion leaders and their counterparts in Western Europe, North America, and beyond. Three Seas summits have convened annually since 2016, attended by member heads of state and top officials from the United States, Germany, the European Union, and other key Three Seas partners.

In 2017, Trump, attending the second Three Seas Summit in Warsaw, suggested the creation of a parallel Business Forum that would bring international business and financial leaders to the region. He is said to have quipped, “If this is about business, where are the business leaders?” Since then, the Three Seas Summits have been complemented by a Three Seas Business Forum that facilitates engagements between heads of state, government ministers, and business executives. These forums have featured sessions on each pillar of the Initiative, as well as topical issues such as investment in the region, partnership with Ukraine and Moldova, regional economic resilience, and sustainable development.

US President Donald Trump speaks as Polish President Andrzej Duda and Croatian President Kolinda Grabar-Kitarovic listen during the Three Seas Initiative Summit in Warsaw, Poland July 6, 2017. REUTERS/Carlos Barria

Because the initiative was intentionally established as an informal venue for regional cooperation without a formal institutional structure outside the Fund, there is no formal organization or office to support its activities. Coordination of summits, their agenda, and deliverables have been facilitated by sherpas appointed by presidents and heads of state, who often work in collaboration with their national governments. As a result, 3SI summits and business forums have served as the primary driver of Three Seas activities.

Developing international awareness and interest

The annual summits have received high-level participation from 3SI countries, partner countries, the private sector, and beyond, providing a tangible sense of interest from foreign partners. In addition to Trump, key participants from outside the region have included then US Secretary of Energy Rick Perry; then President Jean-Claude Juncker of the European Commission; President Frank-Walter Steinmeier and former Foreign Minister Heiko Maas from Germany; and President Volodymyr Zelenskyy of Ukraine. In 2024, the summit welcomed leaders from Japan, which joined as a partner country. Engagement with economic leaders such as the United States, Germany, and Japan has underscored the initiative’s legitimacy, as well as provided tangible commitments to the 3SI. From the international community, summits have included participants from the European Investment Bank, the European Bank for Reconstruction and Development, the International Monetary Fund, and other organizations.

Outside the summits, the 3SI has demonstrated an ability to attract interest from its partners and turn it into commitments. Notably, in 2020, the United States pledged to provide up to $1 billion to the initiative, which became tangible in 2023 when the US Development Finance Corporation finalized the deal for a $300-million financing agreement. While high-level US leaders had attended summits and engaged with the 3SI in its earlier years, this step to direct investment marked a major success for the initiative and the Fund.

Expansion to Greece

At the 2023 summit in Bucharest, the 3SI welcomed Greece as a full member of the initiative. Greek interest in joining demonstrates the initiative’s attractiveness, providing a positive signal to investors. More importantly, Greece brings significant geoeconomic and political weight to the 3SI as the fifth-largest economy in the region, behind Poland, Romania, Austria, and the Czech Republic. Having recovered from its debt crisis, Greece has maintained strong growth rates since 2017 (aside from 2020 due to the COVID-19 pandemic) and strong rates of return on investment, making it an ideal fit for the 3SI. The Economist highlighted Greece’s success by naming it country of the year in 2023 for its work overcoming the debt crisis. Furthermore, the country has made significant investments in green energy, which pairs well with 3SI goals to develop critical energy infrastructure and promote greater energy security. Playing into Greece’s suitability for the 3SI, the country has emphasized its determination to link itself and the region to global infrastructure networks, including through links to both the Middle East and the Indo-Pacific regions through the India-Middle East-Europe Economic Corridor.

Building robust relationships outside the Three Seas countries

In addition to Greece, the 3SI has cultivated broader interest in joining the initiative among neighboring countries. Since Russia’s full-scale invasion of Ukraine prompted calls for its deeper integration into Europe, Ukraine has become a prime candidate for 3SI membership. The 3SI’s market-driven approach and focus on harnessing private capital resonates with many looking ahead to Ukraine’s reconstruction. Due to the initiative’s goal of developing modern infrastructure to connect Europe’s eastern front, some argue that Ukraine and its neighbor Moldova must be integrated into the Three Seas to enhance their security and to complete a Europe whole and free. Ukraine and Moldova made progress on their paths toward the 3SI at the 2023 Bucharest Summit, where they received associate membership. On the southern flank of 3SI, countries in the Western Balkans have expressed interest in joining but will face similar hurdles. Though their membership is not imminent, the perception of the 3SI as a useful forum, both politically and infrastructurally, is critical in building interest in the initiative.

The path to Three Seas 2.0

As the Three Seas Initiative approaches its tenth anniversary, it has presented, but not fully operationalized, an innovative approach to the development of regional infrastructure. It has become an established brand in Central Europe, if not across the transatlantic community. Its summit and business forums are part of the fabric of regional governmental and business convenings, and its investment fund has underscored the profitability of infrastructure investment in the Three Seas region.

Building on these successes, the Three Seas Initiative should do the following to fulfill its founding ambitions and to become a model of regional infrastructure development that would resonate globally.

I. Stand up a secretariat. To set the 3SI up for success, the member states should establish a full-time secretariat or office to shift the initiative’s operations from an iterative summit-to-summit basis to one on a full-time, 24/7 basis. The functions of this small office would be to

  • serve as a repository of information about the Three Seas region and its infrastructure investment opportunities;
  • facilitate contacts and engagements between potential investors and key regional stakeholders regarding these opportunities;
  • market the initiative to potential foreign investors;
  • represent the 3SI at various governmental, finance, and infrastructure convenings around the world;
  • assist in orchestrating annual summits and business forums, as well as other events to drive the initiative’s agenda; and
  • develop and propose initiatives that would increase the attractiveness of the Three Seas region to investment.

To accomplish these objectives, this office should be in a financial capital that is outside of the region. This would facilitate better engagement with foreign stakeholders, including governmental partners and investors. Brussels would be a natural fit due to its important role in European governance and finance, as well as its proximity to Central Europe and accessibility to other European financial hubs.

II. Reinvigorate a focus on mobilizing private capital. The 3SIIF and its intention to leverage private capital to drive regional infrastructure development is one of the most innovative elements of the initiative. However, aside from Amber Infrastructure’s own investment of some $10 million, the Fund’s investment capital has so far been derived almost entirely from treasuries of the member states and the US government. While seeking governmental funds remains important, it also makes sense to take stock of lessons learned since the Fund’s conception by the development banks of Poland and Romania and why the structure was not successful in attracting private capital; appropriate steps should then be taken to restructure it accordingly or to launch a new fund that will have greater success in this regard. The Fund’s current high rate of returns serves as ample proof that, if properly configured, it will have enormous potential to attract commercial capital. This, combined with the region’s infrastructure deficit and projected long-term high growth rates, should reinforce confidence in the prospects for success of both the Fund and the initiative.

III. Deliver a project. To add to its momentum and enhance its credibility to governments, intergovernmental institutions, and financial entities beyond the member states, the 3SI needs to complete a tangible infrastructure project. More specifically, the 3SI needs to undertake a project that it initiated and financed, demonstrate that it can provide an attractive return, and show the initiative’s geopolitical importance. An example of such a project would be an electricity powerline or a data transmission line, which are cheaper and more easily built than a large-scale highway, pipeline, or rail line. These projects would also have more immediate geoeconomic impact and return.

IV. Offer Ukraine full membership. Fundamentally, the goal of the Three Seas is to complete the vision of a Europe that is undivided, integrated, prosperous, free, and secure. That vision will not be completed until Ukraine is a fully integrated member of Europe and the transatlantic community. Toward that end, Ukraine should be offered full membership in the Three Seas Initiative and priority effort should be directed to new and preexisting infrastructure projects that deepen Ukraine’s infrastructural integration into the Three Seas region.

Russia’s 2022 invasion of Ukraine and the immense economic destruction it has caused make this a moral and strategic imperative for the Three Seas region. It is a moral imperative to assist a neighboring democracy that has been so unjustly and brutally attacked, and a strategic imperative in the effort to secure Central and Eastern Europe from further aggression. Ukraine’s reconstruction will stand among this century’s most challenging and urgent economic undertakings, and geography and a shared history ensure that the Three Seas states will play a pivotal role in this effort. The Three Seas Initiative should play a leadership role in the infrastructure dimension of Ukraine’s reconstruction and European integration.

Ukraine’s accession to the Three Seas Initiative would require the abandonment of an informal but long-standing Three Seas principle that only states that are full members of the EU can attain membership. This requirement was set with the belief that EU membership brings a level of political stability necessary to attract significant investment. However, investment in Ukraine following the full-scale invasion has disproven this theory, suggesting that investors are willing to accept higher risk for greater impact and potential return. As Ukraine eyes reconstruction, the initiative will have new opportunities for greenfield infrastructure projects if it incorporates Ukraine and prioritizes integrating it into the region’s preexisting infrastructure.

Even without full 3SI membership, the initiative needs to find opportunities to link Ukraine to the infrastructure network it seeks to build. As the 3SI looks for a project it can deliver to demonstrate the initiative’s geopolitical and geoeconomic relevance, how to include Ukraine should be a top priority.

V. Think bigger. The 3SI’s potential expands beyond the thirteen countries that are currently members. With its broader goal being to firmly tie Central and Eastern European countries to Europe and secure the region from Russian influence, the initiative should consider expanding to countries in Europe’s neighborhood, including the Western Balkans and Moldova. Not only would these countries stand to benefit greatly from tangible efforts to integrate their infrastructure into Europe’s, but 3SI would also help to block unwanted Russian and Chinese influence from the region.

The road to success

The Three Seas Initiative is a historic demonstration of the strategic value that Central and Eastern European democracies bring to the transatlantic community. Immediately after the Cold War, the region was highly dependent on foreign assistance. Today, the initiative is an important demonstration of how the region is leveraging its own geoeconomic capacity, leadership, collaboration, and potential to create economic opportunity and strength—not only for its member states but for the transatlantic community as well. A Central and Eastern European region that is more integrated into a wider Europe will be a more prosperous and secure area. That is a positive return for the region, Europe, and the United States.

It is time to fully leverage the economic potential of the Three Seas region and fulfill the ambitions of this initiative. With a critical summit in Poland in spring 2025, the initiative has an opportunity to demonstrate what it can achieve and to attract greater buy-in from partners and investors alike, working toward realizing the ultimate goal of a completed Europe.

About the authors

Related content

Explore the program

The Europe Center promotes leadership, strategies, and analysis to ensure a strong, ambitious, and forward-looking transatlantic relationship.

The post The Three Seas Initiative stands at an inflection point appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>
Present without impact? How the Middle East perceives China’s diplomatic engagement https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/in-depth-research-reports/issue-brief/present-without-impact-how-the-middle-east-perceives-chinas-diplomatic-engagement/ Thu, 13 Mar 2025 19:00:00 +0000 https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/?p=831428 Despite economic advancements and high-profile diplomatic engagements, China’s influence remains largely economic rather than political, Jonathan Fulton argues.

The post Present without impact? How the Middle East perceives China’s diplomatic engagement appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>

In a new Scowcroft Middle East Security Initiative issue brief, “Present without impact? How the Middle East perceives China’s diplomatic engagement,” Jonathan Fulton argues that despite economic advancements and high-profile diplomatic engagements, China’s influence remains largely economic rather than political. Middle Eastern perceptions of China vary; it is seen as a cautious, transactional actor with limited capacity for addressing key regional conflicts and security concerns. Fulton adds that while Iran views China as a crucial partner, Gulf states leverage their ties with Beijing to maintain strategic flexibility.

Fulton conducted extensive interviews with regional experts, which highlighted skepticism regarding China’s willingness and ability to assume a more influential political role. Fulton argues that economic pragmatism drives ongoing partnerships, but China is not yet considered a key regional political or security player.

Fulton argues that China is viewed more favorably in Middle Eastern countries than in Western countries. That said, it was not described as a benevolent regional actor in any of the conversations conducted for this issue brief. Most analysts believe China’s political and security role will remain minimal in the near term, although its economic importance will continue to grow, driven by infrastructure investments and trade partnerships. This underscores the widespread view of China as a limited regional actor.

About the author

Related content

Explore the program

The Scowcroft Middle East Security Initiative (SMESI) provides policymakers fresh insights into core US national security interests by leveraging its expertise, networks, and on-the-ground programs to develop unique and holistic assessments on the future of the most pressing strategic, political, and security challenges and opportunities in the Middle East. 

The post Present without impact? How the Middle East perceives China’s diplomatic engagement appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>
India’s path to AI autonomy https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/in-depth-research-reports/issue-brief/indias-path-to-ai-autonomy/ Thu, 13 Mar 2025 13:00:00 +0000 https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/?p=830704 India is taking a distinctive approach to the global race for artificial intelligence (AI) supremacy.

The post India’s path to AI autonomy appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>
India’s unique approach to AI autonomy: A three-pillar strategy

India is taking a distinctive approach to the global race for artificial intelligence (AI) supremacy. While the United States and China focus on AI for economic dominance and national security, India’s vision revolves around AI autonomy through the development of homegrown AI solutions that are closely linked to its development goals.1 This approach seeks to position India as a prominent global AI leader through a three-pillar strategy that distinguishes it from other major nations. India’s vision of AI autonomy is based on:

  • Democratizing AI through open innovation: Leading the development of open-source models and platforms that make AI more accessible and adaptable to India’s local needs including the Bhashini platform, which incorporates Indian languages in large language model processing, and the iGOT Karmayogi online learning platform for government training.
  • Public-sector-led development applications: Implementing AI solutions to address critical development challenges through government-led initiatives in healthcare, agriculture, and education, ensuring that technology meets societal needs.
  • Global leadership in AI for sustainable development: Championing the integration of AI to achieve the Sustainable Development Goals2 (SDGs) on a global scale while pushing ethical AI governance and South-South collaboration.

This strategy seeks to establish India as a global AI leader while addressing pressing social issues, closing economic gaps, and improving the quality of life for its diverse population of over 1.3 billion people.

India’s journey toward AI autonomy goes beyond technological independence; it creates a narrative in which innovative AI technologies drive inclusive growth. This philosophy is reflected in the “India AI” mission and its National Strategy for AI, which positions India as both an adopter and developer of AI technologies and a global hub for ethical and development-oriented AI innovation.3

India’s AI landscape: A vision of innovation and strategy

The Indian AI ecosystem is a dynamic landscape shaped by government initiatives, private-sector innovation, and academic research. There has been a notable increase in AI-focused start-ups in recent years, with the National Association of Software and Service Companies (NASSCOM) reporting over 1,600 in 2023.4 This growing sector highlights India’s technological capabilities and entrepreneurial spirit in tackling local challenges.

Several strategic government initiatives at the core of this ecosystem have paved the way for India’s advancements in AI. The India AI mission, launched in 2023, is a government initiative to build a comprehensive ecosystem to foster AI innovation across various sectors in India. Spearheaded by the Ministry of Electronics and Information Technology (MeitY), it focuses on developing AI applications to address societal challenges in healthcare, education, agriculture, and smart cities while promoting responsible and ethical AI development.5

IndiaAI reflects the country’s ambitions to become a global AI powerhouse and is supported by the National AI Strategy, created by the National Institution for Transforming India (NITI Aayog). The strategy provides a comprehensive road map for AI adoption in those sectors targeted by IndiaAI.6

What sets these initiatives apart from AI strategies in other countries is their emphasis on using AI for social good. For instance, the government of India organized the Responsible AI for Social Empowerment (RAISE) initiative in 2020,7 preceding the current AI hype. This demonstrates India’s commitment to ethical AI development, and such initiatives align with India’s National Development Agenda 2030, positioning AI as a driver of economic growth and a crucial enabler for achieving SDGs.8

Democratizing AI through open innovation

India is making significant progress in promoting open-source AI development, fostering inclusivity and collaboration within the global AI community. Open-source frameworks, driven by collaborative innovation, offer transparency, interoperability, and scalability—essential qualities for a diverse country like India.

The Bhashini initiative, led by the MeitY, exemplifies this commitment by leveraging open-source frameworks to build natural language processing (NLP) models that support twenty-two official Indian languages and numerous dialects. This project goes beyond basic language processing; it signifies India’s dedication to AI democratization by making these models and datasets freely available to developers and start-ups.9

The iGOT Karmayogi platform showcases the scalability of open-source AI solutions to improve digital literacy in government. Designed to upskill twenty million employees, it utilizes open-source AI tools to provide personalized learning pathways, reducing costs while ensuring continuous improvement based on user feedback.10

Leading academic institutions like the Indian Institute of Science (IISc) in Bangalore and the Indian Institute of Technology (IIT) Madras actively contribute to open-source AI research through global public platforms such as TensorFlow and Hugging Face.11 Their work encompasses various fields, including computer vision for healthcare, autonomous vehicles, and environmental monitoring.12

For Indian start-ups, using open-source AI models or systems provides significant benefits such as lower costs, greater customization flexibility, access to a larger developer community, the ability to tailor models to specific Indian languages and dialects, and enhanced data security by allowing deployment on premises, making it ideal for building localized AI solutions while maintaining control over sensitive data.

In August 2024, Meta’s open-source Llama model reached a significant milestone of 350 million cumulative downloads since the release of Llama 1 in early 2023.13. India has emerged as one of the top three markets globally for this model.14 Several Indian start-ups and well-known consumer apps, including Flipkart, Meesho, Redbus, Dream11, and Infoedge, have announced their integration of Llama into their applications.

Additionally, IBM Elxsi, a partnership between IBM and Tata Elxsi, India’s largest technology company, focuses on designing local digital engineering solutions, like using open-source models to develop AI-powered edge network solutions for rural and remote areas, enhancing AI accessibility while reducing latency and energy consumption.15

The democratization of AI through open-source initiatives is critical to India’s development trajectory and technological autonomy. This approach enables rapid, cost-effective AI adoption across India’s diverse sectors and regions, with tangible results already visible: The development cycle for AI solutions has been reduced from years to months, as evidenced by the rapid deployment of language models via the Bhashini initiative, which now serves millions in their native languages. Unlike the West, where most AI development is primarily driven by private companies with proprietary technologies, India’s adoption of an open-source-first approach has led to an independent ecosystem in which government initiatives, academic institutions, and private-sector innovations coexist.

The public-sector role in developing applications to address India’s unique challenges

The profound socioeconomic challenges that India’s 1.3 billion people face have fundamentally shaped its approach to AI.

India faces critical healthcare challenges: 70 percent of healthcare infrastructure is concentrated in urban areas serving only 30 percent of the population, and the doctor-patient ratio stands at 1:1,511, far below the World Health Organization’s recommended 1:1,000.16

The education sector struggles with fundamental gaps, as 250 million Indians lack basic literacy skills, with only 27 percent having access to internet-enabled devices for online learning, further complicated by the country’s diversity of twenty-two official languages and 1,600 dialects.17

Agricultural challenges are particularly acute, with the sector employing 42 percent of the workforce but contributing only 18 percent to gross domestic product; 86 percent are small and marginal farmers with less than two hectares of land, and 40 percent of food production is lost due to inefficient supply chains.18

Financial inclusion remains a significant barrier to development, with 190 million unbanked adults, 70 percent of rural transactions being cash-based, and a stark digital gender divide where only 33 percent of women have mobile internet access compared to 67 percent of men.19

The size and complexity of these challenges necessitate innovative technological solutions that are both scalable and relevant to India’s specific issues.

India’s development-focused AI vision strategically responds to these pressing issues. Rather than viewing AI solely as a tool for economic competition or technological advancement, India has positioned it as a transformative tool for closing fundamental development gaps.

AI is closing critical gaps in access and the quality of care in healthcare. Through the government’s eSanjeevani platform—India’s national telemedicine service offering patients access to medical specialists and doctors remotely via smartphones—has been revolutionary, with over one hundred million teleconsultations in 2023 and the aim of closing the urban-rural healthcare gap.20 The platform developed AI/machine learning models to improve data collection, quality of care, and doctor-patient consultations on eSanjeevani.21 The Indian Council of Medical Research’s collaborations with AI start-ups for disease prediction models in tuberculosis and diabetes paved the way for preventive healthcare interventions.

The agricultural sector is experiencing an AI revolution, driven by government initiatives, particularly through two key platforms. The mKisan portal gives more than fifty million farmers personalized SMS access to critical agricultural information, while the Agristack initiative lays the groundwork for precision agriculture by providing AI-powered advisory services for crop planning, pest control, and weather forecasting. The Indian Meteorological Department’s use of AI has improved monsoon forecast accuracy by 20 percent, significantly impacting agricultural planning.22

In education, state governments have contracted with Embibe, a company that offers AI-powered learning for basic education to bridge the learning gaps and expand access to quality education. It identifies gaps in knowledge and creates content that addresses them by studying data from student interactions. FutureSkills Prime, an initiative of the National Association of Software and Service Companies, provides AI skills training—and has developed a large AI talent pool, with more than 2.5 million technology professionals trained in AI in India. According to the 2025 Global Workplace Skills Study by Emeritus, 96% of Indian professionals are using AI and generative AI tools at work, significantly higher than the 81% in the US and 84% in the UK. This workforce advantage has made India a preferred destination for global companies seeking skilled AI professionals.

India’s public-sector-led approach to AI development uniquely integrates technology with development priorities. The government’s strategic leadership in deploying AI solutions in healthcare, agriculture, education, and finance demonstrates a unique model in which technology acts as a force multiplier for development efforts. Unlike many developed countries, where private-sector innovation drives AI advancement, India’s government-led initiatives ensure that AI solutions address fundamental development challenges on a large scale.

By combining scale, accessibility, and local relevance, India’s public-sector leadership in AI deployment is a unique model for other developing countries facing similar challenges, demonstrating that technology can effectively accelerate inclusive development when guided by clear public-policy goals.

Shaping tomorrow: India’s position in global AI leadership and development

India’s global AI leadership position is uniquely shaped by proactive government policies and collaborative initiatives. As a founding member of the Global Partnership on Artificial Intelligence (GPAI), India has used its presidency in 2024 to advance key priorities such as democratizing access to AI skills, addressing societal inequities, promoting responsible AI development, and applying AI in critical sectors such as agriculture and education.

AI plays a critical role in India’s vision to achieve all seventeen SDGs by 2030. India also aims to be one of the top three countries in AI research, innovation, and application by 2030, which reflects a larger ambition: to create a more equitable and sustainable global AI landscape. This unique approach balances technological autonomy and inclusive development, by aligning AI initiatives with socioeconomic priorities to address India’s unique challenges.

However, the expansion of India’s AI ecosystem faces several critical challenges, including the demand for an advanced AI compute infrastructure, developing accessible AI tools, ensuring data privacy, and mitigating algorithmic bias at scale. Addressing these issues requires multistakeholder collaboration between the government, local industry leaders, and academic institutions.

As India progresses in its AI journey, its experience provides valuable insights into how to use AI to drive socioeconomic development. The country’s development-focused approach to AI adoption and governance may serve as a model for other developing countries looking to capitalize on AI’s potential for inclusive growth.

About the authors

Mohamed “Mo” Elbashir is a nonresident senior fellow at the Atlantic Council’s GeoTech Center, as well as Meta Platforms’ global infrastructure risk and enablement manager. With over two decades of experience, he specializes in global technology governance, regulatory frameworks, public policy, and program management.

Kishore Balaji Desikachari is the executive director for government affairs at IBM India/South Asia. With over thirty years of leadership experience at Microsoft, Intel, and Hughes, he is a recognized regional policy commentator on AI, quantum computing, semiconductors, trade, and workforce strategies.

Related content

Explore the program

The GeoTech Center champions positive paths forward that societies can pursue to ensure new technologies and data empower people, prosperity, and peace.

1    World Economic Forum, “Sovereign AI: What It Is, and 6 Ways States Are Building It,” September 10, 2024, https://www.weforum.org/stories/2024/04/sovereign-ai-what-is-ways-states-building/.
2    United Nations member states adopted these SDGs in 2015. See “The 17 Goals,” United Nations Department of Economic and Social Affairs, accessed February 20, 2025, https://sdgs.un.org/goals
3    The National AI Portal of India,” INDIAai, n.d., https://indiaai.gov.in/.
4    “Indian AI Ecosystem: State of the Industry Report,” National Association of Software and Service Companies, December 2023, https://nasscom.in/knowledge-center/publications/weathering-challenges-indian-tech-start-landscape-report-2023.
5    Ministry of Electronics and Information Technology, “India AI Mission: Vision and Implementation Strategy,” Government of India, 2023, https://www.meity.gov.in/indiaai.
6    “National Strategy for Artificial Intelligence: Updated Framework,” National Institution for Transforming India (aka NITI Aayog), Government of India, 2021, https://niti.gov.in/national-strategy-artificial-intelligence.
7    “Raise.” 2020. IndiaAI. 2020. https://indiaai.gov.in/raise.
8    “An Overview of SDGs,” NITI Aayog, n.d., https://www.niti.gov.in/overview-sustainable-development-goals.
9    “Bhashini,” Government of India, 2024, https://bhashini.gov.in/.
10    Department of Personnel and Training, “iGOT Karmayogi: Transforming Capacity Building in Government,” Government of India, 2023, https://igot.gov.in/.
11    “Indian Institute of Science,” n.d., https://iisc.ac.in/; and “Indian Institute of Technology Madras, Tamilnadu,” 2019, https://www.iitm.ac.in/.
12    Bharat, “Top 7 Computer Vision Research Institutes in India,” OpenCV, January 3, 2024, https://opencv.org/blog/computer-vision-research-in-india/.
13    “With 10x Growth Since 2023, Llama Is the Leading Engine of AI Innovation,” Meta, 2024, https://ai.meta.com/blog/llama-usage-doubled-may-through-july-2024/
14    Supreeth Koundinya, “How I Met Your Llama,” Analytics India Magazine, October 26, 2024, https://analyticsindiamag.com/ai-origins-evolution/how-i-met-your-llama/.
15    “Role of Edge AI in Enhancing Real-Time Data Processing,” Hindustan Times (as shown on Tata Elxsi website), December 12, 2024, https://www.tataelxsi.com/news-and-events/role-of-edge-ai-in-enhancing-real-time-data-processing.
16    “Health and Family Welfare Statistics in India 2023,” Ministry of Health and Family Welfare, Government of India, 2023, https://mohfw.gov.in/?q=publications-11; and Sakthivel Selvara et al., India Health System Review, World Health Organization Regional Office for South-East, Health Systems in Transition 11, no. 1 (2022), https://iris.who.int/handle/10665/352685.
17    ASER Centre, “Annual Status of Education (Rural) Report 2023,” Pratham Education Foundation, January 2024, https://asercentre.org/wp-content/uploads/2022/12/ASER-2023-Report-1.pdf
18    “Analytical Reports,” PRS Legislative Research, n.d., https://prsindia.org/policy/analytical-reports/state-agriculture-india.
19    Reserve Bank of India–Annual Report,” 2024, Rbi.org.in, https://www.rbi.org.in/Scripts/AnnualReportPublications.aspx?Id=1404.
20    “Esanjeevani,” n.d., https://esanjeevani.mohfw.gov.in/.
21    “Clinical Decision Support System (CDSS) for Esanjeevani,” MIT SOLVE, 2022, https://solve.mit.edu/challenges/heath-in-fragile-contexts-challenge/solutions/75300.
22    “AI Helps Improve Predictability of Indian Summer Monsoons,” Department of Science & Technology,” 2023, https://dst.gov.in/ai-helps-improve-predictability-indian-summer-monsoons.

The post India’s path to AI autonomy appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>
How greater freedom empowers entrepreneurs and expands access to credit https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/in-depth-research-reports/report/how-greater-freedom-empowers-entrepreneurs-and-expands-access-to-credit/ Mon, 10 Mar 2025 13:00:00 +0000 https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/?p=823493 Access to credit is vital for SMEs, yet barriers like high collateral and discriminatory lending hinder growth, especially for women-led firms. Data shows freer economies reduce borrower discouragement. Legal protections, economic deregulation, and gender-sensitive policies improve access. Case studies from New Zealand, Singapore, and Kenya highlight how strategic reforms bridge credit gaps and drive growth.

The post How greater freedom empowers entrepreneurs and expands access to credit appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>

Access to credit plays a crucial role for small and medium enterprises (SMEs), which account for 90 percent of businesses globally and generate over 50 percent of employment. However, barriers such as high collateral requirements, discriminatory lending practices, and borrower discouragement—especially among women-led firms—hinder their growth. Evidence from firm-level data in the World Bank Enterprise Surveys and the Atlantic Council’s Freedom Index reveals a strong link between freedom—spanning economic, legal, and political dimensions—and borrower discouragement. In high-freedom environments, borrower discouragement rates drop to 17 percent, while they reach nearly 48 percent in low-freedom settings.

Among these dimensions, legal freedom stands out as the most influential. Strong legal frameworks that protect property rights, enforce contracts, and combat corruption instill confidence in entrepreneurs and encourage credit-seeking behavior. The impact of these factors is particularly significant for SMEs and women-led businesses in low- and middle-income countries, where financial systems remain underdeveloped. Economic deregulation and transparent financial markets improve access to credit, while gender-sensitive policies—such as targeted financial education and credit guarantees—help mitigate the systemic biases that female entrepreneurs encounter.

Global case studies of successful policy interventions offer valuable lessons. New Zealand’s robust property rights framework, Singapore’s pro-business environment, and Kenya’s M-Pesa platform illustrate how strategic reforms can empower entrepreneurs and bridge credit gaps. These initiatives demonstrate that fostering freedom reduces borrower discouragement and drives inclusive economic growth.

About the authors

Explore the data

Trackers and Data Visualizations

Jun 15, 2023

Freedom and Prosperity Indexes

The indexes rank 164 countries around the world according to their levels of freedom and prosperity. Use our site to explore twenty-eight years of data, compare countries and regions, and examine the sub-indexes and indicators that comprise our indexes.

Related content

Explore the program

The Freedom and Prosperity Center aims to increase the prosperity of the poor and marginalized in developing countries and to explore the nature of the relationship between freedom and prosperity in both developing and developed nations.

The post How greater freedom empowers entrepreneurs and expands access to credit appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>
Emerging technology policies and democracy in Africa: South Africa, Kenya, Nigeria, Ghana, and Zambia in focus https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/in-depth-research-reports/report/emerging-technology-policies-and-democracy-in-africa-south-africa-kenya-nigeria-ghana-and-zambia-in-focus/ Mon, 10 Mar 2025 12:30:00 +0000 https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/?p=830835 How are African nations navigating the governance of AI, digital infrastructure, and emerging technologies? Emerging Technology Policies and Democracy in Africa: South Africa, Kenya, Nigeria, Ghana, and Zambia in Focus examines how five key countries are shaping regulatory frameworks to drive innovation, protect digital rights, and bridge policy gaps in an evolving tech landscape.

The post Emerging technology policies and democracy in Africa: South Africa, Kenya, Nigeria, Ghana, and Zambia in focus appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>

Executive summary

Africa is increasingly asserting its participation in the advancement of emerging technologies by engaging in active dialogues and devising roadmaps for the development, deployment, and regulation of these technologies. However, strategies to employ emerging technologies vary widely both in levels of progress as well as regulatory mechanisms. This report explores how five African countries—South Africa, Kenya, Nigeria, Ghana, and Zambia—are strategically navigating the governance of new technologies to enrich their citizens’ lives while mitigating potential risks. It focuses on three key emerging technology domains, namely: connectivity, digital public infrastructure, and artificial intelligence (AI).

Beginning with an analysis of the foundational digital technology policies around data protection and governance and cybersecurity, the country reviews highlight the current landscape of laws, and strategies governing each of the emerging technologies of interest. By exploring the strengths and weaknesses of each country’s policy landscape across these technology domains, the report offers insights into prospects and challenges in harnessing emerging technologies for societal good.

The report finds that governments are generally optimistic about the potential impact of emerging technologies on economic development in their respective countries. This is reflected in the large public investment in technology infrastructure, promotion of innovative ecosystems, and the integration of information and communication technologies (ICTs) into e-governance and e-services toward a holistic digitalized economy and society. The countries’ multistakeholder approaches highlight the need for responsible governance while promoting active private-sector engagement for the public good.

Nigeria, South Africa, Kenya, and Ghana were found to have comparatively robust policies for each emerging technology examined, or at least—as is the case with Kenya—documentation or drafts in the form of gazettes and public consultation documents. Government efforts are more prominent in the AI domain, given the increased attention it has garnered lately. However, these frameworks are hampered by limited implementation capacities, poor infrastructure, policy fragmentation and overlap, low digital literacy levels, and a growing digital divide. Zambia on the other hand, while having strong aspirations to become an ICT-enabled knowledge economy, lacks dedicated policies pertaining to emerging technologies. Although the country’s data-protection laws, intellectual property, cyber security, and consumer protection provide a foundational framework, more updated regulations are required to keep pace with the speed at which emerging technologies are playing an increasingly pivotal role in citizens’ daily lives.

A SWOT (i.e., strengths, weaknesses, opportunities, and threats) analysis of the broader digital-technologies sector across these countries reveals some universal themes. Strengthwise, governments are generally proactive and enthusiastic about engaging new technology issues, and ICT authorities tend to adapt quickly to new developments by publishing subsidiary laws, releasing draft statements, or convening multistakeholder workshops, where national policy frameworks are absent. An overarching rather than specific sectoral or technology-domain approach also drives national technology pursuits, where for example, all the five countries examined have a national ICT/digital economy strategy which predates and already makes foundational provisions for emerging technology policies. Policy-formulation processes were driven by stakeholder engagement and public consultations, as seen in regular calls for contributions and multistakeholder convenings leading up to policy enactment. Yet huge disparities were observed within countries, where rural and marginalized urban communities, as well as women, are left behind by governmental technology ambitions. This calls for updated policy frameworks and strategies that emphasize inclusion and other sociopolitical considerations to avoid deepening inequities.

For Africa to leverage emerging technologies for socioeconomic development while maintaining accountable and transparent systems, legislative frameworks must be streamlined alongside strong institutional integration to ensure effective enforcement. It is imperative that policymakers develop a strong understanding of emerging technologies to enhance their capacities for developing comprehensive policies to address them. Equally important is raising public awareness to protect the African people’s digital rights and foster safe digital environments.

About the authors

Ayantola Alayande is a Researcher at the Global Center on AI Governance. There, Ayantola works on the African Union Continental AI Strategy and the African Observatory on Responsible AI. He is also a researcher at the Bennett Institute for Public Policy at the University of Cambridge, where he focuses on industrial policy and the future of work in the public sector.

Samuel Segun, PhD is a Senior Researcher at the Global Center on AI Governance. He is also an AI Innovation & Technology consultant for the United Nations Interregional Crime and Justice Research Institute (UNICRI), where he works on the project ‘Toolkit for Responsible AI Innovation in Law Enforcement’.

Leah Junck, PhD is a Senior Researcher at the Global Center on AI Governance. Her work explores human-technology experiences. She is the author of Cultivating Suspicion: An Ethnography and Like a Bridge Over Trouble: An Ethnography on Strategies of Bodily Navigation of Male Refugees in Cape Town.

Explore the program

The Atlantic Council’s Digital Forensic Research Lab (DFRLab) has operationalized the study of disinformation by exposing falsehoods and fake news, documenting human rights abuses, and building digital resilience worldwide.

The post Emerging technology policies and democracy in Africa: South Africa, Kenya, Nigeria, Ghana, and Zambia in focus appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>
Mexico’s fork in the road: Rule of law or authoritarian shift?  https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/content-series/freedom-and-prosperity-around-the-world/mexicos-fork-in-the-road-rule-of-law-or-authoritarian-shift/ Fri, 07 Mar 2025 17:37:03 +0000 https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/?p=822989 When freedom declines, prosperity tends to follow—a trend observed not only in Latin America but worldwide. Yet Mexico appears to be an exception. The country is experiencing rising prosperity despite increasing restrictions on freedom. However, further centralization of political power could ultimately hinder progress.

The post Mexico’s fork in the road: Rule of law or authoritarian shift?  appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>

table of contents

Introduction

2024 has brought a time of renewed upheaval in Mexico, six years after the election that fundamentally changed the political and economic systems of the country. Claudia Sheinbaum, standard-bearer for the incumbent Morena party, won the presidency in June 2024, the first ever woman to do so. The presidential and legislative elections were among the most decisive in Mexican history. With her victory comes a spate of questions about the political and economic future of the country, as she moves to cement the momentous political reforms her predecessor, Andrés Manuel López Obrador (known as AMLO), set into motion. In such a time of transformation, the Atlantic Council’s Freedom and Prosperity Index remains deeply illuminating.

Starting in the late 1980s, Mexico underwent a series of structural transformations that have significantly modified the nature of the state, the market, and their relationship in the country. At the tail end of the Institutional Revolutionary Party’s seventy-year single-party rule, public and international pressure brought about a democratic transformation that included the emergence of wide-ranging independent and technical institutions, with remits of electoral integrity, monetary policy, competition, statistics, transparency, and the specific regulation of markets. The state’s interventionist role in the economy was reduced, with an overarching privatization process that, among other things, touched banking, telecommunications, and infrastructure. More structural economic change came with free trade agreements and their upward pressure on competition in the private sector. Most notable among them was the North American Free Trade Agreement (NAFTA), which along with its 2018 successor the United States–Mexico–Canada Agreement (USMCA) has shifted the economic matrix over three decades from significantly primary to mostly secondary and tertiary activity: Where oil-related products once represented almost 20 percent of exports in the early-mid 1990s, today they account for less than 5 percent; instead, manufacturing has climbed to approximately 90 percent of exports over the past decade. Several notable milestones have followed:

  • Technocratic rule prevailed for years and favored a relatively unfettered private market.
  • The ruling party lost in the 2000 presidential election—a first in seven decades—to a right-wing party.
  • The 2018 landslide election of a left-leaning populist prompted changes to the nature of the state-market relationship by strongly favoring the role of the state. 
  • The concentration of power has accelerated since 2024, when the incumbent ruling party achieved a legislative supermajority (via a friendly legal interpretation) and full judicial control (through a constitutional amendment). The promise, at least on paper, is not only to give extraordinary weight to the state but also to give force to the market as an engine for growth and prosperity. The result of this experiment is yet to be known.

Taking a step back to examine the Mexican index from its beginning in 1995, we can see a notable difference between the freedom and prosperity indices. On the one hand, the Prosperity Index has shown a steady, though slow, rise over the past twenty-eight years from 55.4 to 65.8 (the COVID-19 crisis notwithstanding). On the other hand, the Freedom Index shows Mexico rated only slightly higher than in 1995, despite a significant period of improvement in the 2000s. We can see two distinct inflection points that form a kind of “plateau” of higher freedom scores, around the years 2000 and 2018. The former coincides with the election of Vicente Fox, of the National Action Party (PAN), to the presidency, enabled through democratic reforms in the 1980s (including the establishment of the precursor to today’s National Electoral Institute). His rise marked a momentous moment in Mexican politics as the first president from outside the PRI, which had previously enjoyed essentially single-party rule since 1929.

The second inflection point, in 2018, is particularly notable as it includes the effects of two countervailing forces on the Freedom Index. The first is the signing of the USMCA, which according to the index’s methodology resulted in a significant increase in economic freedoms. The second is the election of AMLO, who rose to power on a wave of antielite sentiment. Once in power he began implementing his unique brand of populist governance, combining a redistributive fiscal policy with democratic backsliding and power consolidation. These features have blended to create a notable downward trend in freedoms over a half a decade, as we will explore in detail below, though they also have contributed to the continued improvement in some of the prosperity indices.

Focusing on the past five years, the index shows the continuation of a trend that is rare in the region and elsewhere—the decoupling of freedom and prosperity. Mexico is one of the few cases in the last five years, together with Nicaragua and Chile, where prosperity has continued to increase while freedom has declined. This is contrary to the wider trend in the Latin America and Caribbean (LAC) region, where both indices have declined.

In a marked shift from its categorization as “mostly free” in the 2023 index, Mexico is classified in the 2024 edition as a “low freedom” country, ranked 90 in the world—reflecting accumulated, significant antidemocratic shifts over the years of the AMLO presidency. Mexico continues to be “moderately prosperous,” though the changes underlying the reductions in freedom can be expected to damage prosperity as well, sooner rather than later. 

Atlantic Council research suggests that, in general, the level of freedom in a country plays a significant causal role in its prosperity. The effect of a significant shift in freedoms is usually delayed by several years, taking up to two decades to manifest fully. In the case of the recent reductions in freedom in Mexico, the economic effects are likely to be felt much sooner. For example, as I will discuss below, judicial reforms are likely to pose an enormous challenge for the private sector and the renegotiation of the USMCA in the coming year, which could have severe economic ramifications for the country, as uncertainty affects investment climate. In the context of the current authoritarian shift in Mexican politics, this highlights the importance of steadfast, long-term public policy. That said, whether we continue to see this divergence going forward through the Sheinbaum presidency is yet to be seen.

Evolution of freedom

Mexico’s Freedom Index score has continued its decline, falling almost six points to 63.3 over the five years leading up to 2023. The score is characterized, after a decade of stop-start improvement, by a sharp fall since 2018, driven by declining political and legal freedoms. While Latin American countries have seen declining freedoms in this timeframe, Mexico’s slide is an outlier. Despite starting the period with a higher freedom score than the rest of the region, it has now slipped well below the average of 66.4, ranking eighteenth among the twenty-four nations in LAC, and the trendline continues to be negative. While economic freedom has been steady at around 76 after a notable drop in 2019, legal and political freedom scores have plunged since 2018. Mexico’s legal freedom score is 48.6, down from 54 in 2018; in fact, while the score has steadied in the past year, recent judicial developments (discussed below) suggest that we will see a severe drop next year. Political freedom has recorded an even more severe decline, dropping over ten points to 65.4 in 2023.

We can see several notable declines within the political subindex. Political rights have fallen steeply in the past five years. Mexico has dropped over twelve points and twenty-five places in the international rankings, and well down among the LAC countries in the nineteenth position. This score reflects the adversarial stance of the former AMLO government regarding criticism, opposition, public protest, and most significantly, the freedom of the press. The president presided over a militarized response to anti-femicide protests in Mexico City, for example, and he continued to constantly attack specific press representatives during his mandate. On one occasion in February 2024, he revealed the private phone number of a New York Times journalist during a live press conference; on another, he exposed private income and tax information of a Mexican one.

In another sign of democratic backsliding, the elections score has declined almost three points to 89.1. As president, AMLO often used his platform to campaign for members of his party as well as continuously attack political opponents from his privileged tribune, contrary to legal principles. The decline also reflects the fact that while the National Electoral Institute (INE) remains de jure independent, it has been subject to relentless political pressure and intervention, as well as severe funding cuts. The former president accused the institute of fraud and sought to centralize it under the executive. Furthermore, the legislature—controlled by the ruling party, Movimiento de Regeneración Nacional, or Morena—has continued to leave the Elections Tribunal without its required seven magistrates. Those threats and the loss of funding have yet to translate into a further deterioration of election integrity; nonetheless, it remains part of a worrying trend.

On a similar note, the most severe decline was in the legislative constraints on the executive score, which fell almost thirty points to 36.3 in 2023. This period coincided with AMLO’s sweeping election and legislative majorities (including a supermajority in the Chamber of Deputies), giving the administration a period of total legislative control until the supermajority was lost in 2021 (coinciding with a brief uptick in the constraints score). However, AMLO continued to undermine legislative independence: for example, forcing through legislation in violation of procedure. With Sheinbaum’s election victory in 2024 came not only the presidency but a questionable supermajority in the Congress of the Union. In fact, the ruling coalition now controls 73 percent of the Chamber of Deputies with 54 percent of the popular vote for the chamber, against a constitutional limit of 8 percent for the difference between representation and vote share. Despite initially falling one vote short in the Senate, a subsequent—questionable in its form—defection from the opposition has handed the coalition a supermajority across both bodies for the first time since the 1990s. Morena has also sought to remove additional constraints on executive power, for instance by following through on the elimination of several key autonomous agencies. These include the National Institute of Transparency Access to Information and Data Protection (INAI), an essential resource for government accountability; the Federal Economic Competition Commission, known as COFECE, which has a broad antitrust and competition remit; the National Council for Evaluation of Social Development Policy (CONEVAL), which is in charge of the evaluation of social programs and for poverty reduction strategy; the Federal Telecommunications Institute, the telecom regulator; and the Energy Regulatory Commission. The proposal was passed in November 2024, ostensibly to reduce costs, though the savings will amount to less than 0.05 percent of the federal budget. This follows years of AMLO hamstringing the agencies via unfilled appointments and budget cuts. Additionally, while Sheinbaum’s government made some changes to AMLO’s initial proposal to remain compliant with USMCA provisions, potentially compromised regulatory functions may yet violate the treaty if they end up favoring state-owned entities.

A similar dismantling on presidential checks and balances characterizes the decline in the legal subindex score. Apart from informality, which has been steady, every other legal indicator has fallen sharply since 2018, driving a twenty-one-place drop in global rankings for Mexico. Judicial independence has nose-dived to 50.4 from 62.2, reflecting an extended offensive from the Morena government against the national judiciary. AMLO appointed four justices to the Supreme Court of the Justice of the Nation, including a party insider with no judicial experience. He has repeatedly accused the court of treachery and corruption, encouraged public anger at the court’s president, threatened the pensions of judiciary workers, and slashed the court’s budget. Among the most contentious political issues of the past two years is a radical judicial overhaul, first proposed by AMLO but supported by, and eventually passed under, President Sheinbaum in late 2024. In a world first, the reform aims to require every judge in the system (over 17,000) to be elected by popular vote along with a reduction by two seats in the size of the Supreme Court. A significant portion of the candidates will be prescreened by the ruling Morena party. This presents severe dangers to the rule of law and independence in the judiciary, with judges exposed to the influence of political pressure and public sentiment on what should be a fully indifferent, impartial process. Legal interpretations will become unreliable as politicization in the judiciary results in inconsistent ad-hoc rulings. The role of the judiciary as a check on the executive and legislative will be greatly diminished, primarily by means of its ability to intervene against political parties and other political actors which will now control its judges’ candidacies. Despite the imminent need for significant improvement and the administration’s continuous attacks on and heavy-handed influencing of the court, it had remained de jure independent; but the recent judicial reform throws even that into question.

The ramifications of this fundamental reform, which undermines the capacity and oversight of the judiciary, will be manifold. This includes effects on the Mexican economy, as discussed below, but to start with, top-to-bottom elections set for June 2025 will cost $650 million. These expensive elections come in the context of one of budgets aiming at reducing the historically high fiscal deficit of 2024through severe fiscal consolidation in 2025.

The fight against corruption, which has been a key justification for Morena’s authoritarian measures like the judicial reform, has shown little signs of improvement over the past five years. On the contrary, some notable loci of corruption have only emerged during recent years. In one case, the director of the recently established Institute to Return Stolen Property to the People (INDEP) resigned after explosive revelations of theft within the agency. The agency was established to redistribute the value of assets seized from criminals to the Mexican people (though critics argued it simply renamed an existing agency with the same purpose); instead, “multimillion dollar corruption” has plagued its operations. Additionally, while seized assets were previously used solely to compensate victims of crime, the new agency has opaque authority to distribute funds as it pleases, including to other political priorities, increasing risks of cronyism on top of corruption.

The judicial reform is likely to exacerbate the problem by politicizing judicial officials in lower courts and opening them to the influence of political interests and even crime. Additionally, the elimination of key autonomous oversight agencies, as discussed above, is likely to lead to less transparency and accountability for two reasons. One is that by destroying the agencies and absorbing their functions into the executive branch, regulatory and antitrust capacity are likely to suffer significantly, likely allowing more cases of bad practice to fall through the cracks. Additionally, they would be less likely to scrutinize entities associated with the executive. Similarly, while in office AMLO also directed a growing share of economic power to the sole purview of the military, including seaports, airports, customs processing, and major pet infrastructure projects like Tren Maya (Maya Train) and the Trans-Isthmic Corridor. Removing the requirement of competitive bidding and procurement, along with limited outside oversight of militarized economic activity, raise additional transparency and accountability concerns.

Militarization was also a key component of AMLO’s approach to security. In this case, a relatively flat trendline may belie a regression in Mexico’s internal security situation; the former president’s conciliatory approach to cartel violence has failed to reduce their impunity; despite misleading assurances to the contrary, a government agency confirmed that more homicides occurred during AMLO’s time in office than any other Mexican president in history. He also reversed course on his support for Mexico’s “desaparecidos,” over 100,000 unsolved cases of criminal kidnapping. However, President Sheinbaum’s approach to security may prove to be a case of significantly distancing herself from the previous government. Instead of continuing AMLO’s “hugs, not bullets” strategy, she seems willing to rely more on action than inaction, and on counterintelligence and coordination to combat and deter unsustainable levels of violence. This enormous change will be legitimized (vis-à-vis AMLO) by the need to opt for a completely different approach when put between a rock and a hard place by the United States, threatened with a 25 percent blanket tariff if inaction and lack of cooperation occur in terms of tackling drug-trafficking organizations and migration.

Finally, the clarity of law has also suffered, with Mexico dropping twenty-seven places in global rankings and losing eleven points to reach a score of 37.6. This metric assesses whether Mexican laws are general, public, consistent, and predictably enforced. Indeed, all four of those characteristics were tested repeatedly by the previous administration, perhaps most notably in an anticompetitive electricity reform bill that was struck down by the Supreme Court in early 2024. Now that Morena has pushed through its judicial overhaul, it is likely that such distortions of the clarity of the law will have fewer checks going forward, whether through anticompetitive measures from the government or unpredictable enforcement by a judicial system in disarray. Further reduction in the clarity of the law has taken place via government abridgments of private property rights.

The economic subindex shows only a moderate decline of three points since 2018. However, within the average lies an interesting dynamic, with subindices moving in different directions. On one hand, trade freedom and investment freedom show a marked increase in 2018, following the ratification of the USMCA. Trade freedom especially benefited from the agreement, showing further improvement in 2020 once the agreement was ratified.

On the other hand, the property rights score has decreased dramatically following the 2018 election. Despite being an enshrined principle in the constitution, the previous administration took several notable actions to weaken the right to private property and fair treatment of that property by the government. In 2019, the government passed a law equating tax evasion with organized crime and assigned the corresponding punishment; among its outcomes is the ability to enforce mandatory pretrial detention without bail as well as asset forfeiture prior to a guilty verdict. While this was later overturned by the Supreme Court in 2022, citing unconstitutionality, such court-ordered rollbacks are less likely given the recent erosion of judicial independence. We can see the effect of this law on the sharp drop in the score in 2019. This follows from one of the broader themes of the past AMLO administration, which was active interventionism and an anticompetitive role for the state in a variety of sectors. For example, AMLO’s energy nationalism has resulted in more and more of the government’s fiscal eggs going into the basket of Pemex, the state-owned oil company, at the expense of private investment in both fossil fuel energy production as well as, critically, renewables. This is likely to be another area where President Sheinbaum distances herself from her mentor and predecessor as she recently presented an Energy Plan which included private-sector participation through mixed investment and the reprioritization of energy transition through renewable generation. It is yet to be seen, however, what the practical implementation of such a plan will be and how a much more doubtful private sector will respond to these recent policy shifts.

It is important to also mention that the government showed a particular tendency to infringe on property rights when pushing AMLO’s pet projects; for example, in May 2023 the government illegally seized a privately administered rail track, despite a legal contract granting the company its concession, to advance the Trans-Isthmic Corridor rail initiative. Additionally, in 2023, the government sent armed military, in contravention of court order, to seize the port assets of an American company in Playa del Carmen. In the final days of his presidency, AMLO issued a decree expropriating the entirety of that private land for a nature reserve. He has previously suggested using the rare deepwater port as a cruise dock; it is also the only port in the region capable of transporting the required raw materials for the Tren Maya, which has been subject to considerable environmental and economic criticism from opponents. Neither of those two incidents are reflected in the property rights score for the past two years, but they will affect foreign investment, particularly from the United States, and resulted in a sharp rebuke from the US Senate Foreign Relations Committee. While President Sheinbaum has taken a conciliatory tone with foreign investors so far, it remains to be seen how she will align further concentration of power with an environment of enablement and certainty for business development in Mexico.

By contrast, despite some concerning years when women’s marches were met with the use of force, the women’s economic freedom score has stayed flat at 88.8 and now offers reason for cautious optimism. President Sheinbaum plans to introduce several policies aimed at advancing women’s empowerment, including supplemental pensions for women aged sixty to sixty-four and an extension of parental leave. She also has proposed a National Care System aimed at supporting unpaid work (like childcare) that traditionally falls to women, though funding for the system has yet to be established.

Evolution of prosperity

Despite the dramatic backsliding in political, economic, and legal freedoms, Mexico has mostly resisted a similar decline in the Prosperity Index during the same period, rising six places in the global rankings. Despite a foundation of macroeconomic stability, overall growth has remained frustratingly low relative to its potential. Its score has tracked fairly closely with the regional level since 1995.

While Mexico’s global prosperity score rose above pre-COVID-19 levels in 2022, in contrast to the regional average, the income subindex shows the opposite: Mexico remains below its pre-COVID levels, while the region on average has surpassed them. This can be attributed to the government’s low levels of fiscal support (0.7 percent of gross domestic product) during the pandemic, which stands in stark contrast to others in the region such as Brazil, which spent close to 9 percent of GDP on its response. Even before COVID-19, the economic growth of Mexico suffered a significant deceleration. During the first year of AMLO’s government, the economy contracted by 0.1 percent and the compounded average growth of his term (excluding 2024) is less than 1 percent. The economy notably underperformed compared to the just-under 2 percent compounded annual growth seen over the three preceding administrations from 2001 to 2018.

There are also lagging indicators that suggest constraints on growth going forward. For example, while overall foreign direct investment (FDI) has grown in recent years (mostly due to profit reinvestment), new FDI inflows show a different story. Fresh FDI inflows via equity capital have plunged steeply from $15.3 billion in the first three quarters of 2022 to only $2.0 billion for the same period in 2024, based on the latest Mexican government data.

Despite sluggish income growth, Mexico has made significant strides in reducing inequality since 2018, moving up eleven places in the global rankings and five points to 57.7. This has been driven by AMLO’s social policy; for example, the minimum wage has nearly tripled since 2018 (by decree, rather than as a result of higher productivity and competition), and poverty has declined by 20 percent since 2020, in large part due to a costly and enormous rise in cash transfers. This creates further fiscal pressures at a time when the country is running its highest deficit in almost four decades, at 5.9 percent of GDP. Remittances have also virtually doubled from about $8 billion in the first quarter of 2019 to $14 billion in the first quarter of 2024. (International Monetary Fund research has shown that remittances have a downward effect on inequality in Mexico). It should be noted, however, that the rate of improvement in the inequality score has remained reasonably consistent since 2012.

On the environment, the index shows Mexico suffered only a slight decrease from 67.2 in 2018 to 67 in 2023. This reflects a flat trend, on average, for emissions, air pollution deaths, and access to clean cooking technology. In the case of Mexico, however, this obscures significant setbacks in environmental progress from a policy perspective. Mexico dropped seven places to 39 in the 2024 Climate Change Performance Index, which rated its climate policy as “low performance.” AMLO’s oil nationalism prioritized public investments in the floundering state-owned oil supermajor, pushing out competition and heavily disincentivizing investment in renewable energy and the wider green transition. Additionally, some of the administration’s pet projects, particularly the Tren Maya, have been criticized for environmental damage to sensitive ecosystems of the Yucatán peninsula. According to Global Forest Watch, primary forest loss saw a large increase in 2019 and 2020. This was likely due to the misguided Sembrando Vida (Sowing Life) policy, which aimed to address rural poverty and environmental degradation but resulted in large tracts of forest destroyed for timber or agriculture—despite many of the landowners having been compensated for protecting existing forest under the prior government’s policy regime. The data shows a marked improvement in 2021, suggesting the government acted to stymie Sembrando Vida’s negative externalities.

The path forward

Thus far, democratic backsliding has seemingly been either aligned with the will of the voters; a cost they are willing to pay for cash transfers, a renewed hope derived from populist rhetoric, or as punishment to previous governments. Or perhaps Mexicans simply don’t care or do not acknowledge – due to a lack of effective engagement and communication from previous governments – material benefit from a rather ethereal concept: democracy. AMLO’s presidency came with noticeable material improvements in many lives, as we can see with significant progress on poverty, inequality, remittances (though unrelated to his policies), and the minimum wage. Additionally, the political opposition is in total disarray, tainted with accusations of elitism and corruption—and without capacity to self-assess, regroup, and present a compelling alternative. AMLO, with his singular star power, and now Claudia Sheinbaum with more than 75 percent popularity (in January 2025), have effectively capitalized on their absence with an inclusive narrative of economic nationalism and executive strength.

On top of backsliding, the targeted problems of corruption, lack of security, and a culture of privilege remain largely unsolved. Additionally, the risks of continuing down the path of democratic retrenchment are immense and wide-ranging. The politicization of the judicial system risks an even deeper loss of public trust in the law as well as deeper entrenchment of a single hegemonic party, further reducing the viability of a basic democratic requirement: a strong opposition, which has also inflicted significant self-damage to be seen as an appealing and trustworthy political option.  

In addition to driving a cycle of continuously shrinking freedoms, the existing approach may also struggle to generate an adequate growth engine required for improvements in economic vibrancy. The country is facing several headwinds in achieving its growth potential in the medium term. For one thing, returning the budget deficit to manageable levels—Sheinbaum has pledged to meet a 3.9 percent deficit target in 2025—will require fiscal trade-offs. It will require the president to confront her government’s relationship with Pemex, the roughly $100 billion elephant in the room. While her predecessor injected almost $100 billion into Pemex via direct financing and tax breaks, production declined and losses doubled to $8.1 billion in October 2024 compared to a year earlier. The company’s debt now stands at almost 6 percent of the entire country’s GDP and the government has pledged almost $7 billion more this year amid a rapidly tightening budgetary environment. The Pemex albatross will hang heavily on the sovereign balance sheet, as we are seeing already. Along with concerns about the constitutional reform, Pemex’s fiscal burden helped drive Moody’s latest downgrading of Mexico’s debt outlook from “stable” to “negative” in November 2024.

Additionally, Mexico’s macroeconomic scenario is highly dependent on foreign trade, particularly its integration with the United States and Canada via the USMCA. Exports accounted for over 40 percent of Mexico’s GDP in 2022, and over 80 percent of those exports went to the United States. Those who invest and trade with Mexico crave certainty, particularly in a context of transformative changes to international supply chains. However, current uncertainty is driven by two key factors, one domestic and one international. Domestically, dramatic policy change toward concentration of power, fewer checks and balances, and less competitive markets are likely to alarm international investors as well as curtail domestic economic activity. The latter factor concerns Mexico’s trade relationships within North America, especially the outcome of USMCA negotiations and their effect on nearshoring growth. Donald Trump, following his decisive electoral victory in the United States, has advocated for extreme trade protectionism, including against Mexican imports. While rhetoric must soon give way to actual policy implementation for the Trump administration, it remains to be seen if his most severe threats will be realized, such as the imposition of a 25 percent tariff on Mexican imports that would have likely been implemented the first day of February, had the Mexican president not engaged in a forty-five-minute call with Trump in which, among other things, she committed to the immediate deployment of 10,000 military forces in the northern border area of the country. The coming four years, but particularly this year, are expected to be quite uncertain as, according to mostly vague thresholds of cooperation on organized crime and migration, the main anchor of the Mexican economy (trade with the US) will become extremely volatile.

One thing is for sure: There will be uncertain and tense times ahead, beginning with the first months of the second Trump administration and continuing until an agreement for a revamped trade agreement is in place, most probably, one which considers a form of sectoral customs union. Mexico is the main US trading partner and source of imports. Mexico also is among the top trading partners of the majority of the fifty US states, so having a free trade agreement that anchors certainty and promotes competitiveness and productivity in North America is a matter of priority for the United States as well. That said, one should expect a great deal of rhetoric and threats to stand in the way before a consensus emerges. Mexico will have to stay focused and display a sophisticated and effective multilevel strategy to reduce uncertainty and enhance its position in the negotiating process. The most important aspect will be managing the effects of rhetoric on business sentiment and avoiding the implementation of drastic and costly measures for Mexicans and the country’s economy.

The drop in FDI noted above is a foreboding sign. Investors had been awaiting the outcomes of the Mexican judicial reform and the US election, among other factors, and now they watchfully wait to see the Trump administration’s actual policies. Meanwhile, so far, Mexico has seized less of the unique nearshoring opportunity than it should have from Asian competitors like India and Vietnam. To do so, it must still meet important nearshoring requirements such as improvements in infrastructure, energy reliability, and security.

In conclusion, the past several years of deepening democratic retrenchment have culminated in a seismic shift in Mexican politics. Despite continued improvements in poverty and inequality and steady, if low, income growth, these reductions in freedoms may soon threaten Mexico’s prosperity in the medium term. Most of the population has fluctuated between eagerness and indifference vis-à-vis these changes so far. If President Sheinbaum and Morena continue to consolidate power and reduce checks and balances, it may be too late to reverse course once the full effects are felt.

President Sheinbaum has made her choice on the political transformation of the country, moving toward more concentration of power in the executive and the cancellation of several checks and balances which, however imperfect and thus improvable, were there as both limit and anchor. Her second conundrum will be around the economic system, where a series of contradictions derived from the chosen course of action in the political sphere will play out. We have yet to see what can become of a new model and a new trend in the world: regimes with autocratic features or even full-blown autocracies that create the avenues, spaces, and conditions for the private sector to accommodate and flourish in an era of deglobalization and strategic ally shoring; post-truth politics and social media; and a more polarized and volatile ecosystem.

Note: The text of this report was finalized in February of 2025.


Vanessa Rubio-Márquez is professor in practice and associate dean for extended education at the London School of Economics’ (LSE) School of Public Policy. She is also a member of the Freedom and Prosperity Advisory Council at the Atlantic Council, an associate fellow at Chatham House, and a member of organizations such as the Mexican Council of International Affairs, the International Women’s Forum, Hispanas Organized for Political Equality, and LSE’s Latin America and the Caribbean Center. Previously, Rubio-Marquez had a twenty-five-year career in Mexico’s public sector, including serving as three-times deputy minister (Finance, Social Development, and Foreign Affairs) and senator.

Statement on Intellectual Independence

The Atlantic Council and its staff, fellows, and directors generate their own ideas and programming, consistent with the Council’s mission, their related body of work, and the independent records of the participating team members. The Council as an organization does not adopt or advocate positions on particular matters. The Council’s publications always represent the views of the author(s) rather than those of the institution.

Read the previous edition

2024 Atlas: Freedom and Prosperity Around the World

Twenty leading economists and government officials from eighteen countries contributed to this comprehensive volume, which serves as a roadmap for navigating the complexities of contemporary governance. 

Explore the data

Trackers and Data Visualizations

Jun 15, 2023

Freedom and Prosperity Indexes

The indexes rank 164 countries around the world according to their levels of freedom and prosperity. Use our site to explore twenty-eight years of data, compare countries and regions, and examine the sub-indexes and indicators that comprise our indexes.

About the center

The Freedom and Prosperity Center aims to increase the prosperity of the poor and marginalized in developing countries and to explore the nature of the relationship between freedom and prosperity in both developing and developed nations.

Stay connected

The post Mexico’s fork in the road: Rule of law or authoritarian shift?  appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>
The EU must become a strategic player in defense—alongside NATO https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/in-depth-research-reports/issue-brief/the-eu-must-become-a-strategic-player-in-defense-alongside-nato/ Wed, 05 Mar 2025 20:12:28 +0000 https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/?p=830654 The European Union and NATO need renewed alignment on defense to meet the new geopolitical moment. Refocused cooperation would provide a critically needed burden sharing to eliminate vulnerabilities and prepare Europe to withstand new realities.

The post The EU must become a strategic player in defense—alongside NATO appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>
Facing a revanchist Russia and an increasingly transactional United States, European countries should finally start working on several parallel tracks to strengthen the continent’s deterrence and defense. As European members of NATO discuss additional military contingents to mobilize to defend themselves with minimal or—some fear—no support from the United States, it also is crucial for the European Union (EU) to step up to bolster Europe’s defense. The EU’s action is urgently needed on cross-border issues that have a direct impact on the continent’s deterrence and defense posture but remain largely uncovered by NATO.

European countries lack vital logistical interoperability with infrastructural bottlenecks and regulatory inconsistencies hindering military mobility across the continent. They duplicate many military platforms but, at the same time, fail to acquire critical capabilities such as air defense. A still highly fragmented European defense technological and industrial base is protected by narrow national interests and is thus unable to address capability gaps, replenish dwindling arms stocks, and compete on the global level on defense innovation.

In the current extremely demanding times, a refined NATO-EU alignment on defense would provide a critically needed burden sharing to eliminate these vulnerabilities and prepare Europe to withstand potential contingencies.

The NATO-EU nexus

The recent public remarks by representatives of the Trump administration, who repeatedly claimed that Europe must take ownership of conventional security on the continent, mean that an effective burden sharing must be established between European NATO members and the EU to meet the challenge. Both organizations have complementary roles in defense to play, and despite the recent shockwaves that the emerging new transactional American foreign policy has sent to its allies in Europe, the requirement for complementarity in the NATO-EU defense effort remains crucial.

NATO has highly integrated structures and procedures and has developed regional defense plans, predetermined capability targets, and military standards. These assets are the result of decades-long work and would not be easy to replace anytime soon. The United States remains a crucial member of the Alliance, especially in such areas as command and control (C2), intelligence, and long-range strike that would be difficult to replace in the short and medium term.

Strategically vital EU and NATO eastern flank member states—Estonia, Latvia, Lithuania, and Poland—insist on their reliance on NATO as the primary security guarantor. So do the Nordic countries including the newest NATO members, Finland and Sweden.

However, the ongoing dynamics of the past several weeks show clearly that the modus operandi of NATO is about to change with the shifting role of the United States in it. Working through flexible formations of “coalitions of the willing” will most likely replace the rather bureaucratic and, therefore, slow-working methods of past decades. This is not the first time that NATO has undergone a transformation, which is a natural process in a changing world. Working toward the same goal of keeping the Euro-Atlantic area safe is what counts. A repeated assurance will be needed from the United States on this.

The EU, for its part, still lacks both formal competencies and a unified political ambition to step deeper into the defense planning and execution field. At its core, the EU is susceptible to singular member states’ malfunction, as seen in Hungary under Viktor Orbán and Slovakia under Robert Fico, who constantly put brakes on such otherwise widely supported processes as tightening sanctions on Russia. Russia puts enormous effort into expanding the malfunction to other EU members as well: The latest example is the for-now-failed attempt to install a pro-Russian president in Romania. To become autonomous in defense, as repeatedly demanded by France, the EU must first reform internally.

Russia’s main objective is to divide and weaken its most significant strategic rival, NATO. Any attempts to offer alternatives to the Alliance’s primacy in European defense would eventually play into Putin’s hands, undermining deterrence and putting the frontline EU countries at immediate risk. Russia’s continuous rejection of Ukraine’s membership in NATO is—although void—an indication that NATO retains its deterrence power. Allies on both sides of the Atlantic should continue working on this credible deterrence to stay in place—with the EU being an important partner in this regard.

The answer to the current situation is a stronger European pillar in NATO, with the EU bearing a larger and better aligned burden with the Alliance by internalizing and fully embracing its distinct and unique role in security and defense as a defense enabler. Through its budgetary and regulatory authority, the EU can and must ensure that the necessary conditions for implementing NATO’s defense plans in Europe are completely satisfied. This particularly applies to critical areas such as military mobility and defense industrial readiness.

The EU’s role in military mobility

It is alarming that despite their commitment since 2017 to improve military mobility across the EU, European countries still have insufficient cross-border logistical interoperability and face immense bureaucratic obstacles when preparing military convoys for transportation across the EU. Germany and the Baltic states are the two most obvious cases in this regard, both because of the challenges they face and the strategic roles they play.

Due to its central location in Europe, Germany is considered Europe’s key hub in military logistics. Germany is home to major NATO bases including the Headquarters Allied Air Command in Ramstein, the Airborne Warning and Control System’s main base of operation in Geilenkirchen, and the Strategic Air Lift Interim Solution base in Leipzig, among others. Its territory stretches between Europe’s main seaports—Rotterdam, Antwerp, and Hamburg, which are crucial for incoming allied military supplies and reinforcements—and NATO’s and EU’s eastern flank countries Poland and the Baltic states. Germany’s inland waterways—the Rhine and Danube—provide the north-south transportation corridor toward Romania. What stretches in between is Europe’s longest railway network, which, as of 2022, had a total length of 38,836 kilometers of railway lines.

From a military logistics perspective, railways are considered crucial because they allow the transport of numerous pieces of heavy military equipment in one load. However, because of many years of underinvestment and neglect, Germany’s railways, roads, and bridges are in dire shape and often technically incapable of handling such heavy transport. Shortages in special railway wagons, which often have to be supplied by commercial providers, add to the existing problem. Finally, there are immense bureaucratic hurdles remaining within the EU (and even among Germany’s federal states) when it comes to documentation and permits to be acquired before military cargo can move from one state to another.

Thus, the EU should increase its efforts to speed up Europe-wide infrastructure upgrades, increase the state-owned fleets of railway wagons for military transport, and take decisive steps to implement a “Military Schengen” regime. Based on the experience of the free movement of passengers and goods within the EU, this regime is crucial to minimize the paperwork—and thus valuable time—involved in moving troops and military equipment across the EU.

The Baltic states’ logistical accessibility is another key issue in implementing NATO’s defense plans in this strategically vital gateway region. Their railways are primarily of a wide Russian gauge (1,520 millimeters), which is incompatible with the European standard gauge (1,435 mm) rail tracks. Thus, Lithuania, Latvia, and Estonia remain better connected to Russia and Belarus than to their NATO and EU allies.

The RailBaltica project, designed to connect the Baltic capitals with Warsaw via an 870 km long European standard-gauge rail track, is facing significant cost overruns and delays. Now scheduled for completion by 2030, RailBaltica is crucial for the deterrence and defense of the Baltic states—especially considering potential obstacles in sending allied reinforcements and military supplies by ship through the congested Baltic Sea, given the substantial Russian military presence in the Kaliningrad exclave. The EU has already provided financial support for this project, but more assistance—and institutional clarity—is needed, particularly in terms of an EU-level centralized management oversight of this and other military mobility projects. After more than fifteen years of planning, the RailBaltica project, just like other infrastructural upgrades in the EU, must finally be prioritized politically, providing a necessary push and support to the implementing member states.

Europe needs a defense industrial revamp

Russia’s war of aggression against Ukraine has exposed Europe’s dysfunctional defense industrial landscape. The issue involves three factors: the status quo situation (current capability gaps and insufficient ammunition stocks), demand-side shortcomings, and supply-side risks. Whereas NATO’s main—though not sole—instrument to address this issue is to increase the target for member states’ defense spending, the EU has signaled the ambition to employ a more comprehensive approach. What started with the European Defense Fund to finance joint research and development projects in defense is now to be expanded through the still-under-negotiation European Defence Industry Programme (EDIP) to the areas of defense production and joint procurement. Action is urgently needed, but there is a risk of overstretching and losing focus on what really matters now and in the future.

What matters now is closing capability gaps, particularly in air defense, and filling Europe’s depleting ammunition stocks. It has been estimated that at the current production levels, Europe would need ten years to replenish its ammunition stocks in order to be prepared to defend itself. This timeline is far too long, considering German intelligence warnings about a potential Russian attack on European NATO member states by the end of this decade. While NATO sets its stockpile targets, the EU must utilize its regulatory powers and funding initiatives to push its member states to reach them.

Some short-term measures, such as the Act in Support of Ammunition Production, have already been implemented and are set to be transformed into long-term financing instruments through the EDIP. The proposal from the EU’s commissioner for defense and space, Andrius Kubilius, to implement mandatory ammunition stockpiles for EU member states, requiring them to meet NATO’s targets by 2030, would mirror similar EU measures in other critical areas, such as energy.

The discussion surrounding the increase of defense industrial production and joint procurement is closely tied to questions about potential adjustments to the current defense industrial supply and demand dynamics.

In terms of supply, the EU seeks to promote the purchase of arms manufactured by the European defense industry to strengthen and consolidate it while also avoiding restrictions on the use of weapons produced by foreign companies. Financial considerations are directly linked to this matter. Currently, the EU is divided into two main factions: one advocating for this European solution, and the other arguing that non-EU NATO allies—primarily the United States, UK, and Norway—who are major players in the defense industry, along with other key partners such as South Korea, should not be excluded from the EU’s funding mechanisms. On the demand side, the EU seeks to incentivize joint procurement by its member states to allow for bigger, cheaper, and more predictable orders, which would also lead to better standardization and interoperability of military equipment in use by the Europeans.

Keeping the non-EU NATO allies in the loop when contemplating new funding options is crucial for sustaining their commitment to Europe’s defense and accessing currently available off-the-shelf purchases of ammunition and legacy military platforms urgently needed in Europe in the short term. European countries such as Poland and the Baltic states are increasing their defense spending faster than any other European NATO member and are willing to spend the money on military platforms that meet three basic criteria—made by an allied country, proven to be of good quality, and available in the near future—making them eager buyers of US and South Korean production. Given their proximity to a potential future front line and their commitment to securing it for the sake of a free Europe, these choices should not be neglected in future EU funding schemes.

In the short term, instead of supply-side isolationism, demand-side corrections should be prioritized in the EU’s effort to play a more active role in strengthening the European defense technological and industrial base. With the EU’s support, favorable arrangements can be negotiated with foreign arms manufacturers, including fulfilling some parts of their contractual obligations in the EU, for example, in the areas of production, assembly, or servicing, and thus contributing to local economies, skill development, and sustainment of purchased arms’ life cycles locally while also securing the delivery of best quality, battlefield-proven military platforms for the European armed forces.

Thoughts on harsher supply-side interventions should be directed toward fostering the consolidation of emerging defense technology hubs in Europe. The defense industry is experiencing major tectonic shifts, with AI, drones, and robots entering the battlefield more rapidly than ever imagined. This is the area where the EU still has a chance to enter the global innovation race in defense and thus should focus on funding local defense and dual-use start-ups. It is high time to shift attention to niche technologies being developed in smaller EU member states, such as laser technologies in Lithuania and cyber technologies in Estonia, not to speak of the vast defense tech laboratory emerging in Ukraine, an EU candidate country. If properly funded, these EU-made technologies could soon bolster Europe’s deterrence and defense as crucial force multipliers.

Aligning NATO’s targets with EU defense initiatives

For the EU to embrace the role of a defense enabler means working out common NATO-EU mechanisms for transforming NATO’s targets into complementary EU defense initiatives in areas requiring increased cross-border European cooperation. Better interorganizational communication is crucial in this respect to avoid any potential duplication. At the same time, paying attention to non-EU allies’ involvement in EU defense industrial efforts is vital. The allied defense technological and industrial base must be interoperable across the Euro-Atlantic security area and should even look more proactively outward to provide a response to the growing strategic competition with the Russia-China-Iran-North Korea axis that—through involvement in Russia’s war against Ukraine—are also consolidating their military technological base.

The goal for both priority areas—military mobility and defense industrial revamp—is to scale up European rearmament, speed up allied deployment and reinforcements, and send a clear message to our strategic competitors: NATO and the EU are mutually reinforcing entities that aim to expand, not retreat. While a more far-reaching burden sharing with the United States on European defense is surely a huge challenge, it also is an opportunity for Europe to finally become a strategic player in defense.

About the author

Related content

Explore the program

The Europe Center promotes leadership, strategies, and analysis to ensure a strong, ambitious, and forward-looking transatlantic relationship.

The post The EU must become a strategic player in defense—alongside NATO appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>
Foreword: Protecting global freedom in an age of rising autocracy https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/in-depth-research-reports/books/foreword-protecting-global-freedom-in-an-age-of-rising-autocracy/ Wed, 05 Mar 2025 20:02:44 +0000 https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/?p=829894 Geopolitical shifts are weakening Western democracies, technology is reshaping governance, and authoritarianism is on the rise. How will these developments affect the world—and are there pockets of progress that remain? This foreword examines the state of global freedom, setting the stage for the country reports than follow.

The post Foreword: Protecting global freedom in an age of rising autocracy appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>

Table of contents

Will 2012 turn out to have been the high-water mark of human liberty? This volume documents that the downward trend in freedom and democracy, which started then, has continued for another year in 2024. Yet this Atlas also reminds us that there is hope amidst this adverse aggregate trend. In much of the world, women’s economic freedom is higher today than it was thirty years ago. Western Europe’s freedom is either unchanged or greater than it was fifteen years ago. The Global South is steadily becoming more prosperous.

The decline in freedom documented in this volume is clear, but it is also not a massive shift. Average global freedom has moved from Montenegro to Malawi, not from Sweden to Laos. Yet we can no longer maintain a Whiggish faith that we are on an inexorable path toward freedom, democracy, and prosperity, or that history has ended. As the fires of war burn in Eastern Europe, the Middle East, and Sudan, we must ask what has gone wrong, and what we can do about it. Measurement is the first task, and that is why this overview of liberty around the world is important.

The first section of this Foreword discusses the changing nature of the threat to freedom, and presents one hypothesis about rising executive aggrandizement. There has been a significant decline in the prevalence of coups since the 1960s, which means that democratically elected leaders need fear the “man on horseback” much less than in the past. Yet as the threat of military takeovers has fallen, the prevalence of “executive aggrandizements,” in which duly elected leaders push their power beyond constitutional limits, has not. Indeed, elected executives may be more likely to take risks precisely because military coups have become less plausible.

I present a simple framework for thinking about the interplay between technology and executive aggrandizement. Executives are limited by their ability to control the public sector and by popular opposition. Technology can enable the coordination of popular anti-regime action, as was shown vividly in the Twitter Revolutions of the Arab Spring. The increased threat of popular uprising may put limits on some political leaders, but technology can also increase the executive’s ability to control the public sector by monitoring disloyalty or malfeasance. Artificial intelligence (AI) could improve the central government’s ability to detect corruption. If the state is initially weak, the positive impact of technology on popular opposition may lead to less dictatorship. However, if the state is strong, technology will instead reduce the limits on executive activity.

The second section of this Foreword argues that geopolitical changes can also help explain why executive aggrandizement has increased and coups have fallen. Western powers, which used to engineer coups as Cold War policy, now intervene to reverse them. Even more importantly, the influence of the West, which championed democracy in the years after the Cold War, has declined. The 1990s was an era of democratic triumph, in which the strength of liberal democracies was at its apogee. What could have been more appealing to the former Warsaw Pact states of Eastern Europe than to rush toward European integration and prosperity? Mexico’s leaders similarly saw great advantages in tying their country to the United States through the North American Free Trade Agreement (NAFTA). In both cases, democracy ended up being the price of free trade.

Yet the last quarter century has seen a relative decline in the Western champions of liberty. The United States lost military face in its failed occupations of both Iraq and Afghanistan, and economic face in the global financial crisis. The economic importance of the European Union (EU) has declined, while China’s economic heft has expanded enormously. China’s growth provides an example of non-democratic success, and its foreign aid reduces the advantage of courting Western donors who have a deeper demand for democratic reform.

In the final section of the Foreword, I discuss the interplay between economic and political freedom. While I do not believe that complete economic freedom is necessary for political freedom, I do believe that a political executive with control over parts of the economy can use that control to augment its own political power. There are risks in supporting activist industrial and trade policies that enable political leaders to reward their supporters and punish their opponents. It would be far better for democratic leaders to articulate the positive case for freedom, which can both enable economic growth and empower human happiness, than to seek to micromanage the economy.

The man on horseback vanishes while executive aggrandizement persists

Bermeo documents that more than one-third of democracies faced coups between 1960 and 1964, and 15 percent of democracies were toppled by coups between 1965 and 1969. In every five-year interval since 1985, fewer than 5 percent of democracies fell to a coup. In every five-year interval since 1995, fewer than 10 percent of democracies have even faced the threat of a coup. Yet, as this volume documents, the global level of freedom has been declining since 2012.

Executive aggrandizement, where the executive expands its authority beyond constitutional limits, can erode freedom without the fireworks of a coup. Yet it has proven difficult to document a global wave in such expansions of incumbent power. Nevertheless, there are important examples, especially those of China, Russia, and Venezuela, in which political executives have significantly increased their power. Vladimir Putin and Hugo Chávez represent the more standard case in which a democratically elected executive expands his power. In the case of China, the more dispersed control of party leaders has been replaced by the more centralized control of Xi Jinping.

In this section, I first discuss the interplay between coups and executive aggrandizement, using Argentina’s 1930 coup as an example. I then turn to a framework that is meant to suggest how technological change might have influenced the prevalence of coups, protests, and executive aggrandizement. I focus on domestic forces that influence freedom in this section, and in the next section, I will focus on the role of foreign influence.

Coup and executive aggrandizement

Few coups seem so consequential as the 1930 coup in Argentina, which ended seventy-five years of political stability and liberal government and ushered in fifty years of coups and dictatorships. Argentina’s remarkable Generation of 1837, which included Domingo Sarmiento and Juan Bautista Alberdi, crafted that country’s 1853 Constitution and presided over a period of increasing freedom, wealth, and education. Like Britain before 1867, nineteenth-century Argentina was better at protecting freedoms than at promoting broad, uninfluenced suffrage, but after 1912, the Sáenz Peña Law made male suffrage universal, secret, and mandatory.

The Radical Civic Union (UCR) rode to power on the basis of broad population support in 1916, and came into conflict with the more conservative National Autonomist Party (PAN), which had held power since the end of Sarmiento’s presidency in 1874. Their conflict ended in 1930, when a military coup replaced the elected President Hipólito Yrigoyen with Lieutenant General Uriburu. Alemán and Saiegh provide evidence against “the claim that demands for drastic redistribution led to democratic breakdown is not a convincing explanation for the 1930 coup.” Instead, they see the coup as a response to the fact that Yrigoyen “used his authority to exclude the political opposition and take away their remaining bases of power.”

Alemán and Saiegh emphasize that the legislative divisions were not determined by ideology or attitudes toward redistribution. Instead, divisions were heightened over power plays, such as the frequent Federal “interventions” in which Yrigoyen replaced provincial governments with politicians that were more to his liking. While these interventions were and are (the last one occurred in 2004) supposed to be responses to unusual and deeply problematic local circumstances, there were twenty interventions during Yrigoyen’s first term and fifteen of these were done without legislative approval. During Yrigoyen’s second term, “between 1928 and 1929, he took over by executive decree the provinces of San Juan, Mendoza, Corrientes and Santa Fe,” and he nationalized the petroleum industry, which was also “seen as a political power-grab.”

On August 9, 1930, the opposition published the Manifesto of the 44 which denounced Yrigoyen for aggrandizement of executive authority. Within the month, a coup had begun and by September 10, Uriburu had replaced Yrigoyen as President of Argentina. Six more coups would follow in 1943, 1955, 1962, 1966, 1976, and 1981. Executive aggrandizement is a perpetual possibility, and, historically, the opponents of that aggrandizement often came from within the government, including from within the military.

Of course, there have been many cases of executive aggrandizement that have not met with opposition from the military. It took eleven years, and the realization that Hitler had led them into a military catastrophe, for any of the Wehrmacht’s leaders to fight against Hitler’s subversion of the Weimar Republic. Similarly, there have been many military coups that had little or nothing to do with executive aggrandizement, including Argentina’s 1943 coup, and the attempted coups in France in 1961, and Spain in 1981.

These two failed coups suggest that improvements in communications have reduced the ability of officers to command their soldiers to fight against political leaders. Improvements in information technology have made it easier for symbolically important legitimate leaders to communicate directly with the army, which can be effective because “military forces—especially perhaps conscript ones—are susceptible to numerous pressures from the civilian population and from civil institutions.”

During the weekend on April 22, 1961, a junta of French officers, hoping to keep Algeria an integral part of France, took control of Algiers. As Thomas writes, “de Gaulle’s military resources were unimpressive,” because “500,000 [soldiers] were in Algeria, whereas in France itself there were very few regular operational units.” Instead of fighting, on the evening of April 23, De Gaulle took to the radio.

The same voice that had travelled the airwaves in 1940 denouncing “the capitulation” to Nazi Germany in the name of “honor, common sense, and the higher interest of the Nation,” and inviting “all the French who want to remain free to listen to me and to follow me,” declared in 1961 that “I forbid every Frenchman, and in the first place every soldier, to carry out any order.” Even though the rebels controlled the Algiers stations, they could not stop ordinary citizens and soldiers from hearing De Gaulle on their transistor radios, and turning against the plot. The defeat of the coup has been called “la Victoire des Transistors.”

On the evening of February 23, 1981, armed agents of Spain’s Civil Guard, led by a Lieutenant Colonel, took control of the Congress of Deputies. In Valencia, General del Bosch rolled out his tanks and declared a state of emergency. Del Bosch had fought under Franco during the Spanish Civil War, and under German Command during World War II, and he wanted to stop Spain’s shift to liberal democracy. But at 1:14 a.m., King Juan Carlos appeared on television in the uniform of the Captain General of the Army and declared that “the Crown cannot tolerate in any form any act which tries to interfere with the constitution which has been approved by the Spanish people.” The coup promptly fizzled, and Spain’s democracy would survive.

In both France and Spain, coups were stopped by leaders who broadcast strong messages which fundamentally undermined their military subordinates. The framework in the next section will argue that improvements in communications technology more generally make it easier for leaders to stop rebellions from within. This is one hypothesis as to why the risks to freedom now come more from executive aggrandizement than from military coups.

Yet there are other reasons why the frequency of coups has declined, most notably the end of the Cold War and the changing behavior of Western powers. During the Cold War, American leaders often preferred a friendly military regime or monarchy to a hostile democratic one, and the US government supported coups from Tehran in 1953 to Chile in 1973. Since 1991, US-led regime change has meant overt invasion far more than covert coups. In 1994, the United States even acted to reinstate President Aristide of Haiti, who had been ousted by a coup in 1991.1 I will return to the role of the West in promoting democracy in the next section, after first providing a framework for thinking about the interplay between technology and constraints on political leaders.

Technology and constraints on chief executives

The section considers two impacts of improved information technology on the limits facing elected executives or autocrats. Information can be used to organize protests, such as the mass demonstrations in Tahrir Square, Egypt, which brought down the Mubarak regime in 2011, and that places limits on executive action. But information technology can also be used to centralize control over the public sector, such as by granting leaders the ability to communicate directly with soldiers during a coup. I will not focus on other impacts of communications technology, such as enabling leaders like India’s Narendra Modi to bond with their voters by using radio broadcasts and social media.

All actions that an executive might want to take will create some opposition from both the private and public sectors. That opposition places limits on the actions of the executive. I assume that the executive will not risk actions that generate sufficient opposition from either the public sector, which might refuse to implement the action, or the private sector, which might break out into mass protests. If technology expands the range of actions that the executive can take, then the technology is authority-enhancing, but if it contracts the range of executive action, then it is authority-eroding.

The limits on an autocrat’s options are captured by the two solid lines in Figure 1. If the autocrat wants to limit their opposition from either sector to a fixed amount, then his or her options are limited to a rectangle that is below the solid blue line and to the left of the solid orange line. I will argue that recent changes in communications technology have given effective autocrats more power over their own bureaucracies, causing the blue line to rise, but made private opposition more effective by enabling organization, which shifts the orange line to the left.

While China’s surveillance of its own private citizens is frequently discussed in the Western media, the surveillance of public sector workers and the associated anti-corruption campaign has been far more central to Xi Jinping’s centralization of power. The bribery convictions of Bo Xilai and Zhou Yongkang in 2013 and 2015 eliminated two potential rivals early in Xi’s term as president of China. Moreover, because China has “vague and incomplete anti-corruption laws that leave more room for party control,” and “institutional arrangements that centralize control over local anti-corruption agencies,” the fight against corruption essentially gives national leadership the ability to discipline a large swath of the public sector.

Figure 1. The autocrat’s options and technological change

Complaints by ordinary citizens play a significant role in China’s anti-corruption campaign, and those complaints are often transmitted electronically. Pan and Chen report that “China has devoted substantial resources to monitoring the performance of lower-tier officials” including “telephone hotlines,” “government-managed websites where citizens can complain online,” and “web and mobile apps designed for individuals to complain to the government.” In order to reduce bribery, some Chinese “hospitals even put in place monitoring systems with facial recognition technology to identify unregistered medical representatives or unapproved visits.” Fan et al. document that computerizing value-added tax invoices “contributed to 27.1 percent of VAT revenues and 12.9 percent of total government revenues in the five subsequent years.” Beraja et al. examine artificial intelligence procurement across China and find that “autocrats benefit from AI: local unrest leads to greater government procurement of facial-recognition AI as a new technology of political control, and increased AI procurement indeed suppresses subsequent unrest.”

If laws are sufficiently fuzzy, then abundant electronic monitoring, supplemented by the complaints of random citizens, should make it possible to convict almost any public servant. That ability to convict provides a chief executive with enormous control over the public sector. Information technologies, such as the on-board computers carried by commercial truckers, have long been used by corporate chieftains to monitor their workers. There is every reason to believe that government leaders should be able to do the same, and that better technology will strengthen the hold of authoritarian leaders over public sector employees.

For that reason, Figure 1 depicts the blue line rising higher because of better monitoring technology. As the autocrat has an increasing ability to repress opposition within the public sector through better monitoring, they have a greater ability to undertake activities, from suppressing religious minorities to invading their neighbors, that might have been opposed by some public sector workers. This increased range of executive power provides one reason why information technology can lead to less individual freedom. This effect should be much stronger in countries with a more effective public sector.

Better technology can also give the public sector more ability to monitor their private citizens, but there is a countervailing force that I suspect is more important worldwide. Information technology also enables the coordination of citizens, especially through the sharing of information. Historically, cities have been hotbeds of regime change, partially because density enabled the coordination of opposition to the government. Information technology makes it easier to spread information both about why someone should protest and where a protest will occur.

In 2011, protests were coordinated on Twitter in Tunisia and Egypt and two autocrats were forced out of power. In 2022, Maria Litvina called for protests against the Russian invasion of Ukraine on Instagram. While she was arrested, thousands still took to the streets and protests in Russia have continued since then. While the Putin regime does not seem to be in danger, this activity still creates direct and indirect costs for the government, including the challenge of locking up thousands and potential embarrassment on the world stage.

In Figure 1, I chose to capture the ability of improved private coordination as empowering private protest against government, which increases the costs to governments of taking actions that generate private opposition, which shifts the orange line to the left. Consequently, it is unclear whether technology will reduce freedom, by strengthening executives’ controls over their bureaucracies, or increase freedom, by making citizen protest easier. In countries that have large and capable public sectors, such as those in East Asia, I suspect that technology will typically be freedom-reducing. In places where the public sector is weak, then technology seems more likely to encourage regime change, which may lead autocrats to be more cautious.

The core hypothesis put forth in this section is that technology has centralized authority within the government, which can reduce freedom for the rest of us. Direct communication between legitimate leaders and soldiers has reduced the threat of coups. Better monitoring of subordinates has reduced local corruption. The implication of this change is that the centralized authority of autocrats has increased. We now turn to a second hypothesis: that the decline in freedom is associated with the relative weakness of the West.

The decline of the West and the limits on autocracies

The 1990s were a strange time in world history. The Soviet Union was no more. Liberal democracies had triumphed, and they were much wealthier than their alternatives. They were role models for countries emerging from communism. Moreover, the Western democracies were successful enough that they could indulge in the luxury of encouraging others to embrace democracy.

Levitsky and Way emphasize the “international dimension of regime change” and especially the power of “linkage” or “the density of ties (economic, political, diplomatic, social, and organizational) and cross-border flows (of trade and investment, people, and communication) between particular countries and the United States, the European Union (EU), and Western-led multilateral institutions.” These ties led Latin American and Central European countries to democratize in the years after the fall of the Soviet Union.

The two democratizing nations that Levitsky and Way highlight were strongly influenced by the EU and NAFTA. In Slovakia, Vladimír Mečiar “regained control of the government and rapidly sought to eliminate major sources of opposition” and “in the absence of extensive linkage to the West, Mečiar’s autocratic government might well have consolidated power.” But the appeal of access to EU was enormous, and “it employed conditionality in 1997 by rejecting Slovakia’s request to begin accession negotiations due to a failure to meet democratic criteria.” This rejection had political bite, and “Slovakia’s failure to move towards EU membership, for which the EU directly (and very publicly) blamed Mečiar, created a salient electoral issue that benefited the opposition.” In 1998, Slovakia rejected Mečiar and the country has been democratic since then.

The authoritarian PRI (Institutional Revolution Party) controlled Mexico from 1929 to 2000, but the technocratic leadership of the party during the 1990s saw the tremendous economic advantages that could come by enacting NAFTA. While “successive U.S. administrations backed the PRI governments and explicitly excluded democracy from NAFTA negotiations… NAFTA increased Mexico’s salience in the U.S. political arena,” and “as NAFTA negotiations began, the PRI was subjected to intense international scrutiny, including unprecedented media coverage of electoral scandals and US congressional hearings on Mexican human rights”. Mexico’s attempt to placate the United States meant that “by the late 1990s opposition forces had strengthened to the point where they could win national elections” and that “preventing such an outcome would have required large scale fraud or repression, which, given Mexico’s international position, would have been extremely costly.”

Both of these case studies suggest that EU and US influence encouraged democracy in the 1990s either through clear conditionality (as with Slovakia) or through the court of US public opinion (as with Mexico). The democratizing push reflected the Western victory in the Cold War. That victory meant that Western powers looked like role models, and that access to Western markets was enormously profitable. Unlike during the Cold War, when the United States was eager for allies of any political variety, in the 1990s, the West felt sufficiently secure that they could risk alienating countries by pushing democracy.

Indeed, the level of American confidence reached such heights that the United States waged wars in both Afghanistan and Iraq with a stated goal of regime change. When President Bush addressed the nation on October 7, 2001, he said our goal in invading Afghanistan was to “defend not only our precious freedoms, but also the freedom of people everywhere to live and raise their children free from fear.” Two years later, when announcing the invasion of Iraq, President Bush reiterated “we will bring freedom to others and we will prevail” and “we have no ambition in Iraq, except to remove a threat and restore control of that country to its own people.” I am not claiming that promoting democracy was the primary objective of either war, but just that a significant number of policymakers believed that it was reasonable to go to war to promote freedom elsewhere.

Those wars were two reasons for the decline in US influence since 2006. While the US military readily defeated the armed forces of both Iraq and Afghanistan, the US government failed to establish lasting democracies in either country. Moreover, the US management of both occupations appeared incompetent to many global observers. The disastrous collapse of an American housing bubble then brought economic suffering not only to the United States but to the world. The United States started to seem far less like a role model, and a less triumphant United States was less likely to take on the mission of democratizing the world.

Europe’s economic clout has also waned over the last thirty years. While the EU produced one-fourth of the world’s gross domestic product in 1990 (at purchasing power parity prices), it produced less than 15 percent of global output in 2024. After 2005, Turkey seemed poised to join the EU, but it never came to be, partially because many Turks opposed EU membership. One Turkish poll in 2013 reported that “while one third of those surveyed agreed Turkey should persevere with the goal of becoming an EU member, two-thirds of the public lean closer to the view that Turkey should not become a full member.” Given those views, it is unsurprising that President Erdoğan supported a political referendum that would entrench his presidential power despite the risk that such a move would alienate the EU.

Europe’s relative economic heft has diminished, partially because of the growth of China. Between 1990 and 2024, China’s share of the world economy rose from 3.6 percent to 19.05 percent. A strong and wealthy China provides an alternative, non-democratic role model, and access to Chinese aid and markets most certainly does not require democratizing reform. Shinn and Eisenman write that “China’s focus on state sovereignty and reluctance to interfere in the internal affairs of other nations have assisted its ability to develop cordial ties with Africa.” Democratic powers are far less dominant now than they were twenty years ago, and that can help explain why freedom has declined since 2012.

Economic freedom and political freedom

Declining belief in the value of economic freedom in the West may also contribute to declining political freedom both in the Western democracies and elsewhere. Milton Friedman famously saw a particularly tight link between economic and political freedom, writing that “capitalism is a necessary condition for political freedom.” Similarly Hayek saw economic planning as leading down the “road to serfdom.” Critics of this perspective have pointed out that the Scandinavian social democracies seem to have enjoyed almost perfect political freedom, even when their economies looked decidedly non-capitalistic. They have also noted that East Asian economies with very limited political freedom have occasionally been hotbeds of capitalism.

Yet even if Friedman’s statement goes too far, there is an essential truth in his perspective. When the public sector has more discretion to interfere with the economy, then it will also have more ability to reward its supporters and punish its opponents. Hugo Chávez’s direct control over Venezuela’s petroleum enabled his domestic and foreign activities, including subsidizing friendly neighbors with cheap oil. Relief from regulation has been one of the most common sources of illicit public revenues throughout history, and those revenues can also be used to enhance political power.

But as the example of Scandinavia illustrates, not all economic interventions empower political executives. If the rules are decided collectively and enforced strictly, then they are not a source of power for the executive. If the rules are ad hoc and decided by the executive on the spot, then economic intervention can help consolidate political strength. In Chávez’s Venezuela or the Shah’s Iran, public oil revenues became a tool for tyranny. In Norway, they did not, partially because oil revenues go largely into a sovereign wealth fund that is managed by the politically independent Norges Bank.

Yet in recent years, political leaders in the United States and EU have championed economic policies, including industrial policy and tariffs, that are largely discretionary. If a politician seeks support from domestic producers of some product, then that politician can reward those producers either with subsidies, now called industrial policy, or with a selective tariff on that product. The politicization of US pre-World War II tariffs generates little hope that any future discretionary tariff policy will somehow be divorced from politics. Moreover, even if the United States limits its discretionary interventions, public support for these policies, from both parties, reinforces the idea that political leaders should have the right to favor some industries over others.

The case for economic freedom would be strong even if there was not a link between economic and political freedom. Yet, as long as economic policy Edward L. Glaeser interventions provide more scope for political leaders to reward and punish, then these interventions will also pose risks to political freedom. If the leaders of the West want to reverse the downward trend in freedom, then they should continue championing both political and economic liberty and continue to be engaged with the world.


Edward L. Glaeser is the Fred and Eleanor Glimp professor of economics at Harvard University, where he has taught microeconomics and urban economics since 1992. Glaeser previously directed the Taubman Center and the Rappaport Institute. He also leads the Urban Working Group at the National Bureau of Economic Research, co-leads the Cities Programme at the International Growth Centre, and is a senior fellow at the American Enterprise Institute. Glaeser has written hundreds of papers on cities, political economy, and public economics. He received his PhD from the University of Chicago in 1992.

Statement on Intellectual Independence

The Atlantic Council and its staff, fellows, and directors generate their own ideas and programming, consistent with the Council’s mission, their related body of work, and the independent records of the participating team members. The Council as an organization does not adopt or advocate positions on particular matters. The Council’s publications always represent the views of the author(s) rather than those of the institution.

Read the previous edition

2024 Atlas: Freedom and Prosperity Around the World

Twenty leading economists and government officials from eighteen countries contributed to this comprehensive volume, which serves as a roadmap for navigating the complexities of contemporary governance. 

explore the data

Trackers and Data Visualizations

Jun 15, 2023

Freedom and Prosperity Indexes

The indexes rank 164 countries around the world according to their levels of freedom and prosperity. Use our site to explore twenty-eight years of data, compare countries and regions, and examine the sub-indexes and indicators that comprise our indexes.

about the center

The Freedom and Prosperity Center aims to increase the prosperity of the poor and marginalized in developing countries and to explore the nature of the relationship between freedom and prosperity in both developing and developed nations.

stay connected

1    Former President Aristide has accused the United States of forcing his resignation during a later 2004 coup; the United States has denied these allegations.

The post Foreword: Protecting global freedom in an age of rising autocracy appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>
Making AUKUS work: The case for an Indo-Pacific defense innovation consortium https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/in-depth-research-reports/issue-brief/making-aukus-work-the-case-for-an-indo-pacific-defense-innovation-consortium/ Tue, 04 Mar 2025 15:34:04 +0000 https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/?p=824384 The AUKUS partnership, focused on defense innovation in the Indo-Pacific, faces challenges in technology-sharing due to regulations like ITAR and EAR. The proposed Indo-Pacific Strategic Partnership for Accelerated Research and Knowledge in Defense (SPARK) aims to overcome these barriers, fostering faster co-development and co-production of advanced defense technologies

The post Making AUKUS work: The case for an Indo-Pacific defense innovation consortium appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>
Now well into its fourth year, the Australia-United Kingdom-United States (AUKUS) security partnership remains many months away from rapidly delivering advanced capability to the Indo-Pacific. Notwithstanding its prominent place in Washington’s ambitions to design a “hellscape” for China in the region, AUKUS has continued to focus primarily on assisting Australia in building a fleet of conventionally armed, nuclear-powered submarines—a long-term project that will take years, if not decades, to materialize. To bridge this gap, the AUKUS nations have concentrated on creating a seamless export environment for emerging and disruptive technologies with more immediate applications. AUKUS Pillar II, already intended to advance the joint development of advanced capabilities, should be better engineered to support advanced co-development, co-production, and co-sustainment quickly and effectively.

The reality of multilateral defense innovation cooperation, however, is that existing technology-sharing rules and a general lack of understanding of how to navigate the defense sector—both basic requirements for establishing a foothold in a tightly regulated market—remain significant barriers to enhanced industrial collaboration within AUKUS and beyond. In particular, the International Traffic in Arms Regulations (ITAR) and Export Administration Regulations (EAR), the US defense and dual-use technology-sharing regimes, continue to obstruct meaningful allied co-innovation despite reform efforts spanning the Obama, Trump, and Biden administrations. Even a much-touted new ITAR exemption for AUKUS, currently undergoing implementation, took years of lobbying and legislating to enact, and its ultimate impact remains uncertain, contingent on industry buy-in.

Even as the Trump 2.0 administration will likely continue restricting transfers of sensitive capabilities, these export barriers should not prevent the United States from acting swiftly—where clear win-win benefits exist—to enhance cooperation on high technology with key allies. With tensions rising over Taiwan, Washington has a substantial opportunity to advance this agenda in the Department of Defense’s priority region. While ITAR and EAR reform will take time, the Indo-Pacific offers fertile ground for collaboration, with its diverse—if disparate—network of technologists, companies, and investors eager to participate in defense innovation. The important groundwork of fostering relationships between commercial sellers and military buyers cannot and need not wait for these legal frameworks to catch up. These efforts must necessarily proceed in tandem with new export rulemaking and, indeed, would help justify and accelerate those legal changes. To seize this moment, a new mechanism is needed.

Enter the Indo-Pacific Strategic Partnership for Accelerated Research and Knowledge in Defense (SPARK). Inspired by and drawing from the best practices of ongoing NATO innovation efforts—which Rob Murray, one of this article’s authors, created and oversaw for a time—SPARK is our proposed Indo-Pacific initiative to actualize AUKUS Pillar II with dedicated capital and procurement vehicles. If properly constructed, SPARK will rapidly cultivate government relationships, institutional knowledge, and public-private investment pathfinders—critical lifelines for a small business or start-up seeking to navigate the capital-intensive defense innovation landscape.

For SPARK to achieve its potential, it will require strong backing from a wide array of public and private actors to meet the unique demands of its strategic environment. Despite its current limitations, AUKUS Pillar II already carries the broad political and institutional support necessary to grow a new regional effort, making it an ideal initial tether for SPARK and a launchpad for expanded Pillar II engagement with Japan, South Korea, and other key security partners. This new construct will enable Pillar II to establish new structures and incentives for innovators across the Indo-Pacific and facilitate the vast technology talent and capital flows already present in the region.  

Growing priority, piecemeal approach

Defense technology has become a central regional priority amid China’s rapid expansion of its nuclear forces, naval fleet, and munitions stockpiles, as well as its continued provocations in the South China Sea. In 2023, the Department of Defense spent over $1.2 billion on partner capacity-building efforts in the Indo-Pacific, nearly a third of its entire international security cooperation budget. That same year, the Pentagon’s Pacific Deterrence Initiative was funded at a record $9.1 billion—$3 billion more than the original request to Congress. Buttressed by record-high foreign military sales driven by the war in Ukraine, US armaments cooperation in the Indo-Pacific has expanded accordingly.

Yet, despite these efforts, the lack of a unified Indo-Pacific defense innovation framework has become increasingly apparent. While various US-led efforts—such as the Quadrilateral Security Dialogue, Minerals Security Partnership, and informal Chips 4 Alliance—are slowly addressing this gap, no comprehensive approach exists to rapidly enhance strategic technology acquisition and investment in the Indo-Pacific. The Pentagon’s defense innovation partnerships with Japan, Singapore, and India are all important stepping stones toward greater cooperation, but these bilateral “defense tech bridges” remain fragmented and limited in scope. AUKUS Pillar II, despite its potential for expansion, still limits the involvement of key regional leaders, further restricting its impact. Currently, Washington’s new Partnership for Indo-Pacific Industrial Resilience (PIPIR) seeks to unite the region’s national armaments directors, adopting a similar approach to the Ramstein Group established within NATO after Russia’s full-scale invasion of Ukraine in 2022.

While encouraging, PIPIR’s efforts may dissipate unless a means exists to channel this momentum into concrete investments in immediately fieldable capabilities, alongside the longer-term AUKUS submarine effort (Pillar I). At present, US efforts to invest in Pillar II—though regarded as Washington’s flagship defense industrial cooperation effort in the Indo-Pacific—may not be up to the task of scaling development and production. The 2024 National Defense Authorization Act allocated $25 million for “AUKUS innovation initiatives,” while the Further Consolidated Appropriations Act of 2024 provided an additional $12.5 million for these initiatives, alongside $14.7 million for “AUKUS and coalition warfare” prize challenges. The President’s Budget Request for 2025 identified a further $79.8 million in research, development, test, and evaluation funds for AUKUS Pillar II—three times the 2024 budget. While these funds add some heft to the Pillar II project, the scale of investment needed to fully realize the transformative potential of these emerging technologies is vast, far exceeding current appropriations. To put these numbers in context, just in the first quarter of 2024, Alphabet, Apple, Microsoft, and Nvidia collectively spent $30 billion on research and development. Since 2021, the US defense technology sector has absorbed $130 billion in private venture capital. As it stands, AUKUS Pillar II lacks the sustained, comprehensive investment needed to fulfill its ambitious goals, risking significant delays in a climate where speed and scale increasingly determine success or failure. If the Indo-Pacific’s purse strings tighten permanently—after expanded military budgets are wasted on outdated or untested capabilities with few relevant uses—the United States may miss a critical opportunity for meaningful change. Failure to mobilize public and private networks around Pillar II now may risk a return to a more anemic, capital-scarce Indo-Pacific defense technology ecosystem—an outcome that SPARK could help arrest or entirely avoid.

Key priorities

To maximize its effectiveness, SPARK should serve as a catalyst for AUKUS Pillar II industry engagement, drawing on lessons from other alliance consortia—especially those with a proven record of fostering innovation. For instance, NATO’s Defense Innovation Accelerator for the North Atlantic (DIANA) and its sister initiative, NATO Innovation Fund (NIF), launched in 2022 and 2023, respectively, offer a promising model for this new Indo-Pacific framework. DIANA, which became operational in June 2023, seeks to accelerate technology adoption through a network of accelerators and test sites, as well as mentorship and grant opportunities. Meanwhile, NIF was established to provide long-term investment in deep-technology start-ups. With its comprehensive approach toward innovation, the DIANA-NIF model—adapted to the unique requirements of the Indo-Pacific—could galvanize public-private collaboration and innovation across a range of allies and partners. In particular, SPARK should emulate a few key aspects of the DIANA-NIF efforts:

First, SPARK should establish overlapping networks of accelerators and test sites aimed at both low- and high-technology and information-readiness-level partners. As with DIANA, this network should not be overly restrictive, stretching across the AUKUS nations and extending to other important industrial partners in the Indo-Pacific—especially Japan, South Korea, Canada, New Zealand, Singapore, the Philippines, and India.

Second, SPARK should adopt a set of enhanced mechanisms for continuous engagement between the private sector and potential military end users. Like DIANA, SPARK should host regular prize challenges in critical technology areas. Successful applicants to these SPARK challenges would receive access to initial grant seed funding, mentorship, and complimentary facilities before undergoing a second round of reviews to secure additional funding for transition assistance across the acquisition valley of death. Moreover, SPARK should assign a military expert to all successful applicants to ensure frequent and formal end-user engagement as their capabilities progress from prototype to production (idea to impact). While DIANA has begun to bridge this servicemember-technologist gap in NATO, its companies still have infrequent exposure to live end-user feedback. SPARK can avoid this shortcoming by establishing a formalized network of postings for military test and evaluation personnel.

Third, SPARK should strengthen this support by establishing its own rapid acquisition vehicle, designed to provide companies in priority areas with targeted assistance to scale production. Through targeted transition assistance in the form of matching government funding and commercial investment, this vehicle would emulate recent enhancements to the Pentagon’s commercial and dual-use technology procurement efforts, led by organizations such as the Defense Innovation Unit, Strategic Capabilities Office, and Office of Strategic Capital. Along with service-level innovation units like the US Air Force’s AFWERX and US Navy’s Disruptive Capabilities Office, these improved acquisition pathfinders have proven effective in unlocking new technologies for the US military. By implementing a similar combination of activities in the AUKUS+ context, SPARK would help introduce the Indo-Pacific defense industrial base to new contracting models with built-in flexibilities to accommodate today’s rapid innovation cycles and the private sector’s focus on commercialization.

Fourth, SPARK should create an Indo-Pacific Trusted Capital Marketplace where vetted investors can engage defense and dual-use technology start-ups aligned with regional security priorities. The SPARK investment arm should consider a two-track financing approach, building on US efforts to invest in strategic technologies while combating adversarial capital. Track one, inspired by NIF but focused on debt rather than equity, should provide capital-intensive loans and loan-based guarantees (as opposed to equity financing) with long maturity timelines and highly favorable lending terms necessary for deep technology research and maturation. Given the paucity of deep-tech loan financing for national security, a more attractive set of investment mechanisms, backed by the capital and credit of the United States and key regional allies, would fill a crucial gap and complement wider venture capital efforts. Track two, similar to DIANA’s Allied Capital Community, is a new effort intended to fulfill short-term investments for late-stage prototype development. It would cater to “impatient capital” and quickly move projects to operational status.

Finally, SPARK should establish a Joint Interoperability Center of Excellence. Without an alliance architecture resembling NATO, Indo-Pacific countries struggle to achieve and maintain interoperability with the US military, much less with one another. A center of excellence focused on this exact issue would help define the functional and performance requirements of systems operating within an Indo-Pacific coalition across a variety of specific contingencies. By enabling industry to better understand and meet the demands that will be placed on dual-use systems, this center would ensure that companies with little experience working alongside the military can develop into effective partners quickly.

Road map for adoption

The war in Ukraine has underscored the critical importance of rapid technological adaptation and the swift deployment of advanced capabilities, particularly in electronic warfare. Ukraine’s efforts to counter sophisticated Russian electronic warfare tactics with innovative, quickly developed solutions demonstrate the need for a defense framework that can respond rapidly to immediate threats and foster long-term technological advancement. Drawing on these lessons, SPARK should prioritize the development and deployment of electronic warfare systems, unmanned platforms, and cyber defense tools to ensure that Indo-Pacific forces can swiftly adapt to an evolving security environment.

To achieve this parity, SPARK must balance the rapid deployment and production of existing technologies with the development of new innovations. Initial priorities should focus on immediately impactful technologies such as unmanned systems, cyber defense, and secure communications. Longer-term projects should cover game-changing technologies, such as responsible artificial intelligence, quantum computing, and advanced materials. SPARK should operate on three strategic tracks:

  1. Rapid deployment track: Focus on quickly deploying mature technologies that are near operational readiness, ensuring they can be delivered to operators in the field as soon as possible.
  2. Innovation track: Concentrate on developing early-stage technologies that require more time to mature but hold significant future potential. This track will drive sustained innovation and technological superiority.
  3. Production track: Address the critical challenge of scaling production to meet urgent demands. This track will support and accelerate manufacturing capabilities, ensuring that new technologies can be produced at speed and scale.

Attracting private venture capital to SPARK will be crucial, particularly in aligning investment with mission-driven objectives rather than purely profit-maximizing strategies. The incentives for private capital should focus on profit optimization rather than profit maximization—emphasizing stable, long-term returns over short-term gains. Investors will be drawn to the opportunity to participate in projects with significant strategic importance, backed by government and military support, and the potential for steady, reliable returns over time.

To maximize effectiveness, SPARK should be structured as a cohesive entity that integrates research, development, testing, production, and investment under a unified governance framework. Unlike NATO’s DIANA-NIF model, where components function independently, SPARK’s unified structure will ensure seamless coordination across these tracks. It should be established as a regional consortium, open to Indo-Pacific nations beyond AUKUS, with a central management office overseeing operations. This office, potentially based in a neutral regional location, would enable rapid decision-making and coordination, supported by a rotating leadership structure and an advisory board comprising representatives from government, military, and industry sectors.

An Indo-Pacific SPARK would fulfill the glaring need for a unified innovation and technology acquisition framework in Washington’s most consequential arena of superpower industrial competition. A phased approach will be essential. In its first two years, through 2027, SPARK should focus on deploying mature technologies, enhancing production capabilities to meet immediate needs, and augmenting existing efforts such as the Replicator Initiative. Establishing accelerated production lines and leveraging private sector capacity will be critical in this phase. The subsequent phase will expand research and prototype development, guided by continuous feedback from end users. This integrated, multitrack strategy would ensure that SPARK can deliver immediate operational results while also securing long-term technological superiority, making it a cornerstone of regional security and technological collaboration tailored to the Indo-Pacific’s unique environment.

About the authors

Elliot Silverberg is the Director of Research at the Defense Innovation Board (DIB) in the US Department of Defense.

Jacob Sharpe is a Project Lead at the Defense Innovation Board (DIB) in the US Department of Defense.

Rob Murray is a nonresident senior fellow in the Forward Defense program and the Transatlantic Security Initiative within the Atlantic Council’s Scowcroft Center for Strategy and Security.

The views expressed are the authors’ and do not represent those of any organization or affiliation.

Related content

Explore the program

Forward Defense, housed within the Scowcroft Center for Strategy and Security, generates ideas and connects stakeholders in the defense ecosystem to promote an enduring military advantage for the United States, its allies, and partners. Our work identifies the defense strategies, capabilities, and resources the United States needs to deter and, if necessary, prevail in future conflict.

The post Making AUKUS work: The case for an Indo-Pacific defense innovation consortium appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>
Financing the future: Unlocking private capital for global infrastructure and climate goals https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/in-depth-research-reports/issue-brief/financing-the-future-unlocking-private-capital-for-global-infrastructure-and-climate-goals/ Mon, 03 Mar 2025 21:09:37 +0000 https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/?p=829551 MDBs and international financial institutions alone cannot bridge the climate and development financing gaps.

The post Financing the future: Unlocking private capital for global infrastructure and climate goals appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>

The Intergovernmental Panel on Climate Change (IPCC) Sixth Assessment Report paints a dire picture of the possibility of avoiding the 1.5 degrees Celsius (°C) rise in global surface temperature. According to this report, “global warming is more likely than not to reach 1.5°C even under the very low [greenhouse gas] emission scenario” and it will be “harder to limit warming below 2°C.” The report provides strong evidence that, based on the current trends of greenhouse gas (GHG) emissions around the world, 1.5°C will be reached before 2040, which is a bit more optimistic than a 2023 article published in the journal Nature, which estimated the world will reach 1.5°C by 2029, leaving the global community with a mere five-year runway. Yet, a recent report by the European Commission warns that we already passed the 1.5°C-mark in 2024. The IPCC report also highlights the fact that there is a massive shortfall in the level of financial flows needed to achieve climate targets in different countries and sectors.

The link between social and physical infrastructure and economic growth and stability is un-disputable. However, the scale of financing required to meet the Sustainable Development Goals (SDGs) and establish climate-resilient infrastructure for the future global economy is the subject of widespread estimation and debate. These projections differ significantly based on various factors, such as the target year (2030, 2040, or 2050), the specific areas of focus (whether traditional infrastructure, SDG priorities, or the energy transition), and the underlying assumptions shaping the analyses. Despite these variations, one undeniable truth emerges: the financing gap is projected to reach trillions of dollars annually over the next ten to thirty years. This gap has been growing wider with the rising population (and, hence, growing needs for new infrastructure and maintaining the existing ones) and the increasing frequency of severe climate, destroying current critical infrastructure in many countries and negatively impacting their operations in others. Hence, the world not only needs to bridge the financing gap for building and maintaining basic infrastructure—between 1–4 billion people lack dependable access to electricity, water, internet, and sanitation—but old infrastructure must be climate proofed and new infrastructure must be built with climate resiliency in mind. Without bridging this massive and growing SDG and infrastructure financing gap, global growth will come to an eventual halt in just a few decades. 

This presents the global economy with the enormous challenge of funding its sustainable development and infrastructure needs. Given the magnitude of these gaps, it is evident that states, multilateral development banks (MDBs), and international financial institutions (IFIs) alone cannot bridge them. Therefore, there is an urgent need for innovative alternative financing solutions, namely from private sources. 

This report aims to provide a nuanced analysis on this very topic. Section 2 provides a holistic review of the investment gaps in global infrastructure, energy transition, and achieving SDGs. Section 3 highlights several challenges as they relate to de-risking, leveraging ratios, and potential sources of financing. Section 4 presents the case for making infrastructure an asset class that would attract private investment. Section 5 concludes the report. 

About the authors

Amin Mohseni-Cheraghlou is a Senior Lecturer at American University and a former Senior Advisor at IMF’s Office of Executive Directors.

Nisha Narayanan is a senior fellow at the Atlantic Council’s GeoEconomics Center and is the head of country risk at a global financial institution.

Hung Tran is a nonresident senior fellow with the Atlantic Council’s GeoEconomics Center and and senior fellow at the Policy Center for the New South.

Our work

At the intersection of economics, finance, and foreign policy, the GeoEconomics Center is a translation hub with the goal of helping shape a better global economic future.

The post Financing the future: Unlocking private capital for global infrastructure and climate goals appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>
Toward equitable debt contracts: Preventing de facto seniority-clause escalation in the sovereign lending space https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/in-depth-research-reports/issue-brief/toward-equitable-debt-contracts-preventing-de-facto-seniority-clause-escalation-in-the-sovereign-lending-space/ Mon, 03 Mar 2025 21:07:54 +0000 https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/?p=829865 China's stringent clauses are hindering debt restructuring negotiations for low-income borrowers. Here's how the IMF and World Bank can intervene.

The post Toward equitable debt contracts: Preventing de facto seniority-clause escalation in the sovereign lending space appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>

The limitations of the Group of Twenty (G20) “Common Framework” have been extensively discussed and actionable solutions have been put forward. Tackling those limitations of the Common Framework is crucial for countries currently in debt distress, which experienced “significant delays” in the obtention of debt relief. As stressed by Kristalina Georgieva, managing director of the International Monetary Fund, “The framework can and must deliver more quickly.”

What’s hampering progress? Coordination issues, for one thing, but numerous voices also point to China’s role in hindering progress toward resolving the global debt crisis. The People’s Republic of China—a member of the IMF—has not only lent significant sums to borrower nations but also has the capacity to slow down processes because of the preferential terms in its lending agreements.

Overall, 147 countries—representing two-thirds of the global population and 40 percent of the world’s gross domestic product (GDP)—have either benefited from China’s Belt and Road Initiative (BRI) projects or shown interest in joining the program. By 2023, Chinese investment had begun to rebound since China’s zero-COVID policies, but China’s resistance to debt relief for its low-income borrowers will fuel sovereign defaults for years to come. China has spent an estimated $1 trillion through the BRI, thereby considerably strengthening its influence across Asia, Africa, and Latin America. Laos, for instance, owes almost half of its external debt (65 percent of its GDP) and is struggling to repay the debt that financed infrastructure like the high-speed Laos-China railway. China’s ownership of around 17.6 percent of Zambia’s external debt also slowed down Zambia’s debt restructuring negotiations significantly, contributing to a lengthy negotiation of two and a half years.

This piece outlines how China’s lending practices harm low-income borrowers and hinder debt restructuring negotiations through the use of debt clauses giving it de facto seniority. It further outlines ways for the Bretton Woods institutions to collaborate to change these dynamics and improve financing prospects of borrower countries and a more level field for lenders.

About the author

Lili Vessereau is a Research Scholar, Teaching Fellow and Fulbright Scholar at Harvard University, where she focuses on sovereign debt and macroeconomic impact of climate change.

Our work

At the intersection of economics, finance, and foreign policy, the GeoEconomics Center is a translation hub with the goal of helping shape a better global economic future.

Related content

The post Toward equitable debt contracts: Preventing de facto seniority-clause escalation in the sovereign lending space appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>
The art of the transatlantic deal https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/in-depth-research-reports/report/the-art-of-the-transatlantic-deal/ Mon, 03 Mar 2025 20:38:38 +0000 https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/?p=829708 The transatlantic relationship is shifting with US president Donald Trump's return to the White House. Nevertheless, discreet deals across the US-EU trade, energy, and defense sectors are possible.

The post The art of the transatlantic deal appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>

Table of contents

Introduction
Trump and the European Union
The EU response: A new transatlantic deal?
Building a series of deals
Beyond the deal
Mechanisms for a transactional relationship

Introduction

With the February 10 executive order renewing and enhancing US tariffs on steel and aluminum,1 President Donald Trump has given shape to his vision of the United States in the global economy. It is a vision of economic security based on walling off the United States from free flows of international trade and no longer providing economic largesse to others for the sake of systemic stability. He is not alone in his views; indeed, his return to the White House signaled that much of the US public is tired of the obligations of international leadership, both political and economic. Trump won the 2024 Presidential election largely because of fears about the US economy, and tariffs were a prominent part of his campaign. Although his voters may not have fully understood the implications of such measures, the Trump administration is now demonstrating that tariffs—or at least the threat of them—are central to the US approach to the global economy. This shift will have economic and political ramifications around the globe.

For Europe, and especially for the unique institution that is the European Union (EU), this marks the beginning of a new phase in the US-European relationship, one based on different assumptions than those that have guided the transatlantic partnership over the last eighty years. Europe can no longer assume the existence of a strategic partnership in which the United States serves as the protector. Nor can Europe be passive in this new world and simply wait for the old pre-Trump consensus on US trade and foreign policy to reemerge. European leaders have long given priority to ensuring that it supports Washington’s choices and vice versa. Even the structure of Europe today—with its two premier institutions, NATO and the EU—came out of a European design built with strong US support. But today, Europe faces its own challenges: a faltering economy, an aggressive neighbor and unsettled region, a “systemic rival” in China, and a range of internal political challenges, led by far-right extremism. For Europe to deal effectively with the new US reality, it must have its own consensus, reflecting its own interests and environment.

One thing is clear: the new US-EU relationship will be far more transactional. The second Trump administration will not judge European countries as loyal allies, but rather according to their strengths and weaknesses as rival negotiators and what they bring materially to the relationship with the United States. In response, the EU and its member states should not depend on the idea of a strategic partnership but rather seek to conclude a series of deals. While the EU may also seek to maintain and support the international legal order—including the World Trade Organization-based trading system—it should not look to the United States to participate in this endeavor. If anything, the US approach is likely to challenge European efforts to strengthen the international legal regime and multilateral governance. Nor should European leaders imagine that the second Trump administration is an aberration; Trump’s victory has emboldened the isolationist and nationalist tendencies in the United States, and they will be a key—if not dominant—force for some years to come. The EU should plan accordingly.

Trump and the European Union

The possibility of a Trump presidency has caused much consternation in Europe, and deservedly so. The first Trump administration proved itself hostile to both NATO and the EU, and Trump himself has repeatedly criticized those institutions as well as many individual European governments, especially Germany. His second term may see less criticism of NATO since military spending by European governments has increased. Trump seems convinced that his earlier criticisms drove that increase and European leaders will not disagree, although an argument can certainly be made that Russian President Vladimir Putin was even more influential. But Trump may also calculate that even more pressure—including demanding military outlays at three, four, or even five percent of gross domestic product—could benefit his efforts to further reduce European reliance on the United States.

But whichever path he takes toward NATO, Trump is likely to continue his rants against the EU. Trump has long believed that the EU was set up to “take advantage” of the United States, especially through trade.2 He has focused on trade in goods, where the EU has a significant trade surplus with the United States, second only to the surplus held by China. But the EU’s $202 billion imbalance in goods trade in 2023 is significantly offset by the US surplus in trade in services, bringing the total to $125 billion.3 Throughout the campaign, Trump made his position very clear, saying he would impose a 10 percent tariff on goods from Europe: “The European Union sounds so nice, so lovely. All the nice European little countries that get together, right? They don’t take our cars. They don’t take our farm products. They sell millions and millions of cars in the United States. No, no, no, they are going to have to pay a big price.”4

But Trump’s concerns about the EU are about far more than trade. His antagonism is rooted in the view that the EU itself was created so that a group of smaller countries could take advantage of the United States. In this view, the EU has become a trading and regulatory power that is protectionist at its core, while refusing to take on the security and defense responsibilities that such a status should require. In his first term, Trump was an active supporter of Brexit, and he and other officials repeatedly asked other EU member states when they would be leaving the Union. He also floated the idea of a bilateral US-Germany trade deal before then-Chancellor Angela Merkel told him several times that this was impossible; that only the EU could negotiate on trade.5

Every indication is that these long-standing views will remain constant throughout the second Trump administration. Thus, European leaders should not only expect criticism about their defense and trade policies, but also an intentional effort to divide EU member states from each other and weaken the institution. Given Trump’s transactional approach to foreign policy—it is all about the deal—negotiating with a divided group of small countries would be preferable to dealing with one of the most powerful economic blocs in the world. Moreover, Trump does differentiate between European countries and leaders. He has praised Hungarian President Victor Orban as “a great man,”6 and Prime Minister Giorgia Meloni of Italy as a “fantastic woman,”7 but has been openly critical of Germany and its current Chancellor Olaf Scholz and his predecessor, Angela Merkel.

The EU response: A new transatlantic deal?

Thus, as the second Trump administration swings into action, Europe—and specifically the European Union—finds itself in a challenging situation. With war on its doorstep and its economy slumping, Europe must now also renegotiate its most important international partnership. Moreover, it must do so with a partner whose leader is unpredictable and clearly not committed to long-standing assumptions about the desirability of a strong transatlantic partnership. In fact, the first challenge for the EU will be to convince the Trump administration that engagement with the EU can be worthwhile.

For that reason, in the short term the EU must respond to a transactional US president and his threat to renew steel and aluminum tariffs with a good deal—but one that also incorporates Europe’s interests. While some observers argue that the EU should respond to tariffs with retaliation, tariffs would raise costs in Europe at a time of already high prices. But tariffs do provide leverage; indeed, Trump often characterizes potential US tariffs as bargaining tools and clearly used them to elicit some concessions from both Canada and Mexico before suspending those tariffs for a month. And the EU must soon decide whether and how it will use its own leverage. It is now finalizing a retaliation list in response to tariffs the United States levied on black olives in the first Trump administration. And it must decide by March 31 whether to continue the suspension of retaliatory tariffs established in response to initial US tariffs on steel and aluminum.

The Trump administration, in announcing renewed steel and aluminum tariffs, cancelled the Biden administration’s arrangement with the EU to admit those goods under a tariff-rate-quota (TRQ). But it has also held off imposing those tariffs until March 12, leaving a window for negotiation. The EU should take full advantage of that window, resisting the temptation to retaliate immediately and instead focusing on developing a deal that could stave off US tariffs while also serving EU interests. It may be that the threat of retaliation will be required to get the United States to negotiate, as during Canada’s and Mexico’s recent experiences with the Trump administration. Even then, the question is whether EU threats of retaliatory tariffs will bring Trump to the negotiating table or reinforce his antagonism toward the EU. The answer is likely to depend on what else he believes could be gained by negotiating. Thus, any retaliatory tariffs—to be useful—should be part of a larger deal.

Leaders would do well to review the June 2018 deal between then EU Commission President Jean-Claude Juncker and President Trump.8 In that statement, they agreed “to work together toward zero tariffs.” They also pledged not to “go against the spirit of this agreement,” which was widely interpreted as a “no new tariffs” pledge while negotiations were proceeding. Any new deal must begin with an understanding that new tariffs will not be imposed by either party in the wake of the deal, including the steel and aluminum tariffs announced on February 10. Ideally, one result would be to launch renewed negotiations to address the global steel and aluminum overcapacity issue—an issue of importance to both the United States and the EU—and remove those existing TRQs and threats of tariffs.

With tariffs put on the backburner, the deal must address the US trade deficit with the EU, and especially that of trade in goods. As mentioned above, in 2023 the US trade in goods deficit with the EU was significant, and it is on track to be even greater in 2024.9 But efforts to rebalance the number and type of goods traded across the Atlantic may be complicated by the high level of integration between the two economies. Much of transatlantic trade—perhaps as much as 65 percent by some estimates—is driven by strong mutual investment in which US and European companies have established major manufacturing facilities on both sides of the Atlantic.10 Thus, the direction and level of goods trade reflects supply chains in which auto parts, for example, move across the Atlantic several times during production of a finished product. Among the leading US imports from Europe are pharma products, chemicals, autos and components, and machinery. Similarly, the same industries are among the top US exports to the EU. Raising tariffs on EU imports in these industries could disrupt complex supply lines and may even complicate efforts to reduce the US deficit. Taxing components shipped by BMW in Germany to its US manufacturing facility not only raises the cost of a US-made car, but over the longer term threatens the cost-effectiveness of that facility and its jobs. Because BMW is the largest exporter of automobiles from the United States ($10 billion in 2021),11 the health of that factory is important to the reduction of the trade deficit.

Instead, a US-EU deal should seek to reduce barriers to trade in the sectors where trade is heavily integrated, while looking for additional US exports in key commodities. For example, one longtime point of contention between Washington and Brussels has been the EU tariffs of 10 percent on passenger vehicles. These apply to all EU vehicle imports—not just to US vehicle exports—except where trade agreements have been negotiated. The recently updated EU-Mexico trade agreement included a removal of the 10 percent tariff on autos that met a 60 percent threshold of EU or Mexican content.12 Despite the lack of a US-EU trade deal, this might be an opportune time to provide US exports with a waiver or suspension, especially given President Trump’s attention to this issue. The EU might take a page from Trump’s comments on reciprocity and reduce the tariff to the US level of 2.5 percent. Such a tariff reduction is unlikely to lead to a massive increase in cars entering from the United States as larger US vehicles have not proven popular in Europe. In 2023, the EU imported motor vehicles valued at approximately €10 billion from the United States (including US-manufactured German brands), while the EU exported automobiles totaling about €40 billion to the United States.13 A reduction in auto-related tariffs could be an important symbolic gesture, while not threatening the already struggling European car industry. Moreover, such a tariff reduction might lay the groundwork for a broader US-EU bilateral trade deal on auto parts and supplies.

The key element in any US-EU deal would be for the EU to provide assurances of continued significant growth in energy-related imports from the United States, especially liquified natural gas (LNG). This was a major part of the 2018 deal between then-Presidents Jean-Claude Juncker and Donald Trump. In fact, US LNG exports to Europe have tripled since 2021, from 18.9 billion cubic meters (bcm) to approximately 56.3 bcm in 2023.14 Even as Europe reduces its overall gas consumption due to energy efficiency gains and a shift toward renewables, there remains significant potential for expansion of US exports, which now make up about 50 percent of EU LNG imports. Thus, any deal should include steps to reduce barriers to LNG trade so that trade can grow as much as the market allows. On the US side, the cancellation of the Biden administration’s suspension in licensing new LNG projects—accomplished on Trump’s first day in office—should reduce EU concerns about the long-term availability of US LNG.

On the EU side, a pledge that new regulatory measures will not hinder LNG trade should be considered. For example, efforts to foster carbon capture utilization and storage—which are expected to be launched under the new European Commission—should not create requirements that US-based exporters cannot meet. Similarly, the scope of the EU’s Carbon Border Adjustment Mechanism (CBAM) should not be expanded to include LNG until after 2030. These are pledges that also preserve much-needed flexibility in European energy systems until renewables are sufficient.

Perhaps most immediately, consultations should be pursued to ensure that the EU’s new methane regulation does not inhibit the potential import of US LNG. Beginning in May 2025, that regulation establishes reporting requirements for importers, and in 2027 will mandate that EU importers ensure that imported LNG has been subject to methane reduction measures equivalent to those required in the EU.15 US methane regulations introduced by the Biden administration were a step in the direction of satisfying this requirement, but Trump is widely expected to rescind those rules. It may be that removing the financial penalties in the US rules but retaining other elements could provide a basis for a US-EU agreement that will allow US exports to continue unimpeded. A deal could include a pledge to begin consultations to resolve this challenging issue.

Finally, the EU could usefully add to the deal a pledge regarding defense procurement. European defense expenditures have grown significantly over the past three years and are likely to grow even more in the next decade. By some estimates, 80 percent of EU defense funds are spent on procurement from outside the EU, much of it from the United States.16 To date, the EU and its member states have provided more than €52 billion in military assistance to Ukraine.17 Making clear to the Trump administration how much the EU and its members plan to spend on US defense equipment over the next two to four years could be a significant element in a transatlantic deal. The EU could also pledge that there would be no discrimination against US defense companies established in Europe as it develops its EU defense industrial base.

Some may argue that such a deal will result in the EU giving more than it gets. That may be true, but these items also reflect Europe’s interests and likely behavior in any event: Importing LNG and buying weapons from the United States is going to happen. It is in the EU’s interest as much as that of the United States that methane requirements do not hinder the European supply of energy. And if removing a 10 percent tariff on US auto imports leads to an understanding that the United States will not impose more punitive tariffs on steel and aluminum, that would be a win for European industry.

Building a series of deals

Even if such a deal is reached, however, it will not fully resolve the trade tensions between the EU and the Trump administration. As a perpetual dealmaker, President Trump will soon start looking for the next deal that will reduce the trade deficit with the EU. The EU, in turn, will have to decide whether to engage. Depending on the situation, and the ambitions outlined by the United States, entering another negotiation may or may not support EU interests. However, there are some key areas where further deals might benefit both parties.

An area of increasing priority for both the United States and the EU is that of trade in critical minerals. Neither is a major producer of these commodities but rather must rely on imports to fulfill most of their needs. Extraction and processing of these minerals tends to be limited to a small group of countries, with China playing a large role. In 2022 the United States designated fifty minerals as critical to its economy, and China supplies more than half of US imports for nineteen of these minerals.18 The EU is in a similar situation, although it has set targets in its recent Critical Raw Materials Act to extract 10 percent of its annual consumption and process 40 percent of that consumption by 2030. It also envisions a major role for recycling of these commodities from used batteries, computers, etc.19 With the United States and the EU in similar straits, it makes sense to recognize any production from each other as suitable for barrier-free import into the other through an accord on critical minerals. The new administration is also unlikely to insist on the labor and environmental protections sought by the Biden administration in its version of a critical minerals agreement.

Aside from addressing the deficit in trade in goods, future US-EU deals could also include some key regulatory relief from European requirements for US companies. Too often, it is the regulatory differences that stifle US exports to Europe and increase the trade deficit. Europe has the right to regulate its own market and the products it allows into that market, as does any other jurisdiction. But while it is unlikely that any regulatory compromise could be achieved on such politically sensitive issues as GMOs or hormones in food, there are some pending rules in Europe that will cause serious transatlantic disruptions when they are enforced. Two key examples are the Deforestation Regulation (implementation was recently delayed until the end of 2025) and the Corporate Sustainability Due Diligence Directive (CS3D), which is scheduled to be applied in mid-2027. The European Commission has launched an effort to “simplify” both regulations, but it is not yet clear what that potential reform will include.

In its current form, the deforestation rules require companies to certify that products they place on the EU market do not come from recently deforested land, including land outside the EU. The stringency of these rules varies depending on whether the country of production is at a high or low risk for deforestation. To date, the European Commission has not started rating countries according to risk, and there are questions about whether the United States will qualify for low-risk status. But because these doubts are mostly focused on the lack of forest preservation regulations—rather than actual data about the growth or decline of forest cover—the EU should consider providing flexibility in order to find a way to provide the United States with an early identification as a low-risk country.

CS3D requires companies in scope and operating in Europe to identify and address any adverse human rights or environmental impacts resulting from their business. Moreover, they are to ensure that their subsidiaries and business partners also adhere to these rules. For those companies with global supply chains—including US companies—this could have an enormous impact. An offer to open early negotiations between the United States and the EU about how to enforce this rule could help identify ways to ease its implementation. It should be noted that both the deforestation regulation and CS3D have received a significant amount of criticism from within the EU—including from the major center-right political group, the European People’s Party (EPP)—as well as support from companies who have already taken major steps to comply. Even if the EU moderates some of the provisions of these rules in response to domestic criticism, an early beginning to transatlantic discussions on implementation would be worthwhile.

Finally, another area of potential agreement between the EU and the Trump administration is that of digital trade. At its most basic level, this is about agreeing on requirements for digital invoices and other necessities for buying and selling goods online. Negotiations over such an agreement had been underway at the World Trade Organization (WTO) for some time. The Biden administration pulled out of those talks last year, saying that the essential security exemption was inadequate to allow restrictions on data flows to some countries. With the United States moving away from its long-time stance in support of free data flows, there is more opportunity for a bilateral agreement with the EU. While European data authorities have not shown much concern until recently about transferring data to countries such as China and Russia—compared to their focus on US data transfers—that also is beginning to shift. As a result, the prospects for a digital trade agreement between the United States and the EU have improved.20

This is hardly an exhaustive list of topics for a US-EU deal. While it is unlikely that a comprehensive free trade agreement is achievable, Germany’s designated chancellor Friedrich Merz has suggested this would be desirable.21 But even without such an umbrella agreement, there are opportunities for negotiating on specific topics. Key to identifying the most valuable areas for negotiation should be whether they improve the business climate across the Atlantic, and for the United States, whether barriers to US exports are reduced. A joint deal to resist Chinese overcapacity in steel and aluminum or to reduce the dangers posed by data transfers to China, whether in connected cars or through other modes, or an agreement on critical minerals that might boost US exports to Europe—these are just some of the specific arrangements that could be discussed. Initially a transatlantic deal might simply launch negotiations on such topics, giving both sides a further opportunity for hailing another agreement later. Even small deals can be instrumental in building some transatlantic good feeling, as demonstrated by the 2019 beef agreement, which was greeted with much enthusiasm by then-President Trump.22

Organizing such a deal will not happen overnight. It will involve weeks, if not months, of building a case for cooperation and then careful negotiation. The EU has made clear that it is willing to move down this path, as Trade Commissioner Maroš Šefčovič stated soon after Trump’s inauguration.23 President Trump began by announcing his America First Trade Policy but refrained from imposing trade penalties immediately. He then announced steel and aluminum tariffs but delayed their implementation until March 12—clearly opening a window for negotiations.

Beyond the deal

Even if the Trump administration and the EU succeed in concluding a deal, this will not resurrect the strategic partnership that has been central to transatlantic relations for the last seventy years. This will be a transactional US administration, and no single deal will lead to a long-term partnership. As with China, Saudi Arabia, Canada, Mexico, and others, Europe can expect the Trump administration to alternate threats with statements about the benefits of deals.

This method of operation is in part derived from the commercial real estate environment that is part of the president’s background. But it is also in keeping with the mood of the United States, as reflected in the 2024 election. Americans are largely focused on the domestic agenda, especially the economy and immigration, and they expect these to be the top priorities of the new administration. Whether it is justified by the data or not, many Americans believe that the economy is in poor shape and that trading partners have taken advantage of the United States.24 Thus, they are willing to give President Trump an opportunity to try his strategy of reducing access to the US market and seeking investments that will boost US industry. While polls show that many Americans are supportive of NATO,25 and believe the US should continue to support Ukraine,26 the election demonstrated that economic concerns far outweigh foreign policy—and even long-standing partnerships—as priorities for the American people.

As a result, Europe must prepare itself for a new US foreign economic policy, one based on transactionalism and nationalism. The EU as an institution will face some particular challenges. The Trump administration is likely to differentiate between European countries based on their trade surplus or deficit with the United States and the level of their defense spending. Individual member states may be offered opportunities for special deals with the United States, even though it is the European Commission that holds legal competence to negotiate such accords. The Trump administration’s closeness to key tech industry leaders will lead to challenges to EU digital regulation as well as to its competence in competition policy.

Thus, beyond being willing to negotiate a deal, the EU needs to demonstrate that it is a strong negotiating partner. Europe should be able to provide real benefits if a deal is reached, but also to exact costs if warranted. The EU’s trade defense measures are little understood in Washington and not viewed as a serious retaliatory capability, if viewed at all. Moreover, the EU’s recent trade deals with Mercosur (the South American trade bloc) and Mexico have not stimulated any concerns in Washington that Brussels might be gaining an advantage in international trade, despite the European Commission’s messaging on this point.27 Perhaps most importantly, sluggish European growth coupled with political weakness in two major member states (i.e., France and Germany) raise doubts about the value of Europe as an economic partner, despite the steady and significant increases in US-EU trade and investment. This skeptical attitude is only reinforced by the failure of Europe to grow global tech companies that would demonstrate prowess in the twenty-first century economy.

To be viewed by Trump’s Washington as an important economic and international actor, the EU must meet three challenges:

  • It must jump-start its economy. The current debate over competitiveness, grounded in the Draghi28 and Letta29 reports of 2024, is a good first step, but there must be real action and measurable change. Reversing a slow-growth economy will not happen overnight, but a significant reform of capital markets coupled with a genuine simplification of some regulatory requirements and a focus on expanding the already vibrant European start-up environment would be good indicators that change is underway. The new European Commission led by President Ursula von der Leyen must meet this challenge or the EU will become increasingly irrelevant in the eyes of US policymakers.

  • The EU, working with its member states, must clearly define its own interests. As the Trump administration is intently focused on the US domestic economy, the EU also must clarify its objectives and examine its priorities. It will not always be possible to pursue its own policy objectives while also aligning with the United States. Europe, for example, remains committed to decarbonization and the Paris accord, while the Trump administration seeks to ramp up fossil fuel production and restrict renewables. President Trump has a track record of relishing negotiations with those who act on their own interests first, such as China or Saudi Arabia. The EU should define what it wants from the United States and clearly understand its own position before entering negotiations with the Trump administration.

  • European rhetoric must also change. In fact, it has already started to do so, as President von der Leyen’s speech at Davos demonstrated, laying out a willingness to cooperate with the United States while also clarifying how EU interests and priorities may differ from those of the United States. With Trump in the White House, disagreement with the United States may become more normal for the EU, but European rhetoric should focus on issues that can be negotiated or that directly affect EU interests. In the past, European criticisms of the death penalty or lack of gun control in America only exacerbated tensions. Also, many Europeans tend to be intensely critical of their own governments, including the EU institutions. Politicians, think tank analysts, and leaders frequently complain in public and private about disunity within Europe and the EU’s slow political process. Whether one agrees with these criticisms or not (and for many US analysts, our own government seems even more divided and dysfunctional), voicing them will not convince the Trump administration that the EU will be a credible interlocutor.

Mechanisms for a transactional relationship

European leaders and policymakers must be both realistic and imaginative about the mechanisms used to further US–EU discussions. Any deal is likely to create a need to launch consultations on specific issues, and there will be some who will use this to argue for a more comprehensive framework like the US-EU Trade and Technology Council (TTC). However, it should be remembered that the Biden administration accepted the EU proposal for the TTC in part simply to affirm the importance of the relationship with the EU. The Trump administration has no such ambition and is unlikely to duplicate a mechanism that took considerable time from several cabinet-level officials. However, the first Trump administration did convene two US-EU dialogues—the Energy Dialogue and the China Dialogue—and was willing to engage in consultations when they could see a clear US interest. Despite differences over tariffs and other matters, there are numerous issues that could be discussed productively between the United States and the EU.30

During the second Trump administration, there are likely to be three distinct types of US-EU consultation mechanisms:

  • A very specific, working-level consultation that addresses a particular issue, including issues identified during high-level meetings. These may at times veer toward real negotiations. But they will be limited in addressing only the specific topic, and they are unlikely to evolve into a more institutionalized task force or ongoing discussions after the specific matter has been resolved.

  • A continuation of established but rather technical dialogues, such as the Joint US-EU Financial Regulatory Forum, which was established in 2016 as an enhanced version of the EU-US Financial Markets Regulatory Dialogue. The forum addresses money laundering, market stability, and banking oversight, as well as other financial market matters. But while the Financial Regulatory forum tackles issues of clear value to both the United States and the EU, the separate Joint Technology Competition Policy Dialogue probably faces a more uncertain future. Not only was it established during the Biden administration, but it reflects a desire on the part of both parties to use competition policy to restrain market-leading tech companies. While the Trump administration includes a range of views on tech and competition, it is unlikely to engage in a transatlantic discussion of competition policy while the president is criticizing Europe for fining US tech companies. Overall, these technical dialogues are likely to suffer, although some will survive. But without high-level encouragement, these are likely to be more restrained in terms of their scope and may become less frequent if leaders discourage staff from engaging.

  • A series of disconnected but parallel political dialogues, including the Energy, China, and Cybersecurity Dialogues. These are generally high-level dialogues, with a cabinet/commissioner-level leadership meeting annually and working-level continuing discussions throughout the year. In the past, they have been forums for discussion and debate, rather than negotiation, and have served to demystify decisions and build understanding, if not consensus. Such dialogues will either proliferate or disappear according to the interests of both the Trump administration and the EU. The Energy and China Dialogues are likely to persist, given the high priority both parties give to these issues. The Cyber Dialogue is also likely to continue and might be used to raise other technology-related issues where there is not enough harmony to convene a separate dialogue. Another potential dialogue could focus on Ukraine, including its reconstruction. In the absence of a comprehensive TTC-like forum, the question is whether these political dialogues could also address more technical issues. Could the Energy Dialogue, for example, work to address the potential conflicts in methane rules and other issues that could stymie future US LNG exports? Could the China Dialogue work to harmonize US and EU export controls on key technologies?

Given the Trump administration’s hostility to the EU as an institution, this disaggregated set of mechanisms is probably more achievable and effective than something like the TTC. The trick will be to identify issues on which there is some congruence on US and European priorities. Where there is not—with US and EU views far apart on issues such as climate change, for example, and potentially AI—such dialogues would be less productive unless there is a concrete pledge to seek to ameliorate differences.

During the next four years—and perhaps longer—we can expect the transatlantic partnership, and especially the US-EU relationship, to undergo a sea change. Long established assumptions about strategic alliances and jointly protecting the world order will have to change. The Trump administration will expect the EU to act in keeping with Europe’s interests, and especially for the short-term benefit of the European economy. This is, after all, the Trump plan for the United States. Thus, when dealing with the United States, European leaders should worry less about having the United States understand and support their position and instead be clear in promoting Europe’s interests. They should also understand that while deals and agreements are possible, under the Trump administration they will not lead to a rejuvenated US-EU strategic partnership. The calculation of Europe’s value to the United States will begin again the next day. In the end, the best strategy for the European Union will be to grow its economy and strengthen the unity of its members. When the EU can present itself as a strong and coherent actor, with an economy that is recognized as key to the success of US companies, it will find more opportunities to engage with Trump’s America—and to do so on its own terms.

About the author

Related content

Explore the program

The Europe Center promotes leadership, strategies, and analysis to ensure a strong, ambitious, and forward-looking transatlantic relationship.

1    “Adjusting Imports of Steel into the United States,” Presidential Actions, White House, February 11, 2025, https://www.whitehouse.gov/presidential-actions/2025/02/adjusting-imports-of-steel-into-the-united-states-afbe/.
2    Gabriela Galindo, “Trump: EU Was ‘Set Up to Take Advantage’ of US,” Politico, June 28, 2018, https://www.politico.eu/article/donald-trump-eu-was-set-up-to-take-advantage-of-us-trade-tariffs-protectionism/.
3    US Census Bureau, “Exhibit 20a: U.S. Trade in Goods by Selected Countries and Areas, BOP Basis,” https://www.census.gov/foreign-trade/Press-Release/current_press_release/exh20a.xlsx; and US Census Bureau, “Exhibit 20b: U.S. Trade in Services by Selected Countries and Areas,” https://www.census.gov/foreign-trade/Press-Release/current_press_release/exh20b.xlsx.
4    Angela Barnes and Piero Cingali, “Trump Says ‘Lovely’ EU Will Have to Pay a ‘Big Price’ to Trade with US,” Euronews, October 30, 2024, https://www.euronews.com/business/2024/10/30/trump-says-lovely-eu-will-have-to-pay-a-big-price-to-trade-in-us.
5    Sonam Sheth, “Angela Merkel Reportedly Had to Explain the ‘Fundamentals’ of EU Trade to Trump 11 Times,” Business Insider, April 22, 2017, https://www.businessinsider.com/trump-trade-merkel-germany-eu-2017-4.
6    Teri Schultz, “Why Trump Is Lavishing Praise on Hungarian Prime Minister Viktor Orban,” Transcript, National Public Radio, August 20, 2024, https://www.npr.org/2024/08/20/nx-s1-5075164/why-trump-is-lavishing-praise-on-hungarian-prime-minister-viktor-orban.
7    Barbie Latza Nadeau and Sophie Tanno, “Trump Hails Italy’s PM as ‘Fantastic Woman’ as She Visits Him in Florida,” CNN, January 5, 2025, https://www.cnn.com/2025/01/05/europe/trump-italian-pm-meloni-mar-a-lago-intl/index.html.
8    “Joint US-EU Statement following President Juncker’s Visit to the White House,” European Commission, July 25, 2018, https://ec.europa.eu/commission/presscorner/api/files/document/print/en/statement_18_4687/STATEMENT_18_4687_EN.pdf.
9    In 2024, from January through November, the US trade in goods deficit totaled $213 billion, compared to $202 billion for all of 2023. See US Census Bureau, “Trade in Goods with the European Union,” https://www.census.gov/foreign-trade/balance/c0003.html.
10    Daniel S. Hamilton and Joseph P. Quinlan, The Transatlantic Economy 2024: Annual Survey of Jobs, Trade and Investment between the United States and Europe (Washington: Foreign Policy Institute, Johns Hopkins University SAIS/Transatlantic Leadership Network, 2024), 20, https://www.amchameu.eu/sites/default/files/publications/files/transatlantic_economy_2024_0.pdf. The report says: “65% of U.S. imports from the EU consisted of intra-firm trade in 2021 . . .  [and] intra-firm trade also accounted for 39% of U.S. exports to the EU+UK,” Executive Summary, v.
11    Andy Kalmowitz, “BMW Is Still America’s Car Export King,” Jalopnik, February 16, 2022, https://jalopnik.com/bmw-is-still-americas-car-export-king-1848548771.
12    “EU and Mexico Seal Trade Deal Ahead of Donald Trump’s Return,” Financial Times, January 17, 2025, https://www.ft.com/content/f4dabbf4-46de-4ffb-b27c-fc2b72f485aa.
13    “USA-EU International Trade in Goods Statistics,” Eurostat, December 20, 2024, https://ec.europa.eu/eurostat/statistics-explained/index.php?title=USA-EU_-_international_trade_in_goods_statistics.
14    European Commission, “United States of America,” https://energy.ec.europa.eu/topics/international-cooperation/key-partner-countries-and-regions/united-states-america_en; and Council of the European Union, “Where Does Europe’s Gas Come From?,” March 21, 2024, https://www.consilium.europa.eu/en/infographics/eu-gas-supply/.
15    European Commission, “Questions and Answers on the EU Regulations to Reduce Methane Emissions in the Energy Sector,” May 27, 2024,  https://ec.europa.eu/commission/presscorner/detail/en/qanda_24_2258; and Ben Cahill and Hatley Post, “EU Methane Rules: Impact for Global LNG Exporters,” Center for Strategic and International Studies,  May 3, 2024, https://www.csis.org/analysis/eu-methane-rules-impact-global-lng-exporters.
16    European Commission and the High Representative of the Union for Foreign Affairs and Security Policy, A New European Defence Industrial Strategy: Achieving EU Readiness through a Responsive and Resilient European Defence Industry, Joint Communication to the European Parliament, the Council, the Economic and Social Committee, and the Committee of the Regions, March 5, 2024, 3-4, https://defence-industry-space.ec.europa.eu/document/download/643c4a00-0da9-4768-83cd-a5628f5c3063_en?filename=EDIS%20Joint%20Communication.pdf.
17    “EU Assistance to Ukraine,” Delegation of the European Union in the United States, January 15, 2025, https://www.eeas.europa.eu/delegations/united-states-america/eu-assistance-ukraine-us-dollars_en?s=253.
18    “US Geological Survey Releases 2022 List of Critical Minerals,” USGS, February 22, 2022, https://www.usgs.gov/news/national-news-release/us-geological-survey-releases-2022-list-critical-minerals; and Andrew Foran, “U.S. Trade Vulnerabilities in Critical Minerals: Pressure Points Amid Rising Tensions,” TD Economics, October 22, 2024, https://economics.td.com/us-trade-critical-minerals.
19    European Commission, “Critical Raw Materials Act,” in force on May 23, 2024, https://eur-lex.europa.eu/eli/reg/2024/1252/oj/eng.
20    Kenneth Propp, Who’s a National Security Risk? The Changing Transatlantic Geopolitics of Data Transfers,” Atlantic Council, May 29, 2024. https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/in-depth-research-reports/issue-brief/whos-a-national-security-risk-geopolitics-of-data-transfers/.
21    Guy Chazan, “Friedrich Merz Pushes for EU Free Trade Deal with Donald Trump’s US,” Financial Times, January 2, 2025, https://www.ft.com/content/ae2f3d15-45b5-4bc0-acd5-75e8227e6c71.
22    “Remarks by President Trump at the Signing of a U.S.-EU Trade Agreement,” White House, August 2, 2019, https://trumpwhitehouse.archives.gov/briefings-statements/remarks-president-trump-signing-u-s-eu-trade-agreement/.
23    Camille Gus, “EU Trade Chief to Trump: Let’s Deal,” Politico, January 22, 2025, https://www.politico.eu/article/eu-donald-turmp-maros-sefcovic-ursula-von-der-leyen-lets-deal/.
24    Josh Boak and Linley Sanders, “Americans End 2024 with Grim Economic Outlook, but Republicans Are Optimistic for 2025: AP-NORC Poll,” Associated Press, December 17, 2024, https://www.ap.org/news-highlights/spotlights/2024/americans-end-2024-with-grim-economic-outlook-but-republicans-are-optimistic-for-2025-ap-norc-poll/; and Shanay Gracia, “Majority of Americans Take a Dim View of Increased Trade with Other Countries,” Pew Research Center, July 29, 2024, https://www.pewresearch.org/short-reads/2024/07/29/majority-of-americans-take-a-dim-view-of-increased-trade-with-other-countries/.
25    Richard Wike et al., “Americans’ Opinions of NATO,” Pew Research Center, May 8, 2024, https://www.pewresearch.org/global/2024/05/08/americans-opinions-of-nato/.
26    Megan Brenan, “More Americans Favor Quick End to Russian-Ukraine War,” Gallup, December 20, 2024. https://news.gallup.com/poll/654575/americans-favor-quick-end-russia-ukraine-war.aspx.
27    “EU and Mercosur Reach Political Agreement on Groundbreaking Partnership,” European Commission, December 5, 2024, https://ec.europa.eu/commission/presscorner/detail/en/ip_24_6244; and “EU-Mercosur Agreement,” Trade and Economic website, European Commission, accessed February 24, 2025, https://policy.trade.ec.europa.eu/eu-trade-relationships-country-and-region/countries-and-regions/mercosur/eu-mercosur-agreement_en.
28    Mario Draghi, The Future of European Competitiveness, European Commission, September 9, 2024, https://commission.europa.eu/topics/eu-competitiveness/draghi-report_en#paragraph_47059.
29    Enrico Letta, Much More than a Market, Council of the European Union, April 2024, https://www.consilium.europa.eu/media/ny3j24sm/much-more-than-a-market-report-by-enrico-letta.pdf.
30    Kaush Arha, Peter Harrell, and Jörn Fleck, “Securing a free and open world: A US-EU blueprint to counter China and Russia,” Atlantic Council, January 15, 2025, https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/in-depth-research-reports/report/securing-a-free-and-open-world-a-us-eu-blueprint-to-counter-china-and-russia/.

The post The art of the transatlantic deal appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>
Fragmentation and the role of the IMF https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/in-depth-research-reports/issue-brief/fragmentation-and-the-role-of-the-imf/ Mon, 03 Mar 2025 19:00:00 +0000 https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/?p=829673 Here's how the IMF can adapt to ensure that the international system has an effective insurance mechanism.

The post Fragmentation and the role of the IMF appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>

The global economy and international financial system have evolved dramatically since the founding of the Bretton Woods system in 1944. A trend toward greater trade openness defined the decades following the establishment of the system. And while the Bretton Woods arrangement of fixed exchange rates was abandoned in 1973, this new international economic order continued to facilitate global economic integration and financial liberalization. Yet the trend of ever-more globalization, which has largely defined the past fifty years, appears to have stalled. Trade openness has remained effectively flat since the global financial crisis (GFC) (figure 1a), while cross-border assets have trended down or sideways since the COVID-19 pandemic and Russia’s 2022 invasion of Ukraine (figure 1b).

By fostering financial stability and supporting economic growth, the International Monetary Fund (IMF) provided a stable foundation which supported this trend of increased cross-border trade and investment. The IMF, through its surveillance and lending operations, was established to act as an impartial referee to ensure that member countries pursued sound economic and financial policies. It also expanded the global financial safety net (GFSN) – which acts as an insurance mechanism to provide liquidity to countries facing economic crises. The IMF, as the lender of last resort to the global economy, acted as the primary provider of crisis support up until the GFC.

This postwar system, of which the IMF was a core component, supported decades of economic prosperity, broad-based increases in living standards, and a marked decline in global poverty rates. However, the global economy had no shortage of crises in the intervening years. Experiences ranging from the Latin American debt crisis to the Asian financial crisis have incrementally eroded the IMF’s credibility and led member countries to seek alternative insurance mechanisms that do not come with “strings attached” (e.g., IMF program conditionality), thereby reducing member countries’ reliance on the IMF.

The onset of the GFC led countries to double down on self-insurance mechanisms. It also led to a substantial diversification of the GFSN, as bilateral swap lines (BSL) and regional financing arrangements (RFA) overtook the size of IMF resources in the safety net. To safeguard economic stability and protect against external shocks in the wake of the GFC, country authorities enacted capital controls, referred to as capital flow management measures (CFMs) in IMF parlance, in addition to accumulating foreign exchange reserves. This use of CFMs and international reserves as a self-insurance mechanism was further amplified by the COVID-19 pandemic and its associated financial distress. 

Now, following the economic and financial disruptions stemming from Russia’s invasion of Ukraine and rising geopolitical tensions, countries are increasingly utilizing industrial policies and current account restrictions to direct and manage trade flows as well – a trend that is best illustrated by the broad threat (and imposition) of tariffs that President Trump has made during the first month of his second term. These restrictions on capital and trade flows have contributed to the stalling of global integration and will likely result in greater volatility across the global economy in the coming years. Moreover, the displacement of the IMF as the anchor of the GFSN calls into question whether the GFSN can and will provide equitable support to all countries facing economic crises. As the global economy and international financial system enter a new era—characterized by increasing fragmentation rather than integration—ensuring that the international system has an effective insurance mechanism is more important than ever. 

This report is organized as follows. In Section II, I document the rise in fragmentation across capital and trade flows. Section III discusses how the emergence of these fragmentary forces has coincided with changes in the size and composition of the GFSN. Section IV explores how these forces of fragmentation could affect global development prospects and financial stability at the country- and system-level. Section V concludes with policy recommendations to revitalize the IMF and preserve the core insurance mechanism which underpins global development and financial stability. 

About the author


Patrick Ryan is a Bretton Woods 2.0 Fellow with the Atlantic Council’s GeoEconomics Center.

Our work

At the intersection of economics, finance, and foreign policy, the GeoEconomics Center is a translation hub with the goal of helping shape a better global economic future.

Related content

The post Fragmentation and the role of the IMF appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>
Building balanced institutions for prosperity https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/in-depth-research-reports/books/building-balanced-institutions-for-prosperity/ Fri, 28 Feb 2025 19:41:22 +0000 https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/?p=827868 This overview chapter explores the institutional evolution of each country and contextualizes these insights within the broader economic and political science literature on institutions and development. As global instability rose in 2024, longstanding governance challenges that had been intensifying over the past decade became increasingly evident.

The post Building balanced institutions for prosperity appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>

Table of contents

There is no doubt that the global geopolitical context became more unstable in 2024. The wars in Ukraine and the Middle East seem to have brought the world closer to large-scale open conflict. Other ongoing conflicts around the world, including the civil wars in Sudan, Myanmar, and Yemen, rarely make the daily news, at least in Western media.  

The “super-election year” has led to important political changes in several nations. Among developed countries, we have seen a notable trend of incumbents struggling or losing elections. In the United States, Donald Trump made a historical political comeback to the presidency. In the United Kingdom, the Labour Party regained power after fourteen years and five different Conservative prime ministers. Among many, incumbents in France, Germany, Japan, South Korea, and Taiwan all lost ground in elections held in 2024. In the developing world, some countries have experienced dramatic transformations, such as Bangladesh (covered in detail in this volume), while in others the electoral results have debilitated the incumbent government’s majority (India and South Africa among many others).  

Global instability is combined today with a series of concerning governance trends incubated in the last decade. The most worrying is the global decline of political freedom since 2013. This process has been well documented in the academic literature, and has recently been the prominent focus of research for policy-oriented international organizations and think tanks around the world. The Freedom and Prosperity Indexes produced by the Atlantic Council’s Freedom and Prosperity Center, which serve as the quantitative background of the country cases analyzed in this volume, clearly illustrate the generalized tendency toward autocratization that affects all regions. As portrayed in Figure 1, the global average of the political subindex has suffered constant erosion since 2013, and is today at a twenty-four-year low. All of its constitutive components have decreased in recent times, but most severely political rights and civil liberties.  

Figure 1. Erosion of political freedom since 2012 (global average)

Source: Freedom and Prosperity Indexes, Atlantic Council (2024).

In this turbulent context, the fight for freedom and democracy is crucial and must be waged on every front. This battle is always costly and uncertain. Historical cases, but also very recent episodes covered in this volume, such as those in Bangladesh and Venezuela, show us that national populations bear the largest burden, but external factors are also instrumental. In addition to international pressure and support to domestic agents of change, rigorous analysis and research based on objective data, showing the beneficial effects of liberty in the long run, are crucial instruments.  

The Atlantic Council’s Freedom and Prosperity Center wants to serve as a catalyst of such endeavors, particularly through its annual Atlas: Freedom and Prosperity Around the World, of which the present volume is the second edition. This 2025 Atlas features sixteen country studies, offering insights from renowned scholars and practitioners on their nations’ journeys toward freedom and prosperity. It includes timely analyses of countries experiencing dramatic events that may become pivotal in their histories, such as Bangladesh, Georgia, and Venezuela.  

The chapters clearly support the conclusion reached in cross-country studies of a causal positive relation between freedom and prosperity. At the same time, the chapters also highlight the specificities and particular characteristics of each country’s institutional evolution. The Freedom Index’s comprehensive approach allows for a disaggregated analysis of different dimensions (political, economic, and legal subindexes) and components (political rights, trade openness, corruption, etc.) of the institutional architecture of a country, which has proven extremely useful to understand the interlinkages, mechanisms, and complementarities between them in the context of each country covered in this volume. This introductory chapter tries to situate these country-specific insights in the broader economics and political science academic literature on the relationship between distinct institutional dimensions and economic development.  

Countries around the world differ substantially in terms of institutional attributes. Using the conceptual framework of the Freedom Index, which differentiates between three institutional dimensions—political freedom, economic freedom, and the rule of law—we show that there exists a high level of heterogeneity across countries in terms of their progress in each of these. And looking at the historical evolution of these institutional dimensions, we observe that not all countries have followed the same path.  

Knowing that these dimensions are not perfectly correlated, we examine the relationships and interactions between them. Do these institutional dimensions substitute for or complement each other? Is any one of them a necessary condition for the others? Is a particular chronology of institutional development more likely to produce fast-growing prosperity?  

In this chapter we focus on four hypotheses proposed in the academic literature: (1) the claim that the rule of law may be a necessary condition for economic and political freedom; (2) the debate on the primacy of democratization or stateness; (3) the discussion on whether democracy fosters or hampers economic freedom; and (4) the hypothesis that economic freedom may be a necessary condition for political freedom.  

To end this overview, we provide a brief summary of each chapter included in this volume, focusing on how the mechanisms explained here have operated in the politico-economic evolution of each country. The chapters highlight the need for a deeper understanding of the specific channels through which free institutions foster integral and sustained development and, eventually, prosperity. In the words of 2024 winners of the Nobel Prize in Economics, Daron Acemoglu, James Robinson, and Simon Johnson, further research should be carried out on “how democracy alters economic incentives and organizations and to pinpoint what aspects of democratic institutions are more conducive to economic success.” 

The many different paths to freedom 

Douglass North defined institutions as “humanly devised constraints that structure political, economic and social interactions.” Modern societies rely on a complex mix of these institutions—like democracy, the rule of law, human rights, and property rights—which often overlap and can be difficult to clearly define. They are debated and interpreted in different ways, and there is no universal agreement on their precise definition.1

To better understand how institutions influence development, we take a functional approach. Rather than getting stuck in theoretical debates, we use a flexible framework to explore how different sets of institutions function in real-world contexts.  

The Freedom Index created by the Atlantic Council’s Freedom and Prosperity Center is a novel attempt in this direction. The Freedom Index is based on the idea that a country’s institutional architecture rests on three pillars: political, legal, and economic. The set of institutions forming each of these can be assessed based on the level of freedom they grant to individuals. We break the Index down into three subindexes—political, economic, and legal—which relate to the ideas of democracy, market economy, and the rule of law.  

The political subindex reflects a country’s institutional framework for the selection of those holding executive political power and the limits and controls imposed on the exercise of power. The legal subindex is based on how far citizens and government officials are bound and abide by the law. The economic subindex captures the degree to which scarce resources are allocated by personal choices coordinated by markets rather than centralized planning directed by the political process. 

Each subindex is formed by several components. The underlying theoretical conceptualizations and the measures used to quantify them are grounded in the academic literature in political science, law, and economics, as discussed in previous reports. Using this framework, the Freedom Index provides a rigorous quantitative assessment of each dimension and its constituent components for 164 countries, from 1995 to 2023, and allows us to address the question of their interlinkages and relations.  

Looking at the scores for the most recent year in the sample (2023), the simple correlations between dimensions for all countries covered by the indexes is relatively high, ranging between 0.68 and 0.8, as shown in the first column of Table 1 below. Nonetheless, this result is heavily influenced by the most institutionally developed countries, which receive very high scores in all threesubindexes.  

If we limit our analysis to non-Organisation for Economic Co-operation and Development (OECD) countries, as in column 2, the correlations fall significantly, as low as 0.52 for the correlation between political and economic subindexes. Other subgroups, such as the Sub-Saharan African region (column 3), or the countries with relatively less political freedom (column 4), also present far from perfect correlations between the three subindexes.  

These basic results evidence that countries do not necessarily have similar scores in all three sub- indexes, and that these can be fairly uneven. This perception is reinforced when we descend to the component level of the Freedom Index. The correlations between the components of different subindexes are many times below 0.5. Figure 2 shows the scatter plot between political rights versus bureaucracy and corruption for 126 non-OECD countries. As is clearly shown, we can find very different combinations of these two components across countries. The political rights score barely explains 7.6 percent of the variation in the bureaucracy and corruption score. This means that the remaining 92.4 percent of the variation is due to other factors. Some notable cases of great disparities between the scores include United Arab Emirates, Nigeria, and Singapore.  

Table 1. Correlations between dimensions of freedom

Notes: Pearson’s correlation. Number of countries included in each column is shown in parentheses.
Low political freedom refers to countries with a score in the political subindex in 2023 below the median.

Figure 2. Political rights vs bureaucracy and corruption (Non-OECD Countries)

Source: Freedom and Prosperity Indexes, Atlantic Council (2024).

We can further theorize about the evolution of the three dimensions of freedom by looking at how these have changed across time within countries. An in-depth analysis of this topic is beyond the scope of this essay, but we can gain insights with the example of two Sub-Saharan African countries.  

Rwanda and Nigeria had almost identical scores in the Freedom Index in 1995: thirty-nine and forty respectively. Both have experienced substantial increases, reaching a very similar level by 2023 (53.1 and 53.9). Yet the evolution of the three subindexes shows stark differences between the two countries. Progress in the former has been driven by sustained increases in the economic and legal subindexes, while political freedom barely changed. Meanwhile, Nigeria’s improvement is single-handedly explained by a sharp increase in the political subindex in 1999, capturing the country’s democratic transition, whereas the legal and economic subindexes have fluctuated and do not show significant improvement.  

Rwanda and Nigeria exemplify two very different paths of institutional progress that reflect the historical experience of several other countries. Rwanda’s path, based on law and order and economic freedom but limited political freedom, reminds us of South Korea and Spain before their respective democratic transitions. Nigeria’s “democratization first” path is similar to that taken by many Latin American countries in the second half of the last century, which led the third wave of democratization, despite low levels of state capacity and not fully open and developed market economies. 

Figure 3. Evolution of freedom dimensions, Rwanda and Nigeria

Source: Freedom and Prosperity Indexes, Atlantic Council (2024).

The interconnections among dimensions of freedom 

The evidence shows that the three dimensions of freedom develop unevenly over time and in different parts of the world. This highlights the importance of understanding how these dimensions are connected, whether they support each other or can replace one another, and how they work together to influence overall prosperity.  

Most quantitative measures of institutions implicitly assume that the different components can simply substitute for each other.2 However, there are several potential complementarities between institutions.3 Understanding how these complementarities function is crucial, especially when assessing the impact of free institutions on economic performance and overall prosperity. Here we raise four questions about these connections. Empirical testing of these questions will follow in future research. 

Is the rule of law a necessary condition for political and economic freedom? 

The legal subindex measures the rule of law in formal terms, in line with scholars such as L. Fuller or J. Raz. If operating perfectly, the rule of law guarantees that political and economic freedom are effectively upheld, and can thus exert their effects on economic variables. Intuitively, the rule of law is then seen as a container into which substantive freedoms and rights are poured. Severe defects in the establishment of the rule of law, such as widespread corruption, inefficient bureaucracies, or a judiciary that does not ensure that executive power complies with the law, then represent holes and cracks in the receptacle that allow freedom to leak away.  

The idea expresses the distinction between de jure and de facto recognition of rights and freedoms. The enshrinement of individual civil or political rights in a written Constitution—such as freedom of expression, voting rights, and equality before the law—has little value if these are not effectively enforced and respected by the general population and, most importantly, by those in public office. Similarly, if the law recognizes property rights and generally allows private economic transactions and free competition, but the state apparatus does not adequately limit theft or demands bribes, the potential for economic freedom is limited. Additionally, if the state routinely expropriates property without proper compensation, it will hinder the development of a competitive market environment and its associated economic efficiency gains. 

What comes first, stateness or democratization?  

There are different theories on the temporal sequence in which different institutions are built within a country, and whether the order matters for economic outcomes. A prominent one is the “stateness first” argument, which claims that developing state capacity before democratization produces better long-term economic results than democratization processes in weak capacity environments.4 Here, state capacity means a formal notion of the rule of law in which a country is able to establish an efficient state apparatus in the Weberian sense,5 capable of enforcing and implementing policies and regulations within the territory through an impartial and effective bureaucracy.  

In this view, premature democratization is likely to produce clientelistic and patronage dynamics, generating inefficient allocations of resources, reduced productivity, lower quality of public services, increased uncertainty, and overall diminished economic activity. In the worst case, it may be a recipe for internal conflict and violence. Only until a state has solved its problem of credible enforcement, in the terminology of D’Arcy and Nistotskaya, can the benefits of democratization be fully realized. 

Despite its prevalence, especially in policy circles, the stateness first argument is not free of critique. On theoretical grounds, it is not clear whether autocratic or democratic governments face better incentives to invest in state capacity. Democracies, by providing a higher degree of legitimacy to political power and the legal system it enacts, can facilitate legal enforcement and compliance by the general population. Moreover, democratic accountability can incentivize leaders to invest in an administrative apparatus that ensures the efficient delivery and provision of public goods. Autocratic leaders, to the contrary, may prefer to underinvest in state capacity in order to secure personal control of public resources and limit the contestation capacity of the population. 

Recent evidence shows little support for the idea that countries with high state capacity perform better upon democratization than those that democratize under low capacity levels. Additionally, there is evidence of a positive and significant relation between democracy and growth in the context of weak capacity states in Sub-Saharan Africa. 

Does democracy hamper or foster economic freedom? 

The question of whether democracies or autocracies are more conducive to liberalization and the promotion of economic freedom has received different answers. The arguments pivot around three main ideas. First, some have argued that democratic building blocks such as separation of powers and the system of checks and balances limit the opportunities of political power to expropriate private resources, and thus better secure property. In this sense, the same democratic institutions that protect individual civil and political rights also serve as a safeguard of property and contract enforcement. In contrast, an autocratic ruler, not bound by any constraints on his or her authority, represents a permanent threat to private property.  

The second idea relates to the time horizon of policies in democracies versus autocracies. Liberalization, especially openness to trade and financial flows, can produce intense labor and production reallocations in the short run, which can entail layoffs and other costs before the benefits of such policies are materialized. Whether democracies are better equipped than autocracies to bear the short-run costs of liberalization is not clear. On the one hand, democratic leaders have the legitimacy provided by popular support to implement their proposed policies. But on the other hand, incentives to ensure their reelection may deter them from inflicting short-run costs on the elector- ate. For non-democratic leaders, the length of time they expect to stay in power determines the level of incentives to promote economic liberalization. In unstable autocracies, the ruler is likely to try to seize resources in the short run, before he or she loses power. Instead, stable autocracies may favor economic liberalization in order to increase aggregate output and thus the base of potential taxation rents in the future.  

Finally, it has been argued that the relation between regime type and economic freedom depends on mediating factors, especially the distribution of income or wealth. The proposition seems particularly related to the dimension of economic freedom that deals with the size of government in terms of taxation and spending. In highly unequal countries, democratization is likely to generate increasing levels of redistributive taxation and thus harm measures of economic freedom. Similarly, high levels of inequality in wealth and capital may induce voters to favor stricter labor regulations or restrict capital mobility. Recent empirical evidence seems to suggest that, in democracies, economic freedom tends to decrease when the level of inequality is high.6

Is economic freedom necessary for political freedom?  

Nobel laureates Friedrich Hayek and Milton Friedman posited that politically free societies must also be economically free, so economic freedom is a necessary condition for political freedom and democracy. Hayek warned that Western democracies faced a potential slippery slope toward authoritarianism after World War II, if the central governmental management of the economy required by the war effort were to be maintained or expanded. Once the state is given power over economic decisions, Hayek said, it is only a matter of time before the centrally decided plan differs from the preferences of at least some individuals. The government will need to use its coercive power to limit individual choices and rights. It may also constrain freedom of speech if used to confront or oppose governmental action. Additionally, the government might force individuals into certain occupations or locations, ultimately leading to a totalitarian state. Therefore, he concludes that only within a capitalist system is democracy possible. Friedman asserted that there was no historical example of a society that has enjoyed a high level of political freedom without something close to a market economy. 

Neither Hayek nor Friedman argued that economic freedom always sustains political freedom. They saw the former as a necessary but not sufficient condition for the latter. The hypothesis seems to be supported by empirical evidence. Yet, the claim that heavy government intervention in economic affairs inevitably leads to political servitude is contradicted by the experience of some Western countries. This is particularly evident in the Nordic European countries during the second half of the twentieth century. The combination of high levels of political freedom with large government intervention in the economy has proved not only possible, but has led this group to become some of the most prosperous societies of the world today.  

A possible explanation may relate to the discussion about the size of government and economic performance. Government taxation and spending arguably reduce economic freedom, but can nonetheless generate positive aggregate economic effects if social benefits exceed the unavoidable distortionary costs. Political freedom, by favoring free public debate and discussion, may thus help identify those public policies with positive net payoffs, and discard those that generate aggregate inefficiencies, allowing for a stable association of democracy and significant government economic involvement. 

Looking for answers around the world 

Having reviewed some potential relationships between the three dimensions of freedom, the final section of this overview provides a brief summary of each country chapter, with a focus on whether such mechanisms have operated in each country’s institutional evolution in the last three decades or are likely to do so in the foreseeable future. 

Some common ideas emerge. First, there is substantial divergence between written norms and implementation of those norms, especially in the developing and least developed countries. This limits the potential effects of institutional reform on economic growth and overall prosperity. Second, democratic erosion and instability are often the consequence of severe defects in the rule of law, in particular political corruption and inefficient bureaucracies. Third, for most authors, the most urgent area for reform in their countries is the one with the weakest performance—their “weakest link.” This highlights the significant complementarities between institutional dimensions, suggesting that balanced development across all areas is essential for prosperity.  

Country Chapters

Bangladesh

Ahmed Mushfiq Mobarak provides a timely anal- ysis of Bangladesh, covering the student-led “Monsoon Revolution” during the summer of 2024 that ended with Sheikh Hasina’s loss of power. Mobarak traces the beginning of the democratic erosion of Bangladesh to increasing corruption by the two major political parties since the early 2000s, which led to political instability. Hasina and the Awami League won a supermajority in the 2008 elections, but squandered the opportunity for improving governance, and instead initiated a clear autocratic path. Elections followed the regular schedule, but it is difficult to see them as mean- ingful. Boycotts by the opposition, the atmosphere of political violence, and deep erosion of individual rights dramatically limited the level of contestation in the electoral process. In addition, the autocratic government devoted major efforts to controlling the judiciary, to safeguard its hold on power and to use it as a weapon to persecute the opposition.

The 2024 revolution was diffuse and decentralized—with organic student protests that quickly spread throughout the country. As a result, the post-revolution political leadership and the way forward remain unclear. Muhammad Yunus, the founder of the Grameen Bank and a Nobel Peace Prize laureate, took charge as “chief adviser to the caretaker government” at the behest of students. His international name recognition and stature make him a credible leader, and temporarily stabilized the political uncertainty, but the country’s political future remains unclear. There is a lot of hope among average citizens that ousting a powerful autocratic government was a major achievement, and that the architects of that uprising can ensure better governance going forward by instituting some fundamental reforms and not repeating the mistakes of the past. Given that fundamental reforms are needed, including a reexamination of several aspects of the country’s Constitution, the path ahead is likely neither linear nor straightforward.

Cameroon 

Political power is mostly centralized in Cameroon, and as a result there is no effective system of separation of legal powers, with both legislative and judicial branches being dependent on the executive power, as Vera Songwe explains. There are spillovers from political liberty to other aspects of the institutional framework, as evidenced by the country’s poor performance in terms of economic and legal subindexes. The drag imposed by limited political freedom is most notably evident in the very low level of gender equality in the economic sphere, reflecting how lack of representation of significant shares of the population in the political process undeniably harms their interests.

Going forward, the government of Cameroon should focus on two main areas: education and environment. Education remains the fastest way to economic empowerment of populations, and women in particular. In the long run, it can help reduce costs of healthcare as educated women tend to adopt more preventive approaches for themselves and their children. To this end, a policy of free primary education must be complemented by strong indicators of teacher performance to ensure that children are actively learning. Regarding the environment, Cameroon’s environmental resources, if well managed, could be an important source of revenue. Reforestation in particular should be a primary policy focus.

Canada 

Randall Morck notes that Canada has kept its place among the freest countries in the world for sev- eral decades. However, he also identifies some worrying recent trends that are affecting several building blocks of the liberal democratic system. Civil liberties show a decreasing trend that has continued well after all measures imposed to fight the COVID-19 pandemic were lifted, driven by a somewhat freedom-restrictive understanding of diversity, equity, and inclusion (DEI) policies. Recent corruption scandals have involved the current government’s party. Judicial independence is also under stress, and particular Supreme Court rulings have generated some degree of legal uncertainty, specifically in relation to the requirement to consult First Nations about major infrastructure projects, which has produced visible negative effects on the construction sector.

The institutional challenges Canada faces will likely be exacerbated if the country is not able to recover strong economic growth in the medium term. In order to do so, enhancing productivity growth must be a priority, through increasing corporate research and development investment. Canada’s traditional openness to trade and capital will be challenged by the announced intention of the new Trump administration to renegotiate the North American Free Trade Agreement (NAFTA), as well as the rising concerns about national security that will likely produce new trade legislation affecting Canada’s relations with China and other trade powers. In addition to economic risks, several social issues will require especial attention in the coming decade, including immigration policy, the evolution of the territorial tensions between Québec and the rest of the regions, and the successful integration of First Nations.

Ethiopia 

The recent situation in Ethiopia is a paradigmatic example of a case where a government’s incapacity to provide basic civil stability and peace can put an abrupt halt on development. Abbi Kedir argues that the remarkable economic growth of the 2000–20 period, driven by public investment in infrastructure and industrial expansion, was interrupted by the proliferation of internal conflicts and fighting between the federal government and various groups in regions such as Tigray, Amhara, and Oromia, which disrupted production and trade.

The armed conflicts around the country are the biggest impediment to movement of labor and traded goods, and the carrying out of productive activities. If peace and security are not restored in all regions of the country, the socioeconomic situation will deteriorate further. Agricultural and industrial production, and other employment-generating economic activities such as trade and investment, will continue to suffer. Besides the most pressing issue of security, another big challenge that Ethiopia faces is the alarming demographic trend. Each year, two to three million young Ethiopians enter the labor force, and it is clear that the labor market cannot absorb such a huge number of workers. Any hope of transforming the economy—or even of gaining a meaningful grip on it—is an elusive dream in a country where there are high levels of unemployment, poverty, inequality, destitution, internal conflicts, food insecurity, and an ever-growing and underskilled youth population.

Georgia 

The waves of reform Georgia went through between 1995 and 2018 led to a parallel improvement in all three dimensions of freedom, although the establishment of the rule of law persistently lagged behind economic and political liberalization, as noted by Tinatin Khidasheli. Most notably, the country failed to undertake a profound reform of the judicial system, which showed major deficiencies due to a non-transparent and entirely arbitrary selection process, which allowed this crucial pillar of the state to be administered by a small elite of judges for almost two decades. Since 2018, the country has been experiencing a dramatic institutional regression, clearly accentuated in the last months. The data do not yet reflect the passing of recent laws on foreign agents and LGBTQ+ rights, nor the several amendments passed to electoral legislation, reducing the opposition’s and civil society’s capacity to monitor and contest the government. The 2024 parliamentary elections in Georgia produced an even more hostile and polarized environment, with all major opposition parties, civil society monitoring organizations, and international observers claiming major fraud.

Georgia stands today at a critical crossroads. One of the most significant risks the country faces is the ongoing influence of Russia, which exerts considerable power through economic, political, and military channels. The major counterbalanceing force needs to come from civil society, and its wish to look west toward the European Union (EU). A majority of the population are predominantly asking for practical steps to bring Georgia closer to the EU and eventual membership, which serves as a primary catalyst for change. Important milestones, like visa-free travel within the EU for Georgians and free trade agreements, represent advancement and inspire citizens’ hopes for EU membership. Georgia’s future freedom and prosperity depend on leveraging European integration. By fostering resilience, diversifying its economy, and ensuring political stability, Georgia can achieve stability, growth, and greater freedom.

Greece 

Elias Papaioannou explains how, at the onset of the financial crisis of 2008, Greece was significantly more prosperous than its institutional quality would have suggested. Given the strength of the institutions-development nexus, this paradox was unlikely to last indefinitely. Sadly, it was income and prosperity that fell away, and dramatically so, as Greece lost a quarter of its output, unemployment tripled, hundreds of thousands of talented Greeks emigrated, the welfare state collapsed, and poverty became increasingly evident. The economic adjustment programs led by “the troika” forced a series of much-needed reforms in areas like pensions, labor, and product and capital markets. Unfortunately, neither the Syriza/Anel coalition (2015–19) nor the New Democracy administration (2019–present) implemented genuine institutional reform, including making markets more competitive, strengthening investor protection, speeding the judicial process, and safeguarding the independence of public agencies.

In the next decade, Greece needs to significantly reinforce all aspects of its institutional framework. Strengthening the judiciary, enhancing checks and balances on the executive, and investing seriously in the rule of law are essential, not only  to restore confidence in democracy but also to promote much-needed economic growth. The priorities should be to enhance institutions, tackle corruption, promote economic freedom (by bringing down cartels and freeing product markets), and seriously invest in public administration and independent agencies (e.g., a competition authority). This is easier said than done, and at the time of writing this list does not seem to be the priority.

Japan 

Political freedom and the rule of law in Japan have been significantly above the OECD average and experienced only minor fluctuations for the last three decades. Economic freedom, however, is slightly lower, especially in terms of women’s economic opportunities. Kotaro Shiojiri points out that the democratic political debate has directed political agents to focus on those policies demanded by citizens, although the process is sometimes slow. One good example of Japan’s poor performance on women’s economic freedom is the so-called “M-curve,” whereby women in their thirties have much lower labor force participation rates than younger and older age groups. The most recent data show a substantial improve- ment on this issue, but it is still not fully solved even though “womenomics” was a major theme of former Prime Minister Abe’s premiership from 2012–20 and has remained a priority in subsequent administrations.

Japan faces a series of challenges for the next decade. The demographic situation is certainly worrying, as Japan is one of the most rapidly aging societies in the world, and neither policies directed to increase fertility nor immigration is an easy solution to this challenge. A second imperative for the country’s future is to regain solid economic growth. Japan’s labor market lacks flexibility and maintains significant structural rigidities when compared with most developed Western economies. There are pros and cons to this situation that any future reform should weigh up. As Japanese companies look to build job-type employment structures, they have an opportunity to square this circle, maintaining the low levels of inequality for which Japan is rightly praised while also providing more opportunities for flexible and dynamic career paths that will promote economy-wide productivity gains.

Kazakhstan 

Kazakhstan is a good case study for the argument that autocratic regimes are better focused on long-run economic policies. Nargis Kassenova explains that the country has maintained a positive trend of liberalization in the last three decades, reflect- ing the goal to integrate into the global economic community. Yet significant fluctuations and inconsistencies have plagued the process, especially since oil revenues started to increase in the early 2000s and the government was clearly tempted to use the windfall to pursue interventionist and protectionist economic policies.

The unexpected resignation of Nazarbayev in 2019, and the “Bloody January” events in 2022, produced a critical juncture for the country. At present, President Tokayev’s reform agenda points to further liberalization of the system, but progress is by no means guaranteed. Besides very significant geopolitical risks that may heavily influence Kazakhstan’s future, in particular a potential Russian military threat, a crucial milestone will take place when Tokayev’s term ends in 2029. If at that point a peaceful transfer of power takes place, it will be a sign of a successful culmination of the democratic transition. Nonetheless, civil society needs to continue exerting pressure to avoid a halt in the reform process in favor of professional state and socioeconomic goals, which could turn the government’s aspiration into becoming simply a functional authoritarian state.

Kuwait 

Kuwait’s political regime presents noticeable specificities that make it difficult to compare to the liberal democracies of the Western world, states Rabah Arezki. Relatively fair and free elections coexist with a ban on political parties, and the inviolability of the Emir is combined with strong control of his government by parliament. While Kuwait’s democratic experience has been positive and serves as an example for other countries in the region, the system does not yet represent the interests of all segments of society equally, producing large differences in the situation of women and low-skilled expatriates.

Kuwait’s evolution in the near future is highly uncertain. The new Emir of Kuwait, Mishal Al-Ahmad Al-Jaber Al-Sabah, who came to power at the end of 2023, decided to dissolve parliament and take over some of its prerogative after a parliamentary election won by the opposition, and it is not clear when new elections will be held. The Emir and parliament have to resolve their differences if Kuwait is to remain an important beacon of democracy in the region, continue to build on its track record on civil liberties, and fully embark on a process of economic transformation that can deal with the approaching end of the oil era.

Morocco

Rabah Arezki argues that Morocco has substantially improved in all institutional dimensions during the last three decades, but there are many areas in which the country needs to continue its reform effort toward fully free and open institutions. On the economic front, the most positive progress is found in women’s economic freedom, with the implementation of a new Family Code, known as Moudawana, in 2004. This piece of legislation is seen as one of the most progressive of the region, expanding women’s rights and protections in relation to civil liberties as well as labor and economic aspects. The political environment in Morocco is freer than in most other countries in the region, but again it is still far from the most advanced countries of the world.

The danger for Morocco is to remain stuck in a so-called middle-income trap with low growth and high poverty, which could further ignite social tensions. To reignite growth and transform its economy, Morocco must level the playing field. To do so, issues of market structure and competition must take on greater importance. Additionally, further efforts are needed to balance its economic development, as poverty remains pervasive, especially in rural areas. An important limitation is the relatively high level of debt, which constrains government spending to reduce spatial disparities and support poorer households.

Nigeria

The case of Nigeria illustrates how the challenges of democratization in weak capacity states are exacerbated in resource-rich countries. Zainab Usman explains how the democratic transition of 1999 has been followed by volatile institutional progress, by no means free of inconsistencies. On the economic side, the relevance of the oil industry in generating government revenue and foreign reserves motivates important movements in the legal environment and overall economic policy decisions, and has many times led the government and central bank to heavily intervene in the exchange rate market.

Regarding the rule of law, Nigeria desperately needs a total overhaul of its civil service to tackle corruption and bureaucratic inefficiency. The security situation is also delicate, with ongoing violent conflicts (with Islamists Boko Haram in the north- east, and the separatist movement Indigenous People of Biafra in the southeast) and rising levels of violent crime, including kidnapping for ransom, in various parts of the country. The next few years will tell if the democratic mechanisms that are strong in Nigeria, like legislative control of the executive and freedom of the press, can help push forward efficiency-enhancing reforms that can lead to more balanced institutional development, ensuring increased prosperity for all Nigerians.

Peru

Liliana Rojas-Suarez argues that Peru is probably one of the clearest examples of the potential gap between written laws and their actual implementation and enforcement. In terms of the former, the country is comparable to the most advanced democracies of the world, but the degree of implementation and enforcement is far from such standards. As a result, deficiencies in the state’s capacity to deliver public goods and services, including ensuring security and the enforcement of law, significantly constrain the country’s potential for regaining economic growth and overall prosperity. The weakness of institutions and governance, reflected in excessive bureaucracy, corruption, and a weak and inefficient judiciary, hampers domestic and foreign private sector investment. While maintaining a stable macroeconomic framework is key, it is not sufficient to provide the certainty and security that investors need for long-term and productive investments.

Increasing institutional quality is thus a precondition for the economic reforms required to ensure long-run improvements in prosperity for all Peruvians. The country has an exceptional opportunity for growth in the green transition, given its abundance of crucial raw materials. Nonetheless, if Peru wants to position itself as a world leader in this area, some major reforms must be addressed first. Most importantly, the public sector needs to be able to execute large infrastructure investments and develop value chains related to green manufacturing, renewable energy, and eco-tourism; the country must address the issues of informality and low human capital of the workforce.

Poland 

Poland stands as one of history’s most remarkable examples of how embracing democratic institutions and a free-market economy can radically transform a nation and propel it onto a trajectory of rapid development. Nonetheless, Leszek Balcerowicz outlines how the country has undergone a very serious challenge to its institutions in the last decade, with the “bad transition” represented by the accession of the Law and Justice Party (PiS) to power in 2015. On obtaining an ample majority in a free and fair election, the party led by Jarosław Kaczyński quickly revealed its authoritarian ten- dencies, beginning a period of institutional erosion. The most dangerous attack came against the judiciary. Legislative changes in 2016 merged the roles of prosecutor-general and minister of justice, granting a political appointee sweeping powers over the judicial system. Judicial independence similarly eroded under politicized appointment processes. Poland’s judicial system survived this assault primarily due to the vigorous defense mounted by civil society and advocacy groups, together with international pressure, especially by the European institutions.

The positive side of the turbulent tenure of the PiS government is that support for democracy and the rule of law has strengthened in Poland, so there is little concern about the institutional stability of the country after the executive change of 2023. Instead, the more pressing issue lies in sustaining economic growth. One main priority should be a carefully planned privatization schedule that can complete the process initiated in the 1990s, enhancing competition in sectors like energy and oil processing. Another major challenge is excessive fiscal spending, largely driven by social welfare programs. Finally, Poland shares demographic challenges with other developed nations, particularly the rapid aging of its population. Without substantial reforms, economic growth is likely to slow further, and fiscal pressures will intensify.

Spain 

Toni Roldán Monés explains how Spain experienced an enormous transformation since the democratic transition of 1975–78, not only in political terms but also on the economic front, completing a successful integration into the European single market and the European Economic and Monetary Union. Nonetheless, the last three decades have not been free of challenges. The two biggest have been the dramatic economic effects of the bursting of the real estate bubble in 2008, with the subsequent sovereign debt crisis, and the Catalan independence attempt in 2017. The former led to an extremely difficult social situation, with unemployment reaching 27 percent, and the imposition of severe austerity measures. However, the crisis also generated significant impetus for reform, which seems to have halted in the last decade. The secessionist challenge showed the strength of the democratic institutions in Spain, especially the judiciary, which was able to resolve the crisis with a firm and strong response according to the legal provisions and constitutional powers granted to the different branches of power.

Looking ahead, a main source of concern is whether the windfall represented by the NextGenerationEU funds—of which Spain, together with Italy, is the largest beneficiary—may translate into insufficient structural reform. The relaxation of political constraints thanks to the apparently easy availability of resources, both external and internal, could lead to a complacency trap, hampering the impetus for reform.

The most pressing challenges Spain faces include: ensuring fiscal sustainability, especially regarding the pension system; a profound over- haul of the education system with the clear aim of improving its quality at all levels; and reform of the federal system, setting up clearer rules regarding the relative powers of the regions and the central government, and the establishment of the necessary coordination mechanisms to ensure the efficient collaboration of all levels of government.

Unfortunately, the political climate of polarization and fragmentation, together with incipient signs of institutional erosion, is not the best environment to carry out such an ambitious set of structural reforms. Regaining the capacity to reach agreements among those with different political views, which Spain exemplified during the demo- cratic transition, will be a necessary condition.

Taiwan 

Taiwan’s story in the last three decades is a good example of how democracy can serve as a catalyst for improvements in the other two institutional dimensions. Shelley Rigger argues that the completion of the long, incremental process of democratization led, by the end of the 1990s, to a substantial increase in the accountability of political leaders and public officials at large, improving the overall capacity and efficiency of the public sector to enforce and abide by the law. Similarly, Taiwan’s strong performance in terms of investment and trade freedom was complemented by an extraordinary improvement in gender equality in economic matters, likely explained by the increasing political representation of women.

Unfortunately, the future of freedom on the island does not depend on the Taiwanese people alone. The relationship with the People’s Republic of China (PRC) is by far the largest risk, and will likely determine the evolution of political and economic freedom, as well as Taiwan’s prosperity in the next decade. The PRC opposes both Taiwan’s continued self-government and its democratic system. It is impossible to predict how the geo- political situation may evolve, but the PRC seems determined to bring Taiwan to heel, peacefully if possible, but by force if necessary. So far, the two sides have managed to avoid conflict, in part because the costs and risks of forcible unification are high, and in part because Beijing believes it can prevail without force eventually. It is likely that this stalemate will continue in the near future. If it does continue for the next five to ten years, the situation may evolve to a point where a mutually acceptable arrangement is possible. Or it may not, in which case Taiwan’s democracy will continue to exist under constant threat.

Venezuela 

Venezuela seems to exemplify the Hayek-Friedman hypothesis that democracy is incompatible with a socialist economic system. As Sary Levy- Carciente argues, Venezuela’s poor performance in the twenty-first century can be attributed to the political and ideological project known as “socialism of the twenty-first century,” an economic model marked by excessive populism and state intervention, where economic activity and entrepreneurship are severely hampered by wide- spread government interference, inconsistent regulatory enforcement, and a heavy bureaucratic burden. Plummeting economic freedom has been accompanied by a dramatic erosion of political and legal freedoms in Venezuela, driven by the consolidation of executive supremacy, the increasing role of the military in controlling and implementing government policies, and the rise in corruption and lack of transparency, bypassing legal accountability standards.

The sustained deterioration of Venezuela’s political system was epitomized by the crisis following the presidential elections of July 2024, leaving no doubt regarding the autocratic nature of President Nicolás Maduro’s current political regime. As a result, Venezuela finds itself at a crossroads. Two future scenarios can be envisioned: one in which the current regime eliminates any sign of a liberal democracy, resulting in further increases in oppression and poverty; or a diametrically opposed one in which the reestablishment of Venezuela as a liberal democratic republic, anchored in Western values of freedom, individual dignity, and prosperity, leads the country to reclaim its stabilizing role in the Western Hemisphere.


Ignacio P. Campomanes is a nonresident fellow at the Navarra Center for International Development (University of Navarra, Spain) and a senior adviser at the Atlantic Council’s Freedom and Prosperity Center. Campomanes holds a BA in economics and a BA in law from Carlos III University in Spain, MA degrees in economics from Complutense University of Madrid and the University of Minnesota, and a PhD in economics from the University of Minnesota.  

Annie (Yu-Lin) Lee is the program assistant at the Atlantic Council’s Freedom and Prosperity Center. Previously, Lee served as a research assistant at Academia Sinica, Taiwan’s national research institute, where she focused on US policy toward Taiwan and China. Her work has been featured by the American Political Science Association, the US-China Perception Monitor, the Carter Center, and the Atlantic Council. She holds a BA in diplomacy from National Chengchi University in Taiwan.  

Joseph Lemoine is the senior director of the Atlantic Council’s Freedom and Prosperity Center. Previously, he was a private sector specialist at the World Bank. Lemoine has advised governments on policy reforms that help boost entrepreneurship and shared prosperity, primarily in Africa and the Middle East. 

Statement on Intellectual Independence

“The Atlantic Council and its staff, fellows, and directors generate their own ideas and programming, consistent with the Council’s mission, their related body of work, and the independent records of the participating team members. The Council as an organization does not adopt or advocate positions on particular matters. The Council’s publications always represent the views of the author(s) rather than those of the institution.”

Read the previous Edition

2024 Atlas: Freedom and Prosperity Around the World

Twenty leading economists and government officials from eighteen countries contributed to this comprehensive volume, which serves as a roadmap for navigating the complexities of contemporary governance. 

Explore the data

Trackers and Data Visualizations

Jun 15, 2023

Freedom and Prosperity Indexes

The indexes rank 164 countries around the world according to their levels of freedom and prosperity. Use our site to explore twenty-eight years of data, compare countries and regions, and examine the sub-indexes and indicators that comprise our indexes.

About the center

The Freedom and Prosperity Center aims to increase the prosperity of the poor and marginalized in developing countries and to explore the nature of the relationship between freedom and prosperity in both developing and developed nations.

Stay connected

1    On the conceptualizations of democracy, see for example Jørgen Møller and Svend-Erik Skaaning, Requisites of Democracy: Conceptualization, Measurement, and Explanation (Abingdon and New York: Routledge, 2011). For an overview of rule of law definitions, see Brian Z. Tamanaha, On the Rule of Law: History, Politics, Theory (Cambridge, UK: Cambridge University Press, 2004). 
2    Indexes such as the Freedom House Freedom in the World report, the Fraser Index of Economic Freedom, and the World Justice Project Rule of Law Index, among others, all use the simple addition or arithmetic mean of their different areas/components to arrive at the overall score. This implies perfect substitutability.
3    See for example Vanessa A. Boese-Schlosser and Markus Eberhardt, Which Institutions Rule? Unbundling the Democracy-Growth Nexus (Gothenburg: V-Dem Institute, 2022); Sharun W. Mukand and Dani Rodrik, “The Political Economy of Liberal Democracy,” The Economic Journal (2020), 130:627.
4    A classic reference is Samuel P. Huntington, Political Order in Changing Societies (New Haven, CT: Yale University Press, 1996). A recent example is Michelle D’Arcy and Marina Nistotskaya “State First, then Democracy: Using Cadastral Records to Explain Governmental Performance in Public Goods Provision,” Governance (2017), 30:2
5    Max Weber defined the state as an entity that holds a monopoly on the legitimate use of physical force within a given territory. The state apparatus encompasses the institutions and structures through which the state enforces laws, maintains order, and implements policy, including the bureaucracy, military, and legal system. Max Weber, “Economy and Society” (1922) in Economy and Society, Vol. 1, eds. Guenther Roth and Claus Wittich (Berkeley, CA: University of California Press, 2023)
6    See Rainer Kotschy and Uwe Sunde, “Democracy, Inequality, and Institutional Quality,” European Economic Review (2017), 91; or Tim Krieger and Daniel Meierrieks, “Political capitalism: The Interaction between Income Inequality, Economic Freedom and Democracy,” European Journal of Political Economy (2016), 45

The post Building balanced institutions for prosperity appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>
From Tunis to Baghdad: Can platform-based politics take root? https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/in-depth-research-reports/issue-brief/from-tunis-to-baghdad-can-platform-based-politics-take-root/ Mon, 24 Feb 2025 19:30:13 +0000 https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/?p=825082 This paper is the fifth in the Freedom and Prosperity Center's "State of the Parties" series analyzing the strength of multi-party systems in different regions of the world.

The post From Tunis to Baghdad: Can platform-based politics take root? appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>

This paper is the fifth in the Freedom and Prosperity Center’s “State of the Parties” series analyzing the strength of multi-party systems in different regions of the world.

The organization of political parties has served multiple distinct roles in the Middle East and North Africa (MENA). In many cases, regimes use them to create a light veneer of democratic legitimacy for authoritarianism; in other cases, parties exist to represent one identity group or are centered around a singular individual. In rare cases, but with a few successful examples, parties exist to represent an ideology. Rarer still, but key to the future democratic success of the region, are true platform-based parties. Vacuums of political leadership have developed due to the limited role parties play in shaping governance, representation, and public policy. In a rapidly changing region, the opportunity for effective, issues-based parties has never been more evident. Iran’s proxies in the region have been significantly weakened and the “Axis of Resistance” dismantled, presenting openings for new political leadership to emerge.

Political parties are not yet poised to meet the moment. In much of the region, long histories of implicit and explicit bans and one-party dominance have left political parties weak, unpopular, and ineffective. Extended periods of suppression and restriction—such as Jordan’s thirty-year party ban, Iraq’s decades of one-party rule under Saddam Hussein, and Tunisia’s twenty-three years of party bans during the Ben Ali era—have resulted in political parties that lack both organizational capacity and broad public appeal. Rather, they are fragmented, ideologically vague, and centered around individuals rather than coherent platforms.

The proliferation of political parties—more than 220 are currently registered in Tunisia, for example—has further undermined any sense of clear policy platforms and the ability to differentiate one party from another. Rather than reforming or uniting under existing frameworks, disillusioned members frequently break away to form new parties, stymieing coalition-building and the development of rooted, comprehensive party ideologies.

Disillusionment with traditional parties has led citizens to favor actors perceived as more directly serving their interests, such as Hezbollah—which positions itself as a resistance force against Israel—or Muslim Brotherhood-affiliated parties, which have gained trust through their provision of essential social services in Egypt, Jordan, and elsewhere. In an era defined by youth-led movements, digital activism, and persistent calls for democratization, these parties stand at a crossroads. Whether they act as agents of change or instruments of entrenched power remains a central question, shaping not only the future of governance within individual nations but also the trajectory of regional stability and development.

Related content

Explore the series

State of the Parties

This pathbreaking new series delivers insights and policy recommendations from leading experts on how to enhance efforts to strengthen democracy in all regions of the world. 

Explore the program

The Freedom and Prosperity Center aims to increase the prosperity of the poor and marginalized in developing countries and to explore the nature of the relationship between freedom and prosperity in both developing and developed nations.

The post From Tunis to Baghdad: Can platform-based politics take root? appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>
Demography and geopolitics put Japan’s strength to the test https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/in-depth-research-reports/books/demography-and-geopolitics-put-japans-strength-to-the-test/ Mon, 24 Feb 2025 18:36:46 +0000 https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/?p=825604 By almost all freedom and prosperity metrics, Japan is a model for stability and success. However, looming challenges threaten this narrative, including an aging population, outdated social laws, a rigid labor market, and growing security and geopolitical concerns.

The post Demography and geopolitics put Japan’s strength to the test appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>

Table of contents

Evolution of freedom

The only non-Atlantic member of the G7, Japan is a country that defies easy categorization. Even as it has experienced comparative macroeconomic stagnation over the past three decades, Japanese companies have remained innovative and the country as a whole remains prosperous. While the persistence of Liberal Democratic Party (LDP) leadership has led some to characterize Japan as an immature democracy, it also enjoys enviable political stability and its democratic institutions and culture have deep-rooted foundations. Even as Japan has been criticized for its overly rigid labor markets, it has earned admiration for low levels of inequality, high levels of safety, and the stoic persistence of the Japanese people in the face of recurrent natural disasters. Both the great strengths of Japan and the many challenges that it faces ahead are in sharp relief in this year’s Freedom Index, which makes a continued and important contribution to our understanding of the dynamics of freedom around the world. In this essay, I explore several of these trends, offering potential explanations and—at times—respectful disagreements, as well as suggesting opportunities for Japan to continue to strengthen the foundations of its freedom and prosperity in the years to come.  

As the Freedom Index recognizes, Japan is among the world’s leading democracies, with well-developed institutions and a mature economy that promote a high degree of freedom and prosperity for its citizens and residents. Notably, the country’s scores in the political and legal subindexes are both significantly above the OECD average and have experienced only minor fluctuations in the last three decades. That Japan is a stable and mature democracy is reflected not only in the Freedom Index but other well-known indices such as those released by the Economist Intelligence Unit and Freedom House

At the same time, as the Freedom Index recognizes, Japan has further opportunities to strengthen the foundations of its own democracy and prosperity. This is perhaps most evident in scores in the economic subindex of the Freedom Index, which lag behind Japan’s scores in the political and legal subindices. In 2023, Japan’s economic score fell six points below the Organisation for Economic Co-operation and Development (OECD) average and lagged behind peer countries such as Australia, Germany, and the United States by approximately ten points. This gap is explained largely by poor performance in two components: women’s economic freedom, and investment freedom.  

Regarding the former, the underlying data used to construct the component (the World Bank’s Women, Business and the Law index) point to two important aspects in which Japan’s legislation does not reach the same standards of gender equality as other developed countries, specifically equal pay, and workplace protection. Although “womenomics” was a major theme of former Prime Minister Abe’s premiership from 2012–20 and has remained a priority in subsequent administrations, it is true that there is still work to be done.  

In particular, Japan has struggled to right the so-called “M-curve” whereby women in their thirties have much lower labor force participation rates than younger and older age groups, often reflecting temporary withdrawal from the workforce in the early stages of child-rearing. Although this phenomenon is evident in many developed countries, structural rigidities and other distinctive features of Japan’s labor market and work culture have had the effect of limiting women’s ability to return to career-track roles after childbirth. Although the most recent national data suggest significant improvements in this area, the persistent gap between female and male labor force participation in managerial roles attests to the continued importance of this challenge. 

The evolution of investment freedom in Japan is also distinct from many other developed nations. In general, Japan has averaged a ten- to twenty-point gap between the OECD average since 1995, though this gap has narrowed somewhat since 2004, reflecting in part liberalization efforts introduced by the Koizumi and Abe administrations as well as sustained improvements in Japanese corporate governance standards. These have had an important effect over time in attracting additional foreign investment, which has helped to improve Japan’s score. Anecdotally, foreign involvement in state-supported strategic national projects, such as a joint Taiwan Semiconductor Manufacturing Company (TSMC)-Sony-Denso semiconductor fabrication facility in Kumamoto, also attest to more welcoming attitudes and approaches to both foreign direct and portfolio investment. In light of contemporary trends in economic analysis, such as work by the International Monetary Fund and other international institutions to highlight the pernicious economic effects of inequality, it is also reasonable to question whether Japanese labor protections that count against its economic freedom score are truly a mark against economic freedom. An alternative reading might suggest they are instead an example of the kind of stakeholder capitalism that institutions such as The Business Roundtable have called for the United States and others to embrace.  

As for Japan’s score on the political subindex, high marks reflect the extraordinary stability of Japan’s democratic institutions, not only since 1995 but over the last sixty years. To be sure, some commentators have argued that the persistent dominance of the LDP throughout most of the postwar period suggests Japan is an immature democracy. However, the success of the Democratic Party of Japan (2009–12) in capturing a sweeping majority—and then the clear electoral rebuke that followed persistent policy missteps and returned the LDP to power—demonstrate the ability of the Japanese electorate and Japan’s democratic institutions to both generate change and support a peaceful transition of  power. Further, a major reason for the LDP’s persistent electoral success has been its willingness to adapt and accommodate a wide range of political views from moderate conservatism to right-wing nationalism. Political leadership is strongly supported by the bureaucratic system, which has been the driving force of the policymaking process.  

Even the visible (if relatively small in magnitude) drop in the Freedom Index’s civil liberties component in 2019 can readily be explained by restrictions imposed to try to tackle the effects of the COVID-19 pandemic, as evidenced by the subsequent rebound in 2022. A similar fall is observable in the Index’s rating for legislative constraints on the executive. In this case, the drop has been persistent but the cause—and implications—of this drop are worth evaluating critically. One potential explanation is the fact that the national legislature did not decisively condemn multiple scandals related to political appointees in the executive branches and several members of the Cabinet during the late Abe administration (2012–20) and across the Suga and Kishida administrations (2020–24). At the same time, in foreign policy circles, the emergence of a more empowered and decisive Japanese premiership has been widely lauded as vital in allowing Japan to cope with an increasingly complex and severe foreign policy environment. Given that effective foreign policy is a critical guarantor of Japan’s economic freedom—and a critical buttress for the rules-based international economic order that Japan seeks to uphold—these scores deserve cautious interpretation. 

By contrast, the reduction in political rights observed in the Index—though relatively small—is nonetheless a cause for sober reflection. This drop in particular coincides with the former Prime Minister Abe’s second term. Abe’s strong leadership had many positive effects but its treatment of the press at times did not live up to the ideals of Japanese democracy. For example, certain journalists were practically expelled from press conferences when the administration felt their questions were unfair, which can be seen as an indirect restriction of freedom of information. This minor episode reflects a pressure that was looming over journalism in Japan, where the law regulating broadcasting gives an extraordinary importance to the neutrality of public and private media outlets (see Article fourof the Broadcasting Act of Japan). 

Finally, the most notable trend in the legal subindex, which seeks to capture bureaucratic quality and control of corruption, showed a more than fourteen-point improvement from 2002 to 2014, perhaps reflecting the legacy of major government restructuring efforts launched by the Hashimoto administration (1996–98) and carried forward under the subsequent Koizumi administration (2001–05). These gains have since been somewhat sustained, reflecting perhaps the intermittent revelation of corruption scandals, such as a notable case concerning Japan Highway Public Corporation in the 2000s and the recent incident affecting several ministers of the LDP accused of misuse of political donations.

Evolution of prosperity

Just as it is free, Japan is also among the most prosperous countries of the world, a reality well reflected by its high scores across the Prosperity Index. However, rather than dwell on Japan’s considerable strengths, I will focus here primarily on several caveats that highlight challenges ahead for the Japanese economy.  

First, although Japan is prosperous, growth in both gross domestic product (GDP) and income over the past two decades has been extremely limited. This in part reflects a basic reality that maintaining high levels of growth at the economic frontier is always difficult, particularly following the global financial crisis and in the shadow of rising public debt burdens around the world. Nonetheless, it is also true that Japan has underperformed even relative to most of its G7 and developed country peers, leading to a widening gap in income levels between Japan and the United States, France, and Germany (Figure 1). 

Figure 1: Change in Income for Selected Countries (1995-2023)

Source : World Bank GDP per capita, PPP

Second, Japan has experienced a slow rise in economic inequality since the start of the millennium. This is especially notable given the emphasis that Japanese culture and policy place on equality and homogeneity. Although in comparison to both large developed countries such as the United States and large developing countries such as the People’s Republic of China, Japan remains an almost shockingly egalitarian country, it is nonetheless true that policy efforts to increase the level of competition and productivity across the Japanese economy are correlated with increases in inequality. Whether it is these domestic policy changes that have caused inequality to rise, or whether it is structural shifts in the international economy that have led, for example, to many Japanese firms increasing the share of flexible contract employees over protected permanent employees, is unclear. However, the reality that a growing share of Japanese households are facing economic instability and seeing their incomes eroded by rising food and energy prices is unambiguous and a pressing policy challenge.  

Finally, it is worth commenting on Japan’s performance in terms of education. Once more, when compared to the global or regional average, Japan’s score stands as relatively high. Japan’s education system has long been regarded as one of the best in the world, with high literacy rates and a strong emphasis on the fields of science, technology, engineering, and mathematics. For example, Japan exceeded the OECD average for number of fifteen-year-old students amongst the top performers in the OECD Program for International Student Assessment (PISA). Nonetheless, the picture is not so optimistic when noting that Japan’s gap with respect to countries such as Germany or the United States is very sizeable (twelve and six points respectively). This gap could be explained partly by the lack of recognition of the importance of higher education. With the aging population, the need for lifelong learning and reskilling workers have become challenging priorities for Japan. 

The path forward

Looking forward to what the evolution of freedom and prosperity for Japan may look like in the near future, I would like to touch upon four major challenges that Japan may face.  

First is its demographic challenges. Japan is one of the most rapidly aging societies in the world with a shrinking working-age population. According to the World Bank, Japan’s population growth rate has been negative since 2011, and the decreasing workforce also means that there are fewer contributors to social security systems, exacerbating already strained public finances. The government is making various efforts to tackle this issue, including policies to increase the birth rate and address rural depopulation. However, their effects are limited in scale and scope. Immigration policy also remains relatively restricted and, while the necessity of reform is obvious in any macroeconomic analysis, the political economy of large-scale immigration is one where Japan closely resembles its developed country peers: there are no simple answers on offer. These policy areas could be considered both as difficult challenges and potential opportunities for growth.  

Second, Japan has substantial opportunity to more assertively promote diversity, equity, and inclusion. For example, couples married under current law are not allowed to elect to maintain separate surnames, despite a clear public majority in favor of such a reform. Same-sex marriage also enjoys strong public support and is even being considered in some local municipalities but progress at the national level has been slow across both the legislative and judicial branches. As discussed above, Japan also has further room to expand economic opportunities for women. When combined with other strategic labor market reforms, this could lead to significant productivity gains.  

Third, the shifting labor and investment market may affect Japan’s scores in the Freedom and Prosperity Indexes. As noted, Japan’s labor market used to lack flexibility and maintains significant structural rigidities when compared with most developed Western economies. Even today, most Japanese who join a company or government agency as regular employees out of college will think of their career with that institution in terms of decades rather than years. This stability of employment and accompanying seniority-based wage hikes have certain virtues in cultivating skilled, dedicated core employee bases. At the same time, locking away talent within companies and limiting incentives for top performers to excel may have reduced incentives and opportunities for innovation and entrepreneurship. Further, strong protections for some sections of the workforce may have come at the expense of others; as illustrated by the aforementioned rise in the frequency of dual-track employment structures. In this sense, as Japanese companies look to build job-type employment structures, they have an opportunity to square this circle, maintaining the low levels of inequality for which Japan is rightly praised while also providing more opportunities for flexible and dynamic career paths that will promote economy-wide productivity gains (and, hopefully, better work-life balance). 

Last but not least, the increasingly severe security and geopolitical circumstances surrounding Japan are likely to shape the country’s domestic political economy. A belligerent North Korea and the rising threat of a Taiwan Strait contingency remain as important regional security threats, while the situations in Ukraine and the Middle East are also of concern for Japan. In concert with the United States and like-minded partners, Japan is preparing itself for such contingencies while also seeking to proactively reduce the risk that they will occur. As part of this general trend, there is increasing discussion about a potential amendment to the Constitution of Japan, including a part of Article Nine. In some respects, such reforms might be seen as weakening Japan’s freedom—and may well register as such in the Freedom Index—but their actual impact is a matter of interpretation. Likewise, as US-People’s Republic of China tensions have contributed to Japan’s implementation of a world-leading economic security program, measures undertaken to promote Japan’s economic autonomy may alternatively be interpreted by some stakeholders as undermining economic freedom.  

As Japan prepares in 2025 to mark the eightieth anniversary of the end of World War II, it faces an uncertain political and economic future and a complex and challenging international security environment. However, the roots of freedom, prosperity, and democracy run deep in Japan, and Tokyo’s continued commitment to promoting a free and open rules-based international order is clear. Further, Japan’s ability to build a model of capitalism that delivers both freedom and broad-based prosperity is worth learning from, just as Japan must continue learning from its developed country peers as well as the Global South. 


Kotaro Shiojiri is a Japan Foundation visiting scholar at the Wilson Center, fellow at the Edwin O. Reischauer Center for East Asian Studies at Johns Hopkins University School of Advanced International Studies, and visiting associate professor at the Graduate Schools for Law and Politics at the University of Tokyo. Shiojiri earned his BA in law, MA in international studies, and PhD in public policy from the University of Tokyo, and his LLM from Harvard Law School. 

Statement on Intellectual Independence

The Atlantic Council and its staff, fellows, and directors generate their own ideas and programming, consistent with the Council’s mission, their related body of work, and the independent records of the participating team members. The Council as an organization does not adopt or advocate positions on particular matters. The Council’s publications always represent the views of the author(s) rather than those of the institution.

Read the previous Edition

2024 Atlas: Freedom and Prosperity Around the World

Twenty leading economists and government officials from eighteen countries contributed to this comprehensive volume, which serves as a roadmap for navigating the complexities of contemporary governance. 

Explore the data

Trackers and Data Visualizations

Jun 15, 2023

Freedom and Prosperity Indexes

The indexes rank 164 countries around the world according to their levels of freedom and prosperity. Use our site to explore twenty-eight years of data, compare countries and regions, and examine the sub-indexes and indicators that comprise our indexes.

About the center

The Freedom and Prosperity Center aims to increase the prosperity of the poor and marginalized in developing countries and to explore the nature of the relationship between freedom and prosperity in both developing and developed nations.

Stay connected

The post Demography and geopolitics put Japan’s strength to the test appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>
Atoms for Appalachia: The role of nuclear energy in economic development https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/in-depth-research-reports/report/atoms-for-appalachia-the-role-of-nuclear-energy-in-economic-development/ Mon, 24 Feb 2025 14:00:00 +0000 https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/?p=819366 Advanced nuclear technologies can drive economic security and energy security within Appalachian states.

The post Atoms for Appalachia: The role of nuclear energy in economic development appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>
In 2024, the Atlantic Council’s Nuclear Energy Policy Initiative hosted Atoms for Appalachia, a series of private workshops in North Carolina, Pennsylvania, Tennessee, and West Virginia, to identify opportunities and address challenges for the deployment of advanced nuclear energy. The workshops galvanized conversations at the federal, state, and local levels to discuss the potential for advanced nuclear energy to play a crucial role in the energy transition and in economic development. Advanced nuclear technologies can drive economic security and energy security within these states, especially by supporting a clean manufacturing base and creating workforce and educational opportunities.

It is imperative that discussions of opportunities and costs of a potential new nuclear project consider local wants and needs. An integrated, localized approach to nuclear development will enable economic opportunities for first-mover states as well as an honest assessment of the challenges to advancing nuclear deployment. States that deploy advanced nuclear technologies will face common challenges, like projecting workforce needs and attracting talent to the energy workforce; these challenges present opportunities for interstate collaboration.

In this report, “Atoms for Appalachia: The role of advanced nuclear technologies in economic development,” Lauren Hughes discusses common throughlines between the state-centric discussions and examines the role of advanced nuclear technologies in facilitating clean manufacturing and stimulating local and regional economic opportunities.

AUTHORS

Related content

stay connected

Keep up with the latest from the Global Energy Center!

Sign up below for program highlights, event invites, and analysis on the most pressing energy issues.

OUR WORK

The Global Energy Center develops and promotes pragmatic and nonpartisan policy solutions designed to advance global energy security, enhance economic opportunity, and accelerate pathways to net-zero emissions.

The post Atoms for Appalachia: The role of nuclear energy in economic development appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>
Issue brief: A NATO strategy for countering Russia https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/in-depth-research-reports/issue-brief/issue-brief-a-nato-strategy-for-countering-russia/ Thu, 20 Feb 2025 19:56:35 +0000 https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/?p=820507 Russia poses the most direct and growing threat to NATO member states' security. This threat now includes the war in Ukraine, militarization in the Arctic, hybrid warfare, and arms control violations. Despite NATO's military and economic superiority, a unified and effective strategy is essential to counter Russia's aggression.

The post Issue brief: A NATO strategy for countering Russia appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>

Key takeaways

  • Russia is the most direct and significant threat to the security of NATO member states—and since Moscow’s invasion of Georgia in 2008 this threat continues to grow. It now encompasses the war in Ukraine, the militarization of the Arctic, hybrid warfare, and violations of arms control treaties.
  • While NATO holds a significant advantage over Russia in military and economic power, an effective and unified strategy is needed to counter Russia’s aggression and fully harness the Alliance’s collective capabilities.
  • To effectively counter Russia, NATO must defeat Russia in Ukraine, deter Russian aggression against NATO allies and partners, contain Russian influence beyond its borders, and degrade Russia’s ability and will to accomplish its revisionist agenda. That will require, among other actions, a significant increase of support and commitment to Ukraine’s defense against Russia, and a more robust Alliance force posture including the modernization of its nuclear deterrent, the permanent stationing of brigade elements along NATO’s eastern frontier and increased defense industrial capacities.

Russia is “the most significant and direct threat to Allies’ security.” So states the NATO Strategic Concept promulgated at the Alliance’s Madrid Summit in June 2022, just four months after Russia’s massive escalation of its invasion of Ukraine.1 The concept and NATO declarations not only underscore the illegality and brutality of that ongoing attack but also highlight Moscow’s use of nuclear and conventional military aggression, annexation, subversion, sabotage, and other forms of coercion and violence against NATO allies and partners.

Ever since its invasion of Georgia in 2008, Russia’s aggression against the Alliance has steadily intensified. This led NATO leaders at their 2024 Washington Summit to task the development of “recommendations on NATO’s strategic approach to Russia, taking into account the changing security environment.”2 The Alliance’s “Russia strategy” is due for consideration at NATO’s next summit at The Hague in June 2025.3 This issue brief reviews Moscow’s actions affecting the security of the Euro-Atlantic area and presents the enduring realities, objectives, and actions that should constitute the core of an effective NATO strategy to counter the threat posed by Russia.

Intensified and globalized Russian aggression

Russia’s objectives go far beyond the subordination of Ukraine. Moscow seeks to reassert hegemony and control over the space of the former Soviet Union, diminish the power of the democratic community of nations, and delegitimize the international rules-based order. Moscow aims to subjugate its neighbors and to weaken—if not shatter—NATO, the key impediment to its European ambitions.

Toward these ends and under the leadership of President Vladimir Putin, Russia:

  • Has illegally occupied Moldova’s Transnistria region since the early 1990s.
  • Invaded Georgia in 2008, has continued to occupy portions of that country, and recently increased its influence, if not control, over the nation’s governance.
  • Invaded Ukraine in 2014 and significantly escalated this ongoing war in February 2022.
  • Militarized the Arctic by increasing its military presence in the region, including through reopening Soviet-era bases and building new facilities to buttress Russian territorial claims over Arctic waters.
  • Leveraged trade and energy embargoes and other forms of economic pressure to intimidate and coerce its European neighbors.
  • Conducts an escalating campaign of active measures short of war against NATO allies and partners, including information warfare, election interference, sabotage, assassination, weaponized migration, cyberattacks, GPS jamming, and other actions.
  • Expanded its conventional and nuclear military capabilities, an effort that was part of President Putin’s preparations to invade Ukraine.
  • Violated, suspended, and abrogated international arms control agreements, including New START Treaty, the Conventional Armed Forces in Europe (CFE) Treaty, the Intermediate-Range Nuclear Forces (INF) Treaty, the Comprehensive Test Ban Treaty (CTBT), the Open Skies Agreement, and others.4

Enduring realities

A NATO strategy to counter Russia’s aggression is long overdue. Its absence cedes to Russia the initiative, leaving the Alliance too often in a reactive, if not indecisive and passive, posture in this relationship. An effective strategy requires recognition of nine enduring realities:

First, Russia’s invasion of Ukraine was a failure of deterrence. The weakness of the Alliance’s response to Russia’s 2014 invasion of Ukraine, NATO’s failure to respond forcefully to Russia’s months long mobilization of forces along Ukraine’s frontiers in 2021, and NATO’s acquiescence to Putin’s exercise of nuclear coercion emboldened and facilitated Putin’s actions against Ukraine. As a result, the credibility of the Alliance’s commitment to defend resolutely its interests and values has been damaged.

A destroyed Russian tank remains on the side of the road near the frontline town of Kreminna, amid Russia’s attack on Ukraine, in Luhansk region, Ukraine March 24, 2023. REUTERS/Violeta Santos Moura

Second, Russia is at war, not just against Ukraine. It is also at war against NATO. The Alliance can no longer approach the relationship as one of competition or confrontation considering the military invasions, active measures, and other forms of violence and coercion Russia has undertaken against NATO allies and partners.5 As former US Deputy Secretary of State Stephen Biegun has written, “Quite simply, Putin has declared war on the West, but the West does not yet understand we are at war with Russia.”6 By failing to recognize this reality, NATO has ceded escalation dominance to Russia as evidenced by its limiting of support to Ukraine and its inaction against repeated Russian aggression and provocations. The Alliance must recognize and act upon the reality that Moscow has pushed the NATO-Russia relationship into the state of war.

Third, NATO faces long-term conflict with Russia. Putin cannot be expected to abandon his ambitions, even if defeated in Ukraine. Ever since Putin’s speech before the February 2007 Munich Security Conference in which he railed against the international order and NATO’s expanding membership, Russia’s campaign to subjugate its neighbors and to intimidate, divide, and weaken the Alliance has been unceasing and relentless. Nor can the Alliance assume that Putin’s successor will significantly diverge from the objectives and policies that drive Russia’s actions today. Peaceful coexistence with Russia is not attainable in the short to medium term and will be difficult to attain in the long term.

Quite simply, Putin has declared war on the West, but the West does not yet understand we are at war with Russia.


—Stephen Biegun, former US Deputy Secretary of State

Fourth, Russia will continue efforts to increase the size and capability of its armed forces. While Russian land forces have suffered significant losses in its invasion of Ukraine, Moscow has reconstituted that force faster than expected. Russia’s land forces were estimated to be 15 percent larger in April 2024 than when Russia attacked Kyiv in February 2022.7 Earlier this year, Russia announced new ambitious plans to restructure and expand its ground forces to 1.5 million active personnel.8 Moreover, the Russian air force and navy have not been significantly degraded by the war against Ukraine. Russia’s air force has only lost some 10 percent of its aircraft. While Russian naval ships have been destroyed in the Black Sea, Russian naval activity worldwide has increased.9 Similarly, Russian nuclear forces have been unaffected by the conflict in Ukraine. Russia retains the world’s largest arsenal of deployed and nondeployed nuclear weapons and continues to develop new models of intercontinental ballistic missiles (ICBM) and intermediate range ballistic missiles (IRBM), hypersonic boost-glide vehicles, nuclear-powered cruise missiles, nuclear-powered subsurface drones, antisatellite weapons, and orbital space weapons.10 With some 6 percent of gross domestic product (GDP) being directed to its military, Moscow is investing to increase its defense-industrial and research and development capacities.11 Russia’s industrial base produces more ammunition than that produced by all NATO members and is fielding new high-tech weapons systems, such as the nuclear-capable multiple warhead IRBM Oreshnik Russia, which was demonstrated in combat against Ukraine last November.12 In April 2024, NATO SACEUR General Christopher Cavoli testified to the US Congress that:

  • “Russia is on track to command the largest military on the continent and a defense industrial complex capable of generating substantial amounts of ammunition and material in support of large-scale combat operations. Regardless of the outcome of the war in Ukraine, Russia will be larger, more lethal and angrier with the West than when it invaded.”13

Fifth, Moscow’s aggressive actions short of war will continue and escalate. Putin has yet to face a response from the Alliance that will dissuade him from further exercising information warfare, cyber warfare, energy and trade embargoes, assassination, GPS jamming, sabotage, fomenting separatist movements, and other forms of hybrid warfare. These actions are intended to intimidate governments; weaken the credibility of the Alliance’s security guarantee; create and exacerbate internal divisions; and divide allies, among other objectives. Left unchecked, they threaten to undermine the Alliance’s ability to attain consensus necessary to take decisive action against Russia.

Sixth, Moscow’s exercise of nuclear coercion will continue as a key element of Russia’s strategy and should be expected to intensify. Threats of nuclear warfare are a key element of Putin’s strategy to preclude NATO and its members from providing Ukraine support that would enable it to decisively defeat Russia’s invasion. This repeated exercise of nuclear coercion includes verbal threats from President Putin and other senior Russian officials; the launching of nuclear capable ICBMs; the use of a nuclear capable IRBM against Ukraine, the first use of such a system in a conflict; nuclear weapons exercises; and the deployment of nuclear weapons to Belarus, according to both Russia and Belarus.14 NATO allies have repeatedly rewarded this coercion by expressing fear of nuclear war; declaring that NATO forces will not enter Ukraine; restricting NATO’s role in assisting Ukraine; limiting the flow of weapons to Ukraine; and restricting their use against legitimate military targets in Russia. Rewarding nuclear coercion encourages its repeated exercise and escalation. It risks leading Russia to conclude it has attained escalation dominance. A key challenge for NATO going forward will be to demonstrate that Russia’s threats of nuclear strikes are counterproductive, and the Alliance cannot be deterred by nuclear coercion.

NATO leaders stand together for a photo at NATO’s 75th anniversary summit in Washington in July 2024. REUTERS/Yves Herman

Seventh, Moscow is conducting a global campaign of aggression to weaken the democratic community of nations and the rules-based international order. Over the last two decades, Russia has exercised its military, informational, and economic assets to generate anti-Western sentiment across the globe, including in Europe, Africa, the Middle East, and the Indo-Pacific region. This has included military support to authoritarian, anti-Western regimes well beyond Europe, including Venezuela, Syria, and Mali. The most concerning element of Russia’s global campaign is the partnerships it has operationalized with China, Iran, and North Korea. Russia’s “no limits partnership” with China enables Putin to mitigate the impacts of Western sanctions on his war economy. Both Iran and North Korea have provided Russia with weapons and ammunition, and North Korean soldiers have joined Russia’s fight against Ukraine. In return, Russia has supplied missile and nuclear technologies, oil and gas, and economic support to these nations that enables them to stoke violence across the Middle East, threaten the Korean Peninsula, and drive forward Beijing’s hegemonic ambitions in the Indo-Pacific region.

Eighth, an effective Russia strategy will require a coordinated leveraging of all the instruments of power available through the Alliance, its member states, and its key partners, including the European Union. This includes the application of diplomatic, economic, ideological, informational, and other elements of power—none of which are the Alliance’s primary capacity, military power—that can be marshaled through its members states and multinational institutions, such as the European Union, where the Alliance and its member states have influence and authority.

Ninth, NATO significantly overmatches Russia in military and economic power.
NATO Headquarters estimates the combined GDP of Alliance member states to be $54 trillion, more than twenty-five times Russia’s estimated GDP of more than $2 trillion.15 The combined defense budget of NATO members amounts to approximately $1.5 trillion,16 more than ten times that of Russia’s publicly projected defense budget of $128 billion for 2025.17 This imbalance of power favoring the Alliance will be enduring and makes the execution of an effective Russia strategy not a matter of capacity, but one of strategic vision and political will.

Core objectives

To counter the direct and significant threat posed by Moscow, a NATO strategy for Russia should be structured around four core objectives:18

  • Defeat Russia in Ukraine: NATO must defeat Russia’s war against Ukraine. This is its most urgent priority. Failure to do so—and failure includes the conflict’s perpetuation—increases the risk of a wider war in Europe and will encourage other adversaries around the world to pursue their revisionist and hegemonic ambitions. Russia’s decisive defeat in Ukraine is essential to return stability to Europe and to reinforce the credibility of the Alliance’s deterrent posture.
  • Deter aggression by Russia: A key Alliance priority must be the effective deterrence of Russia aggression against the Alliance. A robust conventional and nuclear posture that deters Russian military aggression is far less costly than an active war. Deterrence must also be more effectively exercised against Russia’s actions short of war. Failure to deter aggression in this domain can undermine confidence in the Alliance and increase the risk of war.
  • Contain Russia’s influence and control: The Alliance must actively contain Russia’s efforts to assert influence and control beyond its borders. The Alliance must assist Europe’s non-NATO neighbors in Central and Eastern Europe, the Balkans, the Caucasus, and in Central Asia to strengthen their defenses and resilience to Russian pressure. NATO and NATO allies should also work to counter and roll back Russia’s influence and engagement around the globe.
  • Degrade Russia’s capabilities and determination: A core objective for the Alliance should include weakening Russia’s capacity and will to pursue its hegemonic ambitions. Denying Russia access to international markets would further degrade its economy, including its defense-industrial capacity. Active engagement of the Russian public and other key stakeholders should aim to generate opposition to Putin and the Kremlin’s international aggression.

Achievement of these objectives would compel the Kremlin to conclude that its revanchist ambitions, including the diminishment or destruction of NATO, are unachievable and self-damaging. It would diminish Russia’s will and ability to continue aggression in Europe and weaken the impact of Russia’s partnerships, including with China, Iran, and North Korea. In addition, achieving these objectives would return a modicum of stability to Europe that in the long-term would enhance the prospects for NATO’s peaceful coexistence with Russia.

Regardless of the outcome of the war in Ukraine, Russia will be larger, more lethal, and angrier with the West than when it invaded.


—Gen. Christopher Cavoli, NATO Supreme Allied Commander Europe

A NATO strategy to defeat, deter, contain, and degrade Russian aggression and influence should effectuate the following actions by the Alliance, its member states, and partners:

  • Defeat Russia in Ukraine and accelerate Ukraine’s accession into the NATO alliance Defeating Russian aggression against Ukraine requires its own strategy, which should feature five key elements: adopting Ukraine’s war objectives, including total territorial reconstitution (i.e., the Alliance must never recognize Russian sovereignty over the territories it illegally seized from Ukraine); maximizing the flow of military equipment and supplies to Ukraine, free of restrictions on their use against legitimate military targets in Russia; imposing severe economic sanctions on Russia; deploying aggressive information operations to generate opposition in Russia against Putin’s aggression; and presenting a clear, accelerated path for Ukraine to NATO membership. NATO membership, and the security guarantee it provides, would add real risk and complexity to Russian military planning. NATO membership for Ukraine is the only way to convince the Kremlin that Ukraine cannot be subject to Russian hegemony and would provide security conditions needed for Ukraine’s rapid reconstruction and economic integration into Europe.
  • Fulfill and operationalize NATO’s regional defense plans. To establish a credible and effective deterrent against Russian military aggression, NATO allies must:
    • Build and deploy the requisite national forces. Military plans are no more than visions in the absence of required capabilities. NATO’s European and Canadian allies need to generate more forces, with requisite firepower, mobility, and enabling capacities. In short, given European allies’ obligations under NATO’s new regional defense plans, they must act with urgency.
    • Strengthen transatlantic defense industrial capacity. High intensity warfare, as seen in Ukraine, consumes massive amounts of weapons stocks, much of which have to be in a near constant state of modernization to match the technological adaptations of the adversary. Today, the Alliance has struggled (and often failed) to match the defense-industrial capacity of Russia and its partners. NATO’s defense industrial base must expand its production capacities and its ability to rapidly develop, update, and field weapons systems.
    • Increase allied defense spending to the equivalent of 5 percent of GDP. To facilitate the aforementioned requirements and to address emerging challenges beyond Europe that could simultaneously challenge the transatlantic community, NATO allies need to increase the agreed floor of defense spending from 2 percent to 5 percent and fulfill that new commitment with immediacy. NATO members cannot allow themselves to be forced to choose between defending against Russia and another geopolitical challenge beyond Europe.
  • Terminate the NATO Russia Founding Act (NRFA). Russia has repeatedly and blatantly violated the principles and commitments laid out in the Founding Act. Russia’s actions include having invaded Ukraine both in 2014 and in 2022, using nuclear coercion and escalatory rhetoric to pressue the Alliance, and deploying nonstrategic nuclear weapons to Belarus, as both Russia and Belarus have affirmed. Consequently, NATO should formally render the NRFA defunct, including the Alliance’s commitments to:
    • Adhere to the “three nuclear no’s” that NATO member states “have no intention, no plan and no reason to deploy nuclear weapons on the territory of new members, nor any need to change any aspect of NATO’s nuclear posture or nuclear policy – and do not foresee any future need to do so.”19
    • Abstain from permanently stationing “substantial combat forces” in Central and Eastern Europe.20
  • Update NATO’s nuclear force posture. In response to Russia’s modernization of its nuclear arsenal, exercise of nuclear coercion, and adjustments to its nuclear strategy that lowers the threshold for first use of nuclear weapons, the Alliance must update its own nuclear posture. The objectives should be to provide NATO with a broader and more credible spectrum of nuclear weapons options. An updated force posture would improve NATO’s ability to manage, if not dominate, the ladder of conflict escalation, complicate Russian military planning, and thereby weaken Moscow’s confidence in its own military posture and its strategy of nuclear “escalation to de escalate.” Toward these ends, the Alliance should:
    • Increase the spectrum of NATO’s nuclear capabilities. This should include a nuclear-armed sea-launched cruise missile (SLCM-N) and a ground-launched variant. The breadth and number of NATO nuclear weapons exercises, such as the yearly Steadfast Noon, should be expanded and further integrated with exercises of conventional forces.
    • Expand the number of members participating in the Alliance’s nuclear sharing agreements. Doing so will expand the tactical options available to NATO and underscore more forcefully Alliance unity behind its nuclear posture.
    • Broaden the number and locations of infrastructure capable of hosting the Alliance’s nuclear posture. The Alliance’s nuclear posture still relies solely on Cold War legacy infrastructure in Western Europe. Given the threat posed by Russia, NATO should establish facilities capable of handling nuclear weapons and dual capable systems, including nuclear weapons storage sites, in NATO member states along its eastern frontier.
  • Reinforce NATO’s eastern flank. Russia’s assault on Ukraine and its growing provocations against NATO member states and partners underscore the need to further reinforce the Alliance’s eastern frontier. To date, NATO’s deployments along its eastern flank amount to more of a trip-wire force rather than one designed for a strategy of defense by denial. To give greater credibility to the Alliance’s pledge not to “cede one inch” when considering a potential attack by Russia, NATO should:
    • Establish a more robust permanent military presence along the Alliance’s eastern frontier. NATO is expanding its eight multinational battlegroups deployed to Central and Eastern Europe. But each of these deployments should be further upgraded to full brigades that are permanently stationed there. These elements should feature robust enabling capacities, particularly air and missile defenses and long-range fires. If the United States is expected to sustain a presence of 100,000 troops in Europe, the least Western Europe and Canada can do is to forward station some 32,000 troops combined in Central and Eastern Europe.
    • Conduct large-scale, concentrated exercises on NATO’s eastern flank. The Alliance has commendably reanimated its emphasis on large-scale joint military exercises. However, those exercises have yet to be concentrated on NATO’s eastern flank. Doing so would enhance readiness, reassure the Alliance’s Central and Eastern European member states, and demonstrate resolve and preparedness in the face of Russian aggression.
    • Upgrade the Alliance’s air defense and ballistic missile defense systems to more robustly address Russian threats. In its attacks on Ukraine, Russia has demonstrated with brutality its emphasis on missile and long-range drone strikes against military and civilian targets. As part of its efforts to upgrade its air and missile defense capacities, NATO should direct the European Phased Adaptive Approach to address threats from Russia.21
A Grad-P Partizan single rocket launcher is fired towards Russian troops by servicemen of the 110th Territorial Defence Brigade of the Ukrainian Armed Forces, amid Russia’s attack on Ukraine, on a frontline in Zaporizhzhia region, Ukraine January 21, 2025. REUTERS/Stringer
  • Expand the NATO SACEUR’s authority to order deployments and conduct operations along NATO’s eastern frontier. The Alliance’s regional defense plans are said to provide SACEUR with greater authority to activate and deploy NATO forces before crisis and conflict situations. Due to the aggressiveness of Russia’s ambitions, NATO should consider further expanding those authorities as they relate to the deployment and missions of forces along the Alliance’s eastern frontier. The actions of a deterrent force can be even more important than the magnitude of their presence.
  • Augment the Alliance’s posture in the Arctic. Russia has heavily militarized the Arctic, upgraded the status and capability of its Northern Fleet, and deepened its military cooperation with China in the region while the Kremlin continues to assert Arctic territorial claims that conflict with those of NATO allies. While NATO has been increasing the tempo of its Arctic operations and improving its Arctic capabilities, Russia continues to pose a significant threat in the region and possibly outmatches the Alliance in the High North. To further reinforce deterrence against Russian aggression in the Arctic, the Alliance should:
    • Develop a comprehensive NATO strategy to defend its interests in the High North. Such a document would underscore the Alliance’s commitment to the region and help foster allied investments in infrastructure, capabilities, and training needed to defend and deter Russian threats in the High North.
    • Establish a NATO Arctic Command and Joint Force. The Arctic poses a unique set of geographic and climatic challenges requiring tailored operational capabilities. A command and air-ground-naval force focused specifically on the High North would provide the Alliance a dedicated and tailored deterrent to counter Russian aggression in the Arctic.22
  • Bolster deterrence against Russian actions short of war by strengthening resilience and through more assertive and punitive counteractions. NATO and NATO member states’ failure to respond robustly to Russia’s hybrid warfare—whether it is information warfare, cyberattacks, sabotage, assassinations, or other forms of aggression — has resulted in Russia’s intensification and escalation of these actions. The transatlantic community must strengthen its resilience against such attacks but also take stronger punitive measures against Russia if it is to persuade Russia to cease these attacks. While much of what needs to be done falls beyond the remit of NATO’s military capabilities, greater consideration should be given to how military assets can be leveraged to gather intelligence about Russian activity and provide a military dimension to the transatlantic community’s response to such provocations. For example, when a Russian ship fired a warning shot directed at a commercial Norwegian fishing boat within Norway’s exclusive economic zone or when Russia pulled out Estonian navigation buoys from the Narva River,23 an immediate show of force from NATO could have been an appropriate response.
  • Strengthen the deterrence and resilience capacities of non-NATO nations in Europe and Russia’s periphery. Recent elections in Georgia, Moldova, and Romania reflect the intensity of Russia’s determination to claw back control and influence over the space of the former Soviet Union and Warsaw Pact. A key priority of a Russia strategy should be to strengthen efforts by the Alliance, its member states, and key institutional partners, such as the European Union, to reinforce the resilience and defense capabilities of non-NATO nations in Central and Eastern Europe, the Balkans, the Caucasus, and Central Asia. NATO’s programs, such as the Defence and Related Security Capacity Building Initiative, warrant even greater emphasis and resources, particularly in those regions.
  • Intensify Russia’s economic and diplomatic isolation. The current set of measures taken against Moscow in these realms have failed to sufficiently degrade Russia’s war economy and its ability to sustain its invasion of Ukraine and provocations elsewhere in the world. A key priority for NATO and its member states should be to significantly escalate economic sanctions, including the exercise of secondary sanctions to eliminate Moscow’s ability to generate international revenue from energy exports and attain critical technologies needed by its defense industrial sector.
  • Increase efforts to generate internal Russian opposition to the Kremlin’s revanchist objectives and greater support for democratic principles and governance. Russia has undertaken aggressive campaigns to influence the politics of NATO allies and partners. In the recent elections of Moldova and Romania, Russian intervention nearly effectuated regime change. For too long, the transatlantic community has remained on the defensive in this realm. NATO and its member states need to shift to the offensive and weaponize the power of truth to illuminate the brutal realities of Moscow’s invasion of Ukraine, the corruption of Russian officials, and other realties of Russian governance. NATO allies must more actively support Russian stakeholders—particularly civil society—that are more aligned with transatlantic values. This is critical to degrading the political will of the Russian state to continue its aggressions.
  • Modulate dialogue with Russia, limiting it to what is operationally necessary. The Alliance should formally disband the NATO-Russia Council—which last met in 2022—until Moscow has demonstrated genuine commitment to a constructive relationship. Nonetheless, the Alliance should establish and/or maintain lines of communication between the NATO secretary general and the Kremlin, as well as between Supreme Headquarters Allied Powers Europe (SHAPE) and the Russian General Staff, to enable crisis management and provide transparency needed for military stability. This would not preclude NATO allies from dialogues with Russia deemed necessary, for example, to assist Ukraine or pursue arms control measures.

The bottom line

As noted, NATO possesses an overmatching capacity to defeat Russia in Ukraine, deter Russian aggression, contain Russian influence beyond its borders, and degrade Russia’s ability and will to accomplish its revisionist agenda. Today, there is no better time to achieve these objectives by fully marshaling the Alliance’s assets and potential. Moscow cannot undertake an all-out military attack on NATO without risking the viability of Russia’s armed forces and thus its regime. The accomplishment of these objectives would provide stability to Europe’s eastern frontier and establish the best foundation for an eventual relationship with Moscow that is minimally confrontational, if not cooperative and constructive. However, this will take political will and resources. Russia today is determined to prevail in Ukraine, expand its military capabilities, and further leverage its partners, particularly China, Iran, and North Korea, to defeat the community of democracies and, particularly, the Alliance. Russia already envisions itself as being at war with NATO.

About the authors

Explore the program

The Transatlantic Security Initiative, in the Scowcroft Center for Strategy and Security, shapes and influences the debate on the greatest security challenges facing the North Atlantic Alliance and its key partners.

Related content

1    “NATO Strategic Concept,” June 29, 2022, https://www.nato.int/strategic-concept/
2    Washington Summit Declaration, issued by NATO heads of state and government participating in the meeting of the North Atlantic Council in Washington, DC, July 10, 2024, https://www.nato.int/cps/ar/natohq/official_texts_227678.htm
3    Washington Summit Declaration
4    See Mathias Hammer, “The Collapse of Global Arms Control,” Time Magazine, November 13, 2023, https://time.com/6334258/putin-nuclear-arms-control/
5     more information about active measures, see Mark Galeotti, “Active Measures:
Russia’s Covert Geopolitical Operations,” Strategic Insights, George C. Marshall
European Center for Security Studies, June 2019, https://www.marshallcenter.org/en/
publications/security-insights/active-measures-russias-covert-geopolitical-operations-0
6    Stephen E. Biegun, “The Path Forward,” in Russia Policy Platform, Vandenberg Coalition
and McCain Institute, 2024, 32-36, https://vandenbergcoalition.org/the-russia-policyplatform/
7    US Military Posture and National Security Challenges in Europe, Hearing Before the
House Armed Services Comm., 118th Cong. (2024), (statement of Gen. Christopher
G. Cavoli, Commander, US European Command), https://www.eucom.mil/about-thecommand/2024-posture-statement-to-congress
8    Andrew Osborn, “Putin Orders Russian Army to Become Second Largest After China’s
at 1.5 Million-strong,” Reuters, September 16, 2024, https://www.reuters.com/world/
europe/putin-orders-russian-army-grow-by-180000-soldiers-become-15-millionstrong-2024-09-16/
9    US Military Posture Hearing (statement of Gen. Cavoli)
10    US Military Posture Hearing (statement of Gen. Cavoli)
11    Pavel Luzin and Alexandra Prokopenko, “Russia’s 2024 Budget Shows It’s Planning for
a Long War in Ukraine,” Carnegie Endowment for International Peace, October 11, 2023, https://carnegieendowment.org/russia-eurasia/politika/2023/09/russias-2024-budget-shows-its-planning-for-a-long-war-in-ukraine?lang=en
12    “How Does Russia’s New ‘Oreshnik’ Missile Work?,” Reuters video, November 28, 2024,
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=pYKDNSYw1NQ
13    US Military Posture Hearing (statement of Gen. Cavoli)
14    “Ukraine War: Putin Confirms First Nuclear Weapons Moved to Belarus,” BBC, June
17, 2023, https://www.bbc.com/news/world-europe-65932700; and Associated Press,
“Belarus Has Dozens of Russian Nuclear Weapons and Is Ready for Its Newest Missile, Its
Leader Says,” via ABC News, December 10, 2024, https://abcnews.go.com/International/
wireStory/belarus-dozens-russian-nuclear-weapons-ready-newest-missile-116640354
.
15    “Defense Expenditures of NATO Countries (2014-2024),” Press Release, NATO Public
Diplomacy Division, June 12, 2024, 7, https://www.nato.int/cps/is/natohq/topics_49198.htm
16    “Defense Expenditures of NATO Countries (2014-2024)
17    Pavel Luzin, “Russia Releases Proposed Military Budget for 2025,” Eurasia Daily Monitor
21, no. 134, Jamestown Foundation, October 3, 2024, https://jamestown.org/program/
russia-releases-proposed-military-budget-for-2025/
18    These core objectives are derived in significant part from the writings of Stephen E.
Biegun and Ambassador Alexander Vershbow. Biegun calls for “a new Russia policy
for the United States…built around three goals: defeat, deter, and contain.” See: https://
vandenbergcoalition.org/wp-content/uploads/2024/11/8_The-Path-Forward-Beigun.pdf

published November 21, 2024. See also: Alexander Vershbow, “Russia Policy After the
War: A New Strategy of Containment,” New Atlanticist, Atlantic Council blog, February 22,
2023, https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/blogs/new-atlanticist/russia-policy-after-the-war-anew-strategy-of-containment/
19    See the NATO-Russia Founding Act, “Founding Act on Mutual Relations, Cooperation
and Security between NATO and the Russian Federation,” NATO, May 27, 1997, https://
www.nato.int/cps/en/natolive/official_texts_25468.htm
20    NATO-Russia Founding Act.
21    Jaganath Sankaran, “The United States’ European Phased Adaptive Missile Defense
System,” RAND Corporation, February 13, 2015, https://www.rand.org/pubs/research_
reports/RR957.html
22    For an excellent proposal for a Nordic-led Arctic joint expeditionary force, see Ryan
R. Duffy et al., “More NATO in the Arctic Could Free the United States Up to Focus on
China,” War on the Rocks, November 21, 2024, https://warontherocks.com/2024/11/morenato-in-the-arctic-could-free-the-united-states-up-to-focus-on-china/
23    See Seb Starcevic, “Russian Warship Fired Warning Shot at Norwegian Fishing Boat,”
Politico, September 24, 2024, https://www.politico.eu/article/russia-warship-chaseaway-norway-fishing-vessel/; and George Wright, “Russia Removal of Border Markers
‘Unacceptable’ – EU,” BBC, May 24, 2024, https://www.bbc.com/news/articles/
c899844ypj2o

The post Issue brief: A NATO strategy for countering Russia appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>
Southeast Asia aims for sustainability through connectivity https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/content-series/global-energy-agenda/southeast-asia-aims-for-sustainability-through-connectivity/ Thu, 20 Feb 2025 14:00:00 +0000 https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/?p=826445 As Southeast Asia's energy demand rises,
the region's energy transition stands at an
inflection point. Looking ahead, this growth
presents the region with an enormous
challenge, but also the opportunity to be a leader in the global energy transition.

The post Southeast Asia aims for sustainability through connectivity appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>

Kok Keong Puah is the chief executive of Singapore’s Energy Market Authority. 

Southeast Asia’s energy transition stands at an inflection point. As the region’s energy demand accelerates—spurred by both rapid economic growth and a growing population—the stakes are higher than ever. The ASEAN Centre for Energy (ACE) estimates that Southeast Asia’s energy demand will more than double from 2022 levels by 2050. By that year, the International Energy Agency predicts that the region’s energy demand will surpass the European Union’s.  

This growth presents an enormous challenge: How can we ensure energy security, meet climate ambitions, and address the needs of a growing population at the same time? Yet there is a silver lining: Southeast Asia has the potential to lead the way in the global energy transition. 

ACE estimates suggest that renewable energy could meet more than two-thirds of the region’s energy needs by 2050. However, unlocking this potential is far from straightforward. Large upfront capital investments, profitability concerns, and a lack of adequate grid infrastructure all stand in the way.  

The solution? A more connected Southeast Asia.  

Regional interconnectivity is key to unlocking Southeast Asia’s decarbonized future. The ASEAN Power Grid (APG) vision aims to connect power grids, creating a borderless network throughout Southeast Asia that links regions rich in renewable energy to demand centers. A connected system would lay the foundation for a robust and integrated regional energy market. It would allow countries to diversify their energy sources and strengthen resilience by drawing upon mutual support from neighboring nations. 

Through the APG, countries could establish long-term power purchase agreements for renewable energy projects that improve project bankability and attract high-quality investments. For example, The Business Times in Singapore reported that planned electricity export projects from Indonesia to Singapore could bring as much as $20 billion in investments to Indonesia. The APG would also increase access to electricity in exporting countries as domestic grid infrastructure is strengthened to support cross-border trade. Domestic manufacturing and related economic activities would likely see an uptick as developers source parts and services locally.   

Southeast Asia is already taking strides toward realizing the APG vision. Pathfinding projects, such as the Lao PDR-Thailand-Malaysia-Singapore Power Integration Project, have proven the feasibility of multilateral cross-border power trade among multiple Southeast Asian countries. Its success has paved the way for further initiatives such as the Brunei-Indonesia-Malaysia-Philippines Power Integration Project.  

These efforts are laying the groundwork for an interconnected regional grid. But significant investment and infrastructure development are still needed. 

Singapore is supporting projects from Australia, Cambodia, Indonesia, and Vietnam to provide a total of 7.35 gigawatts of low-carbon electricity imports to Singapore. Doing so has allowed us to kick-start discussions within the region on how we can collaborate to realize the APG vision.  

Collaboration beyond the Association of Southeast Asian Nations (ASEAN) is essential. No one country can realize the APG alone. ASEAN has collaborated with dialogue partners such as Australia, Japan, and the United States on renewable energy technologies and regional power integration. These partnerships not only bring financial support, but also a wealth of expertise to accelerate the sustainable energy transition.  

An example of such collaboration is the joint feasibility study between Singapore and the United States on regional energy connectivity. The first phase demonstrated the technical feasibility and socioeconomic benefits of regional connectivity, while the second phase will focus on studying the necessary legal and financial frameworks to support it.  

Southeast Asia’s renewable energy resources make the region an ideal testing ground for emerging low-carbon technologies. Hydrogen, geothermal energy, and carbon capture and storage (CCS) hold immense potential. Singapore, in collaboration with ExxonMobil and Shell through the S Hub consortium, is studying cross-border CCS projects to enhance the region’s climate resilience.  

The inaugural Singapore-US Forum, co-hosted with the US Department of Commerce at the 2024 Singapore International Energy Week (SIEW), brought together government and industry leaders to discuss strategies to accelerate the development of hydrogen in Asia. These partnerships are critical for driving innovation and ensuring that Southeast Asia remains at the forefront of the global energy transition. 

Similarly, organizations like the Atlantic Council play a key role in driving the region’s decarbonization by facilitating important discussions that shape energy transition narratives. As our strategic insights partner for SIEW, the Atlantic Council’s advocacy efforts on energy security have helped to build mindshare among participants on the benefits of regional interconnectivity, renewables, and low-carbon energy technologies.  

The energy transition in Southeast Asia has global implications. A stable, prosperous, and decarbonized Southeast Asia will not only benefit the region but also strengthen global supply chains, promote economic growth, and contribute to climate stability. Through our continued partnerships with the United States and other global partners, we will build a connected and sustainable world for all. 

All essays

Explore the program

The Global Energy Center develops and promotes pragmatic and nonpartisan policy solutions designed to advance global energy security, enhance economic opportunity, and accelerate pathways to net-zero emissions.

The post Southeast Asia aims for sustainability through connectivity appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>
Energy realities require pragmatic solutions https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/content-series/global-energy-agenda/energy-realities-require-pragmatic-solutions/ Thu, 20 Feb 2025 14:00:00 +0000 https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/?p=824493 Meeting the world’s growing energy demand requires balancing reliability, affordability, and sustainability while addressing geopolitical and economic security. Pragmatic policies that expand energy access, invest in diverse energy sources, and build resilient infrastructure are needed for a more secure and prosperous future.

The post Energy realities require pragmatic solutions appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>

Rick Muncrief is the president and CEO of Devon Energy. This essay is part of the Global Energy Agenda.

Energy is the lifeblood of modern civilization, enhancing the lives of billions of people around the world. It is fundamental to human health, economic opportunity and prosperity, and global security.  

With over four decades of experience in the oil and natural gas industry, I am excited by the opportunity that is in front of us: how to grow the energy system, while making it cleaner and more resilient. As we look to the future, in a world that is becoming increasingly fragmented, it’s crucial to address the energy realities we collectively face.  

The world needs more energy, not less.  

The first reality is that the world needs exceedingly more energy, not less. According to the US Energy Information Administration, global energy demand is projected to grow more than 30 percent by 2050. This surge in demand is fueled not only by the meteoric rise of artificial intelligence and data centers, but also growth in manufacturing and transportation. In emerging economies, energy demand will continue to rise as populations grow and incomes increase, enabling billions of people to drive, access new goods and services, and power their homes.  

Despite significant progress in expanding energy access in the past decades, over one billion people still live in energy poverty, lacking reliable, affordable, productive power. More than two billion people still do not have access to clean cooking fuels or technologies, like natural gas or electricity. Every human being deserves access to the energy they need to thrive—the privileges that so many of us enjoy every day. 

Energy security underpins global security. 

The second reality is that energy security, economic security, and global security are intertwined and interdependent. Diverse, resilient energy systems are necessary to avoid economic disruptions, geopolitical instability, and the likelihood of conflict around the world. The European Union’s (EU) previous reliance on oil and natural gas supplies from Russia highlights the dangers of overweighted dependencies on rogue nations that have the power to weaponize energy to serve as political leverage or tools of coercion in foreign affairs. The devastating invasion of Ukraine and resulting energy supply constraints in the EU also highlight the importance of global energy leadership and international cooperation, as Russian gas supplies were replaced with other sources of energy, including liquefied natural gas (LNG) from the United States.  

Nations with access to diverse, reliable, and affordable energy sources and supply chain inputs—either domestically produced or sourced from exporting international allies around the world—can ensure their people and economies thrive.  

All sources of energy have tradeoffs.  

The third reality is that just as each source of energy has life-changing, transformative benefits that fuel human prosperity, each source also has tradeoffs and negative externalities that should be acknowledged and appropriately balanced in the development of sound public policy and in business.  

To meet growing global demand, we need to produce more energy from traditional and non-traditional sources—and we must produce it more responsibly tomorrow than we do today. For oil and natural gas development, this means committing to reducing carbon and methane emissions. For wind, solar, and battery development, this means minimizing land-use impact and diversifying supply chains. For all energy development, this means ensuring we keep our people and communities safe. We must also be reasonable about the pace, magnitude, and time required to scale new energy resources and enhance existing resources— and the tradeoffs for doing so. 

We cannot prioritize clean energy over reliability and affordability, we cannot pursue reliability and affordability at the expense of the environment, and we cannot develop energy policies and systems that do not account for geopolitical risks domestically and abroad.   

Clear eyes are critical to simultaneously growing energy systems without sacrificing reliability, affordability, or the environment. 

Energy has become a politically polarized flashpoint. It has become “good” versus “bad” and “you” versus “them,” at a time when we should all be coming together to solve the challenges and opportunities in front of us. Now more than ever, we need a pragmatic approach to removing barriers that prevent us from providing the energy access and security the world needs. This includes building infrastructure to move energy where it’s needed most—from oil and natural gas pipelines to transmission lines to LNG terminals to geothermal wells to carbon capture systems and everything in between. In the United States, we need common-sense policies to address meaningful permitting reform that unlocks our vast energy resources and bolsters not only our nation’s energy and economic security, but also those of our allies. While globalism may be receding, energy systems and markets should continue to be highly integrated. We must continue to invest in economic partnerships and trade policies that minimize supply chain disruptions, distort trade flows, slow growth, raise energy costs, and accelerate fragmentation.   

Energy is essential to the technological revolutions unfolding before our eyes and to bringing billions of people into a higher standard of living across the globe. Let us seize this moment to come together in the pursuit of pragmatic and durable policy, technology, and market solutions that grow our collective energy resources to meet the needs of today—and tomorrow.  

Devon Energy is a sponsor of the Global Energy Center. 

All essays

Explore the program

The Global Energy Center develops and promotes pragmatic and nonpartisan policy solutions designed to advance global energy security, enhance economic opportunity, and accelerate pathways to net-zero emissions.

The post Energy realities require pragmatic solutions appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>
Tech and power sector partnerships can accelerate the energy transition https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/content-series/global-energy-agenda/tech-and-power-sector-partnerships-can-accelerate-the-energy-transition/ Thu, 20 Feb 2025 14:00:00 +0000 https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/?p=824754 The field of artificial intelligence is rapidly advancing, causing a surge in data center demand with major implications for global power consumption. But AI could be the tool to solve the challenges it creates, while also transforming the energy sector.

The post Tech and power sector partnerships can accelerate the energy transition appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>

Arshad Mansoor is the president and CEO of the Electric Power Research Institute. This essay is part of the Global Energy Agenda.

In 2017, Google published a groundbreaking paper titled “Attention Is All You Need.”1 It not only revolutionized the field of artificial intelligence but also triggered a boom in the construction of data centers worldwide. This surge in data-center demand has had profound implications for global power consumption, presenting both challenges and opportunities for the transformation of the energy sector. 

Data centers’ impact on power demand 

The proliferation of data centers has led to a substantial rise in global power demand. According to projections by the Oak Ridge National Laboratory, the electricity requirements for these facilities are expected to grow exponentially. This trend is particularly pronounced in the United States: The Electric Power Research Institute (EPRI) estimates that American data centers could consume up to 9 percent of electricity generation by 2030—more than double the estimated 4 percent they consume today.“2

In addition to data centers, other factors such as the onshoring of manufacturing and the electrification of industry are further driving up power consumption. This escalating demand poses a challenge for regions that are already struggling with electricity reliability, leading to delays in the retirement of coal-fired plants and the addition of new natural gas-fired generation to ensure stable supply. 

High-tech commitments to low-carbon energy 

Despite these challenges, the high-tech industry has been a staunch advocate for the clean energy transition. Companies like Google have set ambitious goals to achieve net-zero emissions by 2030. The increasing power demand from their data centers, however, threatens to derail these targets.  

Google’s 2018 paper on 24/7 carbon-free energy (CFE)3 highlighted the limitations of relying solely on renewable energy certificates and emphasized the need for true carbon neutrality, where consumption is matched with zero-carbon energy production on a 24/7 basis. 

The paper laid the foundation for the current push toward 24/7 CFE, which aims to ensure that data centers and other high-tech facilities are powered entirely by low-carbon energy around the clock. While achieving this goal presents significant challenges, it also offers an opportunity for the high-tech and power industries to collaborate and drive the energy transition forward. 

Navigating the path to net zero 

In the short term, the increased reliance on natural gas and the delayed retirement of coal plants may seem like a setback for the clean energy transition. However, these measures are necessary to maintain grid reliability as we work toward a more sustainable energy future. The real challenge lies in accelerating the deployment of emerging carbon-free technologies such as advanced nuclear reactors, carbon capture and storage (CCS), and long-duration energy storage (LDES). 

Public-private partnerships, such as technology deployment hubs, can play a crucial role in this effort. These hubs would facilitate the phased deployment of advanced energy technologies, with specific targets for LDES, small modular reactors, new large nuclear plants, and gas with CCS. By sharing the financial, regulatory, and licensing risks associated with these technologies, these collaborations can help bring them to market more quickly and at scale. 

Technology deployment hubs 

The concept of technology deployment hubs involves a series of phased deployments, each building on the lessons learned from previous projects. Experience suggests that it takes decades and at least ten full-scale deployments for new technologies to achieve cost reductions and supply chain efficiencies.  

Just as early tech company commitments to renewable energy helped drive rapid cost decreases and widespread deployment, similar commitments today can accelerate progress on the new and emerging technologies needed to meet growing electricity demand. By adopting this phased approach, we can ensure that each deployment maximizes cost efficiencies and technological refinements, ultimately accelerating the clean energy transition. 

Relighting the spark 

The collaboration between the high-tech and power industries is essential for achieving our long-term clean energy goals. By working together, these sectors can drive the development and deployment of advanced energy technologies, supported by regulatory and policy frameworks that enable innovation and investment. This partnership has the potential to create a second spark in the energy transition, similar to the one ignited by Google’s early investments in renewable energy. 

While the next few years may see a temporary increase in natural gas use and extended coal plant operations, these measures are necessary to ensure grid reliability during the transition. The ultimate goal is to achieve a net-zero economy. The high-tech industry’s commitment to 24/7 CFE, combined with the power sector’s expertise in energy generation and distribution, can help us reach this target more quickly. 

The path to net zero is fraught with challenges, but it also presents significant opportunities for innovation and collaboration. By seizing the opportunity to accelerate the low-carbon transition through emerging partnerships between high-tech and power companies, we can ensure a sustainable and reliable energy future. Let’s not be distracted by short-term detours; instead, let’s focus on the long-term goal of achieving a net-zero economy and work together to make it a reality. 

All essays

Explore the program

The Global Energy Center develops and promotes pragmatic and nonpartisan policy solutions designed to advance global energy security, enhance economic opportunity, and accelerate pathways to net-zero emissions.

1    Ashish Vaswani et al., “Attention Is All You Need,” Advances in Neural Information Processing Systems, Proceedings, 2017, https://research.google/pubs/attention-is-all-you-need.
2    Powering Intelligence: Analyzing Artificial Intelligence and Data Center Energy Consumption,” EPRI, May 28, 2024, https://www.epri.com/research/products/3002028905.  
3    Moving toward 24×7 Carbon-Free Energy at Google Data Centers: Progress and Insights, Google Sustainability, October 2018, https://sustainability.google/reports/24×7-carbon-free-energy-data-centers.

The post Tech and power sector partnerships can accelerate the energy transition appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>
EU-US energy cooperation: Forging stronger connections in times of division https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/content-series/global-energy-agenda/eu-us-energy-cooperation-forging-stronger-connections-in-times-of-division/ Thu, 20 Feb 2025 14:00:00 +0000 https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/?p=824882 The EU and US share a deep commitment
to energy security, sustainability, and global stability. Strengthening cooperation-on cybersecurity, energy diversification, and decarbonization-will ensure a resilient, competitive, and secure future for both sides of the Atlantic.

The post EU-US energy cooperation: Forging stronger connections in times of division appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>

Dan Jørgensen is the EU Commissioner for Energy and Housing. This essay is part of the Global Energy Agenda.

Looking from Europe to the United States, across the great span of the Atlantic Ocean, it is not always easy to find our common connections.

I discovered this first-hand when my academic pursuits brought me to Seattle. For instance, I realized early on that we certainly do not share the same definition of “football.” We also have different ideas on what constitutes a “large” portion size. A visit to a pastry shop shows that we even have different definitions of “Danish.”

But as I grew accustomed to life in the Emerald City, and, in particular, as I met neighbors and made friends, I came to recognize many of the same qualities that I admired among my own people: an appreciation for hard work, humility, and shared human values.

Many years later, as we begin the latest chapter in EU-US relations, some in Europe have looked across the Atlantic and speculated about potential differences and divisions. However, as I take on the role of European Commissioner for Energy and Housing, I see more ways in which our relationship is defined by our common interests.

First and foremost, we have a common interest in a stable, secure, and rules-based international order, in which freedoms are upheld and borders are respected. That is why we have committed our support and solidarity to the people of Ukraine. Since Russia began its illegal aggression, I have visited Ukraine twice. During these visits, I met people who have lost their families and their homes. I met people who have been living without basic necessities, such as electricity and heating. In fact, during the first two years of the war, Ukraine lost two-thirds of its overall electricity capacity due to brutal and relentless Russian attacks. The united support of the European Union and the United States, including through the Group of Seven Plus (G7+), offers Ukraine a crucial counterbalance to reinforce its energy security. Maintaining this cooperation in the coming years, to support the reconstruction and reform of Ukraine’s energy sector, will be equally essential.

Of course, in the context of geopolitical instability, we must also protect our own energy systems. Here, EU-US cooperation on cybersecurity will be important. Digitalization helps to make our energy systems more efficient, reliable, and sustainable. However, without proper precautions, it can also make our systems more vulnerable to malicious attacks, which are expanding in their reach and increasing in their frequency. We must tackle these threats together, for example, by maintaining our engagement via EU-US cyber dialogues and Group of Seven (G7) meetings on Cybersecurity for Digital Energy Infrastructure Systems.

Another priority shared across the Atlantic is to ensure strong and secure supplies of affordable energy. We want to bring down bills for our citizens and strengthen the competitiveness of our companies. In this regard, there are a number of areas where it is plainly in our common interest to cooperate. For example, liquefied natural gas (LNG) from the United States could continue to play a vital part in completing our REPowerEU objective to phase out Russian energy supplies to the EU.

A key aspect of this joint work will be to diversify our sources of energy. For instance, nuclear will continue to be an integrated part of our energy mix and an important part of the solution to decarbonize our energy systems. Continuing our long-standing cooperation with the United States in the nuclear sector is therefore a priority—in particular, to diversify nuclear fuel and fuel services, to spur investment in small modular reactors, and to foster EU-US leadership in advancing nuclear fusion.

Similarly, we must continue our cooperation in securing critical raw materials. EU-US collaboration enables us to source vital minerals for our energy systems, reduce vulnerabilities in our supply chains, and reward responsible economic actors by sharing the benefits of next-generation energy.

Taking a longer-term view of our energy security, the EU remains committed to pursuing sustainable energy and decarbonization. We do not pursue these objectives for ideological reasons, but for logical reasons. From a competitiveness point of view, the EU is a global leader in key clean tech segments such as wind and heat pumps. We are also leading on hydrogen—including electrolyzers. As a result of our work in these and other clean energy sectors, the share of renewables in our electricity mix increased from 36 percent in 2021 to 46 percent in 2024. As we continue our work to combine competitiveness, innovation, and decarbonization, this share will only increase, ensuring a strong, secure, and sustainable supply of affordable energy for our citizens.

The EU will never close its door on any international partner who is willing to share the path toward a global energy system that is fair, secure, and sustainable. We take this path not because it is easy, but because it is essential.

Similarly, in the face of challenges to come, it will be essential to find and reinforce our common connections, wherever they exist.

All essays

Explore the program

The Global Energy Center develops and promotes pragmatic and nonpartisan policy solutions designed to advance global energy security, enhance economic opportunity, and accelerate pathways to net-zero emissions.

The post EU-US energy cooperation: Forging stronger connections in times of division appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>
Latin America and the Caribbean: Leading the green energy transition amid climate challenges https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/content-series/global-energy-agenda/latin-america-and-the-caribbean-leading-the-green-energy-transition-amid-climate-challenges/ Thu, 20 Feb 2025 14:00:00 +0000 https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/?p=825231 By tapping into a wealth of solar, wind, and water resources, Latin America and the Caribbean are progressing toward decarbonization while addressing poverty and inequality. Collective action across these regions is essential for accelerating progress and achieving a sustainable and equitable energy system.

The post Latin America and the Caribbean: Leading the green energy transition amid climate challenges appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>

Andrés Rebolledo Smitmans is the executive secretary of OLADE. This essay is part of the Global Energy Agenda.

Latin America and the Caribbean constitute a green region. It is home to the planet’s most significant natural lung: the Amazon rainforest. In addition, it has an energy matrix with the highest levels of renewable energy participation at 33 percent compared to a global average of 14 percent. This fact allows us to state with pride, but aware of our responsibility, that we are the greenest region on the Earth.  

At the same time, this highly renewable resources region suffers more than any other from the growing and visible impacts of climate change. Events of unprecedented magnitude and frequency, such as extreme and prolonged droughts, coupled with unprecedented floods and hurricanes that most frequently affect Caribbean countries, are causing damage to infrastructure and families, and seriously jeopardizing the security of energy supply. The situation is reaching extreme levels in some countries, with cases of rationing impacting their economies and populations. 

We live in a region with a great wealth of natural resources, especially renewable resources, all of which are waiting for adequate exploitation. We have used only 30 percent of the water, 12 percent of the wind, and 1 percent of the solar radiation available. Our energy transition industry also has large reserves of critical minerals. In other words, the enormous availability of energy resources also promotes us as one of the world’s major producers and suppliers of low-emission hydrogen. 

The region shows substantial progress in its energy transition toward more decarbonized economies. According to the latest data published by the Latin American Energy Organization (OLADE) in the 2024 Energy Outlook for Latin America and the Caribbean, the share of renewable energy in electricity generation increased from 53 percent to 68 percent in the past ten years, while greenhouse gas emissions were reduced by 26 percent. In addition, 77 percent of the new electricity generation capacity incorporated last year was renewable. 

In the social aspect, 97.4 percent of electricity service coverage was achieved. However, 17 million people still lack access to electricity, 180 million live in poverty, and 77 million do not have access to clean cooking systems, which primarily affects women. These facts compel us to seek alternatives and encourage the region to work together in the search for more robust, flexible, and resilient energy systems that can benefit all. Based on the region’s energy wealth, it is essential to generate local value chains through the development of sources that create jobs and wealth. 

In this context, there are increasingly demanding and pressing challenges. The energy transition and the decarbonization of economies require investments in unprecedented volumes of materials, which must flow and materialize in relatively short periods. This endeavor requires consolidated institutional schemes, with policy and regulatory frameworks that spread the signals of stability and security sought by investors while maintaining the flexibility required by a changing technological environment. 

The lessons learned by countries that have already made progress in their energy transition processes also show that it is just as important to diversify energy production as it is to strengthen transmission and distribution. Also, this goal requires significant investments and favorable environments for their development.  

There are, jointly with opportunities, relevant economic and social challenges. We are responsible for focusing our efforts on making energy a transversal axis of development, contributing to closing the poverty gaps afflicting our region with better levels of access to energy, healthy cooking systems, and access to information and, in short, creating conditions of equity in the broadest sense of the concept. 

The energy setting experienced currently by the world and our region reaffirms the urgency and shared responsibility to act against climate change and its effects, as well as the need to increase and strengthen collective action. In this regard, the region needs to advance energy integration. Significant progress has been made in this area, but there is still a long way to go in consolidating a regional market. Collective action involves dialogue at the intersection of all public- and private-sector actors, academia, international organizations, multilateral banks, and civil society.  

Beyond expressions of goodwill, OLADE, an intergovernmental organization that brings together twenty-seven countries in Latin America and the Caribbean, has been working hard to create the right conditions to deepen and fast-track the energy transition processes in these regions.  

The OLADE Meeting of Ministers is the highest governance structure of our organization, which brings together the highest energy authorities of its member countries. At its recent meeting in Asunción, Paraguay, it adopted a series of resolutions that mark the path to be followed by the region. These decisions seek to improve energy efficiency in all member countries, eliminate the use of coal for electricity generation, and institute a Regional Energy Planning Council, which aims to further advance progress on our common energy and climate goals. 

Our main commitment is to integrate the region’s energy as an instrument that will allow us collectively to better face the impacts of the current environment, plan our future, and build, with the support of all, a better world for future generations. 

All essays

Explore the program

The Global Energy Center develops and promotes pragmatic and nonpartisan policy solutions designed to advance global energy security, enhance economic opportunity, and accelerate pathways to net-zero emissions.

The post Latin America and the Caribbean: Leading the green energy transition amid climate challenges appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>
Busting the top myths about AI and energy efficiency  https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/content-series/global-energy-agenda/busting-the-top-myths-about-ai-and-energy-efficiency/ Thu, 20 Feb 2025 14:00:00 +0000 https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/?p=825234 The rapid growth in AI and data centers in recent years has fueled concern that these systems will push the world toward an energy crisis. Advancements
in this sector, however, should put this concern to rest.

The post Busting the top myths about AI and energy efficiency  appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>

Josh Parker is the senior director of corporate sustainability at Nvidia. This essay is part of the Global Energy Agenda.

The rapid growth of AI in recent years has sparked an unprecedented rush of investment in data centers worldwide to develop the next generation of algorithms, fueling concerns that running these systems will push the world toward an energy crisis. 

However, to determine the true impact of AI on global energy consumption, consider the full picture:  

  • AI computing still makes up a tiny slice of the world’s energy consumption. Data centers accounted for about 2 percent of energy-related carbon emissions in 2022, according to the International Energy Agency—and today, not all data centers run AI. 
  • AI, powered by rapidly advancing accelerated computing technology, is becoming much more energy efficient every year. 
  • AI delivers insights and results that can increase energy efficiency in the domains that use energy the most—including energy generation, manufacturing, transportation, and residential heating and cooling. 

Recent advancements in AI and accelerated computing have enabled developers to harness more computational capabilities while using less energy. Some—in climate science, financial services, and healthcare—already are. But to achieve widespread adoption, it’s critical to separate misconceptions from reality.  

To that end, here are the top myths around AI and energy efficiency, and the long-term perspectives and facts that dispel them.  

MYTH: The carbon footprint and energy consumption of data centers will grow at the same rate as computation.  

Growing demand for computing power does not result in an equivalent rise in energy consumption.  

Global data centers saw a 550 percent increase in compute instances—which are virtual machines—and a 2,500 percent jump in storage capacity between 2010 and 2018, while electricity use rose only 6 percent, noted a report from the Information Technology and Innovation Foundation, a Washington-based think tank.  

These initial energy savings were largely due to the effects of Moore’s Law, which predicted that the number of transistors on a chip would double approximately every two years, leading to a biannual doubling in computing power while maintaining similar energy consumption.  

However, by the mid-2010s, Moore’s Law began to slow as the physical limits of shrinking transistors became more challenging to overcome. This slowdown highlighted the need for new approaches to maintain and accelerate efficiency gains. Accelerated computing emerged as the solution, leveraging specialized hardware like graphics processing units (GPUs) to perform tasks more efficiently than central processing units (CPUs). 

Today, accelerated computing is transforming the world’s data centers, with GPUs and advanced networking technology replacing traditional CPU servers that struggle to keep pace with the rise in computing demand. The parallel computing capabilities of GPUs make them twenty times more energy-efficient than CPUs. If every data center shifted from CPU-based to GPU-based infrastructure, the world would save an estimated 40 terawatt-hours of energy, equivalent to the annual energy usage of five million US homes.  

MYTH: The computing processes required to run AI systems are much more resource intensive than previous methods.  

The demand for new AI models, and therefore compute demand, is growing exponentially. The result is that AI is currently demanding more energy faster than computing is getting more efficient. 

But both the performance and energy efficiency of accelerated computing increase with each GPU generation: meaning that with every advancement, developers and scientists can accomplish more compute work with less energy. Today’s most advanced AI chip matches the performance of supercomputers that were among the fastest in the world a decade ago.  

The newest GPUs deliver thirty times more compute performance with a twenty-five-fold increase in energy efficiency compared to those built just two years ago. This adds up to greater efficiency over several years by a factor of 45,000.  

MYTH: AI is consuming more energy than it will save.  

The rate of AI adoption today is resulting in short-term increases in energy usage, but one long-term view is optimistic.  

Claims of an “AI doomsday” often rely on extrapolations from published AI training statistics. But training predictive and generative AI models isn’t a goal in itself—the real goal is to use those models. The insights that an AI model provides during inference can save time and energy and reduce carbon emissions in resource-intensive domains such as agriculture, weather forecasting, transportation, manufacturing, and drug discovery.

Accelerated computing and AI can also power climate models that help global organizations more effectively predict weather patterns, manage natural disasters, build climate-resilient infrastructure, and save lives. 

It takes a holistic, longitudinal view to fully calculate the efficiencies that stem from AI adoption. While many AI initiatives are currently in the infrastructure building or training phases, with widespread implementation still to come, early adopters are already seeing benefits.  

Efforts to increase energy efficiency and decarbonize buildings across industries are one critical use case for AI. In the United States, buildings are responsible for 40 percent of total energy usage—and, according to the Environmental Protection Agency, 30 percent of energy used in commercial buildings is wasted.  

Peter Herweck, former CEO of Schneider Electric, has predicted that in the next few years AI could reduce energy consumption in buildings by up to 25 percent. Data collected by smart home devices and smart meters are producing data that could train AI models to find optimizations across residential and commercial buildings. 

For example, a pharmaceutical company worked with BrainBox AI, which helps customers optimize their buildings with AI, to boost equipment efficiency at its California campus, making improvements that resulted in annualized electricity savings of 156,000 kilowatt-hours.

Healthcare is energy intensive: The industry’s facilities account for close to 10 percent of commercial building energy consumption in the United States and about 4.6 percent of global greenhouse gas emissions. The life-saving research processed within them is also computationally demanding. 

Genome sequencing is one example. Sequencing the DNA of tumors and healthy tissues is crucial to understanding genetic drivers of cancer and identifying treatments. Using AI, the Wellcome Sanger Institute has significantly reduced the “runtime” (i.e., how long a program runs to execute its function) and energy consumption of genomic analysis—saving approximately 1,000 megawatt-hours annually and potentially reducing costs by $1 million compared to traditional CPU-based methods. 

MYTH: Electric grids can’t handle the energy load of growing AI use. 

AI models can be trained anywhere—and there’s a significant opportunity to build future data centers in parts of the world where there’s excess energy, such as near geothermal reservoirs, which act as 24/7 renewable energy sources, unaffected by weather conditions.  

Rather than placing every data center in urban areas that already have significant power demands, they could be built near these sources of renewable energy. Doing so minimizes transmission issues while simultaneously decreasing or eliminating operational carbon footprints. 

Once they’re trained, models can be deployed to GPUs, which are twenty times more efficient for AI inference tasks than CPUs. Beyond large data centers, lightweight models optimized for inference can run anywhere—on small embedded systems on a robot or other edge device, on desktop workstations, or on cloud servers located in any part of the world.   

AI is becoming an essential technology for businesses in nearly every industry to improve productivity and enable rapid new advancements and discoveries. And although AI’s direct energy footprint is certainly growing, AI is also proving to be a powerful tool for finding ways to save energy and may very well become the best tool we have for advancing sustainability worldwide.  

All essays

Explore the program

The Global Energy Center develops and promotes pragmatic and nonpartisan policy solutions designed to advance global energy security, enhance economic opportunity, and accelerate pathways to net-zero emissions.

The post Busting the top myths about AI and energy efficiency  appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>
The small reactor revolution can transform African energy systems  https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/content-series/global-energy-agenda/the-small-reactor-revolution-can-transform-african-energy-systems/ Thu, 20 Feb 2025 14:00:00 +0000 https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/?p=825253 Africa faces a dual challenge of ensuring reliable access to energy while contributing to global net-zero goals. Nuclear energy—and in particular small modular and micro reactors—can revolutionize the African energy landscape and promote sustainable development.

The post The small reactor revolution can transform African energy systems  appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>

Lassina Zerbo is the chairperson of the Rwanda Atomic Energy Board, former prime minister of Burkina Faso, and executive secretary emeritus of the Comprehensive Nuclear-Test-Ban Treaty Organization. This essay is part of the Global Energy Agenda.

Africa is at a decisive point in its energy journey. With a rapidly growing population and a persistent energy deficit, the continent faces a dual challenge of ensuring reliable access to energy while contributing to global carbon-neutrality goals. Nuclear energy—and in particular small modular and micro reactors (SMRs)—can revolutionize the African energy landscape and promote sustainable development. 

Currently, over 600 million Africans lack access to electricity, a situation exacerbated by weak electrical infrastructure and heavy dependence on biomass. This energy deficit hampers economic growth and contributes to widening social inequalities. 

Although promising, renewable energy sources are often limited by their intermittent nature. So far, solar and wind power have not provided the stable baseload power that is essential for industrialization and urbanization. Africa needs an energy-intensive low-carbon alternative that complements renewable energy to sustainably meet its energy needs. 

The potential of nuclear power in Africa is immense. It provides stable, carbon-free energy with the best return on investment among current technologies. However, traditional nuclear reactors require large initial investments and extensive existing infrastructure, which can be prohibitive for many African countries. This is where micro reactors and SMRs offer a breakthrough solution. 

SMRs, characterized by their compact size and modular design, typically generate up to 300 megawatts per unit. Unlike conventional reactors, SMRs are factory built, reducing construction costs and lead times. They can be deployed in remote areas with limited grid capacity, making them ideal for Africa’s diverse landscape. In addition, SMRs feature enhanced safety mechanisms, such as passive cooling systems, which minimize the risk of accidents. 

SMRs offer a combination of economic and environmental advantages that make them well suited to Africa’s energy needs. The fact that their initial investment cost is generally lower than that of large reactors, coupled with the possibility of setting up innovative financing models, makes their adoption more accessible. Their modularity enables flexible deployment, ideal for electrifying rural areas and supporting industrial development without the need for heavy electrical infrastructure.  

On the environmental front, SMRs have a reduced carbon footprint, in line with global climate objectives. Their integration into the energy mix complements intermittent renewable energy sources, ensuring a stable electricity supply while reducing greenhouse gas emissions. Finally, the development of this technology encourages the transfer of skills and strengthening of local capacities, laying the foundations for long-term technological autonomy. 

To attract investors and ensure public support, African governments need to put in place favorable policies, notably by strengthening their regulatory frameworks and conducting information campaigns to allay any public concerns. 

Skills development is also an important pillar for the successful integration of nuclear power in Africa. Implementing this technology requires a skilled and experienced workforce. Ambitious training programs, supported by international organizations such as the International Atomic Energy Agency, are helping to train the sector’s future experts. Countries such as Rwanda have already shown the way by investing heavily in the training of nuclear scientists and engineers, demonstrating the feasibility of such projects. 

International partnerships are also important to accelerate the deployment of nuclear power in Africa. The West African Economic and Monetary Union is opening up new prospects for energy cooperation by launching a study on the feasibility of installing nuclear power plants in its member countries. The technical and financial complexity of these projects also require close collaboration between African countries and international players. Public-private partnerships, as well as the support of financial institutions like the African Development Bank, the West African Development Bank, and the Economic Commission for Africa, are key to mobilizing the necessary investments.  

But the deployment of nuclear energy in Africa faces a number of challenges. Public distrust, often fueled by misinformation about the risks involved, is a major obstacle. In addition, existing energy infrastructure is often insufficient, necessitating major investment and enhanced regional cooperation, as shown by the example of the West African Power Pool, an association of public and private power entities. Finally, political stability and continuity of energy policies are essential to ensure the long-term success of such projects.  

Small modular and micro reactors offer Africa a real opportunity to transform its energy landscape. With enhanced international cooperation, the continent can build a safer, cleaner energy future, while improving the quality of life for millions of Africans. 

All essays

Explore the program

The Global Energy Center develops and promotes pragmatic and nonpartisan policy solutions designed to advance global energy security, enhance economic opportunity, and accelerate pathways to net-zero emissions.

The post The small reactor revolution can transform African energy systems  appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>
The 2025 Global Energy Agenda https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/content-series/global-energy-agenda/the-2025-global-energy-agenda/ Thu, 20 Feb 2025 14:00:00 +0000 https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/?p=825844 The Atlantic Council is pleased to present its fifth Global Energy Agenda. As in prior years, this collection of essays is complemented by our in-depth analysis of the results of the Atlantic Council Global Energy Center’s annual global energy survey. 

The post The 2025 Global Energy Agenda appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>

The scale of political transformation that took place throughout the democratic world in 2024 will be evident when the Group of Seven (G7) convenes under new Canadian leadership later this year. Ultimately, elections last year led to a notable political shift to the right, laying the foundation for a new international energy and climate architecture. 

Global affairs are only part of the story, however. The release of generative artificial intelligence (AI) models like ChatGPT and OpenAI illustrate the emergence of novel challenges with global consequences on par with those stemming from foreign affairs. For a world still largely pursuing a net-zero future, its leaders must now also contend with yet another competitive race between the United States and China, this time for dominance over key aspects of the development, deployment, and governance of a technology central to global military and economic primacy. 

It’s with this backdrop that the Atlantic Council is pleased to present its fifth Global Energy Agenda. To illuminate this period of profound democratic transition, where the urgent need to secure reliable and sustainable energy systems remains a defining issue, this year’s publication shares the insights from leading industry, civil society, and government voices. As in prior years, this collection of essays is complemented by our in-depth analysis of the results of the Atlantic Council Global Energy Center’s annual global energy survey. 

STAY CONNECTED

Sign up for PowerPlay, the Atlantic Council’s bimonthly newsletter keeping you up to date on all facets of the energy transition.

Global Energy Agenda

Feb 20, 2025

Global Energy Agenda full survey results

In the fall of 2024, the Atlantic Council’s Global Energy Center surveyed global energy and climate experts to take the community’s pulse on the outlook for geopolitical energy risks, a global energy market in transition, and prospects for the net-zero imperative.

Africa Americas

Essays

Watch the event

Previous Global Energy Agenda

Global Energy Agenda

Nov 30, 2023

The 2024 Global Energy Agenda

By Landon Derentz, Christine Suh, Paul Kielstra (Editors)

The fourth edition of the Global Energy Agenda kicks off with a collection of essays by energy leaders that are rolling out during COP28. Rounding out the Agenda in early 2024, the Atlantic Council Global Energy Center will release the results of its annual survey of experts that takes the pulse on the geopolitical risks affecting energy markets, the future of fossil fuels, and the transition to clean energy.

Energy & Environment Geopolitics & Energy Security

Editors

Knowledge partners

Global Energy Forum partners

Platinum

Gold

Silver

Related work

Global Energy Forum

The ninth Atlantic Council Global Energy Forum will be held June 17 and 18 in Washington, DC. Please check back regularly for updates on our programming.

The Global Energy Center develops and promotes pragmatic and nonpartisan policy solutions designed to advance global energy security, enhance economic opportunity, and accelerate pathways to net-zero emissions.

The post The 2025 Global Energy Agenda appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>
Global Energy Agenda full survey results https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/content-series/global-energy-agenda/2025-full-survey-results/ Thu, 20 Feb 2025 14:00:00 +0000 https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/?p=825849 In the fall of 2024, the Atlantic Council's Global Energy Center surveyed global energy and climate experts to take the community's pulse on the outlook for geopolitical energy risks, a global energy market in transition, and prospects for the net-zero imperative.

The post Global Energy Agenda full survey results appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>

Global Energy Agenda full survey results

Survey questions

Demographic data

​​

Related content

Global Energy Agenda

Feb 20, 2025

The 2025 Global Energy Agenda

By Landon Derentz, Christine Suh, Paul Kielstra, Bailee Mathews (Editors)

The Atlantic Council is pleased to present its fifth Global Energy Agenda. As in prior years, this collection of essays is complemented by our in-depth analysis of the results of the Atlantic Council Global Energy Center’s annual global energy survey. 

Energy & Environment Geopolitics & Energy Security

The post Global Energy Agenda full survey results appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>
Ushering the US auto industry into a new energy era https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/content-series/global-energy-agenda/ushering-the-auto-industry-into-a-new-energy-era/ Thu, 20 Feb 2025 14:00:00 +0000 https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/?p=826387 The auto industry is front and center at the intersection of energy, manufacturing, and innovation. For US automakers to continue leading the sector globally, they must work with policymakers to put the choices and needs of the customer first.

The post Ushering the US auto industry into a new energy era appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>

Jim Farley is the president and CEO of Ford Motor Company. This essay is part of the Global Energy Agenda.

Political and policy change are part of the American democratic experiment and integral to the business landscape. As the auto industry navigates its transformation, it’s important to keep the choices and needs of the customer front and center. Automakers must prioritize choice for our customers, listening to their preferences at every turn. That is our north star, and it is a valuable lesson for all of us in the automobile industry and for those who have a role in how we build our global energy future. We must put people first. 

It starts with listening to the people who use our products in a thousand ways, big and small, every day. Whether it’s dropping kids off at school or towing heavy equipment, a diverse vehicle lineup serves customers in unique ways. We want to give customers services and experiences they can’t live without. Automakers will continue to build iconic gas-powered vehicles that customers love. We’ll also innovate new forms of hybrid powertrains that fit the way that Americans work and play.  

And the industry will be making new electric cars, trucks, and vans with technological innovations to take the driving experience to new levels of performance. The next generation of electric vehicles will be even better and include features that customers haven’t yet imagined. 

It is imperative for the future of domestic manufacturing that the best electric cars in the world are made by American automakers. But domestic automakers face stiff international competition in this race. To win, our focus must be clear: The United States cannot cede energy, innovation, or manufacturing leadership to China, Europe, or other regions. If we want to maintain our competitive edge while securing our supply chains and shoring up our manufacturing capacity, we must invest in America’s auto industry. 

We can win this race because we have the road map. When it comes to history’s most pivotal achievements, Americans have led the way—from the moon landing to the microchip to artificial intelligence. US automaking history, like Ford’s, is entwined with America’s greatest moments of achievement: the moving assembly line, converting automobile factories to military factories in World War II, and retooling our operations to build lifesaving equipment during the COVID-19 pandemic. 

This is another moment of upheaval in our industry, and in the global economy as a whole. And if we are going to meet the demands of Americans and our future, we need to adopt the same kind of mindset that has always set our country apart. 

This is important because today, as we navigate winning the energy, technological, and manufacturing future, we have a burst of new innovations at our doorstep and increasingly intricate supply chains around the world. We face both uncertainty and great opportunity. 

We must build the necessary manufacturing plants and components—including the batteries and materials that will power our future—here on our shores. An America that controls its own supply chains, that invests in cutting-edge technology, and that brings innovation home is one that secures its future. Right now, Ford is doing that through industry-leading investments in multiple states, where we’re building vehicles Americans want today and making big bets on the high-tech vehicles of the future. 

We know that battery demand in the United States has grown and that China controls key sectors of our energy supply chain. It’s why US automakers have taken bold steps to scale our advanced battery manufacturing right here in America. Investments to onshore this battery technology are an essential part of improving affordability and availability of choice for Americans. It will take time and commitment to build up this capability in the United States, but the more we delay, the greater our reliance on foreign materials will be and the farther behind American auto companies will fall. If American companies don’t do this, those in other nations will. 

Onshoring our manufacturing also protects us from geopolitical conflicts, pain points, and uncertainty. Last year, we saw escalations of war and conflict around energy-producing countries. When we invest in American facilities, there is less risk to the American people. 

I am confident that we can step up to the task at hand. The US auto industry will be working with policymakers to prioritize American manufacturing and energy security. We’ll collaborate to ensure America sets the terms in the great energy race, so that our auto industry and manufacturing sector continue to lead the world. And we’ll make smarter decisions for our country if we keep the choices and needs of Americans front and center. 

The United States was built for moments like this, and we will continue to usher the auto industry into a new era by investing in our team, our customers, our country, and our future. 

All essays

Explore the program

The Global Energy Center develops and promotes pragmatic and nonpartisan policy solutions designed to advance global energy security, enhance economic opportunity, and accelerate pathways to net-zero emissions.

The post Ushering the US auto industry into a new energy era appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>
Ukraine can unleash energy investment even amid war https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/content-series/global-energy-agenda/ukraine-can-unleash-energy-investment-even-amid-war/ Thu, 20 Feb 2025 14:00:00 +0000 https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/?p=826436 To bolster energy security in Ukraine, its leaders must foster stability for investors to finance new, decentralized power generation. Achieving this will require overcoming three key challenges.

The post Ukraine can unleash energy investment even amid war appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>

Volodymyr Kudrytskyi is the former CEO of Ukrenergo, Ukraine’s transmission system operator. This essay is part of the Global Energy Agenda.

A key energy security objective for Ukraine is to create stability for investors to finance the deployment of new, decentralized generation in the country. How to ensure that investments can hurdle over obstacles in a profoundly challenging environment is the crucial challenge that Ukraine must solve in 2025. 

The Ukrainian power system is in the midst of one of the greatest trials in human history. It has already survived thirty-one Russian onslaughts since February 2022. Of this unprecedented number, thirteen missile and drone attacks took place in 2024. According to officials, more than 2,000 missiles and countless drones have targeted Ukrainian power plants and high-voltage substations since the beginning of full-scale war.  

Russia’s strategic goal is clear: to devastate the Ukrainian power grid to benefit Russian troops on the battlefield. The tactics of this Russian energy terrorism are also obvious: to destroy the grid’s ability to deliver power to consumers and to remove balancing capacity from the system. While nuclear generation still covers most baseload consumption, Ukraine has already lost more than 10 gigawatts (GW) of balancing power plants—mostly thermal and hydropower—which play a crucial role in meeting peak demand. 

After the integration of Ukraine’s power system into the European continental grid in March 2022, the national grid operator, Ukrenergo, discovered how to defend and recover transmission capabilities of Ukraine’s high-voltage infrastructure. With the help of US and European Union (EU) financing, we built unique passive engineering protection for critical elements of the grid. Ukrenergo has accumulated one of the largest stocks of high-voltage equipment in the world. There are 1,500 trained and highly qualified specialists on Ukrenergo’s restoration teams, working 24/7 to keep the lights on for the Ukrainian people. Of course, without adequate air-defense systems, this will not suffice. The high-voltage grid remains a primary target for the adversary’s aerial attacks, but the Ukrainian transmission operator is gaining experience in quick recoveries after massive shelling and is strengthening its ability to balance the grid in wartime. 

As the grid becomes more resilient with time, the traditional electricity generation base is being deteriorated. Big power plants are also trying to restore capacity, but sometimes take on irreversible damage or require years to be brought back online. Therefore, the main strategic task for Ukraine to achieve in 2025 and beyond is to rebuild its balancing generation capacity to compensate for the power shortages caused by Russian missile attacks on thermal and hydropower plants.  

Building back better the Ukrainian way means rolling out hundreds of new generation facilities of up to 10 megawatts (MW) each, instead of dozens of larger plants that could be exhausted with Russia’s latest assault. At Ukrenergo, we determined that the Ukrainian power system will need 12 to 13 GW of new generation capacity in the next three to five years. This means adding more wind and solar plants, high-maneuverability gas peakers, biomass plants, and battery storage. Such technologies should be spread throughout the country to deprive Russia of the ability to knock out large amounts of power capacity with one strike.  

To roll out this decentralized generation, Ukraine would require around €10 billion in investments. Such a volume could be effectively deployed only by the private sector—the public sector doesn’t have the money, and it is impossible to decentralize generation in a centralized way. 

The interest of Ukrainian and foreign investors in reshaping the country’s energy system was demonstrated in August 2024, when Ukrenergo provided special auctions for the ancillary service market. In two auctions, we received nearly 1,000 bids from different businesses, which were ready to roll out nearly 1 GW of new generation to receive five-year-term offtake contracts with Ukrenergo for the provision of grid-balancing services.  

It was like a gunshot at the start of a big race. But to get across the finish line, these pioneers in deploying decentralized generation still face three key obstacles.  

1. Uncertainty in regulation and market debts  

The current price for electricity on the Ukrainian market determines the whole process. Price on the Ukrainian wholesale electricity market is measured by regulated price-caps. In the periods of highest demand, these price caps are not relevant to the prices on the EU market, which is regulated only by supply and demand without any political interference. This difference impacts trade between the EU and Ukraine, and investors’ ability to finance new generation capacity. So, investors need assurances that price depends on supply and demand, and not the wishes of politicians to manually control it through administrative measures like price caps.  

It is critical that Ukrainian regulators exercise fully independent judgement and decision-making. Wise decisions would include setting cost-reflective tariffs for natural monopolies (including Ukrenergo) and taking measures against customers who consume energy without paying for it. This would eliminate market debts, which currently do not allow businesses to achieve their full market potential and make returns on investment less certain. 

2. Access to finance 

The Ukrainian energy sector could be injected into the power system. However, access to financing remains one of the main problems for potential investors.  

A state program offers low interest rates for businesses willing to build new generation facilities, but a typical efficient energy project investment far exceeds the program cap, disqualifying many projects from accessing these loans. 

Moreover, Ukrainian businesses don’t have access to liquidity from international financial institutions and multinational banks, which require at least five-year offtake contracts and have extensive pledge requirements to secure credit lines.  

To roll out up to 13 GW of new generation in Ukraine, we must connect businesses and financial institutions so that they can cooperate effectively. Unused donor money could be leveraged to create financial instruments like insurance, guarantees, and extra collateral to make investments more attractive for banks. This would effectively multiply the generation capacity that every donated euro can pay for. 

3. Coordinating between communities and businesses 

Installing new generation facilities requires finding land and securing permits, both of which fall under the responsibility of local communities. These communities are interested in technologies that will benefit their local area, not the whole system. Better communication and cooperation are needed between the private businesses that are able and willing to roll out new generation and the local communities that need it.  

Unleash the private sector 

Rolling out decentralized balancing capacity along with renewables would not only make the Ukrainian power system resilient to Russian attacks, it would also enable Ukraine to virtually complete the clean transition of its power system, as the new electricity mix would be about 90 percent carbon free. Moreover, the new power system would be cheaper to run than the current one, because of the domination of nuclear and renewable generation with lower marginal cost than the Soviet-era coal-fired power plants.  

Ukraine has unique starting parameters to achieve this quickly: strong nuclear and hydropower, good solar and wind potential, and a sharp deficit of electricity, which supports high market prices and quick payback on energy projects. The main priority of Ukrainian energy strategy for the next five years should be to remove the stumbling blocks and let private initiative do the job—it always does. 

All essays

Explore the program

The Global Energy Center develops and promotes pragmatic and nonpartisan policy solutions designed to advance global energy security, enhance economic opportunity, and accelerate pathways to net-zero emissions.

The post Ukraine can unleash energy investment even amid war appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>
The US must assure its energy-secure future https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/content-series/global-energy-agenda/the-us-must-assure-its-energy-secure-future/ Thu, 20 Feb 2025 14:00:00 +0000 https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/?p=826438 At the US Department of the Navy, energy
security is mission assurance. This reality has led to its national security strategy
to prioritize a diversified, resilient, and independent energy system to prepare for known and unknown threats.

The post The US must assure its energy-secure future appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>

Meredith Berger is the former assistant secretary of the US Department of the Navy for energy, installations, and environment. This essay is part of the Global Energy Agenda.

Energy is both a tool and a weapon. At the US Department of the Navy, energy security is mission assurance, and unless we meet this critical requirement, we cannot protect our national interests. It is the responsibility of the Navy and Marine Corps, and the civilians who serve the department, to make sure that we are ready—that we have what we need for whatever comes our way, regardless of time or task, to defend our nation. 

Our 2022 National Security Strategy acknowledges and prioritizes this energy requirement, calling upon the country to start an energy revolution: to accelerate our diversified, reliable, redundant, independent energy portfolio; to advance technology and talent; and to generate renewable and clean energy sources that reduce climate threat and conflict, as well as emissions and waste. Energy security provides warfighting advantage, deterrence, economic benefit, a healthy, safe environment, and geopolitical stability. Our sailors and Marines are the world’s first responders; dangerous changes to the physical environment put them at heightened risk. 

During my tenure as assistant secretary of the Navy for energy, installations, and environment, I have focused on energy security as a critical driver of mission success: a catalyst for climate action, a defense for critical infrastructure, and a source of resilience for our communities, our homeland.  

On climate action  

Reliable, clean, resilient, independent energy allows us to keep mission first, so we are prepared to fight and win in any environment. Climate change generates extremes: floods, droughts, temperatures, stronger storms, and fewer resources. These are the conflict generators that make the world a more volatile place.  

A more volatile world increases exponentially the demands on the Navy and Marine Corps, while simultaneously decreasing their ability to respond to those demands. In the Department of the Navy, climate readiness is mission readiness, and energy reliability and resilience are critical to mission success. Reliable, resilient energy ensures that our forces are trained, equipped, and ready so that at a moment’s notice, they can launch, fight, and win. As we focus on this decisive decade, we are mindful of the pacing threat that shapes our mission, and the climate threat that shapes how we operate and execute our mission. By advancing and diversifying our energy sources, technology, and supplies, we reduce our emissions, logistics tails and vulnerabilities, and increase readiness and adaptability. 

On critical infrastructure  

The means to our ends—our ports, roads, runways, depots, barracks, and utilities—they connect us, sustain us, prepare us, and ultimately, they protect us. Our installations in the United States and abroad are essential platforms from which we project our military power, and we need reliable, uninterruptable energy to assure physical and cyber protection of this infrastructure. As we confront the new truth that the homeland is no longer a sanctuary, we must continue to defend against a key vulnerability: inadequately protected, aging energy infrastructure that often lacks redundancy, leaving military mission, commerce, health, safety, livelihood, and lives at risk. 

On communities  

This is our homeland: shared spaces between installations and town halls, not divided by a fence line, but instead united by values, traditions, and resources. They are the ecosystems that allow us to thrive, succeed, and achieve. Communities are also connected by vulnerabilities, and when it comes to utilities such as energy, single sources and dependencies yield a comprehensive threat, whether it is the Department of the Navy’s national security mission or the community mission of health, safety, and welfare.  

Energy is life or death: We learned that lesson the hard way in the Department of the Navy. During a three-month period in Afghanistan in early 2010, the United States suffered a Marine casualty for every fifty convoys of fuel. Seven years earlier, then-Major General James Mattis, while serving as commanding general of the First Marine Division in Iraq, and who later served as Secretary of Defense, pleaded with leadership to “unleash us from the tether of fuel.” He knew that single reliance is a single point of failure, and, despite his warning, we saw the cost of inaction paid in young Marines’ lives. 

As we execute our energy future, we cannot afford a single point of failure, and we cannot compromise our own position. My job every day has been to make sure that when Marines and sailors raise their hands and volunteer for our defense, willing to make the ultimate sacrifice for our nation, values, and freedoms, I take on every known threat, prepare for every contingency, and clear a path toward mission success. For energy security, we have done that at the Department of the Navy through integrated, advanced investments in renewable, reliable energy; we’ve taken actions that question the status quo, and increase mission success and quality of life for our forces, bases, and surrounding communities. The US needs to take that same approach for the nation: build an energy portfolio for the future we anticipate and defend against the threats we know so that we can face the ones we don’t see coming. Energy is a matter where everyone has a strong stake in our collective security: defense, finance, environment, climate, health, and safety. Through our energy revolution, we must be ready as a nation to assure our most critical missions no matter what form they take.  

All essays

Explore the program

The Global Energy Center develops and promotes pragmatic and nonpartisan policy solutions designed to advance global energy security, enhance economic opportunity, and accelerate pathways to net-zero emissions.

The post The US must assure its energy-secure future appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>
The importance of US LNG for economic growth and the global energy transition  https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/content-series/global-energy-agenda/the-importance-of-us-lng-for-economic-growth-and-the-global-energy-transition/ Thu, 20 Feb 2025 14:00:00 +0000 https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/?p=826441 The emergence of US liquefied natural gas (LNG) is a remarkable story. In less than a decade, the United States has gone from zero exports to being the world’s largest exporter.

The post The importance of US LNG for economic growth and the global energy transition  appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>

Daniel Yergin is vice chairman of S&P Global, and author of The Prize and The New Map. 

Madeline Jowdy is head of Global LNG Consulting at S&P Global.  

Both are among co-authors of A Major New U.S. Export Industry at a Crossroads. conducted with the US Chamber of Commerce. This essay is part of the Global Energy Agenda.

The emergence of US liquefied natural gas (LNG) is a remarkable story. In less than a decade, the United States has gone from zero exports to being the world’s largest exporter. Moreover, US LNG is at the nexus of the global energy transition, providing affordable and freely traded gas in a global market of some fifty importing countries. This flow promotes security of supply for regions such as Europe and East Asia, supports trade balances with China and India, and serves as a substitute for higher carbon-intensive energy sources in Southeast Asia and elsewhere.   

The geopolitical importance and strategic urgency of the industry were demonstrated when Vladimir Putin cut pipeline gas to Europe in an effort to undermine the European economy and shatter the coalition supporting Ukraine. He miscalculated, failing to recognize the potential of US LNG to play a significant role in filling the gap. US LNG replaced 40 percent of the missing Russian pipeline gas. And the Trump administration is looking to US LNG exports to help rebalance trade with other countries. 

The critical role of US LNG is significant both for the domestic economy and on the international stage. For the continued growth of US LNG exports, it is essential that the United States demonstrate, day in and day out, that it is a supplier on which other countries can rely. As US exports are projected to double in the coming decade, the influence of US LNG is expected to grow. However, despite a more favorable policy climate with the new administration, further success is not guaranteed due to substantial federal and state regulatory, political, and environmental challenges facing the industry, which will need to be addressed. 

As the US LNG sector re-emerges after a year of stagnation caused by the Biden administration’s pause on LNG export authorizations, it is important to recognize the industry’s overall contribution to US GDP, economic influence, and global LNG trade innovation. In our new study Major New US Industry at a Crossroads: A US LNG Impact Study, conducted with the US Chamber of Commerce, we found that the US LNG industry is valued at $34 billion and has contributed more than $400 billion to US GDP since 2016, when the first LNG cargoes were shipped from Sabine Pass, Louisiana.1 The industry has created an average of 273,000 skilled jobs annually since 2016. Its impact penetrates deep into the heartland where gas is produced and transported, and supports supply chain and manufacturing communities in the Northeast, Midwest, and Southeast. What really brings home the industry’s impact is its comparison with other US industries. The value of LNG exports is more than that of soya beans and double those of Hollywood and entertainment exports. It is currently half that of semiconductors, but within a few years, could equal the value of all semiconductor exports. 

What has made this unprecedented growth possible is the vast resource base developed during the US shale revolution, compounded by entrepreneurial energy, infrastructure, and industrial skill. Despite a 13 billion cubic feet per day (Bcf/d) growth in LNG feedgas requirements since 2016, domestic wholesale gas prices have continued their downward trend, with only temporary interruptions due to rapid post-COVID growth and geopolitical events such as Russia’s full-scale invasion of Ukraine in 2022. 

While US LNG exports account for only 12 percent of the domestic gas market, they supply nearly a quarter of global LNG supplies, making the United States the world’s largest LNG supplier. This outsized role in the international gas market is supported by the flexibility and reliability of US LNG, which is traded with fewer restrictions on destinations, volumes, or pricing compared to much of the global LNG market. Additionally, US LNG has significantly contributed to emissions reductions in countries that have replaced more carbon-intensive coal and fuel oil with LNG. 

In terms of trade, US LNG helps offset trade deficits with both Europe and China. In Europe, US LNG is viewed as a reliable and strategic supply mechanism, while in China, it helps mitigate the United States’ largest single trade deficit. US LNG exports to Japan, South Korea, and Taiwan also support energy security for these key allies. 

Growth projections for US LNG, as analyzed by S&P Global, align with a global energy system transitioning to lower carbon-intensive modes of production and consumption. With more favorable conditions under the new administration, US LNG exports are forecast to double by 2030, with projects currently under construction accounting for approximately 60 percent of that projected growth.  

With this anticipated growth, our LNG study projects that  US LNG industry is poised to contribute approximately $1.3 trillion to GDP by 2040 and create an annual average of 500,000 jobs. On the global front, the US share of the LNG market is expected to exceed one quarter by 2040, supporting a large and liquid gas market that might not exist otherwise.2

However, there is a big “if”:  if domestic regulatory, legal, and environmental barriers persist, the United States risks losing over 100,000 jobs annually and more than $250 billion in GDP. Moreover, it appears that 85 percent of the resulting energy gap in the rest of the world would be filled by fossil fuels sourced from outside of the United States. This jeopardizes US geopolitical influence and its reputation as a reliable and affordable energy supplier to allies and trading partners. 

As the global energy transition progresses, US LNG will have a crucial role in reducing carbon emissions. The transition from coal to natural gas in the US power sector has already driven a 40 percent reduction in carbon emissions since 2000. In the medium term, US LNG will be a vital substitute for higher carbon-intensive coal and oil products, especially in the developing world. Long term, it will support reliable and resilient energy systems as renewable energy sources become more prevalent. 

This is not a one-way street; the United States needs the commitment of its allies and other global trading partners to secure long-term supplies of US LNG and avoid an extended halt in development. This nascent industry was advanced over the last decade in part by financial commitments by Japan and other allies. Future growth will likely rely on a diverse array of European and Asian partners, compensating for lost Russian pipeline gas and LNG, while benefiting from this important new export industry that enables the United States to deliver a clean, reliable supply of natural gas to the global economy. 

All essays

Explore the program

The Global Energy Center develops and promotes pragmatic and nonpartisan policy solutions designed to advance global energy security, enhance economic opportunity, and accelerate pathways to net-zero emissions.

1    Major New US Industry at a Crossroads: A US LNG Impact Study – Phase 1, S&P Global, December 17, 2024, https://www.spglobal.com/en/research-insights/special-reports/major-new-us-idustry-at-a-crossroads-us-lng-impact-study-phase-1.
2    Major New US Industry at a Crossroads 

The post The importance of US LNG for economic growth and the global energy transition  appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>
Unlocking America’s untapped energy potential through enhanced geothermal systems https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/in-depth-research-reports/issue-brief/unlocking-americas-untapped-energy-potential-through-enhanced-geothermal-systems/ Wed, 19 Feb 2025 19:10:23 +0000 https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/?p=796629 Enhanced geothermal systems (EGS) offer a promising clean energy solution by overcoming geographical and cost barriers, providing emissions-free, reliable power while supporting US decarbonization and energy security efforts, but widespread adoption requires government support, investment, and streamlined regulations.

The post Unlocking America’s untapped energy potential through enhanced geothermal systems appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>
Geothermal energy has the potential to support environmental sustainability and economic competitiveness imperatives while bolstering energy security. As such, it stands at the nexus of a unique opportunity to meet bipartisan energy and foreign policy objectives. 

The potential for geothermal energy in particular to seize this opportunity has greatly improved due to advancements in geothermal systems. While conventional geothermal and hydrothermal systems have historically faced opposition for their limited geographical accessibility and high upfront costs, the emergence of enhanced systems has significantly augmented the viability of widescale geothermal deployment to support a cleaner, more affordable, and strategically advantageous energy sector. Enhanced geothermal systems (EGS) use directional drilling tools and technologies developed by the oil and gas industry as well as hydraulic fracturing to overcome geographic barriers and reduce costs. EGS thus unlocks the potential for widespread deployment across the United States, offering a cleaner, more affordable, and strategically advantageous energy solution. 

LAUNCH EVENT

EGS offers a myriad of additional benefits, ranging from environmental sustainability to economic competitiveness. Not only does it provide emissions-free electricity generation, it also enhances energy security by offering a reliable 24/7 clean power alternative for emissions-heavy sectors. Coupled with reduced operational costs over time and increased scalability, this positions EGS as a key driver for US decarbonization efforts while maintaining productivity and global competitiveness.

Despite its promise, EGS faces obstacles in attracting investment and achieving widespread commercialization. Efforts to address these barriers must focus on streamlining permitting processes, mitigating upfront capital costs, and creating a conducive political and business environment. Government support through legislation and funding, coupled with industry-led initiatives such as joint ventures and community engagement, will be crucial in accelerating the adoption of EGS and unlocking its full potential in the United States’ energy landscape.

AUTHORS

RELATED CONTENT

OUR WORK

The Global Energy Center develops and promotes pragmatic and nonpartisan policy solutions designed to advance global energy security, enhance economic opportunity, and accelerate pathways to net-zero emissions.

The post Unlocking America’s untapped energy potential through enhanced geothermal systems appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>
Civil war, debt, and Ethiopia’s road to recovery https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/content-series/freedom-and-prosperity-around-the-world/civil-war-debt-and-ethiopias-road-to-recovery/ Tue, 18 Feb 2025 23:52:23 +0000 https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/?p=824174 Strained by ongoing conflict, food insecurity, and economic strife, Ethiopia's path forward hinges on strategic use of foreign assistance and the implementation of robust public policies that uplift its most vulnerable populations.

The post Civil war, debt, and Ethiopia’s road to recovery appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>

table of contents

Evolution of freedom

Since 2000, Ethiopia has achieved remarkable economic growth, driven by public investment in infrastructure and industrial expansion, positioning itself as one of Africa’s fastest-growing economies. Coupled with extensive construction projects, the service and agricultural sectors also made modest contributions. However, since 2020, the country has faced significant setbacks, including internal conflicts that disrupted production and trade, alongside the global COVID-19 pandemic, which exacerbated supply chain disruptions and weakened demand for exports. These challenges were further compounded by rising inflation, which strained household incomes and increased the cost of living, and a severe shortage of international reserves, making it difficult to stabilize its currency. The recent decision to float the Ethiopian birr has added to the volatility, causing currency fluctuations that have increased uncertainty in trade and investment flows. These converging shocks have placed immense pressure on Ethiopia’s economic stability, underscoring the need for carefully managed reforms and international support to restore macroeconomic balance. 

The Freedom Index portrays a realistic picture of the politico-economic development of Ethiopia in the past three decades. The rapid improvement on the economic subindex around the turn of the century illustrates the country’s sustained strong economic growth in that period. More recently, this subindex reflects the euphoric momentum that came with a new administration in 2018, promising additional economic liberalization in trade and investment. I think the rise observed in the property rights component starting in the early 2000s is also a product of an effort to better protect foreign investment.  

Unfortunately, these improvements were not very long-lived, with scores on the investment freedom component dropping first, followed by declines in the trade and property rights components a few years later. 2020 appears to be a clear inflection point, with the expansion of internal conflicts in the country—starting with war in Tigray—that have been devastating for the economic climate. Along with the war, the COVID-19 pandemic lockdown and supply chain disruption exacerbated the economic development challenges. Some of the industrial zones in areas of conflict are now difficult to access, and the lack of stability makes it harder to retain and attract foreign investors. A dramatic example of the effects of these protracted conflicts since November 2020 is the fact that Ethiopia lost its beneficiary status under the African Growth and Opportunity Act in 2022. This dented the country’s ability to propel its economic development via export growth. 

The women’s economic freedom component shows an optimistic view of the situation for women in Ethiopia. In terms of legislation, especially at a federal level, it is true that the economic rights of women have come closer to that of males since 1995. Raising the legal marriage age to eighteen since 2000 has helped reduce child marriage rates, ensuring that young people have more time to complete their education and achieve better economic outcomes. The strict enforcement of the legal marriage age legislation is essential to tackle child marriage problems in some regions, such as Amhara, where the incidence of child marriage was persistently high in the past. Enforcement across all regions in the country contributes to improved health, educational attainment, labor market outcomes, and well-being for young women by allowing them to marry at a more mature age, thereby decreasing the risks and complications associated with early pregnancies. So, the improvement in the legal framework for women, particularly around economic issues, is probably what is being captured in this component, and it is also true that we now see a larger share of women in top government positions, including ministerial posts. 

Nonetheless, the implementation of gender equality more generally and at all levels of society is probably a much harder task. There is still significant cultural resistance in some regions and ethnic groups; for example, some impose informal limits on the assets that women can inherit. My own research on the topic shows that the school-to-work transition remains very challenging for many women, especially when they turn eighteen and the pressure to marry is intense, particularly in rural and remote areas. 

The political subindex clearly captures the excitement of the country when the current administration came to power. However, the regressive nature of the new government—responding both to internal and external factors—became immediately clear, in terms of civil liberties and political rights. In recent years, the country has been going through civil conflicts, a cost-of-living crisis, high levels of indebtedness, and tight monetary policy. These, combined with global factors such as the COVID-19 pandemic and the Ukraine-Russia war, have been detrimental for Ethiopia and the welfare of its population. If the current trajectory continues, the near future is worrisome.  

The unexpectedly high score on the election component may stem from a limited interpretation of this variable. While elections do take place, the system does not yet fully embody a completely democratic political structure with guaranteed political and civil liberties and a robust system of checks and balances on the executive. Ethiopia has no history of a meaningful political opposition. The legislative constraints on the government are very low, which explains, in part, the developments of the past thirty years.  

The low level of the legal subindex components accurately shows the poor state of the rule of law in Ethiopia—a common problem in many African countries. I am somewhat surprised by the relatively good and rising performance of informality, which is probably due to the obvious difficulties in measuring the size of the informal economy and the share of the informal sector in employment. My own research, using the harmonized World Bank Enterprise Surveys, shows a persistently high level of informality in the enterprise sector. Another potential problem with this component is that informality is not a binary phenomenon, but a continuum, as firms navigate the formal and informal sectors simultaneously, making the actual share of the informal economy—and the number of individuals engaged in it—even harder to measure.  

The sharp drop in security starting from 2020 is explained by the proliferation of internal conflicts and fighting between the federal government and various groups in regions such as Tigray, Amhara, and Oromia. The Pretoria Agreement of November 2022 may have slightly improved the situation by stopping the war in Tigray, but the ongoing conflicts in Amhara, Oromia, and elsewhere could jeopardize those security improvements, and the overall future stability of the country.

Evolution of prosperity

The significant rise in the Prosperity Index since 1995 is noteworthy, but it is important to consider the very low initial levels in areas like income, education, and health. While the country remains one of the least prosperous globally and has yet to reach the average level for Sub-Saharan Africa, the substantial progress, especially since 2000, is undeniable.  

The rise in income starting around the turn of the century is substantial. When initial conditions are at a very low level of economic development, any form of growth and stability favors the reallocation of resources to more productive uses and rapidly shows up in gross domestic product (GDP) measures. Sectors like construction and infrastructure clearly benefit from a more stable macroeconomic framework, boosting income growth. For the first two decades of the twenty-first century, growth was propelled mainly by strong public investment. However, the most important question is whether the increase in GDP has been adequately and fairly distributed. The inequality component for Ethiopia, based on the Gini coefficient, is in line with other aggregate measures of inequality. Nonetheless, when you focus on the lower end of the income distribution, the bottom 20 percent, the situation is not so optimistic, and is probably worsening, pointing to the lack of inclusion and progressive redistribution. There are also important disparities across Ethiopia’s regions that are usually not well captured by data, as these are mainly collected in the larger cities. 

The extraordinary increase in Ethiopia’s health component can be attributed to the extensive work of grassroots service providers, expanding healthcare and coverage in line with policies since 2000 (e.g., the use of health extension workers). Broadly speaking, the country focused on improving primary and preventive healthcare, which produced a sharp drop in child mortality and adult morbidity over the past three decades, though maternal mortality remains a significant problem. The small dip on this component since 2019 is not only due to the COVID-19 pandemic, which was not so severe in health terms as in Europe, but also to the deaths related to armed conflicts.  

In any case, while Ethiopia has been meeting the Millennium Development Goals and is even ahead of schedule for indicators such as child mortality, there is a long way to go if the country is to achieve the 2030 Sustainable Development Goals. Despite progress in terms of GDP growth, Ethiopia still faces complex economic challenges including the prevalence of poverty, inequality, malnutrition, and destitution.  

Regarding education, the graph clearly captures the significant improvement in schooling rates, which have increased in all levels of the educational system, for both males and females. However, quality has been an issue, and our graduates are not as well prepared as these data suggest. As an example, think of the investments carried out by the Chinese government in the last two decades. The Chinese investors came to Ethiopia because labor is relatively cheap, but they have realized that the skills and human capital of many of the workers they hired are very poor, to the extent that they have even needed to send them to Beijing to train. To make headway in education, the country needs to “invest in learning” and development of cognitive and other skills for better employability of graduates. This necessitates a paradigm shift away from the usual culture of “spending on schooling” which simply focuses on completing a given schooling cycle, with little attention paid to acquiring employable skills and other practical outcomes for learners. 

The very low level of the minorities component reflects a recurrent problem of the Ethiopian institutional environment: the close alignment of political power and access to services and opportunities. That is, economic growth has failed to be inclusive of all societal groups. The current administration must reverse this tendency so that the proceeds of economic growth reach the wider population. Children, youth, women, the disabled, and the elderly should not be neglected, and the economic management should give utmost priority to have a social protection angle in the ongoing reforms and policy measures. 

The path forward

The current and future challenges for Ethiopia are enormous. First and foremost, the various armed conflicts around the country are the biggest impediment to movement of labor, traded goods, and execution of productive activities. If peace and security are not restored in all regions of the country, there will be further deterioration of the socioeconomic situation nationwide. Agricultural and industrial production, and other employment-generating economic activities such as trade and investment, continue to suffer.  

It will be difficult to attract domestic and foreign investors, who are critical to revive the ailing economy in a situation of insecurity and uncertainty. Economic growth will not be able to maintain the pace of the first two decades of the twenty-first century. The debt problem in the country dented the confidence of investors and the country’s credit rating and/or worthiness suffer consequently. Macroeconomic management will be a major challenge in the context of very limited international reserves, devalued currency, and high levels of debt repayments with high cost of capital. The relatively easy access Ethiopia has enjoyed to international capital markets and bilateral lending from countries like China can suddenly become a problem. China, with its aid (e.g., lending for road and other infrastructure projects), might offer benefits in the present but at a very high cost in the future. But the debt problem Ethiopia faces is not only the making of China; it has been a problem for several years and borrowing from other sources such as the International Monetary Fund and the World Bank contribute to current debt levels.  

Another big challenge that Ethiopia faces is the alarming demographic trend. Even if there has not been a census in the country since 2007, some global estimates put the population at around 120 million and growing. This demographic situation poses a major challenge for attaining food security and creating enough jobs for the growing young and educated population. Each year, two to three million young Ethiopians enter the labor force, and it is clear that the labor market cannot absorb such a huge number of workers. Any hope of transforming the economy—or even of gaining a meaningful grip on it—is an elusive dream in a country where there are high levels of unemployment, poverty, inequality, destitution, internal conflicts, food insecurity, and an ever-growing and underskilled youth population.  

Addressing the challenges facing Ethiopia requires more than just external assistance; it demands the implementation of robust public policies that focus on aiding the poor, youth, and women, all within a framework that fosters inclusive economic growth. While Ethiopia’s strategic importance to global powers, including the United States, might influence the flow of foreign aid from organizations like the International Monetary Fund, the impact of such aid (in the form of grants and/or loans) will depend heavily on the conditions attached to it and how Ethiopia uses the aid for growth enhancing, productive, and poverty-reducing activities. If strict fiscal consolidation is enforced, it could exacerbate inequality and worsen conditions for the most vulnerable populations, potentially leading to increased poverty and destitution. My concern for Ethiopia is profound, and I hope that an end to conflicts will soon allow the country to return to the better economic path it was on before 2020. 


Abbi Kedir is the director of research at the African Economic Research Consortium based in Nairobi, Kenya. Kedir was an associate professor in international business at the University of Sheffield, UK, from 2016 to 2023. Kedir has authored more than fifty journal articles and is an editorial board member of the Journal of Development Studies, International Journal of Entrepreneurial Behaviour & Research, Economies, and Frontiers in Environmental Science.

Statement on Intellectual Independence

The Atlantic Council and its staff, fellows, and directors generate their own ideas and programming, consistent with the Council’s mission, their related body of work, and the independent records of the participating team members. The Council as an organization does not adopt or advocate positions on particular matters. The Council’s publications always represent the views of the author(s) rather than those of the institution.

Read the previous edition

2024 Atlas: Freedom and Prosperity Around the World

Twenty leading economists and government officials from eighteen countries contributed to this comprehensive volume, which serves as a roadmap for navigating the complexities of contemporary governance. 

Explore the data

Trackers and Data Visualizations

Jun 15, 2023

Freedom and Prosperity Indexes

The indexes rank 164 countries around the world according to their levels of freedom and prosperity. Use our site to explore twenty-eight years of data, compare countries and regions, and examine the sub-indexes and indicators that comprise our indexes.

About the center

The Freedom and Prosperity Center aims to increase the prosperity of the poor and marginalized in developing countries and to explore the nature of the relationship between freedom and prosperity in both developing and developed nations.

Stay connected

The post Civil war, debt, and Ethiopia’s road to recovery appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>
To secure Taiwan, the United States must first secure Ukraine https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/in-depth-research-reports/issue-brief/to-secure-taiwan-the-united-states-must-first-secure-ukraine/ Thu, 13 Feb 2025 22:00:00 +0000 https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/?p=824845 US defense priorities appear to be at a crossroads. Can the United States materially sustain Ukraine in its fight with Russia while preparing for a possible fight with China in defense of Taiwan?

The post To secure Taiwan, the United States must first secure Ukraine appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>

Click on the banner above to explore the Tiger Project.

US defense priorities appear to be at a crossroads. Can the United States materially sustain Ukraine in its fight with Russia while preparing for a possible fight with China in defense of Taiwan? There appears to be a competition for resources between two seemingly distinct US foreign policy objectives. But if Russia defeats Ukraine and a future war between the United States and China occurs over Taiwan, the Russo-Ukrainian War will prove to be the first phase of this Sino-US War. The defense of Taiwan tomorrow is intrinsically linked to the defense of Ukraine today. If the United States hopes to secure Taiwan—either through deterrence or through victory in a future fight—the United States must first ensure that Ukraine maintains its sovereignty despite the Russian invasion.

Two threats, one dilemma

Ukraine is in an existential fight with Russia, resisting a murderous invasion through the resolve, courage, and endurance of the Ukrainian people. Ukrainian resistance is all the more impressive considering Russia’s significant advantages in resources and manpower, and the brutal disregard for human life that it transforms into tactical gains on the battlefield. Given this disparity in military advantage, sustaining Ukrainian resistance requires external support from a coalition of partners providing security assistance in the form of weapons, munitions, and materiel. The United States is, and remains, one of the key members of the coalition that supplies Ukraine. 

At the same time, China continues its pressure campaign against Taiwan while increasing military preparedness for a cross-strait invasion. Whether China’s pressure campaign or a future military attack succeeds, the aim is the same: to destroy the sovereignty of a free and democratic Taiwan and subordinate it to communist China.

China is recognized as the premier threat to US national security interests, and the United States is committed to Taiwan’s defense. As such, US, allied, and partnered readiness for this contingency must be adequately resourced. This is essential to deterrence and, should deterrence fail, to fighting and winning.

Therein lies an apparent dilemma. Doesn’t the constant push of US military support to Ukraine drain the United States of critical resources needed to defend Taiwan? This supposed conflict led some commentators to speculate that supporting Ukraine undermines preparedness for a Taiwan fight.

Their case is simple, arguing that supporting Ukraine drains the finite US resources that should be husbanded and prioritized for deterring and fighting China. Every missile, tank, and artillery shell sent to Ukraine is one less round that could be fired in a China contingency. If preparing for a future war with China is the priority, they argue, the United States should deprioritize what they argue is a proxy war it is fighting against Russia.

The fates of Ukraine and Taiwan are entwined

But if this is so, why is Taiwan’s official position that the Russian invasion should be stopped? Why do its officials say the United States should maintain unwavering support to Ukraine, even at Taiwan’s expense? Joseph Wu, formerly the foreign minister of Taiwan under the Tsai Ing-Wen administration and now the secretary general of Taiwan’s National Security Council, argued compellingly that US aid to Ukraine is critical for deterring China, and that a Russian victory would embolden China to move against Taiwan.

While it is true that resources are finite, framing support to Ukraine or Taiwan as mutually exclusive is a false dilemma that is strategically unsound and unproductive to policymaking. More than that, it belies a lack of appreciation for strategic timing and sequencing, and for the connection between Russian aggression in Europe and Chinese aggression in the Pacific.

Ukraine isn’t preparing for a potential future war against Russia; it is fighting for its very survival against Russia right now. While Russia isn’t the premier threat to the United States, it remains an acute threat to US interests, one of which is a free Ukraine. With US support, Ukraine is bleeding Russia dry—in a financial bargain for the United States, with no cost of US lives, and without the political risk associated with the commitment of forces on the ground. Russian threats to interpret Western support as acts of war have proved to be mere saber rattling, as the United States has crossed each Russian red line with no significant consequence.

Russia’s inability to fight the war to a close has drained its military resources to such a degree that, despite its aspirations for great-power status, it must accept external support to continue its campaign. Much of this material and financial aid comes from China, indebting Vladimir Putin to Xi Jinping. A more shocking demonstration of Russia’s need for military support was its acceptance of North Korean troops into the theater of war.

Moreover, the protracted nature of the war continues to have deleterious effects on Russian national power. If this trend continues and Ukraine maintains its sovereignty at the war’s end, what was formerly an acute threat to US interests will be a mere shell of its former self. Russia, as a broken husk, will not reap the economic rewards of conquering Ukraine in its entirety and will be greatly hampered in terms of affecting US operations in a potential fight with China. In addition, US forces that might have needed to be husbanded to defend against Russian aggression and deployed to Europe to honor US treaty alliance commitments to NATO could instead reinforce military requirements for the Pacific in the defense of Taiwan. Finally, China will be further deterred from aggression in the face of sustained US resolve to support Ukraine. Despite the duration of the conflict, maintaining US support to Ukraine will be seen as a parallel for how stalwart US support would be to Taiwan if China threatened it.

The opposite is also true. Should US support to Ukraine fade and Russia emerge victorious, Russia will siphon economic power from the resources it takes from a conquered Ukraine, reconstitute its military power, and become emboldened toward greater aggression throughout Europe. China, too, will become emboldened by the faltering US resolve that led to Ukraine’s defeat, assured that the United States lacks the stomach to hold out against aims for which China is willing to fight. And in a future Taiwan contingency, Russia would be postured to support China in its time of need and reciprocate via material support, while also posing a significant threat to the rest of Europe. This would pin vital US forces and munitions to the European continent, where they will be of no assistance in a fight for the defense of Taiwan. Because of its strategic effects, the lost war against Russia will have proven to be the first phase in the eventual war against China. To defend Taiwan tomorrow, the United States must continue defending Ukraine today.

There is no zero-sum game between Ukraine and Taiwan

In addition, claims that US support to Ukraine prevents it from adequately supporting Taiwan’s defense overinflate the material cost to the United States and disregard the benefits to the industrial base surrounding US weapons production.

There is not a one-for-one tradeoff or a zero-sum game of munitions availability pitting Ukraine against Taiwan. Many of the systems optimal for use in the defense of Ukraine are not suited for a Taiwan defense scenario, and vice versa. US aid provided to Ukraine since the Russian invasion is suited to fighting a continental land war characterized by mass and attrition, incorporating modern technologies. Specifically, this has consisted largely of artillery and mortar rounds, tanks, infantry fighting vehicles, armored personnel carriers, anti-armor systems, and short-range unmanned aerial systems. All of these would be ill-suited for the air, maritime, and littoral fighting that would dominate a Taiwan scenario. There is little direct competition between these systems and those optimized to defend Taiwan and fight China, which also characterizes the bulk of foreign military sales to Taiwan, which include sales of hundreds of Harpoons, Patriot assistance, Sidewinder missiles, and Switchblade loitering munitions, among others.

Finally, the provision of US arms to Ukraine has served as a test run for the US military industrial base, revealing challenges, stovepipes, and other hurdles to meeting timely production goals. This postured the United States to course correct, yielding congressional action to accelerate support to Taiwan, including the Taiwan Enhanced Resilience Act, which authorized Foreign Military Financing to Taiwan for the first time and amended Presidential Drawdown Authority to provision Taiwan directly with US Department of Defense stocks and services. As US support for Ukraine’s defense continues to stress test it, the US industrial base will only grow more capable and resilient, and will be better prepared to accelerate production for the defense of Taiwan. Rather than a zero-sum game, investing in Ukraine’s defense now creates more opportunity for Taiwan tomorrow.

To win in Taiwan tomorrow, the United States must win in Ukraine today

Under today’s conditions, the United States is supporting, by proxy, a single-front war against a decaying Russia. If this future holds and Russia fails to meet its wartime objectives, the United States can later focus the preponderance of its strength against China to deter its aggression against Taiwan and, if necessary, posture to win.

But deprioritizing Ukraine will lead to its defeat and set conditions for the United States to face a future two-front war against an emboldened China and a reconstituted Russia. This is a matter of strategic sequencing of the existential needs of the moment and how they will impact the existential needs of the future. If the United States is firmly committed to the defense of Taiwan against a future Chinese invasion, it should focus on defeating Russia in Ukraine today.


Lieutenant Colonel Brian Kerg is an active-duty US Marine Corps operational planner and a nonresident fellow in the Indo-Pacific Security Initiative at the Atlantic Council’s Scowcroft Center for Strategy and Security. He is also a 2025 nonresident fellow with the Irregular Warfare Initiative, a 501(c)3 partnered with Princeton’s Empirical Studies of Conflict Project and the Modern War Institute at West Point.

The views expressed here are those of the author and do not represent the positions or opinions of the US Marine Corps, the Department of Defense, or any part of the US government.


The Tiger Project, an Atlantic Council effort, develops new insights and actionable recommendations for the United States, as well as its allies and partners, to deter and counter aggression in the Indo-Pacific. Explore our collection of work, including expert commentary, multimedia content, and in-depth analysis, on strategic defense and deterrence issues in the region.

Related content

The post To secure Taiwan, the United States must first secure Ukraine appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>
Deterring Chinese aggression takes real-time intelligence https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/in-depth-research-reports/issue-brief/deterring-chinese-aggression-takes-real-time-intelligence/ Thu, 13 Feb 2025 16:46:21 +0000 https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/?p=824581 LTG (R) Scott D. Berrier argues that transforming the Intelligence Communit's early-warning system and attaining real-time awareness is crucial to deterring Chinese aggression.

The post Deterring Chinese aggression takes real-time intelligence appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>

Click on the banner above to explore the Tiger Project.

To advance peace through strength, the US military must be capable of denying the People’s Republic of China (PRC) any chance of taking Taiwan by force. This will take more than military modernization. The Trump administration needs to transform the Intelligence Community’s (IC) early-warning capabilities. It’s time to inject unprecedented speed and efficiency into this national mission with a clear goal: attaining real-time awareness across all domains—space, cyberspace, sea, land, and air. Creating this capability is crucial for gathering intelligence against hard targets, understanding emerging events, anticipating the future, and maintaining decision advantage. It’s a tall order, but it’s achievable with the president’s leadership and industry’s cutting-edge tech.

A conflict with the PRC over Taiwan is neither imminent nor inevitable. The PRC has a strategy for annexing Taiwan without an invasion—and it’s in use right now. This strategy has more to do with cyber power than firepower. But the Joint Force and the IC must be prepared for all potential futures—including the risk that the PRC might one day try to blockade or invade Taiwan, sparking a global security crisis.

Operationalize the JWC and JADC2

In the unfortunate event of a future crisis or conflict with the PRC, the IC would need to deliver real-time, decision-quality information advantage in all warfighting domains. The Defense Department’s Joint Warfighting Concept (JWC) theorizes new ways to array the Joint Force with a kill web linking any sensor to any shooter. The enabling Joint All-Domain Command and Control System (JADC2) concept is the holistic underlying approach to link these sensors and associated data into the joint all-domain kill web. For the United States, partners, and allies to operate effectively, the JWC and JADC2 will require those forces to possess real-time information because the side that sees first decides first, and the one that acts first will have the advantage.

If deterrence fails, conflict with the PRC would be unlike any other in history. It would be much faster, more lethal, and more autonomous in an era with swarm technology and hypersonic weapons. It could even include the unthinkable: the use of nuclear capabilities. In addition to combat in the traditional air, land, and sea domains, operations in space and cyberspace would play outsized roles. To be ready to prevail, the entire US intelligence enterprise must rethink and retool how it collects in all domains, and how it uses artificial intelligence (AI) and advanced techniques to analyze and deliver information at speed, enabling JWC/JADC2 in new ways. Speed, timing, and escalation would depend on US and allied reactions, as well as readiness levels and positioning of forces that might be involved. Scenarios involving blockades or an invasion would pose unique challenges to current indication and warning methodologies and models.

Overcome silos that hinder national security

Attaining a real-time, all-domain awareness capability will require a unified effort across the IC, which comprises eighteen independent agencies with authorities to collect, analyze, and report. While some roles and missions overlap, they all have unique capabilities and specified intelligence tasks under Title 50, established laws, and associated IC policy documents. All use different sources, methods, and unique tradecraft to produce intelligence on a variety of national security threats and challenges.

Each agency collects sensitive and restricted information not available to all consumers. Agencies operate on their own top-secret networks and with proprietary software and tools. Each agency partners differently and disseminates intelligence on an as-needed basis (some with more restrictions than others). Each agency has grown its culture, governed its own rice bowls, and competed for scarce resources, creating a competitive atmosphere in the IC that limits collaboration and integration.

To be sure, the IC was highly effective in the lead-up to Russia’s invasion of Ukraine. Time and observables were contributing factors, as Russian force movements were visible months before the invasion and the US military had time to posture for the conflict. At the national level, agile disclosure policies allowed for timely and accurate sharing with partners and allies, empowering a coalition build that enabled rapid military and political support for Ukraine. But it is unlikely that a crisis or conflict with the PRC would unfold in a similar way. The PRC has carefully studied Russian mistakes in Ukraine and is unlikely to repeat them in a Taiwan scenario. Moreover, the proximity of Taiwan to the mainland—combined with the tyrannies of time, distance, and force posture in the region—could create larger dilemmas for the IC.

Proactively strengthen the IC’s posture

All in all, the IC’s preparedness for potential crisis and conflict scenarios involving the PRC has significant room for improvement. The IC has grown incredible capabilities but also daunting bureaucracies that stifle true integration. Combine this with the explosion of information sources, collection techniques, analytical tools, AI advancements, technical hurdles, tradecraft discrepancies, and individual agency priorities, and the result is a lack of unity across the intelligence enterprise. The status quo puts at risk the IC’s ability to see what’s coming in real time—potentially with damaging and cascading consequences.

The IC posture shortfalls are amplified by a lack of information integration across the Department of Defense (DoD). JWC and JADC2 require both intelligence and non-intelligence information sharing at speed for rapid situational understanding and decision advantage. But this underpinning of real-time authoritative intelligence—to see, decide, and act first—does not yet exist. Right now, the IC is inundated with data and tools, but has no way to integrate at scale. It’s time for major changes to the system.

The armed services, intelligence agencies, and many US partners have collection tools and capabilities to identify threats. But if there were a crisis or conflict with the PRC, imagine how many People’s Liberation Army (PLA) objects and targets would be involved. In a conflict scenario, the Joint Force would need a clear integrator of the data streams or multiple intelligence (multi-INT) analysis required to hold all those foreign military objects and targets at risk, or to service those targets kinetically or non-kinetically when required. Such a capability is crucial for deterring and defeating threats.

Avoid governing by crisis

Too often, sweeping changes have come only during or after a great crisis, usually with great loss of life and national embarrassment.

  • The 1941 attack on Pearl Harbor resulted in the wartime mass mobilization and the eventual first use of an atomic bomb.
  • It took the humiliating failures associated with Operation Eagle Claw in 1980 to drive the wide-ranging reforms in the 1987 Goldwater-Nichols Act, which brought about dramatic improvements at DoD. That statute mandated new doctrine for joint operations, the creation of US Special Operations Command, new ways to educate and manage DoD personnel, and changes in how the US military operates.
  • The response to the 9/11 attacks drove comprehensive changes in civil society and national security, culminating in the creation of a new cabinet position to unify the IC and prevent strategic surprise and catastrophic attacks against the United States or its allies and partners.

These changes only occurred with presidential leadership and bipartisan congressional consensus. Otherwise, the United States’ layered governmental bureaucracy, policies, bifurcated political system, and funding process do not normally allow for effective, incremental strategic change. The nation cannot afford to govern by crisis or to rely on twentieth-century-style incremental intelligence reform. Without a strong national mandate, the IC will maintain its current trajectory. That trajectory is inadequate in peacetime and will not suffice in a crisis that leads to conflict.

Integrating intelligence is key

To advance peace through strength, leadership is needed now. The Trump administration has the opportunity to raise public awareness about the range of threats posed by the PRC, Russia, Iran, and North Korea, and to accelerate national security to deal with those threats—particularly by building real-time, all-domain awareness. This awareness can enable the Joint Force to have well-established, rehearsed, and standardized kill chains for credible deterrence. What’s more, it can position the United States to identify and address growing threats in the gray zone—where rivals are trying to compete with the United States without resorting to direct conflict.

In a recent, positive development, the undersecretary of defense for intelligence and security (USD-I&S) signed a directive designating the Defense Intelligence Agency as the “enterprise lead” for the common intelligence picture (CIP). This is a good start. But given the enormity of the task, limited time available, and bureaucratic hurdles, DoD will need to go much further—and that won’t happen without a presidential directive, bipartisan congressional support, and a comprehensive approach spanning DoD, the IC, and industry.

Imagine a nationally mandated and funded project to integrate intelligence from all disciplines to gain and maintain real-time, all-domain awareness across multiple networks and classification levels. Turning this idea into reality is the only way the United States and its allies and partners can proactively seize the initiative, reestablish deterrence, and prevail in the event of conflict. To demonstrate US national resolve and potentially advance strategic deterrence, the high-level commitment to intelligence integration and JADC2 should be highly visible to the PRC and Russia while the sensitive details remain carefully guarded.

The president can drive the change

A presidential directive focused on realizing JWC/JADC2 capabilities to address the PRC threat could empower and drive a “whole of DoD and IC” effort to achieve full operating capabilities with strategic impact. This would strengthen the nation’s competitive edge and position the military and the IC to deliver peace through strength. With ten of the nation’s intelligence agencies under DoD’s umbrella, the secretary of defense should lead this effort in collaboration with the director of national intelligence. This could entail empowering a senior DoD leader such as the USD-I&S with real authority to effect change.

The JWC mandate should require delivery of actionable capabilities within specified timelines, include technical, AI, and tradecraft experimentation, and provide other transaction authority (OTA) or other rapid-acquisition authorities that optimize industry support. For the incoming USD-I&S, the quick stand-up of actionable working groups with deliverables and timelines will be critical. At a minimum, technical, tradecraft, AI, integration, experimentation, and industry work groups should be established. Deputies from each DoD intelligence agency and the services should be assigned to this effort on a full-time basis. Ruthless enforcement of timelines and deliverables by the deputy secretary of defense and USD-I&S will be the only way to effectively lead and direct this effort.

There is no time to lose. Attaining real-time awareness across all domains is vital for national security and defense. With the new administration’s leadership and industry’s cutting-edge tech, transforming early-warning capabilities with real-time, all-domain awareness can become both a strategic and budgetary priority and an operational reality.


Lieutenant General, US Army (ret.) Scott D. Berrier is a nonresident senior fellow at the Indo-Pacific Security Initiative within the Atlantic Council’s Scowcroft Center for Strategy and Security and a senior vice president in the intelligence and national security sector with Booz Allen Hamilton.

Related content

The post Deterring Chinese aggression takes real-time intelligence appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>
Global Foresight 2025 https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/content-series/atlantic-council-strategy-paper-series/global-foresight-2025/ Wed, 12 Feb 2025 11:00:00 +0000 https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/?p=819294 In this year’s Global Foresight edition, our experts share findings from our survey of global strategists on how human affairs could unfold over the next decade. Our team of next-generation scholars spot “snow leopards” that could have major unexpected impacts in 2025 and beyond. And our foresight practitioners imagine three different scenarios for the next decade.

The post Global Foresight 2025 appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>

Global Foresight 2025

The authoritative forecast for the decade ahead

Welcome to the fourth edition of Global Foresight from the Atlantic Council’s Scowcroft Center for Strategy and Security, home for the last decade to one of the world’s premier strategic foresight shops.

In this year’s installment, which is part of the Atlantic Council Strategy Papers series, our experts present exclusive findings from our survey of leading strategists and experts around the world on how human affairs could unfold over the next ten years across geopolitics, the global economy, climate change, technological disruption, and more. Our next-generation foresight team spots six “snow leopards”—under-the-radar phenomena that could have major unexpected impacts, for better or worse, in 2025 and beyond. And our foresight practitioners imagine three scenarios for how the world could transform over the next decade as a result of China’s ascendance, worsening climate change, and an evolving international order.

Meet your expert guides to the future

Full survey results

Atlantic Council Strategy Paper Series

Feb 12, 2025

The Global Foresight 2025 survey: Full results

In the fall of 2024 after the outcome of the US presidential election, the Atlantic Council’s Scowcroft Center for Strategy and Security surveyed the future, asking leading global strategists and foresight practitioners around the world to answer our most burning questions about the biggest drivers of change over the next ten years. Here are the full results.

Africa China

See Global Foresight in action

Executive editors

Frederick Kempe
Alexander V. Mirtchev

Editor-in-chief

Matthew Kroenig

Editorial board members

James L. Jones
Odeh Aburdene
Paula Dobriansky
Stephen J. Hadley
Jane Holl Lute
Ginny Mulberger
Stephanie Murphy
Dan Poneman
Arnold Punaro

The post Global Foresight 2025 appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>
The Global Foresight 2025 survey: Full results https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/content-series/atlantic-council-strategy-paper-series/the-global-foresight-2025-survey-full-results/ Wed, 12 Feb 2025 11:00:00 +0000 https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/?p=820069 In the fall of 2024 after the outcome of the US presidential election, the Atlantic Council’s Scowcroft Center for Strategy and Security surveyed the future, asking leading global strategists and foresight practitioners around the world to answer our most burning questions about the biggest drivers of change over the next ten years. Here are the full results.

The post The Global Foresight 2025 survey: Full results appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>

The Global Foresight 2025 survey

Full results

This survey was conducted from November 15, 2024 through December 2, 2024.

Demographic data

Survey questions

The post The Global Foresight 2025 survey: Full results appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>
Six ‘snow leopards’ to watch for in 2025 https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/content-series/atlantic-council-strategy-paper-series/six-snow-leopards-to-watch-for-in-2025/ Wed, 12 Feb 2025 11:00:00 +0000 https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/?p=820370 Atlantic Council foresight experts spot the underappreciated phenomena that could have outsized impact on the world, driving global change and shaping the future.

The post Six ‘snow leopards’ to watch for in 2025 appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>

Six ‘snow leopards’ to watch for in 2025

Consider the snow leopard. Panthera uncia sports some of the most effective camouflage in the animal kingdom, its white coat with gray and black spots blending in perfectly with the rocky, snowy Himalayan landscape it inhabits. It’s known as “the ghost of the mountains,” seeming to appear out of thin air on the rare occasions it is seen in the wild. 

There’s an equivalent phenomenon in global affairs: under-the-radar trends and events that elude even the most seasoned observer. When their effect on world affairs eventually becomes apparent, they may seem to have come out of nowhere. But these “snow leopards” were there all along. Trends slowly gathering momentum while the crisis du jour dominates headlines, technological developments whose real-world application is still theoretical, known but underrated risks—all of these phenomena have the power to reshape the future. Some already are. 

Any forecast of the future needs to account for these snow leopards. As we brought together experts across the Atlantic Council for our annual look into the future, our next-generation staff took on the challenge of spotting the hard to spot. They surveyed the world around them for overlooked risks, trawled scientific journals and the websites of obscure government departments, and came up with a list of potentially world-changing trends and developments. 

In the year to come and beyond, keep an eye on these six snow leopards. 

The terrorist threat that could sever global connections

When you send a message on WhatsApp to a friend in Colombia or share a video call with family in India, the data—images, text, and video—gets broken down into packets and travels along undersea cables that connect continents in fractions of a second. Nearly 99 percent of international data passes through these cables, including terabytes of sensitive data sent by the US military to command posts overseas as well as an estimated ten trillion dollars transferred every day through the global financial system. In an increasingly interconnected world, nonstate actors pose a serious threat to this critical digital infrastructure, which often lies in shallow waters where it is vulnerable to everything from cyber threats to explosive devices to dragging anchors. 

It doesn’t take advanced equipment like submarines to damage these undersea cables. In 2013, for instance, Egyptian authorities arrested three divers who had used underwater explosives to slice through the South East Asia-Middle East-West Europe 4 internet cable, which runs for 12,500 miles and connects three continents. This incident came five years after a similar attack on the same cables and three years after terrorists in the Philippines successfully cut cable lines near the Filipino city of Cagayan de Oro. While the possible involvement of China and Russia in recent cord-cutting incidents has drawn international scrutiny, these prior incidents indicate that nonstate actors also perceive these cables as an opportune target.  

In late 2023, a Telegram channel affiliated with Yemen’s Houthi rebels threatened this vital underwater infrastructure by posting a map showing the subsea communications cables in the Mediterranean Sea, the Red Sea, the Arabian Sea, and the Persian Gulf. An ominous message accompanied the map: “There are maps of international cables connecting all regions of the world through the sea. It seems that Yemen is in a strategic location, as internet lines that connect entire continents—not only countries—pass near it.” Of note, the Houthis possess an arsenal of underwater mines, and Houthi militants have reportedly undergone combat diver training in the Red Sea.  

The Houthis’ bold assertion could inspire other nonstate actors to put undersea cables in their crosshairs, expanding the threat to this vital infrastructure beyond the region. The same day the Telegram post appeared, a Hezbollah-affiliated Telegram channel shared a similar message and questioned whether the Houthi statement was a “veiled message to the Western coalition.” 

Since these cables facilitate financial transactions and are the only hardware capable of accommodating the huge volumes of military sensor data that inform ongoing operations, terrorist groups may see them as high-value targets that can be attacked at a relatively low cost. Furthermore, non-state actors with growing cyber capabilities could exploit vulnerabilities in these networks, potentially disrupting services or stealing sensitive data. This confluence of high-tech and low-tech threats should sound alarms about the future security of global communication networks. 

Emily Milliken is an analyst focusing on Gulf security issues, and the associate director of media and communications for the N7 Initiative at the Atlantic Council’s Middle East Programs. 

The low-carbon energy source that could power nearly half of US homes

In 2023, the United States produced more oil in a single year than any other country in history—largely due to fracking, which injects fluid under high pressure into rocks, cracking them open to access oil stored within them. The same technique can be used to draw cleaner sources of energy—such as the heat trapped in the earth’s crust—to the surface and send it out to homes across the United States. Geothermal energy harnesses that heat and constitutes a low-carbon energy source. With new technology on the horizon that could make it easier to utilize geothermal energy in more parts of the country, the United States is poised to unlock a major source of energy.  

Geothermal-power extraction is currently confined to traditional hydrothermal regions, mostly in the western continental United States plus Hawaii and Alaska. In these regions, conventional geothermal systems tap into the naturally occurring hot water or steam from the earth to drive turbines that generate electricity.  

Through enhanced geothermal systems (EGS), geothermal-energy production could be expanded far beyond traditional hydrothermal regions. According to the US Department of Energy, by replicating the physical dynamics present in these regions, EGS has the potential to power more than 65 million homes—a little under half of all American homes. EGS is similar to fracking in that it involves injecting fluid into the ground to create new fractures or reopen old ones, resulting in increased permeability. The hot fluid is then pumped to the surface, where it is used to generate electricity. This method works in areas where the ground is hot enough but there may not be enough naturally occurring fluid or permeability to make geothermal power viable without the addition of EGS. 

Currently, the United States has utilized less than 0.7 percent of its geothermal-electricity resources, with the remaining potential expected to become available via EGS. The Department of Energy has started to recognize the potential of EGS, funding projects in Nevada, California, and Utah. The department’s Enhanced Geothermal Shot initiative seeks to reduce the cost of EGS by 90 percent by 2035 to $45 per megawatt hour. It’s an ambitious goal, but one that, if successful, would dramatically increase access to this low- or no-carbon energy source across the United States.  

That could help address an urgent need. One analysis estimates that power demand in the United States will grow 4.7 percent over the next five years, outpacing the 0.5 percent growth in annual demand over the last decade. Though not a silver bullet, expanding access to geothermal power could help meet this demand in a clean, predictable, and relatively cheap way. 

Imran Bayoumi is an associate director at the Scowcroft Center for Strategy and Security.

The yellow powder that cleans carbon dioxide out of the air 

Given the political and technical difficulties of getting countries to reduce the amount of greenhouse gases they pump into the air, the quest for technologies that can remove these gases has grown ever more important. One such technology, direct air capture (DAC), involves pulling carbon dioxide (CO2) out of the air and permanently storing it somewhere else, usually deep underground in rock formations. Because current methods of direct air capture are costly and energy-intensive, they have made only a marginal contribution to meeting global climate goals.  

Yet carbon capture might be poised for a transformation thanks to a yellow powder. DAC technologies are expensive to scale because they use substantial amounts of water and energy and are designed to capture concentrated sources of carbon such as the exhaust from a power plant. A new CO2-absorbing material called COF-999, created by a University of California at Berkeley-led team of scientists, could collect CO2 far more cheaply, using substantially less water and energy, than current DAC processes. Utilizing a covalent organic framework—involving the strongest chemical bonds in nature—the material promises to be dependable and sustainable. The powder is less likely to be damaged by humidity, reaches half its capacity in only eighteen minutes, is reusable (it can be used through one hundred cycles of the carbon-removal process, with minimal capacity loss), and might effectively pull CO2 out of the air around us, which has far lower concentrations of carbon than, for example, power-plant exhaust. 

Current carbon-capture technology, according to some estimates, could account for 14 percent of the global-emissions reductions needed to meet climate targets by 2050. The market is already expected to rapidly expand, with a projected compound annual growth rate of 6.2 percent over the next five years and estimated value of four trillion dollars by 2050. The invention of COF-999 could supercharge these numbers. It could be easily implemented in existing carbon-capture systems, or scientists could experiment with ways to take advantage of its ability to clean ambient air. “We took a powder of this material, put it in a tube, and we passed Berkeley air—just outdoor air—into the material to see how it would perform … It cleaned the air entirely of CO2,” said Omar Yaghi, a Berkeley chemistry professor who worked on the study. As atmospheric CO2 levels hit record highs, and extreme heat waves, wildfires, floods, and hurricanes increase in frequency, the yellow-powder breakthrough is one example of the creative science needed to counter inaction on rising global emissions.

Ginger Matchett is a program assistant with the GeoStrategy Initiative in the Atlantic Council’s Scowcroft Center for Strategy and Security. 

The return of wild land

If you have fifteen million dollars to spare, an unused ancestral estate, or even a small plot of land in need of transformation, you too can get in on the hot new trend of rewilding—or the process of rebuilding natural ecosystems on landscapes disrupted by humans. The concept represents a fundamental shift in the way governments, ecologists, and ordinary people view conservation. It focuses on restoring to health native environments—including their balance of plants and animals—rather than on trying to protect scarce undisturbed areas such as wilderness (only 3 percent of the Earth’s land surface is ecologically intact). The idea first took off in North America and has spread like kudzu, including to the estates of the ultra-wealthy. Although rewilding remains a niche solution to various conservation problems, it may be on the verge of an explosion, with major consequences for the global climate. 

Some estimates already put the global total of land available for rewilding at a billion acres, which is roughly half the area of the Australian landmass—and even more is set to become available over the course of this century as a combination of factors reduce pressure for the intensive use of land. Some two-thirds of humanity is projected to live in cities by 2050, and the world’s total population (urban and rural) is expected to peak by the mid-2080s. At the same time, agricultural productivity is increasing, technology and innovation are decoupling food output from land input, and alternative proteins, which are far less land- and carbon-intensive than animal-based proteins, are becoming increasingly popular. 

A 2024 study found that a quarter of land in Europe is suitable for rewilding, with Scandinavian countries, Scotland, Ireland, Spain, and Portugal at the top of the list. A lot of land is viable for rewilding beyond Europe, too, including in Japan and North America. In the United States alone, around thirty million acres of cropland has been abandoned since the 1980s.  

Rewilding may help the environment by absorbing carbon and reversing biodiversity loss. Recent declines in biodiversity around the world, including a 73 percent decrease in wildlife populations over the last fifty years and one million species on the verge of extinction, are linked to accelerated climate change and the spread of infectious diseases. There could be economic benefits as well. Nature tourism is responsible for $600 billion in revenue globally and twenty-two million jobs; revitalized natural spaces and the reintroduction of large animals into them can help raise those numbers. Restoration and rewilding can also increase farming yields, the availability of water, and global fish populations, while also reducing the degradation of agricultural land. Mangroves, coastal wetlands, and coral reefs can lessen flood risk. Putting large herbivores back into their native areas can lower wildfire risk. 

Just as the potential benefits of rewilding are becoming clearer, so too are its possible costs. Some experts fear that rewilding efforts may, like some net-zero carbon pledges, allow governments and industry to sidestep decarbonization efforts in favor of carbon offsets, which are unregulated and can be reversed. The reintroduction of animals and plants, particularly large predators, can also induce a public backlash, which may harm rewilding and restoration. Restoration of ecosystems might increase the risks of tick- and other vector-borne diseases as well. As the world grows hotter, it could prove difficult to reintroduce some desired species. 

Nevertheless, if the land resources and financial incentives for ecological restoration combine with messaging and public sentiment in favor of individual and community action, rewilding may become a movement capable of restoring wide swathes of land to their original states. In so doing, it might open a new route to address the effects of a changing climate.

John Cookson is the editor of the Atlantic Council’s New Atlanticist.  

Sydney Sherry is an assistant director with the GeoStrategy Initiative in the Atlantic Council’s Scowcroft Center for Strategy and Security. 

The coming quantum leap in energy storage

In 2019, scientists Akira Yoshino, M. Stanley Whittingham, and John B. Goodenough won the Nobel Prize in chemistry for their development of the rechargeable, renewable lithium-ion battery. The committee commended the trio for having “laid the foundation of a wireless, fossil fuel-free society.” Since their debut in the 1990s, batteries have become ubiquitous in all kinds of electronics. But there’s something even better on the horizon, and not a moment too soon: quantum batteries. 

These novel batteries store energy by drawing on quantum mechanics (the study of physics on a microscopic scale) and particularly quantum chemistry, which is crucial to battery research and allows scientists to understand the chemical structure and reaction of atoms at significantly quicker speeds than current models. It’s a promising emerging technology to watch amid a broader exploration of alternative battery chemistries that could offer the energy density and stability to perform better than lithium-ion batteries for certain functions. 

One application is medical devices. About 26 percent of the US adult population has some type of disability that requires a medical device—such as cochlear implants or a pacemaker—and these devices rely on lithium-ion, lithium, or lithium-iodine batteries for energy. Supply of such batteries isn’t guaranteed; beginning in 2022, for instance, a lithium-ion battery shortage upended electric-vehicle and medical-device supply chains in the United States. These batteries also often require recharging or a replacement, which can necessitate additional surgeries if the medical device that uses them is implanted.

Since quantum batteries could have higher energy density, quantum devices could provide more efficient and long-lasting performance than lithium-based options, reducing the number of battery exchanges that put patients at risk. The energy stored in quantum batteries also could power medical facilities and electric vehicles, improving emergency services in vulnerable and remote areas—a crucial concern worldwide, as climate change brings stronger storms along with longer and more intense heat waves, which not only raise health risks but also strain power grids. During power outages, most hospitals today rely on fossil-fuel and battery-system generators, which often experience complications. In the future, quantum batteries could power these facilities instead. Additionally, since quantum batteries could accelerate charging times for electric vehicles from the current thirty minutes to seconds at high-speed stations (and from about ten hours to a few minutes at home), electrically powered ambulances and medical devices could be charged and ready to go in seconds—a unit of time that can make all the difference for first responders.  

Tatevik Khachatryan is an assistant director for events at the Atlantic Council.

The very online generation’s susceptibility to misinformation

Picture someone falling for an online hoax. If an elderly internet user came to mind, think again. A recent study from Cambridge University revealed that the generation that grew up with the internet—and that reported in the study spending the most time online—had a hard time telling real headlines from fake ones. 

Though they tend to be tech savvy and certainly are not the only generation vulnerable to inaccurate information, members of Generation Z (those born in the late 1990s and early 2000s) are more susceptible to mis- and disinformation than widely assumed. Often relying on social media as a primary news source, digital natives are vulnerable to manipulation. In the Cambridge study, as well as in research conducted by the Center for Countering Digital Hate, they demonstrated a propensity to believe in conspiracy theories. Gen Z might be conscious of the threat posed by biased feeds and manipulated media, but its members continue to scroll and share—and their amplification of mis- and disinformation will be a serious challenge in the future.

Social media is a central fact of life for the vast majority of Gen Zers in the developed world, and it has become an indispensable informational tool for those in developing countries as well. In 2024, a report surveying nearly 4,500 individuals across the United States, Canada, the United Kingdom, Ireland, and Australia found that 91 percent of Gen Z social media users are on Instagram and 86 percent are on TikTok. Gen Z is forming judgments based on the content appearing on their social media feeds—often curated by algorithms that privilege content with higher engagement levels regardless of whether it is true or false—and circulating it to their digital communities. Their decisions about who to follow on social media are not necessarily rooted in the authenticity or credibility of those figures. Instead their social media consumption is often parasocial: They tend to follow media streams and engage with the causes of individuals who they don’t know personally, be they influencers or politicians. 

A generation growing up with seemingly unlimited access to information and extensive knowledge about what digital technologies like algorithms do, but with limited ability to verify that information, represents a significant sociological change. As members of Gen Z proceed in their careers and assume more powerful positions, there is a real risk that they have been left ill-prepared to navigate the overwhelming scale of online information ecosystems. The mis- and disinformation surrounding global challenges ranging from war to migration to climate change may also make Gen Zers more mistrustful of both institutions and other individuals, rendering them less capable of addressing these challenges. Collaborative efforts between Gen Z and older generations—engaging private companies, governments, and individuals—are needed to manage a transformed information landscape and prevent subsequent generations from growing up in an era of misinformation or falling for online hoaxes. 

Ginger Matchett is a program assistant with the GeoStrategy Initiative in the Atlantic Council’s Scowcroft Center for Strategy and Security. 


Srujan Palkar is a Global India fellow and assistant director with the Scowcroft Middle East Security Initiative in the Atlantic Council’s Middle East Programs.

The post Six ‘snow leopards’ to watch for in 2025 appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>
Welcome to 2035: What the world could look like in ten years, according to more than 350 experts https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/content-series/atlantic-council-strategy-paper-series/welcome-to-2035/ Wed, 12 Feb 2025 11:00:00 +0000 https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/?p=821601 In the fall of 2024 after the outcome of the US presidential election, the Atlantic Council’s Scowcroft Center for Strategy and Security surveyed the future, asking leading global strategists and foresight practitioners around the world to answer our most burning questions about the biggest drivers of change over the next ten years. Here are the full results.

The post Welcome to 2035: What the world could look like in ten years, according to more than 350 experts appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>

Welcome to 2035

What the world could look like in ten years, according to more than 350 experts

By Mary Kate Aylward, Peter Engelke, Uri Friedman, and Paul Kielstra

Another devastating world war, potentially bringing China and the United States into direct conflict. The spread and even the use of nuclear weapons. The wars in Ukraine and Gaza failing to ultimately produce favorable outcomes for Kyiv and Israeli-Palestinian peace. A more multipolar world without robust multilateral institutions. A democratic recession further devolving into a democratic depression. 

These are just some of the future scenarios that global strategists and foresight practitioners pointed to when the Atlantic Council’s Scowcroft Center for Strategy and Security surveyed them, in late November and early December 2024 following the US elections, for its third-annual survey on how they expect the world to change over the next ten years.  

Not all the projections were pessimistic. Fifty-eight percent of those who participated in our Global Foresight 2025 survey, for example, felt that artificial intelligence would, on balance, have a positive impact on global affairs over the next ten years—an increase of 7 percentage points from our Global Foresight 2024 survey. Roughly half of respondents foresaw an expansion of global cooperation on climate change.  

But the grimmer forecasts were in keeping with a dark global outlook overall, with 62 percent of respondents expecting the world a decade from now to be worse off than it is today, and only 38 percent predicting that it will be better off.  

The 357 survey respondents were mostly citizens of the United States (just under 55 percent of those polled), with the others spread across sixty countries and every continent but Antarctica. Respondents skewed male and older, and were dispersed across a range of fields including the private sector, nonprofits, academic or educational organizations, and government and multilateral institutions.  

So what do these forecasters of the global future anticipate over the coming decade? Below are the survey’s ten biggest findings. 

Atlantic Council Strategy Paper Series

Feb 12, 2025

The Global Foresight 2025 survey: Full results

In the fall of 2024 after the outcome of the US presidential election, the Atlantic Council’s Scowcroft Center for Strategy and Security surveyed the future, asking leading global strategists and foresight practitioners around the world to answer our most burning questions about the biggest drivers of change over the next ten years. Here are the full results.

Africa China

1. Forty percent of respondents expect a world war in the next decade—one that could go nuclear and extend to space 

For the first time in our annual survey, we asked respondents whether they expected there to be another world war by 2035. We defined such a war as involving a multifront conflict among great powers. And the results were alarming, with 40 percent saying yes.  

While this was a new question, our Global Foresight 2024 survey surfaced a similar concern, with nearly a quarter of respondents pointing to war between major powers as the greatest threat to global prosperity over the next ten years.

The finding tracks with worries expressed by other experts amid major wars in Europe and the Middle East, growing tensions between the United States and China, and increasing cooperation among China, Russia, North Korea, and Iran. Surveying this treacherous global landscape this past summer, for example, the historian and former US diplomat Philip Zelikow assigned a 20 to 30 percent probability to the prospect of “worldwide warfare” and warned of a “period of maximum danger” within the next one to three years. 

Judging by our respondents’ answers, another world war might feature nuclear weapons. Forty-eight percent of respondents overall (and 63 percent of those predicting World War III) expected nuclear weapons to be used in the coming decade by at least one actor.  

Such a conflict also may play out in outer space. Forty-five percent of respondents overall (and 60 percent of those predicting World War III) expected the next decade to include a direct military conflict fought, at least in part, in space.  

And it could be devastating to the global economy. Twenty-eight percent of respondents identified war among major powers as the single biggest threat to global prosperity over the next ten years. 

⏎ Return to top

2. Tensions with China and Russia are potential vectors for major conflict 

By definition, a world war would involve more than two belligerent nations. But across multiple questions in the survey, respondents forecast a future in which today’s strategic competition and geopolitical tensions between the United States and China in particular could sharpen into something more dangerous.  

Survey respondents, for instance, were significantly more inclined than a year earlier to foresee a military conflict over Taiwan, which could draw in the United States in support of the island and against China. Sixty-five percent of all respondents somewhat or strongly agreed that China will try to retake Taiwan by force within the next decade, and only 24 percent somewhat or strongly disagreed. In our Global Foresight 2024 survey, that split was 50 percent to 30 percent. Among those predicting the breakout of another world war, the proportion was even higher: Seventy-nine percent believed China will attempt to forcibly retake Taiwan over the next ten years. 

Though this year’s survey findings may seem worrisome at first because respondents see increasing risks of war, I find them reassuring. The change from last year shows a greater awareness of the nature of the threats we face in the Indo-Pacific, particularly the risk of confronting simultaneous conflicts with multiple adversaries and nuclear attacks.

That a clear majority of respondents now expect Beijing to try to take Taiwan by force in the coming decade is actually a hopeful signal to me. Chinese President Xi Jinping has been clearly building up military forces suited for offensive operations and has repeatedly stated that he will not renounce the use of force to bring Taiwan under control. Meanwhile, polls suggest that the vast majority of the people of Taiwan are disinclined to be ruled by Beijing, favoring either the status quo or outright independence.

This would seem to set Beijing and Taipei on an inevitable collision course. Yet there is also good reason to believe that China overwhelming Taiwan is not inevitable, in part because invasion would be a far more difficult operation than is commonly recognized. It will take the increasing sense of threat of force identified by the survey to prompt Taiwan and the United States to make the investments necessary to increase their preparedness for deterring and defeating such use of force.

This growing awakening on the part of the United States and its allies can become the basis for a call to action for the populations, governments, and militaries of these countries. The United States has typically waited until war was thrust upon it before preparing comprehensively. Now is the time to act, to prepare, ideally to deter such aggression, and to be ready to hold firm if deterrence fails and we face either a short, sharp war or a protracted one

Markus Garlauskas, director of the Indo-Pacific Security Initiative of the Atlantic Council’s Scowcroft Center for Strategy and Security

A US-China confrontation is not the only potential pathway to a multifront conflict among great powers. Forty-five percent of respondents somewhat or strongly agreed that Russia and NATO will engage in a direct military conflict within the next ten years—a significant increase from the 29 percent who felt this way in our Global Foresight 2024 survey. Among respondents expecting another world war within the next decade, 69 percent anticipated a direct clash between Russia and NATO.

⏎ Return to top

3. Just under half of respondents expect China, Russia, Iran, and North Korea to be formal allies within a decade, potentially in a world featuring China- and US-aligned blocs 

Other geopolitical dynamics forecast by survey respondents could serve as the kindling for whatever spark ignites a wider war or, alternatively, emerge as byproducts of such a conflict.  

Forty-seven percent of respondents predicted that, by 2035, the world will largely be divided into China-aligned and US-aligned blocs; among that group, nearly 60 percent expected the China-aligned bloc to include Russia, Iran, and North Korea as formal allies, presumably with China leading the alliance.  

Overall, just under half of our survey respondents (46 percent) agreed that the emerging axis of Russia, Iran, China, and North Korea will be formal allies in 2035. While this was the first time we asked this question regarding all four countries, in our Global Foresight 2024 survey 33 percent of respondents thought Russia and China would be formal allies in ten years’ time. 

Many respondents appeared to associate these potential developments with the prospect of a world war. Among respondents who foresaw both the world being divided into China- and US-aligned blocs and China, Russia, Iran, and North Korea becoming formal allies, 62 percent also anticipated another world war over the next decade; among other survey respondents, that figure was far lower at 33 percent. 

Economically, there is movement underway toward a US-and-allies versus China-aligned bloc structure, but this movement is still nascent. How far it goes will largely depend on whether the United States can overcome its domestic political reticence to actively shaping the global economic order and once again begin negotiating market-access trade deals.

Beijing seeks a global system in which other nations must abide by its wishes and there are no constraints—legal, normative, or otherwise—limiting Beijing’s own actions. Beijing is using global commerce to enforce this approach. For nations that depend on trade or investment with China, Beijing is increasingly willing to shut off the flow of goods and capital to enforce its demands in other issue areas. Beijing is also using those partners as consumption dumping grounds, exporting excess capacity across a wide array of goods (such as steel and electric vehicles) at rock-bottom prices, which addresses over-supply in the China market but drives local producers out of business. This is leading many nations to reduce their exposure and vulnerabilities to Beijing’s market interference. Many of those nations increasingly view Western, US-centric supply chains as a more attractive option.

As this shift unfolds, it could lead to new economic blocs—for example, a new multilateral trading structure in which the United States and its allies are at the center of a global trading bloc that China is not allowed to join. However, that will depend on Washington shaking off its trade malaise and figuring out how to negotiate new trade deals that create new, formal structures centered on US and allied rules of the road. China is busy creating its own options—such as the Regional Comprehensive Economic Partnership in Asia—but the United States is hanging back. Without more assertive US-led action on the trade front, the biggest risk is that China will form a new, massive global economic bloc and write the rules to benefit itself at our expense, while the United States and its allies watch from the sidelines.

As for China, Russia, Iran, and North Korea, these four nations are partners with a clear shared interest—namely, their desire to undermine the United States and the liberal international order—but they are not true allies. China’s need for integration with the global economy is likely to limit the degree to which today’s partnership evolves in the future into a more formal alliance similar to the alliance the United States enjoys with its NATO partners.

The Chinese Communist Party has staked its regime legitimacy—its pitch for the Chinese people’s continued support—largely on its ability to deliver economically. Unfortunately, the party has also decided that the reforms required to deliver next-level economic growth are too risky, as they would require the party to cede more internal political control over the nation’s economy, legal system, and society. As long as Chinese leaders are unwilling to do that, they will lag behind the West in technology innovation, and they will depend on access to Western companies, universities, and markets to help fill that gap. That dependence limits China’s willingness to sign up for a comprehensive alliance with Russia, Iran, or North Korea, because Beijing does not want to join those nations in an economic wilderness that cuts Chinese companies off from the world’s leading technology powers.

Melanie Hart, senior director of the Atlantic Council’s Global China Hub 

⏎ Return to top

4. The proliferation and use of nuclear weapons is a growing risk, with nearly half of respondents expecting a nuclear weapon to be used by 2035

Since the dawn of the Atomic Age and particularly since the latter part of the Cold War, nuclear nonproliferation efforts have sought to prevent additional countries from acquiring the world’s most destructive weapons, with varying success. And after the United States did so in 1945, no country has used nuclear weapons in war. But according to our survey respondents, the coming decade could bring very concerning developments on both these fronts. 

Iran is the most likely—but not the only potential—new nuclear-weapons power on the horizon 

In our latest survey, 88 percent of respondents expected at least one new country to obtain nuclear weapons in the coming decade, a slight uptick from 84 percent in the Global Foresight 2024 edition. As in our previous survey, just under three quarters of respondents predicted that Iran will go beyond its current threshold status and join the nuclear-weapons club within the next ten years, making it the survey’s most-cited candidate to become a nuclear-weapons state in the future.  

The coming years could bring a range of policy responses to this anticipated development, from strikes against Iran’s nuclear facilities to a new round of nuclear negotiations with Tehran. Perhaps in recognition of these scenarios, more than a third of respondents expected Israel to have engaged in a direct war with Iran by 2035.

Is Iran’s acquisition of a nuclear weapon inevitable or at least highly likely in the next decade? Far from it. Whether Iran acquires a nuclear weapon will depend on policy choices made by Iran, Israel, and the United States regarding Tehran’s nuclear program.

Currently, Iran still officially disavows an intent to produce a nuclear weapon, but there has been much more talk among Iranian officials during the past year of the need for one as pressure on Iran has increased due to Israeli military actions against Tehran’s “resistance axis” and Iran itself.

Iran’s military and economic weaknesses have intensified an ongoing debate between moderates and hardliners in Iran over the direction of the country’s foreign and nuclear policy. Moderates want to negotiate a freeze on Iran’s nuclear program in return for the lifting of economic sanctions and an opening of trade and investment with the West and Arab Gulf states. Hardliners argue Iran must double down on its expansionist regional policies, its threshold status as a military nuclear power, its growing ties to Russia and China, and its hardline stance toward the United States and the West to rebuild deterrence and resilience.

Iranian Supreme Leader Ali Khamenei will have to make the call on which policy to pursue, and uppermost in his mind will be which approach—or mixture of the two—best ensures the survival of the Islamic Republic, his overarching priority.

Israeli officials continue to monitor Iran’s nuclear program closely and have reiterated warnings that Israel will resort to military force if Iran seeks to acquire a nuclear weapon. Israel under Prime Minister Benjamin Netanyahu has been emboldened by its military successes over the past year, including the destruction of Hamas’s and Hezbollah’s military capabilities and Iran’s air defenses, as well as the weakening of Iran’s missile-production capabilities. Senior Israeli officials probably believe conditions are ripe to destroy or set back Iran’s nuclear program without major threat of retaliation, given the Islamic Republic’s current vulnerability, but also seem to recognize that Israel would need US military support to do lasting damage.

The Trump administration is committed to restoring its previous maximum-pressure campaign of sanctions against Iran to compel it to agree to a new nuclear deal and curbs on its malign regional behavior. Trump’s transition team reportedly discussed the possibility of a preemptive attack on Iran’s nuclear facilities given that Iran now has enough highly enriched uranium for several bombs and that sanctions could take a long time to work. They may have leaked this option to frighten Iran into agreeing to negotiations, but clearly the Trump administration is signaling a willingness to go beyond sanctions and diplomacy to achieve its objectives.

With Iran’s axis of resistance shredded, and Iran itself weakened militarily and economically, the United States has an extraordinary opportunity—working with Israel, Arab allies, and European countries—to use economic and diplomatic pressure backed by the threat of military force to secure an agreement that walks Iran back from the nuclear brink and curbs its destabilizing regional policies.

—Alan Pino, former US national intelligence officer for the Near East 

What is new is the jump in the percentage of respondents expecting other countries to get these weapons. In our Global Foresight 2024 survey, for example, a quarter of respondents thought South Korea would acquire nuclear weapons. In our most recent survey, that figure was 40 percent. The percentage of respondents expecting Japan—the only country ever subject to a nuclear-weapons attack, where the survivors of the Hiroshima and Nagasaki bombings are a prominent national presence—to acquire nuclear weapons also increased ten percentage points over 2024, from 19 percent to 29 percent. (Notably, while the percentage of respondents anticipating a nuclear Iran in ten years’ time remained steady year over year, so did the roughly 40 percent of respondents expecting nearby rival Saudi Arabia to acquire nuclear weapons as well.) 

North Korea and Russia are considered the most likely to launch a nuclear-weapons attack

Forty-eight percent of respondents expected nuclear weapons to be used in the coming decade, up from 37 percent in our previous survey.  

This finding demonstrates that nuclear weapons have returned to the center of geopolitics. For years after the end of the Cold War, many assumed that nuclear weapons were obsolete relics from the past. The Obama administration made eliminating nuclear weapons a top priority. At the time, Washington assessed that there was virtually zero chance of a nuclear war among states and the greatest nuclear threats came from terrorism or accident.

Now, nearly half of our respondents assess that nuclear weapons will be used in the coming decade. This shows that nuclear weapons are not twentieth-century curiosities but the ultimate instrument of force and essential tools of great-power competition. China is engaging in the most rapid nuclear buildup since the 1960s, Russia is issuing regular nuclear threats, North Korea’s nuclear arsenal continues to grow, and Iran’s dash time to the bomb is now measured in weeks.

This means that the United States will need to once again strengthen its strategic forces to deter adversaries and assure allies. By doing so, I hope the United States can prove our respondents wrong and ensure that the world’s most powerful weapons are never used again.

Matthew Kroenig, vice president and senior director, Scowcroft Center for Strategy and Security 

Roughly one-quarter of respondents predicted that Russia will use a nuclear weapon by 2035, with around the same percentage saying the same regarding North Korea, amid reports of near-Russian nuclear use early in its war against Ukraine and concerns about crumbling deterrence on the Korean peninsula. Both cases represent significant increases relative to our previous survey, when only 14 percent expected Russia to employ a nuke and 15 percent believed North Korea would do so. 

⏎ Return to top

5. The United States is still likely to be dominant militarily in 2035—but with relatively less economic, diplomatic, and soft power as it navigates a multipolar world

Three-quarters of respondents in our latest survey agreed that the world in 2035 will be multipolar, with multiple centers of power, in line with the findings in our previous survey

A slightly smaller percentage of respondents—71 percent—expected the United States to remain the world’s dominant military power by that time. A majority (58 percent) envisioned the United States being the world’s dominant technology innovator a decade from now.  

On other measures of power—economic, cultural, and diplomatic—respondents predicting US dominance in 2035 were in the minority, if only ever so slightly in the case of economic power, in which 49 percent of respondents expected the United States to be dominant. 

Between our latest survey and the previous year’s, confidence in US dominance over the next decade dropped across several measures of power, particularly diplomatic and military clout. Those forecasting US dominance in ten years’ time declined from 81 percent to 71 percent for military power, 63 percent to 58 percent for technological innovation, 52 percent to 49 percent for economic power, and 32 percent to 24 percent for diplomatic power. (The Global Foresight 2024 survey did not ask about future US dominance in cultural or soft power, which 35 percent of respondents expected in our most recent survey.) Slightly more respondents (12 percent) relative to our prior survey (7 percent) forecast that the United States will be dominant in none of these areas by 2035. 

A bright but more uncertain future for US alliances 

While a majority of respondents (61 percent) expected the United States to maintain its security alliances and partnerships in Europe, Asia, and the Middle East in 2035, this figure was markedly down from our previous survey (79 percent), with much of the shift seeming to stem from those answering that they “don’t know” (26 percent in the Global Foresight 2025 edition relative to 12 percent in the 2024 edition).  

Responses on the future of US military dominance and alliances appear correlated. Among those who expected the United States to retain such dominance by 2035, 67 percent believed that it would maintain its network of alliances. Among those who did not think the United States would be the world’s dominant military power in a decade, only 46 percent believed that the country would preserve its alliance network. 

In our Global Foresight 2024 survey, just under a third of respondents expected Europe to have achieved “strategic autonomy” within the next decade by taking more responsibility for its own security and thus relying less on the United States. In our latest survey, however, almost half of respondents (48 percent) expected Europe to achieve “strategic autonomy” over the next ten years—a notable increase as President Donald Trump presses European countries to substantially increase their defense spending.

Do you agree or disagree with the following statements about the state of alliances and partnerships in 2035:

The dangers of a diminished United States 

Those who anticipate a diminished United States over the next decade may link such a scenario to worse outcomes for the world. Among respondents who said that by 2035 the United States will be the dominant power in none of the domains listed in the survey, for instance, only 24 percent believed that the world will be better off in a decade’s time. Among other respondents, 40 percent expected the world to be better off ten years from now. Similarly, among those who didn’t expect US dominance in any domain of power in a decade, 62 percent envisioned a world war occurring over that timeframe. For the rest of the survey pool, 38 percent anticipated another world war.  

In the United States, declinism is a national pastime with a poor track record. In the 1970s, many thought the Soviet Union was on a trajectory to overtake the United States as the world’s leading superpower. In the 1980s, economists projected that Japan would unseat the United States as the world’s leading economy. In the 2010s, many thought it was inevitable that China would become the world’s largest economic power.

All of those predictions turned out to be incorrect.

The United States is now a rising power, claiming 26 percent of global gross domestic product (GDP), its largest share in two decades. Meanwhile, China is declining; Xi Jinping’s desire to assert Chinese Communist Party control over all aspects of Chinese society is stifling Chinese growth, and his aggressive foreign policy is undercutting the global economic engagement strategy that fueled China’s rise. Europe’s share of global GDP has fallen from a quarter in the 1980s to roughly 15 percent today. Russia’s GDP is smaller than Italy’s and Spain’s. To whom then is the United States supposedly ceding all of this power?

Is the United States in decline? I wouldn’t bet on it.

Matthew Kroenig, vice president and senior director, Scowcroft Center for Strategy and Security 

⏎ Return to top

6. Many respondents are pessimistic about the war in Ukraine ending on terms favorable to Ukraine

Amid a push by the incoming Trump administration to bring the war in Ukraine to an end three years after Russia’s full-scale invasion of the country, and as Ukraine and Russia each seek to secure the best possible terms in any future negotiated peace deal, respondents were split on the likely outcome of the conflict. Forty-seven percent predicted that Russia’s war against Ukraine will end on terms largely favorable to Russia and 43 percent forecast that it will result in a “frozen conflict.” Only 4 percent expected the war to end on terms largely favorable to Ukraine.  

Our previous survey a year earlier, which asked a different and more detailed question about Ukraine in ten years’ time, reflected more optimism, with 48 percent of respondents predicting that Ukraine would emerge from the war as an independent, sovereign state in control of the territory it held before Russia’s escalated assault on the country in 2022. 

Expectations about the future change in the wake of historic developments and perceptions of those developments. Perhaps the single most important factor in determining the outcome of Russia’s aggression in Ukraine is US policy.

Simply put, a strong US policy providing Ukraine the weapons to drive Russian forces largely out of Ukraine and rallying the political West to supply Ukraine’s economic needs would lead to a clear defeat for Russian President Vladimir Putin that would return much of occupied Ukraine to Kyiv’s control, and with a US-led effort would vouchsafe Ukraine’s security and territorial integrity via NATO membership. Alternatively, a US decision to cut off aid to Ukraine would likely lead to a disaster that would ensure Kremlin political control of the country, produce a direct threat to NATO, and encourage aggression by US adversaries in the Far and Middle East.

US President Joe Biden gave substantial support to Ukraine, but he stopped well short of giving Ukraine the arms and permission to take back most of the country. Trump has stated that he wants Ukraine to survive and would not abandon the country, but he is seeking a durable peace that requires compromise from Ukraine as well as Russia. Ukrainian President Volodymyr Zelenskyy has indicated a readiness to compromise; Putin has not. Recognizing this, Trump and his team have identified Putin as the recalcitrant party and have spoken of major economic measures—tougher sanctions, transferring the $300 billion in frozen Russian state assets to Ukraine—to persuade Russia to negotiate. Respondents to the survey pay attention to the major factors affecting this war, including the Trump angle. But respondents to surveys are not seers, and survey questions are not written to explore the insights that seers might provide.

What therefore might we expect to happen with the war this coming year? First, Trump will roll out a peace initiative that likely includes four elements already public. Two are hard for Zelenskyy: territorial concessions (at least de facto) and no NATO membership for Ukraine for twenty years minimum. And two are hard for Putin: the demilitarized zone enforced by European troops and arming Ukraine to the hilt to prevent future Russian aggression. We can expect Putin to try hard to get Trump to drop those last two points before and then during the talks. But if Putin is persuaded that Trump will arm Ukraine with far more advanced weapons if Russia is unyielding, he might agree to terms that he intends to violate. Trump’s hopes for a Nobel Peace Prize depend on him insisting that Russia compromise to the point of ensuring a viable and stable future for Ukraine, and being ready to confront the ever-treacherous Russian dictator if Putin violates an agreement whose terms would yield that outcome.

John Herbst, senior director of the Atlantic Council’s Eurasia Center 

⏎ Return to top

7. Respondents are much more optimistic about a breakthrough in Israeli-Saudi relations than in Israeli-Palestinian peace  

Ever since Hamas’s October 7, 2023 terrorist attacks against Israel and Israel’s ensuing war in Gaza set off transformative changes in the broader Middle East, US officials have linked reviving work on normalizing diplomatic relations between Israel and Saudi Arabia with renewing the push for a pathway to a Palestinian state as part of an eventual Israeli-Palestinian peace deal, with the Saudis insisting on the latter as a condition for the former.  

But our survey respondents—who, notably, shared their views before Israel and Hamas reached their January cease-fire and hostage deal—were much more bullish about the prospects for Israeli-Saudi normalization in the coming decade than about the chances of an Israeli-Palestinian two-state solution. Fifty-six percent envisioned Israel having normalized diplomatic relations with Saudi Arabia by 2035—roughly similar to the percentage who said the same in our post-October 7, 2023, Global Foresight 2024 survey—relative to 17 percent who expected Israel to be coexisting next to a sovereign, independent Palestinian state within that timeframe. More than 60 percent of respondents predicted that when it comes to the Israeli-Palestinian conflict, today’s status quo, with occupied Palestinian territories, will persist. 

In 2035, will Israel have the status quo that exists today, with occupied Palestinian territories?

Hamas’s surprise attack on Israel on October 7, 2023 has taught us the dangers of thinking a status quo will continue indefinitely. Israeli leaders’ belief that Hamas had reconciled itself to the status quo in Gaza—in which Gazans received economic benefits in return for Hamas not attacking Israel—left them unprepared for the most devastating attack on the Jewish state since its war of independence in 1948.

And the war in Gaza that resulted from Hamas’s attack has brought further surprises: Israel’s almost complete destruction of Hamas as a military and political organization; the killing of most of Hezbollah’s military leaders and elimination of a majority of its vaunted rocket and missile arsenal; direct Iranian and Israeli attacks on each other’s territory, with Israel wiping out all of Iran’s most advanced air-defense systems; and the almost overnight collapse of the Syrian military and the regime of Syrian President Bashar al-Assad in the face of a renewed rebel offensive.

The Middle East’s geopolitical landscape has been dramatically transformed, and Iran’s image as a regional hegemon and defender of the Palestinians badly tarnished. Israeli leaders have been emboldened by Israel’s military successes and seem to believe that maintaining military dominance alone will deter the country’s enemies.

But some observers, looking ahead, ask whether the cycle of violence since October 7 is likely to repeat itself at some point if Israel doesn’t address the issue of Palestinian aspirations for independence. The Biden administration and others have called for a return to the idea of a two-state solution as necessary to forestall future cycles of Israeli-Palestinian violence.

Admittedly, the current environment is not propitious for discussion of a Palestinian state. A large majority of Israelis, still traumatized by Hamas’s horrific attack on October 7, reject the idea as posing a grave risk to Israel’s security. Israeli Prime Minister Benjamin Netanyahu has repeatedly refused calls from the United States to incorporate the concept of an eventual Palestinian state into Israel’s post-war strategy, and right-wingers in the current Israeli government want to annex a large part of the West Bank, keep long-term control of the Gaza Strip, and return Israeli settlements to Gaza.

But the Palestinian issue is not likely to go away. Anti-Israel militancy and violence by Palestinians is growing in the Israeli-occupied West Bank, and Israel hasn’t totally suppressed attacks by Hamas in Gaza after more than a year of fighting. Arab publics are seething with anger over the large number of Palestinians killed and displaced by Israeli military operations in Gaza. And world opinion has increasingly turned against Israel as Palestinian casualties have mounted.

The Palestinian issue remains a roadblock to Israel becoming fully integrated into the region, a key goal of Netanyahu’s that he hopes will put a capstone on his legacy as Israel’s longest-serving prime minister. Responding to popular sentiment, Saudi leaders have indicated that Riyadh won’t normalize relations with Israel—an essential step to create a political and security bulwark against renewed threats from Iran—unless Jerusalem endorses a clear pathway to Palestinian statehood.

New elections will probably need to take place in Israel, bringing new leadership open to the idea of a political horizon for the Palestinians, if the current status quo is to change. The United States has an important role to play here by encouraging Israeli leaders to think about how to translate their military success into a regional strategy that includes a vision for ending the Israeli-Palestinian conflict.

The odds of such a development seem long right now, but October 7 is a reminder that clinging to an unstable status quo can be riskier than seeking to change it.

—Alan Pino, former US national intelligence officer for the Near East 

⏎ Return to top

8. As global organizations become less capable of solving the world’s problems, regional groupings and the BRICS may rise in importance   

Respondents foresaw many global institutions growing less effective over the coming decade. Seventy-five percent expected the United Nations (UN) to be less capable of solving challenges core to its mission by 2035 relative to today, compared with 9 percent who anticipated it becoming more capable of doing so. The figures for the United Nations Security Council are only slightly better, with 67 percent of respondents predicting less capability and 9 percent more capability. Sixty percent of respondents envisioned the World Trade Organization being less capable in a decade than it is today.  

Respondents also may be skeptical about the UN’s capacity to tackle global-governance challenges such as climate change. Just under 40 percent of respondents predicted that greenhouse-gas emissions will have peaked and begun to decline by 2035, despite signs that this tipping point is already near. Only about half of respondents believed that renewable energy technologies will be the dominant form of electricity production globally by then, despite significant growth in demand for renewable energy. 

The forecast was less dire for the World Bank, with 46 percent predicting less capability and 19 percent more capability, and International Monetary Fund (IMF), with 41 percent predicting less capability and 20 percent more capability. A similar if slightly more sanguine picture emerged regarding organizations consisting of the world’s leading powers. Forty-nine percent of respondents predicted less capability and 21 percent more capability for the Group of Seven (G7), while 38 percent expected less capability and 29 percent more capability for the Group of Twenty (G20). 

But respondents seemed to hold out even more hope for regional blocs and the BRICS, which is now expanding its membership beyond Brazil, Russia, India, China, and South Africa. Forty percent of respondents predicted that the Association of Southeast Asian Nations will be more capable of fulfilling its mission by 2035, while 20 percent said the opposite. For the European Union, those figures were 40 percent and 33 percent. (Respondents from EU countries were even more optimistic, with 50 percent expecting greater capability and 22 percent less capability.) For the BRICS, the numbers were 43 percent and 31 percent. 

The findings show in hard data what many analysts believe—that the international financial institutions, in particular the Bretton Woods institutions, remain the most functional parts of the multilateral system. That’s because they deliver real money every day to countries around the world. 

But the responses also show a growing recognition that these institutions are not self-perpetuating. The tenuous consensus that allows them to go about day-to-day business is predicated on an understanding that functioning IMF and World Bank institutions serve every country (including the United States) better than dysfunctional ones. With Donald Trump’s return to office, there are questions about whether that consensus will hold. For what it’s worth: The first time Trump was in office, it did, and Trump and his team saw the value in both institutions, even if they disagreed with some policy decisions. 

The one area of the findings that seems off-target is on the BRICS. The likelihood of the BRICS succeeding in fulfilling their main goals seems vastly overstated in these findings (likely a product of media reporting on BRICS expansion during 2023 and 2024). Here’s the question that is much tougher to answer: What do the BRICS actually want to achieve? What they oppose—the Western-led system—is clear. But what is their proactive agenda? Until they answer that question, the ability of BRICS to succeed as an institution will be limited at best.   

Josh Lipsky, senior director of the Atlantic Council’s GeoEconomics Center 

⏎ Return to top

9. Today’s democratic recession may deepen into a democratic depression

Overall, respondents appeared gloomy about the prospects for democracy around the world by 2035. Just under half envisioned the current “democratic recession” worsening and becoming a “democratic depression,” while only 17 percent anticipated a “democratic renaissance” instead. The remaining 37 percent expected the global state of democracy to remain much as it is today, with some encouraging progress but also considerable headwinds and backsliding. 

Sixty-five percent of respondents also forecast that global press freedoms will decrease by 2035, with another quarter expecting them to stay about the same as they are today and very few anticipating those freedoms increasing over the coming decade. 

Our question on the state of global democracy in our previous survey was not identical and therefore not directly comparable. Nevertheless, its results—24 percent expected more democracies a decade hence, 38 percent forecast fewer democracies, and another 37 percent foresaw stasis—presaged the dim outlook expressed in our latest survey. 

⏎ Return to top

10. Women are more pessimistic about the global future than men are 

Women notably expressed a bleaker outlook across many questions in the survey related to conflict, their own rights, and US clout over the next decade. 

For instance, 61 percent of female respondents predicted that nuclear weapons will be used in the coming decade, compared with 44 percent of male respondents who said the same. Women (54 percent) were also more likely than men (44 percent) to expect a democratic depression. Thirty-two percent of women pointed to women as the most likely group to have their rights curtailed in the coming decade—twice the proportion of men who gave the same answer. Women, moreover, were less likely than men to envision the United States as the world’s dominant military power (58 percent relative to 76 percent) and technological innovator (47 percent relative to 61 percent) in a decade’s time.  

The pessimism from women likely reflects persistent inequities in military, economic, and political representation and participation, as well as the disproportionate impacts of crises and shocks—whether those are economic (like inflation), security-related (from wars such as those in Ukraine or Gaza), the result of political turmoil or transition, or the product of natural disasters and climate events.

Compounding these situations are the challenges of child or family care and pay gaps, which limit the work and earnings of many women, and worsening domestic and gender-based violence, which devastates women’s lives in all dimensions. In the United States, the rollback of Roe v. Wade has left many women believing their rights and protection more broadly are at risk.

Nicole Goldin, nonresident senior fellow with the Atlantic Council’s GeoEconomics Center and head of equitable development at United Nations University Centre for Policy Research 

⏎ Return to top


About the authors

Aylward was an editor at War on the Rocks and Army AL&T before joining the Council. She was previously a junior fellow at the Carnegie Endowment for International Peace.
Engelke is on the adjunct faculty at Georgetown University’s School of Continuing Studies and is a frequent lecturer to the US Department of State’s Foreign Service Institute. He was previously a member of the World Economic Forum’s Global Future Council on Complex Risks, an executive-in-residence at the Geneva Centre for Security Policy, a Bosch fellow with the Robert Bosch Foundation, and a visiting fellow at the Stimson Center.
Friedman is also a contributing writer at The Atlantic, where he writes a regular column on international affairs. He was previously a senior staff writer at The Atlantic covering national security and global affairs, the editor of The Atlantic’s Global section, and the deputy managing editor of Foreign Policy magazine.
Kielstra is a freelance author who has published extensively in fields including business analysis, healthcare, energy policy, fraud control, international trade, and international relations. His work regularly includes the drafting and analysis of large surveys, along with desk research, expert interviews, and scenario building. His clients have included the Atlantic Council, the Economist Group, the Financial Times Group, the World Health Organization, and Kroll. Kielstra holds a doctorate in modern history from the University of Oxford, a graduate diploma in economics from the London School of Economics, and a bachelor of arts from the University of Toronto. He is also a published historian.

The post Welcome to 2035: What the world could look like in ten years, according to more than 350 experts appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>
Three worlds in 2035: Imagining scenarios for how the world could be transformed over the next decade https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/content-series/atlantic-council-strategy-paper-series/three-worlds-in-2035/ Wed, 12 Feb 2025 11:00:00 +0000 https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/?p=821694 2024 was marked by increased climate shocks and collaboration of autocratic adversaries. What will the world look like in the next decade? The Atlantic Council’s top experts brought their globe-spanning expertise to the task of forecasting three different scenarios for the future.

The post Three worlds in 2035: Imagining scenarios for how the world could be transformed over the next decade appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>

Three worlds in 2035

Imagining scenarios for how the world could be transformed over the next decade

By Peter Engelke, Greg Lindsay, and Paul Saffo

Welcome to three possible worlds in the year 2035. As resident and non-resident senior fellows in the Atlantic Council’s foresight practice, we produced these scenarios by assessing how current trends and uncertainties across a variety of categories—including geopolitics, the economy, demography, the environment, technology, and society—might interact with one another in the years to come. 

These are not forecasts or predictions of what the future will bring. Instead, these scenarios are intended to inspire imagination and spur readers to consider possible futures, including future worlds that do not align with the readers’ expectations. To paraphrase a sentiment often expressed by the physicist and futurist Herman Kahn, the point of working with future scenarios is to find out what you don’t know and should know but that you didn’t even know you didn’t know. 

We invite readers to interpret these scenarios in that spirit. Consider the interplay among the cause-and-effect elements that lead to each of the potential future worlds, as well as the myriad other possible scenarios that could emerge in the years to come.

Perhaps the world of 2035 might vaguely resemble one of the three scenarios presented here, but that is not the central purpose of this exercise. The primary reason why we crafted these scenarios is to generate deeper insights into how today’s actions and inactions might create a better or worse world ten years from now.

Choose your global future

The reluctant international order

Global governance has never been more complicated than it is in 2035. But although the problems are complex, thus far the governance landscape is proving capable of containing at least some of them, as occurred several years ago when we endured a near-miss catastrophe from a bioweapon-fueled pandemic.  

We might not be experiencing the halcyon days of a revitalized multilateralism, but thankfully we’re also not inhabiting a kill-or-be-killed nihilistic hellscape. We seem to be living through what some commentators are now calling the “Reluctant International Order.” 

Let’s begin with what has not happened: neither the much-feared collapse nor the much-hoped-for revitalization of what often is called the rules-based international order (we’ll use the acronym “RBIO”). Which means that neither the 1930s nor the 1990s have returned.  

The international order that the United States and its allies created and maintained after 1945 delivered benefits for decades—benefits that were admittedly partial and often uneven but nonetheless real. Embedded within the RBIO are norms, such as non-aggression toward other countries and respect for human rights, that are laudable ideals. And at its core are multilateral institutions, including the United Nations (UN), World Bank, and World Health Organization (WHO), which were designed to contain conflict, assist with economic development, anticipate and then manage crises of various kinds, and provide some governance in an otherwise anarchic world. The whole order is premised on the notion that international cooperation, combined with the open exchange of ideas and goods, will lead to a better and more peaceful world. 

Yet there has long been dissatisfaction with the RBIO. Today, as before, many countries are unhappy with the RBIO and seek to upend or reform it. China and Russia, the two most powerful and vocal of these states, have remained steadfast in their opposition to at least parts of this order, although it also has become clear that their ends are not identical. A decade ago, both began to join with North Korea and Iran to form a grouping that was labeled an “axis of aggressors” because of widespread concern about those countries coordinating to directly challenge the West and the international order, militarily and otherwise. Numerous other countries, often middle and emerging powers in the so-called Global South have sought, at a minimum, to modify the RBIO. These states—with India and Brazil the most prominent examples—have accused the RBIO of being unrepresentative and its defenders of being hypocritical because of their selective application of the order’s underpinning norms. Even the core group of democratic nations that historically defended the order, including the United States, often have acted against the RBIO when it suited their interests. 

Resilient rules

Despite all this, the various challenges to the RBIO have never been powerful enough to destroy it. Neither the axis of aggressors nor the partnership between China and Russia ever amounted to real military alliances, reflecting weak rather than strong bonds among them. These revisionist states have acted in disjointed fashion, as a result of their divergent interests, and never staged a coordinated attempt to directly confront the West. Partly for that reason, there has been no global war and thus no wholesale shock that reset the global governance system, as occurred after World War II.  

Russia emerged from its war against Ukraine (which ended in a negotiated peace in 2026) far weaker than it was when the conflict began, and it has yet to sufficiently recover to mount another similar challenge westward in Europe. China has made no overt move to seize control of Taiwan either. Evidently, Chinese President Xi Jinping has decided he does not want to gamble his country’s future in a confrontation with the United States, which after all remains a great economic and military power with a formidable nuclear deterrent. (The United States’ increased investment in defense of the Western Pacific also appears to have influenced Xi’s calculations.) It does not help China that Russia is a much-debilitated junior partner. 

The case of Taiwan is important for another reason. It underscores that, so far, China and the United States have decided that coexistence is the preferable direction for their relationship, which has prevented the international system from collapsing altogether. Their rivalry has been channeled through other pathways short of war, including diplomatic efforts to curry favor abroad and support for various minilateral and multilateral institutions. And they’ve found, more than occasionally, that their interests actually intersect. In the realm of nuclear nonproliferation, for example, both China and the United States have continued working in tandem to prevent Iran from developing a nuclear weapon, albeit by utilizing very different mechanisms and forms of leverage. 

But while the RBIO has not collapsed—meaning there has been no repeat of the era between World War I and World War II—it also has not been revitalized. There has been no return to a triumphalist end of history, no 1990s-style heyday wherein major and middle powers mostly work in concordance with one another toward peaceful and prosperous coexistence within what they perceive as a benign set of global norms and institutions. Hence the increasing references to a “Reluctant International Order,” if meant in jest. 

What has happened instead has been an evolution rather than a revolution, characterized more by experimentation and incrementalism than by some jarring disruption. This has occurred because the world’s problems demand coordinated responses even for countries reluctant to do so and because those countries recognize that the opportunity costs of not engaging are so high.  

Today, the outward institutional trappings of the RBIO remain in place. The UN continues its work as before, partially because China does not want to destroy it. (The UN’s embrace of state sovereignty, for example, appeals to China’s interests.) Global trade is still growing, despite the tariff wars of the mid-to-late 2020s, owing in part to technological developments that have continued to lower the cost of trade. And the norms underpinning the RBIO haven’t disappeared, either, since many around the world—national and sub-national governments, civil-society and non-profit organizations, grassroots groups and ordinary citizens—want to preserve them and continue to see value in cooperative approaches to transnational problems. 

Trading places

Consider trade. More than a decade ago, many nations began curtailing their exposure to global trade flows out of justifiable concern that trade was having detrimental impacts on their security, economies, and societies. Yet despite extensive anti-globalization rhetoric and policies (with the tariff wars the best example), the prevailing perception is that the benefits of trade continue to outweigh the costs. China and the United States, for instance, still have one of the largest bilateral trade relationships of any two countries in the world, despite their now lengthy history of trade disputes, including tariffs and a range of trade restrictions in sensitive technologies.  

The leaders of many countries have realized that they have a compelling interest in remaining engaged in trade and talks to increase trade. This has resulted in the creation, maintenance, or expansion of a number of regional free-trade agreements. Several of these efforts have proven quite successful, perhaps best illustrated by the African Continental Free Trade Area (AfCFTA). Over the past fifteen years, African states have joined with the African Union to extend and deepen AfCFTA and, in so doing, to realize several of its longer-term objectives such as the reduction of intra-continental tariffs and loosening of visa restrictions. The case of AfCFTA and others like it—for instance, strengthened trade agreements between the Gulf Cooperation Council countries and Asian countries—underscore that while global trade volume has grown since the mid-2020s, the geography of trade continues to shift.   

Nonstate actors have been critical to the maintenance of this system. Multinational companies around the world have made their support for trade well-known, which has helped compel countries to continue defining their interests in pro-trade terms. 

Bioweapon-inspired cooperation

Nothing underscored both the value of cooperation and the powers (positive and negative) of nonstate actors like the 2029 bioweapon scare.  

That year, a shadowy, transnational doomsday cult—akin to Aum Shinrikyo, which terrorized Japan with sarin gas in 1995—used an artificial intelligence (AI)-enhanced synthetic biology (“SynBio”) process to develop a deadlier and more easily transmissible strain of smallpox. Because the cult’s plot to release it was foiled at the last minute, owing to frantic collaboration among national intelligence services and INTERPOL, the world narrowly avoided a pandemic that would have been far worse than the COVID-19 pandemic.  

Horrified by this close call, most of the world’s governments—including the United States, China, and Russia—grasped for solutions. Since pandemics do not respect boundaries, world leaders recognized that there was an upper limit on how much they could protect their people on their own. In response, they quickly sought to deepen collaboration with one another and with leading multilateral public-health institutions such as the WHO, multinational corporations including companies that develop major AI platforms, and the global scientific community that sets standards and runs laboratories. The mandate was clear: Determine how to monitor and regulate the biotechnology space more effectively—or risk perhaps hundreds of millions dying in an AI-enhanced, SynBio-caused (“AIxBio”) pandemic along the lines that the doomsday cult had almost willed into existence.  

One of this new coalition’s proposals, which was quickly funded and implemented, was to create an institution similar to the International Atomic Energy Agency but focused on AIxBio. Its formal membership is based on a novel multi-stakeholder model that includes national governments, big-tech firms, and scientific organizations.  

The smallpox bioweapon scare vividly illustrated, even for adversarial major powers, the intolerably high risk of countries not engaging with one another through international institutions and on international norms to address the world’s greatest challenges—and on the enduring relevance and value of the RBIO ninety years after its creation. Halting progress in some areas of the international system doesn’t qualify as a renaissance. But even a Reluctant International Order is better than retreat. 

⏎ Return to top

China ascendant

Welcome to 2035, and a world whose center of gravity has shifted decisively toward Beijing.  

China now has more influence on world affairs than does any other country, including the United States. It is ascendant on every metric of power—diplomatic, military, economic, and technological. That power has enabled Beijing to begin remaking the world to its liking. It has been busy recasting the global system, including multilateral institutions such as the United Nations (UN), in its preferred image, and is in the process of dismantling the democratic norms that have animated the international order since 1945.  

China has arrived at this ascendant position in part because the United States has not done much to stand in its way. At the turn of this century, such an outcome would have been impossible to imagine. Even a decade ago, when Washington’s commitment to the rules-based international order showed initial signs of wavering, such an outcome would have been difficult to forecast. But US leaders have been consumed by the challenges of dealing with the country’s weakening economy, fraying societal bonds, and unrelentingly harsh domestic politics. These dynamics have eliminated the longstanding bipartisan consensus around defending the global order that the United States, along with its many allies and partners, had built and maintained for decades.  

The result has been that the United States no longer has an unwavering commitment to its allies and partners, the core multilateral institutions at the center of the order that it built, and the norms and principles that it stood behind all those years. Instead, the United States has definitively turned inward. By nearly every metric, the United States remains a major power. But it no longer has much interest in maintaining its leadership role in the world. It has ceded that ground to others, especially to China. 

Taiwan-style tipping points

The impact of the US withdrawal from global affairs is evident in various flashpoints around the world, including in Taiwan. While the prevailing fear in the 2010s and early 2020s was of a devastating clash between the United States and China over the island, the Taiwan issue was resolved without firing a shot. China subordinated Taiwan by applying intense pressure—via sabotage, cyber operations, propaganda campaigns, overt and covert influence campaigns within Taiwan, espionage, murky hybrid operations on the island and around its waters—to influence Taiwanese domestic politics toward a cross-Straits settlement with the People’s Republic of China. Its efforts to shape domestic politics within Taiwan succeeded. In 2030, Taiwan’s government agreed to (among other things) such a settlement, which included ceasing defense cooperation with foreign governments and reducing Taiwan’s direct engagement with foreign officials. The United States, which did not respond to China’s various forms of pressure against Taiwan, ultimately could not prevent the cross-Straits agreement, given the Taiwanese government’s support for it. None of China’s individual provocations were dramatic enough for an already hesitant United States to risk a direct military confrontation with China over it.  

What happened in Taiwan has also played out on a global scale. There was no one exceptional event or even set of events that triggered a transformation of the international system—no explosion that China engineered to blow up the global order. Thus, there never was a single focal point for China’s rivals—especially the United States—to rally their citizens around and respond to in a coordinated and decisive way. Rather, there has been a gradual and now inexorable shift away from the US-led order and toward a Chinese-led one. This shift resulted from decisions made by both US and Chinese leaders: inward-looking in the case of the former, outward-looking in the case of the latter. It was, in short, a slow-motion fait accompli. 

China has positioned itself as the world’s inevitable leader, seizing on its strengths to curry favor with other countries and on the opportunity presented by the United States’ implosion to diminish its rival. Take the performance of the two countries’ economies as an example. A decade ago, the economic outlook was bleaker for China than it was for the United States. But over the past ten years, that script has flipped. In the mid-2020s, Chinese President Xi Jinping managed to right China’s sputtering economy, stabilizing it and returning it to steady growth (if less spectacular growth than during the country’s long boom). He did so by successfully transitioning the country to what many are now calling “an innovation system with Chinese characteristics,” striking a balance of rewarding innovation and entrepreneurialism while maintaining the Chinese Communist Party’s control over the nation’s political apparatus.  

All this has enabled China to return to selling itself and its economic rebound on the one hand, plus the United States’ economic stagnation (due to dysfunctional politics) on the other, as a compelling reason why the United States is both unreliable and a poor economic model for the rest of the world, and by extension why China represents a better model. That message has even more resonance around the world now than it did ten years ago.  

Because of the pull of China’s growing economy, which remains integrated within global trade flows, plus the relative weakness of the US economy, foreign governments have become more willing to sign onto China’s various economic diplomacy efforts, such as the Global Development Initiative. Beijing now hosts a robust schedule of international economic forums that position it at the center of the economic universe, and thus as the destination for intergovernmental bargaining and influence on issues such as trade and investment. To outside observers, the economic pull of Beijing has eclipsed that of Washington and, for that matter, of Brussels, London, Paris, Seoul, or Tokyo.  

As a result, China’s influence has grown in many parts of the world. In the Global South, lower- and middle-income countries in Africa, Latin America, and South Asia (where China remains engaged with India in a long-running contest for influence) have been even more eager to trade with and receive investment from China than they were in the 2020s. This outcome is the product of years (in some cases decades) of aggressive economic diplomacy by China and disinterest from the US government. It also stemmed from reform to China’s overseas lending and investment vehicles, which China recognized needed fine-tuning to make them more palatable abroad and deflect rising criticism of the unsustainable debt and other problems they engendered. Thus far, these policy shifts appear to have worked. China has also become the world’s largest trading nation for both imports and exports, ahead of the United States. Shifting trade in goods also has accelerated movement away from trade denominated in US dollars and toward trade denominated in renminbi—a sure sign of the relative strengths of the two economies.  

For China, the advantages are enormous: more wealth at home and influence abroad. China’s diplomatic ties with major materials exporters such as Brazil (soybeans and other crops), the Gulf Cooperation Council states (oil), and the Democratic Republic of the Congo (critical minerals such as cobalt) have increased. For the United States, the reverse has been true. For the average American, wages and incomes have stagnated, and imported goods are more expensive. Abroad, US goods are less competitive in foreign markets than Chinese goods are.   

Allies hedging 

The United States still has numerous allies and partners, but the bonds that held them together are weaker now than they were in the past owing to the rise of China and the self-induced retreat of the United States. 

In Asia, nervous US allies including Japan, South Korea, Australia, and the Philippines are hedging between China and the United States in more ways than they were in the 2020s. But now, having witnessed what happened in Taiwan, these countries are even more concerned about the security guarantee that the United States has provided to them. Both Japan and South Korea have admitted that they are exploring options to acquire nuclear weapons in order to deter China and North Korea, and most analysts expect both to become nuclear-weapons states by 2040. Various forms of US-led minilateral diplomacy in the Asia-Pacific such as the Quad have died slow deaths, the result of both US indifference and Asian countries’ doubts about the value of these efforts to counter and contain a rising China. India, for example, believes it can achieve more through its own bilateral actions to check Chinese influence than it can by working through such forums.  

Also contributing to the deep unease of US allies is the growth of China’s military in size and capabilities, and its increasing forward presence in the Asia-Pacific and elsewhere around the world. China has been steadily increasing its number of basing agreements globally to the point where, just as US intelligence services feared a decade ago, China now has bases in Africa, South Asia, the Caribbean, the Middle East, and the islands in the Pacific and Indian oceans.  

A similar story is playing out in Europe, albeit focused on a different threat. There, European NATO members are arming themselves rapidly, spending well above the 2 percent of gross domestic product threshold for defense spending that Washington had been requesting for decades. Although that amounts to a victory of sorts for US foreign policy, it really is a defeat because the spending is an expression of serious doubt about the United States’ commitment to NATO and the Alliance’s Article 5 collective-defense pledge should war come again to the continent. Although the previous war in Ukraine ended in a negotiated stalemate, most European observers believe that it is only a matter of time before a rearmed and resurgent Russia decides to test NATO, likely through a long-feared invasion focused on the Baltics.  

In this climate, many are pinning their hopes on Beijing rather than Washington, believing that China will restrain Russia, its junior partner, from going on the offensive in Europe. Partly for this reason, and the fact that China is now Europe’s largest trading partner (having surpassed the United States in the early 2030s), European leaders have muted their criticisms of China’s record on human rights, including privacy rights, and have eased China’s access to the common market despite ongoing concerns about dumping, intellectual-property theft, and other such practices.  

Institutional shifts 

In part because China never has been interested in tearing down the entire international system and replacing it with something else entirely, few Western leaders have paid much attention to how China has been busy recasting these institutions in its image. And indeed, the UN system and the Bretton Woods institutions (the World Bank and International Monetary Fund) continue, with China maintaining its representation in them as it has for decades.  

But there have been important changes within the UN system. Recently, for instance, China has been far more successful than it was in previous decades at getting its appointees installed within various technical standard-setting bodies such as the UN’s International Telecommunication Union—a function of China’s unrelenting focus on these specialized bureaucracies plus its rising economic, scientific, and technological prowess.  

Or consider the UN’s historic role in maintaining peace and security. China was long willing to support UN peacekeeping operations around the world by providing troops and funds, at least to an extent. Yet with the United States and its democratic allies among the UN Security Council’s five permanent members—France and the United Kingdom—now far less willing to spearhead these operations, China has yet to pick up the leadership mantle. China remains willing to contribute to peacekeeping but generally not to lead large-scale efforts, whether in terms of the Security Council’s broad peacekeeping mandates or the financial, human, and technical resources necessary to build them. The result has been fewer such operations and weaker ones as well, leaving more of the world’s conflicts to devolve and even in some cases metastasize.  

Perhaps the most worrisome change has to do with the norms and principles that underpin the global system—both within the UN and more generally as well. Although China expresses support for some of the system’s principles—for example, the UN’s emphasis on state sovereignty and territorial integrity—it manifestly does not support others and especially those based upon democratic values. As a result, serious emphasis on human rights and related norms, as well as global oversight of them, has collapsed within multilateral institutions, including the UN.  

These developments are having real, on-the-ground impact. China has successfully built a more robust surveillance apparatus globally that includes more sophisticated cyber-espionage operations capable of tracking the communications of ordinary people around the world, along with a major expansion of China’s overseas police stations. The Chinese government claims that these stations are designed only to service the Chinese diaspora, but their true purpose seems to be to keep track of and pressure both the diaspora and China’s external critics as well.   

The erosion of global human-rights enforcement speaks to a broader trend: The so-called democratic recession that has been plaguing the world since the early 2000s is now bordering on a depression. With China ascendant, the world’s autocratic leaders are acting with greater confidence at home and abroad. Midway through the 2030s, the long-running contest between democratic and authoritarian systems appears to be resolving—in favor of the latter. 

⏎ Return to top

Climate of fear

In 2035, the Earth’s climate is hotter and less stable than it’s ever been in human history. This instability is causing people to turn on one another—and politics to become more abrasive than it was a decade ago. Climate-driven turbulence is making nearly every other problem—be it geopolitical or conflict-related—harder to solve. These challenges transcend national boundaries and afflict every country, whether rich or poor, to the north or south. Numerous local conflicts and one tense regional standoff (in South Asia) have been fueled by the consequences of a changing climate. 

These trends have produced some positive outcomes as well, but in the 2030s it’s difficult to foresee a bright future. As a result, many are looking to radical solutions to get humanity out of its predicament. 

Ecological crisis

There is almost no good news to be found in the natural world. A range of climate-induced problems are all worse than they were a decade ago. Observable, on-the-ground environmental changes have consistently outpaced scientists’ predictions from twenty or even ten years ago.  

The data indicates that several climate tipping points—including the drying of the Amazon rainforest, the melting of the West Antarctic ice sheet, and the ongoing slowing of the Atlantic Meridional Overturning Circulation system, which regulates temperatures and precipitation in Europe, Africa, and elsewhere—are nearer than we previously thought. Scientists’ modeling, based on real-world data in the 2030s, now points even more strongly toward one or more of these or other critical systems collapsing in the next few decades. When these systems begin to collapse, there will be no practical way back from truly horrific ecological disasters.  

Even short of such disasters, the world today lacks the capacity to adjust quickly enough to the climate impacts that are here already. Chronic heat is a problem nearly everywhere in the world, with lengthy heat waves now routine on every continent—including on Antarctica, where record highs, well above freezing, are increasingly common. Most frightening is the rapid increase in “wet bulb” days in some regions near the equator, where high heat plus high humidity make it impossible for humans to survive for long outdoors. Massive storms—flash flooding in the wake of record-breaking torrential rainfall, for example, or hurricanes and cyclones that strike well inland—are commonplace now as well. Several coastal cities around the world, including Bangkok, Miami, and Jakarta, regularly flood, even more frequently than they did a decade ago. In 2029, China’s low-lying Pearl River Delta was hit by a massive typhoon that crippled the region’s manufacturing output for months, disrupting global supply chains. 

These developments have numerous second- and third-order consequences. The world’s forests, for example, have become tinderboxes, which means that firefighting has become a significant part of national-security planning for an ever-lengthening list of the world’s governments. 

(Geo)political upheaval

Politics and geopolitics are changing with the natural world, largely for the worse. Climate change has weakened the world’s democracies, which already had suffered through decades of decline. From Spain and Greece to South Africa, Nepal, and Panama, storms and suffocating heat waves have disrupted elections by making it harder for some voters to cast their ballots. Such events have also affected who participates in elections in the first place, given how they have influenced the outflows and inflows of people through cities and countries, and the voter registration and verification problems that have followed.  

Many years ago, when climate-driven migration was first hypothesized in the scientific literature, few paid attention. Not so today, as fears about the consequences of so-called climate migrants or climate refugees have generated real policies involving real people. These fears often have been based on lurid imagination about crime and chaos rather than on facts.

In 2035, there are an estimated 150 million migrants worldwide who are either temporarily displaced or permanently on the move because of climate impacts, although no one knows the true number because migration is such a complex, multifaceted phenomenon. Yet everyone agrees that more migrants are coming.  

Most climate-driven migration remains within national boundaries, often coming in the form of rural-to-urban migration into cities such as Bogotá and Karachi. Or it is intra-regional migration within areas such as Sub-Saharan Africa, the Middle East and North Africa, and South Asia. Such trends are also occurring within wealthy regions and countries such as the United States.  

These migration patterns have reminded many of the Syrian crisis of the early 2010s, which was preceded by drought-stressed migrants fleeing the countryside for the cities. Although that internal migration likely was only an indirect cause of the subsequent uprising against the Assad regime—which lasted well over a decade and ultimately resulted in the regime’s overthrow—many now see repetition of that past. They point to how climate-fueled internal displacements have increased recruitment into armed nonstate groups. They note the increasing number of communities around the world where climate impacts have exacerbated preexisting vulnerabilities to cause local conflicts, too many of which have started to become deadly. And they cite the increasing number of failed and failing states resulting in part from climate-driven disasters such as intense, multi-year drought. 

Governments have responded through pull-up-the-drawbridges measures—and not just in Europe or the United States, where one might expect that to happen, but around the world, including within the Global South. Border walls designed to keep migrants out were already widespread ten years ago. They are everywhere now.  

India, for example, has clamped down on its borders with Bangladesh and Myanmar, heavily fortifying them with more personnel, fencing, sophisticated electronic-surveillance systems, and autonomous enforcement technologies such as drones. Numerous critics, both within India and outside of it, have voiced objections, but the Indian government insists that it is only doing what its voters want. This has led to a volatile diplomatic situation in South Asia. Pakistan, which long ago patched up its relations with Bangladesh, has joined Bangladesh and Myanmar in loudly and publicly pushing India to reverse its border policies, to no avail. The region is not at war, nor is there an immediate risk of one. But it is at a knife’s edge, with climate-driven migration having become one of the biggest sources of friction. 

Turbulence-induced transformations

There are some bright spots in this otherwise discouraging picture. Renewables are now firmly established as the world’s dominant sources of energy, reflecting both their market competitiveness and the rapid electrification of the global economy. And nuclear energy has begun making a comeback in much of the world, with the latest reactor designs now seen as safely providing reliable, zero-emission electricity. (New power plants, however, remain rare.) In addition, green-technology markets are expanding rapidly across many industries such as food, water, energy, transportation, and consumer goods. Nearly a third of the world’s stock of cars and trucks is fully electric

The challenge lies in the rate at which decarbonization is occurring—a pace that simply has not been fast enough. Although global greenhouse-gas emissions finally peaked in the late 2020s, humankind nonetheless surpassed the carbon budget required to stay within the target of keeping global warming above pre-industrial levels to 1.5 degrees Celsius, as laid out in the 2015 Paris Agreement. Scientists had prioritized staying below this target to limit the worst impacts of climate change.  

One of the factors contributing to this challenge is that much of the world’s legacy energy infrastructure remains in place. Decommissioning such infrastructure, particularly coal and natural-gas plants, is expensive. Too many of the world’s high-carbon plants still exist, especially coal-fired power plants concentrated in China.  

Behind all this is global energy consumption, which has continued to rise fast, consistently outstripping renewables’ capacity to fully meet the demand. (A challenge here is that interest rates for borrowing in riskier storm-affected regions have increased, constraining the expansion of capital-intensive renewables such as offshore wind farms.) There are many drivers of this increasing demand, including technological developments such as advances in artificial intelligence (AI). As was feared in the mid-2020s, the infrastructure necessary to support AI’s growth—in the form of computing power and data centers—boosted global energy demand. Although tech companies have greened their models, the problem is about scale: AI’s ubiquity translates into a massive source of energy usage. Some tech companies have become players in the nuclear-energy space for this reason. 

As they navigate this turbulence, and as already foreshadowed in the 2020s, both right- and left-wing populist governments are no longer reflexively hostile to policies to combat climate change like they once were. There is renewed interest in accelerating decarbonization efforts, including revitalizing the moribund United Nations-led process for mitigating climate change.  

Another response to the unsustainable status quo has been the embrace of more radical solutions. Geoengineering—and specifically solar radiation modification (SRM), which refers to atmospheric and even space-based efforts to reduce warming by reflecting sunlight back into space—has rapidly gone from a scientific curiosity to a subject of serious research. Although SRM engineering is complex, compared with other approaches it is straightforward and inexpensive. As a result, already in 2035 both state and nonstate actors are experimenting with SRM in the atmosphere. There is great fear that the implementation of these new approaches will be a nightmare, as for-profit companies, tech billionaires, and rogue states initiate their own unilateral solutions, while countries fight over the expected (but dimly understood) impacts on their regions. Although the scientific community is warning that SRM’s consequences aren’t yet sufficiently understood, there is a growing sentiment among many (though not all) politicians that it should be tried at scale. But everyone is asking whether effective geoengineering is even possible without some sort of global governance and regulatory regime.  

Meanwhile, the clock is ticking and the climate is changing. Humankind’s efforts to master the natural world during the post-industrial era produced the climate crisis. Now, in 2035, the Earth increasingly seems the master of human affairs rather than the other way around.  

⏎ Return to top

About the authors

Engelke is on the adjunct faculty at Georgetown University’s School of Continuing Studies and is a frequent lecturer to the US Department of State’s Foreign Service Institute. He was previously a member of the World Economic Forum’s Global Future Council on Complex Risks, an executive-in-residence at the Geneva Centre for Security Policy, a Bosch fellow with the Robert Bosch Foundation, and a visiting fellow at the Stimson Center.
Lindsay is a nonresident senior fellow with the Scowcroft Center for Strategy and Security’s GeoStrategy Initiative, as well as a nonresident senior fellow of the Arizona State University Threatcasting Lab and the MIT Future Urban Collectives Lab.
Saffo is a nonresident senior fellow with the Scowcroft Center for Strategy and Security’s GeoStrategy Initiative and co-editor of Futures Research Methodologies, which will be released later this year.

The post Three worlds in 2035: Imagining scenarios for how the world could be transformed over the next decade appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>
More stable trade and investment policies can bolster the Nigerian economy https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/in-depth-research-reports/books/more-stable-trade-and-investment-policies-can-bolster-the-nigerian-economy/ Tue, 11 Feb 2025 17:00:00 +0000 https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/?p=823454 Nigeria’s political and economic trajectory has been marked by democratic breakthroughs as well as electoral setbacks, insurgent conflicts, and volatile reforms. While the country has made notable strides in reducing poverty and lowering inequality, continued efforts to address insecurity, poor health standards, and pervasive corruption are needed to enhance national freedom and prosperity.

The post More stable trade and investment policies can bolster the Nigerian economy appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>

Table of contents

Evolution of freedom

The Freedom Index illustrates well two important aspects of Nigerian institutional development in the last three decades. First, the transition to democracy explains the sharp increase of the Index score in 1999, which closes the gap with the average of the Sub-Saharan Africa region. Second, the often volatile evolution in the subsequent decades is a sign that the liberalization process has not been free of challenges and inconsistencies. Politically, the country has consistently held elections since the turn of the century, even though these have often fallen short of high levels of fairness and transparency. In terms of economic policy, while the successive governments have enacted varying degrees of reforms, these efforts have been somewhat inconsistent and not often coherent depending on the sector we analyze.  

The economic subindex exemplifies well this latter point, with really high short-run fluctuations throughout the period of analysis, mainly driven by the trade and investment freedom components. To be sure, the oil industry is central for Nigeria’s economy, representing 90 percent of its exports, and the fluctuations in both measures is, to an important extent, driven by the situation and the legal framework governing this sector. For about twenty years, the country has had internal debates about new oil industry legislation, and a new law was enacted in 2021, which has generated a climate of uncertainty, causing investors to be reluctant to pursue new investments in the country. In fact, Nigeria is producing less oil today than it did in 2010.  

Another factor that can explain some movements, such as the substantial fall in trade and investment freedom in the first decade of the century, is the introduction of different local content policies. Obviously, these kinds of policies are favored by domestic investors and can support a country’s broader development agenda, but they can often affect the degree to which foreign capital finds the country attractive for investment. Finally, the relevance of the oil industry in generating government revenue and foreign reserves has many times led the government and central bank to heavily intervene in the exchange rate market, sometimes in non-orthodox ways. This was particularly the case after the oil price collapse of 2015, which may explain the fifteen-point fall in trade freedom in the following years.  

It is fair to say that the liberalizing effort has been robust in some other sectors of the Nigerian economy. The telecoms industry was liberalized in the early 2000s, as well as the banking sector, which certainly helped unlock growth and productivity. But trade policy has at best been erratic, with the country pursuing an import substitution strategy in sub-sectors such as beverage products, sugar, flour, and cereal. As a result, it is clear that the country has not yet been able to establish a stable and secure framework for international trade and investment.  

Nigeria’s score on property rights protection is relatively low, compared to the regional average, and does not seem to vary much along the period 1995–2023. Nonetheless, this score has less to do with a risk of government expropriation of property than may be the case in some other economies with such low scores. The score may be reflecting the strict local content policies implemented across different sectors, which in some ways impose limits on the capacity of companies and owners to manage their assets.  

The women’s economic freedom component seems to have improved in the last three decades, but is still lower in Nigeria (66.3) than in other comparator countries in the region like Kenya (83.8), Ethiopia (80), or South Africa (88.1). Some important laws regarding gender equality are probably weaker in Nigeria. For example, there are no quotas for parliamentary participation for women, nor specific legislation incentivizing women’s economic participation, although there are a variety of customary and religious laws at the subnational level that have varying impacts on women’s acquisition of assets. Overall, there might be a significant gap between formal legality and actual practice on this matter, because women in the country are highly entrepreneurial, and girls’ school enrollment has increased substantially since the 1990s, which favors their labor force participation and overall economic activity outside the home.  

Moving on to the political subindex, the democratic transition of 1999, that situated the country together with other democracies in the region, is evident in the graph. All components of the subindex sharply improve, with the notable exception of civil liberties. This indicator is the average of two variables, one measuring private civil liberties (freedom of movement, religion, etc.) and another the degree of physical violence (freedom from torture and political killings). When looking at the disaggregated data, it is clear that the very low level of the civil liberties component is generated by an extremely poor performance in the latter, while private civil liberties have consistently scored above 80 in the last two decades. Violent insurgencies are likely influential in the low level of the physical violence variable, with Islamist Boko Haram in the northeast, the separatist movement Indigenous People of Biafra in the southeast, and the rising levels of violent crime including kidnapping for ransom in various parts of Nigeria. The declining quality of the police forces may also be an important factor. There have been protests against police brutality around the country, most recently in 2020, and individual rights relating to detention and imprisonment are not always adequately guaranteed.  

The rest of the components of the political subindex reach standard levels for young democracies in the developing world, at least until 2016, even though there are some small fluctuations that can be discussed. The component measuring the quality and fairness of the electoral process suffers a five-point drop in 2003, and does not recover the initial level until 2011. This fits well with the generalized view that the 2003 and 2007 elections held in the country suffered clear deficiencies. Subsequent elections in 2011 and 2015 were visibly more credible, and the data reflect it well with a ten-point increase.  

Legislative constraints on the executive have been historically strong in Nigeria. Two episodes illustrate this fact fairly well. First, in 2007, the first post-military president tried to extend his tenure to get a third term in power, but he was successfully thwarted by the legislature. Second, in 2010, the successor president fell ill and his inner circle tried to prevent the handover of power to his vice-president. The legislature stepped in again, ensuring a legal transition of power. However, the data show a clear fall starting in 2015, exacerbated in 2019, and only reversed in 2023. It is not clear that any important piece of legislation was passed during this period that could have reduced the power of parliament to control the executive, so the scores may just be capturing the fact that, in the 2015 elections, the opposition party won a decisive majority in the legislature, and thus in the following years legislative checks on the executive may have been relatively soft as a result of both being of the same political party.  

Finally, the seven-and-a-half-point drop in political rights in 2020 can be explained by a combination of the emergency situation generated by the COVID-19 pandemic and the security concerns due to the insurgencies in the Niger Delta, the northeast, and the southeast of the country. It is undeniable that the government became increasingly intolerant with some forms of freedom of speech, for example limiting the use of social media. Nonetheless, the Nigerian situation is not necessarily comparable to other parts of the world that are experiencing deeper and more extended democratic regressions, and the partial recovery in 2023 seems to confirm this intuition. 

Turning to the legal subindex, it is very clear that judicial independence and effectiveness and clarity of the law receive significantly higher scores than the rest of the components of the subindex. This is comparable to the regional average, at least since the democratic transition of 1999. In the last twenty years, there have been numerous disputes between different branches of power (legislative versus executive, federal versus the thirty-six states, etc.) which have been decided in high courts, often times against the powerful federal government. A good example is the decision of the Supreme Court in the case between the federal government and the Lagos state over local government funds, which was decided in favor of the latter, a strong indication of Nigeria’s judicial independence. In most cases, judicial decisions are accepted, respected and abided by.  

Security, as well as bureaucracy quality and control of corruption, are the components dragging the legal subindex score down, generating a substantial gap with respect to the Sub-Saharan Africa regional average. These scores reflect realities on the ground. As commented earlier, the various insurgent movements around Nigeria, together with the spread of organized violent crime and banditry, generate a generalized environment of insecurity. The government appears to have made some progress in fighting insurgents in the last few years, pushing them back and dismantling their strongholds in both the oil-rich Niger Delta in the south and with regards to the Islamist Boko Haram in the northeast. However, there are high levels of violent crime, kidnapping for ransom, and banditry that the government—both at the federal level and across the thirty-six states—has struggled to address, with significant implications for the continuing development of the country.  

Last but not least, the recurrent and discouraging low score on bureaucracy and corruption is very real. The Nigerian civil service desperately needs a total overhaul, and the country’s successive political leaders are fully cognizant of this fact. But such reform could affect tens of thousands or even millions of public employees, who are politically powerful, which makes it politically very costly for any government. The crucial anti-corruption agencies created in the early 2000s, such as the Independent Corrupt Practices Commission and the Economic and Financial Crimes Commission, were somewhat effective initially, in the first decade of the century, but soon became politicized. Thus, widespread and grand corruption in public administration can only be tackled with a holistic reform, which does not seem to be imminent. 

Evolution of prosperity

Despite the sustained growth of Nigeria’s score in the Prosperity Index since 1995, it still finds itself among the lowest prosperity group, ranking 136 out of 164 countries covered by the Indexes. However, there are some encouraging trends worth noting. First, the income component was influenced by the oil boom, in terms of high global oil prices in the 2002–15 period. Yet, as my own research shows, the oil boom was only a small part of the story. Other sectors of the economy also thrived since the early 2000s, such as banking and financial services and the telecoms industry, which were liberalized, smaller industrial services adjacent to oil production, and other non-oil exporting sectors. As a result, the data clearly show that oil’s contribution to gross domestic product (GDP) growth has been declining—from around 40 percent in the year 2000 to less than 10 percent today—with respect to the rest of the economy, denoting that Nigerian growth was not only based on the commodity boom. Nevertheless, the commodity price crash of 2015 affected the country’s overall growth trajectory, as Nigeria relies on oil exports for the bulk of its foreign exchange reserves, and thus many non-oil industries and sectors suffered increasing difficulties in accessing foreign imported inputs. The global effects of the COVID-19 pandemic further exacerbated the situation, and Nigeria has not yet been able to recover the 2015 level of real GDP per capita. 

The promising evolution of the inequality component is probably capturing the substantial decrease in poverty rates within the country. Yet it must be noted that there is a clear regional divide in Nigeria, and the inequality and poverty reduction has not been homogenous across the country. The majority Muslim regions in the north of Nigeria are significantly poorer than the south, explained by much lower levels of educational attainment, higher prevalence of informality, and lower levels of industrial production, etc. Therefore, interregional or horizontal inequality is certainly deep and pervasive, and public policy should be directed to reduce the north-south gap.  

By far the most striking data come from the health component, where Nigeria ranks 162 among 164 countries, and the gap with respect to the Sub-Saharan Africa average has been widening in the last two decades. Nigeria’s life expectancy is much lower than its income level would predict, close to that of much poorer countries in West and Central Africa like Niger, Central African Republic, and others. This is a combination of two factors. First the already mentioned violence across the country, with its associated high levels of mortality of young fighters. Second, a precarious healthcare system that is significantly underfinanced, lacking professionals and personnel, especially in rural areas, a problem that will only be aggravated in the coming years given the high levels of population growth.  

The similarly low score regarding equal access and absence of discrimination for minorities also has important regional differentiations. The imposition of Sharia law in some northern states in the early 2000s did not favor Christian and other religious minority groups, or secular-oriented Muslims, in these states. However, since the mid2010s, the popularity of Sharia law in these states has declined significantly because the political leaders who championed its implementation were largely underperformers in terms of the actual quality of governance.  

Finally, the score on the environment component of the Prosperity Index is clearly low, but seems to show a positive trend in the last twenty-five years, with important caveats. On the one hand, pollution related to oil production is high, and there is uncertain commitment on its decisive reduction, which necessarily worsens air quality in the areas where oil extraction and refineries are prevalent. On the other, indoor air quality may have improved since the year 2000, when less than 1 percent of the population had access to clean cooking technologies, but even today that share is below 20 percent, which is very low. Deforestation, particularly in the north, is pervasive because many households still rely on biomass, wood burning, and other sources of domestic energy that are highly detrimental for their health. 

The path forward

Developments within Nigeria, within the African continent, and around the world will contribute to the country’s freedom and prosperity trajectory within the medium term. There are likely to be continuities and changes in the various dimensions that constitute Nigeria’s Freedom Index. The consolidation of the country’s electoral democracy will continue even if progress is not linear—it is very unlikely to experience a military coup or other such drastic setbacks to its democracy as was recently the case in Mali, Niger, and Burkina Faso in West Africa. Yet, the quality of Nigeria’s elections will continue to vary by election cycle, contingent on the nature of the electoral competition and the profile of candidates running.  

The pace, consistency and scope of Nigeria’s domestic economic reforms, as well as global economic conditions, will have a determinative impact on Nigeria’s economic subindex. While the country’s debilitating challenge of depending on fuel subsidies will remain prominent in the short term, efforts to increase the domestic refining and supply of refined fuels, including the completion of the Dangote refinery complex, will eventually address this challenge in the medium to long term. Nigeria will also continue to implement local content policies across various industries due to the demand coming from the country’s large and vibrant private sector. In addition to the oil and gas sector, creative industries (entertainment, movies, music), and the f inancial sector, where these local content policies have been most visibly enforced, information and communications technology and the digital economy could be the next frontier. A dynamic trade policy will certainly help propel Nigeria’s economy to greater heights, including helping to further advance important elements of small business development and women’s economic empowerment, but its design and implementation is not yet on the radar of the country’s top decision makers.  

There are likely to be both significant advancements and notable setbacks in the components of Nigeria’s political subindex. The exercise of effective checks on the executive by Nigeria’s National Assembly (i.e., federal legislature) may increase in the next election cycle, especially if opposition parties are able to leverage the current popular discontent and gain more seats in the two legislative houses. Progress on this front in the subnational legislatures—state houses of assemblies—is perhaps less certain. Without drastic and concerted efforts at addressing Nigeria’s security challenges, including a wholesale overhaul of the national police force, the significant levels of violent crime are unlikely to abate in the medium term.  

So much about Nigeria’s legal subindex will continue to be weighed down by the absence of comprehensive civil service reform. While this does not have direct bearing on the country’s notable levels of judicial independence, it directly impacts Nigeria’s bureaucratic quality. It remains to be seen whether any government can shoulder the political costs of overhauling Nigeria’s civil service by implementing the recommendations of the Oronsaye report to reform the public sector. 

In the short term, Nigeria’s per capita income will continue its declining trend as a result of COVID-19 shocks as well as the inflationary impacts of recent exchange rate and subsidies reforms. Consequently, Nigeria’s per capita income will continue to trail its regional peers including South Africa, Ghana, Kenya, and Côte d’Ivoire. However, the pace of this income decline could be halted and even reversed in the medium term with the design and implementation of pro-productivity economic policies on the supply side but also on the demand side. Addressing Nigeria’s electricity, transportation and digital connectivity infrastructure gaps will be crucial on this front. Reducing the incidents of violent crime, especially banditry plaguing rural farming communities, is also necessary. Effective coordination of trade, investment and industrial policies focused on labor-intensive industries, particularly agriculture and manufacturing, will be essential. 

In the near term, Nigeria’s social indicators are likely to deteriorate before they stabilize and, contingent on the rollout of mitigating policies, experience a trend reversal. Due to domestic factors, such as, the impacts of the removal of subsidies, harmonization of exchange rates, and inflation, as well as exogenous factors such as the COVID-19 pandemic, the incidence of poverty is very likely to increase inequality. Findings from a new round of the Nigeria Living Standards Survey when released—the last round was conducted in 2018–19—will likely confirm this trend. However, a comprehensive rollout of income-smoothing social protection interventions could support households and even small businesses to navigate the adverse impacts of liberalization policies. Increased health spending as well as workforce training could further bolster Nigeria’s health and mortality indicators.  

Finally, Nigeria’s environment-related indicators may stabilize and take an improving turn as relevant policies take effect. Progress in the implementation of Nigeria’s natural gas masterplan, in the medium term, could help reduce gas flaring and the associated environmental pollution. Political outreach by the federal government to aggrieved groups in the oil-producing Niger Delta could help reduce some types of small-scale oil theft and illegal oil refining that often result in oil spills and aggravate environmental degradation. Extensive support being provided by multilateral development banks and other international organizations to support clean cooking solutions could help reduce biomass use by households and thereby slow down the pace of deforestation in the country. 


Zainab Usman is the founding director of the Africa Program at the Carnegie Endowment for International Peace in Washington, DC. Usman’s enduring area of expertise is identifying the policies and institutions to enable low- and middle-income economies to harness their natural resources to achieve sustainable economic development. She is author of the book Economic Diversification in Nigeria: The Politics of Building a Post-Oil Economy, which was selected as one of the best books of 2022 on economics by the Financial Times. 

Statement on Intellectual Independence

The Atlantic Council and its staff, fellows, and directors generate their own ideas and programming, consistent with the Council’s mission, their related body of work, and the independent records of the participating team members. The Council as an organization does not adopt or advocate positions on particular matters. The Council’s publications always represent the views of the author(s) rather than those of the institution.

Read the previous Edition

2024 Atlas: Freedom and Prosperity Around the World

Twenty leading economists and government officials from eighteen countries contributed to this comprehensive volume, which serves as a roadmap for navigating the complexities of contemporary governance. 

Explore the data

Trackers and Data Visualizations

Jun 15, 2023

Freedom and Prosperity Indexes

The indexes rank 164 countries around the world according to their levels of freedom and prosperity. Use our site to explore twenty-eight years of data, compare countries and regions, and examine the sub-indexes and indicators that comprise our indexes.

About the center

The Freedom and Prosperity Center aims to increase the prosperity of the poor and marginalized in developing countries and to explore the nature of the relationship between freedom and prosperity in both developing and developed nations.

Stay connected

The post More stable trade and investment policies can bolster the Nigerian economy appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>
Monopolization is stifling Kuwait’s economy—it’s time to rethink top-down policies https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/in-depth-research-reports/books/monopolization-is-stifling-kuwaits-economy/ Tue, 11 Feb 2025 17:00:00 +0000 https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/?p=823447 Since Emir Mishal dissolved parliament in May 2024, Kuwait has faced a political crisis. Meanwhile, economic challenges loom as the oil era wanes. To remain competitive, Kuwait must break up monopolies, foster innovation, and transition from top-down planning to a market-driven approach. In doing so, following regional models while empowering entrepreneurs and diversifying its economy will be crucial.

The post Monopolization is stifling Kuwait’s economy—it’s time to rethink top-down policies appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>

Table of contents

Evolution of freedom

Kuwait’s parliamentary monarchy stands out in the region. Indeed, the country is by far the most open in the region, as evidenced by the ten- to fifteen-point differential with the average of the Gulf Cooperation Council (GCC) countries in the Freedom Index throughout the 1995–2023 period. The distance with respect to other monarchies in the GCC, namely Saudi Arabia or Qatar, is much larger, reaching 23.5 and 18.5 respectively. Kuwait’s political regime presents noticeable specificities that make it difficult to compare to the liberal democracies of the Western world. For example, relatively fair and free elections coexist with a ban on political parties, and the inviolability of the Emir is combined with a strong control of his government by parliament. That said, Kuwait’s democratic experience is positive and serves as an example for other countries in the region.  

To understand the specificities of Kuwait’s political system, it is useful to explore the relative differences between the components of the political subindex. Perhaps the large difference that stands out is between the scores on elections and legislative constraints on the executive (both above 80 in the last two decades) on the one hand, and political rights (below 40 since 1995) on the other. High degrees of legislative control and restraints on the executive are typically not associated with unprotected political freedoms of association and expression. This is probably the most salient feature of Kuwait’s exceptionalism. Even though political parties are prohibited, explaining the low score on political rights, independent candidates compete in regularly held elections to the National Assembly. These individuals cover a wide spectrum of politics, such as the merchant class, urban progressives, Islamist movements and other tribal groups. These fifty elected members of the legislative body hold1 significant power to approve and oversee the Emir’s appointed cabinet, and a majority of them must ratify all laws. The high score on legislative constraints on the executive does reflect a real feature of Kuwait’s political arrangement. 

Finally, it should be noted that civil liberties are also significantly better upheld in Kuwait than in many of its neighbors, but these freedoms are not yet granted to important shares of the population, especially women. It is expected that the voting rights granted to women in 2005 will favor a gradual movement towards gender equality in all areas of social and political life, but progress appears to be slow. 

It should be noted that Kuwait was ahead of its regional neighbors in terms of competitiveness and financial markets until the invasion by Iraq in 1990. Despite being liberated fairly fast, the effects of the invasion were traumatic for Kuwait, and the Iraq war(s) also produced a sense of uncertainty for foreign investors, on top of brain drain out of Kuwait. Indeed, the invasion steered Kuwait toward economic isolation. The country became less competitive and others such as Bahrain, the United Arab Emirates (most notably the emirate of Dubai), Qatar, and more recently Saudi Arabia have become economic powerhouses in the region. That said, the oil sector remains vibrant and an important source of foreign exchange receipts. Gross domestic product (GDP) per capita is still high, but economic reforms in Kuwait have stalled. The new Emir has put a focus on recovering the economic dynamism of the past; whether he succeeds will depend on his ability to formulate a vision for transformation, including to diversify away from oil, with the cohesive support of the population.  

Turning to the legal subindex components, the low score on control of corruption may be at least partially capturing perceptions of corruption more than actual corruption. To be sure, issues of nepotism and monopolization of the economy are pervasive, although some efforts to limit dominance and corruption have been undertaken. The anti-corruption policy triggered by past high-profile scandals may have had unintended consequences up to today. In other words, anti-corruption measures have been divisive and politicized. They also introduced important delays and disruptions in the attribution of public works projects, which are important for bolstering the Kuwaiti economy.  

Informality is low in Kuwait. It should be noted that the labor market is highly polarized, with higher-skilled workers on one side and lower-skilled workers who are mostly expatriates on the other. Kuwaitization policies have been put in place to favor Kuwaitis, especially for higher paid jobs. Kuwait, like many countries in the GCC, relies heavily on expatriates for both high- and low-skilled jobs, especially for the latter whose elasticity of labor supply is very low. Concerns about the treatment of low-skilled expatriates have been an important issue in the GCC. In Kuwait, the situation for foreign workers is relatively better on account of higher levels of freedom of religion and other civil liberties. 

Lack of gender equality is clearly evident in the women’s economic freedom component of the economic subindex, where Kuwait receives the seventh lowest score among the 164 countries covered. As in other countries in the region, traditional norms heavily affect the situation of women, especially in areas related to economic issues for married women. While traditions weigh in on women’s rights, resource abundance—especially oil—has been an important factor influencing the relative position of women in society. In an influential paper, Michael Ross1 provided evidence that the oil sector, being capitalistic, is not intensive in labor and hence demands less female labor than other sectors. In turn, oil-rich countries have substantially lower female labor force participation than oil-poor ones (for example, compare Algeria with Morocco), which in turn reduces women’s political voice and influence. As a result, these countries are left with strong patriarchal norms, laws, and political institutions. This explains the fact that the ten countries at the bottom on women’s economic freedom are Middle East countries with relatively high oil reserves. 

Evolution of prosperity

The Prosperity Index illustrates the relative economic stagnation of Kuwait in the last two decades. Moreover, focusing on income per capita as a measure of prosperity, the country has been on a decreasing path since the Great Recession. Decreasing oil prices in the last ten years obviously play an important role, but Kuwait’s sluggish economic performance is not circumscribed to the oil sector. Kuwait has had difficulties attracting foreign investment in the same way it used to do during the 1980s, which should be a crucial priority in the coming years.  

Inequality among Kuwaiti citizens may not be so large, due to the very substantial scheme of subsidies and redistributive transfers financed by oil rents, but the real source of inequality lies between national and foreign workers. When foreign workers are considered, any inequality statistic drastically worsens for the country. That situation is likely to persist in the future, even though it would be in Kuwait’s interest to protect workers better in all respects, as the spread of COVID-19 has made the interconnectedness clear. 

In terms of education, there has been a significant effort to reform the system in order to ensure universal enrollment and increase the average years of schooling, which is adequately reflected in the data used by the Prosperity Index. Nonetheless, the current deficiencies of Kuwait, as well as other countries in the region, are about quality of education more than just quantity. The old social contract whereby the youth would get a high-paying job, mostly in the public sector, is no longer viable given f iscal restraint. It is thus all the more important that Kuwait furthers its efforts to improve education quality to allow Kuwaitis to perform outside the public sector.  

The data on health show a significantly harder negative shock due to COVID-19 in Kuwait than in the rest of the region. This is surprising as, in general, the healthcare system of Kuwait is high quality. Comorbidity may have been an important factor. Also, importantly, foreign workers were not as well protected as nationals during the pandemic, and the death rate may have been significantly higher among this group. The overall assessment of the healthcare system of Kuwait remains positive, even though our data reveal an element of duality in the system which could have systemic effects.  

Kuwait has several environmental challenges that may be overlooked by the indicator used in the Prosperity Index; such as sandstorms, which are detrimental to health, especially for pregnant women and people with respiratory diseases like asthma; or access to water. But obviously the main concern is the oil industry. The relatively good score obtained by Kuwait can be related to the fact that oil extraction does not account for a majority of the emissions produced by fossil fuels, but these are “exported” to the rest of the world, where actual oil consumption takes place. That said, large economies importing oil are as much to blame for emissions related to hydrocarbon use as oil exporters like Kuwait.  

Finally, the minorities component needs once again to be adequately situated in terms of the point of comparison. With respect to the rest of the Middle East and North Africa region, Kuwait performs relatively well, as it is considerably more tolerant regarding freedom of religion and other civil liberties. Moreover, even if imperfect, the democratic mechanisms described above favor an egalitarian treatment of different social groups. Anyhow, if we compare Kuwait to well-established democracies in Europe or North America, the gap is still substantial, including in the area of gender equality. 

The path forward

The new Emir of Kuwait, Mishal Al-Ahmad Al-Jaber Al-Sabah, came to power after the death of his brother at the end of 2023. After parliamentary elections, which were won by opposition candidates, the Emir decided to dissolve parliament and take over some of its prerogative. The dissolution is the culmination of long-standing tensions between parliament and the Emir. Notwithstanding there have been dissolutions in the past, that move by the Emir raises uncertainty about the future of democracy in Kuwait. There is also uncertainty on the horizon over which new elections will take place. The Emir has justified his actions on account of a gridlock over important issues related to the tackling of corruption and economic diversification of the economy. The Emir and parliament have to resolve their differences, so Kuwait remains an important beacon of democracy in the region and continues to build on its track record on civil liberties as well as making needed improvement on laws regarding women. 

Besides these important political tensions needing resolution, Kuwait should embark on economic transformation. Indeed, the end of the oil era is looming and makes transformation imperative. Kuwait is known to be home to the world’s first sovereign wealth fund which aims to safeguard the economy from fluctuations in oil prices and support the welfare of future generations. Despite having been ahead of the pack, Kuwait has struggled to transform its economy. Other countries in the region have taken the lead, which should inspire Kuwait. Dubai, for example, facing the depletion of its oil reserves, transformed itself into a global trade and financial hub and is acting as a magnet for companies’ headquarters in the region and beyond. That said, Kuwait, like most countries in the Middle East and North Africa region, is plagued with the issue of economic concentration and monopolization. That excessive concentration limits innovation and slows down productivity, in addition to frustrating entry into different sectors. Oil export revenues, which constitute almost the entire source of foreign exchange receipts, finance imports and other non-tradable services. Unfortunately, the monopolization of these sectors has stifled the economy and benefits a small business elite. 

To transform, Kuwait needs to address a myriad of institutional deficiencies, such as pertaining to corporate governance, legal systems, and competition. For example, large public sector employment financed by oil revenue has stifled the impetus for innovation. Economic policies that are not geared toward changing attitudes are unlikely to deliver the needed transformation agenda for Kuwait. Saudi Arabia aims to augment the longtime source of its riches with non-oil income. As part of its ambitious plan to transform its economy, the country issued a public offering of a minority share of the state-owned oil company, Aramco. That is a step toward emulating publicly owned companies in advanced economies, such as Exxon or British Petroleum—which once concentrated on oil, but broadened their focus to become energy companies, balancing their oil assets with other forms of energy.  

The focus on the end goal of diversification has too long kept countries like Kuwait from getting the process right. Transformative policies should move away from top-down approaches that pick which sectors to develop. Instead, they must develop an environment that promotes demonopolization and changes the incentives of managers and tech-savvy young entrepreneurs and helps them, their firms, and ultimately the whole economy reach their potential. 


Rabah Arezki is a former vice president at the African Development Bank, a former chief economist of the World Bank’s Middle East and North Africa region and a former chief of commodities at the International Monetary Fund’s Research Department. Arezki is now a director of research at the French National Centre for Scientific Research, a senior fellow at the Foundation for Studies and Research on International Development, and at Harvard Kennedy School. 

Statement on Intellectual Independence

“The Atlantic Council and its staff, fellows, and directors generate their own ideas and programming, consistent with the Council’s mission, their related body of work, and the independent records of the participating team members. The Council as an organization does not adopt or advocate positions on particular matters. The Council’s publications always represent the views of the author(s) rather than those of the institution.”

Read the previous Edition

2024 Atlas: Freedom and Prosperity Around the World

Twenty leading economists and government officials from eighteen countries contributed to this comprehensive volume, which serves as a roadmap for navigating the complexities of contemporary governance. 

Explore the data

Trackers and Data Visualizations

Jun 15, 2023

Freedom and Prosperity Indexes

The indexes rank 164 countries around the world according to their levels of freedom and prosperity. Use our site to explore twenty-eight years of data, compare countries and regions, and examine the sub-indexes and indicators that comprise our indexes.

About the center

The Freedom and Prosperity Center aims to increase the prosperity of the poor and marginalized in developing countries and to explore the nature of the relationship between freedom and prosperity in both developing and developed nations.

Stay connected

The post Monopolization is stifling Kuwait’s economy—it’s time to rethink top-down policies appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>
Cameroon’s future relies on empowering its women  https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/in-depth-research-reports/books/cameroons-future-relies-on-empowering-its-women/ Mon, 10 Feb 2025 17:00:00 +0000 https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/?p=823268 To build a stronger, more prosperous Cameroon, the country must prioritize boosting economic and political freedoms and invest in managing its environmental resources. This strategy will not only benefit Cameroonian women but also prove most impactful in advancing the nation as a whole.

The post Cameroon’s future relies on empowering its women  appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>

Table of contents

Evolution of freedom

Indexes are only as good as the data they use and the methodology they follow. However, for Africa, indexes are an important determinant of how citizens perceive progress in the country, how bilateral donors make decisions on when, where, and how to extend support, and, lately, they are a fundamental component of rating agency assessments. As African countries seek to improve access to more affordable capital and crowd in more foreign direct investment, it is crucial that they pay attention to these indexes. Cameroon is no exception. In addition, indexes can provide rare insights into the linkages between issues such as environmental freedom and gender prosperity. The data on Cameroon suggest a strong link between economic freedom, health, education, and gender empowerment. This essay will focus on that and draw lessons for the future. 

Cameroon’s score in the Freedom Index (47.6) is well below the average for the African continent (64.03) and many similar countries such as Senegal (68.7) and Côte d’Ivoire (61.7). The overall freedom measure is a composite score of the legal, political, and economic subindexes, where Cameroon ranks 133rd, 120th, and 144th respectively, out of 164 countries covered by the Indexes.  

Cameroon’s poor performance in the Freedom Index since 1995 is mainly determined by the political and legal dimensions. The political subindex includes four main components: elections, political rights, civil liberties, and legislative constraints on the executive. Political power is centralized in Cameroon, unlike Senegal, for example, and as a result there is no effective system of separation of powers, with both legislative and judicial branches being dependent on the executive power. The level and trend of different components of the Index capture this general assessment.  

The low levels of legislative constraints on the executive and judicial independence, compared to Côte d’Ivoire, for example, reflect the high level of concentration of power in the executive. The judiciary is subordinated to the Ministry of Justice, and the president is entitled to appoint judges (this is not unlike the United States but the degree of independence of the judiciary is also about implementation of policies) and only the president can request the Supreme Court to review the constitutionality of a law. Regarding the legislative, the formation of political parties has been permitted since 1997, and political rights are protected by law. Parliament is also highly dependent on the presidency, which appoints thirty out of the one hundred members of the Senate, the second legislative chamber established in 2013.  

Strong executive power could and should actually benefit women’s economic freedom but currently does not. There are spillovers from the political subindex to other aspects of the institutional framework of Cameroon. This is visible in the economic subindex, which measures trade and investment openness, protection of property rights, and economic opportunities for women. Regarding the latter, Cameroon’s score in the women’s economic freedom component (60) is—surprisingly—among the lowest in the world, ranking 140th among the 164 countries covered by the Indexes. Despite a ten-point increase in 2018, reflecting the introduction of legislation dealing with workplace nondiscrimination and sexual harassment, Cameroon’s performance in this component is still significantly lower than that of other countries in the region, such as Côte d’Ivoire (95), Senegal (72.5), Nigeria (66.3), Gabon (95), and Kenya (83.8).  

Important areas affecting gender equality, where Cameroon does not yet grant legal protection similar to the countries mentioned above, include civil liberties such as freedom of movement and marital rights, and financial inclusion legislation regarding access to banking services, asset ownership, and administration. While implementation of some of the more restrictive legislation may differ from the reality on the ground—for example, women can own property in their name today—the lack of changes to the legal documents opens the door for predatory compliance and legal battles in some cases.  

Having women in government leadership positions has led many countries in the region to advance significant improvements in women’s rights and opportunities. One illustrative example is the case of Ngozi Okonjo-Iweala in Nigeria, who introduced several policies aimed at empowering women during her periods as finance minister (2003–06 and 2011–15), such as the Growing Girls and Women in Nigeria (G-WIN) program. This created a gender-responsive budgeting system that ensured a certain share of public procurement went to female entrepreneurs. Similar legislation can be identified in Kenya, with the Access to Government Procurement Opportunities program introduced in 2013, as well as in Côte d’Ivoire and the Democratic Republic of the Congo. Adopting some of these tried and tested programs in Cameroon could help improve women’s economic freedom de jure and de facto.  

Cameroon’s commitment to open and free trade is ambiguous, despite its very strategic location. Total trade to gross domestic product (GDP) has decreased substantially in the last decade, from 50 percent in 2014 to 39 percent in 2023, well below the average for Africa (74.49 percent). On the one hand, the country imposes relatively high tariffs on imports besides primary necessity goods, established at 10 percent for raw materials and equipment goods, 20 percent for intermediary and miscellaneous goods, and up to 30 percent for fast-moving consumer goods, implying an average tariff rate around 18 percent, more than double the average for Africa. With women being the most active small and medium entrepreneurs in cross-border trade, 20 percent tariffs have the potential to disproportionately affect them as a group.  

On the other hand, Cameroon has signed trade agreements with the European Union, United States, China, Japan, and several other nations. In 2020, the country also ratified the African Continental Free Trade Area Agreement, the signature African trade agreement. Cameroon is also a member of the Economic and Monetary Community of Central Africa, which aims a common market among Central African countries. Nonetheless, Cameroon has a negligible trade relationship with Chad, Equatorial Guinea, Gabon, Central African Republic, and the Democratic Republic of the Congo, the other five member states. More generally, inter-Africa trade is still marginal, with only 12.7 percent of Cameroon’s export earnings coming from African partners, and less than 10 percent of total imports in 2023. For example, Cameroon’s trade with Nigeria—the largest economy in Africa—was less than 1 percent in 2021. The two countries having difficult and high tariffs undermines their collective prosperity. Policies to improve trade between the two countries will also disproportionately support small women-owned businesses.  

The most relevant factor regarding investment and capital movement regulations in Cameroon is the fact that the national currency, the Central African CFA franc, is shared by the five neighbors mentioned above, and is pegged to the euro at a fixed exchange rate. This has the benefit of providing stability and predictability but also constrains Cameroon’s capacity to autonomously determine its monetary, investment, and capital flows policies. Another factor certainly influencing the investment climate in Cameroon is the security situation in the country and the region. With low tariffs in the sector, foreign capital continues to focus on extractive industries and infrastructure, and the repeated efforts of the government to expand international investment to other sectors have not borne the expected fruits.  

Two other features of Cameroon’s institutional framework stand out in the legal subindex components, namely, the high levels of corruption across all levels of the administration, and the low level of security. Both of these unduly penalize women, who are generally the most affected by conflict and petty corruption. 

Cameroon is host to a large number of refugees as a result of the conflict in the subregion, and this has impacted civil liberties. With respect to security, relatively high levels of small criminality have combined with a surge in terrorist attacks, especially in the last decade, with the emergence of Boko Haram and other Islamist groups, as well as the unrest in the north and southwest of the country. These different violent conflicts, together with the substantial immigration flows coming from Nigeria, Libya, Central African Republic, Chad, and other neighboring countries, have increased the need for tighter security within the country. 

Evolution of prosperity

On the Prosperity Index, measured as the average of six constituent elements (income, inequality, minorities, health, environment and education), Cameroon performs better than its peers but still remains below the African average. The country has outpaced the low regional average in prosperity growth at least since 2005. Education, health, and environment seem to be the areas where improvements have been most palpable, and will be the focus of the following paragraphs. 

The health component of the Prosperity Index, based on life expectancy data, shows a change of tendency around the late 1990s. This is not a feature unique to Cameroon; a similar inflection point from decreasing to rapidly increasing life expectancy is also observable in other African countries such as South Africa, Gabon, and Côte d’Ivoire. An important push in the fight against AIDS, substantially financed by programs led by the international donor community such as the US President’s Emergency Plan for AIDS Relief, was instrumental in this case. Additionally, the increased availability of vaccines for different diseases and some progress in terms of infant and maternal mortality have contributed to this positive evolution.  

Nonetheless, there is still huge room for improvement. First, total public expenditure on health has been below 4 percent of GDP since 2001 (3.82 percent in 2021, the last year of available data), not yet close to the necessary level to ensure substantial and sustained betterment in health outcomes, usually estimated between 5 and 7 percent. For comparison, the average for Sub-Saharan Africa in 2021 is 5.1 percent, and for the Middle East and North Africa region reaches 5.76 percent. Similarly, health expenditure per capita in Cameroon was in 2021 just $155.56, substantially lower than in Nigeria ($220.40), Gabon ($411), or the average of the Sub-Saharan Africa region ($203.70). 

Not only is aggregate spending relatively low, but also the destination of healthcare investment is not optimal. In the last decades, Cameroon has consolidated a series of big training hospitals, mainly located in big cities. On the contrary, investment in primary and preventive healthcare has been deficient, especially in rural areas, creating wide inequalities across the country. Recent disease outbreaks underscore the need for improved strong healthcare systems at the local level. As for other least developed countries, the potential gains of basic health interventions to ensure generalized access to vaccination and maternal and infant care are enormous, as the experience of other African countries has shown.  

Turning to education, the data on school enrollment show a very significant acceleration since the early 2000s, when Cameroon started to grow faster than the regional average. It is important to note the very low initial level of this indicator, but the progress is still remarkable. Free primary education was introduced in the year 2000, and this is probably one important factor explaining the trend in the last two decades.  

Nonetheless, families still need to cover the costs of uniforms and books, which is a significant barrier for an important share of the population. Recall that, according to the World Bank, 23 percent of Cameroon’s population is today living in extreme poverty (under US$2.15 a day), and thus such costs are very significant for them. Moreover, secondary school tuition and fees are not subsidized, which constrains educational attainment for a much larger fraction of children.  

Two areas requiring substantial improvement are, first, the poor quality of the education received, which undermines actual learning outcomes of Cameroonian students. Learning poverty, the share of children not able to read and understand an age-appropriate text by age ten, is estimated by the World Bank at a high 71.9 percent, with girls especially disadvantaged.  

Second, there are important sources of educational inequality, particularly gender and regional based. School enrollment rates are significantly lower for girls than for boys at all levels of the educational system, heavily influenced by high rates of child marriage and early childbearing among girls.  

The attempt to impose French curricula across the whole country led to heated debate, protests, civil unrest, and ultimately, violent clashes in some parts of the country. As a result, schools closed for two years (2018–19), and before they had fully reopened, the COVID-19 pandemic hit and schools were closed again. This combination of shocks has probably generated a very significant slowdown in educational attainment that is not yet captured by the data used in the Prosperity Index.  

Cameroon’s score on the environment component is heavily influenced by one of the variables used to compute it: access to clean cooking technologies. Although this indicator has improved consistently in the last twenty-five years, from barely 10 percent of the population to almost 30 percent today using clean technologies, once again we observe striking spatial differences across the country and between rural and urban populations. Cameroon produces gas and therefore could rapidly improve on this indicator. New cooking stoves are widely available and easily diffused. The executive has the power to improve on this indicator and save lives while improving livelihoods.  

Most importantly, the Prosperity Index does not include any indicator on deforestation, which is extremely relevant for Cameroon, which has the second largest forest area in the Congo Basin, from which many women earn an income.  

The evolution of tree cover areas reveals a loss of 1.53 million hectares between 2001 and 2020, of which 47 percent was in primary forests. As a result, forest as a percentage of land decreased from 47.6 percent in 1990 to 43.03 percent in 2020. In 2021, Cameroon was seventh on the list of the world’s top deforesters, with 89,000 hectares of forest lost. This trend not only threatens to significantly alter weather and crop patterns in the country, affecting women disproportionately, but may lead to deteriorating health conditions as nature and Cameroon’s biodiversity are altered significantly.  

This situation is by no means unavoidable but requires a clear policy commitment if it is to be averted. Cameroon has important gas reserves, and the low usage of wood by households in cities proves that there are possible alternatives. Obviously, providing access to gas and other forms of energy to rural areas requires an important investment in infrastructure and creation of logistic networks that are not yet in place, but certainly should be a priority for the government and the international community in the near future. Cameroonian women not only suffer from a very unequal legislative environment, but also due to structural conditions on these areas that further hamper their personal development compared to men. 

The path forward

The strength of data lies in its capacity to tell stories and be scrutinized. The data on Cameroon need more attention and the authorities should work with the groups that collect the original data used to build these Indexes, along with the Cameroon National Statistics Office, development institutions, and other research institutions that collect data, to ensure representation of Cameroon is accurate, especially since these data are often used by market players to inform investment decisions.  

In the interim, one crucial conclusion from the data is the interdependence between the health, education, and environment components and the women’s economic freedom component. This interconnectedness is a double-edged sword, as weak legislative focus undermines women’s economic empowerment, which leads to poor health and education outcomes and in some cases may also lead to environmental degradation.  

Bottom-up or top-down policies could help move these indicators, building on the successes already achieved in these domains, first by focusing on laws that provide women with better economic empowerment. This essay has cited several examples of initiatives in other countries which could be adapted to fit the national context and implemented in Cameroon.  

Education remains the fastest way to economic empowerment of populations and women in general. In the long run it can help reduce costs of healthcare as educated women tend to adopt more preventive approaches for themselves and their children, reducing the cost of healthcare which is not only high but still comprises lots of risks for women. To this end, the policy of free primary education must be coupled with robust teacher quality and performance indicators to ensure that children are actively learning. A year of lost learning, even if it appears free, is costly for teacher, student, and parent. This kind of waste undermines the economy in the long run as an unskilled population is an economic cost to the country over time.  

Cameroon’s environmental resources, if well managed, could represent an important source of revenue for local populations and women in particular in an economic environment where carbon markets are growing, protection of fauna and flora is valued, and organic production commands a premium from markets. Support by government to reforestation projects could help generate resources for rural populations while promoting more nature tourism, building on the strengths of the country. An important component of the women’s health and environment nexus, however, would be policies which help women use cleaner cooking practices, as unsafe technologies claim the lives of many women.  

Overall, the policies needed to improve the economic freedom components for women are well within reach of the Cameroonian government, as many are policy-based first and foremost. In addition, it would serve the government well to work with the Indexes to scrutinize the data and scoring so that they can provide a more accurate report on the economic freedom of women in Cameroon. 


Vera Songwe is a nonresident senior fellow in the Global Economy and Development practice at the Brookings Institution and chair and founder of the Board of the Liquidity and Sustainability Facility. Songwe is a board member of the Mo Ibrahim Foundation and previously served as undersecretary-general at the United Nations and executive secretary of the United Nations Economic Commission for Africa. Songwe’s expertise includes work on Africa’s growth prospects in a global context, with a focus on improving access to sustainable finance. 

Statement on Intellectual Independence

The Atlantic Council and its staff, fellows, and directors generate their own ideas and programming, consistent with the Council’s mission, their related body of work, and the independent records of the participating team members. The Council as an organization does not adopt or advocate positions on particular matters. The Council’s publications always represent the views of the author(s) rather than those of the institution.

Read the previous Edition

2024 Atlas: Freedom and Prosperity Around the World

Twenty leading economists and government officials from eighteen countries contributed to this comprehensive volume, which serves as a roadmap for navigating the complexities of contemporary governance. 

Explore the data

Trackers and Data Visualizations

Jun 15, 2023

Freedom and Prosperity Indexes

The indexes rank 164 countries around the world according to their levels of freedom and prosperity. Use our site to explore twenty-eight years of data, compare countries and regions, and examine the sub-indexes and indicators that comprise our indexes.

About the center

The Freedom and Prosperity Center aims to increase the prosperity of the poor and marginalized in developing countries and to explore the nature of the relationship between freedom and prosperity in both developing and developed nations.

Stay connected

The post Cameroon’s future relies on empowering its women  appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>
Toplines: The United States and its allies must be ready to deter a two-front war and nuclear attacks in East Asia https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/in-depth-research-reports/report/toplines-the-united-states-and-its-allies-must-be-ready-to-deter-a-two-front-war-and-nuclear-attacks-in-east-asia/ Fri, 07 Feb 2025 20:24:57 +0000 https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/?p=823410 The "toplines" from Markus Garlauskus' report on two emerging and interrelated deterrence challenges in East Asia with grave risks to US national security.

The post Toplines: The United States and its allies must be ready to deter a two-front war and nuclear attacks in East Asia appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>

Click on the banner above to explore the Tiger Project.

Top three

  • A conflict with either China or North Korea poses a grave and growing risk to the national security of the United States, particularly due to the potentials for simultaneous escalation involving both countries and for nuclear escalation.
  • In coordination with the United States’ allies and partners, US defense and military leaders should therefore expand efforts to ensure preparedness to fight and win a potential conflict in East Asia, even one involving limited nuclear attacks or multiple adversaries simultaneously.
  • The United States should also reduce escalation risks by prioritizing intra-conflict deterrence, fostering expanded multilateral military contributions, and influencing mid-level actors within adversaries’ military structures to enable sub-regime deterrence.

WORTH A THOUSAND WORDS

The geography of East Asia is a key potential variable increasing both the probability and impact of a US conflict with the PRC or North Korea expanding to simultaneous conflicts with both—particularly given the increasing ranges of modern sensors and weapons systems.

Northeast Asian geographic considerations in a US-PRC conflict

THE DIAGNOSIS

The risk of conflict with the People’s Republic of China (PRC) or North Korea—especially the potential for simultaneous escalation involving both—poses a serious threat to the United States and its interests. This threat is heightened by the possibility of either adversary resorting to limited nuclear attacks.

A two-front war in Asia could unfold even without close cooperation between Beijing and Pyongyang. Dysfunctional coordination or misunderstandings could just as easily lead to conflict. Furthermore, with both China and North Korea developing greater incentives and capabilities for limited nuclear attacks, the risk of a nuclear war in East Asia is rising.

Deep-seated organizational and cognitive biases have been obstructing the ability of the United States and its allies to anticipate simultaneous conflicts with China and North Korea. Such biases also impede their preparations to manage such escalation and to counter limited nuclear attacks.

US and allied capabilities, command-and-control arrangements, and military posture are currently unsuited to provide a robust military response in the case of a two-front war and/or a limited nuclear war in East Asia. Simultaneous conflicts with both adversaries would impose severe operational and strategic challenges on the United States and its allies and/or their employment of nuclear weapons.

THE PRESCRIPTION

If a US conflict with one adversary in East Asia doesn’t end quickly, it is likely to widen.

  • The United States and its allies should reconceptualize planning for aggression by either the PRC or North Korea as marking the start of an Indo-Pacific campaign that also requires deterring—and potentially defeating—the other possible adversary.
  • The United States and South Korea should shift their focus to a broader priority of protecting South Korea from aggression—encompassing deterrence of PRC aggression in addition to North Korean aggression.
  • The US government and nongovernment institutions should sponsor studies and wargaming on the potential conditions and drivers that might cause a US-PRC conflict over Taiwan to escalate to the Korean Peninsula.

The risk that a war in East Asia would go nuclear is rising, as both China and North Korea have increasing incentives and capabilities for limited nuclear attacks. 

  • The US defense community should direct and sponsor analysis and studies by the US intelligence community and outside analytic entities to track and identify signposts of North Korea’s increasing capabilities and potential for limited first nuclear use, as well as signposts of the PRC potentially moving down this path. 
  • In collaboration with its allies, the United States should refine and amplify declaratory policies to emphasize that the United States and its allies will not be divided by a limited nuclear attack. This should include contextualizing the repeated US declaration that “there is no scenario in which the Kim [family] regime could employ nuclear weapons and survive.”
  • In coordination with the United States’ allies and partners, US military planners should expand efforts to ensure preparedness to fight and win even if faced with limited nuclear attacks, and to clearly communicate this preparedness to adversaries and allies alike. To preserve a range of military response options other than nuclear retaliation, the stage must also be set to avoid giving the impression that any response but an immediate nuclear counterattack would indicate weakness or hesitation.
  • The United States should lead international interagency efforts to explore and prepare options to respond to, mitigate risks of, and deter a limited nuclear attack by China or North Korea—which should include studies, workshops, and tabletop exercises/wargames, at both unclassified and classified levels. This analysis should include evaluation of the pros and cons of a range of potential options to increase and signal readiness to employ US tactical nuclear weapons in response to a limited nuclear attack, if the situation calls for it—up to and including the potential ramifications of the reintroduction of US tactical nuclear weapons to the region or the Korean Peninsula itself.

The United States and its allies in the Indo-Pacific are not currently well-situated to fight a two-front war and/or a limited nuclear war in East Asia; the PRC’s capability and capacity to do so is growing and it might soon be better positioned to fight the United States and its allies on multiple fronts simultaneously in its neighborhood.

  • The United States should undertake a comprehensive reassessment of its command-and-control (C2) relationships and posture in East Asia in the context of evolving North Korean, Chinese, and nuclear threats, to identify the appropriate C2 relationships in the event of simultaneous conflicts with North Korea and China, as well as the best C2 arrangements and force posture for theater-level tactical nuclear responses, if needed.
  • US defense and military planners should ensure that the United States has effective, timely, and credible options for its own limited nuclear strikes in response to a limited nuclear attack, in addition to robust nonnuclear options. Relevant nuclear capabilities should be resourced, trained, staffed, equipped, and supported, while enabling messaging to dispel any perception among adversaries and friends that there is a gap in US capability that could be exploited through a limited nuclear attack.
  • The United States defense community should increase the forward presence of relevant experts to help operationally and intellectually prepare key US allies and partners (particularly South Korea, Japan, and Taiwan) for a conflict with the PRC and/or North Korea that involves a limited nuclear attack by either or both.

If conflict breaks out, however, the United States has options for managing escalation.

  • Relevant US military commands should apply and operationalize a greater focus on intra-conflict deterrence, rather than just deterrence of conflict in general.
  • The United States and its allies should seek more multilateral (e.g., Australian, Canadian, or UK) rotational contributions of aircraft and maritime patrols, and involvement in exercises to reinforce international commitment and contributions to deterrence of both North Korean and PRC aggression.
  • The US government should pursue study, development, and execution of approaches to pursue “sub-regime deterrence” within the PRC and North Korea as part of US deterrence strategy, including targeted influence of mid-level actors, to delay or prevent execution of escalatory moves, particularly limited nuclear attack.

Biases in US and allied institutions are impeding their understanding of how an East Asian conflict could escalate and their preparations to manage such escalation.

  • The United States and allied analysts should develop new assessments of the likelihood and potential indicators of simultaneous conflicts with the PRC and North Korea, as well as limited nuclear attack by Beijing or Pyongyang. These should use structured analytic techniques, like key assumptions checks, to identify and overcome biases.
  • US and allied leaders should establish guidance that the risks of simultaneous conflicts with the PRC and North Korea, and limited nuclear attack by either, have such key implications that military planning and exercises should consider and address these possibilities, even if they are not used as the baseline.
  • US and allied militaries should establish working groups that cut across a variety of military commands to address preparation for simultaneous conflicts and limited nuclear attacks.
  • US policymakers and analysts should lead efforts to ensure their allied counterparts engage with the potential for simultaneous conflicts and adversary limited nuclear attacks through repeated inclusion of these possibilities in scenarios for exercises and dialogue agendas.

A version of this report was originally written for the US Defense Threat Reduction Agency (DTRA), but it does not necessarily express the views of DTRA or any other US government organization. The principal investigator thanks DTRA, particularly the Strategic Trends team, for the sponsorship, guidance, support, and resources for this study.

Markus Garlauskas is the director of the Indo-Pacific Security Initiative of the Scowcroft Center for Strategy and Security, and former senior US government official. He also leads the Council’s Tiger Project on War and Deterrence in the Indo-Pacific. He was appointed to the Senior National Intelligence Service from 2014 to 2020 as the National Intelligence Officer (NIO) for North Korea—leading the US intelligence community’s strategic analysis on Korea. Garlauskas also served for nearly twelve years at the headquarters of United Nations Command, Combined Forces Command and US Forces Korea in Seoul, including as the chief of intelligence estimates and the director of strategy.


The Tiger Project, an Atlantic Council effort, develops new insights and actionable recommendations for the United States, as well as its allies and partners, to deter and counter aggression in the Indo-Pacific. Explore our collection of work, including expert commentary, multimedia content, and in-depth analysis, on strategic defense and deterrence issues in the region.

Related content

The post Toplines: The United States and its allies must be ready to deter a two-front war and nuclear attacks in East Asia appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>
Central Asia needs regional and international cooperation to bolster water security https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/in-depth-research-reports/report/central-asia-needs-regional-and-international-cooperation-to-bolster-water-security/ Fri, 07 Feb 2025 15:00:00 +0000 https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/?p=823327 A new Atlantic Council report, “Water insecurity in Central Asia: The imperative for regional and international cooperation” details the developing water crises in Central Asia and outlines strategies to combat water insecurity in the region.

The post Central Asia needs regional and international cooperation to bolster water security appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>

Table of contents

Executive summary

Water security is an urgent issue that demands immediate attention from Central Asian governments, businesses, civil society, and their international partners. Climate change, population growth, infrastructure problems, a lack of government foresight, and the unequal distribution of precious water resources between the upstream countries (Kyrgyzstan and Tajikistan) and the downstream nations (Kazakhstan, Turkmenistan, and Uzbekistan) have created a “perfect storm” of pressing water insecurity. The 2021 Central Asia drought, the loss of the Aral Sea, the evaporation of glaciers in the Tian Shan mountains, and the alarming shrinking of the Caspian Sea are reminders of how natural and man-made disasters have destructive consequences on Central Asia’s strained water resources.

This report addresses the status of water security across the five Central Asian countries, outlining recent developments, ongoing challenges, and opportunities for improvement. Geopolitically, interstate tensions and the role of international politics—e.g., influence from the West, Russia, and China and tensions with Afghanistan—all will continue to affect the region’s water security. This report will address international cooperation in projects for water sharing, including the current and future role of agencies like the International Fund for Saving the Aral Sea and partners like the United States Agency for International Development, the World Bank, and extraregional governments. The report concludes with a holistic set of policy recommendations to help improve water security in Central Asia.

Water security is a complex and challenging topic for the five Central Asian countries (C5), a region heavily dependent on shared water sources. Kazakhstan, Kyrgyzstan, Tajikistan, Turkmenistan, and Uzbekistan face increasing water-related challenges due to the unequal distribution of water resources across the region (upstream vs. downstream nations), interstate tensions, the legacy of Soviet-era water management systems, corruption and lack of good governance, and the effects of climate change. Despite efforts to modernize, countries still rely on outdated and insufficient water infrastructure that struggles to meet the demands of growing populations, as well as water-intensive industries like cotton.

Relevant recent developments in this region include the collapse of the Aral Sea, the declining water levels of the Caspian Sea, border conflicts over water access between Kyrgyzstan and Tajikistan, and the Taliban’s construction of a controversial canal in Afghanistan. Challenges also offer opportunities, including regional agreements on sharing and protecting bodies of water, applying new water-management technologies, and using newly arid lands for new projects.

This report analyzes the current state and future of water security across the five Central Asian states while also considering external players such as Afghanistan, China, and the Caspian littoral countries. The region’s division between water-rich upstream countries and water-scarce downstream states is a key focus of this report. A useful map published in a 2017 report by German think tank Adelphi demonstrates how large swathes of the downstream countries—Kazakhstan, Turkmenistan, and Uzbekistan—depend on water resources that flow from the mountainous regions of Kyrgyzstan and Tajikistan upstream. Water security impacts domestic politics, foreign policy, economic stability, infrastructure, and energy security. Thus, our recommendations address a wide range of cross-cutting issues, as a holistic view of water security is necessary to improve living conditions, the environment, economies, and industries while addressing regional geopolitical concerns.

A vital resource, a complicated history

There are several challenges to the health and integrity of Central Asia’s precious water resources, particularly the Amu Darya and Syr Darya rivers, the Aral Sea, Lake Balkhash, and the Caspian Sea. Challenges include climate change, pollution, and issues related to human development, like population growth, urbanization, industrialization, and the all-important agricultural industry, among other human activities. Glacial melt also threatens the Pamir and Tien Shan mountain ranges, located in the region’s two upstream countries, Kyrgyzstan and Tajikistan. Changes to the water flow will (literally) have a trickle-down effect that will affect the two countries and the downstream nations, namely Kazakhstan, Uzbekistan, and Turkmenistan. In other words, water security in Central Asia is heavily linked to transboundary water bodies.

But other challenges must be considered to understand the evolving situation across the region. They include irregular rainfall patterns, which lead to extended droughts in some areas while others suffer from unseasonable rainfalls causing floods; extreme weather patterns that affect both human life and the local environment; and the fragile state of water infrastructure due to neglect in the post-Soviet era.

Central Asia knows how catastrophic water disasters can be. Nearly all of the Aral Sea—90 percent of what had been the fourth-largest inland sea in the world—is simply gone due to poor water mismanagement. The problem commenced in the 1960s due to Soviet-era, large-scale irrigation projects, which included the diversion of the sea’s tributaries, the Amu Darya and Syr Darya, and benefited, for instance, Uzbekistan’s important cotton industry. The negative consequences include soil salinization, waterlogging, and a sea-level drop, resulting in new dry lands. The Aral Sea’s diminishment has prompted economic decline and job loss for noncotton industries, not to mention health challenges for regional populations and devastation of their way of life. Astana has attempted to protect what remains of the Kazakhstani side of the sea, which nowadays mostly resembles a group of interconnected and fragmented lakes rather than a unified body of water, by constructing the Kok-Aral Dam, for example. Unfortunately, the Uzbekistani government still prioritizes its cotton industry over the protection of Aral Sea, parts of which are likely lost forever.

In a similar vein, the Caspian Sea is becoming increasingly precarious. The sea’s northern coast, which borders Kazakhstan and Russia, is already becoming shallower. While desalination projects are a growing part of the problem, the limited amount of water reaching the sea is insufficient to keep it healthy. For instance, the Soviets constructed dams and reservoirs in the Volga River that inhibit water (and marine life) flows into the Caspian. These include Russia’s Cheboksary Dam and the Volga Hydroelectric Station. There will be severe repercussions akin to what the Aral Sea is experiencing if the Caspian’s water level is not safeguarded. Besides the obvious challenges to human life and the regional environment, trade and commerce also will be affected. Specifically, the maritime and transportation sector will be impacted by the Caspian’s disappearance. Bypassing Russian territory, the Trans-Caspian International Transport Route (TITR), commonly known as the Middle Corridor, is integral to the transport of commodities and goods from China and Central Asia to Europe: The Caspian Sea serves as a crucial component of the TITR, with tankers and cargo ships sailing from Baku and Aktau to Turkmenbashi and vice versa. Declining water levels would put heavier ships at risk of being trapped and unable to access ports—and undercut the usefulness of the TITR.

The complexity of water

The C5 states have common problems regarding water security. Obsolete water infrastructure is Central Asia’s greatest water challenge. Overall, their Soviet-era water infrastructure requires repairs, replacement, or full modernization. Unfortunately, the Central Asian governments have been slow to invest in this area. While managing the flow of water across regional rivers or addressing the effects of climate change are challenging long-term issues, improving water infrastructure can significantly protect scarce water flows in the region. Outdated water infrastructure can result in up to “40 percent of water losses during irrigation and up to 55 percent of losses when supplying drinking water.” In other words, improving the transit of water in Central Asia would buy time, allowing regional governments to address some of the more complex problems stemming from climate change and water-diversion projects.

The intersection between water security and energy production is complex, particularly regarding hydroelectric power. Kyrgyzstan and Tajikistan have extensive water resources that generate electricity through hydroelectric dams. However, this strategy creates tensions with downstream nations that depend on these rivers for agricultural irrigation and human consumption. Hydroelectric dams, like Tajikistan’s Rogun Dam, may become a source of conflict between upstream and downstream countries if relationships are not managed carefully. As climate change intensifies, the unpredictability of water flow can worsen interstate relations. Map I shows changes in river flows of major river systems in Central Asia.

Map I: Source: CA Water Info, “Water Flow and Water Use Data,” http://www.cawater-info.net/aral/.

The 2021 Central Asian drought highlighted the region’s vulnerability to water shortages. Kazakhstan, in particular, experienced serious agricultural losses, underscoring the risks of dependence on transboundary water sources. Kazakhstan’s Lake Balkhash, fed by the Ili River from China, presents another example of water insecurity. China’s upstream development projects threaten to reduce the water flow into Lake Balkhash, which could lead to a disaster on the Aral scale. Tensions exist between Uzbekistan and Kyrgyzstan over the Syr Darya, which originates in Kyrgyzstan and flows through Uzbekistan. Around 80 percent of Uzbekistan’s water originates from neighboring countries, leaving it vulnerable to upstream water-management decisions.

The political landscape in Central Asia complicates efforts to manage water resources. The region features a range of political systems, from strongly authoritarian Turkmenistan to the more open Kazakhstan. This contributes to differing levels of commitment to regional cooperation on water management. For example, Astana has identified water security as a problem. It promotes dialogue and proposes the creation of regional water mechanisms to address water-access issues, such as the International Fund for Saving the Aral Sea, which originated in the early 1990s. On the other hand, Ashgabat has a more limited engagement with the rest of the region and the wider world including on environmental issues. Similarly, during the rule of Islam Karimov, Uzbekistan was reluctant to engage with neighbors to discuss water cooperation. However, President Shavkat Mirziyoyev is willing to engage. Meanwhile, Bishkek and Dushanbe’s growing reliance on hydropower to address domestic energy crises will exacerbate water-security problems with their downstream neighbors. More open governments tend to be more willing to discuss sensitive issues, including shared water resources, and admit their shortcomings and erroneous policies.

Finally, water quality tends to receive insufficient attention. Pollution from agriculture, industry, and aging infrastructure impacts water supplies, meaning that even when water reaches a household, drinking it may not be safe.

Country updates

Each C5 country grapples with unique issues driven by geography, infrastructure, and governance affecting water. There are efforts to address these challenges, with projects ranging from cross-border cooperation to investment in new infrastructure and international partnerships. However, political instability, lack of transparency, and outdated technologies impede progress.

Joint coordination is critical to addressing transboundary water issues. Kazakhstan’s President Kassym-Jomart Tokayev will be the president of the International Fund for Saving the Aral Sea (IFAS) from 2024 to 2026. Astana aims to implement development and scientific programs to “[reduce] the negative impact [of the Aral Sea catastrophe] on the entire region and ensure stability and sustainable development of Central Asia.” Similarly, in 2018, the five Caspian states signed a convention in Aktau, Kazakhstan, to end a long-standing border dispute over the sea. Moreover, the five states signed the Tehran Convention in 2003, a much-needed environmental legal framework to protect the sea. While the territorial dispute was resolved, interstate cooperation to protect the Caspian remains limited and challenges continue.

Kazakhstan

Kazakhstan faces significant water challenges due to its dependence on transboundary water resources: The Aral Sea, Lake Balkhash, the Ural River, and the Caspian Sea are all shared with neighboring countries and fed by rivers originating outside of their boundaries, leading to complex management issues. The Ili River, which feeds Lake Balkhash, originates in China’s Xinjiang region, where ongoing development projects and increased agriculture strain water flows to China’s Central Asian neighbor. The Ural River, shared with Russia, suffers from pollution and declining water levels due to industrial activities including oil refining and chemical production. High zinc concentrations in the Ural make the water unsuitable for consumption once it reaches Kazakhstan.

Map II: Lake Balkhash and Ili River
Source: Kmusser, “Lake Balkhash,” Wikimedia, December 15, 2008,https://commons.wikimedia.org/w/index.php?curid=5551971. CC BY-SA 3.0. The source used Digital Chart of the World, data from GTOPO (a global digital elevation model), and labels based on GEOnet; references include UNEP; and Kader Kezer and Hiroshi Matsuyama, “Decrease of River Runoff in the Lake Balkhash Basin in Central Asia,” Hydrological Processes 20 (2006).

Kazakhstan is closely monitoring the health of Lake Balkhash. However, long-term solutions depend on cooperation with Beijing, which sees the Ili’s waters as a domestic issue despite the river’s flow into Kazakhstan. Astana is engaging Beijing and Moscow to address transboundary water issues. There is reason to be cautiously optimistic, as a Kazakh-Russian commission has been established to protect the Ural River. At the same time, Beijing and Astana are drafting an agreement to address river waters.

Water challenges in Kazakhstan take various shapes. The country already suffers from droughts, which are exacerbated by climate change. Moreover, shared water bodies mean Astana must engage in multivector diplomacy with neighboring countries to manage domestic water problems. For Kazakhstan, water security involves more than human consumption and agriculture: Trade is a component, as the country relies on the health of the Caspian Sea to transport goods and commodities, such as oil, from Aktau port to Baku.

The government of Kazakhstan has been straightforward about the need to address water challenges. In his September 1, 2023, address to the nation, President Tokayev was blunt about worst-case scenarios and the need to restructure water management. “The issue of water availability and quality remains critical. Given the population growth and the economy by 2040, the water deficit in Kazakhstan may reach 12-15 billion cubic meters,” he explained. The government soon after created the Ministry of Water Resources and Irrigation to improve water management and usage in Kazakhstan. This ministry announced rules for regulating water relations between regions in December 2023, which came into force on August 31, 2024. In mid-2024, the ministry reestablished the National Hydrogeological Service to develop a state policy in underground water management, exploration, and state monitoring. Without a doubt, Astana recognizes water security as a clear and present danger, while agreements with neighboring states and more water-related projects need to occur faster to avoid a catastrophe.

Uzbekistan

Uzbekistan faces severe water shortages. Approximately 80 percent of its water resources originate from neighboring countries. Major rivers like the Syr Darya and Amu Darya, crucial for Uzbekistan’s agriculture and population, have reportedly lost 20 percent of their volume over the past five decades. Uzbekistan’s reliance on Soviet-era water infrastructure further compounds the problem, leading to inadequate water access in rural areas, where villagers often drink from irrigation ditches or travel to other settlements to collect water.

Tashkent’s Aral Sea strategy differs from Kazakhstan’s. Rather than replenishing the sea’s waters, Tashkent aims to improve newly dry territories. For example, the country is planting trees and shrubs along the Akkum ridge and Muynak district to combat wind erosion and stabilize sand dunes. These projects aim to prevent salt and dust from spreading to other regions, improving environmental conditions.

Uzbekistan also is introducing new technologies to address water security. According to Tashkent, around 1.26 million hectares, or 30 percent of irrigated areas, are now utilizing water-saving technologies, including sprinklers and drip irrigation, though up-front and maintenance costs are high. Tashkent is also analyzing several options to improve water management, according to the Uzbek media, including “transferring 50 percent of internal irrigation networks to closed irrigation systems,” increasing the annual capacity of local water-saving technology enterprises, reducing water salinity, and fortifying canals with concrete. Reforestation and environmental projects also can alleviate the environmental damage caused by the Aral Sea’s desiccation.

However, Uzbekistan’s economy depends heavily on the cotton industry, which requires large quantities of water. In 2012, the amount of water consumed to grow Uzbekistan’s cotton was estimated at sixteen billion cubic meters annually. Moreover, 90 percent of water consumed by Uzbek cotton originates upstream, and over 85 percent of arable land is further reliant on upstream-sourced water irrigation. With roughly 25 percent of the country’s GDP dependent on cotton, Uzbekistan is in no hurry to divest itself of its water-hungry cash crop. Attempts to convince Uzbek farmers to switch to fast-ripening, water-efficient, and climate-resilient cotton varieties have made limited impacts.

Uzbekistan is also exploring hydropower to address its growing electricity consumption. Tashkent aims to build a cascade hydroelectric power station along the Naryn River in the Namangan region, a project expected to cost around US$434 million. It remains to be seen how this hydropower plant will affect water flows for human consumption and other projects.

Reliant on water sourced from neighboring countries like Kyrgyzstan and Tajikistan, Uzbekistan is highly vulnerable to regional water policies and usage. Any upstream activities, such as dam construction or increased agricultural water use, directly impact Uzbekistan’s water availability. Moreover, Uzbekistan’s water infrastructure largely dates to the Soviet era. Some rural communities lack functional water pipelines or access to reservoirs. Modern upgrades are either incomplete or malfunctioning. In the village of Armandasht, new pipelines are failing to supply water two years after installation, leaving residents to rely on unsafe alternatives like irrigation ditches and wells. This disparity in water availability contributes to economic and health issues, particularly for impoverished communities.

Despite progress on the Kazakhstani side of the Aral Sea, areas on the Uzbek side are considered irreparably lost. The sea’s continued desiccation results in severe environmental consequences, including salt and dust storms that negatively affect agriculture and human health.

At a 2023 IFAS meeting, President Mirziyoyev said, “The problem of water shortage in Central Asia has become acute and irreversible and will only worsen further.” If the situation in Uzbekistan does not improve, authorities expect the national water shortage to reach 15 percent to 25 percent by 2050, with a desert area expanding to 123 million square meters. Ultimately, Tashkent must make difficult choices regarding its vital but water-intensive cotton industry. Diversifying toward nuts, fruits, and vegetables is advisable, though that would undoubtedly send shockwaves throughout the country’s economy and social order because it would require a major and expensive retraining and readjustment of farming techniques, equipment, and lifestyle, not to mention the search for customers for noncotton goods. For Uzbekistan, water and economic security are inextricably linked.

Kyrgyzstan

Kyrgyzstan has ample water resources but lacks proper infrastructure and effective water-management policies. Despite its rivers, streams, and vast glaciers, the country faces significant challenges in delivering clean water to its population, especially in rural areas. In 2017, UNICEF identified Kyrgyzstan as one of Central Asia’s most vulnerable countries to climate change, which is expected to disproportionately affect the country’s poorest communities. Children will be particularly affected by the deteriorating situation, according to the UN agency.

Rapid population growth, particularly in urban areas like Bishkek, has outpaced the capacity of the water infrastructure, leading to frequent shortages. The city’s population numbers about 1.15 million, but the underlying and largely Soviet-era infrastructure was designed for around 650,000 people. In 2023, Bishkek experienced severe water shortages, first affecting the southern areas and later spreading to other parts of the city. Authorities cited insufficient glacier thaw as one cause, but rapid urbanization and poor urban planning also play a significant role. Bishkek has announced plans to provide a centralized drinking water system for 95 percent of the urban population and two million rural citizens by 2026. The project and promises are not new; a similar program, called Taza Suu, was launched in the early 2000s with financial support from the Asian Development Bank and the World Bank. It resulted in new pipelines and service for many villages, but the project was plagued by “corruption schemes . . . and construction issues, and the equipment supplied failed to meet the requirements.”

Even when water arrives at a residence, it may not be safe for human consumption. “About 33 percent of piped water services throughout the country do not meet sanitary standards,” said Kyrgyzstan’s Department of Disease Prevention and State Sanitary and Epidemiological Surveillance in 2017. Yet conditions may be improving. In 2022, a World Bank delegation visiting Kyrgyzstan noted that access to and the quality of water supply and sanitation services across Kyrgyz rural communities were improving. The World Bank is currently funding a Sustainable Rural Water Supply and Sanitation Development Project, which costs around US$28 million.

In 2023, the European Bank for Reconstruction and Development (EBRD) announced loans to Kyrgyzstan to renovate its water-supply networks, procure operational and maintenance equipment, and introduce household metering in Aidarken, Kadamzhai, Kok-Jangak, and Tash-Komur in the Batken and Jalal-Abad oblasts. Nevertheless, much of the infrastructure dates to the Soviet era, with little modernization having been done. The government is attempting to address this by expanding and upgrading water pipelines and storage reservoirs. However, the country needs short- and long-term projects, financial assistance, and technical expertise to overhaul its water infrastructure, and a recent World Bank report indicates that one-third of the rural population does not have access to clean drinking water.

Kyrgyzstan’s high vulnerability to climate change exacerbates its water challenges. The country relies on glacial melt for water, but inconsistent thawing patterns (due to climate shifts) cause seasonal water shortages. Additionally, more frequent, severe droughts will disproportionately affect lower-income communities.

Tajikistan

Despite being the most water-rich country in Central Asia, Tajikistan’s water future looks grim. The country’s Department of Water and Energy Policy predicts a drastic reduction in water consumption, from 2,520 cubic meters per person per year to just 1,167 cubic meters by the decade’s end. This projected drop is not just a symptom of poor rainfall or climate change (although these are significant factors), but also due to poor policy, outdated and inadequate infrastructure, lack of investment in water supply, and competing interests among different industries, the national government, and the country’s neighbors.

Tajikistan relies heavily on hydropower, which produces around 95 percent of its electricity. The country’s future crown jewel is the Rogun Hydroelectric Dam. The construction project began in 2016 and the dam, once operational, is intended to help Tajikistan become energy independent—though when exactly that will occur is debatable. According to a 2019 projection, the six planned energy generating turbines would be operational by 2026; now, though, the hope is that the third unit will come online sometime in 2025. The project comes with a hefty price tag, estimated at roughly US$6 billion. Once completed, it is expected to become one of the largest hydropower plants in the region, generating 3.6 gigawatts to power the aluminum industry, help meet domestic energy demand, and potentially export electricity to neighboring countries.

Efforts are underway to modernize critical water infrastructure. Tajikistan is working with international partners to address issues related to water quality, groundwater management, and the overall efficiency of water use across different sectors of the economy. The country also struggles with water distribution, quality, and efficiency. Increasing demand from growing urban populations and industrial sectors compounds the challenge. As competition for water resources between economic sectors intensifies, there is growing concern over the impact on groundwater quality. Tajikistan’s water systems are already under strain, and without significant improvements, water contamination could pose severe health and environmental risks shortly.

Tajikistan also faces increasing pressure from neighboring countries over shared water resources. For example, Kyrgyzstan and Uzbekistan share the Syr Darya River with Tajikistan. Moreover, while hydropower provides the lion’s share of the country’s electricity, the sector is vulnerable to water-level fluctuations caused by climate change. More than twenty billion cubic meters of glacial ice, or about 2.5 percent, melted during the last century. A further temperature increase will accelerate glacial melting. The reliance on hydropower could become a double-edged sword if water resources continue declining, affecting energy security and water availability.

Turkmenistan

In stark contrast to realities observed on the ground, Turkmenistan’s government claims the country does not face significant water challenges. The Voluntary National Review of Turkmenistan in 2023 presents an optimistic view of the nation’s water security, boasting that “95 percent of the population has access to clean water” and “99.9 percent uses water services organized in compliance with safety requirements.” However, residents outside of the capital, Ashgabat, disagree. A resident from Turkmenbashi highlighted the neglect of rural areas, noting that the authorities “don’t see anything except the city of Arkadag [Ashgabat],” and described persistent water and heating shortages during the winter of 2023-24. The country’s failure to invest in modernizing infrastructure and its dependence on water-intensive industries like cotton agriculture exacerbate the challenges. Turkmenistan’s rigid authoritarian government limits civil discourse on environmental concerns, slowing progress toward meaningful solutions.

Turkmenistan’s water supply primarily comes from irrigation canals and dated Soviet-era infrastructure. While the central government has focused on providing water to the capital and vital economic hubs while neglecting rural and peripheral regions, water rationing is common, especially during the summer, when residents may only have access to water for a limited time each day.

The United Nations Environment Program (UNEP) is working with Turkmenistan to address its water challenges. In August 2024, Turkmen Foreign Affairs Minister Raşit Meredow held virtual discussions with UNEP’s executive director, Inger Andersen, about establishing a regional center for technologies related to climate change in Ashgabat. This initiative aims to improve water management and mitigate the effects of climate change, including rising temperatures and arid conditions in Turkmenistan. Supported by USAID, Turkmen officials installed water metering systems along the Karakum Canal, which should improve water efficiency in the agricultural sector, which consumes a sizable portion of Turkmenistan’s water resources. (Water meters help farmers measure the amount of water delivered to different crops, maximizing the productivity of said crops, while reducing energy costs and water waste).

The future

The region’s long-term stability hinges on collaborative water management, transparency, and sustainable development initiatives. Without concerted and cooperative action, Central Asia risks further exacerbating interstate tensions, environmental degradation, social inequalities, and economic disruptions caused by water shortages.

The possibility of conflict

Water conflicts are already on Central Asia’s horizon. Between 2021 and 2022, there were violent clashes between Kyrgyzstan and Tajikistan over unmarked borders and land claims. While water was not the direct cause for many of these skirmishes, access to water—an issue for local communities—has intensified militarist political impulses and sharpened local suffering during the conflict. While Bishkek and Dushanbe appear to have resolved tensions for the time being, there is always the possibility of fighting over water to erupt again if conditions do not improve or continue to deteriorate—and dispute-resolution mechanisms are not in place.

Map III (below) shows the relative uses of irrigation in Central Asia, with the density of irrigated land in the Fergana Valley naturally visible. A significant number of farmers have abandoned their crops to focus on keeping fruit trees alive. If another severe drought occurs, protests and violence over water among border communities could escalate into low-intensity conflict. Lack of water could lead to widespread protests at the local level, resulting in government crackdowns.

Map III:  Source: Chen, Yaning, Gonghuan Fang, Haichao Hao, & Xuanxuan Wang “Water use efficiency data from 2000 to 2019 in measuring progress towards SDGs in Central Asia,” Big Earth Data (2020): 2, https://doi.org/10.1080/20964471.2020.1851891.

Additionally, there is concern about the Taliban’s resurgence in Afghanistan. With the exception of Tajikistan, the other four Central Asian governments are engaging the Taliban to secure economic and trade agreements and peace along the borders, potentially leading to the establishment of a North-South corridor via Afghanistan to Pakistan and India. However, the possibility for conflict is still present: In early 2022, Turkmen border guards and Taliban fighters engaged in border clashes.

The controversial 285 kilometer Qosh Tepa canal in northern Afghanistan could foment conflict. The Central Asian states—except Tajikistan—took a “business as usual” approach when the Taliban took control of Afghanistan. However, the significant percentage of water that Qosh Tepa will divert from the Amu-Darya River upstream in Afghanistan will impact tens of thousands of people downstream in Uzbek and Turkmen communities, disrupting their agricultural capabilities and potentially forcing the resettlement of at least a portion of those affected. It will also interfere with Kazakhstan’s attempts to ameliorate the drying of the Aral Sea. While the project is proceeding, the Taliban is engaged in discussions with neighboring Uzbekistan “to address matters related to the construction of the Qosh Tepa Canal.” Meanwhile, even having agreements in place is no guarantee of quiet—Iran and Afghanistan have had a water treaty in place since 1973 concerning water in the Helmand River, yet tensions over inadequate supply resulted in a cross-border clash in May 2023.

The Taliban government has no partner for the large-scale canal project and is proceeding with construction on its own. In November 2023, satellite imagery showed water escaping from what was supposed to be a completed portion of the canal, sparking fears that either miscalculation of the pressure of flowing water had caused a breach or the project had been sabotaged, sending water into the surrounding dry land to be absorbed by the sand for over a month. Kabul claimed that the outflow had been set up deliberately to manage the groundwater level in the area, yet there are ongoing serious concerns that the open-topped canal risks doing more harm and wasting more water in a region where poorly designed and outdated water transport systems are already responsible for the loss of a large proportion of this vital resource.

Climate change

Central Asia is no stranger to natural disasters, but climate change will exacerbate them. The region suffered a massive heatwave and drought during the summer of 2021, significantly damaging farms and animal husbandry. Mudslides also can result from intense rains or heat waves that melt glaciers. Melting means more water flowing downstream, leading to floods and, eventually, the disappearance of the glaciers themselves. Flooding can also endanger the populations living downhill and may spur migration, furthering societal pressure in the region.

The governments and nongovernmental organizations in the region, as well as international climate and water organizations and experts, recently participated in a series of discussions on climate change. For example, in May 2024, the Central Asian Climate Change Conference (CACC-2024) occurred in Almaty, Kazakhstan. A month later, Astana, the Kazakh capital, hosted the Sub-Regional Workshop on Integrated Planning for Climate and Air, organized by the UNEP-convened Climate and Clean Air Coalition (CCAC) and the UN Economic Commission for Europe (UNECE) secretariat. Similarly, the Dushanbe Water Process takes place in the Tajik capital, organized by the United Nations Development Programme (UNDP), in cooperation with the EU and Tajikistan’s Ministry of Energy and Water Resources.

Central Asia is rapidly warming. A study published in Geophysical Research Letters found that “over the past 35 years, temperatures have increased across Central Asia [while] mountain regions have become hotter and wetter—which might have accelerated the retreat of some major glaciers.” The ADB presents similar troubling data: The decrease in glacier surface area in Central Asia over the past fifty to sixty years—due to changing climate conditions—has reached 30 percent. If the situation is not addressed, climate change will have several destructive effects. Economic damage from droughts and floods in Central Asia could reach “1.3 percent of GDP annually, while crop yields are expected to decrease by 30 percent by 2050,” leading to around 5.1 million internal climate migrants by that time.

Salt flats, new dry lands, and energy infrastructure

A challenge for the C5 is what to do with vast territories affected by climate change and other environmental issues. Not only has the Aral Sea dried up but parts of the landscape are contaminated and toxic due to Soviet testing of biological weapons on Vozrozhdeniyia Island, which used to be in the middle of the Aral Sea. Now that the sea has dried up, it is larger and no longer an island. A lack of reporting on the pathogens there means the nature of the danger is unclear.

However, there are possible uses for this land. The dried-up portions of the Aral and Caspian seas and glacier/snow-free territories could be used for agricultural projects, planting trees and greenery, or installing green energy infrastructure. For example, Uzbekistan is planting trees and shrubs along more than eight thousand hectares of the Akkum ridge, Muynak district, and by the Sudachye system of lakes. Creating a forest in the area will reduce wind erosion, consolidate moving dunes, and prevent salt and dust from moving to other regions and populated areas. The new dry lands could be utilized for green energy projects like solar and wind farms. Kazakhstan already operates the large Burnoye solar plants, while Uzbekistan has the Zarafshan wind farm and is constructing the Bash wind farm.

The region’s salt flats, like the Asht Salt Flat, or Asht Namak, in the Fergana Valley (on Tajik territory but close to the border with Uzbekistan), and Shalkarteniz and Sor Tuzbair in Kazakhstan, must also be protected. Protecting Central Asia’s environment from climate change while capitalizing on areas like the new dry lands is a complex, long-term, and expensive task. Regional authorities have highlighted the need to protect their nations’ environments.

During his speech at the UN Climate Change Conference in Dubai at COP28, Kazakhstan’s President Tokayev explained that a new environmental code will facilitate the implementation of green technology, and “there is extraordinary potential for wind and solar power in my country and for green hydrogen.” The objective of the code is to introduce and support the best available techniques (BAT) and regulate activities that have or may have a negative impact on the environment. Since its introduction, government announcements and media reports suggest that Astana is increasingly interested in green technology to address internal energy demand. In early 2024, The Astana Times announced a green hydrogen production project in Mangystau Region.

Opportunities and policy development

Central Asian countries are aware of the water crisis and the need to develop policies and technologies to ameliorate the situation. International partners are engaged in cooperative efforts in hydrogeology, infrastructure buildup, utilities maintenance, and agricultural/irrigation modernization. EU countries, which have an elevated level of development in water management and environmental protection and prioritize climate-related policies, are particularly fit for this role as they seek new areas for engagement and partnerships in the region. Similarly, USAID is the primary US governmental agency engaging Central Asia on environmental issues. There also is an opportunity for greater diversification and participation on the part of other US federal agencies.

Toktogul Dam in Kyrgyzstan. (Ninara, Flickr, CC BY 2.0) https://creativecommons.org/licenses/by/2.0/

Extraregional partners

French entities are engaging with Central Asian nations. In 2023, the French Geological Survey (Bureau de Recherches Géologiques et Minières, or BRGM) signed an agreement on water management with Kazakhstan’s Geology Committee of the Ministry of Industry and Infrastructure Development. In Uzbekistan, the Suez Group of France signed a seven-year contract with the water company Uzsuvtaminot, the Municipality of Tashkent, and the Ministry of Investment and Foreign Trade to expand and improve drinking water access in Tashkent.

Moreover, France partnered with Kazakhstan, Saudi Arabia, and the World Bank in organizing the One Water Summit, held in Riyadh on December 3, 2024. The event was announced by President Emmanuel Macron and Kazakh President Tokayev at the seventy-ninth session of the UN General Assembly in New York (on September 25), and the summit was held on the margins of the sixteenth session of the Conference of the Parties to the UN Convention to Combat Desertification (UNCCD COP16). These meetings serve as an important links between Central Asia and actors with capital and expertise on water management.

As for other European countries, in August 2024, a Kazakhstani delegation traveled to Germany for working meetings that resulted in four agreements on agriculture and water management. The Netherlands is engaging Astana to share knowledge on good practices. And at a 2023 conference in Astana, Slovak water companies presented research results and proposals to address water-related problems, particularly in Kazakhstan, including resource management and safety of water structures.

The EBRD has provided a sovereign loan of US$8.93 million and another US$8.93 million in investment grants to improve the Kyrgyz Republic’s water supply. The Central Asia Water & Energy Program (CAWEP) aims to expand and improve access to drinking water among the C5 nations and Afghanistan. According to the annual 2022-2023 CAWEP report, current projects include improving water resources and environmental conditions along the Aral Sea and adjacent basin areas of Kazakhstan.

USAID is active in Central Asia. In April 2024, USAID launched a new water supply system in Tajikistan’s Rokhati village, Rudaki District, to provide drinking water to more than 3,000 people. Over the period of October 2020 to September 2025, USAID is investing US$21.5 million to strengthen regional capacity to manage shared water resources and mitigate environmental risks in the Syr Darya and Amu Darya river basins. These initiatives include organizing online lectures, sponsoring academic training, establishing national intersectoral committees and a regional coordination committee, and organizing a study tour of the Syr Darya River basin for water specialists and journalists to raise awareness.

Turkmenistan may turn to Israel for assistance: During an April 2023 visit by Foreign Minister Eli Cohen to open the Israeli embassy in Ashgabat, he met with President Serdar Berdymukhamedov to share experiences in agriculture and water-saving techniques. Meanwhile, Korea Water Resources Corp. (K-Water), a state-run water management agency, has signed agreements with Kyrgyzstan to foster cooperation in the water sector and climate crisis. Finally, Azerbaijan (which borders the Caspian and Baku) could engage Central Asia via international organizations like the Organization of Turkic States to develop water projects to protect the Caspian Sea and capitalize on its close relationship with Kazakhstan.

Working together

For years, Central Asia has been moving toward greater regional integration for economic, cultural, and geopolitical reasons. Geopolitically, regional integration enables interstate cooperation in the face of the ever-present influence of neighboring actors like Russia and China. Initiatives to mitigate water insecurity provide an opportunity to strengthen regional cohesion in a concrete sphere of shared interest. Working together to address common water-related challenges can serve as a confidence-building mechanism to deepen C5 integration.

When the C5 presidents met in Astana in early August 2024 to discuss water issues, President Tokayev emphasized that it is “necessary to develop a new consolidated water policy, based on equal and fair use of water and strict fulfillment of obligations.” Kazakhstan, known for supporting regional cooperation and integration via its multivector foreign policy, is engaging partners. In 2023, Astana and Bishkek approved the Strategic Action Program for the Chu and Talas river basins to protect the combined three million residents of the area. The 2022–2030 program, drafted by UNDP and UNECE, addresses water quality, volumes, and ecosystem conservation.

The third International Conference on the Decade of Action, “Water for Sustainable Development, 2018–2028,” took place in June 2024 in Dushanbe, part of the Dushanbe Water Process. Tatyana Bokova, head of Tajikistan’s Revenue Administration Department, said: “Over decades of cooperation with neighboring countries, various mechanisms for the integrated management of shared waters have been introduced. Our oldest intergovernmental agreement turns sixty this year, and it, like others, continues to meet modern needs.” Similarly, the fourth meeting of the Joint Uzbek-Turkmen Intergovernmental Commission on Water Management met in Turkmenabat on April 30, 2024. The parties agreed to expedite the registration of Uzbek water-management facilities in Turkmenistan and to implement a project to build an antifiltration wall at the Sultan Sanjar dam of the Tuyamuyun hydroelectric complex. The C5 governments are discussing outstanding water-related issues; however, the combined effects of climate change, population growth, water scarcity, and environmental degradation are becoming more pressing. A broad array of effective actions is urgently needed.

Policy recommendations

The C5 forum has sought to increase regional cooperation and connectivity. Initiatives like the Middle Corridor and regional blocs promote cooperation and dialogue, but the C5 does not act as a unified bloc. Kazakhstan relies on its multivector foreign policy, and Uzbekistan is opening to the world. Meanwhile, Kyrgyzstan and Tajikistan have deteriorating relations with the West; Bishkek tends to cooperate more closely with Russia and China. Meanwhile, Turkmenistan maintains a relatively isolationist foreign policy. In other words, the C5 governments have different foreign policies, objectives, and partners.

The C5 format to engage the rest of the world has brought mixed results, though summits with the United States, Europe, and the Gulf states have resulted in positive announcements, investment, and trade projects. Yet Central Asia must increase intraregional connectivity and confidence-building mechanisms to deepen C5 integration to address regional problems in a holistic and unified manner. Challenges like water security do not recognize borders, and no single government can successfully address them without working together with neighbors. As this report has noted, distrust and border incidents, including over access to water, continue to prevent a more cohesive regional bloc from engaging the broader world. A joint, high-level C5 water policy body could improve water management, prepare legislation and regulation, and identify and work with investment partners both in the international assistance space and the private sector. Now that the United States and Central Asia have held a presidential-level C5+1 (regional diplomatic platform) in 2023 and a B5+1 in 2024, a blue C5+1 focused on water issues could prove very fruitful.

Regional cooperation

  • Strengthen the Central Asian water agencies. Regional agencies exist, tasked with managing water bodies, namely IFAS and the Interstate Commission for Water Coordination (ICWC). Regional bodies also have subagencies devoted to environmental affairs. For example, the Economic Cooperation Organization (ECO) has a Directorate for Energy, Minerals, and Environment, while one of the objectives of the Organization of Turkic States (OTS) is cooperation among the ministers of environment and ecology. There also are regular high-level conferences focused on water, such as the Dushanbe Water Process. Moreover, there is a legal environmental framework: the Tehran Convention, which entered into force in 2006, tasked with environmental protection of the Caspian Sea. However, ongoing water challenges, including the troubling Caspian situation, demonstrate that the existing environmental agencies and legal frameworks must be revised.
    • Restructure the ICWC (established in 1992) or create a new Central Asia Water Council/Secretariat. A challenge: deciding how much power a restructured ICWC or new agency would have in executing its mandate without raising concerns about national sovereignty. Water is a critical resource that demands greater cooperation and integration. A state-of-the-science entity exclusively focused on this resource is clearly needed but would require buy-in from all parties in the region to be effective.
    • Address the deteriorating Soviet-era water transport network throughout the region as a starting point, with progress in this critical area providing confidence-building and establishing credibility (as noted earlier in this report), so that more sensitive issues can begin to be discussed and acted upon. An ICWC with a broader mandate (and resources) or a new Central Asian water agency could then help regional governments search for joint solutions to sensitive regional topics. Because stopping hydropower projects in Tajikistan would protect Kazakhstani and Uzbekistani agricultural industries but prolong Tajikistan’s energy woes, for example, it would be important to identify and apply mutually agreed upon and accepted measures.
  • Heighten the prominence of Tajikistan’s Dushanbe Water Process. Organized by a Central Asian state, this forum specifically focuses on water issues. The conference’s name and international recognition could grow if linked to preparations and negotiations for future One Water Summits, for example.

International engagement and partnerships

International activities in Central Asian water management, infrastructure development, and investment are important sources of funding and expertise; proper coordination can avoid or limit wasteful redundancies. Therefore, a strengthened regional agency, as suggested above, is crucial. Specifically, the Central Asian countries should pursue the following formats:

  • Green 5+1: To build on the US-C5 presidential-level meeting and platforms, a ministerial environmental summit between Central Asian and US environmental officials should occur. This summit could have the additional positive outcome of keeping the New York Declaration alive (signed during the historical presidential 5+1 summit in 2023 between Biden and the Central Asian leaders). A Green 5+1 could occur, for example, at the 2025 Astana International Forum: Proper preparation would be needed, and the aim could be announcing specific initiatives with earmarked funding, which would put its earlier publicized general good intentions into action.
  • Hold a green EU + Central Asia head-of-state summit: Europe engages with Central Asia on both country-to-country and bloc-to-region levels: EU-Central Asia summits, EU-Central Asia ministerial meetings, high-level political and security dialogues, and other high-level meetings. In September 2023, there was a C5+Germany summit in Berlin between the C5 presidents and the German chancellor. These meetings often address water. At the 2023 EU-Central Asia Ministerial Meeting in Luxembourg, participants highlighted the need to address the nexus of water and climate change “in a strong and holistic manner.” In June 2024, Dushanbe hosted the High-level Central Asian Forum on “Water and Climate Change” organized by UNDP, with support from Brussels. The next step should be a high-level summit, ideally at the presidential/head of state level, between the EU and Central Asia on environmental challenges, especially water. The EU is interested in expanding cooperation with the region beyond the usual topics of energy, transportation, and civil society—and water is a perfect subject matter. Paris, The Hague, and Astana could spearhead this initiative in collaboration with the UN.
  • Hold Green East Asia (i.e., Japan, South Korea) + Central Asia summits: The first C5+Japan meeting at the presidential/prime minister level occurred in August 2024. Meanwhile, South Korea’s then-President Yoon Suk Yeol toured Kazakhstan, Turkmenistan, and Uzbekistan in June 2024, with the first presidential summit scheduled for 2025. To increase engagement, a Green C5 + East Asia summit at the ministerial level could occur, leading to a presidential C5-East Asia Green summit.
  • Further engage the international donor community: Engaging with the international donor community, like the World Bank and EBRD, is nothing new for Central Asian governments looking to attract investment and aid agreements. While Kazakhstan and Uzbekistan are quite active, the situation is more challenging for the three other countries that are less open to deeper relations with the West. Nevertheless, more donor coordination and participation are advisable to develop regional water conservation, efficient use strategies, and country-specific projects—and to avoid redundancies, incorporate lessons learned, and move away from revisiting project ideas that have not worked before. A donor coordination policy conference focusing on water and climate policy, conducted in the region, and leading to the establishment of a proposed coordinating authority, could go a long way to improve water-management and climate-response strategies.

Confidence building

It is vital that the Central Asian states engage both within the region and with upstream and Caspian littoral countries in high-level international discussions of water issues, raising the profile of the region and communicating the critical nature of the problem. Two conferences provide an opportunity for Central Asia and its neighbors to act.

  • COP29: Azerbaijan hosted the 2024 United Nations Climate Change Conference in November. Azerbaijan had openly stated its hopes that COP29 would avoid some of the criticism of previous COPs by acting as an accelerator for smaller regional initiatives and creating workable frameworks for developing countries to act pragmatically on environmental issues. These foci perfectly complement Central Asian challenges. Central Asian calculations should carefully incorporate the COP29 outlook, especially given the importance of Azerbaijan’s cooperation on many issues.
  • Regional climate summit: Kazakhstan will host a Central Asian environment summit in 2026. Water security in Central Asia must be a critical item on the agenda. Astana should rally support for effective initiatives and solutions. Summit workshops can identify high-priority projects for cooperative execution. COP29 provides a basis for this action. It is highly desirable that the suggested Central Asia Water Council or agency be established either prior to or at this event.

Technology, accountability and jobs

  • Do what works: In recent years, national and regional governments and utilities around the world have implemented technologies like water-measuring systems, drip irrigation, recycling of gray water, and pump stations. Each of these technologies should be field tested in the region and utilized where appropriate.
  • Encourage and incorporate new technologies: Water-saving technologies are being developed in several countries including Japan. Agencies like the Astana International Financial Centre (which has a Green Finance Center), USAID, the Asian Development Bank (ADB), or EBRD can create special funds for innovative water projects and provide grants to scientists (mainly from the C5) who are developing new technologies to address water security.
  • Upgrade regional water infrastructure such as canals. To eliminate seepage, Soviet-era canal bottoms must be paved and insulated until they are watertight. Moreover, the tops of the canals could be covered with solar panels, which would provide energy to pump and measuring stations along the canal while reducing evaporation. Kazakhstan’s lengthy Irtysh–Karaganda Canal, the Arys-Turkistan Canal, and/or the Kyzylkum Canal could be testing grounds for solar panels. These initiatives are especially promising since they have already attracted the interest of private investors.
  • Ensure transparency and accountability: As more money pours into water infrastructure, there is the increasing likelihood of misappropriation, theft, and corrupt practices. Regional governments must consider hiring international accountability agencies that can audit projects to ensure funds are appropriately spent. The citizenry’s trust in their leaders will grow if authorities take concrete steps toward transparency and efficient spending; and the confidence of international donors and partners would be strengthened, which is key to paving the way for continued future cooperation.
  • Create jobs and prioritize training: New projects should contribute to job creation in countries with high unemployment. Prioritizing job training in the water sector will require collaboration between the water and professional education authorities. In this context, it is worth noting the opening of the Kazakh University of Water Management and Land Reclamation in September 2024. Water-related projects will create jobs, as occurred through Uzbekistan’s South Karakalpakstan Water Resources Management Improvement Project.
  • Involve foreign donors and obtain end-user feedback: Government officials must engage with the general population to discuss water security and what citizens need. Kazakhstan’s “Listening State” initiative, for example, could have a specific water component. Other governments can follow Astana’s models and have town halls and meetings between community leaders and senior policymakers about what water-related challenges they face and what the residents of affected communities propose. Ideas should not only come from international agencies or a country’s senior leadership; local populations can also provide valid and helpful recommendations regarding how to manage water challenges. Engaging in listening initiatives will have the added benefit of fostering stakeholder buy-in.

Conclusion

Water shortage is a limiting factor for Central Asia’s regional development. To improve the current situation, the five countries of the region need to accelerate the renovation and upgrading of the regional water infrastructure, field test and incorporate new water-saving technologies, and attract international partners and foreign investment in area water infrastructure at a significantly higher rate. Coordination of these activities on the regional level is paramount.

A previous version of this report misstated the year Kazakhstan will host a Central Asian environment summit. It will be in 2026.

About the authors

Ariel Cohen, LLB, PhD, is an internationally renowned expert on energy policy, Russia/Eurasia, Eastern and Central Europe, and the Middle East. He is a recognized authority on political and security risk man-agement; economic development and investment policy; the rule of law; crime and corruption; market-entry strategies; and other aspects of state/business relations.

Cohen is a senior fellow at the International Tax and Investment Center, a nonprofit research and edu-cation organization in Washington, and director of its Energy, Growth and Security Program. He also serves as a nonresident senior fellow at the Atlantic Council.

He has authored six books and monographs, has been involved in journalism since 1981, and has pub-lished over 900 articles in professional and popular media. A columnist for Forbes, he regularly appears on CNN, NBC, CBS, FOX, C-SPAN, BBC-TV, Al Jazeera, and all Russian and Ukrainian national TV networks.

He also writes for Newsweek, The National Interest, Huffington Post, the Atlantic Council’s New Atlanticist blog, and UPI, and has written numerous guest columns for The New York Times, Christian Science Moni-tor, The Washington Post, The Wall Street Journal, The Washington Times, and National Review Online. He is widely published in Europe and the Middle East.

Until July 2014, Cohen was a senior research fellow at the Heritage Foundation in Washington. Dr. Cohen conducts White House briefings and regularly lectures at the request of US government institutions including the US Department of State, the Joint Chiefs of Staff, the Training and Doctrine and Special Forces Commands of the US Armed Forces, the Central Intelligence Agency, and the Defense Intelligence Agency. He frequently testifies before committees of the US Congress—including the Senate and House Foreign Relations Committees, the House Armed Services Committee, and the House Judiciary Commit-tee—and the Helsinki Commission. He also directs high-level conferences on a wide array of topics.

Cohen is a member of the Council on Foreign Relations, the American Bar Association, and the Amer-ican Council on Germany.

Wesley Alexander Hill is the assistant director and lead analyst for the Energy, Growth, and Security Program at the International Tax and Investment Center. The program focuses on critical natural resources, energy transformations, infrastructure, and geopolitics in Eurasia while exploring opportunities for investment and policymaking.

Hill is an accomplished foreign policy professional with expertise in energy policy, security studies, grand strategy, Chinese politics, Sino-American relations, Sino-African relations, and Sino-Eurasian relations. Hill has been featured in Al Jazeera, The Hill, Newsweek, Voice of America, The National Interest, and many other outlets. Hill is also a contributor to Forbes.

Earlier in his career, Hill was a political science lecturer and researcher at Tulane University. Hill is a fellow of the National Bureau of Asian Research, having conducted research at Beijing’s Tsinghua University and Taipei’s National Normal University. Hill began his career conducting foreign policy research and analysis in the constituent services office of Congresswoman Dina Titus.

Hill graduated from Tulane University.

Wilder Alejandro Sánchez is an analyst who focuses on geopolitical, trade, and defense and security issues across the Western Hemisphere, Eastern Europe, and Central Asia. He is president of Second Floor Strategies, a consulting firm based in Washington, DC.

His analyses have appeared in numerous refereed journals, including the SAIS Review of International Affairs, Small Wars and Insurgencies, Defence Studies, Polar Journal, the Journal of Slavic Military Studies, European Security, Studies in Conflict and Terrorism, and Perspectivas. He has published book chapters on Bolivia’s foreign policy, separatism in Moldova, and economic diversification in Kazakhstan. His essays and commentaries appear in The Diplomat, NE Global, Geopolitical Monitor, World Politics Review, e-International Relations, among others, and have been published by the Center for International Maritime Security.

Sánchez holds a master’s degree in international peace and conflict resolution from American University’s School of International Service. He has attended the Institute of World Politics, Johns Hopkins University’s School of Advanced International Studies, and studied in Austria, Belgium, and France. He also studied at the National Defense University’s William J. Perry Center (formerly the Center for Hemispheric Defense Studies) in Washington.

Presented by

The Eurasia Center’s mission is to promote policies that strengthen stability, democratic values, and prosperity in Eurasia, from Eastern Europe in the West to the Caucasus, Russia, and Central Asia in the East.

Related content

The post Central Asia needs regional and international cooperation to bolster water security appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>
Surrounded by superpowers, Kazakhstan walks a geopolitical tightrope https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/in-depth-research-reports/books/surrounded-by-superpowers-kazakhstan-walks-a-geopolitical-tightrope/ Wed, 05 Feb 2025 14:00:00 +0000 https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/?p=820784 Still a relatively young nation, Kazakhstan finds itself at critical juncture amid a series of domestic and geopolitical shocks. Its future depends on the success of economic liberalization efforts—and a delicate balancing act: The country must strengthen ties with the West and simultaneously manage its relations with powerful neighbors like Russia and China.

The post Surrounded by superpowers, Kazakhstan walks a geopolitical tightrope appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>

table of contents

Evolution of freedom

The Freedom Index shows two important features of the institutional development process that Kazakhstan has followed in the last three decades. On the one hand, the overall positive trend reflects the goal, maintained throughout the period, to integrate into the global community both politically and economically in order to foster the young country’s security and prosperity. All the strategies the country has adopted over the past thirty years consistently reflect its aspiration to have an open competitive economy and be a respected international actor. The latter implied becoming a functional democracy and complying with international human rights norms. On the other hand, while the government’s commitment to economic liberalization has been fairly consistent and genuine, its record in the areas of good governance, democratization, and human rights could be characterized as patchy at best. The divergent paths of the three freedom subindexes underscore the difference in commitment.  

Fluctuations observed in the Freedom Index can be explained by changes in circumstances and policies. Kazakhstan received a strong initial impulse toward liberalization thanks to the late Soviet perestroika reforms and the Washington Consensus. However, by the end of the 1990s, this impulse was subdued by the consolidation of an authoritarian regime under the country’s first president, Nursultan Nazarbayev. It was also challenged by the Asian financial crisis, which generated serious doubts about the benefits of unconstrained openness to financial and trade markets. In the early 2000s, oil revenues started to increase, and the government was clearly tempted to use the windfall to pursue interventionist and protectionist economic policies. Tensions between state-led development and free market orientations have been present ever since. Economic growth also allowed an enhancement of the social welfare system, which had been damaged by the economic crisis and neoliberal policies of the 1990s. Nazarbayev’s resignation in 2019 and comprehensive reforms laid out by president Kassym-Jomart Tokayev in the wake of the dramatic unrest and crackdown in January 2022 created a positive dynamic reflected in the upward trend of the Index.  

Looking at the three freedom subindexes gives a more detailed view of developments in Kazakhstan. The economic subindex is the main contributor to the overall positive trajectory of the aggregate Index. It has been on the ascent and above the region’s average, with the exception of a sudden ten-point decrease in the 2000–04 period. Trade and investment freedom plummeted at that point due to the adoption of new legislation regulating investment, taxes, and environmental requirements. The government grew more assertive in its relations with foreign investors, introduced local content requirements, and renegotiated contracts. But the subindex quickly recovered, and since then has shown a very clear positive trend, which was helped by Kazakhstan’s accession to the World Trade Organization in 2015.  

The relatively high score on women’s economic freedom is both a legacy of the Soviet modernization project and its emphasis on recruiting women into the labor force and a product of current circumstances. For many families, two incomes are needed to support a decent standard of living. A positive long-term consequence of the dramatic economic collapse of the late Soviet and early independence years is the high number of women entrepreneurs in Kazakhstan. At the time, many women quit their non-paying jobs and became shuttle traders, importing goods from China and Turkey and selling them in bazaars and small markets. This experience served as an incubator for women entrepreneurs in the country. The trend has been supported by the government and international donors, and nowadays, there is a relatively high share of female entrepreneurs running their own businesses.  

The political subindex shows a sustained deterioration between 1999 and 2019, with a temporary improvement in 2006–10, and a steep rise since 2019. The relatively higher scores of the 1990s represent the ebbing of the liberalization wave started by Mikhail Gorbachev’s reforms in the mid-1980s. The super-presidential Constitution adopted in 1995 set Kazakhstan on the path of authoritarian consolidation. The trend is illustrated by the twenty-point fall in political rights of expression and association up until 2019. The situation with civil liberties during that period was better and more complex, as indicated by fluctuations on that component. The 2003, 2012, and 2016 dips are all linked to the adoption of new legislation (a 2003 law on extremism, a 2011 law on religious activities, and several legislative and legal amendments in 2016 targeting “extremism and terrorism”) which limited freedom of conscience in the name of security. However, unlike the almost linear deterioration of the political subindex, each dip was followed by a partial recovery, reflecting a certain degree of internalization of liberal values by the political elites.  

The power transition in Kazakhstan, which started with Nazarbayev’s resignation in 2019 and ended with the “Bloody January” events in 2022, produced a critical juncture for the country. The first event did not change the balance of power— Nazarbayev, his family and associates remained in control, with Nazarbayev still designated “Leader of the Nation”—but it changed the mood in society. People felt that change was possible, and started demanding reforms. Tokayev and his team perceived and tried to respond to this growing demand. They developed policies around the concept of the “hearing state” and experimented with more open local elections. However, under the Nazarbayev/Tokayev duumvirate, the system—long used to a clear and rigid vertical of power—grew confused and ineffective. The citizens’ urge for change led to protests at the beginning of 2022 which, combined with what many observers see as an unsuccessful attempted coup by Nazarbayev loyalists, resulted in the “de-Nazarbayevization” of the system. Unexpectedly, President Tokayev transformed from an appointed successor into a reformist president. While the official goals of the political reforms he has been undertaking are democratization and liberalization, they seem to be primarily aimed at removing the excesses of the super-presidential political system and improving governance. The geopolitical context is a factor affecting the direction and depth of reforms. On the one hand, deepening relations with the West is even more important under the new circumstances, and therefore Western perceptions of the human rights situation in Kazakhstan matter. On the other, there are fears that political liberalization could destabilize and weaken the country, making it more vulnerable to external meddling.  

The legal subindex reflects a very complex situation around the implementation of the rule of law in Kazakhstan. First, the improving quality and responsiveness of the bureaucratic apparatus is well captured by the data. The growing budget in the 2000s allowed the regime to invest in good governance, drawing on the understanding that the best way to reduce contestation and protests is to efficiently provide the population with public services through a well-functioning state. The focus has been on better training of civil servants and digitalization to improve efficiency and accountability (in line with the “hearing state” concept). Every public agency has social media accounts, and its performance assessment takes into account the public communication aspect.  

Second, there is a clear lack of improvement— and even deterioration—in the judicial independence and effectiveness score. The subservience of the judicial branch to the president, introduced by the 1995 Constitution, and the systemic corruption, greatly hindered the development of the rule of law in Kazakhstan. Realizing that this reduces the country’s attractiveness to foreign investors, the government created a legal enclave, the Astana International Financial Center, in 2018. It features its own court and international arbitration center, providing a common law system and employing foreign judges. While this arrangement serves as a quick fix for investor-related issues, it makes the injustices facing the general citizenry even more apparent.  

It is worth noting that President Tokayev initiated a judicial reform aimed at raising the qualifications of judges and legal personnel, “cleaning” the system of corruption, and improving processes and procedures. Over the next five years it will be possible to assess the implementation of that reform. One important positive development is the restoration of the Constitutional Court (the previous body was turned into a “toothless” Constitutional Council by the 1995 Constitution) and inviting highly professional and credible people to serve as judges. 

Evolution of prosperity

Kazakhstan is a large exporter of crude oil, gold, iron ore, copper, aluminum, zinc, uranium, and other metals, bringing substantial revenues to the country. It also produces and sells high-quality durum wheat, an important commodity in international markets. Therefore, it is not surprising that its overall Prosperity Index score has been above the regional average. In addition, the government’s efforts to improve social welfare, drawing on the norms and experiences of the Soviet welfare state, also help Kazakhstan to score better in the education and minorities components of the Index.  

Fluctuations of the inequality component show that economic growth does not necessarily translate into reductions in poverty and inequality, and that positive trends can be reversible. There are substantial spatial disparities in wealth and access to services between the regions and along the rural-urban divide. The two largest cities, Almaty and Astana, are better off, while the oil-producing regions of western Kazakhstan have both high income and high poverty rates and the agricultural and largely rural south ranks poorly on both counts. The government is trying to mend these regional inequalities by investing in infrastructure and changing budget allocations to incentivize regions to generate their own revenues through economic activities.  

The education component of the Index places Kazakhstan within the best performers in the world. It can boast nearly universal enrollment in elementary and secondary education, and high enrollment in tertiary education. The scores, however, do not show the patchy quality of the education provided. The neoliberal reforms of the 1990s responsible for underfunding the sector and “streamlining” schools in rural areas, and the gradual dissipation of the Soviet education system, accompanied by the retirement of Soviet-trained teachers, resulted in growing inequality of access and decreasing quality of instruction in public schools. Standardized tests such as PISA show serious deficiencies in the education of Kazakhstani pupils compared to those of Western Europe or other Organisation for Economic Co-operation and Development (OECD) countries. During the Nazarbayev period, the government tried to improve education, which it viewed as a crucial component of economic growth and development, through internationalization and creation of “pockets of excellence,” most importantly the newly established Nazarbayev University and a cluster of Nazarbayev Intellectual Schools, attracting the most talented students with fully funded grants. Tokayev’s government has been working on improving the quality of public, and especially rural, education, by allocating more funding, raising the status and salary of teachers, and reforming teacher training institutions. It also promotes partnerships between established foreign universities and regional universities in Kazakhstan.  

Kazakhstan’s health component has fluctuated above and below the regional average. A steep increase in life expectancy in the 2000s reflects the improvement of the socioeconomic situation and bigger investments in the healthcare system, which enabled Kazakhstan to achieve a substantial decline in infant and maternal mortality, approaching the OECD average. As with the rest of the region, Kazakhstan experienced a decline in life expectancy as a result of the COVID-19 pandemic. The stronger negative effect of the pandemic in Kazakhstan compared to the rest of the region might be the outcome of better and more honest statistics. The country’s government was very active in handling the healthcare crisis during the pandemic and carried out a mass vaccination campaign once vaccines became available. The national Healthy Nation project currently being implemented aims to increase life expectancy from the current seventy-five years to seventy-seven within five years. 

Kazakhstan has scored high in the minorities component. Its Constitution outlaws any discrimination “on the grounds of origin, social, official, or property status, sex, race, nationality, language, attitude to religion, convictions, place of residence or any other circumstance.” Managing interethnic relations has been the biggest challenge. In the early days of independence, the country’s leadership crafted an approach carefully balancing the interests of its multiple ethnic groups (especially  Russians) with the need to develop a nation state around the Kazakh identity. Representatives of different ethnic groups compose the Assembly of the People of Kazakhstan, a special political body, chaired by the president of the country. Five members of the Assembly are elected to the Senate.  

Finally, Kazakhstan scores above the regional average in the environment component. It is not a big carbon emitter, but this is largely due to the country’s small population of 20 million people, dwarfed by its large neighbors in the broader Eurasia region. Kazakhstan’s carbon intensity, that is the amount of carbon dioxide emitted per unit of energy, is high (0.33 kg per kilowatt-hour) and exceeds those of China (0.26 kg/kWh) and India (0.28 kg/kWh). The government has an ambitious decarbonization program, aiming to reach net zero by 2060. 

The path forward

Kazakhstan finds itself at an inflection point. The January 2022 events put a sudden end to the Nazarbayev era, and Russia’s full-scale invasion of Ukraine undermined the post-Soviet political and security order. The combined domestic and geopolitical shocks are causing concerns, fears, and anxieties about the present and the future. At the same time, they are creating space for change and new beginnings. Whether Kazakhstan can move toward more freedom and prosperity will be determined by choices made today and tomorrow, and shaped by the domestic dynamic of state-society relations and external incentives and pressures.  

At present, Tokayev’s reform agenda points to further liberalization of the system. We can expect an improvement in the political subindex: modest improvements on the elections, political rights, and legislative constraints on the executive components; and more substantial improvements on the civil liberties component. The situation with religious freedoms might not improve, but will probably not deteriorate either, despite growing concerns about radical Islamism and terrorism. The legal subindex scores are likely to grow, particularly the judicial independence and effectiveness and bureaucracy and corruption components. There will also be improvement of prosperity scores due to active policies on women’s empowerment, inclusion of people with disabilities, and decarbonization efforts.  

For the gradual liberalization agenda to work, on the domestic side, the state needs to maintain the will for reforms and capacity to implement them with a substantial degree of success, and society needs to be interested in reforms and exercise consistent pressure. If the relations between the two grow conflictual (fueled by inequalities and grievances), there is a risk that the reforms will be curtailed. There will be more clarity about the trajectory of Kazakhstan’s development by 2029, the year when president Tokayev’s single term comes to an end. It is important to keep in mind that there are anti-liberal as well as pro-liberal forces in Kazakhstan’s society. Growing social conservatism that accompanies Islamic revival could become a formidable challenge over the next ten years.  

On the geopolitical side, the liberalization agenda needs to be incentivized and supported by the West. Such a partnership would be useful for both parties—but not easy for either. Kazakhstan wants deeper relations with the West in order to develop and not be overwhelmed by its giant neighbors, Russia and China. However, it needs to build those relationships gently, to avoid angering Moscow and annoying Beijing too much. For the United States, European countries, and others, the challenge is to engage in an effective manner, providing the right incentives. Unlike in the 1990s, the supremacy of the West is now being challenged, and new approaches and ways of dealing with countries like Kazakhstan are needed.  

Taking into account internal and external factors, I can envisage three scenarios. The first, optimistic, scenario, “More freedom and prosperity,” hinges on the success of liberalization reforms and a benign external environment. Under this scenario, President Tokayev and his team are able to successfully implement some reforms, giving them more legitimacy, and Kazakhstani society keeps pushing for more liberalization. Tokayev ends his term in 2029, as defined by the Constitutional amendment, and there is a peaceful power transfer. Relations with the West are strong, Russia accepts the new situation, and China finds it useful for managing relations with Europe. Kazakhstan is not a liberal democracy, but it is on a promising path, gradually internalizing liberal values and norms.  

The second scenario, “Prosperity at the expense of freedom,” implies limited reforms, skewed in favor of professional state and socioeconomic goals. The leadership decides that tightening control over society with the help of traditional and new (digital) surveillance means is a must, and there is no need to pay too much attention to what Western actors think and say on the matter. The aspiration is to be a functional authoritarian state, and that means accepting being a political and economic satellite of China, the new superpower.  

The third scenario, “No freedom and no prosperity,” is a sad story of Kazakhstan imploding from internal tensions and/or destabilized from outside. The January 2022 events provided a glimpse of such destabilization. Transformation of a consolidated, personalized and corrupt authoritarian regime into a softer and better governed one is a way to prevent conflicts and improve the development trajectory of the country, but as with all modernizations, it can be unsettling and pregnant with risks. Russia, unhappy with Kazakhstan “drifting away,” decides to “bring it to heel” using hybrid war methods. 


Nargis Kassenova is a senior fellow and director of the Program on Central Asia at the Davis Center for Russian and Eurasian Studies, Harvard University. Kassenova’s research focuses on Central Asian politics and security, Eurasian geopolitics, China’s Belt and Road Initiative, governance in Central Asia, and the history of state-making in Central Asia.

statement on intellectual independence

“The Atlantic Council and its staff, fellows, and directors generate their own ideas and programming, consistent with the Council’s mission, their related body of work, and the independent records of the participating team members. The Council as an organization does not adopt or advocate positions on particular matters. The Council’s publications always represent the views of the author(s) rather than those of the institution.”

Read the previous edition

2024 Atlas: Freedom and Prosperity Around the World

Twenty leading economists and government officials from eighteen countries contributed to this comprehensive volume, which serves as a roadmap for navigating the complexities of contemporary governance. 

Explore the data

Trackers and Data Visualizations

Jun 15, 2023

Freedom and Prosperity Indexes

The indexes rank 164 countries around the world according to their levels of freedom and prosperity. Use our site to explore twenty-eight years of data, compare countries and regions, and examine the sub-indexes and indicators that comprise our indexes.

About the center

The Freedom and Prosperity Center aims to increase the prosperity of the poor and marginalized in developing countries and to explore the nature of the relationship between freedom and prosperity in both developing and developed nations.

Stay connected

The post Surrounded by superpowers, Kazakhstan walks a geopolitical tightrope appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>
Poland’s democracy stands firm, but its economy faces headwinds https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/in-depth-research-reports/books/polands-democracy-stands-firm-but-its-economy-faces-headwinds/ Wed, 05 Feb 2025 14:00:00 +0000 https://www.atlanticcouncil.org/?p=821442 Despite recent political turmoil, Poland has shown resilience in defending democracy and the rule of law. However, its economic outlook is less certain, as challenges such as incomplete post-Soviet privatization, high fiscal spending, and demographic shifts are threatening long-term growth.

The post Poland’s democracy stands firm, but its economy faces headwinds appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>

table of contents

Evolution of freedom

Poland, along with the three Baltic states, stands as one of history’s most remarkable examples of how embracing democratic institutions and a free-market economy can radically transform a nation and propel it onto a trajectory of rapid development. Following an unprecedented transition in 1989, Poland and other former communist bloc nations successfully established the three foundational pillars of a free society—rule of law, democracy, and market economy—guided by frameworks like the Freedom Index. Although the Index’s coverage begins only in 1995, when many key reforms were already implemented, Poland’s journey in the subsequent decades offers valuable insights. Notable milestones include its accession to the European Union (EU) in 2004 and, more recently, significant challenges to the rule of law starting in 2015, which is the primary focus of this piece. 

The political shift following the 2015 parliamentary elections serves as an archetype of what might be called a “bad transition.” In such scenarios, authoritarian leaders or parties rise to power through legitimate electoral processes—a necessary but insufficient condition for true democracy—and proceed to systematically erode institutional independence, particularly within the justice system and civil service. The Law and Justice Party (PiS), under Jarosław Kaczyński’s leadership, secured a decisive victory in a fair election but quickly revealed its authoritarian tendencies. The sharp decline in political and legal subindexes from 2016 onward vividly illustrates this regression. 

Among the political subindex components, the most severe deterioration occurred in political rights, driven largely by the PiS’s capture of public media, turning it into a propaganda tool. Fortunately, private media outlets managed to resist government pressure and served as a critical counterbalance. 

However, the most dangerous attack came against the judiciary, as evidenced by the more than thirty-five-point drop in the judicial independence component within the legal subindex. Legislative changes in 2016 merged the roles of prosecutor-general and minister of justice, granting a political appointee sweeping powers over the judicial system, including appointments, promotions, and case allocations to specific prosecutors. This effectively undermined safeguards for prosecutorial independence, which allowed compliant prosecutors to be rewarded and dissenters punished. Judicial independence similarly eroded under politicized appointment processes. 

Poland’s judicial system survived this assault primarily due to the vigorous defense mounted by civil society and advocacy groups. The rulings of the European Court of Justice in 2021 and 2023, alongside political pressure from the European Commission, played a crucial role, but these external interventions would likely have been insufficient without the active involvement of Polish non-governmental organizations (NGOs) and grassroots organizations. 

PiS was unsuccessful in undermining the free elections, and those held in 2023 were democratic. The newly elected government has prioritized the restoration of judicial independence, a commitment that has led to the European Commission’s recent decision to terminate the Article 7(1) Treaty on European Union (TEU) procedure, citing that “there is no longer a clear risk of a serious breach of the rule of law in Poland.” 

Turning to the economic subindex, several notable aspects deserve attention. From the early 1990s, the anticipation of eventual EU membership spurred a series of significant liberalizing reforms. Between Poland’s accession to the EU in 2004 and 2016, the country benefited from increasing policy credibility and access to the common market for trade and capital, driving a robust convergence process with other EU member states. 

However, during the years of PiS governance, economic freedom suffered, primarily due to increased nationalizations and expansion of the state sector in the economy. Higher fiscal spending and growing budget deficits during this period Evolution of Prosperity further weighed on economic freedom, representing a clear drag on progress in this area. 

Despite these challenges, the economic subindex reflects an overarching positive trajectory, largely attributed to a notable increase in women’s economic opportunities. A rare positive legacy of the socialist era is the strong foundation of gender equality within Polish society, particularly in economic participation. The sharp rise in this indicator in 2010 aligns with the adoption of European regulations promoting equal treatment—standards that were already a widespread practice in Poland. 

Evolution of prosperity

The Polish economy has undergone a remarkable convergence with the EU. In 1990, Poland’s gross domestic product (GDP) per capita was less than 40 percent of the EU average. Over the past twenty-five years, this gap has significantly narrowed, reaching 83 percent of the EU average by 2023

A notable aspect of Poland’s economic performance is its resilience during the 2008 financial crisis, which left no significant negative impact on the country’s economy. As illustrated in Figure 1, Poland’s GDP per capita growth remained consistently positive from 1992 until the onset of the COVID-19 pandemic. In contrast, the financial crisis, followed by the debt crisis, had substantial repercussions in neighboring countries such as Estonia and Latvia, not to mention the severe impacts felt in Greece. Consequently, Poland today is wealthier than all these countries, despite having a lower GDP per capita than each of them in 2007. 

Finally, it is worth noting a significant external factor that has boosted the Polish economy in recent years, namely, the absorption of around one million Ukrainian refugees since the beginning of the Russian aggression on Ukraine. In 2023, estimates suggested that Ukrainian refugees contributed between 0.7 and 1.1 percent to GDP in Poland.

Figure 1. Real GDP per capita in selected countries

Source: World Bank, GDP per capita, measured in purchasing power parity (PPP), constant 2021 international dollars.

When analyzing the health component, it is evident that persistent challenges remain. Poland’s life expectancy continues to lag behind EU averages, particularly among men, who face a gap of over four years. Lifestyle factors such as high rates of tobacco and alcohol consumption account for much of this disparity. While smoking rates in Poland have declined in parallel with the EU, alcohol consumption has stagnated since 2007, posing an ongoing public health concern. Alcohol consumption is more than three times higher among men. Similarly, 28 percent of Polish men smoke tobacco, compared with only 20 percent of women

Figure 2. Life expectancy by gender, EU vs Poland, 1990-2019

Source: World Bank.

The socialist economic system proved to be detrimental not only to consumers but also to the environment. The shift toward market-oriented policies in Poland significantly reduced the volume of emissions required to generate additional income per capita. However, the transition to an environmentally sustainable economy is not yet complete, as coal continues to play an important role in industry and energy generation. EU regulations in this area are expected to drive further change and the adoption of environmentally sustainable policies, though the pace of the reform will be a critical factor. While there is a risk that some of these regulations may be overly severe or implemented too quickly, the general direction of these measures is undeniably positive. 

Turning to the minorities component, it seems clear that the marked decline in this component beginning in 2015 correlates with the rise to power of the PiS government. A detailed analysis of the underlying data confirm this connection. The sharp drop primarily reflects increased discrimination in access to public sector employment and business opportunities based on political The Path Forward affiliation. This decline illustrates the previously mentioned politicization of public institutions, including the prosecution office and public media, among other agencies that should have remained neutral and independent. 

The path forward

Following the turbulent tenure of the previous government, support for democracy and the rule of law has strengthened in Poland. Consequently, there is little reason for concern, in my opinion, about the stability of these institutions in the near future. Instead, the more pressing issue lies in sustaining economic growth. Although Poland has significantly narrowed the income gap with the EU, including Germany, disparities remain, and the country faces several unresolved challenges requiring a new wave of reforms. 

One persistent issue is the incomplete privatization process initiated in the 1990s. The public sector’s share in the economy remains high—one of the largest in Europe. To ensure sustained growth, Poland must pursue privatization and enhance competition in sectors like energy and oil processing. Unfortunately, no major political party has presented a comprehensive strategy for addressing this issue. Nonetheless, a carefully planned privatization initiative is essential for medium- and long-term economic growth. 

Another major challenge is excessive fiscal spending, largely driven by social welfare programs. What is more, this spending is not effectively targeted, as it does not primarily benefit the poorest households. The tax and transfer system has a minimal impact on reducing income inequality. For instance, the “Family 500+” program, introduced by PiS and later expanded by the current government, provides universal child allowances irrespective of income and number of children in a given household. Such unselective transfers are more characteristic of populist policies than measures aimed at addressing inequality. 

Finally, Poland shares demographic challenges with other developed nations, particularly the rapid aging of its population. Without substantial reforms, economic growth is likely to slow further, and fiscal pressures will intensify. Polish civil society has shown remarkable resilience in defending democratic institutions during recent crises. With these threats now neutralized, it is crucial for citizens to channel this energy to pressure the current government to implement essential reforms. These efforts will be vital to ensuring continued prosperity over the coming decade. 


Leszek Balcerowicz is an economist and professor of economics at the Warsaw School of Economics. He served as deputy prime minister and minister of finance in the first non-communist government in Poland after 1989 (1989–91), and again between 1997 and 2000. He was president of the National Bank of Poland from 2001–07. A member of the Washington-based international advisory body Group of Thirty, he is founder and chairman of the Civil Development Forum, a Warsaw-based think tank. 

The author is grateful to Bartłomiej Jabrzyk for assistance in the preparation of this paper. 

statement on intellectual independence

“The Atlantic Council and its staff, fellows, and directors generate their own ideas and programming, consistent with the Council’s mission, their related body of work, and the independent records of the participating team members. The Council as an organization does not adopt or advocate positions on particular matters. The Council’s publications always represent the views of the author(s) rather than those of the institution.”

Read the previous edition

2024 Atlas: Freedom and Prosperity Around the World

Twenty leading economists and government officials from eighteen countries contributed to this comprehensive volume, which serves as a roadmap for navigating the complexities of contemporary governance. 

Explore the data

Trackers and Data Visualizations

Jun 15, 2023

Freedom and Prosperity Indexes

The indexes rank 164 countries around the world according to their levels of freedom and prosperity. Use our site to explore twenty-eight years of data, compare countries and regions, and examine the sub-indexes and indicators that comprise our indexes.

About the center

The Freedom and Prosperity Center aims to increase the prosperity of the poor and marginalized in developing countries and to explore the nature of the relationship between freedom and prosperity in both developing and developed nations.

Stay connected

The post Poland’s democracy stands firm, but its economy faces headwinds appeared first on Atlantic Council.

]]>